Engineering_Policy_Guide - User contributions [en]

908.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 7A)

2025-12-31T18:26:51Z

HogsettC: /* {{SpanID|908.1.2}}908.1.2 School Route Plans and School Crossings (MUTCD Section 7A.02) */

[[Category:908 Traffic Controls for School Areas (MUTCD Part 7)|908.1]]
=={{SpanID|908.1.1}}908.1.1 Introduction (MUTCD Section 7A.01) ==

'''Support'''. EPG 908 sets forth basic principles and prescribes standards for the design, application, installation, and maintenance of all traffic control devices (including signs, signals, and markings) and other controls (including adult crossing guards) for the special pedestrian conditions in school areas.

=={{SpanID|908.1.2}}908.1.2 School Route Plans and School Crossings (MUTCD Section 7A.02) ==

'''Guidance'''. A school route plan for each school serving elementary to high school students should be prepared in order to develop uniformity in the use of school area traffic controls and to serve as the basis for a school traffic control plan for each school.

The school route plan, developed in a systematic manner by the school, law enforcement, and traffic officials responsible for school pedestrian safety, should consist of a map (see [[#fig908.1.2|Figure 908.1.2]]) showing streets, the school, existing traffic controls, established school walk routes, and established school crossings.

MoDOT is not responsible for preparing school route plans. MoDOT district staff should be consulted when developing school route plans that include installation of traffic control devices on state-maintained roadways.

Bicycle use as a mode of transportation, as applicable, should also be considered if students biking to and from school are not allowed to use the sidewalks along the pedestrian route.

The type(s) of school area traffic control devices used, either warning or regulatory, should be related to the volume and speed of vehicular traffic, street width, and the number and age of the students using the crossing.

School area traffic control devices should be included in a school traffic control plan.

'''Standard. '''No school area traffic control devices shall be installed on state-maintained roadways without the necessary agreements and approvals from MoDOT district staff.

'''Support. '''To establish a safer route to and from school for schoolchildren, the application of planning criterion for school walk routes might make it necessary for children to walk an indirect route to an established school crossing located where there is existing traffic control and to avoid the use of a direct crossing where there is no existing traffic control.

The frequency of gaps in the traffic stream that are sufficient for student crossing is different at each crossing location. When the delay between the occurrences of adequate gaps becomes excessive, students might become impatient and endanger themselves by attempting to cross the street during an inadequate gap. In these instances, the creation of sufficient gaps needs to be considered to accommodate the crossing demand.

'''Guidance. '''School walk routes should be planned to take advantage of existing traffic controls.

The following factors should be considered when determining the feasibility of requiring children to walk a longer distance to a crossing with existing traffic control:

::A. The availability of adequate sidewalks or other pedestrian walkways to and from the location with existing control,

::B. The number of students using the crossing,

::C. The age levels of the students using the crossing, and

::D. The total extra walking distance.

'''Support. '''A School Crossing signal warrant is provided in [[902.3 Traffic Control Signal Needs Studies (MUTCD Chapter 4C) #902.3.6|EPG 902.3.6]].

{{SpanID|fig908.1.2}}
[[File:Figure 908.1.2 Example of a School Route Plan Map.png|center|thumb|alt=A map shows roads and pedestrian routes from every street in a neighborhood to the neighborhood school. The routes and roads include stop signs, yield signs, and crosswalks at many of the intersections. |750px|'''Figure 908.1.2''' Example of a School Route Plan Map]]

908.2 Signs (MUTCD Chapter 7B)

2025-12-31T18:26:19Z

HogsettC: /* {{SpanID|908.2.5}}908.2.5 School Speed Limit Signs (MUTCD Section 7B.05) */

[[Category:908 Traffic Controls for School Areas (MUTCD Part 7)|908.2]]

=={{SpanID|908.2.1}}908.2.1 Design of School Signs (MUTCD Section 7B.01) ==

'''Standard'''. Except as provided in [[903.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 2A) #903.1.7|EPG 903.1.7]], the sizes of signs and plaques to be used in school areas shall be as shown in [[#tab908.2.1|Table 908.2.1]].

Signs and plaques larger than those shown in [[#tab908.2.1|Table 908.2.1]] shall only be used if approved by the MoDOT Highway Safety and Traffic Division (see [[903.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 2A) #903.1.7|EPG 903.1.7]]).

School warning signs, including the “SCHOOL” portion of the School Speed Limit (S5-1) sign and including any supplemental plaques used in association with these warning signs, shall have a fluorescent yellow-green background with a black legend and border unless otherwise provided in the EPG for a specific sign.

The signs used for school area traffic control shall be retroreflective.

'''Support. '''[[903.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 2A) #903.1.13|EPG 903.1.13]] and [[903.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 2A) #903.1.14|EPG 903.1.14]] contain provisions regarding the installation, placement, and location of signs.

[[903.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 2A) #903.1.15|EPG 903.1.15]] contains provisions regarding the mounting heights of signs.

[[903.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 2A) #903.1.16|EPG 903.1.16]] contains provisions regarding the lateral offsets of signs.

The FHWA “Standard Highway Signs” publication (see [[:Category:911_General_(MUTCD_Part_1) #911.1.5|EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1A.05)]]) contains information regarding sign lettering.

'''Option. '''In-roadway signs for school traffic control areas may be used consistent with the requirements of [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2.19|EPG 903.2.19]] and [[#908.2.3| EPG 908.2.3]].

{{SpanID|tab908.2.1}}
<div style="text-align: center">
{| class="wikitable" style="text-align: center; display: inline-table;"
|+ Table 908.2.1, School Area Sign and Plaque Sizes
|-
! rowspan="2" | Sign or Plaque
! rowspan="2" | Sign Designation
! rowspan="2" | EPG Article
! colspan="3" | Conventional Road
|-
! Standard
! Oversized
! Special
|-
| style="text-align: left" | School
| S1-1
| [[#908.2.2|908.2.2]]
| 36 x 36
| -
| -
|-
| style="text-align: left" | School Bus Stop Ahead
| S3-1
| [[#908.2.4|908.2.4]]
| 36 x 36
| -
| -
|-
| style="text-align: left" | School
| S4-3P
| [[#908.2.2|908.2.2]]
| 36 x 12
| -
| -
|-
| style="text-align: left" | School Speed Limit XX When Flashing
| S5-1
| [[#908.2.5|908.2.5]]
| 36 x 72
| -
| -
|-
| style="text-align: left" | End School Zone
| S5-2
| [[#908.2.2|908.2.2]]
| 24 x 30
| -
| -
|-
| style="text-align: left" | End School Speed Limit
| S5-3
| [[#908.2.5|908.2.5]]
| 24 x 30
| -
| -
|-
| style="text-align: left" | Yield Here for School Crossing
| R1-5a
| [[#908.2.3|908.2.3]]
| 36 x 36
| -
| -
|-
| style="text-align: left" | In-Street School Crossing
| R1-6b
| [[#908.2.3|908.2.3]]
| 12 x 36
| -
| -
|-
| style="text-align: left" | Directional Arrow
| W16-5P
| [[#908.2.2|908.2.2]], [[#908.2.3|908.2.3]]
| 21 x 15
| -
| -
|-
| style="text-align: left" | Advance Turn Arrow
| W16-6P
| [[#908.2.2|908.2.2]], [[#908.2.3|908.2.3]]
| 21 x 15
| -
| -
|-
| style="text-align: left" | Downward Diagonal Arrow
| W16-7P
| [[#908.2.2|908.2.2]], [[#908.2.3|908.2.3]]
| 21 x 15
| -
| -
|-
| style="text-align: left" | Ahead
| W16-9P
| [[#908.2.2|908.2.2]], [[#908.2.3|908.2.3]]
| 24 x 12
| -
| -
|-
| style="text-align: left" colspan="7" | '''Note:'''
# Dimensions are shown in inches and are shown as width x height
|}</div>

=={{SpanID|908.2.2}}908.2.2 School Area Signs and Plaques (MUTCD Section 7B.02) ==

<div style="text-align: center;">
<div style="display:inline-block;vertical-align: bottom;">

[[File:S1-1.png|thumb|none|alt=|150px|'''S1-1''']]

</div>
<div style="display:inline-block;vertical-align: bottom;">

[[File:S4-3P.png|thumb|none|alt=|124px|'''S4-3P''']]

</div>
<div style="display:inline-block;vertical-align: bottom;">

[[File:W16-5P.png|thumb|none|alt=|88px|'''W16-5P''']]
</div>

<div style="display:inline-block;vertical-align: bottom;">
[[File:W16-6P.png|thumb|none|alt=|88px|'''W16-6P''']]

</div>
<div style="display:inline-block;vertical-align: bottom;">
[[File:W16-7P (FYG).png|thumb|none|alt=|88px|'''W16-7P''']]

</div>
<div style="display:inline-block;vertical-align: bottom;">

[[File:W16-9P.png|thumb|none|alt=|100px|'''W16-9P''']]

</div>
<div style="display:inline-block;vertical-align: bottom;">

[[File:S5-2.png|thumb|none|alt=|120px|'''S5-2''']]

</div>
</div>

'''Support. '''Many state and local jurisdictions find it beneficial to advise road users that they are approaching a school that is adjacent to a highway, where additional care is needed, even though no school crossing is involved and the speed limit remains unchanged. Additionally, some jurisdictions designate school zones that have a unique legal standing in that fines for speeding or other traffic violations within designated school zones are increased or special enforcement techniques such as photo radar systems are used (see [[:Category:950 Automated Traffic Enforcement #950|EPG 950]]). It is important and sometimes legally necessary to mark the beginning and end points of these designated school zones so that the road user is given proper notice.

The School (S1-1) sign has the following four applications:

::A. School Area – the S1-1 sign can be used to warn road users that they are approaching school buildings or grounds immediately adjacent to the highway.

::B. School Zone – the S1-1 sign can be used to identify the location of the beginning of a designated school zone.

::C. School Advance Crossing – if combined with an AHEAD (W16-9P) plaque to comprise the School Advance Crossing assembly, the S1-1 sign can be used to warn road users that they are approaching a crossing where schoolchildren cross the roadway (see [[#908.2.3|EPG 908.2.3]]). MoDOT does not use the XX FEET plaque for School Advance Crossing assemblies.

::D. School Crossing – if combined with a diagonal downward-pointing arrow (W16-7P) plaque to comprise the School Crossing assembly, the S1-1 sign can be used to warn approaching road users of the location of a crossing where schoolchildren cross the roadway (see [[#908.2.3|EPG 908.2.3]]).

'''Option. '''If a school area or school zone is located on a cross street in close proximity to the intersection, a School (S1-1) sign with a supplemental arrow (W16-5P or W16-6P) plaque may be installed on each approach of the street or highway to warn road users making a turn onto the cross street that they will encounter a school area soon after making the turn.

'''Standard. '''If a school zone has been designated under State or local statute, a School (S1-1) sign shall be installed to identify the beginning point(s) of the designated school zone (see [[#fig908.2.2|Figure 908.2.2]]).

'''Option. '''If a school zone is not established by a State or local statute, school zone signing may be installed adjacent to the school’s property lines or as determined by engineering judgement.

A School Zone (S1-1) sign may be supplemented with a SCHOOL (S4-3P) plaque.

'''Standard'''. The downstream end of a designated school zone shall be identified with an END SCHOOL ZONE (S5-2) sign (see [[#fig908.2.2|Figure 908.2.2]]).

'''Option. '''A Warning Beacon (see [[902.18 Flashing Beacons (MUTCD Chapter 4S) #902.18.3|EPG 902.18.3]]) may be installed above a School (S1-1) sign for supplemental emphasis at a school zone.

'''Standard. '''Prior to the installation of a Warning Beacon, a TR08 Roadside Flashers for School Operations contract shall be executed.

{{SpanID|fig908.2.2}}
[[File:Figure 908.2.2 Example of Signing for a School Zone.jpg|center|thumb|alt=A school is shown on the right side of a vertical roadway with two-way traffic.
In advance of the school, to the right of the vertical roadway and facing northbound traffic, a sign assembly is shown. An S1-1 sign is shown mounted above an S4-3P (optional) plaque. Beyond the school, to the right of the roadway and facing northbound traffic, a S5-2 sign is shown.
On the left side of the roadway, the same series and placements of signs are shown facing southbound traffic.|750px| '''Figure 908.2.2''' Example of Signing for a School Zone]]

=={{SpanID|908.2.3}}908.2.3 School Crossing Signs (MUTCD Section 7B.03)==
<div style="text-align: center; ">
<div style="display: inline-block; vertical-align: bottom;">

[[File:School Area Signs.png|thumb|none|alt=|490px|'''School area signs''']]

</div>
<div style="display:inline-block;vertical-align: bottom;">

[[File:R1-5a.png|thumb|none|alt=|100px|'''R1-5a''']]

</div>
<div style="display:inline-block;vertical-align: bottom;">

[[File:R1-6b.png|thumb|none|alt=|100px|'''R1-6b''']]

</div>
{| class="wikitable" style="inline-table; margin: auto;text-align: left;"
|-
|}

</div>

'''Standard. '''The School Advance Crossing assembly shall consist of a School (S1-1) sign supplemented with an AHEAD (W16-9P) plaque.

Except as provided in the first Option paragraph below, a School Advance Crossing assembly shall be used in advance (see [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #tab903.3.4|Table 903.3.4]] for advance placement guidelines) of the first School Crossing assembly that is encountered in each direction as traffic approaches a school crosswalk).

Prior to the installation of an Advanced School Crossing sign(s), a TR10 or TR11 School Crossing contract shall be executed.

'''Option. '''The School Advance Crossing assembly may be omitted (see [[#fig908.2.5.1|Figure 908.2.5.1]]) where a School Zone (S1-1) sign (see [[#908.2.2|EPG 908.2.2]]) is installed to identify the beginning of a school zone in advance of the School Crossing assembly if determined to be unnecessary by engineering judgement.

If a school crosswalk is located on a cross street in close proximity to an intersection, a School Advance Crossing assembly with a supplemental arrow (W16-5P or W16-6P) plaque may be installed on each approach of the street or highway to warn road users making a turn onto the cross street that they will encounter a school crosswalk soon after making the turn (see [[#fig908.2.5.1|Figure 908.2.5.1]]).

'''Standard. '''If used, the School Crossing assembly shall be installed at the school crossing (see [[#fig908.2.5.1|Figure 908.2.5.1]]), or as close to it as possible, and shall consist of a School (S1-1) sign supplemented with a diagonal downward-pointing arrow (W16-7P) plaque (see [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.62|EPG 903.3.62]]) to show the location of the crossing.

The School Crossing assembly shall not be used at crossings other than those adjacent to schools.

The School Crossing assembly shall not be installed on an approach controlled by a STOP or a YIELD sign except as provided in the first two Option paragraphs below.

Prior to the installation of a School Crossing sign(s), a TR10 or TR11 School Crossing contract shall be executed. All requests for School Crossing sign(s) shall be reviewed in the district.

'''Option. '''The School Crossing assembly may be installed on an approach to a circular intersection controlled by a YIELD sign where the crosswalk is at least 20 feet in advance of the yield point at the entrance to a circulatory roadway.

At a signalized or stop-controlled intersection the School Crossing assembly may be installed on an approach to a channelized right turn lane controlled by a YIELD sign where the crosswalk is at least 20 feet in advance of the yield point.

A Yield Here To School Crossing (R1-5a) sign may be used, in accordance with the provisions of [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2.18|EPG 903.2.18]], in advance of a marked crosswalk that crosses an uncontrolled multi-lane approach within school zones.

The In-Street School Crossing (R1-6b) sign may only be used at midblock school crossings on approaches that are not controlled by a traffic control signal, a pedestrian hybrid beacon, or emergency-vehicle hybrid beacon.

'''Standard. '''When used at an uncontrolled crossing, the In-Street School Crossing sign shall be used only as a supplement to a School Crossing assembly with a diagonal downward-pointing arrow (W16-7P) plaque at the crosswalk location.

An In-Street School Crossing sign shall not be placed in advance of the crosswalk to educate road users about the State law prior to reaching the crosswalk, nor shall it be installed as an educational display that is not near any crosswalk.

'''Option. '''In-Street School Crossing signs may be mounted back-to-back on the center line of an undivided roadway.

'''Standard. '''In-Street School Crossing signs shall only be installed:
:A. Permanently on a raised island, or
:B. Temporarily on a portable base.

If an In-Street School Crossing sign is installed permanently in the roadway, the sign support shall comply with the mounting height and special mounting support requirements for an In-Street Pedestrian Crossing (R1-6) sign (see [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2.19|EPG 903.2.19]]).

If an In-Street School Crossing sign is temporarily placed in the roadway, the sign shall be retroreflective and shall be deployed on a portable temporary sign support. The sign support shall be a crashworthy portable base meeting a minimum of NCHRP 350 standards. The top of an In-Street School Crossing sign shall be a maximum of 4 feet above the pavement surface.

Temporary In-Street School Crossing signs shall be removed from the roadway when the school crossing guard is not present.

'''Support. '''MoDOT does not provide or install temporary In-Street School Crossing signs. If used, temporary portable In-Street School Crossing signs are supplied and installed by school districts.

'''Standard. '''The In-Street School Crossing sign shall not be used on approaches that are controlled by a traffic control signal, pedestrian hybrid beacon, or an emergency-vehicle hybrid beacon.

=={{SpanID|908.2.4}}908.2.4 School Bus Stop Signs (MUTCD Section 7B.04) ==

<div style="text-align: center;">
<div style="display: inline-block; vertical-align: middle;">

[[File:S3-1.png|thumb|none|alt=|150px|'''S3-1''']]

</div>
</div>

'''Support'''. [https://revisor.mo.gov/main/OneSection.aspx?section=304.050 Section 304.050, RSMo], paragraph 5, defines, by state statute the locations where school buses can stop to load and unload passengers based on the number of lanes on the roadway, presence of shoulders, visibility, and speed limits.

It is not intended that School Bus Stop Ahead (S3-1) signs be used everywhere a school bus stops to load or unload passengers, but for use where terrain and roadway features limit the approach sight distance and where there is no opportunity to relocate the school bus stop to another location with adequate sight distance. For this article, a school bus stop is defined as the location where schoolchildren wait to be picked up by a school bus and/or where schoolchildren are discharged from a school bus.

'''Standard.''' Requests for School Bus Stop Ahead signs shall be submitted to MoDOT district staff by the school district. When a request for a S3-1 sign is received, sight distance shall be evaluated at the school bus stop location. Sight distance shall be measured using a 3.5-foot driver’s eye height and an 8-foot object height. Each approach for the school bus stop shall be measured independently for each direction of travel along the roadway.

If the minimum sight distance in [[#tab908.2.4 | Table 908.2.4]] is not met, a school bus stop shall not be allowed by state statute. If the maximum sight distance in [[#tab908.2.4 | Table 908.2.4]] is not met, the school district shall attempt to relocate the school bus stop to a location that does meet or exceed the maximum sight distance.

{{SpanID|tab908.2.4}}
{| class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto"
|+ Table 908.2.4, Sight Distance Requirements for use of the S3-1 Sign
! Posted Speed (mph)
! Minimum Sight Distance (ft.)
! Maximum Sight Distance (ft.)
|-
| align="center"|30|| align="center"| 300|| align="center"| 500
|-
| align="center"|35|| align="center"| 300|| align="center"| 500
|-
| align="center"|40|| align="center"| 300|| align="center"| 500
|-
| align="center"|45|| align="center"| 300|| align="center"| 500
|-
| align="center"|50|| align="center"| 300|| align="center"| 510
|-
| align="center"|55|| align="center"| 300|| align="center"| 560
|-
| align="center"|60|| align="center"| 300|| align="center"| 625
|-
| align="center"|65|| align="center"| 500|| align="center"| 700
|-
| align="center"|70|| align="center"| 500|| align="center"|740
|}

'''Option.''' If the school district has reviewed a school bus stop location and there are no viable alternative locations to relocate the school bus stop, the school district may submit a letter to MoDOT district staff verifying that there are no alternate locations.

The School Bus Stop Ahead sign may be installed on an approach to a school bus stop based on engineering judgement if all the following conditions are met:
::A. Sight distance exceeds the minimum value in [[#tab908.2.4|Table 908.2.4]] when measured as described in the first Standard paragraph above,
::B. Sight distance is less than the maximum value in [[#tab908.2.4|Table 908.2.4]] when measured as described in the first Standard paragraph above, and
::C. A letter has been provided to MoDOT as described in the previous paragraph.

'''Guidance.''' Each approach to a school bus stop should be evaluated independently as it may not be necessary to install S3-1 signs for both approaches to a school bus stop.

If a School Bus Stop Ahead sign is installed, it should be located for a stop condition per [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #tab903.3.4|Table 903.3.4]].

'''Standard.''' To ensure proper placement of signs and encourage driver compliance, all requests for School Bus Stop Ahead signs shall be submitted by school district staff, and the school district must verify the status of all school bus stops with signing as active or inactive on a yearly basis.

'''Guidance.''' MoDOT district staff should send a standard letter requesting verification of school bus stop status prior to the fall session.

'''Option.''' If the school district fails to verify the status of school bus stops, the MoDOT district may remove the School Bus Stop Ahead signs at those stops.

'''Guidance.''' If the signs are removed due to lack of compliance with these requirements, the signs should not be reinstalled for one year. Whenever the school district moves a school bus stop location with S3-1 sign(s), they should advise the district office as soon as possible rather than waiting for the annual review.

=={{SpanID|908.2.5}}908.2.5 School Speed Limit Signs (MUTCD Section 7B.05)==

<div style="text-align: center;">
<div style="position: relative; display: inline-block; vertical-align: middle; whitespace: nowrap;">

<div style="display:inline-block;vertical-align: middle;">
[[File:S5-1.png|thumb|none|alt=|110px|'''School Speed Limit When Flashing Sign — S5-1''']]
</div>

<div style="display: inline-block; width: 126px;"></div>
<div style="box-sizing: border-box; position: absolute; left: 116px; right: auto;;height: 100%;text-align: left; padding-left: 0.4em; /*padding-bottom: 2.27em;*/padding-right: 0.4em; margin-bottom: 0.5em;display: inline-block; width: 120px; vertical-align: bottom; height: calc(100% - 0.5em); background-color: #f8f9fa;border:1px solid #c8ccd1;border-left: none;">
'''Note:''' The sign with WHEN FLASHING legend shall be accompanied by a flashing yellow Speed Limit Sign Beacon (see [[902.18 Flashing Beacons (MUTCD Chapter 4S)#902.18.4|EPG 902.18.4]])
</div>

</div>

<div style="display:inline-block;vertical-align: bottom;">

[[File:S5-3.png|thumb|none|alt=|120px|'''S5-3''']]

</div>
</div>

'''Standard. '''A School Speed Limit When Flashing (S5-1) sign shall be used to indicate the speed limit where a reduced school speed limit zone has been established based upon an engineering study or where a reduced school speed limit is specified for such areas by statute. The School Speed Limit When Flashing sign shall be placed at or as near as practicable to the point where the reduced school speed limit zone begins (see Figures [[#908.2.5.1|908.2.5.1]] and [[#908.2.5.2|908.2.5.2]]).

If a reduced school speed limit zone has been established, a School (S1-1) sign shall be installed in advance (see [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #tab903.3.4|Table 903.3.4]] for advance placement guidelines) of the first School Speed Limit When Flashing (S5-1) sign that is encountered in each direction as traffic approaches the reduced school speed limit zone (see Figures [[#908.2.5.1|908.2.5.1]] and [[#908.2.5.2|908.2.5.2]]).

The downstream end of an authorized and posted reduced school speed limit zone shall be identified with an END SCHOOL SPEED LIMIT (S5-3) sign (see Figures [[#908.2.5.1|908.2.5.1]] and [[#908.2.5.2|908.2.5.2]]).

'''Option. '''A standard Speed Limit sign showing the speed limit for the section of highway that is downstream from the authorized and posted reduced school speed limit zone may be mounted on the same post above the END SCHOOL SPEED LIMIT (S5-3) sign or the END SCHOOL ZONE (S5-2) sign.

'''Guidance. '''The beginning point of a reduced school speed limit zone should be at least 200 feet in advance of the school grounds or a school crossing; however, this 200-foot distance should be increased if the reduced school speed limit is 30 mph or higher. The maximum beginning point of a reduced school speed limit zone should not be greater than 500 feet in advance of the school grounds or a school crossing.

'''Standard.''' When a School Speed Limit When Flashing (S5-1) sign is used, a Speed Limit Sign Beacon (see [[902.18 Flashing Beacons (MUTCD Chapter 4S) #902.18.4|EPG 902.18.4]]) shall be used to identify the periods that the school speed limit is in effect.

Prior to the installation of a School Speed Limit When Flashing sign with a Speed Limit Sign Beacon, a TR08 Roadside Flashers for School Operations contract shall be executed.

'''Guidance'''. If a Speed Limit Sign Beacon is installed, no other Warning Beacons should be permitted on school zone signs inside the same school zone.

'''Standard. '''Upon receipt of a school speed limit request, the district shall perform a site investigation. A speed study and a crash study may be performed based on engineering judgement. The school speed limit shall be 10 mph below the posted speed limit. In no case shall a school speed limit of less than 25 mph be allowed.

If in the course of the speed study it is determined that the posted speed for the corridor is not proper, the posted speed shall be reevaluated and changed as necessary following [[905.2 Traffic Studies #905.2.14|EPG 905.2.14]].

{{SpanID|fig908.2.5.1}}
[[File:Figure 908.2.5.1 Example of Signing for a School Zone with a School Speed Limit and a School Crossing.png|center|thumb|alt=A school is shown on the right side of a vertical roadway with two-way traffic.
In advance of the school, to the right of the vertical roadway and facing northbound traffic, a series of signs and sign assemblies are shown.
Furthest from the school, an S1-1 sign is shown mounted above an S4-3P (optional) plaque. This sign assembly is followed by an S5-1 sign with a warning beacon mounted above. Continuing towards the school, a sign assembly is shown composed of an S1-1 sign above a W16-9P plaque. At the intersection nearest the school, a crosswalk and a sign assembly composed of an S1-1 plaque mounted above a W16-7PL plaque is shown.
Beyond the school, to the right of the roadway and facing northbound traffic, a sign assembly composed of an optional R2-1 sign mounted above an S5-3 sign is shown. R2-1 is shown as a vertical rectangular white sign with a black border and the words "SPEED LIMIT 45" in black, with a large numeral "45."
On the left side of the roadway, the same series and placements of signs are shown facing southbound traffic.|750px| '''Figure 908.2.5.1''' Example of Signing for a School Zone with a School Speed Limit and School Crossing]]

{{SpanID|fig908.2.5.2}}
[[File:Figure 908.2.5.2 Example of Signing for a School Speed Limit.jpg|center|thumb|alt=A school is shown on the right side of a vertical roadway with two-way traffic.
In advance of the school, to the right of the vertical roadway and facing northbound traffic, a series of signs and sign assemblies are shown.
Furthest from the school, an S1-1 sign is shown mounted above an S4-3P (optional) plaque. This sign assembly is followed by an S5-1 sign with a warning beacon mounted above. Continuing towards the school, a sign assembly is shown composed of an S1-1 sign above a W16-9P plaque.
Beyond the school, to the right of the roadway and facing northbound traffic, a sign assembly composed of an optional R2-1 sign mounted above an S5-3 sign is shown. R2-1 is shown as a vertical rectangular white sign with a black border and the words "SPEED LIMIT 45" in black, with a large numeral "45."
On the left side of the roadway, the same series and placements of signs are shown facing southbound traffic.|750px| '''Figure 908.2.5.2''' Example of Signing for a School Speed Limit]]

=={{SpanID|908.2.6}}908.2.6 Higher Fines Zone Signs and Plaques in School Areas (MUTCD Section 7B.06)==

'''Support. '''Higher Fines Zone Signs and Plaques are not used by MoDOT. There is no authority under state law to charge higher fines for moving or speeding violations in school zones.

=={{SpanID|908.2.7}}908.2.7 Parking and Stopping (R7 and R8 Series) Signs (MUTCD Section 7B.07) ==

'''Option. '''Parking and stopping regulatory signs may be used to prevent parked or waiting vehicles from blocking pedestrians’ views, and drivers’ views of pedestrians, and to control vehicles as a part of the school traffic plan.

'''Support. '''Parking signs and other signs governing the stopping and standing of vehicles in school areas cover a wide variety of regulations.

[[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2.43|EPG 903.2.43]] through [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2.45|903.2.45]] contain information regarding the signing of parking regulations in school zone areas.

908.2 Signs (MUTCD Chapter 7B)

2025-12-31T18:25:17Z

HogsettC: /* {{SpanID|908.2.2}}908.2.2 School Area Signs and Plaques (MUTCD Section 7B.02) */

[[Category:908 Traffic Controls for School Areas (MUTCD Part 7)|908.2]]

=={{SpanID|908.2.1}}908.2.1 Design of School Signs (MUTCD Section 7B.01) ==

'''Standard'''. Except as provided in [[903.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 2A) #903.1.7|EPG 903.1.7]], the sizes of signs and plaques to be used in school areas shall be as shown in [[#tab908.2.1|Table 908.2.1]].

Signs and plaques larger than those shown in [[#tab908.2.1|Table 908.2.1]] shall only be used if approved by the MoDOT Highway Safety and Traffic Division (see [[903.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 2A) #903.1.7|EPG 903.1.7]]).

School warning signs, including the “SCHOOL” portion of the School Speed Limit (S5-1) sign and including any supplemental plaques used in association with these warning signs, shall have a fluorescent yellow-green background with a black legend and border unless otherwise provided in the EPG for a specific sign.

The signs used for school area traffic control shall be retroreflective.

'''Support. '''[[903.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 2A) #903.1.13|EPG 903.1.13]] and [[903.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 2A) #903.1.14|EPG 903.1.14]] contain provisions regarding the installation, placement, and location of signs.

[[903.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 2A) #903.1.15|EPG 903.1.15]] contains provisions regarding the mounting heights of signs.

[[903.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 2A) #903.1.16|EPG 903.1.16]] contains provisions regarding the lateral offsets of signs.

The FHWA “Standard Highway Signs” publication (see [[:Category:911_General_(MUTCD_Part_1) #911.1.5|EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1A.05)]]) contains information regarding sign lettering.

'''Option. '''In-roadway signs for school traffic control areas may be used consistent with the requirements of [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2.19|EPG 903.2.19]] and [[#908.2.3| EPG 908.2.3]].

{{SpanID|tab908.2.1}}
<div style="text-align: center">
{| class="wikitable" style="text-align: center; display: inline-table;"
|+ Table 908.2.1, School Area Sign and Plaque Sizes
|-
! rowspan="2" | Sign or Plaque
! rowspan="2" | Sign Designation
! rowspan="2" | EPG Article
! colspan="3" | Conventional Road
|-
! Standard
! Oversized
! Special
|-
| style="text-align: left" | School
| S1-1
| [[#908.2.2|908.2.2]]
| 36 x 36
| -
| -
|-
| style="text-align: left" | School Bus Stop Ahead
| S3-1
| [[#908.2.4|908.2.4]]
| 36 x 36
| -
| -
|-
| style="text-align: left" | School
| S4-3P
| [[#908.2.2|908.2.2]]
| 36 x 12
| -
| -
|-
| style="text-align: left" | School Speed Limit XX When Flashing
| S5-1
| [[#908.2.5|908.2.5]]
| 36 x 72
| -
| -
|-
| style="text-align: left" | End School Zone
| S5-2
| [[#908.2.2|908.2.2]]
| 24 x 30
| -
| -
|-
| style="text-align: left" | End School Speed Limit
| S5-3
| [[#908.2.5|908.2.5]]
| 24 x 30
| -
| -
|-
| style="text-align: left" | Yield Here for School Crossing
| R1-5a
| [[#908.2.3|908.2.3]]
| 36 x 36
| -
| -
|-
| style="text-align: left" | In-Street School Crossing
| R1-6b
| [[#908.2.3|908.2.3]]
| 12 x 36
| -
| -
|-
| style="text-align: left" | Directional Arrow
| W16-5P
| [[#908.2.2|908.2.2]], [[#908.2.3|908.2.3]]
| 21 x 15
| -
| -
|-
| style="text-align: left" | Advance Turn Arrow
| W16-6P
| [[#908.2.2|908.2.2]], [[#908.2.3|908.2.3]]
| 21 x 15
| -
| -
|-
| style="text-align: left" | Downward Diagonal Arrow
| W16-7P
| [[#908.2.2|908.2.2]], [[#908.2.3|908.2.3]]
| 21 x 15
| -
| -
|-
| style="text-align: left" | Ahead
| W16-9P
| [[#908.2.2|908.2.2]], [[#908.2.3|908.2.3]]
| 24 x 12
| -
| -
|-
| style="text-align: left" colspan="7" | '''Note:'''
# Dimensions are shown in inches and are shown as width x height
|}</div>

=={{SpanID|908.2.2}}908.2.2 School Area Signs and Plaques (MUTCD Section 7B.02) ==

<div style="text-align: center;">
<div style="display:inline-block;vertical-align: bottom;">

[[File:S1-1.png|thumb|none|alt=|150px|'''S1-1''']]

</div>
<div style="display:inline-block;vertical-align: bottom;">

[[File:S4-3P.png|thumb|none|alt=|124px|'''S4-3P''']]

</div>
<div style="display:inline-block;vertical-align: bottom;">

[[File:W16-5P.png|thumb|none|alt=|88px|'''W16-5P''']]
</div>

<div style="display:inline-block;vertical-align: bottom;">
[[File:W16-6P.png|thumb|none|alt=|88px|'''W16-6P''']]

</div>
<div style="display:inline-block;vertical-align: bottom;">
[[File:W16-7P (FYG).png|thumb|none|alt=|88px|'''W16-7P''']]

</div>
<div style="display:inline-block;vertical-align: bottom;">

[[File:W16-9P.png|thumb|none|alt=|100px|'''W16-9P''']]

</div>
<div style="display:inline-block;vertical-align: bottom;">

[[File:S5-2.png|thumb|none|alt=|120px|'''S5-2''']]

</div>
</div>

'''Support. '''Many state and local jurisdictions find it beneficial to advise road users that they are approaching a school that is adjacent to a highway, where additional care is needed, even though no school crossing is involved and the speed limit remains unchanged. Additionally, some jurisdictions designate school zones that have a unique legal standing in that fines for speeding or other traffic violations within designated school zones are increased or special enforcement techniques such as photo radar systems are used (see [[:Category:950 Automated Traffic Enforcement #950|EPG 950]]). It is important and sometimes legally necessary to mark the beginning and end points of these designated school zones so that the road user is given proper notice.

The School (S1-1) sign has the following four applications:

::A. School Area – the S1-1 sign can be used to warn road users that they are approaching school buildings or grounds immediately adjacent to the highway.

::B. School Zone – the S1-1 sign can be used to identify the location of the beginning of a designated school zone.

::C. School Advance Crossing – if combined with an AHEAD (W16-9P) plaque to comprise the School Advance Crossing assembly, the S1-1 sign can be used to warn road users that they are approaching a crossing where schoolchildren cross the roadway (see [[#908.2.3|EPG 908.2.3]]). MoDOT does not use the XX FEET plaque for School Advance Crossing assemblies.

::D. School Crossing – if combined with a diagonal downward-pointing arrow (W16-7P) plaque to comprise the School Crossing assembly, the S1-1 sign can be used to warn approaching road users of the location of a crossing where schoolchildren cross the roadway (see [[#908.2.3|EPG 908.2.3]]).

'''Option. '''If a school area or school zone is located on a cross street in close proximity to the intersection, a School (S1-1) sign with a supplemental arrow (W16-5P or W16-6P) plaque may be installed on each approach of the street or highway to warn road users making a turn onto the cross street that they will encounter a school area soon after making the turn.

'''Standard. '''If a school zone has been designated under State or local statute, a School (S1-1) sign shall be installed to identify the beginning point(s) of the designated school zone (see [[#fig908.2.2|Figure 908.2.2]]).

'''Option. '''If a school zone is not established by a State or local statute, school zone signing may be installed adjacent to the school’s property lines or as determined by engineering judgement.

A School Zone (S1-1) sign may be supplemented with a SCHOOL (S4-3P) plaque.

'''Standard'''. The downstream end of a designated school zone shall be identified with an END SCHOOL ZONE (S5-2) sign (see [[#fig908.2.2|Figure 908.2.2]]).

'''Option. '''A Warning Beacon (see [[902.18 Flashing Beacons (MUTCD Chapter 4S) #902.18.3|EPG 902.18.3]]) may be installed above a School (S1-1) sign for supplemental emphasis at a school zone.

'''Standard. '''Prior to the installation of a Warning Beacon, a TR08 Roadside Flashers for School Operations contract shall be executed.

{{SpanID|fig908.2.2}}
[[File:Figure 908.2.2 Example of Signing for a School Zone.jpg|center|thumb|alt=A school is shown on the right side of a vertical roadway with two-way traffic.
In advance of the school, to the right of the vertical roadway and facing northbound traffic, a sign assembly is shown. An S1-1 sign is shown mounted above an S4-3P (optional) plaque. Beyond the school, to the right of the roadway and facing northbound traffic, a S5-2 sign is shown.
On the left side of the roadway, the same series and placements of signs are shown facing southbound traffic.|750px| '''Figure 908.2.2''' Example of Signing for a School Zone]]

=={{SpanID|908.2.3}}908.2.3 School Crossing Signs (MUTCD Section 7B.03)==
<div style="text-align: center; ">
<div style="display: inline-block; vertical-align: bottom;">

[[File:School Area Signs.png|thumb|none|alt=|490px|'''School area signs''']]

</div>
<div style="display:inline-block;vertical-align: bottom;">

[[File:R1-5a.png|thumb|none|alt=|100px|'''R1-5a''']]

</div>
<div style="display:inline-block;vertical-align: bottom;">

[[File:R1-6b.png|thumb|none|alt=|100px|'''R1-6b''']]

</div>
{| class="wikitable" style="inline-table; margin: auto;text-align: left;"
|-
|}

</div>

'''Standard. '''The School Advance Crossing assembly shall consist of a School (S1-1) sign supplemented with an AHEAD (W16-9P) plaque.

Except as provided in the first Option paragraph below, a School Advance Crossing assembly shall be used in advance (see [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #tab903.3.4|Table 903.3.4]] for advance placement guidelines) of the first School Crossing assembly that is encountered in each direction as traffic approaches a school crosswalk).

Prior to the installation of an Advanced School Crossing sign(s), a TR10 or TR11 School Crossing contract shall be executed.

'''Option. '''The School Advance Crossing assembly may be omitted (see [[#fig908.2.5.1|Figure 908.2.5.1]]) where a School Zone (S1-1) sign (see [[#908.2.2|EPG 908.2.2]]) is installed to identify the beginning of a school zone in advance of the School Crossing assembly if determined to be unnecessary by engineering judgement.

If a school crosswalk is located on a cross street in close proximity to an intersection, a School Advance Crossing assembly with a supplemental arrow (W16-5P or W16-6P) plaque may be installed on each approach of the street or highway to warn road users making a turn onto the cross street that they will encounter a school crosswalk soon after making the turn (see [[#fig908.2.5.1|Figure 908.2.5.1]]).

'''Standard. '''If used, the School Crossing assembly shall be installed at the school crossing (see [[#fig908.2.5.1|Figure 908.2.5.1]]), or as close to it as possible, and shall consist of a School (S1-1) sign supplemented with a diagonal downward-pointing arrow (W16-7P) plaque (see [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.62|EPG 903.3.62]]) to show the location of the crossing.

The School Crossing assembly shall not be used at crossings other than those adjacent to schools.

The School Crossing assembly shall not be installed on an approach controlled by a STOP or a YIELD sign except as provided in the first two Option paragraphs below.

Prior to the installation of a School Crossing sign(s), a TR10 or TR11 School Crossing contract shall be executed. All requests for School Crossing sign(s) shall be reviewed in the district.

'''Option. '''The School Crossing assembly may be installed on an approach to a circular intersection controlled by a YIELD sign where the crosswalk is at least 20 feet in advance of the yield point at the entrance to a circulatory roadway.

At a signalized or stop-controlled intersection the School Crossing assembly may be installed on an approach to a channelized right turn lane controlled by a YIELD sign where the crosswalk is at least 20 feet in advance of the yield point.

A Yield Here To School Crossing (R1-5a) sign may be used, in accordance with the provisions of [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2.18|EPG 903.2.18]], in advance of a marked crosswalk that crosses an uncontrolled multi-lane approach within school zones.

The In-Street School Crossing (R1-6b) sign may only be used at midblock school crossings on approaches that are not controlled by a traffic control signal, a pedestrian hybrid beacon, or emergency-vehicle hybrid beacon.

'''Standard. '''When used at an uncontrolled crossing, the In-Street School Crossing sign shall be used only as a supplement to a School Crossing assembly with a diagonal downward-pointing arrow (W16-7P) plaque at the crosswalk location.

An In-Street School Crossing sign shall not be placed in advance of the crosswalk to educate road users about the State law prior to reaching the crosswalk, nor shall it be installed as an educational display that is not near any crosswalk.

'''Option. '''In-Street School Crossing signs may be mounted back-to-back on the center line of an undivided roadway.

'''Standard. '''In-Street School Crossing signs shall only be installed:
:A. Permanently on a raised island, or
:B. Temporarily on a portable base.

If an In-Street School Crossing sign is installed permanently in the roadway, the sign support shall comply with the mounting height and special mounting support requirements for an In-Street Pedestrian Crossing (R1-6) sign (see [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2.19|EPG 903.2.19]]).

If an In-Street School Crossing sign is temporarily placed in the roadway, the sign shall be retroreflective and shall be deployed on a portable temporary sign support. The sign support shall be a crashworthy portable base meeting a minimum of NCHRP 350 standards. The top of an In-Street School Crossing sign shall be a maximum of 4 feet above the pavement surface.

Temporary In-Street School Crossing signs shall be removed from the roadway when the school crossing guard is not present.

'''Support. '''MoDOT does not provide or install temporary In-Street School Crossing signs. If used, temporary portable In-Street School Crossing signs are supplied and installed by school districts.

'''Standard. '''The In-Street School Crossing sign shall not be used on approaches that are controlled by a traffic control signal, pedestrian hybrid beacon, or an emergency-vehicle hybrid beacon.

=={{SpanID|908.2.4}}908.2.4 School Bus Stop Signs (MUTCD Section 7B.04) ==

<div style="text-align: center;">
<div style="display: inline-block; vertical-align: middle;">

[[File:S3-1.png|thumb|none|alt=|150px|'''S3-1''']]

</div>
</div>

'''Support'''. [https://revisor.mo.gov/main/OneSection.aspx?section=304.050 Section 304.050, RSMo], paragraph 5, defines, by state statute the locations where school buses can stop to load and unload passengers based on the number of lanes on the roadway, presence of shoulders, visibility, and speed limits.

It is not intended that School Bus Stop Ahead (S3-1) signs be used everywhere a school bus stops to load or unload passengers, but for use where terrain and roadway features limit the approach sight distance and where there is no opportunity to relocate the school bus stop to another location with adequate sight distance. For this article, a school bus stop is defined as the location where schoolchildren wait to be picked up by a school bus and/or where schoolchildren are discharged from a school bus.

'''Standard.''' Requests for School Bus Stop Ahead signs shall be submitted to MoDOT district staff by the school district. When a request for a S3-1 sign is received, sight distance shall be evaluated at the school bus stop location. Sight distance shall be measured using a 3.5-foot driver’s eye height and an 8-foot object height. Each approach for the school bus stop shall be measured independently for each direction of travel along the roadway.

If the minimum sight distance in [[#tab908.2.4 | Table 908.2.4]] is not met, a school bus stop shall not be allowed by state statute. If the maximum sight distance in [[#tab908.2.4 | Table 908.2.4]] is not met, the school district shall attempt to relocate the school bus stop to a location that does meet or exceed the maximum sight distance.

{{SpanID|tab908.2.4}}
{| class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto"
|+ Table 908.2.4, Sight Distance Requirements for use of the S3-1 Sign
! Posted Speed (mph)
! Minimum Sight Distance (ft.)
! Maximum Sight Distance (ft.)
|-
| align="center"|30|| align="center"| 300|| align="center"| 500
|-
| align="center"|35|| align="center"| 300|| align="center"| 500
|-
| align="center"|40|| align="center"| 300|| align="center"| 500
|-
| align="center"|45|| align="center"| 300|| align="center"| 500
|-
| align="center"|50|| align="center"| 300|| align="center"| 510
|-
| align="center"|55|| align="center"| 300|| align="center"| 560
|-
| align="center"|60|| align="center"| 300|| align="center"| 625
|-
| align="center"|65|| align="center"| 500|| align="center"| 700
|-
| align="center"|70|| align="center"| 500|| align="center"|740
|}

'''Option.''' If the school district has reviewed a school bus stop location and there are no viable alternative locations to relocate the school bus stop, the school district may submit a letter to MoDOT district staff verifying that there are no alternate locations.

The School Bus Stop Ahead sign may be installed on an approach to a school bus stop based on engineering judgement if all the following conditions are met:
::A. Sight distance exceeds the minimum value in [[#tab908.2.4|Table 908.2.4]] when measured as described in the first Standard paragraph above,
::B. Sight distance is less than the maximum value in [[#tab908.2.4|Table 908.2.4]] when measured as described in the first Standard paragraph above, and
::C. A letter has been provided to MoDOT as described in the previous paragraph.

'''Guidance.''' Each approach to a school bus stop should be evaluated independently as it may not be necessary to install S3-1 signs for both approaches to a school bus stop.

If a School Bus Stop Ahead sign is installed, it should be located for a stop condition per [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #tab903.3.4|Table 903.3.4]].

'''Standard.''' To ensure proper placement of signs and encourage driver compliance, all requests for School Bus Stop Ahead signs shall be submitted by school district staff, and the school district must verify the status of all school bus stops with signing as active or inactive on a yearly basis.

'''Guidance.''' MoDOT district staff should send a standard letter requesting verification of school bus stop status prior to the fall session.

'''Option.''' If the school district fails to verify the status of school bus stops, the MoDOT district may remove the School Bus Stop Ahead signs at those stops.

'''Guidance.''' If the signs are removed due to lack of compliance with these requirements, the signs should not be reinstalled for one year. Whenever the school district moves a school bus stop location with S3-1 sign(s), they should advise the district office as soon as possible rather than waiting for the annual review.

=={{SpanID|908.2.5}}908.2.5 School Speed Limit Signs (MUTCD Section 7B.05)==

<div style="text-align: center;">
<div style="position: relative; display: inline-block; vertical-align: middle; whitespace: nowrap;">

<div style="display:inline-block;vertical-align: middle;">
[[File:S5-1.png|thumb|none|alt=|110px|'''School Speed Limit When Flashing Sign — S5-1''']]
</div>

<div style="display: inline-block; width: 126px;"></div>
<div style="box-sizing: border-box; position: absolute; left: 116px; right: auto;;height: 100%;text-align: left; padding-left: 0.4em; /*padding-bottom: 2.27em;*/padding-right: 0.4em; margin-bottom: 0.5em;display: inline-block; width: 120px; vertical-align: bottom; height: calc(100% - 0.5em); background-color: #f8f9fa;border:1px solid #c8ccd1;border-left: none;">
'''Note:''' The sign with WHEN FLASHING legend shall be accompanied by a flashing yellow Speed Limit Sign Beacon (see [[902.18 Flashing Beacons (MUTCD Chapter 4S)#902.18.4|EPG 902.18.4]])
</div>

</div>

<div style="display:inline-block;vertical-align: bottom;">

[[File:S5-3.png|thumb|none|alt=|120px|'''S5-3''']]

</div>
</div>

'''Standard. '''A School Speed Limit When Flashing (S5-1) sign shall be used to indicate the speed limit where a reduced school speed limit zone has been established based upon an engineering study or where a reduced school speed limit is specified for such areas by statute. The School Speed Limit When Flashing sign shall be placed at or as near as practicable to the point where the reduced school speed limit zone begins (see Figures [[#908.2.5.1|908.2.5.1]] and [[#908.2.5.2|908.2.5.2]]).

If a reduced school speed limit zone has been established, a School (S1-1) sign shall be installed in advance (see [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #tab903.3.4|Table 903.3.4]] for advance placement guidelines) of the first School Speed Limit When Flashing (S5-1) sign that is encountered in each direction as traffic approaches the reduced school speed limit zone (see Figures [[#908.2.5.1|908.2.5.1]] and [[#908.2.5.2|908.2.5.2]]).

The downstream end of an authorized and posted reduced school speed limit zone shall be identified with an END SCHOOL SPEED LIMIT (S5-3) sign (see Figures [[#908.2.5.1|908.2.5.1]] and [[#908.2.5.2|908.2.5.2]]).

'''Option. '''A standard Speed Limit sign showing the speed limit for the section of highway that is downstream from the authorized and posted reduced school speed limit zone may be mounted on the same post above the END SCHOOL SPEED LIMIT (S5-3) sign or the END SCHOOL ZONE (S5-2) sign.

'''Guidance. '''The beginning point of a reduced school speed limit zone should be at least 200 feet in advance of the school grounds or a school crossing; however, this 200-foot distance should be increased if the reduced school speed limit is 30 mph or higher. The maximum beginning point of a reduced school speed limit zone should not be greater than 500 feet in advance of the school grounds or a school crossing.

'''Standard.''' When a School Speed Limit When Flashing (S5-1) sign is used, a Speed Limit Sign Beacon (see [[902.18 Flashing Beacons (MUTCD Chapter 4S) #902.18.4|EPG 902.18.4]]) shall be used to identify the periods that the school speed limit is in effect.

Prior to the installation of a School Speed Limit When Flashing sign with a Speed Limit Sign Beacon, a TR08 Roadside Flashers for School Operations contract shall be executed.

'''Guidance'''. If a Speed Limit Sign Beacon is installed, no other Warning Beacons should be permitted on school zone signs inside the same school zone.

'''Standard. '''Upon receipt of a school speed limit request, the district shall perform a site investigation. A speed study and a crash study may be performed based on engineering judgement. The school speed limit shall be 10 mph below the posted speed limit. In no case shall a school speed limit of less than 25 mph be allowed.

If in the course of the speed study it is determined that the posted speed for the corridor is not proper, the posted speed shall be reevaluated and changed as necessary following [[905.2 Traffic Studies #905.2.14|EPG 905.2.14]].

{{SpanID|fig908.2.5.1}}
[[File:Figure 908.2.5.1 Example of Signing for a School Zone with a School Speed Limit and a School Crossing.png|center|thumb|alt=A school is shown on the right side of a vertical roadway with two-way traffic. In advance of the school, to the right of the vertical roadway, a series of signs and sign assemblies are shown. Furthest from the school, a sign assembly composed of an S1-1 plaque mounted above an S4-3P (optional) plaque is shown. This sign assembly is followed by an S5-1 sign with a warning beacon mounted above. Continuing towards the school, another sign assembly is shown composed of an S1-1 sign mounted above a W16-9P plaque. At the School Crossing, there is a S1-1 sign mounted above a W16-7PL plaque. Beyond the school a sign assembly is shown composed of an R2-1 (optional) sign mounted above an S5-3 sign. On the left side of the roadway, the same series and placements of signs are shown.|750px| '''Figure 908.2.5.1''' Example of Signing for a School Zone with a School Speed Limit and School Crossing]]

{{SpanID|fig908.2.5.2}}
[[File:Figure 908.2.5.2 Example of Signing for a School Speed Limit.jpg|center|thumb|alt=A school is shown on the right side of a vertical roadway with two-way traffic. In advance of the school, to the right of the vertical roadway, a series of signs and sign assemblies are shown. Furthest from the school, a sign assembly composed of an S1-1 plaque mounted above an S4-3P (optional) plaque is shown. This sign assembly is followed by an S5-1 sign with a warning beacon mounted above. Beyond the school a sign assembly is shown composed of an R2-1 (optional) sign mounted above an S5-3 sign. On the left side of the roadway, the same series and placements of signs are shown.|750px| '''Figure 908.2.5.2''' Example of Signing for a School Speed Limit]]

=={{SpanID|908.2.6}}908.2.6 Higher Fines Zone Signs and Plaques in School Areas (MUTCD Section 7B.06)==

'''Support. '''Higher Fines Zone Signs and Plaques are not used by MoDOT. There is no authority under state law to charge higher fines for moving or speeding violations in school zones.

=={{SpanID|908.2.7}}908.2.7 Parking and Stopping (R7 and R8 Series) Signs (MUTCD Section 7B.07) ==

'''Option. '''Parking and stopping regulatory signs may be used to prevent parked or waiting vehicles from blocking pedestrians’ views, and drivers’ views of pedestrians, and to control vehicles as a part of the school traffic plan.

'''Support. '''Parking signs and other signs governing the stopping and standing of vehicles in school areas cover a wide variety of regulations.

[[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2.43|EPG 903.2.43]] through [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2.45|903.2.45]] contain information regarding the signing of parking regulations in school zone areas.

903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C)

2025-12-11T21:43:52Z

HogsettC: /* {{SpanID|903.3.62}}903.3.62 Diagonal Downward-Pointing Arrow Plaques (W16-7P and W16-7aP) (MUTCD Section 2C.63) */

{| align="right" style="max-width: 640px;"
|__TOC__
|}
[[Category:903 Highway Signing (MUTCD Part 2)|903.03]]
=={{SpanID|903.3.1}}903.3.1 Application of Warning Signs (MUTCD Section 2C.01)==

'''Standard. '''The use of warning signs shall be based on an engineering study or on engineering judgment.

Warning signs shall be retroreflective.

'''Guidance. '''The use of warning signs should be kept to a minimum as the unnecessary use of warning signs tends to breed disrespect for all signs. In situations where the condition or activity is seasonal or temporary, the warning sign should be removed or covered when the condition or activity does not exist.

'''Support.''' The decision to use most warning signs is based on prevailing conditions. The items to be considered when determining the need for a warning sign are stopping sight distance and prevailing speed. Prevailing speed is determined by using either the posted or 85th percentile speed on the facility. Stopping sight distance is the distance a driver requires to perceive, react, and respond to a condition. The prevailing speed affects the amount of sight distance required for a condition.

It is recommended to use [[#tab903.3.1|Table 903.3.1]] to determine the stopping sight distance needed when considering the use of most warning signs. If the stopping sight distance is less than that in [[#tab903.3.1|Table 903.3.1]], a sign might be needed.

{{SpanID|tab903.3.1}}
<center>
{| class="wikitable" style="text-align: center;"
|+ '''Table 903.3.1''' Stopping Sight Distance Requirements
|-
! Prevailing Speed (mph) !! Distance (ft.)
|-
| 30 || 200
|-
| 35 || 250
|-
| 40 || 305
|-
| 45 || 360
|-
| 50 || 425
|-
| 55 || 495
|-
| 60 || 570
|-
| 65 || 645
|-
| 70 || 730
|-
| style="background-color: #ffffff;" colspan="2" | Note: Based on "A Policy on Geometric Design of Highways and Streets", 2018 Edition, AASHTO, Table 3-1, Stopping Sight Distance
|}
</center>

=={{SpanID|903.3.2}}903.3.2 Design of Warning Signs (MUTCD Section 2C.02)==

'''Standard. '''Except as provided in the following Option paragraph or unless specifically designated otherwise, all warning signs shall be diamond-shaped (square with one diagonal vertical) with a black legend and border on a fluorescent yellow background. Warning signs shall be designed in accordance with the sizes, shapes, colors, and legends contained in the FHWA “Standard Highway Signs” publication (see [[:Category:911_General_(MUTCD_Part_1) #911.1.5|EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1A.05]])).

'''Option.''' A warning sign that is larger than the size shown in the Oversized column in [[#tab903.3.3|Table 903.3.3]] for that particular sign may be diamond-shaped or may be rectangular or square in shape.

'''Support.''' The use of a shape other than diamond-shaped is typical for overhead installations. [[903.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 2A) #903.1.5|EPG 903.1.5]] contains information on allowable methods to accommodate a diamond-shaped warning sign where the lateral space available in which to install a diamond-shaped warning sign is constrained, such as in urban locations, when mounting on a narrow median barrier or adjacent to a retaining wall, including the display of the standard legend in a vertically oriented rectangle.

The use of LEDs in the border and legend of warning signs is described in [[903.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 2A) #903.1.12|EPG 903.1.12]].

'''Option.''' Word message warning signs other than those provided in the EPG may be developed and installed by MoDOT for conditions otherwise not addressed by standard signs (see [[903.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 2A) #903.1.4|EPG 903.1.4]]).

'''Support.''' MoDOT uses the fluorescent yellow-green (FYG) color exclusively for school signs. The only application where MoDOT would use the FYG color for bicycle or pedestrian signs is if a state route and local street intersected and the local jurisdiction utilized FYG color signs on their legs of the intersection. This would only be done to be in compliance with the MUTCD requirement that FYG and yellow shall not be intermixed in an application.

There are two primary reasons MoDOT has chosen not to use FYG color for bicycle or pedestrian signs. The first reason involves the MUTCD requirement that FYG color signs shall not be intermixed with other yellow color signs. A transition to FYG color signs would result in the premature replacement of all signs in an area when just one sign reached the end of its life or was damaged, resulting in wasted resources. The second reason, and most important, is to reserve FYG color signs for school signing to make these signs stand out from other signing, as school children are especially vulnerable road users.

In response to repeated requests by a local jurisdiction for MoDOT to use the FYG color for bicycle and pedestrian signs, MoDOT initiated a research study to determine if there were any documented safety benefits for using the FYG color for these signs. Having previously adopted fluorescent orange for all work zone signs, MoDOT made the transition from standard yellow to fluorescent yellow (FY) for all warning signs as there was documentation to support this change in sheeting color. However, no documentation could be found to indicate that the FYG sign color provides any safety benefits when compared to the FY sign color. The research study surveyed other state DOTs as well as local MPOs to determine if they made a change to the FYG color, how they made the decision to do so, and if they could provide any research documentation which would support FYG to be safer than FY. The study showed there was no conclusive evidence to demonstrate that FYG sign color had any safety benefit compared to the FY sign color that MoDOT was already using. Most agencies who adopted FYG did so based on engineering judgement and not based on the results of research.

'''Standard.''' Warning signs regarding conditions associated with school buses and schools and their related supplemental plaques shall have a black legend and border on a fluorescent yellow-green background (see [[908.2 Signs (MUTCD Chapter 7B) #908.2.1|EPG 908.2.1]]).

'''Option.''' Consistent with the provisions of [[902.18 Flashing Beacons (MUTCD Chapter 4S) #902.18.3|EPG 902.18.3]], a Warning Beacon may be used in combination with a standard warning sign.

=={{SpanID|903.3.3}}903.3.3 Size of Warning Signs and Plaques (MUTCD Section 2C.03)==

'''Standard.''' Except as provided in [[903.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 2A) #903.1.7|EPG 903.1.7]], the sizes for warning signs shall be as shown in [[#tab903.3.3|Table 903.3.3]].

'''Support.''' [[903.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 2A) #903.1.7|EPG 903.1.7]] contains information regarding the applicability of the various columns in [[#tab903.3.3|Table 903.3.3]].

'''Option.''' Signs and plaques larger than those shown in [[#tab903.3.3|Table 903.3.3]] may be used (see [[903.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 2A) #903.1.11|EPG 903.1.11]]) for special applications where speed, volume or other factors result in conditions where increased emphasis, improved recognition or increased legibility would be desirable, with approval from the MoDOT Highway Safety and Traffic Division.

'''Guidance. '''The minimum size for all diamond-shaped warning signs facing traffic on exit and entrance ramps at interchanges should be the size identified in [[#tab903.3.3|Table 903.3.3]] for the mainline roadway classification (Freeway/Expressway).

<center>
{{SpanID|tab903.3.3}}
{| class="wikitable" style="text-align:center;"
|+ Table 903.3.3 Warning Sign and Plaques Sizes
|-
! rowspan="2" | Sign or Plaque
! rowspan="2" | Sign Designation
! rowspan="2" | EPG Article
! colspan="2" | Conventional Road (in. x in.)
! Freeway/Expressway (in. x in.)
|-
! Standard
! Oversized
! Mainline & Ramps
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Turn
| W1-1
| [[#903.3.7|903.3.7]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Curve
| W1-2
| [[#903.3.7|903.3.7]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Reverse Turn
| W1-3
| [[#903.3.7|903.3.7]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Reverse Curve
| W1-4
| [[#903.3.7|903.3.7]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Winding Road
| W1-5
| [[#903.3.7|903.3.7]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | One-Direction Large Arrow
| W1-6
| [[#903.3.10|903.3.10]]
| 48 X 24
| 72 X 36
| 72 X 36
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Two-Direction Large Arrow
| W1-7
| [[#903.3.35|903.3.35]]
| 48 X 24
| 72 X 36
| 72 X 36
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Chevron
| W1-8
| [[#903.3.8|903.3.8]]
| 18 X 24
| 30 X 36
| 30 X 36
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Combination Horizontal Alignment/Intersection
| W1-10 Series
| [[#903.3.9|903.3.9]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Hairpin Curve
| W1-11
| [[#903.3.7|903.3.7]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Truck Rollover
| W1-13
| [[#903.3.11|903.3.11]]
| -
| -
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | 270° Curve
| W1-15
| [[#903.3.7|903.3.7]]
| -
| -
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Cross road
| W2-1
| [[#903.3.33|903.3.33]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Side Road
| W2-2
| [[#903.3.33|903.3.33]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Side Road (45°)
| W2-3, 3a
| [[#903.3.33|903.3.33]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | T Intersection
| W2-4
| [[#903.3.33|903.3.33]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Y Intersection
| W2-5
| [[#903.3.33|903.3.33]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Circular Intersection
| W2-6
| [[#903.3.33|903.3.33]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Offset Side Road
| W2-7
| [[#903.3.33|903.3.33]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 x 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Double Side Roads
| W2-8
| [[#903.3.33|903.3.33]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Watch for Entering Traffic
| W2-10a
| [[#903.3.34|903.3.34]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Watch for Approaching Traffic
| W2-11a
| [[#903.3.34|903.3.34]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Stop Ahead
| W3-1
| [[#903.3.29|903.3.29]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Yield Ahead
| W3-2
| [[#903.3.29|903.3.29]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Signal Ahead
| W3-3
| [[#903.3.29|903.3.29]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Be Prepared to Stop
| W3-4
| [[#903.3.29|903.3.29]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Reduced Speed Ahead
| W3-5
| [[#903.3.32|903.3.32]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Ramp Meter Ahead
| W3-7
| [[#903.3.30|903.3.30]]
| 36 X 36
| -
| -
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Ramp Metered When Flashing
| W3-8
| [[#903.3.30|903.3.30]]
| 36 X 36
| -
| -
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Ferry Crossing Ahead
| W3-18
| [[#903.3.54|903.3.54]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| -
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Merge
| W4-1
| [[#903.3.37|903.3.37]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Lane Ends
| W4-2
| [[#903.3.39|903.3.39]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Added Lane
| W4-3
| [[#903.3.38|903.3.38]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Cross Traffic Does Not Stop (plaque)
| W4-4P
| [[#903.3.37|903.3.37]]
| 24 X 12
| 36 X 18
| 36 X 18
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Traffic From Left Does Not Stop (plaque)
| W4-4aPL
| [[#903.3.37|903.3.37]]
| 24 X 12
| 36 X 18
| 36 X 18
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Traffic From Right Does Not Stop (plaque)
| W4-4aPR
| [[#903.3.37|903.3.37]]
| 24 X 12
| 36 X 18
| 36 X 18
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Oncoming Traffic Does Not Stop (plaque)
| W4-4bP
| [[#903.3.37|903.3.37]]
| 24 X 12
| 36 X 18
| 36 X 18
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Entering Roadway Merge
| W4-5
| [[#903.3.37|903.3.37]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Entering Roadway Added Lane
| W4-6
| [[#903.3.38|903.3.38]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Single Lane Transition
| W4-8
| [[#903.3.40|903.3.40]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | ROAD NARROWS
| W5-1
| [[#903.3.15|903.3.15]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | NARROW BRIDGE
| W5-2
| [[#903.3.16|903.3.16]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | ONE LANE BRIDGE
| W5-3
| [[#903.3.17|903.3.17]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| -
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Divided Highway
| W6-1
| [[#903.3.18|903.3.18]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| -
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Divided Highway Ends
| W6-2
| [[#903.3.19|903.3.19]]
| -
| -
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Two-Way Traffic
| W6-3
| [[#903.3.42|903.3.42]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| -
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Two-Way Traffic (2-Lane)
| W6-5
| [[#903.3.55|903.3.55]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| -
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Two-Way Traffic (3-Lane)
| W6-5a
| [[#903.3.55|903.3.55]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
|
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Passing Lane (plaque)
| W6-6aP
| [[#903.3.55|903.3.55]]
| 42 X 12
| -
| -
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Passing Lane Ends
| W6-16
| [[#903.3.55|903.3.55]]
| 36 X 36
| -
| -
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Watch for Left-Turning Traffic in Passing Lane
| W6-17
| [[#903.3.55|903.3.55]]
| 72 X 48
| -
| -
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Hill
| W7-1
| [[#903.3.14|903.3.14]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Uphill
| W7-1c
| [[#903.3.14|903.3.14]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Percent Grade
| W7-3P
| [[#903.3.63|903.3.63]]
| 24 X 18
| 30 X 24
| 30 X 24
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Next _ Miles (plaque)
| W7-3aP
| [[#903.3.63|903.3.63]]
| 24 X 18
| 30 X 24
| 30 X 24
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Bump
| W8-1
| [[#903.3.23|903.3.23]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Dip
| W8-2
| [[#903.3.23|903.3.23]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Pavement Ends
| W8-3
| [[#903.3.24|903.3.24]]
| 36 X 36
| -
| -
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Slippery When Wet
| W8-5
| [[#903.3.25|903.3.25]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Truck Crossing
| W8-6
| [[#903.3.49|903.3.49]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Fallen Rocks
| W8-14
| [[#903.3.26|903.3.26]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Road May Flood
| W8-18
| [[#903.3.28|903.3.28]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Impassable During High Water
| W8-34
| [[#903.3.28|903.3.28]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Left (Right) Lane Ends
| W9-1
| [[#903.3.39|903.3.39]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Lanes Merge
| W9-4
| [[#903.3.40|903.3.40]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Right (Left) Lane Exit Only
| W9-7
| [[#903.3.41|903.3.41]]
| 132 X 70
| -
| 132 X 70
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Bicycle
| W11-1
| [[#903.3.45|903.3.45]]
| 36 X 36
| -
| -
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Pedestrian
| W11-2
| [[#903.3.53|903.3.53]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| -
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Cattle
| W11-4
| [[#903.3.53|903.3.53]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
|
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Farm Vehicle
| W11-5
| [[#903.3.51|903.3.51]]
| 36 X 36
| -
| -
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Equestrian
| W11-7
| [[#903.3.53|903.3.53]]
| 36 X 36
| -
| -
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Emergency Vehicle
| W11-8
| [[#903.3.52|903.3.52]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Truck Entrance
| W11-10
| [[#903.3.50|903.3.50]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Emergency Signal Ahead (plaque)
| W11-12P
| [[#903.3.52|903.3.52]]
| 36 X 30
| -
| 36 X 30
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Horse-Drawn Vehicle
| W11-14
| [[#903.3.48|903.3.48]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Bike / Ped
| W11-15
| [[#903.3.46|903.3.46]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Trail Crossing
| W11-15a
| [[#903.3.47|903.3.47]]
| 36 X 36
| -
| -
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Double Arrow
| W12-1
| [[#903.3.20|903.3.20]]
| 30 X 30
| 36 X 36
| 36 X 36
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Low Clearance Advance
| W12-2
| [[#903.3.22|903.3.22]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Low Clearance (overhead)
| W12-2a
| [[#903.3.22|903.3.22]]
| 84 X 24
| -
| 84 X 24
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Advisory Speed
| W13-1P
| [[#903.3.33|903.3.33]]
| 24 X 24
| 30 X 30
| 30 X 30
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Advisory Speed (plaque)
| W13-1aP
| [[#903.3.33|903.3.33]]
| 48 X 15
| -
| 48 X 15
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Advisory Exit Speed
| W13-2
| [[#903.3.12|903.3.12]]
| -
| -
| 48 X 60
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Advisory Ramp Speed
| W13-3
| [[#903.3.12|903.3.12]]
| -
| -
| 48 X 60
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Advisory Exit Speed with 270° Loop Arrow
| W13-6
| [[#903.3.12|903.3.12]]
| -
| -
| 48 X 84
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Advisory Ramp Speed with 270° Loop Arrow
| W13-7
| [[#903.3.12|903.3.12]]
| -
| -
| 48 X 84
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Advisory Exit Speed with 180° Hairpin Arrow
| W13-8
| [[#903.3.12|903.3.12]]
| -
| -
| 48 X 84
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Advisory Ramp Speed with 180° Hairpin Arrow
| W13-9
| [[#903.3.12|903.3.12]]
| -
| -
| 48 X 84
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Advisory Exit Speed with 90° Turn Arrow
| W13-10
| [[#903.3.12|903.3.12]]
| -
| -
| 48 X 72
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Advisory Ramp Speed with 90° Turn Arrow
| W13-11
| [[#903.3.12|903.3.12]]
| -
| -
| 48 X 72
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Advisory Exit Speed with Truck Rollover
| W13-12
| [[#903.3.12|903.3.12]]
| -
| -
| 48 X 84
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Advisory Ramp Speed with Truck Rollover
| W13-13
| [[#903.3.12|903.3.12]]
| -
| -
| 48 X 84
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Vehicle Speed Feedback Sign
| W13-20
| [[#903.3.13|903.3.13]]
| 30 X 36
| -
| 48 X 60
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Vehicle Speed Feedback (plaque)
| W13-20aP
| [[#903.3.13|903.3.13]]
| 30 X 24
| -
| 48 X 36
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Dead End
| W14-1
| [[#903.3.21|903.3.21]]
| 36 X 36
| 36 X 36
| -
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | No Outlet
| W14-2
| [[#903.3.21|903.3.21]]
| 36 X 36
| 36 X 36
| -
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | No Passing Zone (pennant)
| W14-3
| [[#903.3.43|903.3.43]]
| -
| -
| -
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Road Ends
| W14-13
| [[#903.3.21|903.3.21]]
| 36 X 36
| 36 X 36
| -
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | In Road (plaque)
| W16-1P
| [[#903.3.66|903.3.66]]
| 24 X 18
| -
| 24 X 18
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | XX FEET (plaque)
| W16-2P
| [[#903.3.60|903.3.60]]
| 24 X 18
| 30 X 24
| 30 X 24
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | XX MILES (plaque)
| W16-3P
| [[#903.3.60|903.3.60]]
| 24 X 18
| 30 X 24
| 30 X 24
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | NEXT _ FEET (plaque)
| W16-4P
| [[#903.3.60|903.3.60]]
| 24 X 18
| 30 X 24
| 30 X 24
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Directional Arrow (plaque)
| W16-5P
| [[#903.3.61|903.3.61]]
| 30 X 21
| -
| 30 X 21
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Advance Turn Arrow (plaque)
| W16-6P
| [[#903.3.61|903.3.61]]
| 30 X 21
| -
| 30 X 21
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Downward Diagonal Arrow (plaque)
| W16-7P
| [[#903.3.62|903.3.62]]
| 30 X 21
| -
| 30 X 21
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Dual Downward Diagonal Arrow (plaque)
| W16-7aP
| [[#903.3.62|903.3.62]]
| 30 X 21
| -
| 30 X 21
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Two Line Street Name (plaque)
| W16-8aP
| [[#903.3.64|903.3.64]]
| Varies X 15
| Varies X 24
| Varies X 24
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Advance Street Name (plaque)
| W16-8P
| [[#903.3.64|903.3.64]]
| Varies X 8
| Varies X 12
| Varies X 12
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Ahead (plaque)
| W16-9P
| [[#903.3.44|903.3.44]], [[#903.3.53|903.3.53]]
| 30 X 18
| -
| 30 X 18
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Notice (plaque)
| W16-18P
| [[#903.3.68|903.3.68]]
| 36 X 12
| 48 X 18
| 48 X 18
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Except to Turn (plaque)
| W16-23P
| [[#903.3.68|903.3.68]]
| 48 X 30
| -
| -
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Except to Exit (plaque)
| W16-24P
| [[#903.3.68|903.3.68]]
| 48 X 30
| -
| -
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Double Reverse Curve Left - 1 Lane
| W24-1L
| [[#903.3.7|903.3.7]]
| 36 X 36
| -
| 36 X 36
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Double Reverse Curve Left - 2 Lanes
| W24-1aL
| [[#903.3.7|903.3.7]]
| 36 X 36
| -
| 36 X 36
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Double Reverse Curve Left - 3 Lanes
| W24-1bL
| [[#903.3.7|903.3.7]]
| 36 X 36
| -
| 36 X 36
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Oncoming Traffic Has Extended Green
| W25-1
| [[#903.3.36|903.3.36]]
| 24 X 30
| -
| -
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Oncoming Traffic May Have Extended Green
| W25-2
| [[#903.3.36|903.3.36]]
| 24 X 30
| -
| -
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Watch for Stopped Traffic
| W26-1
| [[#903.3.31|903.3.31]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Travel Safe Zone
| W27-1
| [[#903.3.56|903.3.56]]
| 36 X 48
| 48 X 60
| 48 X 60
|}
</center>

=={{SpanID|903.3.4}}903.3.4 Placement of Warning Signs (MUTCD Section 2C.04)==

'''Support.''' Information on the placement of warning signs is contained in [[903.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 2A) #903.1.13|EPG 903.1.13]] through [[903.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 2A) #903.1.18|903.1.18]].

The time needed for detection, recognition, decision, and reaction is called the Perception-Response Time (PRT). [[#tab903.3.4|Table 903.3.4]] is provided as an aid for determining warning sign location. The distances shown in [[#tab903.3.4|Table 903.3.4]] can be adjusted for roadway features, other signing, and to improve visibility.

'''Guidance. '''Warning signs should be placed so that they provide an adequate PRT. The distances contained in [[#tab903.3.4|Table 903.3.4]] should be applied with engineering judgment.

Minimum spacing between warning signs with different messages should be based on the estimated PRT for driver comprehension of and reaction to the second sign.

The effectiveness of the placement of warning signs should be periodically evaluated. This is typically accomplished during routine sign inspection cycles. [[903.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 2A) #903.1.19|EPG 903.1.19]] contains information regarding MoDOT’s sign maintenance program.

'''Standard. '''When any part of a warning sign assembly (post, sign, plaque, etc.) is replaced, maintained or modified, the placement of the sign shall be reviewed based on [[#tab903.3.4|Table 903.3.4]]. Additionally, mounting height shall be reviewed for conformance with [[903.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 2A) #903.1.15|EPG 903.1.15]].

{{SpanID|tab903.3.4}}
{| class="wikitable"
|-
|+ '''Table 903.3.4''' Guidelines for Advance Placement of Warning Signs
|- style="text-align:center;"
! rowspan="3" | Posted or 85th-Percentile Speed
! colspan="9" | Advance Placement Distance1
|- style="text-align:center;"
! rowspan="2" style="max-width: 200px;" | Condition A: Speed reduction and lane changing in heavy traffic2
! colspan="8" | Condition B: Deceleration to the listed advisory (mph) for the condition
|- style="text-align:center;"
! 03
! 104
! 204
! 304
! 404
! 504
! 604
! 704
|- style="vertical-align:middle;"
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 20 mph
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 225 ft
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 115 ft
| N/A5
| —
| —
| —
| —
| —
| —
|- style="vertical-align:middle;"
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 25 mph
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 325 ft
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 155 ft
| N/A5
| N/A5
| —
| —
| —
| —
| —
|- style="vertical-align:middle;"
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 30 mph
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 460 ft
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 200 ft
| N/A5
| N/A5
| —
| —
| —
| —
| —
|- style="vertical-align:middle;"
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 35 mph
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 565 ft
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 250 ft
| N/A5
| N/A5
| N/A5
| —
| —
| —
| —
|- style="vertical-align:middle;"
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 40 mph
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 670 ft
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 305 ft
| 100 ft6
| 100 ft6
| N/A5
| —
| —
| —
| —
|- style="vertical-align:middle;"
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 45 mph
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 775 ft
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 360 ft
| 125 ft
| 100 ft6
| 100 ft6
| N/A5
| —
| —
| —
|- style="vertical-align:middle;"
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 50 mph
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 885 ft
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 425 ft
| 200 ft
| 175 ft
| 125 ft
| 100 ft6
| —
| —
| —
|- style="vertical-align:middle;"
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 55 mph
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 990 ft
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 495 ft
| 275 ft
| 225 ft
| 200 ft
| 125 ft
| N/A5
| —
| —
|- style="vertical-align:middle;"
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 60 mph
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 1100 ft
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 570 ft
| 350 ft
| 325 ft
| 275 ft
| 200 ft
| 100 ft6
| —
| —
|- style="vertical-align:middle;"
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 65 mph
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 1200 ft
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 645 ft
| 450 ft
| 400 ft
| 350 ft
| 275 ft
| 200 ft
| 100 ft6
| —
|- style="vertical-align:middle;"
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 70 mph
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 1250 ft
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 730 ft
| 525 ft
| 500 ft
| 450 ft
| 375 ft
| 275 ft
| 150 ft
| —
|- style="vertical-align:middle;"
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 75 mph
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 1350 ft
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 820 ft
| 625 ft
| 600 ft
| 550 ft
| 475 ft
| 375 ft
| 250 ft
| 100 ft6
|-
| style="background-color: #ffffff" colspan="11" |
|-
| style="background-color: #ffffff" colspan="11" | Note 1 — For Advanced Placement Distance — General
* The distances are adjusted for a sign legibility distance of 180 feet for Condition A.
* The distances for Condition B (with the exception of the potential stop condition) have been adjusted for a sign legibility distance of 250 feet, which is appropriate for an alignment warning symbol sign.
* For Conditions A and B, warning signs with less than 6-inch legend or more than four words, a minimum of 100 feet should be added to the advance placement distance to provide adequate legibility of the warning sign.

Note 2 — For Condition A — Speed Reduction and Lane Change Conditions
* Typical conditions are locations where the road user must use extra time to adjust speed and change lanes in heavy traffic because of a complex driving situation or reduce to a new posted speed.
* Typical signs are Merge, Right Lane Ends, and Reduced Speed Ahead.
* The distances are determined by providing the driver a PRT of 14.0 to 14.5 seconds for vehicle maneuvers (2018 AASHTO Policy, Table 3-3, Decision Sight Distance, Avoidance Maneuver E) and adjusted for a legibility distance of 180 feet for the appropriate sign.

Note 3 — For Condition B — Stop Condition
* Typical condition is the warning of a potential stop situation.
* Typical signs are Stop Ahead, Yield Ahead, Signal Ahead, and Intersection Warning signs.
* The distances are based on the 2018 AASHTO Policy, Table 3-1, Stopping Sight Distance, providing a PRT of 2.5 seconds, a deceleration rate of 11.2 feet/second2.

Note 4 — For Condition B — Reduced Speed Conditions
* Typical conditions are locations where the road user must decrease speed to maneuver through the warned condition.
* Typical signs are Turn, Curve, Reverse Turn, Reverse Curve, or Reduced Speed Ahead.
* The distance is determined by providing a 2.5 second PRT, a vehicle deceleration rate of 10 feet/second2, and adjusted for a sign legibility distance of 250 feet.

Note 5 — For Condition B — N/A Values
* No suggested distances are provided for these speeds, as the placement location is dependent on site conditions and other signing.
* An alignment warning sign may be placed anywhere from the point of curvature up to 100 feet in advance of the curve.
* However, the alignment warning sign should be installed in advance of the curve and at least 100 feet from any other signs.

Note 6 — For Condition B — for shortest distance values per posted speed
* The minimum advance placement distance is listed as 100 feet to provide adequate spacing between signs.

General Note:

Warning signs that advise road users about conditions that are not related to a specific location can be installed in an appropriate location, based on engineering judgment.
|}

=={{SpanID|903.3.5}}903.3.5 Horizontal Alignment Warning Signs – General (MUTCD Section 2C.05)==

'''Support.''' A variety of horizontal alignment warning signs, pavement markings (see [[620.2 Pavement and Curb Markings (MUTCD Chapter 3B)|EPG 620.2]]), and delineation (see [[620.6 Delineators (MUTCD Chapter 3G)|EPG 620.6]]) can be used to advise motorists of a change in the roadway alignment. Uniform application of these traffic control devices with respect to the amount of change in the roadway alignment conveys a consistent message establishing driver expectancy and promoting effective roadway operations. The design and application of horizontal alignment warning signs to meet those requirements are addressed in [[#903.3.5|EPG 903.3.5]] through [[#903.3.12|903.3.12]].

The following list identifies treatments that might be used in advance of or within a change in horizontal alignment:
:A. Horizontal alignment (Turn (W1-1), Curve (W1-2, W1-10 series, W1-11, W1-13, W1-15), Reverse Turn (W1-3), Reverse Curve (W1-4), Winding Road (W1-5), Exit Speed (W13-2), Ramp Speed (W13-3), and Combination Horizontal Alignment (Advisory Exit or Ramp Speed W13-6 through W13-11)) signs (see [[#903.3.7|EPG 903.3.7]], [[#903.3.9|903.3.9]], and [[#903.3.12|903.3.12]])
:B. Advisory Speed (W13-1P) plaque (see [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.59|EPG 903.3.59]])
:C. Chevron Alignment (W1-8) signs (see [[#903.3.8|EPG 903.3.8]])
:D. One Direction Large Arrow (W1-6) sign (see [[#903.3.10|EPG 903.3.10]])
:E. Sign or marking conspicuity enhancements (see [[903.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 2A) #903.1.11|EPG 903.1.11]])
:F. Longitudinal rumble strips (see [[620.10 Rumble Strip Markings (MUTCD Chapter 3K) #620.10.1|EPG 620.10.1]])
:G. Vehicle Speed Feedback Sign (see [[#903.3.13|EPG 903.3.13]])

In addition, considerations other than traffic control devices, such as improved surface friction (high friction surface treatments), pavement edge treatments, lighting improvements, increased superelevation, and longitudinal rumble strips, might be used in advance of or within a change in horizontal alignment.

'''Guidance.''' Except as provided in [[#903.3.6|EPG 903.3.6]], the selection of traffic control devices used to warn road users of a change in horizontal alignment or to provide guidance in navigating the change in horizontal alignment should be based on consideration of one or more of the following factors:
:A. The speed of traffic on the approach to the change in horizontal alignment
:B. The recommended advisory speed for the change in horizontal alignment
:C. The difference between the speed limit and the advisory speed, or the speed differential for the change in horizontal alignment
:D. Daily traffic volumes on the roadway
:E. The typical mix of vehicle types on the roadway
:F. Sight distance throughout the change in horizontal alignment
:G. Other types of traffic control devices that are used in advance of and within the change in horizontal alignment on the same roadway segment
:H. The crash history of the change in horizontal alignment
:I. The presence of driveways or intersections within the curve radius

=={{SpanID|903.3.6}}903.3.6 Device Selection for Changes in Horizontal Alignment (MUTCD Section 2C.06)==

'''Standard: '''[[#tab903.3.6|Table 903.3.6]] shall be used to specify the type(s) of warning signs to be used in advance of, and/or along, a horizontal curve, except as provided in following Option paragraph. The speed differential shall be the difference between the horizontal curve’s advisory speed and the roadway’s posted speed limit on the approach to the curve.

'''Option. '''A One Direction Large Arrow (W1-6) sign may be used to supplement Chevron Alignment (W1-8) signs when:
:A. Site conditions limit the number of Chevron Alignment signs that are visible; or

:B. The number of Chevron Alignment signs that can be installed within the change in horizontal alignment is less than the number determined by the spacing specified in [[#903.3.8|EPG 903.3.8]].

Additional or supplemental devices may be used for a change in horizontal alignment on the basis of engineering judgment.

If engineering judgment indicates the need for the horizontal alignment sign for a curve that can be driven at or above the posted speed limit, horizontal alignment signs may be installed with the Advisory Speed Plaque (W13-1P) displaying an advisory speed equal to the posted speed limit.

Warrants for center lines and edge lines are provided in EPG [[620.2 Pavement and Curb Markings (MUTCD Chapter 3B) #620.2.2|620.2.2]] and [[620.2 Pavement and Curb Markings (MUTCD Chapter 3B) #620.2.11|620.2.11]], respectively.

Provisions for delineators are contained in [[620.6 Delineators (MUTCD Chapter 3G)| EPG 620.6]].

Provisions for Advisory Speed (W13-1P) plaques are contained in [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.59|EPG 903.3.59]].

<center>
{{SpanID|tab903.3.6}}
{| class="wikitable"
|+'''Table 903.3.6''' Application of Warning Signs for Changes in Horizontal Alignment
|-
! Speed Differential1 !! Warning Signs Required
|-
| 5 to 10 mph || Horizontal Alignment warning sign2 Advisory Speed plaque3
|-
| 15 mph or more || Horizontal Alignment warning sign2 Advisory Speed plaque3 Chevron Alignment signs4
|-
| style="background-color: #ffffff;" colspan="2" |
# Speed differential shall be the difference between the horizontal curve’s advisory speed and the roadway’s posted speed limit.
# Provisions for the use of Horizontal Alignment warning signs are contained in [[#903.3.6|EPG 903.3.6]].
# Provision for Advisory Speed (W13-1P) plaques are contained in [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.59|EPG 903.3.59]].
# [[#903.3.6|EPG 903.3.6]] contains information about the use of a One Direction Large Arrow (W1-6) sign in place of or to supplement chevron alignment signs.
|}
</center>

=={{SpanID|903.3.7}}903.3.7 Horizontal Alignment Signs (W1-1 through W1-5, W1-11, W1-15, W24-1) (MUTCD Section 2C.07)==
<center>
{| style=""
|-
|[[File:W1-1.png|center|100px|thumb|<center>'''W1-1'''</center>]]
|[[File:W1-2.png|center|100px|thumb|<center>'''W1-2'''</center>]]
|[[File:W1-3.png|center|100px|thumb|<center>'''W1-3'''</center>]]
|[[File:W1-4.png|center|100px|thumb|<center>'''W1-4'''</center>]]
|-
|[[File:W1-5.png|center|100px|thumb|<center>'''W1-5'''</center>]]
|[[File:W1-11.png|center|100px|thumb|<center>'''W1-11'''</center>]]
|[[File:W1-15.png|center|100px|thumb|<center>'''W1-15'''</center>]]
|[[File:W24-1L.png|center|100px|thumb|<center>'''W24-1L'''</center>]]
|}
</center>

'''Standard. '''When a horizontal alignment sign is required as provided in [[#903.3.6|EPG 903.3.6]] the sign installed in advance of the curve shall be a Curve (W1-2) sign unless a different sign is recommended or allowed by the provisions of this Article.

A Turn (W1-1) sign shall be used instead of a Curve (W1-2) sign in advance of a horizontal curve that has an advisory speed of 30 mph or less.

'''Guidance. '''Where there are two changes in roadway alignment in opposite directions that are separated by a tangent distance of less than 600 feet, the Reverse Turn (W1-3) sign should be used instead of multiple Turn (W1-1) signs or the Reverse Curve (W1-4) sign should be used instead of multiple Curve (W1-2) signs.

'''Support. '''[[#fig903.3.7.1|Figures 903.3.7.1]] and [[#fig903.3.7.2|903.3.7.2]] provide examples of warning signs used for turns and curves.

'''Option. '''A Winding Road (W1-5) sign may be used instead of multiple Turn (W1-1) or Curve (W1-2) signs where there are three or more changes in roadway alignment each separated by a tangent distance of less than 600 feet.

A NEXT XX MILES (W7-3aP) supplemental distance plaque (see [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.60|EPG 903.3.60]]) may be installed below the Winding Road sign where continuous roadway curves exist for a specific distance.

If the curve has a change in horizontal alignment of 135 degrees or more, the Hairpin Curve (W1-11) sign may be used instead of a Turn or Curve sign.

If the curve has a change of direction of approximately 270 degrees, such as on a cloverleaf interchange ramp, the 270-degree Loop (W1-15) sign may be used instead of a Turn or Curve sign.

'''Guidance. '''When the Hairpin Curve sign or the 270-degree Loop sign is installed, either a One-Direction Large Arrow (W1-6) sign or Chevron Alignment (W1-8) signs should be installed on the outside of the turn or curve.

'''Option.''' A double reverse left sign (W24-1L) and advisory speed plaque may be used on the crossroad approaches to a Diverging Diamond Interchange (DDI) when the difference between the speed limit and the advisory speed is 5 mph or greater. The need for this signing is based on engineering judgment if speeding through a DDI is a concern. An Advisory speed plaque is typically installed where the posted speed on the crossroad of the DDI is 40 mph or greater.

'''Standard.''' If used with an advisory speed plaque, the W24-1L sign shall display the number of double reverse arrows which indicates the number of lanes on the crossroad going through the DDI in the direction of travel where the sign is observed.

'''Support. '''See [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.59|EPG 903.3.59]] for information regarding Advisory Speed Plaques (W13-1P).

{{SpanID|fig903.3.7.1}}
[[File:Figure 903.3.7.1 Example of Warning Signs for Changes in Horizontal Alignment (Sheet 1 of 2).png|thumb|center|800px|alt="A segment of a vertical two-lane north-south roadway that curves to the right, or east, is shown. At the bottom of the figure, facing south and to the right of the northbound lane, a sign assembly composed of a W1-2R sign mounted above a W13-1P plaque is shown. The W1-2R is a yellow diamond-shaped sign with a black arrow curving up and to the right.
Continuing northbound, on the left side of the roadway, the following sequence of W1-8 chevron signs is shown from bottom to top: four consecutive W1-8L chevrons facing north, one W1-8R chevron facing south, one W1-8L chevron facing north, one W1-8R chevron facing south, one W1-8L chevron facing north, and finally four consecutive W1-8R chevrons facing south. Continuing north on the same side of the road, facing north and to the right of the southbound lane, a sign assembly composed of a W1-2L sign mounted above a W13-1P plaque is shown."
|'''Figure 903.3.7.1''' Examples of Warning Signs for Changes in Horizontal Alignment ''(Sheet 1 of 2)'']]

{{SpanID|fig903.3.7.2}}
[[File:Figure 903.3.7.2 Example of Warning Signs for Changes in Horizontal Alignment (Sheet 2 of 2) .png|thumb|center|800px|alt="A segment of a vertical two-lane north-south roadway that curves to the right, or east, is shown.
At the bottom of the figure, facing south and to the right of the northbound lane, a sign assembly composed of a W1-1R sign mounted above a W13-1P plaque is shown. W1-1R is shown as a yellow diamond-shaped sign with a black arrow pointing up and then a sharp turn to the right.
On the left side of the roadway, the following sequence of optional W1-8 chevron signs are shown from bottom to top: two W1-8L chevrons facing north, followed by one W1-8R chevron facing south, then one W1-8L chevron facing north, and finally one W1-8R chevron facing south.
Just north of this sequence, a sign assembly composed of a W1-6R sign mounted above an optional W13-1aP plaque is shown facing south.
North of that on the curve, still on the left side of the roadway, there is a sequence of optional W1-8 chevron signs as follows: one W1-8R facing southwest, one W1-8L facing northeast, one W1-8R facing southwest, and one W1-8L facing northeast.
East of that, following the curve, another sign assembly composed of a W1-6L sign mounted above an optional W13-1aP plaque is shown facing east.
To the east of that, two optional W1-8R chevrons are shown facing west.
Finally, at the top right of the figure, facing east and to the right of the westbound lane, a sign assembly composed of a W1-1L sign mounted above a W13-1P plaque is shown. The W1-1L is a yellow diamond-shaped sign with a black arrow pointing up and then sharply turning to the left."
|'''Figure 903.3.7.2''' Examples of Warning Signs for Changes in Horizontal Alignment ''(Sheet 2 of 2)'']]

=={{SpanID|903.3.8}}903.3.8 Chevron Alignment Sign (W1-8) (MUTCD Section 2C.08)==
[[File:W1-8.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W1-8'''</center>]]

'''Support. '''Examples of when to use Chevron signs include locations where there is a crash history, evidence of drivers losing control on a curve or turn, a sharp change in horizontal alignment not readily visible to the driver, or as a systemic curve improvement program.

The majority of fatal and serious injury crashes are attributed to lane departure crashes (State Strategic Highway Safety Plan). Chevrons are a highly cost-effective way to reduce lane departure crashes in curves and turns.

Implementation of the 2009 MUTCD requirements for chevron deployments resulted in a statewide reduction in severe lane departure crashes in horizontal curves. To maintain this observed safety benefit, MoDOT has established standards based on the 2009 MUTCD criteria, which is above the minimum requirements in the 11th Edition of the MUTCD. For more details on the safety benefits of chevrons, contact the Highway Safety and Traffic Division.

'''Standard. '''The use of the Chevron Alignment (W1-8) sign (see [[#fig903.3.7.2|Figure 903.3.7.2]]) to provide additional emphasis and guidance for a change in horizontal alignment shall be in accordance with the information provided in [[#903.3.6|EPG 903.3.6]].

The Chevron Alignment sign shall be a vertical rectangle. No border shall be used on the Chevron Alignment sign.

If used, Chevron Alignment signs shall be installed on the outside of a turn or curve, in line with and at approximately a right angle to approaching traffic. Chevron Alignment signs shall be installed at a minimum height of 4 feet, measured vertically from the bottom of the sign to the elevation of the near edge of the traveled way, which will locate the sign at approximately the driver’s eye height.

'''Guidance. '''The approximate spacing of Chevron Alignment signs on the turn or curve measured from the point of curvature (PC) should be as shown in [[#tab903.3.8|Table 903.3.8]].

In addition to the Chevron Alignment signs placed throughout the curve, there should be one sign in advance of the PC and one after the PT. These signs should be spaced the same as the Chevron Alignment signs in the curve.

'''Option.''' The values in [[#tab903.3.8|Table 903.3.8]] are typical and variances for driveways, public roads, and other signs may alter the spacing. Engineering judgment may also be used to modify the spacing as long as road users always have at least two Chevron Alignment signs in view until the change in alignment eliminates the need for the signs.

Based on engineering judgement, chevron alignment signs may be omitted within incorporated city limits.

'''Guidance.''' The Chevron Alignment signs should be visible for a sufficient distance to provide the road user with adequate time to react to the change in alignment.

The single-sided Chevron sign should only be used where only one direction of travel is impacted, such as on an expressway. The double-side Chevron (W1-8D) should be used on two-lane, two-way roads.

At the end of a four-lane divided highway, where the traffic reduces to two lanes, chevrons should be used to direct traffic from the dual lanes that are ending and being redirected to the two-lane roadway.

'''Option. '''Chevron Alignment signs may also be used on any other roadways based on engineering judgment.

Chevron Alignment signs may be used in addition to the One-Direction Large Arrow (W1-6) sign on turns posted at 30 mph or less.

'''Guidance. '''As chevrons are installed, all horizontal alignment signing (chevrons, curve and turn signing, advisory speed plaques and arrow boards) on a corridor should be evaluated to ensure the installations meet current standards. Aspects of existing horizontal alignment signs to look at should include spacing of existing chevrons, offset and mounting heights of any horizontal alignment sign as well as the distance advanced warning signs are installed from the curve/turn. The need for curve/turn signs should be reevaluated if the ball banking measurements from when the signs were installed are out of date due to roadway/pavement improvements or due to changes in vehicle performance.

'''Option. '''LEDs may be used to enhance the conspicuity of Chevron Alignment signs (see [[903.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 2A) #903.1.12|EPG 903.1.12]]).

'''Standard. '''The LEDs used in the Chevron Alignment sign shall consist of yellow LEDs outlining the chevron symbol.

Chevron Alignment signs shall not be placed on the far side of a T-intersection facing traffic on the stem approach to warn drivers that a through movement is not physically possible, as this is the function of a Two-Direction (or One-Direction) Large Arrow sign.

Chevron Alignment signs shall not be used to mark obstructions within or adjacent to the roadway, including the beginning of guardrails or barriers, as this is the function of an object marker (see [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.70|EPG 903.3.70]]).

Chevron Alignment signs directing traffic to the right shall not be used in the central island of a roundabout or a neighborhood traffic circle.

{{SpanID|tab903.3.8}}
<center>
{| class="wikitable" style="text-align: center;"
|+ '''Table 903.3.8''' Typical Spacing of Chevron Alignment Signs on Horizontal Curves
|-
! Advisory Speed !! Curve Radius !! Sign Spacing
|-
| 15 mph or less || Less than 200 feet || 40 feet
|-
| 20 to 30 mph || 200 to 400 feet || 60 feet
|-
| 35 to 45 mph || 401 to 700 feet || 80 feet
|-
| 50 to 60 mph || 701 to 1,250 feet || 100 feet
|-
| more than 60 mph || More than 1,250 feet || 140 feet
|-
| style="background-color: #ffffff; max-width: 500px;" colspan="3" | Note: The relationship between curve radius and the advisory speed shown in this table should not be used to determine the advisory speed.
|}
</center>

=={{SpanID|903.3.9}}903.3.9 Combination Horizontal Alignment/Intersection Signs (W1-10 Series) (MUTCD Section 2C.09)==
<center>
{| style=""
|-
|[[File:W1-10.png|center|100px|thumb|<center>'''W1-10'''</center>]]
|[[File:W1-10a.png|center|100px|thumb|<center>'''W1-10a'''</center>]]
|[[File:W1-10b.png|center|100px|thumb|<center>'''W1-10b'''</center>]]
|-
|[[File:W1-10c.png|center|100px|thumb|<center>'''W1-10c'''</center>]]
|[[File:W1-10d.png|center|100px|thumb|<center>'''W1-10d'''</center>]]
|[[File:W1-10e.png|center|100px|thumb|<center>'''W1-10e'''</center>]]
|}
</center>

'''Option. '''The Turn (W1-1) sign, the Curve (W1-2) sign, and the Reverse Curve (W1-4) sign may be combined with the Cross Road (W2-1) sign or the Side Road (W2-2 or W2-3) sign to create a combination Horizontal Alignment/Intersection (W1-10 series) sign that depicts the condition where an intersection occurs within or immediately adjacent to a turn or curve.

'''Support. '''[[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.64|EPG 903.2.64]] contains information about the use of an advance street name plaque to identify an intersecting road.

'''Guidance. '''Elements of the combination Horizontal Alignment/Intersection sign related to horizontal alignment should comply with the provisions of [[#903.3.7|EPG 903.3.7]], and elements related to intersection configuration should comply with the provisions of [[#903.3.33|EPG 903.3.33]]. The symbol design should approximate the configuration of the intersecting roadway(s). No more than one Cross Road or two Side Road symbols should be displayed on any one combination Horizontal Alignment/Intersection sign.

A layout of the proposed sign should be included when ordering or when including the sign in design plans.

'''Standard. '''The use of the combination Horizontal Alignment/Intersection sign shall be in accordance with the provisions of [[#903.3.7|EPG 903.3.7]] for the appropriate Turn or Curve sign.

If used, a W1-10L sign designation shall indicate a curve to the left, while a W1-10R sign designation shall indicate a curve to the right.

=={{SpanID|903.3.10}}903.3.10 One-Direction Large Arrow Sign (W1-6) (MUTCD Section 2C.10)==

[[File:W1-6.png|100px|thumb|center|<center>'''W1-6'''</center>]]

'''Standard. '''A One-Direction Large Arrow sign shall be used to delineate a change in horizontal alignment where the advisory speed is 30 mph or lower.

The One-Direction Large Arrow sign shall be a horizontal rectangle with an arrow pointing to the left or right.

If used, the One-Direction Large Arrow sign shall be installed on the outside of a turn or curve in line with and at approximately a right angle to approaching traffic.

The One-Direction Large Arrow sign shall not be used where there is no alignment change in the direction of travel, such as at the beginnings and ends of medians or at center piers.

The One-Direction Large Arrow sign directing traffic to the right shall not be used in the central island of a roundabout.

'''Guidance. '''The One-Direction Large Arrow sign should be visible for a sufficient distance to provide the road user with adequate time to react to the change in alignment.

If Chevron Alignment signs are used to supplement the One-Direction Large Arrow sign, chevrons, and arrow signs should be installed so they do not visually block each other.

=={{SpanID|903.3.11}}903.3.11 Truck Rollover Sign (W1-13) (MUTCD Section 2C.11) ==

[[File:W1-13.png|center|100px|thumb|<center>'''W1-13'''</center>]]

'''Option. '''A Truck Rollover (W1-13) sign may be used as a supplement to a horizontal alignment warning sign to warn drivers of vehicles with a high center of gravity, such as trucks, tankers, and recreational vehicles, of a curve or turn where there are:
:A. Past incidents of truck rollovers at the specific location,
:B. High volumes of trucks, or
:C. A speed differential (see [[#903.3.6|EPG 903.3.6]]) that might pose a greater risk for vehicles with high centers of gravity.

'''Guidance. '''Where engineering judgment determines the need for the installation of a Truck Rollover (W1-13) sign, it should be located downstream of the horizontal alignment warning sign in advance of the curve.

'''Standard. '''If a Truck Rollover (W1-13) sign is used, it shall be accompanied by an Advisory Speed (W13-1P) plaque indicating the recommended speed for vehicles with a higher center of gravity.

'''Option. '''The Truck Rollover sign may include conspicuity enhancements, or may be a blank-out sign, activated by the detection of an approaching vehicle with a high center of gravity that is traveling in excess of the recommended speed for the condition.

'''Support. '''The curved arrow on the Truck Rollover sign shows the direction of roadway curvature. The truck tips in the opposite direction.

=={{SpanID|903.3.12}}903.3.12 Advisory Exit and Ramp Speed Signs (W13-2 and W13-3) and Combination Horizontal Alignment/Advisory Exit and Ramp Speed Signs (W13-6 through W13-13) (MUTCD Section 2C.12)==
<center>
{| style=""
|-
|[[File:W13-2.png|center|102px|thumb|<center>'''W13-2'''</center>]]
|[[File:W13-3.png|center|98px|thumb|<center>'''W13-3'''</center>]]
|[[File:W13-6.png|center|100px|thumb|<center>'''W13-6'''</center>]]
|[[File:W13-7.png|center|88px|thumb|<center>'''W13-7'''</center>]]
|}
{|
|[[File:W13-8.png|center|98px|thumb|<center>'''W13-8'''</center>]]
|[[File:W13-9.png|center|100px|thumb|<center>'''W13-9'''</center>]]
|[[File:W13-10.png|center|100px|thumb|<center>'''W13-10'''</center>]]
|[[File:W13-11.png|center|102px|thumb|<center>'''W13-11'''</center>]]
|[[File:W13-12.png|center|100px|thumb|<center>'''W13-12'''</center>]]
|[[File:W13-13.png|center|100px|thumb|<center>'''W13-13'''</center>]]
|}
</center>

'''Standard. '''Where an advisory speed is posted in advance of a freeway or expressway exit, the Advisory Exit Speed (W13-2) sign shall be used.

Where an advisory speed is posted in advance of a conventional road ramp or to another roadway or roadside facility, the Advisory Ramp Speed (W13-3) sign shall be used.

An Advisory Exit Speed or Advisory Ramp Speed sign shall be used when the difference between the mainline roadway speed limit and the exit or ramp advisory speed in the vicinity of the departure is 20 mph or greater.

'''Guidance'''. An Advisory Exit Speed or Advisory Ramp Speed sign should be used when the difference between the mainline roadway speed limit and the exit or ramp advisory speed in the vicinity of the departure is 15 mph.

'''Option. '''An Advisory Exit Speed or Advisory Ramp Speed sign may be used based on engineering judgment when the difference between the mainline roadway speed limit and the exit or ramp advisory speed in the vicinity of the departure is 10 mph or less.

The Combination Horizontal Alignment/Advisory Exit Speed (W13-6, W13-8, and W13-10) signs may be used in lieu of the Advisory Exit Speed (W13-2) sign, and the combination Horizontal Alignment/Advisory Ramp Speed (W13-7, W13-9, and W13-11) signs may be used in lieu of the Advisory Ramp Speed (W13-3) sign.

The Combination Truck Rollover/Advisory Exit Speed and Truck Rollover/Advisory Ramp Speed (W13-12 and W13-13) signs may be used in lieu of the W13-2 and W13-3 signs respectively if the tip over condition is in the vicinity of the gore.

'''Standard. '''Roadway geometrics represented on the Combination Horizontal Alignment/Advisory Exit and Combination Horizontal Alignment/Advisory Ramp Speed signs shall be limited to the standard signs shown in the EPG.

'''Guidance. '''If used, the Advisory Exit Speed sign or the Combination Horizontal Alignment/Advisory Exit Speed sign should be installed along the deceleration lane. The Advisory Exit Speed or the Combination Horizontal Alignment/Advisory Exit Speed signs should be visible in time for the road user to decelerate and make an exiting maneuver.

Regulatory Speed Limit signs (see [[#903.3.20|EPG 903.3.20]]) should not be located in the vicinity of exit ramps or deceleration lanes, particularly where they will conflict with the advisory speed displayed on the Advisory Exit or Ramp Speed signs.

'''Support. '''[[#903.3.6|EPG 903.3.6]] contains provisions for the determination of the displayed advisory speed.

[[#tab903.3.4|Table 903.3.4]] lists recommended advance sign placement distances for deceleration to various advisory speeds.

'''Option. '''Where there is a need to remind road users of the recommended advisory speed, a horizontal alignment warning sign with an advisory speed plaque displaying the same advisory speed may be installed at a downstream location along the ramp.

'''Guidance. '''If the ramp curvature changes to the extent that it warrants a lower advisory speed, a horizontal alignment warning sign with the new advisory speed should be displayed in advance of the change in curvature.

'''Option. '''The One-Direction Large Arrow (W1-6) sign may be installed beyond the exit gore on the outside of the curve to provide additional warning of an immediate change in curvature. When used in conjunction with the exit speed, the One-Direction Large Arrow (W1-6) sign may be supplemented with a Confirmation Advisory Speed (W13-1aP) plaque when the plaque is not used with the Exit Gore (E5-1 series) sign.

'''Guidance. '''The horizontal alignment symbol displayed on the Combination Horizontal Alignment/Advisory Exit and Ramp Speed signs should be consistent with the horizontal geometry of the ramp.

'''Support. '''Examples of advisory speed signing for exit ramps are shown in [[#fig903.3.12|Figure 903.3.12]].

{{SpanID|fig903.3.12}}
[[File:Figure 903.3.12 Examples of Exit Ramp Advisory Speed and Other Warning Signs.png|thumb|center|800px|alt=Two vertical northbound lanes of a divided highway with an exit loop ramp are shown. At the bottom of the figure, and to the right of the right northbound lane, facing northbound traffic is an exit direction sign followed by a W13-2 or a W13-6R sign. At the entrance to the exit ramp is an E5-1a sign followed by an optional W1-6R with a W13-1aP sign assembly. |'''Figure 903.3.12''' Examples of Exit Ramp Advisory Speed and Other Warning Signs]]

=={{SpanID|903.3.13}}903.3.13 Vehicle Speed Feedback Sign and Plaque (W13-20 and W13-20aP) (MUTCD Section 2C.13)==

'''Option. '''A Vehicle Speed Feedback (W13-20) sign or (W13-20aP) plaque (see [[#fig903.3.13|Figure 903.3.13]]) that displays the speed of an approaching vehicle to the vehicle operator may be used to provide warning to drivers of their speed in relation to either a speed limit (R2-1) sign or a horizontal alignment warning sign assembly with a posted advisory speed.

'''Standard. '''When used to display the speed of an approaching vehicle in relation to the posted speed limit, the Vehicle Speed Feedback (W13-20aP) plaque shall be mounted below a Speed Limit (R2-1) sign (see [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2.20|EPG 903.2.20]]).

The Vehicle Speed Feedback assembly shall not be installed at a location where the posted speed limit on the route changes. Vehicle Speed Feedback assemblies shall be placed anywhere downstream of a speed limit change but shall be a minimum of 200 feet downstream of a speed limit change on conventional routes and a minimum of 400 feet downstream of a speed limit change on expressways of freeways. Vehicle Speed Feedback assemblies shall be installed in accordance with the [https://epg.modot.org/forms/general_files/TS/TA_Your_Speed_Feedback_Assembly.pdf Vehicle Speed Feedback Typical Application].

When used to supplement a horizontal alignment warning sign advisory speed, the Vehicle Speed Feedback (W13-20) sign shall be an independent installation near the point of curvature of a horizontal curve (see [[#903.3.6|EPG 903.3.6]]).

The legend YOUR SPEED shall be a black legend on a yellow retroreflective background, except as provided in [[616.8 TTC Zone Warning Signs (MUTCD Chapter 6H) #616.8.1|EPG 616.8.1]] and [[908.2 Signs (MUTCD Chapter 7B) #908.2.1|908.2.1]]. The changeable legend displaying the speed of the approaching vehicle shall be a yellow luminous legend on a black opaque background. The vehicle speed displayed on the changeable portion of the sign shall be displayed as an integer. The Vehicle Speed Feedback sign and plaque shall not flash, strobe, change color, or use other animated elements integrated into the changeable legend display. When no vehicles are approaching, the changeable display shall not display a legend.

Vehicle Speed Feedback sign equipment shall not have the capability to collect, store or transmit personally identifiable information of any type.

'''Guidance. '''The changeable portion of the Vehicle Speed Feedback legend should be approximately the same height, width, and stroke of those on the Speed Limit sign it supplements or is mounted below.

When a W13-20aP plaque is used with a Speed Limit sign it should be approximately the same width as the Speed Limit sign it is mounted below.

{{SpanID|fig903.3.13}}
[[File:Figure 903.3.13 Vehicle Speed Feedback Sign and Plaque.png|thumb|center|400px|alt="The figure shows two versions of a vehicle speed feedback sign. On the left is a stand-alone sign labeled W13-20. It has a yellow background with the words “YOUR SPEED” above an electronic display showing the number “42” in yellow LED digits. A caption below states that the stand-alone sign is placed at the beginning of curves and turns to reaffirm the advisory speed associated with the advance horizontal alignment sign.

On the right is a supplemental plaque labeled W13-20aP. A white “SPEED LIMIT 35” sign is shown above the yellow “YOUR SPEED 42” electronic display. The caption explains that the supplemental plaque is installed below a speed limit sign and is used downstream of speed limit changes or within a speed zone to reaffirm the speed limit."
|'''Figure 903.3.13''' Vehicle Speed Feedback Sign and Plaque]]

=={{SpanID|903.3.14}}903.3.14 Hill Signs (W7-1 and W7-1c) (MUTCD Section 2C.14)==
<center>
{|
| [[File:W7-1.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W7-1'''</center>]]
| [[File:W7-1c.png|thumb|center|103px|alt=|<center>'''W7-1c'''</center>]]
|}
</center>

'''Guidance. '''The Hill (W7-1) sign should be used in advance of a downgrade where the length, percent of grade, horizontal curvature, and/or other physical features require special precautions on the part of road users.

The Hill sign and supplemental grade (W7-3P) plaque (see [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.63|EPG 903.3.63]]) used in combination, or the W7-1a sign used alone, should be installed in advance of downgrades for the following conditions:
:A. 5% grade that is more than 3,000 feet in length,
:B. 6% grade that is more than 2,000 feet in length,
:C. 7% grade that is more than 1,000 feet in length,
:D. 8% grade that is more than 750 feet in length, or
:E. 9% grade that is more than 500 feet in length.

These signs should also be installed for steeper grades or where crash experience and field observations indicate a need.

Supplemental plaques (see [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.57|EPG 903.3.57]] and [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.63|903.3.63]]) and larger signs should be used for emphasis or where special hill characteristics exist. On longer grades, the use of the Hill sign with a distance (W7-3aP) plaque at periodic intervals of approximately 1-mile spacing should be considered.

'''Support. '''The Uphill (W7-1c) sign is also available by special request.

=={{SpanID|903.3.15}}903.3.15 ROAD NARROWS Sign (W5-1) (MUTCD 2C.17)==
[[File:W5-1.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W5-1'''</center>]]

'''Guidance. '''A ROAD NARROWS (W5-1) sign should be used in advance of a transition on two-lane roads where the pavement width is reduced abruptly to a width such that vehicles traveling in opposite directions cannot simultaneously travel through the narrow portion of the roadway without reducing speed.

'''Option. '''Additional emphasis may be provided by the use of object markers and delineators (see [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.70|EPG 903.3.70]] through [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.73|EPG 903.3.73]] and [[620.6 Delineators (MUTCD Chapter 3G)|EPG 620.6]]). The Advisory Speed (W13-1P) plaque (see [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.59|EPG 903.3.59]]) may be used to indicate the recommended speed.

=={{SpanID|903.3.16}}903.3.16 NARROW BRIDGE Sign (W5-2) (MUTCD Section 2C.18)==
[[File:W5-2.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W5-2'''</center>]]

'''Guidance. '''A NARROW BRIDGE (W5-2) sign should be used in advance of any bridge or culvert having a two-way roadway horizontal clearance of 16 to 18 feet, or any bridge or culvert having a roadway horizontal clearance less than the width of the approach travel lanes.

Additional emphasis should be provided by the use of object markers, delineators, and/or pavement markings.

'''Option. '''A NARROW BRIDGE sign may be used in advance of a bridge or culvert on which the approach shoulders are narrowed or eliminated.

=={{SpanID|903.3.17}}903.3.17 ONE LANE BRIDGE Sign (W5-3) (MUTCD Section 2C.19)==
[[File:W5-3.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W5-3'''</center>]]

'''Guidance. '''A ONE LANE BRIDGE (W5-3) sign should be used on two-way roadways in advance of any bridge or culvert:
:A. Having a roadway horizontal clearance of less than 16 feet, or
:B. Having a roadway horizontal clearance of less than 18 feet when commercial vehicles constitute a high proportion of the traffic, or
:C. Having a roadway horizontal clearance of 18 feet or less where the sight distance on the approach is less than that shown in Condition A of [[#tab903.3.4|Table 903.3.4]].

Additional emphasis should be provided by the use of object markers, delineators, and/or pavement markings.

'''Option. '''STOP (R1-1) or YIELD (R1-2) signs (see [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2.4|EPG 903.2.4]] and [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2.5|903.2.5]]) and related pavement markings (see [[620.2 Pavement and Curb Markings (MUTCD Chapter 3B) #620.2.20|EPG 620.2.20]] and [[620.2 Pavement and Curb Markings (MUTCD Chapter 3B) #620.2.21|620.2.21]]) may be used when conditions A, B, or C in the first Guidance paragraph of this Article apply.

=={{SpanID|903.3.18}}903.3.18 Divided Highway Sign (W6-1) (MUTCD Section 2C.20)==
[[File:W6-1.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W6-1'''</center>]]

'''Guidance. '''A Divided Highway (W6-1) sign should be used on the approaches to a section of highway (not an intersection or junction) where the opposing flows of traffic are separated by a median or other physical barrier.

'''Standard. '''The Divided Highway (W6-1) sign shall not be used instead of a Keep Right (R4-7 series) sign on the approach end of a median island.

=={{SpanID|903.3.19}}903.3.19 Divided Highway Ends Sign (W6-2) (MUTCD Section 2C.21)==
[[File:W6-2.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W6-2'''</center>]]

'''Guidance. '''A Divided Highway Ends (W6-2) sign should be used in advance of the end of a section of physically divided highway (not an intersection or junction) as a warning of two-way traffic ahead.

The Two-Way Traffic (W6-3) sign (see [[#903.3.42|EPG 903.3.42]]) should be used to give warning and notice of the transition to a two-lane, two-way section.

=={{SpanID|903.3.20}}903.3.20 Double Arrow Sign (W12-1) (MUTCD Section 2C.23)==
[[File:W12-1.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W12-1'''</center>]]

'''Option. '''The Double Arrow (W12-1) sign may be used to advise road users that traffic is permitted to pass on either side of an island, obstruction, or gore in the roadway. Traffic separated by this sign may either rejoin or change directions.

'''Guidance. '''If used on an island, the Double Arrow sign should be mounted near the approach end (see [[#903.3.13|EPG 903.3.13]]).

If used in front of a pier or obstruction, the Double Arrow sign should be mounted on the face of, or just in front of, the pier or obstruction. Where stripe markings are used on the pier or obstruction, they should be discontinued to leave a 3-inch space around the outside of the Double Arrow sign.

=={{SpanID|903.3.21}}903.3.21 DEAD END, NO OUTLET, and ROAD ENDS Signs (W14-1, W14-2, and W14-13) (MUTCD Section 2C.24)==
<center>
{|
| [[File:W14-1.png|thumb|center|99px|alt=|<center>'''W14-1'''</center>]]
| [[File:W14-2.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W14-2'''</center>]]
| [[File:W14-13.png|thumb|center|96px|alt=|<center>'''W14-13'''</center>]]
|}
</center>

'''Option. '''DEAD END (W14-1) sign may be used at the entrance to a single road or street that terminates without intersecting another street. The NO OUTLET (W14-2) sign may be used at the entrance to a road or road network from which there is no other exit.

The ROAD ENDS (W14-13) sign may be used to warn of a roadway which has no outlet and which terminates in a dead end and may be used in place of the DEAD END or NO OUTLET sign where the use of the DEAD END and NO OUTLET signs would have a negative effect on traffic generators or public perceptions due to the negative connotation of the message.

'''Guidance. '''When the W14-1, W14-2, or W14-13 sign is used, the sign should be posted as near as practicable to the entry point or at a sufficient advance distance to permit the road user to avoid the dead end or no outlet condition by turning at the nearest intersecting street.

'''Standard. '''The W14-1, W14-2, or W8-26 sign shall not be used in place of the ROAD CLOSED (R11-2) sign for temporary conditions, such as high water, bridge out, etc.

'''Support. '''Information about the use of Type 4 object markers to mark the end of the road or street is contained in [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.73|EPG 903.3.73]].

=={{SpanID|903.3.22}}903.3.22 Low Clearance Signs (W12-2, and W12-2a) (MUTCD Section 2C.25)==
<center>
{|
| [[File:W12-2.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W12-2'''</center>]]
| [[File:W12-2a.png|thumb|center|130px|alt=|<center>'''W12-2a'''</center>]]
|}
</center>

'''Support. '''MoDOT is responsible for installing and maintaining overhead low clearance signs mounted on all structures passing over MoDOT routes as well as installing and maintaining overhead low clearance signs mounted all MoDOT structures passing over non-MoDOT routes (this does not include MoDOT structures passing over rail lines). MoDOT has developed specific provisions for the use of Low Clearance signs.

'''Standard. '''Low Clearance signing shall be installed to display vertical clearances available under structures within specified limits of statutory maximum vehicle heights.

The clearance displayed on the Low Clearance (W12-2 and W12-2a) signs shall be 2 inches less than the measured clearance to account for possible packed snow and ice. For example, a measured vertical clearance of 15 ft. shall be posted as 14 ft. 10 in. All clearance measurements shall be rounded down to the nearest full inch. For example, a measured vertical clearance of 14 ft. 9 ½ in. would be rounded down to 14 ft. 9 in. and posted as 14 ft. 7 in.

The statutory maximum vehicle heights and vertical clearances are as follows:
:A. Within Commercial Zones = 15 ft. statutory maximum vehicle height (16’ 0” maximum posting).
:B. On Interstate and designated highway network routes and on all routes within 10 miles of Interstate and designated highway network routes = 14 ft. statutory maximum vehicle height (15’ 0” maximum posting).
:C. On routes greater than 10 miles from Interstate and designated highway network routes = 13 ft. 6 in. statutory maximum vehicle height (15’ 0” maximum posting).

'''Support. '''For specific details on commercial zone limits and designated highway network routes, see Missouri Vehicle Route Map.

'''Standard. '''The MoDOT posting requirements for Low Clearance signs are as follows:
:A. Case I – Two Signs Required: Where the measured vertical clearance is 15 ft. 2 in. or less, but more than 13 ft. 8 in., two signs shall be used. First, a Low Clearance Overhead (W12-2a) sign shall be installed on the structure, and second, a ground-mounted Low Clearance Advance (W12-2) sign shall be placed approximately 750 ft. in advance of the structure. When an interchange is involved, the ground-mounted Low Clearance (W12-2) sign shall be located approximately 750 ft. in advance of the off-ramp.
:B. Case II – Three Signs Required: Where the measured vertical clearance is 13 ft. 8 in. or less, three signs shall be used. First, a Low Clearance Overhead (W12-2a) sign shall be installed on the structure, second, a ground-mounted Low Clearance Advance (W12-2) sign shall be placed approximately 750 ft. in advance of the structure, and third, an additional Low Clearance Advance (W12-2) sign with a Distance Ahead (W16-2P or W16-3P) plaque below the sign shall be placed at the nearest intersecting road or wide point in the road at which a vehicle can detour or turn around.
:C. Case III – One Sign: Where the measured vertical clearance is 15 ft. 2 in. or less and where the bridge is state maintained but the road beneath is not, a Low Clearance Overhead (W12-2a) sign shall be installed on the structure, but the ground-mounted Low Clearance Advance (W12-2) sign shall not be installed by MoDOT. The Low Clearance Advance sign may be installed and maintained by the local jurisdiction.
:D. Case IV – Commercial Zones: Vertical clearance signing shall be provided for structures within commercial zones (see Section 304.190 of the Revised Statutes of Missouri). Any structure with a measured vertical clearance of 16 ft. 2 in. or less within the commercial zone limits shall be posted. For measured vertical clearances greater than 15 ft. 2 in. and equal to or less than 16 ft. 2 in. within commercial zones a Low Clearance Overhead (W12-2a) sign shall be installed on the structure. The signing for measured vertical clearances of 15 ft. 2 in. or less within commercial zones shall be as described for Case I or Case II.

In the case of an arch structure or a structure which has a sloping span resulting in different vertical clearances per lane, one Low Clearance Overhead (W12-2a) sign shall be centered over each lane displaying the vertical clearance available for that lane. One sign per lane shall be applied if the difference in vertical clearance between adjacent lanes is 6 inches or greater or when the vertical clearance between the far-right lane and far-left lane is 12 inches or greater.

'''Guidance. '''Clearances should be evaluated periodically to verify the displayed clearances are accurate and to determine if additional low clearance signing is necessary, particularly when resurfacing operations have occurred, on routes onto which over-height vehicles are normally directed under the permit process, and structures that are susceptible to catastrophic failure when struck by over-height vehicles. The information should be updated in the TMS.

Where there is a need to warn of a low clearance on an intersecting road or off a freeway or expressway exit, a rectangular warning sign with an appropriate word legend should be used rather than a W12-2 sign.

'''Option. '''When only one Overhead Low Clearance (W12-2a) sign is required and mounting one sign centered over the roadway is not practical, two W12-2a signs may be installed with one sign installed to the right of the travel lanes and one sign installed to the left of the travel lanes.

'''Guidance. '''The clearance shown on the Low Clearance Advance (W12-2) sign should match the clearance on the W12-2a sign or, if there are multiple W12-2a signs, should match the lowest clearance.

{{SpanID|fig903.3.22}}
[[File:Figure 903.3.22 Examples of Low Clearance Signs.png|thumb|center|800px|alt="The figure displays four examples of signing layouts for structures with limited vertical clearance.
Case I – Vertical Clearance of 15'-2"" to 13'-9"":
A roadway labeled “MoDOT Route” passes under a structure labeled “Any Structure.” A W12-2a plaque reading “14 FT 4 IN” is placed just before the structure. Farther in advance, a W12-2 low-clearance symbol sign is shown with the legend “14'-4” placed 750 feet before the structure.
Case II – Vertical Clearance of 13'-8"" or Less:
A similar roadway labeled “MoDOT Route” passes under a structure. A W12-2a plaque reading “12 FT 6 IN” is posted at the structure. A W12-2 low-clearance symbol sign reading “12'-6” is placed 750 feet in advance. Below that sign, a W16-3P plaque shows “½ MILES.” A note indicates that the sign is placed at the nearest intersecting road or wide point.
Case III – MoDOT Bridge with Vertical Clearance of 15'-2"" or Less Over a Local Road:
A local road passes under a structure labeled “MoDOT Bridge.” A W12-2a plaque reading “14 FT 4 IN” is shown on the MoDOT route above, installed by MoDOT. On the local road, a W12-2 low-clearance symbol sign reading “14'-4” is shown as installed by the local agency.
Case IV – Vertical Clearance of 16'-2"" or Less in Commercial Zones:
A roadway labeled “MoDOT Route” passes under a structure labeled “Any Structure.” A W12-2a plaque reading “14 FT 4 IN” is placed at the structure. Text notes that advance signing should follow the placement guidelines of Case I or Case II."
|'''Figure 903.3.22''' Examples of Low Clearance Signs]]

=={{SpanID|903.3.23}}903.3.23 BUMP and DIP Signs (W8-1 and W8-2) (MUTCD Section 2C.26)==
<center>
{|
| [[File:W8-1.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W8-1'''</center>]]
| [[File:W8-2.png|thumb|center|105px|alt=|<center>'''W8-2'''</center>]]
|}
</center>

'''Support. '''BUMP and DIP signs (W8-1, W8-2) are limited use signs, only being used for locations where the condition cannot be corrected, such as low water crossings or highway-rail grade crossings.

See [[913.2 Signs (MUTCD Chapter 8B) #913.2.14|EPG 913.2.14]] for low ground clearance conditions at highway-rail grade crossings.

'''Guidance. '''BUMP (W8-1) and DIP (W8-2) signs should be used in advance of a sharp rise or depression in the profile of the road.

'''Option. '''These signs may be supplemented with an Advisory Speed plaque (see [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.59|EPG 903.3.59]]).

'''Guidance. '''The DIP sign should not be used in advance of a short stretch of depressed alignment that might momentarily hide a vehicle.

A short stretch of depressed alignment that might momentarily hide a vehicle should be treated as a no-passing zone when center line striping is provided on a two-lane or three-lane road (see [[620.2 Pavement and Curb Markings (MUTCD Chapter 3B) #620.2.3|EPG 620.2.3]]).

'''Option. '''BUMP and DIP signs may be used as temporary traffic control signs (WO8-1, WO8-2) for locations where the condition is temporary and/or where the condition can be corrected in the future (See [[616.6 Temporary Traffic Control Zone Devices (MUTCD 6F) #616.6.50|EPG 616.6.50]]).

=={{SpanID|903.3.24}}903.3.24 PAVEMENT ENDS Sign (W8-3) (MUTCD Section 2C.28)==
[[File:W8-3.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W8-3'''</center>]]

'''Guidance. '''A PAVEMENT ENDS (W8-3) sign should be used where a paved surface changes to either a gravel treated surface or an earth road surface.

'''Option. '''An Advisory Speed plaque (see [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.59|EPG 903.3.59]]) may be used when the change in roadway condition requires a reduced speed.

=={{SpanID|903.3.25}}903.3.25 Slippery When Wet Sign (W8-5) (Section 2C.30)==
[[File:W8-5.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W8-5'''</center>]]

'''Guidance. '''The Slippery When Wet sign (W8-5) is a limited use sign that should not be installed for locations where the condition can be corrected. Existing Slippery When Wet (W8-5) signs should be left in place until the condition is corrected.

'''Option. '''The Slippery When Wet (W8-5) sign may be used to warn of unexpected slippery conditions.

'''Guidance. '''When used, Slippery When Wet signs should be placed in advance of the beginning of the affected section (see [[#tab903.3.4|Table 903.3.4]]), and additional signs should be placed at appropriate intervals along the road where the condition exists.

'''Option. '''The Slippery When Wet sign may be used as a temporary traffic control sign (WO8-5) for locations where the condition is temporary and/or where the condition can be corrected in the future (See [[616.6 Temporary Traffic Control Zone Devices (MUTCD 6F) #616.6.50|EPG 616.6.50]]).

=={{SpanID|903.3.26}}903.3.26 FALLEN ROCKS Signs (W8-14)==
[[File:W8-14.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W8-14'''</center>]]

'''Option. '''The FALLEN ROCKS (W8-14) sign may be used in advance of an area that is adjacent to a hillside, mountain, or cliff where rocks frequently fall onto the roadway.

'''Guidance. '''When used, FALLEN ROCKS signs should be placed in advance of the beginning of the affected section (see [[#tab903.3.4|Table 903.3.4]]), and additional signs should be placed at appropriate intervals along the road where the condition exists.

'''Standard. '''The district shall perform an evaluation of the FALLEN ROCKS site to determine whether existing installations of the FALLEN ROCKS sign is still necessary. If it is determined that the sign is not necessary, the sign will not be replaced at the end of the service life.

=={{SpanID|903.3.27}}903.3.27 Warning Signs and Plaque for Motorcyclists (W8-15, W8-15aP, and W8-16) (MUTCD Section 2C.31) ==

'''Support. '''MoDOT does not install permanent W8-15, W8-15aP, and W8-16 signs and plaques. For temporary applications, see [[616.16 Typical Applications (MUTCD Chapter 6P)|EPG 616.16]].

=={{SpanID|903.3.28}}903.3.28 IMPASSABLE WHEN WATER OVER ROAD Sign (MUTCD Section 2C.34)==

<center>
{|
| [[File:W8-18.jpg|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W8-18'''</center>]]
| [[File:W020-3.jpg|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''WO20-3'''</center>]]
| [[File:W8-34a.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W8-34a'''</center>]]
| [[File:W08-33.jpg|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''WO8-33'''</center>]]
| [[File:D2-1 and R11-3a.png|thumb|center|130px|alt=|<center>'''D2-1 and R11-3a'''</center>]]

| [[File:R5-22.png|thumb|center|120px|alt=|<center>'''R5-22'''</center>]]
|}
</center>

'''Support.''' When a road goes underwater, MoDOT requires the road to be closed to traffic regardless of the depth of water over the road. This closure is accomplished by following [[616.16 Typical Applications (MUTCD Chapter 6P) #616.16|TA-8W]]. This TA displays two figures; the first figure applies to locations which do not flood on a frequent basis and uses standard work zone signs to close the road. The second figure applies to roads that frequently go under water and utilize permanently installed signs. These permanent signs provide critical guidance to motorists between the time the road begins to flood to the time maintenance crews can physically close the road.

MoDOT has discontinued the use of the LOW WATER CROSSING (W8-35) sign, low water crossings are designed for water to routinely flow over the roadway while traffic passes through the water. MoDOT no longer maintains low water crossings on State routes, and MoDOT’s direction is to close any road covered in any depth of water.
MoDOT has discontinued the use of the WATER GAUGE (W8-19a). Water gauges are intended to indicate the depth of the water over a road to allow motorists to judge if it is safe to proceed, however, MoDOT no longer supports motorists driving through any depth of water and closes any road which is covered by water.

'''Standard.''' Any roadway location which goes underwater shall be closed to traffic as soon as possible. Any location, regardless of flooding frequency, shall be closed using the signing package in the first figure of [[616.16 Typical Applications (MUTCD Chapter 6P) #616.16|TA-8W]].

'''Guidance.''' Any roadway which historically floods one or more times per year should have the permanent signing package found in the second figure of [[616.16 Typical Applications (MUTCD Chapter 6P) #616.16|TA-8W]] installed. This applies to locations where streams and rivers rise and flood the road surface, but not in urban areas where a road floods due to blocked or overwhelmed storm drains. This signing package, which includes the DO NOT ENTER WHEN WATER OVER ROAD (R5-22) sign, provides motorists with advanced information on how they need to react to the flooded road before maintenance crews can get to the location and physically close the roadway. The flip signs allow for an expedited closure with the work zone signs already in place, only needing to flip them from the warning sign message to the work zone message upon arriving at the location, as well as deploying the barricades and ROAD CLOSED (R11-2) sign.

Existing LOW WATER CROSSING (W8-35) signs should be removed at the earliest convenience; the presence of these signs may encourage motorists to enter a flooded road if they see the depth of water and incorrectly believe it is shallow enough to safely pass.

'''Option.''' The signing package in the second figure of [[616.16 Typical Applications (MUTCD Chapter 6P) #616.16|TA-8W]] may be installed at any location that may flood less than one time per year to facilitate quicker road closures.

=={{SpanID|903.3.29}}903.3.29 Advance Traffic Control Signs (W3-1, W3-2, W3-3, and W3-4) (MUTCD Section 2C.35)==
<center>
{|
| [[File:W3-1.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W3-1'''</center>]]
| [[File:W3-2.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W3-2'''</center>]]
| [[File:W3-3.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W3-3'''</center>]]
| [[File:W3-4.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W3-4'''</center>]]
|}
</center>

'''Standard. '''The Stop Ahead (W3-1), Yield Ahead (W3-2), and Signal Ahead (W3-3) Advance Traffic Control signs shall be installed on an approach to a primary traffic control device that is not visible for a sufficient distance to permit the road user to respond to the device (see [[#tab903.3.4|Table 903.3.4]]). The visibility criteria for a traffic control signal shall be based on having a continuous view of at least two signal faces for the distance specified in [[902.4 Design Features of Traffic Control Signals (MUTCD Chapter 4D) #tab902.4.6|Table 902.4.6]].

'''Guidance. '''Where intermittent obstructions occur, engineering judgment should determine the treatment to be implemented.

The minimum visibility distance of a signal for a facility with a speed limit above 60 mph should be determined by summing the stopping sight distance (see [[#tab903.3.1|Table 903.3.1]]) and the assumed queue length. The assumed queue length should be determined by engineering judgment.

If an advance traffic control sign is warranted for an approach at an intersection of a MoDOT maintained road and non-MoDOT maintained road, the agency responsible for the maintenance of the non-MoDOT road should be notified of the condition.

'''Support. '''Permanent obstructions causing the limited visibility might include roadway alignment or structures. Intermittent obstructions might include foliage or parked vehicles.

'''Option. '''An Advance Traffic Control sign may be used for additional emphasis of the primary traffic control device, even when the visibility distance to the device is satisfactory.

Signal Ahead (W3-3) signs may be posted on the right- and left-hand sides of the road on a high speed divided approach.

'''Support. '''[[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.64|EPG 903.3.64]] contains information about the use of an advance street name plaque to identify an intersecting road.

'''Option. '''A BE PREPARED TO STOP (W3-4) sign may be used to warn of stopped traffic caused by a traffic control signal in advance of a section of roadway that regularly experiences traffic congestion, history of crashes, or based on engineering judgement.

A Warning Beacon (see [[902.18 Flashing Beacons (MUTCD Chapter 4S) #902.18.3|EPG 902.18.3]]) may be used with an Advance Traffic Control or BE PREPARED TO STOP (W3-4) sign. If a warning beacon is used, the beacon(s) may be activated before the start of the yellow change interval referred to as lead flash, which is the time before the onset of yellow at which the warning beacon(s) begin to flash. Recommended values for lead flash in accordance with the posted speed limit are specified in [[#tab903.3.29|Table 903.3.29]].
<center>
{{SpanID|tab903.3.29}}
{| class="wikitable" style="max-width:600px; text-align: center;"
|+ '''Table 903.3.29''' Design Parameters for Advance Warning System
|-
! Posted Speed (mph)
! Distance Between Warning Sign and Stop Line (ft)
! Lead Flash, Advance Warning Before End of Green (sec)
|-
| 70
| 871 to 975 max**
| 8
|-
| 70
| 730 min* to 870
| 7
|-
| 65
| 811 to 905 max**
| 8
|-
| 65
| 645 min* to 810
| 7
|-
| 60
| 661 to 745 max**
| 7
|-
| 60
| 570 min* to 660
| 6
|-
| 55
| 606 to 685 max**
| 7
|-
| 55
| 495 min* to 605
| 6
|-
| 50
| 476 to 550 max**
| 6
|-
| 50
| 425 min* to 475
| 5
|-
| 45
| 426 to 495 max**
| 6
|-
| 45
| 360 min* to 425
| 5
|-
| style="text-align: left" colspan="3" | *The advance traffic control sign shall not be installed less than this minimum distance. **The sign placement distance can exceed the "max" distance. The lead flash time should be determined by coordinating with the MoDOT Highway Safety and Traffic Division.
|}
</center>

'''Standard. '''When a BE PREPARED TO STOP (W3-4) sign is used in advance of a traffic control signal, it shall be used in addition to a Signal Ahead sign and shall be placed a minimum of 200 feet downstream from the Signal Ahead sign. The BE PREPARED TO STOP (W3-4) sign shall be installed as specified in [[#tab903.3.4|Table 903.3.4]] (See [[#fig903.3.29.1|Figure 903.3.29.1]]).

A BE PREPARED TO STOP (W3-4) sign with a warning beacon shall not be considered for intersection approaches with a posted speed limit of 40 mph or less.

{{SpanID|fig903.3.29.1}}
[[File:Figure 903.3.29.1 Example for Placement of Be Prepared To Stop Sign.png|thumb|center|500px|alt="The figure shows a four-leg intersection controlled by a traffic signal. A vertical roadway and a horizontal roadway intersect, each with one travel lane in each direction. A traffic signal head with red, yellow, and green indications is shown at the center of the intersection.
On the lower approach of the vertical roadway, two advance warning signs are shown on the right side. The sign closest to the intersection is a W3-4 “BE PREPARED TO STOP” sign, with an optional yellow beacon mounted above it. Farther downstream, a W3-3 traffic signal symbol sign is shown. The spacing between the two signs is labeled “200 ft MIN.”
A separate dimension arrow between the W3-4 sign and the intersection is marked with an asterisk, referencing a note that states, “See Table 903.3.4 for the recommended minimum distance.”"
|'''Figure 903.3.29.1''' Example for Placement of BE PREPARED TO STOP Sign]]

{{SpanID|fig903.3.29.2}}
[[File:Figure 903.3.29.2 Example for Placement Of Signal Ahead Sign-Condition B.png|thumb|center|500px|alt="The figure shows a four-leg intersection controlled by a traffic signal. A vertical roadway and a horizontal roadway intersect, each with one travel lane in each direction. A signal head with red, yellow, and green indications is displayed at the center of the intersection.
On the lower approach of the vertical roadway, a dimension arrow indicates the placement location for an advance warning sign. The arrow is marked with an asterisk referring to a note that reads, “See Table 903.3.4 for the recommended minimum distance.”
To the right of this lower approach, a W3-3 traffic signal symbol sign is shown with an optional yellow beacon mounted above it."
|'''Figure 903.3.29.2''' Example for Placement of Signal Ahead Sign]]

=={{SpanID|903.3.30}}903.3.30 Advance Ramp Control Signal Signs (W3-7 and W3-8) (MUTCD Section 2C.37)==
<center>
{|
| [[File:W3-7.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W3-7'''</center>]]
| [[File:W3-8.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W3-8'''</center>]]
|}
</center>

'''Option. '''A RAMP METER AHEAD (W3-7) sign may be used to warn road users that a freeway entrance ramp is metered and that they will encounter a ramp control signal (see [[902.16 Traffic Control Signals for Freeway Entrance Ramps (MUTCD Chapter 4P) #902.16|EPG 902.16]]).

'''Guidance. '''When the ramp control signals are operated only during certain periods of the day, a RAMP METERED WHEN FLASHING (W3-8) sign should be installed in advance of the ramp control signal near the entrance to the ramp, or on the arterial on the approach to the ramp, to alert road users to the presence and operation of ramp meters.

'''Standard. '''The RAMP METERED WHEN FLASHING sign shall be supplemented with a Warning Beacon (see [[902.18 Flashing Beacons (MUTCD Chapter 4S) #902.18.3|EPG 902.18.3]]) that flashes when the ramp control signal is in operation.

=={{SpanID|903.3.31}}903.3.31 WATCH FOR STOPPED TRAFFIC Sign (W26-1) (MUTCD Section 2C.39)==

[[File:W26-1.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W26-1'''</center>]]

'''Option. '''The WATCH FOR STOPPED TRAFFIC (W26-1) sign may be used to warn road users of the possibility of vehicles stopping abruptly in the travel lane due to recurring congested conditions.

=={{SpanID|903.3.32}}903.3.32 Reduced Speed Limit Ahead and Speed Zone Signs (W3-5) (MUTCD Section 2C.40)==
[[File:W3-5.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W3-5'''</center>]]

'''Standard'''. A Reduced Speed Limit Ahead (W3-5) sign shall be used to inform road users of a reduced speed zone where the speed limit is being reduced by more than 10 mph.

'''Option. '''A Reduced Speed Limit Ahead (W3-5) sign may be used to inform road users of a reduced speed zone where the speed limit is being reduced by 10 mph or less based if engineering judgment indicates the need for advance notice to comply with the posted speed limit ahead.

'''Standard. '''If used, a Reduced Speed Limit Ahead sign shall be followed by a Speed Limit (R2-1) sign (see [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2.20|EPG 903.2.20]]), installed at the beginning of the zone where the speed limit applies.

The speed limit displayed on the W3-5 sign shall be identical to the speed limit displayed on the subsequent Speed Limit sign.

=={{SpanID|903.3.33}}903.3.33 Intersection Warning Signs (W2-1 through W2-8) (MUTCD Section 2C.41)==
<center>
{|
| [[File:W2-1.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W2-1'''</center>]]
| [[File:W2-2.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W2-2'''</center>]]
| [[File:W2-3.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W2-3'''</center>]]
| [[File:W2-3a.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W2-3a'''</center>]]
|}
{|
| [[File:W2-4.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W2-4'''</center>]]
| [[File:W2-5.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W2-5'''</center>]]
| [[File:W2-6.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W2-6'''</center>]]
|-
| [[File:W2-7L.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W2-7L'''</center>]]
| [[File:W2-7R.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W2-7R'''</center>]]
| [[File:W2-8.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W2-8'''</center>]]
|}
</center>

'''Support. '''Intersection Warning Signs are used when there is limited stopping sight distance, history of crashes, or based on engineering judgment.

'''Option. '''A Cross Road (W2-1), Side Road (W2-2, W2-3, or W2-3a), T-Intersection (W2-4), or Y-Intersection (W2-5) sign may be used in advance of an intersection to indicate the presence of an intersection and the possibility of turning or entering traffic.

'''Standard. '''The Circular Intersection (W2-6) sign shall be installed in advance of roundabout intersections. The appropriate Advisory Speed supplemental plaque (W13-1P) shall be installed below the Circular Intersection sign.

'''Option. '''If other circular intersections exist, that would not be classified as roundabouts, the Circular Intersection (W2-6) sign may be used.

'''Support. '''[[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.64|EPG 903.2.64]] contains information about the use of an advance street name plaque to identify an intersecting road.

'''Guidance. '''The Intersection Warning sign should illustrate and depict the general configuration of the intersecting roadway, such as a cross road, side road, T-intersection, or Y-intersection.

Intersection Warning signs, other than the Circular Intersection (W2-6) sign, the T-intersection (W2-4) sign, and the Grade Crossing and Intersection Advance Warning (W10-2, W10-3, and W10-4) signs (see [[913.2 Signs (MUTCD Chapter 8B) #913.2.6|EPG 913.2.6]]) should not be used on approaches controlled by STOP signs, YIELD signs, or signals.

If an Intersection Warning sign is used where the side roads are not opposite of each other, the Offset Side Roads (W2-7) sign should be used instead of the Cross Road sign.

If an Intersection Warning sign is used where two closely-spaced side roads are on the same side of the highway, the Double Side Roads (W2-8) sign should be used instead of the Side Road sign.

No more than two side roads should be depicted on the same side of the highway on a W2-7 or W2-8 sign, and no more than three side roads should be depicted on a W2-7 or W2-8 sign.

=={{SpanID|903.3.34}}903.3.34 Advance Intersection Signs (W2-10a and W2-11a)==
<center>
{|
| [[File:W2-10a.jpg|thumb|center|alt=|100px|<center>'''W2-10a'''</center>]]
| [[File:W2-11a.jpg|thumb|center|alt=|100px|<center>'''W2-11a'''</center>]]
|}
</center>

'''Support.''' Advance Intersection signs are typically associated with restricted sight distance and gap selection at stop controlled intersections.

'''Option.''' The WATCH FOR ENTERING TRAFFIC (W2-10a) sign may be used on the uncontrolled through roadway approach to a side or cross road stop controlled intersection to warn of entering traffic from the side or cross road.

The WATCH FOR APPROACHING TRAFFIC (W2-11a) sign may be used on the side road stop controlled approach to warn of traffic approaching on the uncontrolled through road.

=={{SpanID|903.3.35}}903.3.35 Two-Direction Large Arrow Sign (W1-7) (MUTCD Section 2C.43)==
[[File:W1-7.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W1-7'''</center>]]

'''Standard. '''The Two-Direction Large Arrow (W1-7) sign shall be a horizontal rectangle.

If used, the Two-Direction Large arrow sign shall be installed on the far side of a T-intersection in line with, and at approximately a right angle to, traffic approaching from the stem of the T-intersection.

The Two-Direction Large Arrow sign shall not be used where there is no change in the direction of travel such as at the beginnings and ends of medians or at center piers.

'''Guidance. '''The Two-Direction Large Arrow sign should be visible for a sufficient distance to provide the road user with adequate time to react to the intersection configuration.

=={{SpanID|903.3.36}}903.3.36 Traffic Signal Oncoming Extended Green Signs (W25-1 and W25-2) (MUTCD Section 2C.44)==
<center>
{|
| [[File:W25-1.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W25-1'''</center>]]
| [[File:W25-2.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W25-2'''</center>]]
|}
</center>

'''Standard. '''At locations where either a W25-1 or a W25-2 sign is required based on the provisions in [[902.6 Steady (Stop-and-Go) Operation of Traffic Control Signals (MUTCD Chapter 4F) #902.6.1|EPG 902.6.1]], the W25-1 or W25-2 sign shall be installed near the left-most signal face for the approach.

=={{SpanID|903.3.37}}903.3.37 Merge Signs and Plaque (W4-1 and W4-5) (MUTCD Section 2C.45)==
<center>
{|
| [[File:W4-1.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W4-1'''</center>]]
| [[File:W4-5.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W4-5'''</center>]]
|}
</center>

'''Guidance. '''The Merge (W4-1) sign should be installed on the side of the major roadway where merging traffic will be encountered and in such a position as to not obstruct the road user’s view of entering traffic.

When a Merge sign is installed on a major roadway, the symbol should be oriented right or left as appropriate to depict the side from which the merge occurs, with the arrow representing the major roadway and the curved stem representing the entering roadway.

When a Merge sign is to be installed on an entering roadway that curves before merging with the major roadway, such as a ramp with a curving horizontal alignment as it approaches the major roadway, the Entering Roadway Merge (W4-5) sign should be used to better portray the actual geometric conditions to road users on the entering roadway.

Where two roadways of approximately equal importance converge and merging movements are required, a Merge sign should be placed on each roadway.

The Merge sign should not be used where two roadways converge and merging movements are not required.

'''Standard. '''The Merge sign shall not be used in place of a Lane Ends (W4-2) sign (see [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.39|EPG 903.3.39]]) where lanes of traffic moving on a single roadway must merge because of a reduction in the actual or usable pavement width.

'''Support. '''Examples of the use of Merge (W4-1) signs are shown in Drawing A in [[#fig903.3.37|Figure 903.3.37]].

{{SpanID|fig903.3.37}}
[[File:Figure 903.3.37 Examples of Merge and Added Lane Sign Placement for Entering and Converging Roadways.png|thumb|center|800px|alt="A: A horizontal roadway consisting of three eastbound travel lanes is shown. A converging lane adds a fourth lane to this three-lane horizontal roadway. Two lanes are merging together from the north and south while traveling eastbound to form one converging lane. A W4-1R sign is shown to the right of the right shoulder of the north merge lane and a W4-1L sign is shown to the left of the left shoulder of the south merge lane. The lanes merge together into one converging lane just beyond these signs. Another W4-1R sign is shown on the right shoulder of the right travel lane of the horizontal roadway before the converging lane enters the horizontal roadway.
B: This example only shows the right converging lane of a three-lane horizontal roadway where the converging lane adds a fourth lane. A W4-6R sign is shown on the left of the left shoulder of the converging lane. A W4-3R sign is shown on the right shoulder of the right travel lane of the horizontal roadway before the converging lane enters the horizontal roadway. An additional example shows a W4-6R sign on the left of the left shoulder facing southbound of the converging lane. The converging lane is shown to be entering the right lane of the horizontal roadway at a 90-degree angle with a sharp curve to the right when entering the roadway. A W4-3R sign is shown on the right shoulder of the right travel lane of the horizontal roadway before the converging lane enters the horizontal roadway. This example only shows the right lane of the three-lane horizontal roadway."
|'''Figure 903.3.37''' Examples of Merge and Added Lane Sign Placement for Entering and Converging Roadways]]

=={{SpanID|903.3.38}}903.3.38 Added Lane Signs (W4-3 and W4-6) (MUTCD Section 2C.46)==
<center>
{|
| [[File:W4-3.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W4-3'''</center>]]
| [[File:W4-6.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W4-6'''</center>]]
|}
</center>

'''Guidance. '''The Added Lane (W4-3) sign should be installed in advance of a point where two roadways converge and merging movements are not required. When possible, the Added Lane sign should be placed such that it is visible from both roadways; if this is not possible, an Added Lane sign should be placed on the side of each roadway.

When an Added Lane (W4-3) sign is installed on a major roadway, the symbol should be oriented right or left as appropriate to depict the side from which the entering roadway converges, with the straight arrow representing the major roadway and the curved arrow representing the entering roadway. The sign should be located on the side of the major roadway from which the entering roadway converges.

When an Added Lane sign is to be installed on a roadway that curves before converging with another roadway that has a tangent alignment at the point of convergence, the Entering Roadway Added Lane (W4-6) sign should be used to better portray the actual geometric conditions to road users on the curving roadway.

'''Support. '''Examples of the use of Added Lane (W4-3) and Entering Roadway Added Lane (W4-6) signs are shown in Drawing B in [[#fig903.3.37|Figure 903.3.37]].

=={{SpanID|903.3.39}}903.3.39 Lane Ends Signs (W4-2 and W9-1) (Section 2C.47)==
<center>
{|
| [[File:W4-2.png|thumb|center|106px|alt=|<center>'''W4-2'''</center>]]
| [[File:W9-1.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W9-1'''</center>]]
|}
</center>

'''Support. '''The Lane Ends (W4-2) and RIGHT (LEFT) LANE ENDS (W9-1) signs are used to warn of the reduction in the number of traffic lanes in the direction of travel.

The sequence of the W4-2 and W9-1 signs is illustrated in [[#fig903.3.39.1|Figures 903.3.39.1]] to [[#fig903.3.39.5|903.3.39.5]]

'''Guidance. '''The Lane Ends (W4-2) sign should be installed at the advance placement distance in accordance with [[#tab903.3.4|Table 903.3.4]].

A RIGHT (LEFT) LANE ENDS (W9-1) sign should be installed in advance of the Lane Ends sign, at the advance placement distance in accordance with [[#tab903.3.4|Table 903.3.4]], to provide additional warning that a lane is ending and that a merging maneuver will be required.

If a W9-1 sign is installed, a Distance (W16-2P series or W16-3P series) plaque (see [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.59|EPG 903.3.59]]) should be installed below the W9-1 sign.

On one-way streets or on divided highways where the left-hand lane is ending and the width of the median will permit, the W9-1 and W4-2 signs should be placed facing approaching traffic on the left-hand side or median.

'''Option. '''Where a lane ends a distance beyond the intersection that is less than the advance placement distance indicated in [[#tab903.3.4|Table 903.3.4]], the W4-2 sign may be located at the far side of the intersection (see [[#fig903.3.39.4|Figure 903.3.39.4]]).

'''Guidance. '''When the W4-2 sign is located at the far side of the intersection in accordance with the Option paragraph above, the W9-1 sign should be placed upstream of the intersection with the appropriate distance plaque.

'''Support. '''[[620.2 Pavement and Curb Markings (MUTCD Chapter 3B) #620.2.14|EPG 620.2.14]] contains information regarding the use of pavement markings in conjunction with a lane reduction.

'''Guidance. '''Lane Ends signs should not be installed in advance of the downstream end of an acceleration lane.

'''Standard. '''The W4-2 and W9-1 signs shall not be used in dropped lane situations. In dropped lane situations on conventional roads at intersections, regulatory signs (see [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2.26|EPG 903.2.26]]) shall be used to inform road users that a through lane becomes a mandatory turn lane.

{{SpanID|fig903.3.39.1}}
[[File:Figure 903.3.39.1 Example Sequences for Lane Ends and Lane Merge Signs (Sheet 1 of 5).png|thumb|center|800px|alt=A vertical roadway is shown with four travel lanes at the bottom of the figure transitioning to three travel lanes at the top. The right lane ends through a taper marked by three white lane-reduction arrows placed in the right travel lane, each pointing diagonally toward the adjacent lane. At the bottom right of the figure, a W9-1R “RIGHT LANE ENDS” sign is mounted above a W16-2P “1000 FEET” plaque. Farther upstream, a W4-2R lane-reduction symbol sign is shown to the right of the roadway. The distance between the W4-2R sign and the beginning of the taper is labeled, “See Table 903.3.4 to determine the advance placement distance.” A legend indicates the direction of travel. Two notes are shown: “1. See EPG 620.2.14 Lane Reduction Pavement Markings” and “2. See EPG 620.2.22 Merge Arrows.”
|'''Figure 903.3.39.1''' Example Sequences for Lane Ends and Lane Merge Signs ''(Sheet 1 of 5)'']]

{{SpanID|fig903.3.39.2}}
[[File:Figure 903.3.39.2 Example Sequences for Lane Ends and Lane Merge Signs (Sheet 2 of 5).png|thumb|center|800px|alt=A vertical roadway is shown with two travel lanes at the bottom of the figure and one travel lane at the top. The right lane ends through a taper marked by white lane-reduction arrows placed in the right travel lane, each pointing diagonally toward the adjacent lane. At the bottom right of the figure, a W9-1R “RIGHT LANE ENDS” sign is mounted above a W16-2P “1000 FEET” plaque. Farther upstream, a W4-2R lane-reduction symbol sign is shown to the right of the roadway. The distance between the W4-2R sign and the beginning of the taper is labeled, “See Table 903.3.4 to determine the advance placement distance.” A legend indicates the direction of travel. A note states, “See EPG 620.2.14 for lane-reduction pavement markings and EPG 620.2.22 for merge arrows.”
|'''Figure 903.3.39.2''' Example Sequences for Lane Ends and Lane Merge Signs ''(Sheet 2 of 5)'']]

{{SpanID|fig903.3.39.3}}
[[File:Figure 903.3.39.3 Example Sequences for Lane Ends and Lane Merge Signs (Sheet 3 of 5).jpg|thumb|center|800px|alt="The figure shows two roadway examples where the left lane ends. The illustration on the left depicts an undivided roadway with one travel lane in one direction and two travel lanes in the opposite direction. On the side with two lanes, the left lane ends through a taper marked with a yellow painted gore and white lane-reduction arrows placed in the left travel lane, each arrow pointing diagonally toward the adjacent lane. To the right of this roadway, a W9-1L “LEFT LANE ENDS” sign is shown mounted above a W16-2P “1000 FEET” plaque, and a W4-2L lane-reduction symbol sign is shown farther upstream. The distance between the W4-2L sign and the beginning of the taper is labeled, “See Table 903.3.4 to determine the advance placement distance.”
The illustration on the right depicts a divided or one-way roadway with two travel lanes. The left lane ends through a taper marked by white lane-reduction arrows pointing diagonally toward the adjacent lane. To the right of this roadway, a W9-1L “LEFT LANE ENDS” sign is shown mounted above a W16-2P “1000 FEET” plaque, with a W4-2L lane-reduction symbol sign shown farther upstream. The same advance placement distance label is shown.
A note states, “See EPG 620.2.14 for lane-reduction pavement markings and EPG 620 for merge arrows.” A legend indicates the direction of travel."
|'''Figure 903.3.39.3''' Example Sequences for Lane Ends and Lane Merge Signs ''(Sheet 3 of 5)'']]

{{SpanID|fig903.3.39.4}}
[[File:Figure 903.3.39.4 Example Sequences for Lane Ends and Lane Merge Sign (Sheet 4 of 5).png|thumb|center|800px|alt=The intersection of a two-lane horizontal roadway with a three-lane vertical roadway is shown.The right and left side of the horizontal roadway is composed of one through travel lane in each direction. The left side also has a third lane which is a right-turn only lane when approaching the intersection traveling eastbound to turn south.The vertical roadway is composed of two northbound lanes and one southbound lane. The south side of this vertical roadway is composed of a combination straight or left-turn lane in the left northbound travel lane and a combination straight or right-turn lane in the right northbound travel lane. Solid white through and turn arrows are shown in these travel lanes.Starting near the bottom of the figure, to the right of the right shoulder of the northbound lanes, a sign assembly composed of a W9-1R sign mounted above a W16-2P plaque is shown.On the north side of this vertical roadway, a W4-2R sign is shown to indicate that the two northbound lanes are transitioning to one lane ahead. Before the right lane taper begins, two solid white arrows are shown in the right northbound travel lane on the pavement pointing diagonally to the left northbound travel lane. An “optional dotted lane line” is shown adjacent to these arrows in the middle of the travel lanes. All pavement markings are denoting a northbound left lane merge ahead.
|'''Figure 903.3.39.4''' Example Sequences for Lane Ends and Lane Merge Sign ''(Sheet 4 of 5)'']]

{{SpanID|fig903.3.39.5}}
[[File:Figure 903.3.39.5 Example Sequences for Lane Ends and Lane Merge Signs (Sheet 5 of 5).png|thumb|center|800px|alt="The figure shows a vertical roadway where two lanes traveling in the same direction reduce to one lane. At the bottom of the roadway, two upward-travel lanes are shown. Farther up the figure, both outside edges of the roadway taper inward, reducing the roadway to a single lane. A single dashed centerline is shown within the remaining lane.

To the right of the roadway, near the lower portion of the figure, a sign assembly is shown consisting of a W9-4 “LANES MERGE” sign mounted above a W16-2P “500 FEET” plaque. Farther up the roadway, another sign assembly is shown consisting of a W4-8 lane-reduction symbol sign. A label between the W4-8 sign and the start of the taper reads, “See Table 903.3.4 to determine the advance placement distance.”
A legend indicates the direction of travel with a right-pointing arrow. Notes reference EPG 620.2.14 for lane-reduction pavement markings and EPG 903.3.40 for additional information about this type of merge."
|'''Figure 903.3.39.5''' Example Sequences for Lane Ends and Lane Merge Signs ''(Sheet 5 of 5)'']]

=={{SpanID|903.3.40}}903.3.40 Lanes Merge Signs (W9-4 and W4-8) (MUTCD Section 2C.48)==
<center>
{|
| [[File:W4-8.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W4-8'''</center>]]
| [[File:W9-4.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W9-4'''</center>]]
|}
</center>

'''Support. '''The LANES MERGE (W9-4) and Single-Lane Transition (W4-8) signs are used to warn of a merge of two lanes to one in the same direction of travel with a merging maneuver required for each lane (see [[#fig903.3.39.5|Figure 903.3.39.5]]). This type of merge is for a geometric condition where both approach lanes merge into a single lane, not where one lane merges into the other. [[616.8 TTC Zone Warning Signs (MUTCD Chapter 6H) #616.8.8|EPG 618.8.8]] contains information about the use of the late merge sign.

'''Guidance. '''The Single-Lane Transition (W4-8) sign should be located at the advance placement distance in accordance with [[#tab903.3.4|Table 903.3.4]].

The Lanes Merge (W9-4) sign should be used in advance of the W4-8 sign to provide additional warning that both lanes form a single lane and that a merging maneuver is needed for the traffic in each lane.

=={{SpanID|903.3.41}}903.3.41 RIGHT (LEFT) LANE EXIT ONLY Sign (W9-7) (MUTCD Section 2C.50)==

[[File:W9-7.png|thumb|center|160px|alt=|<center>'''W9-7'''</center>]]

'''Option. '''The RIGHT (LEFT) LANE EXIT ONLY (W9-7) sign may be used to provide advance warning to road users that traffic in the right-hand (left-hand) lane of a roadway will be required to depart the roadway at the next exit.

'''Guidance. '''If used, the W9-7 sign should be installed upstream from the first overhead guide sign that contains an EXIT ONLY sign panel or upstream from the first RIGHT (LEFT) LANE MUST EXIT (R3-33) regulatory sign, if used, whichever is farther upstream from the exit.

=={{SpanID|903.3.42}}903.3.42 Two-Way Traffic Sign (W6-3) (MUTCD Section 2C.51)==
[[File:W6-3.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W6-3'''</center>]]

'''Guidance. '''A Two-Way Traffic (W6-3) sign should be used to warn road users of a transition from a multi-lane divided section of roadway to a two-lane, two-way section of roadway.

A Two-Way Traffic (W6-3) sign with an AHEAD (W16-9P) plaque (see [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.57|EPG 903.3.57]]) should be used to warn road users of a transition from a one-way street to a two-lane, two-way section of roadway.

'''Option. '''The Two-Way Traffic sign may be used to supplement the Divided Highway (Road) Ends (W6-2) sign discussed in [[#903.3.19|EPG 903.3.19]].

=={{SpanID|903.3.43}}903.3.43 NO PASSING ZONE Sign (W14-3) (MUTCD Section 2C.53)==

'''Support. '''The NO PASSING ZONE (W14-3) sign is not to be used on a system-wide basis. It is intended for special use as a measure to reduce crashes at locations where there is a history of crashes related to passing maneuvers.

'''Standard. '''The NO PASSING ZONE (W14-3) sign shall be a pennant-shaped isosceles triangle with its longer axis horizontal and pointing to the right. When used, the NO PASSING ZONE sign shall be installed on the left-hand side of the roadway at the beginning of no-passing zones identified by pavement markings or DO NOT PASS signs or both (see [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2.31|EPG 903.2.31]] and [[620.2 Pavement and Curb Markings (MUTCD Chapter 3B) #620.2.3|620.2.3]]).

The use of the NO PASSING ZONE sign shall be approved by the State Highway Safety and Traffic Engineer.

=={{SpanID|903.3.44}}903.3.44 Vehicular Traffic Warning Signs (MUTCD Section 2C.54)==
'''Option. '''Vehicular Traffic Warning signs may be used to alert road users to locations where unexpected entries into the roadway by trucks, bicycles, farm vehicles, emergency vehicles, golf carts, horse-drawn vehicles, or other vehicles might occur.

'''Guidance. '''Vehicular Traffic Warning signs should be used only at locations where the road user’s sight distance is restricted, or the condition, activity, or entering traffic would be unexpected.

If the condition or activity is seasonal or temporary, the Vehicular Traffic Warning sign should be removed or covered when the condition or activity does not exist.

Before advanced warning signs are installed, all efforts to correct the sight distance issues should be made as this will be far more effective to improve safety compared to installing a sign. Roadway alignments cannot be corrected easily, but removal of vegetation on and off the state right of way that blocks sight distance can address sight distance issues.

'''Option. '''Supplemental plaques (see [[#903.3.57|EPG 903.3.57]]) with legends such as AHEAD, XX FEET, NEXT XX MILES, IN STREET, or IN ROAD may be mounted below Vehicular Traffic Warning signs to provide advance notice to road users of unexpected entries.

'''Standard. '''A Vehicular Traffic Warning sign assembly shall not be installed on an approach controlled by a STOP or a YIELD sign, except as provided in the following two Option paragraphs.

'''Option. '''The Vehicular Traffic Warning sign assembly may be installed on an approach to a circular intersection controlled by a YIELD sign where the crosswalk is at least 20 feet in advance of the yield point at the entrance to the circulatory roadway.

At a signalized or stop-controlled intersection the Vehicular Traffic Warning sign assembly may be installed on an approach to a channelized right-turn lane controlled by a YIELD sign where the crosswalk is at least 20 feet in advance of the yield point.

A Warning Beacon (see [[902.18 Flashing Beacons (MUTCD Chapter 4S) #902.18.3|EPG 902.18.3]]) may be used with any Vehicular Traffic Warning sign to indicate specific periods when the condition or activity is present or is likely to be present, or to provide enhanced sign conspicuity.

=={{SpanID|903.3.45}}903.3.45 Bicycle Warning (W11-1) Sign ==
[[File:W11-1.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W11-1'''</center>]]

'''Guidance. '''Bicycle Warning (W11-1) signs should be used only at locations where the road user’s sight distance is restricted, and the condition, activity, or entering traffic would be unexpected.

'''Option. '''Bicycle Warning (W11-1) signs may be used to alert road users to locations where unexpected entries into the roadway by cyclists might occur.

'''Support. '''Bicycle warning (W11-1) signs with a diagonal downward-pointing arrow (W16-7P) plaques are used to alert road users of locations where bicyclists routinely cross state highways.

'''Standard. '''If a post-mounted W11-1 sign is placed at the location of a bicycle crossing, a diagonal downward pointing arrow (W16-7P) plaque shall be mounted below the sign. The bicycle crossing warning sign with diagonal arrow supplemental plaque should be placed immediately in advance of, as near as possible, the crossing in both directions of travel. If the W11-1 sign is mounted overhead, the W16-7P supplemental plaque shall not be used.

'''Guidance. '''Bicycle crossing warning signs should be installed at locations where an established independent bicycle path crosses a state route. Bicycle crossing warning signs should not be installed where an established “US Bike Route” crosses a state route or where cyclists riding on the public roadways cross a state route.

'''Option. '''A Bicycle Warning (W11-1) sign with an AHEAD (W16-9P) supplemental plaque may be added in advance of the bicycle crossing if engineering judgement determines a need based on limited sight distance of the crossing.

Bicycle Warning (W11-1) signs with an In Road (W16-1P) plaque may be used to alert road users to locations where cyclists riding on the roadway might occur.

'''Standard. '''When bicycle warnings signs are installed to warn motorists of bicycle activity along a state highway, the IN ROAD (W16-1P) plaque shall be installed below the Bicycle Warning (W11-1) sign and shall match the color of the warning sign.

'''Support. '''Bicycle warning signs with the IN ROAD supplemental plaques (IN ROAD plaque replaces the SHARE THE ROAD plaque) are used to alert road users where bicyclists routinely ride along specific sections of state highways, in the travel lane or on the shoulder of the roadway.

'''Guidance. '''The use of Bicycle warning signs to warn road users of cyclist activity along specific sections of roadway should be based on identifiable, routine and/or frequent cyclist activity. Indications bicycle warnings signs should be installed should be based on conditions, such as, but not limited to:
:A. Requests received by bicycle groups, or clubs, who indicate the state highways which are part of their group’s frequent cycling routes.
:B. Requests from Amish, Mennonite or other communities who utilize bicycles as one of their primary modes of routine transportation, indicating the state highways which service their community’s cycling needs.
:C. Sections of a state route where an established bicycle trail overlaps the state route for some length, using the roadway and not a dedicated bike lane, before returning to the independent trail again.
:D. Cycling activity occurs a minimum of 3 days per week, 6 months per year.

Bicycle warning signs should not be installed along routes for the following conditions:
:A. For the purpose of promoting cycling or conveying a bicycle friendly organization when there is no routine cycling activity on that route,
:B. When cyclists have access to a dedicated bicycle lane along the route,
:C. Where cyclists have access to a parallel bike facility, or multi-use path, or
:D. In response to a request from an individual without verifying the need as described in this article.

Bicycle warning signs used to notify drivers of bicycle traffic on the state route should only be ground-mounted installations. Signs should be installed at the point on the route the activity begins and downstream of major public road entry points onto the state route.

'''Option. '''Additional bicycle warning signs may be installed based on engineering judgement if the distance between major road intersections is excessive or if there are areas with limited sight distance which may obscure bicycle traffic.

A NEXT XX MILES (W7-3aP) plaque (See [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.60|EPG 903.3.60]]) may be installed below the IN ROAD plaque if engineering judgement determines the need to notify road users of the length of roadway over which unexpected cyclists riding along the road may occur.

=={{SpanID|903.3.46}}903.3.46 Combined Bicycle/Pedestrian Crossing (W11-15) Sign ==
[[File:W11-15.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W11-15'''</center>]]

'''Option. '''Combined Bicycle/Pedestrian Crossing (W11-15) signs may be used to alert road users to locations where unexpected entries into the roadway by cyclists and pedestrians might occur.

'''Guidance. '''Combined Bicycle/Pedestrian warning signs should be installed at locations where an established shared use path crosses a state route.

'''Support. '''The combined Bicycle/Pedestrian (W11-15) sign is used where both bicyclists and pedestrians might be crossing the roadway at intersections with a shared-use path and state routes. A shared-use path is defined as a paved or gravel path, 8-10 foot wide, dedicated to bike and pedestrian traffic which is an independent facility from the roadway.

'''Standard. '''If a post-mounted W11-15 sign is placed at the location of the combined Bicycle/Pedestrian crossing, a diagonal downward pointing arrow (W16-7P) plaque shall be mounted below the sign. The Bicycle/Pedestrian warning sign with diagonal downward pointing arrow plaque shall be placed immediately in advance of, as near as possible, the crossing in both directions of travel. If the W11-15 sign is mounted overhead, the W16-7P supplemental plaque shall not be used.

'''Option. '''An advanced Bicycle/Pedestrian warning sign with an AHEAD (W16-9P) supplemental plaque may be added in advance of the Bicycle/Pedestrian crossing if engineering judgement determines a need based on limited sight distance of the crossing.

=={{SpanID|903.3.47}}903.3.47 Trail Crossing (W11-15a) Sign ==
[[File:W11-15a.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W11-15a'''</center>]]

'''Option. '''TRAIL CROSSING (W11-15a) signs may be used to alert road users to locations where unexpected entries into the roadway by cyclists, pedestrians or equestrian activity might occur.

'''Support. '''The TRAIL CROSSING sign is used to warn of a rustic trail where pedestrian, bicyclist, or equestrian activities, might be crossing the state highway. A rustic trail would typically be an unpaved trail of an undefined width, but one that is visible and identifiable by a motorist as it crosses the right of way.

'''Guidance. '''TRAIL CROSSING signs should be installed at locations where an established rustic trail used by pedestrians, bicyclists, and equestrian activities crosses a state route.

'''Standard. '''If a post-mounted W11-15a sign is placed at the location of the rustic trail crossing, a diagonal downward pointing arrow (W16-7P) plaque shall be mounted below the sign. The W11-15a sign with diagonal downward pointing arrow plaque shall be placed immediately in advance of, as near as possible, the crossing in both directions of travel. If the W11-15a sign is mounted overhead, the W16-7P supplemental plaque shall not be used.

'''Option. '''A TRAIL CROSSING warning sign with an AHEAD (W16-9P) supplemental plaque may be added in advance of the trail crossing if engineering judgement determines a need based on limited sight distance of the crossing.

=={{SpanID|903.3.48}}903.3.48 Horse-Drawn Vehicle (W11-14) Sign==
[[File:W11-14.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W11-14'''</center>]]

'''Option.''' Horse-Drawn Vehicle (W11-14) signs may be used to alert road users to locations where unexpected horse-drawn vehicles are traveling along the roadway might occur.

'''Guidance.''' W11-14 signs should be used only at locations where the road user’s sight distance is restricted, and the condition, activity, or entering traffic would be unexpected.

'''Support. '''Horse-Drawn Vehicle warning signs with the IN ROAD (W16-1P) supplemental plaque (IN ROAD plaque replaces the SHARE THE ROAD plaque) are used to alert road users where horse-drawn vehicle traffic is routinely traveling along specific sections of state highways, in the travel lane or on the shoulder of the roadway.

'''Standard. '''When Horse-drawn vehicle warnings signs are installed to warn motorists of Horse-drawn vehicle activity along a state highway, the IN ROAD (W16-1P) plaque shall be installed below the Horse-drawn vehicle warning sign and shall match the color of the warning sign.

'''Guidance. '''The use of Horse-Drawn Vehicle signs to warn road users of horse-drawn vehicle activity along specific section of roadway should be based on identifiable, routine and/or frequent horse-drawn vehicle activity. The application of horse-drawn vehicle warning signs is limited to the Amish, Mennonite or other communities who utilize horse-drawn vehicles as one of their primary modes of routine transportation. The district should work with community leadership to determine the state routes their communities utilize on a routine basis to determine the most appropriate sign installation locations.

Horse-Drawn Vehicle signs used to notify drivers of horse-drawn vehicle traffic on the state route should only be ground-mounted installations. Signs should be installed at the point on the route the activity begins and downstream of each major public road entry points onto the state route.

'''Option. '''Additional Horse-Drawn Vehicle signs with IN ROAD plaques may be installed based on engineering judgement if the distance between major road intersections is excessive or if there are areas with limited sight distance which may obscure horse-drawn vehicle traffic.

A NEXT XX MILES (W7-3aP) plaque may be added below the IN ROAD plaque if engineering judgement determines the need to notify drivers of the length of roadway affected by the warning sign.

=={{SpanID|903.3.49}}903.3.49 TRUCK CROSSING (W8-6) Sign ==
[[File:W8-6.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W8-6'''</center>]]

'''Option. '''Truck Crossing (W8-6) signs may be used to alert road users to locations where unexpected entries into the roadway by trucks crossing the road might occur.

'''Guidance. '''W8-6 signs should be used only at locations where the road user’s sight distance is restricted, and the condition, activity, or entering traffic would be unexpected.

'''Support. '''The W8-6 sign is used to alert road users to locations where trucks are routinely crossing a state highway at a commercial entrance intersection. A typical example would be a company with facilities on either side of a highway where raw materials, finished goods, etc. are routinely moved sites. In these cases, warning signs with fluorescent yellow backgrounds are installed in a permanent installation.

'''Option. '''For cases involving temporary truck crossings, such as haul roads moving earth or quarry materials, a TR12 Truck crossing agreement (see [[153.21 Traffic #153.21|EPG 153.21]]) may be used to install a temporary traffic control sign with a fluorescent orange background.

'''Guidance. '''W8-6 signs should be installed at locations where there is consistent and routine truck traffic crossing a state route where the road user’s sight distance is restricted, and the crossing would be unexpected based on engineering judgement.

The truck crossing for which the warning sign is being installed should be recognizable by the presence of a on premise business marquee sign, business name on structures or other indicators to allow drivers to associate the warning sign to the entrance/site where tucks could be crossing the state highway.

'''Standard. '''If used, the TRUCK CROSSING sign shall be placed in accordance with [[#tab903.3.4|Table 903.3.4]].

The TRUCK CROSSING sign shall only be installed for the direction of travel where the road user’s sight distance is restricted.

The TRUCK CROSSING sign shall not be used on state highways at intersections with city streets or county roads, to address issues at these types of intersections other warning signs, such as Intersection Warning signs are more appropriate.

=={{SpanID|903.3.50}}903.3.50 Truck Entrance (W11-10) Sign==
[[File:W11-10.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W11-10'''</center>]]

'''Option. '''Truck Entrance (W11-10) signs may be used to alert road users to locations where unexpected entries into the roadway by trucks might occur.

'''Guidance. '''Truck Entrance signs should be used only at locations where the road user’s sight distance is restricted, and the condition, activity, or entering traffic would be unexpected.

'''Support. '''The W11-10 sign is used to alert road users to locations where trucks are routinely entering and leaving a state highway at a non-public roadway intersection, commercial entrance. A typical example would be trucks entering and exiting a quarry entrance which has direct access to the state route. In these cases, warning signs with fluorescent yellow backgrounds are installed in a permanent installation.

'''Option. '''For cases involving a temporary truck entrance, such as logging trucks entering and leaving a timber harvest location, a TR12 Truck crossing agreement (see [[153.21 Traffic #153.21|EPG 153.21]]) may be used to install a temporary traffic control sign with a fluorescent orange background.

'''Guidance. '''Truck Entrance signs should be installed at locations where there is consistent and routine truck traffic entering and leaving a state route where the road user’s sight distance is restricted, and the crossing would be unexpected based on engineering judgement.

The truck entrance for which the sign is being installed should be recognizable by the presence of a on premise business marquee sign, building with the business name or some other form of marking to allow drivers associate the warning sign to the site where trucks could be entering or leaving the highway.

'''Standard. '''If used, the Truck Entrance sign shall be placed in accordance with [[#tab903.3.4|Table 903.3.4]].

The Truck Entrance sign shall only be installed for the direction of travel where the road user’s sight distance is restricted.

The truck entrance warning sign shall not be used on state highways at intersections with city streets or county roads, to address issues at these types of intersections other warning signs, such as Intersection Warning signs are more appropriate.

=={{SpanID|903.3.51}}903.3.51 Farm Equipment (W11-5) Warning Sign ==
[[File:W11-5.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W11-5'''</center>]]

'''Option. '''Farm Equipment Warning (W11-5) signs may be used to alert road users to locations where unexpected entries into the roadway by farm equipment crossing the road might occur.

'''Guidance. '''W11-5 signs should be used only at locations where the road user’s sight distance is restricted, and the condition, activity, or entering traffic would be unexpected.

'''Support. '''The Farm Equipment (W11-5) sign is used to alert road users to locations where slow-moving farm vehicles are routinely entering or crossing the state highway (immediately across or a short transition down the road to a different entrance) if the highway splits the farm. A typical example would be a dairy farm where these crossings take place daily. In these cases, fluorescent yellow warning signs are installed in a permanent installation.

Farm Equipment signs are not installed to warn of farm equipment traveling along a state highway. This warning is the responsibility of the farmer and can be addressed by displaying the appropriate warning lights and signs on the equipment as well as having the appropriate lead and/or trailing vehicles escorting the equipment.

'''Option. '''For cases involving a temporary farm equipment access entrance, such as during planting or harvest season, a TR12 Truck Crossing agreement (see [[153.21 Traffic #153.21|EPG 153.21]]) may be used to install a temporary traffic control sign with a fluorescent orange background.

'''Guidance. '''Farm Equipment signs should be installed at locations where there is consistent and routine farm equipment entering and leaving a state route where the road user’s sight distance is restricted, and the crossing would be unexpected based on engineering judgement.

The farm vehicle entrance for which the warning sign is being installed should be recognizable by the presence of a on-premise business marquee sign, presence of farm equipment, farm structures or other indicators to allow drivers to associate the warning sign to the site where farm vehicles could be crossing/entering the highway.

'''Standard. '''If used, the Farm Equipment warning sign shall be placed in accordance with [[#tab903.3.4|Table 903.3.4]].

The Farm Equipment warning sign shall only be installed for the direction of travel where the road user’s sight distance is restricted.

=={{SpanID|903.3.52}}903.3.52 Emergency Vehicle (W11-8) Sign==
<center>
{|
| [[File:W11-8.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W11-8'''</center>]]
| [[File:W11-12P.jpg|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W11-12P'''</center>]]
|}
</center>

'''Option. '''Emergency Vehicle (W11-8) signs may be used to alert road users to locations where unexpected entries into the roadway by emergency vehicles might occur.

'''Guidance.''' Emergency Vehicle signs should be used only at locations where the road user’s sight distance is restricted, and the condition, activity, or entering traffic would be unexpected.

'''Support.''' The Emergency Vehicle sign is used to alert road users to locations where emergency vehicles are routinely entering and leaving a state highway at dedicated emergency vehicle facility entrances.

'''Guidance. '''Emergency Vehicle signs should be installed at a state route where the road user’s sight distance is restricted, and the crossing would be unexpected based on engineering judgement.

The emergency vehicle entrance for which the warning sign is being installed should be recognizable by the presence of a on premise marquee sign, building with the emergency agency name displayed or some other form of marking to allow drivers to associate the warning sign to the site/entrance where emergency vehicles could be entering or leaving the state highway.

'''Standard. '''If used, the Emergency Vehicle warning sign shall be placed in accordance with [[#tab903.3.4|Table 903.3.4]].

The Emergency Vehicle warning sign shall only be installed for the direction of travel where the road user’s sight distance is restricted.

When measuring sight distance for emergency vehicle entrances, the sight distance shall be determined using a 3.5 ft. eye height and an 8 ft. object height in the same method use to evaluate school bus stop sight distances (see [[908.2 Signs (MUTCD Chapter 7B) #908.2.4|EPG 908.2.4]]).

The Emergency Vehicle sign with the EMERGENCY SIGNAL AHEAD (W11-12P) supplemental plaque shall be placed in advance of all emergency-vehicle traffic control signals (see [[902.13 Traffic Control Signals for Emergency-Vehicle Access (MUTCD Chapter 4M)|EPG 902.13]]).

=={{SpanID|903.3.53}}903.3.53 Non-Vehicular Warning Signs (W11-2, W11-3, W11-4, and W11-7) (MUTCD Section 2C.55)==
<center>
{|
| [[File:W11-2.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W11-2'''</center>]]
| [[File:W11-4.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W11-4''' (Cattle)</center>]]
| [[File:W11-7.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W11-7'''</center>]]
|}
</center>

'''Option. '''Non-Vehicular Warning (W11-2, W11-4, and W11-7) signs may be used to alert road users in advance of locations where unexpected entries into the roadway might occur.

'''Support. '''These conflicts might be relatively confined or might occur randomly over a segment of roadway.

'''Guidance. '''If used in advance of a pedestrian or equestrian crossing, the W11-2 and W11-7, signs should be supplemented with plaques (see [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.59|EPG 903.3.59]]) with the legend AHEAD or XX FEET to inform road users that they are approaching a point where crossing activity might occur.

'''Standard. '''If a post-mounted W11-2 or W11-7 sign is placed at the location of the crossing point where pedestrians or equestrians might be crossing the roadway, a diagonal downward-pointing arrow (W16-7P) plaque (see [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.62|EPG 903.3.62]]) shall be mounted below the sign. If the W11-2 or W11-7 sign is mounted overhead, the W16-7P plaque shall not be used.

A Non-Vehicular Warning sign assembly shall not be installed on an approach controlled by a STOP or a YIELD sign, except as provided in the first two Option paragraphs below.

Equestrian (W11-7) warning signs shall only be installed at Public Equestrian Trail Crossings. Existing Equestrian (W11-7) Crossing signs that do not meet the Public Equestrian Trail Crossing criteria shall be left in place until they reach the end of their service life.

The use of the Deer (W11-3) warning signs has been discontinued by MoDOT due to studies proving these signs provide little or no safety benefit. Existing W11-3 signs shall be removed at the end of their service life.

The Cattle (W11-4) sign shall be issued to an individual only when the Application for Sign at Cattle Crossings contract (TR09) is fully executed. See [[153.21 Traffic #153.21|EPG 153.21]] for the TR09 Agreement.

'''Option. '''The Non-Vehicular Warning sign assembly may be installed on an approach to a circular intersection controlled by a YIELD sign where the crosswalk is at least 20 feet in advance of the yield point at the entrance to a circulatory roadway.

At a signalized or stop-controlled intersection the Non-Vehicular Warning sign assembly may be installed on an approach to a channelized right-turn lane controlled by a YIELD sign where the crosswalk is at least 20 feet in advance of the yield point.

A Pedestrian Crossing (W11-2) sign may be placed overhead or may be post-mounted with a diagonal downward-pointing arrow (W16-7P) plaque at the crosswalk location where Yield Here To Pedestrians signs (see [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2.18|EPG 903.2.18]]) have been installed in advance of the crosswalk.

'''Standard. '''If a W11-2 sign has been post-mounted at the crosswalk location where a Yield Here To Pedestrians sign is used on the approach, the Yield Here To Pedestrians sign shall not be placed on the same post as the W11-2 sign.

'''Option. '''An advance Pedestrian Crossing (W11-2) sign with an AHEAD or a distance supplemental plaque may be used in conjunction with a Yield Here To Pedestrians sign on the approach to the same crosswalk.

The crossing location identified by a W11-2 or W11-7 sign may be defined with crosswalk markings (see [[620.3 Crosswalk Markings (MUTCD Chapter 3C) #620.3|EPG 620.3]]).

'''Standard. '''The W11-2 sign and related supplemental plaques shall only have a fluorescent yellow-green background with a black legend and border if the signs are installed within a school area as described in the fifth Support paragraph of [[#903.3.2|EPG 903.3.2]].

'''Guidance. '''When a fluorescent yellow-green background is used, a systematic approach featuring one background color within a zone or area should be used. The mixing of standard yellow and fluorescent yellow-green backgrounds within a selected site area should be avoided.

'''Option. '''A Warning Beacon (see [[902.18 Flashing Beacons (MUTCD Chapter 4S) #902.18.3|EPG 902.18.3]]) may be used with any Non-Vehicular Warning sign to indicate specific periods when the condition or activity is present or is likely to be present, or to provide enhanced sign conspicuity.

=={{SpanID|903.3.54}}903.3.54 FERRY CROSSING AHEAD Sign (W3-18)==
[[image:W3-10.gif|center|thumb|<center>'''W3-18'''</center>|100px]]

'''Option. '''The FERRY CROSSING AHEAD (W3-18) sign may be installed for a ferry crossing. A STOP (R1-1) sign at the ferry crossing may be used as a supplement.

=={{SpanID|903.3.55}}903.3.55 Passing Lane Warning Signs (W6-5, W6-5a, W6-6aP, W6-16, and W6-17)==
<center>
{|
|-
|[[image:W4-12a.gif|left|100px|thumb|<center>'''W6-6aP'''</center>]]||[[image:W4-10.gif|left|thumb|<center>'''W6-16'''</center>|100px]]||[[image:W4-11.gif|left|100px|thumb|<center>'''W6-17'''</center>]]
|}
</center>

'''Support. '''Alternating passing lanes may be provided on rural, two-lane highways to provide motorists with an opportunity to pass slower vehicles without crossing the centerline. Where passing lanes are provided, operations and safety may be improved by giving motorists advance information about the location of passing lanes. Providing motorists with advance notice of passing lanes may reduce the number of passing maneuvers.

'''Standard. '''The PASSING LANE ENDS (W6-16), WATCH FOR LEFT-TURNING TRAFFIC IN PASSING LANE (W6-17), and PASSING LANE PLAQUE (W6-6aP) signs shall be black legend and fluorescent yellow background and shall only be used in alternating passing lane sections.

The PASSING LANE ENDS sign shall be used prior to the end of the passing lane to warn motorists the passing lane in that direction of travel is ending and merging back to a single lane. The sign shall be placed in advance of the LANE ENDS MERGE RIGHT (W9-2) sign at a distance determined by [[#tab903.3.4|Table 903.3.4]].

'''Option. '''The WATCH FOR LEFT TURNING TRAFFIC IN PASSING LANE sign may be used at locations in a passing lane segment where left turns are common, such as at a county road. This sign may be installed at the judgement of the engineer.

The Two-Way Traffic on a Three-Lane Roadway (W6-5 and W6-5a) signs may be installed along three-lane roadways with two lanes in one direction and one in the opposing direction.

=={{SpanID|903.3.56}}903.3.56 TRAVEL SAFE ZONE – FINES DOUBLED Sign (W27-1)==
[[File:W27-1.jpg|center|130px|thumb|<center>'''W27-1'''</center>]]

'''Support. '''The TRAVEL SAFE ZONE - FINES DOUBLED (W27-1) sign is not to be used on a system-wide basis. It is intended for special use at locations where severe crashes are occurring. There is a requirement for regional support to focus a safety campaign involving local law enforcement and public information efforts to reduce the number and severity of crashes within the travel safe zone (see [[907.3 Travel Safe Zones #907.3 | EPG 907.3]]).

'''Standard. '''A TRAVEL SAFE ZONE – FINES DOUBLED sign shall be used to mark the beginning of a designated travel safe zone. This sign is installed in conjunction with the FINES DOUBLED ENDS (R2-20) sign (see [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2.70|EPG 903.2.70]]).

=={{SpanID|903.3.57}}903.3.57 Use of Supplemental Warning Plaques (MUTCD Section 2C.57)==

'''Option. '''A supplemental warning plaque may be displayed with a warning or regulatory sign when engineering judgment indicates that road users require additional warning information beyond that contained in the main message of the warning or regulatory sign.

'''Standard. '''Supplemental warning plaques shall be used only in combination with and installed on the same post(s) as warning or regulatory signs. They shall not be mounted alone or displayed alone.

Unless otherwise provided in the EPG for a particular plaque, supplemental warning plaques shall be mounted below the sign they supplement.

=={{SpanID|903.3.58}}903.3.58 Design of Supplemental Warning Plaques (MUTCD Section 2C.58)==

'''Standard. '''A supplemental warning plaque used with a warning sign shall have the same legend, border, and background color as the warning sign with which it is displayed. A supplemental warning plaque used with a regulatory sign shall have a black legend and border on a yellow background.

Supplemental warning plaques shall be square or rectangular.

=={{SpanID|903.3.59}}903.3.59 Advisory Speed Plaque (W13-1P) and Confirmation Advisory Speed Plaque (W13-1aP) (MUTCD Section 2C.59)==
<center>
{|
| [[File:W13-1P.png|thumb|center|84px|alt=|<center>'''W13-1P'''</center>]]
| [[File:W13-1aP.png|thumb|center|220px|alt=|<center>'''W13-1aP'''</center>]]
|}
</center>

'''Option. '''The Advisory Speed (W13-1P) plaque may be used to supplement an advance warning sign to indicate the advisory speed for a condition.

The Confirmation Advisory Speed (W13-1aP) plaque may be used to supplement a One-Direction Large Arrow (W1-6) sign on the outside of a turn or curve in line with and at approximately a right angle to approaching traffic.

'''Standard. '''The use of the Advisory Speed and Confirmation Advisory Speed plaques for horizontal curves shall be in accordance with [[#903.3.6|EPG 903.3.6]]. The Advisory Speed plaque shall also be used where an engineering study indicates a need to advise road users of the advisory speed for other roadway conditions.

The speed displayed on the Advisory Speed and Confirmation Advisory Speed plaques shall be a multiple of 5 mph. The maximum advisory speed posted shall never be more than the posted speed limit.

Except in emergencies or when the condition is temporary, an Advisory Speed or Confirmation Advisory Speed plaque shall not be installed until the advisory speed has been determined by an engineering study.

The Advisory Speed plaque shall only be used to supplement an advance warning sign. The Advisory Speed plaque or the Confirmation Advisory Speed plaque shall not be installed as a separate sign installation.

'''Guidance. '''The Advisory Speed plaque, if used with a sign that is also supplemented with another plaque, such as an Advance Street Name plaque (see [[#903.3.64|EPG 903.3.64]]), should be mounted immediately below the primary warning sign with any other plaque mounted below the Advisory Speed plaque.

'''Standard. '''The Confirmation Advisory Speed plaque shall only be used to supplement a One-Direction Large Arrow (W1-6) sign (see [[#903.3.10|EPG 903.3.10]]) or an Exit Gore (E5-1 series) sign (see [[ 903.5 Guide Signs - Freeways and Expressways (MUTCD Chapter 2E) #903.5.26| EPG 903.5.26]]) and shall not be installed as a separate sign installation.

The advisory speed shall be determined by an engineering study that follows established engineering practices.

'''Guidance. '''The advisory speed should be determined based on free-flowing traffic conditions.

Because changes in conditions, such as roadway geometrics, surface characteristics, or sight distance, might affect the advisory speed, each location should be evaluated periodically or when conditions change.

'''Support. '''Among the established engineering practices that are appropriate for the determination of the recommended advisory speed for a horizontal curve are the following:
:A. Accelerometer method
:B. 10 degrees of ball bank for all speeds

<center>
{| class="wikitable" style="padding: 1em;"
|-
| '''Engineering Study for Ball-Banking'''

The procedure to determine the safe speed on a curve or turn is a ball-bank study. To correctly use the ball-bank indicator, the ball-bank indicator should be mounted on the dashboard of a passenger car and adjusted to read "0" when the car is stationary on a level grade with the ball-bank indicator being in a vertical plane. When adjusting the indicator, all personnel who are to be in the car while testing should be in their seats and all four tires should have the same pressure. It is usually best for at least two persons to be in the car while taking the ball-bank reading: one for driving, the other for observation and recording.

The 10-degree reading that can be maintained the complete length of a curve is the appropriate safe speed for that curve. Care must be taken to maintain the car in its proper lane and to maintain a smooth, consistent speed throughout the curve. It will occasionally be found that a curve will have a higher safe speed in one direction than the other. In such cases, the lower safe speed should be used for both directions. Only increments of 5 mph are used on the Advisory Speed Plaque, therefore the curve shall be posted to the nearest 5 mph speed from the survey.
|-
|}
</center>

=={{SpanID|903.3.60}}903.3.60 Distance Plaques (W16-2P, W16-3P, W16-4P, and W7-3aP) (MUTCD Section 2C.61)==
<center>
{|
| [[File:W16-2P.png|thumb|center|130px|alt=|<center>'''W16-2P'''</center>]]
| [[File:W16-3P.png|thumb|center|130px|alt=|<center>'''W16-3P'''</center>]]
| [[File:W16-4P.png|thumb|center|130px|alt=|<center>'''W16-4P'''</center>]]
| [[File:W7-3aP.png|thumb|center|130px|alt=|<center>'''W7-3aP'''</center>]]
|}
</center>

'''Option. '''The Distance Ahead (W16-2P and W16-3P) plaques may be used to inform the road user of the distance to the condition indicated by the warning sign.

The Next Distance (W7-3aP and W16-4P) plaques may be used to inform road users of the length of roadway over which the condition indicated by the warning sign exists.

'''Standard. '''Distances shall be shown in ¼ mile or 100 ft. increments. If the distance is less than a ½ mile then feet shall be used.

=={{SpanID|903.3.61}}903.3.61 Supplemental Arrow Plaques (W16-5P and W16-6P) (MUTCD Section 2C.62)==
<center>
{|
| [[File:W16-5P_yellow.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W16-5P'''</center>]]
| [[File:W16-6P_yellow.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W16-6P'''</center>]]
|}
</center>

'''Guidance. '''If the condition indicated by a warning sign is located on an intersecting road and the distance between the intersection and condition is not sufficient to provide adequate advance placement of the warning sign, a Supplemental Arrow (W16-5P or W16-6P) plaque should be used below the warning sign.

'''Standard. '''Supplemental Arrow plaques shall have the same legend design as the Advance Turn Arrow and Directional Arrow auxiliary signs (see [[903.4 Guide Signs—Conventional Roads (MUTCD Chapter 2D) #903.4.22|EPG 903.4.22]] and [[903.4 Guide Signs—Conventional Roads (MUTCD Chapter 2D) #903.4.24|903.4.24]]) except that they shall have a black legend and border on a fluorescent yellow or fluorescent yellow-green background, as appropriate.

=={{SpanID|903.3.62}}903.3.62 Diagonal Downward-Pointing Arrow Plaques (W16-7P and W16-7aP) (MUTCD Section 2C.63)==
<center>
{|
| [[File:W16-7P_yellow.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W16-7P'''</center>]]
| [[File:W16-7aP.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W16a-7P'''</center>]]
|}
</center>

'''Support. '''Diagonal downward-pointing arrow (W16-7P and W16-7aP) plaques are used with certain Vehicular Traffic Warning signs and certain Non-Vehicular Warning signs (see [[#903.3.53|EPG 903.3.53]]), and School Crossing signs (see [[908.2 Signs (MUTCD Chapter 7B) #908.2.3|EPG 908.2.3]]) to indicate the specific location of a crossing point.

The W16-7P plaque contains a single arrow pointing diagonally down to the right or left, toward the roadway, depending on which side of the roadway it is located.

'''Option. '''A W16-7aP plaque may be used with a single crossing sign located on a narrow median separating two roadways with traffic in the same direction where the crossing traverses both roadways.

=={{SpanID|903.3.63}}903.3.63 Hill-Related Plaques (W7-3 Series) (MUTCD Section 2C.64)==
<center>
{|
| [[File:W7-3P.png|thumb|center|90px|alt=|<center>'''W7-3P'''</center>]]
| [[File:W7-3aP.png|thumb|center|90px|alt=|<center>'''W7-3aP'''</center>]]
|}
</center>

'''Guidance. '''Hill-Related (W7-3 series) plaques (see [[#903.3.14|EPG 903.3.14]]) or other appropriate legends and larger signs should be used for emphasis or where special hill characteristics exist.

On longer grades, the use of a distance (W7-3aP) plaque (see [[#903.3.14|EPG 903.3.14]]) at periodic intervals of approximately 1-mile spacing should be considered.

=={{SpanID|903.3.64}}903.3.64 Advance Street Name Plaques (W16-8P and W16-8aP) (MUTCD Section 2C.65)==
<center>
{|
| [[File:W16-8P.png|thumb|center|150px|alt=|<center>'''W16-8P'''</center>]]
| [[File:W16-8aP.png|thumb|center|260px|alt=|<center>'''W16-8aP'''</center>]]
|}
</center>

'''Support. '''Advance street name signing can provide valuable information to the motorist. Intersections that are signed with Intersection Warning (W2 series) or Advance Traffic Control (W3 series) signs typically have inherent sight distance concerns. The addition of the street name to the warning sign can aid a motorist in making decisions in a timely manner.

'''Option. '''An Advance Street Name (W16-8P or W16-8aP) plaque may be used with any Intersection (W1-10 series, W2 series, W10-2, W10-3, or W10-4) or Advance Traffic Control (W3 series) sign to identify the name of the intersecting street.

If the side road being signed is maintained by a public agency, the addition of the street name sign may be considered on request.

'''Standard. '''The lettering on Advance Street Name plaques shall be composed of a combination of lower-case letters with initial upper-case letters.

If two street names are used on the Advance Street Name plaque, a directional arrow pointing in the direction of the street shall be placed next to each street name. Arrows pointing to the left shall be placed to the left of the street name, and arrows pointing to the right shall be placed to the right of the street name.

The street name used on an Advance Street Name supplemental sign shall be the approved name used by either the local agency or the Emergency 911 Coordinator.

When used, the Advance Street Name supplemental plaque shall only be mounted below the W2 or W3 series warning sign or the Advisory Speed plaque on the same post.

The Advance Street Name supplemental plaque for a 36 in. x 36 in. warning sign shall be a maximum of 36 in. wide and for a 48 in. x 48 in. warning sign shall be a maximum of 48 in. wide.

'''Guidance. '''If two street names are used on the Advance Street Name plaque, the street names and associated arrows should be displayed in the following order:
:A. For a single intersection, the name of the street to the left should be displayed above the name of the street to the right; or
:B. For two sequential intersections, such as where the plaque is used with an Offset Side Roads (W2-7) or a Double Side Road (W2-8) sign, the name of the first street encountered should be displayed above the name of the second street encountered, and the arrow associated with the second street encountered should be an advance arrow, such as the arrow shown on the W16-6P arrow plaque (see [[#903.3.61|EPG 903.3.61]]).

=={{SpanID|903.3.65}}903.3.65 Traffic Does Not Stop Plaques (W4-4P Series) (MUTCD Section 2C.66)==
<center>
{|
| [[File:W4-4P.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W4-4P'''</center>]]
| [[File:W4-4aP.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W4-4aP'''</center>]]
| [[File:W4-4bP.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W4-4bP'''</center>]]
|}
</center>

'''Option. '''The CROSS TRAFFIC DOES NOT STOP (W4-4P) plaque may be used in combination with a STOP sign when engineering judgment indicates that conditions are present that are causing or could cause road users to misinterpret the intersection as an all-way stop.

The TRAFFIC FROM LEFT (RIGHT) DOES NOT STOP (W4-4aP) or ONCOMING TRAFFIC DOES NOT STOP (W4-4bP) plaque may be used when such messages more accurately describe the traffic controls established at the intersection.

'''Guidance. '''The W4-4aP and W4-4bP plaques should be used at intersections where STOP signs control all but one approach to the intersection, unless the only non-stopped approach is from a one-way street.

'''Standard. '''If a W4-4P series plaque is used, it shall be mounted below the STOP sign.

=={{SpanID|903.3.66}}903.3.66 IN ROAD and IN STREET Plaques (W16-1P) (MUTCD Section 2C.67)==
[[File:W16-1P.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W16-1P'''</center>]]

'''Option. '''In situations where there is a need to warn drivers to watch for other slower forms of transportation traveling along the highway, such as bicycles or horse-drawn vehicles, an IN ROAD (W16-1P) plaque may be used.

'''Standard. '''The background color of the W16-1P plaque shall match the background color of the warning sign with which it is displayed. If a W16-1P plaque is used, it shall be mounted below a Bicycle (W11-1) or Horse-Drawn Vehicle (W11-14) warning signs and shall not be mounted alone.

'''Support. '''[[914.2 Regulatory Signs (MUTCD Chapter 9B) #914.2.6 | EPG 914.2.6]] contains information about the use of a Bicycles Allowed Use of Full Lane (R9-20) sign to inform drivers of the presence of bicycles in the roadway or where bicyclists are expected or preferred to use the full lane.

=={{SpanID|903.3.67}}903.3.67 NOTICE Plaque (W16-18p)==
[[File:W16-18P.jpg|center|120px|thumb|<center>'''W16-18P'''</center>]]

'''Support. '''It is sometimes necessary to enhance the conspicuity of a regulatory sign to attract drivers’ attention to the message the sign is conveying. This may be necessary to help notify drivers to a speed limit reduction, turning movement prohibition, or bridge weight restriction. The NOTICE (W16-18P) plaque is an alternate to the use of red flags (see [[903.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 2A) #903.1.11| EPG 903.1.11]]).

'''Standard. '''The NOTICE (W16-18P) plaque shall not be used alone.

When used, the NOTICE plaque shall be installed directly above the regulatory sign it is enhancing.

'''Guidance. '''The use of the NOTICE (W16-18P) plaque should be based on engineering judgment and not systematically applied to a specific sign unless otherwise specified in the EPG.

=={{SpanID|903.3.68}}903.3.68 Exception Plaques (W16-23P and W16-24P)==
<center>
{|
| [[File:W16-23P.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W16-23P'''</center>]]
| [[File:W16-24P.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W16-24P'''</center>]]
|}
</center>

'''Support.''' The EXCEPT TO TURN (W16-23P) supplemental warning plaque is used with the NO TRUCKS LEFT LANE (R5-32) regulatory sign (see [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2.36|EPG 903.2.36]]) in locations where trucks are not allowed to drive in the left lane, but are allowed to enter the left lane in order to make a turn. The EXCEPT TO EXIT (W16-24P) supplemental warning plaque is used with the NO TRUCKS LEFT LANE (R5-32) regulatory sign in locations where trucks are not allowed to drive in the left lane, but trucks are allowed to enter the left lane in order to exit the highway.

'''Standard.''' When used, the EXCEPT TO TURN (W16-23P) and EXCEPT TO EXIT (W16-24P) supplemental warning plaques shall only be installed in conjunction with the FINES DOUBLED ENDS (R2-20) sign (see [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2.70|EPG 903.2.70]]).

=={{SpanID|903.3.69}}903.3.69 Warning Signs Provided for Other Agencies==

'''Support. '''MoDOT will provide, if requested by the appropriate local traffic authority, warning signs for conditions beyond the end of state-maintained right of way.

If the location for placement of an advance warning sign for a curve, turn, paved road, stop condition or other condition deemed appropriate falls on state-maintained right of way, MoDOT will place and maintain the traffic control device on state-maintained right-of-way at the request of the local traffic authority.

'''Standard. '''The placement of all traffic control devices on the state highway system shall be governed by the Engineering Policy Guide. MoDOT is responsible for the placement and maintenance of all signs on state-maintained right-of-way.

=={{SpanID|903.3.70}}903.3.70 Object Marker Design and Placement Height (MUTCD Section 2C.70)==

'''Support. '''Types 1, 2, and 3 object markers are used to mark obstructions within or adjacent to the roadway. Type 4 object markers are used to mark the end of a roadway.

'''Standard. '''When used, object markers (see [[#fig903.3.70|Figure 903.3.70]]) shall not have a border and shall consist of an arrangement of one or more of the following types:

Type 1—a diamond-shaped sign, at least 18 inches on a side, consisting of an all-yellow retroreflective sign (OM1-3).

Type 2—an all-yellow horizontal or vertical retroreflective sign (OM2-2V or OM2-2H), measuring 6 x 12 inches.

Type 3—a striped marker, 12 x 36 inches, consisting of a vertical rectangle with alternating black and retroreflective yellow stripes sloping downward at an angle of 45 degrees toward the side of the obstruction on which traffic is to pass. The minimum width of the yellow and black stripes shall be 3 inches.

Type 4—a diamond-shaped sign, at least 18 inches on a side, consisting of an all-red retroreflective sign (OM4-3).

'''Support. '''Type 3 object markers with stripes that begin at the upper right side and slope downward to the lower left side are designated as right object markers (OM3-R). Object markers with stripes that begin at the upper left side and slope downward to the lower right side are designated as left object markers (OM3-L). Object markers with chevron stripes that slope downward to both the lower left and lower right sides are designated as center object markers (OM3-C).

'''Guidance. '''When used for marking obstructions within the roadway or obstructions that are 8 feet or less from the shoulder or curb, the minimum mounting height, measured from the bottom of the object marker to the elevation of the near edge of the traveled way, should be 4 feet.

When used to mark obstructions more than 8 feet from the shoulder or curb, the clearance from the ground to the bottom of the object marker should be at least 4 feet.

Object markers should not present a vertical or horizontal clearance obstacle for pedestrians.

'''Option. '''When object markers or markings are applied to an obstruction that by its nature requires a lower or higher mounting, the vertical mounting height may vary according to need.

{{SpanID|fig903.3.70}}
[[File:Figure 903.3.70 Object Markers.png|thumb|center|400px|alt="The figure shows four categories of object markers used to identify obstructions.
Type 1 Object Markers (obstructions within the roadway):
A single yellow diamond-shaped marker labeled OM1-3.
Type 2 Object Markers (obstructions adjacent to the roadway):
Two yellow rectangular markers: a vertical rectangle labeled OM2-2V and a horizontal rectangle labeled OM2-2H.
Type 3 Object Markers (obstructions adjacent to or within the roadway):
Three yellow-and-black striped rectangular markers are shown:
The OM3-L marker has diagonal stripes sloping downward from left to right.
The OM3-C marker has alternating diagonal stripes forming downward-pointing chevrons.
The OM3-R marker has diagonal stripes sloping downward from right to left.
Type 4 Object Marker (end of roadway):
A red diamond-shaped marker labeled OM4-3."
|'''Figure 903.3.70''' Object Markers]]

=={{SpanID|903.3.71}}903.3.71 Object Markers for Obstructions Within the Roadway (MUTCD Section 2C.71)==

'''Standard. '''Obstructions within the roadway shall be marked with a Type 1 or Type 3 object marker. In addition to markers on the face of the obstruction, warning of approach to the obstruction shall be given by appropriate pavement markings (see [[620.2 Pavement and Curb Markings (MUTCD Chapter 3B) #620.2.15|EPG 620.2.15]]).

'''Option. '''To provide additional emphasis, a Type 1 or Type 3 object marker may be installed at or near the approach end of a median island.

To provide additional emphasis, large surfaces such as bridge piers may be painted with diagonal stripes, 12 inches or greater in width, similar in design to the Type 3 object marker.

'''Standard. '''The alternating black and retroreflective yellow stripes (OM3-L, OM3-R) shall be sloped down at an angle of 45 degrees toward the side on which traffic is to pass the obstruction. If traffic can pass to either side of the obstruction, the alternating black and retroreflective yellow stripes (OM3-C) shall form chevrons that point upwards.

'''Option. '''Appropriate signs (see [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2.34|EPG 903.2.34]] and [[#903.3.20|903.3.20]]) directing traffic to one or both sides of the obstruction may be used instead of the object marker.

=={{SpanID|903.3.72}}903.3.72 Object Markers for Obstructions Adjacent to the Roadway (MUTCD Section 2C.72)==

'''Support. '''Obstructions not actually within the roadway are sometimes so close to the edge of the road that they need a marker. These include underpass piers, bridge abutments, handrails, ends of traffic barriers, utility poles, and culvert headwalls. In other cases there might not be a physical object involved, but other roadside conditions exist, such as narrow shoulders, drop-offs, gores, small islands, and abrupt changes in the roadway alignment, that might make it undesirable for a road user to leave the roadway, and therefore would create a need for a marker.

'''Standard. '''Type 3 object markers shall be used to mark all obstructions within 3 feet of the edge of the travel lane or edge of the shoulder when shoulders are present (paved or aggregate). Type 3 object markers shall not be used to mark obstructions located beyond 8 feet of the edge of the travel lane or edge of the shoulder. See [[#fig903.3.72.1|Figures 903.3.72.1]] and [[#fig903.3.72.2|903.3.72.2]] for standard applications of Type 3 object markers.

'''Option. '''Type 3 object markers may be used to mark obstructions located 3 feet to 8 feet from the edge of the travel lane or edge of the shoulder based on engineering judgment. See [[#fig903.3.72.1|Figures 903.3.72.1]] and [[#fig903.3.72.2|903.3.72.2]] for standard applications of Type 3 object markers.

'''Guidance. '''If a Type 2 or Type 3 object marker is used to mark an obstruction adjacent to the roadway, the edge of the object marker that is closest to the road user should be installed in line with the closest edge of the obstruction.

When a marker is applied to the approach ends of guardrail or crash cushion terminals it should have the appearance of a Type 3 object marker and should be directly affixed, without a substrate, to the approach end of the guardrail or crash cushion and generally conform to the size and shape of the approach end of the guardrail or crash cushion.

'''Standard. '''Type 1 and Type 4 object markers shall not be used to mark obstructions adjacent to the roadway.

'''Guidance. '''Standard warning signs in this Chapter should also be used where applicable.

{{SpanID|fig903.3.72.1}}
[[File:Figure 903.3.72.1 Standard Application of Type 3 Object Markers Objects 2' or Less From Edge of Travel Lane_Shoulder.png|thumb|center|800px|alt="The figure shows several examples of Type 3 object marker placement for obstructions along a two-lane, two-way highway and a divided highway. Type 3 object markers are rectangular yellow and black striped panels labeled with the numbers 1, 2, and 3. In the two-lane, two-way highway examples, the first scenario shows a bridge where markers 1, 2, and 3 are placed on each side of the roadway on both approaches. Marker 1 is positioned closest to the obstruction, marker 2 is placed farther from the edge of pavement, and marker 3 is placed the farthest from the obstruction. This identical arrangement appears on all four corners of the bridge. The second scenario shows a box culvert with a length of 20 feet or more. The same arrangement of markers 1, 2, and 3 is placed on both sides of the roadway, and a dimension labeled L indicates the length of the culvert. The third scenario shows a pipe or box culvert with a length of less than 20 feet, where a single marker 1 is placed just before the culvert on the upper side of the roadway, and another marker 1 is placed just before the culvert on the lower side of the roadway. The fourth scenario shows a spillway where a single marker 1 is placed just before the spillway on the right side of the roadway.
In the divided highway examples, the first scenario shows a bridge where markers 1, 2, and 3 are placed only on the approach side of the structure for each direction of travel. No markers are shown beyond the bridge. The second scenario shows a box culvert with a length of 20 feet or more. On the approach to the culvert, object markers 1, 2, and 3 are placed on both sides of the roadway for the direction of travel. After the culvert, one additional marker 1 is placed on the right side of the roadway. A dimension labeled L indicates the length of the culvert. The third scenario shows a pipe or box culvert with a length of less than 20 feet, where a single marker 1 is placed just before the culvert.
A legend shows the direction of travel with an arrow. Notes beneath the figure explain the placement requirements. Marker 1 is placed as close to the obstruction as possible and aligned with the inside edge. Marker 2 is placed 1.5 feet from the edge of pavement and 20 feet from the end of the obstruction. Marker 3 is placed 3 feet from the edge of pavement and 40 feet from the end of the obstruction. Additional notes refer to Figure 903.3.72.2 for mounting height details and describe alternative mounting heights for areas affected by agricultural equipment."
|'''Figure 903.3.72.1''' Standard Application of Type 3 Object Markers Objects 2' or Less From Edge of Travel Lane/Shoulder]]

{{SpanID|fig903.3.72.2}}
[[File:Figure 903.3.72.2 Standard Application of Type 3 Object Markers Objects Greater Than 2' From Edge of Travel Lane_Shoulder.png|thumb|center|800px|alt="The figure shows several examples of Type 3 object marker placement for obstructions along a two-lane, two-way highway and a divided highway, as well as a detail of mounting height and lateral offset requirements. The Type 3 object markers shown are rectangular panels with alternating black and yellow diagonal stripes.
On the two-lane, two-way highway side, the first scenario shows a bridge. Two Type 3 object markers are placed on each side of the roadway at the near approach to the bridge. The same pair of markers appears on the far side of the bridge. In each location, the left and right markers are positioned close to the edges of the roadway.
The second scenario shows a box culvert with a length of 20 feet or more. A pair of Type 3 object markers is placed on both sides of the roadway on the approach to the culvert, with a labeled dimension L indicating the length of the structure. Another pair of markers is placed on both sides immediately after the culvert.
The third scenario shows a pipe or box culvert with a length of less than 20 feet. A single Type 3 object marker is placed just before the culvert on the upper side of the roadway, and another single marker is placed just before the culvert on the lower side.
The fourth scenario shows a spillway. A single Type 3 object marker is placed just before the spillway on the right side of the roadway.
On the divided highway side, the first scenario shows a bridge. One Type 3 object marker is placed on the left shoulder and one on the right shoulder on the approach side of the structure. No markers are placed beyond the bridge.
The second scenario shows a box culvert with a length of 20 feet or more. A single Type 3 object marker is placed on each side of the roadway on the approach to the culvert. Another marker is placed just past the culvert on the right shoulder. A dimension labeled L indicates the length of the culvert.
The third scenario shows pipe or box culverts with a length of less than 20 feet on both sides of the roadway. A single Type 3 object marker is placed just before each culvert, one on the left shoulder and one on the right shoulder.
A legend identifies the direction of travel with an arrow. At the lower right of the figure, a diagram labeled “Mounting Height and Offset, Type 3 Object Marker Installation” shows the required installation details. The marker is mounted so that the edge of the sign aligns with the edge of the object being marked. The bottom of the sign is elevated 4 feet above the ground. The object and ground slope are shown, along with the location of the edge of the travel lane or shoulder."
|'''Figure 903.3.72.2''' Standard Application of Type 3 Object Markers Objects Greater Than 2' From Edge of Travel Lane/Shoulder]]

=={{SpanID|903.3.73}}903.3.73 Object Markers for Ends of Roadways (MUTCD Section 2C.73)==

'''Support. '''The Type 4 object marker is used to warn and alert road users of the end of a roadway in other than construction or maintenance areas.

'''Standard. '''If an object marker is used to mark the end of a roadway, a Type 4 object marker shall be used. See ([https://www.modot.org/media/51221 Section 903 of the Missouri Standard Plans for Highway Construction]) for installation details.

'''Option. '''The Type 4 object marker may be used in instances where there are no alternate vehicular paths.

'''Standard. '''The minimum mounting height, measured vertically from the bottom of a Type 4 object marker to the elevation of the near edge of the traveled way, shall be 4 feet.

'''Guidance. '''Appropriate advance warning signs in EPG 903.3 should be used.

=={{SpanID|903.3.74}}903.3.74 Shoulder Barricade Assembly==

[[image:GB-1.gif|thumb|center|125px|<center>'''GB-1'''</center>]]

'''Option.''' Shoulder barricades may be used for added emphasis of standard warning sign installations at the direction of the engineer.

'''Standard.''' The shoulder barricade assembly shall consist of three horizontal boards (GB-1L or GB-1R) marked with reflective diagonal stripes and a 48-inch standard warning sign and a 48 in. standard warning sign with the appropriate 30-inch advisory plaque. See [[#fig903.3.74|Figure 903.3.74]] for typical construction.

GB-1R shoulder barricades shall be installed on the right side of the roadway and have diagonal stripes sloping downward from the right to the left.

GB-1L shoulder barricades shall be installed on the left side of the roadway and have diagonal stripes sloping downward from the left to the right.

'''Option.''' Supplemental signs may be installed on the shoulder barricade at the direction of the engineer.

'''Guidance.''' Shoulder Barricades should be installed on the appropriate size on wide flanged structural steel posts.

{{SpanID|fig903.3.74}}
[[File:Figure 903.3.74 Shoulder Barricade Assembly.png|thumb|center|alt="The figure shows a three-rail barricade assembly with a 48-inch diamond-shaped warning sign mounted to the front. The barricade consists of three horizontal panels with alternating black and yellow diagonal stripes. Each barricade rail is 12 inches tall, and the rails are stacked vertically with 12-inch gaps between them.
A pair of vertical dimension lines on the right side show 24-inch measurements between the midpoints of each barricade panel, indicating the vertical spacing between the centers of the top, middle, and bottom rails.
Centered on the barricade is a 48-inch warning sign, placed so that its midpoint aligns with the midpoint of the middle barricade rail. Below this sign, a rectangular supplemental MPH plaque is mounted on the lower barricade rail. Both signs are shown centered horizontally on the barricade width.
Horizontal dimensions at the top indicate that the barricade assembly is 8 feet wide with the sign centered within a 5-foot-6-inch internal spacing. To the left of the assembly, a minimum 6-foot offset is shown from the nearest post to the edge of the travel way or stabilized shoulder.
Two wide-flange vertical posts support the barricade. Vertical measurements labeled A and B (referencing EPG 903.1.15) indicate the mounting height of the barricade and signs from the ground.
A note below the figure states that when a supplemental MPH plaque is used, the signs should be mounted exactly as shown, and if no supplemental sign is used, the warning sign should be centered vertically on the barricade. A smaller detail illustration reinforces this alternate configuration, showing the warning sign centered on the three-rail barricade without a supplemental plaque."
|650px|<center>'''Figure 903.3.74''' Shoulder Barricade Assembly</center>]]

File:W16-7P yellow.png

2025-12-11T21:43:36Z

HogsettC: File uploaded with MsUpload

File uploaded with MsUpload

903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C)

2025-12-11T21:43:04Z

HogsettC: /* {{SpanID|903.3.61}}903.3.61 Supplemental Arrow Plaques (W16-5P and W16-6P) (MUTCD Section 2C.62) */

{| align="right" style="max-width: 640px;"
|__TOC__
|}
[[Category:903 Highway Signing (MUTCD Part 2)|903.03]]
=={{SpanID|903.3.1}}903.3.1 Application of Warning Signs (MUTCD Section 2C.01)==

'''Standard. '''The use of warning signs shall be based on an engineering study or on engineering judgment.

Warning signs shall be retroreflective.

'''Guidance. '''The use of warning signs should be kept to a minimum as the unnecessary use of warning signs tends to breed disrespect for all signs. In situations where the condition or activity is seasonal or temporary, the warning sign should be removed or covered when the condition or activity does not exist.

'''Support.''' The decision to use most warning signs is based on prevailing conditions. The items to be considered when determining the need for a warning sign are stopping sight distance and prevailing speed. Prevailing speed is determined by using either the posted or 85th percentile speed on the facility. Stopping sight distance is the distance a driver requires to perceive, react, and respond to a condition. The prevailing speed affects the amount of sight distance required for a condition.

It is recommended to use [[#tab903.3.1|Table 903.3.1]] to determine the stopping sight distance needed when considering the use of most warning signs. If the stopping sight distance is less than that in [[#tab903.3.1|Table 903.3.1]], a sign might be needed.

{{SpanID|tab903.3.1}}
<center>
{| class="wikitable" style="text-align: center;"
|+ '''Table 903.3.1''' Stopping Sight Distance Requirements
|-
! Prevailing Speed (mph) !! Distance (ft.)
|-
| 30 || 200
|-
| 35 || 250
|-
| 40 || 305
|-
| 45 || 360
|-
| 50 || 425
|-
| 55 || 495
|-
| 60 || 570
|-
| 65 || 645
|-
| 70 || 730
|-
| style="background-color: #ffffff;" colspan="2" | Note: Based on "A Policy on Geometric Design of Highways and Streets", 2018 Edition, AASHTO, Table 3-1, Stopping Sight Distance
|}
</center>

=={{SpanID|903.3.2}}903.3.2 Design of Warning Signs (MUTCD Section 2C.02)==

'''Standard. '''Except as provided in the following Option paragraph or unless specifically designated otherwise, all warning signs shall be diamond-shaped (square with one diagonal vertical) with a black legend and border on a fluorescent yellow background. Warning signs shall be designed in accordance with the sizes, shapes, colors, and legends contained in the FHWA “Standard Highway Signs” publication (see [[:Category:911_General_(MUTCD_Part_1) #911.1.5|EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1A.05]])).

'''Option.''' A warning sign that is larger than the size shown in the Oversized column in [[#tab903.3.3|Table 903.3.3]] for that particular sign may be diamond-shaped or may be rectangular or square in shape.

'''Support.''' The use of a shape other than diamond-shaped is typical for overhead installations. [[903.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 2A) #903.1.5|EPG 903.1.5]] contains information on allowable methods to accommodate a diamond-shaped warning sign where the lateral space available in which to install a diamond-shaped warning sign is constrained, such as in urban locations, when mounting on a narrow median barrier or adjacent to a retaining wall, including the display of the standard legend in a vertically oriented rectangle.

The use of LEDs in the border and legend of warning signs is described in [[903.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 2A) #903.1.12|EPG 903.1.12]].

'''Option.''' Word message warning signs other than those provided in the EPG may be developed and installed by MoDOT for conditions otherwise not addressed by standard signs (see [[903.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 2A) #903.1.4|EPG 903.1.4]]).

'''Support.''' MoDOT uses the fluorescent yellow-green (FYG) color exclusively for school signs. The only application where MoDOT would use the FYG color for bicycle or pedestrian signs is if a state route and local street intersected and the local jurisdiction utilized FYG color signs on their legs of the intersection. This would only be done to be in compliance with the MUTCD requirement that FYG and yellow shall not be intermixed in an application.

There are two primary reasons MoDOT has chosen not to use FYG color for bicycle or pedestrian signs. The first reason involves the MUTCD requirement that FYG color signs shall not be intermixed with other yellow color signs. A transition to FYG color signs would result in the premature replacement of all signs in an area when just one sign reached the end of its life or was damaged, resulting in wasted resources. The second reason, and most important, is to reserve FYG color signs for school signing to make these signs stand out from other signing, as school children are especially vulnerable road users.

In response to repeated requests by a local jurisdiction for MoDOT to use the FYG color for bicycle and pedestrian signs, MoDOT initiated a research study to determine if there were any documented safety benefits for using the FYG color for these signs. Having previously adopted fluorescent orange for all work zone signs, MoDOT made the transition from standard yellow to fluorescent yellow (FY) for all warning signs as there was documentation to support this change in sheeting color. However, no documentation could be found to indicate that the FYG sign color provides any safety benefits when compared to the FY sign color. The research study surveyed other state DOTs as well as local MPOs to determine if they made a change to the FYG color, how they made the decision to do so, and if they could provide any research documentation which would support FYG to be safer than FY. The study showed there was no conclusive evidence to demonstrate that FYG sign color had any safety benefit compared to the FY sign color that MoDOT was already using. Most agencies who adopted FYG did so based on engineering judgement and not based on the results of research.

'''Standard.''' Warning signs regarding conditions associated with school buses and schools and their related supplemental plaques shall have a black legend and border on a fluorescent yellow-green background (see [[908.2 Signs (MUTCD Chapter 7B) #908.2.1|EPG 908.2.1]]).

'''Option.''' Consistent with the provisions of [[902.18 Flashing Beacons (MUTCD Chapter 4S) #902.18.3|EPG 902.18.3]], a Warning Beacon may be used in combination with a standard warning sign.

=={{SpanID|903.3.3}}903.3.3 Size of Warning Signs and Plaques (MUTCD Section 2C.03)==

'''Standard.''' Except as provided in [[903.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 2A) #903.1.7|EPG 903.1.7]], the sizes for warning signs shall be as shown in [[#tab903.3.3|Table 903.3.3]].

'''Support.''' [[903.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 2A) #903.1.7|EPG 903.1.7]] contains information regarding the applicability of the various columns in [[#tab903.3.3|Table 903.3.3]].

'''Option.''' Signs and plaques larger than those shown in [[#tab903.3.3|Table 903.3.3]] may be used (see [[903.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 2A) #903.1.11|EPG 903.1.11]]) for special applications where speed, volume or other factors result in conditions where increased emphasis, improved recognition or increased legibility would be desirable, with approval from the MoDOT Highway Safety and Traffic Division.

'''Guidance. '''The minimum size for all diamond-shaped warning signs facing traffic on exit and entrance ramps at interchanges should be the size identified in [[#tab903.3.3|Table 903.3.3]] for the mainline roadway classification (Freeway/Expressway).

<center>
{{SpanID|tab903.3.3}}
{| class="wikitable" style="text-align:center;"
|+ Table 903.3.3 Warning Sign and Plaques Sizes
|-
! rowspan="2" | Sign or Plaque
! rowspan="2" | Sign Designation
! rowspan="2" | EPG Article
! colspan="2" | Conventional Road (in. x in.)
! Freeway/Expressway (in. x in.)
|-
! Standard
! Oversized
! Mainline & Ramps
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Turn
| W1-1
| [[#903.3.7|903.3.7]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Curve
| W1-2
| [[#903.3.7|903.3.7]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Reverse Turn
| W1-3
| [[#903.3.7|903.3.7]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Reverse Curve
| W1-4
| [[#903.3.7|903.3.7]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Winding Road
| W1-5
| [[#903.3.7|903.3.7]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | One-Direction Large Arrow
| W1-6
| [[#903.3.10|903.3.10]]
| 48 X 24
| 72 X 36
| 72 X 36
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Two-Direction Large Arrow
| W1-7
| [[#903.3.35|903.3.35]]
| 48 X 24
| 72 X 36
| 72 X 36
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Chevron
| W1-8
| [[#903.3.8|903.3.8]]
| 18 X 24
| 30 X 36
| 30 X 36
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Combination Horizontal Alignment/Intersection
| W1-10 Series
| [[#903.3.9|903.3.9]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Hairpin Curve
| W1-11
| [[#903.3.7|903.3.7]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Truck Rollover
| W1-13
| [[#903.3.11|903.3.11]]
| -
| -
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | 270° Curve
| W1-15
| [[#903.3.7|903.3.7]]
| -
| -
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Cross road
| W2-1
| [[#903.3.33|903.3.33]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Side Road
| W2-2
| [[#903.3.33|903.3.33]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Side Road (45°)
| W2-3, 3a
| [[#903.3.33|903.3.33]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | T Intersection
| W2-4
| [[#903.3.33|903.3.33]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Y Intersection
| W2-5
| [[#903.3.33|903.3.33]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Circular Intersection
| W2-6
| [[#903.3.33|903.3.33]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Offset Side Road
| W2-7
| [[#903.3.33|903.3.33]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 x 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Double Side Roads
| W2-8
| [[#903.3.33|903.3.33]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Watch for Entering Traffic
| W2-10a
| [[#903.3.34|903.3.34]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Watch for Approaching Traffic
| W2-11a
| [[#903.3.34|903.3.34]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Stop Ahead
| W3-1
| [[#903.3.29|903.3.29]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Yield Ahead
| W3-2
| [[#903.3.29|903.3.29]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Signal Ahead
| W3-3
| [[#903.3.29|903.3.29]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Be Prepared to Stop
| W3-4
| [[#903.3.29|903.3.29]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Reduced Speed Ahead
| W3-5
| [[#903.3.32|903.3.32]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Ramp Meter Ahead
| W3-7
| [[#903.3.30|903.3.30]]
| 36 X 36
| -
| -
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Ramp Metered When Flashing
| W3-8
| [[#903.3.30|903.3.30]]
| 36 X 36
| -
| -
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Ferry Crossing Ahead
| W3-18
| [[#903.3.54|903.3.54]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| -
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Merge
| W4-1
| [[#903.3.37|903.3.37]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Lane Ends
| W4-2
| [[#903.3.39|903.3.39]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Added Lane
| W4-3
| [[#903.3.38|903.3.38]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Cross Traffic Does Not Stop (plaque)
| W4-4P
| [[#903.3.37|903.3.37]]
| 24 X 12
| 36 X 18
| 36 X 18
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Traffic From Left Does Not Stop (plaque)
| W4-4aPL
| [[#903.3.37|903.3.37]]
| 24 X 12
| 36 X 18
| 36 X 18
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Traffic From Right Does Not Stop (plaque)
| W4-4aPR
| [[#903.3.37|903.3.37]]
| 24 X 12
| 36 X 18
| 36 X 18
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Oncoming Traffic Does Not Stop (plaque)
| W4-4bP
| [[#903.3.37|903.3.37]]
| 24 X 12
| 36 X 18
| 36 X 18
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Entering Roadway Merge
| W4-5
| [[#903.3.37|903.3.37]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Entering Roadway Added Lane
| W4-6
| [[#903.3.38|903.3.38]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Single Lane Transition
| W4-8
| [[#903.3.40|903.3.40]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | ROAD NARROWS
| W5-1
| [[#903.3.15|903.3.15]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | NARROW BRIDGE
| W5-2
| [[#903.3.16|903.3.16]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | ONE LANE BRIDGE
| W5-3
| [[#903.3.17|903.3.17]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| -
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Divided Highway
| W6-1
| [[#903.3.18|903.3.18]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| -
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Divided Highway Ends
| W6-2
| [[#903.3.19|903.3.19]]
| -
| -
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Two-Way Traffic
| W6-3
| [[#903.3.42|903.3.42]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| -
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Two-Way Traffic (2-Lane)
| W6-5
| [[#903.3.55|903.3.55]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| -
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Two-Way Traffic (3-Lane)
| W6-5a
| [[#903.3.55|903.3.55]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
|
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Passing Lane (plaque)
| W6-6aP
| [[#903.3.55|903.3.55]]
| 42 X 12
| -
| -
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Passing Lane Ends
| W6-16
| [[#903.3.55|903.3.55]]
| 36 X 36
| -
| -
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Watch for Left-Turning Traffic in Passing Lane
| W6-17
| [[#903.3.55|903.3.55]]
| 72 X 48
| -
| -
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Hill
| W7-1
| [[#903.3.14|903.3.14]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Uphill
| W7-1c
| [[#903.3.14|903.3.14]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Percent Grade
| W7-3P
| [[#903.3.63|903.3.63]]
| 24 X 18
| 30 X 24
| 30 X 24
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Next _ Miles (plaque)
| W7-3aP
| [[#903.3.63|903.3.63]]
| 24 X 18
| 30 X 24
| 30 X 24
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Bump
| W8-1
| [[#903.3.23|903.3.23]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Dip
| W8-2
| [[#903.3.23|903.3.23]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Pavement Ends
| W8-3
| [[#903.3.24|903.3.24]]
| 36 X 36
| -
| -
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Slippery When Wet
| W8-5
| [[#903.3.25|903.3.25]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Truck Crossing
| W8-6
| [[#903.3.49|903.3.49]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Fallen Rocks
| W8-14
| [[#903.3.26|903.3.26]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Road May Flood
| W8-18
| [[#903.3.28|903.3.28]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Impassable During High Water
| W8-34
| [[#903.3.28|903.3.28]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Left (Right) Lane Ends
| W9-1
| [[#903.3.39|903.3.39]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Lanes Merge
| W9-4
| [[#903.3.40|903.3.40]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Right (Left) Lane Exit Only
| W9-7
| [[#903.3.41|903.3.41]]
| 132 X 70
| -
| 132 X 70
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Bicycle
| W11-1
| [[#903.3.45|903.3.45]]
| 36 X 36
| -
| -
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Pedestrian
| W11-2
| [[#903.3.53|903.3.53]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| -
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Cattle
| W11-4
| [[#903.3.53|903.3.53]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
|
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Farm Vehicle
| W11-5
| [[#903.3.51|903.3.51]]
| 36 X 36
| -
| -
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Equestrian
| W11-7
| [[#903.3.53|903.3.53]]
| 36 X 36
| -
| -
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Emergency Vehicle
| W11-8
| [[#903.3.52|903.3.52]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Truck Entrance
| W11-10
| [[#903.3.50|903.3.50]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Emergency Signal Ahead (plaque)
| W11-12P
| [[#903.3.52|903.3.52]]
| 36 X 30
| -
| 36 X 30
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Horse-Drawn Vehicle
| W11-14
| [[#903.3.48|903.3.48]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Bike / Ped
| W11-15
| [[#903.3.46|903.3.46]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Trail Crossing
| W11-15a
| [[#903.3.47|903.3.47]]
| 36 X 36
| -
| -
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Double Arrow
| W12-1
| [[#903.3.20|903.3.20]]
| 30 X 30
| 36 X 36
| 36 X 36
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Low Clearance Advance
| W12-2
| [[#903.3.22|903.3.22]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Low Clearance (overhead)
| W12-2a
| [[#903.3.22|903.3.22]]
| 84 X 24
| -
| 84 X 24
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Advisory Speed
| W13-1P
| [[#903.3.33|903.3.33]]
| 24 X 24
| 30 X 30
| 30 X 30
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Advisory Speed (plaque)
| W13-1aP
| [[#903.3.33|903.3.33]]
| 48 X 15
| -
| 48 X 15
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Advisory Exit Speed
| W13-2
| [[#903.3.12|903.3.12]]
| -
| -
| 48 X 60
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Advisory Ramp Speed
| W13-3
| [[#903.3.12|903.3.12]]
| -
| -
| 48 X 60
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Advisory Exit Speed with 270° Loop Arrow
| W13-6
| [[#903.3.12|903.3.12]]
| -
| -
| 48 X 84
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Advisory Ramp Speed with 270° Loop Arrow
| W13-7
| [[#903.3.12|903.3.12]]
| -
| -
| 48 X 84
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Advisory Exit Speed with 180° Hairpin Arrow
| W13-8
| [[#903.3.12|903.3.12]]
| -
| -
| 48 X 84
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Advisory Ramp Speed with 180° Hairpin Arrow
| W13-9
| [[#903.3.12|903.3.12]]
| -
| -
| 48 X 84
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Advisory Exit Speed with 90° Turn Arrow
| W13-10
| [[#903.3.12|903.3.12]]
| -
| -
| 48 X 72
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Advisory Ramp Speed with 90° Turn Arrow
| W13-11
| [[#903.3.12|903.3.12]]
| -
| -
| 48 X 72
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Advisory Exit Speed with Truck Rollover
| W13-12
| [[#903.3.12|903.3.12]]
| -
| -
| 48 X 84
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Advisory Ramp Speed with Truck Rollover
| W13-13
| [[#903.3.12|903.3.12]]
| -
| -
| 48 X 84
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Vehicle Speed Feedback Sign
| W13-20
| [[#903.3.13|903.3.13]]
| 30 X 36
| -
| 48 X 60
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Vehicle Speed Feedback (plaque)
| W13-20aP
| [[#903.3.13|903.3.13]]
| 30 X 24
| -
| 48 X 36
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Dead End
| W14-1
| [[#903.3.21|903.3.21]]
| 36 X 36
| 36 X 36
| -
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | No Outlet
| W14-2
| [[#903.3.21|903.3.21]]
| 36 X 36
| 36 X 36
| -
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | No Passing Zone (pennant)
| W14-3
| [[#903.3.43|903.3.43]]
| -
| -
| -
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Road Ends
| W14-13
| [[#903.3.21|903.3.21]]
| 36 X 36
| 36 X 36
| -
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | In Road (plaque)
| W16-1P
| [[#903.3.66|903.3.66]]
| 24 X 18
| -
| 24 X 18
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | XX FEET (plaque)
| W16-2P
| [[#903.3.60|903.3.60]]
| 24 X 18
| 30 X 24
| 30 X 24
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | XX MILES (plaque)
| W16-3P
| [[#903.3.60|903.3.60]]
| 24 X 18
| 30 X 24
| 30 X 24
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | NEXT _ FEET (plaque)
| W16-4P
| [[#903.3.60|903.3.60]]
| 24 X 18
| 30 X 24
| 30 X 24
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Directional Arrow (plaque)
| W16-5P
| [[#903.3.61|903.3.61]]
| 30 X 21
| -
| 30 X 21
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Advance Turn Arrow (plaque)
| W16-6P
| [[#903.3.61|903.3.61]]
| 30 X 21
| -
| 30 X 21
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Downward Diagonal Arrow (plaque)
| W16-7P
| [[#903.3.62|903.3.62]]
| 30 X 21
| -
| 30 X 21
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Dual Downward Diagonal Arrow (plaque)
| W16-7aP
| [[#903.3.62|903.3.62]]
| 30 X 21
| -
| 30 X 21
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Two Line Street Name (plaque)
| W16-8aP
| [[#903.3.64|903.3.64]]
| Varies X 15
| Varies X 24
| Varies X 24
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Advance Street Name (plaque)
| W16-8P
| [[#903.3.64|903.3.64]]
| Varies X 8
| Varies X 12
| Varies X 12
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Ahead (plaque)
| W16-9P
| [[#903.3.44|903.3.44]], [[#903.3.53|903.3.53]]
| 30 X 18
| -
| 30 X 18
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Notice (plaque)
| W16-18P
| [[#903.3.68|903.3.68]]
| 36 X 12
| 48 X 18
| 48 X 18
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Except to Turn (plaque)
| W16-23P
| [[#903.3.68|903.3.68]]
| 48 X 30
| -
| -
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Except to Exit (plaque)
| W16-24P
| [[#903.3.68|903.3.68]]
| 48 X 30
| -
| -
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Double Reverse Curve Left - 1 Lane
| W24-1L
| [[#903.3.7|903.3.7]]
| 36 X 36
| -
| 36 X 36
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Double Reverse Curve Left - 2 Lanes
| W24-1aL
| [[#903.3.7|903.3.7]]
| 36 X 36
| -
| 36 X 36
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Double Reverse Curve Left - 3 Lanes
| W24-1bL
| [[#903.3.7|903.3.7]]
| 36 X 36
| -
| 36 X 36
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Oncoming Traffic Has Extended Green
| W25-1
| [[#903.3.36|903.3.36]]
| 24 X 30
| -
| -
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Oncoming Traffic May Have Extended Green
| W25-2
| [[#903.3.36|903.3.36]]
| 24 X 30
| -
| -
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Watch for Stopped Traffic
| W26-1
| [[#903.3.31|903.3.31]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Travel Safe Zone
| W27-1
| [[#903.3.56|903.3.56]]
| 36 X 48
| 48 X 60
| 48 X 60
|}
</center>

=={{SpanID|903.3.4}}903.3.4 Placement of Warning Signs (MUTCD Section 2C.04)==

'''Support.''' Information on the placement of warning signs is contained in [[903.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 2A) #903.1.13|EPG 903.1.13]] through [[903.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 2A) #903.1.18|903.1.18]].

The time needed for detection, recognition, decision, and reaction is called the Perception-Response Time (PRT). [[#tab903.3.4|Table 903.3.4]] is provided as an aid for determining warning sign location. The distances shown in [[#tab903.3.4|Table 903.3.4]] can be adjusted for roadway features, other signing, and to improve visibility.

'''Guidance. '''Warning signs should be placed so that they provide an adequate PRT. The distances contained in [[#tab903.3.4|Table 903.3.4]] should be applied with engineering judgment.

Minimum spacing between warning signs with different messages should be based on the estimated PRT for driver comprehension of and reaction to the second sign.

The effectiveness of the placement of warning signs should be periodically evaluated. This is typically accomplished during routine sign inspection cycles. [[903.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 2A) #903.1.19|EPG 903.1.19]] contains information regarding MoDOT’s sign maintenance program.

'''Standard. '''When any part of a warning sign assembly (post, sign, plaque, etc.) is replaced, maintained or modified, the placement of the sign shall be reviewed based on [[#tab903.3.4|Table 903.3.4]]. Additionally, mounting height shall be reviewed for conformance with [[903.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 2A) #903.1.15|EPG 903.1.15]].

{{SpanID|tab903.3.4}}
{| class="wikitable"
|-
|+ '''Table 903.3.4''' Guidelines for Advance Placement of Warning Signs
|- style="text-align:center;"
! rowspan="3" | Posted or 85th-Percentile Speed
! colspan="9" | Advance Placement Distance1
|- style="text-align:center;"
! rowspan="2" style="max-width: 200px;" | Condition A: Speed reduction and lane changing in heavy traffic2
! colspan="8" | Condition B: Deceleration to the listed advisory (mph) for the condition
|- style="text-align:center;"
! 03
! 104
! 204
! 304
! 404
! 504
! 604
! 704
|- style="vertical-align:middle;"
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 20 mph
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 225 ft
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 115 ft
| N/A5
| —
| —
| —
| —
| —
| —
|- style="vertical-align:middle;"
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 25 mph
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 325 ft
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 155 ft
| N/A5
| N/A5
| —
| —
| —
| —
| —
|- style="vertical-align:middle;"
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 30 mph
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 460 ft
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 200 ft
| N/A5
| N/A5
| —
| —
| —
| —
| —
|- style="vertical-align:middle;"
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 35 mph
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 565 ft
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 250 ft
| N/A5
| N/A5
| N/A5
| —
| —
| —
| —
|- style="vertical-align:middle;"
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 40 mph
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 670 ft
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 305 ft
| 100 ft6
| 100 ft6
| N/A5
| —
| —
| —
| —
|- style="vertical-align:middle;"
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 45 mph
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 775 ft
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 360 ft
| 125 ft
| 100 ft6
| 100 ft6
| N/A5
| —
| —
| —
|- style="vertical-align:middle;"
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 50 mph
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 885 ft
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 425 ft
| 200 ft
| 175 ft
| 125 ft
| 100 ft6
| —
| —
| —
|- style="vertical-align:middle;"
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 55 mph
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 990 ft
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 495 ft
| 275 ft
| 225 ft
| 200 ft
| 125 ft
| N/A5
| —
| —
|- style="vertical-align:middle;"
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 60 mph
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 1100 ft
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 570 ft
| 350 ft
| 325 ft
| 275 ft
| 200 ft
| 100 ft6
| —
| —
|- style="vertical-align:middle;"
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 65 mph
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 1200 ft
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 645 ft
| 450 ft
| 400 ft
| 350 ft
| 275 ft
| 200 ft
| 100 ft6
| —
|- style="vertical-align:middle;"
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 70 mph
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 1250 ft
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 730 ft
| 525 ft
| 500 ft
| 450 ft
| 375 ft
| 275 ft
| 150 ft
| —
|- style="vertical-align:middle;"
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 75 mph
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 1350 ft
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 820 ft
| 625 ft
| 600 ft
| 550 ft
| 475 ft
| 375 ft
| 250 ft
| 100 ft6
|-
| style="background-color: #ffffff" colspan="11" |
|-
| style="background-color: #ffffff" colspan="11" | Note 1 — For Advanced Placement Distance — General
* The distances are adjusted for a sign legibility distance of 180 feet for Condition A.
* The distances for Condition B (with the exception of the potential stop condition) have been adjusted for a sign legibility distance of 250 feet, which is appropriate for an alignment warning symbol sign.
* For Conditions A and B, warning signs with less than 6-inch legend or more than four words, a minimum of 100 feet should be added to the advance placement distance to provide adequate legibility of the warning sign.

Note 2 — For Condition A — Speed Reduction and Lane Change Conditions
* Typical conditions are locations where the road user must use extra time to adjust speed and change lanes in heavy traffic because of a complex driving situation or reduce to a new posted speed.
* Typical signs are Merge, Right Lane Ends, and Reduced Speed Ahead.
* The distances are determined by providing the driver a PRT of 14.0 to 14.5 seconds for vehicle maneuvers (2018 AASHTO Policy, Table 3-3, Decision Sight Distance, Avoidance Maneuver E) and adjusted for a legibility distance of 180 feet for the appropriate sign.

Note 3 — For Condition B — Stop Condition
* Typical condition is the warning of a potential stop situation.
* Typical signs are Stop Ahead, Yield Ahead, Signal Ahead, and Intersection Warning signs.
* The distances are based on the 2018 AASHTO Policy, Table 3-1, Stopping Sight Distance, providing a PRT of 2.5 seconds, a deceleration rate of 11.2 feet/second2.

Note 4 — For Condition B — Reduced Speed Conditions
* Typical conditions are locations where the road user must decrease speed to maneuver through the warned condition.
* Typical signs are Turn, Curve, Reverse Turn, Reverse Curve, or Reduced Speed Ahead.
* The distance is determined by providing a 2.5 second PRT, a vehicle deceleration rate of 10 feet/second2, and adjusted for a sign legibility distance of 250 feet.

Note 5 — For Condition B — N/A Values
* No suggested distances are provided for these speeds, as the placement location is dependent on site conditions and other signing.
* An alignment warning sign may be placed anywhere from the point of curvature up to 100 feet in advance of the curve.
* However, the alignment warning sign should be installed in advance of the curve and at least 100 feet from any other signs.

Note 6 — For Condition B — for shortest distance values per posted speed
* The minimum advance placement distance is listed as 100 feet to provide adequate spacing between signs.

General Note:

Warning signs that advise road users about conditions that are not related to a specific location can be installed in an appropriate location, based on engineering judgment.
|}

=={{SpanID|903.3.5}}903.3.5 Horizontal Alignment Warning Signs – General (MUTCD Section 2C.05)==

'''Support.''' A variety of horizontal alignment warning signs, pavement markings (see [[620.2 Pavement and Curb Markings (MUTCD Chapter 3B)|EPG 620.2]]), and delineation (see [[620.6 Delineators (MUTCD Chapter 3G)|EPG 620.6]]) can be used to advise motorists of a change in the roadway alignment. Uniform application of these traffic control devices with respect to the amount of change in the roadway alignment conveys a consistent message establishing driver expectancy and promoting effective roadway operations. The design and application of horizontal alignment warning signs to meet those requirements are addressed in [[#903.3.5|EPG 903.3.5]] through [[#903.3.12|903.3.12]].

The following list identifies treatments that might be used in advance of or within a change in horizontal alignment:
:A. Horizontal alignment (Turn (W1-1), Curve (W1-2, W1-10 series, W1-11, W1-13, W1-15), Reverse Turn (W1-3), Reverse Curve (W1-4), Winding Road (W1-5), Exit Speed (W13-2), Ramp Speed (W13-3), and Combination Horizontal Alignment (Advisory Exit or Ramp Speed W13-6 through W13-11)) signs (see [[#903.3.7|EPG 903.3.7]], [[#903.3.9|903.3.9]], and [[#903.3.12|903.3.12]])
:B. Advisory Speed (W13-1P) plaque (see [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.59|EPG 903.3.59]])
:C. Chevron Alignment (W1-8) signs (see [[#903.3.8|EPG 903.3.8]])
:D. One Direction Large Arrow (W1-6) sign (see [[#903.3.10|EPG 903.3.10]])
:E. Sign or marking conspicuity enhancements (see [[903.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 2A) #903.1.11|EPG 903.1.11]])
:F. Longitudinal rumble strips (see [[620.10 Rumble Strip Markings (MUTCD Chapter 3K) #620.10.1|EPG 620.10.1]])
:G. Vehicle Speed Feedback Sign (see [[#903.3.13|EPG 903.3.13]])

In addition, considerations other than traffic control devices, such as improved surface friction (high friction surface treatments), pavement edge treatments, lighting improvements, increased superelevation, and longitudinal rumble strips, might be used in advance of or within a change in horizontal alignment.

'''Guidance.''' Except as provided in [[#903.3.6|EPG 903.3.6]], the selection of traffic control devices used to warn road users of a change in horizontal alignment or to provide guidance in navigating the change in horizontal alignment should be based on consideration of one or more of the following factors:
:A. The speed of traffic on the approach to the change in horizontal alignment
:B. The recommended advisory speed for the change in horizontal alignment
:C. The difference between the speed limit and the advisory speed, or the speed differential for the change in horizontal alignment
:D. Daily traffic volumes on the roadway
:E. The typical mix of vehicle types on the roadway
:F. Sight distance throughout the change in horizontal alignment
:G. Other types of traffic control devices that are used in advance of and within the change in horizontal alignment on the same roadway segment
:H. The crash history of the change in horizontal alignment
:I. The presence of driveways or intersections within the curve radius

=={{SpanID|903.3.6}}903.3.6 Device Selection for Changes in Horizontal Alignment (MUTCD Section 2C.06)==

'''Standard: '''[[#tab903.3.6|Table 903.3.6]] shall be used to specify the type(s) of warning signs to be used in advance of, and/or along, a horizontal curve, except as provided in following Option paragraph. The speed differential shall be the difference between the horizontal curve’s advisory speed and the roadway’s posted speed limit on the approach to the curve.

'''Option. '''A One Direction Large Arrow (W1-6) sign may be used to supplement Chevron Alignment (W1-8) signs when:
:A. Site conditions limit the number of Chevron Alignment signs that are visible; or

:B. The number of Chevron Alignment signs that can be installed within the change in horizontal alignment is less than the number determined by the spacing specified in [[#903.3.8|EPG 903.3.8]].

Additional or supplemental devices may be used for a change in horizontal alignment on the basis of engineering judgment.

If engineering judgment indicates the need for the horizontal alignment sign for a curve that can be driven at or above the posted speed limit, horizontal alignment signs may be installed with the Advisory Speed Plaque (W13-1P) displaying an advisory speed equal to the posted speed limit.

Warrants for center lines and edge lines are provided in EPG [[620.2 Pavement and Curb Markings (MUTCD Chapter 3B) #620.2.2|620.2.2]] and [[620.2 Pavement and Curb Markings (MUTCD Chapter 3B) #620.2.11|620.2.11]], respectively.

Provisions for delineators are contained in [[620.6 Delineators (MUTCD Chapter 3G)| EPG 620.6]].

Provisions for Advisory Speed (W13-1P) plaques are contained in [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.59|EPG 903.3.59]].

<center>
{{SpanID|tab903.3.6}}
{| class="wikitable"
|+'''Table 903.3.6''' Application of Warning Signs for Changes in Horizontal Alignment
|-
! Speed Differential1 !! Warning Signs Required
|-
| 5 to 10 mph || Horizontal Alignment warning sign2 Advisory Speed plaque3
|-
| 15 mph or more || Horizontal Alignment warning sign2 Advisory Speed plaque3 Chevron Alignment signs4
|-
| style="background-color: #ffffff;" colspan="2" |
# Speed differential shall be the difference between the horizontal curve’s advisory speed and the roadway’s posted speed limit.
# Provisions for the use of Horizontal Alignment warning signs are contained in [[#903.3.6|EPG 903.3.6]].
# Provision for Advisory Speed (W13-1P) plaques are contained in [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.59|EPG 903.3.59]].
# [[#903.3.6|EPG 903.3.6]] contains information about the use of a One Direction Large Arrow (W1-6) sign in place of or to supplement chevron alignment signs.
|}
</center>

=={{SpanID|903.3.7}}903.3.7 Horizontal Alignment Signs (W1-1 through W1-5, W1-11, W1-15, W24-1) (MUTCD Section 2C.07)==
<center>
{| style=""
|-
|[[File:W1-1.png|center|100px|thumb|<center>'''W1-1'''</center>]]
|[[File:W1-2.png|center|100px|thumb|<center>'''W1-2'''</center>]]
|[[File:W1-3.png|center|100px|thumb|<center>'''W1-3'''</center>]]
|[[File:W1-4.png|center|100px|thumb|<center>'''W1-4'''</center>]]
|-
|[[File:W1-5.png|center|100px|thumb|<center>'''W1-5'''</center>]]
|[[File:W1-11.png|center|100px|thumb|<center>'''W1-11'''</center>]]
|[[File:W1-15.png|center|100px|thumb|<center>'''W1-15'''</center>]]
|[[File:W24-1L.png|center|100px|thumb|<center>'''W24-1L'''</center>]]
|}
</center>

'''Standard. '''When a horizontal alignment sign is required as provided in [[#903.3.6|EPG 903.3.6]] the sign installed in advance of the curve shall be a Curve (W1-2) sign unless a different sign is recommended or allowed by the provisions of this Article.

A Turn (W1-1) sign shall be used instead of a Curve (W1-2) sign in advance of a horizontal curve that has an advisory speed of 30 mph or less.

'''Guidance. '''Where there are two changes in roadway alignment in opposite directions that are separated by a tangent distance of less than 600 feet, the Reverse Turn (W1-3) sign should be used instead of multiple Turn (W1-1) signs or the Reverse Curve (W1-4) sign should be used instead of multiple Curve (W1-2) signs.

'''Support. '''[[#fig903.3.7.1|Figures 903.3.7.1]] and [[#fig903.3.7.2|903.3.7.2]] provide examples of warning signs used for turns and curves.

'''Option. '''A Winding Road (W1-5) sign may be used instead of multiple Turn (W1-1) or Curve (W1-2) signs where there are three or more changes in roadway alignment each separated by a tangent distance of less than 600 feet.

A NEXT XX MILES (W7-3aP) supplemental distance plaque (see [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.60|EPG 903.3.60]]) may be installed below the Winding Road sign where continuous roadway curves exist for a specific distance.

If the curve has a change in horizontal alignment of 135 degrees or more, the Hairpin Curve (W1-11) sign may be used instead of a Turn or Curve sign.

If the curve has a change of direction of approximately 270 degrees, such as on a cloverleaf interchange ramp, the 270-degree Loop (W1-15) sign may be used instead of a Turn or Curve sign.

'''Guidance. '''When the Hairpin Curve sign or the 270-degree Loop sign is installed, either a One-Direction Large Arrow (W1-6) sign or Chevron Alignment (W1-8) signs should be installed on the outside of the turn or curve.

'''Option.''' A double reverse left sign (W24-1L) and advisory speed plaque may be used on the crossroad approaches to a Diverging Diamond Interchange (DDI) when the difference between the speed limit and the advisory speed is 5 mph or greater. The need for this signing is based on engineering judgment if speeding through a DDI is a concern. An Advisory speed plaque is typically installed where the posted speed on the crossroad of the DDI is 40 mph or greater.

'''Standard.''' If used with an advisory speed plaque, the W24-1L sign shall display the number of double reverse arrows which indicates the number of lanes on the crossroad going through the DDI in the direction of travel where the sign is observed.

'''Support. '''See [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.59|EPG 903.3.59]] for information regarding Advisory Speed Plaques (W13-1P).

{{SpanID|fig903.3.7.1}}
[[File:Figure 903.3.7.1 Example of Warning Signs for Changes in Horizontal Alignment (Sheet 1 of 2).png|thumb|center|800px|alt="A segment of a vertical two-lane north-south roadway that curves to the right, or east, is shown. At the bottom of the figure, facing south and to the right of the northbound lane, a sign assembly composed of a W1-2R sign mounted above a W13-1P plaque is shown. The W1-2R is a yellow diamond-shaped sign with a black arrow curving up and to the right.
Continuing northbound, on the left side of the roadway, the following sequence of W1-8 chevron signs is shown from bottom to top: four consecutive W1-8L chevrons facing north, one W1-8R chevron facing south, one W1-8L chevron facing north, one W1-8R chevron facing south, one W1-8L chevron facing north, and finally four consecutive W1-8R chevrons facing south. Continuing north on the same side of the road, facing north and to the right of the southbound lane, a sign assembly composed of a W1-2L sign mounted above a W13-1P plaque is shown."
|'''Figure 903.3.7.1''' Examples of Warning Signs for Changes in Horizontal Alignment ''(Sheet 1 of 2)'']]

{{SpanID|fig903.3.7.2}}
[[File:Figure 903.3.7.2 Example of Warning Signs for Changes in Horizontal Alignment (Sheet 2 of 2) .png|thumb|center|800px|alt="A segment of a vertical two-lane north-south roadway that curves to the right, or east, is shown.
At the bottom of the figure, facing south and to the right of the northbound lane, a sign assembly composed of a W1-1R sign mounted above a W13-1P plaque is shown. W1-1R is shown as a yellow diamond-shaped sign with a black arrow pointing up and then a sharp turn to the right.
On the left side of the roadway, the following sequence of optional W1-8 chevron signs are shown from bottom to top: two W1-8L chevrons facing north, followed by one W1-8R chevron facing south, then one W1-8L chevron facing north, and finally one W1-8R chevron facing south.
Just north of this sequence, a sign assembly composed of a W1-6R sign mounted above an optional W13-1aP plaque is shown facing south.
North of that on the curve, still on the left side of the roadway, there is a sequence of optional W1-8 chevron signs as follows: one W1-8R facing southwest, one W1-8L facing northeast, one W1-8R facing southwest, and one W1-8L facing northeast.
East of that, following the curve, another sign assembly composed of a W1-6L sign mounted above an optional W13-1aP plaque is shown facing east.
To the east of that, two optional W1-8R chevrons are shown facing west.
Finally, at the top right of the figure, facing east and to the right of the westbound lane, a sign assembly composed of a W1-1L sign mounted above a W13-1P plaque is shown. The W1-1L is a yellow diamond-shaped sign with a black arrow pointing up and then sharply turning to the left."
|'''Figure 903.3.7.2''' Examples of Warning Signs for Changes in Horizontal Alignment ''(Sheet 2 of 2)'']]

=={{SpanID|903.3.8}}903.3.8 Chevron Alignment Sign (W1-8) (MUTCD Section 2C.08)==
[[File:W1-8.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W1-8'''</center>]]

'''Support. '''Examples of when to use Chevron signs include locations where there is a crash history, evidence of drivers losing control on a curve or turn, a sharp change in horizontal alignment not readily visible to the driver, or as a systemic curve improvement program.

The majority of fatal and serious injury crashes are attributed to lane departure crashes (State Strategic Highway Safety Plan). Chevrons are a highly cost-effective way to reduce lane departure crashes in curves and turns.

Implementation of the 2009 MUTCD requirements for chevron deployments resulted in a statewide reduction in severe lane departure crashes in horizontal curves. To maintain this observed safety benefit, MoDOT has established standards based on the 2009 MUTCD criteria, which is above the minimum requirements in the 11th Edition of the MUTCD. For more details on the safety benefits of chevrons, contact the Highway Safety and Traffic Division.

'''Standard. '''The use of the Chevron Alignment (W1-8) sign (see [[#fig903.3.7.2|Figure 903.3.7.2]]) to provide additional emphasis and guidance for a change in horizontal alignment shall be in accordance with the information provided in [[#903.3.6|EPG 903.3.6]].

The Chevron Alignment sign shall be a vertical rectangle. No border shall be used on the Chevron Alignment sign.

If used, Chevron Alignment signs shall be installed on the outside of a turn or curve, in line with and at approximately a right angle to approaching traffic. Chevron Alignment signs shall be installed at a minimum height of 4 feet, measured vertically from the bottom of the sign to the elevation of the near edge of the traveled way, which will locate the sign at approximately the driver’s eye height.

'''Guidance. '''The approximate spacing of Chevron Alignment signs on the turn or curve measured from the point of curvature (PC) should be as shown in [[#tab903.3.8|Table 903.3.8]].

In addition to the Chevron Alignment signs placed throughout the curve, there should be one sign in advance of the PC and one after the PT. These signs should be spaced the same as the Chevron Alignment signs in the curve.

'''Option.''' The values in [[#tab903.3.8|Table 903.3.8]] are typical and variances for driveways, public roads, and other signs may alter the spacing. Engineering judgment may also be used to modify the spacing as long as road users always have at least two Chevron Alignment signs in view until the change in alignment eliminates the need for the signs.

Based on engineering judgement, chevron alignment signs may be omitted within incorporated city limits.

'''Guidance.''' The Chevron Alignment signs should be visible for a sufficient distance to provide the road user with adequate time to react to the change in alignment.

The single-sided Chevron sign should only be used where only one direction of travel is impacted, such as on an expressway. The double-side Chevron (W1-8D) should be used on two-lane, two-way roads.

At the end of a four-lane divided highway, where the traffic reduces to two lanes, chevrons should be used to direct traffic from the dual lanes that are ending and being redirected to the two-lane roadway.

'''Option. '''Chevron Alignment signs may also be used on any other roadways based on engineering judgment.

Chevron Alignment signs may be used in addition to the One-Direction Large Arrow (W1-6) sign on turns posted at 30 mph or less.

'''Guidance. '''As chevrons are installed, all horizontal alignment signing (chevrons, curve and turn signing, advisory speed plaques and arrow boards) on a corridor should be evaluated to ensure the installations meet current standards. Aspects of existing horizontal alignment signs to look at should include spacing of existing chevrons, offset and mounting heights of any horizontal alignment sign as well as the distance advanced warning signs are installed from the curve/turn. The need for curve/turn signs should be reevaluated if the ball banking measurements from when the signs were installed are out of date due to roadway/pavement improvements or due to changes in vehicle performance.

'''Option. '''LEDs may be used to enhance the conspicuity of Chevron Alignment signs (see [[903.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 2A) #903.1.12|EPG 903.1.12]]).

'''Standard. '''The LEDs used in the Chevron Alignment sign shall consist of yellow LEDs outlining the chevron symbol.

Chevron Alignment signs shall not be placed on the far side of a T-intersection facing traffic on the stem approach to warn drivers that a through movement is not physically possible, as this is the function of a Two-Direction (or One-Direction) Large Arrow sign.

Chevron Alignment signs shall not be used to mark obstructions within or adjacent to the roadway, including the beginning of guardrails or barriers, as this is the function of an object marker (see [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.70|EPG 903.3.70]]).

Chevron Alignment signs directing traffic to the right shall not be used in the central island of a roundabout or a neighborhood traffic circle.

{{SpanID|tab903.3.8}}
<center>
{| class="wikitable" style="text-align: center;"
|+ '''Table 903.3.8''' Typical Spacing of Chevron Alignment Signs on Horizontal Curves
|-
! Advisory Speed !! Curve Radius !! Sign Spacing
|-
| 15 mph or less || Less than 200 feet || 40 feet
|-
| 20 to 30 mph || 200 to 400 feet || 60 feet
|-
| 35 to 45 mph || 401 to 700 feet || 80 feet
|-
| 50 to 60 mph || 701 to 1,250 feet || 100 feet
|-
| more than 60 mph || More than 1,250 feet || 140 feet
|-
| style="background-color: #ffffff; max-width: 500px;" colspan="3" | Note: The relationship between curve radius and the advisory speed shown in this table should not be used to determine the advisory speed.
|}
</center>

=={{SpanID|903.3.9}}903.3.9 Combination Horizontal Alignment/Intersection Signs (W1-10 Series) (MUTCD Section 2C.09)==
<center>
{| style=""
|-
|[[File:W1-10.png|center|100px|thumb|<center>'''W1-10'''</center>]]
|[[File:W1-10a.png|center|100px|thumb|<center>'''W1-10a'''</center>]]
|[[File:W1-10b.png|center|100px|thumb|<center>'''W1-10b'''</center>]]
|-
|[[File:W1-10c.png|center|100px|thumb|<center>'''W1-10c'''</center>]]
|[[File:W1-10d.png|center|100px|thumb|<center>'''W1-10d'''</center>]]
|[[File:W1-10e.png|center|100px|thumb|<center>'''W1-10e'''</center>]]
|}
</center>

'''Option. '''The Turn (W1-1) sign, the Curve (W1-2) sign, and the Reverse Curve (W1-4) sign may be combined with the Cross Road (W2-1) sign or the Side Road (W2-2 or W2-3) sign to create a combination Horizontal Alignment/Intersection (W1-10 series) sign that depicts the condition where an intersection occurs within or immediately adjacent to a turn or curve.

'''Support. '''[[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.64|EPG 903.2.64]] contains information about the use of an advance street name plaque to identify an intersecting road.

'''Guidance. '''Elements of the combination Horizontal Alignment/Intersection sign related to horizontal alignment should comply with the provisions of [[#903.3.7|EPG 903.3.7]], and elements related to intersection configuration should comply with the provisions of [[#903.3.33|EPG 903.3.33]]. The symbol design should approximate the configuration of the intersecting roadway(s). No more than one Cross Road or two Side Road symbols should be displayed on any one combination Horizontal Alignment/Intersection sign.

A layout of the proposed sign should be included when ordering or when including the sign in design plans.

'''Standard. '''The use of the combination Horizontal Alignment/Intersection sign shall be in accordance with the provisions of [[#903.3.7|EPG 903.3.7]] for the appropriate Turn or Curve sign.

If used, a W1-10L sign designation shall indicate a curve to the left, while a W1-10R sign designation shall indicate a curve to the right.

=={{SpanID|903.3.10}}903.3.10 One-Direction Large Arrow Sign (W1-6) (MUTCD Section 2C.10)==

[[File:W1-6.png|100px|thumb|center|<center>'''W1-6'''</center>]]

'''Standard. '''A One-Direction Large Arrow sign shall be used to delineate a change in horizontal alignment where the advisory speed is 30 mph or lower.

The One-Direction Large Arrow sign shall be a horizontal rectangle with an arrow pointing to the left or right.

If used, the One-Direction Large Arrow sign shall be installed on the outside of a turn or curve in line with and at approximately a right angle to approaching traffic.

The One-Direction Large Arrow sign shall not be used where there is no alignment change in the direction of travel, such as at the beginnings and ends of medians or at center piers.

The One-Direction Large Arrow sign directing traffic to the right shall not be used in the central island of a roundabout.

'''Guidance. '''The One-Direction Large Arrow sign should be visible for a sufficient distance to provide the road user with adequate time to react to the change in alignment.

If Chevron Alignment signs are used to supplement the One-Direction Large Arrow sign, chevrons, and arrow signs should be installed so they do not visually block each other.

=={{SpanID|903.3.11}}903.3.11 Truck Rollover Sign (W1-13) (MUTCD Section 2C.11) ==

[[File:W1-13.png|center|100px|thumb|<center>'''W1-13'''</center>]]

'''Option. '''A Truck Rollover (W1-13) sign may be used as a supplement to a horizontal alignment warning sign to warn drivers of vehicles with a high center of gravity, such as trucks, tankers, and recreational vehicles, of a curve or turn where there are:
:A. Past incidents of truck rollovers at the specific location,
:B. High volumes of trucks, or
:C. A speed differential (see [[#903.3.6|EPG 903.3.6]]) that might pose a greater risk for vehicles with high centers of gravity.

'''Guidance. '''Where engineering judgment determines the need for the installation of a Truck Rollover (W1-13) sign, it should be located downstream of the horizontal alignment warning sign in advance of the curve.

'''Standard. '''If a Truck Rollover (W1-13) sign is used, it shall be accompanied by an Advisory Speed (W13-1P) plaque indicating the recommended speed for vehicles with a higher center of gravity.

'''Option. '''The Truck Rollover sign may include conspicuity enhancements, or may be a blank-out sign, activated by the detection of an approaching vehicle with a high center of gravity that is traveling in excess of the recommended speed for the condition.

'''Support. '''The curved arrow on the Truck Rollover sign shows the direction of roadway curvature. The truck tips in the opposite direction.

=={{SpanID|903.3.12}}903.3.12 Advisory Exit and Ramp Speed Signs (W13-2 and W13-3) and Combination Horizontal Alignment/Advisory Exit and Ramp Speed Signs (W13-6 through W13-13) (MUTCD Section 2C.12)==
<center>
{| style=""
|-
|[[File:W13-2.png|center|102px|thumb|<center>'''W13-2'''</center>]]
|[[File:W13-3.png|center|98px|thumb|<center>'''W13-3'''</center>]]
|[[File:W13-6.png|center|100px|thumb|<center>'''W13-6'''</center>]]
|[[File:W13-7.png|center|88px|thumb|<center>'''W13-7'''</center>]]
|}
{|
|[[File:W13-8.png|center|98px|thumb|<center>'''W13-8'''</center>]]
|[[File:W13-9.png|center|100px|thumb|<center>'''W13-9'''</center>]]
|[[File:W13-10.png|center|100px|thumb|<center>'''W13-10'''</center>]]
|[[File:W13-11.png|center|102px|thumb|<center>'''W13-11'''</center>]]
|[[File:W13-12.png|center|100px|thumb|<center>'''W13-12'''</center>]]
|[[File:W13-13.png|center|100px|thumb|<center>'''W13-13'''</center>]]
|}
</center>

'''Standard. '''Where an advisory speed is posted in advance of a freeway or expressway exit, the Advisory Exit Speed (W13-2) sign shall be used.

Where an advisory speed is posted in advance of a conventional road ramp or to another roadway or roadside facility, the Advisory Ramp Speed (W13-3) sign shall be used.

An Advisory Exit Speed or Advisory Ramp Speed sign shall be used when the difference between the mainline roadway speed limit and the exit or ramp advisory speed in the vicinity of the departure is 20 mph or greater.

'''Guidance'''. An Advisory Exit Speed or Advisory Ramp Speed sign should be used when the difference between the mainline roadway speed limit and the exit or ramp advisory speed in the vicinity of the departure is 15 mph.

'''Option. '''An Advisory Exit Speed or Advisory Ramp Speed sign may be used based on engineering judgment when the difference between the mainline roadway speed limit and the exit or ramp advisory speed in the vicinity of the departure is 10 mph or less.

The Combination Horizontal Alignment/Advisory Exit Speed (W13-6, W13-8, and W13-10) signs may be used in lieu of the Advisory Exit Speed (W13-2) sign, and the combination Horizontal Alignment/Advisory Ramp Speed (W13-7, W13-9, and W13-11) signs may be used in lieu of the Advisory Ramp Speed (W13-3) sign.

The Combination Truck Rollover/Advisory Exit Speed and Truck Rollover/Advisory Ramp Speed (W13-12 and W13-13) signs may be used in lieu of the W13-2 and W13-3 signs respectively if the tip over condition is in the vicinity of the gore.

'''Standard. '''Roadway geometrics represented on the Combination Horizontal Alignment/Advisory Exit and Combination Horizontal Alignment/Advisory Ramp Speed signs shall be limited to the standard signs shown in the EPG.

'''Guidance. '''If used, the Advisory Exit Speed sign or the Combination Horizontal Alignment/Advisory Exit Speed sign should be installed along the deceleration lane. The Advisory Exit Speed or the Combination Horizontal Alignment/Advisory Exit Speed signs should be visible in time for the road user to decelerate and make an exiting maneuver.

Regulatory Speed Limit signs (see [[#903.3.20|EPG 903.3.20]]) should not be located in the vicinity of exit ramps or deceleration lanes, particularly where they will conflict with the advisory speed displayed on the Advisory Exit or Ramp Speed signs.

'''Support. '''[[#903.3.6|EPG 903.3.6]] contains provisions for the determination of the displayed advisory speed.

[[#tab903.3.4|Table 903.3.4]] lists recommended advance sign placement distances for deceleration to various advisory speeds.

'''Option. '''Where there is a need to remind road users of the recommended advisory speed, a horizontal alignment warning sign with an advisory speed plaque displaying the same advisory speed may be installed at a downstream location along the ramp.

'''Guidance. '''If the ramp curvature changes to the extent that it warrants a lower advisory speed, a horizontal alignment warning sign with the new advisory speed should be displayed in advance of the change in curvature.

'''Option. '''The One-Direction Large Arrow (W1-6) sign may be installed beyond the exit gore on the outside of the curve to provide additional warning of an immediate change in curvature. When used in conjunction with the exit speed, the One-Direction Large Arrow (W1-6) sign may be supplemented with a Confirmation Advisory Speed (W13-1aP) plaque when the plaque is not used with the Exit Gore (E5-1 series) sign.

'''Guidance. '''The horizontal alignment symbol displayed on the Combination Horizontal Alignment/Advisory Exit and Ramp Speed signs should be consistent with the horizontal geometry of the ramp.

'''Support. '''Examples of advisory speed signing for exit ramps are shown in [[#fig903.3.12|Figure 903.3.12]].

{{SpanID|fig903.3.12}}
[[File:Figure 903.3.12 Examples of Exit Ramp Advisory Speed and Other Warning Signs.png|thumb|center|800px|alt=Two vertical northbound lanes of a divided highway with an exit loop ramp are shown. At the bottom of the figure, and to the right of the right northbound lane, facing northbound traffic is an exit direction sign followed by a W13-2 or a W13-6R sign. At the entrance to the exit ramp is an E5-1a sign followed by an optional W1-6R with a W13-1aP sign assembly. |'''Figure 903.3.12''' Examples of Exit Ramp Advisory Speed and Other Warning Signs]]

=={{SpanID|903.3.13}}903.3.13 Vehicle Speed Feedback Sign and Plaque (W13-20 and W13-20aP) (MUTCD Section 2C.13)==

'''Option. '''A Vehicle Speed Feedback (W13-20) sign or (W13-20aP) plaque (see [[#fig903.3.13|Figure 903.3.13]]) that displays the speed of an approaching vehicle to the vehicle operator may be used to provide warning to drivers of their speed in relation to either a speed limit (R2-1) sign or a horizontal alignment warning sign assembly with a posted advisory speed.

'''Standard. '''When used to display the speed of an approaching vehicle in relation to the posted speed limit, the Vehicle Speed Feedback (W13-20aP) plaque shall be mounted below a Speed Limit (R2-1) sign (see [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2.20|EPG 903.2.20]]).

The Vehicle Speed Feedback assembly shall not be installed at a location where the posted speed limit on the route changes. Vehicle Speed Feedback assemblies shall be placed anywhere downstream of a speed limit change but shall be a minimum of 200 feet downstream of a speed limit change on conventional routes and a minimum of 400 feet downstream of a speed limit change on expressways of freeways. Vehicle Speed Feedback assemblies shall be installed in accordance with the [https://epg.modot.org/forms/general_files/TS/TA_Your_Speed_Feedback_Assembly.pdf Vehicle Speed Feedback Typical Application].

When used to supplement a horizontal alignment warning sign advisory speed, the Vehicle Speed Feedback (W13-20) sign shall be an independent installation near the point of curvature of a horizontal curve (see [[#903.3.6|EPG 903.3.6]]).

The legend YOUR SPEED shall be a black legend on a yellow retroreflective background, except as provided in [[616.8 TTC Zone Warning Signs (MUTCD Chapter 6H) #616.8.1|EPG 616.8.1]] and [[908.2 Signs (MUTCD Chapter 7B) #908.2.1|908.2.1]]. The changeable legend displaying the speed of the approaching vehicle shall be a yellow luminous legend on a black opaque background. The vehicle speed displayed on the changeable portion of the sign shall be displayed as an integer. The Vehicle Speed Feedback sign and plaque shall not flash, strobe, change color, or use other animated elements integrated into the changeable legend display. When no vehicles are approaching, the changeable display shall not display a legend.

Vehicle Speed Feedback sign equipment shall not have the capability to collect, store or transmit personally identifiable information of any type.

'''Guidance. '''The changeable portion of the Vehicle Speed Feedback legend should be approximately the same height, width, and stroke of those on the Speed Limit sign it supplements or is mounted below.

When a W13-20aP plaque is used with a Speed Limit sign it should be approximately the same width as the Speed Limit sign it is mounted below.

{{SpanID|fig903.3.13}}
[[File:Figure 903.3.13 Vehicle Speed Feedback Sign and Plaque.png|thumb|center|400px|alt="The figure shows two versions of a vehicle speed feedback sign. On the left is a stand-alone sign labeled W13-20. It has a yellow background with the words “YOUR SPEED” above an electronic display showing the number “42” in yellow LED digits. A caption below states that the stand-alone sign is placed at the beginning of curves and turns to reaffirm the advisory speed associated with the advance horizontal alignment sign.

On the right is a supplemental plaque labeled W13-20aP. A white “SPEED LIMIT 35” sign is shown above the yellow “YOUR SPEED 42” electronic display. The caption explains that the supplemental plaque is installed below a speed limit sign and is used downstream of speed limit changes or within a speed zone to reaffirm the speed limit."
|'''Figure 903.3.13''' Vehicle Speed Feedback Sign and Plaque]]

=={{SpanID|903.3.14}}903.3.14 Hill Signs (W7-1 and W7-1c) (MUTCD Section 2C.14)==
<center>
{|
| [[File:W7-1.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W7-1'''</center>]]
| [[File:W7-1c.png|thumb|center|103px|alt=|<center>'''W7-1c'''</center>]]
|}
</center>

'''Guidance. '''The Hill (W7-1) sign should be used in advance of a downgrade where the length, percent of grade, horizontal curvature, and/or other physical features require special precautions on the part of road users.

The Hill sign and supplemental grade (W7-3P) plaque (see [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.63|EPG 903.3.63]]) used in combination, or the W7-1a sign used alone, should be installed in advance of downgrades for the following conditions:
:A. 5% grade that is more than 3,000 feet in length,
:B. 6% grade that is more than 2,000 feet in length,
:C. 7% grade that is more than 1,000 feet in length,
:D. 8% grade that is more than 750 feet in length, or
:E. 9% grade that is more than 500 feet in length.

These signs should also be installed for steeper grades or where crash experience and field observations indicate a need.

Supplemental plaques (see [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.57|EPG 903.3.57]] and [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.63|903.3.63]]) and larger signs should be used for emphasis or where special hill characteristics exist. On longer grades, the use of the Hill sign with a distance (W7-3aP) plaque at periodic intervals of approximately 1-mile spacing should be considered.

'''Support. '''The Uphill (W7-1c) sign is also available by special request.

=={{SpanID|903.3.15}}903.3.15 ROAD NARROWS Sign (W5-1) (MUTCD 2C.17)==
[[File:W5-1.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W5-1'''</center>]]

'''Guidance. '''A ROAD NARROWS (W5-1) sign should be used in advance of a transition on two-lane roads where the pavement width is reduced abruptly to a width such that vehicles traveling in opposite directions cannot simultaneously travel through the narrow portion of the roadway without reducing speed.

'''Option. '''Additional emphasis may be provided by the use of object markers and delineators (see [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.70|EPG 903.3.70]] through [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.73|EPG 903.3.73]] and [[620.6 Delineators (MUTCD Chapter 3G)|EPG 620.6]]). The Advisory Speed (W13-1P) plaque (see [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.59|EPG 903.3.59]]) may be used to indicate the recommended speed.

=={{SpanID|903.3.16}}903.3.16 NARROW BRIDGE Sign (W5-2) (MUTCD Section 2C.18)==
[[File:W5-2.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W5-2'''</center>]]

'''Guidance. '''A NARROW BRIDGE (W5-2) sign should be used in advance of any bridge or culvert having a two-way roadway horizontal clearance of 16 to 18 feet, or any bridge or culvert having a roadway horizontal clearance less than the width of the approach travel lanes.

Additional emphasis should be provided by the use of object markers, delineators, and/or pavement markings.

'''Option. '''A NARROW BRIDGE sign may be used in advance of a bridge or culvert on which the approach shoulders are narrowed or eliminated.

=={{SpanID|903.3.17}}903.3.17 ONE LANE BRIDGE Sign (W5-3) (MUTCD Section 2C.19)==
[[File:W5-3.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W5-3'''</center>]]

'''Guidance. '''A ONE LANE BRIDGE (W5-3) sign should be used on two-way roadways in advance of any bridge or culvert:
:A. Having a roadway horizontal clearance of less than 16 feet, or
:B. Having a roadway horizontal clearance of less than 18 feet when commercial vehicles constitute a high proportion of the traffic, or
:C. Having a roadway horizontal clearance of 18 feet or less where the sight distance on the approach is less than that shown in Condition A of [[#tab903.3.4|Table 903.3.4]].

Additional emphasis should be provided by the use of object markers, delineators, and/or pavement markings.

'''Option. '''STOP (R1-1) or YIELD (R1-2) signs (see [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2.4|EPG 903.2.4]] and [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2.5|903.2.5]]) and related pavement markings (see [[620.2 Pavement and Curb Markings (MUTCD Chapter 3B) #620.2.20|EPG 620.2.20]] and [[620.2 Pavement and Curb Markings (MUTCD Chapter 3B) #620.2.21|620.2.21]]) may be used when conditions A, B, or C in the first Guidance paragraph of this Article apply.

=={{SpanID|903.3.18}}903.3.18 Divided Highway Sign (W6-1) (MUTCD Section 2C.20)==
[[File:W6-1.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W6-1'''</center>]]

'''Guidance. '''A Divided Highway (W6-1) sign should be used on the approaches to a section of highway (not an intersection or junction) where the opposing flows of traffic are separated by a median or other physical barrier.

'''Standard. '''The Divided Highway (W6-1) sign shall not be used instead of a Keep Right (R4-7 series) sign on the approach end of a median island.

=={{SpanID|903.3.19}}903.3.19 Divided Highway Ends Sign (W6-2) (MUTCD Section 2C.21)==
[[File:W6-2.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W6-2'''</center>]]

'''Guidance. '''A Divided Highway Ends (W6-2) sign should be used in advance of the end of a section of physically divided highway (not an intersection or junction) as a warning of two-way traffic ahead.

The Two-Way Traffic (W6-3) sign (see [[#903.3.42|EPG 903.3.42]]) should be used to give warning and notice of the transition to a two-lane, two-way section.

=={{SpanID|903.3.20}}903.3.20 Double Arrow Sign (W12-1) (MUTCD Section 2C.23)==
[[File:W12-1.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W12-1'''</center>]]

'''Option. '''The Double Arrow (W12-1) sign may be used to advise road users that traffic is permitted to pass on either side of an island, obstruction, or gore in the roadway. Traffic separated by this sign may either rejoin or change directions.

'''Guidance. '''If used on an island, the Double Arrow sign should be mounted near the approach end (see [[#903.3.13|EPG 903.3.13]]).

If used in front of a pier or obstruction, the Double Arrow sign should be mounted on the face of, or just in front of, the pier or obstruction. Where stripe markings are used on the pier or obstruction, they should be discontinued to leave a 3-inch space around the outside of the Double Arrow sign.

=={{SpanID|903.3.21}}903.3.21 DEAD END, NO OUTLET, and ROAD ENDS Signs (W14-1, W14-2, and W14-13) (MUTCD Section 2C.24)==
<center>
{|
| [[File:W14-1.png|thumb|center|99px|alt=|<center>'''W14-1'''</center>]]
| [[File:W14-2.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W14-2'''</center>]]
| [[File:W14-13.png|thumb|center|96px|alt=|<center>'''W14-13'''</center>]]
|}
</center>

'''Option. '''DEAD END (W14-1) sign may be used at the entrance to a single road or street that terminates without intersecting another street. The NO OUTLET (W14-2) sign may be used at the entrance to a road or road network from which there is no other exit.

The ROAD ENDS (W14-13) sign may be used to warn of a roadway which has no outlet and which terminates in a dead end and may be used in place of the DEAD END or NO OUTLET sign where the use of the DEAD END and NO OUTLET signs would have a negative effect on traffic generators or public perceptions due to the negative connotation of the message.

'''Guidance. '''When the W14-1, W14-2, or W14-13 sign is used, the sign should be posted as near as practicable to the entry point or at a sufficient advance distance to permit the road user to avoid the dead end or no outlet condition by turning at the nearest intersecting street.

'''Standard. '''The W14-1, W14-2, or W8-26 sign shall not be used in place of the ROAD CLOSED (R11-2) sign for temporary conditions, such as high water, bridge out, etc.

'''Support. '''Information about the use of Type 4 object markers to mark the end of the road or street is contained in [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.73|EPG 903.3.73]].

=={{SpanID|903.3.22}}903.3.22 Low Clearance Signs (W12-2, and W12-2a) (MUTCD Section 2C.25)==
<center>
{|
| [[File:W12-2.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W12-2'''</center>]]
| [[File:W12-2a.png|thumb|center|130px|alt=|<center>'''W12-2a'''</center>]]
|}
</center>

'''Support. '''MoDOT is responsible for installing and maintaining overhead low clearance signs mounted on all structures passing over MoDOT routes as well as installing and maintaining overhead low clearance signs mounted all MoDOT structures passing over non-MoDOT routes (this does not include MoDOT structures passing over rail lines). MoDOT has developed specific provisions for the use of Low Clearance signs.

'''Standard. '''Low Clearance signing shall be installed to display vertical clearances available under structures within specified limits of statutory maximum vehicle heights.

The clearance displayed on the Low Clearance (W12-2 and W12-2a) signs shall be 2 inches less than the measured clearance to account for possible packed snow and ice. For example, a measured vertical clearance of 15 ft. shall be posted as 14 ft. 10 in. All clearance measurements shall be rounded down to the nearest full inch. For example, a measured vertical clearance of 14 ft. 9 ½ in. would be rounded down to 14 ft. 9 in. and posted as 14 ft. 7 in.

The statutory maximum vehicle heights and vertical clearances are as follows:
:A. Within Commercial Zones = 15 ft. statutory maximum vehicle height (16’ 0” maximum posting).
:B. On Interstate and designated highway network routes and on all routes within 10 miles of Interstate and designated highway network routes = 14 ft. statutory maximum vehicle height (15’ 0” maximum posting).
:C. On routes greater than 10 miles from Interstate and designated highway network routes = 13 ft. 6 in. statutory maximum vehicle height (15’ 0” maximum posting).

'''Support. '''For specific details on commercial zone limits and designated highway network routes, see Missouri Vehicle Route Map.

'''Standard. '''The MoDOT posting requirements for Low Clearance signs are as follows:
:A. Case I – Two Signs Required: Where the measured vertical clearance is 15 ft. 2 in. or less, but more than 13 ft. 8 in., two signs shall be used. First, a Low Clearance Overhead (W12-2a) sign shall be installed on the structure, and second, a ground-mounted Low Clearance Advance (W12-2) sign shall be placed approximately 750 ft. in advance of the structure. When an interchange is involved, the ground-mounted Low Clearance (W12-2) sign shall be located approximately 750 ft. in advance of the off-ramp.
:B. Case II – Three Signs Required: Where the measured vertical clearance is 13 ft. 8 in. or less, three signs shall be used. First, a Low Clearance Overhead (W12-2a) sign shall be installed on the structure, second, a ground-mounted Low Clearance Advance (W12-2) sign shall be placed approximately 750 ft. in advance of the structure, and third, an additional Low Clearance Advance (W12-2) sign with a Distance Ahead (W16-2P or W16-3P) plaque below the sign shall be placed at the nearest intersecting road or wide point in the road at which a vehicle can detour or turn around.
:C. Case III – One Sign: Where the measured vertical clearance is 15 ft. 2 in. or less and where the bridge is state maintained but the road beneath is not, a Low Clearance Overhead (W12-2a) sign shall be installed on the structure, but the ground-mounted Low Clearance Advance (W12-2) sign shall not be installed by MoDOT. The Low Clearance Advance sign may be installed and maintained by the local jurisdiction.
:D. Case IV – Commercial Zones: Vertical clearance signing shall be provided for structures within commercial zones (see Section 304.190 of the Revised Statutes of Missouri). Any structure with a measured vertical clearance of 16 ft. 2 in. or less within the commercial zone limits shall be posted. For measured vertical clearances greater than 15 ft. 2 in. and equal to or less than 16 ft. 2 in. within commercial zones a Low Clearance Overhead (W12-2a) sign shall be installed on the structure. The signing for measured vertical clearances of 15 ft. 2 in. or less within commercial zones shall be as described for Case I or Case II.

In the case of an arch structure or a structure which has a sloping span resulting in different vertical clearances per lane, one Low Clearance Overhead (W12-2a) sign shall be centered over each lane displaying the vertical clearance available for that lane. One sign per lane shall be applied if the difference in vertical clearance between adjacent lanes is 6 inches or greater or when the vertical clearance between the far-right lane and far-left lane is 12 inches or greater.

'''Guidance. '''Clearances should be evaluated periodically to verify the displayed clearances are accurate and to determine if additional low clearance signing is necessary, particularly when resurfacing operations have occurred, on routes onto which over-height vehicles are normally directed under the permit process, and structures that are susceptible to catastrophic failure when struck by over-height vehicles. The information should be updated in the TMS.

Where there is a need to warn of a low clearance on an intersecting road or off a freeway or expressway exit, a rectangular warning sign with an appropriate word legend should be used rather than a W12-2 sign.

'''Option. '''When only one Overhead Low Clearance (W12-2a) sign is required and mounting one sign centered over the roadway is not practical, two W12-2a signs may be installed with one sign installed to the right of the travel lanes and one sign installed to the left of the travel lanes.

'''Guidance. '''The clearance shown on the Low Clearance Advance (W12-2) sign should match the clearance on the W12-2a sign or, if there are multiple W12-2a signs, should match the lowest clearance.

{{SpanID|fig903.3.22}}
[[File:Figure 903.3.22 Examples of Low Clearance Signs.png|thumb|center|800px|alt="The figure displays four examples of signing layouts for structures with limited vertical clearance.
Case I – Vertical Clearance of 15'-2"" to 13'-9"":
A roadway labeled “MoDOT Route” passes under a structure labeled “Any Structure.” A W12-2a plaque reading “14 FT 4 IN” is placed just before the structure. Farther in advance, a W12-2 low-clearance symbol sign is shown with the legend “14'-4” placed 750 feet before the structure.
Case II – Vertical Clearance of 13'-8"" or Less:
A similar roadway labeled “MoDOT Route” passes under a structure. A W12-2a plaque reading “12 FT 6 IN” is posted at the structure. A W12-2 low-clearance symbol sign reading “12'-6” is placed 750 feet in advance. Below that sign, a W16-3P plaque shows “½ MILES.” A note indicates that the sign is placed at the nearest intersecting road or wide point.
Case III – MoDOT Bridge with Vertical Clearance of 15'-2"" or Less Over a Local Road:
A local road passes under a structure labeled “MoDOT Bridge.” A W12-2a plaque reading “14 FT 4 IN” is shown on the MoDOT route above, installed by MoDOT. On the local road, a W12-2 low-clearance symbol sign reading “14'-4” is shown as installed by the local agency.
Case IV – Vertical Clearance of 16'-2"" or Less in Commercial Zones:
A roadway labeled “MoDOT Route” passes under a structure labeled “Any Structure.” A W12-2a plaque reading “14 FT 4 IN” is placed at the structure. Text notes that advance signing should follow the placement guidelines of Case I or Case II."
|'''Figure 903.3.22''' Examples of Low Clearance Signs]]

=={{SpanID|903.3.23}}903.3.23 BUMP and DIP Signs (W8-1 and W8-2) (MUTCD Section 2C.26)==
<center>
{|
| [[File:W8-1.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W8-1'''</center>]]
| [[File:W8-2.png|thumb|center|105px|alt=|<center>'''W8-2'''</center>]]
|}
</center>

'''Support. '''BUMP and DIP signs (W8-1, W8-2) are limited use signs, only being used for locations where the condition cannot be corrected, such as low water crossings or highway-rail grade crossings.

See [[913.2 Signs (MUTCD Chapter 8B) #913.2.14|EPG 913.2.14]] for low ground clearance conditions at highway-rail grade crossings.

'''Guidance. '''BUMP (W8-1) and DIP (W8-2) signs should be used in advance of a sharp rise or depression in the profile of the road.

'''Option. '''These signs may be supplemented with an Advisory Speed plaque (see [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.59|EPG 903.3.59]]).

'''Guidance. '''The DIP sign should not be used in advance of a short stretch of depressed alignment that might momentarily hide a vehicle.

A short stretch of depressed alignment that might momentarily hide a vehicle should be treated as a no-passing zone when center line striping is provided on a two-lane or three-lane road (see [[620.2 Pavement and Curb Markings (MUTCD Chapter 3B) #620.2.3|EPG 620.2.3]]).

'''Option. '''BUMP and DIP signs may be used as temporary traffic control signs (WO8-1, WO8-2) for locations where the condition is temporary and/or where the condition can be corrected in the future (See [[616.6 Temporary Traffic Control Zone Devices (MUTCD 6F) #616.6.50|EPG 616.6.50]]).

=={{SpanID|903.3.24}}903.3.24 PAVEMENT ENDS Sign (W8-3) (MUTCD Section 2C.28)==
[[File:W8-3.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W8-3'''</center>]]

'''Guidance. '''A PAVEMENT ENDS (W8-3) sign should be used where a paved surface changes to either a gravel treated surface or an earth road surface.

'''Option. '''An Advisory Speed plaque (see [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.59|EPG 903.3.59]]) may be used when the change in roadway condition requires a reduced speed.

=={{SpanID|903.3.25}}903.3.25 Slippery When Wet Sign (W8-5) (Section 2C.30)==
[[File:W8-5.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W8-5'''</center>]]

'''Guidance. '''The Slippery When Wet sign (W8-5) is a limited use sign that should not be installed for locations where the condition can be corrected. Existing Slippery When Wet (W8-5) signs should be left in place until the condition is corrected.

'''Option. '''The Slippery When Wet (W8-5) sign may be used to warn of unexpected slippery conditions.

'''Guidance. '''When used, Slippery When Wet signs should be placed in advance of the beginning of the affected section (see [[#tab903.3.4|Table 903.3.4]]), and additional signs should be placed at appropriate intervals along the road where the condition exists.

'''Option. '''The Slippery When Wet sign may be used as a temporary traffic control sign (WO8-5) for locations where the condition is temporary and/or where the condition can be corrected in the future (See [[616.6 Temporary Traffic Control Zone Devices (MUTCD 6F) #616.6.50|EPG 616.6.50]]).

=={{SpanID|903.3.26}}903.3.26 FALLEN ROCKS Signs (W8-14)==
[[File:W8-14.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W8-14'''</center>]]

'''Option. '''The FALLEN ROCKS (W8-14) sign may be used in advance of an area that is adjacent to a hillside, mountain, or cliff where rocks frequently fall onto the roadway.

'''Guidance. '''When used, FALLEN ROCKS signs should be placed in advance of the beginning of the affected section (see [[#tab903.3.4|Table 903.3.4]]), and additional signs should be placed at appropriate intervals along the road where the condition exists.

'''Standard. '''The district shall perform an evaluation of the FALLEN ROCKS site to determine whether existing installations of the FALLEN ROCKS sign is still necessary. If it is determined that the sign is not necessary, the sign will not be replaced at the end of the service life.

=={{SpanID|903.3.27}}903.3.27 Warning Signs and Plaque for Motorcyclists (W8-15, W8-15aP, and W8-16) (MUTCD Section 2C.31) ==

'''Support. '''MoDOT does not install permanent W8-15, W8-15aP, and W8-16 signs and plaques. For temporary applications, see [[616.16 Typical Applications (MUTCD Chapter 6P)|EPG 616.16]].

=={{SpanID|903.3.28}}903.3.28 IMPASSABLE WHEN WATER OVER ROAD Sign (MUTCD Section 2C.34)==

<center>
{|
| [[File:W8-18.jpg|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W8-18'''</center>]]
| [[File:W020-3.jpg|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''WO20-3'''</center>]]
| [[File:W8-34a.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W8-34a'''</center>]]
| [[File:W08-33.jpg|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''WO8-33'''</center>]]
| [[File:D2-1 and R11-3a.png|thumb|center|130px|alt=|<center>'''D2-1 and R11-3a'''</center>]]

| [[File:R5-22.png|thumb|center|120px|alt=|<center>'''R5-22'''</center>]]
|}
</center>

'''Support.''' When a road goes underwater, MoDOT requires the road to be closed to traffic regardless of the depth of water over the road. This closure is accomplished by following [[616.16 Typical Applications (MUTCD Chapter 6P) #616.16|TA-8W]]. This TA displays two figures; the first figure applies to locations which do not flood on a frequent basis and uses standard work zone signs to close the road. The second figure applies to roads that frequently go under water and utilize permanently installed signs. These permanent signs provide critical guidance to motorists between the time the road begins to flood to the time maintenance crews can physically close the road.

MoDOT has discontinued the use of the LOW WATER CROSSING (W8-35) sign, low water crossings are designed for water to routinely flow over the roadway while traffic passes through the water. MoDOT no longer maintains low water crossings on State routes, and MoDOT’s direction is to close any road covered in any depth of water.
MoDOT has discontinued the use of the WATER GAUGE (W8-19a). Water gauges are intended to indicate the depth of the water over a road to allow motorists to judge if it is safe to proceed, however, MoDOT no longer supports motorists driving through any depth of water and closes any road which is covered by water.

'''Standard.''' Any roadway location which goes underwater shall be closed to traffic as soon as possible. Any location, regardless of flooding frequency, shall be closed using the signing package in the first figure of [[616.16 Typical Applications (MUTCD Chapter 6P) #616.16|TA-8W]].

'''Guidance.''' Any roadway which historically floods one or more times per year should have the permanent signing package found in the second figure of [[616.16 Typical Applications (MUTCD Chapter 6P) #616.16|TA-8W]] installed. This applies to locations where streams and rivers rise and flood the road surface, but not in urban areas where a road floods due to blocked or overwhelmed storm drains. This signing package, which includes the DO NOT ENTER WHEN WATER OVER ROAD (R5-22) sign, provides motorists with advanced information on how they need to react to the flooded road before maintenance crews can get to the location and physically close the roadway. The flip signs allow for an expedited closure with the work zone signs already in place, only needing to flip them from the warning sign message to the work zone message upon arriving at the location, as well as deploying the barricades and ROAD CLOSED (R11-2) sign.

Existing LOW WATER CROSSING (W8-35) signs should be removed at the earliest convenience; the presence of these signs may encourage motorists to enter a flooded road if they see the depth of water and incorrectly believe it is shallow enough to safely pass.

'''Option.''' The signing package in the second figure of [[616.16 Typical Applications (MUTCD Chapter 6P) #616.16|TA-8W]] may be installed at any location that may flood less than one time per year to facilitate quicker road closures.

=={{SpanID|903.3.29}}903.3.29 Advance Traffic Control Signs (W3-1, W3-2, W3-3, and W3-4) (MUTCD Section 2C.35)==
<center>
{|
| [[File:W3-1.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W3-1'''</center>]]
| [[File:W3-2.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W3-2'''</center>]]
| [[File:W3-3.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W3-3'''</center>]]
| [[File:W3-4.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W3-4'''</center>]]
|}
</center>

'''Standard. '''The Stop Ahead (W3-1), Yield Ahead (W3-2), and Signal Ahead (W3-3) Advance Traffic Control signs shall be installed on an approach to a primary traffic control device that is not visible for a sufficient distance to permit the road user to respond to the device (see [[#tab903.3.4|Table 903.3.4]]). The visibility criteria for a traffic control signal shall be based on having a continuous view of at least two signal faces for the distance specified in [[902.4 Design Features of Traffic Control Signals (MUTCD Chapter 4D) #tab902.4.6|Table 902.4.6]].

'''Guidance. '''Where intermittent obstructions occur, engineering judgment should determine the treatment to be implemented.

The minimum visibility distance of a signal for a facility with a speed limit above 60 mph should be determined by summing the stopping sight distance (see [[#tab903.3.1|Table 903.3.1]]) and the assumed queue length. The assumed queue length should be determined by engineering judgment.

If an advance traffic control sign is warranted for an approach at an intersection of a MoDOT maintained road and non-MoDOT maintained road, the agency responsible for the maintenance of the non-MoDOT road should be notified of the condition.

'''Support. '''Permanent obstructions causing the limited visibility might include roadway alignment or structures. Intermittent obstructions might include foliage or parked vehicles.

'''Option. '''An Advance Traffic Control sign may be used for additional emphasis of the primary traffic control device, even when the visibility distance to the device is satisfactory.

Signal Ahead (W3-3) signs may be posted on the right- and left-hand sides of the road on a high speed divided approach.

'''Support. '''[[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.64|EPG 903.3.64]] contains information about the use of an advance street name plaque to identify an intersecting road.

'''Option. '''A BE PREPARED TO STOP (W3-4) sign may be used to warn of stopped traffic caused by a traffic control signal in advance of a section of roadway that regularly experiences traffic congestion, history of crashes, or based on engineering judgement.

A Warning Beacon (see [[902.18 Flashing Beacons (MUTCD Chapter 4S) #902.18.3|EPG 902.18.3]]) may be used with an Advance Traffic Control or BE PREPARED TO STOP (W3-4) sign. If a warning beacon is used, the beacon(s) may be activated before the start of the yellow change interval referred to as lead flash, which is the time before the onset of yellow at which the warning beacon(s) begin to flash. Recommended values for lead flash in accordance with the posted speed limit are specified in [[#tab903.3.29|Table 903.3.29]].
<center>
{{SpanID|tab903.3.29}}
{| class="wikitable" style="max-width:600px; text-align: center;"
|+ '''Table 903.3.29''' Design Parameters for Advance Warning System
|-
! Posted Speed (mph)
! Distance Between Warning Sign and Stop Line (ft)
! Lead Flash, Advance Warning Before End of Green (sec)
|-
| 70
| 871 to 975 max**
| 8
|-
| 70
| 730 min* to 870
| 7
|-
| 65
| 811 to 905 max**
| 8
|-
| 65
| 645 min* to 810
| 7
|-
| 60
| 661 to 745 max**
| 7
|-
| 60
| 570 min* to 660
| 6
|-
| 55
| 606 to 685 max**
| 7
|-
| 55
| 495 min* to 605
| 6
|-
| 50
| 476 to 550 max**
| 6
|-
| 50
| 425 min* to 475
| 5
|-
| 45
| 426 to 495 max**
| 6
|-
| 45
| 360 min* to 425
| 5
|-
| style="text-align: left" colspan="3" | *The advance traffic control sign shall not be installed less than this minimum distance. **The sign placement distance can exceed the "max" distance. The lead flash time should be determined by coordinating with the MoDOT Highway Safety and Traffic Division.
|}
</center>

'''Standard. '''When a BE PREPARED TO STOP (W3-4) sign is used in advance of a traffic control signal, it shall be used in addition to a Signal Ahead sign and shall be placed a minimum of 200 feet downstream from the Signal Ahead sign. The BE PREPARED TO STOP (W3-4) sign shall be installed as specified in [[#tab903.3.4|Table 903.3.4]] (See [[#fig903.3.29.1|Figure 903.3.29.1]]).

A BE PREPARED TO STOP (W3-4) sign with a warning beacon shall not be considered for intersection approaches with a posted speed limit of 40 mph or less.

{{SpanID|fig903.3.29.1}}
[[File:Figure 903.3.29.1 Example for Placement of Be Prepared To Stop Sign.png|thumb|center|500px|alt="The figure shows a four-leg intersection controlled by a traffic signal. A vertical roadway and a horizontal roadway intersect, each with one travel lane in each direction. A traffic signal head with red, yellow, and green indications is shown at the center of the intersection.
On the lower approach of the vertical roadway, two advance warning signs are shown on the right side. The sign closest to the intersection is a W3-4 “BE PREPARED TO STOP” sign, with an optional yellow beacon mounted above it. Farther downstream, a W3-3 traffic signal symbol sign is shown. The spacing between the two signs is labeled “200 ft MIN.”
A separate dimension arrow between the W3-4 sign and the intersection is marked with an asterisk, referencing a note that states, “See Table 903.3.4 for the recommended minimum distance.”"
|'''Figure 903.3.29.1''' Example for Placement of BE PREPARED TO STOP Sign]]

{{SpanID|fig903.3.29.2}}
[[File:Figure 903.3.29.2 Example for Placement Of Signal Ahead Sign-Condition B.png|thumb|center|500px|alt="The figure shows a four-leg intersection controlled by a traffic signal. A vertical roadway and a horizontal roadway intersect, each with one travel lane in each direction. A signal head with red, yellow, and green indications is displayed at the center of the intersection.
On the lower approach of the vertical roadway, a dimension arrow indicates the placement location for an advance warning sign. The arrow is marked with an asterisk referring to a note that reads, “See Table 903.3.4 for the recommended minimum distance.”
To the right of this lower approach, a W3-3 traffic signal symbol sign is shown with an optional yellow beacon mounted above it."
|'''Figure 903.3.29.2''' Example for Placement of Signal Ahead Sign]]

=={{SpanID|903.3.30}}903.3.30 Advance Ramp Control Signal Signs (W3-7 and W3-8) (MUTCD Section 2C.37)==
<center>
{|
| [[File:W3-7.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W3-7'''</center>]]
| [[File:W3-8.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W3-8'''</center>]]
|}
</center>

'''Option. '''A RAMP METER AHEAD (W3-7) sign may be used to warn road users that a freeway entrance ramp is metered and that they will encounter a ramp control signal (see [[902.16 Traffic Control Signals for Freeway Entrance Ramps (MUTCD Chapter 4P) #902.16|EPG 902.16]]).

'''Guidance. '''When the ramp control signals are operated only during certain periods of the day, a RAMP METERED WHEN FLASHING (W3-8) sign should be installed in advance of the ramp control signal near the entrance to the ramp, or on the arterial on the approach to the ramp, to alert road users to the presence and operation of ramp meters.

'''Standard. '''The RAMP METERED WHEN FLASHING sign shall be supplemented with a Warning Beacon (see [[902.18 Flashing Beacons (MUTCD Chapter 4S) #902.18.3|EPG 902.18.3]]) that flashes when the ramp control signal is in operation.

=={{SpanID|903.3.31}}903.3.31 WATCH FOR STOPPED TRAFFIC Sign (W26-1) (MUTCD Section 2C.39)==

[[File:W26-1.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W26-1'''</center>]]

'''Option. '''The WATCH FOR STOPPED TRAFFIC (W26-1) sign may be used to warn road users of the possibility of vehicles stopping abruptly in the travel lane due to recurring congested conditions.

=={{SpanID|903.3.32}}903.3.32 Reduced Speed Limit Ahead and Speed Zone Signs (W3-5) (MUTCD Section 2C.40)==
[[File:W3-5.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W3-5'''</center>]]

'''Standard'''. A Reduced Speed Limit Ahead (W3-5) sign shall be used to inform road users of a reduced speed zone where the speed limit is being reduced by more than 10 mph.

'''Option. '''A Reduced Speed Limit Ahead (W3-5) sign may be used to inform road users of a reduced speed zone where the speed limit is being reduced by 10 mph or less based if engineering judgment indicates the need for advance notice to comply with the posted speed limit ahead.

'''Standard. '''If used, a Reduced Speed Limit Ahead sign shall be followed by a Speed Limit (R2-1) sign (see [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2.20|EPG 903.2.20]]), installed at the beginning of the zone where the speed limit applies.

The speed limit displayed on the W3-5 sign shall be identical to the speed limit displayed on the subsequent Speed Limit sign.

=={{SpanID|903.3.33}}903.3.33 Intersection Warning Signs (W2-1 through W2-8) (MUTCD Section 2C.41)==
<center>
{|
| [[File:W2-1.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W2-1'''</center>]]
| [[File:W2-2.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W2-2'''</center>]]
| [[File:W2-3.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W2-3'''</center>]]
| [[File:W2-3a.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W2-3a'''</center>]]
|}
{|
| [[File:W2-4.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W2-4'''</center>]]
| [[File:W2-5.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W2-5'''</center>]]
| [[File:W2-6.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W2-6'''</center>]]
|-
| [[File:W2-7L.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W2-7L'''</center>]]
| [[File:W2-7R.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W2-7R'''</center>]]
| [[File:W2-8.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W2-8'''</center>]]
|}
</center>

'''Support. '''Intersection Warning Signs are used when there is limited stopping sight distance, history of crashes, or based on engineering judgment.

'''Option. '''A Cross Road (W2-1), Side Road (W2-2, W2-3, or W2-3a), T-Intersection (W2-4), or Y-Intersection (W2-5) sign may be used in advance of an intersection to indicate the presence of an intersection and the possibility of turning or entering traffic.

'''Standard. '''The Circular Intersection (W2-6) sign shall be installed in advance of roundabout intersections. The appropriate Advisory Speed supplemental plaque (W13-1P) shall be installed below the Circular Intersection sign.

'''Option. '''If other circular intersections exist, that would not be classified as roundabouts, the Circular Intersection (W2-6) sign may be used.

'''Support. '''[[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.64|EPG 903.2.64]] contains information about the use of an advance street name plaque to identify an intersecting road.

'''Guidance. '''The Intersection Warning sign should illustrate and depict the general configuration of the intersecting roadway, such as a cross road, side road, T-intersection, or Y-intersection.

Intersection Warning signs, other than the Circular Intersection (W2-6) sign, the T-intersection (W2-4) sign, and the Grade Crossing and Intersection Advance Warning (W10-2, W10-3, and W10-4) signs (see [[913.2 Signs (MUTCD Chapter 8B) #913.2.6|EPG 913.2.6]]) should not be used on approaches controlled by STOP signs, YIELD signs, or signals.

If an Intersection Warning sign is used where the side roads are not opposite of each other, the Offset Side Roads (W2-7) sign should be used instead of the Cross Road sign.

If an Intersection Warning sign is used where two closely-spaced side roads are on the same side of the highway, the Double Side Roads (W2-8) sign should be used instead of the Side Road sign.

No more than two side roads should be depicted on the same side of the highway on a W2-7 or W2-8 sign, and no more than three side roads should be depicted on a W2-7 or W2-8 sign.

=={{SpanID|903.3.34}}903.3.34 Advance Intersection Signs (W2-10a and W2-11a)==
<center>
{|
| [[File:W2-10a.jpg|thumb|center|alt=|100px|<center>'''W2-10a'''</center>]]
| [[File:W2-11a.jpg|thumb|center|alt=|100px|<center>'''W2-11a'''</center>]]
|}
</center>

'''Support.''' Advance Intersection signs are typically associated with restricted sight distance and gap selection at stop controlled intersections.

'''Option.''' The WATCH FOR ENTERING TRAFFIC (W2-10a) sign may be used on the uncontrolled through roadway approach to a side or cross road stop controlled intersection to warn of entering traffic from the side or cross road.

The WATCH FOR APPROACHING TRAFFIC (W2-11a) sign may be used on the side road stop controlled approach to warn of traffic approaching on the uncontrolled through road.

=={{SpanID|903.3.35}}903.3.35 Two-Direction Large Arrow Sign (W1-7) (MUTCD Section 2C.43)==
[[File:W1-7.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W1-7'''</center>]]

'''Standard. '''The Two-Direction Large Arrow (W1-7) sign shall be a horizontal rectangle.

If used, the Two-Direction Large arrow sign shall be installed on the far side of a T-intersection in line with, and at approximately a right angle to, traffic approaching from the stem of the T-intersection.

The Two-Direction Large Arrow sign shall not be used where there is no change in the direction of travel such as at the beginnings and ends of medians or at center piers.

'''Guidance. '''The Two-Direction Large Arrow sign should be visible for a sufficient distance to provide the road user with adequate time to react to the intersection configuration.

=={{SpanID|903.3.36}}903.3.36 Traffic Signal Oncoming Extended Green Signs (W25-1 and W25-2) (MUTCD Section 2C.44)==
<center>
{|
| [[File:W25-1.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W25-1'''</center>]]
| [[File:W25-2.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W25-2'''</center>]]
|}
</center>

'''Standard. '''At locations where either a W25-1 or a W25-2 sign is required based on the provisions in [[902.6 Steady (Stop-and-Go) Operation of Traffic Control Signals (MUTCD Chapter 4F) #902.6.1|EPG 902.6.1]], the W25-1 or W25-2 sign shall be installed near the left-most signal face for the approach.

=={{SpanID|903.3.37}}903.3.37 Merge Signs and Plaque (W4-1 and W4-5) (MUTCD Section 2C.45)==
<center>
{|
| [[File:W4-1.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W4-1'''</center>]]
| [[File:W4-5.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W4-5'''</center>]]
|}
</center>

'''Guidance. '''The Merge (W4-1) sign should be installed on the side of the major roadway where merging traffic will be encountered and in such a position as to not obstruct the road user’s view of entering traffic.

When a Merge sign is installed on a major roadway, the symbol should be oriented right or left as appropriate to depict the side from which the merge occurs, with the arrow representing the major roadway and the curved stem representing the entering roadway.

When a Merge sign is to be installed on an entering roadway that curves before merging with the major roadway, such as a ramp with a curving horizontal alignment as it approaches the major roadway, the Entering Roadway Merge (W4-5) sign should be used to better portray the actual geometric conditions to road users on the entering roadway.

Where two roadways of approximately equal importance converge and merging movements are required, a Merge sign should be placed on each roadway.

The Merge sign should not be used where two roadways converge and merging movements are not required.

'''Standard. '''The Merge sign shall not be used in place of a Lane Ends (W4-2) sign (see [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.39|EPG 903.3.39]]) where lanes of traffic moving on a single roadway must merge because of a reduction in the actual or usable pavement width.

'''Support. '''Examples of the use of Merge (W4-1) signs are shown in Drawing A in [[#fig903.3.37|Figure 903.3.37]].

{{SpanID|fig903.3.37}}
[[File:Figure 903.3.37 Examples of Merge and Added Lane Sign Placement for Entering and Converging Roadways.png|thumb|center|800px|alt="A: A horizontal roadway consisting of three eastbound travel lanes is shown. A converging lane adds a fourth lane to this three-lane horizontal roadway. Two lanes are merging together from the north and south while traveling eastbound to form one converging lane. A W4-1R sign is shown to the right of the right shoulder of the north merge lane and a W4-1L sign is shown to the left of the left shoulder of the south merge lane. The lanes merge together into one converging lane just beyond these signs. Another W4-1R sign is shown on the right shoulder of the right travel lane of the horizontal roadway before the converging lane enters the horizontal roadway.
B: This example only shows the right converging lane of a three-lane horizontal roadway where the converging lane adds a fourth lane. A W4-6R sign is shown on the left of the left shoulder of the converging lane. A W4-3R sign is shown on the right shoulder of the right travel lane of the horizontal roadway before the converging lane enters the horizontal roadway. An additional example shows a W4-6R sign on the left of the left shoulder facing southbound of the converging lane. The converging lane is shown to be entering the right lane of the horizontal roadway at a 90-degree angle with a sharp curve to the right when entering the roadway. A W4-3R sign is shown on the right shoulder of the right travel lane of the horizontal roadway before the converging lane enters the horizontal roadway. This example only shows the right lane of the three-lane horizontal roadway."
|'''Figure 903.3.37''' Examples of Merge and Added Lane Sign Placement for Entering and Converging Roadways]]

=={{SpanID|903.3.38}}903.3.38 Added Lane Signs (W4-3 and W4-6) (MUTCD Section 2C.46)==
<center>
{|
| [[File:W4-3.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W4-3'''</center>]]
| [[File:W4-6.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W4-6'''</center>]]
|}
</center>

'''Guidance. '''The Added Lane (W4-3) sign should be installed in advance of a point where two roadways converge and merging movements are not required. When possible, the Added Lane sign should be placed such that it is visible from both roadways; if this is not possible, an Added Lane sign should be placed on the side of each roadway.

When an Added Lane (W4-3) sign is installed on a major roadway, the symbol should be oriented right or left as appropriate to depict the side from which the entering roadway converges, with the straight arrow representing the major roadway and the curved arrow representing the entering roadway. The sign should be located on the side of the major roadway from which the entering roadway converges.

When an Added Lane sign is to be installed on a roadway that curves before converging with another roadway that has a tangent alignment at the point of convergence, the Entering Roadway Added Lane (W4-6) sign should be used to better portray the actual geometric conditions to road users on the curving roadway.

'''Support. '''Examples of the use of Added Lane (W4-3) and Entering Roadway Added Lane (W4-6) signs are shown in Drawing B in [[#fig903.3.37|Figure 903.3.37]].

=={{SpanID|903.3.39}}903.3.39 Lane Ends Signs (W4-2 and W9-1) (Section 2C.47)==
<center>
{|
| [[File:W4-2.png|thumb|center|106px|alt=|<center>'''W4-2'''</center>]]
| [[File:W9-1.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W9-1'''</center>]]
|}
</center>

'''Support. '''The Lane Ends (W4-2) and RIGHT (LEFT) LANE ENDS (W9-1) signs are used to warn of the reduction in the number of traffic lanes in the direction of travel.

The sequence of the W4-2 and W9-1 signs is illustrated in [[#fig903.3.39.1|Figures 903.3.39.1]] to [[#fig903.3.39.5|903.3.39.5]]

'''Guidance. '''The Lane Ends (W4-2) sign should be installed at the advance placement distance in accordance with [[#tab903.3.4|Table 903.3.4]].

A RIGHT (LEFT) LANE ENDS (W9-1) sign should be installed in advance of the Lane Ends sign, at the advance placement distance in accordance with [[#tab903.3.4|Table 903.3.4]], to provide additional warning that a lane is ending and that a merging maneuver will be required.

If a W9-1 sign is installed, a Distance (W16-2P series or W16-3P series) plaque (see [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.59|EPG 903.3.59]]) should be installed below the W9-1 sign.

On one-way streets or on divided highways where the left-hand lane is ending and the width of the median will permit, the W9-1 and W4-2 signs should be placed facing approaching traffic on the left-hand side or median.

'''Option. '''Where a lane ends a distance beyond the intersection that is less than the advance placement distance indicated in [[#tab903.3.4|Table 903.3.4]], the W4-2 sign may be located at the far side of the intersection (see [[#fig903.3.39.4|Figure 903.3.39.4]]).

'''Guidance. '''When the W4-2 sign is located at the far side of the intersection in accordance with the Option paragraph above, the W9-1 sign should be placed upstream of the intersection with the appropriate distance plaque.

'''Support. '''[[620.2 Pavement and Curb Markings (MUTCD Chapter 3B) #620.2.14|EPG 620.2.14]] contains information regarding the use of pavement markings in conjunction with a lane reduction.

'''Guidance. '''Lane Ends signs should not be installed in advance of the downstream end of an acceleration lane.

'''Standard. '''The W4-2 and W9-1 signs shall not be used in dropped lane situations. In dropped lane situations on conventional roads at intersections, regulatory signs (see [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2.26|EPG 903.2.26]]) shall be used to inform road users that a through lane becomes a mandatory turn lane.

{{SpanID|fig903.3.39.1}}
[[File:Figure 903.3.39.1 Example Sequences for Lane Ends and Lane Merge Signs (Sheet 1 of 5).png|thumb|center|800px|alt=A vertical roadway is shown with four travel lanes at the bottom of the figure transitioning to three travel lanes at the top. The right lane ends through a taper marked by three white lane-reduction arrows placed in the right travel lane, each pointing diagonally toward the adjacent lane. At the bottom right of the figure, a W9-1R “RIGHT LANE ENDS” sign is mounted above a W16-2P “1000 FEET” plaque. Farther upstream, a W4-2R lane-reduction symbol sign is shown to the right of the roadway. The distance between the W4-2R sign and the beginning of the taper is labeled, “See Table 903.3.4 to determine the advance placement distance.” A legend indicates the direction of travel. Two notes are shown: “1. See EPG 620.2.14 Lane Reduction Pavement Markings” and “2. See EPG 620.2.22 Merge Arrows.”
|'''Figure 903.3.39.1''' Example Sequences for Lane Ends and Lane Merge Signs ''(Sheet 1 of 5)'']]

{{SpanID|fig903.3.39.2}}
[[File:Figure 903.3.39.2 Example Sequences for Lane Ends and Lane Merge Signs (Sheet 2 of 5).png|thumb|center|800px|alt=A vertical roadway is shown with two travel lanes at the bottom of the figure and one travel lane at the top. The right lane ends through a taper marked by white lane-reduction arrows placed in the right travel lane, each pointing diagonally toward the adjacent lane. At the bottom right of the figure, a W9-1R “RIGHT LANE ENDS” sign is mounted above a W16-2P “1000 FEET” plaque. Farther upstream, a W4-2R lane-reduction symbol sign is shown to the right of the roadway. The distance between the W4-2R sign and the beginning of the taper is labeled, “See Table 903.3.4 to determine the advance placement distance.” A legend indicates the direction of travel. A note states, “See EPG 620.2.14 for lane-reduction pavement markings and EPG 620.2.22 for merge arrows.”
|'''Figure 903.3.39.2''' Example Sequences for Lane Ends and Lane Merge Signs ''(Sheet 2 of 5)'']]

{{SpanID|fig903.3.39.3}}
[[File:Figure 903.3.39.3 Example Sequences for Lane Ends and Lane Merge Signs (Sheet 3 of 5).jpg|thumb|center|800px|alt="The figure shows two roadway examples where the left lane ends. The illustration on the left depicts an undivided roadway with one travel lane in one direction and two travel lanes in the opposite direction. On the side with two lanes, the left lane ends through a taper marked with a yellow painted gore and white lane-reduction arrows placed in the left travel lane, each arrow pointing diagonally toward the adjacent lane. To the right of this roadway, a W9-1L “LEFT LANE ENDS” sign is shown mounted above a W16-2P “1000 FEET” plaque, and a W4-2L lane-reduction symbol sign is shown farther upstream. The distance between the W4-2L sign and the beginning of the taper is labeled, “See Table 903.3.4 to determine the advance placement distance.”
The illustration on the right depicts a divided or one-way roadway with two travel lanes. The left lane ends through a taper marked by white lane-reduction arrows pointing diagonally toward the adjacent lane. To the right of this roadway, a W9-1L “LEFT LANE ENDS” sign is shown mounted above a W16-2P “1000 FEET” plaque, with a W4-2L lane-reduction symbol sign shown farther upstream. The same advance placement distance label is shown.
A note states, “See EPG 620.2.14 for lane-reduction pavement markings and EPG 620 for merge arrows.” A legend indicates the direction of travel."
|'''Figure 903.3.39.3''' Example Sequences for Lane Ends and Lane Merge Signs ''(Sheet 3 of 5)'']]

{{SpanID|fig903.3.39.4}}
[[File:Figure 903.3.39.4 Example Sequences for Lane Ends and Lane Merge Sign (Sheet 4 of 5).png|thumb|center|800px|alt=The intersection of a two-lane horizontal roadway with a three-lane vertical roadway is shown.The right and left side of the horizontal roadway is composed of one through travel lane in each direction. The left side also has a third lane which is a right-turn only lane when approaching the intersection traveling eastbound to turn south.The vertical roadway is composed of two northbound lanes and one southbound lane. The south side of this vertical roadway is composed of a combination straight or left-turn lane in the left northbound travel lane and a combination straight or right-turn lane in the right northbound travel lane. Solid white through and turn arrows are shown in these travel lanes.Starting near the bottom of the figure, to the right of the right shoulder of the northbound lanes, a sign assembly composed of a W9-1R sign mounted above a W16-2P plaque is shown.On the north side of this vertical roadway, a W4-2R sign is shown to indicate that the two northbound lanes are transitioning to one lane ahead. Before the right lane taper begins, two solid white arrows are shown in the right northbound travel lane on the pavement pointing diagonally to the left northbound travel lane. An “optional dotted lane line” is shown adjacent to these arrows in the middle of the travel lanes. All pavement markings are denoting a northbound left lane merge ahead.
|'''Figure 903.3.39.4''' Example Sequences for Lane Ends and Lane Merge Sign ''(Sheet 4 of 5)'']]

{{SpanID|fig903.3.39.5}}
[[File:Figure 903.3.39.5 Example Sequences for Lane Ends and Lane Merge Signs (Sheet 5 of 5).png|thumb|center|800px|alt="The figure shows a vertical roadway where two lanes traveling in the same direction reduce to one lane. At the bottom of the roadway, two upward-travel lanes are shown. Farther up the figure, both outside edges of the roadway taper inward, reducing the roadway to a single lane. A single dashed centerline is shown within the remaining lane.

To the right of the roadway, near the lower portion of the figure, a sign assembly is shown consisting of a W9-4 “LANES MERGE” sign mounted above a W16-2P “500 FEET” plaque. Farther up the roadway, another sign assembly is shown consisting of a W4-8 lane-reduction symbol sign. A label between the W4-8 sign and the start of the taper reads, “See Table 903.3.4 to determine the advance placement distance.”
A legend indicates the direction of travel with a right-pointing arrow. Notes reference EPG 620.2.14 for lane-reduction pavement markings and EPG 903.3.40 for additional information about this type of merge."
|'''Figure 903.3.39.5''' Example Sequences for Lane Ends and Lane Merge Signs ''(Sheet 5 of 5)'']]

=={{SpanID|903.3.40}}903.3.40 Lanes Merge Signs (W9-4 and W4-8) (MUTCD Section 2C.48)==
<center>
{|
| [[File:W4-8.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W4-8'''</center>]]
| [[File:W9-4.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W9-4'''</center>]]
|}
</center>

'''Support. '''The LANES MERGE (W9-4) and Single-Lane Transition (W4-8) signs are used to warn of a merge of two lanes to one in the same direction of travel with a merging maneuver required for each lane (see [[#fig903.3.39.5|Figure 903.3.39.5]]). This type of merge is for a geometric condition where both approach lanes merge into a single lane, not where one lane merges into the other. [[616.8 TTC Zone Warning Signs (MUTCD Chapter 6H) #616.8.8|EPG 618.8.8]] contains information about the use of the late merge sign.

'''Guidance. '''The Single-Lane Transition (W4-8) sign should be located at the advance placement distance in accordance with [[#tab903.3.4|Table 903.3.4]].

The Lanes Merge (W9-4) sign should be used in advance of the W4-8 sign to provide additional warning that both lanes form a single lane and that a merging maneuver is needed for the traffic in each lane.

=={{SpanID|903.3.41}}903.3.41 RIGHT (LEFT) LANE EXIT ONLY Sign (W9-7) (MUTCD Section 2C.50)==

[[File:W9-7.png|thumb|center|160px|alt=|<center>'''W9-7'''</center>]]

'''Option. '''The RIGHT (LEFT) LANE EXIT ONLY (W9-7) sign may be used to provide advance warning to road users that traffic in the right-hand (left-hand) lane of a roadway will be required to depart the roadway at the next exit.

'''Guidance. '''If used, the W9-7 sign should be installed upstream from the first overhead guide sign that contains an EXIT ONLY sign panel or upstream from the first RIGHT (LEFT) LANE MUST EXIT (R3-33) regulatory sign, if used, whichever is farther upstream from the exit.

=={{SpanID|903.3.42}}903.3.42 Two-Way Traffic Sign (W6-3) (MUTCD Section 2C.51)==
[[File:W6-3.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W6-3'''</center>]]

'''Guidance. '''A Two-Way Traffic (W6-3) sign should be used to warn road users of a transition from a multi-lane divided section of roadway to a two-lane, two-way section of roadway.

A Two-Way Traffic (W6-3) sign with an AHEAD (W16-9P) plaque (see [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.57|EPG 903.3.57]]) should be used to warn road users of a transition from a one-way street to a two-lane, two-way section of roadway.

'''Option. '''The Two-Way Traffic sign may be used to supplement the Divided Highway (Road) Ends (W6-2) sign discussed in [[#903.3.19|EPG 903.3.19]].

=={{SpanID|903.3.43}}903.3.43 NO PASSING ZONE Sign (W14-3) (MUTCD Section 2C.53)==

'''Support. '''The NO PASSING ZONE (W14-3) sign is not to be used on a system-wide basis. It is intended for special use as a measure to reduce crashes at locations where there is a history of crashes related to passing maneuvers.

'''Standard. '''The NO PASSING ZONE (W14-3) sign shall be a pennant-shaped isosceles triangle with its longer axis horizontal and pointing to the right. When used, the NO PASSING ZONE sign shall be installed on the left-hand side of the roadway at the beginning of no-passing zones identified by pavement markings or DO NOT PASS signs or both (see [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2.31|EPG 903.2.31]] and [[620.2 Pavement and Curb Markings (MUTCD Chapter 3B) #620.2.3|620.2.3]]).

The use of the NO PASSING ZONE sign shall be approved by the State Highway Safety and Traffic Engineer.

=={{SpanID|903.3.44}}903.3.44 Vehicular Traffic Warning Signs (MUTCD Section 2C.54)==
'''Option. '''Vehicular Traffic Warning signs may be used to alert road users to locations where unexpected entries into the roadway by trucks, bicycles, farm vehicles, emergency vehicles, golf carts, horse-drawn vehicles, or other vehicles might occur.

'''Guidance. '''Vehicular Traffic Warning signs should be used only at locations where the road user’s sight distance is restricted, or the condition, activity, or entering traffic would be unexpected.

If the condition or activity is seasonal or temporary, the Vehicular Traffic Warning sign should be removed or covered when the condition or activity does not exist.

Before advanced warning signs are installed, all efforts to correct the sight distance issues should be made as this will be far more effective to improve safety compared to installing a sign. Roadway alignments cannot be corrected easily, but removal of vegetation on and off the state right of way that blocks sight distance can address sight distance issues.

'''Option. '''Supplemental plaques (see [[#903.3.57|EPG 903.3.57]]) with legends such as AHEAD, XX FEET, NEXT XX MILES, IN STREET, or IN ROAD may be mounted below Vehicular Traffic Warning signs to provide advance notice to road users of unexpected entries.

'''Standard. '''A Vehicular Traffic Warning sign assembly shall not be installed on an approach controlled by a STOP or a YIELD sign, except as provided in the following two Option paragraphs.

'''Option. '''The Vehicular Traffic Warning sign assembly may be installed on an approach to a circular intersection controlled by a YIELD sign where the crosswalk is at least 20 feet in advance of the yield point at the entrance to the circulatory roadway.

At a signalized or stop-controlled intersection the Vehicular Traffic Warning sign assembly may be installed on an approach to a channelized right-turn lane controlled by a YIELD sign where the crosswalk is at least 20 feet in advance of the yield point.

A Warning Beacon (see [[902.18 Flashing Beacons (MUTCD Chapter 4S) #902.18.3|EPG 902.18.3]]) may be used with any Vehicular Traffic Warning sign to indicate specific periods when the condition or activity is present or is likely to be present, or to provide enhanced sign conspicuity.

=={{SpanID|903.3.45}}903.3.45 Bicycle Warning (W11-1) Sign ==
[[File:W11-1.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W11-1'''</center>]]

'''Guidance. '''Bicycle Warning (W11-1) signs should be used only at locations where the road user’s sight distance is restricted, and the condition, activity, or entering traffic would be unexpected.

'''Option. '''Bicycle Warning (W11-1) signs may be used to alert road users to locations where unexpected entries into the roadway by cyclists might occur.

'''Support. '''Bicycle warning (W11-1) signs with a diagonal downward-pointing arrow (W16-7P) plaques are used to alert road users of locations where bicyclists routinely cross state highways.

'''Standard. '''If a post-mounted W11-1 sign is placed at the location of a bicycle crossing, a diagonal downward pointing arrow (W16-7P) plaque shall be mounted below the sign. The bicycle crossing warning sign with diagonal arrow supplemental plaque should be placed immediately in advance of, as near as possible, the crossing in both directions of travel. If the W11-1 sign is mounted overhead, the W16-7P supplemental plaque shall not be used.

'''Guidance. '''Bicycle crossing warning signs should be installed at locations where an established independent bicycle path crosses a state route. Bicycle crossing warning signs should not be installed where an established “US Bike Route” crosses a state route or where cyclists riding on the public roadways cross a state route.

'''Option. '''A Bicycle Warning (W11-1) sign with an AHEAD (W16-9P) supplemental plaque may be added in advance of the bicycle crossing if engineering judgement determines a need based on limited sight distance of the crossing.

Bicycle Warning (W11-1) signs with an In Road (W16-1P) plaque may be used to alert road users to locations where cyclists riding on the roadway might occur.

'''Standard. '''When bicycle warnings signs are installed to warn motorists of bicycle activity along a state highway, the IN ROAD (W16-1P) plaque shall be installed below the Bicycle Warning (W11-1) sign and shall match the color of the warning sign.

'''Support. '''Bicycle warning signs with the IN ROAD supplemental plaques (IN ROAD plaque replaces the SHARE THE ROAD plaque) are used to alert road users where bicyclists routinely ride along specific sections of state highways, in the travel lane or on the shoulder of the roadway.

'''Guidance. '''The use of Bicycle warning signs to warn road users of cyclist activity along specific sections of roadway should be based on identifiable, routine and/or frequent cyclist activity. Indications bicycle warnings signs should be installed should be based on conditions, such as, but not limited to:
:A. Requests received by bicycle groups, or clubs, who indicate the state highways which are part of their group’s frequent cycling routes.
:B. Requests from Amish, Mennonite or other communities who utilize bicycles as one of their primary modes of routine transportation, indicating the state highways which service their community’s cycling needs.
:C. Sections of a state route where an established bicycle trail overlaps the state route for some length, using the roadway and not a dedicated bike lane, before returning to the independent trail again.
:D. Cycling activity occurs a minimum of 3 days per week, 6 months per year.

Bicycle warning signs should not be installed along routes for the following conditions:
:A. For the purpose of promoting cycling or conveying a bicycle friendly organization when there is no routine cycling activity on that route,
:B. When cyclists have access to a dedicated bicycle lane along the route,
:C. Where cyclists have access to a parallel bike facility, or multi-use path, or
:D. In response to a request from an individual without verifying the need as described in this article.

Bicycle warning signs used to notify drivers of bicycle traffic on the state route should only be ground-mounted installations. Signs should be installed at the point on the route the activity begins and downstream of major public road entry points onto the state route.

'''Option. '''Additional bicycle warning signs may be installed based on engineering judgement if the distance between major road intersections is excessive or if there are areas with limited sight distance which may obscure bicycle traffic.

A NEXT XX MILES (W7-3aP) plaque (See [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.60|EPG 903.3.60]]) may be installed below the IN ROAD plaque if engineering judgement determines the need to notify road users of the length of roadway over which unexpected cyclists riding along the road may occur.

=={{SpanID|903.3.46}}903.3.46 Combined Bicycle/Pedestrian Crossing (W11-15) Sign ==
[[File:W11-15.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W11-15'''</center>]]

'''Option. '''Combined Bicycle/Pedestrian Crossing (W11-15) signs may be used to alert road users to locations where unexpected entries into the roadway by cyclists and pedestrians might occur.

'''Guidance. '''Combined Bicycle/Pedestrian warning signs should be installed at locations where an established shared use path crosses a state route.

'''Support. '''The combined Bicycle/Pedestrian (W11-15) sign is used where both bicyclists and pedestrians might be crossing the roadway at intersections with a shared-use path and state routes. A shared-use path is defined as a paved or gravel path, 8-10 foot wide, dedicated to bike and pedestrian traffic which is an independent facility from the roadway.

'''Standard. '''If a post-mounted W11-15 sign is placed at the location of the combined Bicycle/Pedestrian crossing, a diagonal downward pointing arrow (W16-7P) plaque shall be mounted below the sign. The Bicycle/Pedestrian warning sign with diagonal downward pointing arrow plaque shall be placed immediately in advance of, as near as possible, the crossing in both directions of travel. If the W11-15 sign is mounted overhead, the W16-7P supplemental plaque shall not be used.

'''Option. '''An advanced Bicycle/Pedestrian warning sign with an AHEAD (W16-9P) supplemental plaque may be added in advance of the Bicycle/Pedestrian crossing if engineering judgement determines a need based on limited sight distance of the crossing.

=={{SpanID|903.3.47}}903.3.47 Trail Crossing (W11-15a) Sign ==
[[File:W11-15a.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W11-15a'''</center>]]

'''Option. '''TRAIL CROSSING (W11-15a) signs may be used to alert road users to locations where unexpected entries into the roadway by cyclists, pedestrians or equestrian activity might occur.

'''Support. '''The TRAIL CROSSING sign is used to warn of a rustic trail where pedestrian, bicyclist, or equestrian activities, might be crossing the state highway. A rustic trail would typically be an unpaved trail of an undefined width, but one that is visible and identifiable by a motorist as it crosses the right of way.

'''Guidance. '''TRAIL CROSSING signs should be installed at locations where an established rustic trail used by pedestrians, bicyclists, and equestrian activities crosses a state route.

'''Standard. '''If a post-mounted W11-15a sign is placed at the location of the rustic trail crossing, a diagonal downward pointing arrow (W16-7P) plaque shall be mounted below the sign. The W11-15a sign with diagonal downward pointing arrow plaque shall be placed immediately in advance of, as near as possible, the crossing in both directions of travel. If the W11-15a sign is mounted overhead, the W16-7P supplemental plaque shall not be used.

'''Option. '''A TRAIL CROSSING warning sign with an AHEAD (W16-9P) supplemental plaque may be added in advance of the trail crossing if engineering judgement determines a need based on limited sight distance of the crossing.

=={{SpanID|903.3.48}}903.3.48 Horse-Drawn Vehicle (W11-14) Sign==
[[File:W11-14.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W11-14'''</center>]]

'''Option.''' Horse-Drawn Vehicle (W11-14) signs may be used to alert road users to locations where unexpected horse-drawn vehicles are traveling along the roadway might occur.

'''Guidance.''' W11-14 signs should be used only at locations where the road user’s sight distance is restricted, and the condition, activity, or entering traffic would be unexpected.

'''Support. '''Horse-Drawn Vehicle warning signs with the IN ROAD (W16-1P) supplemental plaque (IN ROAD plaque replaces the SHARE THE ROAD plaque) are used to alert road users where horse-drawn vehicle traffic is routinely traveling along specific sections of state highways, in the travel lane or on the shoulder of the roadway.

'''Standard. '''When Horse-drawn vehicle warnings signs are installed to warn motorists of Horse-drawn vehicle activity along a state highway, the IN ROAD (W16-1P) plaque shall be installed below the Horse-drawn vehicle warning sign and shall match the color of the warning sign.

'''Guidance. '''The use of Horse-Drawn Vehicle signs to warn road users of horse-drawn vehicle activity along specific section of roadway should be based on identifiable, routine and/or frequent horse-drawn vehicle activity. The application of horse-drawn vehicle warning signs is limited to the Amish, Mennonite or other communities who utilize horse-drawn vehicles as one of their primary modes of routine transportation. The district should work with community leadership to determine the state routes their communities utilize on a routine basis to determine the most appropriate sign installation locations.

Horse-Drawn Vehicle signs used to notify drivers of horse-drawn vehicle traffic on the state route should only be ground-mounted installations. Signs should be installed at the point on the route the activity begins and downstream of each major public road entry points onto the state route.

'''Option. '''Additional Horse-Drawn Vehicle signs with IN ROAD plaques may be installed based on engineering judgement if the distance between major road intersections is excessive or if there are areas with limited sight distance which may obscure horse-drawn vehicle traffic.

A NEXT XX MILES (W7-3aP) plaque may be added below the IN ROAD plaque if engineering judgement determines the need to notify drivers of the length of roadway affected by the warning sign.

=={{SpanID|903.3.49}}903.3.49 TRUCK CROSSING (W8-6) Sign ==
[[File:W8-6.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W8-6'''</center>]]

'''Option. '''Truck Crossing (W8-6) signs may be used to alert road users to locations where unexpected entries into the roadway by trucks crossing the road might occur.

'''Guidance. '''W8-6 signs should be used only at locations where the road user’s sight distance is restricted, and the condition, activity, or entering traffic would be unexpected.

'''Support. '''The W8-6 sign is used to alert road users to locations where trucks are routinely crossing a state highway at a commercial entrance intersection. A typical example would be a company with facilities on either side of a highway where raw materials, finished goods, etc. are routinely moved sites. In these cases, warning signs with fluorescent yellow backgrounds are installed in a permanent installation.

'''Option. '''For cases involving temporary truck crossings, such as haul roads moving earth or quarry materials, a TR12 Truck crossing agreement (see [[153.21 Traffic #153.21|EPG 153.21]]) may be used to install a temporary traffic control sign with a fluorescent orange background.

'''Guidance. '''W8-6 signs should be installed at locations where there is consistent and routine truck traffic crossing a state route where the road user’s sight distance is restricted, and the crossing would be unexpected based on engineering judgement.

The truck crossing for which the warning sign is being installed should be recognizable by the presence of a on premise business marquee sign, business name on structures or other indicators to allow drivers to associate the warning sign to the entrance/site where tucks could be crossing the state highway.

'''Standard. '''If used, the TRUCK CROSSING sign shall be placed in accordance with [[#tab903.3.4|Table 903.3.4]].

The TRUCK CROSSING sign shall only be installed for the direction of travel where the road user’s sight distance is restricted.

The TRUCK CROSSING sign shall not be used on state highways at intersections with city streets or county roads, to address issues at these types of intersections other warning signs, such as Intersection Warning signs are more appropriate.

=={{SpanID|903.3.50}}903.3.50 Truck Entrance (W11-10) Sign==
[[File:W11-10.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W11-10'''</center>]]

'''Option. '''Truck Entrance (W11-10) signs may be used to alert road users to locations where unexpected entries into the roadway by trucks might occur.

'''Guidance. '''Truck Entrance signs should be used only at locations where the road user’s sight distance is restricted, and the condition, activity, or entering traffic would be unexpected.

'''Support. '''The W11-10 sign is used to alert road users to locations where trucks are routinely entering and leaving a state highway at a non-public roadway intersection, commercial entrance. A typical example would be trucks entering and exiting a quarry entrance which has direct access to the state route. In these cases, warning signs with fluorescent yellow backgrounds are installed in a permanent installation.

'''Option. '''For cases involving a temporary truck entrance, such as logging trucks entering and leaving a timber harvest location, a TR12 Truck crossing agreement (see [[153.21 Traffic #153.21|EPG 153.21]]) may be used to install a temporary traffic control sign with a fluorescent orange background.

'''Guidance. '''Truck Entrance signs should be installed at locations where there is consistent and routine truck traffic entering and leaving a state route where the road user’s sight distance is restricted, and the crossing would be unexpected based on engineering judgement.

The truck entrance for which the sign is being installed should be recognizable by the presence of a on premise business marquee sign, building with the business name or some other form of marking to allow drivers associate the warning sign to the site where trucks could be entering or leaving the highway.

'''Standard. '''If used, the Truck Entrance sign shall be placed in accordance with [[#tab903.3.4|Table 903.3.4]].

The Truck Entrance sign shall only be installed for the direction of travel where the road user’s sight distance is restricted.

The truck entrance warning sign shall not be used on state highways at intersections with city streets or county roads, to address issues at these types of intersections other warning signs, such as Intersection Warning signs are more appropriate.

=={{SpanID|903.3.51}}903.3.51 Farm Equipment (W11-5) Warning Sign ==
[[File:W11-5.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W11-5'''</center>]]

'''Option. '''Farm Equipment Warning (W11-5) signs may be used to alert road users to locations where unexpected entries into the roadway by farm equipment crossing the road might occur.

'''Guidance. '''W11-5 signs should be used only at locations where the road user’s sight distance is restricted, and the condition, activity, or entering traffic would be unexpected.

'''Support. '''The Farm Equipment (W11-5) sign is used to alert road users to locations where slow-moving farm vehicles are routinely entering or crossing the state highway (immediately across or a short transition down the road to a different entrance) if the highway splits the farm. A typical example would be a dairy farm where these crossings take place daily. In these cases, fluorescent yellow warning signs are installed in a permanent installation.

Farm Equipment signs are not installed to warn of farm equipment traveling along a state highway. This warning is the responsibility of the farmer and can be addressed by displaying the appropriate warning lights and signs on the equipment as well as having the appropriate lead and/or trailing vehicles escorting the equipment.

'''Option. '''For cases involving a temporary farm equipment access entrance, such as during planting or harvest season, a TR12 Truck Crossing agreement (see [[153.21 Traffic #153.21|EPG 153.21]]) may be used to install a temporary traffic control sign with a fluorescent orange background.

'''Guidance. '''Farm Equipment signs should be installed at locations where there is consistent and routine farm equipment entering and leaving a state route where the road user’s sight distance is restricted, and the crossing would be unexpected based on engineering judgement.

The farm vehicle entrance for which the warning sign is being installed should be recognizable by the presence of a on-premise business marquee sign, presence of farm equipment, farm structures or other indicators to allow drivers to associate the warning sign to the site where farm vehicles could be crossing/entering the highway.

'''Standard. '''If used, the Farm Equipment warning sign shall be placed in accordance with [[#tab903.3.4|Table 903.3.4]].

The Farm Equipment warning sign shall only be installed for the direction of travel where the road user’s sight distance is restricted.

=={{SpanID|903.3.52}}903.3.52 Emergency Vehicle (W11-8) Sign==
<center>
{|
| [[File:W11-8.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W11-8'''</center>]]
| [[File:W11-12P.jpg|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W11-12P'''</center>]]
|}
</center>

'''Option. '''Emergency Vehicle (W11-8) signs may be used to alert road users to locations where unexpected entries into the roadway by emergency vehicles might occur.

'''Guidance.''' Emergency Vehicle signs should be used only at locations where the road user’s sight distance is restricted, and the condition, activity, or entering traffic would be unexpected.

'''Support.''' The Emergency Vehicle sign is used to alert road users to locations where emergency vehicles are routinely entering and leaving a state highway at dedicated emergency vehicle facility entrances.

'''Guidance. '''Emergency Vehicle signs should be installed at a state route where the road user’s sight distance is restricted, and the crossing would be unexpected based on engineering judgement.

The emergency vehicle entrance for which the warning sign is being installed should be recognizable by the presence of a on premise marquee sign, building with the emergency agency name displayed or some other form of marking to allow drivers to associate the warning sign to the site/entrance where emergency vehicles could be entering or leaving the state highway.

'''Standard. '''If used, the Emergency Vehicle warning sign shall be placed in accordance with [[#tab903.3.4|Table 903.3.4]].

The Emergency Vehicle warning sign shall only be installed for the direction of travel where the road user’s sight distance is restricted.

When measuring sight distance for emergency vehicle entrances, the sight distance shall be determined using a 3.5 ft. eye height and an 8 ft. object height in the same method use to evaluate school bus stop sight distances (see [[908.2 Signs (MUTCD Chapter 7B) #908.2.4|EPG 908.2.4]]).

The Emergency Vehicle sign with the EMERGENCY SIGNAL AHEAD (W11-12P) supplemental plaque shall be placed in advance of all emergency-vehicle traffic control signals (see [[902.13 Traffic Control Signals for Emergency-Vehicle Access (MUTCD Chapter 4M)|EPG 902.13]]).

=={{SpanID|903.3.53}}903.3.53 Non-Vehicular Warning Signs (W11-2, W11-3, W11-4, and W11-7) (MUTCD Section 2C.55)==
<center>
{|
| [[File:W11-2.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W11-2'''</center>]]
| [[File:W11-4.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W11-4''' (Cattle)</center>]]
| [[File:W11-7.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W11-7'''</center>]]
|}
</center>

'''Option. '''Non-Vehicular Warning (W11-2, W11-4, and W11-7) signs may be used to alert road users in advance of locations where unexpected entries into the roadway might occur.

'''Support. '''These conflicts might be relatively confined or might occur randomly over a segment of roadway.

'''Guidance. '''If used in advance of a pedestrian or equestrian crossing, the W11-2 and W11-7, signs should be supplemented with plaques (see [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.59|EPG 903.3.59]]) with the legend AHEAD or XX FEET to inform road users that they are approaching a point where crossing activity might occur.

'''Standard. '''If a post-mounted W11-2 or W11-7 sign is placed at the location of the crossing point where pedestrians or equestrians might be crossing the roadway, a diagonal downward-pointing arrow (W16-7P) plaque (see [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.62|EPG 903.3.62]]) shall be mounted below the sign. If the W11-2 or W11-7 sign is mounted overhead, the W16-7P plaque shall not be used.

A Non-Vehicular Warning sign assembly shall not be installed on an approach controlled by a STOP or a YIELD sign, except as provided in the first two Option paragraphs below.

Equestrian (W11-7) warning signs shall only be installed at Public Equestrian Trail Crossings. Existing Equestrian (W11-7) Crossing signs that do not meet the Public Equestrian Trail Crossing criteria shall be left in place until they reach the end of their service life.

The use of the Deer (W11-3) warning signs has been discontinued by MoDOT due to studies proving these signs provide little or no safety benefit. Existing W11-3 signs shall be removed at the end of their service life.

The Cattle (W11-4) sign shall be issued to an individual only when the Application for Sign at Cattle Crossings contract (TR09) is fully executed. See [[153.21 Traffic #153.21|EPG 153.21]] for the TR09 Agreement.

'''Option. '''The Non-Vehicular Warning sign assembly may be installed on an approach to a circular intersection controlled by a YIELD sign where the crosswalk is at least 20 feet in advance of the yield point at the entrance to a circulatory roadway.

At a signalized or stop-controlled intersection the Non-Vehicular Warning sign assembly may be installed on an approach to a channelized right-turn lane controlled by a YIELD sign where the crosswalk is at least 20 feet in advance of the yield point.

A Pedestrian Crossing (W11-2) sign may be placed overhead or may be post-mounted with a diagonal downward-pointing arrow (W16-7P) plaque at the crosswalk location where Yield Here To Pedestrians signs (see [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2.18|EPG 903.2.18]]) have been installed in advance of the crosswalk.

'''Standard. '''If a W11-2 sign has been post-mounted at the crosswalk location where a Yield Here To Pedestrians sign is used on the approach, the Yield Here To Pedestrians sign shall not be placed on the same post as the W11-2 sign.

'''Option. '''An advance Pedestrian Crossing (W11-2) sign with an AHEAD or a distance supplemental plaque may be used in conjunction with a Yield Here To Pedestrians sign on the approach to the same crosswalk.

The crossing location identified by a W11-2 or W11-7 sign may be defined with crosswalk markings (see [[620.3 Crosswalk Markings (MUTCD Chapter 3C) #620.3|EPG 620.3]]).

'''Standard. '''The W11-2 sign and related supplemental plaques shall only have a fluorescent yellow-green background with a black legend and border if the signs are installed within a school area as described in the fifth Support paragraph of [[#903.3.2|EPG 903.3.2]].

'''Guidance. '''When a fluorescent yellow-green background is used, a systematic approach featuring one background color within a zone or area should be used. The mixing of standard yellow and fluorescent yellow-green backgrounds within a selected site area should be avoided.

'''Option. '''A Warning Beacon (see [[902.18 Flashing Beacons (MUTCD Chapter 4S) #902.18.3|EPG 902.18.3]]) may be used with any Non-Vehicular Warning sign to indicate specific periods when the condition or activity is present or is likely to be present, or to provide enhanced sign conspicuity.

=={{SpanID|903.3.54}}903.3.54 FERRY CROSSING AHEAD Sign (W3-18)==
[[image:W3-10.gif|center|thumb|<center>'''W3-18'''</center>|100px]]

'''Option. '''The FERRY CROSSING AHEAD (W3-18) sign may be installed for a ferry crossing. A STOP (R1-1) sign at the ferry crossing may be used as a supplement.

=={{SpanID|903.3.55}}903.3.55 Passing Lane Warning Signs (W6-5, W6-5a, W6-6aP, W6-16, and W6-17)==
<center>
{|
|-
|[[image:W4-12a.gif|left|100px|thumb|<center>'''W6-6aP'''</center>]]||[[image:W4-10.gif|left|thumb|<center>'''W6-16'''</center>|100px]]||[[image:W4-11.gif|left|100px|thumb|<center>'''W6-17'''</center>]]
|}
</center>

'''Support. '''Alternating passing lanes may be provided on rural, two-lane highways to provide motorists with an opportunity to pass slower vehicles without crossing the centerline. Where passing lanes are provided, operations and safety may be improved by giving motorists advance information about the location of passing lanes. Providing motorists with advance notice of passing lanes may reduce the number of passing maneuvers.

'''Standard. '''The PASSING LANE ENDS (W6-16), WATCH FOR LEFT-TURNING TRAFFIC IN PASSING LANE (W6-17), and PASSING LANE PLAQUE (W6-6aP) signs shall be black legend and fluorescent yellow background and shall only be used in alternating passing lane sections.

The PASSING LANE ENDS sign shall be used prior to the end of the passing lane to warn motorists the passing lane in that direction of travel is ending and merging back to a single lane. The sign shall be placed in advance of the LANE ENDS MERGE RIGHT (W9-2) sign at a distance determined by [[#tab903.3.4|Table 903.3.4]].

'''Option. '''The WATCH FOR LEFT TURNING TRAFFIC IN PASSING LANE sign may be used at locations in a passing lane segment where left turns are common, such as at a county road. This sign may be installed at the judgement of the engineer.

The Two-Way Traffic on a Three-Lane Roadway (W6-5 and W6-5a) signs may be installed along three-lane roadways with two lanes in one direction and one in the opposing direction.

=={{SpanID|903.3.56}}903.3.56 TRAVEL SAFE ZONE – FINES DOUBLED Sign (W27-1)==
[[File:W27-1.jpg|center|130px|thumb|<center>'''W27-1'''</center>]]

'''Support. '''The TRAVEL SAFE ZONE - FINES DOUBLED (W27-1) sign is not to be used on a system-wide basis. It is intended for special use at locations where severe crashes are occurring. There is a requirement for regional support to focus a safety campaign involving local law enforcement and public information efforts to reduce the number and severity of crashes within the travel safe zone (see [[907.3 Travel Safe Zones #907.3 | EPG 907.3]]).

'''Standard. '''A TRAVEL SAFE ZONE – FINES DOUBLED sign shall be used to mark the beginning of a designated travel safe zone. This sign is installed in conjunction with the FINES DOUBLED ENDS (R2-20) sign (see [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2.70|EPG 903.2.70]]).

=={{SpanID|903.3.57}}903.3.57 Use of Supplemental Warning Plaques (MUTCD Section 2C.57)==

'''Option. '''A supplemental warning plaque may be displayed with a warning or regulatory sign when engineering judgment indicates that road users require additional warning information beyond that contained in the main message of the warning or regulatory sign.

'''Standard. '''Supplemental warning plaques shall be used only in combination with and installed on the same post(s) as warning or regulatory signs. They shall not be mounted alone or displayed alone.

Unless otherwise provided in the EPG for a particular plaque, supplemental warning plaques shall be mounted below the sign they supplement.

=={{SpanID|903.3.58}}903.3.58 Design of Supplemental Warning Plaques (MUTCD Section 2C.58)==

'''Standard. '''A supplemental warning plaque used with a warning sign shall have the same legend, border, and background color as the warning sign with which it is displayed. A supplemental warning plaque used with a regulatory sign shall have a black legend and border on a yellow background.

Supplemental warning plaques shall be square or rectangular.

=={{SpanID|903.3.59}}903.3.59 Advisory Speed Plaque (W13-1P) and Confirmation Advisory Speed Plaque (W13-1aP) (MUTCD Section 2C.59)==
<center>
{|
| [[File:W13-1P.png|thumb|center|84px|alt=|<center>'''W13-1P'''</center>]]
| [[File:W13-1aP.png|thumb|center|220px|alt=|<center>'''W13-1aP'''</center>]]
|}
</center>

'''Option. '''The Advisory Speed (W13-1P) plaque may be used to supplement an advance warning sign to indicate the advisory speed for a condition.

The Confirmation Advisory Speed (W13-1aP) plaque may be used to supplement a One-Direction Large Arrow (W1-6) sign on the outside of a turn or curve in line with and at approximately a right angle to approaching traffic.

'''Standard. '''The use of the Advisory Speed and Confirmation Advisory Speed plaques for horizontal curves shall be in accordance with [[#903.3.6|EPG 903.3.6]]. The Advisory Speed plaque shall also be used where an engineering study indicates a need to advise road users of the advisory speed for other roadway conditions.

The speed displayed on the Advisory Speed and Confirmation Advisory Speed plaques shall be a multiple of 5 mph. The maximum advisory speed posted shall never be more than the posted speed limit.

Except in emergencies or when the condition is temporary, an Advisory Speed or Confirmation Advisory Speed plaque shall not be installed until the advisory speed has been determined by an engineering study.

The Advisory Speed plaque shall only be used to supplement an advance warning sign. The Advisory Speed plaque or the Confirmation Advisory Speed plaque shall not be installed as a separate sign installation.

'''Guidance. '''The Advisory Speed plaque, if used with a sign that is also supplemented with another plaque, such as an Advance Street Name plaque (see [[#903.3.64|EPG 903.3.64]]), should be mounted immediately below the primary warning sign with any other plaque mounted below the Advisory Speed plaque.

'''Standard. '''The Confirmation Advisory Speed plaque shall only be used to supplement a One-Direction Large Arrow (W1-6) sign (see [[#903.3.10|EPG 903.3.10]]) or an Exit Gore (E5-1 series) sign (see [[ 903.5 Guide Signs - Freeways and Expressways (MUTCD Chapter 2E) #903.5.26| EPG 903.5.26]]) and shall not be installed as a separate sign installation.

The advisory speed shall be determined by an engineering study that follows established engineering practices.

'''Guidance. '''The advisory speed should be determined based on free-flowing traffic conditions.

Because changes in conditions, such as roadway geometrics, surface characteristics, or sight distance, might affect the advisory speed, each location should be evaluated periodically or when conditions change.

'''Support. '''Among the established engineering practices that are appropriate for the determination of the recommended advisory speed for a horizontal curve are the following:
:A. Accelerometer method
:B. 10 degrees of ball bank for all speeds

<center>
{| class="wikitable" style="padding: 1em;"
|-
| '''Engineering Study for Ball-Banking'''

The procedure to determine the safe speed on a curve or turn is a ball-bank study. To correctly use the ball-bank indicator, the ball-bank indicator should be mounted on the dashboard of a passenger car and adjusted to read "0" when the car is stationary on a level grade with the ball-bank indicator being in a vertical plane. When adjusting the indicator, all personnel who are to be in the car while testing should be in their seats and all four tires should have the same pressure. It is usually best for at least two persons to be in the car while taking the ball-bank reading: one for driving, the other for observation and recording.

The 10-degree reading that can be maintained the complete length of a curve is the appropriate safe speed for that curve. Care must be taken to maintain the car in its proper lane and to maintain a smooth, consistent speed throughout the curve. It will occasionally be found that a curve will have a higher safe speed in one direction than the other. In such cases, the lower safe speed should be used for both directions. Only increments of 5 mph are used on the Advisory Speed Plaque, therefore the curve shall be posted to the nearest 5 mph speed from the survey.
|-
|}
</center>

=={{SpanID|903.3.60}}903.3.60 Distance Plaques (W16-2P, W16-3P, W16-4P, and W7-3aP) (MUTCD Section 2C.61)==
<center>
{|
| [[File:W16-2P.png|thumb|center|130px|alt=|<center>'''W16-2P'''</center>]]
| [[File:W16-3P.png|thumb|center|130px|alt=|<center>'''W16-3P'''</center>]]
| [[File:W16-4P.png|thumb|center|130px|alt=|<center>'''W16-4P'''</center>]]
| [[File:W7-3aP.png|thumb|center|130px|alt=|<center>'''W7-3aP'''</center>]]
|}
</center>

'''Option. '''The Distance Ahead (W16-2P and W16-3P) plaques may be used to inform the road user of the distance to the condition indicated by the warning sign.

The Next Distance (W7-3aP and W16-4P) plaques may be used to inform road users of the length of roadway over which the condition indicated by the warning sign exists.

'''Standard. '''Distances shall be shown in ¼ mile or 100 ft. increments. If the distance is less than a ½ mile then feet shall be used.

=={{SpanID|903.3.61}}903.3.61 Supplemental Arrow Plaques (W16-5P and W16-6P) (MUTCD Section 2C.62)==
<center>
{|
| [[File:W16-5P_yellow.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W16-5P'''</center>]]
| [[File:W16-6P_yellow.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W16-6P'''</center>]]
|}
</center>

'''Guidance. '''If the condition indicated by a warning sign is located on an intersecting road and the distance between the intersection and condition is not sufficient to provide adequate advance placement of the warning sign, a Supplemental Arrow (W16-5P or W16-6P) plaque should be used below the warning sign.

'''Standard. '''Supplemental Arrow plaques shall have the same legend design as the Advance Turn Arrow and Directional Arrow auxiliary signs (see [[903.4 Guide Signs—Conventional Roads (MUTCD Chapter 2D) #903.4.22|EPG 903.4.22]] and [[903.4 Guide Signs—Conventional Roads (MUTCD Chapter 2D) #903.4.24|903.4.24]]) except that they shall have a black legend and border on a fluorescent yellow or fluorescent yellow-green background, as appropriate.

=={{SpanID|903.3.62}}903.3.62 Diagonal Downward-Pointing Arrow Plaques (W16-7P and W16-7aP) (MUTCD Section 2C.63)==
<center>
{|
| [[File:W16-7P.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W16-7P'''</center>]]
| [[File:W16-7aP.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W16a-7P'''</center>]]
|}
</center>

'''Support. '''Diagonal downward-pointing arrow (W16-7P and W16-7aP) plaques are used with certain Vehicular Traffic Warning signs and certain Non-Vehicular Warning signs (see [[#903.3.53|EPG 903.3.53]]), and School Crossing signs (see [[908.2 Signs (MUTCD Chapter 7B) #908.2.3|EPG 908.2.3]]) to indicate the specific location of a crossing point.

The W16-7P plaque contains a single arrow pointing diagonally down to the right or left, toward the roadway, depending on which side of the roadway it is located.

'''Option. '''A W16-7aP plaque may be used with a single crossing sign located on a narrow median separating two roadways with traffic in the same direction where the crossing traverses both roadways.

=={{SpanID|903.3.63}}903.3.63 Hill-Related Plaques (W7-3 Series) (MUTCD Section 2C.64)==
<center>
{|
| [[File:W7-3P.png|thumb|center|90px|alt=|<center>'''W7-3P'''</center>]]
| [[File:W7-3aP.png|thumb|center|90px|alt=|<center>'''W7-3aP'''</center>]]
|}
</center>

'''Guidance. '''Hill-Related (W7-3 series) plaques (see [[#903.3.14|EPG 903.3.14]]) or other appropriate legends and larger signs should be used for emphasis or where special hill characteristics exist.

On longer grades, the use of a distance (W7-3aP) plaque (see [[#903.3.14|EPG 903.3.14]]) at periodic intervals of approximately 1-mile spacing should be considered.

=={{SpanID|903.3.64}}903.3.64 Advance Street Name Plaques (W16-8P and W16-8aP) (MUTCD Section 2C.65)==
<center>
{|
| [[File:W16-8P.png|thumb|center|150px|alt=|<center>'''W16-8P'''</center>]]
| [[File:W16-8aP.png|thumb|center|260px|alt=|<center>'''W16-8aP'''</center>]]
|}
</center>

'''Support. '''Advance street name signing can provide valuable information to the motorist. Intersections that are signed with Intersection Warning (W2 series) or Advance Traffic Control (W3 series) signs typically have inherent sight distance concerns. The addition of the street name to the warning sign can aid a motorist in making decisions in a timely manner.

'''Option. '''An Advance Street Name (W16-8P or W16-8aP) plaque may be used with any Intersection (W1-10 series, W2 series, W10-2, W10-3, or W10-4) or Advance Traffic Control (W3 series) sign to identify the name of the intersecting street.

If the side road being signed is maintained by a public agency, the addition of the street name sign may be considered on request.

'''Standard. '''The lettering on Advance Street Name plaques shall be composed of a combination of lower-case letters with initial upper-case letters.

If two street names are used on the Advance Street Name plaque, a directional arrow pointing in the direction of the street shall be placed next to each street name. Arrows pointing to the left shall be placed to the left of the street name, and arrows pointing to the right shall be placed to the right of the street name.

The street name used on an Advance Street Name supplemental sign shall be the approved name used by either the local agency or the Emergency 911 Coordinator.

When used, the Advance Street Name supplemental plaque shall only be mounted below the W2 or W3 series warning sign or the Advisory Speed plaque on the same post.

The Advance Street Name supplemental plaque for a 36 in. x 36 in. warning sign shall be a maximum of 36 in. wide and for a 48 in. x 48 in. warning sign shall be a maximum of 48 in. wide.

'''Guidance. '''If two street names are used on the Advance Street Name plaque, the street names and associated arrows should be displayed in the following order:
:A. For a single intersection, the name of the street to the left should be displayed above the name of the street to the right; or
:B. For two sequential intersections, such as where the plaque is used with an Offset Side Roads (W2-7) or a Double Side Road (W2-8) sign, the name of the first street encountered should be displayed above the name of the second street encountered, and the arrow associated with the second street encountered should be an advance arrow, such as the arrow shown on the W16-6P arrow plaque (see [[#903.3.61|EPG 903.3.61]]).

=={{SpanID|903.3.65}}903.3.65 Traffic Does Not Stop Plaques (W4-4P Series) (MUTCD Section 2C.66)==
<center>
{|
| [[File:W4-4P.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W4-4P'''</center>]]
| [[File:W4-4aP.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W4-4aP'''</center>]]
| [[File:W4-4bP.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W4-4bP'''</center>]]
|}
</center>

'''Option. '''The CROSS TRAFFIC DOES NOT STOP (W4-4P) plaque may be used in combination with a STOP sign when engineering judgment indicates that conditions are present that are causing or could cause road users to misinterpret the intersection as an all-way stop.

The TRAFFIC FROM LEFT (RIGHT) DOES NOT STOP (W4-4aP) or ONCOMING TRAFFIC DOES NOT STOP (W4-4bP) plaque may be used when such messages more accurately describe the traffic controls established at the intersection.

'''Guidance. '''The W4-4aP and W4-4bP plaques should be used at intersections where STOP signs control all but one approach to the intersection, unless the only non-stopped approach is from a one-way street.

'''Standard. '''If a W4-4P series plaque is used, it shall be mounted below the STOP sign.

=={{SpanID|903.3.66}}903.3.66 IN ROAD and IN STREET Plaques (W16-1P) (MUTCD Section 2C.67)==
[[File:W16-1P.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W16-1P'''</center>]]

'''Option. '''In situations where there is a need to warn drivers to watch for other slower forms of transportation traveling along the highway, such as bicycles or horse-drawn vehicles, an IN ROAD (W16-1P) plaque may be used.

'''Standard. '''The background color of the W16-1P plaque shall match the background color of the warning sign with which it is displayed. If a W16-1P plaque is used, it shall be mounted below a Bicycle (W11-1) or Horse-Drawn Vehicle (W11-14) warning signs and shall not be mounted alone.

'''Support. '''[[914.2 Regulatory Signs (MUTCD Chapter 9B) #914.2.6 | EPG 914.2.6]] contains information about the use of a Bicycles Allowed Use of Full Lane (R9-20) sign to inform drivers of the presence of bicycles in the roadway or where bicyclists are expected or preferred to use the full lane.

=={{SpanID|903.3.67}}903.3.67 NOTICE Plaque (W16-18p)==
[[File:W16-18P.jpg|center|120px|thumb|<center>'''W16-18P'''</center>]]

'''Support. '''It is sometimes necessary to enhance the conspicuity of a regulatory sign to attract drivers’ attention to the message the sign is conveying. This may be necessary to help notify drivers to a speed limit reduction, turning movement prohibition, or bridge weight restriction. The NOTICE (W16-18P) plaque is an alternate to the use of red flags (see [[903.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 2A) #903.1.11| EPG 903.1.11]]).

'''Standard. '''The NOTICE (W16-18P) plaque shall not be used alone.

When used, the NOTICE plaque shall be installed directly above the regulatory sign it is enhancing.

'''Guidance. '''The use of the NOTICE (W16-18P) plaque should be based on engineering judgment and not systematically applied to a specific sign unless otherwise specified in the EPG.

=={{SpanID|903.3.68}}903.3.68 Exception Plaques (W16-23P and W16-24P)==
<center>
{|
| [[File:W16-23P.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W16-23P'''</center>]]
| [[File:W16-24P.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W16-24P'''</center>]]
|}
</center>

'''Support.''' The EXCEPT TO TURN (W16-23P) supplemental warning plaque is used with the NO TRUCKS LEFT LANE (R5-32) regulatory sign (see [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2.36|EPG 903.2.36]]) in locations where trucks are not allowed to drive in the left lane, but are allowed to enter the left lane in order to make a turn. The EXCEPT TO EXIT (W16-24P) supplemental warning plaque is used with the NO TRUCKS LEFT LANE (R5-32) regulatory sign in locations where trucks are not allowed to drive in the left lane, but trucks are allowed to enter the left lane in order to exit the highway.

'''Standard.''' When used, the EXCEPT TO TURN (W16-23P) and EXCEPT TO EXIT (W16-24P) supplemental warning plaques shall only be installed in conjunction with the FINES DOUBLED ENDS (R2-20) sign (see [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2.70|EPG 903.2.70]]).

=={{SpanID|903.3.69}}903.3.69 Warning Signs Provided for Other Agencies==

'''Support. '''MoDOT will provide, if requested by the appropriate local traffic authority, warning signs for conditions beyond the end of state-maintained right of way.

If the location for placement of an advance warning sign for a curve, turn, paved road, stop condition or other condition deemed appropriate falls on state-maintained right of way, MoDOT will place and maintain the traffic control device on state-maintained right-of-way at the request of the local traffic authority.

'''Standard. '''The placement of all traffic control devices on the state highway system shall be governed by the Engineering Policy Guide. MoDOT is responsible for the placement and maintenance of all signs on state-maintained right-of-way.

=={{SpanID|903.3.70}}903.3.70 Object Marker Design and Placement Height (MUTCD Section 2C.70)==

'''Support. '''Types 1, 2, and 3 object markers are used to mark obstructions within or adjacent to the roadway. Type 4 object markers are used to mark the end of a roadway.

'''Standard. '''When used, object markers (see [[#fig903.3.70|Figure 903.3.70]]) shall not have a border and shall consist of an arrangement of one or more of the following types:

Type 1—a diamond-shaped sign, at least 18 inches on a side, consisting of an all-yellow retroreflective sign (OM1-3).

Type 2—an all-yellow horizontal or vertical retroreflective sign (OM2-2V or OM2-2H), measuring 6 x 12 inches.

Type 3—a striped marker, 12 x 36 inches, consisting of a vertical rectangle with alternating black and retroreflective yellow stripes sloping downward at an angle of 45 degrees toward the side of the obstruction on which traffic is to pass. The minimum width of the yellow and black stripes shall be 3 inches.

Type 4—a diamond-shaped sign, at least 18 inches on a side, consisting of an all-red retroreflective sign (OM4-3).

'''Support. '''Type 3 object markers with stripes that begin at the upper right side and slope downward to the lower left side are designated as right object markers (OM3-R). Object markers with stripes that begin at the upper left side and slope downward to the lower right side are designated as left object markers (OM3-L). Object markers with chevron stripes that slope downward to both the lower left and lower right sides are designated as center object markers (OM3-C).

'''Guidance. '''When used for marking obstructions within the roadway or obstructions that are 8 feet or less from the shoulder or curb, the minimum mounting height, measured from the bottom of the object marker to the elevation of the near edge of the traveled way, should be 4 feet.

When used to mark obstructions more than 8 feet from the shoulder or curb, the clearance from the ground to the bottom of the object marker should be at least 4 feet.

Object markers should not present a vertical or horizontal clearance obstacle for pedestrians.

'''Option. '''When object markers or markings are applied to an obstruction that by its nature requires a lower or higher mounting, the vertical mounting height may vary according to need.

{{SpanID|fig903.3.70}}
[[File:Figure 903.3.70 Object Markers.png|thumb|center|400px|alt="The figure shows four categories of object markers used to identify obstructions.
Type 1 Object Markers (obstructions within the roadway):
A single yellow diamond-shaped marker labeled OM1-3.
Type 2 Object Markers (obstructions adjacent to the roadway):
Two yellow rectangular markers: a vertical rectangle labeled OM2-2V and a horizontal rectangle labeled OM2-2H.
Type 3 Object Markers (obstructions adjacent to or within the roadway):
Three yellow-and-black striped rectangular markers are shown:
The OM3-L marker has diagonal stripes sloping downward from left to right.
The OM3-C marker has alternating diagonal stripes forming downward-pointing chevrons.
The OM3-R marker has diagonal stripes sloping downward from right to left.
Type 4 Object Marker (end of roadway):
A red diamond-shaped marker labeled OM4-3."
|'''Figure 903.3.70''' Object Markers]]

=={{SpanID|903.3.71}}903.3.71 Object Markers for Obstructions Within the Roadway (MUTCD Section 2C.71)==

'''Standard. '''Obstructions within the roadway shall be marked with a Type 1 or Type 3 object marker. In addition to markers on the face of the obstruction, warning of approach to the obstruction shall be given by appropriate pavement markings (see [[620.2 Pavement and Curb Markings (MUTCD Chapter 3B) #620.2.15|EPG 620.2.15]]).

'''Option. '''To provide additional emphasis, a Type 1 or Type 3 object marker may be installed at or near the approach end of a median island.

To provide additional emphasis, large surfaces such as bridge piers may be painted with diagonal stripes, 12 inches or greater in width, similar in design to the Type 3 object marker.

'''Standard. '''The alternating black and retroreflective yellow stripes (OM3-L, OM3-R) shall be sloped down at an angle of 45 degrees toward the side on which traffic is to pass the obstruction. If traffic can pass to either side of the obstruction, the alternating black and retroreflective yellow stripes (OM3-C) shall form chevrons that point upwards.

'''Option. '''Appropriate signs (see [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2.34|EPG 903.2.34]] and [[#903.3.20|903.3.20]]) directing traffic to one or both sides of the obstruction may be used instead of the object marker.

=={{SpanID|903.3.72}}903.3.72 Object Markers for Obstructions Adjacent to the Roadway (MUTCD Section 2C.72)==

'''Support. '''Obstructions not actually within the roadway are sometimes so close to the edge of the road that they need a marker. These include underpass piers, bridge abutments, handrails, ends of traffic barriers, utility poles, and culvert headwalls. In other cases there might not be a physical object involved, but other roadside conditions exist, such as narrow shoulders, drop-offs, gores, small islands, and abrupt changes in the roadway alignment, that might make it undesirable for a road user to leave the roadway, and therefore would create a need for a marker.

'''Standard. '''Type 3 object markers shall be used to mark all obstructions within 3 feet of the edge of the travel lane or edge of the shoulder when shoulders are present (paved or aggregate). Type 3 object markers shall not be used to mark obstructions located beyond 8 feet of the edge of the travel lane or edge of the shoulder. See [[#fig903.3.72.1|Figures 903.3.72.1]] and [[#fig903.3.72.2|903.3.72.2]] for standard applications of Type 3 object markers.

'''Option. '''Type 3 object markers may be used to mark obstructions located 3 feet to 8 feet from the edge of the travel lane or edge of the shoulder based on engineering judgment. See [[#fig903.3.72.1|Figures 903.3.72.1]] and [[#fig903.3.72.2|903.3.72.2]] for standard applications of Type 3 object markers.

'''Guidance. '''If a Type 2 or Type 3 object marker is used to mark an obstruction adjacent to the roadway, the edge of the object marker that is closest to the road user should be installed in line with the closest edge of the obstruction.

When a marker is applied to the approach ends of guardrail or crash cushion terminals it should have the appearance of a Type 3 object marker and should be directly affixed, without a substrate, to the approach end of the guardrail or crash cushion and generally conform to the size and shape of the approach end of the guardrail or crash cushion.

'''Standard. '''Type 1 and Type 4 object markers shall not be used to mark obstructions adjacent to the roadway.

'''Guidance. '''Standard warning signs in this Chapter should also be used where applicable.

{{SpanID|fig903.3.72.1}}
[[File:Figure 903.3.72.1 Standard Application of Type 3 Object Markers Objects 2' or Less From Edge of Travel Lane_Shoulder.png|thumb|center|800px|alt="The figure shows several examples of Type 3 object marker placement for obstructions along a two-lane, two-way highway and a divided highway. Type 3 object markers are rectangular yellow and black striped panels labeled with the numbers 1, 2, and 3. In the two-lane, two-way highway examples, the first scenario shows a bridge where markers 1, 2, and 3 are placed on each side of the roadway on both approaches. Marker 1 is positioned closest to the obstruction, marker 2 is placed farther from the edge of pavement, and marker 3 is placed the farthest from the obstruction. This identical arrangement appears on all four corners of the bridge. The second scenario shows a box culvert with a length of 20 feet or more. The same arrangement of markers 1, 2, and 3 is placed on both sides of the roadway, and a dimension labeled L indicates the length of the culvert. The third scenario shows a pipe or box culvert with a length of less than 20 feet, where a single marker 1 is placed just before the culvert on the upper side of the roadway, and another marker 1 is placed just before the culvert on the lower side of the roadway. The fourth scenario shows a spillway where a single marker 1 is placed just before the spillway on the right side of the roadway.
In the divided highway examples, the first scenario shows a bridge where markers 1, 2, and 3 are placed only on the approach side of the structure for each direction of travel. No markers are shown beyond the bridge. The second scenario shows a box culvert with a length of 20 feet or more. On the approach to the culvert, object markers 1, 2, and 3 are placed on both sides of the roadway for the direction of travel. After the culvert, one additional marker 1 is placed on the right side of the roadway. A dimension labeled L indicates the length of the culvert. The third scenario shows a pipe or box culvert with a length of less than 20 feet, where a single marker 1 is placed just before the culvert.
A legend shows the direction of travel with an arrow. Notes beneath the figure explain the placement requirements. Marker 1 is placed as close to the obstruction as possible and aligned with the inside edge. Marker 2 is placed 1.5 feet from the edge of pavement and 20 feet from the end of the obstruction. Marker 3 is placed 3 feet from the edge of pavement and 40 feet from the end of the obstruction. Additional notes refer to Figure 903.3.72.2 for mounting height details and describe alternative mounting heights for areas affected by agricultural equipment."
|'''Figure 903.3.72.1''' Standard Application of Type 3 Object Markers Objects 2' or Less From Edge of Travel Lane/Shoulder]]

{{SpanID|fig903.3.72.2}}
[[File:Figure 903.3.72.2 Standard Application of Type 3 Object Markers Objects Greater Than 2' From Edge of Travel Lane_Shoulder.png|thumb|center|800px|alt="The figure shows several examples of Type 3 object marker placement for obstructions along a two-lane, two-way highway and a divided highway, as well as a detail of mounting height and lateral offset requirements. The Type 3 object markers shown are rectangular panels with alternating black and yellow diagonal stripes.
On the two-lane, two-way highway side, the first scenario shows a bridge. Two Type 3 object markers are placed on each side of the roadway at the near approach to the bridge. The same pair of markers appears on the far side of the bridge. In each location, the left and right markers are positioned close to the edges of the roadway.
The second scenario shows a box culvert with a length of 20 feet or more. A pair of Type 3 object markers is placed on both sides of the roadway on the approach to the culvert, with a labeled dimension L indicating the length of the structure. Another pair of markers is placed on both sides immediately after the culvert.
The third scenario shows a pipe or box culvert with a length of less than 20 feet. A single Type 3 object marker is placed just before the culvert on the upper side of the roadway, and another single marker is placed just before the culvert on the lower side.
The fourth scenario shows a spillway. A single Type 3 object marker is placed just before the spillway on the right side of the roadway.
On the divided highway side, the first scenario shows a bridge. One Type 3 object marker is placed on the left shoulder and one on the right shoulder on the approach side of the structure. No markers are placed beyond the bridge.
The second scenario shows a box culvert with a length of 20 feet or more. A single Type 3 object marker is placed on each side of the roadway on the approach to the culvert. Another marker is placed just past the culvert on the right shoulder. A dimension labeled L indicates the length of the culvert.
The third scenario shows pipe or box culverts with a length of less than 20 feet on both sides of the roadway. A single Type 3 object marker is placed just before each culvert, one on the left shoulder and one on the right shoulder.
A legend identifies the direction of travel with an arrow. At the lower right of the figure, a diagram labeled “Mounting Height and Offset, Type 3 Object Marker Installation” shows the required installation details. The marker is mounted so that the edge of the sign aligns with the edge of the object being marked. The bottom of the sign is elevated 4 feet above the ground. The object and ground slope are shown, along with the location of the edge of the travel lane or shoulder."
|'''Figure 903.3.72.2''' Standard Application of Type 3 Object Markers Objects Greater Than 2' From Edge of Travel Lane/Shoulder]]

=={{SpanID|903.3.73}}903.3.73 Object Markers for Ends of Roadways (MUTCD Section 2C.73)==

'''Support. '''The Type 4 object marker is used to warn and alert road users of the end of a roadway in other than construction or maintenance areas.

'''Standard. '''If an object marker is used to mark the end of a roadway, a Type 4 object marker shall be used. See ([https://www.modot.org/media/51221 Section 903 of the Missouri Standard Plans for Highway Construction]) for installation details.

'''Option. '''The Type 4 object marker may be used in instances where there are no alternate vehicular paths.

'''Standard. '''The minimum mounting height, measured vertically from the bottom of a Type 4 object marker to the elevation of the near edge of the traveled way, shall be 4 feet.

'''Guidance. '''Appropriate advance warning signs in EPG 903.3 should be used.

=={{SpanID|903.3.74}}903.3.74 Shoulder Barricade Assembly==

[[image:GB-1.gif|thumb|center|125px|<center>'''GB-1'''</center>]]

'''Option.''' Shoulder barricades may be used for added emphasis of standard warning sign installations at the direction of the engineer.

'''Standard.''' The shoulder barricade assembly shall consist of three horizontal boards (GB-1L or GB-1R) marked with reflective diagonal stripes and a 48-inch standard warning sign and a 48 in. standard warning sign with the appropriate 30-inch advisory plaque. See [[#fig903.3.74|Figure 903.3.74]] for typical construction.

GB-1R shoulder barricades shall be installed on the right side of the roadway and have diagonal stripes sloping downward from the right to the left.

GB-1L shoulder barricades shall be installed on the left side of the roadway and have diagonal stripes sloping downward from the left to the right.

'''Option.''' Supplemental signs may be installed on the shoulder barricade at the direction of the engineer.

'''Guidance.''' Shoulder Barricades should be installed on the appropriate size on wide flanged structural steel posts.

{{SpanID|fig903.3.74}}
[[File:Figure 903.3.74 Shoulder Barricade Assembly.png|thumb|center|alt="The figure shows a three-rail barricade assembly with a 48-inch diamond-shaped warning sign mounted to the front. The barricade consists of three horizontal panels with alternating black and yellow diagonal stripes. Each barricade rail is 12 inches tall, and the rails are stacked vertically with 12-inch gaps between them.
A pair of vertical dimension lines on the right side show 24-inch measurements between the midpoints of each barricade panel, indicating the vertical spacing between the centers of the top, middle, and bottom rails.
Centered on the barricade is a 48-inch warning sign, placed so that its midpoint aligns with the midpoint of the middle barricade rail. Below this sign, a rectangular supplemental MPH plaque is mounted on the lower barricade rail. Both signs are shown centered horizontally on the barricade width.
Horizontal dimensions at the top indicate that the barricade assembly is 8 feet wide with the sign centered within a 5-foot-6-inch internal spacing. To the left of the assembly, a minimum 6-foot offset is shown from the nearest post to the edge of the travel way or stabilized shoulder.
Two wide-flange vertical posts support the barricade. Vertical measurements labeled A and B (referencing EPG 903.1.15) indicate the mounting height of the barricade and signs from the ground.
A note below the figure states that when a supplemental MPH plaque is used, the signs should be mounted exactly as shown, and if no supplemental sign is used, the warning sign should be centered vertically on the barricade. A smaller detail illustration reinforces this alternate configuration, showing the warning sign centered on the three-rail barricade without a supplemental plaque."
|650px|<center>'''Figure 903.3.74''' Shoulder Barricade Assembly</center>]]

File:W16-6P yellow.png

2025-12-11T21:42:35Z

HogsettC: File uploaded with MsUpload

File uploaded with MsUpload

File:W16-5P yellow.png

2025-12-11T21:42:35Z

HogsettC: File uploaded with MsUpload

File uploaded with MsUpload

903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C)

2025-12-11T21:14:31Z

HogsettC: /* {{SpanID|903.3.12}}903.3.12 Advisory Exit and Ramp Speed Signs (W13-2 and W13-3) and Combination Horizontal Alignment/Advisory Exit and Ramp Speed Signs (W13-6 through W13-13) (MUTCD Section 2C.12) */

{| align="right" style="max-width: 640px;"
|__TOC__
|}
[[Category:903 Highway Signing (MUTCD Part 2)|903.03]]
=={{SpanID|903.3.1}}903.3.1 Application of Warning Signs (MUTCD Section 2C.01)==

'''Standard. '''The use of warning signs shall be based on an engineering study or on engineering judgment.

Warning signs shall be retroreflective.

'''Guidance. '''The use of warning signs should be kept to a minimum as the unnecessary use of warning signs tends to breed disrespect for all signs. In situations where the condition or activity is seasonal or temporary, the warning sign should be removed or covered when the condition or activity does not exist.

'''Support.''' The decision to use most warning signs is based on prevailing conditions. The items to be considered when determining the need for a warning sign are stopping sight distance and prevailing speed. Prevailing speed is determined by using either the posted or 85th percentile speed on the facility. Stopping sight distance is the distance a driver requires to perceive, react, and respond to a condition. The prevailing speed affects the amount of sight distance required for a condition.

It is recommended to use [[#tab903.3.1|Table 903.3.1]] to determine the stopping sight distance needed when considering the use of most warning signs. If the stopping sight distance is less than that in [[#tab903.3.1|Table 903.3.1]], a sign might be needed.

{{SpanID|tab903.3.1}}
<center>
{| class="wikitable" style="text-align: center;"
|+ '''Table 903.3.1''' Stopping Sight Distance Requirements
|-
! Prevailing Speed (mph) !! Distance (ft.)
|-
| 30 || 200
|-
| 35 || 250
|-
| 40 || 305
|-
| 45 || 360
|-
| 50 || 425
|-
| 55 || 495
|-
| 60 || 570
|-
| 65 || 645
|-
| 70 || 730
|-
| style="background-color: #ffffff;" colspan="2" | Note: Based on "A Policy on Geometric Design of Highways and Streets", 2018 Edition, AASHTO, Table 3-1, Stopping Sight Distance
|}
</center>

=={{SpanID|903.3.2}}903.3.2 Design of Warning Signs (MUTCD Section 2C.02)==

'''Standard. '''Except as provided in the following Option paragraph or unless specifically designated otherwise, all warning signs shall be diamond-shaped (square with one diagonal vertical) with a black legend and border on a fluorescent yellow background. Warning signs shall be designed in accordance with the sizes, shapes, colors, and legends contained in the FHWA “Standard Highway Signs” publication (see [[:Category:911_General_(MUTCD_Part_1) #911.1.5|EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1A.05]])).

'''Option.''' A warning sign that is larger than the size shown in the Oversized column in [[#tab903.3.3|Table 903.3.3]] for that particular sign may be diamond-shaped or may be rectangular or square in shape.

'''Support.''' The use of a shape other than diamond-shaped is typical for overhead installations. [[903.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 2A) #903.1.5|EPG 903.1.5]] contains information on allowable methods to accommodate a diamond-shaped warning sign where the lateral space available in which to install a diamond-shaped warning sign is constrained, such as in urban locations, when mounting on a narrow median barrier or adjacent to a retaining wall, including the display of the standard legend in a vertically oriented rectangle.

The use of LEDs in the border and legend of warning signs is described in [[903.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 2A) #903.1.12|EPG 903.1.12]].

'''Option.''' Word message warning signs other than those provided in the EPG may be developed and installed by MoDOT for conditions otherwise not addressed by standard signs (see [[903.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 2A) #903.1.4|EPG 903.1.4]]).

'''Support.''' MoDOT uses the fluorescent yellow-green (FYG) color exclusively for school signs. The only application where MoDOT would use the FYG color for bicycle or pedestrian signs is if a state route and local street intersected and the local jurisdiction utilized FYG color signs on their legs of the intersection. This would only be done to be in compliance with the MUTCD requirement that FYG and yellow shall not be intermixed in an application.

There are two primary reasons MoDOT has chosen not to use FYG color for bicycle or pedestrian signs. The first reason involves the MUTCD requirement that FYG color signs shall not be intermixed with other yellow color signs. A transition to FYG color signs would result in the premature replacement of all signs in an area when just one sign reached the end of its life or was damaged, resulting in wasted resources. The second reason, and most important, is to reserve FYG color signs for school signing to make these signs stand out from other signing, as school children are especially vulnerable road users.

In response to repeated requests by a local jurisdiction for MoDOT to use the FYG color for bicycle and pedestrian signs, MoDOT initiated a research study to determine if there were any documented safety benefits for using the FYG color for these signs. Having previously adopted fluorescent orange for all work zone signs, MoDOT made the transition from standard yellow to fluorescent yellow (FY) for all warning signs as there was documentation to support this change in sheeting color. However, no documentation could be found to indicate that the FYG sign color provides any safety benefits when compared to the FY sign color. The research study surveyed other state DOTs as well as local MPOs to determine if they made a change to the FYG color, how they made the decision to do so, and if they could provide any research documentation which would support FYG to be safer than FY. The study showed there was no conclusive evidence to demonstrate that FYG sign color had any safety benefit compared to the FY sign color that MoDOT was already using. Most agencies who adopted FYG did so based on engineering judgement and not based on the results of research.

'''Standard.''' Warning signs regarding conditions associated with school buses and schools and their related supplemental plaques shall have a black legend and border on a fluorescent yellow-green background (see [[908.2 Signs (MUTCD Chapter 7B) #908.2.1|EPG 908.2.1]]).

'''Option.''' Consistent with the provisions of [[902.18 Flashing Beacons (MUTCD Chapter 4S) #902.18.3|EPG 902.18.3]], a Warning Beacon may be used in combination with a standard warning sign.

=={{SpanID|903.3.3}}903.3.3 Size of Warning Signs and Plaques (MUTCD Section 2C.03)==

'''Standard.''' Except as provided in [[903.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 2A) #903.1.7|EPG 903.1.7]], the sizes for warning signs shall be as shown in [[#tab903.3.3|Table 903.3.3]].

'''Support.''' [[903.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 2A) #903.1.7|EPG 903.1.7]] contains information regarding the applicability of the various columns in [[#tab903.3.3|Table 903.3.3]].

'''Option.''' Signs and plaques larger than those shown in [[#tab903.3.3|Table 903.3.3]] may be used (see [[903.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 2A) #903.1.11|EPG 903.1.11]]) for special applications where speed, volume or other factors result in conditions where increased emphasis, improved recognition or increased legibility would be desirable, with approval from the MoDOT Highway Safety and Traffic Division.

'''Guidance. '''The minimum size for all diamond-shaped warning signs facing traffic on exit and entrance ramps at interchanges should be the size identified in [[#tab903.3.3|Table 903.3.3]] for the mainline roadway classification (Freeway/Expressway).

<center>
{{SpanID|tab903.3.3}}
{| class="wikitable" style="text-align:center;"
|+ Table 903.3.3 Warning Sign and Plaques Sizes
|-
! rowspan="2" | Sign or Plaque
! rowspan="2" | Sign Designation
! rowspan="2" | EPG Article
! colspan="2" | Conventional Road (in. x in.)
! Freeway/Expressway (in. x in.)
|-
! Standard
! Oversized
! Mainline & Ramps
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Turn
| W1-1
| [[#903.3.7|903.3.7]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Curve
| W1-2
| [[#903.3.7|903.3.7]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Reverse Turn
| W1-3
| [[#903.3.7|903.3.7]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Reverse Curve
| W1-4
| [[#903.3.7|903.3.7]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Winding Road
| W1-5
| [[#903.3.7|903.3.7]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | One-Direction Large Arrow
| W1-6
| [[#903.3.10|903.3.10]]
| 48 X 24
| 72 X 36
| 72 X 36
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Two-Direction Large Arrow
| W1-7
| [[#903.3.35|903.3.35]]
| 48 X 24
| 72 X 36
| 72 X 36
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Chevron
| W1-8
| [[#903.3.8|903.3.8]]
| 18 X 24
| 30 X 36
| 30 X 36
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Combination Horizontal Alignment/Intersection
| W1-10 Series
| [[#903.3.9|903.3.9]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Hairpin Curve
| W1-11
| [[#903.3.7|903.3.7]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Truck Rollover
| W1-13
| [[#903.3.11|903.3.11]]
| -
| -
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | 270° Curve
| W1-15
| [[#903.3.7|903.3.7]]
| -
| -
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Cross road
| W2-1
| [[#903.3.33|903.3.33]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Side Road
| W2-2
| [[#903.3.33|903.3.33]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Side Road (45°)
| W2-3, 3a
| [[#903.3.33|903.3.33]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | T Intersection
| W2-4
| [[#903.3.33|903.3.33]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Y Intersection
| W2-5
| [[#903.3.33|903.3.33]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Circular Intersection
| W2-6
| [[#903.3.33|903.3.33]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Offset Side Road
| W2-7
| [[#903.3.33|903.3.33]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 x 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Double Side Roads
| W2-8
| [[#903.3.33|903.3.33]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Watch for Entering Traffic
| W2-10a
| [[#903.3.34|903.3.34]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Watch for Approaching Traffic
| W2-11a
| [[#903.3.34|903.3.34]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Stop Ahead
| W3-1
| [[#903.3.29|903.3.29]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Yield Ahead
| W3-2
| [[#903.3.29|903.3.29]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Signal Ahead
| W3-3
| [[#903.3.29|903.3.29]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Be Prepared to Stop
| W3-4
| [[#903.3.29|903.3.29]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Reduced Speed Ahead
| W3-5
| [[#903.3.32|903.3.32]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Ramp Meter Ahead
| W3-7
| [[#903.3.30|903.3.30]]
| 36 X 36
| -
| -
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Ramp Metered When Flashing
| W3-8
| [[#903.3.30|903.3.30]]
| 36 X 36
| -
| -
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Ferry Crossing Ahead
| W3-18
| [[#903.3.54|903.3.54]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| -
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Merge
| W4-1
| [[#903.3.37|903.3.37]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Lane Ends
| W4-2
| [[#903.3.39|903.3.39]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Added Lane
| W4-3
| [[#903.3.38|903.3.38]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Cross Traffic Does Not Stop (plaque)
| W4-4P
| [[#903.3.37|903.3.37]]
| 24 X 12
| 36 X 18
| 36 X 18
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Traffic From Left Does Not Stop (plaque)
| W4-4aPL
| [[#903.3.37|903.3.37]]
| 24 X 12
| 36 X 18
| 36 X 18
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Traffic From Right Does Not Stop (plaque)
| W4-4aPR
| [[#903.3.37|903.3.37]]
| 24 X 12
| 36 X 18
| 36 X 18
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Oncoming Traffic Does Not Stop (plaque)
| W4-4bP
| [[#903.3.37|903.3.37]]
| 24 X 12
| 36 X 18
| 36 X 18
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Entering Roadway Merge
| W4-5
| [[#903.3.37|903.3.37]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Entering Roadway Added Lane
| W4-6
| [[#903.3.38|903.3.38]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Single Lane Transition
| W4-8
| [[#903.3.40|903.3.40]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | ROAD NARROWS
| W5-1
| [[#903.3.15|903.3.15]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | NARROW BRIDGE
| W5-2
| [[#903.3.16|903.3.16]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | ONE LANE BRIDGE
| W5-3
| [[#903.3.17|903.3.17]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| -
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Divided Highway
| W6-1
| [[#903.3.18|903.3.18]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| -
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Divided Highway Ends
| W6-2
| [[#903.3.19|903.3.19]]
| -
| -
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Two-Way Traffic
| W6-3
| [[#903.3.42|903.3.42]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| -
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Two-Way Traffic (2-Lane)
| W6-5
| [[#903.3.55|903.3.55]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| -
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Two-Way Traffic (3-Lane)
| W6-5a
| [[#903.3.55|903.3.55]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
|
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Passing Lane (plaque)
| W6-6aP
| [[#903.3.55|903.3.55]]
| 42 X 12
| -
| -
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Passing Lane Ends
| W6-16
| [[#903.3.55|903.3.55]]
| 36 X 36
| -
| -
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Watch for Left-Turning Traffic in Passing Lane
| W6-17
| [[#903.3.55|903.3.55]]
| 72 X 48
| -
| -
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Hill
| W7-1
| [[#903.3.14|903.3.14]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Uphill
| W7-1c
| [[#903.3.14|903.3.14]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Percent Grade
| W7-3P
| [[#903.3.63|903.3.63]]
| 24 X 18
| 30 X 24
| 30 X 24
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Next _ Miles (plaque)
| W7-3aP
| [[#903.3.63|903.3.63]]
| 24 X 18
| 30 X 24
| 30 X 24
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Bump
| W8-1
| [[#903.3.23|903.3.23]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Dip
| W8-2
| [[#903.3.23|903.3.23]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Pavement Ends
| W8-3
| [[#903.3.24|903.3.24]]
| 36 X 36
| -
| -
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Slippery When Wet
| W8-5
| [[#903.3.25|903.3.25]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Truck Crossing
| W8-6
| [[#903.3.49|903.3.49]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Fallen Rocks
| W8-14
| [[#903.3.26|903.3.26]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Road May Flood
| W8-18
| [[#903.3.28|903.3.28]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Impassable During High Water
| W8-34
| [[#903.3.28|903.3.28]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Left (Right) Lane Ends
| W9-1
| [[#903.3.39|903.3.39]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Lanes Merge
| W9-4
| [[#903.3.40|903.3.40]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Right (Left) Lane Exit Only
| W9-7
| [[#903.3.41|903.3.41]]
| 132 X 70
| -
| 132 X 70
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Bicycle
| W11-1
| [[#903.3.45|903.3.45]]
| 36 X 36
| -
| -
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Pedestrian
| W11-2
| [[#903.3.53|903.3.53]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| -
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Cattle
| W11-4
| [[#903.3.53|903.3.53]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
|
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Farm Vehicle
| W11-5
| [[#903.3.51|903.3.51]]
| 36 X 36
| -
| -
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Equestrian
| W11-7
| [[#903.3.53|903.3.53]]
| 36 X 36
| -
| -
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Emergency Vehicle
| W11-8
| [[#903.3.52|903.3.52]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Truck Entrance
| W11-10
| [[#903.3.50|903.3.50]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Emergency Signal Ahead (plaque)
| W11-12P
| [[#903.3.52|903.3.52]]
| 36 X 30
| -
| 36 X 30
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Horse-Drawn Vehicle
| W11-14
| [[#903.3.48|903.3.48]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Bike / Ped
| W11-15
| [[#903.3.46|903.3.46]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Trail Crossing
| W11-15a
| [[#903.3.47|903.3.47]]
| 36 X 36
| -
| -
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Double Arrow
| W12-1
| [[#903.3.20|903.3.20]]
| 30 X 30
| 36 X 36
| 36 X 36
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Low Clearance Advance
| W12-2
| [[#903.3.22|903.3.22]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Low Clearance (overhead)
| W12-2a
| [[#903.3.22|903.3.22]]
| 84 X 24
| -
| 84 X 24
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Advisory Speed
| W13-1P
| [[#903.3.33|903.3.33]]
| 24 X 24
| 30 X 30
| 30 X 30
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Advisory Speed (plaque)
| W13-1aP
| [[#903.3.33|903.3.33]]
| 48 X 15
| -
| 48 X 15
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Advisory Exit Speed
| W13-2
| [[#903.3.12|903.3.12]]
| -
| -
| 48 X 60
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Advisory Ramp Speed
| W13-3
| [[#903.3.12|903.3.12]]
| -
| -
| 48 X 60
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Advisory Exit Speed with 270° Loop Arrow
| W13-6
| [[#903.3.12|903.3.12]]
| -
| -
| 48 X 84
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Advisory Ramp Speed with 270° Loop Arrow
| W13-7
| [[#903.3.12|903.3.12]]
| -
| -
| 48 X 84
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Advisory Exit Speed with 180° Hairpin Arrow
| W13-8
| [[#903.3.12|903.3.12]]
| -
| -
| 48 X 84
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Advisory Ramp Speed with 180° Hairpin Arrow
| W13-9
| [[#903.3.12|903.3.12]]
| -
| -
| 48 X 84
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Advisory Exit Speed with 90° Turn Arrow
| W13-10
| [[#903.3.12|903.3.12]]
| -
| -
| 48 X 72
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Advisory Ramp Speed with 90° Turn Arrow
| W13-11
| [[#903.3.12|903.3.12]]
| -
| -
| 48 X 72
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Advisory Exit Speed with Truck Rollover
| W13-12
| [[#903.3.12|903.3.12]]
| -
| -
| 48 X 84
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Advisory Ramp Speed with Truck Rollover
| W13-13
| [[#903.3.12|903.3.12]]
| -
| -
| 48 X 84
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Vehicle Speed Feedback Sign
| W13-20
| [[#903.3.13|903.3.13]]
| 30 X 36
| -
| 48 X 60
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Vehicle Speed Feedback (plaque)
| W13-20aP
| [[#903.3.13|903.3.13]]
| 30 X 24
| -
| 48 X 36
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Dead End
| W14-1
| [[#903.3.21|903.3.21]]
| 36 X 36
| 36 X 36
| -
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | No Outlet
| W14-2
| [[#903.3.21|903.3.21]]
| 36 X 36
| 36 X 36
| -
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | No Passing Zone (pennant)
| W14-3
| [[#903.3.43|903.3.43]]
| -
| -
| -
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Road Ends
| W14-13
| [[#903.3.21|903.3.21]]
| 36 X 36
| 36 X 36
| -
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | In Road (plaque)
| W16-1P
| [[#903.3.66|903.3.66]]
| 24 X 18
| -
| 24 X 18
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | XX FEET (plaque)
| W16-2P
| [[#903.3.60|903.3.60]]
| 24 X 18
| 30 X 24
| 30 X 24
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | XX MILES (plaque)
| W16-3P
| [[#903.3.60|903.3.60]]
| 24 X 18
| 30 X 24
| 30 X 24
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | NEXT _ FEET (plaque)
| W16-4P
| [[#903.3.60|903.3.60]]
| 24 X 18
| 30 X 24
| 30 X 24
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Directional Arrow (plaque)
| W16-5P
| [[#903.3.61|903.3.61]]
| 30 X 21
| -
| 30 X 21
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Advance Turn Arrow (plaque)
| W16-6P
| [[#903.3.61|903.3.61]]
| 30 X 21
| -
| 30 X 21
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Downward Diagonal Arrow (plaque)
| W16-7P
| [[#903.3.62|903.3.62]]
| 30 X 21
| -
| 30 X 21
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Dual Downward Diagonal Arrow (plaque)
| W16-7aP
| [[#903.3.62|903.3.62]]
| 30 X 21
| -
| 30 X 21
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Two Line Street Name (plaque)
| W16-8aP
| [[#903.3.64|903.3.64]]
| Varies X 15
| Varies X 24
| Varies X 24
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Advance Street Name (plaque)
| W16-8P
| [[#903.3.64|903.3.64]]
| Varies X 8
| Varies X 12
| Varies X 12
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Ahead (plaque)
| W16-9P
| [[#903.3.44|903.3.44]], [[#903.3.53|903.3.53]]
| 30 X 18
| -
| 30 X 18
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Notice (plaque)
| W16-18P
| [[#903.3.68|903.3.68]]
| 36 X 12
| 48 X 18
| 48 X 18
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Except to Turn (plaque)
| W16-23P
| [[#903.3.68|903.3.68]]
| 48 X 30
| -
| -
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Except to Exit (plaque)
| W16-24P
| [[#903.3.68|903.3.68]]
| 48 X 30
| -
| -
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Double Reverse Curve Left - 1 Lane
| W24-1L
| [[#903.3.7|903.3.7]]
| 36 X 36
| -
| 36 X 36
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Double Reverse Curve Left - 2 Lanes
| W24-1aL
| [[#903.3.7|903.3.7]]
| 36 X 36
| -
| 36 X 36
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Double Reverse Curve Left - 3 Lanes
| W24-1bL
| [[#903.3.7|903.3.7]]
| 36 X 36
| -
| 36 X 36
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Oncoming Traffic Has Extended Green
| W25-1
| [[#903.3.36|903.3.36]]
| 24 X 30
| -
| -
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Oncoming Traffic May Have Extended Green
| W25-2
| [[#903.3.36|903.3.36]]
| 24 X 30
| -
| -
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Watch for Stopped Traffic
| W26-1
| [[#903.3.31|903.3.31]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Travel Safe Zone
| W27-1
| [[#903.3.56|903.3.56]]
| 36 X 48
| 48 X 60
| 48 X 60
|}
</center>

=={{SpanID|903.3.4}}903.3.4 Placement of Warning Signs (MUTCD Section 2C.04)==

'''Support.''' Information on the placement of warning signs is contained in [[903.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 2A) #903.1.13|EPG 903.1.13]] through [[903.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 2A) #903.1.18|903.1.18]].

The time needed for detection, recognition, decision, and reaction is called the Perception-Response Time (PRT). [[#tab903.3.4|Table 903.3.4]] is provided as an aid for determining warning sign location. The distances shown in [[#tab903.3.4|Table 903.3.4]] can be adjusted for roadway features, other signing, and to improve visibility.

'''Guidance. '''Warning signs should be placed so that they provide an adequate PRT. The distances contained in [[#tab903.3.4|Table 903.3.4]] should be applied with engineering judgment.

Minimum spacing between warning signs with different messages should be based on the estimated PRT for driver comprehension of and reaction to the second sign.

The effectiveness of the placement of warning signs should be periodically evaluated. This is typically accomplished during routine sign inspection cycles. [[903.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 2A) #903.1.19|EPG 903.1.19]] contains information regarding MoDOT’s sign maintenance program.

'''Standard. '''When any part of a warning sign assembly (post, sign, plaque, etc.) is replaced, maintained or modified, the placement of the sign shall be reviewed based on [[#tab903.3.4|Table 903.3.4]]. Additionally, mounting height shall be reviewed for conformance with [[903.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 2A) #903.1.15|EPG 903.1.15]].

{{SpanID|tab903.3.4}}
{| class="wikitable"
|-
|+ '''Table 903.3.4''' Guidelines for Advance Placement of Warning Signs
|- style="text-align:center;"
! rowspan="3" | Posted or 85th-Percentile Speed
! colspan="9" | Advance Placement Distance1
|- style="text-align:center;"
! rowspan="2" style="max-width: 200px;" | Condition A: Speed reduction and lane changing in heavy traffic2
! colspan="8" | Condition B: Deceleration to the listed advisory (mph) for the condition
|- style="text-align:center;"
! 03
! 104
! 204
! 304
! 404
! 504
! 604
! 704
|- style="vertical-align:middle;"
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 20 mph
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 225 ft
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 115 ft
| N/A5
| —
| —
| —
| —
| —
| —
|- style="vertical-align:middle;"
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 25 mph
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 325 ft
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 155 ft
| N/A5
| N/A5
| —
| —
| —
| —
| —
|- style="vertical-align:middle;"
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 30 mph
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 460 ft
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 200 ft
| N/A5
| N/A5
| —
| —
| —
| —
| —
|- style="vertical-align:middle;"
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 35 mph
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 565 ft
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 250 ft
| N/A5
| N/A5
| N/A5
| —
| —
| —
| —
|- style="vertical-align:middle;"
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 40 mph
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 670 ft
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 305 ft
| 100 ft6
| 100 ft6
| N/A5
| —
| —
| —
| —
|- style="vertical-align:middle;"
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 45 mph
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 775 ft
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 360 ft
| 125 ft
| 100 ft6
| 100 ft6
| N/A5
| —
| —
| —
|- style="vertical-align:middle;"
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 50 mph
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 885 ft
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 425 ft
| 200 ft
| 175 ft
| 125 ft
| 100 ft6
| —
| —
| —
|- style="vertical-align:middle;"
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 55 mph
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 990 ft
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 495 ft
| 275 ft
| 225 ft
| 200 ft
| 125 ft
| N/A5
| —
| —
|- style="vertical-align:middle;"
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 60 mph
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 1100 ft
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 570 ft
| 350 ft
| 325 ft
| 275 ft
| 200 ft
| 100 ft6
| —
| —
|- style="vertical-align:middle;"
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 65 mph
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 1200 ft
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 645 ft
| 450 ft
| 400 ft
| 350 ft
| 275 ft
| 200 ft
| 100 ft6
| —
|- style="vertical-align:middle;"
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 70 mph
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 1250 ft
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 730 ft
| 525 ft
| 500 ft
| 450 ft
| 375 ft
| 275 ft
| 150 ft
| —
|- style="vertical-align:middle;"
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 75 mph
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 1350 ft
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 820 ft
| 625 ft
| 600 ft
| 550 ft
| 475 ft
| 375 ft
| 250 ft
| 100 ft6
|-
| style="background-color: #ffffff" colspan="11" |
|-
| style="background-color: #ffffff" colspan="11" | Note 1 — For Advanced Placement Distance — General
* The distances are adjusted for a sign legibility distance of 180 feet for Condition A.
* The distances for Condition B (with the exception of the potential stop condition) have been adjusted for a sign legibility distance of 250 feet, which is appropriate for an alignment warning symbol sign.
* For Conditions A and B, warning signs with less than 6-inch legend or more than four words, a minimum of 100 feet should be added to the advance placement distance to provide adequate legibility of the warning sign.

Note 2 — For Condition A — Speed Reduction and Lane Change Conditions
* Typical conditions are locations where the road user must use extra time to adjust speed and change lanes in heavy traffic because of a complex driving situation or reduce to a new posted speed.
* Typical signs are Merge, Right Lane Ends, and Reduced Speed Ahead.
* The distances are determined by providing the driver a PRT of 14.0 to 14.5 seconds for vehicle maneuvers (2018 AASHTO Policy, Table 3-3, Decision Sight Distance, Avoidance Maneuver E) and adjusted for a legibility distance of 180 feet for the appropriate sign.

Note 3 — For Condition B — Stop Condition
* Typical condition is the warning of a potential stop situation.
* Typical signs are Stop Ahead, Yield Ahead, Signal Ahead, and Intersection Warning signs.
* The distances are based on the 2018 AASHTO Policy, Table 3-1, Stopping Sight Distance, providing a PRT of 2.5 seconds, a deceleration rate of 11.2 feet/second2.

Note 4 — For Condition B — Reduced Speed Conditions
* Typical conditions are locations where the road user must decrease speed to maneuver through the warned condition.
* Typical signs are Turn, Curve, Reverse Turn, Reverse Curve, or Reduced Speed Ahead.
* The distance is determined by providing a 2.5 second PRT, a vehicle deceleration rate of 10 feet/second2, and adjusted for a sign legibility distance of 250 feet.

Note 5 — For Condition B — N/A Values
* No suggested distances are provided for these speeds, as the placement location is dependent on site conditions and other signing.
* An alignment warning sign may be placed anywhere from the point of curvature up to 100 feet in advance of the curve.
* However, the alignment warning sign should be installed in advance of the curve and at least 100 feet from any other signs.

Note 6 — For Condition B — for shortest distance values per posted speed
* The minimum advance placement distance is listed as 100 feet to provide adequate spacing between signs.

General Note:

Warning signs that advise road users about conditions that are not related to a specific location can be installed in an appropriate location, based on engineering judgment.
|}

=={{SpanID|903.3.5}}903.3.5 Horizontal Alignment Warning Signs – General (MUTCD Section 2C.05)==

'''Support.''' A variety of horizontal alignment warning signs, pavement markings (see [[620.2 Pavement and Curb Markings (MUTCD Chapter 3B)|EPG 620.2]]), and delineation (see [[620.6 Delineators (MUTCD Chapter 3G)|EPG 620.6]]) can be used to advise motorists of a change in the roadway alignment. Uniform application of these traffic control devices with respect to the amount of change in the roadway alignment conveys a consistent message establishing driver expectancy and promoting effective roadway operations. The design and application of horizontal alignment warning signs to meet those requirements are addressed in [[#903.3.5|EPG 903.3.5]] through [[#903.3.12|903.3.12]].

The following list identifies treatments that might be used in advance of or within a change in horizontal alignment:
:A. Horizontal alignment (Turn (W1-1), Curve (W1-2, W1-10 series, W1-11, W1-13, W1-15), Reverse Turn (W1-3), Reverse Curve (W1-4), Winding Road (W1-5), Exit Speed (W13-2), Ramp Speed (W13-3), and Combination Horizontal Alignment (Advisory Exit or Ramp Speed W13-6 through W13-11)) signs (see [[#903.3.7|EPG 903.3.7]], [[#903.3.9|903.3.9]], and [[#903.3.12|903.3.12]])
:B. Advisory Speed (W13-1P) plaque (see [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.59|EPG 903.3.59]])
:C. Chevron Alignment (W1-8) signs (see [[#903.3.8|EPG 903.3.8]])
:D. One Direction Large Arrow (W1-6) sign (see [[#903.3.10|EPG 903.3.10]])
:E. Sign or marking conspicuity enhancements (see [[903.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 2A) #903.1.11|EPG 903.1.11]])
:F. Longitudinal rumble strips (see [[620.10 Rumble Strip Markings (MUTCD Chapter 3K) #620.10.1|EPG 620.10.1]])
:G. Vehicle Speed Feedback Sign (see [[#903.3.13|EPG 903.3.13]])

In addition, considerations other than traffic control devices, such as improved surface friction (high friction surface treatments), pavement edge treatments, lighting improvements, increased superelevation, and longitudinal rumble strips, might be used in advance of or within a change in horizontal alignment.

'''Guidance.''' Except as provided in [[#903.3.6|EPG 903.3.6]], the selection of traffic control devices used to warn road users of a change in horizontal alignment or to provide guidance in navigating the change in horizontal alignment should be based on consideration of one or more of the following factors:
:A. The speed of traffic on the approach to the change in horizontal alignment
:B. The recommended advisory speed for the change in horizontal alignment
:C. The difference between the speed limit and the advisory speed, or the speed differential for the change in horizontal alignment
:D. Daily traffic volumes on the roadway
:E. The typical mix of vehicle types on the roadway
:F. Sight distance throughout the change in horizontal alignment
:G. Other types of traffic control devices that are used in advance of and within the change in horizontal alignment on the same roadway segment
:H. The crash history of the change in horizontal alignment
:I. The presence of driveways or intersections within the curve radius

=={{SpanID|903.3.6}}903.3.6 Device Selection for Changes in Horizontal Alignment (MUTCD Section 2C.06)==

'''Standard: '''[[#tab903.3.6|Table 903.3.6]] shall be used to specify the type(s) of warning signs to be used in advance of, and/or along, a horizontal curve, except as provided in following Option paragraph. The speed differential shall be the difference between the horizontal curve’s advisory speed and the roadway’s posted speed limit on the approach to the curve.

'''Option. '''A One Direction Large Arrow (W1-6) sign may be used to supplement Chevron Alignment (W1-8) signs when:
:A. Site conditions limit the number of Chevron Alignment signs that are visible; or

:B. The number of Chevron Alignment signs that can be installed within the change in horizontal alignment is less than the number determined by the spacing specified in [[#903.3.8|EPG 903.3.8]].

Additional or supplemental devices may be used for a change in horizontal alignment on the basis of engineering judgment.

If engineering judgment indicates the need for the horizontal alignment sign for a curve that can be driven at or above the posted speed limit, horizontal alignment signs may be installed with the Advisory Speed Plaque (W13-1P) displaying an advisory speed equal to the posted speed limit.

Warrants for center lines and edge lines are provided in EPG [[620.2 Pavement and Curb Markings (MUTCD Chapter 3B) #620.2.2|620.2.2]] and [[620.2 Pavement and Curb Markings (MUTCD Chapter 3B) #620.2.11|620.2.11]], respectively.

Provisions for delineators are contained in [[620.6 Delineators (MUTCD Chapter 3G)| EPG 620.6]].

Provisions for Advisory Speed (W13-1P) plaques are contained in [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.59|EPG 903.3.59]].

<center>
{{SpanID|tab903.3.6}}
{| class="wikitable"
|+'''Table 903.3.6''' Application of Warning Signs for Changes in Horizontal Alignment
|-
! Speed Differential1 !! Warning Signs Required
|-
| 5 to 10 mph || Horizontal Alignment warning sign2 Advisory Speed plaque3
|-
| 15 mph or more || Horizontal Alignment warning sign2 Advisory Speed plaque3 Chevron Alignment signs4
|-
| style="background-color: #ffffff;" colspan="2" |
# Speed differential shall be the difference between the horizontal curve’s advisory speed and the roadway’s posted speed limit.
# Provisions for the use of Horizontal Alignment warning signs are contained in [[#903.3.6|EPG 903.3.6]].
# Provision for Advisory Speed (W13-1P) plaques are contained in [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.59|EPG 903.3.59]].
# [[#903.3.6|EPG 903.3.6]] contains information about the use of a One Direction Large Arrow (W1-6) sign in place of or to supplement chevron alignment signs.
|}
</center>

=={{SpanID|903.3.7}}903.3.7 Horizontal Alignment Signs (W1-1 through W1-5, W1-11, W1-15, W24-1) (MUTCD Section 2C.07)==
<center>
{| style=""
|-
|[[File:W1-1.png|center|100px|thumb|<center>'''W1-1'''</center>]]
|[[File:W1-2.png|center|100px|thumb|<center>'''W1-2'''</center>]]
|[[File:W1-3.png|center|100px|thumb|<center>'''W1-3'''</center>]]
|[[File:W1-4.png|center|100px|thumb|<center>'''W1-4'''</center>]]
|-
|[[File:W1-5.png|center|100px|thumb|<center>'''W1-5'''</center>]]
|[[File:W1-11.png|center|100px|thumb|<center>'''W1-11'''</center>]]
|[[File:W1-15.png|center|100px|thumb|<center>'''W1-15'''</center>]]
|[[File:W24-1L.png|center|100px|thumb|<center>'''W24-1L'''</center>]]
|}
</center>

'''Standard. '''When a horizontal alignment sign is required as provided in [[#903.3.6|EPG 903.3.6]] the sign installed in advance of the curve shall be a Curve (W1-2) sign unless a different sign is recommended or allowed by the provisions of this Article.

A Turn (W1-1) sign shall be used instead of a Curve (W1-2) sign in advance of a horizontal curve that has an advisory speed of 30 mph or less.

'''Guidance. '''Where there are two changes in roadway alignment in opposite directions that are separated by a tangent distance of less than 600 feet, the Reverse Turn (W1-3) sign should be used instead of multiple Turn (W1-1) signs or the Reverse Curve (W1-4) sign should be used instead of multiple Curve (W1-2) signs.

'''Support. '''[[#fig903.3.7.1|Figures 903.3.7.1]] and [[#fig903.3.7.2|903.3.7.2]] provide examples of warning signs used for turns and curves.

'''Option. '''A Winding Road (W1-5) sign may be used instead of multiple Turn (W1-1) or Curve (W1-2) signs where there are three or more changes in roadway alignment each separated by a tangent distance of less than 600 feet.

A NEXT XX MILES (W7-3aP) supplemental distance plaque (see [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.60|EPG 903.3.60]]) may be installed below the Winding Road sign where continuous roadway curves exist for a specific distance.

If the curve has a change in horizontal alignment of 135 degrees or more, the Hairpin Curve (W1-11) sign may be used instead of a Turn or Curve sign.

If the curve has a change of direction of approximately 270 degrees, such as on a cloverleaf interchange ramp, the 270-degree Loop (W1-15) sign may be used instead of a Turn or Curve sign.

'''Guidance. '''When the Hairpin Curve sign or the 270-degree Loop sign is installed, either a One-Direction Large Arrow (W1-6) sign or Chevron Alignment (W1-8) signs should be installed on the outside of the turn or curve.

'''Option.''' A double reverse left sign (W24-1L) and advisory speed plaque may be used on the crossroad approaches to a Diverging Diamond Interchange (DDI) when the difference between the speed limit and the advisory speed is 5 mph or greater. The need for this signing is based on engineering judgment if speeding through a DDI is a concern. An Advisory speed plaque is typically installed where the posted speed on the crossroad of the DDI is 40 mph or greater.

'''Standard.''' If used with an advisory speed plaque, the W24-1L sign shall display the number of double reverse arrows which indicates the number of lanes on the crossroad going through the DDI in the direction of travel where the sign is observed.

'''Support. '''See [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.59|EPG 903.3.59]] for information regarding Advisory Speed Plaques (W13-1P).

{{SpanID|fig903.3.7.1}}
[[File:Figure 903.3.7.1 Example of Warning Signs for Changes in Horizontal Alignment (Sheet 1 of 2).png|thumb|center|800px|alt="A segment of a vertical two-lane north-south roadway that curves to the right, or east, is shown. At the bottom of the figure, facing south and to the right of the northbound lane, a sign assembly composed of a W1-2R sign mounted above a W13-1P plaque is shown. The W1-2R is a yellow diamond-shaped sign with a black arrow curving up and to the right.
Continuing northbound, on the left side of the roadway, the following sequence of W1-8 chevron signs is shown from bottom to top: four consecutive W1-8L chevrons facing north, one W1-8R chevron facing south, one W1-8L chevron facing north, one W1-8R chevron facing south, one W1-8L chevron facing north, and finally four consecutive W1-8R chevrons facing south. Continuing north on the same side of the road, facing north and to the right of the southbound lane, a sign assembly composed of a W1-2L sign mounted above a W13-1P plaque is shown."
|'''Figure 903.3.7.1''' Examples of Warning Signs for Changes in Horizontal Alignment ''(Sheet 1 of 2)'']]

{{SpanID|fig903.3.7.2}}
[[File:Figure 903.3.7.2 Example of Warning Signs for Changes in Horizontal Alignment (Sheet 2 of 2) .png|thumb|center|800px|alt="A segment of a vertical two-lane north-south roadway that curves to the right, or east, is shown.
At the bottom of the figure, facing south and to the right of the northbound lane, a sign assembly composed of a W1-1R sign mounted above a W13-1P plaque is shown. W1-1R is shown as a yellow diamond-shaped sign with a black arrow pointing up and then a sharp turn to the right.
On the left side of the roadway, the following sequence of optional W1-8 chevron signs are shown from bottom to top: two W1-8L chevrons facing north, followed by one W1-8R chevron facing south, then one W1-8L chevron facing north, and finally one W1-8R chevron facing south.
Just north of this sequence, a sign assembly composed of a W1-6R sign mounted above an optional W13-1aP plaque is shown facing south.
North of that on the curve, still on the left side of the roadway, there is a sequence of optional W1-8 chevron signs as follows: one W1-8R facing southwest, one W1-8L facing northeast, one W1-8R facing southwest, and one W1-8L facing northeast.
East of that, following the curve, another sign assembly composed of a W1-6L sign mounted above an optional W13-1aP plaque is shown facing east.
To the east of that, two optional W1-8R chevrons are shown facing west.
Finally, at the top right of the figure, facing east and to the right of the westbound lane, a sign assembly composed of a W1-1L sign mounted above a W13-1P plaque is shown. The W1-1L is a yellow diamond-shaped sign with a black arrow pointing up and then sharply turning to the left."
|'''Figure 903.3.7.2''' Examples of Warning Signs for Changes in Horizontal Alignment ''(Sheet 2 of 2)'']]

=={{SpanID|903.3.8}}903.3.8 Chevron Alignment Sign (W1-8) (MUTCD Section 2C.08)==
[[File:W1-8.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W1-8'''</center>]]

'''Support. '''Examples of when to use Chevron signs include locations where there is a crash history, evidence of drivers losing control on a curve or turn, a sharp change in horizontal alignment not readily visible to the driver, or as a systemic curve improvement program.

The majority of fatal and serious injury crashes are attributed to lane departure crashes (State Strategic Highway Safety Plan). Chevrons are a highly cost-effective way to reduce lane departure crashes in curves and turns.

Implementation of the 2009 MUTCD requirements for chevron deployments resulted in a statewide reduction in severe lane departure crashes in horizontal curves. To maintain this observed safety benefit, MoDOT has established standards based on the 2009 MUTCD criteria, which is above the minimum requirements in the 11th Edition of the MUTCD. For more details on the safety benefits of chevrons, contact the Highway Safety and Traffic Division.

'''Standard. '''The use of the Chevron Alignment (W1-8) sign (see [[#fig903.3.7.2|Figure 903.3.7.2]]) to provide additional emphasis and guidance for a change in horizontal alignment shall be in accordance with the information provided in [[#903.3.6|EPG 903.3.6]].

The Chevron Alignment sign shall be a vertical rectangle. No border shall be used on the Chevron Alignment sign.

If used, Chevron Alignment signs shall be installed on the outside of a turn or curve, in line with and at approximately a right angle to approaching traffic. Chevron Alignment signs shall be installed at a minimum height of 4 feet, measured vertically from the bottom of the sign to the elevation of the near edge of the traveled way, which will locate the sign at approximately the driver’s eye height.

'''Guidance. '''The approximate spacing of Chevron Alignment signs on the turn or curve measured from the point of curvature (PC) should be as shown in [[#tab903.3.8|Table 903.3.8]].

In addition to the Chevron Alignment signs placed throughout the curve, there should be one sign in advance of the PC and one after the PT. These signs should be spaced the same as the Chevron Alignment signs in the curve.

'''Option.''' The values in [[#tab903.3.8|Table 903.3.8]] are typical and variances for driveways, public roads, and other signs may alter the spacing. Engineering judgment may also be used to modify the spacing as long as road users always have at least two Chevron Alignment signs in view until the change in alignment eliminates the need for the signs.

Based on engineering judgement, chevron alignment signs may be omitted within incorporated city limits.

'''Guidance.''' The Chevron Alignment signs should be visible for a sufficient distance to provide the road user with adequate time to react to the change in alignment.

The single-sided Chevron sign should only be used where only one direction of travel is impacted, such as on an expressway. The double-side Chevron (W1-8D) should be used on two-lane, two-way roads.

At the end of a four-lane divided highway, where the traffic reduces to two lanes, chevrons should be used to direct traffic from the dual lanes that are ending and being redirected to the two-lane roadway.

'''Option. '''Chevron Alignment signs may also be used on any other roadways based on engineering judgment.

Chevron Alignment signs may be used in addition to the One-Direction Large Arrow (W1-6) sign on turns posted at 30 mph or less.

'''Guidance. '''As chevrons are installed, all horizontal alignment signing (chevrons, curve and turn signing, advisory speed plaques and arrow boards) on a corridor should be evaluated to ensure the installations meet current standards. Aspects of existing horizontal alignment signs to look at should include spacing of existing chevrons, offset and mounting heights of any horizontal alignment sign as well as the distance advanced warning signs are installed from the curve/turn. The need for curve/turn signs should be reevaluated if the ball banking measurements from when the signs were installed are out of date due to roadway/pavement improvements or due to changes in vehicle performance.

'''Option. '''LEDs may be used to enhance the conspicuity of Chevron Alignment signs (see [[903.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 2A) #903.1.12|EPG 903.1.12]]).

'''Standard. '''The LEDs used in the Chevron Alignment sign shall consist of yellow LEDs outlining the chevron symbol.

Chevron Alignment signs shall not be placed on the far side of a T-intersection facing traffic on the stem approach to warn drivers that a through movement is not physically possible, as this is the function of a Two-Direction (or One-Direction) Large Arrow sign.

Chevron Alignment signs shall not be used to mark obstructions within or adjacent to the roadway, including the beginning of guardrails or barriers, as this is the function of an object marker (see [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.70|EPG 903.3.70]]).

Chevron Alignment signs directing traffic to the right shall not be used in the central island of a roundabout or a neighborhood traffic circle.

{{SpanID|tab903.3.8}}
<center>
{| class="wikitable" style="text-align: center;"
|+ '''Table 903.3.8''' Typical Spacing of Chevron Alignment Signs on Horizontal Curves
|-
! Advisory Speed !! Curve Radius !! Sign Spacing
|-
| 15 mph or less || Less than 200 feet || 40 feet
|-
| 20 to 30 mph || 200 to 400 feet || 60 feet
|-
| 35 to 45 mph || 401 to 700 feet || 80 feet
|-
| 50 to 60 mph || 701 to 1,250 feet || 100 feet
|-
| more than 60 mph || More than 1,250 feet || 140 feet
|-
| style="background-color: #ffffff; max-width: 500px;" colspan="3" | Note: The relationship between curve radius and the advisory speed shown in this table should not be used to determine the advisory speed.
|}
</center>

=={{SpanID|903.3.9}}903.3.9 Combination Horizontal Alignment/Intersection Signs (W1-10 Series) (MUTCD Section 2C.09)==
<center>
{| style=""
|-
|[[File:W1-10.png|center|100px|thumb|<center>'''W1-10'''</center>]]
|[[File:W1-10a.png|center|100px|thumb|<center>'''W1-10a'''</center>]]
|[[File:W1-10b.png|center|100px|thumb|<center>'''W1-10b'''</center>]]
|-
|[[File:W1-10c.png|center|100px|thumb|<center>'''W1-10c'''</center>]]
|[[File:W1-10d.png|center|100px|thumb|<center>'''W1-10d'''</center>]]
|[[File:W1-10e.png|center|100px|thumb|<center>'''W1-10e'''</center>]]
|}
</center>

'''Option. '''The Turn (W1-1) sign, the Curve (W1-2) sign, and the Reverse Curve (W1-4) sign may be combined with the Cross Road (W2-1) sign or the Side Road (W2-2 or W2-3) sign to create a combination Horizontal Alignment/Intersection (W1-10 series) sign that depicts the condition where an intersection occurs within or immediately adjacent to a turn or curve.

'''Support. '''[[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.64|EPG 903.2.64]] contains information about the use of an advance street name plaque to identify an intersecting road.

'''Guidance. '''Elements of the combination Horizontal Alignment/Intersection sign related to horizontal alignment should comply with the provisions of [[#903.3.7|EPG 903.3.7]], and elements related to intersection configuration should comply with the provisions of [[#903.3.33|EPG 903.3.33]]. The symbol design should approximate the configuration of the intersecting roadway(s). No more than one Cross Road or two Side Road symbols should be displayed on any one combination Horizontal Alignment/Intersection sign.

A layout of the proposed sign should be included when ordering or when including the sign in design plans.

'''Standard. '''The use of the combination Horizontal Alignment/Intersection sign shall be in accordance with the provisions of [[#903.3.7|EPG 903.3.7]] for the appropriate Turn or Curve sign.

If used, a W1-10L sign designation shall indicate a curve to the left, while a W1-10R sign designation shall indicate a curve to the right.

=={{SpanID|903.3.10}}903.3.10 One-Direction Large Arrow Sign (W1-6) (MUTCD Section 2C.10)==

[[File:W1-6.png|100px|thumb|center|<center>'''W1-6'''</center>]]

'''Standard. '''A One-Direction Large Arrow sign shall be used to delineate a change in horizontal alignment where the advisory speed is 30 mph or lower.

The One-Direction Large Arrow sign shall be a horizontal rectangle with an arrow pointing to the left or right.

If used, the One-Direction Large Arrow sign shall be installed on the outside of a turn or curve in line with and at approximately a right angle to approaching traffic.

The One-Direction Large Arrow sign shall not be used where there is no alignment change in the direction of travel, such as at the beginnings and ends of medians or at center piers.

The One-Direction Large Arrow sign directing traffic to the right shall not be used in the central island of a roundabout.

'''Guidance. '''The One-Direction Large Arrow sign should be visible for a sufficient distance to provide the road user with adequate time to react to the change in alignment.

If Chevron Alignment signs are used to supplement the One-Direction Large Arrow sign, chevrons, and arrow signs should be installed so they do not visually block each other.

=={{SpanID|903.3.11}}903.3.11 Truck Rollover Sign (W1-13) (MUTCD Section 2C.11) ==

[[File:W1-13.png|center|100px|thumb|<center>'''W1-13'''</center>]]

'''Option. '''A Truck Rollover (W1-13) sign may be used as a supplement to a horizontal alignment warning sign to warn drivers of vehicles with a high center of gravity, such as trucks, tankers, and recreational vehicles, of a curve or turn where there are:
:A. Past incidents of truck rollovers at the specific location,
:B. High volumes of trucks, or
:C. A speed differential (see [[#903.3.6|EPG 903.3.6]]) that might pose a greater risk for vehicles with high centers of gravity.

'''Guidance. '''Where engineering judgment determines the need for the installation of a Truck Rollover (W1-13) sign, it should be located downstream of the horizontal alignment warning sign in advance of the curve.

'''Standard. '''If a Truck Rollover (W1-13) sign is used, it shall be accompanied by an Advisory Speed (W13-1P) plaque indicating the recommended speed for vehicles with a higher center of gravity.

'''Option. '''The Truck Rollover sign may include conspicuity enhancements, or may be a blank-out sign, activated by the detection of an approaching vehicle with a high center of gravity that is traveling in excess of the recommended speed for the condition.

'''Support. '''The curved arrow on the Truck Rollover sign shows the direction of roadway curvature. The truck tips in the opposite direction.

=={{SpanID|903.3.12}}903.3.12 Advisory Exit and Ramp Speed Signs (W13-2 and W13-3) and Combination Horizontal Alignment/Advisory Exit and Ramp Speed Signs (W13-6 through W13-13) (MUTCD Section 2C.12)==
<center>
{| style=""
|-
|[[File:W13-2.png|center|102px|thumb|<center>'''W13-2'''</center>]]
|[[File:W13-3.png|center|98px|thumb|<center>'''W13-3'''</center>]]
|[[File:W13-6.png|center|100px|thumb|<center>'''W13-6'''</center>]]
|[[File:W13-7.png|center|88px|thumb|<center>'''W13-7'''</center>]]
|}
{|
|[[File:W13-8.png|center|98px|thumb|<center>'''W13-8'''</center>]]
|[[File:W13-9.png|center|100px|thumb|<center>'''W13-9'''</center>]]
|[[File:W13-10.png|center|100px|thumb|<center>'''W13-10'''</center>]]
|[[File:W13-11.png|center|102px|thumb|<center>'''W13-11'''</center>]]
|[[File:W13-12.png|center|100px|thumb|<center>'''W13-12'''</center>]]
|[[File:W13-13.png|center|100px|thumb|<center>'''W13-13'''</center>]]
|}
</center>

'''Standard. '''Where an advisory speed is posted in advance of a freeway or expressway exit, the Advisory Exit Speed (W13-2) sign shall be used.

Where an advisory speed is posted in advance of a conventional road ramp or to another roadway or roadside facility, the Advisory Ramp Speed (W13-3) sign shall be used.

An Advisory Exit Speed or Advisory Ramp Speed sign shall be used when the difference between the mainline roadway speed limit and the exit or ramp advisory speed in the vicinity of the departure is 20 mph or greater.

'''Guidance'''. An Advisory Exit Speed or Advisory Ramp Speed sign should be used when the difference between the mainline roadway speed limit and the exit or ramp advisory speed in the vicinity of the departure is 15 mph.

'''Option. '''An Advisory Exit Speed or Advisory Ramp Speed sign may be used based on engineering judgment when the difference between the mainline roadway speed limit and the exit or ramp advisory speed in the vicinity of the departure is 10 mph or less.

The Combination Horizontal Alignment/Advisory Exit Speed (W13-6, W13-8, and W13-10) signs may be used in lieu of the Advisory Exit Speed (W13-2) sign, and the combination Horizontal Alignment/Advisory Ramp Speed (W13-7, W13-9, and W13-11) signs may be used in lieu of the Advisory Ramp Speed (W13-3) sign.

The Combination Truck Rollover/Advisory Exit Speed and Truck Rollover/Advisory Ramp Speed (W13-12 and W13-13) signs may be used in lieu of the W13-2 and W13-3 signs respectively if the tip over condition is in the vicinity of the gore.

'''Standard. '''Roadway geometrics represented on the Combination Horizontal Alignment/Advisory Exit and Combination Horizontal Alignment/Advisory Ramp Speed signs shall be limited to the standard signs shown in the EPG.

'''Guidance. '''If used, the Advisory Exit Speed sign or the Combination Horizontal Alignment/Advisory Exit Speed sign should be installed along the deceleration lane. The Advisory Exit Speed or the Combination Horizontal Alignment/Advisory Exit Speed signs should be visible in time for the road user to decelerate and make an exiting maneuver.

Regulatory Speed Limit signs (see [[#903.3.20|EPG 903.3.20]]) should not be located in the vicinity of exit ramps or deceleration lanes, particularly where they will conflict with the advisory speed displayed on the Advisory Exit or Ramp Speed signs.

'''Support. '''[[#903.3.6|EPG 903.3.6]] contains provisions for the determination of the displayed advisory speed.

[[#tab903.3.4|Table 903.3.4]] lists recommended advance sign placement distances for deceleration to various advisory speeds.

'''Option. '''Where there is a need to remind road users of the recommended advisory speed, a horizontal alignment warning sign with an advisory speed plaque displaying the same advisory speed may be installed at a downstream location along the ramp.

'''Guidance. '''If the ramp curvature changes to the extent that it warrants a lower advisory speed, a horizontal alignment warning sign with the new advisory speed should be displayed in advance of the change in curvature.

'''Option. '''The One-Direction Large Arrow (W1-6) sign may be installed beyond the exit gore on the outside of the curve to provide additional warning of an immediate change in curvature. When used in conjunction with the exit speed, the One-Direction Large Arrow (W1-6) sign may be supplemented with a Confirmation Advisory Speed (W13-1aP) plaque when the plaque is not used with the Exit Gore (E5-1 series) sign.

'''Guidance. '''The horizontal alignment symbol displayed on the Combination Horizontal Alignment/Advisory Exit and Ramp Speed signs should be consistent with the horizontal geometry of the ramp.

'''Support. '''Examples of advisory speed signing for exit ramps are shown in [[#fig903.3.12|Figure 903.3.12]].

{{SpanID|fig903.3.12}}
[[File:Figure 903.3.12 Examples of Exit Ramp Advisory Speed and Other Warning Signs.png|thumb|center|800px|alt=Two vertical northbound lanes of a divided highway with an exit loop ramp are shown. At the bottom of the figure, and to the right of the right northbound lane, facing northbound traffic is an exit direction sign followed by a W13-2 or a W13-6R sign. At the entrance to the exit ramp is an E5-1a sign followed by an optional W1-6R with a W13-1aP sign assembly. |'''Figure 903.3.12''' Examples of Exit Ramp Advisory Speed and Other Warning Signs]]

=={{SpanID|903.3.13}}903.3.13 Vehicle Speed Feedback Sign and Plaque (W13-20 and W13-20aP) (MUTCD Section 2C.13)==

'''Option. '''A Vehicle Speed Feedback (W13-20) sign or (W13-20aP) plaque (see [[#fig903.3.13|Figure 903.3.13]]) that displays the speed of an approaching vehicle to the vehicle operator may be used to provide warning to drivers of their speed in relation to either a speed limit (R2-1) sign or a horizontal alignment warning sign assembly with a posted advisory speed.

'''Standard. '''When used to display the speed of an approaching vehicle in relation to the posted speed limit, the Vehicle Speed Feedback (W13-20aP) plaque shall be mounted below a Speed Limit (R2-1) sign (see [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2.20|EPG 903.2.20]]).

The Vehicle Speed Feedback assembly shall not be installed at a location where the posted speed limit on the route changes. Vehicle Speed Feedback assemblies shall be placed anywhere downstream of a speed limit change but shall be a minimum of 200 feet downstream of a speed limit change on conventional routes and a minimum of 400 feet downstream of a speed limit change on expressways of freeways. Vehicle Speed Feedback assemblies shall be installed in accordance with the [https://epg.modot.org/forms/general_files/TS/TA_Your_Speed_Feedback_Assembly.pdf Vehicle Speed Feedback Typical Application].

When used to supplement a horizontal alignment warning sign advisory speed, the Vehicle Speed Feedback (W13-20) sign shall be an independent installation near the point of curvature of a horizontal curve (see [[#903.3.6|EPG 903.3.6]]).

The legend YOUR SPEED shall be a black legend on a yellow retroreflective background, except as provided in [[616.8 TTC Zone Warning Signs (MUTCD Chapter 6H) #616.8.1|EPG 616.8.1]] and [[908.2 Signs (MUTCD Chapter 7B) #908.2.1|908.2.1]]. The changeable legend displaying the speed of the approaching vehicle shall be a yellow luminous legend on a black opaque background. The vehicle speed displayed on the changeable portion of the sign shall be displayed as an integer. The Vehicle Speed Feedback sign and plaque shall not flash, strobe, change color, or use other animated elements integrated into the changeable legend display. When no vehicles are approaching, the changeable display shall not display a legend.

Vehicle Speed Feedback sign equipment shall not have the capability to collect, store or transmit personally identifiable information of any type.

'''Guidance. '''The changeable portion of the Vehicle Speed Feedback legend should be approximately the same height, width, and stroke of those on the Speed Limit sign it supplements or is mounted below.

When a W13-20aP plaque is used with a Speed Limit sign it should be approximately the same width as the Speed Limit sign it is mounted below.

{{SpanID|fig903.3.13}}
[[File:Figure 903.3.13 Vehicle Speed Feedback Sign and Plaque.png|thumb|center|400px|alt="The figure shows two versions of a vehicle speed feedback sign. On the left is a stand-alone sign labeled W13-20. It has a yellow background with the words “YOUR SPEED” above an electronic display showing the number “42” in yellow LED digits. A caption below states that the stand-alone sign is placed at the beginning of curves and turns to reaffirm the advisory speed associated with the advance horizontal alignment sign.

On the right is a supplemental plaque labeled W13-20aP. A white “SPEED LIMIT 35” sign is shown above the yellow “YOUR SPEED 42” electronic display. The caption explains that the supplemental plaque is installed below a speed limit sign and is used downstream of speed limit changes or within a speed zone to reaffirm the speed limit."
|'''Figure 903.3.13''' Vehicle Speed Feedback Sign and Plaque]]

=={{SpanID|903.3.14}}903.3.14 Hill Signs (W7-1 and W7-1c) (MUTCD Section 2C.14)==
<center>
{|
| [[File:W7-1.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W7-1'''</center>]]
| [[File:W7-1c.png|thumb|center|103px|alt=|<center>'''W7-1c'''</center>]]
|}
</center>

'''Guidance. '''The Hill (W7-1) sign should be used in advance of a downgrade where the length, percent of grade, horizontal curvature, and/or other physical features require special precautions on the part of road users.

The Hill sign and supplemental grade (W7-3P) plaque (see [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.63|EPG 903.3.63]]) used in combination, or the W7-1a sign used alone, should be installed in advance of downgrades for the following conditions:
:A. 5% grade that is more than 3,000 feet in length,
:B. 6% grade that is more than 2,000 feet in length,
:C. 7% grade that is more than 1,000 feet in length,
:D. 8% grade that is more than 750 feet in length, or
:E. 9% grade that is more than 500 feet in length.

These signs should also be installed for steeper grades or where crash experience and field observations indicate a need.

Supplemental plaques (see [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.57|EPG 903.3.57]] and [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.63|903.3.63]]) and larger signs should be used for emphasis or where special hill characteristics exist. On longer grades, the use of the Hill sign with a distance (W7-3aP) plaque at periodic intervals of approximately 1-mile spacing should be considered.

'''Support. '''The Uphill (W7-1c) sign is also available by special request.

=={{SpanID|903.3.15}}903.3.15 ROAD NARROWS Sign (W5-1) (MUTCD 2C.17)==
[[File:W5-1.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W5-1'''</center>]]

'''Guidance. '''A ROAD NARROWS (W5-1) sign should be used in advance of a transition on two-lane roads where the pavement width is reduced abruptly to a width such that vehicles traveling in opposite directions cannot simultaneously travel through the narrow portion of the roadway without reducing speed.

'''Option. '''Additional emphasis may be provided by the use of object markers and delineators (see [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.70|EPG 903.3.70]] through [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.73|EPG 903.3.73]] and [[620.6 Delineators (MUTCD Chapter 3G)|EPG 620.6]]). The Advisory Speed (W13-1P) plaque (see [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.59|EPG 903.3.59]]) may be used to indicate the recommended speed.

=={{SpanID|903.3.16}}903.3.16 NARROW BRIDGE Sign (W5-2) (MUTCD Section 2C.18)==
[[File:W5-2.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W5-2'''</center>]]

'''Guidance. '''A NARROW BRIDGE (W5-2) sign should be used in advance of any bridge or culvert having a two-way roadway horizontal clearance of 16 to 18 feet, or any bridge or culvert having a roadway horizontal clearance less than the width of the approach travel lanes.

Additional emphasis should be provided by the use of object markers, delineators, and/or pavement markings.

'''Option. '''A NARROW BRIDGE sign may be used in advance of a bridge or culvert on which the approach shoulders are narrowed or eliminated.

=={{SpanID|903.3.17}}903.3.17 ONE LANE BRIDGE Sign (W5-3) (MUTCD Section 2C.19)==
[[File:W5-3.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W5-3'''</center>]]

'''Guidance. '''A ONE LANE BRIDGE (W5-3) sign should be used on two-way roadways in advance of any bridge or culvert:
:A. Having a roadway horizontal clearance of less than 16 feet, or
:B. Having a roadway horizontal clearance of less than 18 feet when commercial vehicles constitute a high proportion of the traffic, or
:C. Having a roadway horizontal clearance of 18 feet or less where the sight distance on the approach is less than that shown in Condition A of [[#tab903.3.4|Table 903.3.4]].

Additional emphasis should be provided by the use of object markers, delineators, and/or pavement markings.

'''Option. '''STOP (R1-1) or YIELD (R1-2) signs (see [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2.4|EPG 903.2.4]] and [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2.5|903.2.5]]) and related pavement markings (see [[620.2 Pavement and Curb Markings (MUTCD Chapter 3B) #620.2.20|EPG 620.2.20]] and [[620.2 Pavement and Curb Markings (MUTCD Chapter 3B) #620.2.21|620.2.21]]) may be used when conditions A, B, or C in the first Guidance paragraph of this Article apply.

=={{SpanID|903.3.18}}903.3.18 Divided Highway Sign (W6-1) (MUTCD Section 2C.20)==
[[File:W6-1.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W6-1'''</center>]]

'''Guidance. '''A Divided Highway (W6-1) sign should be used on the approaches to a section of highway (not an intersection or junction) where the opposing flows of traffic are separated by a median or other physical barrier.

'''Standard. '''The Divided Highway (W6-1) sign shall not be used instead of a Keep Right (R4-7 series) sign on the approach end of a median island.

=={{SpanID|903.3.19}}903.3.19 Divided Highway Ends Sign (W6-2) (MUTCD Section 2C.21)==
[[File:W6-2.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W6-2'''</center>]]

'''Guidance. '''A Divided Highway Ends (W6-2) sign should be used in advance of the end of a section of physically divided highway (not an intersection or junction) as a warning of two-way traffic ahead.

The Two-Way Traffic (W6-3) sign (see [[#903.3.42|EPG 903.3.42]]) should be used to give warning and notice of the transition to a two-lane, two-way section.

=={{SpanID|903.3.20}}903.3.20 Double Arrow Sign (W12-1) (MUTCD Section 2C.23)==
[[File:W12-1.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W12-1'''</center>]]

'''Option. '''The Double Arrow (W12-1) sign may be used to advise road users that traffic is permitted to pass on either side of an island, obstruction, or gore in the roadway. Traffic separated by this sign may either rejoin or change directions.

'''Guidance. '''If used on an island, the Double Arrow sign should be mounted near the approach end (see [[#903.3.13|EPG 903.3.13]]).

If used in front of a pier or obstruction, the Double Arrow sign should be mounted on the face of, or just in front of, the pier or obstruction. Where stripe markings are used on the pier or obstruction, they should be discontinued to leave a 3-inch space around the outside of the Double Arrow sign.

=={{SpanID|903.3.21}}903.3.21 DEAD END, NO OUTLET, and ROAD ENDS Signs (W14-1, W14-2, and W14-13) (MUTCD Section 2C.24)==
<center>
{|
| [[File:W14-1.png|thumb|center|99px|alt=|<center>'''W14-1'''</center>]]
| [[File:W14-2.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W14-2'''</center>]]
| [[File:W14-13.png|thumb|center|96px|alt=|<center>'''W14-13'''</center>]]
|}
</center>

'''Option. '''DEAD END (W14-1) sign may be used at the entrance to a single road or street that terminates without intersecting another street. The NO OUTLET (W14-2) sign may be used at the entrance to a road or road network from which there is no other exit.

The ROAD ENDS (W14-13) sign may be used to warn of a roadway which has no outlet and which terminates in a dead end and may be used in place of the DEAD END or NO OUTLET sign where the use of the DEAD END and NO OUTLET signs would have a negative effect on traffic generators or public perceptions due to the negative connotation of the message.

'''Guidance. '''When the W14-1, W14-2, or W14-13 sign is used, the sign should be posted as near as practicable to the entry point or at a sufficient advance distance to permit the road user to avoid the dead end or no outlet condition by turning at the nearest intersecting street.

'''Standard. '''The W14-1, W14-2, or W8-26 sign shall not be used in place of the ROAD CLOSED (R11-2) sign for temporary conditions, such as high water, bridge out, etc.

'''Support. '''Information about the use of Type 4 object markers to mark the end of the road or street is contained in [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.73|EPG 903.3.73]].

=={{SpanID|903.3.22}}903.3.22 Low Clearance Signs (W12-2, and W12-2a) (MUTCD Section 2C.25)==
<center>
{|
| [[File:W12-2.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W12-2'''</center>]]
| [[File:W12-2a.png|thumb|center|130px|alt=|<center>'''W12-2a'''</center>]]
|}
</center>

'''Support. '''MoDOT is responsible for installing and maintaining overhead low clearance signs mounted on all structures passing over MoDOT routes as well as installing and maintaining overhead low clearance signs mounted all MoDOT structures passing over non-MoDOT routes (this does not include MoDOT structures passing over rail lines). MoDOT has developed specific provisions for the use of Low Clearance signs.

'''Standard. '''Low Clearance signing shall be installed to display vertical clearances available under structures within specified limits of statutory maximum vehicle heights.

The clearance displayed on the Low Clearance (W12-2 and W12-2a) signs shall be 2 inches less than the measured clearance to account for possible packed snow and ice. For example, a measured vertical clearance of 15 ft. shall be posted as 14 ft. 10 in. All clearance measurements shall be rounded down to the nearest full inch. For example, a measured vertical clearance of 14 ft. 9 ½ in. would be rounded down to 14 ft. 9 in. and posted as 14 ft. 7 in.

The statutory maximum vehicle heights and vertical clearances are as follows:
:A. Within Commercial Zones = 15 ft. statutory maximum vehicle height (16’ 0” maximum posting).
:B. On Interstate and designated highway network routes and on all routes within 10 miles of Interstate and designated highway network routes = 14 ft. statutory maximum vehicle height (15’ 0” maximum posting).
:C. On routes greater than 10 miles from Interstate and designated highway network routes = 13 ft. 6 in. statutory maximum vehicle height (15’ 0” maximum posting).

'''Support. '''For specific details on commercial zone limits and designated highway network routes, see Missouri Vehicle Route Map.

'''Standard. '''The MoDOT posting requirements for Low Clearance signs are as follows:
:A. Case I – Two Signs Required: Where the measured vertical clearance is 15 ft. 2 in. or less, but more than 13 ft. 8 in., two signs shall be used. First, a Low Clearance Overhead (W12-2a) sign shall be installed on the structure, and second, a ground-mounted Low Clearance Advance (W12-2) sign shall be placed approximately 750 ft. in advance of the structure. When an interchange is involved, the ground-mounted Low Clearance (W12-2) sign shall be located approximately 750 ft. in advance of the off-ramp.
:B. Case II – Three Signs Required: Where the measured vertical clearance is 13 ft. 8 in. or less, three signs shall be used. First, a Low Clearance Overhead (W12-2a) sign shall be installed on the structure, second, a ground-mounted Low Clearance Advance (W12-2) sign shall be placed approximately 750 ft. in advance of the structure, and third, an additional Low Clearance Advance (W12-2) sign with a Distance Ahead (W16-2P or W16-3P) plaque below the sign shall be placed at the nearest intersecting road or wide point in the road at which a vehicle can detour or turn around.
:C. Case III – One Sign: Where the measured vertical clearance is 15 ft. 2 in. or less and where the bridge is state maintained but the road beneath is not, a Low Clearance Overhead (W12-2a) sign shall be installed on the structure, but the ground-mounted Low Clearance Advance (W12-2) sign shall not be installed by MoDOT. The Low Clearance Advance sign may be installed and maintained by the local jurisdiction.
:D. Case IV – Commercial Zones: Vertical clearance signing shall be provided for structures within commercial zones (see Section 304.190 of the Revised Statutes of Missouri). Any structure with a measured vertical clearance of 16 ft. 2 in. or less within the commercial zone limits shall be posted. For measured vertical clearances greater than 15 ft. 2 in. and equal to or less than 16 ft. 2 in. within commercial zones a Low Clearance Overhead (W12-2a) sign shall be installed on the structure. The signing for measured vertical clearances of 15 ft. 2 in. or less within commercial zones shall be as described for Case I or Case II.

In the case of an arch structure or a structure which has a sloping span resulting in different vertical clearances per lane, one Low Clearance Overhead (W12-2a) sign shall be centered over each lane displaying the vertical clearance available for that lane. One sign per lane shall be applied if the difference in vertical clearance between adjacent lanes is 6 inches or greater or when the vertical clearance between the far-right lane and far-left lane is 12 inches or greater.

'''Guidance. '''Clearances should be evaluated periodically to verify the displayed clearances are accurate and to determine if additional low clearance signing is necessary, particularly when resurfacing operations have occurred, on routes onto which over-height vehicles are normally directed under the permit process, and structures that are susceptible to catastrophic failure when struck by over-height vehicles. The information should be updated in the TMS.

Where there is a need to warn of a low clearance on an intersecting road or off a freeway or expressway exit, a rectangular warning sign with an appropriate word legend should be used rather than a W12-2 sign.

'''Option. '''When only one Overhead Low Clearance (W12-2a) sign is required and mounting one sign centered over the roadway is not practical, two W12-2a signs may be installed with one sign installed to the right of the travel lanes and one sign installed to the left of the travel lanes.

'''Guidance. '''The clearance shown on the Low Clearance Advance (W12-2) sign should match the clearance on the W12-2a sign or, if there are multiple W12-2a signs, should match the lowest clearance.

{{SpanID|fig903.3.22}}
[[File:Figure 903.3.22 Examples of Low Clearance Signs.png|thumb|center|800px|alt="The figure displays four examples of signing layouts for structures with limited vertical clearance.
Case I – Vertical Clearance of 15'-2"" to 13'-9"":
A roadway labeled “MoDOT Route” passes under a structure labeled “Any Structure.” A W12-2a plaque reading “14 FT 4 IN” is placed just before the structure. Farther in advance, a W12-2 low-clearance symbol sign is shown with the legend “14'-4” placed 750 feet before the structure.
Case II – Vertical Clearance of 13'-8"" or Less:
A similar roadway labeled “MoDOT Route” passes under a structure. A W12-2a plaque reading “12 FT 6 IN” is posted at the structure. A W12-2 low-clearance symbol sign reading “12'-6” is placed 750 feet in advance. Below that sign, a W16-3P plaque shows “½ MILES.” A note indicates that the sign is placed at the nearest intersecting road or wide point.
Case III – MoDOT Bridge with Vertical Clearance of 15'-2"" or Less Over a Local Road:
A local road passes under a structure labeled “MoDOT Bridge.” A W12-2a plaque reading “14 FT 4 IN” is shown on the MoDOT route above, installed by MoDOT. On the local road, a W12-2 low-clearance symbol sign reading “14'-4” is shown as installed by the local agency.
Case IV – Vertical Clearance of 16'-2"" or Less in Commercial Zones:
A roadway labeled “MoDOT Route” passes under a structure labeled “Any Structure.” A W12-2a plaque reading “14 FT 4 IN” is placed at the structure. Text notes that advance signing should follow the placement guidelines of Case I or Case II."
|'''Figure 903.3.22''' Examples of Low Clearance Signs]]

=={{SpanID|903.3.23}}903.3.23 BUMP and DIP Signs (W8-1 and W8-2) (MUTCD Section 2C.26)==
<center>
{|
| [[File:W8-1.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W8-1'''</center>]]
| [[File:W8-2.png|thumb|center|105px|alt=|<center>'''W8-2'''</center>]]
|}
</center>

'''Support. '''BUMP and DIP signs (W8-1, W8-2) are limited use signs, only being used for locations where the condition cannot be corrected, such as low water crossings or highway-rail grade crossings.

See [[913.2 Signs (MUTCD Chapter 8B) #913.2.14|EPG 913.2.14]] for low ground clearance conditions at highway-rail grade crossings.

'''Guidance. '''BUMP (W8-1) and DIP (W8-2) signs should be used in advance of a sharp rise or depression in the profile of the road.

'''Option. '''These signs may be supplemented with an Advisory Speed plaque (see [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.59|EPG 903.3.59]]).

'''Guidance. '''The DIP sign should not be used in advance of a short stretch of depressed alignment that might momentarily hide a vehicle.

A short stretch of depressed alignment that might momentarily hide a vehicle should be treated as a no-passing zone when center line striping is provided on a two-lane or three-lane road (see [[620.2 Pavement and Curb Markings (MUTCD Chapter 3B) #620.2.3|EPG 620.2.3]]).

'''Option. '''BUMP and DIP signs may be used as temporary traffic control signs (WO8-1, WO8-2) for locations where the condition is temporary and/or where the condition can be corrected in the future (See [[616.6 Temporary Traffic Control Zone Devices (MUTCD 6F) #616.6.50|EPG 616.6.50]]).

=={{SpanID|903.3.24}}903.3.24 PAVEMENT ENDS Sign (W8-3) (MUTCD Section 2C.28)==
[[File:W8-3.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W8-3'''</center>]]

'''Guidance. '''A PAVEMENT ENDS (W8-3) sign should be used where a paved surface changes to either a gravel treated surface or an earth road surface.

'''Option. '''An Advisory Speed plaque (see [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.59|EPG 903.3.59]]) may be used when the change in roadway condition requires a reduced speed.

=={{SpanID|903.3.25}}903.3.25 Slippery When Wet Sign (W8-5) (Section 2C.30)==
[[File:W8-5.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W8-5'''</center>]]

'''Guidance. '''The Slippery When Wet sign (W8-5) is a limited use sign that should not be installed for locations where the condition can be corrected. Existing Slippery When Wet (W8-5) signs should be left in place until the condition is corrected.

'''Option. '''The Slippery When Wet (W8-5) sign may be used to warn of unexpected slippery conditions.

'''Guidance. '''When used, Slippery When Wet signs should be placed in advance of the beginning of the affected section (see [[#tab903.3.4|Table 903.3.4]]), and additional signs should be placed at appropriate intervals along the road where the condition exists.

'''Option. '''The Slippery When Wet sign may be used as a temporary traffic control sign (WO8-5) for locations where the condition is temporary and/or where the condition can be corrected in the future (See [[616.6 Temporary Traffic Control Zone Devices (MUTCD 6F) #616.6.50|EPG 616.6.50]]).

=={{SpanID|903.3.26}}903.3.26 FALLEN ROCKS Signs (W8-14)==
[[File:W8-14.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W8-14'''</center>]]

'''Option. '''The FALLEN ROCKS (W8-14) sign may be used in advance of an area that is adjacent to a hillside, mountain, or cliff where rocks frequently fall onto the roadway.

'''Guidance. '''When used, FALLEN ROCKS signs should be placed in advance of the beginning of the affected section (see [[#tab903.3.4|Table 903.3.4]]), and additional signs should be placed at appropriate intervals along the road where the condition exists.

'''Standard. '''The district shall perform an evaluation of the FALLEN ROCKS site to determine whether existing installations of the FALLEN ROCKS sign is still necessary. If it is determined that the sign is not necessary, the sign will not be replaced at the end of the service life.

=={{SpanID|903.3.27}}903.3.27 Warning Signs and Plaque for Motorcyclists (W8-15, W8-15aP, and W8-16) (MUTCD Section 2C.31) ==

'''Support. '''MoDOT does not install permanent W8-15, W8-15aP, and W8-16 signs and plaques. For temporary applications, see [[616.16 Typical Applications (MUTCD Chapter 6P)|EPG 616.16]].

=={{SpanID|903.3.28}}903.3.28 IMPASSABLE WHEN WATER OVER ROAD Sign (MUTCD Section 2C.34)==

<center>
{|
| [[File:W8-18.jpg|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W8-18'''</center>]]
| [[File:W020-3.jpg|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''WO20-3'''</center>]]
| [[File:W8-34a.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W8-34a'''</center>]]
| [[File:W08-33.jpg|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''WO8-33'''</center>]]
| [[File:D2-1 and R11-3a.png|thumb|center|130px|alt=|<center>'''D2-1 and R11-3a'''</center>]]

| [[File:R5-22.png|thumb|center|120px|alt=|<center>'''R5-22'''</center>]]
|}
</center>

'''Support.''' When a road goes underwater, MoDOT requires the road to be closed to traffic regardless of the depth of water over the road. This closure is accomplished by following [[616.16 Typical Applications (MUTCD Chapter 6P) #616.16|TA-8W]]. This TA displays two figures; the first figure applies to locations which do not flood on a frequent basis and uses standard work zone signs to close the road. The second figure applies to roads that frequently go under water and utilize permanently installed signs. These permanent signs provide critical guidance to motorists between the time the road begins to flood to the time maintenance crews can physically close the road.

MoDOT has discontinued the use of the LOW WATER CROSSING (W8-35) sign, low water crossings are designed for water to routinely flow over the roadway while traffic passes through the water. MoDOT no longer maintains low water crossings on State routes, and MoDOT’s direction is to close any road covered in any depth of water.
MoDOT has discontinued the use of the WATER GAUGE (W8-19a). Water gauges are intended to indicate the depth of the water over a road to allow motorists to judge if it is safe to proceed, however, MoDOT no longer supports motorists driving through any depth of water and closes any road which is covered by water.

'''Standard.''' Any roadway location which goes underwater shall be closed to traffic as soon as possible. Any location, regardless of flooding frequency, shall be closed using the signing package in the first figure of [[616.16 Typical Applications (MUTCD Chapter 6P) #616.16|TA-8W]].

'''Guidance.''' Any roadway which historically floods one or more times per year should have the permanent signing package found in the second figure of [[616.16 Typical Applications (MUTCD Chapter 6P) #616.16|TA-8W]] installed. This applies to locations where streams and rivers rise and flood the road surface, but not in urban areas where a road floods due to blocked or overwhelmed storm drains. This signing package, which includes the DO NOT ENTER WHEN WATER OVER ROAD (R5-22) sign, provides motorists with advanced information on how they need to react to the flooded road before maintenance crews can get to the location and physically close the roadway. The flip signs allow for an expedited closure with the work zone signs already in place, only needing to flip them from the warning sign message to the work zone message upon arriving at the location, as well as deploying the barricades and ROAD CLOSED (R11-2) sign.

Existing LOW WATER CROSSING (W8-35) signs should be removed at the earliest convenience; the presence of these signs may encourage motorists to enter a flooded road if they see the depth of water and incorrectly believe it is shallow enough to safely pass.

'''Option.''' The signing package in the second figure of [[616.16 Typical Applications (MUTCD Chapter 6P) #616.16|TA-8W]] may be installed at any location that may flood less than one time per year to facilitate quicker road closures.

=={{SpanID|903.3.29}}903.3.29 Advance Traffic Control Signs (W3-1, W3-2, W3-3, and W3-4) (MUTCD Section 2C.35)==
<center>
{|
| [[File:W3-1.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W3-1'''</center>]]
| [[File:W3-2.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W3-2'''</center>]]
| [[File:W3-3.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W3-3'''</center>]]
| [[File:W3-4.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W3-4'''</center>]]
|}
</center>

'''Standard. '''The Stop Ahead (W3-1), Yield Ahead (W3-2), and Signal Ahead (W3-3) Advance Traffic Control signs shall be installed on an approach to a primary traffic control device that is not visible for a sufficient distance to permit the road user to respond to the device (see [[#tab903.3.4|Table 903.3.4]]). The visibility criteria for a traffic control signal shall be based on having a continuous view of at least two signal faces for the distance specified in [[902.4 Design Features of Traffic Control Signals (MUTCD Chapter 4D) #tab902.4.6|Table 902.4.6]].

'''Guidance. '''Where intermittent obstructions occur, engineering judgment should determine the treatment to be implemented.

The minimum visibility distance of a signal for a facility with a speed limit above 60 mph should be determined by summing the stopping sight distance (see [[#tab903.3.1|Table 903.3.1]]) and the assumed queue length. The assumed queue length should be determined by engineering judgment.

If an advance traffic control sign is warranted for an approach at an intersection of a MoDOT maintained road and non-MoDOT maintained road, the agency responsible for the maintenance of the non-MoDOT road should be notified of the condition.

'''Support. '''Permanent obstructions causing the limited visibility might include roadway alignment or structures. Intermittent obstructions might include foliage or parked vehicles.

'''Option. '''An Advance Traffic Control sign may be used for additional emphasis of the primary traffic control device, even when the visibility distance to the device is satisfactory.

Signal Ahead (W3-3) signs may be posted on the right- and left-hand sides of the road on a high speed divided approach.

'''Support. '''[[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.64|EPG 903.3.64]] contains information about the use of an advance street name plaque to identify an intersecting road.

'''Option. '''A BE PREPARED TO STOP (W3-4) sign may be used to warn of stopped traffic caused by a traffic control signal in advance of a section of roadway that regularly experiences traffic congestion, history of crashes, or based on engineering judgement.

A Warning Beacon (see [[902.18 Flashing Beacons (MUTCD Chapter 4S) #902.18.3|EPG 902.18.3]]) may be used with an Advance Traffic Control or BE PREPARED TO STOP (W3-4) sign. If a warning beacon is used, the beacon(s) may be activated before the start of the yellow change interval referred to as lead flash, which is the time before the onset of yellow at which the warning beacon(s) begin to flash. Recommended values for lead flash in accordance with the posted speed limit are specified in [[#tab903.3.29|Table 903.3.29]].
<center>
{{SpanID|tab903.3.29}}
{| class="wikitable" style="max-width:600px; text-align: center;"
|+ '''Table 903.3.29''' Design Parameters for Advance Warning System
|-
! Posted Speed (mph)
! Distance Between Warning Sign and Stop Line (ft)
! Lead Flash, Advance Warning Before End of Green (sec)
|-
| 70
| 871 to 975 max**
| 8
|-
| 70
| 730 min* to 870
| 7
|-
| 65
| 811 to 905 max**
| 8
|-
| 65
| 645 min* to 810
| 7
|-
| 60
| 661 to 745 max**
| 7
|-
| 60
| 570 min* to 660
| 6
|-
| 55
| 606 to 685 max**
| 7
|-
| 55
| 495 min* to 605
| 6
|-
| 50
| 476 to 550 max**
| 6
|-
| 50
| 425 min* to 475
| 5
|-
| 45
| 426 to 495 max**
| 6
|-
| 45
| 360 min* to 425
| 5
|-
| style="text-align: left" colspan="3" | *The advance traffic control sign shall not be installed less than this minimum distance. **The sign placement distance can exceed the "max" distance. The lead flash time should be determined by coordinating with the MoDOT Highway Safety and Traffic Division.
|}
</center>

'''Standard. '''When a BE PREPARED TO STOP (W3-4) sign is used in advance of a traffic control signal, it shall be used in addition to a Signal Ahead sign and shall be placed a minimum of 200 feet downstream from the Signal Ahead sign. The BE PREPARED TO STOP (W3-4) sign shall be installed as specified in [[#tab903.3.4|Table 903.3.4]] (See [[#fig903.3.29.1|Figure 903.3.29.1]]).

A BE PREPARED TO STOP (W3-4) sign with a warning beacon shall not be considered for intersection approaches with a posted speed limit of 40 mph or less.

{{SpanID|fig903.3.29.1}}
[[File:Figure 903.3.29.1 Example for Placement of Be Prepared To Stop Sign.png|thumb|center|500px|alt="The figure shows a four-leg intersection controlled by a traffic signal. A vertical roadway and a horizontal roadway intersect, each with one travel lane in each direction. A traffic signal head with red, yellow, and green indications is shown at the center of the intersection.
On the lower approach of the vertical roadway, two advance warning signs are shown on the right side. The sign closest to the intersection is a W3-4 “BE PREPARED TO STOP” sign, with an optional yellow beacon mounted above it. Farther downstream, a W3-3 traffic signal symbol sign is shown. The spacing between the two signs is labeled “200 ft MIN.”
A separate dimension arrow between the W3-4 sign and the intersection is marked with an asterisk, referencing a note that states, “See Table 903.3.4 for the recommended minimum distance.”"
|'''Figure 903.3.29.1''' Example for Placement of BE PREPARED TO STOP Sign]]

{{SpanID|fig903.3.29.2}}
[[File:Figure 903.3.29.2 Example for Placement Of Signal Ahead Sign-Condition B.png|thumb|center|500px|alt="The figure shows a four-leg intersection controlled by a traffic signal. A vertical roadway and a horizontal roadway intersect, each with one travel lane in each direction. A signal head with red, yellow, and green indications is displayed at the center of the intersection.
On the lower approach of the vertical roadway, a dimension arrow indicates the placement location for an advance warning sign. The arrow is marked with an asterisk referring to a note that reads, “See Table 903.3.4 for the recommended minimum distance.”
To the right of this lower approach, a W3-3 traffic signal symbol sign is shown with an optional yellow beacon mounted above it."
|'''Figure 903.3.29.2''' Example for Placement of Signal Ahead Sign]]

=={{SpanID|903.3.30}}903.3.30 Advance Ramp Control Signal Signs (W3-7 and W3-8) (MUTCD Section 2C.37)==
<center>
{|
| [[File:W3-7.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W3-7'''</center>]]
| [[File:W3-8.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W3-8'''</center>]]
|}
</center>

'''Option. '''A RAMP METER AHEAD (W3-7) sign may be used to warn road users that a freeway entrance ramp is metered and that they will encounter a ramp control signal (see [[902.16 Traffic Control Signals for Freeway Entrance Ramps (MUTCD Chapter 4P) #902.16|EPG 902.16]]).

'''Guidance. '''When the ramp control signals are operated only during certain periods of the day, a RAMP METERED WHEN FLASHING (W3-8) sign should be installed in advance of the ramp control signal near the entrance to the ramp, or on the arterial on the approach to the ramp, to alert road users to the presence and operation of ramp meters.

'''Standard. '''The RAMP METERED WHEN FLASHING sign shall be supplemented with a Warning Beacon (see [[902.18 Flashing Beacons (MUTCD Chapter 4S) #902.18.3|EPG 902.18.3]]) that flashes when the ramp control signal is in operation.

=={{SpanID|903.3.31}}903.3.31 WATCH FOR STOPPED TRAFFIC Sign (W26-1) (MUTCD Section 2C.39)==

[[File:W26-1.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W26-1'''</center>]]

'''Option. '''The WATCH FOR STOPPED TRAFFIC (W26-1) sign may be used to warn road users of the possibility of vehicles stopping abruptly in the travel lane due to recurring congested conditions.

=={{SpanID|903.3.32}}903.3.32 Reduced Speed Limit Ahead and Speed Zone Signs (W3-5) (MUTCD Section 2C.40)==
[[File:W3-5.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W3-5'''</center>]]

'''Standard'''. A Reduced Speed Limit Ahead (W3-5) sign shall be used to inform road users of a reduced speed zone where the speed limit is being reduced by more than 10 mph.

'''Option. '''A Reduced Speed Limit Ahead (W3-5) sign may be used to inform road users of a reduced speed zone where the speed limit is being reduced by 10 mph or less based if engineering judgment indicates the need for advance notice to comply with the posted speed limit ahead.

'''Standard. '''If used, a Reduced Speed Limit Ahead sign shall be followed by a Speed Limit (R2-1) sign (see [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2.20|EPG 903.2.20]]), installed at the beginning of the zone where the speed limit applies.

The speed limit displayed on the W3-5 sign shall be identical to the speed limit displayed on the subsequent Speed Limit sign.

=={{SpanID|903.3.33}}903.3.33 Intersection Warning Signs (W2-1 through W2-8) (MUTCD Section 2C.41)==
<center>
{|
| [[File:W2-1.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W2-1'''</center>]]
| [[File:W2-2.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W2-2'''</center>]]
| [[File:W2-3.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W2-3'''</center>]]
| [[File:W2-3a.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W2-3a'''</center>]]
|}
{|
| [[File:W2-4.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W2-4'''</center>]]
| [[File:W2-5.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W2-5'''</center>]]
| [[File:W2-6.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W2-6'''</center>]]
|-
| [[File:W2-7L.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W2-7L'''</center>]]
| [[File:W2-7R.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W2-7R'''</center>]]
| [[File:W2-8.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W2-8'''</center>]]
|}
</center>

'''Support. '''Intersection Warning Signs are used when there is limited stopping sight distance, history of crashes, or based on engineering judgment.

'''Option. '''A Cross Road (W2-1), Side Road (W2-2, W2-3, or W2-3a), T-Intersection (W2-4), or Y-Intersection (W2-5) sign may be used in advance of an intersection to indicate the presence of an intersection and the possibility of turning or entering traffic.

'''Standard. '''The Circular Intersection (W2-6) sign shall be installed in advance of roundabout intersections. The appropriate Advisory Speed supplemental plaque (W13-1P) shall be installed below the Circular Intersection sign.

'''Option. '''If other circular intersections exist, that would not be classified as roundabouts, the Circular Intersection (W2-6) sign may be used.

'''Support. '''[[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.64|EPG 903.2.64]] contains information about the use of an advance street name plaque to identify an intersecting road.

'''Guidance. '''The Intersection Warning sign should illustrate and depict the general configuration of the intersecting roadway, such as a cross road, side road, T-intersection, or Y-intersection.

Intersection Warning signs, other than the Circular Intersection (W2-6) sign, the T-intersection (W2-4) sign, and the Grade Crossing and Intersection Advance Warning (W10-2, W10-3, and W10-4) signs (see [[913.2 Signs (MUTCD Chapter 8B) #913.2.6|EPG 913.2.6]]) should not be used on approaches controlled by STOP signs, YIELD signs, or signals.

If an Intersection Warning sign is used where the side roads are not opposite of each other, the Offset Side Roads (W2-7) sign should be used instead of the Cross Road sign.

If an Intersection Warning sign is used where two closely-spaced side roads are on the same side of the highway, the Double Side Roads (W2-8) sign should be used instead of the Side Road sign.

No more than two side roads should be depicted on the same side of the highway on a W2-7 or W2-8 sign, and no more than three side roads should be depicted on a W2-7 or W2-8 sign.

=={{SpanID|903.3.34}}903.3.34 Advance Intersection Signs (W2-10a and W2-11a)==
<center>
{|
| [[File:W2-10a.jpg|thumb|center|alt=|100px|<center>'''W2-10a'''</center>]]
| [[File:W2-11a.jpg|thumb|center|alt=|100px|<center>'''W2-11a'''</center>]]
|}
</center>

'''Support.''' Advance Intersection signs are typically associated with restricted sight distance and gap selection at stop controlled intersections.

'''Option.''' The WATCH FOR ENTERING TRAFFIC (W2-10a) sign may be used on the uncontrolled through roadway approach to a side or cross road stop controlled intersection to warn of entering traffic from the side or cross road.

The WATCH FOR APPROACHING TRAFFIC (W2-11a) sign may be used on the side road stop controlled approach to warn of traffic approaching on the uncontrolled through road.

=={{SpanID|903.3.35}}903.3.35 Two-Direction Large Arrow Sign (W1-7) (MUTCD Section 2C.43)==
[[File:W1-7.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W1-7'''</center>]]

'''Standard. '''The Two-Direction Large Arrow (W1-7) sign shall be a horizontal rectangle.

If used, the Two-Direction Large arrow sign shall be installed on the far side of a T-intersection in line with, and at approximately a right angle to, traffic approaching from the stem of the T-intersection.

The Two-Direction Large Arrow sign shall not be used where there is no change in the direction of travel such as at the beginnings and ends of medians or at center piers.

'''Guidance. '''The Two-Direction Large Arrow sign should be visible for a sufficient distance to provide the road user with adequate time to react to the intersection configuration.

=={{SpanID|903.3.36}}903.3.36 Traffic Signal Oncoming Extended Green Signs (W25-1 and W25-2) (MUTCD Section 2C.44)==
<center>
{|
| [[File:W25-1.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W25-1'''</center>]]
| [[File:W25-2.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W25-2'''</center>]]
|}
</center>

'''Standard. '''At locations where either a W25-1 or a W25-2 sign is required based on the provisions in [[902.6 Steady (Stop-and-Go) Operation of Traffic Control Signals (MUTCD Chapter 4F) #902.6.1|EPG 902.6.1]], the W25-1 or W25-2 sign shall be installed near the left-most signal face for the approach.

=={{SpanID|903.3.37}}903.3.37 Merge Signs and Plaque (W4-1 and W4-5) (MUTCD Section 2C.45)==
<center>
{|
| [[File:W4-1.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W4-1'''</center>]]
| [[File:W4-5.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W4-5'''</center>]]
|}
</center>

'''Guidance. '''The Merge (W4-1) sign should be installed on the side of the major roadway where merging traffic will be encountered and in such a position as to not obstruct the road user’s view of entering traffic.

When a Merge sign is installed on a major roadway, the symbol should be oriented right or left as appropriate to depict the side from which the merge occurs, with the arrow representing the major roadway and the curved stem representing the entering roadway.

When a Merge sign is to be installed on an entering roadway that curves before merging with the major roadway, such as a ramp with a curving horizontal alignment as it approaches the major roadway, the Entering Roadway Merge (W4-5) sign should be used to better portray the actual geometric conditions to road users on the entering roadway.

Where two roadways of approximately equal importance converge and merging movements are required, a Merge sign should be placed on each roadway.

The Merge sign should not be used where two roadways converge and merging movements are not required.

'''Standard. '''The Merge sign shall not be used in place of a Lane Ends (W4-2) sign (see [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.39|EPG 903.3.39]]) where lanes of traffic moving on a single roadway must merge because of a reduction in the actual or usable pavement width.

'''Support. '''Examples of the use of Merge (W4-1) signs are shown in Drawing A in [[#fig903.3.37|Figure 903.3.37]].

{{SpanID|fig903.3.37}}
[[File:Figure 903.3.37 Examples of Merge and Added Lane Sign Placement for Entering and Converging Roadways.png|thumb|center|800px|alt="A: A horizontal roadway consisting of three eastbound travel lanes is shown. A converging lane adds a fourth lane to this three-lane horizontal roadway. Two lanes are merging together from the north and south while traveling eastbound to form one converging lane. A W4-1R sign is shown to the right of the right shoulder of the north merge lane and a W4-1L sign is shown to the left of the left shoulder of the south merge lane. The lanes merge together into one converging lane just beyond these signs. Another W4-1R sign is shown on the right shoulder of the right travel lane of the horizontal roadway before the converging lane enters the horizontal roadway.
B: This example only shows the right converging lane of a three-lane horizontal roadway where the converging lane adds a fourth lane. A W4-6R sign is shown on the left of the left shoulder of the converging lane. A W4-3R sign is shown on the right shoulder of the right travel lane of the horizontal roadway before the converging lane enters the horizontal roadway. An additional example shows a W4-6R sign on the left of the left shoulder facing southbound of the converging lane. The converging lane is shown to be entering the right lane of the horizontal roadway at a 90-degree angle with a sharp curve to the right when entering the roadway. A W4-3R sign is shown on the right shoulder of the right travel lane of the horizontal roadway before the converging lane enters the horizontal roadway. This example only shows the right lane of the three-lane horizontal roadway."
|'''Figure 903.3.37''' Examples of Merge and Added Lane Sign Placement for Entering and Converging Roadways]]

=={{SpanID|903.3.38}}903.3.38 Added Lane Signs (W4-3 and W4-6) (MUTCD Section 2C.46)==
<center>
{|
| [[File:W4-3.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W4-3'''</center>]]
| [[File:W4-6.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W4-6'''</center>]]
|}
</center>

'''Guidance. '''The Added Lane (W4-3) sign should be installed in advance of a point where two roadways converge and merging movements are not required. When possible, the Added Lane sign should be placed such that it is visible from both roadways; if this is not possible, an Added Lane sign should be placed on the side of each roadway.

When an Added Lane (W4-3) sign is installed on a major roadway, the symbol should be oriented right or left as appropriate to depict the side from which the entering roadway converges, with the straight arrow representing the major roadway and the curved arrow representing the entering roadway. The sign should be located on the side of the major roadway from which the entering roadway converges.

When an Added Lane sign is to be installed on a roadway that curves before converging with another roadway that has a tangent alignment at the point of convergence, the Entering Roadway Added Lane (W4-6) sign should be used to better portray the actual geometric conditions to road users on the curving roadway.

'''Support. '''Examples of the use of Added Lane (W4-3) and Entering Roadway Added Lane (W4-6) signs are shown in Drawing B in [[#fig903.3.37|Figure 903.3.37]].

=={{SpanID|903.3.39}}903.3.39 Lane Ends Signs (W4-2 and W9-1) (Section 2C.47)==
<center>
{|
| [[File:W4-2.png|thumb|center|106px|alt=|<center>'''W4-2'''</center>]]
| [[File:W9-1.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W9-1'''</center>]]
|}
</center>

'''Support. '''The Lane Ends (W4-2) and RIGHT (LEFT) LANE ENDS (W9-1) signs are used to warn of the reduction in the number of traffic lanes in the direction of travel.

The sequence of the W4-2 and W9-1 signs is illustrated in [[#fig903.3.39.1|Figures 903.3.39.1]] to [[#fig903.3.39.5|903.3.39.5]]

'''Guidance. '''The Lane Ends (W4-2) sign should be installed at the advance placement distance in accordance with [[#tab903.3.4|Table 903.3.4]].

A RIGHT (LEFT) LANE ENDS (W9-1) sign should be installed in advance of the Lane Ends sign, at the advance placement distance in accordance with [[#tab903.3.4|Table 903.3.4]], to provide additional warning that a lane is ending and that a merging maneuver will be required.

If a W9-1 sign is installed, a Distance (W16-2P series or W16-3P series) plaque (see [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.59|EPG 903.3.59]]) should be installed below the W9-1 sign.

On one-way streets or on divided highways where the left-hand lane is ending and the width of the median will permit, the W9-1 and W4-2 signs should be placed facing approaching traffic on the left-hand side or median.

'''Option. '''Where a lane ends a distance beyond the intersection that is less than the advance placement distance indicated in [[#tab903.3.4|Table 903.3.4]], the W4-2 sign may be located at the far side of the intersection (see [[#fig903.3.39.4|Figure 903.3.39.4]]).

'''Guidance. '''When the W4-2 sign is located at the far side of the intersection in accordance with the Option paragraph above, the W9-1 sign should be placed upstream of the intersection with the appropriate distance plaque.

'''Support. '''[[620.2 Pavement and Curb Markings (MUTCD Chapter 3B) #620.2.14|EPG 620.2.14]] contains information regarding the use of pavement markings in conjunction with a lane reduction.

'''Guidance. '''Lane Ends signs should not be installed in advance of the downstream end of an acceleration lane.

'''Standard. '''The W4-2 and W9-1 signs shall not be used in dropped lane situations. In dropped lane situations on conventional roads at intersections, regulatory signs (see [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2.26|EPG 903.2.26]]) shall be used to inform road users that a through lane becomes a mandatory turn lane.

{{SpanID|fig903.3.39.1}}
[[File:Figure 903.3.39.1 Example Sequences for Lane Ends and Lane Merge Signs (Sheet 1 of 5).png|thumb|center|800px|alt=A vertical roadway is shown with four travel lanes at the bottom of the figure transitioning to three travel lanes at the top. The right lane ends through a taper marked by three white lane-reduction arrows placed in the right travel lane, each pointing diagonally toward the adjacent lane. At the bottom right of the figure, a W9-1R “RIGHT LANE ENDS” sign is mounted above a W16-2P “1000 FEET” plaque. Farther upstream, a W4-2R lane-reduction symbol sign is shown to the right of the roadway. The distance between the W4-2R sign and the beginning of the taper is labeled, “See Table 903.3.4 to determine the advance placement distance.” A legend indicates the direction of travel. Two notes are shown: “1. See EPG 620.2.14 Lane Reduction Pavement Markings” and “2. See EPG 620.2.22 Merge Arrows.”
|'''Figure 903.3.39.1''' Example Sequences for Lane Ends and Lane Merge Signs ''(Sheet 1 of 5)'']]

{{SpanID|fig903.3.39.2}}
[[File:Figure 903.3.39.2 Example Sequences for Lane Ends and Lane Merge Signs (Sheet 2 of 5).png|thumb|center|800px|alt=A vertical roadway is shown with two travel lanes at the bottom of the figure and one travel lane at the top. The right lane ends through a taper marked by white lane-reduction arrows placed in the right travel lane, each pointing diagonally toward the adjacent lane. At the bottom right of the figure, a W9-1R “RIGHT LANE ENDS” sign is mounted above a W16-2P “1000 FEET” plaque. Farther upstream, a W4-2R lane-reduction symbol sign is shown to the right of the roadway. The distance between the W4-2R sign and the beginning of the taper is labeled, “See Table 903.3.4 to determine the advance placement distance.” A legend indicates the direction of travel. A note states, “See EPG 620.2.14 for lane-reduction pavement markings and EPG 620.2.22 for merge arrows.”
|'''Figure 903.3.39.2''' Example Sequences for Lane Ends and Lane Merge Signs ''(Sheet 2 of 5)'']]

{{SpanID|fig903.3.39.3}}
[[File:Figure 903.3.39.3 Example Sequences for Lane Ends and Lane Merge Signs (Sheet 3 of 5).jpg|thumb|center|800px|alt="The figure shows two roadway examples where the left lane ends. The illustration on the left depicts an undivided roadway with one travel lane in one direction and two travel lanes in the opposite direction. On the side with two lanes, the left lane ends through a taper marked with a yellow painted gore and white lane-reduction arrows placed in the left travel lane, each arrow pointing diagonally toward the adjacent lane. To the right of this roadway, a W9-1L “LEFT LANE ENDS” sign is shown mounted above a W16-2P “1000 FEET” plaque, and a W4-2L lane-reduction symbol sign is shown farther upstream. The distance between the W4-2L sign and the beginning of the taper is labeled, “See Table 903.3.4 to determine the advance placement distance.”
The illustration on the right depicts a divided or one-way roadway with two travel lanes. The left lane ends through a taper marked by white lane-reduction arrows pointing diagonally toward the adjacent lane. To the right of this roadway, a W9-1L “LEFT LANE ENDS” sign is shown mounted above a W16-2P “1000 FEET” plaque, with a W4-2L lane-reduction symbol sign shown farther upstream. The same advance placement distance label is shown.
A note states, “See EPG 620.2.14 for lane-reduction pavement markings and EPG 620 for merge arrows.” A legend indicates the direction of travel."
|'''Figure 903.3.39.3''' Example Sequences for Lane Ends and Lane Merge Signs ''(Sheet 3 of 5)'']]

{{SpanID|fig903.3.39.4}}
[[File:Figure 903.3.39.4 Example Sequences for Lane Ends and Lane Merge Sign (Sheet 4 of 5).png|thumb|center|800px|alt=The intersection of a two-lane horizontal roadway with a three-lane vertical roadway is shown.The right and left side of the horizontal roadway is composed of one through travel lane in each direction. The left side also has a third lane which is a right-turn only lane when approaching the intersection traveling eastbound to turn south.The vertical roadway is composed of two northbound lanes and one southbound lane. The south side of this vertical roadway is composed of a combination straight or left-turn lane in the left northbound travel lane and a combination straight or right-turn lane in the right northbound travel lane. Solid white through and turn arrows are shown in these travel lanes.Starting near the bottom of the figure, to the right of the right shoulder of the northbound lanes, a sign assembly composed of a W9-1R sign mounted above a W16-2P plaque is shown.On the north side of this vertical roadway, a W4-2R sign is shown to indicate that the two northbound lanes are transitioning to one lane ahead. Before the right lane taper begins, two solid white arrows are shown in the right northbound travel lane on the pavement pointing diagonally to the left northbound travel lane. An “optional dotted lane line” is shown adjacent to these arrows in the middle of the travel lanes. All pavement markings are denoting a northbound left lane merge ahead.
|'''Figure 903.3.39.4''' Example Sequences for Lane Ends and Lane Merge Sign ''(Sheet 4 of 5)'']]

{{SpanID|fig903.3.39.5}}
[[File:Figure 903.3.39.5 Example Sequences for Lane Ends and Lane Merge Signs (Sheet 5 of 5).png|thumb|center|800px|alt="The figure shows a vertical roadway where two lanes traveling in the same direction reduce to one lane. At the bottom of the roadway, two upward-travel lanes are shown. Farther up the figure, both outside edges of the roadway taper inward, reducing the roadway to a single lane. A single dashed centerline is shown within the remaining lane.

To the right of the roadway, near the lower portion of the figure, a sign assembly is shown consisting of a W9-4 “LANES MERGE” sign mounted above a W16-2P “500 FEET” plaque. Farther up the roadway, another sign assembly is shown consisting of a W4-8 lane-reduction symbol sign. A label between the W4-8 sign and the start of the taper reads, “See Table 903.3.4 to determine the advance placement distance.”
A legend indicates the direction of travel with a right-pointing arrow. Notes reference EPG 620.2.14 for lane-reduction pavement markings and EPG 903.3.40 for additional information about this type of merge."
|'''Figure 903.3.39.5''' Example Sequences for Lane Ends and Lane Merge Signs ''(Sheet 5 of 5)'']]

=={{SpanID|903.3.40}}903.3.40 Lanes Merge Signs (W9-4 and W4-8) (MUTCD Section 2C.48)==
<center>
{|
| [[File:W4-8.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W4-8'''</center>]]
| [[File:W9-4.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W9-4'''</center>]]
|}
</center>

'''Support. '''The LANES MERGE (W9-4) and Single-Lane Transition (W4-8) signs are used to warn of a merge of two lanes to one in the same direction of travel with a merging maneuver required for each lane (see [[#fig903.3.39.5|Figure 903.3.39.5]]). This type of merge is for a geometric condition where both approach lanes merge into a single lane, not where one lane merges into the other. [[616.8 TTC Zone Warning Signs (MUTCD Chapter 6H) #616.8.8|EPG 618.8.8]] contains information about the use of the late merge sign.

'''Guidance. '''The Single-Lane Transition (W4-8) sign should be located at the advance placement distance in accordance with [[#tab903.3.4|Table 903.3.4]].

The Lanes Merge (W9-4) sign should be used in advance of the W4-8 sign to provide additional warning that both lanes form a single lane and that a merging maneuver is needed for the traffic in each lane.

=={{SpanID|903.3.41}}903.3.41 RIGHT (LEFT) LANE EXIT ONLY Sign (W9-7) (MUTCD Section 2C.50)==

[[File:W9-7.png|thumb|center|160px|alt=|<center>'''W9-7'''</center>]]

'''Option. '''The RIGHT (LEFT) LANE EXIT ONLY (W9-7) sign may be used to provide advance warning to road users that traffic in the right-hand (left-hand) lane of a roadway will be required to depart the roadway at the next exit.

'''Guidance. '''If used, the W9-7 sign should be installed upstream from the first overhead guide sign that contains an EXIT ONLY sign panel or upstream from the first RIGHT (LEFT) LANE MUST EXIT (R3-33) regulatory sign, if used, whichever is farther upstream from the exit.

=={{SpanID|903.3.42}}903.3.42 Two-Way Traffic Sign (W6-3) (MUTCD Section 2C.51)==
[[File:W6-3.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W6-3'''</center>]]

'''Guidance. '''A Two-Way Traffic (W6-3) sign should be used to warn road users of a transition from a multi-lane divided section of roadway to a two-lane, two-way section of roadway.

A Two-Way Traffic (W6-3) sign with an AHEAD (W16-9P) plaque (see [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.57|EPG 903.3.57]]) should be used to warn road users of a transition from a one-way street to a two-lane, two-way section of roadway.

'''Option. '''The Two-Way Traffic sign may be used to supplement the Divided Highway (Road) Ends (W6-2) sign discussed in [[#903.3.19|EPG 903.3.19]].

=={{SpanID|903.3.43}}903.3.43 NO PASSING ZONE Sign (W14-3) (MUTCD Section 2C.53)==

'''Support. '''The NO PASSING ZONE (W14-3) sign is not to be used on a system-wide basis. It is intended for special use as a measure to reduce crashes at locations where there is a history of crashes related to passing maneuvers.

'''Standard. '''The NO PASSING ZONE (W14-3) sign shall be a pennant-shaped isosceles triangle with its longer axis horizontal and pointing to the right. When used, the NO PASSING ZONE sign shall be installed on the left-hand side of the roadway at the beginning of no-passing zones identified by pavement markings or DO NOT PASS signs or both (see [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2.31|EPG 903.2.31]] and [[620.2 Pavement and Curb Markings (MUTCD Chapter 3B) #620.2.3|620.2.3]]).

The use of the NO PASSING ZONE sign shall be approved by the State Highway Safety and Traffic Engineer.

=={{SpanID|903.3.44}}903.3.44 Vehicular Traffic Warning Signs (MUTCD Section 2C.54)==
'''Option. '''Vehicular Traffic Warning signs may be used to alert road users to locations where unexpected entries into the roadway by trucks, bicycles, farm vehicles, emergency vehicles, golf carts, horse-drawn vehicles, or other vehicles might occur.

'''Guidance. '''Vehicular Traffic Warning signs should be used only at locations where the road user’s sight distance is restricted, or the condition, activity, or entering traffic would be unexpected.

If the condition or activity is seasonal or temporary, the Vehicular Traffic Warning sign should be removed or covered when the condition or activity does not exist.

Before advanced warning signs are installed, all efforts to correct the sight distance issues should be made as this will be far more effective to improve safety compared to installing a sign. Roadway alignments cannot be corrected easily, but removal of vegetation on and off the state right of way that blocks sight distance can address sight distance issues.

'''Option. '''Supplemental plaques (see [[#903.3.57|EPG 903.3.57]]) with legends such as AHEAD, XX FEET, NEXT XX MILES, IN STREET, or IN ROAD may be mounted below Vehicular Traffic Warning signs to provide advance notice to road users of unexpected entries.

'''Standard. '''A Vehicular Traffic Warning sign assembly shall not be installed on an approach controlled by a STOP or a YIELD sign, except as provided in the following two Option paragraphs.

'''Option. '''The Vehicular Traffic Warning sign assembly may be installed on an approach to a circular intersection controlled by a YIELD sign where the crosswalk is at least 20 feet in advance of the yield point at the entrance to the circulatory roadway.

At a signalized or stop-controlled intersection the Vehicular Traffic Warning sign assembly may be installed on an approach to a channelized right-turn lane controlled by a YIELD sign where the crosswalk is at least 20 feet in advance of the yield point.

A Warning Beacon (see [[902.18 Flashing Beacons (MUTCD Chapter 4S) #902.18.3|EPG 902.18.3]]) may be used with any Vehicular Traffic Warning sign to indicate specific periods when the condition or activity is present or is likely to be present, or to provide enhanced sign conspicuity.

=={{SpanID|903.3.45}}903.3.45 Bicycle Warning (W11-1) Sign ==
[[File:W11-1.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W11-1'''</center>]]

'''Guidance. '''Bicycle Warning (W11-1) signs should be used only at locations where the road user’s sight distance is restricted, and the condition, activity, or entering traffic would be unexpected.

'''Option. '''Bicycle Warning (W11-1) signs may be used to alert road users to locations where unexpected entries into the roadway by cyclists might occur.

'''Support. '''Bicycle warning (W11-1) signs with a diagonal downward-pointing arrow (W16-7P) plaques are used to alert road users of locations where bicyclists routinely cross state highways.

'''Standard. '''If a post-mounted W11-1 sign is placed at the location of a bicycle crossing, a diagonal downward pointing arrow (W16-7P) plaque shall be mounted below the sign. The bicycle crossing warning sign with diagonal arrow supplemental plaque should be placed immediately in advance of, as near as possible, the crossing in both directions of travel. If the W11-1 sign is mounted overhead, the W16-7P supplemental plaque shall not be used.

'''Guidance. '''Bicycle crossing warning signs should be installed at locations where an established independent bicycle path crosses a state route. Bicycle crossing warning signs should not be installed where an established “US Bike Route” crosses a state route or where cyclists riding on the public roadways cross a state route.

'''Option. '''A Bicycle Warning (W11-1) sign with an AHEAD (W16-9P) supplemental plaque may be added in advance of the bicycle crossing if engineering judgement determines a need based on limited sight distance of the crossing.

Bicycle Warning (W11-1) signs with an In Road (W16-1P) plaque may be used to alert road users to locations where cyclists riding on the roadway might occur.

'''Standard. '''When bicycle warnings signs are installed to warn motorists of bicycle activity along a state highway, the IN ROAD (W16-1P) plaque shall be installed below the Bicycle Warning (W11-1) sign and shall match the color of the warning sign.

'''Support. '''Bicycle warning signs with the IN ROAD supplemental plaques (IN ROAD plaque replaces the SHARE THE ROAD plaque) are used to alert road users where bicyclists routinely ride along specific sections of state highways, in the travel lane or on the shoulder of the roadway.

'''Guidance. '''The use of Bicycle warning signs to warn road users of cyclist activity along specific sections of roadway should be based on identifiable, routine and/or frequent cyclist activity. Indications bicycle warnings signs should be installed should be based on conditions, such as, but not limited to:
:A. Requests received by bicycle groups, or clubs, who indicate the state highways which are part of their group’s frequent cycling routes.
:B. Requests from Amish, Mennonite or other communities who utilize bicycles as one of their primary modes of routine transportation, indicating the state highways which service their community’s cycling needs.
:C. Sections of a state route where an established bicycle trail overlaps the state route for some length, using the roadway and not a dedicated bike lane, before returning to the independent trail again.
:D. Cycling activity occurs a minimum of 3 days per week, 6 months per year.

Bicycle warning signs should not be installed along routes for the following conditions:
:A. For the purpose of promoting cycling or conveying a bicycle friendly organization when there is no routine cycling activity on that route,
:B. When cyclists have access to a dedicated bicycle lane along the route,
:C. Where cyclists have access to a parallel bike facility, or multi-use path, or
:D. In response to a request from an individual without verifying the need as described in this article.

Bicycle warning signs used to notify drivers of bicycle traffic on the state route should only be ground-mounted installations. Signs should be installed at the point on the route the activity begins and downstream of major public road entry points onto the state route.

'''Option. '''Additional bicycle warning signs may be installed based on engineering judgement if the distance between major road intersections is excessive or if there are areas with limited sight distance which may obscure bicycle traffic.

A NEXT XX MILES (W7-3aP) plaque (See [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.60|EPG 903.3.60]]) may be installed below the IN ROAD plaque if engineering judgement determines the need to notify road users of the length of roadway over which unexpected cyclists riding along the road may occur.

=={{SpanID|903.3.46}}903.3.46 Combined Bicycle/Pedestrian Crossing (W11-15) Sign ==
[[File:W11-15.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W11-15'''</center>]]

'''Option. '''Combined Bicycle/Pedestrian Crossing (W11-15) signs may be used to alert road users to locations where unexpected entries into the roadway by cyclists and pedestrians might occur.

'''Guidance. '''Combined Bicycle/Pedestrian warning signs should be installed at locations where an established shared use path crosses a state route.

'''Support. '''The combined Bicycle/Pedestrian (W11-15) sign is used where both bicyclists and pedestrians might be crossing the roadway at intersections with a shared-use path and state routes. A shared-use path is defined as a paved or gravel path, 8-10 foot wide, dedicated to bike and pedestrian traffic which is an independent facility from the roadway.

'''Standard. '''If a post-mounted W11-15 sign is placed at the location of the combined Bicycle/Pedestrian crossing, a diagonal downward pointing arrow (W16-7P) plaque shall be mounted below the sign. The Bicycle/Pedestrian warning sign with diagonal downward pointing arrow plaque shall be placed immediately in advance of, as near as possible, the crossing in both directions of travel. If the W11-15 sign is mounted overhead, the W16-7P supplemental plaque shall not be used.

'''Option. '''An advanced Bicycle/Pedestrian warning sign with an AHEAD (W16-9P) supplemental plaque may be added in advance of the Bicycle/Pedestrian crossing if engineering judgement determines a need based on limited sight distance of the crossing.

=={{SpanID|903.3.47}}903.3.47 Trail Crossing (W11-15a) Sign ==
[[File:W11-15a.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W11-15a'''</center>]]

'''Option. '''TRAIL CROSSING (W11-15a) signs may be used to alert road users to locations where unexpected entries into the roadway by cyclists, pedestrians or equestrian activity might occur.

'''Support. '''The TRAIL CROSSING sign is used to warn of a rustic trail where pedestrian, bicyclist, or equestrian activities, might be crossing the state highway. A rustic trail would typically be an unpaved trail of an undefined width, but one that is visible and identifiable by a motorist as it crosses the right of way.

'''Guidance. '''TRAIL CROSSING signs should be installed at locations where an established rustic trail used by pedestrians, bicyclists, and equestrian activities crosses a state route.

'''Standard. '''If a post-mounted W11-15a sign is placed at the location of the rustic trail crossing, a diagonal downward pointing arrow (W16-7P) plaque shall be mounted below the sign. The W11-15a sign with diagonal downward pointing arrow plaque shall be placed immediately in advance of, as near as possible, the crossing in both directions of travel. If the W11-15a sign is mounted overhead, the W16-7P supplemental plaque shall not be used.

'''Option. '''A TRAIL CROSSING warning sign with an AHEAD (W16-9P) supplemental plaque may be added in advance of the trail crossing if engineering judgement determines a need based on limited sight distance of the crossing.

=={{SpanID|903.3.48}}903.3.48 Horse-Drawn Vehicle (W11-14) Sign==
[[File:W11-14.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W11-14'''</center>]]

'''Option.''' Horse-Drawn Vehicle (W11-14) signs may be used to alert road users to locations where unexpected horse-drawn vehicles are traveling along the roadway might occur.

'''Guidance.''' W11-14 signs should be used only at locations where the road user’s sight distance is restricted, and the condition, activity, or entering traffic would be unexpected.

'''Support. '''Horse-Drawn Vehicle warning signs with the IN ROAD (W16-1P) supplemental plaque (IN ROAD plaque replaces the SHARE THE ROAD plaque) are used to alert road users where horse-drawn vehicle traffic is routinely traveling along specific sections of state highways, in the travel lane or on the shoulder of the roadway.

'''Standard. '''When Horse-drawn vehicle warnings signs are installed to warn motorists of Horse-drawn vehicle activity along a state highway, the IN ROAD (W16-1P) plaque shall be installed below the Horse-drawn vehicle warning sign and shall match the color of the warning sign.

'''Guidance. '''The use of Horse-Drawn Vehicle signs to warn road users of horse-drawn vehicle activity along specific section of roadway should be based on identifiable, routine and/or frequent horse-drawn vehicle activity. The application of horse-drawn vehicle warning signs is limited to the Amish, Mennonite or other communities who utilize horse-drawn vehicles as one of their primary modes of routine transportation. The district should work with community leadership to determine the state routes their communities utilize on a routine basis to determine the most appropriate sign installation locations.

Horse-Drawn Vehicle signs used to notify drivers of horse-drawn vehicle traffic on the state route should only be ground-mounted installations. Signs should be installed at the point on the route the activity begins and downstream of each major public road entry points onto the state route.

'''Option. '''Additional Horse-Drawn Vehicle signs with IN ROAD plaques may be installed based on engineering judgement if the distance between major road intersections is excessive or if there are areas with limited sight distance which may obscure horse-drawn vehicle traffic.

A NEXT XX MILES (W7-3aP) plaque may be added below the IN ROAD plaque if engineering judgement determines the need to notify drivers of the length of roadway affected by the warning sign.

=={{SpanID|903.3.49}}903.3.49 TRUCK CROSSING (W8-6) Sign ==
[[File:W8-6.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W8-6'''</center>]]

'''Option. '''Truck Crossing (W8-6) signs may be used to alert road users to locations where unexpected entries into the roadway by trucks crossing the road might occur.

'''Guidance. '''W8-6 signs should be used only at locations where the road user’s sight distance is restricted, and the condition, activity, or entering traffic would be unexpected.

'''Support. '''The W8-6 sign is used to alert road users to locations where trucks are routinely crossing a state highway at a commercial entrance intersection. A typical example would be a company with facilities on either side of a highway where raw materials, finished goods, etc. are routinely moved sites. In these cases, warning signs with fluorescent yellow backgrounds are installed in a permanent installation.

'''Option. '''For cases involving temporary truck crossings, such as haul roads moving earth or quarry materials, a TR12 Truck crossing agreement (see [[153.21 Traffic #153.21|EPG 153.21]]) may be used to install a temporary traffic control sign with a fluorescent orange background.

'''Guidance. '''W8-6 signs should be installed at locations where there is consistent and routine truck traffic crossing a state route where the road user’s sight distance is restricted, and the crossing would be unexpected based on engineering judgement.

The truck crossing for which the warning sign is being installed should be recognizable by the presence of a on premise business marquee sign, business name on structures or other indicators to allow drivers to associate the warning sign to the entrance/site where tucks could be crossing the state highway.

'''Standard. '''If used, the TRUCK CROSSING sign shall be placed in accordance with [[#tab903.3.4|Table 903.3.4]].

The TRUCK CROSSING sign shall only be installed for the direction of travel where the road user’s sight distance is restricted.

The TRUCK CROSSING sign shall not be used on state highways at intersections with city streets or county roads, to address issues at these types of intersections other warning signs, such as Intersection Warning signs are more appropriate.

=={{SpanID|903.3.50}}903.3.50 Truck Entrance (W11-10) Sign==
[[File:W11-10.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W11-10'''</center>]]

'''Option. '''Truck Entrance (W11-10) signs may be used to alert road users to locations where unexpected entries into the roadway by trucks might occur.

'''Guidance. '''Truck Entrance signs should be used only at locations where the road user’s sight distance is restricted, and the condition, activity, or entering traffic would be unexpected.

'''Support. '''The W11-10 sign is used to alert road users to locations where trucks are routinely entering and leaving a state highway at a non-public roadway intersection, commercial entrance. A typical example would be trucks entering and exiting a quarry entrance which has direct access to the state route. In these cases, warning signs with fluorescent yellow backgrounds are installed in a permanent installation.

'''Option. '''For cases involving a temporary truck entrance, such as logging trucks entering and leaving a timber harvest location, a TR12 Truck crossing agreement (see [[153.21 Traffic #153.21|EPG 153.21]]) may be used to install a temporary traffic control sign with a fluorescent orange background.

'''Guidance. '''Truck Entrance signs should be installed at locations where there is consistent and routine truck traffic entering and leaving a state route where the road user’s sight distance is restricted, and the crossing would be unexpected based on engineering judgement.

The truck entrance for which the sign is being installed should be recognizable by the presence of a on premise business marquee sign, building with the business name or some other form of marking to allow drivers associate the warning sign to the site where trucks could be entering or leaving the highway.

'''Standard. '''If used, the Truck Entrance sign shall be placed in accordance with [[#tab903.3.4|Table 903.3.4]].

The Truck Entrance sign shall only be installed for the direction of travel where the road user’s sight distance is restricted.

The truck entrance warning sign shall not be used on state highways at intersections with city streets or county roads, to address issues at these types of intersections other warning signs, such as Intersection Warning signs are more appropriate.

=={{SpanID|903.3.51}}903.3.51 Farm Equipment (W11-5) Warning Sign ==
[[File:W11-5.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W11-5'''</center>]]

'''Option. '''Farm Equipment Warning (W11-5) signs may be used to alert road users to locations where unexpected entries into the roadway by farm equipment crossing the road might occur.

'''Guidance. '''W11-5 signs should be used only at locations where the road user’s sight distance is restricted, and the condition, activity, or entering traffic would be unexpected.

'''Support. '''The Farm Equipment (W11-5) sign is used to alert road users to locations where slow-moving farm vehicles are routinely entering or crossing the state highway (immediately across or a short transition down the road to a different entrance) if the highway splits the farm. A typical example would be a dairy farm where these crossings take place daily. In these cases, fluorescent yellow warning signs are installed in a permanent installation.

Farm Equipment signs are not installed to warn of farm equipment traveling along a state highway. This warning is the responsibility of the farmer and can be addressed by displaying the appropriate warning lights and signs on the equipment as well as having the appropriate lead and/or trailing vehicles escorting the equipment.

'''Option. '''For cases involving a temporary farm equipment access entrance, such as during planting or harvest season, a TR12 Truck Crossing agreement (see [[153.21 Traffic #153.21|EPG 153.21]]) may be used to install a temporary traffic control sign with a fluorescent orange background.

'''Guidance. '''Farm Equipment signs should be installed at locations where there is consistent and routine farm equipment entering and leaving a state route where the road user’s sight distance is restricted, and the crossing would be unexpected based on engineering judgement.

The farm vehicle entrance for which the warning sign is being installed should be recognizable by the presence of a on-premise business marquee sign, presence of farm equipment, farm structures or other indicators to allow drivers to associate the warning sign to the site where farm vehicles could be crossing/entering the highway.

'''Standard. '''If used, the Farm Equipment warning sign shall be placed in accordance with [[#tab903.3.4|Table 903.3.4]].

The Farm Equipment warning sign shall only be installed for the direction of travel where the road user’s sight distance is restricted.

=={{SpanID|903.3.52}}903.3.52 Emergency Vehicle (W11-8) Sign==
<center>
{|
| [[File:W11-8.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W11-8'''</center>]]
| [[File:W11-12P.jpg|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W11-12P'''</center>]]
|}
</center>

'''Option. '''Emergency Vehicle (W11-8) signs may be used to alert road users to locations where unexpected entries into the roadway by emergency vehicles might occur.

'''Guidance.''' Emergency Vehicle signs should be used only at locations where the road user’s sight distance is restricted, and the condition, activity, or entering traffic would be unexpected.

'''Support.''' The Emergency Vehicle sign is used to alert road users to locations where emergency vehicles are routinely entering and leaving a state highway at dedicated emergency vehicle facility entrances.

'''Guidance. '''Emergency Vehicle signs should be installed at a state route where the road user’s sight distance is restricted, and the crossing would be unexpected based on engineering judgement.

The emergency vehicle entrance for which the warning sign is being installed should be recognizable by the presence of a on premise marquee sign, building with the emergency agency name displayed or some other form of marking to allow drivers to associate the warning sign to the site/entrance where emergency vehicles could be entering or leaving the state highway.

'''Standard. '''If used, the Emergency Vehicle warning sign shall be placed in accordance with [[#tab903.3.4|Table 903.3.4]].

The Emergency Vehicle warning sign shall only be installed for the direction of travel where the road user’s sight distance is restricted.

When measuring sight distance for emergency vehicle entrances, the sight distance shall be determined using a 3.5 ft. eye height and an 8 ft. object height in the same method use to evaluate school bus stop sight distances (see [[908.2 Signs (MUTCD Chapter 7B) #908.2.4|EPG 908.2.4]]).

The Emergency Vehicle sign with the EMERGENCY SIGNAL AHEAD (W11-12P) supplemental plaque shall be placed in advance of all emergency-vehicle traffic control signals (see [[902.13 Traffic Control Signals for Emergency-Vehicle Access (MUTCD Chapter 4M)|EPG 902.13]]).

=={{SpanID|903.3.53}}903.3.53 Non-Vehicular Warning Signs (W11-2, W11-3, W11-4, and W11-7) (MUTCD Section 2C.55)==
<center>
{|
| [[File:W11-2.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W11-2'''</center>]]
| [[File:W11-4.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W11-4''' (Cattle)</center>]]
| [[File:W11-7.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W11-7'''</center>]]
|}
</center>

'''Option. '''Non-Vehicular Warning (W11-2, W11-4, and W11-7) signs may be used to alert road users in advance of locations where unexpected entries into the roadway might occur.

'''Support. '''These conflicts might be relatively confined or might occur randomly over a segment of roadway.

'''Guidance. '''If used in advance of a pedestrian or equestrian crossing, the W11-2 and W11-7, signs should be supplemented with plaques (see [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.59|EPG 903.3.59]]) with the legend AHEAD or XX FEET to inform road users that they are approaching a point where crossing activity might occur.

'''Standard. '''If a post-mounted W11-2 or W11-7 sign is placed at the location of the crossing point where pedestrians or equestrians might be crossing the roadway, a diagonal downward-pointing arrow (W16-7P) plaque (see [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.62|EPG 903.3.62]]) shall be mounted below the sign. If the W11-2 or W11-7 sign is mounted overhead, the W16-7P plaque shall not be used.

A Non-Vehicular Warning sign assembly shall not be installed on an approach controlled by a STOP or a YIELD sign, except as provided in the first two Option paragraphs below.

Equestrian (W11-7) warning signs shall only be installed at Public Equestrian Trail Crossings. Existing Equestrian (W11-7) Crossing signs that do not meet the Public Equestrian Trail Crossing criteria shall be left in place until they reach the end of their service life.

The use of the Deer (W11-3) warning signs has been discontinued by MoDOT due to studies proving these signs provide little or no safety benefit. Existing W11-3 signs shall be removed at the end of their service life.

The Cattle (W11-4) sign shall be issued to an individual only when the Application for Sign at Cattle Crossings contract (TR09) is fully executed. See [[153.21 Traffic #153.21|EPG 153.21]] for the TR09 Agreement.

'''Option. '''The Non-Vehicular Warning sign assembly may be installed on an approach to a circular intersection controlled by a YIELD sign where the crosswalk is at least 20 feet in advance of the yield point at the entrance to a circulatory roadway.

At a signalized or stop-controlled intersection the Non-Vehicular Warning sign assembly may be installed on an approach to a channelized right-turn lane controlled by a YIELD sign where the crosswalk is at least 20 feet in advance of the yield point.

A Pedestrian Crossing (W11-2) sign may be placed overhead or may be post-mounted with a diagonal downward-pointing arrow (W16-7P) plaque at the crosswalk location where Yield Here To Pedestrians signs (see [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2.18|EPG 903.2.18]]) have been installed in advance of the crosswalk.

'''Standard. '''If a W11-2 sign has been post-mounted at the crosswalk location where a Yield Here To Pedestrians sign is used on the approach, the Yield Here To Pedestrians sign shall not be placed on the same post as the W11-2 sign.

'''Option. '''An advance Pedestrian Crossing (W11-2) sign with an AHEAD or a distance supplemental plaque may be used in conjunction with a Yield Here To Pedestrians sign on the approach to the same crosswalk.

The crossing location identified by a W11-2 or W11-7 sign may be defined with crosswalk markings (see [[620.3 Crosswalk Markings (MUTCD Chapter 3C) #620.3|EPG 620.3]]).

'''Standard. '''The W11-2 sign and related supplemental plaques shall only have a fluorescent yellow-green background with a black legend and border if the signs are installed within a school area as described in the fifth Support paragraph of [[#903.3.2|EPG 903.3.2]].

'''Guidance. '''When a fluorescent yellow-green background is used, a systematic approach featuring one background color within a zone or area should be used. The mixing of standard yellow and fluorescent yellow-green backgrounds within a selected site area should be avoided.

'''Option. '''A Warning Beacon (see [[902.18 Flashing Beacons (MUTCD Chapter 4S) #902.18.3|EPG 902.18.3]]) may be used with any Non-Vehicular Warning sign to indicate specific periods when the condition or activity is present or is likely to be present, or to provide enhanced sign conspicuity.

=={{SpanID|903.3.54}}903.3.54 FERRY CROSSING AHEAD Sign (W3-18)==
[[image:W3-10.gif|center|thumb|<center>'''W3-18'''</center>|100px]]

'''Option. '''The FERRY CROSSING AHEAD (W3-18) sign may be installed for a ferry crossing. A STOP (R1-1) sign at the ferry crossing may be used as a supplement.

=={{SpanID|903.3.55}}903.3.55 Passing Lane Warning Signs (W6-5, W6-5a, W6-6aP, W6-16, and W6-17)==
<center>
{|
|-
|[[image:W4-12a.gif|left|100px|thumb|<center>'''W6-6aP'''</center>]]||[[image:W4-10.gif|left|thumb|<center>'''W6-16'''</center>|100px]]||[[image:W4-11.gif|left|100px|thumb|<center>'''W6-17'''</center>]]
|}
</center>

'''Support. '''Alternating passing lanes may be provided on rural, two-lane highways to provide motorists with an opportunity to pass slower vehicles without crossing the centerline. Where passing lanes are provided, operations and safety may be improved by giving motorists advance information about the location of passing lanes. Providing motorists with advance notice of passing lanes may reduce the number of passing maneuvers.

'''Standard. '''The PASSING LANE ENDS (W6-16), WATCH FOR LEFT-TURNING TRAFFIC IN PASSING LANE (W6-17), and PASSING LANE PLAQUE (W6-6aP) signs shall be black legend and fluorescent yellow background and shall only be used in alternating passing lane sections.

The PASSING LANE ENDS sign shall be used prior to the end of the passing lane to warn motorists the passing lane in that direction of travel is ending and merging back to a single lane. The sign shall be placed in advance of the LANE ENDS MERGE RIGHT (W9-2) sign at a distance determined by [[#tab903.3.4|Table 903.3.4]].

'''Option. '''The WATCH FOR LEFT TURNING TRAFFIC IN PASSING LANE sign may be used at locations in a passing lane segment where left turns are common, such as at a county road. This sign may be installed at the judgement of the engineer.

The Two-Way Traffic on a Three-Lane Roadway (W6-5 and W6-5a) signs may be installed along three-lane roadways with two lanes in one direction and one in the opposing direction.

=={{SpanID|903.3.56}}903.3.56 TRAVEL SAFE ZONE – FINES DOUBLED Sign (W27-1)==
[[File:W27-1.jpg|center|130px|thumb|<center>'''W27-1'''</center>]]

'''Support. '''The TRAVEL SAFE ZONE - FINES DOUBLED (W27-1) sign is not to be used on a system-wide basis. It is intended for special use at locations where severe crashes are occurring. There is a requirement for regional support to focus a safety campaign involving local law enforcement and public information efforts to reduce the number and severity of crashes within the travel safe zone (see [[907.3 Travel Safe Zones #907.3 | EPG 907.3]]).

'''Standard. '''A TRAVEL SAFE ZONE – FINES DOUBLED sign shall be used to mark the beginning of a designated travel safe zone. This sign is installed in conjunction with the FINES DOUBLED ENDS (R2-20) sign (see [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2.70|EPG 903.2.70]]).

=={{SpanID|903.3.57}}903.3.57 Use of Supplemental Warning Plaques (MUTCD Section 2C.57)==

'''Option. '''A supplemental warning plaque may be displayed with a warning or regulatory sign when engineering judgment indicates that road users require additional warning information beyond that contained in the main message of the warning or regulatory sign.

'''Standard. '''Supplemental warning plaques shall be used only in combination with and installed on the same post(s) as warning or regulatory signs. They shall not be mounted alone or displayed alone.

Unless otherwise provided in the EPG for a particular plaque, supplemental warning plaques shall be mounted below the sign they supplement.

=={{SpanID|903.3.58}}903.3.58 Design of Supplemental Warning Plaques (MUTCD Section 2C.58)==

'''Standard. '''A supplemental warning plaque used with a warning sign shall have the same legend, border, and background color as the warning sign with which it is displayed. A supplemental warning plaque used with a regulatory sign shall have a black legend and border on a yellow background.

Supplemental warning plaques shall be square or rectangular.

=={{SpanID|903.3.59}}903.3.59 Advisory Speed Plaque (W13-1P) and Confirmation Advisory Speed Plaque (W13-1aP) (MUTCD Section 2C.59)==
<center>
{|
| [[File:W13-1P.png|thumb|center|84px|alt=|<center>'''W13-1P'''</center>]]
| [[File:W13-1aP.png|thumb|center|220px|alt=|<center>'''W13-1aP'''</center>]]
|}
</center>

'''Option. '''The Advisory Speed (W13-1P) plaque may be used to supplement an advance warning sign to indicate the advisory speed for a condition.

The Confirmation Advisory Speed (W13-1aP) plaque may be used to supplement a One-Direction Large Arrow (W1-6) sign on the outside of a turn or curve in line with and at approximately a right angle to approaching traffic.

'''Standard. '''The use of the Advisory Speed and Confirmation Advisory Speed plaques for horizontal curves shall be in accordance with [[#903.3.6|EPG 903.3.6]]. The Advisory Speed plaque shall also be used where an engineering study indicates a need to advise road users of the advisory speed for other roadway conditions.

The speed displayed on the Advisory Speed and Confirmation Advisory Speed plaques shall be a multiple of 5 mph. The maximum advisory speed posted shall never be more than the posted speed limit.

Except in emergencies or when the condition is temporary, an Advisory Speed or Confirmation Advisory Speed plaque shall not be installed until the advisory speed has been determined by an engineering study.

The Advisory Speed plaque shall only be used to supplement an advance warning sign. The Advisory Speed plaque or the Confirmation Advisory Speed plaque shall not be installed as a separate sign installation.

'''Guidance. '''The Advisory Speed plaque, if used with a sign that is also supplemented with another plaque, such as an Advance Street Name plaque (see [[#903.3.64|EPG 903.3.64]]), should be mounted immediately below the primary warning sign with any other plaque mounted below the Advisory Speed plaque.

'''Standard. '''The Confirmation Advisory Speed plaque shall only be used to supplement a One-Direction Large Arrow (W1-6) sign (see [[#903.3.10|EPG 903.3.10]]) or an Exit Gore (E5-1 series) sign (see [[ 903.5 Guide Signs - Freeways and Expressways (MUTCD Chapter 2E) #903.5.26| EPG 903.5.26]]) and shall not be installed as a separate sign installation.

The advisory speed shall be determined by an engineering study that follows established engineering practices.

'''Guidance. '''The advisory speed should be determined based on free-flowing traffic conditions.

Because changes in conditions, such as roadway geometrics, surface characteristics, or sight distance, might affect the advisory speed, each location should be evaluated periodically or when conditions change.

'''Support. '''Among the established engineering practices that are appropriate for the determination of the recommended advisory speed for a horizontal curve are the following:
:A. Accelerometer method
:B. 10 degrees of ball bank for all speeds

<center>
{| class="wikitable" style="padding: 1em;"
|-
| '''Engineering Study for Ball-Banking'''

The procedure to determine the safe speed on a curve or turn is a ball-bank study. To correctly use the ball-bank indicator, the ball-bank indicator should be mounted on the dashboard of a passenger car and adjusted to read "0" when the car is stationary on a level grade with the ball-bank indicator being in a vertical plane. When adjusting the indicator, all personnel who are to be in the car while testing should be in their seats and all four tires should have the same pressure. It is usually best for at least two persons to be in the car while taking the ball-bank reading: one for driving, the other for observation and recording.

The 10-degree reading that can be maintained the complete length of a curve is the appropriate safe speed for that curve. Care must be taken to maintain the car in its proper lane and to maintain a smooth, consistent speed throughout the curve. It will occasionally be found that a curve will have a higher safe speed in one direction than the other. In such cases, the lower safe speed should be used for both directions. Only increments of 5 mph are used on the Advisory Speed Plaque, therefore the curve shall be posted to the nearest 5 mph speed from the survey.
|-
|}
</center>

=={{SpanID|903.3.60}}903.3.60 Distance Plaques (W16-2P, W16-3P, W16-4P, and W7-3aP) (MUTCD Section 2C.61)==
<center>
{|
| [[File:W16-2P.png|thumb|center|130px|alt=|<center>'''W16-2P'''</center>]]
| [[File:W16-3P.png|thumb|center|130px|alt=|<center>'''W16-3P'''</center>]]
| [[File:W16-4P.png|thumb|center|130px|alt=|<center>'''W16-4P'''</center>]]
| [[File:W7-3aP.png|thumb|center|130px|alt=|<center>'''W7-3aP'''</center>]]
|}
</center>

'''Option. '''The Distance Ahead (W16-2P and W16-3P) plaques may be used to inform the road user of the distance to the condition indicated by the warning sign.

The Next Distance (W7-3aP and W16-4P) plaques may be used to inform road users of the length of roadway over which the condition indicated by the warning sign exists.

'''Standard. '''Distances shall be shown in ¼ mile or 100 ft. increments. If the distance is less than a ½ mile then feet shall be used.

=={{SpanID|903.3.61}}903.3.61 Supplemental Arrow Plaques (W16-5P and W16-6P) (MUTCD Section 2C.62)==
<center>
{|
| [[File:W16-5P.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W16-5P'''</center>]]
| [[File:W16-6P.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W16-6P'''</center>]]
|}
</center>

'''Guidance. '''If the condition indicated by a warning sign is located on an intersecting road and the distance between the intersection and condition is not sufficient to provide adequate advance placement of the warning sign, a Supplemental Arrow (W16-5P or W16-6P) plaque should be used below the warning sign.

'''Standard. '''Supplemental Arrow plaques shall have the same legend design as the Advance Turn Arrow and Directional Arrow auxiliary signs (see [[903.4 Guide Signs—Conventional Roads (MUTCD Chapter 2D) #903.4.22|EPG 903.4.22]] and [[903.4 Guide Signs—Conventional Roads (MUTCD Chapter 2D) #903.4.24|903.4.24]]) except that they shall have a black legend and border on a fluorescent yellow or fluorescent yellow-green background, as appropriate.

=={{SpanID|903.3.62}}903.3.62 Diagonal Downward-Pointing Arrow Plaques (W16-7P and W16-7aP) (MUTCD Section 2C.63)==
<center>
{|
| [[File:W16-7P.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W16-7P'''</center>]]
| [[File:W16-7aP.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W16a-7P'''</center>]]
|}
</center>

'''Support. '''Diagonal downward-pointing arrow (W16-7P and W16-7aP) plaques are used with certain Vehicular Traffic Warning signs and certain Non-Vehicular Warning signs (see [[#903.3.53|EPG 903.3.53]]), and School Crossing signs (see [[908.2 Signs (MUTCD Chapter 7B) #908.2.3|EPG 908.2.3]]) to indicate the specific location of a crossing point.

The W16-7P plaque contains a single arrow pointing diagonally down to the right or left, toward the roadway, depending on which side of the roadway it is located.

'''Option. '''A W16-7aP plaque may be used with a single crossing sign located on a narrow median separating two roadways with traffic in the same direction where the crossing traverses both roadways.

=={{SpanID|903.3.63}}903.3.63 Hill-Related Plaques (W7-3 Series) (MUTCD Section 2C.64)==
<center>
{|
| [[File:W7-3P.png|thumb|center|90px|alt=|<center>'''W7-3P'''</center>]]
| [[File:W7-3aP.png|thumb|center|90px|alt=|<center>'''W7-3aP'''</center>]]
|}
</center>

'''Guidance. '''Hill-Related (W7-3 series) plaques (see [[#903.3.14|EPG 903.3.14]]) or other appropriate legends and larger signs should be used for emphasis or where special hill characteristics exist.

On longer grades, the use of a distance (W7-3aP) plaque (see [[#903.3.14|EPG 903.3.14]]) at periodic intervals of approximately 1-mile spacing should be considered.

=={{SpanID|903.3.64}}903.3.64 Advance Street Name Plaques (W16-8P and W16-8aP) (MUTCD Section 2C.65)==
<center>
{|
| [[File:W16-8P.png|thumb|center|150px|alt=|<center>'''W16-8P'''</center>]]
| [[File:W16-8aP.png|thumb|center|260px|alt=|<center>'''W16-8aP'''</center>]]
|}
</center>

'''Support. '''Advance street name signing can provide valuable information to the motorist. Intersections that are signed with Intersection Warning (W2 series) or Advance Traffic Control (W3 series) signs typically have inherent sight distance concerns. The addition of the street name to the warning sign can aid a motorist in making decisions in a timely manner.

'''Option. '''An Advance Street Name (W16-8P or W16-8aP) plaque may be used with any Intersection (W1-10 series, W2 series, W10-2, W10-3, or W10-4) or Advance Traffic Control (W3 series) sign to identify the name of the intersecting street.

If the side road being signed is maintained by a public agency, the addition of the street name sign may be considered on request.

'''Standard. '''The lettering on Advance Street Name plaques shall be composed of a combination of lower-case letters with initial upper-case letters.

If two street names are used on the Advance Street Name plaque, a directional arrow pointing in the direction of the street shall be placed next to each street name. Arrows pointing to the left shall be placed to the left of the street name, and arrows pointing to the right shall be placed to the right of the street name.

The street name used on an Advance Street Name supplemental sign shall be the approved name used by either the local agency or the Emergency 911 Coordinator.

When used, the Advance Street Name supplemental plaque shall only be mounted below the W2 or W3 series warning sign or the Advisory Speed plaque on the same post.

The Advance Street Name supplemental plaque for a 36 in. x 36 in. warning sign shall be a maximum of 36 in. wide and for a 48 in. x 48 in. warning sign shall be a maximum of 48 in. wide.

'''Guidance. '''If two street names are used on the Advance Street Name plaque, the street names and associated arrows should be displayed in the following order:
:A. For a single intersection, the name of the street to the left should be displayed above the name of the street to the right; or
:B. For two sequential intersections, such as where the plaque is used with an Offset Side Roads (W2-7) or a Double Side Road (W2-8) sign, the name of the first street encountered should be displayed above the name of the second street encountered, and the arrow associated with the second street encountered should be an advance arrow, such as the arrow shown on the W16-6P arrow plaque (see [[#903.3.61|EPG 903.3.61]]).

=={{SpanID|903.3.65}}903.3.65 Traffic Does Not Stop Plaques (W4-4P Series) (MUTCD Section 2C.66)==
<center>
{|
| [[File:W4-4P.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W4-4P'''</center>]]
| [[File:W4-4aP.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W4-4aP'''</center>]]
| [[File:W4-4bP.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W4-4bP'''</center>]]
|}
</center>

'''Option. '''The CROSS TRAFFIC DOES NOT STOP (W4-4P) plaque may be used in combination with a STOP sign when engineering judgment indicates that conditions are present that are causing or could cause road users to misinterpret the intersection as an all-way stop.

The TRAFFIC FROM LEFT (RIGHT) DOES NOT STOP (W4-4aP) or ONCOMING TRAFFIC DOES NOT STOP (W4-4bP) plaque may be used when such messages more accurately describe the traffic controls established at the intersection.

'''Guidance. '''The W4-4aP and W4-4bP plaques should be used at intersections where STOP signs control all but one approach to the intersection, unless the only non-stopped approach is from a one-way street.

'''Standard. '''If a W4-4P series plaque is used, it shall be mounted below the STOP sign.

=={{SpanID|903.3.66}}903.3.66 IN ROAD and IN STREET Plaques (W16-1P) (MUTCD Section 2C.67)==
[[File:W16-1P.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W16-1P'''</center>]]

'''Option. '''In situations where there is a need to warn drivers to watch for other slower forms of transportation traveling along the highway, such as bicycles or horse-drawn vehicles, an IN ROAD (W16-1P) plaque may be used.

'''Standard. '''The background color of the W16-1P plaque shall match the background color of the warning sign with which it is displayed. If a W16-1P plaque is used, it shall be mounted below a Bicycle (W11-1) or Horse-Drawn Vehicle (W11-14) warning signs and shall not be mounted alone.

'''Support. '''[[914.2 Regulatory Signs (MUTCD Chapter 9B) #914.2.6 | EPG 914.2.6]] contains information about the use of a Bicycles Allowed Use of Full Lane (R9-20) sign to inform drivers of the presence of bicycles in the roadway or where bicyclists are expected or preferred to use the full lane.

=={{SpanID|903.3.67}}903.3.67 NOTICE Plaque (W16-18p)==
[[File:W16-18P.jpg|center|120px|thumb|<center>'''W16-18P'''</center>]]

'''Support. '''It is sometimes necessary to enhance the conspicuity of a regulatory sign to attract drivers’ attention to the message the sign is conveying. This may be necessary to help notify drivers to a speed limit reduction, turning movement prohibition, or bridge weight restriction. The NOTICE (W16-18P) plaque is an alternate to the use of red flags (see [[903.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 2A) #903.1.11| EPG 903.1.11]]).

'''Standard. '''The NOTICE (W16-18P) plaque shall not be used alone.

When used, the NOTICE plaque shall be installed directly above the regulatory sign it is enhancing.

'''Guidance. '''The use of the NOTICE (W16-18P) plaque should be based on engineering judgment and not systematically applied to a specific sign unless otherwise specified in the EPG.

=={{SpanID|903.3.68}}903.3.68 Exception Plaques (W16-23P and W16-24P)==
<center>
{|
| [[File:W16-23P.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W16-23P'''</center>]]
| [[File:W16-24P.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W16-24P'''</center>]]
|}
</center>

'''Support.''' The EXCEPT TO TURN (W16-23P) supplemental warning plaque is used with the NO TRUCKS LEFT LANE (R5-32) regulatory sign (see [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2.36|EPG 903.2.36]]) in locations where trucks are not allowed to drive in the left lane, but are allowed to enter the left lane in order to make a turn. The EXCEPT TO EXIT (W16-24P) supplemental warning plaque is used with the NO TRUCKS LEFT LANE (R5-32) regulatory sign in locations where trucks are not allowed to drive in the left lane, but trucks are allowed to enter the left lane in order to exit the highway.

'''Standard.''' When used, the EXCEPT TO TURN (W16-23P) and EXCEPT TO EXIT (W16-24P) supplemental warning plaques shall only be installed in conjunction with the FINES DOUBLED ENDS (R2-20) sign (see [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2.70|EPG 903.2.70]]).

=={{SpanID|903.3.69}}903.3.69 Warning Signs Provided for Other Agencies==

'''Support. '''MoDOT will provide, if requested by the appropriate local traffic authority, warning signs for conditions beyond the end of state-maintained right of way.

If the location for placement of an advance warning sign for a curve, turn, paved road, stop condition or other condition deemed appropriate falls on state-maintained right of way, MoDOT will place and maintain the traffic control device on state-maintained right-of-way at the request of the local traffic authority.

'''Standard. '''The placement of all traffic control devices on the state highway system shall be governed by the Engineering Policy Guide. MoDOT is responsible for the placement and maintenance of all signs on state-maintained right-of-way.

=={{SpanID|903.3.70}}903.3.70 Object Marker Design and Placement Height (MUTCD Section 2C.70)==

'''Support. '''Types 1, 2, and 3 object markers are used to mark obstructions within or adjacent to the roadway. Type 4 object markers are used to mark the end of a roadway.

'''Standard. '''When used, object markers (see [[#fig903.3.70|Figure 903.3.70]]) shall not have a border and shall consist of an arrangement of one or more of the following types:

Type 1—a diamond-shaped sign, at least 18 inches on a side, consisting of an all-yellow retroreflective sign (OM1-3).

Type 2—an all-yellow horizontal or vertical retroreflective sign (OM2-2V or OM2-2H), measuring 6 x 12 inches.

Type 3—a striped marker, 12 x 36 inches, consisting of a vertical rectangle with alternating black and retroreflective yellow stripes sloping downward at an angle of 45 degrees toward the side of the obstruction on which traffic is to pass. The minimum width of the yellow and black stripes shall be 3 inches.

Type 4—a diamond-shaped sign, at least 18 inches on a side, consisting of an all-red retroreflective sign (OM4-3).

'''Support. '''Type 3 object markers with stripes that begin at the upper right side and slope downward to the lower left side are designated as right object markers (OM3-R). Object markers with stripes that begin at the upper left side and slope downward to the lower right side are designated as left object markers (OM3-L). Object markers with chevron stripes that slope downward to both the lower left and lower right sides are designated as center object markers (OM3-C).

'''Guidance. '''When used for marking obstructions within the roadway or obstructions that are 8 feet or less from the shoulder or curb, the minimum mounting height, measured from the bottom of the object marker to the elevation of the near edge of the traveled way, should be 4 feet.

When used to mark obstructions more than 8 feet from the shoulder or curb, the clearance from the ground to the bottom of the object marker should be at least 4 feet.

Object markers should not present a vertical or horizontal clearance obstacle for pedestrians.

'''Option. '''When object markers or markings are applied to an obstruction that by its nature requires a lower or higher mounting, the vertical mounting height may vary according to need.

{{SpanID|fig903.3.70}}
[[File:Figure 903.3.70 Object Markers.png|thumb|center|400px|alt="The figure shows four categories of object markers used to identify obstructions.
Type 1 Object Markers (obstructions within the roadway):
A single yellow diamond-shaped marker labeled OM1-3.
Type 2 Object Markers (obstructions adjacent to the roadway):
Two yellow rectangular markers: a vertical rectangle labeled OM2-2V and a horizontal rectangle labeled OM2-2H.
Type 3 Object Markers (obstructions adjacent to or within the roadway):
Three yellow-and-black striped rectangular markers are shown:
The OM3-L marker has diagonal stripes sloping downward from left to right.
The OM3-C marker has alternating diagonal stripes forming downward-pointing chevrons.
The OM3-R marker has diagonal stripes sloping downward from right to left.
Type 4 Object Marker (end of roadway):
A red diamond-shaped marker labeled OM4-3."
|'''Figure 903.3.70''' Object Markers]]

=={{SpanID|903.3.71}}903.3.71 Object Markers for Obstructions Within the Roadway (MUTCD Section 2C.71)==

'''Standard. '''Obstructions within the roadway shall be marked with a Type 1 or Type 3 object marker. In addition to markers on the face of the obstruction, warning of approach to the obstruction shall be given by appropriate pavement markings (see [[620.2 Pavement and Curb Markings (MUTCD Chapter 3B) #620.2.15|EPG 620.2.15]]).

'''Option. '''To provide additional emphasis, a Type 1 or Type 3 object marker may be installed at or near the approach end of a median island.

To provide additional emphasis, large surfaces such as bridge piers may be painted with diagonal stripes, 12 inches or greater in width, similar in design to the Type 3 object marker.

'''Standard. '''The alternating black and retroreflective yellow stripes (OM3-L, OM3-R) shall be sloped down at an angle of 45 degrees toward the side on which traffic is to pass the obstruction. If traffic can pass to either side of the obstruction, the alternating black and retroreflective yellow stripes (OM3-C) shall form chevrons that point upwards.

'''Option. '''Appropriate signs (see [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2.34|EPG 903.2.34]] and [[#903.3.20|903.3.20]]) directing traffic to one or both sides of the obstruction may be used instead of the object marker.

=={{SpanID|903.3.72}}903.3.72 Object Markers for Obstructions Adjacent to the Roadway (MUTCD Section 2C.72)==

'''Support. '''Obstructions not actually within the roadway are sometimes so close to the edge of the road that they need a marker. These include underpass piers, bridge abutments, handrails, ends of traffic barriers, utility poles, and culvert headwalls. In other cases there might not be a physical object involved, but other roadside conditions exist, such as narrow shoulders, drop-offs, gores, small islands, and abrupt changes in the roadway alignment, that might make it undesirable for a road user to leave the roadway, and therefore would create a need for a marker.

'''Standard. '''Type 3 object markers shall be used to mark all obstructions within 3 feet of the edge of the travel lane or edge of the shoulder when shoulders are present (paved or aggregate). Type 3 object markers shall not be used to mark obstructions located beyond 8 feet of the edge of the travel lane or edge of the shoulder. See [[#fig903.3.72.1|Figures 903.3.72.1]] and [[#fig903.3.72.2|903.3.72.2]] for standard applications of Type 3 object markers.

'''Option. '''Type 3 object markers may be used to mark obstructions located 3 feet to 8 feet from the edge of the travel lane or edge of the shoulder based on engineering judgment. See [[#fig903.3.72.1|Figures 903.3.72.1]] and [[#fig903.3.72.2|903.3.72.2]] for standard applications of Type 3 object markers.

'''Guidance. '''If a Type 2 or Type 3 object marker is used to mark an obstruction adjacent to the roadway, the edge of the object marker that is closest to the road user should be installed in line with the closest edge of the obstruction.

When a marker is applied to the approach ends of guardrail or crash cushion terminals it should have the appearance of a Type 3 object marker and should be directly affixed, without a substrate, to the approach end of the guardrail or crash cushion and generally conform to the size and shape of the approach end of the guardrail or crash cushion.

'''Standard. '''Type 1 and Type 4 object markers shall not be used to mark obstructions adjacent to the roadway.

'''Guidance. '''Standard warning signs in this Chapter should also be used where applicable.

{{SpanID|fig903.3.72.1}}
[[File:Figure 903.3.72.1 Standard Application of Type 3 Object Markers Objects 2' or Less From Edge of Travel Lane_Shoulder.png|thumb|center|800px|alt="The figure shows several examples of Type 3 object marker placement for obstructions along a two-lane, two-way highway and a divided highway. Type 3 object markers are rectangular yellow and black striped panels labeled with the numbers 1, 2, and 3. In the two-lane, two-way highway examples, the first scenario shows a bridge where markers 1, 2, and 3 are placed on each side of the roadway on both approaches. Marker 1 is positioned closest to the obstruction, marker 2 is placed farther from the edge of pavement, and marker 3 is placed the farthest from the obstruction. This identical arrangement appears on all four corners of the bridge. The second scenario shows a box culvert with a length of 20 feet or more. The same arrangement of markers 1, 2, and 3 is placed on both sides of the roadway, and a dimension labeled L indicates the length of the culvert. The third scenario shows a pipe or box culvert with a length of less than 20 feet, where a single marker 1 is placed just before the culvert on the upper side of the roadway, and another marker 1 is placed just before the culvert on the lower side of the roadway. The fourth scenario shows a spillway where a single marker 1 is placed just before the spillway on the right side of the roadway.
In the divided highway examples, the first scenario shows a bridge where markers 1, 2, and 3 are placed only on the approach side of the structure for each direction of travel. No markers are shown beyond the bridge. The second scenario shows a box culvert with a length of 20 feet or more. On the approach to the culvert, object markers 1, 2, and 3 are placed on both sides of the roadway for the direction of travel. After the culvert, one additional marker 1 is placed on the right side of the roadway. A dimension labeled L indicates the length of the culvert. The third scenario shows a pipe or box culvert with a length of less than 20 feet, where a single marker 1 is placed just before the culvert.
A legend shows the direction of travel with an arrow. Notes beneath the figure explain the placement requirements. Marker 1 is placed as close to the obstruction as possible and aligned with the inside edge. Marker 2 is placed 1.5 feet from the edge of pavement and 20 feet from the end of the obstruction. Marker 3 is placed 3 feet from the edge of pavement and 40 feet from the end of the obstruction. Additional notes refer to Figure 903.3.72.2 for mounting height details and describe alternative mounting heights for areas affected by agricultural equipment."
|'''Figure 903.3.72.1''' Standard Application of Type 3 Object Markers Objects 2' or Less From Edge of Travel Lane/Shoulder]]

{{SpanID|fig903.3.72.2}}
[[File:Figure 903.3.72.2 Standard Application of Type 3 Object Markers Objects Greater Than 2' From Edge of Travel Lane_Shoulder.png|thumb|center|800px|alt="The figure shows several examples of Type 3 object marker placement for obstructions along a two-lane, two-way highway and a divided highway, as well as a detail of mounting height and lateral offset requirements. The Type 3 object markers shown are rectangular panels with alternating black and yellow diagonal stripes.
On the two-lane, two-way highway side, the first scenario shows a bridge. Two Type 3 object markers are placed on each side of the roadway at the near approach to the bridge. The same pair of markers appears on the far side of the bridge. In each location, the left and right markers are positioned close to the edges of the roadway.
The second scenario shows a box culvert with a length of 20 feet or more. A pair of Type 3 object markers is placed on both sides of the roadway on the approach to the culvert, with a labeled dimension L indicating the length of the structure. Another pair of markers is placed on both sides immediately after the culvert.
The third scenario shows a pipe or box culvert with a length of less than 20 feet. A single Type 3 object marker is placed just before the culvert on the upper side of the roadway, and another single marker is placed just before the culvert on the lower side.
The fourth scenario shows a spillway. A single Type 3 object marker is placed just before the spillway on the right side of the roadway.
On the divided highway side, the first scenario shows a bridge. One Type 3 object marker is placed on the left shoulder and one on the right shoulder on the approach side of the structure. No markers are placed beyond the bridge.
The second scenario shows a box culvert with a length of 20 feet or more. A single Type 3 object marker is placed on each side of the roadway on the approach to the culvert. Another marker is placed just past the culvert on the right shoulder. A dimension labeled L indicates the length of the culvert.
The third scenario shows pipe or box culverts with a length of less than 20 feet on both sides of the roadway. A single Type 3 object marker is placed just before each culvert, one on the left shoulder and one on the right shoulder.
A legend identifies the direction of travel with an arrow. At the lower right of the figure, a diagram labeled “Mounting Height and Offset, Type 3 Object Marker Installation” shows the required installation details. The marker is mounted so that the edge of the sign aligns with the edge of the object being marked. The bottom of the sign is elevated 4 feet above the ground. The object and ground slope are shown, along with the location of the edge of the travel lane or shoulder."
|'''Figure 903.3.72.2''' Standard Application of Type 3 Object Markers Objects Greater Than 2' From Edge of Travel Lane/Shoulder]]

=={{SpanID|903.3.73}}903.3.73 Object Markers for Ends of Roadways (MUTCD Section 2C.73)==

'''Support. '''The Type 4 object marker is used to warn and alert road users of the end of a roadway in other than construction or maintenance areas.

'''Standard. '''If an object marker is used to mark the end of a roadway, a Type 4 object marker shall be used. See ([https://www.modot.org/media/51221 Section 903 of the Missouri Standard Plans for Highway Construction]) for installation details.

'''Option. '''The Type 4 object marker may be used in instances where there are no alternate vehicular paths.

'''Standard. '''The minimum mounting height, measured vertically from the bottom of a Type 4 object marker to the elevation of the near edge of the traveled way, shall be 4 feet.

'''Guidance. '''Appropriate advance warning signs in EPG 903.3 should be used.

=={{SpanID|903.3.74}}903.3.74 Shoulder Barricade Assembly==

[[image:GB-1.gif|thumb|center|125px|<center>'''GB-1'''</center>]]

'''Option.''' Shoulder barricades may be used for added emphasis of standard warning sign installations at the direction of the engineer.

'''Standard.''' The shoulder barricade assembly shall consist of three horizontal boards (GB-1L or GB-1R) marked with reflective diagonal stripes and a 48-inch standard warning sign and a 48 in. standard warning sign with the appropriate 30-inch advisory plaque. See [[#fig903.3.74|Figure 903.3.74]] for typical construction.

GB-1R shoulder barricades shall be installed on the right side of the roadway and have diagonal stripes sloping downward from the right to the left.

GB-1L shoulder barricades shall be installed on the left side of the roadway and have diagonal stripes sloping downward from the left to the right.

'''Option.''' Supplemental signs may be installed on the shoulder barricade at the direction of the engineer.

'''Guidance.''' Shoulder Barricades should be installed on the appropriate size on wide flanged structural steel posts.

{{SpanID|fig903.3.74}}
[[File:Figure 903.3.74 Shoulder Barricade Assembly.png|thumb|center|alt="The figure shows a three-rail barricade assembly with a 48-inch diamond-shaped warning sign mounted to the front. The barricade consists of three horizontal panels with alternating black and yellow diagonal stripes. Each barricade rail is 12 inches tall, and the rails are stacked vertically with 12-inch gaps between them.
A pair of vertical dimension lines on the right side show 24-inch measurements between the midpoints of each barricade panel, indicating the vertical spacing between the centers of the top, middle, and bottom rails.
Centered on the barricade is a 48-inch warning sign, placed so that its midpoint aligns with the midpoint of the middle barricade rail. Below this sign, a rectangular supplemental MPH plaque is mounted on the lower barricade rail. Both signs are shown centered horizontally on the barricade width.
Horizontal dimensions at the top indicate that the barricade assembly is 8 feet wide with the sign centered within a 5-foot-6-inch internal spacing. To the left of the assembly, a minimum 6-foot offset is shown from the nearest post to the edge of the travel way or stabilized shoulder.
Two wide-flange vertical posts support the barricade. Vertical measurements labeled A and B (referencing EPG 903.1.15) indicate the mounting height of the barricade and signs from the ground.
A note below the figure states that when a supplemental MPH plaque is used, the signs should be mounted exactly as shown, and if no supplemental sign is used, the warning sign should be centered vertically on the barricade. A smaller detail illustration reinforces this alternate configuration, showing the warning sign centered on the three-rail barricade without a supplemental plaque."
|650px|<center>'''Figure 903.3.74''' Shoulder Barricade Assembly</center>]]

913.4 Flashing-Light Signals, Automatic Gates, and Traffic Control Signals (MUTCD Chapter 8D)

2025-12-11T14:45:13Z

HogsettC: /* {{SpanID|913.4.1}}913.4.1 Introduction (MUTCD Section 8D.01) */

[[Category:913 Traffic Control for Railroad and Light Rail Transit Grade Crossings (MUTCD Part 8)|913.4]]
=={{SpanID|913.4.1}}913.4.1 Introduction (MUTCD Section 8D.01)==

'''Support. '''Active traffic control systems inform road users of the approach or presence of rail traffic at grade crossings. These systems include Exit Gate systems, automatic gates, flashing-light signals, traffic control signals, actuated blank-out and variable message signs, and other active traffic control devices that are used in conjunction with the signs and pavement markings that are described in [[913.2 Signs (MUTCD Chapter 8B) #913.2| EPG 913.2]] and [[913.3 Purpose and Application (MUTCD Chapter 8C) #913.3| EPG 913.3]], respectively.

The design, installation and maintenance of these devices are normally the responsibility of the railroad company with the approval of the MoDOT Multimodal Division (Rail Section).

[[#fig913.4.1|Figure 913.4.1]] shows a post-mounted flashing-light signal (two light units mounted in a horizontal line), a flashing-light signal mounted on an overhead structure, and an automatic gate assembly.

Where LRT speed is cited in EPG 913, it refers to the maximum speed at which LRT equipment is permitted to traverse a particular grade crossing.

'''Option. '''Post-mounted and overhead flashing-light signals may be used separately or in combination with each other as determined by the Diagnostic Team. Also, flashing-light signals may be used without automatic gate assemblies, as determined by the Diagnostic Team.

'''Standard. '''The meaning of flashing-light signals and automatic gates shall be as stated in Sections 11-701 and 11-703 of the Uniform Vehicle Code (see [[:Category:911_General_(MUTCD_Part_1) #911.1.6|EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1A.06)]]).

Location for flashing-light signals and automatic gates shall be as shown in [[#fig913.4.1|Figure 913.4.1]].

Where there is a curb, a horizontal offset of at least 2 feet shall be provided from the face of the vertical curb to the nearest part of the signal or automatic gate arm in its upright position. Where a cantilevered-arm flashing-light signal is used, the vertical clearance shall be at least 17 feet above the crown of the highway to the lowest point of the signal unit.

Where there is a shoulder, but no curb, a horizontal offset of at least 2 feet from the edge of a paved shoulder shall be provided, with an offset of at least 6 feet from the edge of the traveled way.

Where there is no curb or shoulder, the minimum horizontal offset shall be 6 feet from the edge of the traveled way.

Minimum clearance dimensions for flashing-light signals and automatic gates relative to the closest track shall conform to standards provided by the railroad company and/or transit agency, and the MoDOT Multimodal Division (Rail Section).

'''Guidance. '''Equipment housings (controller cabinets) should have a lateral offset of at least 30 feet from the edge of the highway, and where railroad or LRT property and conditions allow, at least 25 feet from the nearest rail.

If a pedestrian route is provided, sufficient clearance from supports, posts, and automatic gate mechanisms should be maintained for pedestrian travel.

Where determined by the Diagnostic Team, a lateral escape route to the right-hand side of the highway in advance of the grade crossing traffic control devices should be kept free of guardrail or other ground obstructions. Where guardrail is not deemed necessary or appropriate, barriers should not be used for protecting signal supports.

The same lateral offset and roadside safety features should apply to flashing-light signal and automatic gate locations on both the right-hand and left-hand sides of the roadway.

'''Option. '''In industrial or other areas involving only low-speed highway traffic or where signals are vulnerable to damage by turning truck traffic, guardrail may be installed to provide protection for the signal assembly.

{{SpanID|fig913.4.1}}
[[File:Figure 913.4.1. Composite Drawing of Active Traffic Control Devices for Grade Crossings Showing Clearances.jpg|center|thumb|alt=The figure shows a post-mounted flashing-light signal with two red lights shown mounted in a horizontal line, two red flashing-light signals shown mounted on an overhead structure, and an alternating retroreflective red and white vertically striped automatic gate assembly with three red lights on the top edge. The gate is also shown in the horizontal position to the left of the post, extending across the pavement. An R15-1 sign and an R15-2P sign with the words "2 TRACKS" are also shown mounted on the post above the post-mounted lights. The lights are shown with background disks behind the lenses. The lights and the red and white gate assembly are all shown mounted on the traffic control post.|800px| '''Figure 913.4.1. '''Composite Drawing of Active Traffic Control Devices for Grade Crossings Showing Clearances]]

'''Guidance. '''Where both traffic control signals and flashing-light signals (with or without automatic gates) are in operation at the same highway-LRT grade crossing, the operation of the devices should be coordinated to avoid any display of conflicting signal indications.

'''Option. '''If highway traffic signals must be located within close proximity to the flashing-light signals, the highway traffic signals may be mounted on the same overhead structure as the flashing-light signals with the approval of the MoDOT Multimodal Division (Rail Section).

=={{SpanID|913.4.2}}913.4.2 Flashing-Light Signals (MUTCD Section 8D.02)==

'''Support. '''[[#913.4.4|EPG 913.4.4]] contains additional information regarding flashing-light signals at highway-LRT grade crossings in semi-exclusive and mixed-use alignments.

'''Standard. '''If used, the flashing-light signal assembly (shown in [[#fig913.4.1|Figure 913.4.1]]) on the side of the highway shall include a standard Crossbuck (R15-1) sign, and where there is more than one track, a supplemental Number of Tracks (R15-2P) plaque, all of which indicate to motorists, bicyclists, and pedestrians the location of a grade crossing.

'''Guidance. '''The bottom of the Number of Tracks (R15-2P) plaque (when used) should be located as low as practicable above the flashing-light backgrounds. The Crossbuck (R15-1) sign should be located just above the Number of Tracks (R15-2P) plaque or, if no plaque is present, the bottom of the Crossbuck sign should be located as low as practicable above the flashing-light backgrounds.

'''Support. '''Additional information regarding sizes and clearances of components used on flashing-light signals can be found in Part 3 of the “2023 AREMA Communications and Signals Manual” published by the American Railway Engineering and Maintenance-of-Way Association (AREMA).

'''Option. '''At highway-rail grade crossings, bells or other audible warning devices may be included in the assembly and may be operated in conjunction with the flashing-light signals to provide additional warning for pedestrians, bicyclists, and/or other non-motorized road users.

'''Standard. '''When indicating the approach or presence of rail traffic, the flashing-light signal shall display toward approaching highway traffic two red lights mounted in a horizontal line flashing alternately.

If used, flashing-light signals shall be placed to the right-hand side of approaching highway traffic on all highway approaches to a grade crossing. They shall be located laterally with respect to the highway in compliance with [[#fig913.4.1|Figure 913.4.1]] except where such location would adversely affect signal visibility.

If used at a grade crossing with highway traffic in both directions, back-to-back flashing-light signals shall be placed on each side of the tracks. On multi-lane one-way streets and divided highways, flashing-light signals shall be placed on the approach side of the grade crossing on both sides of the roadway or shall be placed above the highway.

Each red signal unit in the flashing-light signal shall flash alternately. The number of flashes per minute for each lamp shall be 35 minimum and 65 maximum. Each lamp shall be illuminated for approximately the same length of time. The total time of illumination of each pair of lamps shall be the entire operating time.

Flashing-light units shall use either 8-inch or 12-inch nominal diameter lenses.

'''Guidance. '''In choosing between the 8-inch or 12-inch nominal diameter lenses for use in grade crossing flashing-light signals, consideration should be given to the principles stated in [[902.5 Traffic Control Signal Indications (MUTCD Chapter 4E) #902.5.2|EPG 902.5.2]].

If flashing-light signals are used, at least one pair of flashing lights should be provided for each approach lane of the roadway.

The center-to-center distance between the two red lights in a flashing-light unit should be approximately 30 inches.

The mounting height of the flashing-light units, measured from the center of the flashing-light unit housing to the elevation of the crown of the roadway, should be between 8 feet and 9 feet .

The top of the support pole foundation should be no more than 4 inches above the surface of the ground and should be at the same elevation as the crown of the roadway.

'''Standard. '''Grade crossing flashing-light signals shall operate at a low voltage using storage batteries either as a primary or stand-by source of electrical energy. Provision shall be made to provide a source of energy for charging batteries.

'''Option. '''Additional flashing-light signals may be mounted on the same supporting post and directed toward vehicular traffic approaching the grade crossing from other than the principal highway route, such as where there are approaching routes on highways closely adjacent to and parallel to the track(s).

'''Guidance. '''Where the storage distance for vehicles approaching a grade crossing is less than a design vehicle length, the Diagnostic Team should consider providing additional flashing-light signals aligned toward the movement turning toward the grade crossing.

The Diagnostic Team should consider the use of additional flashing-light signals to provide supplemental warning to pedestrians, especially on one-way streets and divided highways.

'''Standard. '''References to lenses in this article shall not be used to limit flashing-light signal optical units to incandescent lamps within optical assemblies that include lenses.

'''Support. '''Research has resulted in flashing-light signal optical units that are not lenses, such as, but not limited to, light-emitting diode (LED) flashing-light signal modules.

'''Option. '''If a Diagnostic Team determines that it is appropriate, the flashing-light signals may be installed on overhead structures or cantilevered supports as shown in [[#fig913.4.1|Figure 913.4.1]] where needed for additional emphasis, or for better visibility to approaching traffic, particularly on multi-lane approaches or highways with profile restrictions.

If it is determined by a Diagnostic Team that one flashing-light signal on the cantilever arm is not sufficiently visible to road users, one or more additional flashing-light signals may be mounted on the supporting post and/or on the cantilever arm.

'''Standard. '''Breakaway or frangible bases shall not be used on the supporting posts for overhead structures or cantilevered arms that support overhead flashing-light signals.

=={{SpanID|913.4.3}}913.4.3 Automatic Gates (MUTCD Section 8D.03)==

'''Support. '''An automatic gate is a traffic control device used in conjunction with flashing-light signals.

'''Standard. '''The automatic gate (see [[#fig913.4.1|Figure 913.4.1]]) shall consist of a drive mechanism and a fully retroreflective red-and-white-striped gate arm with lights. When in the down position, the gate arm shall extend across the approaching lanes of highway traffic.

In the normal sequence of operation, unless constant warning time detection or other advanced system requires otherwise, the flashing-light signals and the lights on the gate arm (in its normal upright position) shall be activated immediately upon detection of approaching rail traffic. The gate arm shall start its downward motion not less than 3 seconds after the flashing-light signals start to operate, shall reach its horizontal position at least 5 seconds before the arrival of the rail traffic, and shall remain in the down position until the rail traffic completely clears the grade crossing.

When the rail traffic clears the grade crossing, and if no other rail traffic is detected, the gate arm shall ascend to its upright position, following which the flashing-light signals and the lights on the gate arm shall cease operation.

Gate arms shall be fully retroreflective on both sides and shall have vertical stripes alternately red and white at 16-inch intervals measured horizontally. The width (which becomes the height of the retroreflective sheeting when the automatic gate is in the down position) of the retroreflective sheeting on the front of the gate arm shall be at least 4 inches for the first 32 feet of gate arm length measured from the center of the gate mast. The front of the gate arm beyond 32 feet to the tip of the gate arm shall have retroreflective sheeting at least 2 inches in width.

'''Support. '''It is acceptable to replace a damaged gate arm with a gate arm having vertical stripes even if the other existing gate arms at the same grade crossing have diagonal stripes; however, it is also acceptable to replace a damaged gate arm with a gate arm having diagonal stripes if the other existing gate arms at the same grade crossing have diagonal stripes in order to maintain consistency per the provisions of the last Option paragraph of [[:Category:911 General (MUTCD Part 1)#Compliance_of_Devices_(MUTCD_Section_1B.03)|EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1B.03)]].

'''Standard. '''Gate arms shall have at least three red lights as shown in [[#fig913.4.1|Figure 913.4.1]].

When activated, the gate arm light nearest the tip shall be illuminated continuously and the other lights shall flash alternately in unison with the flashing-light signals such that the left-most flashing gate arm light(s) flashes simultaneously with the left-hand light of the flashing-light signals and the right-most flashing gate arm light(s) flashes simultaneously with the right-hand light of the flashing-light signals.

'''Support. '''Typical gate arm lights are approximately 4 inches in diameter if they are circular. Rectangular gate arm lights with approximately the same illuminated surface area are sometimes used on gate arms instead of circular lights.

'''Standard. '''The entrance gate arm mechanism shall be designed to fail safe in the down position.

'''Guidance. '''The gate arm should ascend to its upright position in 12 seconds or less.

In its normal upright position, when no rail traffic is approaching or occupying the grade crossing, the gate arm should be approximately vertical (see [[#fig913.4.1|Figure 913.4.1]]).

In the design of individual installations, consideration should be given to timing the operation of the gate arm to accommodate large and/or slow-moving motor vehicles.

The gate arms should cover the approaching highway to block all motor vehicles from being driven around the gate arms without crossing the center line.

The height of the gate arm when it is in the down position should be between 3.5 feet and 4.5 feet above the crown of the roadway. When the gate arm is in the down position, no portion of the counterweight should extend into the traveled way, sidewalk, or pathway.

'''Option. '''Channelizing devices and/or raised median islands may be used to discourage driving around lowered automatic gates.

'''Guidance. '''Where sufficient space is available, median islands should be at least 60 feet in length.

'''Option. '''Where automatic gates are located in the median, additional median width may be required to provide the minimum clearance for the counterweight supports.

Automatic gates may be supplemented by cantilevered flashing-light signals (see [[#fig913.4.1|Figure 913.4.1]]) where there is a need for additional emphasis or better visibility.

=={{SpanID|913.4.4}}913.4.4 Use of Active Traffic Control Systems at LRT Grade Crossings (MUTCD Section 8D.04)==

'''Standard. '''At highway-LRT grade crossings where LRT speeds exceed 25 mph, active traffic control systems (see [[#913.4.1|EPG 913.4.1]]) shall be used.

At highway-LRT grade crossings where LRT speeds exceed 40 mph, the active traffic control system shall include automatic gates.

'''Option. '''The Diagnostic Team may recommend an active traffic control system with automatic gates at highway-LRT grade crossings where LRT speeds do not exceed 40 mph.

'''Guidance. '''At highway-LRT grade crossings where LRT speeds are 25 mph or less, active traffic control systems should be used unless the Diagnostic Team determines that the use of Crossbuck Assemblies, STOP signs alone, or YIELD signs alone would be adequate.

Where the highway-LRT grade crossing is at a location other than an intersection and LRT speeds exceed 20 mph, traffic control signals should not be used in lieu of flashing-light signals.

'''Support. ''' [[#913.4.2|EPG 913.4.2]] and [[#913.4.3|913.4.3]] contain additional provisions regarding the design and operation of flashing-light signals and automatic gates, respectively.

'''Standard. '''If flashing-light signals are in operation at a highway-LRT crossing that is used by pedestrians, bicyclists, and/or other non-motorized road users, an audible device such as a bell shall also be provided and shall be operated in conjunction with the flashing-light signals.

=={{SpanID|913.4.5}}913.4.5 Exit Gate and Four-Quadrant Gate Systems (MUTCD Section 8D.05)==

'''Option. '''Exit Gate systems may be installed to improve safety at grade crossings where a Diagnostic Team determines that less restrictive measures, such as automatic gates and median islands, are not effective.

'''Support. '''A grade crossing that includes exit gates on some, but not all, of the exiting lanes is an Exit Gate system, but is not considered to be a Four-Quadrant Gate system.

The term Four-Quadrant Gate system is used in a generic sense in that it refers to the fact that all entrances and exits from a grade crossing are controlled by automatic gates in order to provide a full closure to all entering and exiting lanes. The term Four-Quadrant Gate system does not refer to the number of gates installed, but rather the fact that a full closure is provided.

'''Standard. '''The Exit Gate system shall use a series of automatic gates with fully retroreflective red-and-white-striped gate arms with lights, and when in the down position the gate arms extend individually across the entrance and exit lanes of the roadway as shown in [[#fig913.4.5|Figure 913.4.5]]. The provisions contained in [[#913.4.2|EPG 913.4.2]] for flashing-light signals shall be followed for signal specifications, location, and clearance distances.

Gate arm design, colors, and lighting requirements shall be in accordance with the provisions contained in [[#913.4.3|EPG 913.4.3]].

'''Support. '''The provisions contained in [[#913.4.3|EPG 913.4.3]] for automatic gates are applicable to exit gates.

'''Standard. '''In the normal sequence of operation, unless constant warning time detection or other advanced system requires otherwise, the flashing-light signals and the lights on the gate arms (in their normal upright positions) shall be activated immediately upon the detection of approaching rail traffic. The entrance gate arms shall start their downward motion not less than 3 seconds after the flashing-light signals start to operate and shall reach their horizontal position at least 5 seconds before the arrival of the rail traffic. Exit gate arm activation and downward motion shall be based on detection or timing requirements established by a Diagnostic Team. If an Exit Gate system is present, the exit gate clearance time (see AREMA Manual) shall be long enough to permit the exit gate arm to lower after a design vehicle of maximum length is clear of the minimum track clearance distance (see [[913.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 8A) #913.1.7| EPG 913.1.7]]). The gate arms shall remain in the down position as long as the rail traffic occupies the grade crossing.

When the rail traffic clears the grade crossing, and if no other rail traffic is detected, the gate arms shall ascend to their upright positions, following which the flashing-light signals and the lights on the gate arms shall cease operation.

Except as provided in the first Option paragraph below, the exit gate arm mechanism shall be designed to fail-safe in the up position.

At locations where gate arms are offset a sufficient distance for motor vehicles to drive between the entrance and exit gate arms, median islands (see [[#fig913.4.5|Figure 913.4.5]]) shall be installed in accordance with the needs determined by the Diagnostic Team.

'''Guidance. '''The gate arm should ascend to its upright position in 12 seconds or less.

Constant warning time detection circuits should be used with Exit Gate systems where practical.

The operating mode of the exit gates should be determined by a Diagnostic Team.

If the Timed Exit Gate Operating Mode is used, the Diagnostic Team should also determine the Exit Gate Clearance Time (see definition in [[:Category:911_General_(MUTCD_Part_1) #911.3.2 | EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1C.02)]]).

If the Dynamic Exit Gate Operating Mode is used, highway vehicle intrusion detection devices that are part of a system that incorporates processing logic to detect the presence of motor vehicles within the minimum track clearance distance (see [[913.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 8A) #913.1.7| EPG 913.1.7]]) should be installed to control exit gate operation. Exit gates should be independently controlled for each direction of roadway traffic.

Regardless of which exit gate operating mode is used, the Exit Gate Clearance Time should be considered when determining additional time requirements for the Minimum Warning Time.

'''Support. '''The minimum warning time is the least amount of time that active warning devices operate prior to the arrival of rail traffic at a grade crossing.

'''Guidance. '''If an Exit Gate system is used at a location that is adjacent to an intersection that could cause motor vehicles to queue within the minimum track clearance distance (see [[913.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 8A) #913.1.7| EPG 913.1.7]]), the Dynamic Exit Gate Operating Mode should be used unless the Diagnostic Team determines otherwise.

If an Exit Gate system is interconnected with a highway traffic signal (see [[913.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 8A) #913.1.9| EPG 913.1.9]]), back-up or standby power should be considered for the highway traffic signal. Also, circuitry should be installed to prevent the highway traffic signal from leaving the track clearance green interval until all of the gates are lowered.

Exit Gate systems should include remote health (status) monitoring capable of automatically notifying railroad or LRT signal maintenance personnel when anomalies have occurred within the system.

'''Option. '''Exit gate arms may fail in the down position if the grade crossing is equipped with remote health (status) monitoring.

Exit Gate system installations may include median islands between opposing lanes on an approach to a grade crossing.

'''Guidance. '''Where sufficient space is available, median islands should be at least 60 feet in length.

{{SpanID|fig913.4.5}}
[[File:Figure 913.4.5 Examples of Location Plan for Flashing-Light Signals and Four-Quadrant Gates.jpg|center|thumb|alt= A: Two railroad tracks crossing a vertical six-lane roadway with three lanes in each direction are shown. The tracks run from the bottom left to the top right. On each side of the railroad tracks, two gates are shown: one that extends across the three right lanes (the entrance gate) and one that extends across the three left lanes (the exit gate). On each side of the railroad tracks, a “median island” is shown placed “between” the two gates. B: The same example of railroad tracks crossing a vertical roadway are shown as the “Obtuse Angle” example, except these tracks are shown running from the top left to the bottom right. C: Two railroad tracks are shown crossing a vertical six-lane roadway at a “right angle.” On each side of the railroad tracks, two gates are shown: an entrance gate that extends across the three right lanes and an exit gate that extends across the three left lanes.|800px| '''Figure 913.4.5''' Examples of Location Plan for Flashing-Light Signals and Four-Quadrant Gates]]

=={{SpanID|913.4.6}}913.4.6 Wayside Horn Systems (MUTCD Section 8D.06)==

'''Option. '''A wayside horn system (see definition in [[:Category:911_General_(MUTCD_Part_1) #911.3.2 | EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1C.02)]]) may be installed in compliance with 49 CFR Part 222 to provide audible warning directed toward the road users at a highway-rail grade crossing or at a pathway grade crossing.

'''Standard. '''Wayside horn systems used at grade crossings where the locomotive horn is not sounded shall be equipped and shall operate in compliance with the requirements of Appendix E to 49 CFR Part 222.

'''Guidance. '''The same lateral clearance and roadside safety features should apply to wayside horn systems as described in the provisions contained in [[#913.4.1|EPG 913.4.1]] Wayside horn systems, when mounted on a separate pole assembly, should be installed no closer than 15 feet from the center of the nearest track and should be positioned to not obstruct the motorists’ line of sight of the flashing-light signals.

=={{SpanID|913.4.7}}913.4.7 Rail Traffic Detection (MUTCD Section 8D.07)==

'''Standard. '''The devices employed in active traffic control systems shall be actuated by some form of rail traffic detection.

Rail traffic detection circuits, insofar as practical, shall be designed on the fail-safe principle.

Flashing-light signals shall operate for at least 20 seconds before the arrival of any rail traffic, except as provided in the first Option paragraph below.

'''Option. '''On tracks where all rail traffic operates at less than 20 mph and where road users are directed by an authorized person on the ground to not enter the crossing at all times that approaching rail traffic is about to occupy the crossing, a shorter signal operating time for the flashing-light signals may be used.

Additional warning time may be provided when determined by an engineering study.

'''Guidance. '''Where the speeds of different rail traffic on a given track vary considerably under normal operation, special devices or circuits should be installed to provide reasonably uniform notice in advance of all rail traffic movements over the grade crossing. Special control features should be used to eliminate the effects of station stops and switching operations within approach control circuits to prevent excessive activation of the traffic control devices while rail traffic is stopped on or switching upon the approach track control circuits.

=={{SpanID|913.4.8}}913.4.8 Use of Traffic Control Signals at Grade Crossings (MUTCD Section 8D.08)==

'''Standard. '''Except as provided in the Option paragraph below, traffic control signals shall not be used instead of flashing-light signals to control road users at a highway-rail grade crossing.

'''Option. '''Traffic control signals may be used instead of flashing-light signals to control road users at industrial highway-rail grade crossings and other places where the maximum speed of trains is 10 mph or less with approval of the MoDOT Multimodal Division (Rail Section).

'''Support'''. [[#913.4.4|EPG 913.4.4]] and [[#913.4.14|913.4.14]] contain information regarding the use of traffic control signals at highway-LRT grade crossings.

'''Standard. '''The appropriate provisions of [[:Category:902 Signals (MUTCD Part 4)|EPG 902]] relating to traffic control signal design, installation, and operation shall be applicable where traffic control signals are used instead of flashing-light signals to control road users at grade crossings.

=={{SpanID|913.4.9}}913.4.9 Preemption of Highway Traffic Signals at or Near Grade Crossings (MUTCD Section 8D.09)==

'''Support. '''Traffic signal preemption for grade crossings is a complex topic that requires a specific understanding of grade crossing warning systems and highway traffic signal operations. While most traffic signal operations are governed only by the traffic signal controller unit and the associated traffic signal equipment, preemption for grade crossings is also governed by the grade crossing warning system. Active grade crossing warning systems include flashing-light signals and possibly automatic gates, as well as various types of train detection equipment. Where the traffic signal controller unit is interconnected with the grade crossing warning system for the purpose of preemption, a combined system is created. It is the combined system that requires a thorough understanding of the design and operating parameters in order to provide proper operation of the preemption system.

The Federal Railroad Administration (FRA) has issued two documents that provide additional information relating to preemption of highway traffic signals at or near grade crossings. The first document is “Technical Bulletin S-12-01, Guidance Regarding the Appropriate Process for the Inspection of Highway-Rail Grade Crossing Warning System Pre-emption Interconnections with Highway Traffic Signals” and the second document is “Safety Advisory 2010-02, Signal Recording Devices for Highway-Rail Grade Crossing Active Warning Systems that are Interconnected with Highway Traffic Signal Systems.”

'''Guidance. '''If a grade crossing is equipped with flashing-light signals and is located 200 feet or less from an intersection or midblock location controlled by a traffic control signal, a pedestrian hybrid beacon, or an emergency-vehicle hybrid beacon, the intersection should be provided with rail preemption in accordance with [[902.6 Steady (Stop-and-Go) Operation of Traffic Control Signals (MUTCD Chapter 4F) #902.6.19|EPG 902.6.19]] unless otherwise determined by the Diagnostic Team.

Coordination with the flashing-light signals, such as using queue detection and queue cutter signals, blank-out signs, or other alternatives, should be considered where a traffic control signal, a pedestrian hybrid beacon, or an emergency-vehicle hybrid beacon is located more than 200 feet from the grade crossing. Factors to be considered should include traffic volumes, highway vehicle mix, highway vehicle and train approach speeds, frequency of trains, presence of midblock driveways or unsignalized intersections, and the potential for vehicular queues resulting from an adjacent downstream grade crossing or highway traffic signal to extend into the minimum track clearance distance (see [[913.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 8A) #913.1.7| EPG 913.1.7]]).

The highway agency or authority with jurisdiction and the MoDOT Multimodal Division (Rail Section), if applicable, should jointly determine the preemption operation and the timing of highway traffic signals interconnected with grade crossings adjacent to signalized locations.

If a highway traffic signal is installed 200 feet or less from a passive grade crossing, unless otherwise determined by the Diagnostic Team, an active grade crossing warning system should be installed at the grade crossing to provide a means to preempt the highway traffic signal in order to clear vehicles from the minimum track clearance distance (see [[913.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 8A) #913.1.7| EPG 913.1.7]]) upon approach of rail traffic.

If a highway traffic signal is interconnected with flashing-light signals, the flashing-light signals should be provided with automatic gates to prevent additional vehicles from being drawn into the minimum track clearance distance (see [[913.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 8A) #913.1.7| EPG 913.1.7]]) during the track clearance interval prior to the arrival of rail traffic unless a Diagnostic Team determines otherwise.

'''Support. '''Regular joint inspections by the highway agency or authority with jurisdiction, the MoDOT Multimodal Division (Rail Section), if applicable, and the railroad company or transit agency are a best practice and typically include verification of the preemption operation, the amount of warning time and/or preemption time being provided by the grade crossing warning system, and the timing of highway traffic signals interconnected and/or coordinated with the flashing-light signals.

[[902.6 Steady (Stop-and-Go) Operation of Traffic Control Signals (MUTCD Chapter 4F) #902.6.19|EPG 902.6.19]] includes a recommendation that traffic control signals that are adjacent to highway-rail grade crossings and that are coordinated with the flashing-light signals at the grade crossing or that include railroad preemption features be provided with a back-up power supply.

'''Standard. '''Information regarding the type of preemption and any related timing parameters shall be provided to the railroad company or transit agency so that the railroad company or transit agency can design the appropriate train detection circuitry.

If preemption is provided, unless otherwise determined by a Diagnostic Team, the normal sequence of highway traffic signal indications shall be preempted upon the approach of a train to provide a track clearance interval to provide an opportunity for motor vehicles at the grade crossing to clear the minimum track clearance distance (see [[913.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 8A) #913.1.7| EPG 913.1.7]]) prior to the arrival of rail traffic.

'''Option. '''Where train switching or train restarts occur close to a grade crossing, the Diagnostic Team may determine that the preemption time can be reduced in accordance with the operating requirements of the railroad company and/or transit agency.

'''Standard. '''Where flashing-light signals are in place at a grade crossing, any highway traffic signal faces installed within 50 feet of any rail shall be preempted upon the approach of rail traffic. The Diagnostic Team shall determine the signal indications displayed by the highway traffic signal faces that control movements across the grade crossing in accordance with [[902.6 Steady (Stop-and-Go) Operation of Traffic Control Signals (MUTCD Chapter 4F) #902.6.19|EPG 902.6.19]] in order to avoid the display of signal indications that conflict with the flashing-light signals.

'''Guidance. '''Where the flashing-light signals are in place at a grade crossing, the operation of any flashing yellow beacon installed within 50 feet of any rail should be considered by a Diagnostic Team to determine whether the operation of the beacon should be terminated during the approach and passage of rail traffic.

'''Standard'''. The preemption special control mode shall be activated by a supervised preemption interconnection using fail-safe design principles between the control circuits of the grade crossing warning system and the traffic signal controller unit. The approach of rail traffic to a grade crossing shall de-energize the interconnection or send a message via a fail-safe data communication protocol (such as the “IEEE Standard for the Interface Between the Rail Subsystem and the Highway Subsystem at a Highway Rail Intersection,” 1570-2002 (R2008), Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers), which in turn shall activate the traffic signal controller preemption sequence. This shall establish and maintain the preemption condition during the time the grade crossing warning system is activated, except that when automatic gates exist, the preemption condition shall not be terminated until the automatic gates are energized to start their upward movement.

'''Support. '''Advance preemption is the notification of approaching rail traffic that is forwarded to the highway traffic signal controller unit or assembly by the railroad or light rail transit equipment in advance of the activation of the grade crossing warning system.

The maximum preemption time is the maximum amount of time needed following initiation of the preemption sequence for the highway traffic signals to complete the timing of the right-of-way transfer time, queue clearance time, and separation time.

The separation time is the component of maximum preemption time during which the minimum track clearance distance is clear of vehicular traffic prior to the arrival of rail traffic.

Simultaneous preemption is the notification of approaching rail traffic that is forwarded to the highway traffic signal controller unit or assembly and grade crossing warning system at the same time.

The right-of-way transfer time is the amount of time needed prior to display of the track clearance interval. This includes any time needed by the railroad, light rail transit, or highway traffic signal control equipment to react to a preemption call, and any traffic control signal green, pedestrian walk and clearance if used (see [[902.6 Steady (Stop-and-Go) Operation of Traffic Control Signals (MUTCD Chapter 4F) #902.6.19|EPG 902.6.19]]), yellow change, and red clearance intervals for conflicting traffic.

A supervised preemption interconnection is one that incorporates both a normally-open and a normally-closed circuit from the grade crossing warning system to verify the proper operation of the interconnection.

'''Option. '''Instead of supervision, a double-break preemption interconnection circuit that uses two normally-closed circuits that open both the source and return energy circuits may be used.

A preemption interconnection may incorporate both supervision and double-break circuits.

'''Guidance. '''Where train detection circuits are present at a passive grade crossing, the operation of the preemption interconnection should be treated as if active traffic control devices exist at the crossing and the preemption operation should be determined by a Diagnostic Team.

Where left turns are permitted at a downstream highway-highway traffic control signal from the roadway approach that crosses the track and a delayed or impeded left-turn movement could prevent vehicles from clearing the track, a protected left-turn movement should be provided during the track clearance interval if green signal indications are displayed to the approach for track clearance.

The decision to implement simultaneous or advance preemption should include consideration of the right-of-way transfer time, the queue clearance time, and the separation time in order to determine the maximum preemption time. These time periods should be compared to and verified with the operation of the grade crossing traffic control devices in order to evaluate the operation of the highway traffic signal and the preemption operation. These factors should be considered regardless of whether simultaneous or advance preemption operation is implemented as they are based on traffic signal minimum timing, vehicle acceleration characteristics, and physical distances along the roadway.

'''Support. '''Preemption time variability occurs when the traffic signal controller enters the preemption clearance interval with less than the maximum design right-of-way transfer time or when the speed of a train approaching the grade crossing varies.

The time interval between the initiation of advance preemption and the operation of the grade crossing warning system for rail traffic will decrease in situations when rail traffic is accelerating or increase in situations when rail traffic is decelerating.

'''Guidance. '''Where preemption is used and automatic gates are present, the possibility that an automatic gate might descend upon a vehicle should be analyzed.

If simultaneous preemption is used, an analysis of extended grade crossing warning time requirements should be conducted.

If advance preemption is used, an analysis of preemption operation, traffic signal sequencing, and traffic signal phasing should be conducted to identify preemption time variability. The analysis should include both the condition requiring the longest amount of time to enter the track clearance interval and the condition requiring the shortest amount of time to enter the track clearance interval.

'''Standard. '''Where automatic gates are present and green signal indications are displayed at the downstream traffic control signal during the track clearance interval, the preemption sequence shall be designed such that the green signal indications are not terminated until the automatic gate(s) that controls access over the grade crossing toward the downstream intersection is fully lowered.

'''Support. '''The following are two examples of mutually-exclusive methods to resolve preemption time variability:
::A. Gate-down circuitry provides a means to hold the traffic signal controller sequence in the track clearance interval until the automatic gate(s) that controls access over the grade crossing toward the downstream intersection is fully lowered.
::B. Timing correction resolves preemption time variability by adding the right-of-way transfer time to the track clearance interval in the traffic signal controller unit and setting a fixed maximum period of time between the start of advance preemption and the operation of the flashing-light signals.

The Third Edition of the “Railroad-Highway Grade Crossing Handbook” and the “2023 AREMA Communications and Signals Manual” published by the American Railway Engineering and Maintenance-of-Way Association (AREMA) provide additional information about preemption time variability.

'''Standard. '''Where gate-down circuitry is used to resolve preemption time variability and an automatic gate is broken or is not fully lowered, the crossing control circuits shall not terminate the track clearance interval before the rail traffic has entered the grade crossing.

Where timing correction is used to resolve preemption time variability, a timing circuit shall be used to maintain a maximum time interval between the initiation of advance preemption and the operation of the grade crossing warning system when the approaching rail traffic is decelerating.

'''Guidance. '''Where a highway-highway intersection controlled by traffic control signals is interconnected with a grade crossing equipped with exit gates, advance preemption should be used because of the additional operating time that is required for the exit gates.

Where rail traffic routinely stops and re-starts within or just outside of the approaches to a grade crossing that is interconnected with highway traffic signals, the effects of rail traffic operations on the preemption operation should be analyzed.

Highway traffic signal control equipment should be capable of providing immediate re-service of successive requests for preemption from the railroad warning devices, even if the initial preemption sequence has not been completed. As appropriate, the highway traffic signal control equipment should be able to promptly return to the start of the track clearance interval at any time that the demand for preemption is cancelled and then reactivated. The highway traffic signal control equipment should have the ability to provide this immediate re-service at any point in the preemption sequence.

'''Standard. '''Where traffic control signals are programmed to operate in a flashing mode during the preemption dwell interval (the period following the track clearance interval that lasts for the duration of the preemption interconnection activation), the beginning of the preemption dwell flashing mode shall not occur until the grade crossing equipment indicates that the rail traffic has entered the grade crossing.

At locations where conflicting preemption calls might be received to serve boats and trains, the Diagnostic Team shall determine the relative priority when conflicting preemption calls occur (see [[902.6 Steady (Stop-and-Go) Operation of Traffic Control Signals (MUTCD Chapter 4F) #902.6.19|EPG 902.6.19]]). Where the boat and the train do not conflict with each other, the Diagnostic Team shall determine the preemption sequence when both preemption calls are occurring simultaneously. The United States Coast Guard or other appropriate authority that regulates the operation of the waterway shall be invited to participate on the Diagnostic Team and/or to provide input to the Diagnostic Team.

'''Support. '''[[902.3 Traffic Control Signal Needs Studies (MUTCD Chapter 4C) #902.3.10|EPG 902.3.10]] describes the Intersection Near a Grade Crossing signal warrant that is intended for use at a location where the proximity to the intersection of a grade crossing on an intersection approach controlled by a STOP or YIELD sign is the principal reason to consider installing a traffic control signal.

[[902.6 Steady (Stop-and-Go) Operation of Traffic Control Signals (MUTCD Chapter 4F) #902.6.19|EPG 902.6.19]] describes additional considerations regarding preemption of traffic control signals at or near grade crossings.

=={{SpanID|913.4.10}}913.4.10 Movements Prohibited During Preemption (MUTCD Section 8D.10)==

'''Support. '''The use of blank-out turn prohibition signs requires the authorization of the Highway Safety and Traffic Division.

'''Guidance. '''At a signalized intersection that is located within 100 feet of a grade crossing and the intersection traffic control signals are preempted by the approach of rail traffic, all existing permissive-only turning movements toward the grade crossing should be prohibited, steady red arrow signal indications should be shown to all existing protected/permissive and protected-only turning movements toward the grade crossing, and red signal indications should be shown to the straight-through movement toward the grade crossing during the signal preemption sequences. The prohibition of a permissive-only turning movement toward the grade crossing during preemption should be accomplished through the installation of a blank-out turn prohibition (R3-1a or R3-2a) sign.

'''Option. '''All movements toward the track may be prohibited at a signalized intersection that is preempted by the approach of rail traffic, even if the clear storage distance is more than 100 feet.

'''Support. '''Including the word “TRAIN” as part of the blank-out turn prohibition sign informs road users that the turn prohibition being displayed by the sign is in effect because rail traffic is approaching or occupying a nearby rail grade crossing, and that the turn prohibition will be terminated after the rail traffic has cleared the grade crossing.

<div style="text-align: center;"><div style="display:inline-block;vertical-align: middle;">[[File:R3-1a (Activated Blank Out).png|thumb|none|alt=|200px|'''R3-1a (Activated Blank Out)]]</div>
<div style="display:inline-block;vertical-align: middle;">[[File:R3-2a (Activated Blank Out).png|thumb|none|alt=|200px|'''R3-2a (Activated Blank Out)]]</div>
</div>

Rail operations can include the use of activated blank-out turn prohibition (R3-1a or R3-2a) signs at unsignalized highway-highway intersections in the vicinity of grade crossings, such as where a semi-exclusive or mixed-use alignment is within or parallel to the roadway where road users are normally permitted to turn across the tracks.

'''Guidance. '''An LRT-activated blank-out turn prohibition (R3-1a or R3-2a) sign should be used during preemption where all three of the following conditions are present:
::A. There is no active warning system for the LRT grade crossing,
::B. Vehicles traveling along a parallel roadway would normally be permitted to turn left or right to travel across tracks that are located within 100 feet of the highway-highway intersection or within the median of the intersection, and
::C. The drivers turning at the highway-highway intersection are not controlled by a traffic control signal.

'''Standard'''. Blank-out turn prohibition signs that are associated with preemption shall display their message only when a preemption signal is being received from the railroad or LRT equipment or while the automatic gate is activated.

'''Support. '''The provisions contained in [[903.12 Changeable Message Signs (MUTCD Chapter 2L) #903.12|EPG 903.12]] for blank-out signs are applicable to R3-1a and R3-2a signs.

=={{SpanID|913.4.11}}913.4.11 Pre-Signals at or Near Grade Crossings (MUTCD Section 8D.11)==

'''Guidance. '''If a grade crossing is located in close proximity to an intersection controlled by a traffic control signal and the clear storage distance is less than the design vehicle length, the use of pre-signals to control traffic approaching the grade crossing in the direction toward the intersection should be considered.

If a grade crossing equipped with flashing-light signals, but without automatic gates, is located within 200 feet of an intersection controlled by a traffic control signal, a pre-signal should be provided.

'''Support. '''A pre-signal is generally used where the grade crossing is located less than 200 feet from a downstream signalized intersection. [[#913.4.12|EPG 913.4.12]] contains information for grade crossings located 200 feet or more from a downstream signalized intersection.

Other measures that could be considered instead of or in addition to a pre-signal to minimize the possibility of vehicles queuing across the grade crossing include providing additional lanes, reducing the cycle length, using split phasing, using protected turn phasing, and/or providing an extended green interval for the approach.

'''Standard. '''Pre-signal faces shall display a steady red signal indication during the track clearance interval of the signal preemption sequence to prohibit additional motor vehicles from entering the minimum track clearance distance (see [[913.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 8A) #913.1.7| EPG 913.1.7]]).

Pre-signal faces shall not display green signal indications when the grade crossing flashing-light signals are displaying flashing red indications.

'''Guidance. '''Consideration should be given to using visibility-limited signal faces (see definition in [[:Category:911_General_(MUTCD_Part_1) #911.3.2 | EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1C.02)]]) at the intersection for the downstream signal faces that control the approach that is equipped with pre-signals.

'''Option. '''The duration of the extended green interval may be adjusted by vehicle detection located between the pre-signal and the downstream signalized intersection.

The pre-signal phase sequencing may be timed with an offset from the downstream signalized intersection such that the pre-signal’s green signal indication terminates prior to the downstream intersection’s green signal indication to minimize the possibility of stopping motor vehicles within the minimum track clearance distance (see [[913.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 8A) #913.1.7| EPG 913.1.7]]) and the clear storage distance.

'''Guidance. '''If pre-signals are used, the queue clearance time (see [[913.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 8A) #913.1.9| EPG 913.1.9]]) should be long enough to allow a design vehicle of maximum length stopped just inside the minimum track clearance distance (see [[913.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 8A) #913.1.7| EPG 913.1.7]]) to start up and move through the downstream intersection, or to clear the minimum track clearance distance if there is sufficient clear storage distance.

<div style="text-align: center;"><div style="display:inline-block;vertical-align: middle;">[[File:R10-10b.png|thumb|none|alt=|200px|R10-10b]]</div>
</div>

'''Support. '''The storage area for mandatory left-turn and right-turn lanes at signalized intersections that are downstream from grade crossings sometimes extends from the signalized intersection back to and across the grade crossing. In such cases, drivers that are in the turn lane are required to make a straight-through movement when they cross the track(s) and then are required to make a turning movement when they reach the downstream signalized intersection.

'''Guidance. '''A separate pre-signal face for the mandatory left-turn lane and/or right-turn lane should be provided in addition to the pre-signal signal faces provided for the through movement where both of the following conditions are met:
::A. The storage area for the turn lane extends from the downstream signalized intersection back to and across the grade crossing, and
::B. The green interval for the turning movement at the downstream intersection does not always begin and end simultaneously with the green interval for the adjacent through movement at the downstream intersection.

'''Standard. '''Where adjacent lanes at a pre-signal are controlled separately, all of the signal faces shall be capable of displaying the following signal indications: CIRCULAR RED, CIRCULAR YELLOW, and straight-through GREEN ARROW. Left-turn GREEN ARROW and right-turn GREEN ARROW signal indications shall not be used in pre-signal faces. CIRCULAR GREEN signal indications shall not be used in pre-signal faces where adjacent lanes are controlled separately.

'''Option. '''Where all adjacent lanes at a pre-signal are controlled together, CIRCULAR GREEN signal indications may be used in pre-signal faces.

'''Standard. '''If a separate signal face is provided at a pre-signal for separate control of a mandatory left-turn and/or right-turn lane that extends from the downstream signalized intersection back to and across the grade crossing, the separate signal face shall be devoted exclusively to controlling traffic in the turn lane separately from adjacent lanes, and:
::A. Shall be visibility-limited from the adjacent through movement, or
::B. A LEFT (RIGHT) LANE SIGNAL (R10-10b) sign shall be mounted adjacent to the separate signal face controlling traffic in a single turn lane or in the turn lane that is farthest from the adjacent through lane(s) if multiple turn lanes are present for a particular turning movement, and a LEFT (RIGHT) TURN LANE SIGNAL (R10-10c) sign shall be mounted adjacent to the separate signal face controlling traffic in the other turn lanes if multiple turn lanes are present for a particular turning movement.

'''Support. '''Because the signal faces at a pre-signal do not always display the same signal indications as the downstream signalized intersection, the approach to the pre-signal is considered to be a separate approach from the approach to the downstream signalized intersection. This means that the provisions in [[902.4 Design Features of Traffic Control Signals (MUTCD Chapter 4D) #902.4.5|EPG 902.4.5]] through [[902.4 Design Features of Traffic Control Signals (MUTCD Chapter 4D) #902.4.8|902.4.8]] regarding the number of signal faces, the visibility and aiming of the signal faces, and the lateral and longitudinal positioning of the signal faces apply separately to the approach to the pre-signal.

The provisions in [[902.4 Design Features of Traffic Control Signals (MUTCD Chapter 4D) #902.4.7|EPG 902.4.7]] regarding the lateral positioning of separate turn signal faces are applicable to the separate signal faces that are provided at pre-signals for a mandatory turn lane that extends from the downstream signalized intersection back to and across the grade crossing.

'''Guidance. '''A STOP HERE ON RED (R10-6) sign should be installed at the pre-signal’s stop line.

'''Standard. '''If a pre-signal is installed upstream from a signalized intersection, a No Turn on Red (R10-11) sign (see [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2.49|EPG 903.2.49]]) shall be installed at the pre-signal for the approach that crosses the track if turns on red would otherwise be permitted at the downstream intersection.

'''Option. '''DO NOT STOP ON TRACKS (R8-8) signs may be installed in conjunction with a pre-signal.

Pre-signal faces may be located either upstream or downstream from the grade crossing in order to provide the most effective display to road users approaching the grade crossing.

If pre-signal faces must be located within close proximity to the flashing-light signals, the pre-signal faces may be mounted on the same overhead structure as the flashing-light signals.

=={{SpanID|913.4.12}}913.4.12 Queue Cutter Signals at or Near Grade Crossings (MUTCD Section 8D.12)==

<div style="text-align: center;"><div style="display:inline-block;vertical-align: middle;">[[File:R10-10c.png|thumb|none|alt=|200px|R10-10c]]</div></div>

'''Support. '''A queue cutter signal is a traffic control signal that controls one direction of traffic at a grade crossing to minimize the possibility of vehicles stopping within the minimum track clearance distance (see [[913.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 8A) #913.1.7| EPG 913.1.7]]). Although a queue cutter signal has a similar purpose as a pre-signal (see [[#913.4.11|EPG 913.4.11]]), the difference is that a queue cutter signal is independent from the downstream signalized intersection, whereas a pre-signal is part of the downstream signal.

'''Option. '''At grade crossing locations where the queue from a bottleneck (usually a signalized intersection) that is downstream from the grade crossing frequently extends back to and across the grade crossing, a queue cutter signal may be installed.

A queue cutter signal may be operated in one of the following modes:
::A. Actuated mode – the queue cutter signal operation is dependent on downstream detection of a growing queue.
::B. Non-actuated mode – the queue cutter signal operates on a time-of-day plan based on anticipated downstream queues. This mode could be similar to the functional operation of a pre-signal.
::C. Variable mode – the queue cutter signal operation varies between the actuated mode and the non-actuated mode based on the time of day, on queue detection, or both.

'''Support. '''A non-actuated queue cutter signal is generally used where the grade crossing is located between 200 feet and 400 feet from a downstream bottleneck. An actuated queue cutter signal is generally used where the grade crossing is located more than 400 feet from a downstream bottleneck. [[#913.4.11|EPG 913.4.11]] contains information for grade crossings located less than 200 feet from a downstream signalized intersection.

'''Standard. '''Where adjacent lanes at a queue cutter signal are controlled separately, all of the signal faces shall be capable of displaying the following signal indications: CIRCULAR RED, CIRCULAR YELLOW, and straight-through GREEN ARROW. Left-turn GREEN ARROW and right-turn GREEN ARROW signal indications shall not be used in queue cutter signal faces. CIRCULAR GREEN signal indications shall not be used in queue cutter signal faces where adjacent lanes are controlled separately.

'''Option. '''Where all adjacent lanes at a queue cutter signal are controlled together, CIRCULAR GREEN signal indications may be used in queue cutter signal faces.

Queue cutter signal faces may be located either upstream or downstream from the grade crossing in order to provide the most effective display to road users approaching the grade crossing.

If queue cutter signal faces must be located within close proximity to the flashing-light signals, the queue cutter signal faces may be mounted on the same overhead structure as the flashing-light signals.

'''Guidance. '''A STOP HERE ON RED (R10-6) sign should be installed at the queue cutter signal’s stop line.

'''Option. '''DO NOT STOP ON TRACKS (R8-8) signs may be installed in conjunction with a queue cutter signal.

'''Guidance. '''Where a queue cutter signal operates in an actuated mode based on vehicle presence detection, the queue detector should be located to provide adequate distance to detect a growing queue, permit the queue cutter signal to complete any programmed minimum green or yellow change interval time, and then allow a design vehicle that lawfully crosses the queue cutter signal’s stop line during the yellow change interval to clear the minimum track clearance distance (see [[913.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 8A) #913.1.7| EPG 913.1.7]]) before the growing queue extends to the grade crossing.

A queue cutter signal that is operating in an actuated mode and that is displaying CIRCULAR RED signal indications should continue to display CIRCULAR RED signal indications as long as the downstream detection system continues to detect the presence of a vehicular queue at the detection point on the departure side of the grade crossing.

Where a queue cutter signal operates in actuated mode based on vehicle presence detection, consideration should be given to the potential for turning movements between the grade crossing and the downstream bottleneck that could create an intermediate queue of vehicles. Supplemental queue detectors should be considered to detect the formation of these intermediate queues to activate the queue cutter signal.

Where a queue cutter signal is operated in a non-actuated mode, the queue cutter signal should be coordinated with adjacent signals to provide for the progressive movement of traffic.

'''Option. '''Where a queue cutter signal is always operated in a non-actuated mode based on anticipated queues, the queue cutter signal may be operated in a flashing mode at times when the downstream queues are not expected to extend back to and across the grade crossing.

When a variable-mode queue cutter signal is operating in the non-actuated mode, the queue detector may be used to extend the display of the CIRCULAR RED signal indication as long as the downstream detection system continues to detect the presence of a vehicular queue at the detection point on the departure side of the grade crossing.

'''Standard. '''A queue cutter signal shall be interconnected with the flashing-light signals at the grade crossing.

Queue cutter signal faces shall not display green signal indications when the grade crossing flashing-light signals are displaying flashing red indications.

When a queue cutter signal that is displaying straight-through GREEN ARROW signal indications (when operating in a steady, stop-and-go mode) or flashing CIRCULAR YELLOW signal indications (when operating in a programmed flashing mode) is preempted by the approach of rail traffic, it shall immediately display steady CIRCULAR YELLOW signal indications during the yellow change interval (see [[902.6 Steady (Stop-and-Go) Operation of Traffic Control Signals (MUTCD Chapter 4F) #902.6.17|EPG 902.6.17]]) followed by steady CIRCULAR RED signal indications. The queue cutter signal shall continue to display the steady CIRCULAR RED signal indications until the rail traffic clears the grade crossing and no other rail traffic is detected.

A queue cutter signal operating in an actuated mode shall display straight-through GREEN ARROW signal indications except when it receives an actuation from the downstream vehicle presence detection system or is preempted by the approach of rail traffic. When it receives an actuation from the vehicle presence detection system, the queue cutter signal shall finish timing any active minimum green interval, if used, and then display steady CIRCULAR YELLOW signal indications during the yellow change interval (see [[902.6 Steady (Stop-and-Go) Operation of Traffic Control Signals (MUTCD Chapter 4F) #902.6.17|EPG 902.6.17]]) followed by steady CIRCULAR RED signal indications. When no preemption call is present and the queue length is such that no vehicles are detected in the detection zone of the downstream vehicle presence detection system, the queue cutter signal shall finish timing any active minimum red interval, if used, and then return to the display of straight-through GREEN ARROW signal indications.

The failure modes of the queue cutter signal control system and vehicle presence detection circuitry shall be evaluated and accounted for in the design of any such system. Fail-safe design techniques shall be used in the system design. If a queue detector fails, the queue cutter signal shall display flashing CIRCULAR RED signal indications until the normal functioning of the detection system is restored.

'''Support. '''The storage area for mandatory left-turn and right-turn lanes at signalized intersections that are downstream from grade crossings sometimes extends from the signalized intersection back to and across the grade crossing. In such cases, drivers that are in the turn lane are required to make a straight-through movement when they cross the track(s) and then are required to make a turning movement when they reach the downstream signalized intersection.

'''Guidance. '''A separate queue cutter signal face for the mandatory left-turn lane and/or right-turn lane should be provided in addition to the queue cutter signal faces provided for the through movement where both of the following conditions are met:
::A. The storage area for the turn lane extends from the downstream signalized intersection back to and across the grade crossing, and
::B. The green interval for the turning movement at the downstream intersection does not always begin and end simultaneously with the green interval for the adjacent through movement at the downstream intersection.

'''Standard'''. If a separate signal face is provided at a queue cutter signal for separate control of a mandatory left-turn and/or right-turn lane that extends from the downstream signalized intersection back to and across the grade crossing, the separate signal face shall be devoted exclusively to controlling traffic in the turn lane separately from adjacent lanes, and:
::A. Shall be visibility-limited from the adjacent through movement, or
::B. A LEFT (RIGHT) LANE SIGNAL (R10-10b) sign shall be mounted adjacent to the separate signal face controlling traffic in a single turn lane or in the turn lane that is farthest from the adjacent through lane(s) if multiple turn lanes are present for a particular turning movement, and a LEFT (RIGHT) TURN LANE SIGNAL (R10-10c) sign shall be mounted adjacent to the separate signal face controlling traffic in the other turn lanes if multiple turn lanes are present for a particular turning movement.

'''Support. '''Because the signal faces at a queue cutter signal do not always display the same signal indications as the downstream signalized intersection, the approach to the queue cutter signal is considered to be a separate approach from the approach to the downstream signalized intersection. This means that the provisions in [[902.4 Design Features of Traffic Control Signals (MUTCD Chapter 4D) #902.4.5|EPG 902.4.5]] through [[902.4 Design Features of Traffic Control Signals (MUTCD Chapter 4D) #902.4.8|902.4.8]] regarding the number of signal faces, the visibility and aiming of the signal faces, and the lateral and longitudinal positioning of the signal faces apply separately to the approach to the queue cutter signal.

The provisions in [[902.4 Design Features of Traffic Control Signals (MUTCD Chapter 4D) #902.4.7|EPG 902.4.7]] regarding the lateral positioning of separate turn signal faces are applicable to the separate signal faces that are provided at queue cutter signals for a turn lane that extends from the downstream signalized intersection back to and across the grade crossing.

While queue cutter signals and queue jumping signals have similar names, their purpose, design, and operation are quite different. Care must be taken to avoid confusion between queue cutter signals used in conjunction with a grade crossing and queue jumping signals used with transit operations.

=={{SpanID|913.4.13}}913.4.13 Warning Beacons or LED-Enhanced Warning Signs at Grade Crossings (MUTCD Section 8D.13)==

'''Option.''' Warning Beacons (see [[902.18 Flashing Beacons (MUTCD Chapter 4S) #902.18.3|EPG 902.18.3]]) or LEDs within the legend, symbol, or border of the sign (see [[903.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 2A) #903.1.12|EPG 903.1.12]]) may be used to supplement warning signs installed at or on an approach to a grade crossing if additional emphasis is desired for the warning sign. The Warning Beacon or LED-enhanced sign may operate continuously or be activated upon the approach or presence of rail traffic.

'''Support.''' Most of the warning signs that are used at or on an approach to a grade crossing warn of physical conditions that exist at the grade crossing regardless of whether rail traffic is approaching or occupying the grade crossing. In these cases, a Warning Beacon or LED-enhanced sign would typically be operated continuously to enhance the conspicuity of the sign.

'''Standard.''' If a Warning Beacon or LEDs within the legend, symbol, or border of the sign is activated by the approach or presence of rail traffic, the activation of the Warning Beacon or LEDs shall be accomplished by a supervised preemption interconnection using fail-safe design principles (see [[#913.4.9|EPG 913.4.9]]) between the control circuits of the grade crossing warning system and the Warning Beacon or LED-enhanced sign.

'''Support.''' In the event of a system failure, the normal fault state using a fail-safe interconnection for a Warning Beacon or LED-enhanced sign that is activated by the approach or presence of rail traffic at the grade crossing would be for the Warning Beacon or LEDs to operate when no rail traffic is present.

'''Option. '''A Warning Beacon or LED-enhanced sign that is activated by the approach or presence of rail traffic at the grade crossing may continue to operate for a period of time following the passage of the rail traffic to permit the standing queue to dissipate.

'''Guidance. '''If a Warning Beacon or LED-enhanced sign is activated by the approach or presence of rail traffic at the grade crossing, the Warning Beacon or LED-enhanced sign should begin operating prior to the activation of the flashing-light signals at the grade crossing based upon the typical travel time from the location of the Warning Beacon or LED-enhanced sign to the stop line for the grade crossing.

If a Warning Beacon or LED-enhanced sign that is activated by the approach or presence of rail traffic at the grade crossing is operated by commercial AC power, a back-up power system should be provided.

=={{SpanID|913.4.14}}913.4.14 Traffic Control Signals at or Near Highway-LRT Grade Crossings (MUTCD Section 8D.14)==

'''Support. '''There are two types of traffic control signals for controlling vehicular and LRT movements at interfaces of the two modes. The first is the standard traffic control signal described in [[:Category:902 Signals (MUTCD Part 4)|EPG 902]], which is the focus of this article. The other type of signal is referred to as an LRT signal and is discussed in [[#913.4.15|EPG 913.4.15.]]

'''Standard. '''The provisions of [[:Category:902 Signals (MUTCD Part 4)|EPG 902]] and [[#913.4.8 | EPG 913.4.8]] through [[#913.4.12|913.4.12]] relating to traffic control signal design, installation, and operation, including interconnection with nearby automatic gates or flashing-light signals, shall be applicable as appropriate where traffic control signals are used at highway-LRT grade crossings.

If traffic control signals are in operation at an LRT grade crossing that is used by pedestrians, bicyclists, and/or other non-motorized road users, an audible device such as a bell shall also be provided and shall be operated in conjunction with the traffic control signals.

'''Guidance. '''If the highway traffic signal has emergency-vehicle preemption capability, it should be coordinated with LRT operation.

Where LRT operates in a wide median, motor vehicles crossing the tracks and being controlled by both near and far side traffic signal faces should receive a protected left-turn phase from the far side signal face to clear motor vehicles from the crossing when LRT traffic is approaching the crossing.

'''Option. '''Signal indications that permit the movement of motor vehicles, pedestrians, and bicyclists and do not conflict with LRT movements may be provided during LRT phases.

A traffic control signal may be installed in addition to Exit Gate systems and automatic gates at a highway-LRT grade crossing if the crossing occurs within a highway-highway intersection and if the installation of the traffic control signal can be justified based on the warrants described in [[902.3 Traffic Control Signal Needs Studies (MUTCD Chapter 4C) #902.3|EPG 902.3]].

Where a highway-LRT grade crossing is at a location other than an intersection and LRT operating speeds are less than 25 mph, traffic control signals may be used in lieu of flashing-light signals.

'''Support. '''Typical circumstances for using traffic control signals might include:
::A. Geometric conditions preclude the installation of highway-LRT grade crossing warning devices,
::B. LRT vehicles share the same roadway with road users, or
::C. Traffic control signals already exist.

[[902.6 Steady (Stop-and-Go) Operation of Traffic Control Signals (MUTCD Chapter 4F) #902.6.18|EPG 902.6.18]] contains information regarding traffic control signals at or near highway-LRT grade crossings that are not equipped with highway-LRT grade crossing warning devices.

[[902.3 Traffic Control Signal Needs Studies (MUTCD Chapter 4C) #902.3.10|EPG 902.3.10]] describes the Intersection Near a Grade Crossing signal warrant that is intended for use at a location where the proximity to the intersection of a grade crossing on an intersection approach controlled by a STOP or YIELD sign is the principal reason to consider installing a traffic control signal.

'''Guidance. '''When a highway-LRT grade crossing exists within a signalized intersection, consideration should be given to providing separate turn signal faces (see definition in [[:Category:911_General_(MUTCD_Part_1) #911.3.2|EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1C.02)]]) for the movements crossing the tracks.

'''Standard. '''Separate turn signal faces that are provided for turn movements toward the crossing shall display a steady red indication during the approach and/or passage of LRT traffic.

'''Support. '''[[#913.4.10|EPG 913.4.10]] contains information regarding the prohibition of turning movements toward the crossing during preemption.

=={{SpanID|913.4.15}}913.4.15 Use of LRT Signals for Control of LRT Vehicles at Highway-LRT Grade Crossings (MUTCD Section 8D.15)==

'''Guidance'''. LRT signals are not currently used on MoDOT facilities. When considering the use of LRT signals the Highway Safety and Traffic Division should be contacted for guidance.

'''Option. '''LRT signal indications may be used at grade crossings and at intersections in mixed-use alignments in conjunction with standard traffic control signals where special LRT signal phases are used to accommodate turning LRT vehicles or where additional LRT clearance time is desirable.

LRT signal indications may be used at intersections where special signal phases are used for bus movements.

'''Standard. '''If the LRT crossing control is separate from the intersection control, the two shall be interconnected. The LRT signal phase shall not be terminated until after the LRT vehicle has cleared the crossing or intersection.

If a separate set of standard traffic control signal indications (red, yellow, and green circular and arrow indications) is used to control LRT movements, the indications shall be positioned so they are not visible to motorists, pedestrians, and bicyclists (see [[902.4 Design Features of Traffic Control Signals (MUTCD Chapter 4D) #902.4.6|EPG 902.4.6]]).

'''Guidance. '''If a signal face used to control LRT movements cannot be positioned where the indications are not visible to road users, the LRT signal indications shown in [[#fig913.4.15|Figure 913.4.15]] should be used.

'''Standard. '''If special LRT signal indications such as those shown in [[#fig913.4.15|Figure 913.4.15]] are used, the color of the signal indications shall be white.

'''Option. '''If used, individual LRT signal sections may be displayed to form clustered signal faces or multiple LRT signal indications may be displayed in an individual housing.

'''Guidance. '''LRT signal faces should be located at least 3 feet from the nearest highway traffic signal face for the same approach measured either horizontally perpendicular to the approach between the centers of the signal faces or vertically from the center of the lowest signal indication of the top signal face to the center of the highest signal indication of the bottom signal face.

'''Support. '''[[902.6 Steady (Stop-and-Go) Operation of Traffic Control Signals (MUTCD Chapter 4F) #902.6.18|EPG 902.6.18]] contains information about the use of the LRT signal indications shown in [[#fig913.4.15|Figure 913.4.15]] for the control of exclusive bus movements at “queue jumper lanes” and for the control of exclusive bus rapid transit movements on mixed-use alignments.

{{SpanID|fig913.4.15}}
[[File:Figure 913.4.15. Light Rail Transit Signal Indications.jpg|center|thumb|alt= Four examples of signal indications are shown. The first example consists of a horizontal rectangular white bar for “Stop” on a circular black background. The second example consists of a vertical rectangular white bar for “Go (straight)” on a circular black background. The third example consists of a diagonal rectangular white bar pointing up and to the left for “Go (left)” on a circular black background. The fourth example consists of a diagonal rectangular white bar pointing up and to the right for “Go (right)” on a circular black background. |600px| '''Figure 913.4.15.''' Light Rail Transit Signal Indications]]

913.3 Markings (MUTCD Chapter 8C)

2025-12-11T14:41:37Z

HogsettC: /* {{SpanID|913.3.3}}913.3.3 Stop and Yield Lines (MUTCD Section 8C.03) */

[[Category:913 Traffic Control for Railroad and Light Rail Transit Grade Crossings (MUTCD Part 8)|913.3]]
=={{SpanID|913.3.1}}913.3.1 Purpose and Application (MUTCD Section 8C.01)==

'''Support. '''Passive traffic control systems, consisting of signs and pavement markings only, identify and direct attention to the location of a grade crossing and advise road users to reduce their speed or stop at the grade crossing as necessary in order to yield to any rail traffic occupying, or approaching and in proximity to, the grade crossing.

Signs and pavement markings regulate, warn, and guide the road users so that they, as well as LRT vehicle operators on mixed-use alignments, can take appropriate action when approaching a grade crossing.

Unless otherwise provided in this article, the provisions of [[:Category:620 Pavement Marking (MUTCD Part 3)|EPG 620]] are applicable to the design and location of pavement markings at grade crossings.

=={{SpanID|913.3.2}}913.3.2 Grade Crossing Pavement Markings (MUTCD Section 8C.02)==

'''Standard. '''On paved roadways, grade crossing pavement markings shall consist of an X, the letters RR, a no-passing zone marking (on two-lane, two-way highways with center line markings in compliance with [[620.2 Pavement and Curb Markings (MUTCD Chapter 3B) #620.2.1|EPG 620.2.1]], and certain transverse lines as shown with detailed dimensions in Figures [[#fig913.3.2.1|913.3.2.1]] and [[#fig913.3.2.2|913.3.2.2]].

Except as provided in the following two paragraphs, grade crossing pavement markings shall be placed in each approach lane on all paved approaches to highway-rail grade crossings where signals or automatic gates are located, and at all other grade crossings where the posted or statutory highway speed is 40 mph or higher.

Grade crossing pavement markings shall not be required at highway-rail grade crossings where the posted or statutory highway speed is less than 40 mph if the Diagnostic Team determines that other installed devices provide suitable warning and control.

Grade crossing pavement markings shall not be required at highway-rail grade crossings in urban areas if the Diagnostic Team determines that other installed devices provide suitable warning and control.

Grade crossing pavement markings shall be placed in each approach lane on all paved approaches to highway-LRT grade crossings where a Crossbuck sign is placed at the grade crossing.

If grade crossing pavement markings are used on a multi-lane approach to a grade crossing, identical markings shall be placed in each approach lane that crosses the tracks.

All grade crossing pavement markings shall be retroreflective white. All other markings shall be in accordance with [[:Category:620 Pavement Marking (MUTCD Part 3)|EPG 620]].

'''Guidance. '''Where grade crossing pavement markings are used, a portion of the X symbol should be directly opposite the Grade Crossing Advance Warning sign.

'''Option. '''Where determined by the Diagnostic Team, supplemental pavement marking symbol(s) may be placed between the Grade Crossing Advance Warning sign and the grade crossing.

'''Guidance. '''If supplemental pavement marking symbol(s) are placed between the Grade Crossing Advance Warning sign and the grade crossing, the downstream transverse line should be at least 50 feet upstream from the stop or yield line at the grade crossing.

=={{SpanID|913.3.3}}913.3.3 Stop and Yield Lines (MUTCD Section 8C.03)==

'''Guidance. '''On paved roadway approaches to passive grade crossings where a STOP sign is installed in conjunction with the Crossbuck sign, a stop line should be installed to indicate the point behind which motor vehicles are required to stop or as near to that point as practicable.

'''Option. '''On paved roadway approaches to passive grade crossings where a YIELD sign is installed in conjunction with the Crossbuck sign, a yield line (see [[620.2 Pavement and Curb Markings (MUTCD Chapter 3B) #620.2.18|EPG 620.2.18]]) or a stop line may be installed to indicate the point behind which motor vehicles are required to yield or stop or as near to that point as practicable.

{{SpanID|fig913.3.2.1}}
[[File:Figure 913.3.2.1 Example of Placement of Warning Signs and Pavement Markings at Grade Crossings.png|center|thumb|alt=This figure shows a segment of a vertical two-lane roadway with one lane of travel in each direction. At the top of the figure, a symbol of a railroad track is shown, placed diagonally across the roadway at an acute angle, slanting from the northwest on the left to the southeast on the right. Near the bottom of the figure, on the northbound travel lane, an “RXR” pavement marking symbol is shown as a white ""X"" with a white “R” on each side of it.
At the beginning of the pavement marking symbol and to the right of the roadway facing northbound traffic, a W10-1 sign is shown.
Beyond the “RXR” marking further north and “if needed,” a W3-2 sign “OR” a W3-1 sign is shown at the right of the roadway in advance of a solid horizontal white “Stop” line approximately 8 ft upstream from the gate (if present) of the railroad track.|800px| '''Figure 913.3.2.1''' Example of Placement of Warning Signs and Pavement Markings at Grade Crossings]]

{{SpanID|fig913.3.2.2}}
[[File:Figure 913.3.2.2. Grade Crossing Pavement Markings.jpg|center|thumb|alt=A: At the bottom of a vertical section of one lane of a roadway, a white transverse line is shown that extends across the lane. Beyond it and in the center of the lane, a large white “X” is shown with a smaller white “R” on each side of it. At the top of the roadway section and beyond the “X,” another white transverse line is shown.
B: At the bottom of a vertical section one lane of a roadway, a white transverse line is shown that extends across the lane. Beyond it, two white “Rs” are shown next to each other. Beyond the “RR,” a white “X” is shown marked in the lane. At the top of the roadway section and beyond the “X,” another white transverse line is shown.|800px| '''Figure 913.3.2.2.''' Grade Crossing Pavement Markings]]

'''Guidance. '''If a yield line (see [[#fig620.2.18|Figure 620.2.18]]) or stop line is used at a passive grade crossing, it should be a transverse line at a right angle to the traveled way and should be placed no closer than 15 feet in advance of the nearest rail.

'''Standard. '''On paved roadways at grade crossings that are equipped with active control devices such as flashing-light signals, automatic gates, or traffic control signals, a stop line (see [[620.2 Pavement and Curb Markings (MUTCD Chapter 3B) #620.2.18|EPG 620.2.18]]) shall be installed to indicate the point behind which motor vehicles are or might be required to stop.

'''Guidance. '''If a stop line is used at an active grade crossing where road users are controlled by flashing-light signals, it should be a transverse line at a right angle to the traveled way and should be placed approximately 8 feet in advance of the flashing-light signals or automatic gate (if present), whichever is farther from the track(s), but no closer than 15 feet in advance of the nearest rail (see [[#fig913.3.2.1|Figure 913.3.2.1]]).

If a stop line is used at an active grade crossing where road users are controlled by a traffic control signal, it should be a transverse line at a right angle to the traveled way and should be placed no closer than 15 feet in advance of the nearest rail.

'''Standard. '''If a stop line is used at an active grade crossing where road users are controlled by a traffic control signal, it shall be placed such that the lateral and longitudinal positions of the signal faces for the approach comply with the provisions of [[902.4 Design Features of Traffic Control Signals (MUTCD Chapter 4D) #902.4.7|EPG 902.4.7]] and [[902.4 Design Features of Traffic Control Signals (MUTCD Chapter 4D) #902.4.8|902.4.8]].

=={{SpanID|913.3.4}}913.3.4 Lane-Use Arrow Markings (MUTCD Section 8C.04)==

'''Standard. '''Lane-use arrow markings (see [[620.2 Pavement and Curb Markings (MUTCD Chapter 3B) #620.2.22|EPG 620.2.22]]) that indicate that a turning movement must be made or is permitted to be made from a lane that crosses a grade crossing shall not be placed between the stop line for the grade crossing and the track(s).

'''Guidance. '''Lane-use arrow markings that indicate that a turning movement must be made or is permitted to be made from a lane that crosses a grade crossing should not be placed less than 100 feet upstream from the stop line for the grade crossing or less than 20 feet beyond the farthest rail.

=={{SpanID|913.3.5}}913.3.5 Edge Lines, Lane Lines, Center Lines, Raised Pavement Markers, and Tubular Markers (MUTCD Section 8C.05)==

'''Guidance. '''Except as provided in the first three Option paragraphs below, if edge lines (see [[620.2 Pavement and Curb Markings (MUTCD Chapter 3B) #620.2.10|EPG 620.2.10]]), lane lines (see [[620.2 Pavement and Curb Markings (MUTCD Chapter 3B) #620.2.7|EPG 620.2.7]]), or center lines (see [[620.2 Pavement and Curb Markings (MUTCD Chapter 3B) #620.2.1|EPG 620.2.1]]) are used on an approach to a grade crossing, the edge lines, lane lines, and center lines should extend up to and across the grade crossing to reduce the likelihood that road users might inadvertently turn into the track area.

If crossing surface maintenance or highway approach maintenance is performed that alters the markings, the removal or replacement of the markings, raised pavement markers, and/or tubular markers should be coordinated with the road authority and the railroad company or transit agency.

'''Option. '''Edge lines, lane lines, and center lines may be omitted on or between the rails to conform to the requirements of the railroad company and/or transit agency.

Edge lines, lane lines, and center lines may be omitted on or between the rails where the highway profile is sufficiently abrupt to create a hang-up situation for pavement marking equipment with low ground clearance.

The edge lines, lane lines, and center lines may be omitted from the highway surface at a grade crossing if the surface cannot retain the application of the edge line, lane line, or center line marking.

If recommended by a Diagnostic Team, tubular markers (see [[620.8 Channelizing Devices used for Emphasis of Pavement Marking Patterns (MUTCD Chapter 3I) #620.8.2|EPG 620.8.2]]) may be used to supplement the edge lines that extend up to and across the grade crossing.

'''Guidance. '''Tubular markers should be installed in accordance with the clearance requirements of the railroad company and/or transit agency.

'''Standard. '''The color under both daytime and nighttime conditions of raised pavement markers or tubular markers that are used at a grade crossing shall be the same color as the edge line, lane line, or center line that they supplement.

913.2 Signs (MUTCD Chapter 8B)

2025-12-11T14:39:52Z

HogsettC: /* {{SpanID|913.2.4}}913.2.4 Crossbuck Assemblies with YIELD or STOP Signs at Passive Grade Crossings (MUTCD Section 8B.04) */

[[Category:913 Traffic Control for Railroad and Light Rail Transit Grade Crossings (MUTCD Part 8)|913.2]]
=={{SpanID|913.2.1}}913.2.1 Purpose and Application (MUTCD Section 8B.01) ==

'''Support. '''Passive traffic control systems, consisting of signs and pavement markings only, identify and direct attention to the location of a grade crossing and advise road users to reduce their speed or stop at the grade crossing as necessary in order to yield to any rail traffic occupying, or approaching and in proximity to, the grade crossing.

Signs and markings regulate, warn, and guide the road users so that they, as well as LRT vehicle operators on mixed-use alignments, can take appropriate action when approaching a grade crossing.

Unless otherwise provided in this article, the provisions of [[:Category:903 Highway Signing (MUTCD Part 2)|EPG 903]] are applicable to the design and location of signs at grade crossings.

=={{SpanID|913.2.2}}913.2.2 Sizes of Grade Crossing Signs (MUTCD Section 8B.02) ==

'''Standard. '''The sizes of grade crossing signs shall be as shown in [[#913.2.2|Table 913.2.2]].

{{SpanID|tab913.2.2}}
<div style="width: 100%; text-align: center">
{| class="wikitable" style="text-align: center; display:inline-table;"
|+ Table 913.2.2, Railroad and Light Rail Transit Grade Crossings Sign and Plaque Sizes
|-
! rowspan="2" | Sign or Plaque
! rowspan="2" | Sign Designation
! rowspan="2" | EPG Article
! colspan="3" | Conventional Road
(in. x in.)
! colspan="1" | Freeway/Expressway
(in. x in.)
|-
! Standard
! Oversized
! Special
! Mainline and Ramps

|-
| style="text-align: left" | STOP
| R1-1
| -
| 36 x 36
| 48 x 48
| -
| 48 x 48
|-
| style="text-align: left" | YIELD
| R1-2
| -
| 48 x 48
| 60 x 60
| -
| 60 x 60
|-
| style="text-align: left" | No Right Turn - Train (symbol)
| R3-1a
| [[913.4 Flashing-Light Signals, Automatic Gates, and Traffic Control Signals (MUTCD Chapter 8D) #913.4.10| 913.4.10]]
| 24 x 30
| 30 x 36
| -
| -
|-
| style="text-align: left" | No Left Turn - Train (symbol)
| R3-2a
| [[913.4 Flashing-Light Signals, Automatic Gates, and Traffic Control Signals (MUTCD Chapter 8D) #913.4.10| 913.4.10]]
| 24 x 30
| 30 x 36
| -
| -
|-
| style="text-align: left" | DO NOT STOP ON TRACKS
| R8-8
| [[#913.2.7|913.2.7]]
| 24 x 30
| 24 x 30
| -
| 36 x 48
|-
| style="text-align: left" | STOP HERE ON RED
| R10-6
| [[#913.2.8|913.2.8]]
| 24 x 36
| 24 x 36
| -
| -
|-
| style="text-align: left" | LEFT (RIGHT) LANE SIGNAL
| R10-10b
| [[913.4 Flashing-Light Signals, Automatic Gates, and Traffic Control Signals (MUTCD Chapter 8D) #913.4.11| 913.4.11]], [[913.4 Flashing-Light Signals, Automatic Gates, and Traffic Control Signals (MUTCD Chapter 8D) #913.4.12| 913.4.12]]
| 24 x 30
| 30 x 36
| -
| 30 x 36
|-
| style="text-align: left" | LEFT (RIGHT) TURN LANE SIGNAL
| R10-10C
| [[913.4 Flashing-Light Signals, Automatic Gates, and Traffic Control Signals (MUTCD Chapter 8D) #913.4.11| 913.4.11]], [[913.4 Flashing-Light Signals, Automatic Gates, and Traffic Control Signals (MUTCD Chapter 8D) #913.4.12| 913.4.12]]
| 24 x 30
| 30 x 36
| -
| 30 x 36
|-
| style="text-align: left" | Grade Crossing (Crossbuck) [Railroad Responsibility]
| R15-1
| [[#913.2.3|913.2.3]]
| 48 x 9
| -
| -
| 48 x 9
|-
| style="text-align: left" | Number of Tracks (plaque) [Railroad Responsibility]
| R15-2P
| [[#913.2.3|913.2.3]]
| 27 x 18
| -
| -
| 27 x 18
|-
| style="text-align: left" | EXEMPT
| R15-3P
| [[#913.2.9|913.2.9]]
| 24 x 12
| -
| -
| -
|-
| style="text-align: left" | Railroad Crossing
| W10-1
| [[#913.2.6|913.2.6]]
| 42 dia.
| -
| -
| 48 dia.
|-
| style="text-align: left" | EXEMPT
| W10-1aP
| [[#913.2.6|913.2.6]]
| 24 x 12
| -
| -
| -
|-
| style="text-align: left" | Crossroad Railroad Crossing
| W10-2
| [[#913.2.6|913.2.6]]
| 36 x 36
| 48 x 48
| -
| 48 x 48
|-
| style="text-align: left" | Side Road Railroad Crossing
| W10-3
| [[#913.2.6|913.2.6]]
| 36 x 36
| 48 x 48
| -
| 48 x 48
|-
| style="text-align: left" | T-Intersection Railroad Crossing
| W10-4
| [[#913.2.6|913.2.6]]
| 36 x 36
| 48 x 48
| -
| 48 x 48
|-
| style="text-align: left" | Low Ground Clearance (symbol)
| W10-5
| [[#913.2.14|913.2.14]]
| 36 x 36
| 48 x 48
| -
| 48 x 48
|-
| style="text-align: left" | Low Ground Clearance (plaque)
| W10-5P
| [[#913.2.14|913.2.14]]
| 30 x 24
| -
| -
| 30 x 24
|-
| style="text-align: left" | No Train Horn (plaque)
| W10-9P
| [[#913.2.15|913.2.15]]
| 30 x 24
| -
| -
| 30 x 24
|-
| style="text-align: left" | Emergency Notification [Railroad Responsibility]
| I13-1
| [[#913.2.16|913.2.16]]
| 12 x 9
| -
| -
| 12 x 9
|-
| colspan=10 style="text-align: left" | '''Notes:'''
# Dimensions in inches are shown as width x height
# [[914.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 9A)#tab914.1.2|Table 914.1.2]] shows the minimum sizes that may be used for grade crossing signs and plaques that face shared-use paths and pedestrian facilities
|}
</div>

=={{SpanID|913.2.3}}913.2.3 Grade Crossing (Crossbuck) Sign (R15-1) and Number of Tracks Plaque (R15-2P) at Active and Passive Grade Crossings (MUTCD Section 8B.03) ==
<div style="text-align: center;">
<div style="display:inline-block;vertical-align: bottom;">

[[File:R15-1.png|thumb|none|alt=|150px|'''R15-1''']]

</div>
<div style="display:inline-block;vertical-align: bottom;">

[[File:R15-2P.png|thumb|none|alt=|150px|'''R15-2P''']]

</div>
</div>

'''Standard. '''The Grade Crossing (R15-1) sign, commonly identified as the Crossbuck sign, shall be retroreflective white with the words RAILROAD CROSSING in black lettering, mounted as shown in [[#fig913.2.3|Figure 913.2.3]].

'''Support. '''The Grade Crossing (R15-1) sign and Number of Tracks (R15-2P) plaque are provided by the appropriate railroad company. Railroad companies and/or transit agencies are responsible for the installation and maintenance of these signs.

{{SpanID|fig913.2.3}}
[[File:Figure 913.2.3 Crossbuck Assembly with a YIELD or STOP Sign on the Crossbuck Sign Support.jpg|center|thumb|alt=A sign assembly composed of an R15-1 sign mounted above an R15-2P plaque is shown. This assembly is shown mounted on a sign support above either a “YIELD” sign or a “STOP” sign.
A white or red retroreflective strip is shown attached on the front of the sign support. A white retroreflective strip is shown attached on the back of the support. The center of the crossbuck is shown at a dimensioned distance of 9 ft above the roadway level. |800px| '''Figure 913.2.3''' Crossbuck Assembly with a YIELD or STOP Sign on the Crossbuck Sign Support 
'''Notes:'''
<ol>
<li>YIELD or STOP signs are used only at passive crossings. A STOP sign is used only if an engineering study determines that it is appropriate for that particular approach.</li>
<li>Mounting height shall be at least 4 feet for installations of YIELD or STOP signs on existing Crossbuck sign supports.</li>
<li>Mounting height shall be at least 5 feet for new installations in rural areas and at least 7 feet for new installations in areas where parking or pedestrian movements are likely to occur.</li>
</ol>
]]

'''Standard. '''As a minimum, one Crossbuck sign shall be used on each highway approach to every highway-rail grade crossing, alone or in combination with other traffic control devices.

As a minimum, one Crossbuck sign shall be used on each highway approach to every highway-LRT grade crossing where flashing-light signals or automatic gates are used, alone or in combination with other traffic control devices.

'''Option. '''A Crossbuck sign may be used on a highway approach to a highway-LRT grade crossing where flashing-light signals or automatic gates are not used, alone or in combination with other traffic control devices.

'''Standard'''. If there are two or more tracks at a grade crossing, the number of tracks shall be indicated on a supplemental Number of Tracks (R15-2P) plaque of inverted T shape mounted below the Crossbuck sign in the manner shown in [[#fig913.2.3|Figure 913.2.3]].

On each approach to a highway-rail grade crossing and, if used, on each approach to a highway-LRT grade crossing, the Crossbuck sign shall be installed on the right-hand side of the highway on each approach to the grade crossing. Where restricted sight distance or unfavorable highway geometry exists on an approach to a grade crossing, or where there is a one-way multi-lane approach, an additional Crossbuck sign shall be installed on the left-hand side of the highway, possibly placed back-to-back with the Crossbuck sign for the opposite approach or otherwise located so that two Crossbuck signs are displayed for that approach.

A strip of retroreflective white material not less than 2 inches in width shall be used on the back of each blade of each Crossbuck sign for the length of each blade at all passive grade crossings, except those where Crossbuck signs have been installed back-to-back or where double-faced Crossbuck signs have been installed.

'''Option. '''A strip of retroreflective white material not less than 2 inches in width may be used on the back of each blade of each Crossbuck sign for the length of each blade at active grade crossings.

'''Guidance. '''Minimum clearance dimensions for crossbuck signs relative to the proximity to the nearest rail should conform to the requirements of the railroad company and/or transit agency, and MoDOT Multimodal Division (Rail Section).

Except as provided in the Option paragraph below, the mounting height of Crossbuck signs, measured vertically from the center of the sign to the elevation of the near edge of the pavement, should be approximately 9 feet (see [[#fig913.2.3|Figure 913.2.3]]).

'''Option. '''The 9-foot mounting height for the Crossbuck sign may be varied as required by local conditions and may be increased to accommodate signs mounted below the Crossbuck sign.

=={{SpanID|913.2.4}}913.2.4 Crossbuck Assemblies with YIELD or STOP Signs at Passive Grade Crossings (MUTCD Section 8B.04)==

'''Support. '''The MoDOT Multimodal Division developed a [[:File:Stop_Sign_Fact_Sheet_non_fillable.pdf|Stop Sign Fact Sheet]] Sheet to help determine if a Stop sign should be displayed below the Crossbuck sign instead of a Yield sign at passive railroad crossings.

'''Standard. '''A Crossbuck Assembly shall consist of a Crossbuck (R15-1) sign, and a Number of Tracks (R15-2P) plaque if two or more tracks are present, that complies with the provisions of [[#913.2.3|EPG 913.2.3]], and either a YIELD (R1-2) or STOP (R1-1) sign installed on the same support, except as provided in the Option paragraph below. YIELD or STOP signs used at passive grade crossings shall be installed in compliance with the provisions of [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2.17|EPG 903.2.17]], and Figures [[#fig913.2.3|913.2.3]], [[#fig913.2.4.1|913.2.4.1]], and [[#fig913.2.4.2|913.2.4.2]].

At all public highway-rail grade crossings that are not equipped with the active traffic control systems that are described in [[913.4 Flashing-Light Signals, Automatic Gates, and Traffic Control Signals (MUTCD Chapter 8D) #913.4| EPG 913.4]], except crossings where road users are directed by an authorized person on the ground to not enter the crossing at all times that an approaching train is about to occupy the crossing, a Crossbuck Assembly shall be installed on the right-hand side of the highway on each approach to the highway-rail grade crossing.

If a Crossbuck sign is used on a highway approach to a public highway-LRT grade crossing that is not equipped with the active traffic control systems that are described in [[913.4 Flashing-Light Signals, Automatic Gates, and Traffic Control Signals (MUTCD Chapter 8D) #913.4| EPG 913.4]], a Crossbuck Assembly shall be installed on the right-hand side of the highway on each approach to the highway-LRT grade crossing.

Where restricted sight distance or unfavorable highway geometry exists on an approach to a grade crossing that has a Crossbuck Assembly, or where there is a one-way multi-lane approach, an additional Crossbuck Assembly shall be installed on the left-hand side of the highway.

A YIELD sign shall be the default traffic control device for Crossbuck Assemblies on all highway approaches to passive grade crossings unless an engineering study performed by the MoDOT Multimodal Division (Rail Section) or highway authority having jurisdiction over the roadway approach determines that a STOP sign is appropriate.

'''Guidance. '''The use of STOP signs at passive grade crossings should be limited to unusual conditions where requiring all motor vehicles to make a full stop is determined to be necessary by a Diagnostic Team. Among the factors that should be considered by the Diagnostic Team are the line of sight to approaching rail traffic (giving due consideration to seasonal crops or vegetation beyond both the highway and railroad or LRT rights-of-ways), the number of tracks, the speeds of trains or LRT equipment and motor vehicles, and the crash history at the grade crossing.

Where a passive grade crossing is located on a stop-controlled approach and the clear storage distance is less than the length of the design vehicle, and where adequate sight distance to oncoming traffic on the parallel roadway is available to road users stopped on the approach to the grade crossing, consideration should be given to installing a STOP sign at the Crossbuck Assembly instead of at the highway-highway intersection. If the STOP sign is installed at the Crossbuck Assembly instead of at the highway-highway intersection, the Diagnostic Team should consider installing some other intersection traffic control device at the highway-highway intersection.



{{SpanID|fig913.2.4.1}}
[[File:Figure 913.2.4.1. Crossbuck Assembly with a YIELD or STOP Sign on a Separate Sign Support (Sheet 1 of 2).jpg|center|thumb|alt=The first example shows the signs in a ”rural area.” It shows a “YIELD” sign mounted on a sign support to the right of a “roadway.” An optional red retroreflective strip is shown attached on the front of the sign support. The base of the sign is shown as a dimensioned distance of 5 ft MIN from the ground. The left edge of the sign is shown as a dimensioned distance of 6 ft MIN from the near edge of the traveled way.
An R15-1 sign mounted on a sign support is shown to the right of the “YIELD” sign. The left arms of the R15-1 sign are shown overhanging the “YIELD” sign with a dimensioned distance of “2 inches MIN” between the top of the “YIELD” sign and the bottom of the arm of the R15-1 sign. The R15-1 sign is shown with a white retroreflective strip on the front and back of the sign support.
The second example shows the signs in an “area with pedestrian movements or parking.” It shows a taller “YIELD” sign mounted on a sign support to the right of a curb. A red retroreflective strip is shown attached on the front of the sign support. The base of the sign is shown as a dimensioned distance of 7 ft MIN from the ground. The left edge of the sign is shown as a dimensioned distance of 2 ft MIN from the near edge of the face of the curb.
An R15-1 sign mounted on a sign support is shown to the right of the “YIELD” sign. The left arms of the R15-1 sign are shown a dimensioned distance of 2 inches MIN to the right of the “YIELD” sign. The R15-1 sign is shown with a white retroreflective strip on the front and back of the sign support.|800px| '''Figure 913.2.4.1.''' Crossbuck Assembly with a YIELD or STOP Sign on a Separate Sign Support ''(Sheet 1 of 2)'' 
'''Notes:'''
<ol>
<li>YIELD signs are used only at passive crossings.</li>
<li>Place the face of the signs in the same plane and place the YIELD sign closer to the traveled way. Provide a 2-inch minimum separation between the edge of the Crossbuck sign and the edge of the YIELD sign.</li>
</ol>
]]

{{SpanID|fig913.2.4.2}}
[[File:Figure 913.2.4.2 Crossbuck Assembly with a YIELD or STOP Sign on a Separate Sign Support (Sheet 2 of 2).jpg|center|thumb|alt= The first example shows the signs in a ”rural area.” It shows a “STOP” sign mounted on a sign support to the right of a “roadway.” An optional red retroreflective strip is shown attached on the front of the sign support. The base of the sign is shown as a dimensioned distance of 5 ft MIN from the ground. The left edge of the sign is shown as a dimensioned distance of 6 ft MIN from the near edge of the traveled way.
An R15-1 sign mounted on a sign support is shown to the right of the “STOP” sign. The left arms of the R15-1 sign are shown overhanging the “STOP” sign with a dimensioned distance of “2 inches MIN” between the top of the “STOP” sign and the bottom of the arm of the R15-1 sign. The R15-1 sign is shown with a white retroreflective strip on the front and back of the sign support.
The second example shows the signs in an “area with pedestrian movements or parking.” It shows a taller “STOP” sign mounted on a sign support to the right of a curb. A red retroreflective strip is shown attached on the front of the sign support. The base of the sign is shown as a dimensioned distance of 7 ft MIN from the ground. The left edge of the sign is shown as a dimensioned distance of 2 ft MIN from the near edge of the face of the curb.
An R15-1 sign mounted on a sign support is shown to the right of the “STOP” sign. The left arms of the R15-1 sign are shown a dimensioned distance of 2 inches MIN to the right of the “STOP” sign. The R15-1 sign is shown with a white retroreflective strip on the front and back of the sign support.|800px| '''Figure 913.2.4.2''' Crossbuck Assembly with a YIELD or STOP Sign on a Separate Sign Support ''(Sheet 2 of 2)'' 
'''Notes:'''
<ol>
<li>STOP signs are used only at passive crossings and only if an engineering study determines that it is appropriate for that particular approach.</li>
<li>Place the face of the signs in the same plane and place the STOP sign closer to the traveled way. Provide a 2-inch minimum separation between the edge of the Crossbuck sign and the edge of the STOP sign.</li>
</ol>
]]

'''Standard. '''If a Crossbuck Assembly is installed on the approach to a passive grade crossing located at a highway-highway intersection controlled by a traffic control signal that is not interconnected with the grade crossing and not preempted by the approach of rail traffic, a Diagnostic Team shall be convened to determine the appropriate traffic control devices. A STOP sign shall not be installed on a Crossbuck Assembly in this situation.

'''Support. '''[[913.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 8A) #913.1.1|EPG 913.1.1]] through [[913.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 8A) #913.1.5|EPG 913.1.5]] contain information regarding the responsibilities of the Diagnostic Team, highway agency, MoDOT Multimodal Division (Rail Section), and the railroad company or transit agency regarding the selection, design, and operation of traffic control devices placed at grade crossings.

'''Option. '''If a YIELD or STOP sign is installed for a Crossbuck Assembly at a grade crossing, it may be installed on the same support as the Crossbuck sign or it may be installed on a separate support at a point where the motor vehicle is to stop, or as near to that point as practicable, but in either case, the YIELD or STOP sign is considered to be a part of the Crossbuck Assembly.

'''Standard. '''If a YIELD or STOP sign is installed on an existing Crossbuck sign support, the mounting height, measured vertically from the bottom of the YIELD or STOP sign to the top of the curb, or in the absence of curb, measured vertically from the bottom of the YIELD or STOP sign to the elevation of the near edge of the traveled way, shall be at least 4 feet [[#fig913.2.3|Figure 913.2.3]]).

If a Crossbuck Assembly is installed on a new sign support (see [[#fig913.2.3|Figure 913.2.3]]) or if the YIELD or STOP sign is installed on a separate support (see Figures [[#fig913.2.4.1|913.2.4.1]] and [[#fig913.2.4.2|913.2.4.2]]), the mounting height, measured vertically from the bottom of the YIELD or STOP sign to the top of the curb, or in the absence of curb, measured vertically from the bottom of the YIELD or STOP sign to the elevation of the near edge of the traveled way, shall be at least 5 feet in rural areas and shall be at least 7 feet in areas where parking or pedestrian movements are likely to occur.

'''Guidance. '''If a YIELD or STOP sign is installed for a Crossbuck Assembly at a grade crossing on a separate support than the Crossbuck sign (see Figures [[#fig913.2.4.1|913.2.4.1]] and [[#fig913.2.4.2|913.2.4.2]]), the YIELD or STOP sign should be placed in the same plane as the Crossbuck sign and closer to the traveled way than the Crossbuck sign. The minimum separation between the nearest point of the YIELD or STOP sign and the nearest point of the Crossbuck sign should be 2 inches as shown in Figures [[#fig913.2.4.1|913.2.4.1]] and [[#fig913.2.4.2|913.2.4.2]].

'''Support. '''The meaning of a Crossbuck Assembly that includes a YIELD sign is that a road user approaching the grade crossing needs to be prepared to decelerate, and when necessary, yield the right-of-way to any rail traffic that might be occupying the crossing or might be approaching and in such close proximity to the crossing that it would be unsafe for the road user to cross.

Certain commercial motor vehicles and school buses are required to stop at all grade crossings in accordance with 49 CFR 392.10 even if a YIELD sign (or just a Crossbuck sign) is posted.

The meaning of a Crossbuck Assembly that includes a STOP sign is that a road user approaching the grade crossing must come to a full stop not less than 15 feet short of the nearest rail, and remain stopped while the road user determines if there is rail traffic either occupying the crossing or approaching and in such close proximity to the crossing that the road user must yield the right-of-way to rail traffic. The road user is permitted to proceed when it is safe to cross.

'''Standard. '''A vertical strip of retroreflective white material, not less than 2 inches in width, shall be used on each Crossbuck support at passive grade crossings for the full length of the back of the support from the Crossbuck sign or Number of Tracks plaque to within 2 feet above the near edge of the roadway, except as provided in the first Option paragraph below. A white retroreflective strip wrapped around a round support for the full length of the support from the Crossbuck Sign or Number of Tracks plaque to within 2 feet above the near edge of the roadway shall satisfy this requirement as long as the round support has an outside diameter of at least 2 inches.

'''Option. '''The vertical strip of retroreflective material may be omitted from the back sides of Crossbuck sign supports installed on one-way streets and at pathway or sidewalk grade crossings (see [[913.5 Pathway Grade Crossings (MUTCD Chapter 8E) #913.5.5|EPG 913.5.5]]).

If a YIELD or STOP sign is installed on the same support as the Crossbuck sign, a vertical strip of red (see [[903.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 2A) #903.1.11|EPG 903.1.11]]) or white retroreflective material that is at least 2 inches wide may be used on the front of the support from the YIELD or STOP sign to within 2 feet above the near edge of the roadway.

'''Standard. '''If a Crossbuck sign support at a passive grade crossing does not include a YIELD or STOP sign (either because the YIELD or STOP sign is placed on a separate support or because a YIELD or STOP sign is not present on the approach), a vertical strip of retroreflective white material, not less than 2 inches in width, shall be used for the full length of the front of the support from the Crossbuck sign or Number of Tracks plaque to within 2 feet above the near edge of the roadway. A white retroreflective strip wrapped around a round support for the full length of the support from the Crossbuck Sign or Number of Tracks plaque to within 2 feet above the near edge of the roadway shall satisfy this requirement as long as the round support has an outside diameter of at least 2 inches.

At all grade crossings where YIELD or STOP signs are installed, Yield Ahead (W3-2) or Stop Ahead (W3-1) signs shall also be installed if the criteria for their installation in [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.29|EPG 903.3.29]] is met.

'''Support. '''[[913.3 Purpose and Application (MUTCD Chapter 8C) #913.3.3|EPG 913.3.3]] contains provisions regarding the use of stop lines or yield lines at grade crossings.

=={{SpanID|913.2.5}}913.2.5 Use of STOP (R1-1) or YIELD (R1-2) Signs without Crossbuck Signs at Highway-LRT Grade Crossings (MUTCD Section 8B.05) ==

'''Guidance. '''The use of only STOP or YIELD signs for road users at highway-LRT grade crossings should be limited to those crossings where the need and feasibility is determined by the Diagnostic Team. Such crossings should have all of the following characteristics:
::A. The crossing roadways are secondary in character (such as a minor street with one lane in each direction, an alley, or a driveway) with low traffic volumes and low speed limits. The specific thresholds of traffic volumes and speed limits should be determined by the local agencies.
::B. The line of sight for an approaching LRT operator is adequate from a sufficient distance such that the operator can sound an audible signal and bring the LRT equipment to a stop before arriving at the crossing.
::C. The road user has sufficient sight distance at the stop line to permit the vehicle to cross the tracks before the arrival of the LRT equipment.
::D. If at an intersection of two roadways, the intersection does not meet the warrants for a traffic control signal as provided in [[902.3 Traffic Control Signal Needs Studies (MUTCD Chapter 4C) #902.3|EPG 902.3]].
::E. The LRT tracks are located such that motor vehicles are not likely to stop on the tracks while waiting to enter a crossroad or highway.

'''Standard. '''For all highway-LRT grade crossings where only STOP (R1-1) or YIELD (R1-2) signs are installed, the placement shall comply with the requirements of [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2.17|EPG 903.2.17]]. Stop Ahead (W3-1) or Yield Ahead (W3-2) Advance Warning signs shall also be installed if the criteria for their installation given in [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.29|EPG 903.3.29]] is met.

=={{SpanID|913.2.6}}913.2.6 Grade Crossing Advance Warning Signs (W10-1 through W10-4) (MUTCD Section 8B.06) ==

<div style="text-align: center;">
<div style="display:inline-block;vertical-align: bottom;">

[[File:W10-1.png|thumb|none|alt=|150px|'''W10-1''']]

</div>
<div style="display:inline-block;vertical-align: bottom;">

[[File:W10-1aP.png|thumb|none|alt=|150px|'''W10-1aP''']]

</div>
<div style="display:inline-block;vertical-align: bottom;">

[[File:W10-2.png|thumb|none|alt=|150px|'''W10-2''']]

</div>
<div style="display:inline-block;vertical-align: bottom;">

[[File:W10-4.png|thumb|none|alt=|150px|'''W10-4''']]

</div>
</div>

'''Standard. '''A Grade Crossing Advance Warning (W10-1) sign shall be used on each highway in advance of every grade crossing, except in the following circumstances:
::A. On an approach to a grade crossing from an intersection with a parallel highway if the distance from the nearest rail of the tracks to the edge of the parallel roadway is less than 100 feet and W10-2, W10-3, or W10-4 signs are used on the approaches of the parallel highway (see the third Standard paragraph below);
::B. In business or commercial areas where active grade crossing traffic control systems are in use;
::C. Where physical conditions do not permit even a partially effective display of the sign; or
::D. At highway-LRT grade crossings where Crossbuck signs are not used (see [[#913.2.3|EPG 913.2.3]]).

The placement of the Grade Crossing Advance Warning sign shall be in accordance with [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.4|EPG 903.3.4]] and [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #tab903.3.3|Table 903.3.3]].

If a YIELD or STOP sign is present at a passive grade crossing, a Yield Ahead (W3-2) or Stop Ahead (W3-1) Advance Warning sign shall also be installed if the criteria for their installation given in [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.29|EPG 903.3.29]] is met. If a Yield Ahead or Stop Ahead sign is installed on the approach to the crossing, the W10-1 sign shall be installed upstream from the Yield Ahead or Stop Ahead sign. The Yield Ahead or Stop Ahead sign shall be located in accordance with [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #tab903.3.3|Table 903.3.3]]. The minimum distance between the signs shall be in accordance with [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.4|EPG 903.3.4]] and [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #tab903.3.3|Table 903.3.3]].

'''Option. '''On divided highways and one-way streets, an additional W10-1 sign may be installed on the left-hand side of the roadway.

'''Standard. '''If the distance between the tracks and a parallel highway, from the nearest rail of the tracks to the edge of the parallel roadway, is less than 100 feet, a W10-2, W10-3, or W10-4 sign shall be installed on each approach of the parallel highway to warn road users making a turn that they will encounter a grade crossing soon after making a turn, and a W10-1 sign for the approach to the tracks shall not be required to be between the tracks and the parallel highway.

If the W10-2, W10-3, or W10-4 sign is used, sign placement in accordance with the guidelines for Intersection Warning signs in [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #tab903.3.3|Table 903.3.3]] using the speed of through traffic shall be measured from the highway intersection.

'''Guidance.''' If the distance between the tracks and the parallel highway, from the nearest rail of the tracks to the edge of the parallel roadway, is 100 feet or more, a W10-1 sign should be installed in advance of the grade crossing, and the W10-2, W10-3, or W10-4 sign should not be used on the parallel highway.

=={{SpanID|913.2.7}}913.2.7 DO NOT STOP ON TRACKS Sign (R8-8) (MUTCD Section 8B.07) ==

<div style="text-align: center;"><div style="display:inline-block;vertical-align: middle;">[[File:R8-8.png|thumb|none|alt=|150px|'''R8-8''']]</div>
</div>

'''Guidance. '''If motor vehicle queues are likely to extend onto the tracks, a DO NOT STOP ON TRACKS (R8-8) sign should be used.

'''Support. '''Locations where motor vehicles could queue onto the grade crossing include intersections where a STOP or YIELD sign is installed downstream of the grade crossing, where there is a downstream circular intersection, or where there is a pre-signal installed at the grade crossing.

'''Guidance. '''The R8-8 sign, if used, should be located on the right-hand side of the highway on either the near or far side of the grade crossing, depending upon which position provides better visibility to approaching drivers.

'''Option. '''DO NOT STOP ON TRACKS signs may be placed on both sides of the track.

On divided highways and one-way streets, a second DO NOT STOP ON TRACKS sign may be placed on the near or far left-hand side of the highway at the grade crossing to further improve the visibility of the sign.

=={{SpanID|913.2.8}}913.2.8 STOP HERE ON RED Signs (R10-6) (MUTCD Section 8B.10) ==

<div style="text-align: center;"><div style="display:inline-block;vertical-align: middle;">[[File:R10-6.png|thumb|none|alt=|150px|'''R10-6''']]</div>
</div>

'''Support. '''The STOP HERE ON RED (R10-6) sign defines and facilitates observance of stop lines at traffic control signals.

'''Option. '''STOP HERE ON RED signs may be used at locations where motor vehicles frequently violate the stop line or where it is not obvious to road users where to stop.

'''Guidance. '''If possible, stop lines should be placed at a point where the motor vehicle driver has adequate sight distance along the track.

=={{SpanID|913.2.9}}913.2.9 EXEMPT Grade Crossing Plaques (R15-3P and W10-1aP) (MUTCD Section 8B.11) ==

<div style="text-align: center;"><div style="display:inline-block;vertical-align: middle;">[[File:R15-3P.png|thumb|none|alt=|150px|'''R15-3P''']]</div>
</div>

'''Option. '''Where authorized by MoDOT Multimodal Division (Rail Section), an EXEMPT (R15-3P) plaque with a white background may be used below the Crossbuck sign or Number of Tracks plaque, if present, at the grade crossing, and an EXEMPT (W10-1aP) plaque with a fluorescent yellow background may be used below the Grade Crossing Advance Warning (W10-1 through W10-4) sign.

Where neither the Crossbuck sign nor the advance warning signs exist for a particular highway-LRT grade crossing, an EXEMPT (R15-3P) plaque with a white background may be placed on its own post on the near right-hand side of the approach to the crossing.

'''Support. '''These plaques inform drivers of motor vehicles carrying passengers for hire, school buses carrying students, or motor vehicles carrying hazardous materials that a stop is not required at certain designated grade crossings, except when rail traffic is approaching or occupying the grade crossing, or the driver’s view is blocked.

=={{SpanID|913.2.10}}913.2.10 Light Rail Transit Only Lane Signs (R15-4 Series) (MUTCD Section 8B.12)==

'''Support. '''Reserved for future use. R15-4 Series signs are not currently used on MoDOT facilities.

=={{SpanID|913.2.11}}913.2.11 Do Not Pass Light Rail Transit Signs (R15-5 and R15-5a) (MUTCD Section 8B.13)==

'''Support. '''Reserved for future use. R15-5 and R15-5a signs are not currently used on MoDOT facilities.

=={{SpanID|913.2.12}}913.2.12 No Motor Vehicles On Tracks Signs (R15-6 and R15-6a) (MUTCD Section 8B.14)==

'''Support. '''Reserved for future use. R15-6 and R15-6a signs are not currently used on MoDOT facilities.

=={{SpanID|913.2.13}}913.2.13 Divided Highway with Light Rail Transit Crossing Signs (R15-7 Series) (MUTCD Section 8B.15)==

'''Support. '''Reserved for future use. R15-7 Series signs are not currently used on MoDOT facilities.

=={{SpanID|913.2.14}}913.2.14 Low Ground Clearance Grade Crossing Sign (W10-5) (MUTCD Section 8B.16)==

<div style="text-align: center;"><div style="display:inline-block;vertical-align: bottom;">[[File:W10-5.png|thumb|none|alt=|150px|'''W10-5''']]</div>
<div style="display:inline-block;vertical-align: bottom;">[[File:W10-5P.png|thumb|none|alt=|150px|'''W10-5P''']]</div>
</div>

'''Guidance. '''If the highway profile conditions are sufficiently abrupt to create a hang-up situation for long wheelbase vehicles or for trailers with low ground clearance, the Low Ground Clearance Grade Crossing (W10-5) sign should be installed in advance of the grade crossing.

'''Standard. '''Because this symbol might not be readily recognizable by the public, the Low Ground Clearance Grade Crossing (W10-5) warning sign shall be accompanied by a LOW GROUND CLEARANCE (W10-5P) educational plaque. The LOW GROUND CLEARANCE educational plaque shall remain in place for at least 3 years after the initial installation of the W10-5 sign (see [[903.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 2A) #903.1.9|EPG 903.1.9]]).

'''Guidance. '''Because other vehicle types and combinations also face the potential risk of hanging up at a grade crossing, word message warning signs and selective exclusion regulatory signs (see [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2.36|EPG 903.2.36]]) for specific vehicle types and combinations should be used in addition to, or in place of, the Low Ground Clearance Grade Crossing (W10-5) sign.

'''Support. '''While not all inclusive, some potential low ground clearance vehicles and combinations include single-unit trucks, buses, motor coaches, low-boy trailers, car carriers, and recreational vehicles.

'''Guidance. '''Auxiliary plaques such as AHEAD, NEXT CROSSING, or USE NEXT CROSSING (with appropriate arrows), or a supplemental distance plaque should be placed below the W10-5 sign at the nearest intersecting highway where a vehicle can detour or at a point on the highway wide enough to permit a U-turn.

If engineering judgment of roadway geometric and operating conditions confirms that motor vehicle speeds across the tracks should be below the posted speed limit, a W13-1P advisory speed plaque should be posted.

A signed detour should be installed to guide potential hang-up vehicles to alternate nearby crossings to avoid the potential hang-up condition.

'''Support. '''Information on ground clearance requirements at grade crossings is available in the 2019 edition of the “American Railway Engineering and Maintenance-of-Way Association’s Engineering Manual,” or in “A Policy on Geometric Design of Highways and Streets,” 2018 Edition, AASHTO.

An inventory of crossings with low ground clearance concerns, including a list of potential vehicle types that could hang up on the crossing, can be useful in tracking locations of low ground clearance crossings. Specific geometric conditions, known incidents, or anecdotal evidence of vehicle hang-ups can also be used to identify crossings with low ground clearance concerns.

=={{SpanID|913.2.15}}913.2.15 NO TRAIN HORN Sign or Plaque (W10-9P) (MUTCD Section 8B.20)==

<div style="text-align: center;"><div style="display:inline-block;vertical-align: bottom;">[[File:W10-9P.png|thumb|none|alt=|150px|'''W10-9P''']]</div>
</div>

'''Standard. '''A NO TRAIN HORN (W10-9P) plaque shall be installed in each direction at each highway-rail grade crossing where a Quiet Zone has been established in compliance with 49 CFR Part 222. Where it is used, a W10-9P plaque shall supplement and be mounted directly below the Grade Crossing Advance Warning (W10-1 through W10-4) sign.

=={{SpanID|913.2.16}}913.2.16 Emergency Notification System Sign (I13-1) (MUTCD Section 8B.27)==

[[File:I13-1.png|center|thumb|alt=I13-1 is shown as a horizontal rectangular blue sign with a white border. It shows the message “REPORT PROBLEM OR EMERGENCY 1-800-XXX-XXXX” in white on the first three lines. “X-ING” in white to the left of “836 597 H” in black on a vertical horizontal white panel on the fourth line. “XYZ RAILROAD” in small white letters on the fifth line. |180px| {{SpanID|fig913.2.15}}'''I13-1 ''']]

'''Support. '''Emergency Notification Signs (I-13) are installed by the Railroad that operates through the crossing.

'''Standard. '''The Emergency Notification System (I13-1) sign shall be installed on each approach at all highway-rail grade crossings, and at all highway-LRT grade crossings with automatic gates or flashing light-signals, to provide information to road users so that they can notify the railroad company or transit agency about emergencies or malfunctioning traffic control devices.

At a highway-rail grade crossing, the Emergency Notification System sign shall, at a minimum, include the USDOT grade crossing inventory number and the emergency contact telephone number.

Where Emergency Notification System signs are used at a highway-LRT grade crossing, they shall, at a minimum, include a unique crossing identifier and the emergency contact telephone number.

The minimum width of the Emergency Notification System sign shall be 12 inches and the minimum height shall be 9 inches. The lettering on Emergency Notification System signs for the telephone number, the grade crossing inventory number, and the explanation of the purpose of the sign shall be composed of numerals and upper-case letters that are at least 1 inch in height.

Emergency Notification System signs shall be retroreflective.

Except as provided in the Option paragraph below, Emergency Notification System signs shall have a white legend and border on a blue background.

'''Option. '''The seven-character grade crossing inventory number may be shown on the sign as a black legend on a white rectangular background.

'''Guidance. '''Except as provided in the first Option paragraph below, Emergency Notification System signs should be attached to the Crossbuck Assemblies or grade crossing signal masts on the right-hand side of each roadway approach to the grade crossing rather than on the railroad or LRT signal control equipment housings. Emergency Notification System signs should be oriented so the face of the sign is approximately parallel or approximately perpendicular to the edge of the roadway or pathway and is visible to road users or pathway users. The visibility of the Emergency Notification System sign should not be obstructed by automatic gates in either the vertical or horizontal position.

The Emergency Notification System signs should be positioned so as to not obstruct any traffic control devices or limit the view of rail traffic approaching the grade crossing.

Emergency Notification System signs mounted on Crossbuck Assemblies or signal masts should only be large enough to provide the necessary contact information. Use of larger signs on Crossbuck Assemblies or signal masts that might obstruct the view of rail traffic or other motor vehicles should be avoided.

At station crossings, Emergency Notification System signs or information should be posted in a conspicuous location.

'''Option. '''Emergency Notification System signs may be located on a separate post. Where located on a separate post, the size of the Emergency Notification System sign may be increased for improved visibility.

Where the improvement of the conspicuity of an Emergency Notification System sign is desired, a solid yellow rectangular header panel with a legend of “NOTICE” in black letters may be used (see [[903.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 2A) #903.1.11|EPG 903.1.11]]).

Additional Emergency Notification System signs may be installed at a grade crossing.

903.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 2A)

2025-12-11T14:33:26Z

HogsettC: /* {{SpanID|903.1.23}}903.1.23 Median Opening Treatments for Divided Highways (MUTCD Section 2A.23) */

[[Category:903 Highway Signing (MUTCD Part 2)|903.0]]
{| align="right" style="margin-left: 15px;"
| __TOC__
|}

=={{SpanID|903.1.1}}903.1.1 Function and Purpose of Signs (MUTCD Section 2A.01)==
'''Support. '''The EPG contains Standards, Guidance, and Options for the signing of all types of highways, and site roadways open to public travel within the right-of-way maintained by MoDOT. The functions of signs are to provide regulations, warnings, and guidance information for road users. Words, symbols, and arrows are used to convey the messages. Signs are not typically used to confirm rules of the road.

Detailed sign requirements are located in the following articles of the EPG:
*[[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B)|EPG 903.2]] - Regulatory Signs and Barricades
*[[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C)|EPG 903.3]] - Warning Signs and Object Markers
*[[903.4_Guide_Signs—Conventional_Roads_(MUTCD_Chapter_2D)|EPG 903.4]] - Guide Signs for Conventional Roads
*[[903.5 Guide Signs - Freeways and Expressways (MUTCD Chapter 2E)|EPG 903.5]] - Guide Signs for Freeways and Expressways
*[[903.6 Toll Road Signs (MUTCD Chapter 2F)|EPG 903.6]] - Toll Road Signs – Not used on MoDOT facilities
*[[903.7 Preferential and Managed Lane Signs (MUTCD Chapter 2G)|EPG 903.7]] - Preferential and Managed Lane Signs – Not used on MoDOT facilities
*[[903.8 General Information Signs (MUTCD Chapter 2H)|EPG 903.8]] - General Information Signs
*[[903.9 General Service Signs (MUTCD Chapter 2I)|EPG 903.9]] - General Service Signs
*[[903.10 Specific Service Signs (MUTCD Chapter 2J)|EPG 903.10]] - Specific Service Signs
*[[903.11 Tourist-Oriented Directional Signs (MUTCD Chapter 2K)|EPG 903.11]] - Tourist-Oriented Directional Signs
*[[903.12 Changeable Message Signs (MUTCD Chapter 2L)|EPG 903.12]] - Changeable Message Signs
*[[903.13 Recreational, Historic Site, and Cultural Interest Area Signs (MUTCD Chapter 2M)|EPG 903.13]] - Recreational, Historic Site, and Cultural Interest Area Signs
*[[903.14 Emergency Management Signs (MUTCD Chapter 2N)|EPG 903.14]] - Emergency Management Signs – Not used on MoDOT facilities

Definitions and acronyms that are applicable to signs are provided in [[:Category:911_General_(MUTCD_Part_1) #911.3.2 | EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1C.02)]].

MoDOT typically will not use signing to confirm rules of the road or state laws. The application of such signing will typically be used when a new law is passed for educational purposes, with the signs remaining in place until the end of their service life and then removed. Some signs may be left in place at strategic locations such as major entry points into the state.

'''Standard. '''The decision to install and maintain signs to confirm rules of the road or state laws shall be made by the MoDOT Highway Safety and Traffic Division along with the MoDOT Executive Leadership Team.

=={{SpanID|903.1.2}}903.1.2 Standardization of Application (MUTCD Section 2A.02)==
'''Support. '''It is recognized that urban traffic conditions differ from those in rural environments, and in many instances signs are applied and located differently. Where pertinent and practical, the EPG sets forth separate recommendations for urban and rural conditions. This generally applies to sign mounting heights.

'''Guidance. '''Signs should be used only where justified by engineering judgment or studies, as provided in [[:Category:911_General_(MUTCD_Part_1) #911.4.3 | EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1D.03)]].

Results from traffic engineering studies of physical and traffic safety or operational factors should indicate the locations where signs are deemed necessary or desirable.

Roadway geometric design and sign application should be coordinated so that signing can be effectively placed to give the road user any necessary regulatory, warning, guidance, and other information.

'''Standard. '''Each standard sign (see first paragraph of [[#903.1.4|EPG 903.1.4]]) shall be displayed only for the specific purpose as prescribed in the EPG. Before any new highway, site roadway open to public travel (see definition in [[:Category:911_General_(MUTCD_Part_1) #911.3.2 | EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1C.02)]]), detour, or temporary route is opened to public travel, all necessary signs shall be in place. Signs required by road conditions or restrictions shall be removed when those conditions cease to exist or the restrictions are withdrawn.

=={{SpanID|903.1.3}}903.1.3 Classification of Signs (MUTCD Section 2A.03) ==
'''Standard. '''Signs shall be defined by their function as follows:
::A. Regulatory signs give notice of traffic laws or regulations.
::B. Warning signs give notice of a situation that might not be readily apparent.
::C. Guide signs show route designations, destinations, directions, distances, services, points of interest, and other geographical, recreational, or cultural information.

'''Support. '''Barricades are described in [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2.60|EPG 903.2.60]] and [[616.11 TTC Zone Channelizing Devices (MUTCD Chapter 6K) #616.11.7|616.11.7]].

Object markers are described in [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.70|EPG 903.3.70]].

=={{SpanID|903.1.4}}903.1.4 Design of Signs (MUTCD Section 2A.04)==
'''Support. '''The EPG shows many standard signs and object markers approved for use on streets, highways, bikeways, and pedestrian crossings. Standard signs and object markers have a standardized design, shape, background, and legend as shown in the EPG.

In the provisions for individual standard signs and object markers, the general appearance of the legend, color, and size are shown in the accompanying tables and illustrations, and are not always detailed in the text.

The MoDOT Highway Safety and Traffic Division maintains design files of standard signs, object markers, alphabets, symbols, and arrows that meet or exceed MUTCD standards and are used to detail, order, and fabricate signs used on MoDOT routes.

The basic requirements of a sign are that it be legible to those for whom it is intended and that it be understandable in time to allow for a proper response. Desirable attributes include:
::A. High visibility by day and night; and
::B. High legibility (adequately-sized letters, symbols, or arrows, and a short legend for quick comprehension by a road user approaching a sign).

Standardized colors and shapes are specified so that the several classes of traffic signs can be promptly recognized. Simplicity and uniformity in design, position, and application are essential for a sign to be effective.

'''Standard. '''The term legend shall include all word messages and symbol and arrow designs that are intended to convey specific meanings.

Uniformity in design shall include shape, color, dimensions, legends, letter style, borders, and illumination or retroreflectivity.

Standardization of these designs does not preclude further improvement by minor modifications to the orientation of symbols (see [[#903.1.9|EPG 903.1.9]]), width of borders, or layout of word messages, but all shapes and colors shall be as indicated.

All symbols (see [[#903.1.9|EPG 903.1.9]]) shall be unmistakably similar to, or mirror images of, the adopted symbol signs, all of which are shown in the FHWA's “Standard Highway Signs” publication (see [[:Category:911_General_(MUTCD_Part_1) #911.1.5 | EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1A.05)]]). Symbols and colors shall not be modified unless otherwise provided in the EPG. All symbols, colors, or other design features for signs not shown in the FHWA's “Standard Highway Signs” publication (see [[:Category:911_General_(MUTCD_Part_1) #911.1.5 | EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1A.05)]]) shall be approved by the MoDOT Highway Safety and Traffic Division and shall follow the MUTCD procedures for experimentation and change described in [[:Category:911_General_(MUTCD_Part_1) #911.2.1 | EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1B.01)]].

Where a standard word message is applicable, the wording shall be as provided in the EPG.

In situations where word messages are necessary other than those provided in the EPG (see the first Option paragraph below), the signs shall be of the same shape and color as standard signs of the same functional type.

Where the legend of a standard sign is a symbol or a combination of a symbol and words, an alternative word legend shall not be allowed in place of the symbol, except as otherwise provided in the EPG.

Where a standard sign provided in the EPG or the FHWA's “Standard Highway Signs” publication (see [[:Category:911_General_(MUTCD_Part_1) #911.1.5 | EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1A.05)]]) is applicable, an alternative legend sign or alternative sign design shall not be allowed in place of the standardized legend or design except as provided in the EPG.

Where a standard sign provided in the EPG or the FHWA's “Standard Highway Signs” publication (see [[:Category:911_General_(MUTCD_Part_1) #911.1.5 | EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1A.05)]]) is applicable, but the legend is variable, such as for destination names, an alternative sign design or dimensions shall not be allowed in place of the standardized design for the non-variable elements except as provided in the EPG.

'''Option. '''The MoDOT Highway Safety and Traffic Division may develop special word legend signs in situations where engineering judgment determines roadway conditions make it necessary to provide road users with additional regulatory, warning, or guidance information, such as when road users need to be notified of special regulations or warned about a situation that might not be readily apparent. Unlike colors that have not been assigned or symbols that have not been approved for signs, new word legend signs may be used without the need for experimentation.

'''Support. '''The message conveyed by some special word legend signs might be unclear to the road user. Although experimentation is not required for such word legends, they might still warrant an evaluation to determine comprehension or possible misinterpretation of the intended message by the road user.

Scanning graphics are graphics designed for scanning by machine, and include bar codes, quick-response (QR) codes or other matrix bar-code formats, or similar graphics.

'''Standard. '''Unless otherwise provided in the EPG for a specific sign or as provided in the Option paragraph below, telephone numbers, Internet addresses, e-mail addresses, domain names, uniform resource locators (URL), metadata tags (“hash-tags”), and scanning graphics (see Support paragraph above) for the purpose of obtaining information (other than those for maintenance or inventory purposes per the provisions of the second Standard paragraph below) shall not be displayed on any sign, plaque, sign panel, or changeable message sign.

'''Option. '''Internet addresses, e-mail addresses, telephone numbers, scanning graphics, or other graphics for the purpose of conveying information may be displayed on the face of signs, plaques, sign panels, and changeable message signs that are oriented away from or otherwise not readily visible to operators of motor vehicles but rather are intended for viewing only by pedestrians, occupants of parked vehicles, and driving automation systems if approved by the MoDOT Highway Safety and Traffic Division.

'''Standard. '''Pictographs (see definition in [[:Category:911_General_(MUTCD_Part_1) #911.3.2 | EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1C.02)]]) shall not be displayed on signs except as specifically provided in the EPG for a particular type of sign. Pictographs shall be simple, dignified, and devoid of any advertising and shall not contain any scanning graphics (see first Support paragraph above) for the purpose of conveying information. When used to represent a political jurisdiction (a State, county, or municipal corporation) the pictograph shall be the official designation adopted by the jurisdiction, except as provided otherwise in the EPG. When used to represent any other type of jurisdiction, the pictograph shall be the official designation adopted by the jurisdiction. When used to represent a college or university, the pictograph shall be the official seal adopted by the institution. College or university pictographs shall not include pictorial representations of university or college programs, or athletic mascots.

No items other than official traffic control signs, inventory stickers or decals, sign installation dates, manufacturer name, sign sizes, sign designations, anti-vandalism stickers, inventory or maintenance codes, and maintenance-related scanning graphics shall be mounted on the back of a sign.

Only the MoDOT ID logo shall be displayed on the face of a sign to identify the sign as MoDOT property and define the penalties for tampering with the sign. The MoDOT ID logo shall match the detail and installation location as displayed in [https://www.modot.org/media/16920 Standard Plan 903.02].

=={{SpanID|903.1.5}}903.1.5 Shapes (MUTCD Section 2A.05)==
'''Standard. '''Particular shapes, as shown in [[#tab903.1.5|Table 903.1.5]], shall be used exclusively for specific signs or a series of signs, unless otherwise provided in the EPG for a particular sign or class of signs.

{{SpanID|tab903.1.5}}

<div style="width: 100%; display: flex; justify-content: center;">
{| class="wikitable"
|+ Table 903.1.5, Use of Sign Shapes
|-
!Shape !! Signs
|-
|Octagon*||Stop (R1-1)**
|-
|Equilateral Triangle (downward-pointing)* ||Yield (R1-2)**
|-
|Circle*||Grade Crossing Advance Warning (W10-1)**
|-
|Pentagon (upward-pointing)*||School (S1-1) (squares bottom corners)**
|-
|Crossbuck (two rectangles in a perpendicular "X" configuration)*||Grade Crossing (R15-1)**
|-
|Diamond||Warning Series
|-
|Rectangle (including square)||Regulatory Series Guide Series*** Warning Series
|-
|colspan="2" style="background-color: #ffffff"|Key: * This shape shall be limited exclusively to the sign(s) indicated. ** This sign shall be exclusively the shape shown. *** Guide series includes general service, specific service, tourist-oriented directional, general information, recreational and cultural interest area, and emergency management signs. Note: Signs with standardized designs shall not be modified to accommodate a different shape except as provided in the EPG.
|}
</div>

The Crossbuck is a shape exclusive to the Grade Crossing (R15-1) sign and shall not be obscured by mounting a different shape sign on the back of the Crossbuck (see [[913.2 Signs (MUTCD Chapter 8B) #913.2.3 | EPG 913.2.3]]).

'''Guidance. '''Shapes that are exclusive to a particular sign (STOP, YIELD, Railroad Advance, School, Warning, and Crossbuck signs) should not be obscured by another sign mounted on the back of the same assembly protruding or extending beyond the edge of the sign with the exclusive shape. The following methods should be considered in lieu of mounting a sign on the back of another sign that would obscure the exclusive shape of the sign:
::A. Install the signs on separate mountings to maintain the exclusive shape.
::B. Increase the size of the sign with the exclusive shape and/or decrease the size of the sign mounted behind the sign with the exclusive shape so the sign installed on the back does not obscure its shape.

Where the lateral space available in which to install a standard sign is constrained, such as mounting on a narrow median barrier or adjacent to a retaining wall, the following methods should be considered to maintain the shape of the sign:
::A. Angle the sign up to 45 degrees toward the roadway while still maintaining adequate legibility.
::B. Install the sign at a different location that still provides adequate advance warning, supplementing the sign with a Distance plaque (see [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.60|EPG 903.3.60]]), if appropriate.
::C. Reduce the size of the sign, but supplement it with a duplicate sign on the opposite side of the roadway (see [[#903.1.11|EPG 903.1.11]]).
::D. In addition to either angling or reducing the size of the sign, supplement it with a duplicate warning sign and Distance plaque at an upstream location.
::E. Mount the sign asymmetrically on the sign support, such as when the support is mounted on a bridge parapet or railing, such that the edge of the sign does not overhang the roadway, shoulder, or other areas used by bicyclists or pedestrians.

'''Option. '''Where the shape of the sign cannot be maintained due to lateral constraints, the following methods may be considered:
::A. For warning signs or other types of signs displayed in a horizontally-oriented rectangle, the legend may be displayed in a vertically-oriented rectangle.
::B. When mounted overhead, the word legend for a standard warning sign may be displayed in a horizontally-oriented rectangle.

'''Support. '''Provisions for mounting height of signs that overhang any portion of the traveled way are contained in [[#903.1.15|EPG 903.1.15]].

Provisions for lateral offset are contained in [[#903.1.16|EPG 903.1.16]].

'''Standard. '''Modifications to sign shapes, such as cutting off the left and right points of a diamond, shall not be allowed. This applies to both permanent and temporary traffic control signs.

'''Option. '''Where the methods described in the first Guidance paragraph of this article are impracticable, the legend of the warning sign may be displayed in a vertically-oriented rectangle.

=={{SpanID|903.1.6}}903.1.6 Colors (MUTCD Section 2A.06)==
'''Standard. '''The colors to be used on signs and their specific uses on signs shall be as provided in the applicable articles of the EPG. The color coordinates and values shall be as described in 23 CFR, Part 655, Subpart F, Appendix.

Colors (see [[:Category:911_General_(MUTCD_Part_1) #911.4.5 | EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1D.05)]]) shall be consistent across the face of a sign or a sign panel. Color gradients (smooth or defined gradual transitions either within a color or transition to another color) shall not be allowed.

{{SpanID|tab903.1.6}}
{|| class="wikitable" style="margin:auto; text-align: center; font-size: 80%"
|+ style="font-size:125%;"|Table 903.1.6, Common Uses of Sign Colors
!rowspan="2"|Type of Sign!!colspan="8"|Legend!!colspan="11"|Background
|- style="writing-mode: vertical-lr;"
!Black!!Green!!Red!!White!!Yellow!!Orange!!Fluorescent Yellow-Green1!!Fluorescent Pink!!Black!!Blue!!Brown!!Green!!Fluorescent Orange!!Red!!White!!Fluorescent Yellow!!Purple!!Fluorescent Yellow-Green1!!Fluorescent Pink
|-

||Regulatory||X|| ||X||X|| || || || ||X|| || || || ||X||X|| || || ||
|-
||Prohibitive|| || ||X||X2|| || || || || || || || || ||X2||X|| || || ||
|-
||Permissive|| ||X|| || || || || || || || || || || || ||X|| || || ||
|-
||Warning||X|| || || || || || || || || || || || || || ||X|| || ||
|-
||Pedestrian||X|| || || || || || || || || || || || || || ||X|| || ||
|-
||Bicycle||X|| || || || || || || || || || || || || || ||X|||| ||
|-
||Guide|| || || ||X|| || || || || || || ||X|| || || || || || ||
|-
||Interstate Route|| || || ||X|| || || || || ||X|| || || ||X|| || || || ||
|-
||State Route||X|| || || || || || || || || || || || || ||X|| || || ||
|-
||U.S. Route||X|| || || || || || || || || || || || || ||X|| || || ||
|-
||Street Name|| || || ||X|| || || || || || || ||X|| || || || || || ||
|-
||Destination|| || || ||X|| || || || || || || ||X|| || || || || || ||
|-
||Reference Location|| || || ||X|| || || || || || || ||X|| || || || || || ||
|-
||Information|| || || ||X|| || || || || ||X|| ||X|| || || || || || ||
|-
||Road User Service|| || || ||X|| || || || || ||X|| || || || || || || || ||
|-
||Recreational|| || || ||X|| || || || || || ||X||X|| || || || || || ||
|-
||Temporary Traffic Control||X|| || || || || || || || || || || ||X|| || || || || ||
|-
||Incident Management||X|| || || || || || || || || || || ||X|| || || || || ||X
|-
||School||X|| || || || || || || || || || || || || || || || ||X||
|-
|-
!colspan="99" style="text-align:left"|Changeable Message Signs
|-
|Regulatory || || ||X4||X|| || || || ||X|| || || || || || || || || ||
|-
|Warning, Pedestrian, Bicycle|| || || || ||X|| || || ||X|| || || || || || || || || ||
|-
|Temporary Traffic Control || || || || ||X||X|| || ||X|| || || || || || || || || ||
|-
|Guide || || || ||X|| || || || ||X|| || ||X3|| || || || || || ||
|-
|Motorist Services || || || ||X|| || || || ||X||X3|| || || || || || || || ||
|-
|Incident Management || || || || ||X|| || ||X||X|| || || || || || || || || ||
|-
|School || || || || || || ||X|| ||X|| || || || || || || || || ||
|-
|colspan="99" style="text-align:left; font-size: 120%;"|1 MoDOT has conducted research on the use of Fluorescent Yellow-Green for Pedestrian and Bicycle Signs. Research did not indicate any safety benefit, therefore the color is reserved for School signs only. 

2 Legend and background color combination for use only as identified for specific signs in the EPG or FHWA's Standard Highway Signs publication. 

3 These alternative background colors would be provided by blue or green lighted pixels such that the entire CMS would be lighted, not just the legend. 

4 Red is used only for the circle and diagonal or other red elements of a similar static regulatory sign. 

Notes: 
# The purpose of the information in this table is to provide a general overview of common color combinations. The color combinations and orientations for signs with standardized designs shall not be modified. For signs with unique legends, the shape and color shall be the same as standard signs of the same functional type.
# The colors shown for changeable message signs are for those with electronic displays.
|-
|}

'''Support. '''Common uses of sign colors are shown in [[#tab903.1.6|Table 903.1.6]]. Color schemes on specific signs are shown in the illustrations located in each applicable EPG article.

Whenever white is specified in the EPG or in the FHWA's “Standard Highway Signs” publication (see [[:Category:911_General_(MUTCD_Part_1) #911.1.5 | EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1A.05)]]) as a color, it is understood to include silver-colored retroreflective coatings or elements that reflect white light.

The colors coral and light blue are being reserved for uses that will be determined in the future by the Federal Highway Administration.

Information regarding color coding of destinations on guide signs, including community wayfinding signs, is contained in [[903.4 Guide Signs—Conventional Roads (MUTCD Chapter 2D) #903.4|EPG 903.4]].

=={{SpanID|903.1.7}}903.1.7 Dimensions (MUTCD Section 2A.07)==
'''Support. '''To standardize signing throughout the state highway system, MoDOT has predetermined the sizes for all highway signs; refer to the appropriate EPG article. Larger sizes are designed for use on freeways and expressways, and can also be used in oversized applications to enhance road user safety and convenience on other facilities, especially on multi-lane divided highways and on undivided highways having five or more lanes of traffic and/or high speeds. The intermediate sizes are designed to be used on other highway types. MoDOT does not adopt smaller sized signs for bikeways or other off-road applications as MoDOT typically does not maintain these types of facilities. MoDOT's minimum sign sizes generally exceed the MUTCD minimum sign sizes. The MUTCD minimum sizes in these cases are intended more for low-speed, local jurisdictional roadways and not for state highways. The sign size tables at the beginning of each EPG signing article lists the correct sign sizes for MoDOT applications.

'''Standard. '''The sign dimensions prescribed in the sign size tables in the various EPG articles shall be used unless engineering judgment determines that other sizes are appropriate. All sign sizes smaller than the prescribed dimensions shall be approved by the MoDOT Highway Safety and Traffic Division.

'''Guidance. '''The sizes shown in the Oversized columns in the various sign size tables in the EPG should be used for those special applications where speed, volume, or other factors result in conditions where increased emphasis, improved recognition, or increased legibility is needed, as determined by engineering judgment or study.

Except as provided in the Standard paragraph below, and where specifically prohibited in the EPG, increases above the minimum prescribed sizes should be used where greater legibility or emphasis is needed. If signs larger than the prescribed sizes are used, the overall sign dimensions will typically be increased in 12-inch increments.

'''Standard. '''Where a maximum allowable sign size is prescribed, increases in sign size above the maximum size shall not be allowed.

Where engineering judgment determines that sizes that are different from the minimum prescribed dimensions are appropriate for use, standard shapes and colors shall be used. Standard proportions shall be retained as much as practicable. Any application of size which is different from those given in the EPG shall first be approved by the MoDOT Highway Safety and Traffic Division.

=={{SpanID|903.1.8}}903.1.8 Word Messages (MUTCD Section 2A.08)==
'''Standard. '''Except as otherwise provided in the EPG, all word messages shall be aligned horizontally across a sign, reading left to right.

Except as provided in [[#903.1.4|EPG 903.1.4]], all word messages shall use standard wording as shown in the EPG and in the FHWA's “Standard Highway Signs” publication (see [[:Category:911_General_(MUTCD_Part_1) #911.1.5 | EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1A.05)]]).

All sign lettering, numerals, and other characters shall be of the Standard Alphabets as provided in the FHWA's “Standard Highway Signs” publication (see [[:Category:911_General_(MUTCD_Part_1) #911.1.5 | EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1A.05)]]), unless otherwise provided in the EPG.

The sign lettering for names of places, streets, and highways shall be composed of a combination of lower-case letters with initial upper-case letters. The sign lettering for other legends shall be composed of upper-case letters, unless otherwise provided in the EPG for a particular sign or type of message.

Except as provided in [[903.5 Guide Signs - Freeways and Expressways (MUTCD Chapter 2E)|EPG 903.5]], when a mixed-case legend is used, the nominal loop height of the lower-case letters shall be ¾ of the height of the initial upper-case letter.

The unique letter forms for each of the Standard Alphabet series shall not be stretched, compressed, warped, or otherwise manipulated.

Any non-standard or variable sign shall be detailed by the MoDOT Highway Safety and Traffic Division for signs installed by MoDOT forces as well as those installed by contractors on MoDOT projects.

'''Support. '''[[903.4 Guide Signs—Conventional Roads (MUTCD Chapter 2D) #903.4.3|EPG 903.4.3]] contains information regarding the acceptable methods of modifying the length of a word for a given letter height and series.

'''Guidance. '''Word messages should be as brief as practical to convey a clear, simple meaning, and the lettering should be large enough to provide the necessary legibility distance. A minimum specific ratio of 1 inch of letter height per 30 feet of legibility distance should be used.

Abbreviations (see [[:Category:911_General_(MUTCD_Part_1) #911.4.8 | EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1D.08)]]) should be kept to a minimum, except as otherwise prescribed in the EPG.

Word messages should not contain periods, apostrophes, question marks, ampersands, or other punctuation or characters that are not letters, numerals, or hyphens unless necessary to avoid confusion.

'''Support. '''Diacritical marks on words or names that are adapted to English are not normally needed on signs for comprehension or navigational purposes.

A legend in a secondary language, in addition to English, may be displayed on the face of signs, plaques, sign panels, and changeable message signs that are oriented away from or otherwise not readily visible to operators of motor vehicles, but rather are intended for viewing only by pedestrians and occupants of parked vehicles.

'''Guidance. '''The solidus (slanted line or forward slash) is intended to be used for fractions only and should not be used to separate words on the same line of legend. Instead, a hyphen should be used for this purpose, such as “TRUCKS - BUSES.”

'''Standard. '''Fractions shall be displayed with the numerator and denominator diagonally arranged about the solidus. The overall height of the fraction is measured from the top of the numerator to the bottom of the denominator, each of which is vertically aligned with the upper and lower ends of the solidus. The overall height of the fraction shall be determined by the height of the numerals within the fraction, and shall be 1.5 times the height of an individual numeral within the fraction.

Except as otherwise provided in the EPG, distances shall be displayed on signs using fractions of a mile rather than decimals.

'''Support. '''The FHWA's “Standard Highway Signs” publication (see [[:Category:911_General_(MUTCD_Part_1) #911.1.5 | EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1A.05)]]) contains details regarding the layouts of fractions on signs.

'''Guidance. '''When initials are used to represent an abbreviation for separate words (such as “U S” for a United States route), the initials should be separated by a space of between ½ and ¾ of the letter height of the initials.

When an Interstate route is displayed in text form instead of using the route shield, a hyphen should be used for clarity, such as “I-70.”

'''Support. '''Letter height is expressed in terms of the height of an upper-case letter. For mixed-case legends (those composed of an initial upper-case letter followed by lower-case letters), the height of the lower-case letters is derived from the specified height of the initial upper-case letter based on a prescribed ratio. Letter heights for mixed-case legends might be expressed in terms of both the upper- and lower-case letters, or in terms of the initial upper-case letter alone. When the height of a lower-case letter is specified or determined from the prescribed ratio, the reference is to the nominal loop height of the letter. The term loop height refers to the portion of a lower-case letter that excludes any ascending or descending stems or tails of the letter, such as with the letters “d” or “q.” The nominal loop height is equal to the actual height of a non-rounded lower-case letter whose form does not include ascending or descending stems or tails, such as the letter “x.” The rounded portions of a lower-case letter extend slightly above and below the baselines projected from the top and bottom of such a non-rounded letter so that the appearance of a uniform letter height within a word is achieved. The actual loop height of a rounded lower-case letter is slightly greater than the nominal loop height and this additional height is excluded from the expression of the lower-case letter height.

=={{SpanID|903.1.9}}903.1.9 Symbols (MUTCD Section 2A.09)==
'''Standard. '''Symbol designs shall in all cases be unmistakably similar to those shown in the EPG and in the FHWA's “Standard Highway Signs” publication (see [[:Category:911_General_(MUTCD_Part_1) #911.1.5 | EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1A.05)]]).

'''Option. '''Although most standard symbols are oriented facing left, mirror images of these symbols may be used where the reverse orientation might better convey to road users a direction of movement.

'''Support. '''New symbol designs are adopted by the Federal Highway Administration based on research evaluations to determine road user comprehension, sign conspicuity, and sign legibility.

Sometimes a change from word messages to symbols requires significant time for public education and transition. Therefore, the EPG sometimes includes the practice of using educational plaques to accompany new symbol signs.

'''Guidance. '''New standard warning or regulatory symbol signs should be accompanied by an educational plaque where engineering judgment determines that the plaque will improve road user comprehension during the transition from word message to symbol signs.

'''Option. '''Educational plaques may be left in place as long as they are in serviceable condition.

'''Standard. '''A symbol used for a given category of signs (regulatory, warning, or guide) shall not be used for a different category of signs, except as specifically authorized in the EPG.

A recreational and cultural interest area symbol (see [[903.13 Recreational, Historic Site, and Cultural Interest Area Signs (MUTCD Chapter 2M) #903.13|EPG 903.13]]) shall not be used on streets or highways outside of recreational and cultural interest areas.

A recreational and cultural interest area symbol (see [[903.13 Recreational, Historic Site, and Cultural Interest Area Signs (MUTCD Chapter 2M) #903.13|EPG 903.13]]) shall not be used on any regulatory or warning sign on any street, road, or highway.

=={{SpanID|903.1.10}}903.1.10 Sign Borders (MUTCD Section 2A.10)==
'''Standard. '''Unless otherwise provided, signs shall have a border of the same color as the legend in order to outline their distinctive shape and thereby give them easy recognition and a finished appearance.

The corners of all sign borders shall be rounded, except for STOP signs.

'''Guidance. '''A dark border on a light background should be set in from the edge, while a light border on a dark background should extend to the edge of the sign. A border for 30-inch signs with a light background should be from ½ to ¾ inch in width, ½ inch from the edge. For similar signs with a light border, a width of 1 inch should be used. For other sizes, the border width should be of similar proportions, but should not exceed the stroke-width of the major lettering of the sign. On signs exceeding 72 x 120 inches in size, the border should be 2 inches wide. On unusually large signs with oversized letter heights, route shields, or other legend elements, the border should be 2.5 inches wide and should not exceed 3 inches in width. Except for STOP signs and as otherwise provided in [[903.5 Guide Signs - Freeways and Expressways (MUTCD Chapter 2E) #903.5.13|EPG 903.5.13]], the corners of the sign should be rounded to a radius that is concentric with that of the border.

'''Support. '''[[#903.1.12|EPG 903.1.12]] contains information regarding the use of light-emitting diode (LED) units within the border of a sign.

=={{SpanID|903.1.11}}903.1.11 Enhanced Conspicuity for Standards Signs (MUTCD Section 2A.11)==

'''Option. '''Based upon engineering judgment, where the improvement of the conspicuity of a standard regulatory, warning, or guide sign is desired, any of the following methods may be used, as appropriate, to enhance the sign’s conspicuity (see [[#fig903-1-11|Figure 903.1.11]]):
::A. Increasing the size of a standard regulatory, warning, or guide sign.
::B. Dual signing of a standard regulatory, warning, or guide sign by adding a second identical sign on the left-hand side of the roadway at the same location.
::C. Adding a fluorescent yellow rectangular header panel above a standard regulatory sign, with the width of the panel corresponding to the width of the standard regulatory sign. A legend of “NOTICE,” “STATE LAW,” or other appropriate text may be added in black letters within the header panel for a period of time determined by engineering judgment.
::D. Adding a Warning Beacon (see [[902.18 Flashing Beacons (MUTCD Chapter 4S) #902.18.3|EPG 902.18.3]]) to a standard regulatory (other than a STOP, DO NOT ENTER, WRONG WAY, or a Speed Limit sign), warning, or guide sign.
::E. Adding a Speed Limit Sign Beacon (see [[902.18 Flashing Beacons (MUTCD Chapter 4S) #902.18.4|EPG 902.18.4 ]]) to a standard Speed Limit sign.
::F. Adding a Stop Beacon (see [[902.18 Flashing Beacons (MUTCD Chapter 4S) #902.18.5|EPG 902.18.5]]) to a STOP, DO NOT ENTER, or WRONG WAY sign.
::G. Adding a rectangular rapid-flashing beacon (see [[902.12 Rectangular Rapid Flashing Beacons (MUTCD Chapter 4L)#902.12.1|EPG 902.12]]) to a Pedestrian, School, or Trail warning sign at an uncontrolled marked crosswalk.
::H. Adding light-emitting diode (LED) units within the symbol, legend, or border of a standard regulatory, warning, or guide sign, as provided in [[#903.1.12|EPG 903.1.12]].
::I. Adding a strip of retroreflective material to the sign support in accordance with the provisions of the second Standard paragraph below.
::J. Using other methods that are specifically allowed for certain signs as described elsewhere in the EPG. The MoDOT Highway Safety and Traffic Division will evaluate any new methods to improve sign conspicuity.

{{SpanID|fig903-1-11}}
[[File:Figure 903.1.11 Examples of Enhanced Conspicuity for Signs.png|thumb|alt="A:A yellow rectangular header panel is shown with the legend ""NOTICE,"" in black letters, mounted above a standard regulatory sign with the legend ""WEIGHT LIMIT 10 TONS"" in black letters on four lines.
B:LED lights are shown on the perimeter of a “Stop” sign.
C:A round yellow beacon is shown mounted above an intersection warning sign.
D:A vertical fluorescent yellow-green strip is shown on the top half length of a sign support for a fluorescent yellow-green “Pedestrian Crossing” sign."
|center|600px| '''Figure 903.1.11''' Examples of Enhanced Conspicuity for Signs]]

'''Support. '''Sign conspicuity improvements can also be achieved by removing non-essential and illegal signs from the right-of-way (see [[:Category:911_General_(MUTCD_Part_1) #911.4.2 | EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1D.02)]]), and by relocating signs to provide better spacing. [[#903.1.20|EPG 903.1.20]] contains information on excessive use of signs.

'''Standard. '''Strobe lights shall not be used to enhance the conspicuity of highway signs.

If a strip of retroreflective material is used on the sign support, it shall be at least 4 inches in width, it shall be placed for the full length of the support from the bottom of the sign and extending down the length of the post, with the bottom of the retroreflective strip not being taller than 2 feet above the edge of the roadway, (see [[#fig903-1-11|Figure 903.1.11]]), and its color shall match the background color of the primary sign, except that the color of the strip for the YIELD and DO NOT ENTER signs shall be red. The retroreflective strip shall not display any legend or other information. MoDOT’s standard for this application uses a 4” x 72” aluminum panel with the retroreflective material applied to it where the panel can then be attached to the signpost using the same types of fasteners used to attach signs. These panels are available from MoDOT’s third party sign fabricator. Retroreflective strips shall not be placed on the sign supports below green, blue, or brown guide signs and shall only be placed below regulatory, warning, and school signs, and route marker assemblies.

For a post-mounted sign installation, placing a duplicate sign in the same assembly facing the same direction of traffic shall not be permitted as a method of enhancing conspicuity.

If plaques are used, they shall be installed below the main sign, up to two plaques.

'''Option. '''Retroreflective strips may be used to help identify and delineate the location of rural and unlit intersections and expressway crossovers, giving drivers visual cues where these intersections are located in dark nighttime conditions, see [[620.6 Delineators (MUTCD Chapter 3G) #620.6.3|EPG 620.6.3]] for information regarding this application.

=={{SpanID|903.1.12}}903.1.12 LEDs Used for Conspicuity Enhancement on Standard Signs (MUTCD Section 2A.12) ==
'''Support. '''This article regarding light-emitting diode (LED) units applies to the use of illuminated elements that supplement a sign legend to enhance the conspicuity of the sign.

LED units that are used to illuminate the full sign display, background, or legend are changeable message signs (CMS), which are covered in [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2|EPG 903.2]], [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3| 903.3]], [[903.12 Changeable Message Signs (MUTCD Chapter 2L) #903.12|903.12]], and [[:Category:908 Traffic Controls for School Areas (MUTCD Part 7)|908]].

The application of LED units in compliance with the third Standard paragraph below does not create a changeable message sign because the legend of the sign is always displayed when the LED units are not illuminated. Changeable message or blank-out signs whose legends change or extinguish by means of illuminated elements are addressed elsewhere in the EPG.

Approved LED sign manufacturers that are MUTCD compliant and whose products have been evaluated by MoDOT are listed in the MoDOT’s Traffic Approved Products List (APL) found on MoDOT's public website (https://www.modot.org/traffic).

'''Standard. '''If LED enhanced signs are used, only those products listed on the Traffic APL shall be permitted.

'''Option. '''New products may be considered for the APL, however, before being used they must first be vetted by the MoDOT Highway Safety and Traffic Division and its APL review process. The [[:File:LED Sign Compliance Checklist.pdf|LED Sign Compliance Checklist]] can be used to verify if a manufacturer’s LED sign is in compliance with the MUTCD and can be considered for the APL.

Light-emitting diode (LED) units may be used individually within the symbol, legend, or border of a sign to enhance the sign conspicuity and legibility (see [[#903.1.11|EPG 903.1.11]]).

Except as provided in the sixth Standard paragraph below, LED units may either operate continuously or be actuated.

'''Standard. '''Where LED units are used to enhance the conspicuity of a sign, the sign shall otherwise comply with the requirements for retroreflection and illumination for nighttime viewing (see [[#903.1.21|EPG 903.1.21]]).

Except as provided in the Option and Support paragraphs below, and for changeable message signs, neither individual LEDs nor groups of LEDs shall be placed within the background area of a sign.

The application of LEDs to display sign legends or symbols shall use a maximum pitch of 20 millimeters to cover the stroke width of the letter or symbol.

The LEDs shall not protrude outside the sign border or legend when used in such applications, shall have a maximum diameter of ¼ inch, and shall be the following colors based on the type of sign:
::A. White or red, with STOP, YIELD, DO NOT ENTER, or WRONG WAY signs.
::B. White, with other regulatory signs.
::C. White or yellow, with warning signs.
::D. White or green, with guide signs.
::E. White, yellow, or orange, with temporary traffic control signs.
::F. White or yellow, with pedestrian or bicycle warning signs.
::G. White or fluorescent yellow-green, with school area signs.

If flashed, all LED units shall flash simultaneously at a steady rate between 50 and 60 times per minute. All the LED units in a sign legend or border shall be illuminated simultaneously with no sequential (chasing) or variable flash rates (dancing), except as otherwise allowed in the EPG. A cluster of LEDs shall not be used within the border of a sign.

Where used in STOP or YIELD signs, flashing LED units shall operate continuously. Actuation of the LED units shall not be allowed.

Flashing LED units shall not be used within the legend or border of a Speed Limit sign to indicate that the displayed speed limit is in effect.

LED units shall not be used within the legend or border of a sign in conjunction with the phrase WHEN FLASHING in its legend (see Item E in the first paragraph of [[902.18 Flashing Beacons (MUTCD Chapter 4S)#902.18.3|EPG 902.18.3]] for the use of Warning Beacons to indicate when a regulatory or warning message is in effect).

Where LED units are used along the edge of a sign, at least one LED unit shall be placed along each edge of the sign, in addition to one LED unit at each corner of the sign, so that the distinct outline of the sign shape is recognized under nighttime viewing conditions. The LED units along each side of the sign shall be spaced approximately equidistantly. For a circular sign shape, the number of LED units shall clearly form the appearance of a circle and not be perceived as some other shape.

The uniformity of the sign design shall be maintained without any decrease in visibility, legibility, or driver comprehension during either daytime or nighttime conditions. The LED units shall have the capability to be dimmed automatically by a timing mechanism or a device sensitive to ambient light (photoelectric cell) such that the LEDs do not reduce the visibility of the sign legend.

'''Option. '''For STOP, YIELD, DO NOT ENTER, and WRONG WAY signs, LEDs may be placed within the border or within one border width within the background of the sign.

'''Support. '''[[616.4 Flagger Control (MUTCD Chapter 6D) #616.4.2|EPG 616.4.2]] contains information about STOP/SLOW paddles used by flaggers. [[908.4 Crossing Supervision (MUTCD Chapter 7D) #908.4.1|EPG 908.4.1]] contains information about STOP paddles used by adult crossing guards.

Other methods of enhancing the conspicuity of standard signs are described in [[#903.1.11|EPG 903.1.11]].

=={{SpanID|903.1.13}}903.1.13 Standardization of Location (MUTCD Section 2A.13)==

'''Support. '''Standardization of position cannot always be attained in practice. Examples of heights and lateral locations of signs for typical installations are illustrated in [[#fig903-1-13-1|Figure 903.1.13.1]], and examples of locations for some typical signs at intersections are illustrated in [[#fig903-1-13-2|Figure 903.1.13.2]] and [[616.16 Typical Applications (MUTCD Chapter 6P) #616.16|EPG 616.16]].

Examples of advance signing on intersection approaches are illustrated in [[616.16 Typical Applications (MUTCD Chapter 6P) #616.16|EPG 616.16]]. [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2|EPG 903.2]], [[903.3 Ground-Mounted Sign Supports #903.3|903.3]], and [[903.4 Guide Signs—Conventional Roads (MUTCD Chapter 2D) #903.4|903.4]] contain provisions regarding the application of regulatory, warning, and conventional guide signs, respectively.

{{SpanID|fig903-1-13-1}}
[[File:Figure 903.1.13.1 Examples of Heights and Lateral Locations of Sign Installations.png|thumb|alt=A: A sign is shown at a height from the bottom edge of the sign to the level of the edge of the pavement, and at a lateral distance between the edge of the pavement and edge of shoulder and the near edge of the sign.
B: A roadway is shown with a curb along the outside edge of the pavement. A “Speed Limit” sign is shown at a height from the bottom edge of the sign to the surface of the sidewalk, and at a lateral distance from the edge of the pavement to the near edge of the sign.
C: A Curve Warning sign is shown with a 25 MPH advisory speed plaque mounted below. This sign assembly is shown at a height from the bottom edge of the plaque to the surface of the pavement, and at a lateral distance from the pavement edge and shoulder edge to the near edge of the Warning sign.
D: A roadway is shown with the placement of a roadside assembly consisting of several route markers and directional arrow markers. The height from the bottom edge of the lowest sign to the pavement and the lateral distance from the pavement edge and shoulder edge to the near edge of the closest sign are shown.
E: A R4-7 sign mounted above an object marker is shown. The height from the bottom edge of the Warning sign and the bottom edge of the object marker to the pavement is shown.
F: A Chevron sign is shown at a height from the bottom edge of the sign to the level of the edge of the pavement or edge of shoulder, and at a lateral distance between the edge of the pavement or edge of shoulder and the near edge of the sign.
G: An Emergency Reference Marker is shown at a height from the bottom edge of the sign to the level edge of the shoulder, and at a lateral distance between the edge of the shoulder and the near edge of the sign.
H. A Double Down Arrow sign is is shown at a height from the bottom edge of the sign to the level edge of the shoulder, and at a lateral distance between the edge of the shoulder and the near edge of the sign.|center|600px|'''Figure 903.1.13.1''' Examples of Locations for Some Typical Signs at Intersections]]

{{SpanID|fig903-1-13-2}}
[[File:Figure 903.1.13.2 Examples of Locations for Some Typical Signs at Intersections.png|thumb|alt=
A: A “STOP” sign placed on the stem of an acute angle intersection that is T-shaped is shown. The distance from the edge of the road along the top of the T and from the edge of the road on the stem of the T to the nearest edge of the “STOP” sign is shown.
B: A T-shaped intersection with a right-turn lane separated from the perpendicular portion of the road by a triangular-shaped channelizing island is shown. A “STOP” sign facing the stem of the T is shown on the island. The distances from the edge of the island closest to the stem of the T and top of the T to the nearest edge of the “STOP” sign are shown. A “Yield” sign is shown to the right of the right-turn lane facing traffic. The distance from the edge of the right-turn lane to the nearest edge of the “Yield” sign is shown.
C: An intersection with four legs is shown. Signs are on the northwest and southeast corners of the intersection, facing to the north and south, respectively. The distance from the edge of the horizontal and vertical road pavement to the near edge of these signs is both the same. The distances are only shown on the southeast corner sign.
D: The southeast corner of an intersection is shown. Sidewalks are parallel to both the horizontal and vertical road. The projection of the horizontal sidewalk across the vertical road is denoted as a ""marked or unmarked crosswalk."" A sign is shown on the south leg of the intersection, facing northbound traffic. The distance from the southernmost edge of the “marked or unmarked crosswalk” to the sign is shown. The distance from the edge of the vertical road to the near edge of the sign is shown.
E: A divisional island at a T-shaped intersection is shown. The island in the middle of the roadway is at the stem of the T. A sign on the right side of the roadway facing northbound traffic is shown. The distance from the nearest edge of that sign to the edge of the pavement of the vertical road is shown. Another sign is shown near the north end of the island. The distances from either edge of that sign to either edge of the divisional island are both shown.
F: A T-shaped intersection. A sign is shown on the southeast corner of the intersection, facing northbound traffic. The distance from the edge of the horizontal road to the sign, at the point where the southeast corner radius meets the tangent section of the horizontal roadway, is shown. The distance from the edge of the vertical roadway to the nearest edge of the sign is shown.|center|600px|'''Figure 903.1.13.2''' Examples of Locations for Some Typical Signs at Intersections]]

'''Standard. '''Signs requiring separate decisions by the road user shall be spaced sufficiently far apart for the appropriate decisions to be made.

'''Guidance. '''One of the factors considered when determining the appropriate spacing of signs should be the posted or 85th percentile speed.

Mainline signs on freeways and expressways should be visible a minimum of 800 feet and signs on conventional roads should be visible a minimum of 200 feet (minimum sign spacing in [[903.4 Guide Signs—Conventional Roads (MUTCD Chapter 2D) #903.4|EPG 903.4]] and [[903.5 Regulatory Signs #903.5|EPG 903.5]]. These distances should be considered when determining spacing between signs and when evaluating sign legibility during sign inspections. When these minimum sign spacing distances are not achievable, engineering judgement should be used to determine if the sign can be relocated to improve visibility, provide advance signing or determine if a reduced sign spacing distance is appropriate.

Except as provided in the third Guidance paragraph below, signs should be located on the right-hand side of the roadway where they are easily recognized and understood by road users. Signs in other locations should be considered only as supplementary to signs in the normal locations, except as otherwise provided in the EPG.

Signs should be individually installed on separate posts or mountings except where:
::A. One sign supplements another;
::B. Route or directional signs are grouped to clarify information to motorists;
::C. Regulatory signs that do not conflict with each other are grouped, such as Turn Prohibition signs posted with ONE WAY signs or a parking regulation sign posted with a Speed Limit sign; or
::D. Street Name signs are posted with a STOP or YIELD sign.

Signs should be located so that they:
::A. When post mounted, are installed on a breakaway assembly, regardless of where they are located on right-of-way,
::B. Optimize nighttime visibility,
::C. Minimize the effects of mud splatter and debris,
::D. Do not obscure each other,
::E. Do not obscure the sight distance to approaching vehicles on the major street for drivers who are stopped on minor-street approaches, and
::F. Are not hidden from view.

Except for STOP, YIELD, DO NOT ENTER, and WRONG WAY signs, or as otherwise provided in the EPG, where a sign on a one-way roadway indicates an action intended exclusively or primarily for a road user in the left-hand lane or at the left-hand side of that roadway, such as LEFT LANE MUST TURN LEFT (R3-7) or LEFT LANE ENDS (W9-1), the sign should be located on the left-hand side of the roadway. In the case of a divided road, the sign should be located in the median.

'''Option. '''Signs located on the left-hand side of a one-way roadway or in the median of a divided road, in accordance with the Guidance paragraph above, may be supplemented by an identical sign located on the right-hand side of the roadway.

'''Support. '''The clear zone (see definition in [[:Category:911_General_(MUTCD_Part_1) #911.3.2 | EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1C.02)]]) is the total roadside border area, starting at the edge of the traveled way, available for an errant driver to stop or regain control of a vehicle. The width of the clear zone is dependent upon traffic volumes, speeds, and roadside geometry. Additional information can be found in the “Roadside Design Guide,” 4th Edition, 2011, AASHTO. Based on the Roadside Design Guide, the clear zone only accounts for 80% of vehicles leaving the roadway, leaving 20% traveling outside the clear zone, this is the reason all MoDOT signs are required to be on breakaway sign supports.

'''Guidance. '''With the increase in traffic volumes and the need to provide road users regulatory, warning, and guidance information, an order of priority for sign installation should be established.

'''Support. '''An order of priority is especially critical where space is limited for sign installation and there is a demand for several different types of signs. Overloading road users with too much information is not desirable. Priority according to type of sign will depend on the specific situation and conditions of the site at which the signs are to be installed. For example, in the vicinity of an exit ramp, guide signs and warning signs for the exit ramp might take precedence over supplemental guide signs or a mainline Speed Limit sign where there is no change in the speed zone.

'''Guidance. '''Because regulatory and warning information is typically more critical to the road user than guidance information, regulatory and warning signing whose locations are critical should be displayed rather than guide signing in cases where conflicts occur. In such cases, the guide sign should be relocated to another appropriate location where it will still be effective. In other cases, such as at a decision point, the guide sign should take precedence over other signs whose locations are not as critical to an immediate decision or action necessary by the road user. In all cases, careful attention should be given to minimizing sign clutter (see [[#903.1.20|EPG 903.1.20]]). Community wayfinding and acknowledgment guide signs should have a lower priority as to placement than other guide signs. Signs conveying information of a less-critical nature should be moved to less-critical locations or omitted.

'''Option. '''Under some circumstances, such as on curves to the right, signs may be placed on median islands or on the left-hand side of the road. A supplementary sign located on the left-hand side of the roadway may be used on a multi-lane road where traffic in a lane to the right might obstruct the view to the right.

'''Guidance. '''In urban areas where crosswalks exist, signs should not be placed within 4 feet in advance of the crosswalk (see Drawing D in [[#fig903-1-13-2|Figure 903.1.13.2]]).

=={{SpanID|903.1.14}}903.1.14 Overhead Sign Installation (MUTCD Section 2A.14)==
'''Standard. '''Overhead sign installations shall be limited to MoDOT regulatory, warning, and guide sign installations, unless otherwise specified in the EPG. Supplemental signs or aesthetic messages shall not be displayed on overhead structures, which also apply to structures constructed and installed by another jurisdiction over a state route. Supplemental signs or aesthetic messages include, but are not limited to Welcome To signs, Welcome To monuments, and Community Wayfinding signs.

'''Guidance. '''Overhead signs should be used on freeways and expressways, at locations where some degree of lane-use control is desirable, and at locations where space is not available at the roadside. It is recommended that justification be provided when mounting signs overhead.

'''Support. '''The operational requirements of the present highway system are such that overhead signs have value at many locations. The factors to be considered for the installation of overhead sign displays are not definable in specific numerical terms. In some cases, overhead mounting of a sign might be required by other provisions of the EPG.

MoDOT has established the following general criteria for the use of overhead signs on the state highway system:

'''Standard. '''Overhead signs shall be used in the following applications:
::A. EXIT ONLY lane drops,
::B. Complex interchange design, including, but not limited to:
:::1. Directional ramps, and
:::2. Ramp splits
::C. Three or more lanes in each direction in urban areas,
::D. Closely-spaced interchanges,
::E. Multi-lane exits,
::F. Consistency of sign message location through a series of interchanges,
::G. Junction of two freeways, and
::H. Complex intersection guide signs, including, but not limited to:
::: 1. Multi-lane roundabouts,
::: 2. Diverging Diamond Interchanges, and
::: 3. Single Point Urban Interchanges.

'''Guidance.''' Overhead signs should be used in the following applications:
::A. Reduction of basic lanes in a LANE ENDS application and
::B. Left-side exit ramps.

'''Option.''' Overhead signs may be used in the following applications:
::A. Insufficient space for post-mounted signs,
::B. Restricted sight distance,
::C. Traffic volume at or near capacity,
::D. Large percentage of trucks,
::E. In urban areas with ambient light issues which obscure the visibility of the ground mounted sign,
::F. Locations where there is a history of crashes with a ground-mounted sign, and
::G. High-speed traffic.

Over-crossing structures may be used to support overhead signs.

'''Support. '''Under some circumstances, the use of over-crossing structures as sign supports might be the only practical solution that will provide adequate viewing distance. The use of such structures as sign supports might eliminate the need for the foundations and sign supports along the roadside.

=={{SpanID|903.1.15}}903.1.15 Mounting Height (MUTCD Section 2A.15)==
'''Standard. '''The provisions of this article shall apply unless specifically stated otherwise for a particular sign or object marker elsewhere in the EPG.

'''Support. '''Mounting heights in the EPG and in [https://www.modot.org/media/16921 Standard Plan 903.03] are nominal dimensions, meaning these dimensions represent the minimum mounting height, as well as the maximum mounting heights unless otherwise stated. The mounting height, measured from the roadway surface to the bottom of the sign, is only increased in order to meet the minimum distance requirements from the bottom of the sign to the ground directly below the sign. Minimum mounting heights ensure the installations meet breakaway standards as well as placing the signs at the appropriate level for visibility. Installing signs taller than these nominal dimensions will move the signs outside the driver’s normal line of sight negatively affecting the signs legibility and visibility.

In addition to the provisions of this article, information affecting the minimum mounting height of signs as a function of crash performance can be found in the “Roadside Design Guide,” 4th Edition, 2011, AASHTO.

'''Standard. '''In rural areas, the minimum height, measured vertically from the bottom of the sign to the elevation of the near edge of the pavement, of signs installed at the side of the road shall be 5 feet (see [[#fig903-1-13-1|Figure 903.1.13.1]]).

In business, commercial, or residential areas where parking, bicyclist, or pedestrian movements are likely to occur, or where the view of the sign might be obstructed, the minimum height, measured vertically from the bottom of the sign to the top of the curb, or in the absence of curb, measured vertically from the bottom of the sign to the elevation of the near edge of the traveled way, of signs installed at the side of the road shall be 7 feet (see [[#fig903-1-13-1|Figure 903.1.13.1]]).

'''Option. '''The height to the bottom of a secondary sign mounted below another sign may be 1 foot less than the height specified in the Standard paragraphs above.

'''Standard. '''The minimum height of signs, measured vertically from the bottom of the sign to the sidewalk shall be 7 feet.

If the bottom of a secondary sign that is mounted below another sign is mounted lower than 7 feet above a pedestrian sidewalk or pathway (see [[616.3 Pedestrian and Worker Safety (MUTCD Chapter 6C) #616.3.2|EPG 616.3.2]]), the secondary sign shall not project more than 4 inches into the pedestrian facility.

'''Support. '''[[914.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 9A) #914.1.2|EPG 914.1.2]] contains provisions for the minimum mounting height of signs on shared-use paths.

'''Standard. '''All sign installations shall meet the installation, mounting height and lateral offset of MoDOT specifications for the type of signs support being used, see [https://www.modot.org/media/16921 Standard Plan 903.03].

'''Option. '''A route sign assembly (see [[903.4 Guide Signs—Conventional Roads (MUTCD Chapter 2D) #fig903.4.25.1|Figures 903.4.25.1]] through [[903.4 Guide Signs—Conventional Roads (MUTCD Chapter 2D)#fig903.4.25.3|903.4.25.3]]) consisting of a route sign and auxiliary signs may be treated as a single sign for the purposes of this article.

The mounting height may be adjusted when supports are located near the edge of the right-of-way on a steep backslope in order to avoid the sometimes less desirable alternative of placing the sign closer to the roadway.

'''Standard. '''Signs that are post-mounted on a median barrier shall not overhang any portion of the traveled way.

New overhead sign installations shall provide a vertical clearance of not less than 18 feet from the highest point of pavement or shoulder (including mountable curbs located within the shoulder limits) to the lowest point of the sign, light fixture, or sign bridge over the entire width of the pavement and shoulders, except where the structure on which the overhead signs are to be mounted or other structures along the roadway near the sign structure have a lesser vertical clearance. No overhead sign installations shall have a mounting height that is lower than 17 feet.

'''Option. '''If the vertical clearance of other structures along the roadway near the sign structure is less than 16 feet, the vertical clearance to an overhead sign structure or support may be as low as 1 foot higher than the vertical clearance of the other structures in order to improve the visibility of the overhead signs.

In special cases the clearance to overhead signs may be reduced if necessary because of substandard dimensions in tunnels and other major structures such as double-deck bridges.

Signs may be raised above the standard vertical clearance to improve visibility and avoid other obstructions such as signal equipment.

'''Guidance. '''While a maximum mounting height for signs is generally not prescribed in the EPG, the nominal mounting heights should be adhered to, ensuring that signs are not mounted at such a height as to be out of the road user’s normal field of vision (see the second paragraph of this article and the third paragraph of [[:Category:911_General_(MUTCD_Part_1) #911.4.9 | EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1D.09)]]), especially in urban settings where signs are mounted on traffic signal or light poles.

'''Support. '''[[#fig903-1-13-1|Figure 903.1.13.1]] illustrates some examples of the mounting height requirements contained in this article.

See [[903.17 Overhead Sign Mounting #903.17.4|EPG 903.17.4]] for information regarding vertical clearances for overhead signs.

=={{SpanID|903.1.16}}903.1.16 Lateral Offset (MUTCD Section 2A.16)==
'''Standard. '''For overhead sign supports, the minimum lateral offset from the edge of the shoulder (or if no shoulder exists, from the edge of the pavement) to the near edge of overhead sign supports (cantilever or sign bridges) shall be 6 feet. Overhead sign supports shall have a barrier or crash cushion to shield them if they are within the right-of-way.

See [[903.17 Overhead Sign Mounting #903.17.3|EPG 903.17.3]] for information regarding lateral offset of overhead sign supports.

Post-mounted sign and object marker supports shall be crashworthy (see [[:Category:911_General_(MUTCD_Part_1) #911.4.11 | EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1D.11)]]) if within the right-of-way.

'''Guidance. '''For post-mounted signs, the minimum lateral offset should be 12 feet from the edge of the traveled way. If a shoulder wider than 6 feet exists, the minimum lateral offset for post-mounted signs should be 6 feet from the edge of the shoulder.

Supports for signs mounted laterally behind a longitudinal barrier should be placed so that the near edge of the support is located beyond the deflection distance of the longitudinal barrier and the edge of the sign does not extend beyond the face of the barrier towards traffic.

'''Support. '''The minimum lateral offset requirements for object markers are provided in [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3|EPG 903.3]].

The minimum lateral offset is intended to keep trucks and cars that use the shoulders from striking the signs or supports. The minimum lateral offset requirements do not supersede the requirement for crashworthiness (see the second Standard paragraph of this article) if the sign is located within the right-of-way.

'''Guidance. '''All supports should be located as far as practical from the edge of the shoulder. Advantage should be taken to place signs behind existing roadside barriers, on over-crossing structures, or other locations that minimize the exposure of the traffic to sign supports.

'''Option. '''Lesser lateral offsets may be used on connecting roadways or ramps at interchanges, but not less than 6 feet from the edge of the traveled way.

On conventional roads in areas where it is impractical to locate a sign with the lateral offset prescribed by this article because of roadside features such as terrain or vegetation, a lateral offset of at least 2 feet may be used.

A lateral offset of at least 1 foot from the face of the curb may be used in business, commercial, or residential areas where sidewalk width is limited or where existing poles are close to the curb.

'''Guidance. '''Overhead sign supports and post-mounted sign and object marker supports should not obstruct the sidewalk or the pedestrian access route such that less than 4 feet of clear space is available.

'''Support. '''Guidance for maintaining sign shape in laterally-constrained conditions is described in [[#903.1.5|EPG 903.1.5]].

[[#fig903-1-13-1|Figure 903.1.13.1]] and [[#fig903-1-13-2|903.1.13.2]] illustrate some examples of the lateral offset requirements contained in this article.

=={{SpanID|903.1.17}}903.1.17 Orientation (MUTCD Section 2A.17)==
'''Guidance. '''Unless otherwise provided in the EPG, signs should be vertically mounted at right angles to the direction of, and facing, the traffic that they are intended to serve.

Where mirror reflection from the sign face is encountered to such a degree as to reduce legibility, the sign should be turned slightly away from the road. On curved alignments, the angle of placement should be determined by the direction of approaching traffic rather than by the roadway edge at the point where the sign is located.

=={{SpanID|903.1.18}}903.1.18 Posts and Mountings (MUTCD Section 2A.18)==
'''Standard. '''Sign posts, foundations, and mountings shall be so constructed as to hold signs in a proper and permanent position, and to resist swaying in the wind or displacement by vandalism.

'''Support. '''See [https://www.modot.org/media/16921 Standard Plan 903.03] for additional information regarding posts and mounting. The Standard Plans are compliant with the latest edition of AASHTO’s “Specifications for Structural Supports for Highway Signs, Luminaires, and Traffic Signals.”

'''Option. '''Where permitted, signs may be placed on existing supports used for other purposes, such as highway traffic signal supports or overhead sign supports. This does not include utility poles or light poles.

'''Support. '''[[#903.1.11|EPG 903.1.11]] contains criteria for enhanced conspicuity of standard signs.

[[#903.1.15|EPG 903.1.15]] and [[#903.1.16|903.1.16]] contain lateral and height placement criteria for signs placed on existing supports.

'''Standard. '''If mounted to the sign support, equipment for powering electronic components of a sign, including solar panels, the sign support shall be a traffic signal pedestal pole with a breakaway base so as to not to compromise the crashworthy performance of the sign installation (see [[:Category:911_General_(MUTCD_Part_1) #911.4.11 | EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1D.11)]]). Such equipment shall be mounted so as not to obscure the shape of the sign. Any wiring installed in the breakaway base shall include appropriate breakaway fuse connectors.

=={{SpanID|903.1.19}}903.1.19 Maintenance (MUTCD Section 2A.19)==
'''Guidance. '''Maintenance activities should consider proper position, cleanliness, legibility, and daytime and nighttime visibility (see [[#903.1.21|EPG 903.1.21]] and [[#903.1.22|903.1.22]]). Damaged or deteriorated signs or object markers should be replaced.

To assure adequate maintenance, a schedule for inspecting (at night), trimming vegetation, and replacing signs and object markers should be established. Employees of highway, law enforcement, and other public agencies whose duties require that they travel on the roadways should be encouraged to report any damaged, deteriorated, or obscured signs or object markers at the first opportunity. While MoDOT’s sign maintenance program relies on nighttime inspections, random daytime inspections are encouraged to identify needs between scheduled nighttime inspections.

Steps should be taken to see that weeds, trees, shrubbery, and construction, maintenance, and utility materials and equipment do not obscure the face of any sign or object marker.

A regular schedule of replacement of lighting elements for illuminated signs should be maintained.

'''Support. '''See [[903.20 Construction Inspection Guidelines for Sec 903 #903.20.4|EPG 903.20.4]] for additional information related to sign inspection.

=={{SpanID|903.1.20}}903.1.20 Excessive Use of Signs (MUTCD Section 2A.20)==
'''Guidance. '''Signs should be used and located judiciously, minimizing their proliferation in order to maintain their effectiveness. Regulatory and warning signs should be used conservatively because these signs, if used to excess, tend to lose their effectiveness. Route signs and directional guide signs for primary routes and destinations should be used frequently at strategic locations because their use promotes efficient operations by keeping road users informed of their location. In all cases, however, sign clutter (see the Support paragraph below) should be avoided and minimized as much as practicable.

'''Support. '''Sign clutter is the proliferation of sign installations or assemblies along the roadway or roadside, either separately or grouped, to such an extent that adequate spacing between installations necessary for orderly processing of the sign messages by the driver cannot be achieved. Sign clutter can reduce the effectiveness of one or more signs in a sequence of signs.

The basic role of traffic control devices is to provide only as much information to the road user as necessary to promote the safe and efficient operation of streets and highways. Sign clutter can result from the overuse of MUTCD-compliant signs and or signs that display information unrelated to traffic operation, navigation, or transportation information. Examples of such signs would include, but are not limited to, those displaying the birthplace or home of a noted person, local sports team accomplishments, population information, and self-described qualities of a community such as “friendly” or “open for business.”

'''Guidance. '''Signs and other traffic control devices should be installed and maintained from a systematic standpoint rather than individually. When a new sign is installed, the existing signs in the vicinity should be considered for replacement, relocation, or removal as a result of the new sign that is installed. Existing systems of signs should be reviewed periodically for evidence of sign clutter and adjustments should be made accordingly.

'''Support. '''[[#903.1.13|EPG 903.1.13]] contains information regarding an order of priority for signs where available spacing along the roadway is limited.

=={{SpanID|903.1.21}}903.1.21 Retroreflection and Illumination (MUTCD Section 2A.21)==
'''Support. '''There are many materials currently available for retroreflection and various methods currently available for the illumination of signs and object markers. New materials and methods continue to emerge. New materials and methods can be used as long as the signs and object markers meet the standard requirements for color, both by day and by night.

This article applies to visibility of signs at night or in low-light or adverse weather conditions, whose legends are otherwise visible under typical daytime viewing conditions.

'''Standard. '''All traffic control signs on MoDOT right-of-way shall be retroreflective to show the same shape and similar color by both day and night, unless otherwise provided in the EPG for a particular sign or group of signs.

Where the color black is specified for the legend or background of a sign, an opaque and non-retroreflective material shall be used.

The requirements for sign illumination shall not be considered to be satisfied by street or highway lighting.

In special conditions when illuminated signs are permitted to be used per the EPG, sign symbols, word messages, and backgrounds shall be illuminated by a light behind the sign face through a translucent material.

Retroreflection of sign elements shall be accomplished by the means shown in [[#tab903.1.21|Table 903.1.21]].

{{SpanID|tab903.1.21}}

<div style="width: 100%; display: flex; justify-content: center;">
{| class="wikitable"
|+Table 903.1.21, Retroreflection of Sign Elements
|-
!Means of Retroreflection!!Sign Element
|-
|A material that has a smooth, sealed outer surface over a microstructure that reflects light||Symbol Word message Border Background 
|-
|colspan="2"style="background-color:#ffffff;"|Note: Illuminated signs are not used by MoDOT. Cities and counties may use illuminated street name signs if a maintenance agreement is in place.
|}
</div>

'''Guidance. '''Overhead sign installations should not be illuminated unless an engineering study shows a need for illumination, e.g. fog prone areas.

'''Support. '''Information regarding the use of retroreflective material on the sign support is contained in [[#903.1.11|EPG 903.1.11]].

Information regarding MoDOT sheeting types is contained in [[903.16 Design Aspects of MoDOT Signing #903.16.2|EPG 903.16.3]].

=={{SpanID|903.1.22}}903.1.22 Maintaining Minimum Retroreflectivity (MUTCD Section 2A.22)==
'''Support. '''Retroreflectivity is one of several factors associated with maintaining nighttime sign visibility (see [[#903.1.21|EPG 903.1.21]]).

'''Standard. '''MoDOT shall use an assessment or management method that is designed to maintain sign retroreflectivity at or above the minimum levels in [[#tab903-1-22|Table 903.1.22]]. Local jurisdictions who maintain sections of state routes and the signs on those sections under maintenance agreements shall maintain those signs in accordance with one of the MUTCD assessment methods.

{{SpanID|tab903-1-22}}


<div style="display: flex; justify-content: center;">
{|class="wikitable" style="text-align: center;"
|+ Table 903.1.22, Minimum Maintained Retroreflectivity Levels
|-
!rowspan="2"|Sign Color!!colspan="3"|Beaded Sheeting Type (ASTM D4956)!!rowspan="2"|Prismatic Sheeting!!rowspan="2"|Additional Criteria
|-
!I!!II!!III
|-
|rowspan="2"|White on Green || W*; G ≥ 7 || W*; G ≥ 15 || W*; G ≥ 25 || W ≥ 250; G ≥ 25 || Overhead
|-
| W*; G ≥ 7 || colspan="3"| W ≥ 120; G ≥ 15 || Post-mounted
|-
|rowspan="2"|White on Blue || W*; B ≥ 3 || W*; B ≥ 5 || W*; B ≥ 12 || W ≥ 250; B ≥ 12 || Overhead
|-
| W*; B ≥ 3 || colspan="3"|W ≥ 120; B ≥ 7 || Post-mounted
|-
|rowspan="2"|White on Brown || W*; Br ≥ 1 || W*; Br ≥ 5 || W*; Br ≥ 10 || W ≥ 350; Br ≥ 10 || Overhead
|-
| W*; Br ≥ 1 || colspan="3"|W ≥ 150; B ≥ 5 || Post-mounted
|-
|rowspan="2"|Black on Yellow or Black on Orange || Y*; O* || colspan="3"|Y ≥ 50; O ≥ 50 || 2
|-
| Y*; O* || colspan="3"|Y ≥ 75; O ≥ 75 || 3
|-
|White on Red || colspan="4"| W ≥ 35; R ≥ 7 || 4
|-
|Black on White || colspan="4"| W ≥ 50 || -
|-
|colspan="6" style="background-color: #ffffff; text-align: left;text-indent:-1em; padding-left: 1.5em;"| 1 The minimum maintained retroreflectivity levels shown in this table are in units of cd/Ix/m2 measured at an observation angle of 0.2° and an entrance angle of -4.0°.2 For word legend and fine symbol signs measuring at least 48 inches and for all sizes of bold symbol signs.3For word legend and fine symbol signs measuring less than 48 inches.4 Minimum sign contrast ratio ≥ 3:1 (white retroreflectivity ÷ red retroreflectivity).*This sheeting type shall not be used for this color for this application.
|-
!colspan="6"|Bold Symbol Signs
|-
|colspan="6"|<ul style="columns:3;"><li>W1-1,2 - Turn and Curve</li>
<li>W1-3,4 - Reverse Turn and Curve</li>
<li>W1-5 - Winding Road</li>
<li>W1-6,7 - Large Arrow</li>
<li>W1-8 - Chevron</li>
<li>W1-10 - Intersection in Curve</li>
<li>W1-11 - Hairpin Curve</li>
<li>W1-15 - 270 Degree Loop</li>
<li>W2-1 - Cross Road</li>
<li>W2-2,3 - Side Road</li>
<li>W2-4,5 - T and Y Intersection</li>
<li>W2-6 - Circular Intersection</li>
<li>W2-7,8 - Double Side Roads</li>
<li>W3-1 - Stop Ahead</li>
<li>W3-2 - Yield Ahead</li>
<li>W3-3 - Signal Ahead</li>
<li>W4-1 - Merge</li>
<li>W4-2 - Lane Ends</li>
<li>W4-3 - Added Lane</li>
<li>W4-5 - Entering Roadway Merge</li>
<li>W4-6 - Entering Roadway Added Lane</li>
<li>W6-1,2 - Divided Highway Begins and Ends</li>
<li>W6-3 - Two-Way Traffic</li>
<li>W10-1,2,3,4,11,12 - Grade Crossing Advance Warning</li>
<li>W11-2 - Pedestrian Crossing</li>
<li>W11-5 - Farm Equipment</li>
<li>W11-7 - Equestrian Crossing</li>
<li>W11-10 - Truck Crossing</li>
<li>W12-1 - Double Arrow</li>
<li>W16-5P,6P,7P - Pointing Arrow Plaques</li>
<li>W20-7 - Flagger</li>
<li>W21-1 - Worker</li></ul>
|-
!colspan="6"|Fine Symbol Signs (symbol signs not listed as bold symbol signs)
|-
|colspan="6" style="text-align: left"|'''Special Cases''' <ul><li>W3-1 - Stop Ahead: Red retroreflectivity ≥ 7</li><li>W3-2 - Yield Ahead: Red retroreflectivity ≥ 7; White retroreflectivity ≥ 35</li><li>W3-3 - Signal Ahead: Red retroreflectivity ≥ 7; Green retroreflectivity ≥ 35</li><li>W3-5 - Speed Reduction: White retroreflectivity ≥ 50</li><li>For non-diamond shaped signs, such as W14-3 (No Passing Zone), WP-4P (Cross Traffic Does Not Stop), or W13-1P,2,3,6,7 (Speed Advisory Signs), use the largest sign dimension to determine the proper minimum retroreflectivity level.</li>
|-
|colspan="6" style="background-color:#ffffff; text-align: left;"|'''Note:''' All MoDOT signs shall be fabricated as retroreflective for durability and longevity
|}
</div>

'''Support. '''Compliance with the Standard in the paragraph above is achieved by having a method in place and using the method to maintain the minimum levels established in [[#tab903-1-22|Table 903.1.22]]. Provided that an assessment or management method is being used, MoDOT would be in compliance with the Standard in the paragraph above even if there are some individual signs that do not meet the minimum retroreflectivity levels at a particular point in time.

MoDOT has a sign inspection process to maintain sign retroreflectivity at or above the minimum levels. See [[903.20 Construction Inspection Guidelines for Sec 903 #903.20.4|EPG 903.20.4]] for additional information related to sign inspection.

=={{SpanID|903.1.23}}903.1.23 Median Opening Treatments for Divided Highways (MUTCD Section 2A.23)==
'''Guidance. '''A divided highway crossing should be signed and marked as separate intersections when both of the following conditions are present:
::A. The paths of opposing left turns from the divided highway cross each other (see [[#fig903-1-23|Figure 903.1.23]]), and
::B. There is adequate storage in the interior approaches for the design vehicles expected to cross the divided highway.

If either one or both of the conditions in the Guidance paragraph above do not exist, the divided highway crossing should be signed and marked as a single intersection.

{{SpanID|fig903-1-23}}
[[File:Figure 903.1.23 Intersection Configuration at a Divided Highway Crossing.png|center|thumb|alt= A: A two-lane horizontal roadway intersecting with two northbound lanes, a wide median, and two southbound lanes of a vertical divided highway with a median width of 150 feet is shown. The vertical highway is composed of two through lanes and a left-turn lane in each direction. Starting at the end of both left-turn lanes, a solid blue line is shown curving to the left, continuing straight through the two horizontal lanes (one eastbound and one westbound, respectively), and stopping in the middle of the opposite vertical roadway travel lanes. The blue lines end in arrowheads, pointing to the left. The blue lines denote the “path of left-turning vehicles” that cross over each other in the horizontal roadway in opposing directions.
B: A two-lane horizontal roadway intersecting with two northbound lanes, a narrow median, and two southbound lanes of a vertical divided highway is shown. The vertical highway is composed of two through lanes and a left-turn lane in each direction. Starting at the end of both left-turn lanes, a solid blue line is shown curving to the left, continuing straight through the intersection, crossing over both vertical lanes before stopping at the outside edge of the opposite vertical roadway. The blue lines end in arrowheads, pointing to the left. The blue lines denote the “path of left-turning vehicles” that do not cross over each other in the intersection in opposing directions.|800px| '''Figure 903.1.23''' Intersection Configuration at a Divided Highway Crossing]]

At the crossing of two divided highways, engineering judgment should be used to determine the number of separate intersections.

'''Support. '''Divided highway crossings with median widths 150 feet or greater might function as two intersections depending upon the interaction of the opposing left-turn vehicle paths and the available interior storage in the median for a crossing vehicle. Other factors that could determine whether a divided highway crossing is operating as one or two intersections include:
::A. The geometric design of the divided highway crossing,
::B. The use of positive offset mainline left-turn lanes,
::C. The length of the median opening (as measured parallel to the center line of the divided highway),
::D. The geometric design of the median noses,
::E. Other roadway geometric considerations such as a skewed side street approach or a variable median width,
::F. Intersection sight distance,
::G. The physical characteristics of the design vehicle, and
::H. The observed prevailing driver behavior with regard to opposing left-turn path interaction.

=={{SpanID|903.1.24}}903.1.24 Priority Order of Signs==
'''Standard. '''The order classification of signs shall be defined as follows (refer to [[#fig903-1-24|Figure 903.1.24]]):
#First Order Signing. Signs that are installed in advance of the closest intersection or interchange where motorists turn off of the state highway system to arrive at the desired traffic generator or site. First order signing will always be on state right-of-way.
#Second Order Signing. Signs that are installed in advance of the intersection or interchange where motorists turn to access the highway where the first order signing is provided. Second order signing will always be on state right-of-way and shall require the use of first order signing on state right-of-way.
#Third Order Signing. Signs that are installed in advance of the intersection or interchange where motorists turn to access the highway where the second order signing is provided. Third order signing will always be on state right-of-way and shall require the use of first order and second order signing on state right-of-way.

[[File:Figure 903.1.24 Sign Order Classification.gif|center|frame|thumb|alt=A diagram illustrating the priority order of signs for state highway directions with First, Second, and Third Order Signing.| <center>'''Figure 903.1.24 Sign Order Classification'''</center>]]

'''Support. '''In general, as the “order” of signing increases, the functional classification of road stays the same or increases. For example, if first order signing is on a four-lane U.S. route, second order signing should be on another U.S. route, expressway, or a freeway. In this example case, second order signing should not be placed on a two-lane lettered route.

903.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 2A)

2025-12-11T14:32:22Z

HogsettC: /* {{SpanID|903.1.13}}903.1.13 Standardization of Location (MUTCD Section 2A.13) */

[[Category:903 Highway Signing (MUTCD Part 2)|903.0]]
{| align="right" style="margin-left: 15px;"
| __TOC__
|}

=={{SpanID|903.1.1}}903.1.1 Function and Purpose of Signs (MUTCD Section 2A.01)==
'''Support. '''The EPG contains Standards, Guidance, and Options for the signing of all types of highways, and site roadways open to public travel within the right-of-way maintained by MoDOT. The functions of signs are to provide regulations, warnings, and guidance information for road users. Words, symbols, and arrows are used to convey the messages. Signs are not typically used to confirm rules of the road.

Detailed sign requirements are located in the following articles of the EPG:
*[[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B)|EPG 903.2]] - Regulatory Signs and Barricades
*[[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C)|EPG 903.3]] - Warning Signs and Object Markers
*[[903.4_Guide_Signs—Conventional_Roads_(MUTCD_Chapter_2D)|EPG 903.4]] - Guide Signs for Conventional Roads
*[[903.5 Guide Signs - Freeways and Expressways (MUTCD Chapter 2E)|EPG 903.5]] - Guide Signs for Freeways and Expressways
*[[903.6 Toll Road Signs (MUTCD Chapter 2F)|EPG 903.6]] - Toll Road Signs – Not used on MoDOT facilities
*[[903.7 Preferential and Managed Lane Signs (MUTCD Chapter 2G)|EPG 903.7]] - Preferential and Managed Lane Signs – Not used on MoDOT facilities
*[[903.8 General Information Signs (MUTCD Chapter 2H)|EPG 903.8]] - General Information Signs
*[[903.9 General Service Signs (MUTCD Chapter 2I)|EPG 903.9]] - General Service Signs
*[[903.10 Specific Service Signs (MUTCD Chapter 2J)|EPG 903.10]] - Specific Service Signs
*[[903.11 Tourist-Oriented Directional Signs (MUTCD Chapter 2K)|EPG 903.11]] - Tourist-Oriented Directional Signs
*[[903.12 Changeable Message Signs (MUTCD Chapter 2L)|EPG 903.12]] - Changeable Message Signs
*[[903.13 Recreational, Historic Site, and Cultural Interest Area Signs (MUTCD Chapter 2M)|EPG 903.13]] - Recreational, Historic Site, and Cultural Interest Area Signs
*[[903.14 Emergency Management Signs (MUTCD Chapter 2N)|EPG 903.14]] - Emergency Management Signs – Not used on MoDOT facilities

Definitions and acronyms that are applicable to signs are provided in [[:Category:911_General_(MUTCD_Part_1) #911.3.2 | EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1C.02)]].

MoDOT typically will not use signing to confirm rules of the road or state laws. The application of such signing will typically be used when a new law is passed for educational purposes, with the signs remaining in place until the end of their service life and then removed. Some signs may be left in place at strategic locations such as major entry points into the state.

'''Standard. '''The decision to install and maintain signs to confirm rules of the road or state laws shall be made by the MoDOT Highway Safety and Traffic Division along with the MoDOT Executive Leadership Team.

=={{SpanID|903.1.2}}903.1.2 Standardization of Application (MUTCD Section 2A.02)==
'''Support. '''It is recognized that urban traffic conditions differ from those in rural environments, and in many instances signs are applied and located differently. Where pertinent and practical, the EPG sets forth separate recommendations for urban and rural conditions. This generally applies to sign mounting heights.

'''Guidance. '''Signs should be used only where justified by engineering judgment or studies, as provided in [[:Category:911_General_(MUTCD_Part_1) #911.4.3 | EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1D.03)]].

Results from traffic engineering studies of physical and traffic safety or operational factors should indicate the locations where signs are deemed necessary or desirable.

Roadway geometric design and sign application should be coordinated so that signing can be effectively placed to give the road user any necessary regulatory, warning, guidance, and other information.

'''Standard. '''Each standard sign (see first paragraph of [[#903.1.4|EPG 903.1.4]]) shall be displayed only for the specific purpose as prescribed in the EPG. Before any new highway, site roadway open to public travel (see definition in [[:Category:911_General_(MUTCD_Part_1) #911.3.2 | EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1C.02)]]), detour, or temporary route is opened to public travel, all necessary signs shall be in place. Signs required by road conditions or restrictions shall be removed when those conditions cease to exist or the restrictions are withdrawn.

=={{SpanID|903.1.3}}903.1.3 Classification of Signs (MUTCD Section 2A.03) ==
'''Standard. '''Signs shall be defined by their function as follows:
::A. Regulatory signs give notice of traffic laws or regulations.
::B. Warning signs give notice of a situation that might not be readily apparent.
::C. Guide signs show route designations, destinations, directions, distances, services, points of interest, and other geographical, recreational, or cultural information.

'''Support. '''Barricades are described in [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2.60|EPG 903.2.60]] and [[616.11 TTC Zone Channelizing Devices (MUTCD Chapter 6K) #616.11.7|616.11.7]].

Object markers are described in [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.70|EPG 903.3.70]].

=={{SpanID|903.1.4}}903.1.4 Design of Signs (MUTCD Section 2A.04)==
'''Support. '''The EPG shows many standard signs and object markers approved for use on streets, highways, bikeways, and pedestrian crossings. Standard signs and object markers have a standardized design, shape, background, and legend as shown in the EPG.

In the provisions for individual standard signs and object markers, the general appearance of the legend, color, and size are shown in the accompanying tables and illustrations, and are not always detailed in the text.

The MoDOT Highway Safety and Traffic Division maintains design files of standard signs, object markers, alphabets, symbols, and arrows that meet or exceed MUTCD standards and are used to detail, order, and fabricate signs used on MoDOT routes.

The basic requirements of a sign are that it be legible to those for whom it is intended and that it be understandable in time to allow for a proper response. Desirable attributes include:
::A. High visibility by day and night; and
::B. High legibility (adequately-sized letters, symbols, or arrows, and a short legend for quick comprehension by a road user approaching a sign).

Standardized colors and shapes are specified so that the several classes of traffic signs can be promptly recognized. Simplicity and uniformity in design, position, and application are essential for a sign to be effective.

'''Standard. '''The term legend shall include all word messages and symbol and arrow designs that are intended to convey specific meanings.

Uniformity in design shall include shape, color, dimensions, legends, letter style, borders, and illumination or retroreflectivity.

Standardization of these designs does not preclude further improvement by minor modifications to the orientation of symbols (see [[#903.1.9|EPG 903.1.9]]), width of borders, or layout of word messages, but all shapes and colors shall be as indicated.

All symbols (see [[#903.1.9|EPG 903.1.9]]) shall be unmistakably similar to, or mirror images of, the adopted symbol signs, all of which are shown in the FHWA's “Standard Highway Signs” publication (see [[:Category:911_General_(MUTCD_Part_1) #911.1.5 | EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1A.05)]]). Symbols and colors shall not be modified unless otherwise provided in the EPG. All symbols, colors, or other design features for signs not shown in the FHWA's “Standard Highway Signs” publication (see [[:Category:911_General_(MUTCD_Part_1) #911.1.5 | EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1A.05)]]) shall be approved by the MoDOT Highway Safety and Traffic Division and shall follow the MUTCD procedures for experimentation and change described in [[:Category:911_General_(MUTCD_Part_1) #911.2.1 | EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1B.01)]].

Where a standard word message is applicable, the wording shall be as provided in the EPG.

In situations where word messages are necessary other than those provided in the EPG (see the first Option paragraph below), the signs shall be of the same shape and color as standard signs of the same functional type.

Where the legend of a standard sign is a symbol or a combination of a symbol and words, an alternative word legend shall not be allowed in place of the symbol, except as otherwise provided in the EPG.

Where a standard sign provided in the EPG or the FHWA's “Standard Highway Signs” publication (see [[:Category:911_General_(MUTCD_Part_1) #911.1.5 | EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1A.05)]]) is applicable, an alternative legend sign or alternative sign design shall not be allowed in place of the standardized legend or design except as provided in the EPG.

Where a standard sign provided in the EPG or the FHWA's “Standard Highway Signs” publication (see [[:Category:911_General_(MUTCD_Part_1) #911.1.5 | EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1A.05)]]) is applicable, but the legend is variable, such as for destination names, an alternative sign design or dimensions shall not be allowed in place of the standardized design for the non-variable elements except as provided in the EPG.

'''Option. '''The MoDOT Highway Safety and Traffic Division may develop special word legend signs in situations where engineering judgment determines roadway conditions make it necessary to provide road users with additional regulatory, warning, or guidance information, such as when road users need to be notified of special regulations or warned about a situation that might not be readily apparent. Unlike colors that have not been assigned or symbols that have not been approved for signs, new word legend signs may be used without the need for experimentation.

'''Support. '''The message conveyed by some special word legend signs might be unclear to the road user. Although experimentation is not required for such word legends, they might still warrant an evaluation to determine comprehension or possible misinterpretation of the intended message by the road user.

Scanning graphics are graphics designed for scanning by machine, and include bar codes, quick-response (QR) codes or other matrix bar-code formats, or similar graphics.

'''Standard. '''Unless otherwise provided in the EPG for a specific sign or as provided in the Option paragraph below, telephone numbers, Internet addresses, e-mail addresses, domain names, uniform resource locators (URL), metadata tags (“hash-tags”), and scanning graphics (see Support paragraph above) for the purpose of obtaining information (other than those for maintenance or inventory purposes per the provisions of the second Standard paragraph below) shall not be displayed on any sign, plaque, sign panel, or changeable message sign.

'''Option. '''Internet addresses, e-mail addresses, telephone numbers, scanning graphics, or other graphics for the purpose of conveying information may be displayed on the face of signs, plaques, sign panels, and changeable message signs that are oriented away from or otherwise not readily visible to operators of motor vehicles but rather are intended for viewing only by pedestrians, occupants of parked vehicles, and driving automation systems if approved by the MoDOT Highway Safety and Traffic Division.

'''Standard. '''Pictographs (see definition in [[:Category:911_General_(MUTCD_Part_1) #911.3.2 | EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1C.02)]]) shall not be displayed on signs except as specifically provided in the EPG for a particular type of sign. Pictographs shall be simple, dignified, and devoid of any advertising and shall not contain any scanning graphics (see first Support paragraph above) for the purpose of conveying information. When used to represent a political jurisdiction (a State, county, or municipal corporation) the pictograph shall be the official designation adopted by the jurisdiction, except as provided otherwise in the EPG. When used to represent any other type of jurisdiction, the pictograph shall be the official designation adopted by the jurisdiction. When used to represent a college or university, the pictograph shall be the official seal adopted by the institution. College or university pictographs shall not include pictorial representations of university or college programs, or athletic mascots.

No items other than official traffic control signs, inventory stickers or decals, sign installation dates, manufacturer name, sign sizes, sign designations, anti-vandalism stickers, inventory or maintenance codes, and maintenance-related scanning graphics shall be mounted on the back of a sign.

Only the MoDOT ID logo shall be displayed on the face of a sign to identify the sign as MoDOT property and define the penalties for tampering with the sign. The MoDOT ID logo shall match the detail and installation location as displayed in [https://www.modot.org/media/16920 Standard Plan 903.02].

=={{SpanID|903.1.5}}903.1.5 Shapes (MUTCD Section 2A.05)==
'''Standard. '''Particular shapes, as shown in [[#tab903.1.5|Table 903.1.5]], shall be used exclusively for specific signs or a series of signs, unless otherwise provided in the EPG for a particular sign or class of signs.

{{SpanID|tab903.1.5}}

<div style="width: 100%; display: flex; justify-content: center;">
{| class="wikitable"
|+ Table 903.1.5, Use of Sign Shapes
|-
!Shape !! Signs
|-
|Octagon*||Stop (R1-1)**
|-
|Equilateral Triangle (downward-pointing)* ||Yield (R1-2)**
|-
|Circle*||Grade Crossing Advance Warning (W10-1)**
|-
|Pentagon (upward-pointing)*||School (S1-1) (squares bottom corners)**
|-
|Crossbuck (two rectangles in a perpendicular "X" configuration)*||Grade Crossing (R15-1)**
|-
|Diamond||Warning Series
|-
|Rectangle (including square)||Regulatory Series Guide Series*** Warning Series
|-
|colspan="2" style="background-color: #ffffff"|Key: * This shape shall be limited exclusively to the sign(s) indicated. ** This sign shall be exclusively the shape shown. *** Guide series includes general service, specific service, tourist-oriented directional, general information, recreational and cultural interest area, and emergency management signs. Note: Signs with standardized designs shall not be modified to accommodate a different shape except as provided in the EPG.
|}
</div>

The Crossbuck is a shape exclusive to the Grade Crossing (R15-1) sign and shall not be obscured by mounting a different shape sign on the back of the Crossbuck (see [[913.2 Signs (MUTCD Chapter 8B) #913.2.3 | EPG 913.2.3]]).

'''Guidance. '''Shapes that are exclusive to a particular sign (STOP, YIELD, Railroad Advance, School, Warning, and Crossbuck signs) should not be obscured by another sign mounted on the back of the same assembly protruding or extending beyond the edge of the sign with the exclusive shape. The following methods should be considered in lieu of mounting a sign on the back of another sign that would obscure the exclusive shape of the sign:
::A. Install the signs on separate mountings to maintain the exclusive shape.
::B. Increase the size of the sign with the exclusive shape and/or decrease the size of the sign mounted behind the sign with the exclusive shape so the sign installed on the back does not obscure its shape.

Where the lateral space available in which to install a standard sign is constrained, such as mounting on a narrow median barrier or adjacent to a retaining wall, the following methods should be considered to maintain the shape of the sign:
::A. Angle the sign up to 45 degrees toward the roadway while still maintaining adequate legibility.
::B. Install the sign at a different location that still provides adequate advance warning, supplementing the sign with a Distance plaque (see [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.60|EPG 903.3.60]]), if appropriate.
::C. Reduce the size of the sign, but supplement it with a duplicate sign on the opposite side of the roadway (see [[#903.1.11|EPG 903.1.11]]).
::D. In addition to either angling or reducing the size of the sign, supplement it with a duplicate warning sign and Distance plaque at an upstream location.
::E. Mount the sign asymmetrically on the sign support, such as when the support is mounted on a bridge parapet or railing, such that the edge of the sign does not overhang the roadway, shoulder, or other areas used by bicyclists or pedestrians.

'''Option. '''Where the shape of the sign cannot be maintained due to lateral constraints, the following methods may be considered:
::A. For warning signs or other types of signs displayed in a horizontally-oriented rectangle, the legend may be displayed in a vertically-oriented rectangle.
::B. When mounted overhead, the word legend for a standard warning sign may be displayed in a horizontally-oriented rectangle.

'''Support. '''Provisions for mounting height of signs that overhang any portion of the traveled way are contained in [[#903.1.15|EPG 903.1.15]].

Provisions for lateral offset are contained in [[#903.1.16|EPG 903.1.16]].

'''Standard. '''Modifications to sign shapes, such as cutting off the left and right points of a diamond, shall not be allowed. This applies to both permanent and temporary traffic control signs.

'''Option. '''Where the methods described in the first Guidance paragraph of this article are impracticable, the legend of the warning sign may be displayed in a vertically-oriented rectangle.

=={{SpanID|903.1.6}}903.1.6 Colors (MUTCD Section 2A.06)==
'''Standard. '''The colors to be used on signs and their specific uses on signs shall be as provided in the applicable articles of the EPG. The color coordinates and values shall be as described in 23 CFR, Part 655, Subpart F, Appendix.

Colors (see [[:Category:911_General_(MUTCD_Part_1) #911.4.5 | EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1D.05)]]) shall be consistent across the face of a sign or a sign panel. Color gradients (smooth or defined gradual transitions either within a color or transition to another color) shall not be allowed.

{{SpanID|tab903.1.6}}
{|| class="wikitable" style="margin:auto; text-align: center; font-size: 80%"
|+ style="font-size:125%;"|Table 903.1.6, Common Uses of Sign Colors
!rowspan="2"|Type of Sign!!colspan="8"|Legend!!colspan="11"|Background
|- style="writing-mode: vertical-lr;"
!Black!!Green!!Red!!White!!Yellow!!Orange!!Fluorescent Yellow-Green1!!Fluorescent Pink!!Black!!Blue!!Brown!!Green!!Fluorescent Orange!!Red!!White!!Fluorescent Yellow!!Purple!!Fluorescent Yellow-Green1!!Fluorescent Pink
|-

||Regulatory||X|| ||X||X|| || || || ||X|| || || || ||X||X|| || || ||
|-
||Prohibitive|| || ||X||X2|| || || || || || || || || ||X2||X|| || || ||
|-
||Permissive|| ||X|| || || || || || || || || || || || ||X|| || || ||
|-
||Warning||X|| || || || || || || || || || || || || || ||X|| || ||
|-
||Pedestrian||X|| || || || || || || || || || || || || || ||X|| || ||
|-
||Bicycle||X|| || || || || || || || || || || || || || ||X|||| ||
|-
||Guide|| || || ||X|| || || || || || || ||X|| || || || || || ||
|-
||Interstate Route|| || || ||X|| || || || || ||X|| || || ||X|| || || || ||
|-
||State Route||X|| || || || || || || || || || || || || ||X|| || || ||
|-
||U.S. Route||X|| || || || || || || || || || || || || ||X|| || || ||
|-
||Street Name|| || || ||X|| || || || || || || ||X|| || || || || || ||
|-
||Destination|| || || ||X|| || || || || || || ||X|| || || || || || ||
|-
||Reference Location|| || || ||X|| || || || || || || ||X|| || || || || || ||
|-
||Information|| || || ||X|| || || || || ||X|| ||X|| || || || || || ||
|-
||Road User Service|| || || ||X|| || || || || ||X|| || || || || || || || ||
|-
||Recreational|| || || ||X|| || || || || || ||X||X|| || || || || || ||
|-
||Temporary Traffic Control||X|| || || || || || || || || || || ||X|| || || || || ||
|-
||Incident Management||X|| || || || || || || || || || || ||X|| || || || || ||X
|-
||School||X|| || || || || || || || || || || || || || || || ||X||
|-
|-
!colspan="99" style="text-align:left"|Changeable Message Signs
|-
|Regulatory || || ||X4||X|| || || || ||X|| || || || || || || || || ||
|-
|Warning, Pedestrian, Bicycle|| || || || ||X|| || || ||X|| || || || || || || || || ||
|-
|Temporary Traffic Control || || || || ||X||X|| || ||X|| || || || || || || || || ||
|-
|Guide || || || ||X|| || || || ||X|| || ||X3|| || || || || || ||
|-
|Motorist Services || || || ||X|| || || || ||X||X3|| || || || || || || || ||
|-
|Incident Management || || || || ||X|| || ||X||X|| || || || || || || || || ||
|-
|School || || || || || || ||X|| ||X|| || || || || || || || || ||
|-
|colspan="99" style="text-align:left; font-size: 120%;"|1 MoDOT has conducted research on the use of Fluorescent Yellow-Green for Pedestrian and Bicycle Signs. Research did not indicate any safety benefit, therefore the color is reserved for School signs only. 

2 Legend and background color combination for use only as identified for specific signs in the EPG or FHWA's Standard Highway Signs publication. 

3 These alternative background colors would be provided by blue or green lighted pixels such that the entire CMS would be lighted, not just the legend. 

4 Red is used only for the circle and diagonal or other red elements of a similar static regulatory sign. 

Notes: 
# The purpose of the information in this table is to provide a general overview of common color combinations. The color combinations and orientations for signs with standardized designs shall not be modified. For signs with unique legends, the shape and color shall be the same as standard signs of the same functional type.
# The colors shown for changeable message signs are for those with electronic displays.
|-
|}

'''Support. '''Common uses of sign colors are shown in [[#tab903.1.6|Table 903.1.6]]. Color schemes on specific signs are shown in the illustrations located in each applicable EPG article.

Whenever white is specified in the EPG or in the FHWA's “Standard Highway Signs” publication (see [[:Category:911_General_(MUTCD_Part_1) #911.1.5 | EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1A.05)]]) as a color, it is understood to include silver-colored retroreflective coatings or elements that reflect white light.

The colors coral and light blue are being reserved for uses that will be determined in the future by the Federal Highway Administration.

Information regarding color coding of destinations on guide signs, including community wayfinding signs, is contained in [[903.4 Guide Signs—Conventional Roads (MUTCD Chapter 2D) #903.4|EPG 903.4]].

=={{SpanID|903.1.7}}903.1.7 Dimensions (MUTCD Section 2A.07)==
'''Support. '''To standardize signing throughout the state highway system, MoDOT has predetermined the sizes for all highway signs; refer to the appropriate EPG article. Larger sizes are designed for use on freeways and expressways, and can also be used in oversized applications to enhance road user safety and convenience on other facilities, especially on multi-lane divided highways and on undivided highways having five or more lanes of traffic and/or high speeds. The intermediate sizes are designed to be used on other highway types. MoDOT does not adopt smaller sized signs for bikeways or other off-road applications as MoDOT typically does not maintain these types of facilities. MoDOT's minimum sign sizes generally exceed the MUTCD minimum sign sizes. The MUTCD minimum sizes in these cases are intended more for low-speed, local jurisdictional roadways and not for state highways. The sign size tables at the beginning of each EPG signing article lists the correct sign sizes for MoDOT applications.

'''Standard. '''The sign dimensions prescribed in the sign size tables in the various EPG articles shall be used unless engineering judgment determines that other sizes are appropriate. All sign sizes smaller than the prescribed dimensions shall be approved by the MoDOT Highway Safety and Traffic Division.

'''Guidance. '''The sizes shown in the Oversized columns in the various sign size tables in the EPG should be used for those special applications where speed, volume, or other factors result in conditions where increased emphasis, improved recognition, or increased legibility is needed, as determined by engineering judgment or study.

Except as provided in the Standard paragraph below, and where specifically prohibited in the EPG, increases above the minimum prescribed sizes should be used where greater legibility or emphasis is needed. If signs larger than the prescribed sizes are used, the overall sign dimensions will typically be increased in 12-inch increments.

'''Standard. '''Where a maximum allowable sign size is prescribed, increases in sign size above the maximum size shall not be allowed.

Where engineering judgment determines that sizes that are different from the minimum prescribed dimensions are appropriate for use, standard shapes and colors shall be used. Standard proportions shall be retained as much as practicable. Any application of size which is different from those given in the EPG shall first be approved by the MoDOT Highway Safety and Traffic Division.

=={{SpanID|903.1.8}}903.1.8 Word Messages (MUTCD Section 2A.08)==
'''Standard. '''Except as otherwise provided in the EPG, all word messages shall be aligned horizontally across a sign, reading left to right.

Except as provided in [[#903.1.4|EPG 903.1.4]], all word messages shall use standard wording as shown in the EPG and in the FHWA's “Standard Highway Signs” publication (see [[:Category:911_General_(MUTCD_Part_1) #911.1.5 | EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1A.05)]]).

All sign lettering, numerals, and other characters shall be of the Standard Alphabets as provided in the FHWA's “Standard Highway Signs” publication (see [[:Category:911_General_(MUTCD_Part_1) #911.1.5 | EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1A.05)]]), unless otherwise provided in the EPG.

The sign lettering for names of places, streets, and highways shall be composed of a combination of lower-case letters with initial upper-case letters. The sign lettering for other legends shall be composed of upper-case letters, unless otherwise provided in the EPG for a particular sign or type of message.

Except as provided in [[903.5 Guide Signs - Freeways and Expressways (MUTCD Chapter 2E)|EPG 903.5]], when a mixed-case legend is used, the nominal loop height of the lower-case letters shall be ¾ of the height of the initial upper-case letter.

The unique letter forms for each of the Standard Alphabet series shall not be stretched, compressed, warped, or otherwise manipulated.

Any non-standard or variable sign shall be detailed by the MoDOT Highway Safety and Traffic Division for signs installed by MoDOT forces as well as those installed by contractors on MoDOT projects.

'''Support. '''[[903.4 Guide Signs—Conventional Roads (MUTCD Chapter 2D) #903.4.3|EPG 903.4.3]] contains information regarding the acceptable methods of modifying the length of a word for a given letter height and series.

'''Guidance. '''Word messages should be as brief as practical to convey a clear, simple meaning, and the lettering should be large enough to provide the necessary legibility distance. A minimum specific ratio of 1 inch of letter height per 30 feet of legibility distance should be used.

Abbreviations (see [[:Category:911_General_(MUTCD_Part_1) #911.4.8 | EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1D.08)]]) should be kept to a minimum, except as otherwise prescribed in the EPG.

Word messages should not contain periods, apostrophes, question marks, ampersands, or other punctuation or characters that are not letters, numerals, or hyphens unless necessary to avoid confusion.

'''Support. '''Diacritical marks on words or names that are adapted to English are not normally needed on signs for comprehension or navigational purposes.

A legend in a secondary language, in addition to English, may be displayed on the face of signs, plaques, sign panels, and changeable message signs that are oriented away from or otherwise not readily visible to operators of motor vehicles, but rather are intended for viewing only by pedestrians and occupants of parked vehicles.

'''Guidance. '''The solidus (slanted line or forward slash) is intended to be used for fractions only and should not be used to separate words on the same line of legend. Instead, a hyphen should be used for this purpose, such as “TRUCKS - BUSES.”

'''Standard. '''Fractions shall be displayed with the numerator and denominator diagonally arranged about the solidus. The overall height of the fraction is measured from the top of the numerator to the bottom of the denominator, each of which is vertically aligned with the upper and lower ends of the solidus. The overall height of the fraction shall be determined by the height of the numerals within the fraction, and shall be 1.5 times the height of an individual numeral within the fraction.

Except as otherwise provided in the EPG, distances shall be displayed on signs using fractions of a mile rather than decimals.

'''Support. '''The FHWA's “Standard Highway Signs” publication (see [[:Category:911_General_(MUTCD_Part_1) #911.1.5 | EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1A.05)]]) contains details regarding the layouts of fractions on signs.

'''Guidance. '''When initials are used to represent an abbreviation for separate words (such as “U S” for a United States route), the initials should be separated by a space of between ½ and ¾ of the letter height of the initials.

When an Interstate route is displayed in text form instead of using the route shield, a hyphen should be used for clarity, such as “I-70.”

'''Support. '''Letter height is expressed in terms of the height of an upper-case letter. For mixed-case legends (those composed of an initial upper-case letter followed by lower-case letters), the height of the lower-case letters is derived from the specified height of the initial upper-case letter based on a prescribed ratio. Letter heights for mixed-case legends might be expressed in terms of both the upper- and lower-case letters, or in terms of the initial upper-case letter alone. When the height of a lower-case letter is specified or determined from the prescribed ratio, the reference is to the nominal loop height of the letter. The term loop height refers to the portion of a lower-case letter that excludes any ascending or descending stems or tails of the letter, such as with the letters “d” or “q.” The nominal loop height is equal to the actual height of a non-rounded lower-case letter whose form does not include ascending or descending stems or tails, such as the letter “x.” The rounded portions of a lower-case letter extend slightly above and below the baselines projected from the top and bottom of such a non-rounded letter so that the appearance of a uniform letter height within a word is achieved. The actual loop height of a rounded lower-case letter is slightly greater than the nominal loop height and this additional height is excluded from the expression of the lower-case letter height.

=={{SpanID|903.1.9}}903.1.9 Symbols (MUTCD Section 2A.09)==
'''Standard. '''Symbol designs shall in all cases be unmistakably similar to those shown in the EPG and in the FHWA's “Standard Highway Signs” publication (see [[:Category:911_General_(MUTCD_Part_1) #911.1.5 | EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1A.05)]]).

'''Option. '''Although most standard symbols are oriented facing left, mirror images of these symbols may be used where the reverse orientation might better convey to road users a direction of movement.

'''Support. '''New symbol designs are adopted by the Federal Highway Administration based on research evaluations to determine road user comprehension, sign conspicuity, and sign legibility.

Sometimes a change from word messages to symbols requires significant time for public education and transition. Therefore, the EPG sometimes includes the practice of using educational plaques to accompany new symbol signs.

'''Guidance. '''New standard warning or regulatory symbol signs should be accompanied by an educational plaque where engineering judgment determines that the plaque will improve road user comprehension during the transition from word message to symbol signs.

'''Option. '''Educational plaques may be left in place as long as they are in serviceable condition.

'''Standard. '''A symbol used for a given category of signs (regulatory, warning, or guide) shall not be used for a different category of signs, except as specifically authorized in the EPG.

A recreational and cultural interest area symbol (see [[903.13 Recreational, Historic Site, and Cultural Interest Area Signs (MUTCD Chapter 2M) #903.13|EPG 903.13]]) shall not be used on streets or highways outside of recreational and cultural interest areas.

A recreational and cultural interest area symbol (see [[903.13 Recreational, Historic Site, and Cultural Interest Area Signs (MUTCD Chapter 2M) #903.13|EPG 903.13]]) shall not be used on any regulatory or warning sign on any street, road, or highway.

=={{SpanID|903.1.10}}903.1.10 Sign Borders (MUTCD Section 2A.10)==
'''Standard. '''Unless otherwise provided, signs shall have a border of the same color as the legend in order to outline their distinctive shape and thereby give them easy recognition and a finished appearance.

The corners of all sign borders shall be rounded, except for STOP signs.

'''Guidance. '''A dark border on a light background should be set in from the edge, while a light border on a dark background should extend to the edge of the sign. A border for 30-inch signs with a light background should be from ½ to ¾ inch in width, ½ inch from the edge. For similar signs with a light border, a width of 1 inch should be used. For other sizes, the border width should be of similar proportions, but should not exceed the stroke-width of the major lettering of the sign. On signs exceeding 72 x 120 inches in size, the border should be 2 inches wide. On unusually large signs with oversized letter heights, route shields, or other legend elements, the border should be 2.5 inches wide and should not exceed 3 inches in width. Except for STOP signs and as otherwise provided in [[903.5 Guide Signs - Freeways and Expressways (MUTCD Chapter 2E) #903.5.13|EPG 903.5.13]], the corners of the sign should be rounded to a radius that is concentric with that of the border.

'''Support. '''[[#903.1.12|EPG 903.1.12]] contains information regarding the use of light-emitting diode (LED) units within the border of a sign.

=={{SpanID|903.1.11}}903.1.11 Enhanced Conspicuity for Standards Signs (MUTCD Section 2A.11)==

'''Option. '''Based upon engineering judgment, where the improvement of the conspicuity of a standard regulatory, warning, or guide sign is desired, any of the following methods may be used, as appropriate, to enhance the sign’s conspicuity (see [[#fig903-1-11|Figure 903.1.11]]):
::A. Increasing the size of a standard regulatory, warning, or guide sign.
::B. Dual signing of a standard regulatory, warning, or guide sign by adding a second identical sign on the left-hand side of the roadway at the same location.
::C. Adding a fluorescent yellow rectangular header panel above a standard regulatory sign, with the width of the panel corresponding to the width of the standard regulatory sign. A legend of “NOTICE,” “STATE LAW,” or other appropriate text may be added in black letters within the header panel for a period of time determined by engineering judgment.
::D. Adding a Warning Beacon (see [[902.18 Flashing Beacons (MUTCD Chapter 4S) #902.18.3|EPG 902.18.3]]) to a standard regulatory (other than a STOP, DO NOT ENTER, WRONG WAY, or a Speed Limit sign), warning, or guide sign.
::E. Adding a Speed Limit Sign Beacon (see [[902.18 Flashing Beacons (MUTCD Chapter 4S) #902.18.4|EPG 902.18.4 ]]) to a standard Speed Limit sign.
::F. Adding a Stop Beacon (see [[902.18 Flashing Beacons (MUTCD Chapter 4S) #902.18.5|EPG 902.18.5]]) to a STOP, DO NOT ENTER, or WRONG WAY sign.
::G. Adding a rectangular rapid-flashing beacon (see [[902.12 Rectangular Rapid Flashing Beacons (MUTCD Chapter 4L)#902.12.1|EPG 902.12]]) to a Pedestrian, School, or Trail warning sign at an uncontrolled marked crosswalk.
::H. Adding light-emitting diode (LED) units within the symbol, legend, or border of a standard regulatory, warning, or guide sign, as provided in [[#903.1.12|EPG 903.1.12]].
::I. Adding a strip of retroreflective material to the sign support in accordance with the provisions of the second Standard paragraph below.
::J. Using other methods that are specifically allowed for certain signs as described elsewhere in the EPG. The MoDOT Highway Safety and Traffic Division will evaluate any new methods to improve sign conspicuity.

{{SpanID|fig903-1-11}}
[[File:Figure 903.1.11 Examples of Enhanced Conspicuity for Signs.png|thumb|alt="A:A yellow rectangular header panel is shown with the legend ""NOTICE,"" in black letters, mounted above a standard regulatory sign with the legend ""WEIGHT LIMIT 10 TONS"" in black letters on four lines.
B:LED lights are shown on the perimeter of a “Stop” sign.
C:A round yellow beacon is shown mounted above an intersection warning sign.
D:A vertical fluorescent yellow-green strip is shown on the top half length of a sign support for a fluorescent yellow-green “Pedestrian Crossing” sign."
|center|600px| '''Figure 903.1.11''' Examples of Enhanced Conspicuity for Signs]]

'''Support. '''Sign conspicuity improvements can also be achieved by removing non-essential and illegal signs from the right-of-way (see [[:Category:911_General_(MUTCD_Part_1) #911.4.2 | EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1D.02)]]), and by relocating signs to provide better spacing. [[#903.1.20|EPG 903.1.20]] contains information on excessive use of signs.

'''Standard. '''Strobe lights shall not be used to enhance the conspicuity of highway signs.

If a strip of retroreflective material is used on the sign support, it shall be at least 4 inches in width, it shall be placed for the full length of the support from the bottom of the sign and extending down the length of the post, with the bottom of the retroreflective strip not being taller than 2 feet above the edge of the roadway, (see [[#fig903-1-11|Figure 903.1.11]]), and its color shall match the background color of the primary sign, except that the color of the strip for the YIELD and DO NOT ENTER signs shall be red. The retroreflective strip shall not display any legend or other information. MoDOT’s standard for this application uses a 4” x 72” aluminum panel with the retroreflective material applied to it where the panel can then be attached to the signpost using the same types of fasteners used to attach signs. These panels are available from MoDOT’s third party sign fabricator. Retroreflective strips shall not be placed on the sign supports below green, blue, or brown guide signs and shall only be placed below regulatory, warning, and school signs, and route marker assemblies.

For a post-mounted sign installation, placing a duplicate sign in the same assembly facing the same direction of traffic shall not be permitted as a method of enhancing conspicuity.

If plaques are used, they shall be installed below the main sign, up to two plaques.

'''Option. '''Retroreflective strips may be used to help identify and delineate the location of rural and unlit intersections and expressway crossovers, giving drivers visual cues where these intersections are located in dark nighttime conditions, see [[620.6 Delineators (MUTCD Chapter 3G) #620.6.3|EPG 620.6.3]] for information regarding this application.

=={{SpanID|903.1.12}}903.1.12 LEDs Used for Conspicuity Enhancement on Standard Signs (MUTCD Section 2A.12) ==
'''Support. '''This article regarding light-emitting diode (LED) units applies to the use of illuminated elements that supplement a sign legend to enhance the conspicuity of the sign.

LED units that are used to illuminate the full sign display, background, or legend are changeable message signs (CMS), which are covered in [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2|EPG 903.2]], [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3| 903.3]], [[903.12 Changeable Message Signs (MUTCD Chapter 2L) #903.12|903.12]], and [[:Category:908 Traffic Controls for School Areas (MUTCD Part 7)|908]].

The application of LED units in compliance with the third Standard paragraph below does not create a changeable message sign because the legend of the sign is always displayed when the LED units are not illuminated. Changeable message or blank-out signs whose legends change or extinguish by means of illuminated elements are addressed elsewhere in the EPG.

Approved LED sign manufacturers that are MUTCD compliant and whose products have been evaluated by MoDOT are listed in the MoDOT’s Traffic Approved Products List (APL) found on MoDOT's public website (https://www.modot.org/traffic).

'''Standard. '''If LED enhanced signs are used, only those products listed on the Traffic APL shall be permitted.

'''Option. '''New products may be considered for the APL, however, before being used they must first be vetted by the MoDOT Highway Safety and Traffic Division and its APL review process. The [[:File:LED Sign Compliance Checklist.pdf|LED Sign Compliance Checklist]] can be used to verify if a manufacturer’s LED sign is in compliance with the MUTCD and can be considered for the APL.

Light-emitting diode (LED) units may be used individually within the symbol, legend, or border of a sign to enhance the sign conspicuity and legibility (see [[#903.1.11|EPG 903.1.11]]).

Except as provided in the sixth Standard paragraph below, LED units may either operate continuously or be actuated.

'''Standard. '''Where LED units are used to enhance the conspicuity of a sign, the sign shall otherwise comply with the requirements for retroreflection and illumination for nighttime viewing (see [[#903.1.21|EPG 903.1.21]]).

Except as provided in the Option and Support paragraphs below, and for changeable message signs, neither individual LEDs nor groups of LEDs shall be placed within the background area of a sign.

The application of LEDs to display sign legends or symbols shall use a maximum pitch of 20 millimeters to cover the stroke width of the letter or symbol.

The LEDs shall not protrude outside the sign border or legend when used in such applications, shall have a maximum diameter of ¼ inch, and shall be the following colors based on the type of sign:
::A. White or red, with STOP, YIELD, DO NOT ENTER, or WRONG WAY signs.
::B. White, with other regulatory signs.
::C. White or yellow, with warning signs.
::D. White or green, with guide signs.
::E. White, yellow, or orange, with temporary traffic control signs.
::F. White or yellow, with pedestrian or bicycle warning signs.
::G. White or fluorescent yellow-green, with school area signs.

If flashed, all LED units shall flash simultaneously at a steady rate between 50 and 60 times per minute. All the LED units in a sign legend or border shall be illuminated simultaneously with no sequential (chasing) or variable flash rates (dancing), except as otherwise allowed in the EPG. A cluster of LEDs shall not be used within the border of a sign.

Where used in STOP or YIELD signs, flashing LED units shall operate continuously. Actuation of the LED units shall not be allowed.

Flashing LED units shall not be used within the legend or border of a Speed Limit sign to indicate that the displayed speed limit is in effect.

LED units shall not be used within the legend or border of a sign in conjunction with the phrase WHEN FLASHING in its legend (see Item E in the first paragraph of [[902.18 Flashing Beacons (MUTCD Chapter 4S)#902.18.3|EPG 902.18.3]] for the use of Warning Beacons to indicate when a regulatory or warning message is in effect).

Where LED units are used along the edge of a sign, at least one LED unit shall be placed along each edge of the sign, in addition to one LED unit at each corner of the sign, so that the distinct outline of the sign shape is recognized under nighttime viewing conditions. The LED units along each side of the sign shall be spaced approximately equidistantly. For a circular sign shape, the number of LED units shall clearly form the appearance of a circle and not be perceived as some other shape.

The uniformity of the sign design shall be maintained without any decrease in visibility, legibility, or driver comprehension during either daytime or nighttime conditions. The LED units shall have the capability to be dimmed automatically by a timing mechanism or a device sensitive to ambient light (photoelectric cell) such that the LEDs do not reduce the visibility of the sign legend.

'''Option. '''For STOP, YIELD, DO NOT ENTER, and WRONG WAY signs, LEDs may be placed within the border or within one border width within the background of the sign.

'''Support. '''[[616.4 Flagger Control (MUTCD Chapter 6D) #616.4.2|EPG 616.4.2]] contains information about STOP/SLOW paddles used by flaggers. [[908.4 Crossing Supervision (MUTCD Chapter 7D) #908.4.1|EPG 908.4.1]] contains information about STOP paddles used by adult crossing guards.

Other methods of enhancing the conspicuity of standard signs are described in [[#903.1.11|EPG 903.1.11]].

=={{SpanID|903.1.13}}903.1.13 Standardization of Location (MUTCD Section 2A.13)==

'''Support. '''Standardization of position cannot always be attained in practice. Examples of heights and lateral locations of signs for typical installations are illustrated in [[#fig903-1-13-1|Figure 903.1.13.1]], and examples of locations for some typical signs at intersections are illustrated in [[#fig903-1-13-2|Figure 903.1.13.2]] and [[616.16 Typical Applications (MUTCD Chapter 6P) #616.16|EPG 616.16]].

Examples of advance signing on intersection approaches are illustrated in [[616.16 Typical Applications (MUTCD Chapter 6P) #616.16|EPG 616.16]]. [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2|EPG 903.2]], [[903.3 Ground-Mounted Sign Supports #903.3|903.3]], and [[903.4 Guide Signs—Conventional Roads (MUTCD Chapter 2D) #903.4|903.4]] contain provisions regarding the application of regulatory, warning, and conventional guide signs, respectively.

{{SpanID|fig903-1-13-1}}
[[File:Figure 903.1.13.1 Examples of Heights and Lateral Locations of Sign Installations.png|thumb|alt=A: A sign is shown at a height from the bottom edge of the sign to the level of the edge of the pavement, and at a lateral distance between the edge of the pavement and edge of shoulder and the near edge of the sign.
B: A roadway is shown with a curb along the outside edge of the pavement. A “Speed Limit” sign is shown at a height from the bottom edge of the sign to the surface of the sidewalk, and at a lateral distance from the edge of the pavement to the near edge of the sign.
C: A Curve Warning sign is shown with a 25 MPH advisory speed plaque mounted below. This sign assembly is shown at a height from the bottom edge of the plaque to the surface of the pavement, and at a lateral distance from the pavement edge and shoulder edge to the near edge of the Warning sign.
D: A roadway is shown with the placement of a roadside assembly consisting of several route markers and directional arrow markers. The height from the bottom edge of the lowest sign to the pavement and the lateral distance from the pavement edge and shoulder edge to the near edge of the closest sign are shown.
E: A R4-7 sign mounted above an object marker is shown. The height from the bottom edge of the Warning sign and the bottom edge of the object marker to the pavement is shown.
F: A Chevron sign is shown at a height from the bottom edge of the sign to the level of the edge of the pavement or edge of shoulder, and at a lateral distance between the edge of the pavement or edge of shoulder and the near edge of the sign.
G: An Emergency Reference Marker is shown at a height from the bottom edge of the sign to the level edge of the shoulder, and at a lateral distance between the edge of the shoulder and the near edge of the sign.
H. A Double Down Arrow sign is is shown at a height from the bottom edge of the sign to the level edge of the shoulder, and at a lateral distance between the edge of the shoulder and the near edge of the sign.|center|600px|'''Figure 903.1.13.1''' Examples of Locations for Some Typical Signs at Intersections]]

{{SpanID|fig903-1-13-2}}
[[File:Figure 903.1.13.2 Examples of Locations for Some Typical Signs at Intersections.png|thumb|alt=
A: A “STOP” sign placed on the stem of an acute angle intersection that is T-shaped is shown. The distance from the edge of the road along the top of the T and from the edge of the road on the stem of the T to the nearest edge of the “STOP” sign is shown.
B: A T-shaped intersection with a right-turn lane separated from the perpendicular portion of the road by a triangular-shaped channelizing island is shown. A “STOP” sign facing the stem of the T is shown on the island. The distances from the edge of the island closest to the stem of the T and top of the T to the nearest edge of the “STOP” sign are shown. A “Yield” sign is shown to the right of the right-turn lane facing traffic. The distance from the edge of the right-turn lane to the nearest edge of the “Yield” sign is shown.
C: An intersection with four legs is shown. Signs are on the northwest and southeast corners of the intersection, facing to the north and south, respectively. The distance from the edge of the horizontal and vertical road pavement to the near edge of these signs is both the same. The distances are only shown on the southeast corner sign.
D: The southeast corner of an intersection is shown. Sidewalks are parallel to both the horizontal and vertical road. The projection of the horizontal sidewalk across the vertical road is denoted as a ""marked or unmarked crosswalk."" A sign is shown on the south leg of the intersection, facing northbound traffic. The distance from the southernmost edge of the “marked or unmarked crosswalk” to the sign is shown. The distance from the edge of the vertical road to the near edge of the sign is shown.
E: A divisional island at a T-shaped intersection is shown. The island in the middle of the roadway is at the stem of the T. A sign on the right side of the roadway facing northbound traffic is shown. The distance from the nearest edge of that sign to the edge of the pavement of the vertical road is shown. Another sign is shown near the north end of the island. The distances from either edge of that sign to either edge of the divisional island are both shown.
F: A T-shaped intersection. A sign is shown on the southeast corner of the intersection, facing northbound traffic. The distance from the edge of the horizontal road to the sign, at the point where the southeast corner radius meets the tangent section of the horizontal roadway, is shown. The distance from the edge of the vertical roadway to the nearest edge of the sign is shown.|center|600px|'''Figure 903.1.13.2''' Examples of Locations for Some Typical Signs at Intersections]]

'''Standard. '''Signs requiring separate decisions by the road user shall be spaced sufficiently far apart for the appropriate decisions to be made.

'''Guidance. '''One of the factors considered when determining the appropriate spacing of signs should be the posted or 85th percentile speed.

Mainline signs on freeways and expressways should be visible a minimum of 800 feet and signs on conventional roads should be visible a minimum of 200 feet (minimum sign spacing in [[903.4 Guide Signs—Conventional Roads (MUTCD Chapter 2D) #903.4|EPG 903.4]] and [[903.5 Regulatory Signs #903.5|EPG 903.5]]. These distances should be considered when determining spacing between signs and when evaluating sign legibility during sign inspections. When these minimum sign spacing distances are not achievable, engineering judgement should be used to determine if the sign can be relocated to improve visibility, provide advance signing or determine if a reduced sign spacing distance is appropriate.

Except as provided in the third Guidance paragraph below, signs should be located on the right-hand side of the roadway where they are easily recognized and understood by road users. Signs in other locations should be considered only as supplementary to signs in the normal locations, except as otherwise provided in the EPG.

Signs should be individually installed on separate posts or mountings except where:
::A. One sign supplements another;
::B. Route or directional signs are grouped to clarify information to motorists;
::C. Regulatory signs that do not conflict with each other are grouped, such as Turn Prohibition signs posted with ONE WAY signs or a parking regulation sign posted with a Speed Limit sign; or
::D. Street Name signs are posted with a STOP or YIELD sign.

Signs should be located so that they:
::A. When post mounted, are installed on a breakaway assembly, regardless of where they are located on right-of-way,
::B. Optimize nighttime visibility,
::C. Minimize the effects of mud splatter and debris,
::D. Do not obscure each other,
::E. Do not obscure the sight distance to approaching vehicles on the major street for drivers who are stopped on minor-street approaches, and
::F. Are not hidden from view.

Except for STOP, YIELD, DO NOT ENTER, and WRONG WAY signs, or as otherwise provided in the EPG, where a sign on a one-way roadway indicates an action intended exclusively or primarily for a road user in the left-hand lane or at the left-hand side of that roadway, such as LEFT LANE MUST TURN LEFT (R3-7) or LEFT LANE ENDS (W9-1), the sign should be located on the left-hand side of the roadway. In the case of a divided road, the sign should be located in the median.

'''Option. '''Signs located on the left-hand side of a one-way roadway or in the median of a divided road, in accordance with the Guidance paragraph above, may be supplemented by an identical sign located on the right-hand side of the roadway.

'''Support. '''The clear zone (see definition in [[:Category:911_General_(MUTCD_Part_1) #911.3.2 | EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1C.02)]]) is the total roadside border area, starting at the edge of the traveled way, available for an errant driver to stop or regain control of a vehicle. The width of the clear zone is dependent upon traffic volumes, speeds, and roadside geometry. Additional information can be found in the “Roadside Design Guide,” 4th Edition, 2011, AASHTO. Based on the Roadside Design Guide, the clear zone only accounts for 80% of vehicles leaving the roadway, leaving 20% traveling outside the clear zone, this is the reason all MoDOT signs are required to be on breakaway sign supports.

'''Guidance. '''With the increase in traffic volumes and the need to provide road users regulatory, warning, and guidance information, an order of priority for sign installation should be established.

'''Support. '''An order of priority is especially critical where space is limited for sign installation and there is a demand for several different types of signs. Overloading road users with too much information is not desirable. Priority according to type of sign will depend on the specific situation and conditions of the site at which the signs are to be installed. For example, in the vicinity of an exit ramp, guide signs and warning signs for the exit ramp might take precedence over supplemental guide signs or a mainline Speed Limit sign where there is no change in the speed zone.

'''Guidance. '''Because regulatory and warning information is typically more critical to the road user than guidance information, regulatory and warning signing whose locations are critical should be displayed rather than guide signing in cases where conflicts occur. In such cases, the guide sign should be relocated to another appropriate location where it will still be effective. In other cases, such as at a decision point, the guide sign should take precedence over other signs whose locations are not as critical to an immediate decision or action necessary by the road user. In all cases, careful attention should be given to minimizing sign clutter (see [[#903.1.20|EPG 903.1.20]]). Community wayfinding and acknowledgment guide signs should have a lower priority as to placement than other guide signs. Signs conveying information of a less-critical nature should be moved to less-critical locations or omitted.

'''Option. '''Under some circumstances, such as on curves to the right, signs may be placed on median islands or on the left-hand side of the road. A supplementary sign located on the left-hand side of the roadway may be used on a multi-lane road where traffic in a lane to the right might obstruct the view to the right.

'''Guidance. '''In urban areas where crosswalks exist, signs should not be placed within 4 feet in advance of the crosswalk (see Drawing D in [[#fig903-1-13-2|Figure 903.1.13.2]]).

=={{SpanID|903.1.14}}903.1.14 Overhead Sign Installation (MUTCD Section 2A.14)==
'''Standard. '''Overhead sign installations shall be limited to MoDOT regulatory, warning, and guide sign installations, unless otherwise specified in the EPG. Supplemental signs or aesthetic messages shall not be displayed on overhead structures, which also apply to structures constructed and installed by another jurisdiction over a state route. Supplemental signs or aesthetic messages include, but are not limited to Welcome To signs, Welcome To monuments, and Community Wayfinding signs.

'''Guidance. '''Overhead signs should be used on freeways and expressways, at locations where some degree of lane-use control is desirable, and at locations where space is not available at the roadside. It is recommended that justification be provided when mounting signs overhead.

'''Support. '''The operational requirements of the present highway system are such that overhead signs have value at many locations. The factors to be considered for the installation of overhead sign displays are not definable in specific numerical terms. In some cases, overhead mounting of a sign might be required by other provisions of the EPG.

MoDOT has established the following general criteria for the use of overhead signs on the state highway system:

'''Standard. '''Overhead signs shall be used in the following applications:
::A. EXIT ONLY lane drops,
::B. Complex interchange design, including, but not limited to:
:::1. Directional ramps, and
:::2. Ramp splits
::C. Three or more lanes in each direction in urban areas,
::D. Closely-spaced interchanges,
::E. Multi-lane exits,
::F. Consistency of sign message location through a series of interchanges,
::G. Junction of two freeways, and
::H. Complex intersection guide signs, including, but not limited to:
::: 1. Multi-lane roundabouts,
::: 2. Diverging Diamond Interchanges, and
::: 3. Single Point Urban Interchanges.

'''Guidance.''' Overhead signs should be used in the following applications:
::A. Reduction of basic lanes in a LANE ENDS application and
::B. Left-side exit ramps.

'''Option.''' Overhead signs may be used in the following applications:
::A. Insufficient space for post-mounted signs,
::B. Restricted sight distance,
::C. Traffic volume at or near capacity,
::D. Large percentage of trucks,
::E. In urban areas with ambient light issues which obscure the visibility of the ground mounted sign,
::F. Locations where there is a history of crashes with a ground-mounted sign, and
::G. High-speed traffic.

Over-crossing structures may be used to support overhead signs.

'''Support. '''Under some circumstances, the use of over-crossing structures as sign supports might be the only practical solution that will provide adequate viewing distance. The use of such structures as sign supports might eliminate the need for the foundations and sign supports along the roadside.

=={{SpanID|903.1.15}}903.1.15 Mounting Height (MUTCD Section 2A.15)==
'''Standard. '''The provisions of this article shall apply unless specifically stated otherwise for a particular sign or object marker elsewhere in the EPG.

'''Support. '''Mounting heights in the EPG and in [https://www.modot.org/media/16921 Standard Plan 903.03] are nominal dimensions, meaning these dimensions represent the minimum mounting height, as well as the maximum mounting heights unless otherwise stated. The mounting height, measured from the roadway surface to the bottom of the sign, is only increased in order to meet the minimum distance requirements from the bottom of the sign to the ground directly below the sign. Minimum mounting heights ensure the installations meet breakaway standards as well as placing the signs at the appropriate level for visibility. Installing signs taller than these nominal dimensions will move the signs outside the driver’s normal line of sight negatively affecting the signs legibility and visibility.

In addition to the provisions of this article, information affecting the minimum mounting height of signs as a function of crash performance can be found in the “Roadside Design Guide,” 4th Edition, 2011, AASHTO.

'''Standard. '''In rural areas, the minimum height, measured vertically from the bottom of the sign to the elevation of the near edge of the pavement, of signs installed at the side of the road shall be 5 feet (see [[#fig903-1-13-1|Figure 903.1.13.1]]).

In business, commercial, or residential areas where parking, bicyclist, or pedestrian movements are likely to occur, or where the view of the sign might be obstructed, the minimum height, measured vertically from the bottom of the sign to the top of the curb, or in the absence of curb, measured vertically from the bottom of the sign to the elevation of the near edge of the traveled way, of signs installed at the side of the road shall be 7 feet (see [[#fig903-1-13-1|Figure 903.1.13.1]]).

'''Option. '''The height to the bottom of a secondary sign mounted below another sign may be 1 foot less than the height specified in the Standard paragraphs above.

'''Standard. '''The minimum height of signs, measured vertically from the bottom of the sign to the sidewalk shall be 7 feet.

If the bottom of a secondary sign that is mounted below another sign is mounted lower than 7 feet above a pedestrian sidewalk or pathway (see [[616.3 Pedestrian and Worker Safety (MUTCD Chapter 6C) #616.3.2|EPG 616.3.2]]), the secondary sign shall not project more than 4 inches into the pedestrian facility.

'''Support. '''[[914.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 9A) #914.1.2|EPG 914.1.2]] contains provisions for the minimum mounting height of signs on shared-use paths.

'''Standard. '''All sign installations shall meet the installation, mounting height and lateral offset of MoDOT specifications for the type of signs support being used, see [https://www.modot.org/media/16921 Standard Plan 903.03].

'''Option. '''A route sign assembly (see [[903.4 Guide Signs—Conventional Roads (MUTCD Chapter 2D) #fig903.4.25.1|Figures 903.4.25.1]] through [[903.4 Guide Signs—Conventional Roads (MUTCD Chapter 2D)#fig903.4.25.3|903.4.25.3]]) consisting of a route sign and auxiliary signs may be treated as a single sign for the purposes of this article.

The mounting height may be adjusted when supports are located near the edge of the right-of-way on a steep backslope in order to avoid the sometimes less desirable alternative of placing the sign closer to the roadway.

'''Standard. '''Signs that are post-mounted on a median barrier shall not overhang any portion of the traveled way.

New overhead sign installations shall provide a vertical clearance of not less than 18 feet from the highest point of pavement or shoulder (including mountable curbs located within the shoulder limits) to the lowest point of the sign, light fixture, or sign bridge over the entire width of the pavement and shoulders, except where the structure on which the overhead signs are to be mounted or other structures along the roadway near the sign structure have a lesser vertical clearance. No overhead sign installations shall have a mounting height that is lower than 17 feet.

'''Option. '''If the vertical clearance of other structures along the roadway near the sign structure is less than 16 feet, the vertical clearance to an overhead sign structure or support may be as low as 1 foot higher than the vertical clearance of the other structures in order to improve the visibility of the overhead signs.

In special cases the clearance to overhead signs may be reduced if necessary because of substandard dimensions in tunnels and other major structures such as double-deck bridges.

Signs may be raised above the standard vertical clearance to improve visibility and avoid other obstructions such as signal equipment.

'''Guidance. '''While a maximum mounting height for signs is generally not prescribed in the EPG, the nominal mounting heights should be adhered to, ensuring that signs are not mounted at such a height as to be out of the road user’s normal field of vision (see the second paragraph of this article and the third paragraph of [[:Category:911_General_(MUTCD_Part_1) #911.4.9 | EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1D.09)]]), especially in urban settings where signs are mounted on traffic signal or light poles.

'''Support. '''[[#fig903-1-13-1|Figure 903.1.13.1]] illustrates some examples of the mounting height requirements contained in this article.

See [[903.17 Overhead Sign Mounting #903.17.4|EPG 903.17.4]] for information regarding vertical clearances for overhead signs.

=={{SpanID|903.1.16}}903.1.16 Lateral Offset (MUTCD Section 2A.16)==
'''Standard. '''For overhead sign supports, the minimum lateral offset from the edge of the shoulder (or if no shoulder exists, from the edge of the pavement) to the near edge of overhead sign supports (cantilever or sign bridges) shall be 6 feet. Overhead sign supports shall have a barrier or crash cushion to shield them if they are within the right-of-way.

See [[903.17 Overhead Sign Mounting #903.17.3|EPG 903.17.3]] for information regarding lateral offset of overhead sign supports.

Post-mounted sign and object marker supports shall be crashworthy (see [[:Category:911_General_(MUTCD_Part_1) #911.4.11 | EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1D.11)]]) if within the right-of-way.

'''Guidance. '''For post-mounted signs, the minimum lateral offset should be 12 feet from the edge of the traveled way. If a shoulder wider than 6 feet exists, the minimum lateral offset for post-mounted signs should be 6 feet from the edge of the shoulder.

Supports for signs mounted laterally behind a longitudinal barrier should be placed so that the near edge of the support is located beyond the deflection distance of the longitudinal barrier and the edge of the sign does not extend beyond the face of the barrier towards traffic.

'''Support. '''The minimum lateral offset requirements for object markers are provided in [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3|EPG 903.3]].

The minimum lateral offset is intended to keep trucks and cars that use the shoulders from striking the signs or supports. The minimum lateral offset requirements do not supersede the requirement for crashworthiness (see the second Standard paragraph of this article) if the sign is located within the right-of-way.

'''Guidance. '''All supports should be located as far as practical from the edge of the shoulder. Advantage should be taken to place signs behind existing roadside barriers, on over-crossing structures, or other locations that minimize the exposure of the traffic to sign supports.

'''Option. '''Lesser lateral offsets may be used on connecting roadways or ramps at interchanges, but not less than 6 feet from the edge of the traveled way.

On conventional roads in areas where it is impractical to locate a sign with the lateral offset prescribed by this article because of roadside features such as terrain or vegetation, a lateral offset of at least 2 feet may be used.

A lateral offset of at least 1 foot from the face of the curb may be used in business, commercial, or residential areas where sidewalk width is limited or where existing poles are close to the curb.

'''Guidance. '''Overhead sign supports and post-mounted sign and object marker supports should not obstruct the sidewalk or the pedestrian access route such that less than 4 feet of clear space is available.

'''Support. '''Guidance for maintaining sign shape in laterally-constrained conditions is described in [[#903.1.5|EPG 903.1.5]].

[[#fig903-1-13-1|Figure 903.1.13.1]] and [[#fig903-1-13-2|903.1.13.2]] illustrate some examples of the lateral offset requirements contained in this article.

=={{SpanID|903.1.17}}903.1.17 Orientation (MUTCD Section 2A.17)==
'''Guidance. '''Unless otherwise provided in the EPG, signs should be vertically mounted at right angles to the direction of, and facing, the traffic that they are intended to serve.

Where mirror reflection from the sign face is encountered to such a degree as to reduce legibility, the sign should be turned slightly away from the road. On curved alignments, the angle of placement should be determined by the direction of approaching traffic rather than by the roadway edge at the point where the sign is located.

=={{SpanID|903.1.18}}903.1.18 Posts and Mountings (MUTCD Section 2A.18)==
'''Standard. '''Sign posts, foundations, and mountings shall be so constructed as to hold signs in a proper and permanent position, and to resist swaying in the wind or displacement by vandalism.

'''Support. '''See [https://www.modot.org/media/16921 Standard Plan 903.03] for additional information regarding posts and mounting. The Standard Plans are compliant with the latest edition of AASHTO’s “Specifications for Structural Supports for Highway Signs, Luminaires, and Traffic Signals.”

'''Option. '''Where permitted, signs may be placed on existing supports used for other purposes, such as highway traffic signal supports or overhead sign supports. This does not include utility poles or light poles.

'''Support. '''[[#903.1.11|EPG 903.1.11]] contains criteria for enhanced conspicuity of standard signs.

[[#903.1.15|EPG 903.1.15]] and [[#903.1.16|903.1.16]] contain lateral and height placement criteria for signs placed on existing supports.

'''Standard. '''If mounted to the sign support, equipment for powering electronic components of a sign, including solar panels, the sign support shall be a traffic signal pedestal pole with a breakaway base so as to not to compromise the crashworthy performance of the sign installation (see [[:Category:911_General_(MUTCD_Part_1) #911.4.11 | EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1D.11)]]). Such equipment shall be mounted so as not to obscure the shape of the sign. Any wiring installed in the breakaway base shall include appropriate breakaway fuse connectors.

=={{SpanID|903.1.19}}903.1.19 Maintenance (MUTCD Section 2A.19)==
'''Guidance. '''Maintenance activities should consider proper position, cleanliness, legibility, and daytime and nighttime visibility (see [[#903.1.21|EPG 903.1.21]] and [[#903.1.22|903.1.22]]). Damaged or deteriorated signs or object markers should be replaced.

To assure adequate maintenance, a schedule for inspecting (at night), trimming vegetation, and replacing signs and object markers should be established. Employees of highway, law enforcement, and other public agencies whose duties require that they travel on the roadways should be encouraged to report any damaged, deteriorated, or obscured signs or object markers at the first opportunity. While MoDOT’s sign maintenance program relies on nighttime inspections, random daytime inspections are encouraged to identify needs between scheduled nighttime inspections.

Steps should be taken to see that weeds, trees, shrubbery, and construction, maintenance, and utility materials and equipment do not obscure the face of any sign or object marker.

A regular schedule of replacement of lighting elements for illuminated signs should be maintained.

'''Support. '''See [[903.20 Construction Inspection Guidelines for Sec 903 #903.20.4|EPG 903.20.4]] for additional information related to sign inspection.

=={{SpanID|903.1.20}}903.1.20 Excessive Use of Signs (MUTCD Section 2A.20)==
'''Guidance. '''Signs should be used and located judiciously, minimizing their proliferation in order to maintain their effectiveness. Regulatory and warning signs should be used conservatively because these signs, if used to excess, tend to lose their effectiveness. Route signs and directional guide signs for primary routes and destinations should be used frequently at strategic locations because their use promotes efficient operations by keeping road users informed of their location. In all cases, however, sign clutter (see the Support paragraph below) should be avoided and minimized as much as practicable.

'''Support. '''Sign clutter is the proliferation of sign installations or assemblies along the roadway or roadside, either separately or grouped, to such an extent that adequate spacing between installations necessary for orderly processing of the sign messages by the driver cannot be achieved. Sign clutter can reduce the effectiveness of one or more signs in a sequence of signs.

The basic role of traffic control devices is to provide only as much information to the road user as necessary to promote the safe and efficient operation of streets and highways. Sign clutter can result from the overuse of MUTCD-compliant signs and or signs that display information unrelated to traffic operation, navigation, or transportation information. Examples of such signs would include, but are not limited to, those displaying the birthplace or home of a noted person, local sports team accomplishments, population information, and self-described qualities of a community such as “friendly” or “open for business.”

'''Guidance. '''Signs and other traffic control devices should be installed and maintained from a systematic standpoint rather than individually. When a new sign is installed, the existing signs in the vicinity should be considered for replacement, relocation, or removal as a result of the new sign that is installed. Existing systems of signs should be reviewed periodically for evidence of sign clutter and adjustments should be made accordingly.

'''Support. '''[[#903.1.13|EPG 903.1.13]] contains information regarding an order of priority for signs where available spacing along the roadway is limited.

=={{SpanID|903.1.21}}903.1.21 Retroreflection and Illumination (MUTCD Section 2A.21)==
'''Support. '''There are many materials currently available for retroreflection and various methods currently available for the illumination of signs and object markers. New materials and methods continue to emerge. New materials and methods can be used as long as the signs and object markers meet the standard requirements for color, both by day and by night.

This article applies to visibility of signs at night or in low-light or adverse weather conditions, whose legends are otherwise visible under typical daytime viewing conditions.

'''Standard. '''All traffic control signs on MoDOT right-of-way shall be retroreflective to show the same shape and similar color by both day and night, unless otherwise provided in the EPG for a particular sign or group of signs.

Where the color black is specified for the legend or background of a sign, an opaque and non-retroreflective material shall be used.

The requirements for sign illumination shall not be considered to be satisfied by street or highway lighting.

In special conditions when illuminated signs are permitted to be used per the EPG, sign symbols, word messages, and backgrounds shall be illuminated by a light behind the sign face through a translucent material.

Retroreflection of sign elements shall be accomplished by the means shown in [[#tab903.1.21|Table 903.1.21]].

{{SpanID|tab903.1.21}}

<div style="width: 100%; display: flex; justify-content: center;">
{| class="wikitable"
|+Table 903.1.21, Retroreflection of Sign Elements
|-
!Means of Retroreflection!!Sign Element
|-
|A material that has a smooth, sealed outer surface over a microstructure that reflects light||Symbol Word message Border Background 
|-
|colspan="2"style="background-color:#ffffff;"|Note: Illuminated signs are not used by MoDOT. Cities and counties may use illuminated street name signs if a maintenance agreement is in place.
|}
</div>

'''Guidance. '''Overhead sign installations should not be illuminated unless an engineering study shows a need for illumination, e.g. fog prone areas.

'''Support. '''Information regarding the use of retroreflective material on the sign support is contained in [[#903.1.11|EPG 903.1.11]].

Information regarding MoDOT sheeting types is contained in [[903.16 Design Aspects of MoDOT Signing #903.16.2|EPG 903.16.3]].

=={{SpanID|903.1.22}}903.1.22 Maintaining Minimum Retroreflectivity (MUTCD Section 2A.22)==
'''Support. '''Retroreflectivity is one of several factors associated with maintaining nighttime sign visibility (see [[#903.1.21|EPG 903.1.21]]).

'''Standard. '''MoDOT shall use an assessment or management method that is designed to maintain sign retroreflectivity at or above the minimum levels in [[#tab903-1-22|Table 903.1.22]]. Local jurisdictions who maintain sections of state routes and the signs on those sections under maintenance agreements shall maintain those signs in accordance with one of the MUTCD assessment methods.

{{SpanID|tab903-1-22}}


<div style="display: flex; justify-content: center;">
{|class="wikitable" style="text-align: center;"
|+ Table 903.1.22, Minimum Maintained Retroreflectivity Levels
|-
!rowspan="2"|Sign Color!!colspan="3"|Beaded Sheeting Type (ASTM D4956)!!rowspan="2"|Prismatic Sheeting!!rowspan="2"|Additional Criteria
|-
!I!!II!!III
|-
|rowspan="2"|White on Green || W*; G ≥ 7 || W*; G ≥ 15 || W*; G ≥ 25 || W ≥ 250; G ≥ 25 || Overhead
|-
| W*; G ≥ 7 || colspan="3"| W ≥ 120; G ≥ 15 || Post-mounted
|-
|rowspan="2"|White on Blue || W*; B ≥ 3 || W*; B ≥ 5 || W*; B ≥ 12 || W ≥ 250; B ≥ 12 || Overhead
|-
| W*; B ≥ 3 || colspan="3"|W ≥ 120; B ≥ 7 || Post-mounted
|-
|rowspan="2"|White on Brown || W*; Br ≥ 1 || W*; Br ≥ 5 || W*; Br ≥ 10 || W ≥ 350; Br ≥ 10 || Overhead
|-
| W*; Br ≥ 1 || colspan="3"|W ≥ 150; B ≥ 5 || Post-mounted
|-
|rowspan="2"|Black on Yellow or Black on Orange || Y*; O* || colspan="3"|Y ≥ 50; O ≥ 50 || 2
|-
| Y*; O* || colspan="3"|Y ≥ 75; O ≥ 75 || 3
|-
|White on Red || colspan="4"| W ≥ 35; R ≥ 7 || 4
|-
|Black on White || colspan="4"| W ≥ 50 || -
|-
|colspan="6" style="background-color: #ffffff; text-align: left;text-indent:-1em; padding-left: 1.5em;"| 1 The minimum maintained retroreflectivity levels shown in this table are in units of cd/Ix/m2 measured at an observation angle of 0.2° and an entrance angle of -4.0°.2 For word legend and fine symbol signs measuring at least 48 inches and for all sizes of bold symbol signs.3For word legend and fine symbol signs measuring less than 48 inches.4 Minimum sign contrast ratio ≥ 3:1 (white retroreflectivity ÷ red retroreflectivity).*This sheeting type shall not be used for this color for this application.
|-
!colspan="6"|Bold Symbol Signs
|-
|colspan="6"|<ul style="columns:3;"><li>W1-1,2 - Turn and Curve</li>
<li>W1-3,4 - Reverse Turn and Curve</li>
<li>W1-5 - Winding Road</li>
<li>W1-6,7 - Large Arrow</li>
<li>W1-8 - Chevron</li>
<li>W1-10 - Intersection in Curve</li>
<li>W1-11 - Hairpin Curve</li>
<li>W1-15 - 270 Degree Loop</li>
<li>W2-1 - Cross Road</li>
<li>W2-2,3 - Side Road</li>
<li>W2-4,5 - T and Y Intersection</li>
<li>W2-6 - Circular Intersection</li>
<li>W2-7,8 - Double Side Roads</li>
<li>W3-1 - Stop Ahead</li>
<li>W3-2 - Yield Ahead</li>
<li>W3-3 - Signal Ahead</li>
<li>W4-1 - Merge</li>
<li>W4-2 - Lane Ends</li>
<li>W4-3 - Added Lane</li>
<li>W4-5 - Entering Roadway Merge</li>
<li>W4-6 - Entering Roadway Added Lane</li>
<li>W6-1,2 - Divided Highway Begins and Ends</li>
<li>W6-3 - Two-Way Traffic</li>
<li>W10-1,2,3,4,11,12 - Grade Crossing Advance Warning</li>
<li>W11-2 - Pedestrian Crossing</li>
<li>W11-5 - Farm Equipment</li>
<li>W11-7 - Equestrian Crossing</li>
<li>W11-10 - Truck Crossing</li>
<li>W12-1 - Double Arrow</li>
<li>W16-5P,6P,7P - Pointing Arrow Plaques</li>
<li>W20-7 - Flagger</li>
<li>W21-1 - Worker</li></ul>
|-
!colspan="6"|Fine Symbol Signs (symbol signs not listed as bold symbol signs)
|-
|colspan="6" style="text-align: left"|'''Special Cases''' <ul><li>W3-1 - Stop Ahead: Red retroreflectivity ≥ 7</li><li>W3-2 - Yield Ahead: Red retroreflectivity ≥ 7; White retroreflectivity ≥ 35</li><li>W3-3 - Signal Ahead: Red retroreflectivity ≥ 7; Green retroreflectivity ≥ 35</li><li>W3-5 - Speed Reduction: White retroreflectivity ≥ 50</li><li>For non-diamond shaped signs, such as W14-3 (No Passing Zone), WP-4P (Cross Traffic Does Not Stop), or W13-1P,2,3,6,7 (Speed Advisory Signs), use the largest sign dimension to determine the proper minimum retroreflectivity level.</li>
|-
|colspan="6" style="background-color:#ffffff; text-align: left;"|'''Note:''' All MoDOT signs shall be fabricated as retroreflective for durability and longevity
|}
</div>

'''Support. '''Compliance with the Standard in the paragraph above is achieved by having a method in place and using the method to maintain the minimum levels established in [[#tab903-1-22|Table 903.1.22]]. Provided that an assessment or management method is being used, MoDOT would be in compliance with the Standard in the paragraph above even if there are some individual signs that do not meet the minimum retroreflectivity levels at a particular point in time.

MoDOT has a sign inspection process to maintain sign retroreflectivity at or above the minimum levels. See [[903.20 Construction Inspection Guidelines for Sec 903 #903.20.4|EPG 903.20.4]] for additional information related to sign inspection.

=={{SpanID|903.1.23}}903.1.23 Median Opening Treatments for Divided Highways (MUTCD Section 2A.23)==
'''Guidance. '''A divided highway crossing should be signed and marked as separate intersections when both of the following conditions are present:
::A. The paths of opposing left turns from the divided highway cross each other (see [[#fig903-1-23|Figure 903.1.23]]), and
::B. There is adequate storage in the interior approaches for the design vehicles expected to cross the divided highway.

If either one or both of the conditions in the Guidance paragraph above do not exist, the divided highway crossing should be signed and marked as a single intersection.

{{SpanID|fig903-1-23}}
[[File:Figure 903.1.23 Intersection Configuration at a Divided Highway Crossing.png|center|thumb|alt=An example of separate intersections, where the paths the of opposing left-turning vehicles cross, and an example of a single intersection, in which the paths of opposing left-turning vehicles do not cross. |800px| '''Figure 903.1.23''' Intersection Configuration at a Divided Highway Crossing]]

At the crossing of two divided highways, engineering judgment should be used to determine the number of separate intersections.

'''Support. '''Divided highway crossings with median widths 150 feet or greater might function as two intersections depending upon the interaction of the opposing left-turn vehicle paths and the available interior storage in the median for a crossing vehicle. Other factors that could determine whether a divided highway crossing is operating as one or two intersections include:
::A. The geometric design of the divided highway crossing,
::B. The use of positive offset mainline left-turn lanes,
::C. The length of the median opening (as measured parallel to the center line of the divided highway),
::D. The geometric design of the median noses,
::E. Other roadway geometric considerations such as a skewed side street approach or a variable median width,
::F. Intersection sight distance,
::G. The physical characteristics of the design vehicle, and
::H. The observed prevailing driver behavior with regard to opposing left-turn path interaction.

=={{SpanID|903.1.24}}903.1.24 Priority Order of Signs==
'''Standard. '''The order classification of signs shall be defined as follows (refer to [[#fig903-1-24|Figure 903.1.24]]):
#First Order Signing. Signs that are installed in advance of the closest intersection or interchange where motorists turn off of the state highway system to arrive at the desired traffic generator or site. First order signing will always be on state right-of-way.
#Second Order Signing. Signs that are installed in advance of the intersection or interchange where motorists turn to access the highway where the first order signing is provided. Second order signing will always be on state right-of-way and shall require the use of first order signing on state right-of-way.
#Third Order Signing. Signs that are installed in advance of the intersection or interchange where motorists turn to access the highway where the second order signing is provided. Third order signing will always be on state right-of-way and shall require the use of first order and second order signing on state right-of-way.

[[File:Figure 903.1.24 Sign Order Classification.gif|center|frame|thumb|alt=A diagram illustrating the priority order of signs for state highway directions with First, Second, and Third Order Signing.| <center>'''Figure 903.1.24 Sign Order Classification'''</center>]]

'''Support. '''In general, as the “order” of signing increases, the functional classification of road stays the same or increases. For example, if first order signing is on a four-lane U.S. route, second order signing should be on another U.S. route, expressway, or a freeway. In this example case, second order signing should not be placed on a two-lane lettered route.

903.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 2A)

2025-12-11T14:30:59Z

HogsettC: /* {{SpanID|903.1.11}}903.1.11 Enhanced Conspicuity for Standards Signs (MUTCD Section 2A.11) */

[[Category:903 Highway Signing (MUTCD Part 2)|903.0]]
{| align="right" style="margin-left: 15px;"
| __TOC__
|}

=={{SpanID|903.1.1}}903.1.1 Function and Purpose of Signs (MUTCD Section 2A.01)==
'''Support. '''The EPG contains Standards, Guidance, and Options for the signing of all types of highways, and site roadways open to public travel within the right-of-way maintained by MoDOT. The functions of signs are to provide regulations, warnings, and guidance information for road users. Words, symbols, and arrows are used to convey the messages. Signs are not typically used to confirm rules of the road.

Detailed sign requirements are located in the following articles of the EPG:
*[[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B)|EPG 903.2]] - Regulatory Signs and Barricades
*[[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C)|EPG 903.3]] - Warning Signs and Object Markers
*[[903.4_Guide_Signs—Conventional_Roads_(MUTCD_Chapter_2D)|EPG 903.4]] - Guide Signs for Conventional Roads
*[[903.5 Guide Signs - Freeways and Expressways (MUTCD Chapter 2E)|EPG 903.5]] - Guide Signs for Freeways and Expressways
*[[903.6 Toll Road Signs (MUTCD Chapter 2F)|EPG 903.6]] - Toll Road Signs – Not used on MoDOT facilities
*[[903.7 Preferential and Managed Lane Signs (MUTCD Chapter 2G)|EPG 903.7]] - Preferential and Managed Lane Signs – Not used on MoDOT facilities
*[[903.8 General Information Signs (MUTCD Chapter 2H)|EPG 903.8]] - General Information Signs
*[[903.9 General Service Signs (MUTCD Chapter 2I)|EPG 903.9]] - General Service Signs
*[[903.10 Specific Service Signs (MUTCD Chapter 2J)|EPG 903.10]] - Specific Service Signs
*[[903.11 Tourist-Oriented Directional Signs (MUTCD Chapter 2K)|EPG 903.11]] - Tourist-Oriented Directional Signs
*[[903.12 Changeable Message Signs (MUTCD Chapter 2L)|EPG 903.12]] - Changeable Message Signs
*[[903.13 Recreational, Historic Site, and Cultural Interest Area Signs (MUTCD Chapter 2M)|EPG 903.13]] - Recreational, Historic Site, and Cultural Interest Area Signs
*[[903.14 Emergency Management Signs (MUTCD Chapter 2N)|EPG 903.14]] - Emergency Management Signs – Not used on MoDOT facilities

Definitions and acronyms that are applicable to signs are provided in [[:Category:911_General_(MUTCD_Part_1) #911.3.2 | EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1C.02)]].

MoDOT typically will not use signing to confirm rules of the road or state laws. The application of such signing will typically be used when a new law is passed for educational purposes, with the signs remaining in place until the end of their service life and then removed. Some signs may be left in place at strategic locations such as major entry points into the state.

'''Standard. '''The decision to install and maintain signs to confirm rules of the road or state laws shall be made by the MoDOT Highway Safety and Traffic Division along with the MoDOT Executive Leadership Team.

=={{SpanID|903.1.2}}903.1.2 Standardization of Application (MUTCD Section 2A.02)==
'''Support. '''It is recognized that urban traffic conditions differ from those in rural environments, and in many instances signs are applied and located differently. Where pertinent and practical, the EPG sets forth separate recommendations for urban and rural conditions. This generally applies to sign mounting heights.

'''Guidance. '''Signs should be used only where justified by engineering judgment or studies, as provided in [[:Category:911_General_(MUTCD_Part_1) #911.4.3 | EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1D.03)]].

Results from traffic engineering studies of physical and traffic safety or operational factors should indicate the locations where signs are deemed necessary or desirable.

Roadway geometric design and sign application should be coordinated so that signing can be effectively placed to give the road user any necessary regulatory, warning, guidance, and other information.

'''Standard. '''Each standard sign (see first paragraph of [[#903.1.4|EPG 903.1.4]]) shall be displayed only for the specific purpose as prescribed in the EPG. Before any new highway, site roadway open to public travel (see definition in [[:Category:911_General_(MUTCD_Part_1) #911.3.2 | EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1C.02)]]), detour, or temporary route is opened to public travel, all necessary signs shall be in place. Signs required by road conditions or restrictions shall be removed when those conditions cease to exist or the restrictions are withdrawn.

=={{SpanID|903.1.3}}903.1.3 Classification of Signs (MUTCD Section 2A.03) ==
'''Standard. '''Signs shall be defined by their function as follows:
::A. Regulatory signs give notice of traffic laws or regulations.
::B. Warning signs give notice of a situation that might not be readily apparent.
::C. Guide signs show route designations, destinations, directions, distances, services, points of interest, and other geographical, recreational, or cultural information.

'''Support. '''Barricades are described in [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2.60|EPG 903.2.60]] and [[616.11 TTC Zone Channelizing Devices (MUTCD Chapter 6K) #616.11.7|616.11.7]].

Object markers are described in [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.70|EPG 903.3.70]].

=={{SpanID|903.1.4}}903.1.4 Design of Signs (MUTCD Section 2A.04)==
'''Support. '''The EPG shows many standard signs and object markers approved for use on streets, highways, bikeways, and pedestrian crossings. Standard signs and object markers have a standardized design, shape, background, and legend as shown in the EPG.

In the provisions for individual standard signs and object markers, the general appearance of the legend, color, and size are shown in the accompanying tables and illustrations, and are not always detailed in the text.

The MoDOT Highway Safety and Traffic Division maintains design files of standard signs, object markers, alphabets, symbols, and arrows that meet or exceed MUTCD standards and are used to detail, order, and fabricate signs used on MoDOT routes.

The basic requirements of a sign are that it be legible to those for whom it is intended and that it be understandable in time to allow for a proper response. Desirable attributes include:
::A. High visibility by day and night; and
::B. High legibility (adequately-sized letters, symbols, or arrows, and a short legend for quick comprehension by a road user approaching a sign).

Standardized colors and shapes are specified so that the several classes of traffic signs can be promptly recognized. Simplicity and uniformity in design, position, and application are essential for a sign to be effective.

'''Standard. '''The term legend shall include all word messages and symbol and arrow designs that are intended to convey specific meanings.

Uniformity in design shall include shape, color, dimensions, legends, letter style, borders, and illumination or retroreflectivity.

Standardization of these designs does not preclude further improvement by minor modifications to the orientation of symbols (see [[#903.1.9|EPG 903.1.9]]), width of borders, or layout of word messages, but all shapes and colors shall be as indicated.

All symbols (see [[#903.1.9|EPG 903.1.9]]) shall be unmistakably similar to, or mirror images of, the adopted symbol signs, all of which are shown in the FHWA's “Standard Highway Signs” publication (see [[:Category:911_General_(MUTCD_Part_1) #911.1.5 | EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1A.05)]]). Symbols and colors shall not be modified unless otherwise provided in the EPG. All symbols, colors, or other design features for signs not shown in the FHWA's “Standard Highway Signs” publication (see [[:Category:911_General_(MUTCD_Part_1) #911.1.5 | EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1A.05)]]) shall be approved by the MoDOT Highway Safety and Traffic Division and shall follow the MUTCD procedures for experimentation and change described in [[:Category:911_General_(MUTCD_Part_1) #911.2.1 | EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1B.01)]].

Where a standard word message is applicable, the wording shall be as provided in the EPG.

In situations where word messages are necessary other than those provided in the EPG (see the first Option paragraph below), the signs shall be of the same shape and color as standard signs of the same functional type.

Where the legend of a standard sign is a symbol or a combination of a symbol and words, an alternative word legend shall not be allowed in place of the symbol, except as otherwise provided in the EPG.

Where a standard sign provided in the EPG or the FHWA's “Standard Highway Signs” publication (see [[:Category:911_General_(MUTCD_Part_1) #911.1.5 | EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1A.05)]]) is applicable, an alternative legend sign or alternative sign design shall not be allowed in place of the standardized legend or design except as provided in the EPG.

Where a standard sign provided in the EPG or the FHWA's “Standard Highway Signs” publication (see [[:Category:911_General_(MUTCD_Part_1) #911.1.5 | EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1A.05)]]) is applicable, but the legend is variable, such as for destination names, an alternative sign design or dimensions shall not be allowed in place of the standardized design for the non-variable elements except as provided in the EPG.

'''Option. '''The MoDOT Highway Safety and Traffic Division may develop special word legend signs in situations where engineering judgment determines roadway conditions make it necessary to provide road users with additional regulatory, warning, or guidance information, such as when road users need to be notified of special regulations or warned about a situation that might not be readily apparent. Unlike colors that have not been assigned or symbols that have not been approved for signs, new word legend signs may be used without the need for experimentation.

'''Support. '''The message conveyed by some special word legend signs might be unclear to the road user. Although experimentation is not required for such word legends, they might still warrant an evaluation to determine comprehension or possible misinterpretation of the intended message by the road user.

Scanning graphics are graphics designed for scanning by machine, and include bar codes, quick-response (QR) codes or other matrix bar-code formats, or similar graphics.

'''Standard. '''Unless otherwise provided in the EPG for a specific sign or as provided in the Option paragraph below, telephone numbers, Internet addresses, e-mail addresses, domain names, uniform resource locators (URL), metadata tags (“hash-tags”), and scanning graphics (see Support paragraph above) for the purpose of obtaining information (other than those for maintenance or inventory purposes per the provisions of the second Standard paragraph below) shall not be displayed on any sign, plaque, sign panel, or changeable message sign.

'''Option. '''Internet addresses, e-mail addresses, telephone numbers, scanning graphics, or other graphics for the purpose of conveying information may be displayed on the face of signs, plaques, sign panels, and changeable message signs that are oriented away from or otherwise not readily visible to operators of motor vehicles but rather are intended for viewing only by pedestrians, occupants of parked vehicles, and driving automation systems if approved by the MoDOT Highway Safety and Traffic Division.

'''Standard. '''Pictographs (see definition in [[:Category:911_General_(MUTCD_Part_1) #911.3.2 | EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1C.02)]]) shall not be displayed on signs except as specifically provided in the EPG for a particular type of sign. Pictographs shall be simple, dignified, and devoid of any advertising and shall not contain any scanning graphics (see first Support paragraph above) for the purpose of conveying information. When used to represent a political jurisdiction (a State, county, or municipal corporation) the pictograph shall be the official designation adopted by the jurisdiction, except as provided otherwise in the EPG. When used to represent any other type of jurisdiction, the pictograph shall be the official designation adopted by the jurisdiction. When used to represent a college or university, the pictograph shall be the official seal adopted by the institution. College or university pictographs shall not include pictorial representations of university or college programs, or athletic mascots.

No items other than official traffic control signs, inventory stickers or decals, sign installation dates, manufacturer name, sign sizes, sign designations, anti-vandalism stickers, inventory or maintenance codes, and maintenance-related scanning graphics shall be mounted on the back of a sign.

Only the MoDOT ID logo shall be displayed on the face of a sign to identify the sign as MoDOT property and define the penalties for tampering with the sign. The MoDOT ID logo shall match the detail and installation location as displayed in [https://www.modot.org/media/16920 Standard Plan 903.02].

=={{SpanID|903.1.5}}903.1.5 Shapes (MUTCD Section 2A.05)==
'''Standard. '''Particular shapes, as shown in [[#tab903.1.5|Table 903.1.5]], shall be used exclusively for specific signs or a series of signs, unless otherwise provided in the EPG for a particular sign or class of signs.

{{SpanID|tab903.1.5}}

<div style="width: 100%; display: flex; justify-content: center;">
{| class="wikitable"
|+ Table 903.1.5, Use of Sign Shapes
|-
!Shape !! Signs
|-
|Octagon*||Stop (R1-1)**
|-
|Equilateral Triangle (downward-pointing)* ||Yield (R1-2)**
|-
|Circle*||Grade Crossing Advance Warning (W10-1)**
|-
|Pentagon (upward-pointing)*||School (S1-1) (squares bottom corners)**
|-
|Crossbuck (two rectangles in a perpendicular "X" configuration)*||Grade Crossing (R15-1)**
|-
|Diamond||Warning Series
|-
|Rectangle (including square)||Regulatory Series Guide Series*** Warning Series
|-
|colspan="2" style="background-color: #ffffff"|Key: * This shape shall be limited exclusively to the sign(s) indicated. ** This sign shall be exclusively the shape shown. *** Guide series includes general service, specific service, tourist-oriented directional, general information, recreational and cultural interest area, and emergency management signs. Note: Signs with standardized designs shall not be modified to accommodate a different shape except as provided in the EPG.
|}
</div>

The Crossbuck is a shape exclusive to the Grade Crossing (R15-1) sign and shall not be obscured by mounting a different shape sign on the back of the Crossbuck (see [[913.2 Signs (MUTCD Chapter 8B) #913.2.3 | EPG 913.2.3]]).

'''Guidance. '''Shapes that are exclusive to a particular sign (STOP, YIELD, Railroad Advance, School, Warning, and Crossbuck signs) should not be obscured by another sign mounted on the back of the same assembly protruding or extending beyond the edge of the sign with the exclusive shape. The following methods should be considered in lieu of mounting a sign on the back of another sign that would obscure the exclusive shape of the sign:
::A. Install the signs on separate mountings to maintain the exclusive shape.
::B. Increase the size of the sign with the exclusive shape and/or decrease the size of the sign mounted behind the sign with the exclusive shape so the sign installed on the back does not obscure its shape.

Where the lateral space available in which to install a standard sign is constrained, such as mounting on a narrow median barrier or adjacent to a retaining wall, the following methods should be considered to maintain the shape of the sign:
::A. Angle the sign up to 45 degrees toward the roadway while still maintaining adequate legibility.
::B. Install the sign at a different location that still provides adequate advance warning, supplementing the sign with a Distance plaque (see [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.60|EPG 903.3.60]]), if appropriate.
::C. Reduce the size of the sign, but supplement it with a duplicate sign on the opposite side of the roadway (see [[#903.1.11|EPG 903.1.11]]).
::D. In addition to either angling or reducing the size of the sign, supplement it with a duplicate warning sign and Distance plaque at an upstream location.
::E. Mount the sign asymmetrically on the sign support, such as when the support is mounted on a bridge parapet or railing, such that the edge of the sign does not overhang the roadway, shoulder, or other areas used by bicyclists or pedestrians.

'''Option. '''Where the shape of the sign cannot be maintained due to lateral constraints, the following methods may be considered:
::A. For warning signs or other types of signs displayed in a horizontally-oriented rectangle, the legend may be displayed in a vertically-oriented rectangle.
::B. When mounted overhead, the word legend for a standard warning sign may be displayed in a horizontally-oriented rectangle.

'''Support. '''Provisions for mounting height of signs that overhang any portion of the traveled way are contained in [[#903.1.15|EPG 903.1.15]].

Provisions for lateral offset are contained in [[#903.1.16|EPG 903.1.16]].

'''Standard. '''Modifications to sign shapes, such as cutting off the left and right points of a diamond, shall not be allowed. This applies to both permanent and temporary traffic control signs.

'''Option. '''Where the methods described in the first Guidance paragraph of this article are impracticable, the legend of the warning sign may be displayed in a vertically-oriented rectangle.

=={{SpanID|903.1.6}}903.1.6 Colors (MUTCD Section 2A.06)==
'''Standard. '''The colors to be used on signs and their specific uses on signs shall be as provided in the applicable articles of the EPG. The color coordinates and values shall be as described in 23 CFR, Part 655, Subpart F, Appendix.

Colors (see [[:Category:911_General_(MUTCD_Part_1) #911.4.5 | EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1D.05)]]) shall be consistent across the face of a sign or a sign panel. Color gradients (smooth or defined gradual transitions either within a color or transition to another color) shall not be allowed.

{{SpanID|tab903.1.6}}
{|| class="wikitable" style="margin:auto; text-align: center; font-size: 80%"
|+ style="font-size:125%;"|Table 903.1.6, Common Uses of Sign Colors
!rowspan="2"|Type of Sign!!colspan="8"|Legend!!colspan="11"|Background
|- style="writing-mode: vertical-lr;"
!Black!!Green!!Red!!White!!Yellow!!Orange!!Fluorescent Yellow-Green1!!Fluorescent Pink!!Black!!Blue!!Brown!!Green!!Fluorescent Orange!!Red!!White!!Fluorescent Yellow!!Purple!!Fluorescent Yellow-Green1!!Fluorescent Pink
|-

||Regulatory||X|| ||X||X|| || || || ||X|| || || || ||X||X|| || || ||
|-
||Prohibitive|| || ||X||X2|| || || || || || || || || ||X2||X|| || || ||
|-
||Permissive|| ||X|| || || || || || || || || || || || ||X|| || || ||
|-
||Warning||X|| || || || || || || || || || || || || || ||X|| || ||
|-
||Pedestrian||X|| || || || || || || || || || || || || || ||X|| || ||
|-
||Bicycle||X|| || || || || || || || || || || || || || ||X|||| ||
|-
||Guide|| || || ||X|| || || || || || || ||X|| || || || || || ||
|-
||Interstate Route|| || || ||X|| || || || || ||X|| || || ||X|| || || || ||
|-
||State Route||X|| || || || || || || || || || || || || ||X|| || || ||
|-
||U.S. Route||X|| || || || || || || || || || || || || ||X|| || || ||
|-
||Street Name|| || || ||X|| || || || || || || ||X|| || || || || || ||
|-
||Destination|| || || ||X|| || || || || || || ||X|| || || || || || ||
|-
||Reference Location|| || || ||X|| || || || || || || ||X|| || || || || || ||
|-
||Information|| || || ||X|| || || || || ||X|| ||X|| || || || || || ||
|-
||Road User Service|| || || ||X|| || || || || ||X|| || || || || || || || ||
|-
||Recreational|| || || ||X|| || || || || || ||X||X|| || || || || || ||
|-
||Temporary Traffic Control||X|| || || || || || || || || || || ||X|| || || || || ||
|-
||Incident Management||X|| || || || || || || || || || || ||X|| || || || || ||X
|-
||School||X|| || || || || || || || || || || || || || || || ||X||
|-
|-
!colspan="99" style="text-align:left"|Changeable Message Signs
|-
|Regulatory || || ||X4||X|| || || || ||X|| || || || || || || || || ||
|-
|Warning, Pedestrian, Bicycle|| || || || ||X|| || || ||X|| || || || || || || || || ||
|-
|Temporary Traffic Control || || || || ||X||X|| || ||X|| || || || || || || || || ||
|-
|Guide || || || ||X|| || || || ||X|| || ||X3|| || || || || || ||
|-
|Motorist Services || || || ||X|| || || || ||X||X3|| || || || || || || || ||
|-
|Incident Management || || || || ||X|| || ||X||X|| || || || || || || || || ||
|-
|School || || || || || || ||X|| ||X|| || || || || || || || || ||
|-
|colspan="99" style="text-align:left; font-size: 120%;"|1 MoDOT has conducted research on the use of Fluorescent Yellow-Green for Pedestrian and Bicycle Signs. Research did not indicate any safety benefit, therefore the color is reserved for School signs only. 

2 Legend and background color combination for use only as identified for specific signs in the EPG or FHWA's Standard Highway Signs publication. 

3 These alternative background colors would be provided by blue or green lighted pixels such that the entire CMS would be lighted, not just the legend. 

4 Red is used only for the circle and diagonal or other red elements of a similar static regulatory sign. 

Notes: 
# The purpose of the information in this table is to provide a general overview of common color combinations. The color combinations and orientations for signs with standardized designs shall not be modified. For signs with unique legends, the shape and color shall be the same as standard signs of the same functional type.
# The colors shown for changeable message signs are for those with electronic displays.
|-
|}

'''Support. '''Common uses of sign colors are shown in [[#tab903.1.6|Table 903.1.6]]. Color schemes on specific signs are shown in the illustrations located in each applicable EPG article.

Whenever white is specified in the EPG or in the FHWA's “Standard Highway Signs” publication (see [[:Category:911_General_(MUTCD_Part_1) #911.1.5 | EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1A.05)]]) as a color, it is understood to include silver-colored retroreflective coatings or elements that reflect white light.

The colors coral and light blue are being reserved for uses that will be determined in the future by the Federal Highway Administration.

Information regarding color coding of destinations on guide signs, including community wayfinding signs, is contained in [[903.4 Guide Signs—Conventional Roads (MUTCD Chapter 2D) #903.4|EPG 903.4]].

=={{SpanID|903.1.7}}903.1.7 Dimensions (MUTCD Section 2A.07)==
'''Support. '''To standardize signing throughout the state highway system, MoDOT has predetermined the sizes for all highway signs; refer to the appropriate EPG article. Larger sizes are designed for use on freeways and expressways, and can also be used in oversized applications to enhance road user safety and convenience on other facilities, especially on multi-lane divided highways and on undivided highways having five or more lanes of traffic and/or high speeds. The intermediate sizes are designed to be used on other highway types. MoDOT does not adopt smaller sized signs for bikeways or other off-road applications as MoDOT typically does not maintain these types of facilities. MoDOT's minimum sign sizes generally exceed the MUTCD minimum sign sizes. The MUTCD minimum sizes in these cases are intended more for low-speed, local jurisdictional roadways and not for state highways. The sign size tables at the beginning of each EPG signing article lists the correct sign sizes for MoDOT applications.

'''Standard. '''The sign dimensions prescribed in the sign size tables in the various EPG articles shall be used unless engineering judgment determines that other sizes are appropriate. All sign sizes smaller than the prescribed dimensions shall be approved by the MoDOT Highway Safety and Traffic Division.

'''Guidance. '''The sizes shown in the Oversized columns in the various sign size tables in the EPG should be used for those special applications where speed, volume, or other factors result in conditions where increased emphasis, improved recognition, or increased legibility is needed, as determined by engineering judgment or study.

Except as provided in the Standard paragraph below, and where specifically prohibited in the EPG, increases above the minimum prescribed sizes should be used where greater legibility or emphasis is needed. If signs larger than the prescribed sizes are used, the overall sign dimensions will typically be increased in 12-inch increments.

'''Standard. '''Where a maximum allowable sign size is prescribed, increases in sign size above the maximum size shall not be allowed.

Where engineering judgment determines that sizes that are different from the minimum prescribed dimensions are appropriate for use, standard shapes and colors shall be used. Standard proportions shall be retained as much as practicable. Any application of size which is different from those given in the EPG shall first be approved by the MoDOT Highway Safety and Traffic Division.

=={{SpanID|903.1.8}}903.1.8 Word Messages (MUTCD Section 2A.08)==
'''Standard. '''Except as otherwise provided in the EPG, all word messages shall be aligned horizontally across a sign, reading left to right.

Except as provided in [[#903.1.4|EPG 903.1.4]], all word messages shall use standard wording as shown in the EPG and in the FHWA's “Standard Highway Signs” publication (see [[:Category:911_General_(MUTCD_Part_1) #911.1.5 | EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1A.05)]]).

All sign lettering, numerals, and other characters shall be of the Standard Alphabets as provided in the FHWA's “Standard Highway Signs” publication (see [[:Category:911_General_(MUTCD_Part_1) #911.1.5 | EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1A.05)]]), unless otherwise provided in the EPG.

The sign lettering for names of places, streets, and highways shall be composed of a combination of lower-case letters with initial upper-case letters. The sign lettering for other legends shall be composed of upper-case letters, unless otherwise provided in the EPG for a particular sign or type of message.

Except as provided in [[903.5 Guide Signs - Freeways and Expressways (MUTCD Chapter 2E)|EPG 903.5]], when a mixed-case legend is used, the nominal loop height of the lower-case letters shall be ¾ of the height of the initial upper-case letter.

The unique letter forms for each of the Standard Alphabet series shall not be stretched, compressed, warped, or otherwise manipulated.

Any non-standard or variable sign shall be detailed by the MoDOT Highway Safety and Traffic Division for signs installed by MoDOT forces as well as those installed by contractors on MoDOT projects.

'''Support. '''[[903.4 Guide Signs—Conventional Roads (MUTCD Chapter 2D) #903.4.3|EPG 903.4.3]] contains information regarding the acceptable methods of modifying the length of a word for a given letter height and series.

'''Guidance. '''Word messages should be as brief as practical to convey a clear, simple meaning, and the lettering should be large enough to provide the necessary legibility distance. A minimum specific ratio of 1 inch of letter height per 30 feet of legibility distance should be used.

Abbreviations (see [[:Category:911_General_(MUTCD_Part_1) #911.4.8 | EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1D.08)]]) should be kept to a minimum, except as otherwise prescribed in the EPG.

Word messages should not contain periods, apostrophes, question marks, ampersands, or other punctuation or characters that are not letters, numerals, or hyphens unless necessary to avoid confusion.

'''Support. '''Diacritical marks on words or names that are adapted to English are not normally needed on signs for comprehension or navigational purposes.

A legend in a secondary language, in addition to English, may be displayed on the face of signs, plaques, sign panels, and changeable message signs that are oriented away from or otherwise not readily visible to operators of motor vehicles, but rather are intended for viewing only by pedestrians and occupants of parked vehicles.

'''Guidance. '''The solidus (slanted line or forward slash) is intended to be used for fractions only and should not be used to separate words on the same line of legend. Instead, a hyphen should be used for this purpose, such as “TRUCKS - BUSES.”

'''Standard. '''Fractions shall be displayed with the numerator and denominator diagonally arranged about the solidus. The overall height of the fraction is measured from the top of the numerator to the bottom of the denominator, each of which is vertically aligned with the upper and lower ends of the solidus. The overall height of the fraction shall be determined by the height of the numerals within the fraction, and shall be 1.5 times the height of an individual numeral within the fraction.

Except as otherwise provided in the EPG, distances shall be displayed on signs using fractions of a mile rather than decimals.

'''Support. '''The FHWA's “Standard Highway Signs” publication (see [[:Category:911_General_(MUTCD_Part_1) #911.1.5 | EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1A.05)]]) contains details regarding the layouts of fractions on signs.

'''Guidance. '''When initials are used to represent an abbreviation for separate words (such as “U S” for a United States route), the initials should be separated by a space of between ½ and ¾ of the letter height of the initials.

When an Interstate route is displayed in text form instead of using the route shield, a hyphen should be used for clarity, such as “I-70.”

'''Support. '''Letter height is expressed in terms of the height of an upper-case letter. For mixed-case legends (those composed of an initial upper-case letter followed by lower-case letters), the height of the lower-case letters is derived from the specified height of the initial upper-case letter based on a prescribed ratio. Letter heights for mixed-case legends might be expressed in terms of both the upper- and lower-case letters, or in terms of the initial upper-case letter alone. When the height of a lower-case letter is specified or determined from the prescribed ratio, the reference is to the nominal loop height of the letter. The term loop height refers to the portion of a lower-case letter that excludes any ascending or descending stems or tails of the letter, such as with the letters “d” or “q.” The nominal loop height is equal to the actual height of a non-rounded lower-case letter whose form does not include ascending or descending stems or tails, such as the letter “x.” The rounded portions of a lower-case letter extend slightly above and below the baselines projected from the top and bottom of such a non-rounded letter so that the appearance of a uniform letter height within a word is achieved. The actual loop height of a rounded lower-case letter is slightly greater than the nominal loop height and this additional height is excluded from the expression of the lower-case letter height.

=={{SpanID|903.1.9}}903.1.9 Symbols (MUTCD Section 2A.09)==
'''Standard. '''Symbol designs shall in all cases be unmistakably similar to those shown in the EPG and in the FHWA's “Standard Highway Signs” publication (see [[:Category:911_General_(MUTCD_Part_1) #911.1.5 | EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1A.05)]]).

'''Option. '''Although most standard symbols are oriented facing left, mirror images of these symbols may be used where the reverse orientation might better convey to road users a direction of movement.

'''Support. '''New symbol designs are adopted by the Federal Highway Administration based on research evaluations to determine road user comprehension, sign conspicuity, and sign legibility.

Sometimes a change from word messages to symbols requires significant time for public education and transition. Therefore, the EPG sometimes includes the practice of using educational plaques to accompany new symbol signs.

'''Guidance. '''New standard warning or regulatory symbol signs should be accompanied by an educational plaque where engineering judgment determines that the plaque will improve road user comprehension during the transition from word message to symbol signs.

'''Option. '''Educational plaques may be left in place as long as they are in serviceable condition.

'''Standard. '''A symbol used for a given category of signs (regulatory, warning, or guide) shall not be used for a different category of signs, except as specifically authorized in the EPG.

A recreational and cultural interest area symbol (see [[903.13 Recreational, Historic Site, and Cultural Interest Area Signs (MUTCD Chapter 2M) #903.13|EPG 903.13]]) shall not be used on streets or highways outside of recreational and cultural interest areas.

A recreational and cultural interest area symbol (see [[903.13 Recreational, Historic Site, and Cultural Interest Area Signs (MUTCD Chapter 2M) #903.13|EPG 903.13]]) shall not be used on any regulatory or warning sign on any street, road, or highway.

=={{SpanID|903.1.10}}903.1.10 Sign Borders (MUTCD Section 2A.10)==
'''Standard. '''Unless otherwise provided, signs shall have a border of the same color as the legend in order to outline their distinctive shape and thereby give them easy recognition and a finished appearance.

The corners of all sign borders shall be rounded, except for STOP signs.

'''Guidance. '''A dark border on a light background should be set in from the edge, while a light border on a dark background should extend to the edge of the sign. A border for 30-inch signs with a light background should be from ½ to ¾ inch in width, ½ inch from the edge. For similar signs with a light border, a width of 1 inch should be used. For other sizes, the border width should be of similar proportions, but should not exceed the stroke-width of the major lettering of the sign. On signs exceeding 72 x 120 inches in size, the border should be 2 inches wide. On unusually large signs with oversized letter heights, route shields, or other legend elements, the border should be 2.5 inches wide and should not exceed 3 inches in width. Except for STOP signs and as otherwise provided in [[903.5 Guide Signs - Freeways and Expressways (MUTCD Chapter 2E) #903.5.13|EPG 903.5.13]], the corners of the sign should be rounded to a radius that is concentric with that of the border.

'''Support. '''[[#903.1.12|EPG 903.1.12]] contains information regarding the use of light-emitting diode (LED) units within the border of a sign.

=={{SpanID|903.1.11}}903.1.11 Enhanced Conspicuity for Standards Signs (MUTCD Section 2A.11)==

'''Option. '''Based upon engineering judgment, where the improvement of the conspicuity of a standard regulatory, warning, or guide sign is desired, any of the following methods may be used, as appropriate, to enhance the sign’s conspicuity (see [[#fig903-1-11|Figure 903.1.11]]):
::A. Increasing the size of a standard regulatory, warning, or guide sign.
::B. Dual signing of a standard regulatory, warning, or guide sign by adding a second identical sign on the left-hand side of the roadway at the same location.
::C. Adding a fluorescent yellow rectangular header panel above a standard regulatory sign, with the width of the panel corresponding to the width of the standard regulatory sign. A legend of “NOTICE,” “STATE LAW,” or other appropriate text may be added in black letters within the header panel for a period of time determined by engineering judgment.
::D. Adding a Warning Beacon (see [[902.18 Flashing Beacons (MUTCD Chapter 4S) #902.18.3|EPG 902.18.3]]) to a standard regulatory (other than a STOP, DO NOT ENTER, WRONG WAY, or a Speed Limit sign), warning, or guide sign.
::E. Adding a Speed Limit Sign Beacon (see [[902.18 Flashing Beacons (MUTCD Chapter 4S) #902.18.4|EPG 902.18.4 ]]) to a standard Speed Limit sign.
::F. Adding a Stop Beacon (see [[902.18 Flashing Beacons (MUTCD Chapter 4S) #902.18.5|EPG 902.18.5]]) to a STOP, DO NOT ENTER, or WRONG WAY sign.
::G. Adding a rectangular rapid-flashing beacon (see [[902.12 Rectangular Rapid Flashing Beacons (MUTCD Chapter 4L)#902.12.1|EPG 902.12]]) to a Pedestrian, School, or Trail warning sign at an uncontrolled marked crosswalk.
::H. Adding light-emitting diode (LED) units within the symbol, legend, or border of a standard regulatory, warning, or guide sign, as provided in [[#903.1.12|EPG 903.1.12]].
::I. Adding a strip of retroreflective material to the sign support in accordance with the provisions of the second Standard paragraph below.
::J. Using other methods that are specifically allowed for certain signs as described elsewhere in the EPG. The MoDOT Highway Safety and Traffic Division will evaluate any new methods to improve sign conspicuity.

{{SpanID|fig903-1-11}}
[[File:Figure 903.1.11 Examples of Enhanced Conspicuity for Signs.png|thumb|alt="A:A yellow rectangular header panel is shown with the legend ""NOTICE,"" in black letters, mounted above a standard regulatory sign with the legend ""WEIGHT LIMIT 10 TONS"" in black letters on four lines.
B:LED lights are shown on the perimeter of a “Stop” sign.
C:A round yellow beacon is shown mounted above an intersection warning sign.
D:A vertical fluorescent yellow-green strip is shown on the top half length of a sign support for a fluorescent yellow-green “Pedestrian Crossing” sign."
|center|600px| '''Figure 903.1.11''' Examples of Enhanced Conspicuity for Signs]]

'''Support. '''Sign conspicuity improvements can also be achieved by removing non-essential and illegal signs from the right-of-way (see [[:Category:911_General_(MUTCD_Part_1) #911.4.2 | EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1D.02)]]), and by relocating signs to provide better spacing. [[#903.1.20|EPG 903.1.20]] contains information on excessive use of signs.

'''Standard. '''Strobe lights shall not be used to enhance the conspicuity of highway signs.

If a strip of retroreflective material is used on the sign support, it shall be at least 4 inches in width, it shall be placed for the full length of the support from the bottom of the sign and extending down the length of the post, with the bottom of the retroreflective strip not being taller than 2 feet above the edge of the roadway, (see [[#fig903-1-11|Figure 903.1.11]]), and its color shall match the background color of the primary sign, except that the color of the strip for the YIELD and DO NOT ENTER signs shall be red. The retroreflective strip shall not display any legend or other information. MoDOT’s standard for this application uses a 4” x 72” aluminum panel with the retroreflective material applied to it where the panel can then be attached to the signpost using the same types of fasteners used to attach signs. These panels are available from MoDOT’s third party sign fabricator. Retroreflective strips shall not be placed on the sign supports below green, blue, or brown guide signs and shall only be placed below regulatory, warning, and school signs, and route marker assemblies.

For a post-mounted sign installation, placing a duplicate sign in the same assembly facing the same direction of traffic shall not be permitted as a method of enhancing conspicuity.

If plaques are used, they shall be installed below the main sign, up to two plaques.

'''Option. '''Retroreflective strips may be used to help identify and delineate the location of rural and unlit intersections and expressway crossovers, giving drivers visual cues where these intersections are located in dark nighttime conditions, see [[620.6 Delineators (MUTCD Chapter 3G) #620.6.3|EPG 620.6.3]] for information regarding this application.

=={{SpanID|903.1.12}}903.1.12 LEDs Used for Conspicuity Enhancement on Standard Signs (MUTCD Section 2A.12) ==
'''Support. '''This article regarding light-emitting diode (LED) units applies to the use of illuminated elements that supplement a sign legend to enhance the conspicuity of the sign.

LED units that are used to illuminate the full sign display, background, or legend are changeable message signs (CMS), which are covered in [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2|EPG 903.2]], [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3| 903.3]], [[903.12 Changeable Message Signs (MUTCD Chapter 2L) #903.12|903.12]], and [[:Category:908 Traffic Controls for School Areas (MUTCD Part 7)|908]].

The application of LED units in compliance with the third Standard paragraph below does not create a changeable message sign because the legend of the sign is always displayed when the LED units are not illuminated. Changeable message or blank-out signs whose legends change or extinguish by means of illuminated elements are addressed elsewhere in the EPG.

Approved LED sign manufacturers that are MUTCD compliant and whose products have been evaluated by MoDOT are listed in the MoDOT’s Traffic Approved Products List (APL) found on MoDOT's public website (https://www.modot.org/traffic).

'''Standard. '''If LED enhanced signs are used, only those products listed on the Traffic APL shall be permitted.

'''Option. '''New products may be considered for the APL, however, before being used they must first be vetted by the MoDOT Highway Safety and Traffic Division and its APL review process. The [[:File:LED Sign Compliance Checklist.pdf|LED Sign Compliance Checklist]] can be used to verify if a manufacturer’s LED sign is in compliance with the MUTCD and can be considered for the APL.

Light-emitting diode (LED) units may be used individually within the symbol, legend, or border of a sign to enhance the sign conspicuity and legibility (see [[#903.1.11|EPG 903.1.11]]).

Except as provided in the sixth Standard paragraph below, LED units may either operate continuously or be actuated.

'''Standard. '''Where LED units are used to enhance the conspicuity of a sign, the sign shall otherwise comply with the requirements for retroreflection and illumination for nighttime viewing (see [[#903.1.21|EPG 903.1.21]]).

Except as provided in the Option and Support paragraphs below, and for changeable message signs, neither individual LEDs nor groups of LEDs shall be placed within the background area of a sign.

The application of LEDs to display sign legends or symbols shall use a maximum pitch of 20 millimeters to cover the stroke width of the letter or symbol.

The LEDs shall not protrude outside the sign border or legend when used in such applications, shall have a maximum diameter of ¼ inch, and shall be the following colors based on the type of sign:
::A. White or red, with STOP, YIELD, DO NOT ENTER, or WRONG WAY signs.
::B. White, with other regulatory signs.
::C. White or yellow, with warning signs.
::D. White or green, with guide signs.
::E. White, yellow, or orange, with temporary traffic control signs.
::F. White or yellow, with pedestrian or bicycle warning signs.
::G. White or fluorescent yellow-green, with school area signs.

If flashed, all LED units shall flash simultaneously at a steady rate between 50 and 60 times per minute. All the LED units in a sign legend or border shall be illuminated simultaneously with no sequential (chasing) or variable flash rates (dancing), except as otherwise allowed in the EPG. A cluster of LEDs shall not be used within the border of a sign.

Where used in STOP or YIELD signs, flashing LED units shall operate continuously. Actuation of the LED units shall not be allowed.

Flashing LED units shall not be used within the legend or border of a Speed Limit sign to indicate that the displayed speed limit is in effect.

LED units shall not be used within the legend or border of a sign in conjunction with the phrase WHEN FLASHING in its legend (see Item E in the first paragraph of [[902.18 Flashing Beacons (MUTCD Chapter 4S)#902.18.3|EPG 902.18.3]] for the use of Warning Beacons to indicate when a regulatory or warning message is in effect).

Where LED units are used along the edge of a sign, at least one LED unit shall be placed along each edge of the sign, in addition to one LED unit at each corner of the sign, so that the distinct outline of the sign shape is recognized under nighttime viewing conditions. The LED units along each side of the sign shall be spaced approximately equidistantly. For a circular sign shape, the number of LED units shall clearly form the appearance of a circle and not be perceived as some other shape.

The uniformity of the sign design shall be maintained without any decrease in visibility, legibility, or driver comprehension during either daytime or nighttime conditions. The LED units shall have the capability to be dimmed automatically by a timing mechanism or a device sensitive to ambient light (photoelectric cell) such that the LEDs do not reduce the visibility of the sign legend.

'''Option. '''For STOP, YIELD, DO NOT ENTER, and WRONG WAY signs, LEDs may be placed within the border or within one border width within the background of the sign.

'''Support. '''[[616.4 Flagger Control (MUTCD Chapter 6D) #616.4.2|EPG 616.4.2]] contains information about STOP/SLOW paddles used by flaggers. [[908.4 Crossing Supervision (MUTCD Chapter 7D) #908.4.1|EPG 908.4.1]] contains information about STOP paddles used by adult crossing guards.

Other methods of enhancing the conspicuity of standard signs are described in [[#903.1.11|EPG 903.1.11]].

=={{SpanID|903.1.13}}903.1.13 Standardization of Location (MUTCD Section 2A.13)==

'''Support. '''Standardization of position cannot always be attained in practice. Examples of heights and lateral locations of signs for typical installations are illustrated in [[#fig903-1-13-1|Figure 903.1.13.1]], and examples of locations for some typical signs at intersections are illustrated in [[#fig903-1-13-2|Figure 903.1.13.2]] and [[616.16 Typical Applications (MUTCD Chapter 6P) #616.16|EPG 616.16]].

Examples of advance signing on intersection approaches are illustrated in [[616.16 Typical Applications (MUTCD Chapter 6P) #616.16|EPG 616.16]]. [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2|EPG 903.2]], [[903.3 Ground-Mounted Sign Supports #903.3|903.3]], and [[903.4 Guide Signs—Conventional Roads (MUTCD Chapter 2D) #903.4|903.4]] contain provisions regarding the application of regulatory, warning, and conventional guide signs, respectively.

{{SpanID|fig903-1-13-1}}
[[File:Figure 903.1.13.1 Examples of Heights and Lateral Locations of Sign Installations.png|thumb|alt=Examples of sign locations at an acute-angle intersection, a channelized intersection, a minor crossroad, an urban intersection, a divisional island, and a wide-throat intersection.|center|600px|'''Figure 903.1.13.1''' Examples of Locations for Some Typical Signs at Intersections]]

{{SpanID|fig903-1-13-2}}
[[File:Figure 903.1.13.2 Examples of Locations for Some Typical Signs at Intersections.png|thumb|alt=Examples of sign locations at an acute-angle intersection, a channelized intersection, a minor crossroad, an urban intersection, a divisional island, and a wide-throat intersection.|center|600px|'''Figure 903.1.13.2''' Examples of Locations for Some Typical Signs at Intersections]]

'''Standard. '''Signs requiring separate decisions by the road user shall be spaced sufficiently far apart for the appropriate decisions to be made.

'''Guidance. '''One of the factors considered when determining the appropriate spacing of signs should be the posted or 85th percentile speed.

Mainline signs on freeways and expressways should be visible a minimum of 800 feet and signs on conventional roads should be visible a minimum of 200 feet (minimum sign spacing in [[903.4 Guide Signs—Conventional Roads (MUTCD Chapter 2D) #903.4|EPG 903.4]] and [[903.5 Regulatory Signs #903.5|EPG 903.5]]. These distances should be considered when determining spacing between signs and when evaluating sign legibility during sign inspections. When these minimum sign spacing distances are not achievable, engineering judgement should be used to determine if the sign can be relocated to improve visibility, provide advance signing or determine if a reduced sign spacing distance is appropriate.

Except as provided in the third Guidance paragraph below, signs should be located on the right-hand side of the roadway where they are easily recognized and understood by road users. Signs in other locations should be considered only as supplementary to signs in the normal locations, except as otherwise provided in the EPG.

Signs should be individually installed on separate posts or mountings except where:
::A. One sign supplements another;
::B. Route or directional signs are grouped to clarify information to motorists;
::C. Regulatory signs that do not conflict with each other are grouped, such as Turn Prohibition signs posted with ONE WAY signs or a parking regulation sign posted with a Speed Limit sign; or
::D. Street Name signs are posted with a STOP or YIELD sign.

Signs should be located so that they:
::A. When post mounted, are installed on a breakaway assembly, regardless of where they are located on right-of-way,
::B. Optimize nighttime visibility,
::C. Minimize the effects of mud splatter and debris,
::D. Do not obscure each other,
::E. Do not obscure the sight distance to approaching vehicles on the major street for drivers who are stopped on minor-street approaches, and
::F. Are not hidden from view.

Except for STOP, YIELD, DO NOT ENTER, and WRONG WAY signs, or as otherwise provided in the EPG, where a sign on a one-way roadway indicates an action intended exclusively or primarily for a road user in the left-hand lane or at the left-hand side of that roadway, such as LEFT LANE MUST TURN LEFT (R3-7) or LEFT LANE ENDS (W9-1), the sign should be located on the left-hand side of the roadway. In the case of a divided road, the sign should be located in the median.

'''Option. '''Signs located on the left-hand side of a one-way roadway or in the median of a divided road, in accordance with the Guidance paragraph above, may be supplemented by an identical sign located on the right-hand side of the roadway.

'''Support. '''The clear zone (see definition in [[:Category:911_General_(MUTCD_Part_1) #911.3.2 | EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1C.02)]]) is the total roadside border area, starting at the edge of the traveled way, available for an errant driver to stop or regain control of a vehicle. The width of the clear zone is dependent upon traffic volumes, speeds, and roadside geometry. Additional information can be found in the “Roadside Design Guide,” 4th Edition, 2011, AASHTO. Based on the Roadside Design Guide, the clear zone only accounts for 80% of vehicles leaving the roadway, leaving 20% traveling outside the clear zone, this is the reason all MoDOT signs are required to be on breakaway sign supports.

'''Guidance. '''With the increase in traffic volumes and the need to provide road users regulatory, warning, and guidance information, an order of priority for sign installation should be established.

'''Support. '''An order of priority is especially critical where space is limited for sign installation and there is a demand for several different types of signs. Overloading road users with too much information is not desirable. Priority according to type of sign will depend on the specific situation and conditions of the site at which the signs are to be installed. For example, in the vicinity of an exit ramp, guide signs and warning signs for the exit ramp might take precedence over supplemental guide signs or a mainline Speed Limit sign where there is no change in the speed zone.

'''Guidance. '''Because regulatory and warning information is typically more critical to the road user than guidance information, regulatory and warning signing whose locations are critical should be displayed rather than guide signing in cases where conflicts occur. In such cases, the guide sign should be relocated to another appropriate location where it will still be effective. In other cases, such as at a decision point, the guide sign should take precedence over other signs whose locations are not as critical to an immediate decision or action necessary by the road user. In all cases, careful attention should be given to minimizing sign clutter (see [[#903.1.20|EPG 903.1.20]]). Community wayfinding and acknowledgment guide signs should have a lower priority as to placement than other guide signs. Signs conveying information of a less-critical nature should be moved to less-critical locations or omitted.

'''Option. '''Under some circumstances, such as on curves to the right, signs may be placed on median islands or on the left-hand side of the road. A supplementary sign located on the left-hand side of the roadway may be used on a multi-lane road where traffic in a lane to the right might obstruct the view to the right.

'''Guidance. '''In urban areas where crosswalks exist, signs should not be placed within 4 feet in advance of the crosswalk (see Drawing D in [[#fig903-1-13-2|Figure 903.1.13.2]]).

=={{SpanID|903.1.14}}903.1.14 Overhead Sign Installation (MUTCD Section 2A.14)==
'''Standard. '''Overhead sign installations shall be limited to MoDOT regulatory, warning, and guide sign installations, unless otherwise specified in the EPG. Supplemental signs or aesthetic messages shall not be displayed on overhead structures, which also apply to structures constructed and installed by another jurisdiction over a state route. Supplemental signs or aesthetic messages include, but are not limited to Welcome To signs, Welcome To monuments, and Community Wayfinding signs.

'''Guidance. '''Overhead signs should be used on freeways and expressways, at locations where some degree of lane-use control is desirable, and at locations where space is not available at the roadside. It is recommended that justification be provided when mounting signs overhead.

'''Support. '''The operational requirements of the present highway system are such that overhead signs have value at many locations. The factors to be considered for the installation of overhead sign displays are not definable in specific numerical terms. In some cases, overhead mounting of a sign might be required by other provisions of the EPG.

MoDOT has established the following general criteria for the use of overhead signs on the state highway system:

'''Standard. '''Overhead signs shall be used in the following applications:
::A. EXIT ONLY lane drops,
::B. Complex interchange design, including, but not limited to:
:::1. Directional ramps, and
:::2. Ramp splits
::C. Three or more lanes in each direction in urban areas,
::D. Closely-spaced interchanges,
::E. Multi-lane exits,
::F. Consistency of sign message location through a series of interchanges,
::G. Junction of two freeways, and
::H. Complex intersection guide signs, including, but not limited to:
::: 1. Multi-lane roundabouts,
::: 2. Diverging Diamond Interchanges, and
::: 3. Single Point Urban Interchanges.

'''Guidance.''' Overhead signs should be used in the following applications:
::A. Reduction of basic lanes in a LANE ENDS application and
::B. Left-side exit ramps.

'''Option.''' Overhead signs may be used in the following applications:
::A. Insufficient space for post-mounted signs,
::B. Restricted sight distance,
::C. Traffic volume at or near capacity,
::D. Large percentage of trucks,
::E. In urban areas with ambient light issues which obscure the visibility of the ground mounted sign,
::F. Locations where there is a history of crashes with a ground-mounted sign, and
::G. High-speed traffic.

Over-crossing structures may be used to support overhead signs.

'''Support. '''Under some circumstances, the use of over-crossing structures as sign supports might be the only practical solution that will provide adequate viewing distance. The use of such structures as sign supports might eliminate the need for the foundations and sign supports along the roadside.

=={{SpanID|903.1.15}}903.1.15 Mounting Height (MUTCD Section 2A.15)==
'''Standard. '''The provisions of this article shall apply unless specifically stated otherwise for a particular sign or object marker elsewhere in the EPG.

'''Support. '''Mounting heights in the EPG and in [https://www.modot.org/media/16921 Standard Plan 903.03] are nominal dimensions, meaning these dimensions represent the minimum mounting height, as well as the maximum mounting heights unless otherwise stated. The mounting height, measured from the roadway surface to the bottom of the sign, is only increased in order to meet the minimum distance requirements from the bottom of the sign to the ground directly below the sign. Minimum mounting heights ensure the installations meet breakaway standards as well as placing the signs at the appropriate level for visibility. Installing signs taller than these nominal dimensions will move the signs outside the driver’s normal line of sight negatively affecting the signs legibility and visibility.

In addition to the provisions of this article, information affecting the minimum mounting height of signs as a function of crash performance can be found in the “Roadside Design Guide,” 4th Edition, 2011, AASHTO.

'''Standard. '''In rural areas, the minimum height, measured vertically from the bottom of the sign to the elevation of the near edge of the pavement, of signs installed at the side of the road shall be 5 feet (see [[#fig903-1-13-1|Figure 903.1.13.1]]).

In business, commercial, or residential areas where parking, bicyclist, or pedestrian movements are likely to occur, or where the view of the sign might be obstructed, the minimum height, measured vertically from the bottom of the sign to the top of the curb, or in the absence of curb, measured vertically from the bottom of the sign to the elevation of the near edge of the traveled way, of signs installed at the side of the road shall be 7 feet (see [[#fig903-1-13-1|Figure 903.1.13.1]]).

'''Option. '''The height to the bottom of a secondary sign mounted below another sign may be 1 foot less than the height specified in the Standard paragraphs above.

'''Standard. '''The minimum height of signs, measured vertically from the bottom of the sign to the sidewalk shall be 7 feet.

If the bottom of a secondary sign that is mounted below another sign is mounted lower than 7 feet above a pedestrian sidewalk or pathway (see [[616.3 Pedestrian and Worker Safety (MUTCD Chapter 6C) #616.3.2|EPG 616.3.2]]), the secondary sign shall not project more than 4 inches into the pedestrian facility.

'''Support. '''[[914.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 9A) #914.1.2|EPG 914.1.2]] contains provisions for the minimum mounting height of signs on shared-use paths.

'''Standard. '''All sign installations shall meet the installation, mounting height and lateral offset of MoDOT specifications for the type of signs support being used, see [https://www.modot.org/media/16921 Standard Plan 903.03].

'''Option. '''A route sign assembly (see [[903.4 Guide Signs—Conventional Roads (MUTCD Chapter 2D) #fig903.4.25.1|Figures 903.4.25.1]] through [[903.4 Guide Signs—Conventional Roads (MUTCD Chapter 2D)#fig903.4.25.3|903.4.25.3]]) consisting of a route sign and auxiliary signs may be treated as a single sign for the purposes of this article.

The mounting height may be adjusted when supports are located near the edge of the right-of-way on a steep backslope in order to avoid the sometimes less desirable alternative of placing the sign closer to the roadway.

'''Standard. '''Signs that are post-mounted on a median barrier shall not overhang any portion of the traveled way.

New overhead sign installations shall provide a vertical clearance of not less than 18 feet from the highest point of pavement or shoulder (including mountable curbs located within the shoulder limits) to the lowest point of the sign, light fixture, or sign bridge over the entire width of the pavement and shoulders, except where the structure on which the overhead signs are to be mounted or other structures along the roadway near the sign structure have a lesser vertical clearance. No overhead sign installations shall have a mounting height that is lower than 17 feet.

'''Option. '''If the vertical clearance of other structures along the roadway near the sign structure is less than 16 feet, the vertical clearance to an overhead sign structure or support may be as low as 1 foot higher than the vertical clearance of the other structures in order to improve the visibility of the overhead signs.

In special cases the clearance to overhead signs may be reduced if necessary because of substandard dimensions in tunnels and other major structures such as double-deck bridges.

Signs may be raised above the standard vertical clearance to improve visibility and avoid other obstructions such as signal equipment.

'''Guidance. '''While a maximum mounting height for signs is generally not prescribed in the EPG, the nominal mounting heights should be adhered to, ensuring that signs are not mounted at such a height as to be out of the road user’s normal field of vision (see the second paragraph of this article and the third paragraph of [[:Category:911_General_(MUTCD_Part_1) #911.4.9 | EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1D.09)]]), especially in urban settings where signs are mounted on traffic signal or light poles.

'''Support. '''[[#fig903-1-13-1|Figure 903.1.13.1]] illustrates some examples of the mounting height requirements contained in this article.

See [[903.17 Overhead Sign Mounting #903.17.4|EPG 903.17.4]] for information regarding vertical clearances for overhead signs.

=={{SpanID|903.1.16}}903.1.16 Lateral Offset (MUTCD Section 2A.16)==
'''Standard. '''For overhead sign supports, the minimum lateral offset from the edge of the shoulder (or if no shoulder exists, from the edge of the pavement) to the near edge of overhead sign supports (cantilever or sign bridges) shall be 6 feet. Overhead sign supports shall have a barrier or crash cushion to shield them if they are within the right-of-way.

See [[903.17 Overhead Sign Mounting #903.17.3|EPG 903.17.3]] for information regarding lateral offset of overhead sign supports.

Post-mounted sign and object marker supports shall be crashworthy (see [[:Category:911_General_(MUTCD_Part_1) #911.4.11 | EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1D.11)]]) if within the right-of-way.

'''Guidance. '''For post-mounted signs, the minimum lateral offset should be 12 feet from the edge of the traveled way. If a shoulder wider than 6 feet exists, the minimum lateral offset for post-mounted signs should be 6 feet from the edge of the shoulder.

Supports for signs mounted laterally behind a longitudinal barrier should be placed so that the near edge of the support is located beyond the deflection distance of the longitudinal barrier and the edge of the sign does not extend beyond the face of the barrier towards traffic.

'''Support. '''The minimum lateral offset requirements for object markers are provided in [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3|EPG 903.3]].

The minimum lateral offset is intended to keep trucks and cars that use the shoulders from striking the signs or supports. The minimum lateral offset requirements do not supersede the requirement for crashworthiness (see the second Standard paragraph of this article) if the sign is located within the right-of-way.

'''Guidance. '''All supports should be located as far as practical from the edge of the shoulder. Advantage should be taken to place signs behind existing roadside barriers, on over-crossing structures, or other locations that minimize the exposure of the traffic to sign supports.

'''Option. '''Lesser lateral offsets may be used on connecting roadways or ramps at interchanges, but not less than 6 feet from the edge of the traveled way.

On conventional roads in areas where it is impractical to locate a sign with the lateral offset prescribed by this article because of roadside features such as terrain or vegetation, a lateral offset of at least 2 feet may be used.

A lateral offset of at least 1 foot from the face of the curb may be used in business, commercial, or residential areas where sidewalk width is limited or where existing poles are close to the curb.

'''Guidance. '''Overhead sign supports and post-mounted sign and object marker supports should not obstruct the sidewalk or the pedestrian access route such that less than 4 feet of clear space is available.

'''Support. '''Guidance for maintaining sign shape in laterally-constrained conditions is described in [[#903.1.5|EPG 903.1.5]].

[[#fig903-1-13-1|Figure 903.1.13.1]] and [[#fig903-1-13-2|903.1.13.2]] illustrate some examples of the lateral offset requirements contained in this article.

=={{SpanID|903.1.17}}903.1.17 Orientation (MUTCD Section 2A.17)==
'''Guidance. '''Unless otherwise provided in the EPG, signs should be vertically mounted at right angles to the direction of, and facing, the traffic that they are intended to serve.

Where mirror reflection from the sign face is encountered to such a degree as to reduce legibility, the sign should be turned slightly away from the road. On curved alignments, the angle of placement should be determined by the direction of approaching traffic rather than by the roadway edge at the point where the sign is located.

=={{SpanID|903.1.18}}903.1.18 Posts and Mountings (MUTCD Section 2A.18)==
'''Standard. '''Sign posts, foundations, and mountings shall be so constructed as to hold signs in a proper and permanent position, and to resist swaying in the wind or displacement by vandalism.

'''Support. '''See [https://www.modot.org/media/16921 Standard Plan 903.03] for additional information regarding posts and mounting. The Standard Plans are compliant with the latest edition of AASHTO’s “Specifications for Structural Supports for Highway Signs, Luminaires, and Traffic Signals.”

'''Option. '''Where permitted, signs may be placed on existing supports used for other purposes, such as highway traffic signal supports or overhead sign supports. This does not include utility poles or light poles.

'''Support. '''[[#903.1.11|EPG 903.1.11]] contains criteria for enhanced conspicuity of standard signs.

[[#903.1.15|EPG 903.1.15]] and [[#903.1.16|903.1.16]] contain lateral and height placement criteria for signs placed on existing supports.

'''Standard. '''If mounted to the sign support, equipment for powering electronic components of a sign, including solar panels, the sign support shall be a traffic signal pedestal pole with a breakaway base so as to not to compromise the crashworthy performance of the sign installation (see [[:Category:911_General_(MUTCD_Part_1) #911.4.11 | EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1D.11)]]). Such equipment shall be mounted so as not to obscure the shape of the sign. Any wiring installed in the breakaway base shall include appropriate breakaway fuse connectors.

=={{SpanID|903.1.19}}903.1.19 Maintenance (MUTCD Section 2A.19)==
'''Guidance. '''Maintenance activities should consider proper position, cleanliness, legibility, and daytime and nighttime visibility (see [[#903.1.21|EPG 903.1.21]] and [[#903.1.22|903.1.22]]). Damaged or deteriorated signs or object markers should be replaced.

To assure adequate maintenance, a schedule for inspecting (at night), trimming vegetation, and replacing signs and object markers should be established. Employees of highway, law enforcement, and other public agencies whose duties require that they travel on the roadways should be encouraged to report any damaged, deteriorated, or obscured signs or object markers at the first opportunity. While MoDOT’s sign maintenance program relies on nighttime inspections, random daytime inspections are encouraged to identify needs between scheduled nighttime inspections.

Steps should be taken to see that weeds, trees, shrubbery, and construction, maintenance, and utility materials and equipment do not obscure the face of any sign or object marker.

A regular schedule of replacement of lighting elements for illuminated signs should be maintained.

'''Support. '''See [[903.20 Construction Inspection Guidelines for Sec 903 #903.20.4|EPG 903.20.4]] for additional information related to sign inspection.

=={{SpanID|903.1.20}}903.1.20 Excessive Use of Signs (MUTCD Section 2A.20)==
'''Guidance. '''Signs should be used and located judiciously, minimizing their proliferation in order to maintain their effectiveness. Regulatory and warning signs should be used conservatively because these signs, if used to excess, tend to lose their effectiveness. Route signs and directional guide signs for primary routes and destinations should be used frequently at strategic locations because their use promotes efficient operations by keeping road users informed of their location. In all cases, however, sign clutter (see the Support paragraph below) should be avoided and minimized as much as practicable.

'''Support. '''Sign clutter is the proliferation of sign installations or assemblies along the roadway or roadside, either separately or grouped, to such an extent that adequate spacing between installations necessary for orderly processing of the sign messages by the driver cannot be achieved. Sign clutter can reduce the effectiveness of one or more signs in a sequence of signs.

The basic role of traffic control devices is to provide only as much information to the road user as necessary to promote the safe and efficient operation of streets and highways. Sign clutter can result from the overuse of MUTCD-compliant signs and or signs that display information unrelated to traffic operation, navigation, or transportation information. Examples of such signs would include, but are not limited to, those displaying the birthplace or home of a noted person, local sports team accomplishments, population information, and self-described qualities of a community such as “friendly” or “open for business.”

'''Guidance. '''Signs and other traffic control devices should be installed and maintained from a systematic standpoint rather than individually. When a new sign is installed, the existing signs in the vicinity should be considered for replacement, relocation, or removal as a result of the new sign that is installed. Existing systems of signs should be reviewed periodically for evidence of sign clutter and adjustments should be made accordingly.

'''Support. '''[[#903.1.13|EPG 903.1.13]] contains information regarding an order of priority for signs where available spacing along the roadway is limited.

=={{SpanID|903.1.21}}903.1.21 Retroreflection and Illumination (MUTCD Section 2A.21)==
'''Support. '''There are many materials currently available for retroreflection and various methods currently available for the illumination of signs and object markers. New materials and methods continue to emerge. New materials and methods can be used as long as the signs and object markers meet the standard requirements for color, both by day and by night.

This article applies to visibility of signs at night or in low-light or adverse weather conditions, whose legends are otherwise visible under typical daytime viewing conditions.

'''Standard. '''All traffic control signs on MoDOT right-of-way shall be retroreflective to show the same shape and similar color by both day and night, unless otherwise provided in the EPG for a particular sign or group of signs.

Where the color black is specified for the legend or background of a sign, an opaque and non-retroreflective material shall be used.

The requirements for sign illumination shall not be considered to be satisfied by street or highway lighting.

In special conditions when illuminated signs are permitted to be used per the EPG, sign symbols, word messages, and backgrounds shall be illuminated by a light behind the sign face through a translucent material.

Retroreflection of sign elements shall be accomplished by the means shown in [[#tab903.1.21|Table 903.1.21]].

{{SpanID|tab903.1.21}}

<div style="width: 100%; display: flex; justify-content: center;">
{| class="wikitable"
|+Table 903.1.21, Retroreflection of Sign Elements
|-
!Means of Retroreflection!!Sign Element
|-
|A material that has a smooth, sealed outer surface over a microstructure that reflects light||Symbol Word message Border Background 
|-
|colspan="2"style="background-color:#ffffff;"|Note: Illuminated signs are not used by MoDOT. Cities and counties may use illuminated street name signs if a maintenance agreement is in place.
|}
</div>

'''Guidance. '''Overhead sign installations should not be illuminated unless an engineering study shows a need for illumination, e.g. fog prone areas.

'''Support. '''Information regarding the use of retroreflective material on the sign support is contained in [[#903.1.11|EPG 903.1.11]].

Information regarding MoDOT sheeting types is contained in [[903.16 Design Aspects of MoDOT Signing #903.16.2|EPG 903.16.3]].

=={{SpanID|903.1.22}}903.1.22 Maintaining Minimum Retroreflectivity (MUTCD Section 2A.22)==
'''Support. '''Retroreflectivity is one of several factors associated with maintaining nighttime sign visibility (see [[#903.1.21|EPG 903.1.21]]).

'''Standard. '''MoDOT shall use an assessment or management method that is designed to maintain sign retroreflectivity at or above the minimum levels in [[#tab903-1-22|Table 903.1.22]]. Local jurisdictions who maintain sections of state routes and the signs on those sections under maintenance agreements shall maintain those signs in accordance with one of the MUTCD assessment methods.

{{SpanID|tab903-1-22}}


<div style="display: flex; justify-content: center;">
{|class="wikitable" style="text-align: center;"
|+ Table 903.1.22, Minimum Maintained Retroreflectivity Levels
|-
!rowspan="2"|Sign Color!!colspan="3"|Beaded Sheeting Type (ASTM D4956)!!rowspan="2"|Prismatic Sheeting!!rowspan="2"|Additional Criteria
|-
!I!!II!!III
|-
|rowspan="2"|White on Green || W*; G ≥ 7 || W*; G ≥ 15 || W*; G ≥ 25 || W ≥ 250; G ≥ 25 || Overhead
|-
| W*; G ≥ 7 || colspan="3"| W ≥ 120; G ≥ 15 || Post-mounted
|-
|rowspan="2"|White on Blue || W*; B ≥ 3 || W*; B ≥ 5 || W*; B ≥ 12 || W ≥ 250; B ≥ 12 || Overhead
|-
| W*; B ≥ 3 || colspan="3"|W ≥ 120; B ≥ 7 || Post-mounted
|-
|rowspan="2"|White on Brown || W*; Br ≥ 1 || W*; Br ≥ 5 || W*; Br ≥ 10 || W ≥ 350; Br ≥ 10 || Overhead
|-
| W*; Br ≥ 1 || colspan="3"|W ≥ 150; B ≥ 5 || Post-mounted
|-
|rowspan="2"|Black on Yellow or Black on Orange || Y*; O* || colspan="3"|Y ≥ 50; O ≥ 50 || 2
|-
| Y*; O* || colspan="3"|Y ≥ 75; O ≥ 75 || 3
|-
|White on Red || colspan="4"| W ≥ 35; R ≥ 7 || 4
|-
|Black on White || colspan="4"| W ≥ 50 || -
|-
|colspan="6" style="background-color: #ffffff; text-align: left;text-indent:-1em; padding-left: 1.5em;"| 1 The minimum maintained retroreflectivity levels shown in this table are in units of cd/Ix/m2 measured at an observation angle of 0.2° and an entrance angle of -4.0°.2 For word legend and fine symbol signs measuring at least 48 inches and for all sizes of bold symbol signs.3For word legend and fine symbol signs measuring less than 48 inches.4 Minimum sign contrast ratio ≥ 3:1 (white retroreflectivity ÷ red retroreflectivity).*This sheeting type shall not be used for this color for this application.
|-
!colspan="6"|Bold Symbol Signs
|-
|colspan="6"|<ul style="columns:3;"><li>W1-1,2 - Turn and Curve</li>
<li>W1-3,4 - Reverse Turn and Curve</li>
<li>W1-5 - Winding Road</li>
<li>W1-6,7 - Large Arrow</li>
<li>W1-8 - Chevron</li>
<li>W1-10 - Intersection in Curve</li>
<li>W1-11 - Hairpin Curve</li>
<li>W1-15 - 270 Degree Loop</li>
<li>W2-1 - Cross Road</li>
<li>W2-2,3 - Side Road</li>
<li>W2-4,5 - T and Y Intersection</li>
<li>W2-6 - Circular Intersection</li>
<li>W2-7,8 - Double Side Roads</li>
<li>W3-1 - Stop Ahead</li>
<li>W3-2 - Yield Ahead</li>
<li>W3-3 - Signal Ahead</li>
<li>W4-1 - Merge</li>
<li>W4-2 - Lane Ends</li>
<li>W4-3 - Added Lane</li>
<li>W4-5 - Entering Roadway Merge</li>
<li>W4-6 - Entering Roadway Added Lane</li>
<li>W6-1,2 - Divided Highway Begins and Ends</li>
<li>W6-3 - Two-Way Traffic</li>
<li>W10-1,2,3,4,11,12 - Grade Crossing Advance Warning</li>
<li>W11-2 - Pedestrian Crossing</li>
<li>W11-5 - Farm Equipment</li>
<li>W11-7 - Equestrian Crossing</li>
<li>W11-10 - Truck Crossing</li>
<li>W12-1 - Double Arrow</li>
<li>W16-5P,6P,7P - Pointing Arrow Plaques</li>
<li>W20-7 - Flagger</li>
<li>W21-1 - Worker</li></ul>
|-
!colspan="6"|Fine Symbol Signs (symbol signs not listed as bold symbol signs)
|-
|colspan="6" style="text-align: left"|'''Special Cases''' <ul><li>W3-1 - Stop Ahead: Red retroreflectivity ≥ 7</li><li>W3-2 - Yield Ahead: Red retroreflectivity ≥ 7; White retroreflectivity ≥ 35</li><li>W3-3 - Signal Ahead: Red retroreflectivity ≥ 7; Green retroreflectivity ≥ 35</li><li>W3-5 - Speed Reduction: White retroreflectivity ≥ 50</li><li>For non-diamond shaped signs, such as W14-3 (No Passing Zone), WP-4P (Cross Traffic Does Not Stop), or W13-1P,2,3,6,7 (Speed Advisory Signs), use the largest sign dimension to determine the proper minimum retroreflectivity level.</li>
|-
|colspan="6" style="background-color:#ffffff; text-align: left;"|'''Note:''' All MoDOT signs shall be fabricated as retroreflective for durability and longevity
|}
</div>

'''Support. '''Compliance with the Standard in the paragraph above is achieved by having a method in place and using the method to maintain the minimum levels established in [[#tab903-1-22|Table 903.1.22]]. Provided that an assessment or management method is being used, MoDOT would be in compliance with the Standard in the paragraph above even if there are some individual signs that do not meet the minimum retroreflectivity levels at a particular point in time.

MoDOT has a sign inspection process to maintain sign retroreflectivity at or above the minimum levels. See [[903.20 Construction Inspection Guidelines for Sec 903 #903.20.4|EPG 903.20.4]] for additional information related to sign inspection.

=={{SpanID|903.1.23}}903.1.23 Median Opening Treatments for Divided Highways (MUTCD Section 2A.23)==
'''Guidance. '''A divided highway crossing should be signed and marked as separate intersections when both of the following conditions are present:
::A. The paths of opposing left turns from the divided highway cross each other (see [[#fig903-1-23|Figure 903.1.23]]), and
::B. There is adequate storage in the interior approaches for the design vehicles expected to cross the divided highway.

If either one or both of the conditions in the Guidance paragraph above do not exist, the divided highway crossing should be signed and marked as a single intersection.

{{SpanID|fig903-1-23}}
[[File:Figure 903.1.23 Intersection Configuration at a Divided Highway Crossing.png|center|thumb|alt=An example of separate intersections, where the paths the of opposing left-turning vehicles cross, and an example of a single intersection, in which the paths of opposing left-turning vehicles do not cross. |800px| '''Figure 903.1.23''' Intersection Configuration at a Divided Highway Crossing]]

At the crossing of two divided highways, engineering judgment should be used to determine the number of separate intersections.

'''Support. '''Divided highway crossings with median widths 150 feet or greater might function as two intersections depending upon the interaction of the opposing left-turn vehicle paths and the available interior storage in the median for a crossing vehicle. Other factors that could determine whether a divided highway crossing is operating as one or two intersections include:
::A. The geometric design of the divided highway crossing,
::B. The use of positive offset mainline left-turn lanes,
::C. The length of the median opening (as measured parallel to the center line of the divided highway),
::D. The geometric design of the median noses,
::E. Other roadway geometric considerations such as a skewed side street approach or a variable median width,
::F. Intersection sight distance,
::G. The physical characteristics of the design vehicle, and
::H. The observed prevailing driver behavior with regard to opposing left-turn path interaction.

=={{SpanID|903.1.24}}903.1.24 Priority Order of Signs==
'''Standard. '''The order classification of signs shall be defined as follows (refer to [[#fig903-1-24|Figure 903.1.24]]):
#First Order Signing. Signs that are installed in advance of the closest intersection or interchange where motorists turn off of the state highway system to arrive at the desired traffic generator or site. First order signing will always be on state right-of-way.
#Second Order Signing. Signs that are installed in advance of the intersection or interchange where motorists turn to access the highway where the first order signing is provided. Second order signing will always be on state right-of-way and shall require the use of first order signing on state right-of-way.
#Third Order Signing. Signs that are installed in advance of the intersection or interchange where motorists turn to access the highway where the second order signing is provided. Third order signing will always be on state right-of-way and shall require the use of first order and second order signing on state right-of-way.

[[File:Figure 903.1.24 Sign Order Classification.gif|center|frame|thumb|alt=A diagram illustrating the priority order of signs for state highway directions with First, Second, and Third Order Signing.| <center>'''Figure 903.1.24 Sign Order Classification'''</center>]]

'''Support. '''In general, as the “order” of signing increases, the functional classification of road stays the same or increases. For example, if first order signing is on a four-lane U.S. route, second order signing should be on another U.S. route, expressway, or a freeway. In this example case, second order signing should not be placed on a two-lane lettered route.

903.12 Changeable Message Signs (MUTCD Chapter 2L)

2025-12-10T22:52:10Z

HogsettC: /* {{SpanID|903.12.5}}903.12.5 Message Length and Units of Information (MUTCD Section 2L.05) */

[[Category:903 Highway Signing (MUTCD Part 2)|903.12]]
=={{SpanID|903.12.1}}903.12.1 Description of Changeable Message Signs (MUTCD Section 2L.01)==

'''Support. '''A changeable message sign (CMS) is a traffic control device that is capable of displaying one or more alternative messages. Some CMS have a blank mode when no message is displayed, while others display multiple messages with only one of the messages displayed at a time (such as OPEN/CLOSED signs at weigh stations).

Dynamic message signs (DMS) are a type of CMS which are stationary traffic control devices capable of displaying one or more alternative messages that provide travelers with real-time, traffic-related variable messages. DMS are used to warn, regulate, route and manage traffic.

The provisions in EPG 903.12 apply to both permanent and portable changeable message signs with electronic displays or the electronic display portion of an otherwise conventional static sign. Additional provisions that only apply to portable changeable message signs (PCMS) can be found in [[616.12 Other TTC Zone Traffic Control Devices (MUTCD Chapter 6L)#616.12.5|EPG 616.12.5]]. Additional MoDOT provisions that apply to permanently-located DMS can be found in [[910.3 Dynamic Message Signs (DMS)#910.3|EPG 910.3]].

The CMS is a traffic control device at all times regardless of the type of message being displayed. Accordingly, the limitations on design, format, and manner of display of a message conveyed on a conventional sign apply to CMS regardless of the type of message being displayed at any given time. Some of the general provisions regarding traffic control devices are reiterated in EPG 903.12. However, EPG 903.12 is not an independent or stand-alone reference for CMS. Users of CMS are expected to consult the other articles in the EPG for criteria on how to develop effective messages that comply with the EPG and that meet the expectancy and limitations of the road user. In this regard, the engineering processes applied to decisions about whether to use a particular sign, for example, are no different for the decisions about the type and content of the message under consideration for display on a CMS. The other limited-use messages allowed on CMS as provided for in EPG 903.12 likewise fall under the same MUTCD provisions as the primary-use traffic operation regulatory, warning, and guidance messages except as stated otherwise in EPG 903.12.

CMS messaging can be subject to habituation, a phenomenon by which repeated exposure to a stimulus results in diminished response. CMS habituation can occur through repeated exposure to messages, especially those messages that might not be perceived as having relevance to the road user, resulting in diminished responsiveness of the road user to that message. Because messages can be changed or extinguished, the effectiveness of CMS is tied more to the messages displayed thereon, the frequency of displayed messages, and the relevance to the road user, rather than to the installation of the signs themselves.

'''Guidance. '''Changeable message signs should be used judiciously to avoid habituation and preserve their effectiveness during the display of real-time messages about traffic conditions or traffic advisories.

'''Standard. '''No items other than inventory or maintenance-related information (see [[903.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 2A)#903.1.4|EPG 903.1.4]]) shall be displayed on the front or back of a CMS or portable CMS. Names or logos of the manufacturer, brand, or model shall not be displayed on a CMS or portable CMS, either in the message display itself or on the exterior housing.

'''Guidance. '''Blank-out signs that display only single-phase, predetermined electronic-display legends that are limited by their composition and arrangement of pixels or other illuminated forms in a fixed arrangement (such as a blank-out sign indicating a part-time turn prohibition, a blank-out or changeable lane-use sign, or a changeable OPEN/CLOSED sign for a weigh station) should comply with the provisions of the applicable Article for the specific type of sign, provided that the letter forms, symbols, and other legend elements are duplicates of the conventional messages as detailed in the “Standard Highway Signs” publication (see [[:Category:911 General (MUTCD Part 1)#Relation_to_Other_Publications_(MUTCD_Section_1A.05)|EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1A.05)]]). Because such a sign is effectively an illuminated version of a conventional sign, the size of its legend elements, the overall size of the sign, and the placement of the sign should comply with the applicable provisions for the conventional version of the sign.

=={{SpanID|903.12.2}}903.12.2 Applications of Changeable Message Signs (MUTCD Section 2L.02)==

'''Standard. '''CMS shall display only traffic operational, regulatory, warning, and guidance information except as otherwise provided in [[#903.12 Changeable Message Signs (MUTCD Chapter 2L) #903.12|EPG 903.12]] and [[910.3 Dynamic Message Signs (DMS)#910.3.2.12_Congestion_Messages|EPG 910.3]]. Advertising or other messages not related to traffic control shall not be displayed on a CMS or on its supports or other equipment.

'''Option. '''CMS may display traffic safety campaign messages (see [[#903.12.7|EPG 903.12.7]]), transportation-related messages, emergency homeland security messages, and America’s Missing: Broadcast Emergency Response (AMBER) and Blue Alert messages, all as provided for in [[#903.12 Changeable Message Signs (MUTCD Chapter 2L) #903.12|EPG 903.12]] and [[910.3 Dynamic Message Signs (DMS)|910.3]].

Transportation-related messages for the purpose of improving traffic conditions, such as those providing information on alternative means of transportation, electronic toll collection, or carpooling may be displayed to remind or inform drivers of relevant options or opportunities for transportation.

'''Support. '''Messages regarding broader transportation items not related to improving traffic conditions, such as reminders of driver’s license or vehicle registration renewal, vehicle recall information, and vehicle maintenance, do not meet the purpose of a transportation-related message.

Examples of transportation-related messages include “STADIUM EVENT SUNDAY, DELAYS NOON TO 4 PM” and “OZONE ALERT—USE TRANSIT.”

'''Guidance. '''A CMS should not be used to display a transportation-related message if doing so could adversely affect respect for the sign. “CONGESTION AHEAD” or other overly simplistic or vague messages should not be displayed alone. These messages should be supplemented with a message on the location or distance to the congestion or incident, delay and travel time, alternative route, or other similar messages.

CMS should not be used in place of conventional signs for conditions that do not change, except for blank-out type signs used to display regulatory, warning, and guidance information that routinely reoccurs, but only on a part-time basis. Similarly, when only certain elements of a message on a non-changeable sign are subject to change, only those elements of the sign should be in an electronic display.

'''Support. '''The purpose of CMS is to provide real-time traffic regulatory, warning, or guidance messages as follows:
:A. Incident management and route diversion;
:B. Warning of adverse roadway travel conditions due to weather;
:C. Special event applications associated with traffic control or conditions;
:D. Lane, ramp, and roadway control;
:E. Priced or other types of managed lanes;
:F. Travel times;
:G. Warning situations;
:H. Traffic regulations;
:I. Speed control or warning;
:J. Variable destination guidance;
:K. Supporting temporary traffic control; or
:L. Active Traffic Management.

CMS provide significant flexibility and capability in communicating many types of real-time traffic control messages to road users. While their intended purpose is the display of traffic regulatory, warning, or guidance information, other limited uses are also allowed under certain conditions, as provided in EPG 903.12. Their integrity as an official traffic control device rests significantly on their judicious use and proper messaging format and content, regardless of the message type being displayed.

'''Standard. '''MoDOT shall issue and maintain a policy regarding the use and display of all types of messages to be used on their CMS. The policy shall define the types of messages that will be allowed, the priority of messages, the proper syntax of messages, the timing of messages, and other important messaging elements to ensure messages displayed meet the basic principles that govern the design and use of traffic control devices in general (see [[:Category:911 General (MUTCD Part 1)#Purpose_and_Principles_of_Traffic_Control_Devices_(MUTCD_Section_1D.01)|EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1D.01)]]) and traffic signs in particular as provided for in the EPG.

'''Guidance. '''When CMS are used at multiple locations to address a specific situation, the message displays should be consistent along the roadway corridor and adjacent corridors, which might necessitate coordination among different operating agencies.

AMBER and Blue Alerts (see the first option paragraph of this Article), when displayed, should not preempt messages related to traffic or travel conditions. AMBER and Blue Alert messages should be kept as brief as possible and, when possible, direct road users to another source, such as broadcast or highway advisory radio, for detailed information about the alert.

'''Support. '''[[910.3 Dynamic Message Signs (DMS) #903.3.2.15 Child Abduction, Blue Alert and Ozone Alert Messages|EPG 910.3.2.15]] contains procedures for Child Abduction, Blue Alert, and Ozon Alert messages.

'''Standard. '''Types of “alert” messages other than AMBER and Blue alerts that are unrelated to traffic or travel conditions shall not be displayed on CMS.

The format of CMS displays shall not be of a type that could be considered similar to advertising or promotional displays.

'''Support. '''In times of a declared state of emergency, it might be appropriate to display messages related to evacuation, homeland security, or emergency information. Traffic patterns, movement, or other situations might be atypical due to the emergency, necessitating unique messaging not specifically related to traffic conditions.

'''Standard. '''Homeland security and emergency messages shall only be displayed in declared states of emergency when there is an imminent threat to the general population. Generic security or personal safety messages shall not be displayed when there is no context of a declared state of emergency or known imminent national security threat. Homeland security and emergency messages shall not be promotional or advisory in nature, including the message design, layout, or manner of display.

'''Guidance. '''Homeland Security and emergency messages should undergo significant levels of scrutiny prior to being approved for broadcast to ensure accuracy and consistency with emergency conditions. These messages should be designed to convey a clear and simple meaning in a similar format to traffic control messages.

'''Support. '''[[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B)#903.2.20|EPG 903.2.20]] contains information regarding the design of CMS that are used to display variable speed limits that change based on ambient or operational conditions on the variable Speed Limit (R2-1) sign.

[[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C)#903.3.13|EPG 903.3.13]] contains information regarding the design of CMS that are used to display the speed at which approaching vehicles are traveling on the Vehicle Speed Feedback (W13-20 and W13-20aP) sign and plaque.

[[:Category:912 Traffic Control Device Considerations for Automated Vehicles (MUTCD Part 5)#912.2.1|EPG 912 (MUTCD Section 5B.01)]] contains provisions for LEDs used in electronic-display signs to accommodate driving automation systems.

=={{SpanID|903.12.3}}903.12.3 Legibility and Visibility of Changeable Message Signs (MUTCD Section 2L.03)==

'''Support. '''The maximum distance at which a driver can first correctly identify letters and words on a sign is called the legibility distance of the sign. Legibility distance is affected by the characteristics of the sign design and the visual capabilities of drivers. Visual capabilities, and thus legibility distances, vary among drivers.

For the more common types of CMS, the longest measured legibility distances on sunny days occur during mid-day when the sun is overhead. Legibility distances are much shorter when the sun is behind the sign face, when the sun is on the horizon and shining on the sign face, or at night.

Visibility is the characteristic that enables a CMS to be seen. Visibility is associated with the point where the CMS is first detected, whereas legibility is the point where the message on the CMS can be read. Environmental conditions such as rain, fog, and snow impact the visibility of CMS and can reduce the available legibility distances. During these conditions, there might not be enough viewing time for drivers to read the message.

'''Guidance. '''CMS used on roadways with speed limits of 55 mph or higher should be visible from ½ mile under both day and night conditions. The message should be designed to be legible from a minimum distance of 600 feet for nighttime conditions and 800 feet for normal daylight conditions. When environmental conditions that reduce visibility and legibility are present, or when the legibility distances stated in the previous sentences in this paragraph cannot be practically achieved, messages composed of fewer units of information should be used and consideration should be given to limiting the message to a single phase (see [[#903.12.5|EPG 903.12.5]] for information regarding the lengths of messages displayed on CMS).

The electronic display of standardized regulatory and warning signs used individually or as part of the legend for a larger sign should meet the size and legend requirements for those specific signs in [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B)|EPG 903.2]] and [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C)|903.3]].

=={{SpanID|903.12.4}}903.12.4 Design Characteristics of Messages (MUTCD Section 2L.04)==

'''Standard. '''Except as provided in the following paragraph, messages shall not include animation, flashing, dissolving, exploding, scrolling, or other dynamic display elements.

When a portable CMS is used as an arrow board that uses a flashing or sequential display for a lane or shoulder closure, the display and operation shall be considered that of an arrow board and shall comply with the provisions of EPG [[616.12 Other TTC Zone Traffic Control Devices (MUTCD Chapter 6L)#616.12.5|616.12.5]] and [[616.12 Other TTC Zone Traffic Control Devices (MUTCD Chapter 6L)#616.12.6|616.12.6]].

'''Guidance. '''In developing messages for display on CMS, the provisions of [[:Category:911 General (MUTCD Part 1)#Purpose_and_Principles_of_Traffic_Control_Devices_(MUTCD_Section_1D.01)|EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1D.01)]] should be consulted for the principles of an effective traffic control device.

'''Standard.''' All message displays on CMS, whether for traffic operational, regulatory, warning, or guidance information, or for the other allowable message types as defined in EPG 903.12, shall follow the same design and display principles found in the EPG used for other traffic control signs, except as provided elsewhere in EPG 903.12.

'''Guidance. '''Except in the case of a limited-legend CMS (such as a blank-out or a part-time regulatory sign display) that is used in place of a conventional regulatory sign or an activated blank-out warning sign that supplements a conventional warning sign at a separate location, the signs should be used as a supplement to and not as a substitute for conventional signs and markings unless otherwise provided for in the EPG.

'''Support. '''When CMS are overused for messages not directly associated with real-time driving conditions, road users might pay less attention to the sign, thereby limiting their effectiveness as traffic control devices.

'''Guidance. '''Warning Beacons (see [[902.18 Flashing Beacons (MUTCD Chapter 4S)#902.18.3|EPG 902.18.3]]) should not be installed on CMS, rather CMS should be used predominately to display messages that are critical to real-time travel conditions. CMS word messages should be limited to no more than three lines, with no more than 20 characters per line.

The spacing between characters in a word should be between 25 and 40 percent of the letter height. The spacing between words in a message should be between 75 and 100 percent of the letter height. Spacing between the message lines should be between 50 and 75 percent of the letter height. [[#tab903.12.4|Table 903.12.4]] contains information for spacing between characters, words, and lines of text.

<center>
{{SpanID|tab903.12.4}}
{| class="wikitable" align="center" style="max-width:564px; margin-left: 15px;"
|+ '''Table 903.12.4''' Spacing between Message Characters, Words, and Lines of Text
|-
! Height of Letters Used on CMS !! Spacing between Characters in Words !! Horizontal Spacing between Words !! Vertical Spacing between Lines of Text
|-
| 12 || 3 - 5 || 9 - 12 || 6 - 9
|-
| 18 || 4 ½ - 7 || 13 ½ - 18 || 9 - 13 ½
|-
| colspan="4" style="background-color: #ffffff" | Note: All units are in inches
|}
</center>

Except as otherwise provided in the EPG, word messages on CMS should be composed of all upper-case letters. The minimum letter height should be 18 inches for CMS on roadways with speed limits of 45 mph or higher. The minimum letter height should be 12 inches for CMS on roadways with speed limits of less than 45 mph. When a message is composed of two phases and higher informational load (see [[#903.12.5|EPG 903.12.5]]), the letter height should be 18 inches, regardless of the speed limit, to optimize legibility distance and available viewing time.

'''Option. '''CMS used to replicate a conventional sign may use the character size of the conventional sign being replicated.

'''Support. '''Using letter heights of more than 18 inches will not result in proportional increases in legibility distance.

'''Guidance. '''The width-to-height ratio of the sign characters should be between 0.7 and 1.0. The stroke width-to-height ratio should be 0.2.

'''Support. '''The width-to-height ratio is commonly accomplished using a minimum font matrix density of five pixels wide by seven pixels high.

'''Standard. '''CMS shall automatically adjust their brightness under varying light conditions to maintain legibility.

'''Guidance. '''The luminance design of a CMS should meet industry criteria for daytime and nighttime conditions. Luminance contrast design should be between 8 and 12 for all conditions.

'''Support. '''CMS maintenance and replacement practices might need to account for the reduction of LED luminance and luminance contrast that occurs naturally over time and might substantially impact legibility.

'''Guidance. '''Contrast orientation of CMS should always be positive, that is, with luminous characters on a dark or less-luminous background.

'''Support. '''Legibility distances for negative-contrast CMS are likely to be at least 25 percent shorter than those of positive-contrast messages. In addition, the increased light emitted by negative-contrast CMS has not been shown to improve detection distances and might visually overwhelm the darker characters of the sign legend.

'''Standard. '''The colors used for the legends and backgrounds on CMS shall be as provided in [[903.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 2A)#tab903.1.6|Table 903.1.6]].

'''Guidance. '''When displaying color messages use of full background color should be avoided in nighttime conditions. Full background color at night can cause a washout effect of the text or other image being displayed.

'''Standard. '''Except as provided for in the following paragraph, if a black background is used, the color used for the legend on a CMS shall match the background color that would be used on a standard sign for that type of legend as specified in [[903.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 2A)#tab903.1.6|Table 903.1.6]].

'''Option. '''CMS that use only yellow or amber LEDs may display a yellow or amber legend that does not match the background color used on a standard sign for that type of legend as specified in [[903.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 2A)#tab903.1.6|Table 903.1.6]].

'''Standard. '''If a green background is used for a guide message on a CMS or if a blue background is used for a motorist services message on a CMS, the background color shall be provided by green or blue lighted pixels such that the entire CMS would be lighted, not just the white legend.

'''Support. '''Some CMS that employ newer technologies have the capability to display a near duplicate of a standard sign or other sign legend using standard symbols, the Standard Alphabets and letter forms, route shields, and other typical sign legend elements with no apparent loss of resolution or recognition to the road user when compared with a conventional version of the same sign legend. Such signs are of the full-matrix type and can typically display full-color legends. [[#fig903.12.4|Figure 903.12.4]] shows comparative examples of the effects of varying pixel densities on legend form.

'''Guidance. '''If used, the CMS described in the previous paragraph should not display symbols or route shields unless they can do so in the appropriate legend and background color combinations. Where an LED matrix is used to form the changeable legend, signs with pixel spacing greater than 20 millimeters should display only word legends and no symbols or route shields.

For a single-phase message where the Standard Alphabets and other legend elements of standard designs are used, the lettering style, size, and line spacing should comply with the applicable provisions for the type of message displayed as provided elsewhere in the EPG. For two-phase messages, larger legend heights should be used as described previously in this Article because of the need for such messages to be legible at a greater distance. Regardless of the number of phases, the CMS should comply with the legibility and visibility provisions of [[#903.12.3|EPG 903.12.3]].

'''Support. '''[[910.3 Dynamic Message Signs (DMS)#910.3.2.12_Congestion_Messages#910.3.2.8.1_Design_Characteristics_of_DMSs_(MUTCD_2L.04)|EPG 910.3.2.8.1]] includes additional information regarding Design Characteristics of Messages for DMS.

{{SpanID|fig903.12.4}}
[[File:Figure 903.12.4 Example of Capability to display Sign Legends Based on Pixel Pitch.png|thumb|center|600px|alt="The figure compares two changeable message sign (CMS) displays with different pixel densities. The top image shows a high-resolution full-matrix CMS capable of displaying detailed graphics. It presents a green sign with a blue and red Interstate 40 shield followed by the message “EAST CLOSED USE ALT ROUTE” in white text. A note beside the image explains that color full-matrix CMS with pixel pitches of 20 millimeters or less can display legends similar to conventional highway signs, including route shields and symbols.

The bottom image shows a low-resolution CMS with larger pixel spacing. The display reads “I-40 EAST CLOSED USE ALT ROUTE” in amber text on a black background. The characters appear blockier and less detailed. A note beside the image explains that CMS with pixel pitches greater than 20 millimeters, whether color or monochrome, cannot adequately display conventional sign legends and should only be used for monochrome word messages."
|'''Figure 903.12.4''' Example of Capability to display Sign Legends Based on Pixel Pitch Notes:<ol><li>Pixel pitch is the distance from the center of a pixel to the center of an adjacent pixel.</li><li>The pixel pitch is described in Metric units because sign manufacturers only use Metric units.</li></ol>]]

=={{SpanID|903.12.5}}903.12.5 Message Length and Units of Information (MUTCD Section 2L.05)==

'''Guidance. '''The maximum length of a message should be dictated by the number of units of information contained in the message, in addition to the size of the CMS. A unit of information, which is a single answer to a single question that a driver can use to make a decision, should not be more than four words.

<center>
{{SpanID|tab903.12.5}}
{| class="wikitable" align="center" style="text-align: center; margin-left: 15px;"
|-
|+ '''Table 903.12.5''' Example of Units of Information
|-
! Question !! Answer !! Number of Information Units
|-
| style="text-align: left" | What happened? || MAJOR CRASH || 1
|-
| style="text-align: left" | Where? || AT EXIT 12 || 1
|-
| style="text-align: left" | Who is the advisory for? || Drivers heading TO NEW YORK || 1
|-
| style="text-align: left" | What is Advised? || USE ROUTE 46 || 1
|-
| colspan="3" style="text-align: left; background-color: #ffffff;min-width: 400px;" | Note: the following is an example of a two-phase message that could be developed from the four information units shown in this table: 
<div style="text-align: center;">   [[File:UnitsofInformationPhase1-2.png|center|400px|alt="Use Route 46 to New York", Phase 2]]</div>
|}
</center>

'''Support'''. In order to illustrate the concept of units of information, [[#tab903.12.5|Table 903.12.5]] shows an example message that is comprised of four units of information.

The maximum allowable number of units of information in a CMS message is based on the principles described in this Article, the current highway operating speed, the legibility characteristics of the CMS, and the lighting conditions.

'''Standard. '''Each message shall consist of no more than two phases. A phase shall consist of no more than three lines of text. Each phase shall be understood by itself, and the meaning of the entire message shall be the same, regardless of the sequence in which the phases are read. Each line of legend shall be centered on the sign. If more than one CMS is visible to road users, then only one sign shall display a sequential message at any given time.

'''Option. '''A legend on a CMS that replicates a legend on a conventional sign that would not normally be center justified may be left justified or right justified as appropriate, such as a travel time display.

'''Standard. '''Abbreviations displayed on CMS shall comply with the provisions of [[:Category:911 General (MUTCD Part 1)#Abbreviations_Used_on_Traffic_Control_Devices_(MUTCD_Section_1D.08)|EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1D.08)]].

'''Guidance. '''When designing and displaying messages on CMS, the following principles should be used:
:A. The minimum time that an individual phase is displayed should be based on 1 second per word or 2 seconds per unit of information, whichever produces a lesser value. The display time for a phase should never be less than 2 seconds.
:B. The maximum cycle time of a two-phase message should be 8 seconds.
:C. The duration between the display of two phases should not exceed 0.3 seconds.
:D. No more than three units of information should be displayed in a message phase.
:E. No more than four units of information should be in a message when the traffic operating speeds are 35 mph or more.
:F. No more than five units of information should be in a message when the traffic operating speeds are less than 35 mph.
:G. Only one unit of information should appear on each line of the CMS.

'''Support. '''[[#tab903.12.5|Table 903.12.5]] provides an example of the number of units of information in a message.

'''Option. '''A unit of information consisting of more than one word may be displayed on more than one line. An additional CMS at a downstream location may be used for the purpose of allowing the entire message to be read twice.

If more than two phases would be needed to display the necessary information, additional CMS may be used to display this information as a series of two distinct, independent messages with a maximum of two phases at each location, in accordance with the provisions of the first Standard paragraph of [[#903.12.5|EPG 903.12.5]].

'''Support. '''[[#fig903.12.5.1|Figures 913.12.5.1]] and [[#fig903.12.5.2|903.12.5.2]] provide examples of message construction for CMS. Each example shows the message content, layout, and phasing for a potential message and an improved message. The improved message for each example has been optimized for recognition, comprehension, and effectiveness.

See [[910.3 Dynamic Message Signs (DMS)#910.3.2.12_Congestion_Messages#910.3.2.8.1_Design_Characteristics_of_DMSs_(MUTCD_2L.04)|EPG 910.3.2.8.1]] for additional information regarding Message Length and Units of Information for DMS.

{{SpanID|fig903.12.5.1}}
[[File:Figure 903.12.5.1 Examples of Message Construction for CMS.png|thumb|center|800px|alt="The figure is a table titled “Examples of Potential and Improved CMS Messages,” showing nine examples of changeable message sign (CMS) messages with three columns: Potential Message, Improved Message, and Comments. Each row presents Phase 1 and Phase 2 messages, along with commentary explaining why the improved version is preferred.
Example 1: Potential messages “EXIT 10” and “CLOSED USE EXIT 12” are improved to “EXIT 10 CLOSED” and “USE EXIT 12.” Comments note this is a diversionary message and each phase should stand alone.
Example 2: “ROADWORK AHEAD” and “CAUTION CAUTION CAUTION” are improved to “ROAD WORK AHEAD” and “FINES DOUBLE.” Comments explain the improved version provides clearer actionable information.
Example 3: “RIGHT LANE CLOSED” and “1 MILE” become “RIGHT LANE CLOSED 1 MILE.” Comments state the improved single-phase message reduces driver reading time.
Example 4: “RT LN CLSD 1 MI” becomes “RIGHT LANE CLOSED 1 MILE,” noting that abbreviations should not be used when the sign can display full words.
Example 5: “9TH AVENUE SOUTHWEST KEEP RIGHT” becomes “9TH AVE SW KEEP RIGHT.” Comments say standard street abbreviations improve recognition.
Example 6: “EXPWY CONGESTED USE 101 FOR AIRPORT” becomes “US 19 CONGESTED” and “AIRPORT USE EXIT 101.” Comments explain unfamiliar expressway numbers reduce clarity and that diversion instructions should be simplified.
Example 7: “TRAVEL TIME TO I-89 13 MINUTES” becomes “I-89 JCT 12 MILES 13 MINS.” Comments note distance and time should appear together, and repeating legends across phases reduces comprehension.
Example 8: “SEAT BELTS SAVE LIVES” is improved to “STATE LAW FASTEN SEAT BELTS,” clarifying the regulatory requirement. Comments state slogan messages do not convey legal meaning.
Example 9: “DON’T TEXT JUST DRIVE” and “IT CAN WAIT” become “NO HAND-HELD PHONE BY DRIVER” and “$250 FINE AND POINTS.” Comments state that slogan messages do not convey enforceable regulations and Phase 2 may be omitted.
Each row includes corresponding commentary explaining message clarity, abbreviation rules, safety communication, or regulatory requirements. The table emphasizes improved CMS message structure for readability, consistency, and compliance." |'''Figure 903.12.5.1''' Examples of Message Construction for CMS *Examples shown are for single-color CMS with pixel spacing greater than 20 mm and use all upper-case lettering. Multi-color, fullmatrix CMS with pixel spacing of 20 mm or less should use upper- and lower-case lettering where appropriate and proper legend and background colors.]]

{{SpanID|fig903.12.5.2}}
[[File:Figure 903.12.5.2 Examples of Message Construction for CMS.png|thumb|center|800px|alt="The figure shows a table with eight examples of potential and improved changeable message sign (CMS) messages. The table contains columns for Example number, Phase, Potential Message, Improved Message, and Comments. Each example lists Phase 1 and, if applicable, Phase 2 messages with commentary explaining why the improved message is preferred.
Example 1: “EXIT 10” and “CLOSED USE EXIT 12” are improved to “EXIT 10 CLOSED” and “USE EXIT 12.” Comments note each phase should convey a complete thought.
Example 2: “ROADWORK AHEAD” and “CAUTION CAUTION CAUTION” are improved to “ROAD WORK AHEAD” and “FINES DOUBLE,” with comments stating that caution messages are too vague and that Phase 2 can be eliminated.
Example 3: “RIGHT LANE CLOSED” and “1 MILE” become “RIGHT LN CLOSED 1 MILE.” Comments explain a single-phase message is more effective.
Example 4: “RT LN CLSD 1 MI” becomes “RIGHT LN CLOSED 1 MILE.” Comments state uncommon abbreviations should not be used when full wording fits the sign.
Example 5: “9TH AVENUE SW” becomes “9 AVE SW KEEP RIGHT,” with comments noting that standard street abbreviations improve recognition.
Example 6: “ROAD WORK NEXT 3 MILES” is kept as a single-phase message, with comments explaining that condensing ROAD and WORK into one word is unnecessary because the sign can accommodate the full message.
Example 7: “SEAT BELTS SAVE LIVES” becomes “FASTEN SEAT BELTS” with “STATE LAW” as Phase 2. Comments state slogan messages do not convey legal requirements.
Example 8: “DON’T TEXT JUST DRIVE” becomes “NO HAND-HELD PHONE BY DRIVER.” Comments explain that slogan messages do not convey enforceable regulations and that Phase 2 can be removed.
The table emphasizes clarity, abbreviation standards, and proper structuring of CMS messages for road users."
|'''Figure 903.12.5.2''' Examples of Message Construction for CMS *Examples shown are for a portable CMS where the display width is generally limited to 8 characters per line of legend.]]

=={{SpanID|903.12.6}}903.12.6 Travel Time Messages (MUTCD Section 2L.06)==

'''Support. '''Travel times provide road users useful information about the level of congestion on segments of highways where motorists experience frequent incidents that slow traffic. Travel times are only helpful to the road user if they have a general understanding of the length of the road segment the travel time is related to so that they can compare that to the time it takes them to travel a similar distance on a highway without congestion. However, travel time messages require road users to read and process a significant amount of information and careful consideration is needed to ensure the overall message is not overloading the motorist.

'''Guidance. '''Travel times should be tied to the distance to a particular destination or junction so that road users can estimate the level of congestion based on the time to travel that distance. When travel times are displayed on CMS, such as during peak traffic conditions, the message should comply with the provisions of Sections [[903.5 Guide Signs - Freeways and Expressways (MUTCD Chapter 2E) #903.5.47|EPG 903.5.47]] and [[903.5 Guide Signs - Freeways and Expressways (MUTCD Chapter 2E) #903.5.48|903.5.48]]. If both a travel time and a distance are displayed, the sign should display only one destination. A distance displayed as part of a travel time message should be rounded to the nearest whole mile.

'''Option. '''When comparative travel time displays are used providing travel times on different routes to one destination, distances to that destination may be eliminated.

A reference-location-based exit number (see [[903.5 Guide Signs - Freeways and Expressways (MUTCD Chapter 2E)#903.5.22|EPG 903.5.22]]) may be displayed in lieu of a destination name or junction thereby providing the necessary distance information to the road user. If reference-location-based exit numbers are displayed, then up to two travel times may be displayed provided that the distance to the exit is not also displayed.

'''Support. '''[[910.3 Dynamic Message Signs (DMS)#910.3.2.12_Congestion_Messages#910.3.2.12_Congestion_Messages#910.3.2.12_Congestion_Messages|EPG 910.3.2.12]] includes information regarding Congestion Messages for DMS.

=={{SpanID|903.12.7}}903.12.7 Traffic Safety Campaign Messages (MUTCD Section 2L.07)==

'''Support. '''An allowable ancillary use of CMS is the display of traffic safety messages in conjunction with a traffic safety campaign that includes other forms of media as the primary communication and education mechanism.

'''Standard. '''Traffic control messages shall have priority over traffic safety campaign messages.

'''Guidance. '''When a CMS is used to display a traffic safety campaign, the message should be simple, direct, brief, legible, and clear (see [[:Category:911 General (MUTCD Part 1)#Purpose_and_Principles_of_Traffic_Control_Devices_(MUTCD_Section_1D.01)|EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1D.01)]]). Traffic safety campaign messages should be relevant to the road user on the roadway on which the message is displayed. For example, messages regarding school bus stop safety should not be displayed on freeways where school bus stops are not found.

A CMS should not be used to display a traffic safety campaign message if doing so could adversely affect respect for the sign. Messages with obscure or secondary meanings should not be used as they might be misunderstood or understood only by a limited segment of road users and require greater time to process and understand. Similarly, slogan-type messages and the display of statistical information should not be used.

The broad traffic safety campaign marketing message should be appropriately shortened or otherwise modified to comply with the provisions of [[#903.12.5|EPG 903.12.5]] when a traffic safety campaign message is displayed on a CMS.

Traffic safety campaign messages should emphasize the applicable regulation or warning and should reference any penalties associated with violations of the regulation. Traffic safety campaigns using CMS should include coordinated enforcement efforts where penalties or enforcement type warnings are part of the message displayed on the CMS.

Traffic safety campaign messages should not be displayed on CMS unless they are part of an active, coordinated safety campaign that uses other media forms as the primary means of outreach. For consistency on a national level, traffic safety campaigns should be coordinated with those on the National Highway Transportation Safety Administration’s annual communications calendar or similarly planned sate campaigns.

'''Support. '''Examples of traffic safety campaign messages include “UNBUCKLED SEAT BELTS FINE + POINTS” and “IMPAIRED DRIVERS LOSE LICENSE + JAIL.”

[[910.3 Dynamic Message Signs (DMS)#910.3.2.12_Congestion_Messages#910.3.2.16_Driver_Safety_Campaigns_(MUTCD_2L.02)|EPG 910.3.2.16]] includes additional information related to Driver Safety Campaigns.

=={{SpanID|903.12.8}}903.12.8 Permanently-Located Changeable Message Signs (MUTCD Section 2L.08)==
'''Support. '''See [[910.3 Dynamic Message Signs (DMS)#910.3.2.6|EPG 910.3.2.6]] for information regarding Permanently-Located Changeable Message Signs and Dynamic Message Signs (DMS).

File:UnitsofInformationPhase1-2.png

2025-12-10T22:51:30Z

HogsettC: File uploaded with MsUpload

File uploaded with MsUpload

903.12 Changeable Message Signs (MUTCD Chapter 2L)

2025-12-10T22:50:17Z

HogsettC: /* {{SpanID|903.12.5}}903.12.5 Message Length and Units of Information (MUTCD Section 2L.05) */

[[Category:903 Highway Signing (MUTCD Part 2)|903.12]]
=={{SpanID|903.12.1}}903.12.1 Description of Changeable Message Signs (MUTCD Section 2L.01)==

'''Support. '''A changeable message sign (CMS) is a traffic control device that is capable of displaying one or more alternative messages. Some CMS have a blank mode when no message is displayed, while others display multiple messages with only one of the messages displayed at a time (such as OPEN/CLOSED signs at weigh stations).

Dynamic message signs (DMS) are a type of CMS which are stationary traffic control devices capable of displaying one or more alternative messages that provide travelers with real-time, traffic-related variable messages. DMS are used to warn, regulate, route and manage traffic.

The provisions in EPG 903.12 apply to both permanent and portable changeable message signs with electronic displays or the electronic display portion of an otherwise conventional static sign. Additional provisions that only apply to portable changeable message signs (PCMS) can be found in [[616.12 Other TTC Zone Traffic Control Devices (MUTCD Chapter 6L)#616.12.5|EPG 616.12.5]]. Additional MoDOT provisions that apply to permanently-located DMS can be found in [[910.3 Dynamic Message Signs (DMS)#910.3|EPG 910.3]].

The CMS is a traffic control device at all times regardless of the type of message being displayed. Accordingly, the limitations on design, format, and manner of display of a message conveyed on a conventional sign apply to CMS regardless of the type of message being displayed at any given time. Some of the general provisions regarding traffic control devices are reiterated in EPG 903.12. However, EPG 903.12 is not an independent or stand-alone reference for CMS. Users of CMS are expected to consult the other articles in the EPG for criteria on how to develop effective messages that comply with the EPG and that meet the expectancy and limitations of the road user. In this regard, the engineering processes applied to decisions about whether to use a particular sign, for example, are no different for the decisions about the type and content of the message under consideration for display on a CMS. The other limited-use messages allowed on CMS as provided for in EPG 903.12 likewise fall under the same MUTCD provisions as the primary-use traffic operation regulatory, warning, and guidance messages except as stated otherwise in EPG 903.12.

CMS messaging can be subject to habituation, a phenomenon by which repeated exposure to a stimulus results in diminished response. CMS habituation can occur through repeated exposure to messages, especially those messages that might not be perceived as having relevance to the road user, resulting in diminished responsiveness of the road user to that message. Because messages can be changed or extinguished, the effectiveness of CMS is tied more to the messages displayed thereon, the frequency of displayed messages, and the relevance to the road user, rather than to the installation of the signs themselves.

'''Guidance. '''Changeable message signs should be used judiciously to avoid habituation and preserve their effectiveness during the display of real-time messages about traffic conditions or traffic advisories.

'''Standard. '''No items other than inventory or maintenance-related information (see [[903.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 2A)#903.1.4|EPG 903.1.4]]) shall be displayed on the front or back of a CMS or portable CMS. Names or logos of the manufacturer, brand, or model shall not be displayed on a CMS or portable CMS, either in the message display itself or on the exterior housing.

'''Guidance. '''Blank-out signs that display only single-phase, predetermined electronic-display legends that are limited by their composition and arrangement of pixels or other illuminated forms in a fixed arrangement (such as a blank-out sign indicating a part-time turn prohibition, a blank-out or changeable lane-use sign, or a changeable OPEN/CLOSED sign for a weigh station) should comply with the provisions of the applicable Article for the specific type of sign, provided that the letter forms, symbols, and other legend elements are duplicates of the conventional messages as detailed in the “Standard Highway Signs” publication (see [[:Category:911 General (MUTCD Part 1)#Relation_to_Other_Publications_(MUTCD_Section_1A.05)|EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1A.05)]]). Because such a sign is effectively an illuminated version of a conventional sign, the size of its legend elements, the overall size of the sign, and the placement of the sign should comply with the applicable provisions for the conventional version of the sign.

=={{SpanID|903.12.2}}903.12.2 Applications of Changeable Message Signs (MUTCD Section 2L.02)==

'''Standard. '''CMS shall display only traffic operational, regulatory, warning, and guidance information except as otherwise provided in [[#903.12 Changeable Message Signs (MUTCD Chapter 2L) #903.12|EPG 903.12]] and [[910.3 Dynamic Message Signs (DMS)#910.3.2.12_Congestion_Messages|EPG 910.3]]. Advertising or other messages not related to traffic control shall not be displayed on a CMS or on its supports or other equipment.

'''Option. '''CMS may display traffic safety campaign messages (see [[#903.12.7|EPG 903.12.7]]), transportation-related messages, emergency homeland security messages, and America’s Missing: Broadcast Emergency Response (AMBER) and Blue Alert messages, all as provided for in [[#903.12 Changeable Message Signs (MUTCD Chapter 2L) #903.12|EPG 903.12]] and [[910.3 Dynamic Message Signs (DMS)|910.3]].

Transportation-related messages for the purpose of improving traffic conditions, such as those providing information on alternative means of transportation, electronic toll collection, or carpooling may be displayed to remind or inform drivers of relevant options or opportunities for transportation.

'''Support. '''Messages regarding broader transportation items not related to improving traffic conditions, such as reminders of driver’s license or vehicle registration renewal, vehicle recall information, and vehicle maintenance, do not meet the purpose of a transportation-related message.

Examples of transportation-related messages include “STADIUM EVENT SUNDAY, DELAYS NOON TO 4 PM” and “OZONE ALERT—USE TRANSIT.”

'''Guidance. '''A CMS should not be used to display a transportation-related message if doing so could adversely affect respect for the sign. “CONGESTION AHEAD” or other overly simplistic or vague messages should not be displayed alone. These messages should be supplemented with a message on the location or distance to the congestion or incident, delay and travel time, alternative route, or other similar messages.

CMS should not be used in place of conventional signs for conditions that do not change, except for blank-out type signs used to display regulatory, warning, and guidance information that routinely reoccurs, but only on a part-time basis. Similarly, when only certain elements of a message on a non-changeable sign are subject to change, only those elements of the sign should be in an electronic display.

'''Support. '''The purpose of CMS is to provide real-time traffic regulatory, warning, or guidance messages as follows:
:A. Incident management and route diversion;
:B. Warning of adverse roadway travel conditions due to weather;
:C. Special event applications associated with traffic control or conditions;
:D. Lane, ramp, and roadway control;
:E. Priced or other types of managed lanes;
:F. Travel times;
:G. Warning situations;
:H. Traffic regulations;
:I. Speed control or warning;
:J. Variable destination guidance;
:K. Supporting temporary traffic control; or
:L. Active Traffic Management.

CMS provide significant flexibility and capability in communicating many types of real-time traffic control messages to road users. While their intended purpose is the display of traffic regulatory, warning, or guidance information, other limited uses are also allowed under certain conditions, as provided in EPG 903.12. Their integrity as an official traffic control device rests significantly on their judicious use and proper messaging format and content, regardless of the message type being displayed.

'''Standard. '''MoDOT shall issue and maintain a policy regarding the use and display of all types of messages to be used on their CMS. The policy shall define the types of messages that will be allowed, the priority of messages, the proper syntax of messages, the timing of messages, and other important messaging elements to ensure messages displayed meet the basic principles that govern the design and use of traffic control devices in general (see [[:Category:911 General (MUTCD Part 1)#Purpose_and_Principles_of_Traffic_Control_Devices_(MUTCD_Section_1D.01)|EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1D.01)]]) and traffic signs in particular as provided for in the EPG.

'''Guidance. '''When CMS are used at multiple locations to address a specific situation, the message displays should be consistent along the roadway corridor and adjacent corridors, which might necessitate coordination among different operating agencies.

AMBER and Blue Alerts (see the first option paragraph of this Article), when displayed, should not preempt messages related to traffic or travel conditions. AMBER and Blue Alert messages should be kept as brief as possible and, when possible, direct road users to another source, such as broadcast or highway advisory radio, for detailed information about the alert.

'''Support. '''[[910.3 Dynamic Message Signs (DMS) #903.3.2.15 Child Abduction, Blue Alert and Ozone Alert Messages|EPG 910.3.2.15]] contains procedures for Child Abduction, Blue Alert, and Ozon Alert messages.

'''Standard. '''Types of “alert” messages other than AMBER and Blue alerts that are unrelated to traffic or travel conditions shall not be displayed on CMS.

The format of CMS displays shall not be of a type that could be considered similar to advertising or promotional displays.

'''Support. '''In times of a declared state of emergency, it might be appropriate to display messages related to evacuation, homeland security, or emergency information. Traffic patterns, movement, or other situations might be atypical due to the emergency, necessitating unique messaging not specifically related to traffic conditions.

'''Standard. '''Homeland security and emergency messages shall only be displayed in declared states of emergency when there is an imminent threat to the general population. Generic security or personal safety messages shall not be displayed when there is no context of a declared state of emergency or known imminent national security threat. Homeland security and emergency messages shall not be promotional or advisory in nature, including the message design, layout, or manner of display.

'''Guidance. '''Homeland Security and emergency messages should undergo significant levels of scrutiny prior to being approved for broadcast to ensure accuracy and consistency with emergency conditions. These messages should be designed to convey a clear and simple meaning in a similar format to traffic control messages.

'''Support. '''[[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B)#903.2.20|EPG 903.2.20]] contains information regarding the design of CMS that are used to display variable speed limits that change based on ambient or operational conditions on the variable Speed Limit (R2-1) sign.

[[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C)#903.3.13|EPG 903.3.13]] contains information regarding the design of CMS that are used to display the speed at which approaching vehicles are traveling on the Vehicle Speed Feedback (W13-20 and W13-20aP) sign and plaque.

[[:Category:912 Traffic Control Device Considerations for Automated Vehicles (MUTCD Part 5)#912.2.1|EPG 912 (MUTCD Section 5B.01)]] contains provisions for LEDs used in electronic-display signs to accommodate driving automation systems.

=={{SpanID|903.12.3}}903.12.3 Legibility and Visibility of Changeable Message Signs (MUTCD Section 2L.03)==

'''Support. '''The maximum distance at which a driver can first correctly identify letters and words on a sign is called the legibility distance of the sign. Legibility distance is affected by the characteristics of the sign design and the visual capabilities of drivers. Visual capabilities, and thus legibility distances, vary among drivers.

For the more common types of CMS, the longest measured legibility distances on sunny days occur during mid-day when the sun is overhead. Legibility distances are much shorter when the sun is behind the sign face, when the sun is on the horizon and shining on the sign face, or at night.

Visibility is the characteristic that enables a CMS to be seen. Visibility is associated with the point where the CMS is first detected, whereas legibility is the point where the message on the CMS can be read. Environmental conditions such as rain, fog, and snow impact the visibility of CMS and can reduce the available legibility distances. During these conditions, there might not be enough viewing time for drivers to read the message.

'''Guidance. '''CMS used on roadways with speed limits of 55 mph or higher should be visible from ½ mile under both day and night conditions. The message should be designed to be legible from a minimum distance of 600 feet for nighttime conditions and 800 feet for normal daylight conditions. When environmental conditions that reduce visibility and legibility are present, or when the legibility distances stated in the previous sentences in this paragraph cannot be practically achieved, messages composed of fewer units of information should be used and consideration should be given to limiting the message to a single phase (see [[#903.12.5|EPG 903.12.5]] for information regarding the lengths of messages displayed on CMS).

The electronic display of standardized regulatory and warning signs used individually or as part of the legend for a larger sign should meet the size and legend requirements for those specific signs in [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B)|EPG 903.2]] and [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C)|903.3]].

=={{SpanID|903.12.4}}903.12.4 Design Characteristics of Messages (MUTCD Section 2L.04)==

'''Standard. '''Except as provided in the following paragraph, messages shall not include animation, flashing, dissolving, exploding, scrolling, or other dynamic display elements.

When a portable CMS is used as an arrow board that uses a flashing or sequential display for a lane or shoulder closure, the display and operation shall be considered that of an arrow board and shall comply with the provisions of EPG [[616.12 Other TTC Zone Traffic Control Devices (MUTCD Chapter 6L)#616.12.5|616.12.5]] and [[616.12 Other TTC Zone Traffic Control Devices (MUTCD Chapter 6L)#616.12.6|616.12.6]].

'''Guidance. '''In developing messages for display on CMS, the provisions of [[:Category:911 General (MUTCD Part 1)#Purpose_and_Principles_of_Traffic_Control_Devices_(MUTCD_Section_1D.01)|EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1D.01)]] should be consulted for the principles of an effective traffic control device.

'''Standard.''' All message displays on CMS, whether for traffic operational, regulatory, warning, or guidance information, or for the other allowable message types as defined in EPG 903.12, shall follow the same design and display principles found in the EPG used for other traffic control signs, except as provided elsewhere in EPG 903.12.

'''Guidance. '''Except in the case of a limited-legend CMS (such as a blank-out or a part-time regulatory sign display) that is used in place of a conventional regulatory sign or an activated blank-out warning sign that supplements a conventional warning sign at a separate location, the signs should be used as a supplement to and not as a substitute for conventional signs and markings unless otherwise provided for in the EPG.

'''Support. '''When CMS are overused for messages not directly associated with real-time driving conditions, road users might pay less attention to the sign, thereby limiting their effectiveness as traffic control devices.

'''Guidance. '''Warning Beacons (see [[902.18 Flashing Beacons (MUTCD Chapter 4S)#902.18.3|EPG 902.18.3]]) should not be installed on CMS, rather CMS should be used predominately to display messages that are critical to real-time travel conditions. CMS word messages should be limited to no more than three lines, with no more than 20 characters per line.

The spacing between characters in a word should be between 25 and 40 percent of the letter height. The spacing between words in a message should be between 75 and 100 percent of the letter height. Spacing between the message lines should be between 50 and 75 percent of the letter height. [[#tab903.12.4|Table 903.12.4]] contains information for spacing between characters, words, and lines of text.

<center>
{{SpanID|tab903.12.4}}
{| class="wikitable" align="center" style="max-width:564px; margin-left: 15px;"
|+ '''Table 903.12.4''' Spacing between Message Characters, Words, and Lines of Text
|-
! Height of Letters Used on CMS !! Spacing between Characters in Words !! Horizontal Spacing between Words !! Vertical Spacing between Lines of Text
|-
| 12 || 3 - 5 || 9 - 12 || 6 - 9
|-
| 18 || 4 ½ - 7 || 13 ½ - 18 || 9 - 13 ½
|-
| colspan="4" style="background-color: #ffffff" | Note: All units are in inches
|}
</center>

Except as otherwise provided in the EPG, word messages on CMS should be composed of all upper-case letters. The minimum letter height should be 18 inches for CMS on roadways with speed limits of 45 mph or higher. The minimum letter height should be 12 inches for CMS on roadways with speed limits of less than 45 mph. When a message is composed of two phases and higher informational load (see [[#903.12.5|EPG 903.12.5]]), the letter height should be 18 inches, regardless of the speed limit, to optimize legibility distance and available viewing time.

'''Option. '''CMS used to replicate a conventional sign may use the character size of the conventional sign being replicated.

'''Support. '''Using letter heights of more than 18 inches will not result in proportional increases in legibility distance.

'''Guidance. '''The width-to-height ratio of the sign characters should be between 0.7 and 1.0. The stroke width-to-height ratio should be 0.2.

'''Support. '''The width-to-height ratio is commonly accomplished using a minimum font matrix density of five pixels wide by seven pixels high.

'''Standard. '''CMS shall automatically adjust their brightness under varying light conditions to maintain legibility.

'''Guidance. '''The luminance design of a CMS should meet industry criteria for daytime and nighttime conditions. Luminance contrast design should be between 8 and 12 for all conditions.

'''Support. '''CMS maintenance and replacement practices might need to account for the reduction of LED luminance and luminance contrast that occurs naturally over time and might substantially impact legibility.

'''Guidance. '''Contrast orientation of CMS should always be positive, that is, with luminous characters on a dark or less-luminous background.

'''Support. '''Legibility distances for negative-contrast CMS are likely to be at least 25 percent shorter than those of positive-contrast messages. In addition, the increased light emitted by negative-contrast CMS has not been shown to improve detection distances and might visually overwhelm the darker characters of the sign legend.

'''Standard. '''The colors used for the legends and backgrounds on CMS shall be as provided in [[903.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 2A)#tab903.1.6|Table 903.1.6]].

'''Guidance. '''When displaying color messages use of full background color should be avoided in nighttime conditions. Full background color at night can cause a washout effect of the text or other image being displayed.

'''Standard. '''Except as provided for in the following paragraph, if a black background is used, the color used for the legend on a CMS shall match the background color that would be used on a standard sign for that type of legend as specified in [[903.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 2A)#tab903.1.6|Table 903.1.6]].

'''Option. '''CMS that use only yellow or amber LEDs may display a yellow or amber legend that does not match the background color used on a standard sign for that type of legend as specified in [[903.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 2A)#tab903.1.6|Table 903.1.6]].

'''Standard. '''If a green background is used for a guide message on a CMS or if a blue background is used for a motorist services message on a CMS, the background color shall be provided by green or blue lighted pixels such that the entire CMS would be lighted, not just the white legend.

'''Support. '''Some CMS that employ newer technologies have the capability to display a near duplicate of a standard sign or other sign legend using standard symbols, the Standard Alphabets and letter forms, route shields, and other typical sign legend elements with no apparent loss of resolution or recognition to the road user when compared with a conventional version of the same sign legend. Such signs are of the full-matrix type and can typically display full-color legends. [[#fig903.12.4|Figure 903.12.4]] shows comparative examples of the effects of varying pixel densities on legend form.

'''Guidance. '''If used, the CMS described in the previous paragraph should not display symbols or route shields unless they can do so in the appropriate legend and background color combinations. Where an LED matrix is used to form the changeable legend, signs with pixel spacing greater than 20 millimeters should display only word legends and no symbols or route shields.

For a single-phase message where the Standard Alphabets and other legend elements of standard designs are used, the lettering style, size, and line spacing should comply with the applicable provisions for the type of message displayed as provided elsewhere in the EPG. For two-phase messages, larger legend heights should be used as described previously in this Article because of the need for such messages to be legible at a greater distance. Regardless of the number of phases, the CMS should comply with the legibility and visibility provisions of [[#903.12.3|EPG 903.12.3]].

'''Support. '''[[910.3 Dynamic Message Signs (DMS)#910.3.2.12_Congestion_Messages#910.3.2.8.1_Design_Characteristics_of_DMSs_(MUTCD_2L.04)|EPG 910.3.2.8.1]] includes additional information regarding Design Characteristics of Messages for DMS.

{{SpanID|fig903.12.4}}
[[File:Figure 903.12.4 Example of Capability to display Sign Legends Based on Pixel Pitch.png|thumb|center|600px|alt="The figure compares two changeable message sign (CMS) displays with different pixel densities. The top image shows a high-resolution full-matrix CMS capable of displaying detailed graphics. It presents a green sign with a blue and red Interstate 40 shield followed by the message “EAST CLOSED USE ALT ROUTE” in white text. A note beside the image explains that color full-matrix CMS with pixel pitches of 20 millimeters or less can display legends similar to conventional highway signs, including route shields and symbols.

The bottom image shows a low-resolution CMS with larger pixel spacing. The display reads “I-40 EAST CLOSED USE ALT ROUTE” in amber text on a black background. The characters appear blockier and less detailed. A note beside the image explains that CMS with pixel pitches greater than 20 millimeters, whether color or monochrome, cannot adequately display conventional sign legends and should only be used for monochrome word messages."
|'''Figure 903.12.4''' Example of Capability to display Sign Legends Based on Pixel Pitch Notes:<ol><li>Pixel pitch is the distance from the center of a pixel to the center of an adjacent pixel.</li><li>The pixel pitch is described in Metric units because sign manufacturers only use Metric units.</li></ol>]]

=={{SpanID|903.12.5}}903.12.5 Message Length and Units of Information (MUTCD Section 2L.05)==

'''Guidance. '''The maximum length of a message should be dictated by the number of units of information contained in the message, in addition to the size of the CMS. A unit of information, which is a single answer to a single question that a driver can use to make a decision, should not be more than four words.

<center>
{{SpanID|tab903.12.5}}
{| class="wikitable" align="center" style="text-align: center; margin-left: 15px;"
|-
|+ '''Table 903.12.5''' Example of Units of Information
|-
! Question !! Answer !! Number of Information Units
|-
| style="text-align: left" | What happened? || MAJOR CRASH || 1
|-
| style="text-align: left" | Where? || AT EXIT 12 || 1
|-
| style="text-align: left" | Who is the advisory for? || Drivers heading TO NEW YORK || 1
|-
| style="text-align: left" | What is Advised? || USE ROUTE 46 || 1
|-
| colspan="3" style="text-align: left; background-color: #ffffff;min-width: 400px;" | Note: the following is an example of a two-phase message that could be developed from the four information units shown in this table: 
<div style="text-align: center;">[[File:UnitsofInformationPhase1.png|center|200px|alt="Major Crash at Exit 12", Phase 1]]   [[File:UnitsofInformationPhase2.png|center|200px|alt="Use Route 46 to New York", Phase 2]]</div>
|}
</center>

'''Support'''. In order to illustrate the concept of units of information, [[#tab903.12.5|Table 903.12.5]] shows an example message that is comprised of four units of information.

The maximum allowable number of units of information in a CMS message is based on the principles described in this Article, the current highway operating speed, the legibility characteristics of the CMS, and the lighting conditions.

'''Standard. '''Each message shall consist of no more than two phases. A phase shall consist of no more than three lines of text. Each phase shall be understood by itself, and the meaning of the entire message shall be the same, regardless of the sequence in which the phases are read. Each line of legend shall be centered on the sign. If more than one CMS is visible to road users, then only one sign shall display a sequential message at any given time.

'''Option. '''A legend on a CMS that replicates a legend on a conventional sign that would not normally be center justified may be left justified or right justified as appropriate, such as a travel time display.

'''Standard. '''Abbreviations displayed on CMS shall comply with the provisions of [[:Category:911 General (MUTCD Part 1)#Abbreviations_Used_on_Traffic_Control_Devices_(MUTCD_Section_1D.08)|EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1D.08)]].

'''Guidance. '''When designing and displaying messages on CMS, the following principles should be used:
:A. The minimum time that an individual phase is displayed should be based on 1 second per word or 2 seconds per unit of information, whichever produces a lesser value. The display time for a phase should never be less than 2 seconds.
:B. The maximum cycle time of a two-phase message should be 8 seconds.
:C. The duration between the display of two phases should not exceed 0.3 seconds.
:D. No more than three units of information should be displayed in a message phase.
:E. No more than four units of information should be in a message when the traffic operating speeds are 35 mph or more.
:F. No more than five units of information should be in a message when the traffic operating speeds are less than 35 mph.
:G. Only one unit of information should appear on each line of the CMS.

'''Support. '''[[#tab903.12.5|Table 903.12.5]] provides an example of the number of units of information in a message.

'''Option. '''A unit of information consisting of more than one word may be displayed on more than one line. An additional CMS at a downstream location may be used for the purpose of allowing the entire message to be read twice.

If more than two phases would be needed to display the necessary information, additional CMS may be used to display this information as a series of two distinct, independent messages with a maximum of two phases at each location, in accordance with the provisions of the first Standard paragraph of [[#903.12.5|EPG 903.12.5]].

'''Support. '''[[#fig903.12.5.1|Figures 913.12.5.1]] and [[#fig903.12.5.2|903.12.5.2]] provide examples of message construction for CMS. Each example shows the message content, layout, and phasing for a potential message and an improved message. The improved message for each example has been optimized for recognition, comprehension, and effectiveness.

See [[910.3 Dynamic Message Signs (DMS)#910.3.2.12_Congestion_Messages#910.3.2.8.1_Design_Characteristics_of_DMSs_(MUTCD_2L.04)|EPG 910.3.2.8.1]] for additional information regarding Message Length and Units of Information for DMS.

{{SpanID|fig903.12.5.1}}
[[File:Figure 903.12.5.1 Examples of Message Construction for CMS.png|thumb|center|800px|alt="The figure is a table titled “Examples of Potential and Improved CMS Messages,” showing nine examples of changeable message sign (CMS) messages with three columns: Potential Message, Improved Message, and Comments. Each row presents Phase 1 and Phase 2 messages, along with commentary explaining why the improved version is preferred.
Example 1: Potential messages “EXIT 10” and “CLOSED USE EXIT 12” are improved to “EXIT 10 CLOSED” and “USE EXIT 12.” Comments note this is a diversionary message and each phase should stand alone.
Example 2: “ROADWORK AHEAD” and “CAUTION CAUTION CAUTION” are improved to “ROAD WORK AHEAD” and “FINES DOUBLE.” Comments explain the improved version provides clearer actionable information.
Example 3: “RIGHT LANE CLOSED” and “1 MILE” become “RIGHT LANE CLOSED 1 MILE.” Comments state the improved single-phase message reduces driver reading time.
Example 4: “RT LN CLSD 1 MI” becomes “RIGHT LANE CLOSED 1 MILE,” noting that abbreviations should not be used when the sign can display full words.
Example 5: “9TH AVENUE SOUTHWEST KEEP RIGHT” becomes “9TH AVE SW KEEP RIGHT.” Comments say standard street abbreviations improve recognition.
Example 6: “EXPWY CONGESTED USE 101 FOR AIRPORT” becomes “US 19 CONGESTED” and “AIRPORT USE EXIT 101.” Comments explain unfamiliar expressway numbers reduce clarity and that diversion instructions should be simplified.
Example 7: “TRAVEL TIME TO I-89 13 MINUTES” becomes “I-89 JCT 12 MILES 13 MINS.” Comments note distance and time should appear together, and repeating legends across phases reduces comprehension.
Example 8: “SEAT BELTS SAVE LIVES” is improved to “STATE LAW FASTEN SEAT BELTS,” clarifying the regulatory requirement. Comments state slogan messages do not convey legal meaning.
Example 9: “DON’T TEXT JUST DRIVE” and “IT CAN WAIT” become “NO HAND-HELD PHONE BY DRIVER” and “$250 FINE AND POINTS.” Comments state that slogan messages do not convey enforceable regulations and Phase 2 may be omitted.
Each row includes corresponding commentary explaining message clarity, abbreviation rules, safety communication, or regulatory requirements. The table emphasizes improved CMS message structure for readability, consistency, and compliance." |'''Figure 903.12.5.1''' Examples of Message Construction for CMS *Examples shown are for single-color CMS with pixel spacing greater than 20 mm and use all upper-case lettering. Multi-color, fullmatrix CMS with pixel spacing of 20 mm or less should use upper- and lower-case lettering where appropriate and proper legend and background colors.]]

{{SpanID|fig903.12.5.2}}
[[File:Figure 903.12.5.2 Examples of Message Construction for CMS.png|thumb|center|800px|alt="The figure shows a table with eight examples of potential and improved changeable message sign (CMS) messages. The table contains columns for Example number, Phase, Potential Message, Improved Message, and Comments. Each example lists Phase 1 and, if applicable, Phase 2 messages with commentary explaining why the improved message is preferred.
Example 1: “EXIT 10” and “CLOSED USE EXIT 12” are improved to “EXIT 10 CLOSED” and “USE EXIT 12.” Comments note each phase should convey a complete thought.
Example 2: “ROADWORK AHEAD” and “CAUTION CAUTION CAUTION” are improved to “ROAD WORK AHEAD” and “FINES DOUBLE,” with comments stating that caution messages are too vague and that Phase 2 can be eliminated.
Example 3: “RIGHT LANE CLOSED” and “1 MILE” become “RIGHT LN CLOSED 1 MILE.” Comments explain a single-phase message is more effective.
Example 4: “RT LN CLSD 1 MI” becomes “RIGHT LN CLOSED 1 MILE.” Comments state uncommon abbreviations should not be used when full wording fits the sign.
Example 5: “9TH AVENUE SW” becomes “9 AVE SW KEEP RIGHT,” with comments noting that standard street abbreviations improve recognition.
Example 6: “ROAD WORK NEXT 3 MILES” is kept as a single-phase message, with comments explaining that condensing ROAD and WORK into one word is unnecessary because the sign can accommodate the full message.
Example 7: “SEAT BELTS SAVE LIVES” becomes “FASTEN SEAT BELTS” with “STATE LAW” as Phase 2. Comments state slogan messages do not convey legal requirements.
Example 8: “DON’T TEXT JUST DRIVE” becomes “NO HAND-HELD PHONE BY DRIVER.” Comments explain that slogan messages do not convey enforceable regulations and that Phase 2 can be removed.
The table emphasizes clarity, abbreviation standards, and proper structuring of CMS messages for road users."
|'''Figure 903.12.5.2''' Examples of Message Construction for CMS *Examples shown are for a portable CMS where the display width is generally limited to 8 characters per line of legend.]]

=={{SpanID|903.12.6}}903.12.6 Travel Time Messages (MUTCD Section 2L.06)==

'''Support. '''Travel times provide road users useful information about the level of congestion on segments of highways where motorists experience frequent incidents that slow traffic. Travel times are only helpful to the road user if they have a general understanding of the length of the road segment the travel time is related to so that they can compare that to the time it takes them to travel a similar distance on a highway without congestion. However, travel time messages require road users to read and process a significant amount of information and careful consideration is needed to ensure the overall message is not overloading the motorist.

'''Guidance. '''Travel times should be tied to the distance to a particular destination or junction so that road users can estimate the level of congestion based on the time to travel that distance. When travel times are displayed on CMS, such as during peak traffic conditions, the message should comply with the provisions of Sections [[903.5 Guide Signs - Freeways and Expressways (MUTCD Chapter 2E) #903.5.47|EPG 903.5.47]] and [[903.5 Guide Signs - Freeways and Expressways (MUTCD Chapter 2E) #903.5.48|903.5.48]]. If both a travel time and a distance are displayed, the sign should display only one destination. A distance displayed as part of a travel time message should be rounded to the nearest whole mile.

'''Option. '''When comparative travel time displays are used providing travel times on different routes to one destination, distances to that destination may be eliminated.

A reference-location-based exit number (see [[903.5 Guide Signs - Freeways and Expressways (MUTCD Chapter 2E)#903.5.22|EPG 903.5.22]]) may be displayed in lieu of a destination name or junction thereby providing the necessary distance information to the road user. If reference-location-based exit numbers are displayed, then up to two travel times may be displayed provided that the distance to the exit is not also displayed.

'''Support. '''[[910.3 Dynamic Message Signs (DMS)#910.3.2.12_Congestion_Messages#910.3.2.12_Congestion_Messages#910.3.2.12_Congestion_Messages|EPG 910.3.2.12]] includes information regarding Congestion Messages for DMS.

=={{SpanID|903.12.7}}903.12.7 Traffic Safety Campaign Messages (MUTCD Section 2L.07)==

'''Support. '''An allowable ancillary use of CMS is the display of traffic safety messages in conjunction with a traffic safety campaign that includes other forms of media as the primary communication and education mechanism.

'''Standard. '''Traffic control messages shall have priority over traffic safety campaign messages.

'''Guidance. '''When a CMS is used to display a traffic safety campaign, the message should be simple, direct, brief, legible, and clear (see [[:Category:911 General (MUTCD Part 1)#Purpose_and_Principles_of_Traffic_Control_Devices_(MUTCD_Section_1D.01)|EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1D.01)]]). Traffic safety campaign messages should be relevant to the road user on the roadway on which the message is displayed. For example, messages regarding school bus stop safety should not be displayed on freeways where school bus stops are not found.

A CMS should not be used to display a traffic safety campaign message if doing so could adversely affect respect for the sign. Messages with obscure or secondary meanings should not be used as they might be misunderstood or understood only by a limited segment of road users and require greater time to process and understand. Similarly, slogan-type messages and the display of statistical information should not be used.

The broad traffic safety campaign marketing message should be appropriately shortened or otherwise modified to comply with the provisions of [[#903.12.5|EPG 903.12.5]] when a traffic safety campaign message is displayed on a CMS.

Traffic safety campaign messages should emphasize the applicable regulation or warning and should reference any penalties associated with violations of the regulation. Traffic safety campaigns using CMS should include coordinated enforcement efforts where penalties or enforcement type warnings are part of the message displayed on the CMS.

Traffic safety campaign messages should not be displayed on CMS unless they are part of an active, coordinated safety campaign that uses other media forms as the primary means of outreach. For consistency on a national level, traffic safety campaigns should be coordinated with those on the National Highway Transportation Safety Administration’s annual communications calendar or similarly planned sate campaigns.

'''Support. '''Examples of traffic safety campaign messages include “UNBUCKLED SEAT BELTS FINE + POINTS” and “IMPAIRED DRIVERS LOSE LICENSE + JAIL.”

[[910.3 Dynamic Message Signs (DMS)#910.3.2.12_Congestion_Messages#910.3.2.16_Driver_Safety_Campaigns_(MUTCD_2L.02)|EPG 910.3.2.16]] includes additional information related to Driver Safety Campaigns.

=={{SpanID|903.12.8}}903.12.8 Permanently-Located Changeable Message Signs (MUTCD Section 2L.08)==
'''Support. '''See [[910.3 Dynamic Message Signs (DMS)#910.3.2.6|EPG 910.3.2.6]] for information regarding Permanently-Located Changeable Message Signs and Dynamic Message Signs (DMS).

File:UnitsofInformationPhase2.png

2025-12-10T22:48:48Z

HogsettC: File uploaded with MsUpload

File uploaded with MsUpload

File:UnitsofInformationPhase1.png

2025-12-10T22:48:47Z

HogsettC: File uploaded with MsUpload

File uploaded with MsUpload

903.12 Changeable Message Signs (MUTCD Chapter 2L)

2025-12-10T13:54:17Z

HogsettC: /* {{SpanID|903.12.5}}903.12.5 Message Length and Units of Information (MUTCD Section 2L.05) */

[[Category:903 Highway Signing (MUTCD Part 2)|903.12]]
=={{SpanID|903.12.1}}903.12.1 Description of Changeable Message Signs (MUTCD Section 2L.01)==

'''Support. '''A changeable message sign (CMS) is a traffic control device that is capable of displaying one or more alternative messages. Some CMS have a blank mode when no message is displayed, while others display multiple messages with only one of the messages displayed at a time (such as OPEN/CLOSED signs at weigh stations).

Dynamic message signs (DMS) are a type of CMS which are stationary traffic control devices capable of displaying one or more alternative messages that provide travelers with real-time, traffic-related variable messages. DMS are used to warn, regulate, route and manage traffic.

The provisions in EPG 903.12 apply to both permanent and portable changeable message signs with electronic displays or the electronic display portion of an otherwise conventional static sign. Additional provisions that only apply to portable changeable message signs (PCMS) can be found in [[616.12 Other TTC Zone Traffic Control Devices (MUTCD Chapter 6L)#616.12.5|EPG 616.12.5]]. Additional MoDOT provisions that apply to permanently-located DMS can be found in [[910.3 Dynamic Message Signs (DMS)#910.3|EPG 910.3]].

The CMS is a traffic control device at all times regardless of the type of message being displayed. Accordingly, the limitations on design, format, and manner of display of a message conveyed on a conventional sign apply to CMS regardless of the type of message being displayed at any given time. Some of the general provisions regarding traffic control devices are reiterated in EPG 903.12. However, EPG 903.12 is not an independent or stand-alone reference for CMS. Users of CMS are expected to consult the other articles in the EPG for criteria on how to develop effective messages that comply with the EPG and that meet the expectancy and limitations of the road user. In this regard, the engineering processes applied to decisions about whether to use a particular sign, for example, are no different for the decisions about the type and content of the message under consideration for display on a CMS. The other limited-use messages allowed on CMS as provided for in EPG 903.12 likewise fall under the same MUTCD provisions as the primary-use traffic operation regulatory, warning, and guidance messages except as stated otherwise in EPG 903.12.

CMS messaging can be subject to habituation, a phenomenon by which repeated exposure to a stimulus results in diminished response. CMS habituation can occur through repeated exposure to messages, especially those messages that might not be perceived as having relevance to the road user, resulting in diminished responsiveness of the road user to that message. Because messages can be changed or extinguished, the effectiveness of CMS is tied more to the messages displayed thereon, the frequency of displayed messages, and the relevance to the road user, rather than to the installation of the signs themselves.

'''Guidance. '''Changeable message signs should be used judiciously to avoid habituation and preserve their effectiveness during the display of real-time messages about traffic conditions or traffic advisories.

'''Standard. '''No items other than inventory or maintenance-related information (see [[903.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 2A)#903.1.4|EPG 903.1.4]]) shall be displayed on the front or back of a CMS or portable CMS. Names or logos of the manufacturer, brand, or model shall not be displayed on a CMS or portable CMS, either in the message display itself or on the exterior housing.

'''Guidance. '''Blank-out signs that display only single-phase, predetermined electronic-display legends that are limited by their composition and arrangement of pixels or other illuminated forms in a fixed arrangement (such as a blank-out sign indicating a part-time turn prohibition, a blank-out or changeable lane-use sign, or a changeable OPEN/CLOSED sign for a weigh station) should comply with the provisions of the applicable Article for the specific type of sign, provided that the letter forms, symbols, and other legend elements are duplicates of the conventional messages as detailed in the “Standard Highway Signs” publication (see [[:Category:911 General (MUTCD Part 1)#Relation_to_Other_Publications_(MUTCD_Section_1A.05)|EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1A.05)]]). Because such a sign is effectively an illuminated version of a conventional sign, the size of its legend elements, the overall size of the sign, and the placement of the sign should comply with the applicable provisions for the conventional version of the sign.

=={{SpanID|903.12.2}}903.12.2 Applications of Changeable Message Signs (MUTCD Section 2L.02)==

'''Standard. '''CMS shall display only traffic operational, regulatory, warning, and guidance information except as otherwise provided in [[#903.12 Changeable Message Signs (MUTCD Chapter 2L) #903.12|EPG 903.12]] and [[910.3 Dynamic Message Signs (DMS)#910.3.2.12_Congestion_Messages|EPG 910.3]]. Advertising or other messages not related to traffic control shall not be displayed on a CMS or on its supports or other equipment.

'''Option. '''CMS may display traffic safety campaign messages (see [[#903.12.7|EPG 903.12.7]]), transportation-related messages, emergency homeland security messages, and America’s Missing: Broadcast Emergency Response (AMBER) and Blue Alert messages, all as provided for in [[#903.12 Changeable Message Signs (MUTCD Chapter 2L) #903.12|EPG 903.12]] and [[910.3 Dynamic Message Signs (DMS)|910.3]].

Transportation-related messages for the purpose of improving traffic conditions, such as those providing information on alternative means of transportation, electronic toll collection, or carpooling may be displayed to remind or inform drivers of relevant options or opportunities for transportation.

'''Support. '''Messages regarding broader transportation items not related to improving traffic conditions, such as reminders of driver’s license or vehicle registration renewal, vehicle recall information, and vehicle maintenance, do not meet the purpose of a transportation-related message.

Examples of transportation-related messages include “STADIUM EVENT SUNDAY, DELAYS NOON TO 4 PM” and “OZONE ALERT—USE TRANSIT.”

'''Guidance. '''A CMS should not be used to display a transportation-related message if doing so could adversely affect respect for the sign. “CONGESTION AHEAD” or other overly simplistic or vague messages should not be displayed alone. These messages should be supplemented with a message on the location or distance to the congestion or incident, delay and travel time, alternative route, or other similar messages.

CMS should not be used in place of conventional signs for conditions that do not change, except for blank-out type signs used to display regulatory, warning, and guidance information that routinely reoccurs, but only on a part-time basis. Similarly, when only certain elements of a message on a non-changeable sign are subject to change, only those elements of the sign should be in an electronic display.

'''Support. '''The purpose of CMS is to provide real-time traffic regulatory, warning, or guidance messages as follows:
:A. Incident management and route diversion;
:B. Warning of adverse roadway travel conditions due to weather;
:C. Special event applications associated with traffic control or conditions;
:D. Lane, ramp, and roadway control;
:E. Priced or other types of managed lanes;
:F. Travel times;
:G. Warning situations;
:H. Traffic regulations;
:I. Speed control or warning;
:J. Variable destination guidance;
:K. Supporting temporary traffic control; or
:L. Active Traffic Management.

CMS provide significant flexibility and capability in communicating many types of real-time traffic control messages to road users. While their intended purpose is the display of traffic regulatory, warning, or guidance information, other limited uses are also allowed under certain conditions, as provided in EPG 903.12. Their integrity as an official traffic control device rests significantly on their judicious use and proper messaging format and content, regardless of the message type being displayed.

'''Standard. '''MoDOT shall issue and maintain a policy regarding the use and display of all types of messages to be used on their CMS. The policy shall define the types of messages that will be allowed, the priority of messages, the proper syntax of messages, the timing of messages, and other important messaging elements to ensure messages displayed meet the basic principles that govern the design and use of traffic control devices in general (see [[:Category:911 General (MUTCD Part 1)#Purpose_and_Principles_of_Traffic_Control_Devices_(MUTCD_Section_1D.01)|EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1D.01)]]) and traffic signs in particular as provided for in the EPG.

'''Guidance. '''When CMS are used at multiple locations to address a specific situation, the message displays should be consistent along the roadway corridor and adjacent corridors, which might necessitate coordination among different operating agencies.

AMBER and Blue Alerts (see the first option paragraph of this Article), when displayed, should not preempt messages related to traffic or travel conditions. AMBER and Blue Alert messages should be kept as brief as possible and, when possible, direct road users to another source, such as broadcast or highway advisory radio, for detailed information about the alert.

'''Support. '''[[910.3 Dynamic Message Signs (DMS) #903.3.2.15 Child Abduction, Blue Alert and Ozone Alert Messages|EPG 910.3.2.15]] contains procedures for Child Abduction, Blue Alert, and Ozon Alert messages.

'''Standard. '''Types of “alert” messages other than AMBER and Blue alerts that are unrelated to traffic or travel conditions shall not be displayed on CMS.

The format of CMS displays shall not be of a type that could be considered similar to advertising or promotional displays.

'''Support. '''In times of a declared state of emergency, it might be appropriate to display messages related to evacuation, homeland security, or emergency information. Traffic patterns, movement, or other situations might be atypical due to the emergency, necessitating unique messaging not specifically related to traffic conditions.

'''Standard. '''Homeland security and emergency messages shall only be displayed in declared states of emergency when there is an imminent threat to the general population. Generic security or personal safety messages shall not be displayed when there is no context of a declared state of emergency or known imminent national security threat. Homeland security and emergency messages shall not be promotional or advisory in nature, including the message design, layout, or manner of display.

'''Guidance. '''Homeland Security and emergency messages should undergo significant levels of scrutiny prior to being approved for broadcast to ensure accuracy and consistency with emergency conditions. These messages should be designed to convey a clear and simple meaning in a similar format to traffic control messages.

'''Support. '''[[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B)#903.2.20|EPG 903.2.20]] contains information regarding the design of CMS that are used to display variable speed limits that change based on ambient or operational conditions on the variable Speed Limit (R2-1) sign.

[[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C)#903.3.13|EPG 903.3.13]] contains information regarding the design of CMS that are used to display the speed at which approaching vehicles are traveling on the Vehicle Speed Feedback (W13-20 and W13-20aP) sign and plaque.

[[:Category:912 Traffic Control Device Considerations for Automated Vehicles (MUTCD Part 5)#912.2.1|EPG 912 (MUTCD Section 5B.01)]] contains provisions for LEDs used in electronic-display signs to accommodate driving automation systems.

=={{SpanID|903.12.3}}903.12.3 Legibility and Visibility of Changeable Message Signs (MUTCD Section 2L.03)==

'''Support. '''The maximum distance at which a driver can first correctly identify letters and words on a sign is called the legibility distance of the sign. Legibility distance is affected by the characteristics of the sign design and the visual capabilities of drivers. Visual capabilities, and thus legibility distances, vary among drivers.

For the more common types of CMS, the longest measured legibility distances on sunny days occur during mid-day when the sun is overhead. Legibility distances are much shorter when the sun is behind the sign face, when the sun is on the horizon and shining on the sign face, or at night.

Visibility is the characteristic that enables a CMS to be seen. Visibility is associated with the point where the CMS is first detected, whereas legibility is the point where the message on the CMS can be read. Environmental conditions such as rain, fog, and snow impact the visibility of CMS and can reduce the available legibility distances. During these conditions, there might not be enough viewing time for drivers to read the message.

'''Guidance. '''CMS used on roadways with speed limits of 55 mph or higher should be visible from ½ mile under both day and night conditions. The message should be designed to be legible from a minimum distance of 600 feet for nighttime conditions and 800 feet for normal daylight conditions. When environmental conditions that reduce visibility and legibility are present, or when the legibility distances stated in the previous sentences in this paragraph cannot be practically achieved, messages composed of fewer units of information should be used and consideration should be given to limiting the message to a single phase (see [[#903.12.5|EPG 903.12.5]] for information regarding the lengths of messages displayed on CMS).

The electronic display of standardized regulatory and warning signs used individually or as part of the legend for a larger sign should meet the size and legend requirements for those specific signs in [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B)|EPG 903.2]] and [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C)|903.3]].

=={{SpanID|903.12.4}}903.12.4 Design Characteristics of Messages (MUTCD Section 2L.04)==

'''Standard. '''Except as provided in the following paragraph, messages shall not include animation, flashing, dissolving, exploding, scrolling, or other dynamic display elements.

When a portable CMS is used as an arrow board that uses a flashing or sequential display for a lane or shoulder closure, the display and operation shall be considered that of an arrow board and shall comply with the provisions of EPG [[616.12 Other TTC Zone Traffic Control Devices (MUTCD Chapter 6L)#616.12.5|616.12.5]] and [[616.12 Other TTC Zone Traffic Control Devices (MUTCD Chapter 6L)#616.12.6|616.12.6]].

'''Guidance. '''In developing messages for display on CMS, the provisions of [[:Category:911 General (MUTCD Part 1)#Purpose_and_Principles_of_Traffic_Control_Devices_(MUTCD_Section_1D.01)|EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1D.01)]] should be consulted for the principles of an effective traffic control device.

'''Standard.''' All message displays on CMS, whether for traffic operational, regulatory, warning, or guidance information, or for the other allowable message types as defined in EPG 903.12, shall follow the same design and display principles found in the EPG used for other traffic control signs, except as provided elsewhere in EPG 903.12.

'''Guidance. '''Except in the case of a limited-legend CMS (such as a blank-out or a part-time regulatory sign display) that is used in place of a conventional regulatory sign or an activated blank-out warning sign that supplements a conventional warning sign at a separate location, the signs should be used as a supplement to and not as a substitute for conventional signs and markings unless otherwise provided for in the EPG.

'''Support. '''When CMS are overused for messages not directly associated with real-time driving conditions, road users might pay less attention to the sign, thereby limiting their effectiveness as traffic control devices.

'''Guidance. '''Warning Beacons (see [[902.18 Flashing Beacons (MUTCD Chapter 4S)#902.18.3|EPG 902.18.3]]) should not be installed on CMS, rather CMS should be used predominately to display messages that are critical to real-time travel conditions. CMS word messages should be limited to no more than three lines, with no more than 20 characters per line.

The spacing between characters in a word should be between 25 and 40 percent of the letter height. The spacing between words in a message should be between 75 and 100 percent of the letter height. Spacing between the message lines should be between 50 and 75 percent of the letter height. [[#tab903.12.4|Table 903.12.4]] contains information for spacing between characters, words, and lines of text.

<center>
{{SpanID|tab903.12.4}}
{| class="wikitable" align="center" style="max-width:564px; margin-left: 15px;"
|+ '''Table 903.12.4''' Spacing between Message Characters, Words, and Lines of Text
|-
! Height of Letters Used on CMS !! Spacing between Characters in Words !! Horizontal Spacing between Words !! Vertical Spacing between Lines of Text
|-
| 12 || 3 - 5 || 9 - 12 || 6 - 9
|-
| 18 || 4 ½ - 7 || 13 ½ - 18 || 9 - 13 ½
|-
| colspan="4" style="background-color: #ffffff" | Note: All units are in inches
|}
</center>

Except as otherwise provided in the EPG, word messages on CMS should be composed of all upper-case letters. The minimum letter height should be 18 inches for CMS on roadways with speed limits of 45 mph or higher. The minimum letter height should be 12 inches for CMS on roadways with speed limits of less than 45 mph. When a message is composed of two phases and higher informational load (see [[#903.12.5|EPG 903.12.5]]), the letter height should be 18 inches, regardless of the speed limit, to optimize legibility distance and available viewing time.

'''Option. '''CMS used to replicate a conventional sign may use the character size of the conventional sign being replicated.

'''Support. '''Using letter heights of more than 18 inches will not result in proportional increases in legibility distance.

'''Guidance. '''The width-to-height ratio of the sign characters should be between 0.7 and 1.0. The stroke width-to-height ratio should be 0.2.

'''Support. '''The width-to-height ratio is commonly accomplished using a minimum font matrix density of five pixels wide by seven pixels high.

'''Standard. '''CMS shall automatically adjust their brightness under varying light conditions to maintain legibility.

'''Guidance. '''The luminance design of a CMS should meet industry criteria for daytime and nighttime conditions. Luminance contrast design should be between 8 and 12 for all conditions.

'''Support. '''CMS maintenance and replacement practices might need to account for the reduction of LED luminance and luminance contrast that occurs naturally over time and might substantially impact legibility.

'''Guidance. '''Contrast orientation of CMS should always be positive, that is, with luminous characters on a dark or less-luminous background.

'''Support. '''Legibility distances for negative-contrast CMS are likely to be at least 25 percent shorter than those of positive-contrast messages. In addition, the increased light emitted by negative-contrast CMS has not been shown to improve detection distances and might visually overwhelm the darker characters of the sign legend.

'''Standard. '''The colors used for the legends and backgrounds on CMS shall be as provided in [[903.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 2A)#tab903.1.6|Table 903.1.6]].

'''Guidance. '''When displaying color messages use of full background color should be avoided in nighttime conditions. Full background color at night can cause a washout effect of the text or other image being displayed.

'''Standard. '''Except as provided for in the following paragraph, if a black background is used, the color used for the legend on a CMS shall match the background color that would be used on a standard sign for that type of legend as specified in [[903.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 2A)#tab903.1.6|Table 903.1.6]].

'''Option. '''CMS that use only yellow or amber LEDs may display a yellow or amber legend that does not match the background color used on a standard sign for that type of legend as specified in [[903.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 2A)#tab903.1.6|Table 903.1.6]].

'''Standard. '''If a green background is used for a guide message on a CMS or if a blue background is used for a motorist services message on a CMS, the background color shall be provided by green or blue lighted pixels such that the entire CMS would be lighted, not just the white legend.

'''Support. '''Some CMS that employ newer technologies have the capability to display a near duplicate of a standard sign or other sign legend using standard symbols, the Standard Alphabets and letter forms, route shields, and other typical sign legend elements with no apparent loss of resolution or recognition to the road user when compared with a conventional version of the same sign legend. Such signs are of the full-matrix type and can typically display full-color legends. [[#fig903.12.4|Figure 903.12.4]] shows comparative examples of the effects of varying pixel densities on legend form.

'''Guidance. '''If used, the CMS described in the previous paragraph should not display symbols or route shields unless they can do so in the appropriate legend and background color combinations. Where an LED matrix is used to form the changeable legend, signs with pixel spacing greater than 20 millimeters should display only word legends and no symbols or route shields.

For a single-phase message where the Standard Alphabets and other legend elements of standard designs are used, the lettering style, size, and line spacing should comply with the applicable provisions for the type of message displayed as provided elsewhere in the EPG. For two-phase messages, larger legend heights should be used as described previously in this Article because of the need for such messages to be legible at a greater distance. Regardless of the number of phases, the CMS should comply with the legibility and visibility provisions of [[#903.12.3|EPG 903.12.3]].

'''Support. '''[[910.3 Dynamic Message Signs (DMS)#910.3.2.12_Congestion_Messages#910.3.2.8.1_Design_Characteristics_of_DMSs_(MUTCD_2L.04)|EPG 910.3.2.8.1]] includes additional information regarding Design Characteristics of Messages for DMS.

{{SpanID|fig903.12.4}}
[[File:Figure 903.12.4 Example of Capability to display Sign Legends Based on Pixel Pitch.png|thumb|center|600px|alt="The figure compares two changeable message sign (CMS) displays with different pixel densities. The top image shows a high-resolution full-matrix CMS capable of displaying detailed graphics. It presents a green sign with a blue and red Interstate 40 shield followed by the message “EAST CLOSED USE ALT ROUTE” in white text. A note beside the image explains that color full-matrix CMS with pixel pitches of 20 millimeters or less can display legends similar to conventional highway signs, including route shields and symbols.

The bottom image shows a low-resolution CMS with larger pixel spacing. The display reads “I-40 EAST CLOSED USE ALT ROUTE” in amber text on a black background. The characters appear blockier and less detailed. A note beside the image explains that CMS with pixel pitches greater than 20 millimeters, whether color or monochrome, cannot adequately display conventional sign legends and should only be used for monochrome word messages."
|'''Figure 903.12.4''' Example of Capability to display Sign Legends Based on Pixel Pitch Notes:<ol><li>Pixel pitch is the distance from the center of a pixel to the center of an adjacent pixel.</li><li>The pixel pitch is described in Metric units because sign manufacturers only use Metric units.</li></ol>]]

=={{SpanID|903.12.5}}903.12.5 Message Length and Units of Information (MUTCD Section 2L.05)==

'''Guidance. '''The maximum length of a message should be dictated by the number of units of information contained in the message, in addition to the size of the CMS. A unit of information, which is a single answer to a single question that a driver can use to make a decision, should not be more than four words.

<center>
{{SpanID|tab903.12.5}}
{| class="wikitable" align="center" style="text-align: center; margin-left: 15px;"
|-
|+ '''Table 903.12.5''' Example of Units of Information
|-
! Question !! Answer !! Number of Information Units
|-
| style="text-align: left" | What happened? || MAJOR CRASH || 1
|-
| style="text-align: left" | Where? || AT EXIT 12 || 1
|-
| style="text-align: left" | Who is the advisory for? || Drivers heading TO NEW YORK || 1
|-
| style="text-align: left" | What is Advised? || USE ROUTE 46 || 1
|-
| colspan="3" style="text-align: left; background-color: #ffffff;min-width: 400px;" | Note: the following is an example of a two-phase message that could be developed from the four information units shown in this table: 
<div style="text-align: center;">[[File:UnitsOfInformation_Phase1.png|center|alt="Major Crash at Exit 12", Phase 1]]   [[File:UnitsOfInformation_Phase2.png|center|alt="Use Route 46 to New York", Phase 2]]</div>
|}
</center>

'''Support'''. In order to illustrate the concept of units of information, [[#tab903.12.5|Table 903.12.5]] shows an example message that is comprised of four units of information.

The maximum allowable number of units of information in a CMS message is based on the principles described in this Article, the current highway operating speed, the legibility characteristics of the CMS, and the lighting conditions.

'''Standard. '''Each message shall consist of no more than two phases. A phase shall consist of no more than three lines of text. Each phase shall be understood by itself, and the meaning of the entire message shall be the same, regardless of the sequence in which the phases are read. Each line of legend shall be centered on the sign. If more than one CMS is visible to road users, then only one sign shall display a sequential message at any given time.

'''Option. '''A legend on a CMS that replicates a legend on a conventional sign that would not normally be center justified may be left justified or right justified as appropriate, such as a travel time display.

'''Standard. '''Abbreviations displayed on CMS shall comply with the provisions of [[:Category:911 General (MUTCD Part 1)#Abbreviations_Used_on_Traffic_Control_Devices_(MUTCD_Section_1D.08)|EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1D.08)]].

'''Guidance. '''When designing and displaying messages on CMS, the following principles should be used:
:A. The minimum time that an individual phase is displayed should be based on 1 second per word or 2 seconds per unit of information, whichever produces a lesser value. The display time for a phase should never be less than 2 seconds.
:B. The maximum cycle time of a two-phase message should be 8 seconds.
:C. The duration between the display of two phases should not exceed 0.3 seconds.
:D. No more than three units of information should be displayed in a message phase.
:E. No more than four units of information should be in a message when the traffic operating speeds are 35 mph or more.
:F. No more than five units of information should be in a message when the traffic operating speeds are less than 35 mph.
:G. Only one unit of information should appear on each line of the CMS.

'''Support. '''[[#tab903.12.5|Table 903.12.5]] provides an example of the number of units of information in a message.

'''Option. '''A unit of information consisting of more than one word may be displayed on more than one line. An additional CMS at a downstream location may be used for the purpose of allowing the entire message to be read twice.

If more than two phases would be needed to display the necessary information, additional CMS may be used to display this information as a series of two distinct, independent messages with a maximum of two phases at each location, in accordance with the provisions of the first Standard paragraph of [[#903.12.5|EPG 903.12.5]].

'''Support. '''[[#fig903.12.5.1|Figures 913.12.5.1]] and [[#fig903.12.5.2|903.12.5.2]] provide examples of message construction for CMS. Each example shows the message content, layout, and phasing for a potential message and an improved message. The improved message for each example has been optimized for recognition, comprehension, and effectiveness.

See [[910.3 Dynamic Message Signs (DMS)#910.3.2.12_Congestion_Messages#910.3.2.8.1_Design_Characteristics_of_DMSs_(MUTCD_2L.04)|EPG 910.3.2.8.1]] for additional information regarding Message Length and Units of Information for DMS.

{{SpanID|fig903.12.5.1}}
[[File:Figure 903.12.5.1 Examples of Message Construction for CMS.png|thumb|center|800px|alt="The figure is a table titled “Examples of Potential and Improved CMS Messages,” showing nine examples of changeable message sign (CMS) messages with three columns: Potential Message, Improved Message, and Comments. Each row presents Phase 1 and Phase 2 messages, along with commentary explaining why the improved version is preferred.
Example 1: Potential messages “EXIT 10” and “CLOSED USE EXIT 12” are improved to “EXIT 10 CLOSED” and “USE EXIT 12.” Comments note this is a diversionary message and each phase should stand alone.
Example 2: “ROADWORK AHEAD” and “CAUTION CAUTION CAUTION” are improved to “ROAD WORK AHEAD” and “FINES DOUBLE.” Comments explain the improved version provides clearer actionable information.
Example 3: “RIGHT LANE CLOSED” and “1 MILE” become “RIGHT LANE CLOSED 1 MILE.” Comments state the improved single-phase message reduces driver reading time.
Example 4: “RT LN CLSD 1 MI” becomes “RIGHT LANE CLOSED 1 MILE,” noting that abbreviations should not be used when the sign can display full words.
Example 5: “9TH AVENUE SOUTHWEST KEEP RIGHT” becomes “9TH AVE SW KEEP RIGHT.” Comments say standard street abbreviations improve recognition.
Example 6: “EXPWY CONGESTED USE 101 FOR AIRPORT” becomes “US 19 CONGESTED” and “AIRPORT USE EXIT 101.” Comments explain unfamiliar expressway numbers reduce clarity and that diversion instructions should be simplified.
Example 7: “TRAVEL TIME TO I-89 13 MINUTES” becomes “I-89 JCT 12 MILES 13 MINS.” Comments note distance and time should appear together, and repeating legends across phases reduces comprehension.
Example 8: “SEAT BELTS SAVE LIVES” is improved to “STATE LAW FASTEN SEAT BELTS,” clarifying the regulatory requirement. Comments state slogan messages do not convey legal meaning.
Example 9: “DON’T TEXT JUST DRIVE” and “IT CAN WAIT” become “NO HAND-HELD PHONE BY DRIVER” and “$250 FINE AND POINTS.” Comments state that slogan messages do not convey enforceable regulations and Phase 2 may be omitted.
Each row includes corresponding commentary explaining message clarity, abbreviation rules, safety communication, or regulatory requirements. The table emphasizes improved CMS message structure for readability, consistency, and compliance." |'''Figure 903.12.5.1''' Examples of Message Construction for CMS *Examples shown are for single-color CMS with pixel spacing greater than 20 mm and use all upper-case lettering. Multi-color, fullmatrix CMS with pixel spacing of 20 mm or less should use upper- and lower-case lettering where appropriate and proper legend and background colors.]]

{{SpanID|fig903.12.5.2}}
[[File:Figure 903.12.5.2 Examples of Message Construction for CMS.png|thumb|center|800px|alt="The figure shows a table with eight examples of potential and improved changeable message sign (CMS) messages. The table contains columns for Example number, Phase, Potential Message, Improved Message, and Comments. Each example lists Phase 1 and, if applicable, Phase 2 messages with commentary explaining why the improved message is preferred.
Example 1: “EXIT 10” and “CLOSED USE EXIT 12” are improved to “EXIT 10 CLOSED” and “USE EXIT 12.” Comments note each phase should convey a complete thought.
Example 2: “ROADWORK AHEAD” and “CAUTION CAUTION CAUTION” are improved to “ROAD WORK AHEAD” and “FINES DOUBLE,” with comments stating that caution messages are too vague and that Phase 2 can be eliminated.
Example 3: “RIGHT LANE CLOSED” and “1 MILE” become “RIGHT LN CLOSED 1 MILE.” Comments explain a single-phase message is more effective.
Example 4: “RT LN CLSD 1 MI” becomes “RIGHT LN CLOSED 1 MILE.” Comments state uncommon abbreviations should not be used when full wording fits the sign.
Example 5: “9TH AVENUE SW” becomes “9 AVE SW KEEP RIGHT,” with comments noting that standard street abbreviations improve recognition.
Example 6: “ROAD WORK NEXT 3 MILES” is kept as a single-phase message, with comments explaining that condensing ROAD and WORK into one word is unnecessary because the sign can accommodate the full message.
Example 7: “SEAT BELTS SAVE LIVES” becomes “FASTEN SEAT BELTS” with “STATE LAW” as Phase 2. Comments state slogan messages do not convey legal requirements.
Example 8: “DON’T TEXT JUST DRIVE” becomes “NO HAND-HELD PHONE BY DRIVER.” Comments explain that slogan messages do not convey enforceable regulations and that Phase 2 can be removed.
The table emphasizes clarity, abbreviation standards, and proper structuring of CMS messages for road users."
|'''Figure 903.12.5.2''' Examples of Message Construction for CMS *Examples shown are for a portable CMS where the display width is generally limited to 8 characters per line of legend.]]

=={{SpanID|903.12.6}}903.12.6 Travel Time Messages (MUTCD Section 2L.06)==

'''Support. '''Travel times provide road users useful information about the level of congestion on segments of highways where motorists experience frequent incidents that slow traffic. Travel times are only helpful to the road user if they have a general understanding of the length of the road segment the travel time is related to so that they can compare that to the time it takes them to travel a similar distance on a highway without congestion. However, travel time messages require road users to read and process a significant amount of information and careful consideration is needed to ensure the overall message is not overloading the motorist.

'''Guidance. '''Travel times should be tied to the distance to a particular destination or junction so that road users can estimate the level of congestion based on the time to travel that distance. When travel times are displayed on CMS, such as during peak traffic conditions, the message should comply with the provisions of Sections [[903.5 Guide Signs - Freeways and Expressways (MUTCD Chapter 2E) #903.5.47|EPG 903.5.47]] and [[903.5 Guide Signs - Freeways and Expressways (MUTCD Chapter 2E) #903.5.48|903.5.48]]. If both a travel time and a distance are displayed, the sign should display only one destination. A distance displayed as part of a travel time message should be rounded to the nearest whole mile.

'''Option. '''When comparative travel time displays are used providing travel times on different routes to one destination, distances to that destination may be eliminated.

A reference-location-based exit number (see [[903.5 Guide Signs - Freeways and Expressways (MUTCD Chapter 2E)#903.5.22|EPG 903.5.22]]) may be displayed in lieu of a destination name or junction thereby providing the necessary distance information to the road user. If reference-location-based exit numbers are displayed, then up to two travel times may be displayed provided that the distance to the exit is not also displayed.

'''Support. '''[[910.3 Dynamic Message Signs (DMS)#910.3.2.12_Congestion_Messages#910.3.2.12_Congestion_Messages#910.3.2.12_Congestion_Messages|EPG 910.3.2.12]] includes information regarding Congestion Messages for DMS.

=={{SpanID|903.12.7}}903.12.7 Traffic Safety Campaign Messages (MUTCD Section 2L.07)==

'''Support. '''An allowable ancillary use of CMS is the display of traffic safety messages in conjunction with a traffic safety campaign that includes other forms of media as the primary communication and education mechanism.

'''Standard. '''Traffic control messages shall have priority over traffic safety campaign messages.

'''Guidance. '''When a CMS is used to display a traffic safety campaign, the message should be simple, direct, brief, legible, and clear (see [[:Category:911 General (MUTCD Part 1)#Purpose_and_Principles_of_Traffic_Control_Devices_(MUTCD_Section_1D.01)|EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1D.01)]]). Traffic safety campaign messages should be relevant to the road user on the roadway on which the message is displayed. For example, messages regarding school bus stop safety should not be displayed on freeways where school bus stops are not found.

A CMS should not be used to display a traffic safety campaign message if doing so could adversely affect respect for the sign. Messages with obscure or secondary meanings should not be used as they might be misunderstood or understood only by a limited segment of road users and require greater time to process and understand. Similarly, slogan-type messages and the display of statistical information should not be used.

The broad traffic safety campaign marketing message should be appropriately shortened or otherwise modified to comply with the provisions of [[#903.12.5|EPG 903.12.5]] when a traffic safety campaign message is displayed on a CMS.

Traffic safety campaign messages should emphasize the applicable regulation or warning and should reference any penalties associated with violations of the regulation. Traffic safety campaigns using CMS should include coordinated enforcement efforts where penalties or enforcement type warnings are part of the message displayed on the CMS.

Traffic safety campaign messages should not be displayed on CMS unless they are part of an active, coordinated safety campaign that uses other media forms as the primary means of outreach. For consistency on a national level, traffic safety campaigns should be coordinated with those on the National Highway Transportation Safety Administration’s annual communications calendar or similarly planned sate campaigns.

'''Support. '''Examples of traffic safety campaign messages include “UNBUCKLED SEAT BELTS FINE + POINTS” and “IMPAIRED DRIVERS LOSE LICENSE + JAIL.”

[[910.3 Dynamic Message Signs (DMS)#910.3.2.12_Congestion_Messages#910.3.2.16_Driver_Safety_Campaigns_(MUTCD_2L.02)|EPG 910.3.2.16]] includes additional information related to Driver Safety Campaigns.

=={{SpanID|903.12.8}}903.12.8 Permanently-Located Changeable Message Signs (MUTCD Section 2L.08)==
'''Support. '''See [[910.3 Dynamic Message Signs (DMS)#910.3.2.6|EPG 910.3.2.6]] for information regarding Permanently-Located Changeable Message Signs and Dynamic Message Signs (DMS).

File:UnitsOfInformation Phase2.png

2025-12-10T13:53:19Z

HogsettC: HogsettC uploaded a new version of File:UnitsOfInformation Phase2.png

File uploaded with MsUpload

File:UnitsOfInformation Phase1.png

2025-12-10T13:53:18Z

HogsettC: HogsettC uploaded a new version of File:UnitsOfInformation Phase1.png

File uploaded with MsUpload

913.2 Signs (MUTCD Chapter 8B)

2025-12-08T16:03:59Z

HogsettC: /* {{SpanID|913.2.4}}913.2.4 Crossbuck Assemblies with YIELD or STOP Signs at Passive Grade Crossings (MUTCD Section 8B.04) */

[[Category:913 Traffic Control for Railroad and Light Rail Transit Grade Crossings (MUTCD Part 8)|913.2]]
=={{SpanID|913.2.1}}913.2.1 Purpose and Application (MUTCD Section 8B.01) ==

'''Support. '''Passive traffic control systems, consisting of signs and pavement markings only, identify and direct attention to the location of a grade crossing and advise road users to reduce their speed or stop at the grade crossing as necessary in order to yield to any rail traffic occupying, or approaching and in proximity to, the grade crossing.

Signs and markings regulate, warn, and guide the road users so that they, as well as LRT vehicle operators on mixed-use alignments, can take appropriate action when approaching a grade crossing.

Unless otherwise provided in this article, the provisions of [[:Category:903 Highway Signing (MUTCD Part 2)|EPG 903]] are applicable to the design and location of signs at grade crossings.

=={{SpanID|913.2.2}}913.2.2 Sizes of Grade Crossing Signs (MUTCD Section 8B.02) ==

'''Standard. '''The sizes of grade crossing signs shall be as shown in [[#913.2.2|Table 913.2.2]].

{{SpanID|tab913.2.2}}
<div style="width: 100%; text-align: center">
{| class="wikitable" style="text-align: center; display:inline-table;"
|+ Table 913.2.2, Railroad and Light Rail Transit Grade Crossings Sign and Plaque Sizes
|-
! rowspan="2" | Sign or Plaque
! rowspan="2" | Sign Designation
! rowspan="2" | EPG Article
! colspan="3" | Conventional Road
(in. x in.)
! colspan="1" | Freeway/Expressway
(in. x in.)
|-
! Standard
! Oversized
! Special
! Mainline and Ramps

|-
| style="text-align: left" | STOP
| R1-1
| -
| 36 x 36
| 48 x 48
| -
| 48 x 48
|-
| style="text-align: left" | YIELD
| R1-2
| -
| 48 x 48
| 60 x 60
| -
| 60 x 60
|-
| style="text-align: left" | No Right Turn - Train (symbol)
| R3-1a
| [[913.4 Flashing-Light Signals, Automatic Gates, and Traffic Control Signals (MUTCD Chapter 8D) #913.4.10| 913.4.10]]
| 24 x 30
| 30 x 36
| -
| -
|-
| style="text-align: left" | No Left Turn - Train (symbol)
| R3-2a
| [[913.4 Flashing-Light Signals, Automatic Gates, and Traffic Control Signals (MUTCD Chapter 8D) #913.4.10| 913.4.10]]
| 24 x 30
| 30 x 36
| -
| -
|-
| style="text-align: left" | DO NOT STOP ON TRACKS
| R8-8
| [[#913.2.7|913.2.7]]
| 24 x 30
| 24 x 30
| -
| 36 x 48
|-
| style="text-align: left" | STOP HERE ON RED
| R10-6
| [[#913.2.8|913.2.8]]
| 24 x 36
| 24 x 36
| -
| -
|-
| style="text-align: left" | LEFT (RIGHT) LANE SIGNAL
| R10-10b
| [[913.4 Flashing-Light Signals, Automatic Gates, and Traffic Control Signals (MUTCD Chapter 8D) #913.4.11| 913.4.11]], [[913.4 Flashing-Light Signals, Automatic Gates, and Traffic Control Signals (MUTCD Chapter 8D) #913.4.12| 913.4.12]]
| 24 x 30
| 30 x 36
| -
| 30 x 36
|-
| style="text-align: left" | LEFT (RIGHT) TURN LANE SIGNAL
| R10-10C
| [[913.4 Flashing-Light Signals, Automatic Gates, and Traffic Control Signals (MUTCD Chapter 8D) #913.4.11| 913.4.11]], [[913.4 Flashing-Light Signals, Automatic Gates, and Traffic Control Signals (MUTCD Chapter 8D) #913.4.12| 913.4.12]]
| 24 x 30
| 30 x 36
| -
| 30 x 36
|-
| style="text-align: left" | Grade Crossing (Crossbuck) [Railroad Responsibility]
| R15-1
| [[#913.2.3|913.2.3]]
| 48 x 9
| -
| -
| 48 x 9
|-
| style="text-align: left" | Number of Tracks (plaque) [Railroad Responsibility]
| R15-2P
| [[#913.2.3|913.2.3]]
| 27 x 18
| -
| -
| 27 x 18
|-
| style="text-align: left" | EXEMPT
| R15-3P
| [[#913.2.9|913.2.9]]
| 24 x 12
| -
| -
| -
|-
| style="text-align: left" | Railroad Crossing
| W10-1
| [[#913.2.6|913.2.6]]
| 42 dia.
| -
| -
| 48 dia.
|-
| style="text-align: left" | EXEMPT
| W10-1aP
| [[#913.2.6|913.2.6]]
| 24 x 12
| -
| -
| -
|-
| style="text-align: left" | Crossroad Railroad Crossing
| W10-2
| [[#913.2.6|913.2.6]]
| 36 x 36
| 48 x 48
| -
| 48 x 48
|-
| style="text-align: left" | Side Road Railroad Crossing
| W10-3
| [[#913.2.6|913.2.6]]
| 36 x 36
| 48 x 48
| -
| 48 x 48
|-
| style="text-align: left" | T-Intersection Railroad Crossing
| W10-4
| [[#913.2.6|913.2.6]]
| 36 x 36
| 48 x 48
| -
| 48 x 48
|-
| style="text-align: left" | Low Ground Clearance (symbol)
| W10-5
| [[#913.2.14|913.2.14]]
| 36 x 36
| 48 x 48
| -
| 48 x 48
|-
| style="text-align: left" | Low Ground Clearance (plaque)
| W10-5P
| [[#913.2.14|913.2.14]]
| 30 x 24
| -
| -
| 30 x 24
|-
| style="text-align: left" | No Train Horn (plaque)
| W10-9P
| [[#913.2.15|913.2.15]]
| 30 x 24
| -
| -
| 30 x 24
|-
| style="text-align: left" | Emergency Notification [Railroad Responsibility]
| I13-1
| [[#913.2.16|913.2.16]]
| 12 x 9
| -
| -
| 12 x 9
|-
| colspan=10 style="text-align: left" | '''Notes:'''
# Dimensions in inches are shown as width x height
# [[914.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 9A)#tab914.1.2|Table 914.1.2]] shows the minimum sizes that may be used for grade crossing signs and plaques that face shared-use paths and pedestrian facilities
|}
</div>

=={{SpanID|913.2.3}}913.2.3 Grade Crossing (Crossbuck) Sign (R15-1) and Number of Tracks Plaque (R15-2P) at Active and Passive Grade Crossings (MUTCD Section 8B.03) ==
<div style="text-align: center;">
<div style="display:inline-block;vertical-align: bottom;">

[[File:R15-1.png|thumb|none|alt=|150px|'''R15-1''']]

</div>
<div style="display:inline-block;vertical-align: bottom;">

[[File:R15-2P.png|thumb|none|alt=|150px|'''R15-2P''']]

</div>
</div>

'''Standard. '''The Grade Crossing (R15-1) sign, commonly identified as the Crossbuck sign, shall be retroreflective white with the words RAILROAD CROSSING in black lettering, mounted as shown in [[#fig913.2.3|Figure 913.2.3]].

'''Support. '''The Grade Crossing (R15-1) sign and Number of Tracks (R15-2P) plaque are provided by the appropriate railroad company. Railroad companies and/or transit agencies are responsible for the installation and maintenance of these signs.

{{SpanID|fig913.2.3}}
[[File:Figure 913.2.3 Crossbuck Assembly with a YIELD or STOP Sign on the Crossbuck Sign Support.jpg|center|thumb|alt=A sign assembly composed of an R15-1 sign mounted above an R15-2P plaque is shown. This assembly is shown mounted on a sign support above either a “YIELD” sign or a “STOP” sign.
A white or red retroreflective strip is shown attached on the front of the sign support. A white retroreflective strip is shown attached on the back of the support. The center of the crossbuck is shown at a dimensioned distance of 9 ft above the roadway level. |800px| '''Figure 913.2.3''' Crossbuck Assembly with a YIELD or STOP Sign on the Crossbuck Sign Support 
'''Notes:'''
<ol>
<li>YIELD or STOP signs are used only at passive crossings. A STOP sign is used only if an engineering study determines that it is appropriate for that particular approach.</li>
<li>Mounting height shall be at least 4 feet for installations of YIELD or STOP signs on existing Crossbuck sign supports.</li>
<li>Mounting height shall be at least 5 feet for new installations in rural areas and at least 7 feet for new installations in areas where parking or pedestrian movements are likely to occur.</li>
</ol>
]]

'''Standard. '''As a minimum, one Crossbuck sign shall be used on each highway approach to every highway-rail grade crossing, alone or in combination with other traffic control devices.

As a minimum, one Crossbuck sign shall be used on each highway approach to every highway-LRT grade crossing where flashing-light signals or automatic gates are used, alone or in combination with other traffic control devices.

'''Option. '''A Crossbuck sign may be used on a highway approach to a highway-LRT grade crossing where flashing-light signals or automatic gates are not used, alone or in combination with other traffic control devices.

'''Standard'''. If there are two or more tracks at a grade crossing, the number of tracks shall be indicated on a supplemental Number of Tracks (R15-2P) plaque of inverted T shape mounted below the Crossbuck sign in the manner shown in [[#fig913.2.3|Figure 913.2.3]].

On each approach to a highway-rail grade crossing and, if used, on each approach to a highway-LRT grade crossing, the Crossbuck sign shall be installed on the right-hand side of the highway on each approach to the grade crossing. Where restricted sight distance or unfavorable highway geometry exists on an approach to a grade crossing, or where there is a one-way multi-lane approach, an additional Crossbuck sign shall be installed on the left-hand side of the highway, possibly placed back-to-back with the Crossbuck sign for the opposite approach or otherwise located so that two Crossbuck signs are displayed for that approach.

A strip of retroreflective white material not less than 2 inches in width shall be used on the back of each blade of each Crossbuck sign for the length of each blade at all passive grade crossings, except those where Crossbuck signs have been installed back-to-back or where double-faced Crossbuck signs have been installed.

'''Option. '''A strip of retroreflective white material not less than 2 inches in width may be used on the back of each blade of each Crossbuck sign for the length of each blade at active grade crossings.

'''Guidance. '''Minimum clearance dimensions for crossbuck signs relative to the proximity to the nearest rail should conform to the requirements of the railroad company and/or transit agency, and MoDOT Multimodal Division (Rail Section).

Except as provided in the Option paragraph below, the mounting height of Crossbuck signs, measured vertically from the center of the sign to the elevation of the near edge of the pavement, should be approximately 9 feet (see [[#fig913.2.3|Figure 913.2.3]]).

'''Option. '''The 9-foot mounting height for the Crossbuck sign may be varied as required by local conditions and may be increased to accommodate signs mounted below the Crossbuck sign.

=={{SpanID|913.2.4}}913.2.4 Crossbuck Assemblies with YIELD or STOP Signs at Passive Grade Crossings (MUTCD Section 8B.04)==

'''Support. '''The MoDOT Multimodal Division developed a [[:File:Stop_Sign_Fact_Sheet_non_fillable.pdf|Stop Sign Fact Sheet]] Sheet to help determine if a Stop sign should be displayed below the Crossbuck sign instead of a Yield sign at passive railroad crossings.

'''Standard. '''A Crossbuck Assembly shall consist of a Crossbuck (R15-1) sign, and a Number of Tracks (R15-2P) plaque if two or more tracks are present, that complies with the provisions of [[#913.2.3|EPG 913.2.3]], and either a YIELD (R1-2) or STOP (R1-1) sign installed on the same support, except as provided in the Option paragraph below. YIELD or STOP signs used at passive grade crossings shall be installed in compliance with the provisions of [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2.17|EPG 903.2.17]], and Figures [[#fig913.2.3|913.2.3]], [[#fig913.2.4.1|913.2.4.1]], and [[#fig913.2.4.2|913.2.4.2]].

At all public highway-rail grade crossings that are not equipped with the active traffic control systems that are described in [[913.4 Flashing-Light Signals, Automatic Gates, and Traffic Control Signals (MUTCD Chapter 8D) #913.4| EPG 913.4]], except crossings where road users are directed by an authorized person on the ground to not enter the crossing at all times that an approaching train is about to occupy the crossing, a Crossbuck Assembly shall be installed on the right-hand side of the highway on each approach to the highway-rail grade crossing.

If a Crossbuck sign is used on a highway approach to a public highway-LRT grade crossing that is not equipped with the active traffic control systems that are described in [[913.4 Flashing-Light Signals, Automatic Gates, and Traffic Control Signals (MUTCD Chapter 8D) #913.4| EPG 913.4]], a Crossbuck Assembly shall be installed on the right-hand side of the highway on each approach to the highway-LRT grade crossing.

Where restricted sight distance or unfavorable highway geometry exists on an approach to a grade crossing that has a Crossbuck Assembly, or where there is a one-way multi-lane approach, an additional Crossbuck Assembly shall be installed on the left-hand side of the highway.

A YIELD sign shall be the default traffic control device for Crossbuck Assemblies on all highway approaches to passive grade crossings unless an engineering study performed by the MoDOT Multimodal Division (Rail Section) or highway authority having jurisdiction over the roadway approach determines that a STOP sign is appropriate.

'''Guidance. '''The use of STOP signs at passive grade crossings should be limited to unusual conditions where requiring all motor vehicles to make a full stop is determined to be necessary by a Diagnostic Team. Among the factors that should be considered by the Diagnostic Team are the line of sight to approaching rail traffic (giving due consideration to seasonal crops or vegetation beyond both the highway and railroad or LRT rights-of-ways), the number of tracks, the speeds of trains or LRT equipment and motor vehicles, and the crash history at the grade crossing.

Where a passive grade crossing is located on a stop-controlled approach and the clear storage distance is less than the length of the design vehicle, and where adequate sight distance to oncoming traffic on the parallel roadway is available to road users stopped on the approach to the grade crossing, consideration should be given to installing a STOP sign at the Crossbuck Assembly instead of at the highway-highway intersection. If the STOP sign is installed at the Crossbuck Assembly instead of at the highway-highway intersection, the Diagnostic Team should consider installing some other intersection traffic control device at the highway-highway intersection.



{{SpanID|fig913.2.4.1}}
[[File:Figure 913.2.4.1. Crossbuck Assembly with a YIELD or STOP Sign on a Separate Sign Support (Sheet 1 of 2).jpg|center|thumb|alt=Th is example shows the signs in a ”rural area.” It shows a “YIELD” sign mounted on a sign support to the right of a “roadway.” An optional red retroreflective strip is shown attached on the front of the sign support. The base of the sign is shown as a dimensioned distance of 5 ft MIN from the ground. The left edge of the sign is shown as a dimensioned distance of 6 ft MIN from the near edge of the traveled way. An R15-1 sign mounted on a sign support is shown to the right of the “YIELD” sign. The left arms of the R15-1 sign are shown overhanging the “YIELD” sign with a dimensioned distance of “2 inches MIN” between the top of the “YIELD” sign and the bottom of the arm of the R15-1 sign. The R15-1 sign is shown with a white retroreflective strip on the front and back of the sign support. |800px| '''Figure 913.2.4.1.''' Crossbuck Assembly with a YIELD or STOP Sign on a Separate Sign Support ''(Sheet 1 of 2)'' 
'''Notes:'''
<ol>
<li>YIELD signs are used only at passive crossings.</li>
<li>Place the face of the signs in the same plane and place the YIELD sign closer to the traveled way. Provide a 2-inch minimum separation between the edge of the Crossbuck sign and the edge of the YIELD sign.</li>
</ol>
]]

{{SpanID|fig913.2.4.2}}
[[File:Figure 913.2.4.2 Crossbuck Assembly with a YIELD or STOP Sign on a Separate Sign Support (Sheet 2 of 2).jpg|center|thumb|alt= This example shows the signs in an “area with pedestrian movements or parking.” It shows a taller “STOP” sign mounted on a sign support to the right of a curb. A red retroreflective strip is shown attached on the front of the sign support. The base of the sign is shown as a dimensioned distance of 7 ft MIN from the ground. The left edge of the sign is shown as a dimensioned distance of 2 ft MIN from the near edge of the face of the curb. An R15-1 sign mounted on a sign support is shown to the right of the “STOP” sign. The left arms of the R15-1 sign are shown a dimensioned distance of 2 inches MIN to the right of the “STOP” sign. The R15-1 sign is shown with a white retroreflective strip on the front and back of the sign support. |800px| '''Figure 913.2.4.2''' Crossbuck Assembly with a YIELD or STOP Sign on a Separate Sign Support ''(Sheet 2 of 2)'' 
'''Notes:'''
<ol>
<li>STOP signs are used only at passive crossings and only if an engineering study determines that it is appropriate for that particular approach.</li>
<li>Place the face of the signs in the same plane and place the STOP sign closer to the traveled way. Provide a 2-inch minimum separation between the edge of the Crossbuck sign and the edge of the STOP sign.</li>
</ol>
]]

'''Standard. '''If a Crossbuck Assembly is installed on the approach to a passive grade crossing located at a highway-highway intersection controlled by a traffic control signal that is not interconnected with the grade crossing and not preempted by the approach of rail traffic, a Diagnostic Team shall be convened to determine the appropriate traffic control devices. A STOP sign shall not be installed on a Crossbuck Assembly in this situation.

'''Support. '''[[913.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 8A) #913.1.1|EPG 913.1.1]] through [[913.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 8A) #913.1.5|EPG 913.1.5]] contain information regarding the responsibilities of the Diagnostic Team, highway agency, MoDOT Multimodal Division (Rail Section), and the railroad company or transit agency regarding the selection, design, and operation of traffic control devices placed at grade crossings.

'''Option. '''If a YIELD or STOP sign is installed for a Crossbuck Assembly at a grade crossing, it may be installed on the same support as the Crossbuck sign or it may be installed on a separate support at a point where the motor vehicle is to stop, or as near to that point as practicable, but in either case, the YIELD or STOP sign is considered to be a part of the Crossbuck Assembly.

'''Standard. '''If a YIELD or STOP sign is installed on an existing Crossbuck sign support, the mounting height, measured vertically from the bottom of the YIELD or STOP sign to the top of the curb, or in the absence of curb, measured vertically from the bottom of the YIELD or STOP sign to the elevation of the near edge of the traveled way, shall be at least 4 feet [[#fig913.2.3|Figure 913.2.3]]).

If a Crossbuck Assembly is installed on a new sign support (see [[#fig913.2.3|Figure 913.2.3]]) or if the YIELD or STOP sign is installed on a separate support (see Figures [[#fig913.2.4.1|913.2.4.1]] and [[#fig913.2.4.2|913.2.4.2]]), the mounting height, measured vertically from the bottom of the YIELD or STOP sign to the top of the curb, or in the absence of curb, measured vertically from the bottom of the YIELD or STOP sign to the elevation of the near edge of the traveled way, shall be at least 5 feet in rural areas and shall be at least 7 feet in areas where parking or pedestrian movements are likely to occur.

'''Guidance. '''If a YIELD or STOP sign is installed for a Crossbuck Assembly at a grade crossing on a separate support than the Crossbuck sign (see Figures [[#fig913.2.4.1|913.2.4.1]] and [[#fig913.2.4.2|913.2.4.2]]), the YIELD or STOP sign should be placed in the same plane as the Crossbuck sign and closer to the traveled way than the Crossbuck sign. The minimum separation between the nearest point of the YIELD or STOP sign and the nearest point of the Crossbuck sign should be 2 inches as shown in Figures [[#fig913.2.4.1|913.2.4.1]] and [[#fig913.2.4.2|913.2.4.2]].

'''Support. '''The meaning of a Crossbuck Assembly that includes a YIELD sign is that a road user approaching the grade crossing needs to be prepared to decelerate, and when necessary, yield the right-of-way to any rail traffic that might be occupying the crossing or might be approaching and in such close proximity to the crossing that it would be unsafe for the road user to cross.

Certain commercial motor vehicles and school buses are required to stop at all grade crossings in accordance with 49 CFR 392.10 even if a YIELD sign (or just a Crossbuck sign) is posted.

The meaning of a Crossbuck Assembly that includes a STOP sign is that a road user approaching the grade crossing must come to a full stop not less than 15 feet short of the nearest rail, and remain stopped while the road user determines if there is rail traffic either occupying the crossing or approaching and in such close proximity to the crossing that the road user must yield the right-of-way to rail traffic. The road user is permitted to proceed when it is safe to cross.

'''Standard. '''A vertical strip of retroreflective white material, not less than 2 inches in width, shall be used on each Crossbuck support at passive grade crossings for the full length of the back of the support from the Crossbuck sign or Number of Tracks plaque to within 2 feet above the near edge of the roadway, except as provided in the first Option paragraph below. A white retroreflective strip wrapped around a round support for the full length of the support from the Crossbuck Sign or Number of Tracks plaque to within 2 feet above the near edge of the roadway shall satisfy this requirement as long as the round support has an outside diameter of at least 2 inches.

'''Option. '''The vertical strip of retroreflective material may be omitted from the back sides of Crossbuck sign supports installed on one-way streets and at pathway or sidewalk grade crossings (see [[913.5 Pathway Grade Crossings (MUTCD Chapter 8E) #913.5.5|EPG 913.5.5]]).

If a YIELD or STOP sign is installed on the same support as the Crossbuck sign, a vertical strip of red (see [[903.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 2A) #903.1.11|EPG 903.1.11]]) or white retroreflective material that is at least 2 inches wide may be used on the front of the support from the YIELD or STOP sign to within 2 feet above the near edge of the roadway.

'''Standard. '''If a Crossbuck sign support at a passive grade crossing does not include a YIELD or STOP sign (either because the YIELD or STOP sign is placed on a separate support or because a YIELD or STOP sign is not present on the approach), a vertical strip of retroreflective white material, not less than 2 inches in width, shall be used for the full length of the front of the support from the Crossbuck sign or Number of Tracks plaque to within 2 feet above the near edge of the roadway. A white retroreflective strip wrapped around a round support for the full length of the support from the Crossbuck Sign or Number of Tracks plaque to within 2 feet above the near edge of the roadway shall satisfy this requirement as long as the round support has an outside diameter of at least 2 inches.

At all grade crossings where YIELD or STOP signs are installed, Yield Ahead (W3-2) or Stop Ahead (W3-1) signs shall also be installed if the criteria for their installation in [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.29|EPG 903.3.29]] is met.

'''Support. '''[[913.3 Purpose and Application (MUTCD Chapter 8C) #913.3.3|EPG 913.3.3]] contains provisions regarding the use of stop lines or yield lines at grade crossings.

=={{SpanID|913.2.5}}913.2.5 Use of STOP (R1-1) or YIELD (R1-2) Signs without Crossbuck Signs at Highway-LRT Grade Crossings (MUTCD Section 8B.05) ==

'''Guidance. '''The use of only STOP or YIELD signs for road users at highway-LRT grade crossings should be limited to those crossings where the need and feasibility is determined by the Diagnostic Team. Such crossings should have all of the following characteristics:
::A. The crossing roadways are secondary in character (such as a minor street with one lane in each direction, an alley, or a driveway) with low traffic volumes and low speed limits. The specific thresholds of traffic volumes and speed limits should be determined by the local agencies.
::B. The line of sight for an approaching LRT operator is adequate from a sufficient distance such that the operator can sound an audible signal and bring the LRT equipment to a stop before arriving at the crossing.
::C. The road user has sufficient sight distance at the stop line to permit the vehicle to cross the tracks before the arrival of the LRT equipment.
::D. If at an intersection of two roadways, the intersection does not meet the warrants for a traffic control signal as provided in [[902.3 Traffic Control Signal Needs Studies (MUTCD Chapter 4C) #902.3|EPG 902.3]].
::E. The LRT tracks are located such that motor vehicles are not likely to stop on the tracks while waiting to enter a crossroad or highway.

'''Standard. '''For all highway-LRT grade crossings where only STOP (R1-1) or YIELD (R1-2) signs are installed, the placement shall comply with the requirements of [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2.17|EPG 903.2.17]]. Stop Ahead (W3-1) or Yield Ahead (W3-2) Advance Warning signs shall also be installed if the criteria for their installation given in [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.29|EPG 903.3.29]] is met.

=={{SpanID|913.2.6}}913.2.6 Grade Crossing Advance Warning Signs (W10-1 through W10-4) (MUTCD Section 8B.06) ==

<div style="text-align: center;">
<div style="display:inline-block;vertical-align: bottom;">

[[File:W10-1.png|thumb|none|alt=|150px|'''W10-1''']]

</div>
<div style="display:inline-block;vertical-align: bottom;">

[[File:W10-1aP.png|thumb|none|alt=|150px|'''W10-1aP''']]

</div>
<div style="display:inline-block;vertical-align: bottom;">

[[File:W10-2.png|thumb|none|alt=|150px|'''W10-2''']]

</div>
<div style="display:inline-block;vertical-align: bottom;">

[[File:W10-4.png|thumb|none|alt=|150px|'''W10-4''']]

</div>
</div>

'''Standard. '''A Grade Crossing Advance Warning (W10-1) sign shall be used on each highway in advance of every grade crossing, except in the following circumstances:
::A. On an approach to a grade crossing from an intersection with a parallel highway if the distance from the nearest rail of the tracks to the edge of the parallel roadway is less than 100 feet and W10-2, W10-3, or W10-4 signs are used on the approaches of the parallel highway (see the third Standard paragraph below);
::B. In business or commercial areas where active grade crossing traffic control systems are in use;
::C. Where physical conditions do not permit even a partially effective display of the sign; or
::D. At highway-LRT grade crossings where Crossbuck signs are not used (see [[#913.2.3|EPG 913.2.3]]).

The placement of the Grade Crossing Advance Warning sign shall be in accordance with [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.4|EPG 903.3.4]] and [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #tab903.3.3|Table 903.3.3]].

If a YIELD or STOP sign is present at a passive grade crossing, a Yield Ahead (W3-2) or Stop Ahead (W3-1) Advance Warning sign shall also be installed if the criteria for their installation given in [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.29|EPG 903.3.29]] is met. If a Yield Ahead or Stop Ahead sign is installed on the approach to the crossing, the W10-1 sign shall be installed upstream from the Yield Ahead or Stop Ahead sign. The Yield Ahead or Stop Ahead sign shall be located in accordance with [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #tab903.3.3|Table 903.3.3]]. The minimum distance between the signs shall be in accordance with [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.4|EPG 903.3.4]] and [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #tab903.3.3|Table 903.3.3]].

'''Option. '''On divided highways and one-way streets, an additional W10-1 sign may be installed on the left-hand side of the roadway.

'''Standard. '''If the distance between the tracks and a parallel highway, from the nearest rail of the tracks to the edge of the parallel roadway, is less than 100 feet, a W10-2, W10-3, or W10-4 sign shall be installed on each approach of the parallel highway to warn road users making a turn that they will encounter a grade crossing soon after making a turn, and a W10-1 sign for the approach to the tracks shall not be required to be between the tracks and the parallel highway.

If the W10-2, W10-3, or W10-4 sign is used, sign placement in accordance with the guidelines for Intersection Warning signs in [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #tab903.3.3|Table 903.3.3]] using the speed of through traffic shall be measured from the highway intersection.

'''Guidance.''' If the distance between the tracks and the parallel highway, from the nearest rail of the tracks to the edge of the parallel roadway, is 100 feet or more, a W10-1 sign should be installed in advance of the grade crossing, and the W10-2, W10-3, or W10-4 sign should not be used on the parallel highway.

=={{SpanID|913.2.7}}913.2.7 DO NOT STOP ON TRACKS Sign (R8-8) (MUTCD Section 8B.07) ==

<div style="text-align: center;"><div style="display:inline-block;vertical-align: middle;">[[File:R8-8.png|thumb|none|alt=|150px|'''R8-8''']]</div>
</div>

'''Guidance. '''If motor vehicle queues are likely to extend onto the tracks, a DO NOT STOP ON TRACKS (R8-8) sign should be used.

'''Support. '''Locations where motor vehicles could queue onto the grade crossing include intersections where a STOP or YIELD sign is installed downstream of the grade crossing, where there is a downstream circular intersection, or where there is a pre-signal installed at the grade crossing.

'''Guidance. '''The R8-8 sign, if used, should be located on the right-hand side of the highway on either the near or far side of the grade crossing, depending upon which position provides better visibility to approaching drivers.

'''Option. '''DO NOT STOP ON TRACKS signs may be placed on both sides of the track.

On divided highways and one-way streets, a second DO NOT STOP ON TRACKS sign may be placed on the near or far left-hand side of the highway at the grade crossing to further improve the visibility of the sign.

=={{SpanID|913.2.8}}913.2.8 STOP HERE ON RED Signs (R10-6) (MUTCD Section 8B.10) ==

<div style="text-align: center;"><div style="display:inline-block;vertical-align: middle;">[[File:R10-6.png|thumb|none|alt=|150px|'''R10-6''']]</div>
</div>

'''Support. '''The STOP HERE ON RED (R10-6) sign defines and facilitates observance of stop lines at traffic control signals.

'''Option. '''STOP HERE ON RED signs may be used at locations where motor vehicles frequently violate the stop line or where it is not obvious to road users where to stop.

'''Guidance. '''If possible, stop lines should be placed at a point where the motor vehicle driver has adequate sight distance along the track.

=={{SpanID|913.2.9}}913.2.9 EXEMPT Grade Crossing Plaques (R15-3P and W10-1aP) (MUTCD Section 8B.11) ==

<div style="text-align: center;"><div style="display:inline-block;vertical-align: middle;">[[File:R15-3P.png|thumb|none|alt=|150px|'''R15-3P''']]</div>
</div>

'''Option. '''Where authorized by MoDOT Multimodal Division (Rail Section), an EXEMPT (R15-3P) plaque with a white background may be used below the Crossbuck sign or Number of Tracks plaque, if present, at the grade crossing, and an EXEMPT (W10-1aP) plaque with a fluorescent yellow background may be used below the Grade Crossing Advance Warning (W10-1 through W10-4) sign.

Where neither the Crossbuck sign nor the advance warning signs exist for a particular highway-LRT grade crossing, an EXEMPT (R15-3P) plaque with a white background may be placed on its own post on the near right-hand side of the approach to the crossing.

'''Support. '''These plaques inform drivers of motor vehicles carrying passengers for hire, school buses carrying students, or motor vehicles carrying hazardous materials that a stop is not required at certain designated grade crossings, except when rail traffic is approaching or occupying the grade crossing, or the driver’s view is blocked.

=={{SpanID|913.2.10}}913.2.10 Light Rail Transit Only Lane Signs (R15-4 Series) (MUTCD Section 8B.12)==

'''Support. '''Reserved for future use. R15-4 Series signs are not currently used on MoDOT facilities.

=={{SpanID|913.2.11}}913.2.11 Do Not Pass Light Rail Transit Signs (R15-5 and R15-5a) (MUTCD Section 8B.13)==

'''Support. '''Reserved for future use. R15-5 and R15-5a signs are not currently used on MoDOT facilities.

=={{SpanID|913.2.12}}913.2.12 No Motor Vehicles On Tracks Signs (R15-6 and R15-6a) (MUTCD Section 8B.14)==

'''Support. '''Reserved for future use. R15-6 and R15-6a signs are not currently used on MoDOT facilities.

=={{SpanID|913.2.13}}913.2.13 Divided Highway with Light Rail Transit Crossing Signs (R15-7 Series) (MUTCD Section 8B.15)==

'''Support. '''Reserved for future use. R15-7 Series signs are not currently used on MoDOT facilities.

=={{SpanID|913.2.14}}913.2.14 Low Ground Clearance Grade Crossing Sign (W10-5) (MUTCD Section 8B.16)==

<div style="text-align: center;"><div style="display:inline-block;vertical-align: bottom;">[[File:W10-5.png|thumb|none|alt=|150px|'''W10-5''']]</div>
<div style="display:inline-block;vertical-align: bottom;">[[File:W10-5P.png|thumb|none|alt=|150px|'''W10-5P''']]</div>
</div>

'''Guidance. '''If the highway profile conditions are sufficiently abrupt to create a hang-up situation for long wheelbase vehicles or for trailers with low ground clearance, the Low Ground Clearance Grade Crossing (W10-5) sign should be installed in advance of the grade crossing.

'''Standard. '''Because this symbol might not be readily recognizable by the public, the Low Ground Clearance Grade Crossing (W10-5) warning sign shall be accompanied by a LOW GROUND CLEARANCE (W10-5P) educational plaque. The LOW GROUND CLEARANCE educational plaque shall remain in place for at least 3 years after the initial installation of the W10-5 sign (see [[903.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 2A) #903.1.9|EPG 903.1.9]]).

'''Guidance. '''Because other vehicle types and combinations also face the potential risk of hanging up at a grade crossing, word message warning signs and selective exclusion regulatory signs (see [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2.36|EPG 903.2.36]]) for specific vehicle types and combinations should be used in addition to, or in place of, the Low Ground Clearance Grade Crossing (W10-5) sign.

'''Support. '''While not all inclusive, some potential low ground clearance vehicles and combinations include single-unit trucks, buses, motor coaches, low-boy trailers, car carriers, and recreational vehicles.

'''Guidance. '''Auxiliary plaques such as AHEAD, NEXT CROSSING, or USE NEXT CROSSING (with appropriate arrows), or a supplemental distance plaque should be placed below the W10-5 sign at the nearest intersecting highway where a vehicle can detour or at a point on the highway wide enough to permit a U-turn.

If engineering judgment of roadway geometric and operating conditions confirms that motor vehicle speeds across the tracks should be below the posted speed limit, a W13-1P advisory speed plaque should be posted.

A signed detour should be installed to guide potential hang-up vehicles to alternate nearby crossings to avoid the potential hang-up condition.

'''Support. '''Information on ground clearance requirements at grade crossings is available in the 2019 edition of the “American Railway Engineering and Maintenance-of-Way Association’s Engineering Manual,” or in “A Policy on Geometric Design of Highways and Streets,” 2018 Edition, AASHTO.

An inventory of crossings with low ground clearance concerns, including a list of potential vehicle types that could hang up on the crossing, can be useful in tracking locations of low ground clearance crossings. Specific geometric conditions, known incidents, or anecdotal evidence of vehicle hang-ups can also be used to identify crossings with low ground clearance concerns.

=={{SpanID|913.2.15}}913.2.15 NO TRAIN HORN Sign or Plaque (W10-9P) (MUTCD Section 8B.20)==

<div style="text-align: center;"><div style="display:inline-block;vertical-align: bottom;">[[File:W10-9P.png|thumb|none|alt=|150px|'''W10-9P''']]</div>
</div>

'''Standard. '''A NO TRAIN HORN (W10-9P) plaque shall be installed in each direction at each highway-rail grade crossing where a Quiet Zone has been established in compliance with 49 CFR Part 222. Where it is used, a W10-9P plaque shall supplement and be mounted directly below the Grade Crossing Advance Warning (W10-1 through W10-4) sign.

=={{SpanID|913.2.16}}913.2.16 Emergency Notification System Sign (I13-1) (MUTCD Section 8B.27)==

[[File:I13-1.png|center|thumb|alt=I13-1 is shown as a horizontal rectangular blue sign with a white border. It shows the message “REPORT PROBLEM OR EMERGENCY 1-800-XXX-XXXX” in white on the first three lines. “X-ING” in white to the left of “836 597 H” in black on a vertical horizontal white panel on the fourth line. “XYZ RAILROAD” in small white letters on the fifth line. |180px| {{SpanID|fig913.2.15}}'''I13-1 ''']]

'''Support. '''Emergency Notification Signs (I-13) are installed by the Railroad that operates through the crossing.

'''Standard. '''The Emergency Notification System (I13-1) sign shall be installed on each approach at all highway-rail grade crossings, and at all highway-LRT grade crossings with automatic gates or flashing light-signals, to provide information to road users so that they can notify the railroad company or transit agency about emergencies or malfunctioning traffic control devices.

At a highway-rail grade crossing, the Emergency Notification System sign shall, at a minimum, include the USDOT grade crossing inventory number and the emergency contact telephone number.

Where Emergency Notification System signs are used at a highway-LRT grade crossing, they shall, at a minimum, include a unique crossing identifier and the emergency contact telephone number.

The minimum width of the Emergency Notification System sign shall be 12 inches and the minimum height shall be 9 inches. The lettering on Emergency Notification System signs for the telephone number, the grade crossing inventory number, and the explanation of the purpose of the sign shall be composed of numerals and upper-case letters that are at least 1 inch in height.

Emergency Notification System signs shall be retroreflective.

Except as provided in the Option paragraph below, Emergency Notification System signs shall have a white legend and border on a blue background.

'''Option. '''The seven-character grade crossing inventory number may be shown on the sign as a black legend on a white rectangular background.

'''Guidance. '''Except as provided in the first Option paragraph below, Emergency Notification System signs should be attached to the Crossbuck Assemblies or grade crossing signal masts on the right-hand side of each roadway approach to the grade crossing rather than on the railroad or LRT signal control equipment housings. Emergency Notification System signs should be oriented so the face of the sign is approximately parallel or approximately perpendicular to the edge of the roadway or pathway and is visible to road users or pathway users. The visibility of the Emergency Notification System sign should not be obstructed by automatic gates in either the vertical or horizontal position.

The Emergency Notification System signs should be positioned so as to not obstruct any traffic control devices or limit the view of rail traffic approaching the grade crossing.

Emergency Notification System signs mounted on Crossbuck Assemblies or signal masts should only be large enough to provide the necessary contact information. Use of larger signs on Crossbuck Assemblies or signal masts that might obstruct the view of rail traffic or other motor vehicles should be avoided.

At station crossings, Emergency Notification System signs or information should be posted in a conspicuous location.

'''Option. '''Emergency Notification System signs may be located on a separate post. Where located on a separate post, the size of the Emergency Notification System sign may be increased for improved visibility.

Where the improvement of the conspicuity of an Emergency Notification System sign is desired, a solid yellow rectangular header panel with a legend of “NOTICE” in black letters may be used (see [[903.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 2A) #903.1.11|EPG 903.1.11]]).

Additional Emergency Notification System signs may be installed at a grade crossing.

903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C)

2025-12-03T19:57:24Z

HogsettC: /* {{SpanID|903.3.32}}903.3.32 Reduced Speed Limit Ahead and Speed Zone Signs (W3-5) (MUTCD Section 2C.40) */

{| align="right" style="max-width: 640px;"
|__TOC__
|}
[[Category:903 Highway Signing (MUTCD Part 2)|903.03]]
=={{SpanID|903.3.1}}903.3.1 Application of Warning Signs (MUTCD Section 2C.01)==

'''Standard. '''The use of warning signs shall be based on an engineering study or on engineering judgment.

Warning signs shall be retroreflective.

'''Guidance. '''The use of warning signs should be kept to a minimum as the unnecessary use of warning signs tends to breed disrespect for all signs. In situations where the condition or activity is seasonal or temporary, the warning sign should be removed or covered when the condition or activity does not exist.

'''Support.''' The decision to use most warning signs is based on prevailing conditions. The items to be considered when determining the need for a warning sign are stopping sight distance and prevailing speed. Prevailing speed is determined by using either the posted or 85th percentile speed on the facility. Stopping sight distance is the distance a driver requires to perceive, react, and respond to a condition. The prevailing speed affects the amount of sight distance required for a condition.

It is recommended to use [[#tab903.3.1|Table 903.3.1]] to determine the stopping sight distance needed when considering the use of most warning signs. If the stopping sight distance is less than that in [[#tab903.3.1|Table 903.3.1]], a sign might be needed.

{{SpanID|tab903.3.1}}
<center>
{| class="wikitable" style="text-align: center;"
|+ '''Table 903.3.1''' Stopping Sight Distance Requirements
|-
! Prevailing Speed (mph) !! Distance (ft.)
|-
| 30 || 200
|-
| 35 || 250
|-
| 40 || 305
|-
| 45 || 360
|-
| 50 || 425
|-
| 55 || 495
|-
| 60 || 570
|-
| 65 || 645
|-
| 70 || 730
|-
| style="background-color: #ffffff;" colspan="2" | Note: Based on "A Policy on Geometric Design of Highways and Streets", 2018 Edition, AASHTO, Table 3-1, Stopping Sight Distance
|}
</center>

=={{SpanID|903.3.2}}903.3.2 Design of Warning Signs (MUTCD Section 2C.02)==

'''Standard. '''Except as provided in the following Option paragraph or unless specifically designated otherwise, all warning signs shall be diamond-shaped (square with one diagonal vertical) with a black legend and border on a fluorescent yellow background. Warning signs shall be designed in accordance with the sizes, shapes, colors, and legends contained in the FHWA “Standard Highway Signs” publication (see [[:Category:911_General_(MUTCD_Part_1) #911.1.5|EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1A.05]])).

'''Option.''' A warning sign that is larger than the size shown in the Oversized column in [[#tab903.3.3|Table 903.3.3]] for that particular sign may be diamond-shaped or may be rectangular or square in shape.

'''Support.''' The use of a shape other than diamond-shaped is typical for overhead installations. [[903.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 2A) #903.1.5|EPG 903.1.5]] contains information on allowable methods to accommodate a diamond-shaped warning sign where the lateral space available in which to install a diamond-shaped warning sign is constrained, such as in urban locations, when mounting on a narrow median barrier or adjacent to a retaining wall, including the display of the standard legend in a vertically oriented rectangle.

The use of LEDs in the border and legend of warning signs is described in [[903.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 2A) #903.1.12|EPG 903.1.12]].

'''Option.''' Word message warning signs other than those provided in the EPG may be developed and installed by MoDOT for conditions otherwise not addressed by standard signs (see [[903.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 2A) #903.1.4|EPG 903.1.4]]).

'''Support.''' MoDOT uses the fluorescent yellow-green (FYG) color exclusively for school signs. The only application where MoDOT would use the FYG color for bicycle or pedestrian signs is if a state route and local street intersected and the local jurisdiction utilized FYG color signs on their legs of the intersection. This would only be done to be in compliance with the MUTCD requirement that FYG and yellow shall not be intermixed in an application.

There are two primary reasons MoDOT has chosen not to use FYG color for bicycle or pedestrian signs. The first reason involves the MUTCD requirement that FYG color signs shall not be intermixed with other yellow color signs. A transition to FYG color signs would result in the premature replacement of all signs in an area when just one sign reached the end of its life or was damaged, resulting in wasted resources. The second reason, and most important, is to reserve FYG color signs for school signing to make these signs stand out from other signing, as school children are especially vulnerable road users.

In response to repeated requests by a local jurisdiction for MoDOT to use the FYG color for bicycle and pedestrian signs, MoDOT initiated a research study to determine if there were any documented safety benefits for using the FYG color for these signs. Having previously adopted fluorescent orange for all work zone signs, MoDOT made the transition from standard yellow to fluorescent yellow (FY) for all warning signs as there was documentation to support this change in sheeting color. However, no documentation could be found to indicate that the FYG sign color provides any safety benefits when compared to the FY sign color. The research study surveyed other state DOTs as well as local MPOs to determine if they made a change to the FYG color, how they made the decision to do so, and if they could provide any research documentation which would support FYG to be safer than FY. The study showed there was no conclusive evidence to demonstrate that FYG sign color had any safety benefit compared to the FY sign color that MoDOT was already using. Most agencies who adopted FYG did so based on engineering judgement and not based on the results of research.

'''Standard.''' Warning signs regarding conditions associated with school buses and schools and their related supplemental plaques shall have a black legend and border on a fluorescent yellow-green background (see [[908.2 Signs (MUTCD Chapter 7B) #908.2.1|EPG 908.2.1]]).

'''Option.''' Consistent with the provisions of [[902.18 Flashing Beacons (MUTCD Chapter 4S) #902.18.3|EPG 902.18.3]], a Warning Beacon may be used in combination with a standard warning sign.

=={{SpanID|903.3.3}}903.3.3 Size of Warning Signs and Plaques (MUTCD Section 2C.03)==

'''Standard.''' Except as provided in [[903.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 2A) #903.1.7|EPG 903.1.7]], the sizes for warning signs shall be as shown in [[#tab903.3.3|Table 903.3.3]].

'''Support.''' [[903.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 2A) #903.1.7|EPG 903.1.7]] contains information regarding the applicability of the various columns in [[#tab903.3.3|Table 903.3.3]].

'''Option.''' Signs and plaques larger than those shown in [[#tab903.3.3|Table 903.3.3]] may be used (see [[903.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 2A) #903.1.11|EPG 903.1.11]]) for special applications where speed, volume or other factors result in conditions where increased emphasis, improved recognition or increased legibility would be desirable, with approval from the MoDOT Highway Safety and Traffic Division.

'''Guidance. '''The minimum size for all diamond-shaped warning signs facing traffic on exit and entrance ramps at interchanges should be the size identified in [[#tab903.3.3|Table 903.3.3]] for the mainline roadway classification (Freeway/Expressway).

<center>
{{SpanID|tab903.3.3}}
{| class="wikitable" style="text-align:center;"
|+ Table 903.3.3 Warning Sign and Plaques Sizes
|-
! rowspan="2" | Sign or Plaque
! rowspan="2" | Sign Designation
! rowspan="2" | EPG Article
! colspan="2" | Conventional Road (in. x in.)
! Freeway/Expressway (in. x in.)
|-
! Standard
! Oversized
! Mainline & Ramps
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Turn
| W1-1
| [[#903.3.7|903.3.7]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Curve
| W1-2
| [[#903.3.7|903.3.7]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Reverse Turn
| W1-3
| [[#903.3.7|903.3.7]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Reverse Curve
| W1-4
| [[#903.3.7|903.3.7]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Winding Road
| W1-5
| [[#903.3.7|903.3.7]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | One-Direction Large Arrow
| W1-6
| [[#903.3.10|903.3.10]]
| 48 X 24
| 72 X 36
| 72 X 36
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Two-Direction Large Arrow
| W1-7
| [[#903.3.35|903.3.35]]
| 48 X 24
| 72 X 36
| 72 X 36
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Chevron
| W1-8
| [[#903.3.8|903.3.8]]
| 18 X 24
| 30 X 36
| 30 X 36
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Combination Horizontal Alignment/Intersection
| W1-10 Series
| [[#903.3.9|903.3.9]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Hairpin Curve
| W1-11
| [[#903.3.7|903.3.7]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Truck Rollover
| W1-13
| [[#903.3.11|903.3.11]]
| -
| -
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | 270° Curve
| W1-15
| [[#903.3.7|903.3.7]]
| -
| -
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Cross road
| W2-1
| [[#903.3.33|903.3.33]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Side Road
| W2-2
| [[#903.3.33|903.3.33]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Side Road (45°)
| W2-3, 3a
| [[#903.3.33|903.3.33]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | T Intersection
| W2-4
| [[#903.3.33|903.3.33]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Y Intersection
| W2-5
| [[#903.3.33|903.3.33]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Circular Intersection
| W2-6
| [[#903.3.33|903.3.33]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Offset Side Road
| W2-7
| [[#903.3.33|903.3.33]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 x 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Double Side Roads
| W2-8
| [[#903.3.33|903.3.33]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Watch for Entering Traffic
| W2-10a
| [[#903.3.34|903.3.34]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Watch for Approaching Traffic
| W2-11a
| [[#903.3.34|903.3.34]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Stop Ahead
| W3-1
| [[#903.3.29|903.3.29]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Yield Ahead
| W3-2
| [[#903.3.29|903.3.29]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Signal Ahead
| W3-3
| [[#903.3.29|903.3.29]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Be Prepared to Stop
| W3-4
| [[#903.3.29|903.3.29]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Reduced Speed Ahead
| W3-5
| [[#903.3.32|903.3.32]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Ramp Meter Ahead
| W3-7
| [[#903.3.30|903.3.30]]
| 36 X 36
| -
| -
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Ramp Metered When Flashing
| W3-8
| [[#903.3.30|903.3.30]]
| 36 X 36
| -
| -
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Ferry Crossing Ahead
| W3-18
| [[#903.3.54|903.3.54]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| -
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Merge
| W4-1
| [[#903.3.37|903.3.37]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Lane Ends
| W4-2
| [[#903.3.39|903.3.39]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Added Lane
| W4-3
| [[#903.3.38|903.3.38]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Cross Traffic Does Not Stop (plaque)
| W4-4P
| [[#903.3.37|903.3.37]]
| 24 X 12
| 36 X 18
| 36 X 18
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Traffic From Left Does Not Stop (plaque)
| W4-4aPL
| [[#903.3.37|903.3.37]]
| 24 X 12
| 36 X 18
| 36 X 18
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Traffic From Right Does Not Stop (plaque)
| W4-4aPR
| [[#903.3.37|903.3.37]]
| 24 X 12
| 36 X 18
| 36 X 18
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Oncoming Traffic Does Not Stop (plaque)
| W4-4bP
| [[#903.3.37|903.3.37]]
| 24 X 12
| 36 X 18
| 36 X 18
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Entering Roadway Merge
| W4-5
| [[#903.3.37|903.3.37]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Entering Roadway Added Lane
| W4-6
| [[#903.3.38|903.3.38]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Single Lane Transition
| W4-8
| [[#903.3.40|903.3.40]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | ROAD NARROWS
| W5-1
| [[#903.3.15|903.3.15]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | NARROW BRIDGE
| W5-2
| [[#903.3.16|903.3.16]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | ONE LANE BRIDGE
| W5-3
| [[#903.3.17|903.3.17]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| -
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Divided Highway
| W6-1
| [[#903.3.18|903.3.18]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| -
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Divided Highway Ends
| W6-2
| [[#903.3.19|903.3.19]]
| -
| -
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Two-Way Traffic
| W6-3
| [[#903.3.42|903.3.42]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| -
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Two-Way Traffic (2-Lane)
| W6-5
| [[#903.3.55|903.3.55]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| -
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Two-Way Traffic (3-Lane)
| W6-5a
| [[#903.3.55|903.3.55]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
|
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Passing Lane (plaque)
| W6-6aP
| [[#903.3.55|903.3.55]]
| 42 X 12
| -
| -
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Passing Lane Ends
| W6-16
| [[#903.3.55|903.3.55]]
| 36 X 36
| -
| -
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Watch for Left-Turning Traffic in Passing Lane
| W6-17
| [[#903.3.55|903.3.55]]
| 72 X 48
| -
| -
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Hill
| W7-1
| [[#903.3.14|903.3.14]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Uphill
| W7-1c
| [[#903.3.14|903.3.14]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Percent Grade
| W7-3P
| [[#903.3.63|903.3.63]]
| 24 X 18
| 30 X 24
| 30 X 24
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Next _ Miles (plaque)
| W7-3aP
| [[#903.3.63|903.3.63]]
| 24 X 18
| 30 X 24
| 30 X 24
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Bump
| W8-1
| [[#903.3.23|903.3.23]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Dip
| W8-2
| [[#903.3.23|903.3.23]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Pavement Ends
| W8-3
| [[#903.3.24|903.3.24]]
| 36 X 36
| -
| -
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Slippery When Wet
| W8-5
| [[#903.3.25|903.3.25]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Truck Crossing
| W8-6
| [[#903.3.49|903.3.49]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Fallen Rocks
| W8-14
| [[#903.3.26|903.3.26]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Road May Flood
| W8-18
| [[#903.3.28|903.3.28]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Impassable During High Water
| W8-34
| [[#903.3.28|903.3.28]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Left (Right) Lane Ends
| W9-1
| [[#903.3.39|903.3.39]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Lanes Merge
| W9-4
| [[#903.3.40|903.3.40]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Right (Left) Lane Exit Only
| W9-7
| [[#903.3.41|903.3.41]]
| 132 X 70
| -
| 132 X 70
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Bicycle
| W11-1
| [[#903.3.45|903.3.45]]
| 36 X 36
| -
| -
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Pedestrian
| W11-2
| [[#903.3.53|903.3.53]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| -
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Cattle
| W11-4
| [[#903.3.53|903.3.53]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
|
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Farm Vehicle
| W11-5
| [[#903.3.51|903.3.51]]
| 36 X 36
| -
| -
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Equestrian
| W11-7
| [[#903.3.53|903.3.53]]
| 36 X 36
| -
| -
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Emergency Vehicle
| W11-8
| [[#903.3.52|903.3.52]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Truck Entrance
| W11-10
| [[#903.3.50|903.3.50]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Emergency Signal Ahead (plaque)
| W11-12P
| [[#903.3.52|903.3.52]]
| 36 X 30
| -
| 36 X 30
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Horse-Drawn Vehicle
| W11-14
| [[#903.3.48|903.3.48]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Bike / Ped
| W11-15
| [[#903.3.46|903.3.46]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Trail Crossing
| W11-15a
| [[#903.3.47|903.3.47]]
| 36 X 36
| -
| -
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Double Arrow
| W12-1
| [[#903.3.20|903.3.20]]
| 30 X 30
| 36 X 36
| 36 X 36
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Low Clearance Advance
| W12-2
| [[#903.3.22|903.3.22]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Low Clearance (overhead)
| W12-2a
| [[#903.3.22|903.3.22]]
| 84 X 24
| -
| 84 X 24
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Advisory Speed
| W13-1P
| [[#903.3.33|903.3.33]]
| 24 X 24
| 30 X 30
| 30 X 30
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Advisory Speed (plaque)
| W13-1aP
| [[#903.3.33|903.3.33]]
| 48 X 15
| -
| 48 X 15
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Advisory Exit Speed
| W13-2
| [[#903.3.12|903.3.12]]
| -
| -
| 48 X 60
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Advisory Ramp Speed
| W13-3
| [[#903.3.12|903.3.12]]
| -
| -
| 48 X 60
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Advisory Exit Speed with 270° Loop Arrow
| W13-6
| [[#903.3.12|903.3.12]]
| -
| -
| 48 X 84
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Advisory Ramp Speed with 270° Loop Arrow
| W13-7
| [[#903.3.12|903.3.12]]
| -
| -
| 48 X 84
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Advisory Exit Speed with 180° Hairpin Arrow
| W13-8
| [[#903.3.12|903.3.12]]
| -
| -
| 48 X 84
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Advisory Ramp Speed with 180° Hairpin Arrow
| W13-9
| [[#903.3.12|903.3.12]]
| -
| -
| 48 X 84
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Advisory Exit Speed with 90° Turn Arrow
| W13-10
| [[#903.3.12|903.3.12]]
| -
| -
| 48 X 72
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Advisory Ramp Speed with 90° Turn Arrow
| W13-11
| [[#903.3.12|903.3.12]]
| -
| -
| 48 X 72
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Advisory Exit Speed with Truck Rollover
| W13-12
| [[#903.3.12|903.3.12]]
| -
| -
| 48 X 84
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Advisory Ramp Speed with Truck Rollover
| W13-13
| [[#903.3.12|903.3.12]]
| -
| -
| 48 X 84
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Vehicle Speed Feedback Sign
| W13-20
| [[#903.3.13|903.3.13]]
| 30 X 36
| -
| 48 X 60
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Vehicle Speed Feedback (plaque)
| W13-20aP
| [[#903.3.13|903.3.13]]
| 30 X 24
| -
| 48 X 36
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Dead End
| W14-1
| [[#903.3.21|903.3.21]]
| 36 X 36
| 36 X 36
| -
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | No Outlet
| W14-2
| [[#903.3.21|903.3.21]]
| 36 X 36
| 36 X 36
| -
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | No Passing Zone (pennant)
| W14-3
| [[#903.3.43|903.3.43]]
| -
| -
| -
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Road Ends
| W14-13
| [[#903.3.21|903.3.21]]
| 36 X 36
| 36 X 36
| -
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | In Road (plaque)
| W16-1P
| [[#903.3.66|903.3.66]]
| 24 X 18
| -
| 24 X 18
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | XX FEET (plaque)
| W16-2P
| [[#903.3.60|903.3.60]]
| 24 X 18
| 30 X 24
| 30 X 24
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | XX MILES (plaque)
| W16-3P
| [[#903.3.60|903.3.60]]
| 24 X 18
| 30 X 24
| 30 X 24
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | NEXT _ FEET (plaque)
| W16-4P
| [[#903.3.60|903.3.60]]
| 24 X 18
| 30 X 24
| 30 X 24
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Directional Arrow (plaque)
| W16-5P
| [[#903.3.61|903.3.61]]
| 30 X 21
| -
| 30 X 21
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Advance Turn Arrow (plaque)
| W16-6P
| [[#903.3.61|903.3.61]]
| 30 X 21
| -
| 30 X 21
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Downward Diagonal Arrow (plaque)
| W16-7P
| [[#903.3.62|903.3.62]]
| 30 X 21
| -
| 30 X 21
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Dual Downward Diagonal Arrow (plaque)
| W16-7aP
| [[#903.3.62|903.3.62]]
| 30 X 21
| -
| 30 X 21
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Two Line Street Name (plaque)
| W16-8aP
| [[#903.3.64|903.3.64]]
| Varies X 15
| Varies X 24
| Varies X 24
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Advance Street Name (plaque)
| W16-8P
| [[#903.3.64|903.3.64]]
| Varies X 8
| Varies X 12
| Varies X 12
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Ahead (plaque)
| W16-9P
| [[#903.3.44|903.3.44]], [[#903.3.53|903.3.53]]
| 30 X 18
| -
| 30 X 18
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Notice (plaque)
| W16-18P
| [[#903.3.68|903.3.68]]
| 36 X 12
| 48 X 18
| 48 X 18
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Except to Turn (plaque)
| W16-23P
| [[#903.3.68|903.3.68]]
| 48 X 30
| -
| -
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Except to Exit (plaque)
| W16-24P
| [[#903.3.68|903.3.68]]
| 48 X 30
| -
| -
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Double Reverse Curve Left - 1 Lane
| W24-1L
| [[#903.3.7|903.3.7]]
| 36 X 36
| -
| 36 X 36
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Double Reverse Curve Left - 2 Lanes
| W24-1aL
| [[#903.3.7|903.3.7]]
| 36 X 36
| -
| 36 X 36
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Double Reverse Curve Left - 3 Lanes
| W24-1bL
| [[#903.3.7|903.3.7]]
| 36 X 36
| -
| 36 X 36
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Oncoming Traffic Has Extended Green
| W25-1
| [[#903.3.36|903.3.36]]
| 24 X 30
| -
| -
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Oncoming Traffic May Have Extended Green
| W25-2
| [[#903.3.36|903.3.36]]
| 24 X 30
| -
| -
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Watch for Stopped Traffic
| W26-1
| [[#903.3.31|903.3.31]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Travel Safe Zone
| W27-1
| [[#903.3.56|903.3.56]]
| 36 X 48
| 48 X 60
| 48 X 60
|}
</center>

=={{SpanID|903.3.4}}903.3.4 Placement of Warning Signs (MUTCD Section 2C.04)==

'''Support.''' Information on the placement of warning signs is contained in [[903.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 2A) #903.1.13|EPG 903.1.13]] through [[903.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 2A) #903.1.18|903.1.18]].

The time needed for detection, recognition, decision, and reaction is called the Perception-Response Time (PRT). [[#tab903.3.4|Table 903.3.4]] is provided as an aid for determining warning sign location. The distances shown in [[#tab903.3.4|Table 903.3.4]] can be adjusted for roadway features, other signing, and to improve visibility.

'''Guidance. '''Warning signs should be placed so that they provide an adequate PRT. The distances contained in [[#tab903.3.4|Table 903.3.4]] should be applied with engineering judgment.

Minimum spacing between warning signs with different messages should be based on the estimated PRT for driver comprehension of and reaction to the second sign.

The effectiveness of the placement of warning signs should be periodically evaluated. This is typically accomplished during routine sign inspection cycles. [[903.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 2A) #903.1.19|EPG 903.1.19]] contains information regarding MoDOT’s sign maintenance program.

'''Standard. '''When any part of a warning sign assembly (post, sign, plaque, etc.) is replaced, maintained or modified, the placement of the sign shall be reviewed based on [[#tab903.3.4|Table 903.3.4]]. Additionally, mounting height shall be reviewed for conformance with [[903.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 2A) #903.1.15|EPG 903.1.15]].

{{SpanID|tab903.3.4}}
{| class="wikitable"
|-
|+ '''Table 903.3.4''' Guidelines for Advance Placement of Warning Signs
|- style="text-align:center;"
! rowspan="3" | Posted or 85th-Percentile Speed
! colspan="9" | Advance Placement Distance1
|- style="text-align:center;"
! rowspan="2" style="max-width: 200px;" | Condition A: Speed reduction and lane changing in heavy traffic2
! colspan="8" | Condition B: Deceleration to the listed advisory (mph) for the condition
|- style="text-align:center;"
! 03
! 104
! 204
! 304
! 404
! 504
! 604
! 704
|- style="vertical-align:middle;"
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 20 mph
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 225 ft
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 115 ft
| N/A5
| —
| —
| —
| —
| —
| —
|- style="vertical-align:middle;"
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 25 mph
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 325 ft
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 155 ft
| N/A5
| N/A5
| —
| —
| —
| —
| —
|- style="vertical-align:middle;"
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 30 mph
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 460 ft
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 200 ft
| N/A5
| N/A5
| —
| —
| —
| —
| —
|- style="vertical-align:middle;"
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 35 mph
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 565 ft
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 250 ft
| N/A5
| N/A5
| N/A5
| —
| —
| —
| —
|- style="vertical-align:middle;"
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 40 mph
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 670 ft
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 305 ft
| 100 ft6
| 100 ft6
| N/A5
| —
| —
| —
| —
|- style="vertical-align:middle;"
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 45 mph
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 775 ft
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 360 ft
| 125 ft
| 100 ft6
| 100 ft6
| N/A5
| —
| —
| —
|- style="vertical-align:middle;"
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 50 mph
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 885 ft
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 425 ft
| 200 ft
| 175 ft
| 125 ft
| 100 ft6
| —
| —
| —
|- style="vertical-align:middle;"
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 55 mph
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 990 ft
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 495 ft
| 275 ft
| 225 ft
| 200 ft
| 125 ft
| N/A5
| —
| —
|- style="vertical-align:middle;"
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 60 mph
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 1100 ft
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 570 ft
| 350 ft
| 325 ft
| 275 ft
| 200 ft
| 100 ft6
| —
| —
|- style="vertical-align:middle;"
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 65 mph
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 1200 ft
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 645 ft
| 450 ft
| 400 ft
| 350 ft
| 275 ft
| 200 ft
| 100 ft6
| —
|- style="vertical-align:middle;"
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 70 mph
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 1250 ft
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 730 ft
| 525 ft
| 500 ft
| 450 ft
| 375 ft
| 275 ft
| 150 ft
| —
|- style="vertical-align:middle;"
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 75 mph
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 1350 ft
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 820 ft
| 625 ft
| 600 ft
| 550 ft
| 475 ft
| 375 ft
| 250 ft
| 100 ft6
|-
| style="background-color: #ffffff" colspan="11" |
|-
| style="background-color: #ffffff" colspan="11" | Note 1 — For Advanced Placement Distance — General
* The distances are adjusted for a sign legibility distance of 180 feet for Condition A.
* The distances for Condition B (with the exception of the potential stop condition) have been adjusted for a sign legibility distance of 250 feet, which is appropriate for an alignment warning symbol sign.
* For Conditions A and B, warning signs with less than 6-inch legend or more than four words, a minimum of 100 feet should be added to the advance placement distance to provide adequate legibility of the warning sign.

Note 2 — For Condition A — Speed Reduction and Lane Change Conditions
* Typical conditions are locations where the road user must use extra time to adjust speed and change lanes in heavy traffic because of a complex driving situation or reduce to a new posted speed.
* Typical signs are Merge, Right Lane Ends, and Reduced Speed Ahead.
* The distances are determined by providing the driver a PRT of 14.0 to 14.5 seconds for vehicle maneuvers (2018 AASHTO Policy, Table 3-3, Decision Sight Distance, Avoidance Maneuver E) and adjusted for a legibility distance of 180 feet for the appropriate sign.

Note 3 — For Condition B — Stop Condition
* Typical condition is the warning of a potential stop situation.
* Typical signs are Stop Ahead, Yield Ahead, Signal Ahead, and Intersection Warning signs.
* The distances are based on the 2018 AASHTO Policy, Table 3-1, Stopping Sight Distance, providing a PRT of 2.5 seconds, a deceleration rate of 11.2 feet/second2.

Note 4 — For Condition B — Reduced Speed Conditions
* Typical conditions are locations where the road user must decrease speed to maneuver through the warned condition.
* Typical signs are Turn, Curve, Reverse Turn, Reverse Curve, or Reduced Speed Ahead.
* The distance is determined by providing a 2.5 second PRT, a vehicle deceleration rate of 10 feet/second2, and adjusted for a sign legibility distance of 250 feet.

Note 5 — For Condition B — N/A Values
* No suggested distances are provided for these speeds, as the placement location is dependent on site conditions and other signing.
* An alignment warning sign may be placed anywhere from the point of curvature up to 100 feet in advance of the curve.
* However, the alignment warning sign should be installed in advance of the curve and at least 100 feet from any other signs.

Note 6 — For Condition B — for shortest distance values per posted speed
* The minimum advance placement distance is listed as 100 feet to provide adequate spacing between signs.

General Note:

Warning signs that advise road users about conditions that are not related to a specific location can be installed in an appropriate location, based on engineering judgment.
|}

=={{SpanID|903.3.5}}903.3.5 Horizontal Alignment Warning Signs – General (MUTCD Section 2C.05)==

'''Support.''' A variety of horizontal alignment warning signs, pavement markings (see [[620.2 Pavement and Curb Markings (MUTCD Chapter 3B)|EPG 620.2]]), and delineation (see [[620.6 Delineators (MUTCD Chapter 3G)|EPG 620.6]]) can be used to advise motorists of a change in the roadway alignment. Uniform application of these traffic control devices with respect to the amount of change in the roadway alignment conveys a consistent message establishing driver expectancy and promoting effective roadway operations. The design and application of horizontal alignment warning signs to meet those requirements are addressed in [[#903.3.5|EPG 903.3.5]] through [[#903.3.12|903.3.12]].

The following list identifies treatments that might be used in advance of or within a change in horizontal alignment:
:A. Horizontal alignment (Turn (W1-1), Curve (W1-2, W1-10 series, W1-11, W1-13, W1-15), Reverse Turn (W1-3), Reverse Curve (W1-4), Winding Road (W1-5), Exit Speed (W13-2), Ramp Speed (W13-3), and Combination Horizontal Alignment (Advisory Exit or Ramp Speed W13-6 through W13-11)) signs (see [[#903.3.7|EPG 903.3.7]], [[#903.3.9|903.3.9]], and [[#903.3.12|903.3.12]])
:B. Advisory Speed (W13-1P) plaque (see [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.59|EPG 903.3.59]])
:C. Chevron Alignment (W1-8) signs (see [[#903.3.8|EPG 903.3.8]])
:D. One Direction Large Arrow (W1-6) sign (see [[#903.3.10|EPG 903.3.10]])
:E. Sign or marking conspicuity enhancements (see [[903.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 2A) #903.1.11|EPG 903.1.11]])
:F. Longitudinal rumble strips (see [[620.10 Rumble Strip Markings (MUTCD Chapter 3K) #620.10.1|EPG 620.10.1]])
:G. Vehicle Speed Feedback Sign (see [[#903.3.13|EPG 903.3.13]])

In addition, considerations other than traffic control devices, such as improved surface friction (high friction surface treatments), pavement edge treatments, lighting improvements, increased superelevation, and longitudinal rumble strips, might be used in advance of or within a change in horizontal alignment.

'''Guidance.''' Except as provided in [[#903.3.6|EPG 903.3.6]], the selection of traffic control devices used to warn road users of a change in horizontal alignment or to provide guidance in navigating the change in horizontal alignment should be based on consideration of one or more of the following factors:
:A. The speed of traffic on the approach to the change in horizontal alignment
:B. The recommended advisory speed for the change in horizontal alignment
:C. The difference between the speed limit and the advisory speed, or the speed differential for the change in horizontal alignment
:D. Daily traffic volumes on the roadway
:E. The typical mix of vehicle types on the roadway
:F. Sight distance throughout the change in horizontal alignment
:G. Other types of traffic control devices that are used in advance of and within the change in horizontal alignment on the same roadway segment
:H. The crash history of the change in horizontal alignment
:I. The presence of driveways or intersections within the curve radius

=={{SpanID|903.3.6}}903.3.6 Device Selection for Changes in Horizontal Alignment (MUTCD Section 2C.06)==

'''Standard: '''[[#tab903.3.6|Table 903.3.6]] shall be used to specify the type(s) of warning signs to be used in advance of, and/or along, a horizontal curve, except as provided in following Option paragraph. The speed differential shall be the difference between the horizontal curve’s advisory speed and the roadway’s posted speed limit on the approach to the curve.

'''Option. '''A One Direction Large Arrow (W1-6) sign may be used to supplement Chevron Alignment (W1-8) signs when:
:A. Site conditions limit the number of Chevron Alignment signs that are visible; or

:B. The number of Chevron Alignment signs that can be installed within the change in horizontal alignment is less than the number determined by the spacing specified in [[#903.3.8|EPG 903.3.8]].

Additional or supplemental devices may be used for a change in horizontal alignment on the basis of engineering judgment.

If engineering judgment indicates the need for the horizontal alignment sign for a curve that can be driven at or above the posted speed limit, horizontal alignment signs may be installed with the Advisory Speed Plaque (W13-1P) displaying an advisory speed equal to the posted speed limit.

Warrants for center lines and edge lines are provided in EPG [[620.2 Pavement and Curb Markings (MUTCD Chapter 3B) #620.2.2|620.2.2]] and [[620.2 Pavement and Curb Markings (MUTCD Chapter 3B) #620.2.11|620.2.11]], respectively.

Provisions for delineators are contained in [[620.6 Delineators (MUTCD Chapter 3G)| EPG 620.6]].

Provisions for Advisory Speed (W13-1P) plaques are contained in [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.59|EPG 903.3.59]].

<center>
{{SpanID|tab903.3.6}}
{| class="wikitable"
|+'''Table 903.3.6''' Application of Warning Signs for Changes in Horizontal Alignment
|-
! Speed Differential1 !! Warning Signs Required
|-
| 5 to 10 mph || Horizontal Alignment warning sign2 Advisory Speed plaque3
|-
| 15 mph or more || Horizontal Alignment warning sign2 Advisory Speed plaque3 Chevron Alignment signs4
|-
| style="background-color: #ffffff;" colspan="2" |
# Speed differential shall be the difference between the horizontal curve’s advisory speed and the roadway’s posted speed limit.
# Provisions for the use of Horizontal Alignment warning signs are contained in [[#903.3.6|EPG 903.3.6]].
# Provision for Advisory Speed (W13-1P) plaques are contained in [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.59|EPG 903.3.59]].
# [[#903.3.6|EPG 903.3.6]] contains information about the use of a One Direction Large Arrow (W1-6) sign in place of or to supplement chevron alignment signs.
|}
</center>

=={{SpanID|903.3.7}}903.3.7 Horizontal Alignment Signs (W1-1 through W1-5, W1-11, W1-15, W24-1) (MUTCD Section 2C.07)==
<center>
{| style=""
|-
|[[File:W1-1.png|center|100px|thumb|<center>'''W1-1'''</center>]]
|[[File:W1-2.png|center|100px|thumb|<center>'''W1-2'''</center>]]
|[[File:W1-3.png|center|100px|thumb|<center>'''W1-3'''</center>]]
|[[File:W1-4.png|center|100px|thumb|<center>'''W1-4'''</center>]]
|-
|[[File:W1-5.png|center|100px|thumb|<center>'''W1-5'''</center>]]
|[[File:W1-11.png|center|100px|thumb|<center>'''W1-11'''</center>]]
|[[File:W1-15.png|center|100px|thumb|<center>'''W1-15'''</center>]]
|[[File:W24-1L.png|center|100px|thumb|<center>'''W24-1L'''</center>]]
|}
</center>

'''Standard. '''When a horizontal alignment sign is required as provided in [[#903.3.6|EPG 903.3.6]] the sign installed in advance of the curve shall be a Curve (W1-2) sign unless a different sign is recommended or allowed by the provisions of this Article.

A Turn (W1-1) sign shall be used instead of a Curve (W1-2) sign in advance of a horizontal curve that has an advisory speed of 30 mph or less.

'''Guidance. '''Where there are two changes in roadway alignment in opposite directions that are separated by a tangent distance of less than 600 feet, the Reverse Turn (W1-3) sign should be used instead of multiple Turn (W1-1) signs or the Reverse Curve (W1-4) sign should be used instead of multiple Curve (W1-2) signs.

'''Support. '''[[#fig903.3.7.1|Figures 903.3.7.1]] and [[#fig903.3.7.2|903.3.7.2]] provide examples of warning signs used for turns and curves.

'''Option. '''A Winding Road (W1-5) sign may be used instead of multiple Turn (W1-1) or Curve (W1-2) signs where there are three or more changes in roadway alignment each separated by a tangent distance of less than 600 feet.

A NEXT XX MILES (W7-3aP) supplemental distance plaque (see [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.60|EPG 903.3.60]]) may be installed below the Winding Road sign where continuous roadway curves exist for a specific distance.

If the curve has a change in horizontal alignment of 135 degrees or more, the Hairpin Curve (W1-11) sign may be used instead of a Turn or Curve sign.

If the curve has a change of direction of approximately 270 degrees, such as on a cloverleaf interchange ramp, the 270-degree Loop (W1-15) sign may be used instead of a Turn or Curve sign.

'''Guidance. '''When the Hairpin Curve sign or the 270-degree Loop sign is installed, either a One-Direction Large Arrow (W1-6) sign or Chevron Alignment (W1-8) signs should be installed on the outside of the turn or curve.

'''Option.''' A double reverse left sign (W24-1L) and advisory speed plaque may be used on the crossroad approaches to a Diverging Diamond Interchange (DDI) when the difference between the speed limit and the advisory speed is 5 mph or greater. The need for this signing is based on engineering judgment if speeding through a DDI is a concern. An Advisory speed plaque is typically installed where the posted speed on the crossroad of the DDI is 40 mph or greater.

'''Standard.''' If used with an advisory speed plaque, the W24-1L sign shall display the number of double reverse arrows which indicates the number of lanes on the crossroad going through the DDI in the direction of travel where the sign is observed.

'''Support. '''See [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.59|EPG 903.3.59]] for information regarding Advisory Speed Plaques (W13-1P).

{{SpanID|fig903.3.7.1}}
[[File:Figure 903.3.7.1 Example of Warning Signs for Changes in Horizontal Alignment (Sheet 1 of 2).png|thumb|center|800px|alt="A segment of a vertical two-lane north-south roadway that curves to the right, or east, is shown. At the bottom of the figure, facing south and to the right of the northbound lane, a sign assembly composed of a W1-2R sign mounted above a W13-1P plaque is shown. The W1-2R is a yellow diamond-shaped sign with a black arrow curving up and to the right.
Continuing northbound, on the left side of the roadway, the following sequence of W1-8 chevron signs is shown from bottom to top: four consecutive W1-8L chevrons facing north, one W1-8R chevron facing south, one W1-8L chevron facing north, one W1-8R chevron facing south, one W1-8L chevron facing north, and finally four consecutive W1-8R chevrons facing south. Continuing north on the same side of the road, facing north and to the right of the southbound lane, a sign assembly composed of a W1-2L sign mounted above a W13-1P plaque is shown."
|'''Figure 903.3.7.1''' Examples of Warning Signs for Changes in Horizontal Alignment ''(Sheet 1 of 2)'']]

{{SpanID|fig903.3.7.2}}
[[File:Figure 903.3.7.2 Example of Warning Signs for Changes in Horizontal Alignment (Sheet 2 of 2) .png|thumb|center|800px|alt="A segment of a vertical two-lane north-south roadway that curves to the right, or east, is shown.
At the bottom of the figure, facing south and to the right of the northbound lane, a sign assembly composed of a W1-1R sign mounted above a W13-1P plaque is shown. W1-1R is shown as a yellow diamond-shaped sign with a black arrow pointing up and then a sharp turn to the right.
On the left side of the roadway, the following sequence of optional W1-8 chevron signs are shown from bottom to top: two W1-8L chevrons facing north, followed by one W1-8R chevron facing south, then one W1-8L chevron facing north, and finally one W1-8R chevron facing south.
Just north of this sequence, a sign assembly composed of a W1-6R sign mounted above an optional W13-1aP plaque is shown facing south.
North of that on the curve, still on the left side of the roadway, there is a sequence of optional W1-8 chevron signs as follows: one W1-8R facing southwest, one W1-8L facing northeast, one W1-8R facing southwest, and one W1-8L facing northeast.
East of that, following the curve, another sign assembly composed of a W1-6L sign mounted above an optional W13-1aP plaque is shown facing east.
To the east of that, two optional W1-8R chevrons are shown facing west.
Finally, at the top right of the figure, facing east and to the right of the westbound lane, a sign assembly composed of a W1-1L sign mounted above a W13-1P plaque is shown. The W1-1L is a yellow diamond-shaped sign with a black arrow pointing up and then sharply turning to the left."
|'''Figure 903.3.7.2''' Examples of Warning Signs for Changes in Horizontal Alignment ''(Sheet 2 of 2)'']]

=={{SpanID|903.3.8}}903.3.8 Chevron Alignment Sign (W1-8) (MUTCD Section 2C.08)==
[[File:W1-8.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W1-8'''</center>]]

'''Support. '''Examples of when to use Chevron signs include locations where there is a crash history, evidence of drivers losing control on a curve or turn, a sharp change in horizontal alignment not readily visible to the driver, or as a systemic curve improvement program.

The majority of fatal and serious injury crashes are attributed to lane departure crashes (State Strategic Highway Safety Plan). Chevrons are a highly cost-effective way to reduce lane departure crashes in curves and turns.

Implementation of the 2009 MUTCD requirements for chevron deployments resulted in a statewide reduction in severe lane departure crashes in horizontal curves. To maintain this observed safety benefit, MoDOT has established standards based on the 2009 MUTCD criteria, which is above the minimum requirements in the 11th Edition of the MUTCD. For more details on the safety benefits of chevrons, contact the Highway Safety and Traffic Division.

'''Standard. '''The use of the Chevron Alignment (W1-8) sign (see [[#fig903.3.7.2|Figure 903.3.7.2]]) to provide additional emphasis and guidance for a change in horizontal alignment shall be in accordance with the information provided in [[#903.3.6|EPG 903.3.6]].

The Chevron Alignment sign shall be a vertical rectangle. No border shall be used on the Chevron Alignment sign.

If used, Chevron Alignment signs shall be installed on the outside of a turn or curve, in line with and at approximately a right angle to approaching traffic. Chevron Alignment signs shall be installed at a minimum height of 4 feet, measured vertically from the bottom of the sign to the elevation of the near edge of the traveled way, which will locate the sign at approximately the driver’s eye height.

'''Guidance. '''The approximate spacing of Chevron Alignment signs on the turn or curve measured from the point of curvature (PC) should be as shown in [[#tab903.3.8|Table 903.3.8]].

In addition to the Chevron Alignment signs placed throughout the curve, there should be one sign in advance of the PC and one after the PT. These signs should be spaced the same as the Chevron Alignment signs in the curve.

'''Option.''' The values in [[#tab903.3.8|Table 903.3.8]] are typical and variances for driveways, public roads, and other signs may alter the spacing. Engineering judgment may also be used to modify the spacing as long as road users always have at least two Chevron Alignment signs in view until the change in alignment eliminates the need for the signs.

Based on engineering judgement, chevron alignment signs may be omitted within incorporated city limits.

'''Guidance.''' The Chevron Alignment signs should be visible for a sufficient distance to provide the road user with adequate time to react to the change in alignment.

The single-sided Chevron sign should only be used where only one direction of travel is impacted, such as on an expressway. The double-side Chevron (W1-8D) should be used on two-lane, two-way roads.

At the end of a four-lane divided highway, where the traffic reduces to two lanes, chevrons should be used to direct traffic from the dual lanes that are ending and being redirected to the two-lane roadway.

'''Option. '''Chevron Alignment signs may also be used on any other roadways based on engineering judgment.

Chevron Alignment signs may be used in addition to the One-Direction Large Arrow (W1-6) sign on turns posted at 30 mph or less.

'''Guidance. '''As chevrons are installed, all horizontal alignment signing (chevrons, curve and turn signing, advisory speed plaques and arrow boards) on a corridor should be evaluated to ensure the installations meet current standards. Aspects of existing horizontal alignment signs to look at should include spacing of existing chevrons, offset and mounting heights of any horizontal alignment sign as well as the distance advanced warning signs are installed from the curve/turn. The need for curve/turn signs should be reevaluated if the ball banking measurements from when the signs were installed are out of date due to roadway/pavement improvements or due to changes in vehicle performance.

'''Option. '''LEDs may be used to enhance the conspicuity of Chevron Alignment signs (see [[903.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 2A) #903.1.12|EPG 903.1.12]]).

'''Standard. '''The LEDs used in the Chevron Alignment sign shall consist of yellow LEDs outlining the chevron symbol.

Chevron Alignment signs shall not be placed on the far side of a T-intersection facing traffic on the stem approach to warn drivers that a through movement is not physically possible, as this is the function of a Two-Direction (or One-Direction) Large Arrow sign.

Chevron Alignment signs shall not be used to mark obstructions within or adjacent to the roadway, including the beginning of guardrails or barriers, as this is the function of an object marker (see [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.70|EPG 903.3.70]]).

Chevron Alignment signs directing traffic to the right shall not be used in the central island of a roundabout or a neighborhood traffic circle.

{{SpanID|tab903.3.8}}
<center>
{| class="wikitable" style="text-align: center;"
|+ '''Table 903.3.8''' Typical Spacing of Chevron Alignment Signs on Horizontal Curves
|-
! Advisory Speed !! Curve Radius !! Sign Spacing
|-
| 15 mph or less || Less than 200 feet || 40 feet
|-
| 20 to 30 mph || 200 to 400 feet || 60 feet
|-
| 35 to 45 mph || 401 to 700 feet || 80 feet
|-
| 50 to 60 mph || 701 to 1,250 feet || 100 feet
|-
| more than 60 mph || More than 1,250 feet || 140 feet
|-
| style="background-color: #ffffff; max-width: 500px;" colspan="3" | Note: The relationship between curve radius and the advisory speed shown in this table should not be used to determine the advisory speed.
|}
</center>

=={{SpanID|903.3.9}}903.3.9 Combination Horizontal Alignment/Intersection Signs (W1-10 Series) (MUTCD Section 2C.09)==
<center>
{| style=""
|-
|[[File:W1-10.png|center|100px|thumb|<center>'''W1-10'''</center>]]
|[[File:W1-10a.png|center|100px|thumb|<center>'''W1-10a'''</center>]]
|[[File:W1-10b.png|center|100px|thumb|<center>'''W1-10b'''</center>]]
|-
|[[File:W1-10c.png|center|100px|thumb|<center>'''W1-10c'''</center>]]
|[[File:W1-10d.png|center|100px|thumb|<center>'''W1-10d'''</center>]]
|[[File:W1-10e.png|center|100px|thumb|<center>'''W1-10e'''</center>]]
|}
</center>

'''Option. '''The Turn (W1-1) sign, the Curve (W1-2) sign, and the Reverse Curve (W1-4) sign may be combined with the Cross Road (W2-1) sign or the Side Road (W2-2 or W2-3) sign to create a combination Horizontal Alignment/Intersection (W1-10 series) sign that depicts the condition where an intersection occurs within or immediately adjacent to a turn or curve.

'''Support. '''[[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.64|EPG 903.2.64]] contains information about the use of an advance street name plaque to identify an intersecting road.

'''Guidance. '''Elements of the combination Horizontal Alignment/Intersection sign related to horizontal alignment should comply with the provisions of [[#903.3.7|EPG 903.3.7]], and elements related to intersection configuration should comply with the provisions of [[#903.3.33|EPG 903.3.33]]. The symbol design should approximate the configuration of the intersecting roadway(s). No more than one Cross Road or two Side Road symbols should be displayed on any one combination Horizontal Alignment/Intersection sign.

A layout of the proposed sign should be included when ordering or when including the sign in design plans.

'''Standard. '''The use of the combination Horizontal Alignment/Intersection sign shall be in accordance with the provisions of [[#903.3.7|EPG 903.3.7]] for the appropriate Turn or Curve sign.

If used, a W1-10L sign designation shall indicate a curve to the left, while a W1-10R sign designation shall indicate a curve to the right.

=={{SpanID|903.3.10}}903.3.10 One-Direction Large Arrow Sign (W1-6) (MUTCD Section 2C.10)==

[[File:W1-6.png|100px|thumb|center|<center>'''W1-6'''</center>]]

'''Standard. '''A One-Direction Large Arrow sign shall be used to delineate a change in horizontal alignment where the advisory speed is 30 mph or lower.

The One-Direction Large Arrow sign shall be a horizontal rectangle with an arrow pointing to the left or right.

If used, the One-Direction Large Arrow sign shall be installed on the outside of a turn or curve in line with and at approximately a right angle to approaching traffic.

The One-Direction Large Arrow sign shall not be used where there is no alignment change in the direction of travel, such as at the beginnings and ends of medians or at center piers.

The One-Direction Large Arrow sign directing traffic to the right shall not be used in the central island of a roundabout.

'''Guidance. '''The One-Direction Large Arrow sign should be visible for a sufficient distance to provide the road user with adequate time to react to the change in alignment.

If Chevron Alignment signs are used to supplement the One-Direction Large Arrow sign, chevrons, and arrow signs should be installed so they do not visually block each other.

=={{SpanID|903.3.11}}903.3.11 Truck Rollover Sign (W1-13) (MUTCD Section 2C.11) ==

[[File:W1-13.png|center|100px|thumb|<center>'''W1-13'''</center>]]

'''Option. '''A Truck Rollover (W1-13) sign may be used as a supplement to a horizontal alignment warning sign to warn drivers of vehicles with a high center of gravity, such as trucks, tankers, and recreational vehicles, of a curve or turn where there are:
:A. Past incidents of truck rollovers at the specific location,
:B. High volumes of trucks, or
:C. A speed differential (see [[#903.3.6|EPG 903.3.6]]) that might pose a greater risk for vehicles with high centers of gravity.

'''Guidance. '''Where engineering judgment determines the need for the installation of a Truck Rollover (W1-13) sign, it should be located downstream of the horizontal alignment warning sign in advance of the curve.

'''Standard. '''If a Truck Rollover (W1-13) sign is used, it shall be accompanied by an Advisory Speed (W13-1P) plaque indicating the recommended speed for vehicles with a higher center of gravity.

'''Option. '''The Truck Rollover sign may include conspicuity enhancements, or may be a blank-out sign, activated by the detection of an approaching vehicle with a high center of gravity that is traveling in excess of the recommended speed for the condition.

'''Support. '''The curved arrow on the Truck Rollover sign shows the direction of roadway curvature. The truck tips in the opposite direction.

=={{SpanID|903.3.12}}903.3.12 Advisory Exit and Ramp Speed Signs (W13-2 and W13-3) and Combination Horizontal Alignment/Advisory Exit and Ramp Speed Signs (W13-6 through W13-13) (MUTCD Section 2C.12)==
<center>
{| style=""
|-
|[[File:W13-2.png|center|102px|thumb|<center>'''W13-2'''</center>]]
|[[File:W13-3.png|center|98px|thumb|<center>'''W13-3'''</center>]]
|[[File:W13-6.png|center|100px|thumb|<center>'''W13-6'''</center>]]
|[[File:W13-7.png|center|88px|thumb|<center>'''W13-7'''</center>]]
|}
{|
|[[File:W13-8.png|center|98px|thumb|<center>'''W13-8'''</center>]]
|[[File:W13-9.png|center|100px|thumb|<center>'''W13-9'''</center>]]
|[[File:W13-10.png|center|100px|thumb|<center>'''W13-10'''</center>]]
|[[File:W13-11.png|center|102px|thumb|<center>'''W13-11'''</center>]]
|[[File:W13-12.png|center|100px|thumb|<center>'''W13-12'''</center>]]
|[[File:W13-13.png|center|100px|thumb|<center>'''W13-13'''</center>]]
|}
</center>

'''Standard. '''Where an advisory speed is posted in advance of a freeway or expressway exit, the Advisory Exit Speed (W13-2) sign shall be used.

Where an advisory speed is posted in advance of a conventional road ramp or to another roadway or roadside facility, the Advisory Ramp Speed (W13-3) sign shall be used.

An Advisory Exit Speed or Advisory Ramp Speed sign shall be used when the difference between the mainline roadway speed limit and the exit or ramp advisory speed in the vicinity of the departure is 20 mph or greater.

'''Guidance'''. An Advisory Exit Speed or Advisory Ramp Speed sign should be used when the difference between the mainline roadway speed limit and the exit or ramp advisory speed in the vicinity of the departure is 15 mph.

'''Option. '''An Advisory Exit Speed or Advisory Ramp Speed sign may be used based on engineering judgment when the difference between the mainline roadway speed limit and the exit or ramp advisory speed in the vicinity of the departure is 10 mph or less.

The Combination Horizontal Alignment/Advisory Exit Speed (W13-6, W13-8, and W13-10) signs may be used in lieu of the Advisory Exit Speed (W13-2) sign, and the combination Horizontal Alignment/Advisory Ramp Speed (W13-7, W13-9, and W13-11) signs may be used in lieu of the Advisory Ramp Speed (W13-3) sign.

The Combination Truck Rollover/Advisory Exit Speed and Truck Rollover/Advisory Ramp Speed (W13-12 and W13-13) signs may be used in lieu of the W13-2 and W13-3 signs respectively if the tip over condition is in the vicinity of the gore.

'''Standard. '''Roadway geometrics represented on the Combination Horizontal Alignment/Advisory Exit and Combination Horizontal Alignment/Advisory Ramp Speed signs shall be limited to the standard signs shown in the EPG.

'''Guidance. '''If used, the Advisory Exit Speed sign or the Combination Horizontal Alignment/Advisory Exit Speed sign should be installed along the deceleration lane. The Advisory Exit Speed or the Combination Horizontal Alignment/Advisory Exit Speed signs should be visible in time for the road user to decelerate and make an exiting maneuver.

Regulatory Speed Limit signs (see [[#903.3.20|EPG 903.3.20]]) should not be located in the vicinity of exit ramps or deceleration lanes, particularly where they will conflict with the advisory speed displayed on the Advisory Exit or Ramp Speed signs.

'''Support. '''[[#903.3.6|EPG 903.3.6]] contains provisions for the determination of the displayed advisory speed.

[[#tab903.3.4|Table 903.3.4]] lists recommended advance sign placement distances for deceleration to various advisory speeds.

'''Option. '''Where there is a need to remind road users of the recommended advisory speed, a horizontal alignment warning sign with an advisory speed plaque displaying the same advisory speed may be installed at a downstream location along the ramp.

'''Guidance. '''If the ramp curvature changes to the extent that it warrants a lower advisory speed, a horizontal alignment warning sign with the new advisory speed should be displayed in advance of the change in curvature.

'''Option. '''The One-Direction Large Arrow (W1-6) sign may be installed beyond the exit gore on the outside of the curve to provide additional warning of an immediate change in curvature. When used in conjunction with the exit speed, the One-Direction Large Arrow (W1-6) sign may be supplemented with a Confirmation Advisory Speed (W13-1aP) plaque when the plaque is not used with the Exit Gore (E5-1 series) sign.

'''Guidance. '''The horizontal alignment symbol displayed on the Combination Horizontal Alignment/Advisory Exit and Ramp Speed signs should be consistent with the horizontal geometry of the ramp.

'''Support. '''Examples of advisory speed signing for exit ramps are shown in [[#fig903.3.12|Figure 903.3.12]].

{{SpanID|fig903.3.12}}
[[File:Figure 903.3.12 Examples of Exit Ramp Advisory Speed and Other Warning Signs.png|thumb|center|800px|alt="Two vertical northbound lanes of a divided highway with an exit loop ramp are shown.
At the bottom of the figure, and to the right of the right northbound lane, facing south is an exit direction sign followed by a W13-2 or a W13-6R sign. At the entrance to the exit ramp is an E5-1a sign with a supplemental W13-1aP plaque followed by an optional W1-6R with a W13-1aP sign assembly. W1-8R chevron signs are shown along the curve."
|'''Figure 903.3.12''' Examples of Exit Ramp Advisory Speed and Other Warning Signs]]

=={{SpanID|903.3.13}}903.3.13 Vehicle Speed Feedback Sign and Plaque (W13-20 and W13-20aP) (MUTCD Section 2C.13)==

'''Option. '''A Vehicle Speed Feedback (W13-20) sign or (W13-20aP) plaque (see [[#fig903.3.13|Figure 903.3.13]]) that displays the speed of an approaching vehicle to the vehicle operator may be used to provide warning to drivers of their speed in relation to either a speed limit (R2-1) sign or a horizontal alignment warning sign assembly with a posted advisory speed.

'''Standard. '''When used to display the speed of an approaching vehicle in relation to the posted speed limit, the Vehicle Speed Feedback (W13-20aP) plaque shall be mounted below a Speed Limit (R2-1) sign (see [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2.20|EPG 903.2.20]]).

The Vehicle Speed Feedback assembly shall not be installed at a location where the posted speed limit on the route changes. Vehicle Speed Feedback assemblies shall be placed anywhere downstream of a speed limit change but shall be a minimum of 200 feet downstream of a speed limit change on conventional routes and a minimum of 400 feet downstream of a speed limit change on expressways of freeways. Vehicle Speed Feedback assemblies shall be installed in accordance with the [https://epg.modot.org/forms/general_files/TS/TA_Your_Speed_Feedback_Assembly.pdf Vehicle Speed Feedback Typical Application].

When used to supplement a horizontal alignment warning sign advisory speed, the Vehicle Speed Feedback (W13-20) sign shall be an independent installation near the point of curvature of a horizontal curve (see [[#903.3.6|EPG 903.3.6]]).

The legend YOUR SPEED shall be a black legend on a yellow retroreflective background, except as provided in [[616.8 TTC Zone Warning Signs (MUTCD Chapter 6H) #616.8.1|EPG 616.8.1]] and [[908.2 Signs (MUTCD Chapter 7B) #908.2.1|908.2.1]]. The changeable legend displaying the speed of the approaching vehicle shall be a yellow luminous legend on a black opaque background. The vehicle speed displayed on the changeable portion of the sign shall be displayed as an integer. The Vehicle Speed Feedback sign and plaque shall not flash, strobe, change color, or use other animated elements integrated into the changeable legend display. When no vehicles are approaching, the changeable display shall not display a legend.

Vehicle Speed Feedback sign equipment shall not have the capability to collect, store or transmit personally identifiable information of any type.

'''Guidance. '''The changeable portion of the Vehicle Speed Feedback legend should be approximately the same height, width, and stroke of those on the Speed Limit sign it supplements or is mounted below.

When a W13-20aP plaque is used with a Speed Limit sign it should be approximately the same width as the Speed Limit sign it is mounted below.

{{SpanID|fig903.3.13}}
[[File:Figure 903.3.13 Vehicle Speed Feedback Sign and Plaque.png|thumb|center|400px|alt="The figure shows two versions of a vehicle speed feedback sign. On the left is a stand-alone sign labeled W13-20. It has a yellow background with the words “YOUR SPEED” above an electronic display showing the number “42” in yellow LED digits. A caption below states that the stand-alone sign is placed at the beginning of curves and turns to reaffirm the advisory speed associated with the advance horizontal alignment sign.

On the right is a supplemental plaque labeled W13-20aP. A white “SPEED LIMIT 35” sign is shown above the yellow “YOUR SPEED 42” electronic display. The caption explains that the supplemental plaque is installed below a speed limit sign and is used downstream of speed limit changes or within a speed zone to reaffirm the speed limit."
|'''Figure 903.3.13''' Vehicle Speed Feedback Sign and Plaque]]

=={{SpanID|903.3.14}}903.3.14 Hill Signs (W7-1 and W7-1c) (MUTCD Section 2C.14)==
<center>
{|
| [[File:W7-1.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W7-1'''</center>]]
| [[File:W7-1c.png|thumb|center|103px|alt=|<center>'''W7-1c'''</center>]]
|}
</center>

'''Guidance. '''The Hill (W7-1) sign should be used in advance of a downgrade where the length, percent of grade, horizontal curvature, and/or other physical features require special precautions on the part of road users.

The Hill sign and supplemental grade (W7-3P) plaque (see [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.63|EPG 903.3.63]]) used in combination, or the W7-1a sign used alone, should be installed in advance of downgrades for the following conditions:
:A. 5% grade that is more than 3,000 feet in length,
:B. 6% grade that is more than 2,000 feet in length,
:C. 7% grade that is more than 1,000 feet in length,
:D. 8% grade that is more than 750 feet in length, or
:E. 9% grade that is more than 500 feet in length.

These signs should also be installed for steeper grades or where crash experience and field observations indicate a need.

Supplemental plaques (see [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.57|EPG 903.3.57]] and [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.63|903.3.63]]) and larger signs should be used for emphasis or where special hill characteristics exist. On longer grades, the use of the Hill sign with a distance (W7-3aP) plaque at periodic intervals of approximately 1-mile spacing should be considered.

'''Support. '''The Uphill (W7-1c) sign is also available by special request.

=={{SpanID|903.3.15}}903.3.15 ROAD NARROWS Sign (W5-1) (MUTCD 2C.17)==
[[File:W5-1.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W5-1'''</center>]]

'''Guidance. '''A ROAD NARROWS (W5-1) sign should be used in advance of a transition on two-lane roads where the pavement width is reduced abruptly to a width such that vehicles traveling in opposite directions cannot simultaneously travel through the narrow portion of the roadway without reducing speed.

'''Option. '''Additional emphasis may be provided by the use of object markers and delineators (see [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.70|EPG 903.3.70]] through [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.73|EPG 903.3.73]] and [[620.6 Delineators (MUTCD Chapter 3G)|EPG 620.6]]). The Advisory Speed (W13-1P) plaque (see [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.59|EPG 903.3.59]]) may be used to indicate the recommended speed.

=={{SpanID|903.3.16}}903.3.16 NARROW BRIDGE Sign (W5-2) (MUTCD Section 2C.18)==
[[File:W5-2.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W5-2'''</center>]]

'''Guidance. '''A NARROW BRIDGE (W5-2) sign should be used in advance of any bridge or culvert having a two-way roadway horizontal clearance of 16 to 18 feet, or any bridge or culvert having a roadway horizontal clearance less than the width of the approach travel lanes.

Additional emphasis should be provided by the use of object markers, delineators, and/or pavement markings.

'''Option. '''A NARROW BRIDGE sign may be used in advance of a bridge or culvert on which the approach shoulders are narrowed or eliminated.

=={{SpanID|903.3.17}}903.3.17 ONE LANE BRIDGE Sign (W5-3) (MUTCD Section 2C.19)==
[[File:W5-3.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W5-3'''</center>]]

'''Guidance. '''A ONE LANE BRIDGE (W5-3) sign should be used on two-way roadways in advance of any bridge or culvert:
:A. Having a roadway horizontal clearance of less than 16 feet, or
:B. Having a roadway horizontal clearance of less than 18 feet when commercial vehicles constitute a high proportion of the traffic, or
:C. Having a roadway horizontal clearance of 18 feet or less where the sight distance on the approach is less than that shown in Condition A of [[#tab903.3.4|Table 903.3.4]].

Additional emphasis should be provided by the use of object markers, delineators, and/or pavement markings.

'''Option. '''STOP (R1-1) or YIELD (R1-2) signs (see [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2.4|EPG 903.2.4]] and [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2.5|903.2.5]]) and related pavement markings (see [[620.2 Pavement and Curb Markings (MUTCD Chapter 3B) #620.2.20|EPG 620.2.20]] and [[620.2 Pavement and Curb Markings (MUTCD Chapter 3B) #620.2.21|620.2.21]]) may be used when conditions A, B, or C in the first Guidance paragraph of this Article apply.

=={{SpanID|903.3.18}}903.3.18 Divided Highway Sign (W6-1) (MUTCD Section 2C.20)==
[[File:W6-1.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W6-1'''</center>]]

'''Guidance. '''A Divided Highway (W6-1) sign should be used on the approaches to a section of highway (not an intersection or junction) where the opposing flows of traffic are separated by a median or other physical barrier.

'''Standard. '''The Divided Highway (W6-1) sign shall not be used instead of a Keep Right (R4-7 series) sign on the approach end of a median island.

=={{SpanID|903.3.19}}903.3.19 Divided Highway Ends Sign (W6-2) (MUTCD Section 2C.21)==
[[File:W6-2.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W6-2'''</center>]]

'''Guidance. '''A Divided Highway Ends (W6-2) sign should be used in advance of the end of a section of physically divided highway (not an intersection or junction) as a warning of two-way traffic ahead.

The Two-Way Traffic (W6-3) sign (see [[#903.3.42|EPG 903.3.42]]) should be used to give warning and notice of the transition to a two-lane, two-way section.

=={{SpanID|903.3.20}}903.3.20 Double Arrow Sign (W12-1) (MUTCD Section 2C.23)==
[[File:W12-1.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W12-1'''</center>]]

'''Option. '''The Double Arrow (W12-1) sign may be used to advise road users that traffic is permitted to pass on either side of an island, obstruction, or gore in the roadway. Traffic separated by this sign may either rejoin or change directions.

'''Guidance. '''If used on an island, the Double Arrow sign should be mounted near the approach end (see [[#903.3.13|EPG 903.3.13]]).

If used in front of a pier or obstruction, the Double Arrow sign should be mounted on the face of, or just in front of, the pier or obstruction. Where stripe markings are used on the pier or obstruction, they should be discontinued to leave a 3-inch space around the outside of the Double Arrow sign.

=={{SpanID|903.3.21}}903.3.21 DEAD END, NO OUTLET, and ROAD ENDS Signs (W14-1, W14-2, and W14-13) (MUTCD Section 2C.24)==
<center>
{|
| [[File:W14-1.png|thumb|center|99px|alt=|<center>'''W14-1'''</center>]]
| [[File:W14-2.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W14-2'''</center>]]
| [[File:W14-13.png|thumb|center|96px|alt=|<center>'''W14-13'''</center>]]
|}
</center>

'''Option. '''DEAD END (W14-1) sign may be used at the entrance to a single road or street that terminates without intersecting another street. The NO OUTLET (W14-2) sign may be used at the entrance to a road or road network from which there is no other exit.

The ROAD ENDS (W14-13) sign may be used to warn of a roadway which has no outlet and which terminates in a dead end and may be used in place of the DEAD END or NO OUTLET sign where the use of the DEAD END and NO OUTLET signs would have a negative effect on traffic generators or public perceptions due to the negative connotation of the message.

'''Guidance. '''When the W14-1, W14-2, or W14-13 sign is used, the sign should be posted as near as practicable to the entry point or at a sufficient advance distance to permit the road user to avoid the dead end or no outlet condition by turning at the nearest intersecting street.

'''Standard. '''The W14-1, W14-2, or W8-26 sign shall not be used in place of the ROAD CLOSED (R11-2) sign for temporary conditions, such as high water, bridge out, etc.

'''Support. '''Information about the use of Type 4 object markers to mark the end of the road or street is contained in [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.73|EPG 903.3.73]].

=={{SpanID|903.3.22}}903.3.22 Low Clearance Signs (W12-2, and W12-2a) (MUTCD Section 2C.25)==
<center>
{|
| [[File:W12-2.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W12-2'''</center>]]
| [[File:W12-2a.png|thumb|center|130px|alt=|<center>'''W12-2a'''</center>]]
|}
</center>

'''Support. '''MoDOT is responsible for installing and maintaining overhead low clearance signs mounted on all structures passing over MoDOT routes as well as installing and maintaining overhead low clearance signs mounted all MoDOT structures passing over non-MoDOT routes (this does not include MoDOT structures passing over rail lines). MoDOT has developed specific provisions for the use of Low Clearance signs.

'''Standard. '''Low Clearance signing shall be installed to display vertical clearances available under structures within specified limits of statutory maximum vehicle heights.

The clearance displayed on the Low Clearance (W12-2 and W12-2a) signs shall be 2 inches less than the measured clearance to account for possible packed snow and ice. For example, a measured vertical clearance of 15 ft. shall be posted as 14 ft. 10 in. All clearance measurements shall be rounded down to the nearest full inch. For example, a measured vertical clearance of 14 ft. 9 ½ in. would be rounded down to 14 ft. 9 in. and posted as 14 ft. 7 in.

The statutory maximum vehicle heights and vertical clearances are as follows:
:A. Within Commercial Zones = 15 ft. statutory maximum vehicle height (16’ 0” maximum posting).
:B. On Interstate and designated highway network routes and on all routes within 10 miles of Interstate and designated highway network routes = 14 ft. statutory maximum vehicle height (15’ 0” maximum posting).
:C. On routes greater than 10 miles from Interstate and designated highway network routes = 13 ft. 6 in. statutory maximum vehicle height (15’ 0” maximum posting).

'''Support. '''For specific details on commercial zone limits and designated highway network routes, see Missouri Vehicle Route Map.

'''Standard. '''The MoDOT posting requirements for Low Clearance signs are as follows:
:A. Case I – Two Signs Required: Where the measured vertical clearance is 15 ft. 2 in. or less, but more than 13 ft. 8 in., two signs shall be used. First, a Low Clearance Overhead (W12-2a) sign shall be installed on the structure, and second, a ground-mounted Low Clearance Advance (W12-2) sign shall be placed approximately 750 ft. in advance of the structure. When an interchange is involved, the ground-mounted Low Clearance (W12-2) sign shall be located approximately 750 ft. in advance of the off-ramp.
:B. Case II – Three Signs Required: Where the measured vertical clearance is 13 ft. 8 in. or less, three signs shall be used. First, a Low Clearance Overhead (W12-2a) sign shall be installed on the structure, second, a ground-mounted Low Clearance Advance (W12-2) sign shall be placed approximately 750 ft. in advance of the structure, and third, an additional Low Clearance Advance (W12-2) sign with a Distance Ahead (W16-2P or W16-3P) plaque below the sign shall be placed at the nearest intersecting road or wide point in the road at which a vehicle can detour or turn around.
:C. Case III – One Sign: Where the measured vertical clearance is 15 ft. 2 in. or less and where the bridge is state maintained but the road beneath is not, a Low Clearance Overhead (W12-2a) sign shall be installed on the structure, but the ground-mounted Low Clearance Advance (W12-2) sign shall not be installed by MoDOT. The Low Clearance Advance sign may be installed and maintained by the local jurisdiction.
:D. Case IV – Commercial Zones: Vertical clearance signing shall be provided for structures within commercial zones (see Section 304.190 of the Revised Statutes of Missouri). Any structure with a measured vertical clearance of 16 ft. 2 in. or less within the commercial zone limits shall be posted. For measured vertical clearances greater than 15 ft. 2 in. and equal to or less than 16 ft. 2 in. within commercial zones a Low Clearance Overhead (W12-2a) sign shall be installed on the structure. The signing for measured vertical clearances of 15 ft. 2 in. or less within commercial zones shall be as described for Case I or Case II.

In the case of an arch structure or a structure which has a sloping span resulting in different vertical clearances per lane, one Low Clearance Overhead (W12-2a) sign shall be centered over each lane displaying the vertical clearance available for that lane. One sign per lane shall be applied if the difference in vertical clearance between adjacent lanes is 6 inches or greater or when the vertical clearance between the far-right lane and far-left lane is 12 inches or greater.

'''Guidance. '''Clearances should be evaluated periodically to verify the displayed clearances are accurate and to determine if additional low clearance signing is necessary, particularly when resurfacing operations have occurred, on routes onto which over-height vehicles are normally directed under the permit process, and structures that are susceptible to catastrophic failure when struck by over-height vehicles. The information should be updated in the TMS.

Where there is a need to warn of a low clearance on an intersecting road or off a freeway or expressway exit, a rectangular warning sign with an appropriate word legend should be used rather than a W12-2 sign.

'''Option. '''When only one Overhead Low Clearance (W12-2a) sign is required and mounting one sign centered over the roadway is not practical, two W12-2a signs may be installed with one sign installed to the right of the travel lanes and one sign installed to the left of the travel lanes.

'''Guidance. '''The clearance shown on the Low Clearance Advance (W12-2) sign should match the clearance on the W12-2a sign or, if there are multiple W12-2a signs, should match the lowest clearance.

{{SpanID|fig903.3.22}}
[[File:Figure 903.3.22 Examples of Low Clearance Signs.png|thumb|center|800px|alt="The figure displays four examples of signing layouts for structures with limited vertical clearance.
Case I – Vertical Clearance of 15'-2"" to 13'-9"":
A roadway labeled “MoDOT Route” passes under a structure labeled “Any Structure.” A W12-2a plaque reading “14 FT 4 IN” is placed just before the structure. Farther in advance, a W12-2 low-clearance symbol sign is shown with the legend “14'-4” placed 750 feet before the structure.
Case II – Vertical Clearance of 13'-8"" or Less:
A similar roadway labeled “MoDOT Route” passes under a structure. A W12-2a plaque reading “12 FT 6 IN” is posted at the structure. A W12-2 low-clearance symbol sign reading “12'-6” is placed 750 feet in advance. Below that sign, a W16-3P plaque shows “½ MILES.” A note indicates that the sign is placed at the nearest intersecting road or wide point.
Case III – MoDOT Bridge with Vertical Clearance of 15'-2"" or Less Over a Local Road:
A local road passes under a structure labeled “MoDOT Bridge.” A W12-2a plaque reading “14 FT 4 IN” is shown on the MoDOT route above, installed by MoDOT. On the local road, a W12-2 low-clearance symbol sign reading “14'-4” is shown as installed by the local agency.
Case IV – Vertical Clearance of 16'-2"" or Less in Commercial Zones:
A roadway labeled “MoDOT Route” passes under a structure labeled “Any Structure.” A W12-2a plaque reading “14 FT 4 IN” is placed at the structure. Text notes that advance signing should follow the placement guidelines of Case I or Case II."
|'''Figure 903.3.22''' Examples of Low Clearance Signs]]

=={{SpanID|903.3.23}}903.3.23 BUMP and DIP Signs (W8-1 and W8-2) (MUTCD Section 2C.26)==
<center>
{|
| [[File:W8-1.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W8-1'''</center>]]
| [[File:W8-2.png|thumb|center|105px|alt=|<center>'''W8-2'''</center>]]
|}
</center>

'''Support. '''BUMP and DIP signs (W8-1, W8-2) are limited use signs, only being used for locations where the condition cannot be corrected, such as low water crossings or highway-rail grade crossings.

See [[913.2 Signs (MUTCD Chapter 8B) #913.2.14|EPG 913.2.14]] for low ground clearance conditions at highway-rail grade crossings.

'''Guidance. '''BUMP (W8-1) and DIP (W8-2) signs should be used in advance of a sharp rise or depression in the profile of the road.

'''Option. '''These signs may be supplemented with an Advisory Speed plaque (see [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.59|EPG 903.3.59]]).

'''Guidance. '''The DIP sign should not be used in advance of a short stretch of depressed alignment that might momentarily hide a vehicle.

A short stretch of depressed alignment that might momentarily hide a vehicle should be treated as a no-passing zone when center line striping is provided on a two-lane or three-lane road (see [[620.2 Pavement and Curb Markings (MUTCD Chapter 3B) #620.2.3|EPG 620.2.3]]).

'''Option. '''BUMP and DIP signs may be used as temporary traffic control signs (WO8-1, WO8-2) for locations where the condition is temporary and/or where the condition can be corrected in the future (See [[616.6 Temporary Traffic Control Zone Devices (MUTCD 6F) #616.6.50|EPG 616.6.50]]).

=={{SpanID|903.3.24}}903.3.24 PAVEMENT ENDS Sign (W8-3) (MUTCD Section 2C.28)==
[[File:W8-3.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W8-3'''</center>]]

'''Guidance. '''A PAVEMENT ENDS (W8-3) sign should be used where a paved surface changes to either a gravel treated surface or an earth road surface.

'''Option. '''An Advisory Speed plaque (see [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.59|EPG 903.3.59]]) may be used when the change in roadway condition requires a reduced speed.

=={{SpanID|903.3.25}}903.3.25 Slippery When Wet Sign (W8-5) (Section 2C.30)==
[[File:W8-5.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W8-5'''</center>]]

'''Guidance. '''The Slippery When Wet sign (W8-5) is a limited use sign that should not be installed for locations where the condition can be corrected. Existing Slippery When Wet (W8-5) signs should be left in place until the condition is corrected.

'''Option. '''The Slippery When Wet (W8-5) sign may be used to warn of unexpected slippery conditions.

'''Guidance. '''When used, Slippery When Wet signs should be placed in advance of the beginning of the affected section (see [[#tab903.3.4|Table 903.3.4]]), and additional signs should be placed at appropriate intervals along the road where the condition exists.

'''Option. '''The Slippery When Wet sign may be used as a temporary traffic control sign (WO8-5) for locations where the condition is temporary and/or where the condition can be corrected in the future (See [[616.6 Temporary Traffic Control Zone Devices (MUTCD 6F) #616.6.50|EPG 616.6.50]]).

=={{SpanID|903.3.26}}903.3.26 FALLEN ROCKS Signs (W8-14)==
[[File:W8-14.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W8-14'''</center>]]

'''Option. '''The FALLEN ROCKS (W8-14) sign may be used in advance of an area that is adjacent to a hillside, mountain, or cliff where rocks frequently fall onto the roadway.

'''Guidance. '''When used, FALLEN ROCKS signs should be placed in advance of the beginning of the affected section (see [[#tab903.3.4|Table 903.3.4]]), and additional signs should be placed at appropriate intervals along the road where the condition exists.

'''Standard. '''The district shall perform an evaluation of the FALLEN ROCKS site to determine whether existing installations of the FALLEN ROCKS sign is still necessary. If it is determined that the sign is not necessary, the sign will not be replaced at the end of the service life.

=={{SpanID|903.3.27}}903.3.27 Warning Signs and Plaque for Motorcyclists (W8-15, W8-15aP, and W8-16) (MUTCD Section 2C.31) ==

'''Support. '''MoDOT does not install permanent W8-15, W8-15aP, and W8-16 signs and plaques. For temporary applications, see [[616.16 Typical Applications (MUTCD Chapter 6P)|EPG 616.16]].

=={{SpanID|903.3.28}}903.3.28 IMPASSABLE WHEN WATER OVER ROAD Sign (MUTCD Section 2C.34)==

<center>
{|
| [[File:W8-18.jpg|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W8-18'''</center>]]
| [[File:W020-3.jpg|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''WO20-3'''</center>]]
| [[File:W8-34a.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W8-34a'''</center>]]
| [[File:W08-33.jpg|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''WO8-33'''</center>]]
| [[File:D2-1 and R11-3a.png|thumb|center|130px|alt=|<center>'''D2-1 and R11-3a'''</center>]]

| [[File:R5-22.png|thumb|center|120px|alt=|<center>'''R5-22'''</center>]]
|}
</center>

'''Support.''' When a road goes underwater, MoDOT requires the road to be closed to traffic regardless of the depth of water over the road. This closure is accomplished by following [[616.16 Typical Applications (MUTCD Chapter 6P) #616.16|TA-8W]]. This TA displays two figures; the first figure applies to locations which do not flood on a frequent basis and uses standard work zone signs to close the road. The second figure applies to roads that frequently go under water and utilize permanently installed signs. These permanent signs provide critical guidance to motorists between the time the road begins to flood to the time maintenance crews can physically close the road.

MoDOT has discontinued the use of the LOW WATER CROSSING (W8-35) sign, low water crossings are designed for water to routinely flow over the roadway while traffic passes through the water. MoDOT no longer maintains low water crossings on State routes, and MoDOT’s direction is to close any road covered in any depth of water.
MoDOT has discontinued the use of the WATER GAUGE (W8-19a). Water gauges are intended to indicate the depth of the water over a road to allow motorists to judge if it is safe to proceed, however, MoDOT no longer supports motorists driving through any depth of water and closes any road which is covered by water.

'''Standard.''' Any roadway location which goes underwater shall be closed to traffic as soon as possible. Any location, regardless of flooding frequency, shall be closed using the signing package in the first figure of [[616.16 Typical Applications (MUTCD Chapter 6P) #616.16|TA-8W]].

'''Guidance.''' Any roadway which historically floods one or more times per year should have the permanent signing package found in the second figure of [[616.16 Typical Applications (MUTCD Chapter 6P) #616.16|TA-8W]] installed. This applies to locations where streams and rivers rise and flood the road surface, but not in urban areas where a road floods due to blocked or overwhelmed storm drains. This signing package, which includes the DO NOT ENTER WHEN WATER OVER ROAD (R5-22) sign, provides motorists with advanced information on how they need to react to the flooded road before maintenance crews can get to the location and physically close the roadway. The flip signs allow for an expedited closure with the work zone signs already in place, only needing to flip them from the warning sign message to the work zone message upon arriving at the location, as well as deploying the barricades and ROAD CLOSED (R11-2) sign.

Existing LOW WATER CROSSING (W8-35) signs should be removed at the earliest convenience; the presence of these signs may encourage motorists to enter a flooded road if they see the depth of water and incorrectly believe it is shallow enough to safely pass.

'''Option.''' The signing package in the second figure of [[616.16 Typical Applications (MUTCD Chapter 6P) #616.16|TA-8W]] may be installed at any location that may flood less than one time per year to facilitate quicker road closures.

=={{SpanID|903.3.29}}903.3.29 Advance Traffic Control Signs (W3-1, W3-2, W3-3, and W3-4) (MUTCD Section 2C.35)==
<center>
{|
| [[File:W3-1.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W3-1'''</center>]]
| [[File:W3-2.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W3-2'''</center>]]
| [[File:W3-3.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W3-3'''</center>]]
| [[File:W3-4.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W3-4'''</center>]]
|}
</center>

'''Standard. '''The Stop Ahead (W3-1), Yield Ahead (W3-2), and Signal Ahead (W3-3) Advance Traffic Control signs shall be installed on an approach to a primary traffic control device that is not visible for a sufficient distance to permit the road user to respond to the device (see [[#tab903.3.4|Table 903.3.4]]). The visibility criteria for a traffic control signal shall be based on having a continuous view of at least two signal faces for the distance specified in [[902.4 Design Features of Traffic Control Signals (MUTCD Chapter 4D) #tab902.4.6|Table 902.4.6]].

'''Guidance. '''Where intermittent obstructions occur, engineering judgment should determine the treatment to be implemented.

The minimum visibility distance of a signal for a facility with a speed limit above 60 mph should be determined by summing the stopping sight distance (see [[#tab903.3.1|Table 903.3.1]]) and the assumed queue length. The assumed queue length should be determined by engineering judgment.

If an advance traffic control sign is warranted for an approach at an intersection of a MoDOT maintained road and non-MoDOT maintained road, the agency responsible for the maintenance of the non-MoDOT road should be notified of the condition.

'''Support. '''Permanent obstructions causing the limited visibility might include roadway alignment or structures. Intermittent obstructions might include foliage or parked vehicles.

'''Option. '''An Advance Traffic Control sign may be used for additional emphasis of the primary traffic control device, even when the visibility distance to the device is satisfactory.

Signal Ahead (W3-3) signs may be posted on the right- and left-hand sides of the road on a high speed divided approach.

'''Support. '''[[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.64|EPG 903.3.64]] contains information about the use of an advance street name plaque to identify an intersecting road.

'''Option. '''A BE PREPARED TO STOP (W3-4) sign may be used to warn of stopped traffic caused by a traffic control signal in advance of a section of roadway that regularly experiences traffic congestion, history of crashes, or based on engineering judgement.

A Warning Beacon (see [[902.18 Flashing Beacons (MUTCD Chapter 4S) #902.18.3|EPG 902.18.3]]) may be used with an Advance Traffic Control or BE PREPARED TO STOP (W3-4) sign. If a warning beacon is used, the beacon(s) may be activated before the start of the yellow change interval referred to as lead flash, which is the time before the onset of yellow at which the warning beacon(s) begin to flash. Recommended values for lead flash in accordance with the posted speed limit are specified in [[#tab903.3.29|Table 903.3.29]].
<center>
{{SpanID|tab903.3.29}}
{| class="wikitable" style="max-width:600px; text-align: center;"
|+ '''Table 903.3.29''' Design Parameters for Advance Warning System
|-
! Posted Speed (mph)
! Distance Between Warning Sign and Stop Line (ft)
! Lead Flash, Advance Warning Before End of Green (sec)
|-
| 70
| 871 to 975 max**
| 8
|-
| 70
| 730 min* to 870
| 7
|-
| 65
| 811 to 905 max**
| 8
|-
| 65
| 645 min* to 810
| 7
|-
| 60
| 661 to 745 max**
| 7
|-
| 60
| 570 min* to 660
| 6
|-
| 55
| 606 to 685 max**
| 7
|-
| 55
| 495 min* to 605
| 6
|-
| 50
| 476 to 550 max**
| 6
|-
| 50
| 425 min* to 475
| 5
|-
| 45
| 426 to 495 max**
| 6
|-
| 45
| 360 min* to 425
| 5
|-
| style="text-align: left" colspan="3" | *The advance traffic control sign shall not be installed less than this minimum distance. **The sign placement distance can exceed the "max" distance. The lead flash time should be determined by coordinating with the MoDOT Highway Safety and Traffic Division.
|}
</center>

'''Standard. '''When a BE PREPARED TO STOP (W3-4) sign is used in advance of a traffic control signal, it shall be used in addition to a Signal Ahead sign and shall be placed a minimum of 200 feet downstream from the Signal Ahead sign. The BE PREPARED TO STOP (W3-4) sign shall be installed as specified in [[#tab903.3.4|Table 903.3.4]] (See [[#fig903.3.29.1|Figure 903.3.29.1]]).

A BE PREPARED TO STOP (W3-4) sign with a warning beacon shall not be considered for intersection approaches with a posted speed limit of 40 mph or less.

{{SpanID|fig903.3.29.1}}
[[File:Figure 903.3.29.1 Example for Placement of Be Prepared To Stop Sign.png|thumb|center|500px|alt="The figure shows a four-leg intersection controlled by a traffic signal. A vertical roadway and a horizontal roadway intersect, each with one travel lane in each direction. A traffic signal head with red, yellow, and green indications is shown at the center of the intersection.
On the lower approach of the vertical roadway, two advance warning signs are shown on the right side. The sign closest to the intersection is a W3-4 “BE PREPARED TO STOP” sign, with an optional yellow beacon mounted above it. Farther downstream, a W3-3 traffic signal symbol sign is shown. The spacing between the two signs is labeled “200 ft MIN.”
A separate dimension arrow between the W3-4 sign and the intersection is marked with an asterisk, referencing a note that states, “See Table 903.3.4 for the recommended minimum distance.”"
|'''Figure 903.3.29.1''' Example for Placement of BE PREPARED TO STOP Sign]]

{{SpanID|fig903.3.29.2}}
[[File:Figure 903.3.29.2 Example for Placement Of Signal Ahead Sign-Condition B.png|thumb|center|500px|alt="The figure shows a four-leg intersection controlled by a traffic signal. A vertical roadway and a horizontal roadway intersect, each with one travel lane in each direction. A signal head with red, yellow, and green indications is displayed at the center of the intersection.
On the lower approach of the vertical roadway, a dimension arrow indicates the placement location for an advance warning sign. The arrow is marked with an asterisk referring to a note that reads, “See Table 903.3.4 for the recommended minimum distance.”
To the right of this lower approach, a W3-3 traffic signal symbol sign is shown with an optional yellow beacon mounted above it."
|'''Figure 903.3.29.2''' Example for Placement of Signal Ahead Sign]]

=={{SpanID|903.3.30}}903.3.30 Advance Ramp Control Signal Signs (W3-7 and W3-8) (MUTCD Section 2C.37)==
<center>
{|
| [[File:W3-7.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W3-7'''</center>]]
| [[File:W3-8.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W3-8'''</center>]]
|}
</center>

'''Option. '''A RAMP METER AHEAD (W3-7) sign may be used to warn road users that a freeway entrance ramp is metered and that they will encounter a ramp control signal (see [[902.16 Traffic Control Signals for Freeway Entrance Ramps (MUTCD Chapter 4P) #902.16|EPG 902.16]]).

'''Guidance. '''When the ramp control signals are operated only during certain periods of the day, a RAMP METERED WHEN FLASHING (W3-8) sign should be installed in advance of the ramp control signal near the entrance to the ramp, or on the arterial on the approach to the ramp, to alert road users to the presence and operation of ramp meters.

'''Standard. '''The RAMP METERED WHEN FLASHING sign shall be supplemented with a Warning Beacon (see [[902.18 Flashing Beacons (MUTCD Chapter 4S) #902.18.3|EPG 902.18.3]]) that flashes when the ramp control signal is in operation.

=={{SpanID|903.3.31}}903.3.31 WATCH FOR STOPPED TRAFFIC Sign (W26-1) (MUTCD Section 2C.39)==

[[File:W26-1.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W26-1'''</center>]]

'''Option. '''The WATCH FOR STOPPED TRAFFIC (W26-1) sign may be used to warn road users of the possibility of vehicles stopping abruptly in the travel lane due to recurring congested conditions.

=={{SpanID|903.3.32}}903.3.32 Reduced Speed Limit Ahead and Speed Zone Signs (W3-5) (MUTCD Section 2C.40)==
[[File:W3-5.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W3-5'''</center>]]

'''Standard'''. A Reduced Speed Limit Ahead (W3-5) sign shall be used to inform road users of a reduced speed zone where the speed limit is being reduced by more than 10 mph.

'''Option. '''A Reduced Speed Limit Ahead (W3-5) sign may be used to inform road users of a reduced speed zone where the speed limit is being reduced by 10 mph or less based if engineering judgment indicates the need for advance notice to comply with the posted speed limit ahead.

'''Standard. '''If used, a Reduced Speed Limit Ahead sign shall be followed by a Speed Limit (R2-1) sign (see [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2.20|EPG 903.2.20]]), installed at the beginning of the zone where the speed limit applies.

The speed limit displayed on the W3-5 sign shall be identical to the speed limit displayed on the subsequent Speed Limit sign.

=={{SpanID|903.3.33}}903.3.33 Intersection Warning Signs (W2-1 through W2-8) (MUTCD Section 2C.41)==
<center>
{|
| [[File:W2-1.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W2-1'''</center>]]
| [[File:W2-2.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W2-2'''</center>]]
| [[File:W2-3.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W2-3'''</center>]]
| [[File:W2-3a.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W2-3a'''</center>]]
|}
{|
| [[File:W2-4.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W2-4'''</center>]]
| [[File:W2-5.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W2-5'''</center>]]
| [[File:W2-6.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W2-6'''</center>]]
|-
| [[File:W2-7L.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W2-7L'''</center>]]
| [[File:W2-7R.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W2-7R'''</center>]]
| [[File:W2-8.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W2-8'''</center>]]
|}
</center>

'''Support. '''Intersection Warning Signs are used when there is limited stopping sight distance, history of crashes, or based on engineering judgment.

'''Option. '''A Cross Road (W2-1), Side Road (W2-2, W2-3, or W2-3a), T-Intersection (W2-4), or Y-Intersection (W2-5) sign may be used in advance of an intersection to indicate the presence of an intersection and the possibility of turning or entering traffic.

'''Standard. '''The Circular Intersection (W2-6) sign shall be installed in advance of roundabout intersections. The appropriate Advisory Speed supplemental plaque (W13-1P) shall be installed below the Circular Intersection sign.

'''Option. '''If other circular intersections exist, that would not be classified as roundabouts, the Circular Intersection (W2-6) sign may be used.

'''Support. '''[[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.64|EPG 903.2.64]] contains information about the use of an advance street name plaque to identify an intersecting road.

'''Guidance. '''The Intersection Warning sign should illustrate and depict the general configuration of the intersecting roadway, such as a cross road, side road, T-intersection, or Y-intersection.

Intersection Warning signs, other than the Circular Intersection (W2-6) sign, the T-intersection (W2-4) sign, and the Grade Crossing and Intersection Advance Warning (W10-2, W10-3, and W10-4) signs (see [[913.2 Signs (MUTCD Chapter 8B) #913.2.6|EPG 913.2.6]]) should not be used on approaches controlled by STOP signs, YIELD signs, or signals.

If an Intersection Warning sign is used where the side roads are not opposite of each other, the Offset Side Roads (W2-7) sign should be used instead of the Cross Road sign.

If an Intersection Warning sign is used where two closely-spaced side roads are on the same side of the highway, the Double Side Roads (W2-8) sign should be used instead of the Side Road sign.

No more than two side roads should be depicted on the same side of the highway on a W2-7 or W2-8 sign, and no more than three side roads should be depicted on a W2-7 or W2-8 sign.

=={{SpanID|903.3.34}}903.3.34 Advance Intersection Signs (W2-10a and W2-11a)==
<center>
{|
| [[File:W2-10a.jpg|thumb|center|alt=|100px|<center>'''W2-10a'''</center>]]
| [[File:W2-11a.jpg|thumb|center|alt=|100px|<center>'''W2-11a'''</center>]]
|}
</center>

'''Support.''' Advance Intersection signs are typically associated with restricted sight distance and gap selection at stop controlled intersections.

'''Option.''' The WATCH FOR ENTERING TRAFFIC (W2-10a) sign may be used on the uncontrolled through roadway approach to a side or cross road stop controlled intersection to warn of entering traffic from the side or cross road.

The WATCH FOR APPROACHING TRAFFIC (W2-11a) sign may be used on the side road stop controlled approach to warn of traffic approaching on the uncontrolled through road.

=={{SpanID|903.3.35}}903.3.35 Two-Direction Large Arrow Sign (W1-7) (MUTCD Section 2C.43)==
[[File:W1-7.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W1-7'''</center>]]

'''Standard. '''The Two-Direction Large Arrow (W1-7) sign shall be a horizontal rectangle.

If used, the Two-Direction Large arrow sign shall be installed on the far side of a T-intersection in line with, and at approximately a right angle to, traffic approaching from the stem of the T-intersection.

The Two-Direction Large Arrow sign shall not be used where there is no change in the direction of travel such as at the beginnings and ends of medians or at center piers.

'''Guidance. '''The Two-Direction Large Arrow sign should be visible for a sufficient distance to provide the road user with adequate time to react to the intersection configuration.

=={{SpanID|903.3.36}}903.3.36 Traffic Signal Oncoming Extended Green Signs (W25-1 and W25-2) (MUTCD Section 2C.44)==
<center>
{|
| [[File:W25-1.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W25-1'''</center>]]
| [[File:W25-2.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W25-2'''</center>]]
|}
</center>

'''Standard. '''At locations where either a W25-1 or a W25-2 sign is required based on the provisions in [[902.6 Steady (Stop-and-Go) Operation of Traffic Control Signals (MUTCD Chapter 4F) #902.6.1|EPG 902.6.1]], the W25-1 or W25-2 sign shall be installed near the left-most signal face for the approach.

=={{SpanID|903.3.37}}903.3.37 Merge Signs and Plaque (W4-1 and W4-5) (MUTCD Section 2C.45)==
<center>
{|
| [[File:W4-1.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W4-1'''</center>]]
| [[File:W4-5.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W4-5'''</center>]]
|}
</center>

'''Guidance. '''The Merge (W4-1) sign should be installed on the side of the major roadway where merging traffic will be encountered and in such a position as to not obstruct the road user’s view of entering traffic.

When a Merge sign is installed on a major roadway, the symbol should be oriented right or left as appropriate to depict the side from which the merge occurs, with the arrow representing the major roadway and the curved stem representing the entering roadway.

When a Merge sign is to be installed on an entering roadway that curves before merging with the major roadway, such as a ramp with a curving horizontal alignment as it approaches the major roadway, the Entering Roadway Merge (W4-5) sign should be used to better portray the actual geometric conditions to road users on the entering roadway.

Where two roadways of approximately equal importance converge and merging movements are required, a Merge sign should be placed on each roadway.

The Merge sign should not be used where two roadways converge and merging movements are not required.

'''Standard. '''The Merge sign shall not be used in place of a Lane Ends (W4-2) sign (see [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.39|EPG 903.3.39]]) where lanes of traffic moving on a single roadway must merge because of a reduction in the actual or usable pavement width.

'''Support. '''Examples of the use of Merge (W4-1) signs are shown in Drawing A in [[#fig903.3.37|Figure 903.3.37]].

{{SpanID|fig903.3.37}}
[[File:Figure 903.3.37 Examples of Merge and Added Lane Sign Placement for Entering and Converging Roadways.png|thumb|center|800px|alt="A: A horizontal roadway consisting of three eastbound travel lanes is shown. A converging lane adds a fourth lane to this three-lane horizontal roadway. Two lanes are merging together from the north and south while traveling eastbound to form one converging lane. A W4-1R sign is shown to the right of the right shoulder of the north merge lane and a W4-1L sign is shown to the left of the left shoulder of the south merge lane. The lanes merge together into one converging lane just beyond these signs. Another W4-1R sign is shown on the right shoulder of the right travel lane of the horizontal roadway before the converging lane enters the horizontal roadway.
B: This example only shows the right converging lane of a three-lane horizontal roadway where the converging lane adds a fourth lane. A W4-6R sign is shown on the left of the left shoulder of the converging lane. A W4-3R sign is shown on the right shoulder of the right travel lane of the horizontal roadway before the converging lane enters the horizontal roadway. An additional example shows a W4-6R sign on the left of the left shoulder facing southbound of the converging lane. The converging lane is shown to be entering the right lane of the horizontal roadway at a 90-degree angle with a sharp curve to the right when entering the roadway. A W4-3R sign is shown on the right shoulder of the right travel lane of the horizontal roadway before the converging lane enters the horizontal roadway. This example only shows the right lane of the three-lane horizontal roadway."
|'''Figure 903.3.37''' Examples of Merge and Added Lane Sign Placement for Entering and Converging Roadways]]

=={{SpanID|903.3.38}}903.3.38 Added Lane Signs (W4-3 and W4-6) (MUTCD Section 2C.46)==
<center>
{|
| [[File:W4-3.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W4-3'''</center>]]
| [[File:W4-6.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W4-6'''</center>]]
|}
</center>

'''Guidance. '''The Added Lane (W4-3) sign should be installed in advance of a point where two roadways converge and merging movements are not required. When possible, the Added Lane sign should be placed such that it is visible from both roadways; if this is not possible, an Added Lane sign should be placed on the side of each roadway.

When an Added Lane (W4-3) sign is installed on a major roadway, the symbol should be oriented right or left as appropriate to depict the side from which the entering roadway converges, with the straight arrow representing the major roadway and the curved arrow representing the entering roadway. The sign should be located on the side of the major roadway from which the entering roadway converges.

When an Added Lane sign is to be installed on a roadway that curves before converging with another roadway that has a tangent alignment at the point of convergence, the Entering Roadway Added Lane (W4-6) sign should be used to better portray the actual geometric conditions to road users on the curving roadway.

'''Support. '''Examples of the use of Added Lane (W4-3) and Entering Roadway Added Lane (W4-6) signs are shown in Drawing B in [[#fig903.3.37|Figure 903.3.37]].

=={{SpanID|903.3.39}}903.3.39 Lane Ends Signs (W4-2 and W9-1) (Section 2C.47)==
<center>
{|
| [[File:W4-2.png|thumb|center|106px|alt=|<center>'''W4-2'''</center>]]
| [[File:W9-1.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W9-1'''</center>]]
|}
</center>

'''Support. '''The Lane Ends (W4-2) and RIGHT (LEFT) LANE ENDS (W9-1) signs are used to warn of the reduction in the number of traffic lanes in the direction of travel.

The sequence of the W4-2 and W9-1 signs is illustrated in [[#fig903.3.39.1|Figures 903.3.39.1]] to [[#fig903.3.39.5|903.3.39.5]]

'''Guidance. '''The Lane Ends (W4-2) sign should be installed at the advance placement distance in accordance with [[#tab903.3.4|Table 903.3.4]].

A RIGHT (LEFT) LANE ENDS (W9-1) sign should be installed in advance of the Lane Ends sign, at the advance placement distance in accordance with [[#tab903.3.4|Table 903.3.4]], to provide additional warning that a lane is ending and that a merging maneuver will be required.

If a W9-1 sign is installed, a Distance (W16-2P series or W16-3P series) plaque (see [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.59|EPG 903.3.59]]) should be installed below the W9-1 sign.

On one-way streets or on divided highways where the left-hand lane is ending and the width of the median will permit, the W9-1 and W4-2 signs should be placed facing approaching traffic on the left-hand side or median.

'''Option. '''Where a lane ends a distance beyond the intersection that is less than the advance placement distance indicated in [[#tab903.3.4|Table 903.3.4]], the W4-2 sign may be located at the far side of the intersection (see [[#fig903.3.39.4|Figure 903.3.39.4]]).

'''Guidance. '''When the W4-2 sign is located at the far side of the intersection in accordance with the Option paragraph above, the W9-1 sign should be placed upstream of the intersection with the appropriate distance plaque.

'''Support. '''[[620.2 Pavement and Curb Markings (MUTCD Chapter 3B) #620.2.14|EPG 620.2.14]] contains information regarding the use of pavement markings in conjunction with a lane reduction.

'''Guidance. '''Lane Ends signs should not be installed in advance of the downstream end of an acceleration lane.

'''Standard. '''The W4-2 and W9-1 signs shall not be used in dropped lane situations. In dropped lane situations on conventional roads at intersections, regulatory signs (see [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2.26|EPG 903.2.26]]) shall be used to inform road users that a through lane becomes a mandatory turn lane.

{{SpanID|fig903.3.39.1}}
[[File:Figure 903.3.39.1 Example Sequences for Lane Ends and Lane Merge Signs (Sheet 1 of 5).png|thumb|center|800px|alt=A vertical roadway is shown with four travel lanes at the bottom of the figure transitioning to three travel lanes at the top. The right lane ends through a taper marked by three white lane-reduction arrows placed in the right travel lane, each pointing diagonally toward the adjacent lane. At the bottom right of the figure, a W9-1R “RIGHT LANE ENDS” sign is mounted above a W16-2P “1000 FEET” plaque. Farther upstream, a W4-2R lane-reduction symbol sign is shown to the right of the roadway. The distance between the W4-2R sign and the beginning of the taper is labeled, “See Table 903.3.4 to determine the advance placement distance.” A legend indicates the direction of travel. Two notes are shown: “1. See EPG 620.2.14 Lane Reduction Pavement Markings” and “2. See EPG 620.2.22 Merge Arrows.”
|'''Figure 903.3.39.1''' Example Sequences for Lane Ends and Lane Merge Signs ''(Sheet 1 of 5)'']]

{{SpanID|fig903.3.39.2}}
[[File:Figure 903.3.39.2 Example Sequences for Lane Ends and Lane Merge Signs (Sheet 2 of 5).png|thumb|center|800px|alt=A vertical roadway is shown with two travel lanes at the bottom of the figure and one travel lane at the top. The right lane ends through a taper marked by white lane-reduction arrows placed in the right travel lane, each pointing diagonally toward the adjacent lane. At the bottom right of the figure, a W9-1R “RIGHT LANE ENDS” sign is mounted above a W16-2P “1000 FEET” plaque. Farther upstream, a W4-2R lane-reduction symbol sign is shown to the right of the roadway. The distance between the W4-2R sign and the beginning of the taper is labeled, “See Table 903.3.4 to determine the advance placement distance.” A legend indicates the direction of travel. A note states, “See EPG 620.2.14 for lane-reduction pavement markings and EPG 620.2.22 for merge arrows.”
|'''Figure 903.3.39.2''' Example Sequences for Lane Ends and Lane Merge Signs ''(Sheet 2 of 5)'']]

{{SpanID|fig903.3.39.3}}
[[File:Figure 903.3.39.3 Example Sequences for Lane Ends and Lane Merge Signs (Sheet 3 of 5).jpg|thumb|center|800px|alt="The figure shows two roadway examples where the left lane ends. The illustration on the left depicts an undivided roadway with one travel lane in one direction and two travel lanes in the opposite direction. On the side with two lanes, the left lane ends through a taper marked with a yellow painted gore and white lane-reduction arrows placed in the left travel lane, each arrow pointing diagonally toward the adjacent lane. To the right of this roadway, a W9-1L “LEFT LANE ENDS” sign is shown mounted above a W16-2P “1000 FEET” plaque, and a W4-2L lane-reduction symbol sign is shown farther upstream. The distance between the W4-2L sign and the beginning of the taper is labeled, “See Table 903.3.4 to determine the advance placement distance.”
The illustration on the right depicts a divided or one-way roadway with two travel lanes. The left lane ends through a taper marked by white lane-reduction arrows pointing diagonally toward the adjacent lane. To the right of this roadway, a W9-1L “LEFT LANE ENDS” sign is shown mounted above a W16-2P “1000 FEET” plaque, with a W4-2L lane-reduction symbol sign shown farther upstream. The same advance placement distance label is shown.
A note states, “See EPG 620.2.14 for lane-reduction pavement markings and EPG 620 for merge arrows.” A legend indicates the direction of travel."
|'''Figure 903.3.39.3''' Example Sequences for Lane Ends and Lane Merge Signs ''(Sheet 3 of 5)'']]

{{SpanID|fig903.3.39.4}}
[[File:Figure 903.3.39.4 Example Sequences for Lane Ends and Lane Merge Sign (Sheet 4 of 5).png|thumb|center|800px|alt=The intersection of a two-lane horizontal roadway with a three-lane vertical roadway is shown.The right and left side of the horizontal roadway is composed of one through travel lane in each direction. The left side also has a third lane which is a right-turn only lane when approaching the intersection traveling eastbound to turn south.The vertical roadway is composed of two northbound lanes and one southbound lane. The south side of this vertical roadway is composed of a combination straight or left-turn lane in the left northbound travel lane and a combination straight or right-turn lane in the right northbound travel lane. Solid white through and turn arrows are shown in these travel lanes.Starting near the bottom of the figure, to the right of the right shoulder of the northbound lanes, a sign assembly composed of a W9-1R sign mounted above a W16-2P plaque is shown.On the north side of this vertical roadway, a W4-2R sign is shown to indicate that the two northbound lanes are transitioning to one lane ahead. Before the right lane taper begins, two solid white arrows are shown in the right northbound travel lane on the pavement pointing diagonally to the left northbound travel lane. An “optional dotted lane line” is shown adjacent to these arrows in the middle of the travel lanes. All pavement markings are denoting a northbound left lane merge ahead.
|'''Figure 903.3.39.4''' Example Sequences for Lane Ends and Lane Merge Sign ''(Sheet 4 of 5)'']]

{{SpanID|fig903.3.39.5}}
[[File:Figure 903.3.39.5 Example Sequences for Lane Ends and Lane Merge Signs (Sheet 5 of 5).png|thumb|center|800px|alt="The figure shows a vertical roadway where two lanes traveling in the same direction reduce to one lane. At the bottom of the roadway, two upward-travel lanes are shown. Farther up the figure, both outside edges of the roadway taper inward, reducing the roadway to a single lane. A single dashed centerline is shown within the remaining lane.

To the right of the roadway, near the lower portion of the figure, a sign assembly is shown consisting of a W9-4 “LANES MERGE” sign mounted above a W16-2P “500 FEET” plaque. Farther up the roadway, another sign assembly is shown consisting of a W4-8 lane-reduction symbol sign. A label between the W4-8 sign and the start of the taper reads, “See Table 903.3.4 to determine the advance placement distance.”
A legend indicates the direction of travel with a right-pointing arrow. Notes reference EPG 620.2.14 for lane-reduction pavement markings and EPG 903.3.40 for additional information about this type of merge."
|'''Figure 903.3.39.5''' Example Sequences for Lane Ends and Lane Merge Signs ''(Sheet 5 of 5)'']]

=={{SpanID|903.3.40}}903.3.40 Lanes Merge Signs (W9-4 and W4-8) (MUTCD Section 2C.48)==
<center>
{|
| [[File:W4-8.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W4-8'''</center>]]
| [[File:W9-4.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W9-4'''</center>]]
|}
</center>

'''Support. '''The LANES MERGE (W9-4) and Single-Lane Transition (W4-8) signs are used to warn of a merge of two lanes to one in the same direction of travel with a merging maneuver required for each lane (see [[#fig903.3.39.5|Figure 903.3.39.5]]). This type of merge is for a geometric condition where both approach lanes merge into a single lane, not where one lane merges into the other. [[616.8 TTC Zone Warning Signs (MUTCD Chapter 6H) #616.8.8|EPG 618.8.8]] contains information about the use of the late merge sign.

'''Guidance. '''The Single-Lane Transition (W4-8) sign should be located at the advance placement distance in accordance with [[#tab903.3.4|Table 903.3.4]].

The Lanes Merge (W9-4) sign should be used in advance of the W4-8 sign to provide additional warning that both lanes form a single lane and that a merging maneuver is needed for the traffic in each lane.

=={{SpanID|903.3.41}}903.3.41 RIGHT (LEFT) LANE EXIT ONLY Sign (W9-7) (MUTCD Section 2C.50)==

[[File:W9-7.png|thumb|center|160px|alt=|<center>'''W9-7'''</center>]]

'''Option. '''The RIGHT (LEFT) LANE EXIT ONLY (W9-7) sign may be used to provide advance warning to road users that traffic in the right-hand (left-hand) lane of a roadway will be required to depart the roadway at the next exit.

'''Guidance. '''If used, the W9-7 sign should be installed upstream from the first overhead guide sign that contains an EXIT ONLY sign panel or upstream from the first RIGHT (LEFT) LANE MUST EXIT (R3-33) regulatory sign, if used, whichever is farther upstream from the exit.

=={{SpanID|903.3.42}}903.3.42 Two-Way Traffic Sign (W6-3) (MUTCD Section 2C.51)==
[[File:W6-3.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W6-3'''</center>]]

'''Guidance. '''A Two-Way Traffic (W6-3) sign should be used to warn road users of a transition from a multi-lane divided section of roadway to a two-lane, two-way section of roadway.

A Two-Way Traffic (W6-3) sign with an AHEAD (W16-9P) plaque (see [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.57|EPG 903.3.57]]) should be used to warn road users of a transition from a one-way street to a two-lane, two-way section of roadway.

'''Option. '''The Two-Way Traffic sign may be used to supplement the Divided Highway (Road) Ends (W6-2) sign discussed in [[#903.3.19|EPG 903.3.19]].

=={{SpanID|903.3.43}}903.3.43 NO PASSING ZONE Sign (W14-3) (MUTCD Section 2C.53)==

'''Support. '''The NO PASSING ZONE (W14-3) sign is not to be used on a system-wide basis. It is intended for special use as a measure to reduce crashes at locations where there is a history of crashes related to passing maneuvers.

'''Standard. '''The NO PASSING ZONE (W14-3) sign shall be a pennant-shaped isosceles triangle with its longer axis horizontal and pointing to the right. When used, the NO PASSING ZONE sign shall be installed on the left-hand side of the roadway at the beginning of no-passing zones identified by pavement markings or DO NOT PASS signs or both (see [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2.31|EPG 903.2.31]] and [[620.2 Pavement and Curb Markings (MUTCD Chapter 3B) #620.2.3|620.2.3]]).

The use of the NO PASSING ZONE sign shall be approved by the State Highway Safety and Traffic Engineer.

=={{SpanID|903.3.44}}903.3.44 Vehicular Traffic Warning Signs (MUTCD Section 2C.54)==
'''Option. '''Vehicular Traffic Warning signs may be used to alert road users to locations where unexpected entries into the roadway by trucks, bicycles, farm vehicles, emergency vehicles, golf carts, horse-drawn vehicles, or other vehicles might occur.

'''Guidance. '''Vehicular Traffic Warning signs should be used only at locations where the road user’s sight distance is restricted, or the condition, activity, or entering traffic would be unexpected.

If the condition or activity is seasonal or temporary, the Vehicular Traffic Warning sign should be removed or covered when the condition or activity does not exist.

Before advanced warning signs are installed, all efforts to correct the sight distance issues should be made as this will be far more effective to improve safety compared to installing a sign. Roadway alignments cannot be corrected easily, but removal of vegetation on and off the state right of way that blocks sight distance can address sight distance issues.

'''Option. '''Supplemental plaques (see [[#903.3.57|EPG 903.3.57]]) with legends such as AHEAD, XX FEET, NEXT XX MILES, IN STREET, or IN ROAD may be mounted below Vehicular Traffic Warning signs to provide advance notice to road users of unexpected entries.

'''Standard. '''A Vehicular Traffic Warning sign assembly shall not be installed on an approach controlled by a STOP or a YIELD sign, except as provided in the following two Option paragraphs.

'''Option. '''The Vehicular Traffic Warning sign assembly may be installed on an approach to a circular intersection controlled by a YIELD sign where the crosswalk is at least 20 feet in advance of the yield point at the entrance to the circulatory roadway.

At a signalized or stop-controlled intersection the Vehicular Traffic Warning sign assembly may be installed on an approach to a channelized right-turn lane controlled by a YIELD sign where the crosswalk is at least 20 feet in advance of the yield point.

A Warning Beacon (see [[902.18 Flashing Beacons (MUTCD Chapter 4S) #902.18.3|EPG 902.18.3]]) may be used with any Vehicular Traffic Warning sign to indicate specific periods when the condition or activity is present or is likely to be present, or to provide enhanced sign conspicuity.

=={{SpanID|903.3.45}}903.3.45 Bicycle Warning (W11-1) Sign ==
[[File:W11-1.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W11-1'''</center>]]

'''Guidance. '''Bicycle Warning (W11-1) signs should be used only at locations where the road user’s sight distance is restricted, and the condition, activity, or entering traffic would be unexpected.

'''Option. '''Bicycle Warning (W11-1) signs may be used to alert road users to locations where unexpected entries into the roadway by cyclists might occur.

'''Support. '''Bicycle warning (W11-1) signs with a diagonal downward-pointing arrow (W16-7P) plaques are used to alert road users of locations where bicyclists routinely cross state highways.

'''Standard. '''If a post-mounted W11-1 sign is placed at the location of a bicycle crossing, a diagonal downward pointing arrow (W16-7P) plaque shall be mounted below the sign. The bicycle crossing warning sign with diagonal arrow supplemental plaque should be placed immediately in advance of, as near as possible, the crossing in both directions of travel. If the W11-1 sign is mounted overhead, the W16-7P supplemental plaque shall not be used.

'''Guidance. '''Bicycle crossing warning signs should be installed at locations where an established independent bicycle path crosses a state route. Bicycle crossing warning signs should not be installed where an established “US Bike Route” crosses a state route or where cyclists riding on the public roadways cross a state route.

'''Option. '''A Bicycle Warning (W11-1) sign with an AHEAD (W16-9P) supplemental plaque may be added in advance of the bicycle crossing if engineering judgement determines a need based on limited sight distance of the crossing.

Bicycle Warning (W11-1) signs with an In Road (W16-1P) plaque may be used to alert road users to locations where cyclists riding on the roadway might occur.

'''Standard. '''When bicycle warnings signs are installed to warn motorists of bicycle activity along a state highway, the IN ROAD (W16-1P) plaque shall be installed below the Bicycle Warning (W11-1) sign and shall match the color of the warning sign.

'''Support. '''Bicycle warning signs with the IN ROAD supplemental plaques (IN ROAD plaque replaces the SHARE THE ROAD plaque) are used to alert road users where bicyclists routinely ride along specific sections of state highways, in the travel lane or on the shoulder of the roadway.

'''Guidance. '''The use of Bicycle warning signs to warn road users of cyclist activity along specific sections of roadway should be based on identifiable, routine and/or frequent cyclist activity. Indications bicycle warnings signs should be installed should be based on conditions, such as, but not limited to:
:A. Requests received by bicycle groups, or clubs, who indicate the state highways which are part of their group’s frequent cycling routes.
:B. Requests from Amish, Mennonite or other communities who utilize bicycles as one of their primary modes of routine transportation, indicating the state highways which service their community’s cycling needs.
:C. Sections of a state route where an established bicycle trail overlaps the state route for some length, using the roadway and not a dedicated bike lane, before returning to the independent trail again.
:D. Cycling activity occurs a minimum of 3 days per week, 6 months per year.

Bicycle warning signs should not be installed along routes for the following conditions:
:A. For the purpose of promoting cycling or conveying a bicycle friendly organization when there is no routine cycling activity on that route,
:B. When cyclists have access to a dedicated bicycle lane along the route,
:C. Where cyclists have access to a parallel bike facility, or multi-use path, or
:D. In response to a request from an individual without verifying the need as described in this article.

Bicycle warning signs used to notify drivers of bicycle traffic on the state route should only be ground-mounted installations. Signs should be installed at the point on the route the activity begins and downstream of major public road entry points onto the state route.

'''Option. '''Additional bicycle warning signs may be installed based on engineering judgement if the distance between major road intersections is excessive or if there are areas with limited sight distance which may obscure bicycle traffic.

A NEXT XX MILES (W7-3aP) plaque (See [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.60|EPG 903.3.60]]) may be installed below the IN ROAD plaque if engineering judgement determines the need to notify road users of the length of roadway over which unexpected cyclists riding along the road may occur.

=={{SpanID|903.3.46}}903.3.46 Combined Bicycle/Pedestrian Crossing (W11-15) Sign ==
[[File:W11-15.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W11-15'''</center>]]

'''Option. '''Combined Bicycle/Pedestrian Crossing (W11-15) signs may be used to alert road users to locations where unexpected entries into the roadway by cyclists and pedestrians might occur.

'''Guidance. '''Combined Bicycle/Pedestrian warning signs should be installed at locations where an established shared use path crosses a state route.

'''Support. '''The combined Bicycle/Pedestrian (W11-15) sign is used where both bicyclists and pedestrians might be crossing the roadway at intersections with a shared-use path and state routes. A shared-use path is defined as a paved or gravel path, 8-10 foot wide, dedicated to bike and pedestrian traffic which is an independent facility from the roadway.

'''Standard. '''If a post-mounted W11-15 sign is placed at the location of the combined Bicycle/Pedestrian crossing, a diagonal downward pointing arrow (W16-7P) plaque shall be mounted below the sign. The Bicycle/Pedestrian warning sign with diagonal downward pointing arrow plaque shall be placed immediately in advance of, as near as possible, the crossing in both directions of travel. If the W11-15 sign is mounted overhead, the W16-7P supplemental plaque shall not be used.

'''Option. '''An advanced Bicycle/Pedestrian warning sign with an AHEAD (W16-9P) supplemental plaque may be added in advance of the Bicycle/Pedestrian crossing if engineering judgement determines a need based on limited sight distance of the crossing.

=={{SpanID|903.3.47}}903.3.47 Trail Crossing (W11-15a) Sign ==
[[File:W11-15a.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W11-15a'''</center>]]

'''Option. '''TRAIL CROSSING (W11-15a) signs may be used to alert road users to locations where unexpected entries into the roadway by cyclists, pedestrians or equestrian activity might occur.

'''Support. '''The TRAIL CROSSING sign is used to warn of a rustic trail where pedestrian, bicyclist, or equestrian activities, might be crossing the state highway. A rustic trail would typically be an unpaved trail of an undefined width, but one that is visible and identifiable by a motorist as it crosses the right of way.

'''Guidance. '''TRAIL CROSSING signs should be installed at locations where an established rustic trail used by pedestrians, bicyclists, and equestrian activities crosses a state route.

'''Standard. '''If a post-mounted W11-15a sign is placed at the location of the rustic trail crossing, a diagonal downward pointing arrow (W16-7P) plaque shall be mounted below the sign. The W11-15a sign with diagonal downward pointing arrow plaque shall be placed immediately in advance of, as near as possible, the crossing in both directions of travel. If the W11-15a sign is mounted overhead, the W16-7P supplemental plaque shall not be used.

'''Option. '''A TRAIL CROSSING warning sign with an AHEAD (W16-9P) supplemental plaque may be added in advance of the trail crossing if engineering judgement determines a need based on limited sight distance of the crossing.

=={{SpanID|903.3.48}}903.3.48 Horse-Drawn Vehicle (W11-14) Sign==
[[File:W11-14.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W11-14'''</center>]]

'''Option.''' Horse-Drawn Vehicle (W11-14) signs may be used to alert road users to locations where unexpected horse-drawn vehicles are traveling along the roadway might occur.

'''Guidance.''' W11-14 signs should be used only at locations where the road user’s sight distance is restricted, and the condition, activity, or entering traffic would be unexpected.

'''Support. '''Horse-Drawn Vehicle warning signs with the IN ROAD (W16-1P) supplemental plaque (IN ROAD plaque replaces the SHARE THE ROAD plaque) are used to alert road users where horse-drawn vehicle traffic is routinely traveling along specific sections of state highways, in the travel lane or on the shoulder of the roadway.

'''Standard. '''When Horse-drawn vehicle warnings signs are installed to warn motorists of Horse-drawn vehicle activity along a state highway, the IN ROAD (W16-1P) plaque shall be installed below the Horse-drawn vehicle warning sign and shall match the color of the warning sign.

'''Guidance. '''The use of Horse-Drawn Vehicle signs to warn road users of horse-drawn vehicle activity along specific section of roadway should be based on identifiable, routine and/or frequent horse-drawn vehicle activity. The application of horse-drawn vehicle warning signs is limited to the Amish, Mennonite or other communities who utilize horse-drawn vehicles as one of their primary modes of routine transportation. The district should work with community leadership to determine the state routes their communities utilize on a routine basis to determine the most appropriate sign installation locations.

Horse-Drawn Vehicle signs used to notify drivers of horse-drawn vehicle traffic on the state route should only be ground-mounted installations. Signs should be installed at the point on the route the activity begins and downstream of each major public road entry points onto the state route.

'''Option. '''Additional Horse-Drawn Vehicle signs with IN ROAD plaques may be installed based on engineering judgement if the distance between major road intersections is excessive or if there are areas with limited sight distance which may obscure horse-drawn vehicle traffic.

A NEXT XX MILES (W7-3aP) plaque may be added below the IN ROAD plaque if engineering judgement determines the need to notify drivers of the length of roadway affected by the warning sign.

=={{SpanID|903.3.49}}903.3.49 TRUCK CROSSING (W8-6) Sign ==
[[File:W8-6.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W8-6'''</center>]]

'''Option. '''Truck Crossing (W8-6) signs may be used to alert road users to locations where unexpected entries into the roadway by trucks crossing the road might occur.

'''Guidance. '''W8-6 signs should be used only at locations where the road user’s sight distance is restricted, and the condition, activity, or entering traffic would be unexpected.

'''Support. '''The W8-6 sign is used to alert road users to locations where trucks are routinely crossing a state highway at a commercial entrance intersection. A typical example would be a company with facilities on either side of a highway where raw materials, finished goods, etc. are routinely moved sites. In these cases, warning signs with fluorescent yellow backgrounds are installed in a permanent installation.

'''Option. '''For cases involving temporary truck crossings, such as haul roads moving earth or quarry materials, a TR12 Truck crossing agreement (see [[153.21 Traffic #153.21|EPG 153.21]]) may be used to install a temporary traffic control sign with a fluorescent orange background.

'''Guidance. '''W8-6 signs should be installed at locations where there is consistent and routine truck traffic crossing a state route where the road user’s sight distance is restricted, and the crossing would be unexpected based on engineering judgement.

The truck crossing for which the warning sign is being installed should be recognizable by the presence of a on premise business marquee sign, business name on structures or other indicators to allow drivers to associate the warning sign to the entrance/site where tucks could be crossing the state highway.

'''Standard. '''If used, the TRUCK CROSSING sign shall be placed in accordance with [[#tab903.3.4|Table 903.3.4]].

The TRUCK CROSSING sign shall only be installed for the direction of travel where the road user’s sight distance is restricted.

The TRUCK CROSSING sign shall not be used on state highways at intersections with city streets or county roads, to address issues at these types of intersections other warning signs, such as Intersection Warning signs are more appropriate.

=={{SpanID|903.3.50}}903.3.50 Truck Entrance (W11-10) Sign==
[[File:W11-10.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W11-10'''</center>]]

'''Option. '''Truck Entrance (W11-10) signs may be used to alert road users to locations where unexpected entries into the roadway by trucks might occur.

'''Guidance. '''Truck Entrance signs should be used only at locations where the road user’s sight distance is restricted, and the condition, activity, or entering traffic would be unexpected.

'''Support. '''The W11-10 sign is used to alert road users to locations where trucks are routinely entering and leaving a state highway at a non-public roadway intersection, commercial entrance. A typical example would be trucks entering and exiting a quarry entrance which has direct access to the state route. In these cases, warning signs with fluorescent yellow backgrounds are installed in a permanent installation.

'''Option. '''For cases involving a temporary truck entrance, such as logging trucks entering and leaving a timber harvest location, a TR12 Truck crossing agreement (see [[153.21 Traffic #153.21|EPG 153.21]]) may be used to install a temporary traffic control sign with a fluorescent orange background.

'''Guidance. '''Truck Entrance signs should be installed at locations where there is consistent and routine truck traffic entering and leaving a state route where the road user’s sight distance is restricted, and the crossing would be unexpected based on engineering judgement.

The truck entrance for which the sign is being installed should be recognizable by the presence of a on premise business marquee sign, building with the business name or some other form of marking to allow drivers associate the warning sign to the site where trucks could be entering or leaving the highway.

'''Standard. '''If used, the Truck Entrance sign shall be placed in accordance with [[#tab903.3.4|Table 903.3.4]].

The Truck Entrance sign shall only be installed for the direction of travel where the road user’s sight distance is restricted.

The truck entrance warning sign shall not be used on state highways at intersections with city streets or county roads, to address issues at these types of intersections other warning signs, such as Intersection Warning signs are more appropriate.

=={{SpanID|903.3.51}}903.3.51 Farm Equipment (W11-5) Warning Sign ==
[[File:W11-5.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W11-5'''</center>]]

'''Option. '''Farm Equipment Warning (W11-5) signs may be used to alert road users to locations where unexpected entries into the roadway by farm equipment crossing the road might occur.

'''Guidance. '''W11-5 signs should be used only at locations where the road user’s sight distance is restricted, and the condition, activity, or entering traffic would be unexpected.

'''Support. '''The Farm Equipment (W11-5) sign is used to alert road users to locations where slow-moving farm vehicles are routinely entering or crossing the state highway (immediately across or a short transition down the road to a different entrance) if the highway splits the farm. A typical example would be a dairy farm where these crossings take place daily. In these cases, fluorescent yellow warning signs are installed in a permanent installation.

Farm Equipment signs are not installed to warn of farm equipment traveling along a state highway. This warning is the responsibility of the farmer and can be addressed by displaying the appropriate warning lights and signs on the equipment as well as having the appropriate lead and/or trailing vehicles escorting the equipment.

'''Option. '''For cases involving a temporary farm equipment access entrance, such as during planting or harvest season, a TR12 Truck Crossing agreement (see [[153.21 Traffic #153.21|EPG 153.21]]) may be used to install a temporary traffic control sign with a fluorescent orange background.

'''Guidance. '''Farm Equipment signs should be installed at locations where there is consistent and routine farm equipment entering and leaving a state route where the road user’s sight distance is restricted, and the crossing would be unexpected based on engineering judgement.

The farm vehicle entrance for which the warning sign is being installed should be recognizable by the presence of a on-premise business marquee sign, presence of farm equipment, farm structures or other indicators to allow drivers to associate the warning sign to the site where farm vehicles could be crossing/entering the highway.

'''Standard. '''If used, the Farm Equipment warning sign shall be placed in accordance with [[#tab903.3.4|Table 903.3.4]].

The Farm Equipment warning sign shall only be installed for the direction of travel where the road user’s sight distance is restricted.

=={{SpanID|903.3.52}}903.3.52 Emergency Vehicle (W11-8) Sign==
<center>
{|
| [[File:W11-8.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W11-8'''</center>]]
| [[File:W11-12P.jpg|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W11-12P'''</center>]]
|}
</center>

'''Option. '''Emergency Vehicle (W11-8) signs may be used to alert road users to locations where unexpected entries into the roadway by emergency vehicles might occur.

'''Guidance.''' Emergency Vehicle signs should be used only at locations where the road user’s sight distance is restricted, and the condition, activity, or entering traffic would be unexpected.

'''Support.''' The Emergency Vehicle sign is used to alert road users to locations where emergency vehicles are routinely entering and leaving a state highway at dedicated emergency vehicle facility entrances.

'''Guidance. '''Emergency Vehicle signs should be installed at a state route where the road user’s sight distance is restricted, and the crossing would be unexpected based on engineering judgement.

The emergency vehicle entrance for which the warning sign is being installed should be recognizable by the presence of a on premise marquee sign, building with the emergency agency name displayed or some other form of marking to allow drivers to associate the warning sign to the site/entrance where emergency vehicles could be entering or leaving the state highway.

'''Standard. '''If used, the Emergency Vehicle warning sign shall be placed in accordance with [[#tab903.3.4|Table 903.3.4]].

The Emergency Vehicle warning sign shall only be installed for the direction of travel where the road user’s sight distance is restricted.

When measuring sight distance for emergency vehicle entrances, the sight distance shall be determined using a 3.5 ft. eye height and an 8 ft. object height in the same method use to evaluate school bus stop sight distances (see [[908.2 Signs (MUTCD Chapter 7B) #908.2.4|EPG 908.2.4]]).

The Emergency Vehicle sign with the EMERGENCY SIGNAL AHEAD (W11-12P) supplemental plaque shall be placed in advance of all emergency-vehicle traffic control signals (see [[902.13 Traffic Control Signals for Emergency-Vehicle Access (MUTCD Chapter 4M)|EPG 902.13]]).

=={{SpanID|903.3.53}}903.3.53 Non-Vehicular Warning Signs (W11-2, W11-3, W11-4, and W11-7) (MUTCD Section 2C.55)==
<center>
{|
| [[File:W11-2.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W11-2'''</center>]]
| [[File:W11-4.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W11-4''' (Cattle)</center>]]
| [[File:W11-7.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W11-7'''</center>]]
|}
</center>

'''Option. '''Non-Vehicular Warning (W11-2, W11-4, and W11-7) signs may be used to alert road users in advance of locations where unexpected entries into the roadway might occur.

'''Support. '''These conflicts might be relatively confined or might occur randomly over a segment of roadway.

'''Guidance. '''If used in advance of a pedestrian or equestrian crossing, the W11-2 and W11-7, signs should be supplemented with plaques (see [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.59|EPG 903.3.59]]) with the legend AHEAD or XX FEET to inform road users that they are approaching a point where crossing activity might occur.

'''Standard. '''If a post-mounted W11-2 or W11-7 sign is placed at the location of the crossing point where pedestrians or equestrians might be crossing the roadway, a diagonal downward-pointing arrow (W16-7P) plaque (see [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.62|EPG 903.3.62]]) shall be mounted below the sign. If the W11-2 or W11-7 sign is mounted overhead, the W16-7P plaque shall not be used.

A Non-Vehicular Warning sign assembly shall not be installed on an approach controlled by a STOP or a YIELD sign, except as provided in the first two Option paragraphs below.

Equestrian (W11-7) warning signs shall only be installed at Public Equestrian Trail Crossings. Existing Equestrian (W11-7) Crossing signs that do not meet the Public Equestrian Trail Crossing criteria shall be left in place until they reach the end of their service life.

The use of the Deer (W11-3) warning signs has been discontinued by MoDOT due to studies proving these signs provide little or no safety benefit. Existing W11-3 signs shall be removed at the end of their service life.

The Cattle (W11-4) sign shall be issued to an individual only when the Application for Sign at Cattle Crossings contract (TR09) is fully executed. See [[153.21 Traffic #153.21|EPG 153.21]] for the TR09 Agreement.

'''Option. '''The Non-Vehicular Warning sign assembly may be installed on an approach to a circular intersection controlled by a YIELD sign where the crosswalk is at least 20 feet in advance of the yield point at the entrance to a circulatory roadway.

At a signalized or stop-controlled intersection the Non-Vehicular Warning sign assembly may be installed on an approach to a channelized right-turn lane controlled by a YIELD sign where the crosswalk is at least 20 feet in advance of the yield point.

A Pedestrian Crossing (W11-2) sign may be placed overhead or may be post-mounted with a diagonal downward-pointing arrow (W16-7P) plaque at the crosswalk location where Yield Here To Pedestrians signs (see [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2.18|EPG 903.2.18]]) have been installed in advance of the crosswalk.

'''Standard. '''If a W11-2 sign has been post-mounted at the crosswalk location where a Yield Here To Pedestrians sign is used on the approach, the Yield Here To Pedestrians sign shall not be placed on the same post as the W11-2 sign.

'''Option. '''An advance Pedestrian Crossing (W11-2) sign with an AHEAD or a distance supplemental plaque may be used in conjunction with a Yield Here To Pedestrians sign on the approach to the same crosswalk.

The crossing location identified by a W11-2 or W11-7 sign may be defined with crosswalk markings (see [[620.3 Crosswalk Markings (MUTCD Chapter 3C) #620.3|EPG 620.3]]).

'''Standard. '''The W11-2 sign and related supplemental plaques shall only have a fluorescent yellow-green background with a black legend and border if the signs are installed within a school area as described in the fifth Support paragraph of [[#903.3.2|EPG 903.3.2]].

'''Guidance. '''When a fluorescent yellow-green background is used, a systematic approach featuring one background color within a zone or area should be used. The mixing of standard yellow and fluorescent yellow-green backgrounds within a selected site area should be avoided.

'''Option. '''A Warning Beacon (see [[902.18 Flashing Beacons (MUTCD Chapter 4S) #902.18.3|EPG 902.18.3]]) may be used with any Non-Vehicular Warning sign to indicate specific periods when the condition or activity is present or is likely to be present, or to provide enhanced sign conspicuity.

=={{SpanID|903.3.54}}903.3.54 FERRY CROSSING AHEAD Sign (W3-18)==
[[image:W3-10.gif|center|thumb|<center>'''W3-18'''</center>|100px]]

'''Option. '''The FERRY CROSSING AHEAD (W3-18) sign may be installed for a ferry crossing. A STOP (R1-1) sign at the ferry crossing may be used as a supplement.

=={{SpanID|903.3.55}}903.3.55 Passing Lane Warning Signs (W6-5, W6-5a, W6-6aP, W6-16, and W6-17)==
<center>
{|
|-
|[[image:W4-12a.gif|left|100px|thumb|<center>'''W6-6aP'''</center>]]||[[image:W4-10.gif|left|thumb|<center>'''W6-16'''</center>|100px]]||[[image:W4-11.gif|left|100px|thumb|<center>'''W6-17'''</center>]]
|}
</center>

'''Support. '''Alternating passing lanes may be provided on rural, two-lane highways to provide motorists with an opportunity to pass slower vehicles without crossing the centerline. Where passing lanes are provided, operations and safety may be improved by giving motorists advance information about the location of passing lanes. Providing motorists with advance notice of passing lanes may reduce the number of passing maneuvers.

'''Standard. '''The PASSING LANE ENDS (W6-16), WATCH FOR LEFT-TURNING TRAFFIC IN PASSING LANE (W6-17), and PASSING LANE PLAQUE (W6-6aP) signs shall be black legend and fluorescent yellow background and shall only be used in alternating passing lane sections.

The PASSING LANE ENDS sign shall be used prior to the end of the passing lane to warn motorists the passing lane in that direction of travel is ending and merging back to a single lane. The sign shall be placed in advance of the LANE ENDS MERGE RIGHT (W9-2) sign at a distance determined by [[#tab903.3.4|Table 903.3.4]].

'''Option. '''The WATCH FOR LEFT TURNING TRAFFIC IN PASSING LANE sign may be used at locations in a passing lane segment where left turns are common, such as at a county road. This sign may be installed at the judgement of the engineer.

The Two-Way Traffic on a Three-Lane Roadway (W6-5 and W6-5a) signs may be installed along three-lane roadways with two lanes in one direction and one in the opposing direction.

=={{SpanID|903.3.56}}903.3.56 TRAVEL SAFE ZONE – FINES DOUBLED Sign (W27-1)==
[[File:W27-1.jpg|center|130px|thumb|<center>'''W27-1'''</center>]]

'''Support. '''The TRAVEL SAFE ZONE - FINES DOUBLED (W27-1) sign is not to be used on a system-wide basis. It is intended for special use at locations where severe crashes are occurring. There is a requirement for regional support to focus a safety campaign involving local law enforcement and public information efforts to reduce the number and severity of crashes within the travel safe zone (see [[907.3 Travel Safe Zones #907.3 | EPG 907.3]]).

'''Standard. '''A TRAVEL SAFE ZONE – FINES DOUBLED sign shall be used to mark the beginning of a designated travel safe zone. This sign is installed in conjunction with the FINES DOUBLED ENDS (R2-20) sign (see [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2.70|EPG 903.2.70]]).

=={{SpanID|903.3.57}}903.3.57 Use of Supplemental Warning Plaques (MUTCD Section 2C.57)==

'''Option. '''A supplemental warning plaque may be displayed with a warning or regulatory sign when engineering judgment indicates that road users require additional warning information beyond that contained in the main message of the warning or regulatory sign.

'''Standard. '''Supplemental warning plaques shall be used only in combination with and installed on the same post(s) as warning or regulatory signs. They shall not be mounted alone or displayed alone.

Unless otherwise provided in the EPG for a particular plaque, supplemental warning plaques shall be mounted below the sign they supplement.

=={{SpanID|903.3.58}}903.3.58 Design of Supplemental Warning Plaques (MUTCD Section 2C.58)==

'''Standard. '''A supplemental warning plaque used with a warning sign shall have the same legend, border, and background color as the warning sign with which it is displayed. A supplemental warning plaque used with a regulatory sign shall have a black legend and border on a yellow background.

Supplemental warning plaques shall be square or rectangular.

=={{SpanID|903.3.59}}903.3.59 Advisory Speed Plaque (W13-1P) and Confirmation Advisory Speed Plaque (W13-1aP) (MUTCD Section 2C.59)==
<center>
{|
| [[File:W13-1P.png|thumb|center|84px|alt=|<center>'''W13-1P'''</center>]]
| [[File:W13-1aP.png|thumb|center|220px|alt=|<center>'''W13-1aP'''</center>]]
|}
</center>

'''Option. '''The Advisory Speed (W13-1P) plaque may be used to supplement an advance warning sign to indicate the advisory speed for a condition.

The Confirmation Advisory Speed (W13-1aP) plaque may be used to supplement a One-Direction Large Arrow (W1-6) sign on the outside of a turn or curve in line with and at approximately a right angle to approaching traffic.

'''Standard. '''The use of the Advisory Speed and Confirmation Advisory Speed plaques for horizontal curves shall be in accordance with [[#903.3.6|EPG 903.3.6]]. The Advisory Speed plaque shall also be used where an engineering study indicates a need to advise road users of the advisory speed for other roadway conditions.

The speed displayed on the Advisory Speed and Confirmation Advisory Speed plaques shall be a multiple of 5 mph. The maximum advisory speed posted shall never be more than the posted speed limit.

Except in emergencies or when the condition is temporary, an Advisory Speed or Confirmation Advisory Speed plaque shall not be installed until the advisory speed has been determined by an engineering study.

The Advisory Speed plaque shall only be used to supplement an advance warning sign. The Advisory Speed plaque or the Confirmation Advisory Speed plaque shall not be installed as a separate sign installation.

'''Guidance. '''The Advisory Speed plaque, if used with a sign that is also supplemented with another plaque, such as an Advance Street Name plaque (see [[#903.3.64|EPG 903.3.64]]), should be mounted immediately below the primary warning sign with any other plaque mounted below the Advisory Speed plaque.

'''Standard. '''The Confirmation Advisory Speed plaque shall only be used to supplement a One-Direction Large Arrow (W1-6) sign (see [[#903.3.10|EPG 903.3.10]]) or an Exit Gore (E5-1 series) sign (see [[ 903.5 Guide Signs - Freeways and Expressways (MUTCD Chapter 2E) #903.5.26| EPG 903.5.26]]) and shall not be installed as a separate sign installation.

The advisory speed shall be determined by an engineering study that follows established engineering practices.

'''Guidance. '''The advisory speed should be determined based on free-flowing traffic conditions.

Because changes in conditions, such as roadway geometrics, surface characteristics, or sight distance, might affect the advisory speed, each location should be evaluated periodically or when conditions change.

'''Support. '''Among the established engineering practices that are appropriate for the determination of the recommended advisory speed for a horizontal curve are the following:
:A. Accelerometer method
:B. 10 degrees of ball bank for all speeds

<center>
{| class="wikitable" style="padding: 1em;"
|-
| '''Engineering Study for Ball-Banking'''

The procedure to determine the safe speed on a curve or turn is a ball-bank study. To correctly use the ball-bank indicator, the ball-bank indicator should be mounted on the dashboard of a passenger car and adjusted to read "0" when the car is stationary on a level grade with the ball-bank indicator being in a vertical plane. When adjusting the indicator, all personnel who are to be in the car while testing should be in their seats and all four tires should have the same pressure. It is usually best for at least two persons to be in the car while taking the ball-bank reading: one for driving, the other for observation and recording.

The 10-degree reading that can be maintained the complete length of a curve is the appropriate safe speed for that curve. Care must be taken to maintain the car in its proper lane and to maintain a smooth, consistent speed throughout the curve. It will occasionally be found that a curve will have a higher safe speed in one direction than the other. In such cases, the lower safe speed should be used for both directions. Only increments of 5 mph are used on the Advisory Speed Plaque, therefore the curve shall be posted to the nearest 5 mph speed from the survey.
|-
|}
</center>

=={{SpanID|903.3.60}}903.3.60 Distance Plaques (W16-2P, W16-3P, W16-4P, and W7-3aP) (MUTCD Section 2C.61)==
<center>
{|
| [[File:W16-2P.png|thumb|center|130px|alt=|<center>'''W16-2P'''</center>]]
| [[File:W16-3P.png|thumb|center|130px|alt=|<center>'''W16-3P'''</center>]]
| [[File:W16-4P.png|thumb|center|130px|alt=|<center>'''W16-4P'''</center>]]
| [[File:W7-3aP.png|thumb|center|130px|alt=|<center>'''W7-3aP'''</center>]]
|}
</center>

'''Option. '''The Distance Ahead (W16-2P and W16-3P) plaques may be used to inform the road user of the distance to the condition indicated by the warning sign.

The Next Distance (W7-3aP and W16-4P) plaques may be used to inform road users of the length of roadway over which the condition indicated by the warning sign exists.

'''Standard. '''Distances shall be shown in ¼ mile or 100 ft. increments. If the distance is less than a ½ mile then feet shall be used.

=={{SpanID|903.3.61}}903.3.61 Supplemental Arrow Plaques (W16-5P and W16-6P) (MUTCD Section 2C.62)==
<center>
{|
| [[File:W16-5P.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W16-5P'''</center>]]
| [[File:W16-6P.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W16-6P'''</center>]]
|}
</center>

'''Guidance. '''If the condition indicated by a warning sign is located on an intersecting road and the distance between the intersection and condition is not sufficient to provide adequate advance placement of the warning sign, a Supplemental Arrow (W16-5P or W16-6P) plaque should be used below the warning sign.

'''Standard. '''Supplemental Arrow plaques shall have the same legend design as the Advance Turn Arrow and Directional Arrow auxiliary signs (see [[903.4 Guide Signs—Conventional Roads (MUTCD Chapter 2D) #903.4.22|EPG 903.4.22]] and [[903.4 Guide Signs—Conventional Roads (MUTCD Chapter 2D) #903.4.24|903.4.24]]) except that they shall have a black legend and border on a fluorescent yellow or fluorescent yellow-green background, as appropriate.

=={{SpanID|903.3.62}}903.3.62 Diagonal Downward-Pointing Arrow Plaques (W16-7P and W16-7aP) (MUTCD Section 2C.63)==
<center>
{|
| [[File:W16-7P.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W16-7P'''</center>]]
| [[File:W16-7aP.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W16a-7P'''</center>]]
|}
</center>

'''Support. '''Diagonal downward-pointing arrow (W16-7P and W16-7aP) plaques are used with certain Vehicular Traffic Warning signs and certain Non-Vehicular Warning signs (see [[#903.3.53|EPG 903.3.53]]), and School Crossing signs (see [[908.2 Signs (MUTCD Chapter 7B) #908.2.3|EPG 908.2.3]]) to indicate the specific location of a crossing point.

The W16-7P plaque contains a single arrow pointing diagonally down to the right or left, toward the roadway, depending on which side of the roadway it is located.

'''Option. '''A W16-7aP plaque may be used with a single crossing sign located on a narrow median separating two roadways with traffic in the same direction where the crossing traverses both roadways.

=={{SpanID|903.3.63}}903.3.63 Hill-Related Plaques (W7-3 Series) (MUTCD Section 2C.64)==
<center>
{|
| [[File:W7-3P.png|thumb|center|90px|alt=|<center>'''W7-3P'''</center>]]
| [[File:W7-3aP.png|thumb|center|90px|alt=|<center>'''W7-3aP'''</center>]]
|}
</center>

'''Guidance. '''Hill-Related (W7-3 series) plaques (see [[#903.3.14|EPG 903.3.14]]) or other appropriate legends and larger signs should be used for emphasis or where special hill characteristics exist.

On longer grades, the use of a distance (W7-3aP) plaque (see [[#903.3.14|EPG 903.3.14]]) at periodic intervals of approximately 1-mile spacing should be considered.

=={{SpanID|903.3.64}}903.3.64 Advance Street Name Plaques (W16-8P and W16-8aP) (MUTCD Section 2C.65)==
<center>
{|
| [[File:W16-8P.png|thumb|center|150px|alt=|<center>'''W16-8P'''</center>]]
| [[File:W16-8aP.png|thumb|center|260px|alt=|<center>'''W16-8aP'''</center>]]
|}
</center>

'''Support. '''Advance street name signing can provide valuable information to the motorist. Intersections that are signed with Intersection Warning (W2 series) or Advance Traffic Control (W3 series) signs typically have inherent sight distance concerns. The addition of the street name to the warning sign can aid a motorist in making decisions in a timely manner.

'''Option. '''An Advance Street Name (W16-8P or W16-8aP) plaque may be used with any Intersection (W1-10 series, W2 series, W10-2, W10-3, or W10-4) or Advance Traffic Control (W3 series) sign to identify the name of the intersecting street.

If the side road being signed is maintained by a public agency, the addition of the street name sign may be considered on request.

'''Standard. '''The lettering on Advance Street Name plaques shall be composed of a combination of lower-case letters with initial upper-case letters.

If two street names are used on the Advance Street Name plaque, a directional arrow pointing in the direction of the street shall be placed next to each street name. Arrows pointing to the left shall be placed to the left of the street name, and arrows pointing to the right shall be placed to the right of the street name.

The street name used on an Advance Street Name supplemental sign shall be the approved name used by either the local agency or the Emergency 911 Coordinator.

When used, the Advance Street Name supplemental plaque shall only be mounted below the W2 or W3 series warning sign or the Advisory Speed plaque on the same post.

The Advance Street Name supplemental plaque for a 36 in. x 36 in. warning sign shall be a maximum of 36 in. wide and for a 48 in. x 48 in. warning sign shall be a maximum of 48 in. wide.

'''Guidance. '''If two street names are used on the Advance Street Name plaque, the street names and associated arrows should be displayed in the following order:
:A. For a single intersection, the name of the street to the left should be displayed above the name of the street to the right; or
:B. For two sequential intersections, such as where the plaque is used with an Offset Side Roads (W2-7) or a Double Side Road (W2-8) sign, the name of the first street encountered should be displayed above the name of the second street encountered, and the arrow associated with the second street encountered should be an advance arrow, such as the arrow shown on the W16-6P arrow plaque (see [[#903.3.61|EPG 903.3.61]]).

=={{SpanID|903.3.65}}903.3.65 Traffic Does Not Stop Plaques (W4-4P Series) (MUTCD Section 2C.66)==
<center>
{|
| [[File:W4-4P.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W4-4P'''</center>]]
| [[File:W4-4aP.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W4-4aP'''</center>]]
| [[File:W4-4bP.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W4-4bP'''</center>]]
|}
</center>

'''Option. '''The CROSS TRAFFIC DOES NOT STOP (W4-4P) plaque may be used in combination with a STOP sign when engineering judgment indicates that conditions are present that are causing or could cause road users to misinterpret the intersection as an all-way stop.

The TRAFFIC FROM LEFT (RIGHT) DOES NOT STOP (W4-4aP) or ONCOMING TRAFFIC DOES NOT STOP (W4-4bP) plaque may be used when such messages more accurately describe the traffic controls established at the intersection.

'''Guidance. '''The W4-4aP and W4-4bP plaques should be used at intersections where STOP signs control all but one approach to the intersection, unless the only non-stopped approach is from a one-way street.

'''Standard. '''If a W4-4P series plaque is used, it shall be mounted below the STOP sign.

=={{SpanID|903.3.66}}903.3.66 IN ROAD and IN STREET Plaques (W16-1P) (MUTCD Section 2C.67)==
[[File:W16-1P.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W16-1P'''</center>]]

'''Option. '''In situations where there is a need to warn drivers to watch for other slower forms of transportation traveling along the highway, such as bicycles or horse-drawn vehicles, an IN ROAD (W16-1P) plaque may be used.

'''Standard. '''The background color of the W16-1P plaque shall match the background color of the warning sign with which it is displayed. If a W16-1P plaque is used, it shall be mounted below a Bicycle (W11-1) or Horse-Drawn Vehicle (W11-14) warning signs and shall not be mounted alone.

'''Support. '''[[914.2 Regulatory Signs (MUTCD Chapter 9B) #914.2.6 | EPG 914.2.6]] contains information about the use of a Bicycles Allowed Use of Full Lane (R9-20) sign to inform drivers of the presence of bicycles in the roadway or where bicyclists are expected or preferred to use the full lane.

=={{SpanID|903.3.67}}903.3.67 NOTICE Plaque (W16-18p)==
[[File:W16-18P.jpg|center|120px|thumb|<center>'''W16-18P'''</center>]]

'''Support. '''It is sometimes necessary to enhance the conspicuity of a regulatory sign to attract drivers’ attention to the message the sign is conveying. This may be necessary to help notify drivers to a speed limit reduction, turning movement prohibition, or bridge weight restriction. The NOTICE (W16-18P) plaque is an alternate to the use of red flags (see [[903.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 2A) #903.1.11| EPG 903.1.11]]).

'''Standard. '''The NOTICE (W16-18P) plaque shall not be used alone.

When used, the NOTICE plaque shall be installed directly above the regulatory sign it is enhancing.

'''Guidance. '''The use of the NOTICE (W16-18P) plaque should be based on engineering judgment and not systematically applied to a specific sign unless otherwise specified in the EPG.

=={{SpanID|903.3.68}}903.3.68 Exception Plaques (W16-23P and W16-24P)==
<center>
{|
| [[File:W16-23P.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W16-23P'''</center>]]
| [[File:W16-24P.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W16-24P'''</center>]]
|}
</center>

'''Support.''' The EXCEPT TO TURN (W16-23P) supplemental warning plaque is used with the NO TRUCKS LEFT LANE (R5-32) regulatory sign (see [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2.36|EPG 903.2.36]]) in locations where trucks are not allowed to drive in the left lane, but are allowed to enter the left lane in order to make a turn. The EXCEPT TO EXIT (W16-24P) supplemental warning plaque is used with the NO TRUCKS LEFT LANE (R5-32) regulatory sign in locations where trucks are not allowed to drive in the left lane, but trucks are allowed to enter the left lane in order to exit the highway.

'''Standard.''' When used, the EXCEPT TO TURN (W16-23P) and EXCEPT TO EXIT (W16-24P) supplemental warning plaques shall only be installed in conjunction with the FINES DOUBLED ENDS (R2-20) sign (see [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2.70|EPG 903.2.70]]).

=={{SpanID|903.3.69}}903.3.69 Warning Signs Provided for Other Agencies==

'''Support. '''MoDOT will provide, if requested by the appropriate local traffic authority, warning signs for conditions beyond the end of state-maintained right of way.

If the location for placement of an advance warning sign for a curve, turn, paved road, stop condition or other condition deemed appropriate falls on state-maintained right of way, MoDOT will place and maintain the traffic control device on state-maintained right-of-way at the request of the local traffic authority.

'''Standard. '''The placement of all traffic control devices on the state highway system shall be governed by the Engineering Policy Guide. MoDOT is responsible for the placement and maintenance of all signs on state-maintained right-of-way.

=={{SpanID|903.3.70}}903.3.70 Object Marker Design and Placement Height (MUTCD Section 2C.70)==

'''Support. '''Types 1, 2, and 3 object markers are used to mark obstructions within or adjacent to the roadway. Type 4 object markers are used to mark the end of a roadway.

'''Standard. '''When used, object markers (see [[#fig903.3.70|Figure 903.3.70]]) shall not have a border and shall consist of an arrangement of one or more of the following types:

Type 1—a diamond-shaped sign, at least 18 inches on a side, consisting of an all-yellow retroreflective sign (OM1-3).

Type 2—an all-yellow horizontal or vertical retroreflective sign (OM2-2V or OM2-2H), measuring 6 x 12 inches.

Type 3—a striped marker, 12 x 36 inches, consisting of a vertical rectangle with alternating black and retroreflective yellow stripes sloping downward at an angle of 45 degrees toward the side of the obstruction on which traffic is to pass. The minimum width of the yellow and black stripes shall be 3 inches.

Type 4—a diamond-shaped sign, at least 18 inches on a side, consisting of an all-red retroreflective sign (OM4-3).

'''Support. '''Type 3 object markers with stripes that begin at the upper right side and slope downward to the lower left side are designated as right object markers (OM3-R). Object markers with stripes that begin at the upper left side and slope downward to the lower right side are designated as left object markers (OM3-L). Object markers with chevron stripes that slope downward to both the lower left and lower right sides are designated as center object markers (OM3-C).

'''Guidance. '''When used for marking obstructions within the roadway or obstructions that are 8 feet or less from the shoulder or curb, the minimum mounting height, measured from the bottom of the object marker to the elevation of the near edge of the traveled way, should be 4 feet.

When used to mark obstructions more than 8 feet from the shoulder or curb, the clearance from the ground to the bottom of the object marker should be at least 4 feet.

Object markers should not present a vertical or horizontal clearance obstacle for pedestrians.

'''Option. '''When object markers or markings are applied to an obstruction that by its nature requires a lower or higher mounting, the vertical mounting height may vary according to need.

{{SpanID|fig903.3.70}}
[[File:Figure 903.3.70 Object Markers.png|thumb|center|400px|alt="The figure shows four categories of object markers used to identify obstructions.
Type 1 Object Markers (obstructions within the roadway):
A single yellow diamond-shaped marker labeled OM1-3.
Type 2 Object Markers (obstructions adjacent to the roadway):
Two yellow rectangular markers: a vertical rectangle labeled OM2-2V and a horizontal rectangle labeled OM2-2H.
Type 3 Object Markers (obstructions adjacent to or within the roadway):
Three yellow-and-black striped rectangular markers are shown:
The OM3-L marker has diagonal stripes sloping downward from left to right.
The OM3-C marker has alternating diagonal stripes forming downward-pointing chevrons.
The OM3-R marker has diagonal stripes sloping downward from right to left.
Type 4 Object Marker (end of roadway):
A red diamond-shaped marker labeled OM4-3."
|'''Figure 903.3.70''' Object Markers]]

=={{SpanID|903.3.71}}903.3.71 Object Markers for Obstructions Within the Roadway (MUTCD Section 2C.71)==

'''Standard. '''Obstructions within the roadway shall be marked with a Type 1 or Type 3 object marker. In addition to markers on the face of the obstruction, warning of approach to the obstruction shall be given by appropriate pavement markings (see [[620.2 Pavement and Curb Markings (MUTCD Chapter 3B) #620.2.15|EPG 620.2.15]]).

'''Option. '''To provide additional emphasis, a Type 1 or Type 3 object marker may be installed at or near the approach end of a median island.

To provide additional emphasis, large surfaces such as bridge piers may be painted with diagonal stripes, 12 inches or greater in width, similar in design to the Type 3 object marker.

'''Standard. '''The alternating black and retroreflective yellow stripes (OM3-L, OM3-R) shall be sloped down at an angle of 45 degrees toward the side on which traffic is to pass the obstruction. If traffic can pass to either side of the obstruction, the alternating black and retroreflective yellow stripes (OM3-C) shall form chevrons that point upwards.

'''Option. '''Appropriate signs (see [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2.34|EPG 903.2.34]] and [[#903.3.20|903.3.20]]) directing traffic to one or both sides of the obstruction may be used instead of the object marker.

=={{SpanID|903.3.72}}903.3.72 Object Markers for Obstructions Adjacent to the Roadway (MUTCD Section 2C.72)==

'''Support. '''Obstructions not actually within the roadway are sometimes so close to the edge of the road that they need a marker. These include underpass piers, bridge abutments, handrails, ends of traffic barriers, utility poles, and culvert headwalls. In other cases there might not be a physical object involved, but other roadside conditions exist, such as narrow shoulders, drop-offs, gores, small islands, and abrupt changes in the roadway alignment, that might make it undesirable for a road user to leave the roadway, and therefore would create a need for a marker.

'''Standard. '''Type 3 object markers shall be used to mark all obstructions within 3 feet of the edge of the travel lane or edge of the shoulder when shoulders are present (paved or aggregate). Type 3 object markers shall not be used to mark obstructions located beyond 8 feet of the edge of the travel lane or edge of the shoulder. See [[#fig903.3.72.1|Figures 903.3.72.1]] and [[#fig903.3.72.2|903.3.72.2]] for standard applications of Type 3 object markers.

'''Option. '''Type 3 object markers may be used to mark obstructions located 3 feet to 8 feet from the edge of the travel lane or edge of the shoulder based on engineering judgment. See [[#fig903.3.72.1|Figures 903.3.72.1]] and [[#fig903.3.72.2|903.3.72.2]] for standard applications of Type 3 object markers.

'''Guidance. '''If a Type 2 or Type 3 object marker is used to mark an obstruction adjacent to the roadway, the edge of the object marker that is closest to the road user should be installed in line with the closest edge of the obstruction.

When a marker is applied to the approach ends of guardrail or crash cushion terminals it should have the appearance of a Type 3 object marker and should be directly affixed, without a substrate, to the approach end of the guardrail or crash cushion and generally conform to the size and shape of the approach end of the guardrail or crash cushion.

'''Standard. '''Type 1 and Type 4 object markers shall not be used to mark obstructions adjacent to the roadway.

'''Guidance. '''Standard warning signs in this Chapter should also be used where applicable.

{{SpanID|fig903.3.72.1}}
[[File:Figure 903.3.72.1 Standard Application of Type 3 Object Markers Objects 2' or Less From Edge of Travel Lane_Shoulder.png|thumb|center|800px|alt="The figure shows several examples of Type 3 object marker placement for obstructions along a two-lane, two-way highway and a divided highway. Type 3 object markers are rectangular yellow and black striped panels labeled with the numbers 1, 2, and 3. In the two-lane, two-way highway examples, the first scenario shows a bridge where markers 1, 2, and 3 are placed on each side of the roadway on both approaches. Marker 1 is positioned closest to the obstruction, marker 2 is placed farther from the edge of pavement, and marker 3 is placed the farthest from the obstruction. This identical arrangement appears on all four corners of the bridge. The second scenario shows a box culvert with a length of 20 feet or more. The same arrangement of markers 1, 2, and 3 is placed on both sides of the roadway, and a dimension labeled L indicates the length of the culvert. The third scenario shows a pipe or box culvert with a length of less than 20 feet, where a single marker 1 is placed just before the culvert on the upper side of the roadway, and another marker 1 is placed just before the culvert on the lower side of the roadway. The fourth scenario shows a spillway where a single marker 1 is placed just before the spillway on the right side of the roadway.
In the divided highway examples, the first scenario shows a bridge where markers 1, 2, and 3 are placed only on the approach side of the structure for each direction of travel. No markers are shown beyond the bridge. The second scenario shows a box culvert with a length of 20 feet or more. On the approach to the culvert, object markers 1, 2, and 3 are placed on both sides of the roadway for the direction of travel. After the culvert, one additional marker 1 is placed on the right side of the roadway. A dimension labeled L indicates the length of the culvert. The third scenario shows a pipe or box culvert with a length of less than 20 feet, where a single marker 1 is placed just before the culvert.
A legend shows the direction of travel with an arrow. Notes beneath the figure explain the placement requirements. Marker 1 is placed as close to the obstruction as possible and aligned with the inside edge. Marker 2 is placed 1.5 feet from the edge of pavement and 20 feet from the end of the obstruction. Marker 3 is placed 3 feet from the edge of pavement and 40 feet from the end of the obstruction. Additional notes refer to Figure 903.3.72.2 for mounting height details and describe alternative mounting heights for areas affected by agricultural equipment."
|'''Figure 903.3.72.1''' Standard Application of Type 3 Object Markers Objects 2' or Less From Edge of Travel Lane/Shoulder]]

{{SpanID|fig903.3.72.2}}
[[File:Figure 903.3.72.2 Standard Application of Type 3 Object Markers Objects Greater Than 2' From Edge of Travel Lane_Shoulder.png|thumb|center|800px|alt="The figure shows several examples of Type 3 object marker placement for obstructions along a two-lane, two-way highway and a divided highway, as well as a detail of mounting height and lateral offset requirements. The Type 3 object markers shown are rectangular panels with alternating black and yellow diagonal stripes.
On the two-lane, two-way highway side, the first scenario shows a bridge. Two Type 3 object markers are placed on each side of the roadway at the near approach to the bridge. The same pair of markers appears on the far side of the bridge. In each location, the left and right markers are positioned close to the edges of the roadway.
The second scenario shows a box culvert with a length of 20 feet or more. A pair of Type 3 object markers is placed on both sides of the roadway on the approach to the culvert, with a labeled dimension L indicating the length of the structure. Another pair of markers is placed on both sides immediately after the culvert.
The third scenario shows a pipe or box culvert with a length of less than 20 feet. A single Type 3 object marker is placed just before the culvert on the upper side of the roadway, and another single marker is placed just before the culvert on the lower side.
The fourth scenario shows a spillway. A single Type 3 object marker is placed just before the spillway on the right side of the roadway.
On the divided highway side, the first scenario shows a bridge. One Type 3 object marker is placed on the left shoulder and one on the right shoulder on the approach side of the structure. No markers are placed beyond the bridge.
The second scenario shows a box culvert with a length of 20 feet or more. A single Type 3 object marker is placed on each side of the roadway on the approach to the culvert. Another marker is placed just past the culvert on the right shoulder. A dimension labeled L indicates the length of the culvert.
The third scenario shows pipe or box culverts with a length of less than 20 feet on both sides of the roadway. A single Type 3 object marker is placed just before each culvert, one on the left shoulder and one on the right shoulder.
A legend identifies the direction of travel with an arrow. At the lower right of the figure, a diagram labeled “Mounting Height and Offset, Type 3 Object Marker Installation” shows the required installation details. The marker is mounted so that the edge of the sign aligns with the edge of the object being marked. The bottom of the sign is elevated 4 feet above the ground. The object and ground slope are shown, along with the location of the edge of the travel lane or shoulder."
|'''Figure 903.3.72.2''' Standard Application of Type 3 Object Markers Objects Greater Than 2' From Edge of Travel Lane/Shoulder]]

=={{SpanID|903.3.73}}903.3.73 Object Markers for Ends of Roadways (MUTCD Section 2C.73)==

'''Support. '''The Type 4 object marker is used to warn and alert road users of the end of a roadway in other than construction or maintenance areas.

'''Standard. '''If an object marker is used to mark the end of a roadway, a Type 4 object marker shall be used. See ([https://www.modot.org/media/51221 Section 903 of the Missouri Standard Plans for Highway Construction]) for installation details.

'''Option. '''The Type 4 object marker may be used in instances where there are no alternate vehicular paths.

'''Standard. '''The minimum mounting height, measured vertically from the bottom of a Type 4 object marker to the elevation of the near edge of the traveled way, shall be 4 feet.

'''Guidance. '''Appropriate advance warning signs in EPG 903.3 should be used.

=={{SpanID|903.3.74}}903.3.74 Shoulder Barricade Assembly==

[[image:GB-1.gif|thumb|center|125px|<center>'''GB-1'''</center>]]

'''Option.''' Shoulder barricades may be used for added emphasis of standard warning sign installations at the direction of the engineer.

'''Standard.''' The shoulder barricade assembly shall consist of three horizontal boards (GB-1L or GB-1R) marked with reflective diagonal stripes and a 48-inch standard warning sign and a 48 in. standard warning sign with the appropriate 30-inch advisory plaque. See [[#fig903.3.74|Figure 903.3.74]] for typical construction.

GB-1R shoulder barricades shall be installed on the right side of the roadway and have diagonal stripes sloping downward from the right to the left.

GB-1L shoulder barricades shall be installed on the left side of the roadway and have diagonal stripes sloping downward from the left to the right.

'''Option.''' Supplemental signs may be installed on the shoulder barricade at the direction of the engineer.

'''Guidance.''' Shoulder Barricades should be installed on the appropriate size on wide flanged structural steel posts.

{{SpanID|fig903.3.74}}
[[File:Figure 903.3.74 Shoulder Barricade Assembly.png|thumb|center|alt="The figure shows a three-rail barricade assembly with a 48-inch diamond-shaped warning sign mounted to the front. The barricade consists of three horizontal panels with alternating black and yellow diagonal stripes. Each barricade rail is 12 inches tall, and the rails are stacked vertically with 12-inch gaps between them.
A pair of vertical dimension lines on the right side show 24-inch measurements between the midpoints of each barricade panel, indicating the vertical spacing between the centers of the top, middle, and bottom rails.
Centered on the barricade is a 48-inch warning sign, placed so that its midpoint aligns with the midpoint of the middle barricade rail. Below this sign, a rectangular supplemental MPH plaque is mounted on the lower barricade rail. Both signs are shown centered horizontally on the barricade width.
Horizontal dimensions at the top indicate that the barricade assembly is 8 feet wide with the sign centered within a 5-foot-6-inch internal spacing. To the left of the assembly, a minimum 6-foot offset is shown from the nearest post to the edge of the travel way or stabilized shoulder.
Two wide-flange vertical posts support the barricade. Vertical measurements labeled A and B (referencing EPG 903.1.15) indicate the mounting height of the barricade and signs from the ground.
A note below the figure states that when a supplemental MPH plaque is used, the signs should be mounted exactly as shown, and if no supplemental sign is used, the warning sign should be centered vertically on the barricade. A smaller detail illustration reinforces this alternate configuration, showing the warning sign centered on the three-rail barricade without a supplemental plaque."
|650px|<center>'''Figure 903.3.74''' Shoulder Barricade Assembly</center>]]

903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C)

2025-12-03T19:56:50Z

HogsettC: /* {{SpanID|903.3.32}}903.3.32 Reduced Speed Limit Ahead and Speed Zone Signs (W3-5) (MUTCD Section 2C.40) */

{| align="right" style="max-width: 640px;"
|__TOC__
|}
[[Category:903 Highway Signing (MUTCD Part 2)|903.03]]
=={{SpanID|903.3.1}}903.3.1 Application of Warning Signs (MUTCD Section 2C.01)==

'''Standard. '''The use of warning signs shall be based on an engineering study or on engineering judgment.

Warning signs shall be retroreflective.

'''Guidance. '''The use of warning signs should be kept to a minimum as the unnecessary use of warning signs tends to breed disrespect for all signs. In situations where the condition or activity is seasonal or temporary, the warning sign should be removed or covered when the condition or activity does not exist.

'''Support.''' The decision to use most warning signs is based on prevailing conditions. The items to be considered when determining the need for a warning sign are stopping sight distance and prevailing speed. Prevailing speed is determined by using either the posted or 85th percentile speed on the facility. Stopping sight distance is the distance a driver requires to perceive, react, and respond to a condition. The prevailing speed affects the amount of sight distance required for a condition.

It is recommended to use [[#tab903.3.1|Table 903.3.1]] to determine the stopping sight distance needed when considering the use of most warning signs. If the stopping sight distance is less than that in [[#tab903.3.1|Table 903.3.1]], a sign might be needed.

{{SpanID|tab903.3.1}}
<center>
{| class="wikitable" style="text-align: center;"
|+ '''Table 903.3.1''' Stopping Sight Distance Requirements
|-
! Prevailing Speed (mph) !! Distance (ft.)
|-
| 30 || 200
|-
| 35 || 250
|-
| 40 || 305
|-
| 45 || 360
|-
| 50 || 425
|-
| 55 || 495
|-
| 60 || 570
|-
| 65 || 645
|-
| 70 || 730
|-
| style="background-color: #ffffff;" colspan="2" | Note: Based on "A Policy on Geometric Design of Highways and Streets", 2018 Edition, AASHTO, Table 3-1, Stopping Sight Distance
|}
</center>

=={{SpanID|903.3.2}}903.3.2 Design of Warning Signs (MUTCD Section 2C.02)==

'''Standard. '''Except as provided in the following Option paragraph or unless specifically designated otherwise, all warning signs shall be diamond-shaped (square with one diagonal vertical) with a black legend and border on a fluorescent yellow background. Warning signs shall be designed in accordance with the sizes, shapes, colors, and legends contained in the FHWA “Standard Highway Signs” publication (see [[:Category:911_General_(MUTCD_Part_1) #911.1.5|EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1A.05]])).

'''Option.''' A warning sign that is larger than the size shown in the Oversized column in [[#tab903.3.3|Table 903.3.3]] for that particular sign may be diamond-shaped or may be rectangular or square in shape.

'''Support.''' The use of a shape other than diamond-shaped is typical for overhead installations. [[903.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 2A) #903.1.5|EPG 903.1.5]] contains information on allowable methods to accommodate a diamond-shaped warning sign where the lateral space available in which to install a diamond-shaped warning sign is constrained, such as in urban locations, when mounting on a narrow median barrier or adjacent to a retaining wall, including the display of the standard legend in a vertically oriented rectangle.

The use of LEDs in the border and legend of warning signs is described in [[903.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 2A) #903.1.12|EPG 903.1.12]].

'''Option.''' Word message warning signs other than those provided in the EPG may be developed and installed by MoDOT for conditions otherwise not addressed by standard signs (see [[903.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 2A) #903.1.4|EPG 903.1.4]]).

'''Support.''' MoDOT uses the fluorescent yellow-green (FYG) color exclusively for school signs. The only application where MoDOT would use the FYG color for bicycle or pedestrian signs is if a state route and local street intersected and the local jurisdiction utilized FYG color signs on their legs of the intersection. This would only be done to be in compliance with the MUTCD requirement that FYG and yellow shall not be intermixed in an application.

There are two primary reasons MoDOT has chosen not to use FYG color for bicycle or pedestrian signs. The first reason involves the MUTCD requirement that FYG color signs shall not be intermixed with other yellow color signs. A transition to FYG color signs would result in the premature replacement of all signs in an area when just one sign reached the end of its life or was damaged, resulting in wasted resources. The second reason, and most important, is to reserve FYG color signs for school signing to make these signs stand out from other signing, as school children are especially vulnerable road users.

In response to repeated requests by a local jurisdiction for MoDOT to use the FYG color for bicycle and pedestrian signs, MoDOT initiated a research study to determine if there were any documented safety benefits for using the FYG color for these signs. Having previously adopted fluorescent orange for all work zone signs, MoDOT made the transition from standard yellow to fluorescent yellow (FY) for all warning signs as there was documentation to support this change in sheeting color. However, no documentation could be found to indicate that the FYG sign color provides any safety benefits when compared to the FY sign color. The research study surveyed other state DOTs as well as local MPOs to determine if they made a change to the FYG color, how they made the decision to do so, and if they could provide any research documentation which would support FYG to be safer than FY. The study showed there was no conclusive evidence to demonstrate that FYG sign color had any safety benefit compared to the FY sign color that MoDOT was already using. Most agencies who adopted FYG did so based on engineering judgement and not based on the results of research.

'''Standard.''' Warning signs regarding conditions associated with school buses and schools and their related supplemental plaques shall have a black legend and border on a fluorescent yellow-green background (see [[908.2 Signs (MUTCD Chapter 7B) #908.2.1|EPG 908.2.1]]).

'''Option.''' Consistent with the provisions of [[902.18 Flashing Beacons (MUTCD Chapter 4S) #902.18.3|EPG 902.18.3]], a Warning Beacon may be used in combination with a standard warning sign.

=={{SpanID|903.3.3}}903.3.3 Size of Warning Signs and Plaques (MUTCD Section 2C.03)==

'''Standard.''' Except as provided in [[903.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 2A) #903.1.7|EPG 903.1.7]], the sizes for warning signs shall be as shown in [[#tab903.3.3|Table 903.3.3]].

'''Support.''' [[903.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 2A) #903.1.7|EPG 903.1.7]] contains information regarding the applicability of the various columns in [[#tab903.3.3|Table 903.3.3]].

'''Option.''' Signs and plaques larger than those shown in [[#tab903.3.3|Table 903.3.3]] may be used (see [[903.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 2A) #903.1.11|EPG 903.1.11]]) for special applications where speed, volume or other factors result in conditions where increased emphasis, improved recognition or increased legibility would be desirable, with approval from the MoDOT Highway Safety and Traffic Division.

'''Guidance. '''The minimum size for all diamond-shaped warning signs facing traffic on exit and entrance ramps at interchanges should be the size identified in [[#tab903.3.3|Table 903.3.3]] for the mainline roadway classification (Freeway/Expressway).

<center>
{{SpanID|tab903.3.3}}
{| class="wikitable" style="text-align:center;"
|+ Table 903.3.3 Warning Sign and Plaques Sizes
|-
! rowspan="2" | Sign or Plaque
! rowspan="2" | Sign Designation
! rowspan="2" | EPG Article
! colspan="2" | Conventional Road (in. x in.)
! Freeway/Expressway (in. x in.)
|-
! Standard
! Oversized
! Mainline & Ramps
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Turn
| W1-1
| [[#903.3.7|903.3.7]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Curve
| W1-2
| [[#903.3.7|903.3.7]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Reverse Turn
| W1-3
| [[#903.3.7|903.3.7]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Reverse Curve
| W1-4
| [[#903.3.7|903.3.7]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Winding Road
| W1-5
| [[#903.3.7|903.3.7]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | One-Direction Large Arrow
| W1-6
| [[#903.3.10|903.3.10]]
| 48 X 24
| 72 X 36
| 72 X 36
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Two-Direction Large Arrow
| W1-7
| [[#903.3.35|903.3.35]]
| 48 X 24
| 72 X 36
| 72 X 36
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Chevron
| W1-8
| [[#903.3.8|903.3.8]]
| 18 X 24
| 30 X 36
| 30 X 36
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Combination Horizontal Alignment/Intersection
| W1-10 Series
| [[#903.3.9|903.3.9]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Hairpin Curve
| W1-11
| [[#903.3.7|903.3.7]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Truck Rollover
| W1-13
| [[#903.3.11|903.3.11]]
| -
| -
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | 270° Curve
| W1-15
| [[#903.3.7|903.3.7]]
| -
| -
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Cross road
| W2-1
| [[#903.3.33|903.3.33]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Side Road
| W2-2
| [[#903.3.33|903.3.33]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Side Road (45°)
| W2-3, 3a
| [[#903.3.33|903.3.33]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | T Intersection
| W2-4
| [[#903.3.33|903.3.33]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Y Intersection
| W2-5
| [[#903.3.33|903.3.33]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Circular Intersection
| W2-6
| [[#903.3.33|903.3.33]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Offset Side Road
| W2-7
| [[#903.3.33|903.3.33]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 x 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Double Side Roads
| W2-8
| [[#903.3.33|903.3.33]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Watch for Entering Traffic
| W2-10a
| [[#903.3.34|903.3.34]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Watch for Approaching Traffic
| W2-11a
| [[#903.3.34|903.3.34]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Stop Ahead
| W3-1
| [[#903.3.29|903.3.29]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Yield Ahead
| W3-2
| [[#903.3.29|903.3.29]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Signal Ahead
| W3-3
| [[#903.3.29|903.3.29]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Be Prepared to Stop
| W3-4
| [[#903.3.29|903.3.29]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Reduced Speed Ahead
| W3-5
| [[#903.3.32|903.3.32]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Ramp Meter Ahead
| W3-7
| [[#903.3.30|903.3.30]]
| 36 X 36
| -
| -
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Ramp Metered When Flashing
| W3-8
| [[#903.3.30|903.3.30]]
| 36 X 36
| -
| -
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Ferry Crossing Ahead
| W3-18
| [[#903.3.54|903.3.54]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| -
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Merge
| W4-1
| [[#903.3.37|903.3.37]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Lane Ends
| W4-2
| [[#903.3.39|903.3.39]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Added Lane
| W4-3
| [[#903.3.38|903.3.38]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Cross Traffic Does Not Stop (plaque)
| W4-4P
| [[#903.3.37|903.3.37]]
| 24 X 12
| 36 X 18
| 36 X 18
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Traffic From Left Does Not Stop (plaque)
| W4-4aPL
| [[#903.3.37|903.3.37]]
| 24 X 12
| 36 X 18
| 36 X 18
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Traffic From Right Does Not Stop (plaque)
| W4-4aPR
| [[#903.3.37|903.3.37]]
| 24 X 12
| 36 X 18
| 36 X 18
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Oncoming Traffic Does Not Stop (plaque)
| W4-4bP
| [[#903.3.37|903.3.37]]
| 24 X 12
| 36 X 18
| 36 X 18
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Entering Roadway Merge
| W4-5
| [[#903.3.37|903.3.37]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Entering Roadway Added Lane
| W4-6
| [[#903.3.38|903.3.38]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Single Lane Transition
| W4-8
| [[#903.3.40|903.3.40]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | ROAD NARROWS
| W5-1
| [[#903.3.15|903.3.15]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | NARROW BRIDGE
| W5-2
| [[#903.3.16|903.3.16]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | ONE LANE BRIDGE
| W5-3
| [[#903.3.17|903.3.17]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| -
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Divided Highway
| W6-1
| [[#903.3.18|903.3.18]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| -
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Divided Highway Ends
| W6-2
| [[#903.3.19|903.3.19]]
| -
| -
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Two-Way Traffic
| W6-3
| [[#903.3.42|903.3.42]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| -
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Two-Way Traffic (2-Lane)
| W6-5
| [[#903.3.55|903.3.55]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| -
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Two-Way Traffic (3-Lane)
| W6-5a
| [[#903.3.55|903.3.55]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
|
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Passing Lane (plaque)
| W6-6aP
| [[#903.3.55|903.3.55]]
| 42 X 12
| -
| -
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Passing Lane Ends
| W6-16
| [[#903.3.55|903.3.55]]
| 36 X 36
| -
| -
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Watch for Left-Turning Traffic in Passing Lane
| W6-17
| [[#903.3.55|903.3.55]]
| 72 X 48
| -
| -
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Hill
| W7-1
| [[#903.3.14|903.3.14]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Uphill
| W7-1c
| [[#903.3.14|903.3.14]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Percent Grade
| W7-3P
| [[#903.3.63|903.3.63]]
| 24 X 18
| 30 X 24
| 30 X 24
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Next _ Miles (plaque)
| W7-3aP
| [[#903.3.63|903.3.63]]
| 24 X 18
| 30 X 24
| 30 X 24
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Bump
| W8-1
| [[#903.3.23|903.3.23]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Dip
| W8-2
| [[#903.3.23|903.3.23]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Pavement Ends
| W8-3
| [[#903.3.24|903.3.24]]
| 36 X 36
| -
| -
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Slippery When Wet
| W8-5
| [[#903.3.25|903.3.25]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Truck Crossing
| W8-6
| [[#903.3.49|903.3.49]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Fallen Rocks
| W8-14
| [[#903.3.26|903.3.26]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Road May Flood
| W8-18
| [[#903.3.28|903.3.28]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Impassable During High Water
| W8-34
| [[#903.3.28|903.3.28]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Left (Right) Lane Ends
| W9-1
| [[#903.3.39|903.3.39]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Lanes Merge
| W9-4
| [[#903.3.40|903.3.40]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Right (Left) Lane Exit Only
| W9-7
| [[#903.3.41|903.3.41]]
| 132 X 70
| -
| 132 X 70
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Bicycle
| W11-1
| [[#903.3.45|903.3.45]]
| 36 X 36
| -
| -
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Pedestrian
| W11-2
| [[#903.3.53|903.3.53]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| -
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Cattle
| W11-4
| [[#903.3.53|903.3.53]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
|
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Farm Vehicle
| W11-5
| [[#903.3.51|903.3.51]]
| 36 X 36
| -
| -
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Equestrian
| W11-7
| [[#903.3.53|903.3.53]]
| 36 X 36
| -
| -
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Emergency Vehicle
| W11-8
| [[#903.3.52|903.3.52]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Truck Entrance
| W11-10
| [[#903.3.50|903.3.50]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Emergency Signal Ahead (plaque)
| W11-12P
| [[#903.3.52|903.3.52]]
| 36 X 30
| -
| 36 X 30
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Horse-Drawn Vehicle
| W11-14
| [[#903.3.48|903.3.48]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Bike / Ped
| W11-15
| [[#903.3.46|903.3.46]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Trail Crossing
| W11-15a
| [[#903.3.47|903.3.47]]
| 36 X 36
| -
| -
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Double Arrow
| W12-1
| [[#903.3.20|903.3.20]]
| 30 X 30
| 36 X 36
| 36 X 36
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Low Clearance Advance
| W12-2
| [[#903.3.22|903.3.22]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Low Clearance (overhead)
| W12-2a
| [[#903.3.22|903.3.22]]
| 84 X 24
| -
| 84 X 24
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Advisory Speed
| W13-1P
| [[#903.3.33|903.3.33]]
| 24 X 24
| 30 X 30
| 30 X 30
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Advisory Speed (plaque)
| W13-1aP
| [[#903.3.33|903.3.33]]
| 48 X 15
| -
| 48 X 15
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Advisory Exit Speed
| W13-2
| [[#903.3.12|903.3.12]]
| -
| -
| 48 X 60
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Advisory Ramp Speed
| W13-3
| [[#903.3.12|903.3.12]]
| -
| -
| 48 X 60
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Advisory Exit Speed with 270° Loop Arrow
| W13-6
| [[#903.3.12|903.3.12]]
| -
| -
| 48 X 84
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Advisory Ramp Speed with 270° Loop Arrow
| W13-7
| [[#903.3.12|903.3.12]]
| -
| -
| 48 X 84
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Advisory Exit Speed with 180° Hairpin Arrow
| W13-8
| [[#903.3.12|903.3.12]]
| -
| -
| 48 X 84
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Advisory Ramp Speed with 180° Hairpin Arrow
| W13-9
| [[#903.3.12|903.3.12]]
| -
| -
| 48 X 84
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Advisory Exit Speed with 90° Turn Arrow
| W13-10
| [[#903.3.12|903.3.12]]
| -
| -
| 48 X 72
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Advisory Ramp Speed with 90° Turn Arrow
| W13-11
| [[#903.3.12|903.3.12]]
| -
| -
| 48 X 72
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Advisory Exit Speed with Truck Rollover
| W13-12
| [[#903.3.12|903.3.12]]
| -
| -
| 48 X 84
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Advisory Ramp Speed with Truck Rollover
| W13-13
| [[#903.3.12|903.3.12]]
| -
| -
| 48 X 84
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Vehicle Speed Feedback Sign
| W13-20
| [[#903.3.13|903.3.13]]
| 30 X 36
| -
| 48 X 60
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Vehicle Speed Feedback (plaque)
| W13-20aP
| [[#903.3.13|903.3.13]]
| 30 X 24
| -
| 48 X 36
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Dead End
| W14-1
| [[#903.3.21|903.3.21]]
| 36 X 36
| 36 X 36
| -
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | No Outlet
| W14-2
| [[#903.3.21|903.3.21]]
| 36 X 36
| 36 X 36
| -
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | No Passing Zone (pennant)
| W14-3
| [[#903.3.43|903.3.43]]
| -
| -
| -
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Road Ends
| W14-13
| [[#903.3.21|903.3.21]]
| 36 X 36
| 36 X 36
| -
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | In Road (plaque)
| W16-1P
| [[#903.3.66|903.3.66]]
| 24 X 18
| -
| 24 X 18
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | XX FEET (plaque)
| W16-2P
| [[#903.3.60|903.3.60]]
| 24 X 18
| 30 X 24
| 30 X 24
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | XX MILES (plaque)
| W16-3P
| [[#903.3.60|903.3.60]]
| 24 X 18
| 30 X 24
| 30 X 24
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | NEXT _ FEET (plaque)
| W16-4P
| [[#903.3.60|903.3.60]]
| 24 X 18
| 30 X 24
| 30 X 24
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Directional Arrow (plaque)
| W16-5P
| [[#903.3.61|903.3.61]]
| 30 X 21
| -
| 30 X 21
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Advance Turn Arrow (plaque)
| W16-6P
| [[#903.3.61|903.3.61]]
| 30 X 21
| -
| 30 X 21
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Downward Diagonal Arrow (plaque)
| W16-7P
| [[#903.3.62|903.3.62]]
| 30 X 21
| -
| 30 X 21
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Dual Downward Diagonal Arrow (plaque)
| W16-7aP
| [[#903.3.62|903.3.62]]
| 30 X 21
| -
| 30 X 21
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Two Line Street Name (plaque)
| W16-8aP
| [[#903.3.64|903.3.64]]
| Varies X 15
| Varies X 24
| Varies X 24
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Advance Street Name (plaque)
| W16-8P
| [[#903.3.64|903.3.64]]
| Varies X 8
| Varies X 12
| Varies X 12
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Ahead (plaque)
| W16-9P
| [[#903.3.44|903.3.44]], [[#903.3.53|903.3.53]]
| 30 X 18
| -
| 30 X 18
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Notice (plaque)
| W16-18P
| [[#903.3.68|903.3.68]]
| 36 X 12
| 48 X 18
| 48 X 18
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Except to Turn (plaque)
| W16-23P
| [[#903.3.68|903.3.68]]
| 48 X 30
| -
| -
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Except to Exit (plaque)
| W16-24P
| [[#903.3.68|903.3.68]]
| 48 X 30
| -
| -
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Double Reverse Curve Left - 1 Lane
| W24-1L
| [[#903.3.7|903.3.7]]
| 36 X 36
| -
| 36 X 36
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Double Reverse Curve Left - 2 Lanes
| W24-1aL
| [[#903.3.7|903.3.7]]
| 36 X 36
| -
| 36 X 36
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Double Reverse Curve Left - 3 Lanes
| W24-1bL
| [[#903.3.7|903.3.7]]
| 36 X 36
| -
| 36 X 36
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Oncoming Traffic Has Extended Green
| W25-1
| [[#903.3.36|903.3.36]]
| 24 X 30
| -
| -
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Oncoming Traffic May Have Extended Green
| W25-2
| [[#903.3.36|903.3.36]]
| 24 X 30
| -
| -
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Watch for Stopped Traffic
| W26-1
| [[#903.3.31|903.3.31]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 48 X 48
|-
| style="text-align:left;" | Travel Safe Zone
| W27-1
| [[#903.3.56|903.3.56]]
| 36 X 48
| 48 X 60
| 48 X 60
|}
</center>

=={{SpanID|903.3.4}}903.3.4 Placement of Warning Signs (MUTCD Section 2C.04)==

'''Support.''' Information on the placement of warning signs is contained in [[903.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 2A) #903.1.13|EPG 903.1.13]] through [[903.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 2A) #903.1.18|903.1.18]].

The time needed for detection, recognition, decision, and reaction is called the Perception-Response Time (PRT). [[#tab903.3.4|Table 903.3.4]] is provided as an aid for determining warning sign location. The distances shown in [[#tab903.3.4|Table 903.3.4]] can be adjusted for roadway features, other signing, and to improve visibility.

'''Guidance. '''Warning signs should be placed so that they provide an adequate PRT. The distances contained in [[#tab903.3.4|Table 903.3.4]] should be applied with engineering judgment.

Minimum spacing between warning signs with different messages should be based on the estimated PRT for driver comprehension of and reaction to the second sign.

The effectiveness of the placement of warning signs should be periodically evaluated. This is typically accomplished during routine sign inspection cycles. [[903.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 2A) #903.1.19|EPG 903.1.19]] contains information regarding MoDOT’s sign maintenance program.

'''Standard. '''When any part of a warning sign assembly (post, sign, plaque, etc.) is replaced, maintained or modified, the placement of the sign shall be reviewed based on [[#tab903.3.4|Table 903.3.4]]. Additionally, mounting height shall be reviewed for conformance with [[903.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 2A) #903.1.15|EPG 903.1.15]].

{{SpanID|tab903.3.4}}
{| class="wikitable"
|-
|+ '''Table 903.3.4''' Guidelines for Advance Placement of Warning Signs
|- style="text-align:center;"
! rowspan="3" | Posted or 85th-Percentile Speed
! colspan="9" | Advance Placement Distance1
|- style="text-align:center;"
! rowspan="2" style="max-width: 200px;" | Condition A: Speed reduction and lane changing in heavy traffic2
! colspan="8" | Condition B: Deceleration to the listed advisory (mph) for the condition
|- style="text-align:center;"
! 03
! 104
! 204
! 304
! 404
! 504
! 604
! 704
|- style="vertical-align:middle;"
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 20 mph
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 225 ft
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 115 ft
| N/A5
| —
| —
| —
| —
| —
| —
|- style="vertical-align:middle;"
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 25 mph
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 325 ft
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 155 ft
| N/A5
| N/A5
| —
| —
| —
| —
| —
|- style="vertical-align:middle;"
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 30 mph
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 460 ft
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 200 ft
| N/A5
| N/A5
| —
| —
| —
| —
| —
|- style="vertical-align:middle;"
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 35 mph
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 565 ft
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 250 ft
| N/A5
| N/A5
| N/A5
| —
| —
| —
| —
|- style="vertical-align:middle;"
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 40 mph
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 670 ft
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 305 ft
| 100 ft6
| 100 ft6
| N/A5
| —
| —
| —
| —
|- style="vertical-align:middle;"
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 45 mph
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 775 ft
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 360 ft
| 125 ft
| 100 ft6
| 100 ft6
| N/A5
| —
| —
| —
|- style="vertical-align:middle;"
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 50 mph
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 885 ft
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 425 ft
| 200 ft
| 175 ft
| 125 ft
| 100 ft6
| —
| —
| —
|- style="vertical-align:middle;"
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 55 mph
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 990 ft
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 495 ft
| 275 ft
| 225 ft
| 200 ft
| 125 ft
| N/A5
| —
| —
|- style="vertical-align:middle;"
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 60 mph
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 1100 ft
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 570 ft
| 350 ft
| 325 ft
| 275 ft
| 200 ft
| 100 ft6
| —
| —
|- style="vertical-align:middle;"
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 65 mph
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 1200 ft
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 645 ft
| 450 ft
| 400 ft
| 350 ft
| 275 ft
| 200 ft
| 100 ft6
| —
|- style="vertical-align:middle;"
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 70 mph
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 1250 ft
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 730 ft
| 525 ft
| 500 ft
| 450 ft
| 375 ft
| 275 ft
| 150 ft
| —
|- style="vertical-align:middle;"
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 75 mph
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 1350 ft
| style="vertical-align:middle;" | 820 ft
| 625 ft
| 600 ft
| 550 ft
| 475 ft
| 375 ft
| 250 ft
| 100 ft6
|-
| style="background-color: #ffffff" colspan="11" |
|-
| style="background-color: #ffffff" colspan="11" | Note 1 — For Advanced Placement Distance — General
* The distances are adjusted for a sign legibility distance of 180 feet for Condition A.
* The distances for Condition B (with the exception of the potential stop condition) have been adjusted for a sign legibility distance of 250 feet, which is appropriate for an alignment warning symbol sign.
* For Conditions A and B, warning signs with less than 6-inch legend or more than four words, a minimum of 100 feet should be added to the advance placement distance to provide adequate legibility of the warning sign.

Note 2 — For Condition A — Speed Reduction and Lane Change Conditions
* Typical conditions are locations where the road user must use extra time to adjust speed and change lanes in heavy traffic because of a complex driving situation or reduce to a new posted speed.
* Typical signs are Merge, Right Lane Ends, and Reduced Speed Ahead.
* The distances are determined by providing the driver a PRT of 14.0 to 14.5 seconds for vehicle maneuvers (2018 AASHTO Policy, Table 3-3, Decision Sight Distance, Avoidance Maneuver E) and adjusted for a legibility distance of 180 feet for the appropriate sign.

Note 3 — For Condition B — Stop Condition
* Typical condition is the warning of a potential stop situation.
* Typical signs are Stop Ahead, Yield Ahead, Signal Ahead, and Intersection Warning signs.
* The distances are based on the 2018 AASHTO Policy, Table 3-1, Stopping Sight Distance, providing a PRT of 2.5 seconds, a deceleration rate of 11.2 feet/second2.

Note 4 — For Condition B — Reduced Speed Conditions
* Typical conditions are locations where the road user must decrease speed to maneuver through the warned condition.
* Typical signs are Turn, Curve, Reverse Turn, Reverse Curve, or Reduced Speed Ahead.
* The distance is determined by providing a 2.5 second PRT, a vehicle deceleration rate of 10 feet/second2, and adjusted for a sign legibility distance of 250 feet.

Note 5 — For Condition B — N/A Values
* No suggested distances are provided for these speeds, as the placement location is dependent on site conditions and other signing.
* An alignment warning sign may be placed anywhere from the point of curvature up to 100 feet in advance of the curve.
* However, the alignment warning sign should be installed in advance of the curve and at least 100 feet from any other signs.

Note 6 — For Condition B — for shortest distance values per posted speed
* The minimum advance placement distance is listed as 100 feet to provide adequate spacing between signs.

General Note:

Warning signs that advise road users about conditions that are not related to a specific location can be installed in an appropriate location, based on engineering judgment.
|}

=={{SpanID|903.3.5}}903.3.5 Horizontal Alignment Warning Signs – General (MUTCD Section 2C.05)==

'''Support.''' A variety of horizontal alignment warning signs, pavement markings (see [[620.2 Pavement and Curb Markings (MUTCD Chapter 3B)|EPG 620.2]]), and delineation (see [[620.6 Delineators (MUTCD Chapter 3G)|EPG 620.6]]) can be used to advise motorists of a change in the roadway alignment. Uniform application of these traffic control devices with respect to the amount of change in the roadway alignment conveys a consistent message establishing driver expectancy and promoting effective roadway operations. The design and application of horizontal alignment warning signs to meet those requirements are addressed in [[#903.3.5|EPG 903.3.5]] through [[#903.3.12|903.3.12]].

The following list identifies treatments that might be used in advance of or within a change in horizontal alignment:
:A. Horizontal alignment (Turn (W1-1), Curve (W1-2, W1-10 series, W1-11, W1-13, W1-15), Reverse Turn (W1-3), Reverse Curve (W1-4), Winding Road (W1-5), Exit Speed (W13-2), Ramp Speed (W13-3), and Combination Horizontal Alignment (Advisory Exit or Ramp Speed W13-6 through W13-11)) signs (see [[#903.3.7|EPG 903.3.7]], [[#903.3.9|903.3.9]], and [[#903.3.12|903.3.12]])
:B. Advisory Speed (W13-1P) plaque (see [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.59|EPG 903.3.59]])
:C. Chevron Alignment (W1-8) signs (see [[#903.3.8|EPG 903.3.8]])
:D. One Direction Large Arrow (W1-6) sign (see [[#903.3.10|EPG 903.3.10]])
:E. Sign or marking conspicuity enhancements (see [[903.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 2A) #903.1.11|EPG 903.1.11]])
:F. Longitudinal rumble strips (see [[620.10 Rumble Strip Markings (MUTCD Chapter 3K) #620.10.1|EPG 620.10.1]])
:G. Vehicle Speed Feedback Sign (see [[#903.3.13|EPG 903.3.13]])

In addition, considerations other than traffic control devices, such as improved surface friction (high friction surface treatments), pavement edge treatments, lighting improvements, increased superelevation, and longitudinal rumble strips, might be used in advance of or within a change in horizontal alignment.

'''Guidance.''' Except as provided in [[#903.3.6|EPG 903.3.6]], the selection of traffic control devices used to warn road users of a change in horizontal alignment or to provide guidance in navigating the change in horizontal alignment should be based on consideration of one or more of the following factors:
:A. The speed of traffic on the approach to the change in horizontal alignment
:B. The recommended advisory speed for the change in horizontal alignment
:C. The difference between the speed limit and the advisory speed, or the speed differential for the change in horizontal alignment
:D. Daily traffic volumes on the roadway
:E. The typical mix of vehicle types on the roadway
:F. Sight distance throughout the change in horizontal alignment
:G. Other types of traffic control devices that are used in advance of and within the change in horizontal alignment on the same roadway segment
:H. The crash history of the change in horizontal alignment
:I. The presence of driveways or intersections within the curve radius

=={{SpanID|903.3.6}}903.3.6 Device Selection for Changes in Horizontal Alignment (MUTCD Section 2C.06)==

'''Standard: '''[[#tab903.3.6|Table 903.3.6]] shall be used to specify the type(s) of warning signs to be used in advance of, and/or along, a horizontal curve, except as provided in following Option paragraph. The speed differential shall be the difference between the horizontal curve’s advisory speed and the roadway’s posted speed limit on the approach to the curve.

'''Option. '''A One Direction Large Arrow (W1-6) sign may be used to supplement Chevron Alignment (W1-8) signs when:
:A. Site conditions limit the number of Chevron Alignment signs that are visible; or

:B. The number of Chevron Alignment signs that can be installed within the change in horizontal alignment is less than the number determined by the spacing specified in [[#903.3.8|EPG 903.3.8]].

Additional or supplemental devices may be used for a change in horizontal alignment on the basis of engineering judgment.

If engineering judgment indicates the need for the horizontal alignment sign for a curve that can be driven at or above the posted speed limit, horizontal alignment signs may be installed with the Advisory Speed Plaque (W13-1P) displaying an advisory speed equal to the posted speed limit.

Warrants for center lines and edge lines are provided in EPG [[620.2 Pavement and Curb Markings (MUTCD Chapter 3B) #620.2.2|620.2.2]] and [[620.2 Pavement and Curb Markings (MUTCD Chapter 3B) #620.2.11|620.2.11]], respectively.

Provisions for delineators are contained in [[620.6 Delineators (MUTCD Chapter 3G)| EPG 620.6]].

Provisions for Advisory Speed (W13-1P) plaques are contained in [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.59|EPG 903.3.59]].

<center>
{{SpanID|tab903.3.6}}
{| class="wikitable"
|+'''Table 903.3.6''' Application of Warning Signs for Changes in Horizontal Alignment
|-
! Speed Differential1 !! Warning Signs Required
|-
| 5 to 10 mph || Horizontal Alignment warning sign2 Advisory Speed plaque3
|-
| 15 mph or more || Horizontal Alignment warning sign2 Advisory Speed plaque3 Chevron Alignment signs4
|-
| style="background-color: #ffffff;" colspan="2" |
# Speed differential shall be the difference between the horizontal curve’s advisory speed and the roadway’s posted speed limit.
# Provisions for the use of Horizontal Alignment warning signs are contained in [[#903.3.6|EPG 903.3.6]].
# Provision for Advisory Speed (W13-1P) plaques are contained in [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.59|EPG 903.3.59]].
# [[#903.3.6|EPG 903.3.6]] contains information about the use of a One Direction Large Arrow (W1-6) sign in place of or to supplement chevron alignment signs.
|}
</center>

=={{SpanID|903.3.7}}903.3.7 Horizontal Alignment Signs (W1-1 through W1-5, W1-11, W1-15, W24-1) (MUTCD Section 2C.07)==
<center>
{| style=""
|-
|[[File:W1-1.png|center|100px|thumb|<center>'''W1-1'''</center>]]
|[[File:W1-2.png|center|100px|thumb|<center>'''W1-2'''</center>]]
|[[File:W1-3.png|center|100px|thumb|<center>'''W1-3'''</center>]]
|[[File:W1-4.png|center|100px|thumb|<center>'''W1-4'''</center>]]
|-
|[[File:W1-5.png|center|100px|thumb|<center>'''W1-5'''</center>]]
|[[File:W1-11.png|center|100px|thumb|<center>'''W1-11'''</center>]]
|[[File:W1-15.png|center|100px|thumb|<center>'''W1-15'''</center>]]
|[[File:W24-1L.png|center|100px|thumb|<center>'''W24-1L'''</center>]]
|}
</center>

'''Standard. '''When a horizontal alignment sign is required as provided in [[#903.3.6|EPG 903.3.6]] the sign installed in advance of the curve shall be a Curve (W1-2) sign unless a different sign is recommended or allowed by the provisions of this Article.

A Turn (W1-1) sign shall be used instead of a Curve (W1-2) sign in advance of a horizontal curve that has an advisory speed of 30 mph or less.

'''Guidance. '''Where there are two changes in roadway alignment in opposite directions that are separated by a tangent distance of less than 600 feet, the Reverse Turn (W1-3) sign should be used instead of multiple Turn (W1-1) signs or the Reverse Curve (W1-4) sign should be used instead of multiple Curve (W1-2) signs.

'''Support. '''[[#fig903.3.7.1|Figures 903.3.7.1]] and [[#fig903.3.7.2|903.3.7.2]] provide examples of warning signs used for turns and curves.

'''Option. '''A Winding Road (W1-5) sign may be used instead of multiple Turn (W1-1) or Curve (W1-2) signs where there are three or more changes in roadway alignment each separated by a tangent distance of less than 600 feet.

A NEXT XX MILES (W7-3aP) supplemental distance plaque (see [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.60|EPG 903.3.60]]) may be installed below the Winding Road sign where continuous roadway curves exist for a specific distance.

If the curve has a change in horizontal alignment of 135 degrees or more, the Hairpin Curve (W1-11) sign may be used instead of a Turn or Curve sign.

If the curve has a change of direction of approximately 270 degrees, such as on a cloverleaf interchange ramp, the 270-degree Loop (W1-15) sign may be used instead of a Turn or Curve sign.

'''Guidance. '''When the Hairpin Curve sign or the 270-degree Loop sign is installed, either a One-Direction Large Arrow (W1-6) sign or Chevron Alignment (W1-8) signs should be installed on the outside of the turn or curve.

'''Option.''' A double reverse left sign (W24-1L) and advisory speed plaque may be used on the crossroad approaches to a Diverging Diamond Interchange (DDI) when the difference between the speed limit and the advisory speed is 5 mph or greater. The need for this signing is based on engineering judgment if speeding through a DDI is a concern. An Advisory speed plaque is typically installed where the posted speed on the crossroad of the DDI is 40 mph or greater.

'''Standard.''' If used with an advisory speed plaque, the W24-1L sign shall display the number of double reverse arrows which indicates the number of lanes on the crossroad going through the DDI in the direction of travel where the sign is observed.

'''Support. '''See [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.59|EPG 903.3.59]] for information regarding Advisory Speed Plaques (W13-1P).

{{SpanID|fig903.3.7.1}}
[[File:Figure 903.3.7.1 Example of Warning Signs for Changes in Horizontal Alignment (Sheet 1 of 2).png|thumb|center|800px|alt="A segment of a vertical two-lane north-south roadway that curves to the right, or east, is shown. At the bottom of the figure, facing south and to the right of the northbound lane, a sign assembly composed of a W1-2R sign mounted above a W13-1P plaque is shown. The W1-2R is a yellow diamond-shaped sign with a black arrow curving up and to the right.
Continuing northbound, on the left side of the roadway, the following sequence of W1-8 chevron signs is shown from bottom to top: four consecutive W1-8L chevrons facing north, one W1-8R chevron facing south, one W1-8L chevron facing north, one W1-8R chevron facing south, one W1-8L chevron facing north, and finally four consecutive W1-8R chevrons facing south. Continuing north on the same side of the road, facing north and to the right of the southbound lane, a sign assembly composed of a W1-2L sign mounted above a W13-1P plaque is shown."
|'''Figure 903.3.7.1''' Examples of Warning Signs for Changes in Horizontal Alignment ''(Sheet 1 of 2)'']]

{{SpanID|fig903.3.7.2}}
[[File:Figure 903.3.7.2 Example of Warning Signs for Changes in Horizontal Alignment (Sheet 2 of 2) .png|thumb|center|800px|alt="A segment of a vertical two-lane north-south roadway that curves to the right, or east, is shown.
At the bottom of the figure, facing south and to the right of the northbound lane, a sign assembly composed of a W1-1R sign mounted above a W13-1P plaque is shown. W1-1R is shown as a yellow diamond-shaped sign with a black arrow pointing up and then a sharp turn to the right.
On the left side of the roadway, the following sequence of optional W1-8 chevron signs are shown from bottom to top: two W1-8L chevrons facing north, followed by one W1-8R chevron facing south, then one W1-8L chevron facing north, and finally one W1-8R chevron facing south.
Just north of this sequence, a sign assembly composed of a W1-6R sign mounted above an optional W13-1aP plaque is shown facing south.
North of that on the curve, still on the left side of the roadway, there is a sequence of optional W1-8 chevron signs as follows: one W1-8R facing southwest, one W1-8L facing northeast, one W1-8R facing southwest, and one W1-8L facing northeast.
East of that, following the curve, another sign assembly composed of a W1-6L sign mounted above an optional W13-1aP plaque is shown facing east.
To the east of that, two optional W1-8R chevrons are shown facing west.
Finally, at the top right of the figure, facing east and to the right of the westbound lane, a sign assembly composed of a W1-1L sign mounted above a W13-1P plaque is shown. The W1-1L is a yellow diamond-shaped sign with a black arrow pointing up and then sharply turning to the left."
|'''Figure 903.3.7.2''' Examples of Warning Signs for Changes in Horizontal Alignment ''(Sheet 2 of 2)'']]

=={{SpanID|903.3.8}}903.3.8 Chevron Alignment Sign (W1-8) (MUTCD Section 2C.08)==
[[File:W1-8.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W1-8'''</center>]]

'''Support. '''Examples of when to use Chevron signs include locations where there is a crash history, evidence of drivers losing control on a curve or turn, a sharp change in horizontal alignment not readily visible to the driver, or as a systemic curve improvement program.

The majority of fatal and serious injury crashes are attributed to lane departure crashes (State Strategic Highway Safety Plan). Chevrons are a highly cost-effective way to reduce lane departure crashes in curves and turns.

Implementation of the 2009 MUTCD requirements for chevron deployments resulted in a statewide reduction in severe lane departure crashes in horizontal curves. To maintain this observed safety benefit, MoDOT has established standards based on the 2009 MUTCD criteria, which is above the minimum requirements in the 11th Edition of the MUTCD. For more details on the safety benefits of chevrons, contact the Highway Safety and Traffic Division.

'''Standard. '''The use of the Chevron Alignment (W1-8) sign (see [[#fig903.3.7.2|Figure 903.3.7.2]]) to provide additional emphasis and guidance for a change in horizontal alignment shall be in accordance with the information provided in [[#903.3.6|EPG 903.3.6]].

The Chevron Alignment sign shall be a vertical rectangle. No border shall be used on the Chevron Alignment sign.

If used, Chevron Alignment signs shall be installed on the outside of a turn or curve, in line with and at approximately a right angle to approaching traffic. Chevron Alignment signs shall be installed at a minimum height of 4 feet, measured vertically from the bottom of the sign to the elevation of the near edge of the traveled way, which will locate the sign at approximately the driver’s eye height.

'''Guidance. '''The approximate spacing of Chevron Alignment signs on the turn or curve measured from the point of curvature (PC) should be as shown in [[#tab903.3.8|Table 903.3.8]].

In addition to the Chevron Alignment signs placed throughout the curve, there should be one sign in advance of the PC and one after the PT. These signs should be spaced the same as the Chevron Alignment signs in the curve.

'''Option.''' The values in [[#tab903.3.8|Table 903.3.8]] are typical and variances for driveways, public roads, and other signs may alter the spacing. Engineering judgment may also be used to modify the spacing as long as road users always have at least two Chevron Alignment signs in view until the change in alignment eliminates the need for the signs.

Based on engineering judgement, chevron alignment signs may be omitted within incorporated city limits.

'''Guidance.''' The Chevron Alignment signs should be visible for a sufficient distance to provide the road user with adequate time to react to the change in alignment.

The single-sided Chevron sign should only be used where only one direction of travel is impacted, such as on an expressway. The double-side Chevron (W1-8D) should be used on two-lane, two-way roads.

At the end of a four-lane divided highway, where the traffic reduces to two lanes, chevrons should be used to direct traffic from the dual lanes that are ending and being redirected to the two-lane roadway.

'''Option. '''Chevron Alignment signs may also be used on any other roadways based on engineering judgment.

Chevron Alignment signs may be used in addition to the One-Direction Large Arrow (W1-6) sign on turns posted at 30 mph or less.

'''Guidance. '''As chevrons are installed, all horizontal alignment signing (chevrons, curve and turn signing, advisory speed plaques and arrow boards) on a corridor should be evaluated to ensure the installations meet current standards. Aspects of existing horizontal alignment signs to look at should include spacing of existing chevrons, offset and mounting heights of any horizontal alignment sign as well as the distance advanced warning signs are installed from the curve/turn. The need for curve/turn signs should be reevaluated if the ball banking measurements from when the signs were installed are out of date due to roadway/pavement improvements or due to changes in vehicle performance.

'''Option. '''LEDs may be used to enhance the conspicuity of Chevron Alignment signs (see [[903.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 2A) #903.1.12|EPG 903.1.12]]).

'''Standard. '''The LEDs used in the Chevron Alignment sign shall consist of yellow LEDs outlining the chevron symbol.

Chevron Alignment signs shall not be placed on the far side of a T-intersection facing traffic on the stem approach to warn drivers that a through movement is not physically possible, as this is the function of a Two-Direction (or One-Direction) Large Arrow sign.

Chevron Alignment signs shall not be used to mark obstructions within or adjacent to the roadway, including the beginning of guardrails or barriers, as this is the function of an object marker (see [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.70|EPG 903.3.70]]).

Chevron Alignment signs directing traffic to the right shall not be used in the central island of a roundabout or a neighborhood traffic circle.

{{SpanID|tab903.3.8}}
<center>
{| class="wikitable" style="text-align: center;"
|+ '''Table 903.3.8''' Typical Spacing of Chevron Alignment Signs on Horizontal Curves
|-
! Advisory Speed !! Curve Radius !! Sign Spacing
|-
| 15 mph or less || Less than 200 feet || 40 feet
|-
| 20 to 30 mph || 200 to 400 feet || 60 feet
|-
| 35 to 45 mph || 401 to 700 feet || 80 feet
|-
| 50 to 60 mph || 701 to 1,250 feet || 100 feet
|-
| more than 60 mph || More than 1,250 feet || 140 feet
|-
| style="background-color: #ffffff; max-width: 500px;" colspan="3" | Note: The relationship between curve radius and the advisory speed shown in this table should not be used to determine the advisory speed.
|}
</center>

=={{SpanID|903.3.9}}903.3.9 Combination Horizontal Alignment/Intersection Signs (W1-10 Series) (MUTCD Section 2C.09)==
<center>
{| style=""
|-
|[[File:W1-10.png|center|100px|thumb|<center>'''W1-10'''</center>]]
|[[File:W1-10a.png|center|100px|thumb|<center>'''W1-10a'''</center>]]
|[[File:W1-10b.png|center|100px|thumb|<center>'''W1-10b'''</center>]]
|-
|[[File:W1-10c.png|center|100px|thumb|<center>'''W1-10c'''</center>]]
|[[File:W1-10d.png|center|100px|thumb|<center>'''W1-10d'''</center>]]
|[[File:W1-10e.png|center|100px|thumb|<center>'''W1-10e'''</center>]]
|}
</center>

'''Option. '''The Turn (W1-1) sign, the Curve (W1-2) sign, and the Reverse Curve (W1-4) sign may be combined with the Cross Road (W2-1) sign or the Side Road (W2-2 or W2-3) sign to create a combination Horizontal Alignment/Intersection (W1-10 series) sign that depicts the condition where an intersection occurs within or immediately adjacent to a turn or curve.

'''Support. '''[[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.64|EPG 903.2.64]] contains information about the use of an advance street name plaque to identify an intersecting road.

'''Guidance. '''Elements of the combination Horizontal Alignment/Intersection sign related to horizontal alignment should comply with the provisions of [[#903.3.7|EPG 903.3.7]], and elements related to intersection configuration should comply with the provisions of [[#903.3.33|EPG 903.3.33]]. The symbol design should approximate the configuration of the intersecting roadway(s). No more than one Cross Road or two Side Road symbols should be displayed on any one combination Horizontal Alignment/Intersection sign.

A layout of the proposed sign should be included when ordering or when including the sign in design plans.

'''Standard. '''The use of the combination Horizontal Alignment/Intersection sign shall be in accordance with the provisions of [[#903.3.7|EPG 903.3.7]] for the appropriate Turn or Curve sign.

If used, a W1-10L sign designation shall indicate a curve to the left, while a W1-10R sign designation shall indicate a curve to the right.

=={{SpanID|903.3.10}}903.3.10 One-Direction Large Arrow Sign (W1-6) (MUTCD Section 2C.10)==

[[File:W1-6.png|100px|thumb|center|<center>'''W1-6'''</center>]]

'''Standard. '''A One-Direction Large Arrow sign shall be used to delineate a change in horizontal alignment where the advisory speed is 30 mph or lower.

The One-Direction Large Arrow sign shall be a horizontal rectangle with an arrow pointing to the left or right.

If used, the One-Direction Large Arrow sign shall be installed on the outside of a turn or curve in line with and at approximately a right angle to approaching traffic.

The One-Direction Large Arrow sign shall not be used where there is no alignment change in the direction of travel, such as at the beginnings and ends of medians or at center piers.

The One-Direction Large Arrow sign directing traffic to the right shall not be used in the central island of a roundabout.

'''Guidance. '''The One-Direction Large Arrow sign should be visible for a sufficient distance to provide the road user with adequate time to react to the change in alignment.

If Chevron Alignment signs are used to supplement the One-Direction Large Arrow sign, chevrons, and arrow signs should be installed so they do not visually block each other.

=={{SpanID|903.3.11}}903.3.11 Truck Rollover Sign (W1-13) (MUTCD Section 2C.11) ==

[[File:W1-13.png|center|100px|thumb|<center>'''W1-13'''</center>]]

'''Option. '''A Truck Rollover (W1-13) sign may be used as a supplement to a horizontal alignment warning sign to warn drivers of vehicles with a high center of gravity, such as trucks, tankers, and recreational vehicles, of a curve or turn where there are:
:A. Past incidents of truck rollovers at the specific location,
:B. High volumes of trucks, or
:C. A speed differential (see [[#903.3.6|EPG 903.3.6]]) that might pose a greater risk for vehicles with high centers of gravity.

'''Guidance. '''Where engineering judgment determines the need for the installation of a Truck Rollover (W1-13) sign, it should be located downstream of the horizontal alignment warning sign in advance of the curve.

'''Standard. '''If a Truck Rollover (W1-13) sign is used, it shall be accompanied by an Advisory Speed (W13-1P) plaque indicating the recommended speed for vehicles with a higher center of gravity.

'''Option. '''The Truck Rollover sign may include conspicuity enhancements, or may be a blank-out sign, activated by the detection of an approaching vehicle with a high center of gravity that is traveling in excess of the recommended speed for the condition.

'''Support. '''The curved arrow on the Truck Rollover sign shows the direction of roadway curvature. The truck tips in the opposite direction.

=={{SpanID|903.3.12}}903.3.12 Advisory Exit and Ramp Speed Signs (W13-2 and W13-3) and Combination Horizontal Alignment/Advisory Exit and Ramp Speed Signs (W13-6 through W13-13) (MUTCD Section 2C.12)==
<center>
{| style=""
|-
|[[File:W13-2.png|center|102px|thumb|<center>'''W13-2'''</center>]]
|[[File:W13-3.png|center|98px|thumb|<center>'''W13-3'''</center>]]
|[[File:W13-6.png|center|100px|thumb|<center>'''W13-6'''</center>]]
|[[File:W13-7.png|center|88px|thumb|<center>'''W13-7'''</center>]]
|}
{|
|[[File:W13-8.png|center|98px|thumb|<center>'''W13-8'''</center>]]
|[[File:W13-9.png|center|100px|thumb|<center>'''W13-9'''</center>]]
|[[File:W13-10.png|center|100px|thumb|<center>'''W13-10'''</center>]]
|[[File:W13-11.png|center|102px|thumb|<center>'''W13-11'''</center>]]
|[[File:W13-12.png|center|100px|thumb|<center>'''W13-12'''</center>]]
|[[File:W13-13.png|center|100px|thumb|<center>'''W13-13'''</center>]]
|}
</center>

'''Standard. '''Where an advisory speed is posted in advance of a freeway or expressway exit, the Advisory Exit Speed (W13-2) sign shall be used.

Where an advisory speed is posted in advance of a conventional road ramp or to another roadway or roadside facility, the Advisory Ramp Speed (W13-3) sign shall be used.

An Advisory Exit Speed or Advisory Ramp Speed sign shall be used when the difference between the mainline roadway speed limit and the exit or ramp advisory speed in the vicinity of the departure is 20 mph or greater.

'''Guidance'''. An Advisory Exit Speed or Advisory Ramp Speed sign should be used when the difference between the mainline roadway speed limit and the exit or ramp advisory speed in the vicinity of the departure is 15 mph.

'''Option. '''An Advisory Exit Speed or Advisory Ramp Speed sign may be used based on engineering judgment when the difference between the mainline roadway speed limit and the exit or ramp advisory speed in the vicinity of the departure is 10 mph or less.

The Combination Horizontal Alignment/Advisory Exit Speed (W13-6, W13-8, and W13-10) signs may be used in lieu of the Advisory Exit Speed (W13-2) sign, and the combination Horizontal Alignment/Advisory Ramp Speed (W13-7, W13-9, and W13-11) signs may be used in lieu of the Advisory Ramp Speed (W13-3) sign.

The Combination Truck Rollover/Advisory Exit Speed and Truck Rollover/Advisory Ramp Speed (W13-12 and W13-13) signs may be used in lieu of the W13-2 and W13-3 signs respectively if the tip over condition is in the vicinity of the gore.

'''Standard. '''Roadway geometrics represented on the Combination Horizontal Alignment/Advisory Exit and Combination Horizontal Alignment/Advisory Ramp Speed signs shall be limited to the standard signs shown in the EPG.

'''Guidance. '''If used, the Advisory Exit Speed sign or the Combination Horizontal Alignment/Advisory Exit Speed sign should be installed along the deceleration lane. The Advisory Exit Speed or the Combination Horizontal Alignment/Advisory Exit Speed signs should be visible in time for the road user to decelerate and make an exiting maneuver.

Regulatory Speed Limit signs (see [[#903.3.20|EPG 903.3.20]]) should not be located in the vicinity of exit ramps or deceleration lanes, particularly where they will conflict with the advisory speed displayed on the Advisory Exit or Ramp Speed signs.

'''Support. '''[[#903.3.6|EPG 903.3.6]] contains provisions for the determination of the displayed advisory speed.

[[#tab903.3.4|Table 903.3.4]] lists recommended advance sign placement distances for deceleration to various advisory speeds.

'''Option. '''Where there is a need to remind road users of the recommended advisory speed, a horizontal alignment warning sign with an advisory speed plaque displaying the same advisory speed may be installed at a downstream location along the ramp.

'''Guidance. '''If the ramp curvature changes to the extent that it warrants a lower advisory speed, a horizontal alignment warning sign with the new advisory speed should be displayed in advance of the change in curvature.

'''Option. '''The One-Direction Large Arrow (W1-6) sign may be installed beyond the exit gore on the outside of the curve to provide additional warning of an immediate change in curvature. When used in conjunction with the exit speed, the One-Direction Large Arrow (W1-6) sign may be supplemented with a Confirmation Advisory Speed (W13-1aP) plaque when the plaque is not used with the Exit Gore (E5-1 series) sign.

'''Guidance. '''The horizontal alignment symbol displayed on the Combination Horizontal Alignment/Advisory Exit and Ramp Speed signs should be consistent with the horizontal geometry of the ramp.

'''Support. '''Examples of advisory speed signing for exit ramps are shown in [[#fig903.3.12|Figure 903.3.12]].

{{SpanID|fig903.3.12}}
[[File:Figure 903.3.12 Examples of Exit Ramp Advisory Speed and Other Warning Signs.png|thumb|center|800px|alt="Two vertical northbound lanes of a divided highway with an exit loop ramp are shown.
At the bottom of the figure, and to the right of the right northbound lane, facing south is an exit direction sign followed by a W13-2 or a W13-6R sign. At the entrance to the exit ramp is an E5-1a sign with a supplemental W13-1aP plaque followed by an optional W1-6R with a W13-1aP sign assembly. W1-8R chevron signs are shown along the curve."
|'''Figure 903.3.12''' Examples of Exit Ramp Advisory Speed and Other Warning Signs]]

=={{SpanID|903.3.13}}903.3.13 Vehicle Speed Feedback Sign and Plaque (W13-20 and W13-20aP) (MUTCD Section 2C.13)==

'''Option. '''A Vehicle Speed Feedback (W13-20) sign or (W13-20aP) plaque (see [[#fig903.3.13|Figure 903.3.13]]) that displays the speed of an approaching vehicle to the vehicle operator may be used to provide warning to drivers of their speed in relation to either a speed limit (R2-1) sign or a horizontal alignment warning sign assembly with a posted advisory speed.

'''Standard. '''When used to display the speed of an approaching vehicle in relation to the posted speed limit, the Vehicle Speed Feedback (W13-20aP) plaque shall be mounted below a Speed Limit (R2-1) sign (see [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2.20|EPG 903.2.20]]).

The Vehicle Speed Feedback assembly shall not be installed at a location where the posted speed limit on the route changes. Vehicle Speed Feedback assemblies shall be placed anywhere downstream of a speed limit change but shall be a minimum of 200 feet downstream of a speed limit change on conventional routes and a minimum of 400 feet downstream of a speed limit change on expressways of freeways. Vehicle Speed Feedback assemblies shall be installed in accordance with the [https://epg.modot.org/forms/general_files/TS/TA_Your_Speed_Feedback_Assembly.pdf Vehicle Speed Feedback Typical Application].

When used to supplement a horizontal alignment warning sign advisory speed, the Vehicle Speed Feedback (W13-20) sign shall be an independent installation near the point of curvature of a horizontal curve (see [[#903.3.6|EPG 903.3.6]]).

The legend YOUR SPEED shall be a black legend on a yellow retroreflective background, except as provided in [[616.8 TTC Zone Warning Signs (MUTCD Chapter 6H) #616.8.1|EPG 616.8.1]] and [[908.2 Signs (MUTCD Chapter 7B) #908.2.1|908.2.1]]. The changeable legend displaying the speed of the approaching vehicle shall be a yellow luminous legend on a black opaque background. The vehicle speed displayed on the changeable portion of the sign shall be displayed as an integer. The Vehicle Speed Feedback sign and plaque shall not flash, strobe, change color, or use other animated elements integrated into the changeable legend display. When no vehicles are approaching, the changeable display shall not display a legend.

Vehicle Speed Feedback sign equipment shall not have the capability to collect, store or transmit personally identifiable information of any type.

'''Guidance. '''The changeable portion of the Vehicle Speed Feedback legend should be approximately the same height, width, and stroke of those on the Speed Limit sign it supplements or is mounted below.

When a W13-20aP plaque is used with a Speed Limit sign it should be approximately the same width as the Speed Limit sign it is mounted below.

{{SpanID|fig903.3.13}}
[[File:Figure 903.3.13 Vehicle Speed Feedback Sign and Plaque.png|thumb|center|400px|alt="The figure shows two versions of a vehicle speed feedback sign. On the left is a stand-alone sign labeled W13-20. It has a yellow background with the words “YOUR SPEED” above an electronic display showing the number “42” in yellow LED digits. A caption below states that the stand-alone sign is placed at the beginning of curves and turns to reaffirm the advisory speed associated with the advance horizontal alignment sign.

On the right is a supplemental plaque labeled W13-20aP. A white “SPEED LIMIT 35” sign is shown above the yellow “YOUR SPEED 42” electronic display. The caption explains that the supplemental plaque is installed below a speed limit sign and is used downstream of speed limit changes or within a speed zone to reaffirm the speed limit."
|'''Figure 903.3.13''' Vehicle Speed Feedback Sign and Plaque]]

=={{SpanID|903.3.14}}903.3.14 Hill Signs (W7-1 and W7-1c) (MUTCD Section 2C.14)==
<center>
{|
| [[File:W7-1.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W7-1'''</center>]]
| [[File:W7-1c.png|thumb|center|103px|alt=|<center>'''W7-1c'''</center>]]
|}
</center>

'''Guidance. '''The Hill (W7-1) sign should be used in advance of a downgrade where the length, percent of grade, horizontal curvature, and/or other physical features require special precautions on the part of road users.

The Hill sign and supplemental grade (W7-3P) plaque (see [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.63|EPG 903.3.63]]) used in combination, or the W7-1a sign used alone, should be installed in advance of downgrades for the following conditions:
:A. 5% grade that is more than 3,000 feet in length,
:B. 6% grade that is more than 2,000 feet in length,
:C. 7% grade that is more than 1,000 feet in length,
:D. 8% grade that is more than 750 feet in length, or
:E. 9% grade that is more than 500 feet in length.

These signs should also be installed for steeper grades or where crash experience and field observations indicate a need.

Supplemental plaques (see [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.57|EPG 903.3.57]] and [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.63|903.3.63]]) and larger signs should be used for emphasis or where special hill characteristics exist. On longer grades, the use of the Hill sign with a distance (W7-3aP) plaque at periodic intervals of approximately 1-mile spacing should be considered.

'''Support. '''The Uphill (W7-1c) sign is also available by special request.

=={{SpanID|903.3.15}}903.3.15 ROAD NARROWS Sign (W5-1) (MUTCD 2C.17)==
[[File:W5-1.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W5-1'''</center>]]

'''Guidance. '''A ROAD NARROWS (W5-1) sign should be used in advance of a transition on two-lane roads where the pavement width is reduced abruptly to a width such that vehicles traveling in opposite directions cannot simultaneously travel through the narrow portion of the roadway without reducing speed.

'''Option. '''Additional emphasis may be provided by the use of object markers and delineators (see [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.70|EPG 903.3.70]] through [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.73|EPG 903.3.73]] and [[620.6 Delineators (MUTCD Chapter 3G)|EPG 620.6]]). The Advisory Speed (W13-1P) plaque (see [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.59|EPG 903.3.59]]) may be used to indicate the recommended speed.

=={{SpanID|903.3.16}}903.3.16 NARROW BRIDGE Sign (W5-2) (MUTCD Section 2C.18)==
[[File:W5-2.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W5-2'''</center>]]

'''Guidance. '''A NARROW BRIDGE (W5-2) sign should be used in advance of any bridge or culvert having a two-way roadway horizontal clearance of 16 to 18 feet, or any bridge or culvert having a roadway horizontal clearance less than the width of the approach travel lanes.

Additional emphasis should be provided by the use of object markers, delineators, and/or pavement markings.

'''Option. '''A NARROW BRIDGE sign may be used in advance of a bridge or culvert on which the approach shoulders are narrowed or eliminated.

=={{SpanID|903.3.17}}903.3.17 ONE LANE BRIDGE Sign (W5-3) (MUTCD Section 2C.19)==
[[File:W5-3.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W5-3'''</center>]]

'''Guidance. '''A ONE LANE BRIDGE (W5-3) sign should be used on two-way roadways in advance of any bridge or culvert:
:A. Having a roadway horizontal clearance of less than 16 feet, or
:B. Having a roadway horizontal clearance of less than 18 feet when commercial vehicles constitute a high proportion of the traffic, or
:C. Having a roadway horizontal clearance of 18 feet or less where the sight distance on the approach is less than that shown in Condition A of [[#tab903.3.4|Table 903.3.4]].

Additional emphasis should be provided by the use of object markers, delineators, and/or pavement markings.

'''Option. '''STOP (R1-1) or YIELD (R1-2) signs (see [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2.4|EPG 903.2.4]] and [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2.5|903.2.5]]) and related pavement markings (see [[620.2 Pavement and Curb Markings (MUTCD Chapter 3B) #620.2.20|EPG 620.2.20]] and [[620.2 Pavement and Curb Markings (MUTCD Chapter 3B) #620.2.21|620.2.21]]) may be used when conditions A, B, or C in the first Guidance paragraph of this Article apply.

=={{SpanID|903.3.18}}903.3.18 Divided Highway Sign (W6-1) (MUTCD Section 2C.20)==
[[File:W6-1.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W6-1'''</center>]]

'''Guidance. '''A Divided Highway (W6-1) sign should be used on the approaches to a section of highway (not an intersection or junction) where the opposing flows of traffic are separated by a median or other physical barrier.

'''Standard. '''The Divided Highway (W6-1) sign shall not be used instead of a Keep Right (R4-7 series) sign on the approach end of a median island.

=={{SpanID|903.3.19}}903.3.19 Divided Highway Ends Sign (W6-2) (MUTCD Section 2C.21)==
[[File:W6-2.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W6-2'''</center>]]

'''Guidance. '''A Divided Highway Ends (W6-2) sign should be used in advance of the end of a section of physically divided highway (not an intersection or junction) as a warning of two-way traffic ahead.

The Two-Way Traffic (W6-3) sign (see [[#903.3.42|EPG 903.3.42]]) should be used to give warning and notice of the transition to a two-lane, two-way section.

=={{SpanID|903.3.20}}903.3.20 Double Arrow Sign (W12-1) (MUTCD Section 2C.23)==
[[File:W12-1.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W12-1'''</center>]]

'''Option. '''The Double Arrow (W12-1) sign may be used to advise road users that traffic is permitted to pass on either side of an island, obstruction, or gore in the roadway. Traffic separated by this sign may either rejoin or change directions.

'''Guidance. '''If used on an island, the Double Arrow sign should be mounted near the approach end (see [[#903.3.13|EPG 903.3.13]]).

If used in front of a pier or obstruction, the Double Arrow sign should be mounted on the face of, or just in front of, the pier or obstruction. Where stripe markings are used on the pier or obstruction, they should be discontinued to leave a 3-inch space around the outside of the Double Arrow sign.

=={{SpanID|903.3.21}}903.3.21 DEAD END, NO OUTLET, and ROAD ENDS Signs (W14-1, W14-2, and W14-13) (MUTCD Section 2C.24)==
<center>
{|
| [[File:W14-1.png|thumb|center|99px|alt=|<center>'''W14-1'''</center>]]
| [[File:W14-2.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W14-2'''</center>]]
| [[File:W14-13.png|thumb|center|96px|alt=|<center>'''W14-13'''</center>]]
|}
</center>

'''Option. '''DEAD END (W14-1) sign may be used at the entrance to a single road or street that terminates without intersecting another street. The NO OUTLET (W14-2) sign may be used at the entrance to a road or road network from which there is no other exit.

The ROAD ENDS (W14-13) sign may be used to warn of a roadway which has no outlet and which terminates in a dead end and may be used in place of the DEAD END or NO OUTLET sign where the use of the DEAD END and NO OUTLET signs would have a negative effect on traffic generators or public perceptions due to the negative connotation of the message.

'''Guidance. '''When the W14-1, W14-2, or W14-13 sign is used, the sign should be posted as near as practicable to the entry point or at a sufficient advance distance to permit the road user to avoid the dead end or no outlet condition by turning at the nearest intersecting street.

'''Standard. '''The W14-1, W14-2, or W8-26 sign shall not be used in place of the ROAD CLOSED (R11-2) sign for temporary conditions, such as high water, bridge out, etc.

'''Support. '''Information about the use of Type 4 object markers to mark the end of the road or street is contained in [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.73|EPG 903.3.73]].

=={{SpanID|903.3.22}}903.3.22 Low Clearance Signs (W12-2, and W12-2a) (MUTCD Section 2C.25)==
<center>
{|
| [[File:W12-2.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W12-2'''</center>]]
| [[File:W12-2a.png|thumb|center|130px|alt=|<center>'''W12-2a'''</center>]]
|}
</center>

'''Support. '''MoDOT is responsible for installing and maintaining overhead low clearance signs mounted on all structures passing over MoDOT routes as well as installing and maintaining overhead low clearance signs mounted all MoDOT structures passing over non-MoDOT routes (this does not include MoDOT structures passing over rail lines). MoDOT has developed specific provisions for the use of Low Clearance signs.

'''Standard. '''Low Clearance signing shall be installed to display vertical clearances available under structures within specified limits of statutory maximum vehicle heights.

The clearance displayed on the Low Clearance (W12-2 and W12-2a) signs shall be 2 inches less than the measured clearance to account for possible packed snow and ice. For example, a measured vertical clearance of 15 ft. shall be posted as 14 ft. 10 in. All clearance measurements shall be rounded down to the nearest full inch. For example, a measured vertical clearance of 14 ft. 9 ½ in. would be rounded down to 14 ft. 9 in. and posted as 14 ft. 7 in.

The statutory maximum vehicle heights and vertical clearances are as follows:
:A. Within Commercial Zones = 15 ft. statutory maximum vehicle height (16’ 0” maximum posting).
:B. On Interstate and designated highway network routes and on all routes within 10 miles of Interstate and designated highway network routes = 14 ft. statutory maximum vehicle height (15’ 0” maximum posting).
:C. On routes greater than 10 miles from Interstate and designated highway network routes = 13 ft. 6 in. statutory maximum vehicle height (15’ 0” maximum posting).

'''Support. '''For specific details on commercial zone limits and designated highway network routes, see Missouri Vehicle Route Map.

'''Standard. '''The MoDOT posting requirements for Low Clearance signs are as follows:
:A. Case I – Two Signs Required: Where the measured vertical clearance is 15 ft. 2 in. or less, but more than 13 ft. 8 in., two signs shall be used. First, a Low Clearance Overhead (W12-2a) sign shall be installed on the structure, and second, a ground-mounted Low Clearance Advance (W12-2) sign shall be placed approximately 750 ft. in advance of the structure. When an interchange is involved, the ground-mounted Low Clearance (W12-2) sign shall be located approximately 750 ft. in advance of the off-ramp.
:B. Case II – Three Signs Required: Where the measured vertical clearance is 13 ft. 8 in. or less, three signs shall be used. First, a Low Clearance Overhead (W12-2a) sign shall be installed on the structure, second, a ground-mounted Low Clearance Advance (W12-2) sign shall be placed approximately 750 ft. in advance of the structure, and third, an additional Low Clearance Advance (W12-2) sign with a Distance Ahead (W16-2P or W16-3P) plaque below the sign shall be placed at the nearest intersecting road or wide point in the road at which a vehicle can detour or turn around.
:C. Case III – One Sign: Where the measured vertical clearance is 15 ft. 2 in. or less and where the bridge is state maintained but the road beneath is not, a Low Clearance Overhead (W12-2a) sign shall be installed on the structure, but the ground-mounted Low Clearance Advance (W12-2) sign shall not be installed by MoDOT. The Low Clearance Advance sign may be installed and maintained by the local jurisdiction.
:D. Case IV – Commercial Zones: Vertical clearance signing shall be provided for structures within commercial zones (see Section 304.190 of the Revised Statutes of Missouri). Any structure with a measured vertical clearance of 16 ft. 2 in. or less within the commercial zone limits shall be posted. For measured vertical clearances greater than 15 ft. 2 in. and equal to or less than 16 ft. 2 in. within commercial zones a Low Clearance Overhead (W12-2a) sign shall be installed on the structure. The signing for measured vertical clearances of 15 ft. 2 in. or less within commercial zones shall be as described for Case I or Case II.

In the case of an arch structure or a structure which has a sloping span resulting in different vertical clearances per lane, one Low Clearance Overhead (W12-2a) sign shall be centered over each lane displaying the vertical clearance available for that lane. One sign per lane shall be applied if the difference in vertical clearance between adjacent lanes is 6 inches or greater or when the vertical clearance between the far-right lane and far-left lane is 12 inches or greater.

'''Guidance. '''Clearances should be evaluated periodically to verify the displayed clearances are accurate and to determine if additional low clearance signing is necessary, particularly when resurfacing operations have occurred, on routes onto which over-height vehicles are normally directed under the permit process, and structures that are susceptible to catastrophic failure when struck by over-height vehicles. The information should be updated in the TMS.

Where there is a need to warn of a low clearance on an intersecting road or off a freeway or expressway exit, a rectangular warning sign with an appropriate word legend should be used rather than a W12-2 sign.

'''Option. '''When only one Overhead Low Clearance (W12-2a) sign is required and mounting one sign centered over the roadway is not practical, two W12-2a signs may be installed with one sign installed to the right of the travel lanes and one sign installed to the left of the travel lanes.

'''Guidance. '''The clearance shown on the Low Clearance Advance (W12-2) sign should match the clearance on the W12-2a sign or, if there are multiple W12-2a signs, should match the lowest clearance.

{{SpanID|fig903.3.22}}
[[File:Figure 903.3.22 Examples of Low Clearance Signs.png|thumb|center|800px|alt="The figure displays four examples of signing layouts for structures with limited vertical clearance.
Case I – Vertical Clearance of 15'-2"" to 13'-9"":
A roadway labeled “MoDOT Route” passes under a structure labeled “Any Structure.” A W12-2a plaque reading “14 FT 4 IN” is placed just before the structure. Farther in advance, a W12-2 low-clearance symbol sign is shown with the legend “14'-4” placed 750 feet before the structure.
Case II – Vertical Clearance of 13'-8"" or Less:
A similar roadway labeled “MoDOT Route” passes under a structure. A W12-2a plaque reading “12 FT 6 IN” is posted at the structure. A W12-2 low-clearance symbol sign reading “12'-6” is placed 750 feet in advance. Below that sign, a W16-3P plaque shows “½ MILES.” A note indicates that the sign is placed at the nearest intersecting road or wide point.
Case III – MoDOT Bridge with Vertical Clearance of 15'-2"" or Less Over a Local Road:
A local road passes under a structure labeled “MoDOT Bridge.” A W12-2a plaque reading “14 FT 4 IN” is shown on the MoDOT route above, installed by MoDOT. On the local road, a W12-2 low-clearance symbol sign reading “14'-4” is shown as installed by the local agency.
Case IV – Vertical Clearance of 16'-2"" or Less in Commercial Zones:
A roadway labeled “MoDOT Route” passes under a structure labeled “Any Structure.” A W12-2a plaque reading “14 FT 4 IN” is placed at the structure. Text notes that advance signing should follow the placement guidelines of Case I or Case II."
|'''Figure 903.3.22''' Examples of Low Clearance Signs]]

=={{SpanID|903.3.23}}903.3.23 BUMP and DIP Signs (W8-1 and W8-2) (MUTCD Section 2C.26)==
<center>
{|
| [[File:W8-1.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W8-1'''</center>]]
| [[File:W8-2.png|thumb|center|105px|alt=|<center>'''W8-2'''</center>]]
|}
</center>

'''Support. '''BUMP and DIP signs (W8-1, W8-2) are limited use signs, only being used for locations where the condition cannot be corrected, such as low water crossings or highway-rail grade crossings.

See [[913.2 Signs (MUTCD Chapter 8B) #913.2.14|EPG 913.2.14]] for low ground clearance conditions at highway-rail grade crossings.

'''Guidance. '''BUMP (W8-1) and DIP (W8-2) signs should be used in advance of a sharp rise or depression in the profile of the road.

'''Option. '''These signs may be supplemented with an Advisory Speed plaque (see [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.59|EPG 903.3.59]]).

'''Guidance. '''The DIP sign should not be used in advance of a short stretch of depressed alignment that might momentarily hide a vehicle.

A short stretch of depressed alignment that might momentarily hide a vehicle should be treated as a no-passing zone when center line striping is provided on a two-lane or three-lane road (see [[620.2 Pavement and Curb Markings (MUTCD Chapter 3B) #620.2.3|EPG 620.2.3]]).

'''Option. '''BUMP and DIP signs may be used as temporary traffic control signs (WO8-1, WO8-2) for locations where the condition is temporary and/or where the condition can be corrected in the future (See [[616.6 Temporary Traffic Control Zone Devices (MUTCD 6F) #616.6.50|EPG 616.6.50]]).

=={{SpanID|903.3.24}}903.3.24 PAVEMENT ENDS Sign (W8-3) (MUTCD Section 2C.28)==
[[File:W8-3.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W8-3'''</center>]]

'''Guidance. '''A PAVEMENT ENDS (W8-3) sign should be used where a paved surface changes to either a gravel treated surface or an earth road surface.

'''Option. '''An Advisory Speed plaque (see [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.59|EPG 903.3.59]]) may be used when the change in roadway condition requires a reduced speed.

=={{SpanID|903.3.25}}903.3.25 Slippery When Wet Sign (W8-5) (Section 2C.30)==
[[File:W8-5.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W8-5'''</center>]]

'''Guidance. '''The Slippery When Wet sign (W8-5) is a limited use sign that should not be installed for locations where the condition can be corrected. Existing Slippery When Wet (W8-5) signs should be left in place until the condition is corrected.

'''Option. '''The Slippery When Wet (W8-5) sign may be used to warn of unexpected slippery conditions.

'''Guidance. '''When used, Slippery When Wet signs should be placed in advance of the beginning of the affected section (see [[#tab903.3.4|Table 903.3.4]]), and additional signs should be placed at appropriate intervals along the road where the condition exists.

'''Option. '''The Slippery When Wet sign may be used as a temporary traffic control sign (WO8-5) for locations where the condition is temporary and/or where the condition can be corrected in the future (See [[616.6 Temporary Traffic Control Zone Devices (MUTCD 6F) #616.6.50|EPG 616.6.50]]).

=={{SpanID|903.3.26}}903.3.26 FALLEN ROCKS Signs (W8-14)==
[[File:W8-14.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W8-14'''</center>]]

'''Option. '''The FALLEN ROCKS (W8-14) sign may be used in advance of an area that is adjacent to a hillside, mountain, or cliff where rocks frequently fall onto the roadway.

'''Guidance. '''When used, FALLEN ROCKS signs should be placed in advance of the beginning of the affected section (see [[#tab903.3.4|Table 903.3.4]]), and additional signs should be placed at appropriate intervals along the road where the condition exists.

'''Standard. '''The district shall perform an evaluation of the FALLEN ROCKS site to determine whether existing installations of the FALLEN ROCKS sign is still necessary. If it is determined that the sign is not necessary, the sign will not be replaced at the end of the service life.

=={{SpanID|903.3.27}}903.3.27 Warning Signs and Plaque for Motorcyclists (W8-15, W8-15aP, and W8-16) (MUTCD Section 2C.31) ==

'''Support. '''MoDOT does not install permanent W8-15, W8-15aP, and W8-16 signs and plaques. For temporary applications, see [[616.16 Typical Applications (MUTCD Chapter 6P)|EPG 616.16]].

=={{SpanID|903.3.28}}903.3.28 IMPASSABLE WHEN WATER OVER ROAD Sign (MUTCD Section 2C.34)==

<center>
{|
| [[File:W8-18.jpg|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W8-18'''</center>]]
| [[File:W020-3.jpg|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''WO20-3'''</center>]]
| [[File:W8-34a.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W8-34a'''</center>]]
| [[File:W08-33.jpg|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''WO8-33'''</center>]]
| [[File:D2-1 and R11-3a.png|thumb|center|130px|alt=|<center>'''D2-1 and R11-3a'''</center>]]

| [[File:R5-22.png|thumb|center|120px|alt=|<center>'''R5-22'''</center>]]
|}
</center>

'''Support.''' When a road goes underwater, MoDOT requires the road to be closed to traffic regardless of the depth of water over the road. This closure is accomplished by following [[616.16 Typical Applications (MUTCD Chapter 6P) #616.16|TA-8W]]. This TA displays two figures; the first figure applies to locations which do not flood on a frequent basis and uses standard work zone signs to close the road. The second figure applies to roads that frequently go under water and utilize permanently installed signs. These permanent signs provide critical guidance to motorists between the time the road begins to flood to the time maintenance crews can physically close the road.

MoDOT has discontinued the use of the LOW WATER CROSSING (W8-35) sign, low water crossings are designed for water to routinely flow over the roadway while traffic passes through the water. MoDOT no longer maintains low water crossings on State routes, and MoDOT’s direction is to close any road covered in any depth of water.
MoDOT has discontinued the use of the WATER GAUGE (W8-19a). Water gauges are intended to indicate the depth of the water over a road to allow motorists to judge if it is safe to proceed, however, MoDOT no longer supports motorists driving through any depth of water and closes any road which is covered by water.

'''Standard.''' Any roadway location which goes underwater shall be closed to traffic as soon as possible. Any location, regardless of flooding frequency, shall be closed using the signing package in the first figure of [[616.16 Typical Applications (MUTCD Chapter 6P) #616.16|TA-8W]].

'''Guidance.''' Any roadway which historically floods one or more times per year should have the permanent signing package found in the second figure of [[616.16 Typical Applications (MUTCD Chapter 6P) #616.16|TA-8W]] installed. This applies to locations where streams and rivers rise and flood the road surface, but not in urban areas where a road floods due to blocked or overwhelmed storm drains. This signing package, which includes the DO NOT ENTER WHEN WATER OVER ROAD (R5-22) sign, provides motorists with advanced information on how they need to react to the flooded road before maintenance crews can get to the location and physically close the roadway. The flip signs allow for an expedited closure with the work zone signs already in place, only needing to flip them from the warning sign message to the work zone message upon arriving at the location, as well as deploying the barricades and ROAD CLOSED (R11-2) sign.

Existing LOW WATER CROSSING (W8-35) signs should be removed at the earliest convenience; the presence of these signs may encourage motorists to enter a flooded road if they see the depth of water and incorrectly believe it is shallow enough to safely pass.

'''Option.''' The signing package in the second figure of [[616.16 Typical Applications (MUTCD Chapter 6P) #616.16|TA-8W]] may be installed at any location that may flood less than one time per year to facilitate quicker road closures.

=={{SpanID|903.3.29}}903.3.29 Advance Traffic Control Signs (W3-1, W3-2, W3-3, and W3-4) (MUTCD Section 2C.35)==
<center>
{|
| [[File:W3-1.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W3-1'''</center>]]
| [[File:W3-2.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W3-2'''</center>]]
| [[File:W3-3.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W3-3'''</center>]]
| [[File:W3-4.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W3-4'''</center>]]
|}
</center>

'''Standard. '''The Stop Ahead (W3-1), Yield Ahead (W3-2), and Signal Ahead (W3-3) Advance Traffic Control signs shall be installed on an approach to a primary traffic control device that is not visible for a sufficient distance to permit the road user to respond to the device (see [[#tab903.3.4|Table 903.3.4]]). The visibility criteria for a traffic control signal shall be based on having a continuous view of at least two signal faces for the distance specified in [[902.4 Design Features of Traffic Control Signals (MUTCD Chapter 4D) #tab902.4.6|Table 902.4.6]].

'''Guidance. '''Where intermittent obstructions occur, engineering judgment should determine the treatment to be implemented.

The minimum visibility distance of a signal for a facility with a speed limit above 60 mph should be determined by summing the stopping sight distance (see [[#tab903.3.1|Table 903.3.1]]) and the assumed queue length. The assumed queue length should be determined by engineering judgment.

If an advance traffic control sign is warranted for an approach at an intersection of a MoDOT maintained road and non-MoDOT maintained road, the agency responsible for the maintenance of the non-MoDOT road should be notified of the condition.

'''Support. '''Permanent obstructions causing the limited visibility might include roadway alignment or structures. Intermittent obstructions might include foliage or parked vehicles.

'''Option. '''An Advance Traffic Control sign may be used for additional emphasis of the primary traffic control device, even when the visibility distance to the device is satisfactory.

Signal Ahead (W3-3) signs may be posted on the right- and left-hand sides of the road on a high speed divided approach.

'''Support. '''[[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.64|EPG 903.3.64]] contains information about the use of an advance street name plaque to identify an intersecting road.

'''Option. '''A BE PREPARED TO STOP (W3-4) sign may be used to warn of stopped traffic caused by a traffic control signal in advance of a section of roadway that regularly experiences traffic congestion, history of crashes, or based on engineering judgement.

A Warning Beacon (see [[902.18 Flashing Beacons (MUTCD Chapter 4S) #902.18.3|EPG 902.18.3]]) may be used with an Advance Traffic Control or BE PREPARED TO STOP (W3-4) sign. If a warning beacon is used, the beacon(s) may be activated before the start of the yellow change interval referred to as lead flash, which is the time before the onset of yellow at which the warning beacon(s) begin to flash. Recommended values for lead flash in accordance with the posted speed limit are specified in [[#tab903.3.29|Table 903.3.29]].
<center>
{{SpanID|tab903.3.29}}
{| class="wikitable" style="max-width:600px; text-align: center;"
|+ '''Table 903.3.29''' Design Parameters for Advance Warning System
|-
! Posted Speed (mph)
! Distance Between Warning Sign and Stop Line (ft)
! Lead Flash, Advance Warning Before End of Green (sec)
|-
| 70
| 871 to 975 max**
| 8
|-
| 70
| 730 min* to 870
| 7
|-
| 65
| 811 to 905 max**
| 8
|-
| 65
| 645 min* to 810
| 7
|-
| 60
| 661 to 745 max**
| 7
|-
| 60
| 570 min* to 660
| 6
|-
| 55
| 606 to 685 max**
| 7
|-
| 55
| 495 min* to 605
| 6
|-
| 50
| 476 to 550 max**
| 6
|-
| 50
| 425 min* to 475
| 5
|-
| 45
| 426 to 495 max**
| 6
|-
| 45
| 360 min* to 425
| 5
|-
| style="text-align: left" colspan="3" | *The advance traffic control sign shall not be installed less than this minimum distance. **The sign placement distance can exceed the "max" distance. The lead flash time should be determined by coordinating with the MoDOT Highway Safety and Traffic Division.
|}
</center>

'''Standard. '''When a BE PREPARED TO STOP (W3-4) sign is used in advance of a traffic control signal, it shall be used in addition to a Signal Ahead sign and shall be placed a minimum of 200 feet downstream from the Signal Ahead sign. The BE PREPARED TO STOP (W3-4) sign shall be installed as specified in [[#tab903.3.4|Table 903.3.4]] (See [[#fig903.3.29.1|Figure 903.3.29.1]]).

A BE PREPARED TO STOP (W3-4) sign with a warning beacon shall not be considered for intersection approaches with a posted speed limit of 40 mph or less.

{{SpanID|fig903.3.29.1}}
[[File:Figure 903.3.29.1 Example for Placement of Be Prepared To Stop Sign.png|thumb|center|500px|alt="The figure shows a four-leg intersection controlled by a traffic signal. A vertical roadway and a horizontal roadway intersect, each with one travel lane in each direction. A traffic signal head with red, yellow, and green indications is shown at the center of the intersection.
On the lower approach of the vertical roadway, two advance warning signs are shown on the right side. The sign closest to the intersection is a W3-4 “BE PREPARED TO STOP” sign, with an optional yellow beacon mounted above it. Farther downstream, a W3-3 traffic signal symbol sign is shown. The spacing between the two signs is labeled “200 ft MIN.”
A separate dimension arrow between the W3-4 sign and the intersection is marked with an asterisk, referencing a note that states, “See Table 903.3.4 for the recommended minimum distance.”"
|'''Figure 903.3.29.1''' Example for Placement of BE PREPARED TO STOP Sign]]

{{SpanID|fig903.3.29.2}}
[[File:Figure 903.3.29.2 Example for Placement Of Signal Ahead Sign-Condition B.png|thumb|center|500px|alt="The figure shows a four-leg intersection controlled by a traffic signal. A vertical roadway and a horizontal roadway intersect, each with one travel lane in each direction. A signal head with red, yellow, and green indications is displayed at the center of the intersection.
On the lower approach of the vertical roadway, a dimension arrow indicates the placement location for an advance warning sign. The arrow is marked with an asterisk referring to a note that reads, “See Table 903.3.4 for the recommended minimum distance.”
To the right of this lower approach, a W3-3 traffic signal symbol sign is shown with an optional yellow beacon mounted above it."
|'''Figure 903.3.29.2''' Example for Placement of Signal Ahead Sign]]

=={{SpanID|903.3.30}}903.3.30 Advance Ramp Control Signal Signs (W3-7 and W3-8) (MUTCD Section 2C.37)==
<center>
{|
| [[File:W3-7.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W3-7'''</center>]]
| [[File:W3-8.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W3-8'''</center>]]
|}
</center>

'''Option. '''A RAMP METER AHEAD (W3-7) sign may be used to warn road users that a freeway entrance ramp is metered and that they will encounter a ramp control signal (see [[902.16 Traffic Control Signals for Freeway Entrance Ramps (MUTCD Chapter 4P) #902.16|EPG 902.16]]).

'''Guidance. '''When the ramp control signals are operated only during certain periods of the day, a RAMP METERED WHEN FLASHING (W3-8) sign should be installed in advance of the ramp control signal near the entrance to the ramp, or on the arterial on the approach to the ramp, to alert road users to the presence and operation of ramp meters.

'''Standard. '''The RAMP METERED WHEN FLASHING sign shall be supplemented with a Warning Beacon (see [[902.18 Flashing Beacons (MUTCD Chapter 4S) #902.18.3|EPG 902.18.3]]) that flashes when the ramp control signal is in operation.

=={{SpanID|903.3.31}}903.3.31 WATCH FOR STOPPED TRAFFIC Sign (W26-1) (MUTCD Section 2C.39)==

[[File:W26-1.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W26-1'''</center>]]

'''Option. '''The WATCH FOR STOPPED TRAFFIC (W26-1) sign may be used to warn road users of the possibility of vehicles stopping abruptly in the travel lane due to recurring congested conditions.

=={{SpanID|903.3.32}}903.3.32 Reduced Speed Limit Ahead and Speed Zone Signs (W3-5) (MUTCD Section 2C.40)==
[[File:W3-5.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W3-5'''</center>]]

'''Standard'''. A Reduced Speed Limit Ahead (W3-5) sign shall be used to inform road users of a reduced speed zone where the speed limit is being reduced by more than 10 mph.

'''Option. '''A Reduced Speed Limit Ahead (W3-5) sign may be used to inform road users of a reduced speed zone where the speed limit is being reduced by 10 mph or less based if engineering judgment indicates the need for advance notice to comply with the posted speed limit ahead.

'''Standard. '''If used, a Reduced Speed Limit Ahead sign shall be followed by a Speed Limit (R2-1) sign (see [[#903.2.20|EPG 903.2.20]]), installed at the beginning of the zone where the speed limit applies.

The speed limit displayed on the W3-5 sign shall be identical to the speed limit displayed on the subsequent Speed Limit sign.

=={{SpanID|903.3.33}}903.3.33 Intersection Warning Signs (W2-1 through W2-8) (MUTCD Section 2C.41)==
<center>
{|
| [[File:W2-1.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W2-1'''</center>]]
| [[File:W2-2.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W2-2'''</center>]]
| [[File:W2-3.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W2-3'''</center>]]
| [[File:W2-3a.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W2-3a'''</center>]]
|}
{|
| [[File:W2-4.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W2-4'''</center>]]
| [[File:W2-5.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W2-5'''</center>]]
| [[File:W2-6.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W2-6'''</center>]]
|-
| [[File:W2-7L.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W2-7L'''</center>]]
| [[File:W2-7R.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W2-7R'''</center>]]
| [[File:W2-8.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W2-8'''</center>]]
|}
</center>

'''Support. '''Intersection Warning Signs are used when there is limited stopping sight distance, history of crashes, or based on engineering judgment.

'''Option. '''A Cross Road (W2-1), Side Road (W2-2, W2-3, or W2-3a), T-Intersection (W2-4), or Y-Intersection (W2-5) sign may be used in advance of an intersection to indicate the presence of an intersection and the possibility of turning or entering traffic.

'''Standard. '''The Circular Intersection (W2-6) sign shall be installed in advance of roundabout intersections. The appropriate Advisory Speed supplemental plaque (W13-1P) shall be installed below the Circular Intersection sign.

'''Option. '''If other circular intersections exist, that would not be classified as roundabouts, the Circular Intersection (W2-6) sign may be used.

'''Support. '''[[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.64|EPG 903.2.64]] contains information about the use of an advance street name plaque to identify an intersecting road.

'''Guidance. '''The Intersection Warning sign should illustrate and depict the general configuration of the intersecting roadway, such as a cross road, side road, T-intersection, or Y-intersection.

Intersection Warning signs, other than the Circular Intersection (W2-6) sign, the T-intersection (W2-4) sign, and the Grade Crossing and Intersection Advance Warning (W10-2, W10-3, and W10-4) signs (see [[913.2 Signs (MUTCD Chapter 8B) #913.2.6|EPG 913.2.6]]) should not be used on approaches controlled by STOP signs, YIELD signs, or signals.

If an Intersection Warning sign is used where the side roads are not opposite of each other, the Offset Side Roads (W2-7) sign should be used instead of the Cross Road sign.

If an Intersection Warning sign is used where two closely-spaced side roads are on the same side of the highway, the Double Side Roads (W2-8) sign should be used instead of the Side Road sign.

No more than two side roads should be depicted on the same side of the highway on a W2-7 or W2-8 sign, and no more than three side roads should be depicted on a W2-7 or W2-8 sign.

=={{SpanID|903.3.34}}903.3.34 Advance Intersection Signs (W2-10a and W2-11a)==
<center>
{|
| [[File:W2-10a.jpg|thumb|center|alt=|100px|<center>'''W2-10a'''</center>]]
| [[File:W2-11a.jpg|thumb|center|alt=|100px|<center>'''W2-11a'''</center>]]
|}
</center>

'''Support.''' Advance Intersection signs are typically associated with restricted sight distance and gap selection at stop controlled intersections.

'''Option.''' The WATCH FOR ENTERING TRAFFIC (W2-10a) sign may be used on the uncontrolled through roadway approach to a side or cross road stop controlled intersection to warn of entering traffic from the side or cross road.

The WATCH FOR APPROACHING TRAFFIC (W2-11a) sign may be used on the side road stop controlled approach to warn of traffic approaching on the uncontrolled through road.

=={{SpanID|903.3.35}}903.3.35 Two-Direction Large Arrow Sign (W1-7) (MUTCD Section 2C.43)==
[[File:W1-7.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W1-7'''</center>]]

'''Standard. '''The Two-Direction Large Arrow (W1-7) sign shall be a horizontal rectangle.

If used, the Two-Direction Large arrow sign shall be installed on the far side of a T-intersection in line with, and at approximately a right angle to, traffic approaching from the stem of the T-intersection.

The Two-Direction Large Arrow sign shall not be used where there is no change in the direction of travel such as at the beginnings and ends of medians or at center piers.

'''Guidance. '''The Two-Direction Large Arrow sign should be visible for a sufficient distance to provide the road user with adequate time to react to the intersection configuration.

=={{SpanID|903.3.36}}903.3.36 Traffic Signal Oncoming Extended Green Signs (W25-1 and W25-2) (MUTCD Section 2C.44)==
<center>
{|
| [[File:W25-1.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W25-1'''</center>]]
| [[File:W25-2.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W25-2'''</center>]]
|}
</center>

'''Standard. '''At locations where either a W25-1 or a W25-2 sign is required based on the provisions in [[902.6 Steady (Stop-and-Go) Operation of Traffic Control Signals (MUTCD Chapter 4F) #902.6.1|EPG 902.6.1]], the W25-1 or W25-2 sign shall be installed near the left-most signal face for the approach.

=={{SpanID|903.3.37}}903.3.37 Merge Signs and Plaque (W4-1 and W4-5) (MUTCD Section 2C.45)==
<center>
{|
| [[File:W4-1.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W4-1'''</center>]]
| [[File:W4-5.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W4-5'''</center>]]
|}
</center>

'''Guidance. '''The Merge (W4-1) sign should be installed on the side of the major roadway where merging traffic will be encountered and in such a position as to not obstruct the road user’s view of entering traffic.

When a Merge sign is installed on a major roadway, the symbol should be oriented right or left as appropriate to depict the side from which the merge occurs, with the arrow representing the major roadway and the curved stem representing the entering roadway.

When a Merge sign is to be installed on an entering roadway that curves before merging with the major roadway, such as a ramp with a curving horizontal alignment as it approaches the major roadway, the Entering Roadway Merge (W4-5) sign should be used to better portray the actual geometric conditions to road users on the entering roadway.

Where two roadways of approximately equal importance converge and merging movements are required, a Merge sign should be placed on each roadway.

The Merge sign should not be used where two roadways converge and merging movements are not required.

'''Standard. '''The Merge sign shall not be used in place of a Lane Ends (W4-2) sign (see [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.39|EPG 903.3.39]]) where lanes of traffic moving on a single roadway must merge because of a reduction in the actual or usable pavement width.

'''Support. '''Examples of the use of Merge (W4-1) signs are shown in Drawing A in [[#fig903.3.37|Figure 903.3.37]].

{{SpanID|fig903.3.37}}
[[File:Figure 903.3.37 Examples of Merge and Added Lane Sign Placement for Entering and Converging Roadways.png|thumb|center|800px|alt="A: A horizontal roadway consisting of three eastbound travel lanes is shown. A converging lane adds a fourth lane to this three-lane horizontal roadway. Two lanes are merging together from the north and south while traveling eastbound to form one converging lane. A W4-1R sign is shown to the right of the right shoulder of the north merge lane and a W4-1L sign is shown to the left of the left shoulder of the south merge lane. The lanes merge together into one converging lane just beyond these signs. Another W4-1R sign is shown on the right shoulder of the right travel lane of the horizontal roadway before the converging lane enters the horizontal roadway.
B: This example only shows the right converging lane of a three-lane horizontal roadway where the converging lane adds a fourth lane. A W4-6R sign is shown on the left of the left shoulder of the converging lane. A W4-3R sign is shown on the right shoulder of the right travel lane of the horizontal roadway before the converging lane enters the horizontal roadway. An additional example shows a W4-6R sign on the left of the left shoulder facing southbound of the converging lane. The converging lane is shown to be entering the right lane of the horizontal roadway at a 90-degree angle with a sharp curve to the right when entering the roadway. A W4-3R sign is shown on the right shoulder of the right travel lane of the horizontal roadway before the converging lane enters the horizontal roadway. This example only shows the right lane of the three-lane horizontal roadway."
|'''Figure 903.3.37''' Examples of Merge and Added Lane Sign Placement for Entering and Converging Roadways]]

=={{SpanID|903.3.38}}903.3.38 Added Lane Signs (W4-3 and W4-6) (MUTCD Section 2C.46)==
<center>
{|
| [[File:W4-3.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W4-3'''</center>]]
| [[File:W4-6.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W4-6'''</center>]]
|}
</center>

'''Guidance. '''The Added Lane (W4-3) sign should be installed in advance of a point where two roadways converge and merging movements are not required. When possible, the Added Lane sign should be placed such that it is visible from both roadways; if this is not possible, an Added Lane sign should be placed on the side of each roadway.

When an Added Lane (W4-3) sign is installed on a major roadway, the symbol should be oriented right or left as appropriate to depict the side from which the entering roadway converges, with the straight arrow representing the major roadway and the curved arrow representing the entering roadway. The sign should be located on the side of the major roadway from which the entering roadway converges.

When an Added Lane sign is to be installed on a roadway that curves before converging with another roadway that has a tangent alignment at the point of convergence, the Entering Roadway Added Lane (W4-6) sign should be used to better portray the actual geometric conditions to road users on the curving roadway.

'''Support. '''Examples of the use of Added Lane (W4-3) and Entering Roadway Added Lane (W4-6) signs are shown in Drawing B in [[#fig903.3.37|Figure 903.3.37]].

=={{SpanID|903.3.39}}903.3.39 Lane Ends Signs (W4-2 and W9-1) (Section 2C.47)==
<center>
{|
| [[File:W4-2.png|thumb|center|106px|alt=|<center>'''W4-2'''</center>]]
| [[File:W9-1.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W9-1'''</center>]]
|}
</center>

'''Support. '''The Lane Ends (W4-2) and RIGHT (LEFT) LANE ENDS (W9-1) signs are used to warn of the reduction in the number of traffic lanes in the direction of travel.

The sequence of the W4-2 and W9-1 signs is illustrated in [[#fig903.3.39.1|Figures 903.3.39.1]] to [[#fig903.3.39.5|903.3.39.5]]

'''Guidance. '''The Lane Ends (W4-2) sign should be installed at the advance placement distance in accordance with [[#tab903.3.4|Table 903.3.4]].

A RIGHT (LEFT) LANE ENDS (W9-1) sign should be installed in advance of the Lane Ends sign, at the advance placement distance in accordance with [[#tab903.3.4|Table 903.3.4]], to provide additional warning that a lane is ending and that a merging maneuver will be required.

If a W9-1 sign is installed, a Distance (W16-2P series or W16-3P series) plaque (see [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.59|EPG 903.3.59]]) should be installed below the W9-1 sign.

On one-way streets or on divided highways where the left-hand lane is ending and the width of the median will permit, the W9-1 and W4-2 signs should be placed facing approaching traffic on the left-hand side or median.

'''Option. '''Where a lane ends a distance beyond the intersection that is less than the advance placement distance indicated in [[#tab903.3.4|Table 903.3.4]], the W4-2 sign may be located at the far side of the intersection (see [[#fig903.3.39.4|Figure 903.3.39.4]]).

'''Guidance. '''When the W4-2 sign is located at the far side of the intersection in accordance with the Option paragraph above, the W9-1 sign should be placed upstream of the intersection with the appropriate distance plaque.

'''Support. '''[[620.2 Pavement and Curb Markings (MUTCD Chapter 3B) #620.2.14|EPG 620.2.14]] contains information regarding the use of pavement markings in conjunction with a lane reduction.

'''Guidance. '''Lane Ends signs should not be installed in advance of the downstream end of an acceleration lane.

'''Standard. '''The W4-2 and W9-1 signs shall not be used in dropped lane situations. In dropped lane situations on conventional roads at intersections, regulatory signs (see [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2.26|EPG 903.2.26]]) shall be used to inform road users that a through lane becomes a mandatory turn lane.

{{SpanID|fig903.3.39.1}}
[[File:Figure 903.3.39.1 Example Sequences for Lane Ends and Lane Merge Signs (Sheet 1 of 5).png|thumb|center|800px|alt=A vertical roadway is shown with four travel lanes at the bottom of the figure transitioning to three travel lanes at the top. The right lane ends through a taper marked by three white lane-reduction arrows placed in the right travel lane, each pointing diagonally toward the adjacent lane. At the bottom right of the figure, a W9-1R “RIGHT LANE ENDS” sign is mounted above a W16-2P “1000 FEET” plaque. Farther upstream, a W4-2R lane-reduction symbol sign is shown to the right of the roadway. The distance between the W4-2R sign and the beginning of the taper is labeled, “See Table 903.3.4 to determine the advance placement distance.” A legend indicates the direction of travel. Two notes are shown: “1. See EPG 620.2.14 Lane Reduction Pavement Markings” and “2. See EPG 620.2.22 Merge Arrows.”
|'''Figure 903.3.39.1''' Example Sequences for Lane Ends and Lane Merge Signs ''(Sheet 1 of 5)'']]

{{SpanID|fig903.3.39.2}}
[[File:Figure 903.3.39.2 Example Sequences for Lane Ends and Lane Merge Signs (Sheet 2 of 5).png|thumb|center|800px|alt=A vertical roadway is shown with two travel lanes at the bottom of the figure and one travel lane at the top. The right lane ends through a taper marked by white lane-reduction arrows placed in the right travel lane, each pointing diagonally toward the adjacent lane. At the bottom right of the figure, a W9-1R “RIGHT LANE ENDS” sign is mounted above a W16-2P “1000 FEET” plaque. Farther upstream, a W4-2R lane-reduction symbol sign is shown to the right of the roadway. The distance between the W4-2R sign and the beginning of the taper is labeled, “See Table 903.3.4 to determine the advance placement distance.” A legend indicates the direction of travel. A note states, “See EPG 620.2.14 for lane-reduction pavement markings and EPG 620.2.22 for merge arrows.”
|'''Figure 903.3.39.2''' Example Sequences for Lane Ends and Lane Merge Signs ''(Sheet 2 of 5)'']]

{{SpanID|fig903.3.39.3}}
[[File:Figure 903.3.39.3 Example Sequences for Lane Ends and Lane Merge Signs (Sheet 3 of 5).jpg|thumb|center|800px|alt="The figure shows two roadway examples where the left lane ends. The illustration on the left depicts an undivided roadway with one travel lane in one direction and two travel lanes in the opposite direction. On the side with two lanes, the left lane ends through a taper marked with a yellow painted gore and white lane-reduction arrows placed in the left travel lane, each arrow pointing diagonally toward the adjacent lane. To the right of this roadway, a W9-1L “LEFT LANE ENDS” sign is shown mounted above a W16-2P “1000 FEET” plaque, and a W4-2L lane-reduction symbol sign is shown farther upstream. The distance between the W4-2L sign and the beginning of the taper is labeled, “See Table 903.3.4 to determine the advance placement distance.”
The illustration on the right depicts a divided or one-way roadway with two travel lanes. The left lane ends through a taper marked by white lane-reduction arrows pointing diagonally toward the adjacent lane. To the right of this roadway, a W9-1L “LEFT LANE ENDS” sign is shown mounted above a W16-2P “1000 FEET” plaque, with a W4-2L lane-reduction symbol sign shown farther upstream. The same advance placement distance label is shown.
A note states, “See EPG 620.2.14 for lane-reduction pavement markings and EPG 620 for merge arrows.” A legend indicates the direction of travel."
|'''Figure 903.3.39.3''' Example Sequences for Lane Ends and Lane Merge Signs ''(Sheet 3 of 5)'']]

{{SpanID|fig903.3.39.4}}
[[File:Figure 903.3.39.4 Example Sequences for Lane Ends and Lane Merge Sign (Sheet 4 of 5).png|thumb|center|800px|alt=The intersection of a two-lane horizontal roadway with a three-lane vertical roadway is shown.The right and left side of the horizontal roadway is composed of one through travel lane in each direction. The left side also has a third lane which is a right-turn only lane when approaching the intersection traveling eastbound to turn south.The vertical roadway is composed of two northbound lanes and one southbound lane. The south side of this vertical roadway is composed of a combination straight or left-turn lane in the left northbound travel lane and a combination straight or right-turn lane in the right northbound travel lane. Solid white through and turn arrows are shown in these travel lanes.Starting near the bottom of the figure, to the right of the right shoulder of the northbound lanes, a sign assembly composed of a W9-1R sign mounted above a W16-2P plaque is shown.On the north side of this vertical roadway, a W4-2R sign is shown to indicate that the two northbound lanes are transitioning to one lane ahead. Before the right lane taper begins, two solid white arrows are shown in the right northbound travel lane on the pavement pointing diagonally to the left northbound travel lane. An “optional dotted lane line” is shown adjacent to these arrows in the middle of the travel lanes. All pavement markings are denoting a northbound left lane merge ahead.
|'''Figure 903.3.39.4''' Example Sequences for Lane Ends and Lane Merge Sign ''(Sheet 4 of 5)'']]

{{SpanID|fig903.3.39.5}}
[[File:Figure 903.3.39.5 Example Sequences for Lane Ends and Lane Merge Signs (Sheet 5 of 5).png|thumb|center|800px|alt="The figure shows a vertical roadway where two lanes traveling in the same direction reduce to one lane. At the bottom of the roadway, two upward-travel lanes are shown. Farther up the figure, both outside edges of the roadway taper inward, reducing the roadway to a single lane. A single dashed centerline is shown within the remaining lane.

To the right of the roadway, near the lower portion of the figure, a sign assembly is shown consisting of a W9-4 “LANES MERGE” sign mounted above a W16-2P “500 FEET” plaque. Farther up the roadway, another sign assembly is shown consisting of a W4-8 lane-reduction symbol sign. A label between the W4-8 sign and the start of the taper reads, “See Table 903.3.4 to determine the advance placement distance.”
A legend indicates the direction of travel with a right-pointing arrow. Notes reference EPG 620.2.14 for lane-reduction pavement markings and EPG 903.3.40 for additional information about this type of merge."
|'''Figure 903.3.39.5''' Example Sequences for Lane Ends and Lane Merge Signs ''(Sheet 5 of 5)'']]

=={{SpanID|903.3.40}}903.3.40 Lanes Merge Signs (W9-4 and W4-8) (MUTCD Section 2C.48)==
<center>
{|
| [[File:W4-8.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W4-8'''</center>]]
| [[File:W9-4.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W9-4'''</center>]]
|}
</center>

'''Support. '''The LANES MERGE (W9-4) and Single-Lane Transition (W4-8) signs are used to warn of a merge of two lanes to one in the same direction of travel with a merging maneuver required for each lane (see [[#fig903.3.39.5|Figure 903.3.39.5]]). This type of merge is for a geometric condition where both approach lanes merge into a single lane, not where one lane merges into the other. [[616.8 TTC Zone Warning Signs (MUTCD Chapter 6H) #616.8.8|EPG 618.8.8]] contains information about the use of the late merge sign.

'''Guidance. '''The Single-Lane Transition (W4-8) sign should be located at the advance placement distance in accordance with [[#tab903.3.4|Table 903.3.4]].

The Lanes Merge (W9-4) sign should be used in advance of the W4-8 sign to provide additional warning that both lanes form a single lane and that a merging maneuver is needed for the traffic in each lane.

=={{SpanID|903.3.41}}903.3.41 RIGHT (LEFT) LANE EXIT ONLY Sign (W9-7) (MUTCD Section 2C.50)==

[[File:W9-7.png|thumb|center|160px|alt=|<center>'''W9-7'''</center>]]

'''Option. '''The RIGHT (LEFT) LANE EXIT ONLY (W9-7) sign may be used to provide advance warning to road users that traffic in the right-hand (left-hand) lane of a roadway will be required to depart the roadway at the next exit.

'''Guidance. '''If used, the W9-7 sign should be installed upstream from the first overhead guide sign that contains an EXIT ONLY sign panel or upstream from the first RIGHT (LEFT) LANE MUST EXIT (R3-33) regulatory sign, if used, whichever is farther upstream from the exit.

=={{SpanID|903.3.42}}903.3.42 Two-Way Traffic Sign (W6-3) (MUTCD Section 2C.51)==
[[File:W6-3.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W6-3'''</center>]]

'''Guidance. '''A Two-Way Traffic (W6-3) sign should be used to warn road users of a transition from a multi-lane divided section of roadway to a two-lane, two-way section of roadway.

A Two-Way Traffic (W6-3) sign with an AHEAD (W16-9P) plaque (see [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.57|EPG 903.3.57]]) should be used to warn road users of a transition from a one-way street to a two-lane, two-way section of roadway.

'''Option. '''The Two-Way Traffic sign may be used to supplement the Divided Highway (Road) Ends (W6-2) sign discussed in [[#903.3.19|EPG 903.3.19]].

=={{SpanID|903.3.43}}903.3.43 NO PASSING ZONE Sign (W14-3) (MUTCD Section 2C.53)==

'''Support. '''The NO PASSING ZONE (W14-3) sign is not to be used on a system-wide basis. It is intended for special use as a measure to reduce crashes at locations where there is a history of crashes related to passing maneuvers.

'''Standard. '''The NO PASSING ZONE (W14-3) sign shall be a pennant-shaped isosceles triangle with its longer axis horizontal and pointing to the right. When used, the NO PASSING ZONE sign shall be installed on the left-hand side of the roadway at the beginning of no-passing zones identified by pavement markings or DO NOT PASS signs or both (see [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2.31|EPG 903.2.31]] and [[620.2 Pavement and Curb Markings (MUTCD Chapter 3B) #620.2.3|620.2.3]]).

The use of the NO PASSING ZONE sign shall be approved by the State Highway Safety and Traffic Engineer.

=={{SpanID|903.3.44}}903.3.44 Vehicular Traffic Warning Signs (MUTCD Section 2C.54)==
'''Option. '''Vehicular Traffic Warning signs may be used to alert road users to locations where unexpected entries into the roadway by trucks, bicycles, farm vehicles, emergency vehicles, golf carts, horse-drawn vehicles, or other vehicles might occur.

'''Guidance. '''Vehicular Traffic Warning signs should be used only at locations where the road user’s sight distance is restricted, or the condition, activity, or entering traffic would be unexpected.

If the condition or activity is seasonal or temporary, the Vehicular Traffic Warning sign should be removed or covered when the condition or activity does not exist.

Before advanced warning signs are installed, all efforts to correct the sight distance issues should be made as this will be far more effective to improve safety compared to installing a sign. Roadway alignments cannot be corrected easily, but removal of vegetation on and off the state right of way that blocks sight distance can address sight distance issues.

'''Option. '''Supplemental plaques (see [[#903.3.57|EPG 903.3.57]]) with legends such as AHEAD, XX FEET, NEXT XX MILES, IN STREET, or IN ROAD may be mounted below Vehicular Traffic Warning signs to provide advance notice to road users of unexpected entries.

'''Standard. '''A Vehicular Traffic Warning sign assembly shall not be installed on an approach controlled by a STOP or a YIELD sign, except as provided in the following two Option paragraphs.

'''Option. '''The Vehicular Traffic Warning sign assembly may be installed on an approach to a circular intersection controlled by a YIELD sign where the crosswalk is at least 20 feet in advance of the yield point at the entrance to the circulatory roadway.

At a signalized or stop-controlled intersection the Vehicular Traffic Warning sign assembly may be installed on an approach to a channelized right-turn lane controlled by a YIELD sign where the crosswalk is at least 20 feet in advance of the yield point.

A Warning Beacon (see [[902.18 Flashing Beacons (MUTCD Chapter 4S) #902.18.3|EPG 902.18.3]]) may be used with any Vehicular Traffic Warning sign to indicate specific periods when the condition or activity is present or is likely to be present, or to provide enhanced sign conspicuity.

=={{SpanID|903.3.45}}903.3.45 Bicycle Warning (W11-1) Sign ==
[[File:W11-1.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W11-1'''</center>]]

'''Guidance. '''Bicycle Warning (W11-1) signs should be used only at locations where the road user’s sight distance is restricted, and the condition, activity, or entering traffic would be unexpected.

'''Option. '''Bicycle Warning (W11-1) signs may be used to alert road users to locations where unexpected entries into the roadway by cyclists might occur.

'''Support. '''Bicycle warning (W11-1) signs with a diagonal downward-pointing arrow (W16-7P) plaques are used to alert road users of locations where bicyclists routinely cross state highways.

'''Standard. '''If a post-mounted W11-1 sign is placed at the location of a bicycle crossing, a diagonal downward pointing arrow (W16-7P) plaque shall be mounted below the sign. The bicycle crossing warning sign with diagonal arrow supplemental plaque should be placed immediately in advance of, as near as possible, the crossing in both directions of travel. If the W11-1 sign is mounted overhead, the W16-7P supplemental plaque shall not be used.

'''Guidance. '''Bicycle crossing warning signs should be installed at locations where an established independent bicycle path crosses a state route. Bicycle crossing warning signs should not be installed where an established “US Bike Route” crosses a state route or where cyclists riding on the public roadways cross a state route.

'''Option. '''A Bicycle Warning (W11-1) sign with an AHEAD (W16-9P) supplemental plaque may be added in advance of the bicycle crossing if engineering judgement determines a need based on limited sight distance of the crossing.

Bicycle Warning (W11-1) signs with an In Road (W16-1P) plaque may be used to alert road users to locations where cyclists riding on the roadway might occur.

'''Standard. '''When bicycle warnings signs are installed to warn motorists of bicycle activity along a state highway, the IN ROAD (W16-1P) plaque shall be installed below the Bicycle Warning (W11-1) sign and shall match the color of the warning sign.

'''Support. '''Bicycle warning signs with the IN ROAD supplemental plaques (IN ROAD plaque replaces the SHARE THE ROAD plaque) are used to alert road users where bicyclists routinely ride along specific sections of state highways, in the travel lane or on the shoulder of the roadway.

'''Guidance. '''The use of Bicycle warning signs to warn road users of cyclist activity along specific sections of roadway should be based on identifiable, routine and/or frequent cyclist activity. Indications bicycle warnings signs should be installed should be based on conditions, such as, but not limited to:
:A. Requests received by bicycle groups, or clubs, who indicate the state highways which are part of their group’s frequent cycling routes.
:B. Requests from Amish, Mennonite or other communities who utilize bicycles as one of their primary modes of routine transportation, indicating the state highways which service their community’s cycling needs.
:C. Sections of a state route where an established bicycle trail overlaps the state route for some length, using the roadway and not a dedicated bike lane, before returning to the independent trail again.
:D. Cycling activity occurs a minimum of 3 days per week, 6 months per year.

Bicycle warning signs should not be installed along routes for the following conditions:
:A. For the purpose of promoting cycling or conveying a bicycle friendly organization when there is no routine cycling activity on that route,
:B. When cyclists have access to a dedicated bicycle lane along the route,
:C. Where cyclists have access to a parallel bike facility, or multi-use path, or
:D. In response to a request from an individual without verifying the need as described in this article.

Bicycle warning signs used to notify drivers of bicycle traffic on the state route should only be ground-mounted installations. Signs should be installed at the point on the route the activity begins and downstream of major public road entry points onto the state route.

'''Option. '''Additional bicycle warning signs may be installed based on engineering judgement if the distance between major road intersections is excessive or if there are areas with limited sight distance which may obscure bicycle traffic.

A NEXT XX MILES (W7-3aP) plaque (See [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.60|EPG 903.3.60]]) may be installed below the IN ROAD plaque if engineering judgement determines the need to notify road users of the length of roadway over which unexpected cyclists riding along the road may occur.

=={{SpanID|903.3.46}}903.3.46 Combined Bicycle/Pedestrian Crossing (W11-15) Sign ==
[[File:W11-15.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W11-15'''</center>]]

'''Option. '''Combined Bicycle/Pedestrian Crossing (W11-15) signs may be used to alert road users to locations where unexpected entries into the roadway by cyclists and pedestrians might occur.

'''Guidance. '''Combined Bicycle/Pedestrian warning signs should be installed at locations where an established shared use path crosses a state route.

'''Support. '''The combined Bicycle/Pedestrian (W11-15) sign is used where both bicyclists and pedestrians might be crossing the roadway at intersections with a shared-use path and state routes. A shared-use path is defined as a paved or gravel path, 8-10 foot wide, dedicated to bike and pedestrian traffic which is an independent facility from the roadway.

'''Standard. '''If a post-mounted W11-15 sign is placed at the location of the combined Bicycle/Pedestrian crossing, a diagonal downward pointing arrow (W16-7P) plaque shall be mounted below the sign. The Bicycle/Pedestrian warning sign with diagonal downward pointing arrow plaque shall be placed immediately in advance of, as near as possible, the crossing in both directions of travel. If the W11-15 sign is mounted overhead, the W16-7P supplemental plaque shall not be used.

'''Option. '''An advanced Bicycle/Pedestrian warning sign with an AHEAD (W16-9P) supplemental plaque may be added in advance of the Bicycle/Pedestrian crossing if engineering judgement determines a need based on limited sight distance of the crossing.

=={{SpanID|903.3.47}}903.3.47 Trail Crossing (W11-15a) Sign ==
[[File:W11-15a.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W11-15a'''</center>]]

'''Option. '''TRAIL CROSSING (W11-15a) signs may be used to alert road users to locations where unexpected entries into the roadway by cyclists, pedestrians or equestrian activity might occur.

'''Support. '''The TRAIL CROSSING sign is used to warn of a rustic trail where pedestrian, bicyclist, or equestrian activities, might be crossing the state highway. A rustic trail would typically be an unpaved trail of an undefined width, but one that is visible and identifiable by a motorist as it crosses the right of way.

'''Guidance. '''TRAIL CROSSING signs should be installed at locations where an established rustic trail used by pedestrians, bicyclists, and equestrian activities crosses a state route.

'''Standard. '''If a post-mounted W11-15a sign is placed at the location of the rustic trail crossing, a diagonal downward pointing arrow (W16-7P) plaque shall be mounted below the sign. The W11-15a sign with diagonal downward pointing arrow plaque shall be placed immediately in advance of, as near as possible, the crossing in both directions of travel. If the W11-15a sign is mounted overhead, the W16-7P supplemental plaque shall not be used.

'''Option. '''A TRAIL CROSSING warning sign with an AHEAD (W16-9P) supplemental plaque may be added in advance of the trail crossing if engineering judgement determines a need based on limited sight distance of the crossing.

=={{SpanID|903.3.48}}903.3.48 Horse-Drawn Vehicle (W11-14) Sign==
[[File:W11-14.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W11-14'''</center>]]

'''Option.''' Horse-Drawn Vehicle (W11-14) signs may be used to alert road users to locations where unexpected horse-drawn vehicles are traveling along the roadway might occur.

'''Guidance.''' W11-14 signs should be used only at locations where the road user’s sight distance is restricted, and the condition, activity, or entering traffic would be unexpected.

'''Support. '''Horse-Drawn Vehicle warning signs with the IN ROAD (W16-1P) supplemental plaque (IN ROAD plaque replaces the SHARE THE ROAD plaque) are used to alert road users where horse-drawn vehicle traffic is routinely traveling along specific sections of state highways, in the travel lane or on the shoulder of the roadway.

'''Standard. '''When Horse-drawn vehicle warnings signs are installed to warn motorists of Horse-drawn vehicle activity along a state highway, the IN ROAD (W16-1P) plaque shall be installed below the Horse-drawn vehicle warning sign and shall match the color of the warning sign.

'''Guidance. '''The use of Horse-Drawn Vehicle signs to warn road users of horse-drawn vehicle activity along specific section of roadway should be based on identifiable, routine and/or frequent horse-drawn vehicle activity. The application of horse-drawn vehicle warning signs is limited to the Amish, Mennonite or other communities who utilize horse-drawn vehicles as one of their primary modes of routine transportation. The district should work with community leadership to determine the state routes their communities utilize on a routine basis to determine the most appropriate sign installation locations.

Horse-Drawn Vehicle signs used to notify drivers of horse-drawn vehicle traffic on the state route should only be ground-mounted installations. Signs should be installed at the point on the route the activity begins and downstream of each major public road entry points onto the state route.

'''Option. '''Additional Horse-Drawn Vehicle signs with IN ROAD plaques may be installed based on engineering judgement if the distance between major road intersections is excessive or if there are areas with limited sight distance which may obscure horse-drawn vehicle traffic.

A NEXT XX MILES (W7-3aP) plaque may be added below the IN ROAD plaque if engineering judgement determines the need to notify drivers of the length of roadway affected by the warning sign.

=={{SpanID|903.3.49}}903.3.49 TRUCK CROSSING (W8-6) Sign ==
[[File:W8-6.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W8-6'''</center>]]

'''Option. '''Truck Crossing (W8-6) signs may be used to alert road users to locations where unexpected entries into the roadway by trucks crossing the road might occur.

'''Guidance. '''W8-6 signs should be used only at locations where the road user’s sight distance is restricted, and the condition, activity, or entering traffic would be unexpected.

'''Support. '''The W8-6 sign is used to alert road users to locations where trucks are routinely crossing a state highway at a commercial entrance intersection. A typical example would be a company with facilities on either side of a highway where raw materials, finished goods, etc. are routinely moved sites. In these cases, warning signs with fluorescent yellow backgrounds are installed in a permanent installation.

'''Option. '''For cases involving temporary truck crossings, such as haul roads moving earth or quarry materials, a TR12 Truck crossing agreement (see [[153.21 Traffic #153.21|EPG 153.21]]) may be used to install a temporary traffic control sign with a fluorescent orange background.

'''Guidance. '''W8-6 signs should be installed at locations where there is consistent and routine truck traffic crossing a state route where the road user’s sight distance is restricted, and the crossing would be unexpected based on engineering judgement.

The truck crossing for which the warning sign is being installed should be recognizable by the presence of a on premise business marquee sign, business name on structures or other indicators to allow drivers to associate the warning sign to the entrance/site where tucks could be crossing the state highway.

'''Standard. '''If used, the TRUCK CROSSING sign shall be placed in accordance with [[#tab903.3.4|Table 903.3.4]].

The TRUCK CROSSING sign shall only be installed for the direction of travel where the road user’s sight distance is restricted.

The TRUCK CROSSING sign shall not be used on state highways at intersections with city streets or county roads, to address issues at these types of intersections other warning signs, such as Intersection Warning signs are more appropriate.

=={{SpanID|903.3.50}}903.3.50 Truck Entrance (W11-10) Sign==
[[File:W11-10.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W11-10'''</center>]]

'''Option. '''Truck Entrance (W11-10) signs may be used to alert road users to locations where unexpected entries into the roadway by trucks might occur.

'''Guidance. '''Truck Entrance signs should be used only at locations where the road user’s sight distance is restricted, and the condition, activity, or entering traffic would be unexpected.

'''Support. '''The W11-10 sign is used to alert road users to locations where trucks are routinely entering and leaving a state highway at a non-public roadway intersection, commercial entrance. A typical example would be trucks entering and exiting a quarry entrance which has direct access to the state route. In these cases, warning signs with fluorescent yellow backgrounds are installed in a permanent installation.

'''Option. '''For cases involving a temporary truck entrance, such as logging trucks entering and leaving a timber harvest location, a TR12 Truck crossing agreement (see [[153.21 Traffic #153.21|EPG 153.21]]) may be used to install a temporary traffic control sign with a fluorescent orange background.

'''Guidance. '''Truck Entrance signs should be installed at locations where there is consistent and routine truck traffic entering and leaving a state route where the road user’s sight distance is restricted, and the crossing would be unexpected based on engineering judgement.

The truck entrance for which the sign is being installed should be recognizable by the presence of a on premise business marquee sign, building with the business name or some other form of marking to allow drivers associate the warning sign to the site where trucks could be entering or leaving the highway.

'''Standard. '''If used, the Truck Entrance sign shall be placed in accordance with [[#tab903.3.4|Table 903.3.4]].

The Truck Entrance sign shall only be installed for the direction of travel where the road user’s sight distance is restricted.

The truck entrance warning sign shall not be used on state highways at intersections with city streets or county roads, to address issues at these types of intersections other warning signs, such as Intersection Warning signs are more appropriate.

=={{SpanID|903.3.51}}903.3.51 Farm Equipment (W11-5) Warning Sign ==
[[File:W11-5.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W11-5'''</center>]]

'''Option. '''Farm Equipment Warning (W11-5) signs may be used to alert road users to locations where unexpected entries into the roadway by farm equipment crossing the road might occur.

'''Guidance. '''W11-5 signs should be used only at locations where the road user’s sight distance is restricted, and the condition, activity, or entering traffic would be unexpected.

'''Support. '''The Farm Equipment (W11-5) sign is used to alert road users to locations where slow-moving farm vehicles are routinely entering or crossing the state highway (immediately across or a short transition down the road to a different entrance) if the highway splits the farm. A typical example would be a dairy farm where these crossings take place daily. In these cases, fluorescent yellow warning signs are installed in a permanent installation.

Farm Equipment signs are not installed to warn of farm equipment traveling along a state highway. This warning is the responsibility of the farmer and can be addressed by displaying the appropriate warning lights and signs on the equipment as well as having the appropriate lead and/or trailing vehicles escorting the equipment.

'''Option. '''For cases involving a temporary farm equipment access entrance, such as during planting or harvest season, a TR12 Truck Crossing agreement (see [[153.21 Traffic #153.21|EPG 153.21]]) may be used to install a temporary traffic control sign with a fluorescent orange background.

'''Guidance. '''Farm Equipment signs should be installed at locations where there is consistent and routine farm equipment entering and leaving a state route where the road user’s sight distance is restricted, and the crossing would be unexpected based on engineering judgement.

The farm vehicle entrance for which the warning sign is being installed should be recognizable by the presence of a on-premise business marquee sign, presence of farm equipment, farm structures or other indicators to allow drivers to associate the warning sign to the site where farm vehicles could be crossing/entering the highway.

'''Standard. '''If used, the Farm Equipment warning sign shall be placed in accordance with [[#tab903.3.4|Table 903.3.4]].

The Farm Equipment warning sign shall only be installed for the direction of travel where the road user’s sight distance is restricted.

=={{SpanID|903.3.52}}903.3.52 Emergency Vehicle (W11-8) Sign==
<center>
{|
| [[File:W11-8.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W11-8'''</center>]]
| [[File:W11-12P.jpg|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W11-12P'''</center>]]
|}
</center>

'''Option. '''Emergency Vehicle (W11-8) signs may be used to alert road users to locations where unexpected entries into the roadway by emergency vehicles might occur.

'''Guidance.''' Emergency Vehicle signs should be used only at locations where the road user’s sight distance is restricted, and the condition, activity, or entering traffic would be unexpected.

'''Support.''' The Emergency Vehicle sign is used to alert road users to locations where emergency vehicles are routinely entering and leaving a state highway at dedicated emergency vehicle facility entrances.

'''Guidance. '''Emergency Vehicle signs should be installed at a state route where the road user’s sight distance is restricted, and the crossing would be unexpected based on engineering judgement.

The emergency vehicle entrance for which the warning sign is being installed should be recognizable by the presence of a on premise marquee sign, building with the emergency agency name displayed or some other form of marking to allow drivers to associate the warning sign to the site/entrance where emergency vehicles could be entering or leaving the state highway.

'''Standard. '''If used, the Emergency Vehicle warning sign shall be placed in accordance with [[#tab903.3.4|Table 903.3.4]].

The Emergency Vehicle warning sign shall only be installed for the direction of travel where the road user’s sight distance is restricted.

When measuring sight distance for emergency vehicle entrances, the sight distance shall be determined using a 3.5 ft. eye height and an 8 ft. object height in the same method use to evaluate school bus stop sight distances (see [[908.2 Signs (MUTCD Chapter 7B) #908.2.4|EPG 908.2.4]]).

The Emergency Vehicle sign with the EMERGENCY SIGNAL AHEAD (W11-12P) supplemental plaque shall be placed in advance of all emergency-vehicle traffic control signals (see [[902.13 Traffic Control Signals for Emergency-Vehicle Access (MUTCD Chapter 4M)|EPG 902.13]]).

=={{SpanID|903.3.53}}903.3.53 Non-Vehicular Warning Signs (W11-2, W11-3, W11-4, and W11-7) (MUTCD Section 2C.55)==
<center>
{|
| [[File:W11-2.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W11-2'''</center>]]
| [[File:W11-4.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W11-4''' (Cattle)</center>]]
| [[File:W11-7.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W11-7'''</center>]]
|}
</center>

'''Option. '''Non-Vehicular Warning (W11-2, W11-4, and W11-7) signs may be used to alert road users in advance of locations where unexpected entries into the roadway might occur.

'''Support. '''These conflicts might be relatively confined or might occur randomly over a segment of roadway.

'''Guidance. '''If used in advance of a pedestrian or equestrian crossing, the W11-2 and W11-7, signs should be supplemented with plaques (see [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.59|EPG 903.3.59]]) with the legend AHEAD or XX FEET to inform road users that they are approaching a point where crossing activity might occur.

'''Standard. '''If a post-mounted W11-2 or W11-7 sign is placed at the location of the crossing point where pedestrians or equestrians might be crossing the roadway, a diagonal downward-pointing arrow (W16-7P) plaque (see [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.62|EPG 903.3.62]]) shall be mounted below the sign. If the W11-2 or W11-7 sign is mounted overhead, the W16-7P plaque shall not be used.

A Non-Vehicular Warning sign assembly shall not be installed on an approach controlled by a STOP or a YIELD sign, except as provided in the first two Option paragraphs below.

Equestrian (W11-7) warning signs shall only be installed at Public Equestrian Trail Crossings. Existing Equestrian (W11-7) Crossing signs that do not meet the Public Equestrian Trail Crossing criteria shall be left in place until they reach the end of their service life.

The use of the Deer (W11-3) warning signs has been discontinued by MoDOT due to studies proving these signs provide little or no safety benefit. Existing W11-3 signs shall be removed at the end of their service life.

The Cattle (W11-4) sign shall be issued to an individual only when the Application for Sign at Cattle Crossings contract (TR09) is fully executed. See [[153.21 Traffic #153.21|EPG 153.21]] for the TR09 Agreement.

'''Option. '''The Non-Vehicular Warning sign assembly may be installed on an approach to a circular intersection controlled by a YIELD sign where the crosswalk is at least 20 feet in advance of the yield point at the entrance to a circulatory roadway.

At a signalized or stop-controlled intersection the Non-Vehicular Warning sign assembly may be installed on an approach to a channelized right-turn lane controlled by a YIELD sign where the crosswalk is at least 20 feet in advance of the yield point.

A Pedestrian Crossing (W11-2) sign may be placed overhead or may be post-mounted with a diagonal downward-pointing arrow (W16-7P) plaque at the crosswalk location where Yield Here To Pedestrians signs (see [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2.18|EPG 903.2.18]]) have been installed in advance of the crosswalk.

'''Standard. '''If a W11-2 sign has been post-mounted at the crosswalk location where a Yield Here To Pedestrians sign is used on the approach, the Yield Here To Pedestrians sign shall not be placed on the same post as the W11-2 sign.

'''Option. '''An advance Pedestrian Crossing (W11-2) sign with an AHEAD or a distance supplemental plaque may be used in conjunction with a Yield Here To Pedestrians sign on the approach to the same crosswalk.

The crossing location identified by a W11-2 or W11-7 sign may be defined with crosswalk markings (see [[620.3 Crosswalk Markings (MUTCD Chapter 3C) #620.3|EPG 620.3]]).

'''Standard. '''The W11-2 sign and related supplemental plaques shall only have a fluorescent yellow-green background with a black legend and border if the signs are installed within a school area as described in the fifth Support paragraph of [[#903.3.2|EPG 903.3.2]].

'''Guidance. '''When a fluorescent yellow-green background is used, a systematic approach featuring one background color within a zone or area should be used. The mixing of standard yellow and fluorescent yellow-green backgrounds within a selected site area should be avoided.

'''Option. '''A Warning Beacon (see [[902.18 Flashing Beacons (MUTCD Chapter 4S) #902.18.3|EPG 902.18.3]]) may be used with any Non-Vehicular Warning sign to indicate specific periods when the condition or activity is present or is likely to be present, or to provide enhanced sign conspicuity.

=={{SpanID|903.3.54}}903.3.54 FERRY CROSSING AHEAD Sign (W3-18)==
[[image:W3-10.gif|center|thumb|<center>'''W3-18'''</center>|100px]]

'''Option. '''The FERRY CROSSING AHEAD (W3-18) sign may be installed for a ferry crossing. A STOP (R1-1) sign at the ferry crossing may be used as a supplement.

=={{SpanID|903.3.55}}903.3.55 Passing Lane Warning Signs (W6-5, W6-5a, W6-6aP, W6-16, and W6-17)==
<center>
{|
|-
|[[image:W4-12a.gif|left|100px|thumb|<center>'''W6-6aP'''</center>]]||[[image:W4-10.gif|left|thumb|<center>'''W6-16'''</center>|100px]]||[[image:W4-11.gif|left|100px|thumb|<center>'''W6-17'''</center>]]
|}
</center>

'''Support. '''Alternating passing lanes may be provided on rural, two-lane highways to provide motorists with an opportunity to pass slower vehicles without crossing the centerline. Where passing lanes are provided, operations and safety may be improved by giving motorists advance information about the location of passing lanes. Providing motorists with advance notice of passing lanes may reduce the number of passing maneuvers.

'''Standard. '''The PASSING LANE ENDS (W6-16), WATCH FOR LEFT-TURNING TRAFFIC IN PASSING LANE (W6-17), and PASSING LANE PLAQUE (W6-6aP) signs shall be black legend and fluorescent yellow background and shall only be used in alternating passing lane sections.

The PASSING LANE ENDS sign shall be used prior to the end of the passing lane to warn motorists the passing lane in that direction of travel is ending and merging back to a single lane. The sign shall be placed in advance of the LANE ENDS MERGE RIGHT (W9-2) sign at a distance determined by [[#tab903.3.4|Table 903.3.4]].

'''Option. '''The WATCH FOR LEFT TURNING TRAFFIC IN PASSING LANE sign may be used at locations in a passing lane segment where left turns are common, such as at a county road. This sign may be installed at the judgement of the engineer.

The Two-Way Traffic on a Three-Lane Roadway (W6-5 and W6-5a) signs may be installed along three-lane roadways with two lanes in one direction and one in the opposing direction.

=={{SpanID|903.3.56}}903.3.56 TRAVEL SAFE ZONE – FINES DOUBLED Sign (W27-1)==
[[File:W27-1.jpg|center|130px|thumb|<center>'''W27-1'''</center>]]

'''Support. '''The TRAVEL SAFE ZONE - FINES DOUBLED (W27-1) sign is not to be used on a system-wide basis. It is intended for special use at locations where severe crashes are occurring. There is a requirement for regional support to focus a safety campaign involving local law enforcement and public information efforts to reduce the number and severity of crashes within the travel safe zone (see [[907.3 Travel Safe Zones #907.3 | EPG 907.3]]).

'''Standard. '''A TRAVEL SAFE ZONE – FINES DOUBLED sign shall be used to mark the beginning of a designated travel safe zone. This sign is installed in conjunction with the FINES DOUBLED ENDS (R2-20) sign (see [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2.70|EPG 903.2.70]]).

=={{SpanID|903.3.57}}903.3.57 Use of Supplemental Warning Plaques (MUTCD Section 2C.57)==

'''Option. '''A supplemental warning plaque may be displayed with a warning or regulatory sign when engineering judgment indicates that road users require additional warning information beyond that contained in the main message of the warning or regulatory sign.

'''Standard. '''Supplemental warning plaques shall be used only in combination with and installed on the same post(s) as warning or regulatory signs. They shall not be mounted alone or displayed alone.

Unless otherwise provided in the EPG for a particular plaque, supplemental warning plaques shall be mounted below the sign they supplement.

=={{SpanID|903.3.58}}903.3.58 Design of Supplemental Warning Plaques (MUTCD Section 2C.58)==

'''Standard. '''A supplemental warning plaque used with a warning sign shall have the same legend, border, and background color as the warning sign with which it is displayed. A supplemental warning plaque used with a regulatory sign shall have a black legend and border on a yellow background.

Supplemental warning plaques shall be square or rectangular.

=={{SpanID|903.3.59}}903.3.59 Advisory Speed Plaque (W13-1P) and Confirmation Advisory Speed Plaque (W13-1aP) (MUTCD Section 2C.59)==
<center>
{|
| [[File:W13-1P.png|thumb|center|84px|alt=|<center>'''W13-1P'''</center>]]
| [[File:W13-1aP.png|thumb|center|220px|alt=|<center>'''W13-1aP'''</center>]]
|}
</center>

'''Option. '''The Advisory Speed (W13-1P) plaque may be used to supplement an advance warning sign to indicate the advisory speed for a condition.

The Confirmation Advisory Speed (W13-1aP) plaque may be used to supplement a One-Direction Large Arrow (W1-6) sign on the outside of a turn or curve in line with and at approximately a right angle to approaching traffic.

'''Standard. '''The use of the Advisory Speed and Confirmation Advisory Speed plaques for horizontal curves shall be in accordance with [[#903.3.6|EPG 903.3.6]]. The Advisory Speed plaque shall also be used where an engineering study indicates a need to advise road users of the advisory speed for other roadway conditions.

The speed displayed on the Advisory Speed and Confirmation Advisory Speed plaques shall be a multiple of 5 mph. The maximum advisory speed posted shall never be more than the posted speed limit.

Except in emergencies or when the condition is temporary, an Advisory Speed or Confirmation Advisory Speed plaque shall not be installed until the advisory speed has been determined by an engineering study.

The Advisory Speed plaque shall only be used to supplement an advance warning sign. The Advisory Speed plaque or the Confirmation Advisory Speed plaque shall not be installed as a separate sign installation.

'''Guidance. '''The Advisory Speed plaque, if used with a sign that is also supplemented with another plaque, such as an Advance Street Name plaque (see [[#903.3.64|EPG 903.3.64]]), should be mounted immediately below the primary warning sign with any other plaque mounted below the Advisory Speed plaque.

'''Standard. '''The Confirmation Advisory Speed plaque shall only be used to supplement a One-Direction Large Arrow (W1-6) sign (see [[#903.3.10|EPG 903.3.10]]) or an Exit Gore (E5-1 series) sign (see [[ 903.5 Guide Signs - Freeways and Expressways (MUTCD Chapter 2E) #903.5.26| EPG 903.5.26]]) and shall not be installed as a separate sign installation.

The advisory speed shall be determined by an engineering study that follows established engineering practices.

'''Guidance. '''The advisory speed should be determined based on free-flowing traffic conditions.

Because changes in conditions, such as roadway geometrics, surface characteristics, or sight distance, might affect the advisory speed, each location should be evaluated periodically or when conditions change.

'''Support. '''Among the established engineering practices that are appropriate for the determination of the recommended advisory speed for a horizontal curve are the following:
:A. Accelerometer method
:B. 10 degrees of ball bank for all speeds

<center>
{| class="wikitable" style="padding: 1em;"
|-
| '''Engineering Study for Ball-Banking'''

The procedure to determine the safe speed on a curve or turn is a ball-bank study. To correctly use the ball-bank indicator, the ball-bank indicator should be mounted on the dashboard of a passenger car and adjusted to read "0" when the car is stationary on a level grade with the ball-bank indicator being in a vertical plane. When adjusting the indicator, all personnel who are to be in the car while testing should be in their seats and all four tires should have the same pressure. It is usually best for at least two persons to be in the car while taking the ball-bank reading: one for driving, the other for observation and recording.

The 10-degree reading that can be maintained the complete length of a curve is the appropriate safe speed for that curve. Care must be taken to maintain the car in its proper lane and to maintain a smooth, consistent speed throughout the curve. It will occasionally be found that a curve will have a higher safe speed in one direction than the other. In such cases, the lower safe speed should be used for both directions. Only increments of 5 mph are used on the Advisory Speed Plaque, therefore the curve shall be posted to the nearest 5 mph speed from the survey.
|-
|}
</center>

=={{SpanID|903.3.60}}903.3.60 Distance Plaques (W16-2P, W16-3P, W16-4P, and W7-3aP) (MUTCD Section 2C.61)==
<center>
{|
| [[File:W16-2P.png|thumb|center|130px|alt=|<center>'''W16-2P'''</center>]]
| [[File:W16-3P.png|thumb|center|130px|alt=|<center>'''W16-3P'''</center>]]
| [[File:W16-4P.png|thumb|center|130px|alt=|<center>'''W16-4P'''</center>]]
| [[File:W7-3aP.png|thumb|center|130px|alt=|<center>'''W7-3aP'''</center>]]
|}
</center>

'''Option. '''The Distance Ahead (W16-2P and W16-3P) plaques may be used to inform the road user of the distance to the condition indicated by the warning sign.

The Next Distance (W7-3aP and W16-4P) plaques may be used to inform road users of the length of roadway over which the condition indicated by the warning sign exists.

'''Standard. '''Distances shall be shown in ¼ mile or 100 ft. increments. If the distance is less than a ½ mile then feet shall be used.

=={{SpanID|903.3.61}}903.3.61 Supplemental Arrow Plaques (W16-5P and W16-6P) (MUTCD Section 2C.62)==
<center>
{|
| [[File:W16-5P.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W16-5P'''</center>]]
| [[File:W16-6P.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W16-6P'''</center>]]
|}
</center>

'''Guidance. '''If the condition indicated by a warning sign is located on an intersecting road and the distance between the intersection and condition is not sufficient to provide adequate advance placement of the warning sign, a Supplemental Arrow (W16-5P or W16-6P) plaque should be used below the warning sign.

'''Standard. '''Supplemental Arrow plaques shall have the same legend design as the Advance Turn Arrow and Directional Arrow auxiliary signs (see [[903.4 Guide Signs—Conventional Roads (MUTCD Chapter 2D) #903.4.22|EPG 903.4.22]] and [[903.4 Guide Signs—Conventional Roads (MUTCD Chapter 2D) #903.4.24|903.4.24]]) except that they shall have a black legend and border on a fluorescent yellow or fluorescent yellow-green background, as appropriate.

=={{SpanID|903.3.62}}903.3.62 Diagonal Downward-Pointing Arrow Plaques (W16-7P and W16-7aP) (MUTCD Section 2C.63)==
<center>
{|
| [[File:W16-7P.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W16-7P'''</center>]]
| [[File:W16-7aP.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W16a-7P'''</center>]]
|}
</center>

'''Support. '''Diagonal downward-pointing arrow (W16-7P and W16-7aP) plaques are used with certain Vehicular Traffic Warning signs and certain Non-Vehicular Warning signs (see [[#903.3.53|EPG 903.3.53]]), and School Crossing signs (see [[908.2 Signs (MUTCD Chapter 7B) #908.2.3|EPG 908.2.3]]) to indicate the specific location of a crossing point.

The W16-7P plaque contains a single arrow pointing diagonally down to the right or left, toward the roadway, depending on which side of the roadway it is located.

'''Option. '''A W16-7aP plaque may be used with a single crossing sign located on a narrow median separating two roadways with traffic in the same direction where the crossing traverses both roadways.

=={{SpanID|903.3.63}}903.3.63 Hill-Related Plaques (W7-3 Series) (MUTCD Section 2C.64)==
<center>
{|
| [[File:W7-3P.png|thumb|center|90px|alt=|<center>'''W7-3P'''</center>]]
| [[File:W7-3aP.png|thumb|center|90px|alt=|<center>'''W7-3aP'''</center>]]
|}
</center>

'''Guidance. '''Hill-Related (W7-3 series) plaques (see [[#903.3.14|EPG 903.3.14]]) or other appropriate legends and larger signs should be used for emphasis or where special hill characteristics exist.

On longer grades, the use of a distance (W7-3aP) plaque (see [[#903.3.14|EPG 903.3.14]]) at periodic intervals of approximately 1-mile spacing should be considered.

=={{SpanID|903.3.64}}903.3.64 Advance Street Name Plaques (W16-8P and W16-8aP) (MUTCD Section 2C.65)==
<center>
{|
| [[File:W16-8P.png|thumb|center|150px|alt=|<center>'''W16-8P'''</center>]]
| [[File:W16-8aP.png|thumb|center|260px|alt=|<center>'''W16-8aP'''</center>]]
|}
</center>

'''Support. '''Advance street name signing can provide valuable information to the motorist. Intersections that are signed with Intersection Warning (W2 series) or Advance Traffic Control (W3 series) signs typically have inherent sight distance concerns. The addition of the street name to the warning sign can aid a motorist in making decisions in a timely manner.

'''Option. '''An Advance Street Name (W16-8P or W16-8aP) plaque may be used with any Intersection (W1-10 series, W2 series, W10-2, W10-3, or W10-4) or Advance Traffic Control (W3 series) sign to identify the name of the intersecting street.

If the side road being signed is maintained by a public agency, the addition of the street name sign may be considered on request.

'''Standard. '''The lettering on Advance Street Name plaques shall be composed of a combination of lower-case letters with initial upper-case letters.

If two street names are used on the Advance Street Name plaque, a directional arrow pointing in the direction of the street shall be placed next to each street name. Arrows pointing to the left shall be placed to the left of the street name, and arrows pointing to the right shall be placed to the right of the street name.

The street name used on an Advance Street Name supplemental sign shall be the approved name used by either the local agency or the Emergency 911 Coordinator.

When used, the Advance Street Name supplemental plaque shall only be mounted below the W2 or W3 series warning sign or the Advisory Speed plaque on the same post.

The Advance Street Name supplemental plaque for a 36 in. x 36 in. warning sign shall be a maximum of 36 in. wide and for a 48 in. x 48 in. warning sign shall be a maximum of 48 in. wide.

'''Guidance. '''If two street names are used on the Advance Street Name plaque, the street names and associated arrows should be displayed in the following order:
:A. For a single intersection, the name of the street to the left should be displayed above the name of the street to the right; or
:B. For two sequential intersections, such as where the plaque is used with an Offset Side Roads (W2-7) or a Double Side Road (W2-8) sign, the name of the first street encountered should be displayed above the name of the second street encountered, and the arrow associated with the second street encountered should be an advance arrow, such as the arrow shown on the W16-6P arrow plaque (see [[#903.3.61|EPG 903.3.61]]).

=={{SpanID|903.3.65}}903.3.65 Traffic Does Not Stop Plaques (W4-4P Series) (MUTCD Section 2C.66)==
<center>
{|
| [[File:W4-4P.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W4-4P'''</center>]]
| [[File:W4-4aP.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W4-4aP'''</center>]]
| [[File:W4-4bP.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W4-4bP'''</center>]]
|}
</center>

'''Option. '''The CROSS TRAFFIC DOES NOT STOP (W4-4P) plaque may be used in combination with a STOP sign when engineering judgment indicates that conditions are present that are causing or could cause road users to misinterpret the intersection as an all-way stop.

The TRAFFIC FROM LEFT (RIGHT) DOES NOT STOP (W4-4aP) or ONCOMING TRAFFIC DOES NOT STOP (W4-4bP) plaque may be used when such messages more accurately describe the traffic controls established at the intersection.

'''Guidance. '''The W4-4aP and W4-4bP plaques should be used at intersections where STOP signs control all but one approach to the intersection, unless the only non-stopped approach is from a one-way street.

'''Standard. '''If a W4-4P series plaque is used, it shall be mounted below the STOP sign.

=={{SpanID|903.3.66}}903.3.66 IN ROAD and IN STREET Plaques (W16-1P) (MUTCD Section 2C.67)==
[[File:W16-1P.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W16-1P'''</center>]]

'''Option. '''In situations where there is a need to warn drivers to watch for other slower forms of transportation traveling along the highway, such as bicycles or horse-drawn vehicles, an IN ROAD (W16-1P) plaque may be used.

'''Standard. '''The background color of the W16-1P plaque shall match the background color of the warning sign with which it is displayed. If a W16-1P plaque is used, it shall be mounted below a Bicycle (W11-1) or Horse-Drawn Vehicle (W11-14) warning signs and shall not be mounted alone.

'''Support. '''[[914.2 Regulatory Signs (MUTCD Chapter 9B) #914.2.6 | EPG 914.2.6]] contains information about the use of a Bicycles Allowed Use of Full Lane (R9-20) sign to inform drivers of the presence of bicycles in the roadway or where bicyclists are expected or preferred to use the full lane.

=={{SpanID|903.3.67}}903.3.67 NOTICE Plaque (W16-18p)==
[[File:W16-18P.jpg|center|120px|thumb|<center>'''W16-18P'''</center>]]

'''Support. '''It is sometimes necessary to enhance the conspicuity of a regulatory sign to attract drivers’ attention to the message the sign is conveying. This may be necessary to help notify drivers to a speed limit reduction, turning movement prohibition, or bridge weight restriction. The NOTICE (W16-18P) plaque is an alternate to the use of red flags (see [[903.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 2A) #903.1.11| EPG 903.1.11]]).

'''Standard. '''The NOTICE (W16-18P) plaque shall not be used alone.

When used, the NOTICE plaque shall be installed directly above the regulatory sign it is enhancing.

'''Guidance. '''The use of the NOTICE (W16-18P) plaque should be based on engineering judgment and not systematically applied to a specific sign unless otherwise specified in the EPG.

=={{SpanID|903.3.68}}903.3.68 Exception Plaques (W16-23P and W16-24P)==
<center>
{|
| [[File:W16-23P.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W16-23P'''</center>]]
| [[File:W16-24P.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''W16-24P'''</center>]]
|}
</center>

'''Support.''' The EXCEPT TO TURN (W16-23P) supplemental warning plaque is used with the NO TRUCKS LEFT LANE (R5-32) regulatory sign (see [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2.36|EPG 903.2.36]]) in locations where trucks are not allowed to drive in the left lane, but are allowed to enter the left lane in order to make a turn. The EXCEPT TO EXIT (W16-24P) supplemental warning plaque is used with the NO TRUCKS LEFT LANE (R5-32) regulatory sign in locations where trucks are not allowed to drive in the left lane, but trucks are allowed to enter the left lane in order to exit the highway.

'''Standard.''' When used, the EXCEPT TO TURN (W16-23P) and EXCEPT TO EXIT (W16-24P) supplemental warning plaques shall only be installed in conjunction with the FINES DOUBLED ENDS (R2-20) sign (see [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2.70|EPG 903.2.70]]).

=={{SpanID|903.3.69}}903.3.69 Warning Signs Provided for Other Agencies==

'''Support. '''MoDOT will provide, if requested by the appropriate local traffic authority, warning signs for conditions beyond the end of state-maintained right of way.

If the location for placement of an advance warning sign for a curve, turn, paved road, stop condition or other condition deemed appropriate falls on state-maintained right of way, MoDOT will place and maintain the traffic control device on state-maintained right-of-way at the request of the local traffic authority.

'''Standard. '''The placement of all traffic control devices on the state highway system shall be governed by the Engineering Policy Guide. MoDOT is responsible for the placement and maintenance of all signs on state-maintained right-of-way.

=={{SpanID|903.3.70}}903.3.70 Object Marker Design and Placement Height (MUTCD Section 2C.70)==

'''Support. '''Types 1, 2, and 3 object markers are used to mark obstructions within or adjacent to the roadway. Type 4 object markers are used to mark the end of a roadway.

'''Standard. '''When used, object markers (see [[#fig903.3.70|Figure 903.3.70]]) shall not have a border and shall consist of an arrangement of one or more of the following types:

Type 1—a diamond-shaped sign, at least 18 inches on a side, consisting of an all-yellow retroreflective sign (OM1-3).

Type 2—an all-yellow horizontal or vertical retroreflective sign (OM2-2V or OM2-2H), measuring 6 x 12 inches.

Type 3—a striped marker, 12 x 36 inches, consisting of a vertical rectangle with alternating black and retroreflective yellow stripes sloping downward at an angle of 45 degrees toward the side of the obstruction on which traffic is to pass. The minimum width of the yellow and black stripes shall be 3 inches.

Type 4—a diamond-shaped sign, at least 18 inches on a side, consisting of an all-red retroreflective sign (OM4-3).

'''Support. '''Type 3 object markers with stripes that begin at the upper right side and slope downward to the lower left side are designated as right object markers (OM3-R). Object markers with stripes that begin at the upper left side and slope downward to the lower right side are designated as left object markers (OM3-L). Object markers with chevron stripes that slope downward to both the lower left and lower right sides are designated as center object markers (OM3-C).

'''Guidance. '''When used for marking obstructions within the roadway or obstructions that are 8 feet or less from the shoulder or curb, the minimum mounting height, measured from the bottom of the object marker to the elevation of the near edge of the traveled way, should be 4 feet.

When used to mark obstructions more than 8 feet from the shoulder or curb, the clearance from the ground to the bottom of the object marker should be at least 4 feet.

Object markers should not present a vertical or horizontal clearance obstacle for pedestrians.

'''Option. '''When object markers or markings are applied to an obstruction that by its nature requires a lower or higher mounting, the vertical mounting height may vary according to need.

{{SpanID|fig903.3.70}}
[[File:Figure 903.3.70 Object Markers.png|thumb|center|400px|alt="The figure shows four categories of object markers used to identify obstructions.
Type 1 Object Markers (obstructions within the roadway):
A single yellow diamond-shaped marker labeled OM1-3.
Type 2 Object Markers (obstructions adjacent to the roadway):
Two yellow rectangular markers: a vertical rectangle labeled OM2-2V and a horizontal rectangle labeled OM2-2H.
Type 3 Object Markers (obstructions adjacent to or within the roadway):
Three yellow-and-black striped rectangular markers are shown:
The OM3-L marker has diagonal stripes sloping downward from left to right.
The OM3-C marker has alternating diagonal stripes forming downward-pointing chevrons.
The OM3-R marker has diagonal stripes sloping downward from right to left.
Type 4 Object Marker (end of roadway):
A red diamond-shaped marker labeled OM4-3."
|'''Figure 903.3.70''' Object Markers]]

=={{SpanID|903.3.71}}903.3.71 Object Markers for Obstructions Within the Roadway (MUTCD Section 2C.71)==

'''Standard. '''Obstructions within the roadway shall be marked with a Type 1 or Type 3 object marker. In addition to markers on the face of the obstruction, warning of approach to the obstruction shall be given by appropriate pavement markings (see [[620.2 Pavement and Curb Markings (MUTCD Chapter 3B) #620.2.15|EPG 620.2.15]]).

'''Option. '''To provide additional emphasis, a Type 1 or Type 3 object marker may be installed at or near the approach end of a median island.

To provide additional emphasis, large surfaces such as bridge piers may be painted with diagonal stripes, 12 inches or greater in width, similar in design to the Type 3 object marker.

'''Standard. '''The alternating black and retroreflective yellow stripes (OM3-L, OM3-R) shall be sloped down at an angle of 45 degrees toward the side on which traffic is to pass the obstruction. If traffic can pass to either side of the obstruction, the alternating black and retroreflective yellow stripes (OM3-C) shall form chevrons that point upwards.

'''Option. '''Appropriate signs (see [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2.34|EPG 903.2.34]] and [[#903.3.20|903.3.20]]) directing traffic to one or both sides of the obstruction may be used instead of the object marker.

=={{SpanID|903.3.72}}903.3.72 Object Markers for Obstructions Adjacent to the Roadway (MUTCD Section 2C.72)==

'''Support. '''Obstructions not actually within the roadway are sometimes so close to the edge of the road that they need a marker. These include underpass piers, bridge abutments, handrails, ends of traffic barriers, utility poles, and culvert headwalls. In other cases there might not be a physical object involved, but other roadside conditions exist, such as narrow shoulders, drop-offs, gores, small islands, and abrupt changes in the roadway alignment, that might make it undesirable for a road user to leave the roadway, and therefore would create a need for a marker.

'''Standard. '''Type 3 object markers shall be used to mark all obstructions within 3 feet of the edge of the travel lane or edge of the shoulder when shoulders are present (paved or aggregate). Type 3 object markers shall not be used to mark obstructions located beyond 8 feet of the edge of the travel lane or edge of the shoulder. See [[#fig903.3.72.1|Figures 903.3.72.1]] and [[#fig903.3.72.2|903.3.72.2]] for standard applications of Type 3 object markers.

'''Option. '''Type 3 object markers may be used to mark obstructions located 3 feet to 8 feet from the edge of the travel lane or edge of the shoulder based on engineering judgment. See [[#fig903.3.72.1|Figures 903.3.72.1]] and [[#fig903.3.72.2|903.3.72.2]] for standard applications of Type 3 object markers.

'''Guidance. '''If a Type 2 or Type 3 object marker is used to mark an obstruction adjacent to the roadway, the edge of the object marker that is closest to the road user should be installed in line with the closest edge of the obstruction.

When a marker is applied to the approach ends of guardrail or crash cushion terminals it should have the appearance of a Type 3 object marker and should be directly affixed, without a substrate, to the approach end of the guardrail or crash cushion and generally conform to the size and shape of the approach end of the guardrail or crash cushion.

'''Standard. '''Type 1 and Type 4 object markers shall not be used to mark obstructions adjacent to the roadway.

'''Guidance. '''Standard warning signs in this Chapter should also be used where applicable.

{{SpanID|fig903.3.72.1}}
[[File:Figure 903.3.72.1 Standard Application of Type 3 Object Markers Objects 2' or Less From Edge of Travel Lane_Shoulder.png|thumb|center|800px|alt="The figure shows several examples of Type 3 object marker placement for obstructions along a two-lane, two-way highway and a divided highway. Type 3 object markers are rectangular yellow and black striped panels labeled with the numbers 1, 2, and 3. In the two-lane, two-way highway examples, the first scenario shows a bridge where markers 1, 2, and 3 are placed on each side of the roadway on both approaches. Marker 1 is positioned closest to the obstruction, marker 2 is placed farther from the edge of pavement, and marker 3 is placed the farthest from the obstruction. This identical arrangement appears on all four corners of the bridge. The second scenario shows a box culvert with a length of 20 feet or more. The same arrangement of markers 1, 2, and 3 is placed on both sides of the roadway, and a dimension labeled L indicates the length of the culvert. The third scenario shows a pipe or box culvert with a length of less than 20 feet, where a single marker 1 is placed just before the culvert on the upper side of the roadway, and another marker 1 is placed just before the culvert on the lower side of the roadway. The fourth scenario shows a spillway where a single marker 1 is placed just before the spillway on the right side of the roadway.
In the divided highway examples, the first scenario shows a bridge where markers 1, 2, and 3 are placed only on the approach side of the structure for each direction of travel. No markers are shown beyond the bridge. The second scenario shows a box culvert with a length of 20 feet or more. On the approach to the culvert, object markers 1, 2, and 3 are placed on both sides of the roadway for the direction of travel. After the culvert, one additional marker 1 is placed on the right side of the roadway. A dimension labeled L indicates the length of the culvert. The third scenario shows a pipe or box culvert with a length of less than 20 feet, where a single marker 1 is placed just before the culvert.
A legend shows the direction of travel with an arrow. Notes beneath the figure explain the placement requirements. Marker 1 is placed as close to the obstruction as possible and aligned with the inside edge. Marker 2 is placed 1.5 feet from the edge of pavement and 20 feet from the end of the obstruction. Marker 3 is placed 3 feet from the edge of pavement and 40 feet from the end of the obstruction. Additional notes refer to Figure 903.3.72.2 for mounting height details and describe alternative mounting heights for areas affected by agricultural equipment."
|'''Figure 903.3.72.1''' Standard Application of Type 3 Object Markers Objects 2' or Less From Edge of Travel Lane/Shoulder]]

{{SpanID|fig903.3.72.2}}
[[File:Figure 903.3.72.2 Standard Application of Type 3 Object Markers Objects Greater Than 2' From Edge of Travel Lane_Shoulder.png|thumb|center|800px|alt="The figure shows several examples of Type 3 object marker placement for obstructions along a two-lane, two-way highway and a divided highway, as well as a detail of mounting height and lateral offset requirements. The Type 3 object markers shown are rectangular panels with alternating black and yellow diagonal stripes.
On the two-lane, two-way highway side, the first scenario shows a bridge. Two Type 3 object markers are placed on each side of the roadway at the near approach to the bridge. The same pair of markers appears on the far side of the bridge. In each location, the left and right markers are positioned close to the edges of the roadway.
The second scenario shows a box culvert with a length of 20 feet or more. A pair of Type 3 object markers is placed on both sides of the roadway on the approach to the culvert, with a labeled dimension L indicating the length of the structure. Another pair of markers is placed on both sides immediately after the culvert.
The third scenario shows a pipe or box culvert with a length of less than 20 feet. A single Type 3 object marker is placed just before the culvert on the upper side of the roadway, and another single marker is placed just before the culvert on the lower side.
The fourth scenario shows a spillway. A single Type 3 object marker is placed just before the spillway on the right side of the roadway.
On the divided highway side, the first scenario shows a bridge. One Type 3 object marker is placed on the left shoulder and one on the right shoulder on the approach side of the structure. No markers are placed beyond the bridge.
The second scenario shows a box culvert with a length of 20 feet or more. A single Type 3 object marker is placed on each side of the roadway on the approach to the culvert. Another marker is placed just past the culvert on the right shoulder. A dimension labeled L indicates the length of the culvert.
The third scenario shows pipe or box culverts with a length of less than 20 feet on both sides of the roadway. A single Type 3 object marker is placed just before each culvert, one on the left shoulder and one on the right shoulder.
A legend identifies the direction of travel with an arrow. At the lower right of the figure, a diagram labeled “Mounting Height and Offset, Type 3 Object Marker Installation” shows the required installation details. The marker is mounted so that the edge of the sign aligns with the edge of the object being marked. The bottom of the sign is elevated 4 feet above the ground. The object and ground slope are shown, along with the location of the edge of the travel lane or shoulder."
|'''Figure 903.3.72.2''' Standard Application of Type 3 Object Markers Objects Greater Than 2' From Edge of Travel Lane/Shoulder]]

=={{SpanID|903.3.73}}903.3.73 Object Markers for Ends of Roadways (MUTCD Section 2C.73)==

'''Support. '''The Type 4 object marker is used to warn and alert road users of the end of a roadway in other than construction or maintenance areas.

'''Standard. '''If an object marker is used to mark the end of a roadway, a Type 4 object marker shall be used. See ([https://www.modot.org/media/51221 Section 903 of the Missouri Standard Plans for Highway Construction]) for installation details.

'''Option. '''The Type 4 object marker may be used in instances where there are no alternate vehicular paths.

'''Standard. '''The minimum mounting height, measured vertically from the bottom of a Type 4 object marker to the elevation of the near edge of the traveled way, shall be 4 feet.

'''Guidance. '''Appropriate advance warning signs in EPG 903.3 should be used.

=={{SpanID|903.3.74}}903.3.74 Shoulder Barricade Assembly==

[[image:GB-1.gif|thumb|center|125px|<center>'''GB-1'''</center>]]

'''Option.''' Shoulder barricades may be used for added emphasis of standard warning sign installations at the direction of the engineer.

'''Standard.''' The shoulder barricade assembly shall consist of three horizontal boards (GB-1L or GB-1R) marked with reflective diagonal stripes and a 48-inch standard warning sign and a 48 in. standard warning sign with the appropriate 30-inch advisory plaque. See [[#fig903.3.74|Figure 903.3.74]] for typical construction.

GB-1R shoulder barricades shall be installed on the right side of the roadway and have diagonal stripes sloping downward from the right to the left.

GB-1L shoulder barricades shall be installed on the left side of the roadway and have diagonal stripes sloping downward from the left to the right.

'''Option.''' Supplemental signs may be installed on the shoulder barricade at the direction of the engineer.

'''Guidance.''' Shoulder Barricades should be installed on the appropriate size on wide flanged structural steel posts.

{{SpanID|fig903.3.74}}
[[File:Figure 903.3.74 Shoulder Barricade Assembly.png|thumb|center|alt="The figure shows a three-rail barricade assembly with a 48-inch diamond-shaped warning sign mounted to the front. The barricade consists of three horizontal panels with alternating black and yellow diagonal stripes. Each barricade rail is 12 inches tall, and the rails are stacked vertically with 12-inch gaps between them.
A pair of vertical dimension lines on the right side show 24-inch measurements between the midpoints of each barricade panel, indicating the vertical spacing between the centers of the top, middle, and bottom rails.
Centered on the barricade is a 48-inch warning sign, placed so that its midpoint aligns with the midpoint of the middle barricade rail. Below this sign, a rectangular supplemental MPH plaque is mounted on the lower barricade rail. Both signs are shown centered horizontally on the barricade width.
Horizontal dimensions at the top indicate that the barricade assembly is 8 feet wide with the sign centered within a 5-foot-6-inch internal spacing. To the left of the assembly, a minimum 6-foot offset is shown from the nearest post to the edge of the travel way or stabilized shoulder.
Two wide-flange vertical posts support the barricade. Vertical measurements labeled A and B (referencing EPG 903.1.15) indicate the mounting height of the barricade and signs from the ground.
A note below the figure states that when a supplemental MPH plaque is used, the signs should be mounted exactly as shown, and if no supplemental sign is used, the warning sign should be centered vertically on the barricade. A smaller detail illustration reinforces this alternate configuration, showing the warning sign centered on the three-rail barricade without a supplemental plaque."
|650px|<center>'''Figure 903.3.74''' Shoulder Barricade Assembly</center>]]

903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B)

2025-12-01T18:17:58Z

HogsettC: /* {{SpanID|903.2.53}}903.2.53 Weight Limit Sign (R12-1) (MUTCD Section 2B.64) */

[[Category:903 Highway Signing (MUTCD Part 2)|903.02]]
{| align="right" style="margin-left: 15px; max-width: 690px;"
| __TOC__
|}
=={{SpanID|903.2.1}}903.2.1 Application of Regulatory Signs (MUTCD Section 2B.01)==

'''Standard. '''Regulatory signs shall be used to inform road users of selected traffic laws or regulations and to indicate the applicability of the legal requirements.

Regulatory signs shall be installed at or near where the regulations apply. The signs shall clearly indicate the requirements imposed by the regulations and shall be designed and installed to provide adequate visibility and legibility in order to obtain compliance.

Regulatory signs shall be retroreflective or illuminated (see [[903.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 2A) #903.1.21|EPG 903.1.21]]).

=={{SpanID|903.2.2}}903.2.2 Design of Regulatory Signs (MUTCD Section 2B.02)==

'''Standard. '''Regulatory signs shall be rectangular unless specifically designated otherwise in the EPG. Regulatory signs shall be designed in accordance with the sizes, shapes, colors, and legends contained in the FHWA “Standard Highway Signs” publication (see [[:Category:911 General (MUTCD Part 1) #911.1.5|EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1A.05)]]).

'''Support. '''The use of educational plaques to supplement symbol signs is described in [[903.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 2A) #903.1.9|EPG 903.1.9]].

The use of LEDs in the border or legend of regulatory signs is described in [[903.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 2A) #903.1.12|EPG 903.1.12]].

'''Standard. '''LED signs displaying a part-time prohibitory message incorporating a red circle and diagonal of a static sign shall display a red symbol that approximates the same red circle and diagonal as closely as possible. The symbol of the action to be prohibited shall be displayed in white LEDs on a black background.

A regulatory sign displayed entirely with LEDs and incorporated within the border of a larger full-matrix changeable message sign shall display the regulatory sign legend in the size, shape, color, and legend of the standard regulatory sign.

=={{SpanID|903.2.3}}903.2.3 Size of Regulatory Signs (MUTCD Section 2B.03)==

'''Standard. '''Except as provided in [[903.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 2A) #903.1.7|EPG 903.1.7]], the minimum sizes for regulatory signs shall be as shown in [[#tab903.2.3|Table 903.2.3]].

'''Support. ''' [[903.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 2A) #903.1.7|EPG 903.1.7]] contains information regarding the applicability of the various columns in [[#tab903.2.3|Table 903.2.3]].

'''Guidance. '''The minimum sizes for regulatory signs facing traffic on exit and entrance ramps at interchanges should be as shown in the column of [[#tab903.2.3|Table 903.2.3]] that corresponds to the mainline roadway classification (Expressway/Freeway).

'''Standard. '''The minimum size for WRONG WAY and DO NOT ENTER signs on ramps facing the opposite direction of travel where a road user could wrongly enter the ramp from a conventional road shall be the size listed in the Conventional Road - Standard column of [[#tab903.2.3|Table 903.2.3]]. See [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2.37|EPG 903.2.37]] and [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2.38|903.2.38]] for additional information.

'''Option. '''The minimum size for WRONG WAY and DO NOT ENTER signs on ramps facing the opposite direction of travel where a road user could wrongly enter the ramp from a conventional road may be increased to the size in the Conventional Road – Oversized column of [[#tab903.2.3|Table 903.2.3]] when the need for greater emphasis has been determined based on engineering judgement.

{{SpanID|tab903.2.3}}
{| class="wikitable" style="text-align: center"
|-
|+ Table 903.2.3, Regulatory Sign and Plaque Sizes
! rowspan="2" | Sign or Plaque
! rowspan="2" | Sign Designation
! rowspan="2" | EPG Article
! colspan="3" | Conventional Road (in. x in.)
! Freeway/Expressway (in. x in.)
|-
! style="text-align:left;"| Standard
! Oversized
! Special
! Mainline and Ramps
|-
! style="text-align:left;"| Stop
| R1-1
| [[#903.2.4|903.2.4]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| -
| 48 X 48
|-
! style="text-align:left;"| Yield
| R1-2
| [[#903.2.5|903.2.5]]
| 48 X 48 X 48
| 60 X 60 X 60
| -
| 60 X 60 X 60
|-
! style="text-align:left;"| To Oncoming Traffic (plaque)
| R1-2aP
| [[#903.2.5|903.2.5]]
| 36 X 30
| -
| -
| -
|-
! style="text-align:left;"| All-Way (plaque)
| R1-3P
| [[#903.2.4|903.2.4]]
| 30 X 12
| -
| -
| -
|-
! style="text-align:left;"| Yield Here To Pedestrians
| R1-5
| [[#903.2.18|903.2.18]]
| 36 X 36
| -
| -
| -
|-
! style="text-align:left;"| Yield Here to Trail Crossing
| R1-5d
| [[#903.2.18|903.2.18]]
| 36 X 42
| -
| -
| -
|-
! style="text-align:left;"| In-Street Pedestrian Crossing - Yield
| R1-6
| [[#903.2.19|903.2.19]]
| 12 X 36
| -
| -
| -
|-
! style="text-align:left;"| In-Street Trail Crossing - Yield
| R1-6d
| [[#903.2.19|903.2.19]]
| 12 X 36
| -
| -
| -
|-
! style="text-align:left;"| Speed Limit
| R2-1
| [[#903.2.20|903.2.20]]
| 36 X 48
| 48 X 60
| -
| 48 X 60
|-
! style="text-align:left;"| Combined Speed Limit
| R2-4a
| [[#903.2.21|903.2.21]]
| -
| -
| -
| 48 X 96
|-
! style="text-align:left;"| Speed Limit _ Except Where Posted
| R2-5d
| [[#903.2.22|903.2.22]]
| 36 X 48
| -
| -
| 36 X 48
|-
! style="text-align:left;"| Fines Doubled Ends
| R2-20
| [[#903.2.71|903.2.71]]
| 36 X 30
| -
| -
| 36 X 30
|-
! style="text-align:left;"| No Right Turn
| R3-1
| [[#903.2.24|903.2.24]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 24 X 24 - 30 X 30
| 48 X 48
|-
! style="text-align:left;"| No Left Turn
| R3-2
| [[#903.2.24|903.2.24]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 24 X 24 - 30 X 30
| 48 X 48
|-
! style="text-align:left;"| No Turns
| R3-3
| [[#903.2.24|903.2.24]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 24 X 24 - 30 X 30
| 36 X 36
|-
! style="text-align:left;"| No U Turn
| R3-4
| [[#903.2.24|903.2.24]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 24 X 24 - 30 X 30
| -
|-
! style="text-align:left;"| Right (Left/Ahead) Only
| R3-5, 5a
| [[#903.2.26|903.2.26]]
| 30 X 36
| -
| -
| -
|-
! style="text-align:left;"| Straight and Right (Left)
| R3-6
| [[#903.2.27|903.2.27]]
| 30 X 36
| -
| -
| -
|-
! style="text-align:left;"| Optional Movement U and Left Turn
| R3-6a
| [[#903.2.27|903.2.27]]
| 30 X 36
| -
| -
| -
|-
! style="text-align:left;"| Optional Movement Left Turns
| R3-6b
| [[#903.2.27|903.2.27]]
| 30 X 36
| -
| -
| -
|-
! style="text-align:left;"| Right (Left) Lane Must Turn Right (Left)
| R3-7
| [[#903.2.26|903.2.26]]
| 36 X 36
| -
| -
| -
|-
! style="text-align:left;"| Advance Intersection Lane Control
| R3-8,8a,8b,8xa, 8xb,8xc
| [[#903.2.28|903.2.28]]
| Varies X 30
| -
| -
| -
|-
! style="text-align:left;"| Two-Way Left Turn Only (overhead)
| R3-9a
| [[#903.2.29|903.2.29]]
| 30 X 36
| -
| -
| -
|-
! style="text-align:left;"| Center Lane Two-Way Left Turn Only (post-mounted)
| R3-9b
| [[#903.2.29|903.2.29]]
| 24 X 36
| 36 X 48
| -
| -
|-
! style="text-align:left;"| No U Turn/No Left Turn
| R3-18
| [[#903.2.24|903.2.24]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 24 X 24 - 30 X 30
| -
|-
! style="text-align:left;"| No Straight Through
| R3-27
| [[#903.2.24|903.2.24]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| 24 X 24 - 30 X 30
| 48 X 48
|-
! style="text-align:left;"| Do Not Pass
| R4-1
| [[#903.2.31|903.2.31]]
| 36 X 48
|
| 36 X 48
| -
|-
! style="text-align:left;"| Pass With Care
| R4-2
| [[#903.2.32|903.2.32]]
| 36 X 48
|
| 48 X 60
| -
|-
! style="text-align:left;"| Slower Traffic Keep Right
| R4-3
| [[#903.2.33|903.2.33]]
| 36 X 48
| 48 X 60
| 48 X 60
| 48 X 60
|-
! style="text-align:left;"| Keep Right
| R4-7
| [[#903.2.34|903.2.34]]
| 24 X 30
| 36 X 48
| 36 X 48
| 48 X 60
|-
! style="text-align:left;"| Keep Right (horizontal arrow)
| R4-7a
| [[#903.2.34|903.2.34]]
| 36 X 48
| 48 X 60
| 48 X 60
| 48 X 60
|-
! style="text-align:left;"| Keep Right (45° arrow)
| R4-7b
| [[#903.2.34|903.2.34]]
| 36 X 48
| 48 X 60
| -
| 84 X 96
|-
! style="text-align:left;"| Narrow Keep Right
| R4-7c
| [[#903.2.34|903.2.34]]
| 18 X 30
| -
| -
| -
|-
! style="text-align:left;"| Keep Left
| R4-8
| [[#903.2.34|903.2.34]]
| 24 X 30
| 36 X 48
| -
| 48 X 60
|-
! style="text-align:left;"| Keep Left (horizontal arrow)
| R4-8a
| [[#903.2.34|903.2.34]]
| 36 X 48
| 48 X 60
| -
| 48 X 60
|-
! style="text-align:left;"| Keep Left (45° arrow)
| R4-8b
| [[#903.2.34|903.2.34]]
| 36 X 48
| 48 X 60
| -
| 84 X 96
|-
! style="text-align:left;"| Narrow Keep Left
| R4-8c
| [[#903.2.34|903.2.34]]
| 18 X 30
| -
| -
| -
|-
! style="text-align:left;"| Keep Right Except to Pass
| R4-16
| [[#903.2.33|903.2.33]]
| 36 X 48
| -
| -
| -
|-
! style="text-align:left;"| Do Not Drive on Shoulder
| R4-17
| [[#903.2.35|903.2.35]]
| 36 X 48
| -
| -
| -
|-
! style="text-align:left;"| Next Passing Lane _ Miles
| R4-28
| [[#903.2.69|903.2.69]]
| -
| -
| -
| -
|-
! style="text-align:left;"| End Passing Lanes
| R4-29
| [[#903.2.69|903.2.69]]
| -
| -
| -
| -
|-
! style="text-align:left;"| Do Not Enter
| R5-1
| [[#903.2.37|903.2.37]]
| 36 X 36
| 48 X 48
| -
| 48 X 48
|-
! style="text-align:left;"| Wrong Way
| R5-1a
| [[#903.2.39|903.2.39]]
| 42 X 30
| -
| -
| 42 X 30
|-
! style="text-align:left;"| No Trucks
| R5-2
| [[#903.2.36|903.2.36]]
| 36 X 36
| -
| -
|
|-
! style="text-align:left;"| Except Local Deliveries (plaque)
| R5-2aP
| [[#903.2.36|903.2.36]]
| 36 X 18
| -
| -
|
|-
! style="text-align:left;"| Engine Brake Muffler Required
| R5-23
| -
| 30 X 30
| -
| -
| 30 X 30
|-
! style="text-align:left;"| No Fishing from Bridge
| R5-25
| [[#903.2.36|903.2.36]]
| 18 X 24
| -
| -
| 18 X 24
|-
! style="text-align:left;"| No Dumping
| R5-28
| [[#903.2.66|903.2.66]]
| -
| -
| -
| 48 X 24
|-
! style="text-align:left;"| Authorized and Emergency Vehicles Only
| R5-29
| [[#903.2.36|903.2.36]]
| -
| -
| -
| 24 X 30
|-
! style="text-align:left;"| Do Not Stop on Tracks
| R5-31
| [[#903.2.45|903.2.45]]
| 24 X 30
| -
| -
| -
|-
! style="text-align:left;"| One Way
| R6-1
| [[#903.2.40|903.2.40]]
| 36 X 12
| 48 X 18
| -
| 48 X 18
|-
! style="text-align:left;"| One Way
| R6-2
| [[#903.2.40|903.2.40]]
| 24 X 30
| 30 X 36
| -
| -
|-
! style="text-align:left;"| Divided Highway (4-legged)
| R6-3
| [[#903.2.41|903.2.41]]
| 30 X 24
| -
| -
| 36 X 30
|-
! style="text-align:left;"| Divided Highway (T-intersection)
| R6-3a
| [[#903.2.41|903.2.41]]
| 30 X 24
| -
| -
| 36 X 30
|-
! style="text-align:left;"| No Parking Signs
| R7 series
| [[#903.2.43|903.2.43]]
| 18 X 24
| -
| -
| -
|-
! style="text-align:left;"| Reserved Parking
| R7-8
| [[#903.2.43|903.2.43]]
| 18 X 24
| -
| -
| -
|-
! style="text-align:left;"| Van Accessible (plaque)
| R7-8aP
| [[#903.2.43|903.2.43]]
| 18 X 9
| -
| -
| -
|-
! style="text-align:left;"| No Parking on Bridge
| R7-35
| [[#903.2.43|903.2.43]]
| 18 X 24
| -
| -
| 18 X 24
|-
! style="text-align:left;"| No Parking Trucks and Trailers Over 6 Tons
| R7-36
| [[#903.2.62|903.2.62]]
| 18 X 24
| 36 X 48
| -
| -
|-
! style="text-align:left;"| Tow Away Zone (plaque)
| R7-201P, R7-201ap
| [[#903.2.43|903.2.43]]
| 18 X 9
| -
|
|
|-
! style="text-align:left;"| This Side of Sign (plaque)
| R7-202P
| [[#903.2.43|903.2.43]]
| 18 X 9
| -
| -
|
|-
! style="text-align:left;"| Emergency Stopping Only
| R8-7
| [[#903.2.45|903.2.45]]
| 48 X 36
| -
| -
| 48 X 36
|-
! style="text-align:left;"| No Pedestrian Crossing (symbol)
| R9-3
| [[#903.2.46|903.2.46]]
| 18 X 24
| -
| -
| -
|-
! style="text-align:left;"| No Pedestrian Crossing
| R9-3a
| [[#903.2.46|903.2.46]]
| 18 X 24
| -
| -
| -
|-
! style="text-align:left;"| Pedestrian Signal Series
| R10-3 & R10-4 series
| [[#903.2.47|903.2.47]]
| 9 X 15
| -
| -
| -
|-
! style="text-align:left;"| Left on Green Arrow Only
| R10-5
| [[#903.2.48|903.2.48]]
| 24 X 30
| 30 X 36
| -
| 30 X 36
|-
! style="text-align:left;"| Stop Here on Red
| R10-6
| [[#903.2.48|903.2.48]]
| 24 X 36
| -
| -
| -
|-
! style="text-align:left;"| Do Not Block Intersection
| R10-7
| [[#903.2.48|903.2.48]]
| 24 X 30
| -
| -
| -
|-
! style="text-align:left;"| Right Turn Signal
| R10-10R
| -
| 30 X 36
| -
| -
| -
|-
! style="text-align:left;"| No Turn on Red
| R10-11
| [[#903.2.49|903.2.49]]
| 30 X 36
| -
| -
| -
|-
! style="text-align:left;"| Left Turn on Green (Ball)
| R10-12
| [[#903.2.48|903.2.48]]
| 24 X 30
| 30 X 36
| -
| 30 X 36
|-
! style="text-align:left;"| Left Turn Yield on Flashing Yellow Arrow
| R10-12a
| [[#903.2.48|903.2.48]]
| 24 X 30
| 30 X 36
| -
| 30 X 36
|-
! style="text-align:left;"| Emergency Signal
| R10-13
| [[#903.2.48|903.2.48]]
| 36 X 24
| -
| -
| -
|-
! style="text-align:left;"| Emergency Signal Stop on Flashing Red
| R10-14
| [[#903.2.48|903.2.48]]
| 36 X 42
| -
| -
| -
|-
! style="text-align:left;"| Emergency Signal - Stop on Flashing Red (overhead)
| R10-14a
| [[#903.2.48|903.2.48]]
| 60 X 24
| -
| -
| -
|-
! style="text-align:left;"| Stop Here on Red
| R10-14b
| [[#903.2.48|903.2.48]]
| 24 X 36
| -
| -
| -
|-
! style="text-align:left;"| Turning Vehicles Yield to Pedestrians
| R10-15
| [[#903.2.48|903.2.48]]
| 30 X 30
| -
| -
| -
|-
! style="text-align:left;"| Traffic Signal Photo Enforced
| R10-18a
| [[#903.2.56|903.2.56]]
| 30 X 42
| 36 X 54
| -
| -
|-
! style="text-align:left;"| Photo Enforced (symbol plaque)
| R10-19P
| [[#903.2.56|903.2.56]]
| 24 X 12
| 48 X 24
| -
| -
|-
! style="text-align:left;"| Crosswalk - Stop on Red
| R10-23
| [[#903.2.48|903.2.48]]
| 24 X 30
| -
| -
| -
|-
! style="text-align:left;"| Stop on Red - Yield on Flashing Red After Stop
| R10-23a
| [[#903.2.48|903.2.48]]
| 24 X 30
| -
| -
| -
|-
! style="text-align:left;"| Push Button for Warning Lights - Wait for Gap in Traffic
| R10-25
| [[#903.2.47|903.2.47]]
| 9 X 12
| -
| -
| -
|-
! style="text-align:left;"| XX Vehicles per Green
| R10-28
| [[#903.2.50|903.2.50]]
| 24 X 30
| -
| -
| -
|-
! style="text-align:left;"| XX Vehicles per Green Each Lane
| R10-29
| [[#903.2.50|903.2.50]]
| 36 X 24
| -
| -
| -
|-
! style="text-align:left;"| Right Turn on Red Must Yield to U-Turn
| R10-30
| [[#903.2.49|903.2.49]]
| 30 X 36
| -
| -
| -
|-
! style="text-align:left;"| Right Turn Must Yield To U-Turn
| R10-30a
| [[#903.2.49|903.2.49]]
| 36 X 24
| -
| -
| -
|-
! style="text-align:left;"| Keep Off Median
| R11-1
| [[#903.2.51|903.2.51]]
| 48 X 60
| 48 X 60
| -
| -
|-
! style="text-align:left;"| Road Closed
| R11-2
| [[#903.2.52|903.2.52]]
| 48 X 30
|
|
| -
|-
! style="text-align:left;"| Road Closed _ Miles Ahead Local Traffic Only
| R11-3
| [[#903.2.52|903.2.52]]
| 60 X 30
|
|
| -
|-
! style="text-align:left;"| Road Closed to Thru Traffic
| R11-4
| [[#903.2.52|903.2.52]]
| 60 X 30
|
|
| -
|-
! style="text-align:left;"| Weight Limit XX Tons
| R12-1
| [[#903.2.53|903.2.53]]
| 36 X 48
|
|
| 36 X 48
|-
! style="text-align:left;"| Weigh Station Signs
| R13 series
| [[#903.2.54|903.2.54]]
| Varies
|
|
| Varies
|-
! style="text-align:left;"| Truck Route
| R14-1
| [[#903.2.55|903.2.55]]
| 24 X 18
|
|
| -
|-
! style="text-align:left;"| State Law Move Over or Slow Down for Stopped Emergency Vehicles
| R16-25
| [[#903.2.57|903.2.57]]
| 120 X 60
|
|
| 120 X 60
|-
! style="text-align:left;"| Primary Seatbelt City/Country
| R16-27B
| -
| 30 X 36
|
|
| -
|-
! style="text-align:left;"| State Law Buckle Up / Phone Down
| R16-30
| [[#903.2.59|903.2.59]]
| 48 X 30
|
|
| -
|-
! style="text-align:left;"| State Law Buckle Up / Phone Down
| R16-30a
| [[#903.2.59|903.2.59]]
| -
|
|
| 72 X 48
|-
! style="text-align:left;"| Roadside Park Signs
| R20-1
| [[#903.2.66|903.2.66]]
| 30 X 30
|
|
| -
|-
! style="text-align:left;"| Rest Area Regulations
| R20-2
| [[#903.2.67|903.2.67]]
| 30 X 36
|
|
| -
|-
! style="text-align:left;"| Commuter Parking Regulations
| R20-3
| [[#903.2.67|903.2.67]]
| 42 X 48
|
|
| -
|-
! style="text-align:left;"| Rest Area Signs
| R20 Series
| [[#903.2.67|903.2.67]]
|
|
|
| Varies
|}

=={{SpanID|903.2.4}}903.2.4 STOP Sign (R1-1) and ALL-WAY Plaque (R1-3P) (MUTCD Section 2B.04)==

{| style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto"
|-
|[[image:R1-1.gif|left|120px|thumb|<center>'''R1-1'''</center>]]||[[File:R1-3P.gif|left|110px|thumb|<center>'''R1-3P'''</center>]]
|}

'''Standard. '''When it is determined that a full stop is always required on an approach to an intersection, a STOP (R1-1) sign shall be used.

Secondary legends shall not be used on STOP sign faces.

The STOP sign shall not be displayed using a changeable message sign.

At intersections where all approaches are controlled by STOP signs (see [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2.11|EPG 903.2.11]]), an ALL-WAY (R1-3P) supplemental plaque shall be mounted below each STOP sign. The ALL-WAY plaque shall have a white legend and border on a red background.

Supplemental plaques with legends such as 2-WAY, 3-WAY, 4-WAY, or other numbers of ways shall not be used with STOP signs.

'''Support. '''The use of the CROSS TRAFFIC DOES NOT STOP (W4-4P Series) and other plaques with variations of this legend is described in [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.65|EPG 903.3.65]].

'''Guidance. '''The TRAFFIC FROM LEFT (RIGHT) DOES NOT STOP (W4-4aP) plaque or ONCOMING TRAFFIC DOES NOT STOP (W4-4bP) plaque should be used at intersections where STOP signs control all but one approach to the intersection, unless the only non-stopped approach is from a one-way street.

'''Support. '''The design and application of Stop Beacons are described in [[902.18 Flashing Beacons (MUTCD Chapter 4S) #902.18.5|EPG 902.18.5]].

=={{SpanID|903.2.5}}903.2.5 YIELD Sign (R1-2) (MUTCD Section 2B.05)==

{| style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto"
|-
|[[image:R1-2.gif|left|120px|thumb|<center>'''R1-2'''</center>]]
||[[File:R1-2aP.gif|left|thumb|<center>'''R1-2aP'''</center>|95px]]
|}

'''Support. '''The YIELD sign requires road users to yield the right-of-way to other traffic on certain approaches to an intersection or on a two-way approach to a one-way section of roadway, such as a narrow bridge or underpass. Vehicles controlled by a YIELD sign need to slow down to a speed that is reasonable for the existing conditions or stop when necessary to avoid interfering with conflicting traffic.

'''Standard. '''The YIELD (R1-2) sign shall not be displayed using a changeable message sign.

=={{SpanID|903.2.6}}903.2.6 General Considerations (MUTCD Section 2B.06)==

'''Support. '''Unsignalized intersections represent the most common form of intersection right-of-way control. Selection of control type might be impacted by specific requirements of State law or local ordinances.

Roundabouts and traffic circles are circular intersection designs and are not traffic control devices. The decision to convert an intersection from a conventional intersection to a circular intersection is an engineering design decision and not a traffic control device decision. As such, criteria for conversion from a conventional intersection to a circular intersection are not included in [[:Category:903 Highway Signing (MUTCD Part 2)|EPG 903]].

'''Guidance. '''The type of traffic control used at an unsignalized intersection should be the least restrictive that provides appropriate levels of safety and efficiency for all road users.

'''Support. '''Some types of right-of-way control that can exist at an unsignalized intersection in order from the least restrictive to the most restrictive are the following:

::A. Yield control (see [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2.9|EPG 903.2.9]]): YIELD signs are placed on all approaches (for a circular intersection), or in the median of a divided highway. The YIELD signs are placed on the minor road.

::B. Minor road stop control (see [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2.10|EPG 903.2.10]]): STOP signs are typically placed on opposing approaches (for a four-leg intersection) or on a single approach (for a three-leg intersection). The STOP signs are normally placed on the minor road. [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2.7|EPG 903.2.7]] contains guidance on selecting the minor road.

::C. All-way stop control (see [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2.11|EPG 903.2.11]]): STOP signs are placed on all approaches to the intersection.

'''Guidance. '''When selecting a form of intersection control, the following factors should be considered:
::A. Motor vehicle, bicycle, and pedestrian traffic volumes on all approaches'''; '''where the term units/day or units/hour is indicated, it should be the total of motor vehicle, bicycle, and pedestrian volume;
::B. Driver yielding behavior with regard to all modes of conflicting traffic, including bicyclists and pedestrians;
::C. Number and angle of approaches;
::D. Approach speeds;
::E. Sight distance available on each approach;
::F. Reported crash experience; and
::G. The presence of a grade crossing near the intersection.

'''Standard. '''YIELD or STOP signs shall not be used for speed control.

Access to the state highway system from city streets, county roads or other significant private road approaches shall be controlled by installation of MoDOT STOP signs. Significant private roads are those that service 3 or more private residences.

'''Option. '''Stop signs, based on engineering judgment and a traffic study justifying the need, may be installed for a private road approach servicing fewer than 3 private residences, or a commercial entrance.

'''Standard. '''Because the potential for conflicting commands could create driver confusion, YIELD or STOP signs shall not be used in conjunction with any traffic control signal operation, except in the following cases:
::A. If the signal indication for an approach is a flashing red at all times;
::B. If a minor street or driveway is located within or adjacent to the area controlled by the traffic control signal, but does not require separate traffic signal control because an extremely low potential for conflict exists; or
::C. If a channelized turn lane is separated from the adjacent travel lanes by an island and the channelized turn lane is not controlled by a traffic control signal.

STOP signs and YIELD signs shall not be installed on different approaches to the same unsignalized intersection if those approaches conflict with or oppose each other, except as provided for in Items A and B in the first paragraph of [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2.9|EPG 903.2.9]].

Portable or part-time STOP or YIELD signs shall not be used except for emergency and temporary traffic control zone purposes.

A portable or part-time (folding) STOP sign that is manually placed into view and manually removed from view shall not be used during a power outage to control a signalized approach unless the maintaining agency establishes that the signal indication that will first be displayed to that approach upon restoration of power is a flashing red signal indication and that the portable STOP sign will be manually removed from view prior to resuming stop-and-go operation of the traffic control signal.

'''Option. '''When a STOP sign or YIELD sign is knocked down and it is not possible to repair the assembly immediately, a temporary sign of the same likeness (STOP sign for STOP and YIELD sign for YIELD) may be installed on a portable sign support at the location until the permanent assembly can be repaired. See [[:Category:948 Incident Response Plan and Emergency Response Management|EPG 948]] for additional information regarding Incident Response Planning.

'''Support. '''The use of STOP signs at grade crossings is described in [[913.2 Signs (MUTCD Chapter 8B) #913.2.4|EPG 913.2.4]] and [[913.2 Signs (MUTCD Chapter 8B) #913.2.5|EPG 913.2.5]].

[[914.2 Regulatory Signs (MUTCD Chapter 9B) #914.2.1|EPG 914.2.1]] contains provisions regarding the assignment of priority where a shared-use path crosses a roadway.

=={{SpanID|903.2.7}}903.2.7 Determining the Minor Road for Unsignalized Intersections (MUTCD Section 2B.07)==

'''Guidance. '''The selection of the minor road to be controlled by STOP signs should be based on one or more of the following criteria:
::A. A roadway intersecting a highway,
::B. A roadway with the lower functional classification,
::C. A roadway with the lower traffic volume,
::D. A roadway with the lower speed limit, and/or
::E. A roadway that intersects with a roadway that has a higher priority for one or more modes of travel.

When two roadways that have relatively equal volumes, speeds, and/or other characteristics intersect, the following factors should be considered in selecting the minor road for installation of STOP signs:
::A. Controlling the direction that conflicts the most with established pedestrian crossing activity or school walking routes;
::B. Controlling the direction that has obscured vision, dips, or bumps that already require drivers to use lower operating speeds;
::C. Controlling the direction that has the best sight distance from a controlled position to observe conflicting traffic; and
::D. Stopping the direction that has the longest distance of uninterrupted flow approaching the intersection.

=={{SpanID|903.2.8}}903.2.8 Right-of-Way Intersection Control Considerations (MUTCD Section 2B.08)==

'''Guidance. '''Before converting to a more restrictive form of right-of-way control at an unsignalized intersection, the following alternative treatments to address safety, operational, or other concerns should be among those to be considered:
::A. Where stop controlled, installing Stop Ahead signs on the appropriate approaches to the intersection;
::B. Removing parking on one or more approaches;
::C. Removing sight distance obstructions;
::D. Installing signs along the major street to warn road users approaching the intersection;
::E. Relocating the stop line(s) and making other changes to improve the sight distance at the intersection;
::F. Installing measures designed to reduce speeds on the approaches;
::G. Installing an Intersection Control Beacon (see [[902.18 Flashing Beacons (MUTCD Chapter 4S) #902.18.2|EPG 902.18.2]]) or Stop Beacon (see [[902.18 Flashing Beacons (MUTCD Chapter 4S) #902.18.5|EPG 902.18.5]]) at the intersection to supplement STOP sign control;
::H. Installing a Warning Beacon (see [[902.18 Flashing Beacons (MUTCD Chapter 4S) #902.18.3|EPG 902.18.3)]] on warning signs in advance of a stop-controlled intersection on major-street and/or minor-street approaches;
::I. Adding one or more lanes on a minor-street approach to reduce the number of vehicles per lane on the approach;
::J. Revising the geometrics at the intersection to channelize vehicular movements and reduce the time required for a vehicle to complete a movement, which could also assist pedestrians;
::K. Revising the geometrics at the intersection to add pedestrian median refuge islands and/or curb extensions;
::L. Installing roadway lighting if a disproportionate number of crashes occur at night;
::M. Restricting one or more turning movements on a full-time or part-time basis if alternate routes are available;
::N. Installing on the major street a pedestrian-actuated device: Warning Beacon (see [[902.18 Flashing Beacons (MUTCD Chapter 4S) #902.18.3|EPG 902.18.3]]), rectangular rapid-flashing beacon (see [[902.12 Rectangular Rapid Flashing Beacons (MUTCD Chapter 4L) #902.12.1|EPG 902.12.1]]), or In-Roadway Warning Lights (see [[902.20 In-Roadway Warning Lights (MUTCD Chapter 4U) #902.20|EPG 902.20]]), if pedestrian safety is the major concern;
::O. If the warrant is satisfied, installing all-way stop control;
::P. Installing a pedestrian hybrid beacon (see [[902.10 Pedestrian Hybrid Beacons (MUTCD Chapter 4J) #902.10|EPG 902.10]]) on the major street to address pedestrian safety;
::Q. Installing a circular intersection; and
::R. Employing other alternatives, depending on conditions at the intersection.

=={{SpanID|903.2.9}}903.2.9 Yield Control (MUTCD Section 2B.10)==

'''Guidance. '''YIELD signs should be installed at an intersection when any of the following conditions apply:
::A. At the second intersection of a divided highway crossing or median break functioning as two separate intersections (see [[#fig903.2.41.2|Figure 903.2.41.2]]). In this case, a YIELD sign should be installed at the entrance to the second intersection.
::B. For a channelized turn lane that is separated from the adjacent travel lanes by an island, even if the adjacent lanes at the intersection are controlled by a highway traffic control signal or by a STOP sign.
::C. At an intersection where a special problem exists and where engineering judgment indicates the problem to be susceptible to correction by the use of the YIELD sign.
::D. On an approach to an intersection where the only permissible movement is a right-turn movement with an intersection geometry similar to a channelized right-turn lane or an approach to a roundabout.

'''Support. '''YIELD signs are generally not to be installed at entrance ramps on MoDOT freeways or expressways where an acceleration lane is provided. The intention is for drivers to accelerate to improve merging traffic operation. YIELD signs may cause drivers to decelerate, thus negatively impacting merging traffic operation. For cloverleaf interchanges, the loop entrance ramps can result in low speeds on ramps and short weave sections. Therefore, YIELD signs are installed at cloverleaf interchanges.

'''Standard. '''YIELD signs shall be used at a cloverleaf interchange where the in-loop traffic merges with the acceleration and deceleration traffic movement.

'''Option. '''YIELD signs may be installed facing the entering roadway for a merge-type movement if engineering judgment indicates that control is needed because acceleration geometry and/or sight distance is not adequate for merging traffic operation. The design criteria contained in Section 10.9.6.5 of the “AASHTO Green Book – A Policy on Geometric Design Of Highways and Streets,” 7th Edition, 2018, AASHTO should be used to evaluate acceleration lane geometry. (See [[903.15 Typical Signing Applications #fig903.16.23|Figure 903.15.23]]).

'''Standard. '''A YIELD sign shall be used to require road users to yield the right-of-way to other traffic at the entrance to a roundabout. YIELD signs at roundabouts shall be used to control the approach roadways and shall not be used to control the circulatory roadway.

YIELD signs shall not be placed on all of the approaches to an intersection, except at roundabouts.

=={{SpanID|903.2.10}}903.2.10 Minor Road Stop Control (MUTCD Section 2B.11)==

'''Standard.''' All city street and county road access to the state highway system shall be controlled by a stop sign except as described in [[#903.2.9|EPG 903.2.9]] and [[:Category:902 Signals|EPG 902]].

=={{SpanID|903.2.11}}903.2.11 All-Way Stop Control (MUTCD Section 2B.12)==

'''Support. '''The provisions in the following sections describe warrants for the recommended engineering study to determine all-way stop control. Warrants are not a substitute for engineering judgment. The fact that a warrant for a particular traffic control device is met is not conclusive justification to install or not install all-way stop control. Because each intersection will have unique characteristics that affect its operational performance or safety, it is the engineering study for a given intersection that is ultimately the basis for a decision to install or not install all-way stop control.

All-way stop controls at intersections with substantially differing approach volumes can reduce the effectiveness of these devices for all roadway users.

'''Guidance. '''The decision to establish all-way stop control at an unsignalized intersection should be based on an engineering study. The engineering study for all-way stop control should include an analysis of factors related to the existing operation and safety at the intersection, the potential to improve these conditions, and the applicable factors contained in the following all-way stop control warrants:
::A. All-Way Stop Control Warrant A: Crash Experience (see [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2.12|EPG 903.2.12]])
::B. All-Way Stop Control Warrant B: Sight Distance (see [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2.13|EPG 903.2.13]])
::C. All-Way Stop Control Warrant C: Transition to Signal Control or Transition to Yield Control at a Circular Intersection (see [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2.14|EPG 903.2.14]])
::D. All-Way Stop Control Warrant D: 8-Hour Volume (Vehicles, Pedestrians, Bicycles) (see [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2.15|EPG 903.2.15]])
::E. All-Way Stop Control Warrant E: Other Factors (see [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2.16|EPG 903.2.16]])

'''Standard. '''The satisfaction of an all-way stop control warrant or warrants shall not in itself require the installation of all-way stop control at an unsignalized intersection.

=={{SpanID|903.2.12}}903.2.12 All-Way Stop Control Warrant A: Crash Experience (MUTCD Section 2B.13)==

'''Option. '''All-way stop control may be installed at an intersection where an engineering study indicates that:
::A. For a four-leg intersection, there are five or more reported crashes in a 12-month period or six or more reported crashes in a 36-month period that were of a type susceptible to correction by the installation of all-way stop control.
::B. For a three-leg intersection, there are four or more reported crashes in a 12-month period or five or more reported crashes in a 36-month period that were of a type susceptible to correction by the installation of all-way stop control.

=={{SpanID|903.2.13}}903.2.13 All-Way Stop Control Warrant B: Sight Distance (MUTCD Section 2B.14)==

'''Option. '''All-way stop control may be installed at an intersection where an engineering study indicates that sight distance on the minor-road approaches controlled by a STOP sign is not adequate for a vehicle to turn onto or cross the major (uncontrolled) road.

'''Support. '''At such a location, a road user, after stopping, cannot see conflicting traffic and is not able to negotiate the intersection unless conflicting cross traffic is also required to stop.

=={{SpanID|903.2.14}}903.2.14 All-Way Stop Control Warrant C: Transition to Signal Control or Transition to Yield Control at a Circular Intersection (MUTCD Section 2B.15)==

'''Option. '''All-way stop control may be installed at locations where all-way stop control is an interim measure that can be installed to control traffic while arrangements are being made for the installation of a traffic control signal (see [[902.3 Traffic Control Signal Needs Studies (MUTCD Chapter 4C) #902.3|EPG 902.3]]) at the intersection or for the installation of yield control at a circular intersection.

=={{SpanID|903.2.15}}903.2.15 All-Way Stop Control Warrant D: 8-Hour Volume (Vehicles, Pedestrians, Bicycles) (MUTCD Section 2B.16)==

'''Option. '''All-way stop control may be installed at an intersection where an engineering study indicates:
::A. The combined motor vehicle, bicycle, and pedestrian volume entering the intersection from the major-street approaches is at least 300 units per hour for each of any 8 hours of a typical day; and
::B. The combined motor vehicle, bicycle, and pedestrian volume entering the intersection from the minor-street approaches is at least 200 units per hour for each of any of the same 8 hours.

If the 85th-percentile approach speed of the major-street traffic exceeds 40 mph, the minimum vehicular volume warrants may be reduced to 70 percent of the values given in Items A and B in the preceding paragraph.

=={{SpanID|903.2.16}}903.2.16 All-Way Stop Control Warrant E: Other Factors (MUTCD Section 2B.17)==

'''Option. '''All-way stop control may be installed at an intersection where an engineering study indicates that all-way stop control is needed due to other factors not addressed in the other all-way stop control warrants. Such other factors may include, but are not limited to, the following:
::A. The need to control left-turn conflicts,
::B. An intersection of two residential neighborhood collector (through) streets of similar design and operating characteristics where all-way stop control would improve traffic operational characteristics of the intersection, or
::C. Where pedestrian and/or bicyclist movements support the installation of all-way stop control.

=={{SpanID|903.2.17}}903.2.17 STOP Sign or YIELD Sign Placement (MUTCD Section 2B.18)==

'''Standard. '''The STOP or YIELD sign shall be installed on the near side of the intersection on the right-hand side of the approach to which it applies. When the STOP or YIELD sign is installed at this required location and the sign visibility is restricted, a Stop Ahead sign (see [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.29|EPG 903.2.29]]) shall be installed in advance of the STOP sign or a Yield Ahead sign (see [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.29|EPG 903.2.29]]) shall be installed in advance of the YIELD sign.

The STOP or YIELD sign shall be located as close as practicable to the intersection it regulates, while optimizing its visibility to the road user it is intended to regulate.

STOP signs and YIELD signs shall not be mounted on the same post.

'''Support. ''' [[903.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 2A) #903.1.5|EPG 903.1.5]] contains information about mounting signs back-to-back with a STOP or YIELD sign.

'''Guidance. '''STOP or YIELD signs should not be placed farther than 50 feet from the edge of the pavement of the intersected roadway (see Drawing F in [[903.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 2A) #fig903-1-13-1|Figure 903.1.13]]).

Supplemental plaques used in conjunction with a STOP or YIELD sign should be limited to those specified for such use in the EPG.

'''Standard. '''Where drivers proceeding straight ahead must yield to traffic approaching from the opposite direction, such as at a one-lane bridge, a TO ONCOMING TRAFFIC (R1-2aP) plaque shall be mounted below the YIELD sign. See [[#fig903.2.53.2|Figure 903.2.53.2]] and [[#fig903.2.53.3|Figure 903.2.53.3]] in [[#903.2.53|EPG 903.2.53]].

'''Support. '''[[903.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 2A) #903.1.13|Figure 903.1.13]] shows examples of some typical placements of STOP signs and YIELD signs.

[[903.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 2A) #903.1.13|EPG 903.1.13]] contains additional information about separate and combined mounting of other signs with STOP or YIELD signs.

'''Guidance. '''Stop lines that are used to supplement a STOP sign should be located as described in [[620.2 Pavement and Curb Markings (MUTCD Chapter 3B) #620.2.18|EPG 620.2.18]]. Yield lines that are used to supplement a YIELD sign should be located as described in [[620.2 Pavement and Curb Markings (MUTCD Chapter 3B) #620.2.18|EPG 620.2.18]].

Where there is a marked crosswalk at the intersection, the STOP sign should be installed in advance of the edge of the crosswalk that is nearest to the approaching traffic.

Except at roundabouts and channelized right-turn lanes, where there is a marked crosswalk at the intersection, the YIELD sign should be installed in advance of the edge of the crosswalk that is nearest to the approaching traffic.

Where two roads intersect at an acute angle, the STOP or YIELD sign should be positioned at an angle, or shielded, so that the legend is out of view of traffic to which it does not apply.

At a roundabout intersection, to prevent circulating vehicles from yielding unnecessarily, the face of the YIELD sign is not to be visible from the circulatory roadway.

If a raised splitter island is available on the left-hand side of a multi-lane roundabout approach, an additional YIELD sign should be placed on the left-hand side of the approach.

'''Option. '''If a raised splitter island is available on the left-hand side of a single-lane roundabout approach, an additional YIELD sign may be placed on the left-hand side of the approach.

At wide-throat intersections or where two or more approach lanes of traffic exist on the signed approach, an additional STOP or YIELD sign may be installed on the left-hand side of the road and/or a stop or yield line may be used to improve observance of the right-of-way control. At channelized intersections or at divided roadways separated by a median or divisional island (painted or physical), the additional STOP or YIELD sign may be placed on a channelizing island, or in the median or on the divisional island.

'''Standard. '''More than one STOP sign or more than one YIELD sign shall not be placed on the same support facing in the same direction.

=={{SpanID|903.2.18}}903.2.18 Yield Here To Pedestrians Signs (R1-5 Series) (MUTCD Section 2B.19)==

{| style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto"
|-
||[[image:R1-5.gif|left|thumb|<center>'''R1-5'''</center>|130px]]||
[[image:R1-5d.jpg|left|thumb|<center>'''R1-5d'''</center>|120px]]
|}

'''Support. '''The R1-5 series signs are intended to mitigate the scenario that can place pedestrians at risk by blocking other drivers’ view of pedestrians and by blocking the pedestrians' view of the vehicles approaching in the adjacent lanes.

'''Standard. '''Yield Here to Pedestrians (R1-5, R1-5a, R1-5c, and R1-5d) signs shall be used if yield lines are used in advance of a marked crosswalk only where it crosses an uncontrolled multi-lane approach. The legend STATE LAW shall not be displayed on the R1-5 series signs.

'''Guidance. '''If yield lines and Yield Here to Pedestrians signs are used in advance of a crosswalk that crosses an uncontrolled multi-lane approach, the signs should be placed 20 to 50 feet in advance of the nearest edge of the crosswalk (see [[620.2 Pavement and Curb Markings (MUTCD Chapter 3B) #620.2.18|EPG 620.2.18]] and [[#fig620.2.18|Figure 620.2.18]]).

'''Standard. '''When used with a School Crossing assembly within school zones (see [[:Category:908 Traffic Controls for School Areas (MUTCD Part 7)|EPG 908]]), the R1-5a sign shall be used in place of the R1-5 sign in accordance with the second paragraph of this article.

When used with a Trail Crossing assembly (see [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.44|EPG 903.3.44]]), the R1-5d sign shall be used in place of the R1-5 sign in accordance with the second paragraph of this article.

'''Guidance. '''When Yield Here to Pedestrians signs are provided in advance of a crosswalk across an multi-lane approach, parking should be prohibited in the area between the yield line and the crosswalk.

Yield lines and Yield Here to Pedestrians signs should not be used in advance of crosswalks that cross an approach to or departure from a roundabout.

'''Option. '''A Pedestrian Crossing (W11-2) warning sign may be placed overhead or may be post-mounted with a diagonal downward-pointing arrow (W16-7P) plaque at the crosswalk location where Yield Here to Pedestrians signs have been installed in advance of the crosswalk.

'''Standard. '''If a W11-2 sign is post-mounted at the crosswalk location where a Yield Here to Pedestrians sign is used on the approach, the Yield Here to Pedestrians sign shall not be placed on the same post as the W11-2 sign.

'''Option. '''An advance Pedestrian Crossing (W11-2) warning sign with an AHEAD or a distance supplemental plaque may be used in conjunction with a Yield Here to Pedestrians sign on the approach to the same crosswalk.

In-Street Pedestrian Crossing signs and Yield Here to Pedestrians signs may be used together at the same crosswalk.

=={{SpanID|903.2.19}}903.2.19 In-Street Pedestrian and Trail Crossing Signs (R1-6 Series) (MUTCD Section 2B.20)==

{| style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto"
|-
||[[File:R1-6.png|left|thumb|<center>'''R1-6'''</center>|130px]]||
[[File:R1-6d.png|left|thumb|<center>'''R1-6d'''</center>|130px]]
|-
| colspan="2" style="padding: 4px 8px;border: 1px solid #c8ccd1;background-color: #f8f9fa;;"|'''Note: '''The legend STATE LAW is optional
|}

'''Option. '''The In-Street Pedestrian Crossing (R1-6) sign, In-Street Trail Crossing (R1-6d) sign, may be used to remind road users of laws regarding right-of-way at an unsignalized crosswalk. The legend STATE LAW may be displayed at the top of the R1-6 series signs if applicable. On the R1-6 series signs, the legend YIELD may be used instead of the appropriate YIELD sign symbol.

MoDOT may develop and apply criteria for determining the applicability of In-Street Pedestrian Crossing signs.

'''Standard. '''If used, In-Street Pedestrian or Trail Crossing signs shall only be placed in the roadway at the crosswalk location on a raised island.

The In-Street Pedestrian or Trail Crossing sign shall not be post-mounted on the left-hand or right-hand side of the roadway.

'''Support. ''' [[620.8 Channelizing Devices used for Emphasis of Pavement Marking Patterns (MUTCD Chapter 3I) #620.8.2|EPG 620.8.2]] contains information about the use of tubular markers to provide additional emphasis for a pedestrian crossing. '''

'''Standard. '''When used at an uncontrolled crossing, the In-Street Pedestrian Crossing sign shall be used only as a supplement to a Pedestrian Crossing (W11-2) warning sign with a diagonal downward-pointing arrow (W16-7P) plaque at the crosswalk location.

When used at an uncontrolled crossing, the In-Street Trail Crossing sign shall be used only as a supplement to a Trail Crossing (W11-15) warning sign with a diagonal downward-pointing arrow (W16-7P) plaque at the crosswalk location.

An In-Street or Trail Crossing sign shall not be placed in advance of the crosswalk to educate road users about the State law prior to reaching the crosswalk, nor shall it be installed as an educational display that is not near any crosswalk.

'''Option. '''In-Street Pedestrian or Trail Crossing signs may be mounted back-to-back on a raised island in the median of an undivided roadway.

'''Standard. '''The In-Street Pedestrian or Trail Crossing sign shall not be used at crosswalks on approaches controlled by a traffic control signal, pedestrian hybrid beacon, or an emergency-vehicle hybrid beacon.

'''Option. '''The In-Street Pedestrian or Trail Crossing sign may be used at intersections or midblock pedestrian crossings with flashing beacons.

'''Support. '''The provisions of [[903.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 2A) #903.1.15|EPG 903.1.15]] concerning mounting height are not applicable for the In-Street Pedestrian Crossing sign. [[903.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 2A) #903.1.18|EPG 903.1.18]] contains information about sign mounting methods.

'''Standard. '''The top of an In-Street Pedestrian or Trail Crossing sign placed in an island shall be a maximum of 4 feet above the island surface.

'''Option. '''The In-Street Pedestrian Crossing or Trail Crossing signs may be used seasonally to prevent damage in winter because of plowing operations, and may be removed at night if the pedestrian activity at night is minimal.

=={{SpanID|903.2.20}}903.2.20 Speed Limit Sign (R2-1) (MUTCD Section 2B.21)==

{| style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto"
|-
|[[image:R2-1.png|left|thumb|150px|<center>'''R2-1'''</center>]]
|}

'''Support. '''In general, the maximum speed limits applicable to roads are established:
::A. Statutorily – a maximum speed limit applicable to a particular class of road, such as freeways or city streets, that is established by State law; or
::B. As speed zones – based on engineering studies.

State statutory limits restrict the maximum speed limit that can be established on a particular road, notwithstanding what an engineering study might indicate. Maximum speed limits in Missouri are governed by the Missouri Revised Statutes, Section 304.010.

MoDOT can establish non-statutory speed limits or designate reduced speed zones using an engineering study. Setting appropriate speed limits is especially important to ensure safety for all road users in varying types of contexts, particularly on roadways where adjacent land use suggests that trips could be served by varied modes. These situations include urban and suburban non-freeway arterials or rural arterials that serve as main streets in smaller communities, consistent with the context classifications of urban core, urban, suburban, and rural towns found in “A Policy on Geometric Design of Highways and Streets,” 2018 Edition, AASHTO. When setting a speed limit, a range of factors such as land-use context, pedestrian and bicyclist activity, crash history, intersection spacing, driveway density, roadway geometry, roadside conditions, roadway functional classification, traffic volume, and observed speeds can influence the speed limit determined in the engineering study. The engineering study will determine which of the recommended factors will prevail in setting the speed limit.

MoDOT can use speed limit setting tools and methods such as expert systems and those consistent with the safe system approach as part of the required engineering study for a non-statutory speed limit. As speed limit setting tools vary, practitioners needs to be aware of their limitations and advantages, possible variation between the tools and the need to explore gaps or weaknesses of tools, and weigh the output accordingly in consideration of setting speed limits.

To achieve desired operating speeds, agencies often implement other speed management strategies concurrently with setting speed limits, such as traffic calming measures, geometric design features, and increased enforcement. See [[905.2 Traffic Studies #905.2.14|EPG 905.2.14]] for more information regarding speed limit guidelines.

'''Standard. '''Speed zones (other than statutory speed limits) shall only be established on the basis of an engineering study that has been performed in accordance with traffic engineering practices. The engineering study shall consider the roadway context.

'''Guidance. '''Among the factors that should be considered when conducting an engineering study for establishing or reevaluating speed limits within speed zones are the following:
::A. Roadway environment (such as roadside development, number and frequency of driveways and access points, and land use), functional classification, public transit volume and location or frequency of stops, parking practices, and pedestrian and bicycle facilities and activity;
::B. Roadway characteristics (such as lane widths, shoulder condition, grade, alignment, median type, and sight distance);
::C. Geographic context (such as an urban district, rural town center, non-urbanized rural area, or suburban area), and multi-modal trip generation;
::D. Reported crash experience for at least a 12-month period;
::E. Speed distribution of free-flowing vehicles including the pace, median (50th-percentile), and 85th-percentile speeds; and
::F. A review of past speed studies to identify any trends in operating speeds.

When the 85th-percentile speed is appreciably greater than the posted speed limit, and the roadway context does not support setting a higher speed limit, the engineering study should consider whether changes to geometric features, enforcement, and/or other speed-reduction countermeasures might improve compliance with the posted speed limit. A similar approach should be used if the results of past speed studies indicate that the 85th-percentile speed has consistently increased.

On urban and suburban arterials, and on rural arterials that serve as main streets through developed areas of communities, the 85th-percentile speed should not be used to set speed limits without consideration of all factors described in the first Guidance paragraph of this article.

On a freeway, expressway, or rural highway (outside urbanized locations or conditions), the speed limit that is posted within a speed zone should be within 5 mph of the 85th-percentile speed of free-flowing motor-vehicle traffic under the following conditions:
::A. All factors described in the first Guidance paragraph of this article have been considered and determined to be non-mitigating, and
::B. The measures described in the second Guidance paragraph of this article have been considered to the extent practicable.

See [[905.2 Traffic Studies #905.2.14|EPG 905.2.14]] for additional information regarding setting speed limits

MoDOT should conduct engineering studies to reevaluate non-statutory speed limits on segments of their roadways that have undergone significant changes since the last review (such as changes to roadway context, the addition or elimination of parking or driveways, changes in the number of travel lanes, changes in the configuration of bicycle lanes, changes to road geometrics, changes in traffic control signal coordination, or significant changes in traffic volumes).

Speed studies for signalized intersection approaches should be taken outside the influence area of the traffic control signal, which is generally considered to be approximately ½ mile, to avoid obtaining skewed results for the speed distribution. If the signal spacing is less than 1 mile, the speed study should be at approximately the middle of the segment.

'''Standard. '''The Speed Limit (R2-1) sign shall display the limit established by law, ordinance, regulation, or as adopted by the authorized agency based on an engineering study. The speed limits displayed shall be in multiples of 5 mph.

Speed Limit (R2-1) signs, indicating speed limits for which posting is required by law, shall be located at the points of change from one speed limit to another.

At the downstream end of the section to which a particular speed limit applies, a Speed Limit sign showing the next speed limit shall be installed.

Speed Limit signs indicating the statutory speed limits shall be installed at entrances to Missouri and at city limits, where appropriate.

'''Guidance'''. Additional Speed Limit signs should be installed beyond interchanges and major intersections and at other locations where it is necessary to remind road users of the speed limit that is applicable.

Speed Limit signs should not be located at curves or other locations where the legal speed limit is greater than the safe operating speed. If Speed Limit signs are installed on the same sign supports and above a City Limit sign, the sign supports should be sized to properly support both signs.

The following are recommended locations for posting a Speed Limit sign:
::A. Downstream from all acceleration ramps on the freeway/expressway system, posted after the route confirmation marker, if space allows;
::B. Downstream from major intersections such as state system junctions, signalized intersections, and major county road junctions;
::C. Where it is necessary to remind road users of the speed limit that is applicable;
::D. In each direction of travel for road users leaving the Interstate system onto a state route. The sign should be located, if practical, approximately 400 ft. beyond the route confirmation assembly. If the crossroad is not located on the state system, the proper jurisdiction should be notified; or
::E. When the speed limit is reduced on the freeway/expressway, an additional sign should be posted in the median.

'''Support. '''The “Traffic Control Devices Handbook – 2nd Edition, 2013, ITE.” contains suggested criteria on the spacing of speed limit signs.

[[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.32|EPG 903.3.32]] contains information about the use of speed zone signs to inform road users of a reduced or variable speed zone to provide advance notice to comply with the posted speed limit ahead.

'''Option. '''If a W3-5b sign is posted to provide notice of a variable speed zone, an END VARIABLE SPEED LIMIT (R2-13) sign may be installed at the downstream end of the zone to provide notice to road users of the termination of the speed zone.

Advance traffic control warning signs (see [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.29|EPG 903.2.29]]), intersection warning signs (see [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.33|EPG 903.3.33]]), and/or other traffic control devices are appropriate warning prior to a signalized intersection. A Speed Limit sign should not be used for this purpose.

'''Guidance. '''An advisory speed plaque (see [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.59|EPG 903.3.59]]) mounted below a warning sign should be used to warn road users of an advisory speed for a roadway condition. A Speed Limit sign should not be used for this purpose.

'''Option. '''A variable speed limit sign that changes the speed limit for traffic and ambient conditions may be installed provided that the appropriate speed limit is displayed at the proper times and locations in accordance with the third and fourth Guidance paragraphs of this article.

'''Standard. '''The variable speed limit sign legend “SPEED LIMIT” shall be a black legend on a white retroreflective background. The variable speed limit legend shall be displayed in white LEDs on an opaque black background.

'''Support. ''' [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.13|EPG 903.3.13]] contains information about the use of a Vehicle Speed Feedback plaque mounted below a Speed Limit sign that displays to approaching drivers the speed at which they are traveling.

Advisory speed signs and plaques are discussed in [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.12|EPG 903.3.12]] and [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.59|903.3.59]]. Temporary traffic control zone speed signs are discussed in [[:Category:616 Temporary Traffic Control (MUTCD Part 6)|EPG 616]]. The WORK ZONE (G20-5aP) plaque intended for installation above a Speed Limit sign is discussed in [[616.7 TTC Zone Regulatory Signs (MUTCD Chapter 6G) #616.7.7|EPG 616.7.7]]. School Speed Limit signs are discussed in [[908.2 Signs (MUTCD Chapter 7B) #908.2.5|EPG 908.2.5]].

=={{SpanID|903.2.21}}903.2.21 Combined Maximum and Minimum Speed Limits Sign (R2-4a) (MUTCD Section 2B.24)==

{| style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto"
|-
|[[image:R2-4a.png|left|thumb|150px|<center>'''R2-4a'''</center>]]
|}

'''Standard. '''Combined Maximum and Minimum Speed Limits (R2-4a) signs shall be installed only on interstate routes in lieu of Speed Limit (R2-1) signs to designate the maximum and minimum speed limits that apply.

'''Guidance. '''The Combined Maximum and Minimum Speed Limits sign should be located in the same manner as Speed Limit signs (See [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2.9|EPG 903.2.9]]). Additionally, the R2-4a sign should be installed on interstate routes at entrances to Missouri and where interstate routes cross county lines. '''

=={{SpanID|903.2.22}}903.2.22 Speed Limit XX Except Where Posted Sign (R2-5d)==

{| style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto"
|-
|[[image:R2-5d.png|left|thumb|150px|<center>'''R2-5d'''</center>]]
|}

'''Standard. '''The SPEED LIMIT XX EXCEPT WHERE POSTED (R2-5d) sign shall be installed only at locations where it has been requested and is required by an enabling ordinance.

'''Guidance. '''The SPEED LIMIT XX EXCEPT WHERE POSTED sign should be placed immediately to the right of the City Limit sign on its own post.

'''Option. '''The SPEED LIMIT XX EXCEPT WHERE POSTED sign may be used on all state highways and outer roads except the Interstate system.

=={{SpanID|903.2.23}}903.2.23 Higher Fines Signs and Plaque (MUTCD Section 2B.25)==

'''Support. '''See [[907.3 Travel Safe Zones #907.3|EPG 907.3]] for information on Travel Safe Zones.

=={{SpanID|903.2.24}}903.2.24 Movement Prohibition Signs (R3-1 through R3-4, R3-18, and R3-27) (MUTCD Section 2B.26)==

{| style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto"
|-
|[[image:R3-1.gif|left|thumb|<center>'''R3-1'''</center>|95px]]
||[[image:R3-2.gif|left|thumb|<center>'''R3-2'''</center>|95px]]
||[[image:R3-3.gif|left|thumb|<center>'''R3-3'''</center>|95px]]
||[[image:R3-4.gif|left|thumb|<center>'''R3-4'''</center>|95px]]
||[[image:R3-18.gif|left|thumb|<center>'''R3-18'''</center>|95px]]
||[[image:R3-27.jpg|left|thumb|<center>'''R3-27'''</center>|95px]]
|}

'''Standard. '''Movement Prohibition signs shall be installed where specific movements are prohibited at an intersection approach except as provided in the second Option and fourth Standard paragraphs of this article.

'''Support. '''Missouri Statute 304.341, which governs U-turn Movements at signalized intersections, states: It shall be unlawful for the driver of any vehicle to turn such vehicle so as to proceed in the opposite direction at any intersection controlled by a traffic signal or police officer; nor shall such turn be made at any place unless the movement can be made in safety and without interfering with other traffic.

Missouri Statute 304.120 allows municipalities, by ordinance, to make additional rules of the road or traffic regulations to meet their needs and traffic conditions, which would allow U-turn Movements to be permitted at certain unsignalized intersections.

'''Guidance. '''Movement Prohibition signs should only be used to prohibit a turn or through movement from an entire approach and should not be used to designate movements that are required or permitted from a specific lane or lanes on a multi-lane approach.

Movement Prohibition signs should be placed where they will be most easily seen by road users who might be intending to make the movement.

If a No Right Turn (R3-1) sign is used, at least one should be placed either over the roadway or at a right-hand corner of the intersection.

If a No Left Turn (R3-2) sign is used, at least one should be placed over the roadway, at the far left corner of the intersection, on a median, or in conjunction with the STOP sign or YIELD sign located on the near right corner.

Except as provided in Item C of the third Standard paragraph of this article for signalized locations, if a NO TURNS (R3-3) sign is used, two signs should be used, one at a location specified for a No Right Turn sign and one at a location specified for a No Left Turn sign.

If a No U-Turn (R3-4) sign or a combination No U or Left Turn (R3-18) sign is used, at least one should be used at a location specified for a No Left Turn sign.

The No U-Turn sign (R3-4) should be used sparingly and only where a specific problem has been documented and not as standard practice for median breaks. If used, these signs should be placed at or between intersections to indicate where U-turns are prohibited.

If both left turns and U-turns are prohibited, the combination No U or Left Turn (R3-18) sign should be used instead of separate R3-2 and R3-4 signs.

'''Standard. '''The No U-Turn sign shall be installed above the AUTHORIZED AND EMERGENCY VEHICLES ONLY (R5-29) sign (See [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2.36|EPG 903.2.36]]).

'''Support. ''' [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2.25|EPG 903.2.25]] through [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2.28|EPG 903.2.28]] contain information regarding lane control signs that indicate the required or permitted movements from individual lanes.

'''Guidance. '''If a No Straight Through (R3-27) sign is used, at least one should be placed either over the roadway or at a location where it can be seen by road users who might be intending to travel straight through the intersection.

If turn prohibition signs are installed in conjunction with traffic control signals:
::A. The No Right Turn sign should be installed adjacent to a signal face viewed by road users in the right-hand lane.
::B. The No Left Turn (or No U-Turn or combination No U or Left Turn) sign should be installed adjacent to a signal face viewed by road users in the left-hand lane.
::C. A NO TURNS sign should be placed adjacent to a signal face viewed by all road users on that approach, or two signs should be used.

'''Option. '''If turn prohibition signs are installed in conjunction with traffic control signals, an additional turn prohibition sign may be post-mounted to supplement the sign mounted overhead.

Where ONE WAY signs are used (see [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2.40|EPG 903.2.40]]), No Left Turn and No Right Turn signs may be omitted.

Where the movement restriction applies to certain vehicle classes, signs incorporating a supplementary legend, modified as appropriate, may be used to indicate the specific vehicle class restriction or exception. When the movement restriction applies during certain time periods only, the following Movement Prohibition signing alternatives may be used and are listed in order of preference:
::A. A blank-out or changeable message sign (see Chapter 2L) that displays the prohibited movement only during the time that the movement prohibition is applicable, especially at signalized intersections.
::B. Permanently-mounted signs incorporating a supplementary legend showing the hours and days during which the prohibition is applicable. Contact the Highway Safety and Traffic Division for the design of supplementary legends and plaques.
::C. Portable signs, installed by proper authority, located off the roadway at each corner of the intersection. The portable signs are only to be used during the time that the movement prohibition is applicable.

'''Standard. '''The blank-out part-time electronic-display Movement Prohibition sign shall consist of a red circle and diagonal with a white prohibited movement on an opaque black background.

'''Option. '''Movement Prohibition signs may be omitted at a ramp entrance to an expressway or a channelized intersection where the design is such as to indicate clearly the one-way traffic movement on the ramp or turning lane.

'''Standard. '''The No Left Turn (R3-2) sign, the No U-Turn (R3-4) sign, and the combination No U or Left Turn (R3-18) sign shall not be used at approaches to roundabouts to prohibit drivers from turning left onto the circulatory roadway of a roundabout.

'''Support. '''At roundabouts, the use of R3-2, R3-4, or R3-18 signs to prohibit left turns onto the circulatory roadway might confuse drivers about the possible legal turning movements around the roundabout. ONE WAY (R6-1 or R6-2) signs are appropriate to indicate the travel direction within a roundabout.

=={{SpanID|903.2.25}}903.2.25 Intersection Lane Control Signs (R3-5 through R3-8) (MUTCD Section 2B.27)==

'''Standard. '''Intersection Lane Control signs, if used, shall require road users in certain lanes to turn, shall permit turns from a lane where such turns would otherwise not be permitted, shall require a road user to stay in the same lane and proceed straight through an intersection, or shall indicate permitted movements from a lane.

Intersection Lane Control signs shall not be used in lieu of turn prohibition signs, such as No Right-Turn (R3-1).

'''Support. '''Intersection Lane Control signs have three applications:
::A. Mandatory Movement Lane Control (R3-5 series and R3-7 series) signs,
::B. Optional Movement Lane Control (R3-6 series) signs, and
::C. Advance Intersection Lane Control (R3-8 series) signs.

'''Guidance. '''When Intersection Lane Control signs are mounted overhead, each sign used should be placed over the lane or a projection of the lane to which it applies.

On signalized approaches where through lanes that become mandatory turn lanes, multiple-lane turns that include shared lanes for through and turning movements, ramps with two or more lanes or other lane-use regulations are present that would be unexpected by unfamiliar road users, overhead Intersection Lane Control signs should be installed approximately 250 ft. in advance of the stop bar over the appropriate lanes. A one-arm cantilever tubular truss to support these signs should be used to eliminate an obstacle on one side of the roadway.

'''Option. '''A signal mast arm design (without signal head) may be used to mount Intersection Lane Control signs, which allows a longer arm than standard one or two arm tubular sign supports. The upright post may be placed on either side of the roadway, and if possible, placed so that roadway geometrics draw traffic away from the post and footing.

'''Guidance. '''The Left Only (R3-5L) sign should be installed on the back side of the mast arms over the left turn lanes where practical.

Where overhead mounting on the approach is impracticable for the Advance and/or Intersection Lane Control signs, one of the following alternatives should be employed:
::A. At locations where through lanes become mandatory turn lanes, a Mandatory Movement Lane Control (R3-7) sign should be post-mounted on the left-hand side of the roadway where a through lane is becoming a mandatory left-turn lane on a one-way street or where a median of sufficient width for the signs is available, or on the right-hand side of the roadway where a through lane is becoming a mandatory right-turn lane.
::B. At locations where a through lane is becoming a mandatory left-turn lane on a two-way street where a median of sufficient width for the signs is not available, and at locations where multiple-lane turns that include shared lanes for through and turning movements are present, an Advance Intersection Lane Control (R3-8 series) sign should be post-mounted in a prominent location in advance of the intersection, and consideration should be given to the use of an oversized version in accordance with [[#tab903.2.3|Table 903.2.3]].

Use of an overhead sign for one approach lane should not require installation of overhead signs for the other lanes of that approach.

'''Option. '''Intersection Lane Control signs may be omitted where:
::A. A turn bay has been provided by physical construction or pavement markings, and
::B. Only the road users using such turn bays are permitted to make a turn in that direction.

'''Standard. '''Except as provided in the last paragraph of this article, at roundabouts, Intersection Lane Control (R3-5, R3-6, and R3-8 series) signs shall display curved-stem arrow symbols as shown in [[#fig903.2.25|Figure 903.2.25]].

'''Option. '''Normal-stem arrow symbol options may be displayed on Intersection Lane Control (R3-5, R3-6, and R3-8 series) signs at roundabouts where they more effectively indicate road geometry based on engineering judgment.

{{SpanID|fig903.2.25}}
[[File:Figure 903.2.25 Intersection Lane Control Signal Arrow Options for Roundabouts.jpg|center|thumb|alt=A: The first example shows a vertical black curved-stem arrow curving up and then slightly to the right and then to the left. Three “match arrows with desired lane-use configuration” are shown attached to the black arrows. One is attached to the arrow indicating a left-turn maneuver. One is attached to the arrow indicating a through maneuver. One is attached to the arrow indicating a right-turn maneuver.
B: The second example shows a vertical black normal-stem arrow curving up and to the left. The arrow is shown curving around an “optional for left-most lane” circle. Three “match arrows with desired lane-use configuration” are shown attached to the black arrows. One is attached to the arrow indicating a left-turn maneuver. One is attached to the arrow indicating a through maneuver. One is attached to the arrow indicating a right-turn maneuver.|800px|'''Figure 903.2.25''' Intersection Lane Control Signal Arrow Options for Roundabouts]]

=={{SpanID|903.2.26}}903.2.26 Mandatory Movement Lane Control Signs (R3-5, R3-5a, and R3-7) and Plaques (MUTCD Section 2B.28)==

{| style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto"
|-
||[[File:R3-5.gif|left|thumb|<center>'''R3-5'''</center>|105px]]
||[[File:R3-5a.gif|left|thumb|<center>'''R3-5a'''</center>|95px]]
||[[File:R3-7L.png|left|thumb|<center>'''R3-7L'''</center>|130px]]
||[[File:R3-7R.png|left|thumb|<center>'''R3-7R'''</center>|130px]]
|}

'''Standard. '''Mandatory Movement Lane Control (R3-5, R3-5a, and R3-7) signs, if used, shall indicate only the single vehicle movement that is required from the lane.

The Mandatory Movement Lane Control (R3-5 and R3-5a) symbol signs shall include the legend ONLY and shall be mounted overhead over the specific lanes to which they apply (see [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2.25|EPG 903.2.25]]). The R3-7 sign shall be for post-mounting only. The R3-7 sign shall not be mounted at the far side of the intersection.

If used, the Mandatory Movement Lane Control (R3-7) sign shall be located in advance of the intersection, such as near the upstream end of the mandatory movement lane, and/or at the near side of the intersection where the regulation applies.

The use of the Mandatory Movement Lane Control (R3-7) word message sign shall be limited to only locations where through lanes approaching an intersection become mandatory turn lanes.

Mandatory Movement Lane Control Signs shall not be used on roadways with speed limits 50 mph or greater. Contact Highway Safety and Traffic Division for alternatives when speed limits are 50 mph or greater.

'''Guidance. '''Mandatory Movement Lane Control signs should be accompanied by lane-use arrow markings, especially where traffic volumes are high, where there is a high percentage of commercial vehicles, or where other distractions exist.

'''Option. '''The Through Only (R3-5a) sign may be used to require a road user in a particular lane to proceed straight through an intersection.

On an approach to a mandatory turn lane where traffic regularly enters the shoulder to access the turn lane inappropriately, creating safety or operational issues, a DO NOT DRIVE ON SHOULDER (R4-17) sign (see [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2.35|EPG 903.2.35]]) may be used to supplement the standard Mandatory Movement Lane Control (R3-5 and/or R3-7 series) signs.

=={{SpanID|903.2.27}}903.2.27 Optional Movement Lane Control Signs (R3-6 Series) (MUTCD Section 2B.29)==

{| style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto"
|-
||[[image:R3-6.png|left|thumb|<center>'''R3-6'''</center>|130px]]
||[[image:R3-6a.png|left|thumb|<center>'''R3-6a'''</center>|130px]]
||[[image:R3-6b.png|left|thumb|<center>'''R3-6b'''</center>|130px]]
|}

'''Standard. '''Optional Movement Lane Control (R3-6, R3-6a and R3-6b) signs, if used, shall be used for two or more movements from a specific lane or to emphasize permitted movements. The Optional Movement Lane Control sign shall be mounted overhead over the specific lane to which it applies.

If used, the Optional Movement Lane Control signs shall indicate all permissible movements from specific lanes.

Because more than one movement is permitted from the lane, the word message ONLY shall not be used on an Optional Movement Lane Control sign.

Optional Movement Lane Control signs shall be used for two or more movements from a specific lane where a movement, not allowed by State statute or local ordinance, is permitted.

The Optional Movement Lane Control signs shall not be used alone to effect a turn prohibition.

'''Guidance. '''If used, the Optional Movement Lane Control sign should be located overhead in advance of the intersection, such as near the upstream end of an adjacent mandatory movement lane, and/or overhead at the intersection where the regulation applies.

=={{SpanID|903.2.28}}903.2.28 Advance Intersection Lane Control Signs (R3-8 Series) (MUTCD Section 2B.30)==

{| style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto; text-align: center;"
|-
||[[image:R3-8.png|left|thumb|<center>'''R3-8'''</center>|130px]]
||[[image:R3-8a.png|left|thumb|<center>'''R3-8a'''</center>|195px]]
||[[image:R3-8b.png|left|thumb|<center>'''R3-8b'''</center>|195px]]
|-
||[[image:R3-8xa.png|left|thumb|<center>'''R3-8xa'''</center>|195px]]
||[[image:R3-8xb.png|left|thumb|<center>'''R3-8xb'''</center>|195px]]
||[[image:R3-8xc.png|left|thumb|<center>'''R3-8xc'''</center>|195px]]
|}

'''Option. '''Advance Intersection Lane Control (R3-8, R3-8a, and R3-8b) signs may be used to indicate the configuration of all lanes ahead.

The word message ONLY or the bicycle symbol, may be used within the border in combination with the arrow symbols of the R3-8 sign series.

Where a bicycle lane is between two general-purpose lanes the R3-8 series signs may be modified to show the bicycle lane with a white legend on a black background in accordance with designs of the R3-8x series signs (see [[914.2 Regulatory Signs (MUTCD Chapter 9B) #914.2.2|EPG 914.2.2]]).

'''Guidance. '''When used, an Advance Intersection Lane Control sign should be placed at an adequate distance in advance of the intersection, either along the lane tapers or at the beginning of the turn lane so that road users can select the appropriate lane.

'''Option. '''An Advance Intersection Lane Control sign may be repeated closer to the intersection along the approach for additional emphasis.

'''Standard. '''An Advance Intersection Lane Control (R3-8 series) sign shall not be mounted at the far side of an intersection to which it applies.

Where three or more approach lanes are available to traffic, Advance Intersection Lane Control (R3-8 series) signs, if used, shall be post-mounted in advance of the intersection and shall not be mounted overhead.

=={{SpanID|903.2.29}}903.2.29 Two-Way Left-Turn-Only Signs (R3-9a and R3-9b) and Plaques (MUTCD Section 2B.32)==

{| style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto"
|-
||[[File:R3-9a.gif|left|thumb|<center>'''R3-9a'''</center>|105px]]
||[[File:R3-9b.gif|left|thumb|<center>'''R3-9b'''</center>|85px]]
|}

'''Support. '''Missouri Statute 300.215, which governs two-way left turn lane movements states:

Designated two-way left turn lanes: Where a special lane for making left turns by drivers proceeding in opposite directions have been indicated by official traffic control devices:

::A. A left turn shall not be made from any other lane;

::B. A vehicle shall not be driven in the lane except when preparing for or making a left turn from or into the roadway or when preparing for or making a U-turn when otherwise permitted by law;

::C. A vehicle shall not be driven in the lane for a distance more than five hundred feet.

'''Standard. '''Two-Way Left Turn Only (R3-9a) signs shall be used for overhead installation only. Center Lane Only (R3-9b) signs shall be post mounted installations.

'''Guidance. '''A Two-Way Left-Turn-Only (R3-9a or R3-9b) sign should be used in conjunction with the required pavement markings where a non-reversible lane is reserved for the exclusive use of left-turning vehicles in either direction and is not used for passing, overtaking, or through travel.

'''Option. '''The post-mounted R3-9b sign may be used as an alternate to or a supplement to the overhead R3-9a sign

Additional R3-9b signs may be installed after major intersections, or in situations that require additional emphasis of the proper use of this lane.

'''Support. '''Signing is especially helpful to drivers in areas where the two-way left-turn-only maneuver is new, in areas subject to environmental conditions that frequently obscure the pavement markings, and on peripheral streets with two-way left-turn-only lanes leading to an extensive system of routes with two-way left-turn-only lanes.

=={{SpanID|903.2.30}}903.2.30 Jughandle Signs (R3-23, R3-24, R3-25, and R3-26 Series) (MUTCD Section 2B.35)==

'''Guidance. '''There are limited cases where these signs are applicable to the MoDOT system. Any use of these signs requires authorization from the Highway Safety and Traffic Division.'''

=={{SpanID|903.2.31}}903.2.31 DO NOT PASS Sign (R4-1) (MUTCD Section 2B.36)==

[[File:R4-1.gif|center|thumb|<center>'''R4-1'''</center>|105px]]

'''Option. '''The DO NOT PASS (R4-1) sign may be used in addition to pavement markings (see [[620.2 Pavement and Curb Markings (MUTCD Chapter 3B) #620.2.3|EPG 620.2.3]]) to emphasize the restriction on passing. The DO NOT PASS sign may be used at one-lane bridges and work zones. Any other use of this sign requires authorization from the Highway Safety and Traffic Division.

'''Support. '''Standards for determining the location and extent of no-passing zone pavement markings are set forth in [[620.2 Pavement and Curb Markings (MUTCD Chapter 3B) #620.2.3|EPG 620.2.3]].

'''Standard. '''PASS WITH CARE (R4-2) signs shall be used in conjunction with the DO NOT PASS sign.

=={{SpanID|903.2.32}}903.2.32 PASS WITH CARE Sign (R4-2) (MUTCD Section 2B.37)==

[[File:R4-2.png|center|thumb|<center>'''R4-2'''</center>|105px]]

'''Guidance. '''The PASS WITH CARE (R4-2) sign should be installed at the downstream end of a no-passing zone if a DO NOT PASS sign has been installed at the upstream end of the zone.

'''Standard. '''The PASS WITH CARE sign shall be the same size and shall be erected in the same manner as the DO NOT PASS (R4-1) sign.

=={{SpanID|903.2.33}}903.2.33 KEEP RIGHT EXCEPT TO PASS Sign (R4-16) and SLOWER TRAFFIC KEEP RIGHT Sign (R4-3) (MUTCD Section 2B.38)==

{| style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto"
|-
||[[File:R4-3.jpg|left|thumb|<center>'''R4-3'''</center>|105px]]
||[[File:R4-16.jpg|left|thumb|<center>'''R4-16'''</center>|105px]]
|}

'''Option. '''The KEEP RIGHT EXCEPT TO PASS (R4-16) sign may be used on roadways where there are two lanes in one direction of travel to direct drivers to stay in the right-hand lane except when they are passing another vehicle.

'''Guidance. '''If used, the KEEP RIGHT EXCEPT TO PASS sign should be installed at or just beyond the beginning of a two-lane section of roadway and at selected locations along two-lane roadways where additional emphasis is needed.

'''Option. '''The SLOWER TRAFFIC KEEP RIGHT (R4-3) sign may be used on multi-lane through roadways to improve capacity or reduce unnecessary lane changing due to the presence of slower vehicles that impede the normal flow of traffic.

'''Standard. '''The SLOWER TRAFFIC KEEP RIGHT (R4-3) sign shall be required for climbing lanes.

'''Guidance. '''If used, the SLOWER TRAFFIC KEEP RIGHT sign should be installed at or just beyond the beginning of a multi-lane roadway section or at the beginning of an extra lane provided for trucks and/or other slow-moving traffic, and at selected locations where there is a tendency on the part of some road users to drive in the left-hand lane(or lanes) below the normal speed of traffic. These signs should not be used on the approach to an interchange or through an interchange area where traffic is entering or exiting, or along deceleration or acceleration lanes.

If an extra lane has been provided for trucks and other slow-moving traffic, a Lane Ends sign (see [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.39|EPG 903.3.39]]) should be installed in advance of the point where the extra lane ends. Appropriate pavement markings should be installed at both the upstream and downstream ends of the extra lane (see [[620.2 Pavement and Curb Markings (MUTCD Chapter 3B) #620.2.14|EPG 620.2.14]] and [[#fig620.2.14|Figure 620.2.14]] ).

=={{SpanID|903.2.34}}903.2.34 Keep Right and Keep Left Signs (R4-7 Series and R4-8 Series) (MUTCD Section 2B.39)==

{| style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto"
|-
||[[File:R4-7.gif|left|thumb|<center>'''R4-7'''</center>|105px]]
||[[File:R4-7a.gif|left|thumb|<center>'''R4-7a'''</center>|105px]]
||[[File:R4-7b.gif|left|thumb|<center>'''R4-7b'''</center>|115px]]
||[[File:R4-7c.jpg|left|thumb|<center>'''R4-7c'''</center>|85px]]
|-
||[[File:R4-8.gif|left|thumb|<center>'''R4-8'''</center>|105px]]
||[[File:R4-8a.jpg|left|thumb|<center>'''R4-8a'''</center>|105px]]
||[[File:R4-8b.jpg|left|thumb|<center>'''R4-8b'''</center>|105px]]
||[[File:R4-8c.jpg|left|thumb|<center>'''R4-8c'''</center>|85px]]
|}

'''Option. '''The Keep Right (R4-7) sign may be used at locations where it is necessary for traffic to pass only to the right-hand side of a roadway feature or obstruction. The Keep Left (R4-8) sign may be used at locations where it is necessary for traffic to pass only to the left-hand side of a roadway feature or obstruction.

'''Guidance. '''At locations where it is not readily apparent that traffic is required to keep to the right, a Keep Right sign should be used.

'''Standard. '''If Keep Right signs are installed at the start of a median or at a median opening, they shall be placed as close as practicable to the approach ends of the medians, and shall be visible to traffic on the divided highway.

'''Guidance. '''If used, the Keep Right sign should be mounted on the face of or just in front of a pier or other obstruction separating opposite directions of traffic in the center of the highway such that traffic will have to pass to the right-hand side of the sign.

Where the approach end of the island channelizes traffic away from the approach direction, the word legend (R4-7a, R4-7b, R4-8a, or R4-8b) signs should be used instead of the symbol (R4-7 or R4-8) signs to emphasize the degree of curvature away from the approach direction (see [[#fig903.2.34.1|Figure 903.2.34.1]] ).

Where a two-lane, two-way highway transitions to a divided highway, the KEEP RIGHT (R4-7b) sign should be installed within 50 ft. of the gore point, if possible. The edge of the sign should be a minimum of 6 ft. from the curb or shoulder point.

'''Standard. '''The Keep Right (Left) sign shall not be installed on the right-hand (left-hand) side of the roadway in a position where traffic must pass to the left-hand (right-hand) side of the sign.

'''Option. '''The Keep Right sign may be omitted at intermediate ends of divisional islands and medians.

A narrow Keep Right (R4-7c) sign may be installed on the approach end of a median island that is less than 4 feet wide at the point where the sign is to be located.

'''Standard. '''A narrow Keep Right (R4-7c) sign shall not be installed on a median island that has a width of 4 feet or more at the point where the sign is to be located.

'''Option. '''The Keep Right sign may be installed in the median of a divided highway crossing that functions as a single intersection such that it is visible to traffic on the divided highway as shown in [[#fig903.2.41.3|Figure 903.2.41.3]] and [[#fig903.2.41.4|Figure 903.2.41.4]] .

'''Support. '''[[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2.40|EPG 903.2.40]] provides more information about the use of the Keep Right sign in combination with or in lieu of ONE-WAY signs at divided highway crossings.

'''Standard. '''The KEEP RIGHT (R4-7b) sign shall be installed as close to the median nose as possible where an undivided highway transitions into a divided highway.

{{SpanID|fig903.2.34.1}}
[[File:Figure 903.2.34.1 Examples of Keep Right and Keep Left Sign Placement (Sheet 1 of 2).jpg|center|800px|alt=The first example shows a two-lane vertical roadway on the left of a two-lane horizontal roadway. Both lanes of the horizontal roadway are traveling eastbound. Posted on a triangular median island, which separates the southbound lane from the northbound lane, an R4-7a sign is shown facing south toward northbound traffic merging east onto the horizontal roadway.

The second example shows a two-lane vertical roadway intersecting a three-lane horizontal roadway. All lanes of the horizontal roadway are traveling eastbound. Posted on a triangular median island, an R4-7a sign is shown facing south toward northbound traffic merging east onto the horizontal roadway.

The third example shows a two-lane vertical roadway curving to the east into a one-lane ramp. Posted on a triangular median island, an R4-7a sign is shown facing south toward northbound traffic merging onto the curved ramp.|thumb|'''Figure 903.2.34.1 '''Examples of Keep Right and Keep Left Sign Placement ''(Sheet 1 of 2)'']]

{{SpanID|fig903.2.34.2}}
[[File:Figure 903.2.34.2 Examples of Keep Right and Keep Left Sign Placement (Sheet 2 of 2).jpg|center|800px|alt=The first example shows a three-lane vertical roadway intersecting a two-lane horizontal roadway. Both directions of the vertical roadway are separated by a narrow median island. Posted on the median island, an R4-7 sign is shown facing north toward the horizontal roadway, indicating vehicles must keep right when traveling on the south receiving leg of the intersection.

The second example shows a four-lane vertical roadway, two lanes in each direction, separated by a yellow painted median. The median transitions into a wider raised median that tapers outward as it continues north. Posted at the start of the wider median, an R4-7b sign is shown facing south toward northbound traffic, indicating vehicles must keep right.|thumb|'''Figure 903.2.34.2 '''Examples of Keep Right and Keep Left Sign Placement ''(Sheet 2 of 2)'']]

=={{SpanID|903.2.35}}903.2.35 DO NOT DRIVE ON SHOULDER Sign (R4-17) (MUTCD Section 2B.43)==

[[image:R4-17.jpg|center|thumb|<center>'''R4-17'''</center>|105px]]

'''Option. '''The DO NOT DRIVE ON SHOULDER (R4-17) sign may be installed to inform road users that using the shoulder of a roadway as a travel lane is prohibited.

'''Guidance. '''The DO NOT DRIVE ON SHOULDER (R4-17) sign should be considered for special conditions if there is a need determined by district traffic engineering staff. The sign should be considered as a temporary tool to aid in the enforcement of the condition. After it appears the problem has been corrected, these signs should be removed.

'''Support. '''The R4-17 sign is to be used only where necessary. MoDOT does not want to set driver expectations for general use of this sign.

=={{SpanID|903.2.36}}903.2.36 Selective Exclusion Signs and Plaques (MUTCD Section 2B.45)==

{| style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto"
|-
||[[image:R5-2.jpg|left|thumb|<center>'''R5-2'''</center>|105px]]
||[[image:R5-2aP.jpg|left|thumb|<center>'''R5-2aP'''</center>|105px]]
||[[image:R5-25.jpg|left|thumb|<center>'''R5-25'''</center>|105px]]
||[[image:R5-29.jpg|left|thumb|<center>'''R5-29'''</center>|105px]]
|}

'''Option. '''Selective Exclusion signs may be used to provide notice to road users that State or local statutes or ordinances exclude designated types of traffic from using particular roadways or facilities.

'''Standard. '''Selective Exclusion signs shall clearly indicate the type of traffic that is excluded.

'''Support. '''Typical exclusion messages include:
::A. No Trucks (R5-2),
::B. No Pedestrian Crossing (R9-3),
::C. EXCEPT LOCAL DELIVERY (R5-2aP) plaque.
::D. NO VENDING (R5-24)
::E. NO FISHING FROM BRIDGE (R5-25)
::F. AUTHORIZED AND EMERGENCY VEHICLES ONLY (R5-29)

'''Guidance. '''If an exclusion is governed by vehicle weight, a Weight Limit sign (see [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2.53|EPG 903.2.53]]) should be used instead of a Selective Exclusion sign.

The Selective Exclusion sign should be placed on the right-hand side of the roadway at an appropriate distance from the intersection so as to be clearly visible to all road users turning into the roadway that has the exclusion. The No Pedestrian Crossing (R9-3) sign (see [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2.46|EPG 903.2.46]]) should be installed so as to be clearly visible to pedestrians who are at a location where an alternative route is available.

'''Option. '''The No Pedestrian Crossing (R9-3) sign may also be used at underpasses or elsewhere where pedestrian facilities are not provided.

The EXCEPT LOCAL DELIVERY (R5-2aP) plaque may be mounted below the R5-2 sign.

The NO VENDING (R5-24) sign may be used at locations where vending is taking place within the right-of-way.

'''Standard. '''When used, the NO FISHING FROM BRIDGE (R5-25) sign shall be mounted at or near the bridge ends.

'''Option. '''The NO FISHING FROM BRIDGE (R5-25) sign may be used at locations where fishing from a bridge creates a safety hazard.

'''Guidance. '''The AUTHORIZED AND EMERGENCY VEHICLES ONLY (R5-29) sign should be used at emergency crossovers to prohibit vehicles from using the emergency crossover unless they have special permission (such as law enforcement vehicles or emergency vehicles) or are performing official business (such as highway agency vehicles).

The No U Turn sign should be installed above the AUTHORIZED AND EMERGENCY VEHICLES ONLY sign.

Signing for both directions of traffic should be provided on one post with the signs being installed 90 degrees to the roadway. The signs should be mounted back to back. The post should be located approximately in the middle of the median. If median width is greater than 60 ft., consideration should be given to install separate signs.

=={{SpanID|903.2.37}}903.2.37 DO NOT ENTER Sign (R5-1) (MUTCD Section 2B.46)==

[[image:R5-1.gif|thumb|center|<center>'''R5-1'''</center>|105px]]

'''Standard. '''The DO NOT ENTER (R5-1) sign shall be used at the following locations:
::A. Where a two-way roadway becomes a one-way roadway;
::B. The intersection of an interchange exit ramp with a crossroad as specified in [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2.39|EPG 903.2.39]] (see [[#fig903.2.39.1|Figure 903.2.39.1]]);
::C. The intersection of a channelized or turning roadway with a two-way undivided crossroad; and
::D. Except as provided in the fourth paragraph of this article, an intersection with a divided highway (see [[#fig903.2.37|Figure 903.2.37]]).

If the DO NOT ENTER sign is mounted behind a STOP or YIELD sign:
::A. 36 x 36 inch DO NOT ENTER sign shall be used behind a 48 x 48 inch STOP sign; and
::B. 30 x 30 inch. DO NOT ENTER sign shall be used behind a 60 x 60 inch YIELD sign.

'''Guidance. '''A DO NOT ENTER sign should be installed at other locations where additional emphasis is needed where wrong-way movements are prominent or where the intersecting angle of roadways is such that the visibility of ONE WAY signs alone does not sufficiently convey the restriction.

'''Option. '''A DO NOT ENTER sign may be omitted on a low-speed urban street that is a divided highway at a crossing that functions as two separate intersections.

'''Guidance. '''The DO NOT ENTER sign, if used, should be placed directly in view of a road user at the point where a road user could wrongly enter a divided highway, one-way roadway, or ramp. The sign should be mounted facing traffic that might enter the roadway or ramp in the wrong direction.

At a crossing with a divided highway; the sign, if used, should be placed on the outside edge side of the roadway facing traffic that might enter the roadway in the wrong direction.

If the DO NOT ENTER sign would be visible to traffic to which it does not apply, the sign should be turned away from, or shielded from, the view of that traffic.

A second DO NOT ENTER sign should be used, particularly where traffic approaches from an intersecting roadway ([[#fig903.2.37|Figure 903.2.37]]).

[[903.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 2A) #903.1.12|EPG 903.1.12]] contains the provisions for the use of continuously-operated or actuated LEDs to enhance the conspicuity of signs.

{{SpanID|fig903.2.37}}
[[File:Figure 903.2.37 Locations of DO NOT ENTER and WRONG WAY Signing for Divided Highway Crossings that Function as Two Separate Intersections.jpg|thumb|800px|alt=A vertical two-lane roadway intersects a horizontal divided highway with two eastbound lanes, a median, and two westbound lanes. Each direction of the horizontal highway has a left-turn lane at its intersection with the vertical roadway.
Along the eastbound lanes, a required R5-1 “DO NOT ENTER” sign is posted on the median to the left of the left-turn lane, facing westbound traffic. A second R5-1 sign is posted to the right of the eastbound right lane at the intersection, also facing westbound traffic. Farther west along the eastbound lanes, two R5-1a “WRONG WAY” signs are installed outside of the travel lanes, one on each side of the roadway, both facing westbound traffic.
Along the westbound lanes, a required R5-1 “DO NOT ENTER” sign is posted on the median to the left of the left-turn lane, facing eastbound traffic. A second R5-1 sign is posted to the right of the westbound right lane at the intersection, also facing eastbound traffic. Farther east along the westbound lanes, two R5-1a “WRONG WAY” signs are installed outside of the travel lanes, one on each side of the roadway, both facing eastbound traffic.
Spacing guidance is shown: the R5-1 signs are placed 50 to 80 feet from the intersection, while the R5-1a signs are placed 200 to 250 feet from the R5-1 signs.|center|'''Figure 903.2.37 '''Locations of DO NOT ENTER and WRONG WAY Signing for Divided Highway Crossings that Function as Two Separate Intersections]]

=={{SpanID|903.2.38}}903.2.38 WRONG WAY Sign (R5-1a) (MUTCD Section 2B.47)==

[[image:R5-1a.gif|thumb|center|<center>'''R5-1a'''</center>|105px]]

'''Option. '''The WRONG WAY (R5-1a) sign may be used as a supplement to the DO NOT ENTER sign where a crossroad intersects a one-way roadway in a manner that does not physically discourage or prevent wrong-way entry (see [[#fig903.2.37|Figure 903.2.37]]).

'''Guidance. '''If used, the WRONG WAY sign should be placed at a location along the one-way roadway farther from the crossroad than the DO NOT ENTER sign (see [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2.37|EPG 903.2.37]]).

The WRONG WAY sign should be placed on the same side of the road as the DO NOT ENTER sign.

'''Support. '''[[903.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 2A) #903.1.12|EPG 903.1.12]] contains the provisions for the use of continuously-operated or actuated LEDs to enhance the conspicuity of signs.

=={{SpanID|903.2.39}}903.2.39 Wrong-Way Traffic Control at Interchange Ramps (MUTCD Section 2B.48)==

'''Standard. '''At interchange exit ramp terminals where the ramp intersects a crossroad in such a manner that wrong-way entry could inadvertently be made, the following signs shall be used (see [[#fig903.2.39.1|Figure 903.2.39.1]]):
::A. At least one ONE WAY sign for each direction of travel on the crossroad shall be placed where the exit ramp intersects the crossroad.
::B. At least one DO NOT ENTER sign shall be conspicuously placed near the downstream end of the exit ramp in positions appropriate for full view of a road user starting to enter wrongly from the crossroad.
::C. At least one WRONG WAY sign shall be placed on the exit ramp facing a road user traveling in the wrong direction.

'''Guidance. '''In addition, the following pavement markings should be used (see [[#fig903.2.39.1|Figure 903.2.39.1]]):
::A. On two-lane paved crossroads at interchanges, solid double yellow lines should be used as a center line for an adequate distance on both sides approaching the ramp intersections.
::B. Where crossroad channelization or ramp geometrics do not make wrong-way movements difficult, a lane-use arrow should be placed in each lane of an exit ramp near the crossroad terminal where it will be clearly visible to a potential wrong-way road user.

'''Option. '''The following traffic control devices may be used to supplement the signs and pavement markings described in the first and second paragraphs of this article:
::A. Additional ONE WAY signs may be placed, especially on two-lane rural crossroads, appropriately in advance of the ramp intersection to supplement the required ONE WAY sign(s).
::B. Additional WRONG WAY signs may be used.
::C. Slender, elongated wrong-way arrow pavement markings (see [[620.2 Pavement and Curb Markings (MUTCD Chapter 3B) #fig3b21|Figure 620.2.22.1]]) intended primarily to warn wrong-way road users that they are traveling in the wrong direction may be placed upstream from the ramp terminus (see [[#fig903.2.39.1|Figure 903.2.39.1]] ) to indicate the correct direction of traffic flow. Wrong-way arrow pavement markings may also be placed on the exit ramp at appropriate locations near the crossroad junction to indicate wrong-way movement.
::D. Lane-use arrow pavement markings may be placed on the exit ramp and crossroad near their intersection to indicate the permissive direction of flow.
::E. Lane control signs or movement prohibition signs may be used on the approaches to the exit ramp.
::D. A Keep Right (R4-7 or R4-7c) may be used on a ramp median nose for wrong-way traffic control.

'''Guidance. '''On interchange entrance ramps where the ramp merges with the through roadway and the design of the interchange does not clearly make evident the direction of traffic on the separate roadways or ramps, a ONE WAY sign visible to traffic on the entrance ramp and through roadway should be placed on each side of the through roadway near the entrance ramp merging point.

'''Option. '''On interchange entrance ramps where the ramp merges with the through roadway and the design of the interchange does not clearly make evident the direction of traffic on the separate roadways or ramps a No Left Turn (R3-2) sign may be located on the left-hand side of the entrance ramp at the gore. If a No Left Turn (R3-2) sign is located on the left-hand side, a supplemental R3-2 sign may be installed on the right-hand side of the entrance ramp.

On interchange entrance ramps where the ramp merges with the through roadway and the design clearly indicates the direction of flow, a ONE WAY sign may be placed visible to traffic on the entrance ramp and/or a NO TURNS (R3-3) sign may be placed visible to traffic on the entrance ramp and through roadway at the gore area.

'''Support. '''[[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2.37|EPG 903.2.37]], [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2.38|EPG 903.2.38]], and [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2.40|EPG 903.2.40]] contain further information on signing to avoid wrong-way movements at at-grade intersections on expressways.

{{SpanID|fig903.2.39.1}}
[[File:Figure 903.2.39.1. Example of Application of Regulatory Signing and Pavement Markings at an Exit Ramp Termination to Deter Wrong-Way Entry.jpg|800px|alt=The example shows a horizontal two-lane roadway with an entrance ramp connecting from the north and a vertical exit ramp intersecting from the south.
At the top of the figure, on the horizontal roadway, a guide sign for “I-70 East Columbia” is shown to the right of the roadway, adjacent to a R3-1 “No Right Turn” sign and two R6-1 one-way signs, all facing eastbound traffic. Further east, at the intersection, there are two additional R6-1 one-way signs, back to back—one facing eastbound traffic and the other facing westbound traffic.
At the bottom of the figure, on the vertical exit ramp, two R5-1a “WRONG WAY” signs are shown, one on each side of the roadway, both facing north. A Wrong-Way arrow is marked on the pavement between the signs. Further north, two R5-1 “DO NOT ENTER” signs are shown on both sides of the roadway, both facing north. As the exit ramp approaches the intersection, it splits into two lanes, one for right turns and one for through/left turns, separated by a triangular-shaped channelizing island.
At the intersection of the exit ramp right-turn lane, a Wrong-Way arrow is marked on the pavement. A yield line pavement marking is shown across the lane. Adjacent to this marking and on the right side of the lane, an R1-2 “Yield” sign is shown, with an optional R1-1 “Stop” sign alternative, in which case the marking should be a stop line. Immediately behind these signs, an R5-1 “DO NOT ENTER” sign is shown facing toward the northeast and the horizontal roadway.
In the through/left-turn lane of the exit ramp, an R1-1 “Stop” sign is posted on the island in front of two back-to-back R6-1 one-way signs that face both directions of the horizontal roadway.
Spacing guidance is shown: the R5-1 signs are placed 50 to 80 feet from the intersection, while the R5-1a “WRONG WAY” signs are placed 200 to 250 feet from the DO NOT ENTER sign.|thumb|center|'''Figure 903.2.39.1.''' Example of Application of Regulatory Signing and Pavement Markings at an Exit Ramp Termination to Deter Wrong-Way Entry]]

{{SpanID|fig903.2.39.2}}
[[File:Figure 903.2.39.2. Locations of Wrong-Way signing for Divided Highways with Offset Left Turn Lanes.jpg|800px|alt=The example shows a horizontal divided highway intersected by a vertical two-lane roadway. The divided highway has two eastbound lanes, a median, and two westbound lanes, each with a left-turn lane at the intersection.
Starting with the eastbound approach, two R5-1a “WRONG WAY” signs are located outside of the travel lane, one on each side of the roadway, both facing east. Just east of these, an R5-1 “DO NOT ENTER” sign is posted on the median to the left of the eastbound left-turn lane, and another R5-1 sign is posted to the right of the eastbound right lane. Additionally, a third “DO NOT ENTER” sign is placed just east of the first sign on the right.
On the westbound approach, two R5-1a “WRONG WAY” signs are located outside of the travel lane, one on each side of the roadway, both facing west. Just west of these, an R5-1 “DO NOT ENTER” sign is posted on the median to the left of the westbound left-turn lane, and another R5-1 sign is posted to the right of the westbound right lane. Additionally, a third “DO NOT ENTER” sign is placed just west of the first sign on the right.
In total, six R5-1 “DO NOT ENTER” signs and four R5-1a “WRONG WAY” signs are shown, oriented toward drivers who may mistakenly travel the wrong way.|thumb|center|'''Figure 903.2.39.2. ''' Locations of Wrong-Way signing for Divided Highways with Offset Left Turn Lanes '''Notes:''' 
<ol style="margin-left: 1.5em;">
<li>Distances may be adjusted up to 20’ +/- based on engineering judgement</li>
<li>4”x72” red sign post delineators are optional</li>
<li>MoDOT maintained signs shall not be installed on the back of non-MoDOT maintained signs</li>
<li>See [[#fig903.2.41.1 |Figure 903.2.41.4 ]] for ONE WAY signing for Divided Highways with Offset Left Turn Lanes</li>
</ol>
]]

=={{SpanID|903.2.40}}903.2.40 ONE WAY Signs (R6-1 and R6-2) (MUTCD Section 2B.49)==

{| style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto"
|-
||[[image:R6-1.gif|left|thumb|<center>'''R6-1'''</center>|170px]]
|[[image:R6-2.gif|left|thumb|<center>'''R6-2'''</center>|110px]]
|}

'''Standard. '''Except as provided in the sixth paragraph of this article, the ONE WAY (R6-1 or R6-2) sign shall be used to indicate streets or roadways upon which vehicular traffic is allowed to travel in one direction only.

ONE WAY signs shall be placed parallel to the one-way street at all alleys and roadways that intersect one-way roadways.

At the crossing of a roadway with a divided highway that functions as two separate intersections, ONE WAY signs shall be placed, visible to each crossroad approach, on the near right and far left corners of each intersection with the directional roadways (see [[#fig903.2.41.1|Figures 903.2.41.1]] and [[#fig903.2.41.2|903.2.41.2]]).

At the crossing of a roadway with a divided highway that functions as a single intersection Keep Right (R4-7) signs (see [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2.34|EPG 903.2.34]]) and/or ONE WAY signs shall be installed (see [[#fig903.2.41.3|Figure 903.2.41.3]] and [[#fig903.2.41.4|Figure 903.2.41.4]]). If Keep Right signs are installed, they shall be placed as close as practicable to the approach ends of the medians and shall be visible to traffic on the divided highway as shown in [[#fig903.2.41.3|Figure 903.2.41.3]] and [[#fig903.2.41.4|Figure 903.2.41.4]]. If ONE WAY signs are installed, they shall be placed on the near right and far left corners of the intersection and shall be visible to each crossroad approach.

'''Option. '''At the crossing of a roadway with a divided highway, regardless of function as a single or separate intersections, ONE WAY signs may also be placed on the far right corner of the intersection as shown in [[#fig903.2.41.1|Figure 903.2.41.1]], [[#fig903.2.41.2|Figure 903.2.41.2]], [[#fig903.2.41.3|Figure 903.2.41.3]] and [[#fig903.2.41.4|Figure 903.2.41.4]].

ONE WAY signs may be omitted on the one-way roadways of divided highways, where the design of interchanges indicates the direction of traffic on the separate roadways.

'''Support. ''' [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2.39|EPG 903.2.39]] contains information for the placement of ONE WAY signs at a crossroad with an interchange.

'''Standard. '''If used at unsignalized intersections with one-way streets, ONE WAY signs shall be placed on the near right and the far left corners of the intersection facing traffic entering or crossing the one-way street.

If used at signalized intersections with one-way streets, ONE WAY signs shall be placed near the appropriate signal faces, on the poles holding the traffic signals, on the mast arm or span wire holding the signals, or at the locations specified for unsignalized intersections.

At unsignalized T-intersections where the roadway at the top of the T-intersection is a one-way roadway, ONE WAY signs shall be placed on the near-right and the far side of the intersection facing traffic on the stem approach.

ONE WAY (R6-2) signs may be used in lieu of ONE WAY (R6-1) signs on mast arms for signals or where lateral space is limited.

Where the central island of a roundabout allows for the installation of signs, ONE WAY signs may be used to direct traffic counter-clockwise around the central island (see [[#fig903.2.40.2|Figure 903.2.40.2]] and [[#fig903.2.40.3|Figure 903.2.40.3]]).

'''Guidance. '''Where used on the central island of a roundabout, the mounting height of a ONE WAY sign should be at least 4 feet, measured vertically from the bottom of the sign to the elevation of the near edge of the traveled way.

{{SpanID|fig903.2.40.1}}
[[File:Figure 903.2.40.1 Example of Regulatory and Warning Signs for a Mini-Roundabout.png|center|thumb|alt=A central island surrounded by a circular roadway is shown with four roadways that enter from the north, south, east, and west.
On the roadway entering the circular roadway from the south, a sign assembly composed of a W2-6 sign mounted above a W13-1P plaque is shown to the right of the roadway facing south. Farther north, a W11-2 sign mounted above a W16-7P plaque is shown to the right of the roadway facing south in advance of a crosswalk. Just beyond this crosswalk, an R1-2 “YIELD” sign is shown on the right side of the roadway facing south, at the entrance to the mini-roundabout.
On the opposite side of the road, before the same crosswalk, a W11-2 sign mounted above a W16-7P plaque is shown facing north.|800px|'''Figure 903.2.40.1''' Example of Regulatory and Warning Signs for a Mini-Roundabout]]

{{SpanID|fig903.2.40.2}}
[[File:Figure 903.2.40.2 Example of Regulatory and Warning Signs for a One-Lane Roundabout.png|center|thumb|alt=A central island surrounded by a circular roadway is shown with four roadways that enter from the north, south, east, and west.
On the roadway entering the circular roadway from the south, a sign assembly composed of a W2-6 sign mounted above a W13-1P plaque is shown to the right of the roadway facing south. Farther north, a W11-2 sign mounted above a W16-7P plaque is shown to the right of the roadway facing south in advance of a crosswalk. Just beyond this crosswalk, an R1-2 “YIELD” sign is shown on the right side of the roadway facing south as it enters the one-lane roundabout.
Within the central island of the roundabout, an R6-1 “ONE WAY” sign is shown facing south. In the median of the north approach, prior to entering the roundabout, an R1-2 “YIELD” sign is shown facing south.
On the opposite side of the south approach (before the same crosswalk), a W11-2 sign mounted above a W16-7P plaque is shown facing north.|800px|'''Figure 903.2.40.2''' Example of Regulatory and Warning Signs for a One-Lane Roundabout]]

{{SpanID|fig903.2.40.3}}
[[File:Figure 903.2.40.3 Example of a Regulatory and Warning Signs for a Two-Lane Roundabout with Consecutive Double lefts.png|center|thumb|alt=A central island surrounded by a circular roadway is shown with four roadways that enter from the north, south, east, and west.
On the roadway entering the circular roadway from the south, a sign assembly composed of a W2-6 sign mounted above a W13-1P plaque is shown to the right of the roadway facing south. Farther north, a W11-2 sign mounted above a W16-7P plaque is shown to the right of the roadway facing south in advance of a crosswalk. Just beyond this crosswalk, an R1-2 “YIELD” sign is shown on the right side of the roadway facing south as it enters the one-lane roundabout.
Within the central island of the roundabout, an R6-1 “ONE WAY” sign is shown facing south. In the median of the northbound approach, prior to entering the roundabout, an R1-2 “YIELD” sign is shown facing south. Additionally, in this same median, two sign assemblies composed of a W2-6 sign mounted above a W13-1P plaque are shown: one placed before the crosswalk facing south, and another placed just beyond the crosswalk facing north.
On the opposite side of the north approach (before the same crosswalk), a W11-2 sign mounted above a W16-7P plaque is shown facing north.|800px|'''Figure 903.2.40.3''' Example of a Regulatory and Warning Signs for a Two-Lane Roundabout with Consecutive Double lefts]]

=={{SpanID|903.2.41}}903.2.41 Divided Highway Crossing Signs (R6-3 and R6-3a) (MUTCD Section 2B.50)==

{| style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto"
|-
||[[image:R6-3.gif|left|thumb|<center>'''R6-3'''</center>|150px]]
|[[image:R6-3a.gif|left|thumb|<center>'''R6-3a'''</center>|150px]]
|}

'''Standard. '''On unsignalized minor-street approaches from which both left turns and right turns are permitted onto a divided highway at a crossing that functions as two separate intersections (see [[903.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 2A) #903.1.23|EPG 903.1.23]]), a Divided Highway Crossing (R6-3 or R6-3a) sign shall be used to advise road users that they are approaching an intersection with a divided highway (see [[#fig903.2.41.1|Figure 903.2.41.1]] and [[#fig903.2.41.2|Figure 903.2.41.2]]).

If a Divided Highway Crossing sign is used at a four-leg intersection, the R6-3 sign shall be used. If used at a T-intersection, the R6-3a sign shall be used.

The Divided Highway Crossing sign shall be located on the near right corner of the intersection, mounted beneath a STOP or YIELD sign or on a separate support.

The DIVIDED HIGHWAY (R6-3b) sign may be used in situations where the R6-3 or R6-3a Divided Highway Crossing signs may be confusing.

{{SpanID|fig903.2.41.1}}
[[File:Figure 903.2.41.1 ONE WAY Signing for Divided Highways with Median Widths Greater than 150 Feet.png|center|thumb|alt=The example shows a horizontal divided highway intersected by a vertical two-lane roadway. The divided highway has two lanes to the east, a wide median greater than 150 feet, and two lanes to the west, each with a left-turn lane at the intersection.
On the vertical roadway, northbound approach, on the right just before the intersection with the east lanes there is an R6-1 “ONE WAY” sign with an R1-1 “STOP” sign and an R6-3 “Divided Highway” sign, all facing south. Behind these signs, back-to-back, there is an R6-1 “ONE WAY” sign facing north. Just past the intersection with the east lanes, there is an R6-1 “ONE WAY” sign on the right corner facing south.
Further north, at the intersection with the west lanes, an R6-1 “ONE WAY” sign with an R1-1 “STOP” sign faces south. Behind this sign, back-to-back, there is an R6-1 “ONE WAY” sign facing north. Just past the intersection with the west lanes, there is an R6-1 “ONE WAY” sign on the right corner facing south.
On the vertical roadway, southbound approach, the signing is mirrored. On the right just before the intersection with the west lanes, there is an R6-1 “ONE WAY” sign with an R1-1 “STOP” sign and an R6-3 “Divided Highway” sign, all facing north. Behind these signs, back-to-back, there is an R6-1 “ONE WAY” sign facing south. Just past the intersection with the west lanes, there is an R6-1 “ONE WAY” sign on the right corner facing north.
Further south, at the intersection with the east lanes, an R6-1 “ONE WAY” sign with an R1-1 “STOP” sign faces north. Behind this sign, back-to-back, there is an R6-1 “ONE WAY” sign facing south. Just past the intersection with the east lanes, there is an R6-1 “ONE WAY” sign on the right corner facing north.|800px|'''Figure 903.2.41.1''' ONE WAY Signing for Divided Highways with Median Widths Greater than 150 Feet]]

{{SpanID|fig903.2.41.2}}
[[File:Figure 903.2.41.2 ONE WAY Signing for Divided Highways with Median Widths of 60 Feet to 150 Feet.png|center|thumb|alt=The example shows a horizontal divided highway intersected by a vertical two-lane roadway. The divided highway has two lanes to the east, a median width between 60 and 150 feet, and two lanes to the west, each with a left-turn lane at the intersection.
On the vertical roadway, northbound approach, on the right just before the intersection with the east lanes there is an R6-1 “ONE WAY” sign with an R1-1 “STOP” sign and an R6-3 “Divided Highway” sign, all facing south. Behind these signs, back-to-back, there is an R6-1 “ONE WAY” sign facing north. Just past the intersection with the east lanes, there is an R6-1 “ONE WAY” sign on the right side of the roadway facing south.
Further north, at the intersection with the west lanes, an R6-1 “ONE WAY” sign with either an R1-1 “STOP” sign or an R1-2 “YIELD” sign faces south. Behind this sign, back-to-back, there is an R6-1 “ONE WAY” sign facing north. Just past the intersection with the west lanes, there is an R6-1 “ONE WAY” sign on the right corner facing south.
On the vertical roadway, southbound approach, the signing is mirrored. On the right just before the intersection with the west lanes, there is an R6-1 “ONE WAY” sign with an R1-1 “STOP” sign and an R6-3 “Divided Highway” sign, all facing north. Behind these signs, back-to-back, there is an R6-1 “ONE WAY” sign facing south. Just past the intersection with the west lanes, there is an R6-1 “ONE WAY” sign on the right side of the roadway facing north.
Further south, at the intersection with the east lanes, an R6-1 “ONE WAY” sign with either an R1-1 “STOP” sign or an R1-2 “YIELD” sign faces north. Behind this sign, back-to-back, there is an R6-1 “ONE WAY” sign facing south. Just past the intersection with the east lanes, there is an R6-1 “ONE WAY” sign on the right corner facing north.|800px|'''Figure 903.2.41.2''' ONE WAY Signing for Divided Highways with Median Widths of 60 Feet to 150 Feet]]

{{SpanID|fig903.2.41.3}}
[[File:Figure 903.2.41.3 ONE WAY Signing for Divided Highways with Median Widths Narrower Than 60 Feet.png|center|thumb|alt=A vertical two-lane roadway intersects a horizontal highway with two lanes to the east, a median narrower than 60 feet, and two lanes to the west. Each direction of the horizontal highway has a left-turn lane at its intersection with the vertical roadway.
On the vertical roadway, northbound approach, on the right just before the intersection with the east lanes there is an R6-1 “ONE WAY” sign with an R1-1 “STOP” sign and an R6-3 “Divided Highway” sign, all facing south. Behind these signs, back-to-back, there is an R6-1 “ONE WAY” sign facing north. Just past the intersection with the east lanes, there is an R4-7 “KEEP RIGHT” sign posted on the median facing west.
Further north, past the intersection with the west lanes, an R6-1 “ONE WAY” sign faces south (optional).
On the vertical roadway, southbound approach, the signing is mirrored. On the right just before the intersection with the west lanes, there is an R6-1 “ONE WAY” sign with an R1-1 “STOP” sign and an R6-3 “Divided Highway” sign, all facing north. Behind these signs, back-to-back, there is an R6-1 “ONE WAY” sign facing south. Just past the intersection with the west lanes, there is an R4-7 “KEEP RIGHT” sign posted on the median facing east.
Further south, past the intersection with the east lanes, an R6-1 “ONE WAY” sign faces north (optional).|800px|'''Figure 903.2.41.3''' ONE WAY Signing for Divided Highways with Median Widths Narrower Than 60 Feet]]

{{SpanID|fig903.2.41.4}}
[[File:Figure 903.2.41.4 ONE WAY Signing for Divided Highways with Offset Left Turn Lanes.png|center|thumb|alt=A vertical two-lane roadway intersects a horizontal highway with two lanes to the east, a median, and two lanes to the west. Each direction of the horizontal highway has a left-turn lane at its intersection with the vertical roadway, and the left-turn lanes are offset across the median.
On the vertical roadway, north approach, on the right just before the intersection with the east lanes there is an R6-1 “ONE WAY” sign with an R1-1 “STOP” sign and an R6-3 “Divided Highway” sign, all facing south. Behind these signs, back-to-back, there is an R6-1 “ONE WAY” sign facing north. Just past the intersection with the east lanes, there is an R4-7 “KEEP RIGHT” sign posted on the median facing west.
Further north, past the intersection with the west lanes, an R6-1 “ONE WAY” sign faces south (optional).
On the vertical roadway, south approach, the signing is mirrored. On the right just before the intersection with the west lanes, there is an R6-1 “ONE WAY” sign with an R1-1 “STOP” sign and an R6-3 “Divided Highway” sign, all facing north. Behind these signs, back-to-back, there is an R6-1 “ONE WAY” sign facing south. Just past the intersection with the west lanes, there is an R4-7 “KEEP RIGHT” sign posted on the median facing east.
Further south, past the intersection with the east lanes, an R6-1 “ONE WAY” sign faces north (optional).|800px|'''Figure 903.2.41.4''' ONE WAY Signing for Divided Highways with Offset Left Turn Lanes]]

=={{SpanID|903.2.42}}903.2.42 Parking, Standing, and Stopping Signs (R7 and R8 Series) (MUTCD Section 2B.52)==

'''Support. '''Parking signs pertain to the parking, standing, and stopping of vehicles along the roadway and in designated parking areas. They cover a wide variety of regulations, and only general guidance can be provided here. The word “standing” when used on the R7 and R8 series of signs refers to the practice of a driver keeping the vehicle in a stationary position while continuing to occupy the vehicle. The word “stopping” when used on the R7 and R8 series signs refers to any vehicle, occupied by a driver or not, that stops other than to avoid conflict with other traffic or to comply with official direction. Other types of activities such as active loading, active passenger loading, and/or waiting might be established in State or local codes for use on R7 and R8 series signs.

Parking signs are categorized as either (1) prohibiting parking or (2) permitting parking with restrictions on how parking is allowed.

The types of parking, standing, or stopping prohibitions that might be encountered include, but are not limited to:
::A. Prohibited at all times;
::B. Prohibited only at certain times of the day and/or days of the week;
::C. Prohibited with exceptions, such as for bus stops, loading/unloading zones, persons with disabilities, or electric vehicle charging stations; or
::D. Prohibited under certain conditions, such as Snow Emergency Routes.

Permissive parking signs allowing parking with restrictions include, but are not limited to:
::A. Parking only allowed for limited time duration (such as 30 minutes or for 1 hour);
::B. Metered parking requiring payment at an individual or a multi-space parking meter, or through electronic means such as by telephone or mobile application.;
::C. Parking only for specific persons (such as those with disabilities or patrons or employees of a business) or specific vehicle types (such as electric vehicles, police/government vehicles, motorcycles, bicycles, or taxis);
::D. Angled or back-in angled parking when it is not commonly used in the area;
::E. Parking programs such as neighborhood/residential permits, school areas, or special events; and
::F. Emergency parking or stopping only.

The District Engineer is authorized to act on requests for parking restrictions within incorporated areas upon receipt of a city ordinance requesting the same.

'''Option. '''The District Engineer may authorize parking restrictions after completion of a study by the district staff and review by county and local law enforcement.

Within interchange areas and on ramps the standard NO PARKING ANYTIME (R7-1) sign may be used.

'''Guidance. '''Local law enforcement agencies should be consulted when determining if there is a need for no parking signs to be installed.

=={{SpanID|903.2.43}}903.2.43 Design of Parking, Standing, and Stopping Signs (MUTCD Section 2B.53)==
<center>
{| style="text-align: center;"
|-
| [[File:R7-1.gif|center|thumb|alt=|105px|<center>'''R7-1 '''</center>]]
| [[File:R7-108.gif|center|thumb|alt=|105px|<center>'''R7-108 '''</center>]]
| [[File:R7-111.gif|center|thumb|alt=|105px|<center>'''R7-111 '''</center>]]
| [[File:R7-111a.gif|center|thumb|alt=|105px|<center>'''R7-111a '''</center>]]
| [[File:R7-112.gif|center|thumb|alt=|105px|<center>'''R7-112 '''</center>]]
| [[File:R7-112a.gif|center|thumb|alt=|105px|<center>'''R7-112a '''</center>]]
|-
| [[File:R7-112b.gif|center|thumb|alt=|105px|<center>'''R7-112b '''</center>]]
| [[File:R7-113.gif|center|thumb|alt=|105px|<center>'''R7-113 '''</center>]]
| [[File:R7-113aP.gif|center|thumb|alt=|105px|<center>'''R7-113aP '''</center>]][[File:R7-113bP.gif|center|thumb|alt=|105px|<center>'''R7-113bP '''</center>]]
| [[File:R7-114a.gif|center|thumb|alt=|105px|<center>'''R7-114a '''</center>]]
| [[File:R7-114b.jpg|center|thumb|alt=|105px|<center>'''R7-114b '''</center>]]
| [[File:R7-201P.gif|center|thumb|alt=|105px|<center>'''R7-201P '''</center>]]
|-
| [[File:R7-202P.gif|center|thumb|alt=|105px|<center>'''R7-202P '''</center>]]
| [[File:R7-5.gif|center|thumb|alt=|105px|<center>'''R7-5 '''</center>]]
| [[File:R7-8.gif|center|thumb|alt=|105px|<center>'''R7-8 '''</center>]]
| [[File:R7-8aP.gif|center|thumb|alt=|105px|<center>'''R7-8aP '''</center>]]
| [[File:R7-35.png|center|thumb|alt=|105px|<center>'''R7-35 '''</center>]]

|}
</center>
'''Standard. '''Parking, standing, or stopping signs shall be rectangular.

Public agencies shall follow established law (State law, local ordinance, or regulation) as adopted by the authorized agency regarding what messages are allowed on parking signs.

The legend on parking signs shall state applicable regulations. Parking signs shall comply with the standards of shape, color, and location.

Prohibitive parking signs shall be used where parking is prohibited at all times or at specific times. Except as otherwise provided in this article, parking signs shall have a red legend and border on a white background and, when the parking prohibition symbol is used, the symbol “P” shall be black.

Permissive parking signs shall be used where only time-limited parking or parking in a particular manner is allowed. Permissive parking signs shall have a green legend and border on a white background.

'''Guidance. '''Parking information, should be displayed from top to bottom of the sign, as applicable, in the following order:
::A. The restriction or prohibition;
::B. The times of the day that it is applicable, if not all hours;
::C. The days of the week that it is applicable, if not every day;
::D. Qualifying or supplementary information;
::E. Exemptions to the restriction of prohibition; and
::F. Any tow-away message or symbol.

If the parking regulation applies to a limited area or zone, the limits of the regulation should be shown by arrows or supplemental plaques. If arrows are used and if the sign is at the end of a parking zone, there should be a single-headed arrow pointing in the direction that the regulation is in effect. If the sign is at an intermediate point in a zone, there should be a double-headed arrow pointing both ways. When a single sign is used at the transition point between two parking zones, it should display a right arrow and a left arrow pointing in the direction that the respective regulations apply.

'''Standard. '''The times and days for which the parking regulations are in effect shall be posted if they are not in effect at all times of day or all days of the week.

'''Option. '''As an alternate to the use of arrows to show designated restriction zones, the following word messages may be used: BEGIN, END, HERE TO CORNER, HERE TO ALLEY, and THIS SIDE OF SIGN.

'''Standard. '''Where parking spaces are reserved for persons with disabilities, the Accessible Parking (R7-8) sign shall be used to designate the space and shall display the official International Symbol of Accessibility.

Where parking spaces that are reserved for persons with disabilities are designed to accommodate wheelchair vans, a VAN ACCESSIBLE (R7-8aP) plaque shall be mounted below the R7-8 sign.

The RESERVED PARKING for Persons with Disabilities (R7-8) sign shall be installed in rest area parking lots 10 ft. to 16 ft. from the edge of the handicap ramp.

'''Support. '''The R7-8L has a left arrow and the R7-8R a right arrow. The R7-8 does not have an arrow.

'''Guidance. '''Where parking spaces are designated for parking of electric vehicles, an Electric Vehicle Parking (R7-111 series, R7-112 series, and R7-113) sign should be installed adjacent to the designated spaces. Where there is no time limit, the R7-111 series sign should be used. Where parking is subject to a time limit, the R7-112 series sign should be used.

Where parking spaces are only designated for charging of electric vehicles, an R7-113 sign or R7-114 series sign should be installed adjacent to the designated spaces.

Where additional restrictions apply while a vehicle occupies the designated space, the R7-113P series plaques should be installed below the R7-113 sign or the R7-114 series signs.

'''Option. '''A Tow-Away Zone (R7-201P or R7-201aP) plaque may be mounted below any parking prohibition sign. The word legend TOW-AWAY ZONE may be incorporated into the parking prohibition sign in lieu of using a separate plaque.

The R7-201P plaque may have a black or red symbol and border on a white background.

'''Guidance. '''When a legend other than that on the standard parking signs is necessary, letter height, symbol size, and basic sign layout should be consistent with the those shown on the standard parking signs as detailed in the FHWA “Standard Highway Signs” publication (see [[911 General (MUTCD Part 1) #911.1.5|EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1A.05)]]). '''

In general, the letter height of the principal legend on parking signs sized for urbanized applications should be at least 2 inches.

The NO PARKING ON BRIDGE sign (R7-35) should be used at bridge ends or on bridges where motorists tend to block or endanger through traffic by parking on the bridge.

=={{SpanID|903.2.44}}903.2.44 Placement of Parking, Standing, and Stopping Signs (MUTCD Section 2B.54)==

'''Support. '''The efficacy of parking, standing, and stopping signs, when used on conventional roads in urbanized or developed environments, depends on their visibility and consistent placement along a street or within a particular block. It is often impracticable for the entire legend to be legible from similar distances as for other types of signs. Therefore, it is important that their conventional form be recognizable from an adequate distance such that the road user can obtain the information upon closer inspection.

'''Guidance. '''When signs with arrows are used to indicate the extent of the restricted zones, the signs should be set at an angle of not less than 30 degrees nor more than 45 degrees with the line of traffic flow in order to be visible to approaching traffic.

When signs are placed at the head of perpendicular parking stalls, the signs should be parallel to the roadway facing the parking stall.

Spacing of signs should be based on legibility, conspicuity, and sign orientation.

If the zone is long, signs should be used at intermediate points within the zone.

If the signs are mounted at an angle of 90 degrees to the curb line, two signs should be mounted back to back at the transition point between two parking zones, each with an appended THIS SIDE OF SIGN (R7-202P) supplemental plaque.

If the signs are mounted at an angle of 90 degrees to the curb line, signs without any arrows or appended plaques should be used at intermediate points within a parking zone, facing in the direction of approaching traffic. Otherwise, the standards of placement should be the same as for signs using directional arrows.

'''Option. '''Blanket parking regulations that apply to an entire jurisdiction may, if legal, be posted in the vicinity of the jurisdictional boundary lines. Blanket parking regulations that apply to a posted zone or district may, if legal, be posted at the entry points to the zone or district.

=={{SpanID|903.2.45}}903.2.45 Emergency Restriction Signs (R8-7) (MUTCD Section 2B.55)==

[[image:R8-7.gif|center|150px|thumb|<center>'''R8-7'''</center>]]

'''Standard. '''Emergency Restriction signs shall be rectangular and shall have a black legend and border on a white background.

'''Option. '''The EMERGENCY STOPPING ONLY (R8-7) sign may be used to discourage or prohibit shoulder parking on the interstate and other freeway highway systems based on the Missouri Revised Statutes, Section 304.024.

'''Guidance. '''The use of the EMERGENCY STOPPING ONLY sign should be held to a minimum and not erected unless there is a specific problem.

'''Support. ''' [[913.2 Signs (MUTCD Chapter 8B) #913.2.7|EPG 913.2.7]] contains information for the use of the DO NOT STOP ON TRACKS (R8-8) sign to discourage or prohibit parking or stopping on railroad or light rail transit tracks.

=={{SpanID|903.2.46}}903.2.46 Pedestrian Crossing Signs (R9-3) (MUTCD Section 2B.57)==
<center>
{|
|-
| [[File:R9-3.jpg|thumb|center|<center>'''R9-3'''</center>|120px]]
| [[File:R9-3a.jpg|thumb|center|<center>'''R9-3a'''</center>|120px]]
|}</center>

'''Option. '''Pedestrian Crossing signs may be used to limit pedestrian crossing to specific locations.

'''Standard. '''If used, Pedestrian Crossing signs shall be installed to face pedestrian approaches.

'''Option. '''The No Pedestrian Crossing (R9-3) sign may be used to prohibit pedestrians from crossing a roadway at an undesirable location or in front of a school or other public building where a crossing is not designated.

The NO PEDESTRIAN CROSSING (R9-3a) word message sign may be used as an alternate to the R9-3 symbol sign.

'''Support. '''Pedestrians with vision disabilities might need features other than traffic control devices to provide effective communication of the prohibition of pedestrian crossing.

=={{SpanID|903.2.47}}903.2.47 Traffic Signal Pedestrian and Bicyclist Actuation Signs (R10-3b, R10-3d, R10-3e, R10-4, and R10-25) (MUTCD Section 2B.58)==

<center>
{|
|-
| [[File:R10-3b.jpg|center|thumb|alt=|105px|<center>'''R10-3b'''</center>]]
| [[File:R10-3d.jpg|center|thumb|alt=|105px|<center>'''R10-3d'''</center>]]
| [[File:R10-3e.jpg|center|thumb|alt=|105px|<center>'''R10-3e'''</center>]]
| [[File:R10-4.jpg|center|thumb|alt=|105px|<center>'''R10-4'''</center>]]
| [[File:R10-25.jpg|center|thumb|alt=|105px|<center>'''R10-25'''</center>]]
|-
|}
</center>

'''Standard. '''Where manual actuation of a traffic signal is required for pedestrians or bicyclists to call a signal phase to cross the roadway, traffic signal signs applicable to pedestrian actuation or bicyclist actuation shall be mounted immediately above or incorporated into the push button detector units (see [[902.9 Pedestrian Control Features (MUTCD Chapter 4I) #902.9.5|EPG 902.9.5]]). '''

'''Support. '''Traffic signal signs applicable to pedestrians include:
::A. Push Button for Walk Signal (R10-3 series), and
::B. Push Button for Green Signal (R10-4 series).

'''Option. '''If the signalized intersection has push buttons but no pedestrian heads the PUSH BUTTON FOR GREEN SIGNAL (R10-4) sign may be used instead of the R10-3e and R10-3j signs.

'''Guidance. '''The finger in the push button symbol on the R10-4 sign should point in the same direction as the arrow on the sign.

'''Option. '''Where symbolic pedestrian signal indications are used, an educational sign (R10-3b) may be used at signalized intersections. The R10-3d educational sign may be used to inform pedestrians that the pedestrian clearance time is sufficient only for the pedestrian to cross to the median at locations where pedestrians cross in two stages using a median refuge island. The R10-3e educational sign may be used where countdown pedestrian signals have been provided.

The R10-3e sign shall be used with pre-timed pedestrian signals. For actuated pedestrian signal, the R10-3eL and R10-3eR shall be mounted immediately above or incorporated in pedestrian pushbutton units.

The R10-25 sign may be used where a push button detector has been installed for pedestrians to activate In-Roadway Warning Lights (see [[902.20 In-Roadway Warning Lights (MUTCD Chapter 4U) #902.20|EPG 902.20]]) or flashing beacons that have been added to the pedestrian warning signs.

=={{SpanID|903.2.48}}903.2.48 Traffic Signal Signs and Plaques (R10-5 through R10-23a) (MUTCD Section 2B.59)==
<center>
{|
|-
| [[File:R10-5.gif|center|thumb|alt=|105px|<center>'''R10-5 '''</center>]]
| [[File:R10-6.gif|center|thumb|alt=|105px|<center>'''R10-6 '''</center>]]
| [[File:R10-7.gif|center|thumb|alt=|105px|<center>'''R10-7 '''</center>]]
| [[File:R10-10.gif|center|thumb|alt=|105px|<center>'''R10-10 '''</center>]]
|-
| [[File:R10-12.gif|center|thumb|alt=|105px|<center>'''R10-12 '''</center>]]
| [[File:R10-12a.gif|center|thumb|alt=|105px|<center>'''R10-12a '''</center>]]
| [[File:R10-13.gif|center|thumb|alt=|105px|<center>'''R10-13 '''</center>]]
| [[File:R10-14.gif|center|thumb|alt=|105px|<center>'''R10-14 '''</center>]]
| [[File:R10-14a.gif|center|thumb|alt=|105px|<center>'''R10-14a '''</center>]]
|-
| [[File:R10-14b.jpg|center|thumb|alt=|105px|<center>'''R10-14b '''</center>]]
| [[File:R10-15.gif|center|thumb|alt=|105px|<center>'''R10-15 '''</center>]]
| [[File:R10-23.gif|center|thumb|alt=|105px|<center>'''R10-23 '''</center>]]
| [[File:R10-23a.jpg|center|thumb|alt=|105px|<center>'''R10-23a '''</center>]]
|-
|}
</center>

'''Option. '''To supplement traffic signal control, traffic signal (R10-5 through R10-30) signs may be used to regulate road users.

Traffic signal signs may be installed at certain locations to clarify signal control. Among the legends that may be used for this purpose are:
::A. LEFT (RIGHT) ON GREEN ARROW ONLY (R10-5),
::B. STOP HERE ON RED (R10-6) for observance of stop lines,
::C. DO NOT BLOCK INTERSECTION (R10-7) for avoidance of traffic obstructions,
::D. LEFT (RIGHT) TURN SIGNAL (R10-10),
::E. U TURN SIGNAL (R10-10a) for exclusive control of a U-turn movement,
::F. LEFT (RIGHT) TURN YIELD ON GREEN (symbolic circular green) (R10-12), and
::G. LEFT (RIGHT) TURN YIELD ON FLASHING YELLOW ARROW (R10-12a).

'''Guidance. '''If used, the LEFT ON GREEN ARROW ONLY sign, the LEFT TURN SIGNAL sign, the LEFT TURN YIELD ON GREEN (symbolic circular green) sign, or the LEFT TURN YIELD ON FLASHING YELLOW ARROW sign should be located adjacent to the left-turn signal face.

'''Standard. '''The LEFT TURN SIGNAL (R10-10L) sign has been discontinued by MoDOT. These signs shall remain in place until the circular red indication is replaced with a red left arrow (see [[902.6 Steady (Stop-and-Go) Operation of Traffic Control Signals (MUTCD Chapter 4F) #902.6.6|EPG 902.6.6]] Signal Indications for Protected Only Mode Left-Turn Movements in a Separate Signal Face).

If an existing R10-10L is at the end of its service life, it shall be removed, and the circular red indication shall be replaced with a red left arrow.

'''Guidance. '''If used, the RIGHT ON GREEN ARROW ONLY sign, the RIGHT TURN SIGNAL sign, or the RIGHT TURN YIELD ON FLASHING YELLOW ARROW sign should be located adjacent to the right-turn signal face.

'''Option. '''If used, a U TURN SIGNAL (R10-10a) sign may be installed adjacent to the signal face that exclusively controls a U-turn movement.

'''Standard. '''The CROSSWALK—STOP ON RED (symbolic circular red) (R10-23) and STOP ON RED-YIELD ON FLASHING RED AFTER STOP (R10-23a) signs shall only be used in conjunction with pedestrian hybrid beacons (see [[902.10 Pedestrian Hybrid Beacons (MUTCD Chapter 4J) #902.10.2|EPG 902.10.2]]).

The EMERGENCY SIGNAL (R10-13) sign shall be used in conjunction with emergency-vehicle traffic control signals (see [[902.13 Traffic Control Signals for Emergency-Vehicle Access (MUTCD Chapter 4M) #902.13.2|EPG 902.13.2]]).

The EMERGENCY SIGNAL—STOP ON FLASHING RED (R10-14 or R10-14a) sign shall be used in conjunction with emergency-vehicle hybrid beacons (see [[902.14 Hybrid Beacons for Emergency-Vehicle Access (MUTCD Chapter 4N) #902.14.2|EPG 902.14.2]]).

'''Option. '''If needed for extra emphasis, a STOP HERE ON FLASHING RED (R10-14b) sign may be installed with an emergency-vehicle hybrid beacon.

'''Standard. '''The Left Turn Yield to Bicycles (R10-12b) sign shall be limited to applications where the conflicting bicyclist movement would be unexpected in direction, location, or similar condition that would tend to violate the expectation of a turning motorist.

'''Guidance. '''The Left Turn Yield to Bicycles sign should be located adjacent to the left-turn signal face.

Currently the R10-12b sign is not used by MoDOT. Contact the Highway Safety and Traffic division when considering the use of this sign.

Where conditions might warrant additional emphasis to drivers turning at a signalized intersection where potential pedestrian conflicts might not be readily apparent, a Turning Vehicles Yield to Pedestrians (R10-15) sign may be used.

The R10-15 series signs, where used, should be placed as follows:
::A. On the near right corner of the signalized intersection for right-turning vehicles.
::B. On the far left corner of the signalized intersection for the left-turning vehicles onto a two-way street.
::C. On the near left corner of the signalized intersection for left-turning vehicles from a one-way street onto a one-way street.

=={{SpanID|903.2.49}}903.2.49 No Turn on Red Signs (R10-11 and R10-30a) (MUTCD Section 2B.60)==

<center>
{|
| [[File:R10-11.gif|thumb|center|105px|<center>'''R10-11'''</center>]]
|}
</center>

'''Standard. '''Where a right turn on a circular red signal indication (or a left turn on a circular red signal indication from a one-way street to a one-way street) is to be prohibited, a NO TURN ON RED (R10-11) word message sign shall be used.

The NO TURN ON RED (R10-11) sign shall be used to prohibit a right turn on red.

'''Guidance. '''If used, the No Turn on Red sign should be installed near the appropriate signal head.

A No Turn on Red sign should be considered when an engineering study finds that one or more of the following conditions exists:
::A. Inadequate sight distance to vehicles approaching from the left (or right, if applicable);
::B. Geometrics or operational characteristics of the intersection that might result in unexpected conflicts;
::C. An exclusive pedestrian or bicycle phase;
::D. An unacceptable number of conflicting pedestrian movements with right-turn-on-red maneuvers, especially involving children, older pedestrians, or persons with disabilities;
::E. More than three right-turn-on-red crashes reported in a 12-month period for the particular approach; or
::F. The skew angle of the intersecting roadways creates difficulty for drivers to see traffic approaching from their left (or right, if applicable).

'''Standard. '''If an R10-11 sign with conventional road size as shown in [[#tab903.2.3|Table 903.2.3]] is used on an approach on the far side of the intersection and the distance between the stop line and the sign is greater than 120 feet, then a duplicate sign shall be located on the near side of the intersection to supplement the sign on the far side of the intersection.

Except as provided by the option below, if right turn on red (RTOR) is restricted, then the NO TURN ON RED (R10-11) sign shall be used in lieu of the RIGHT TURN SIGNAL sign.

'''Guidance. '''If used, the NO TURN ON RED sign should mounted adjacent to the far right signal indication. Refer to [[902.6 Steady (Stop-and-Go) Operation of Traffic Control Signals (MUTCD Chapter 4F) #902.6.13|EPG 902.6.13]] to determine when a NO TURN ON RED sign should be considered.

'''Option. '''Where space is limited, the square-shaped NO TURN ON RED (R10-11b) sign may be used instead of the R10-11 sign.

When a no-turn-on-red restriction applies during certain time periods only, the following alternatives may be used:
::A Movement Prohibition (R3-1, R3-2, R3-4, R3-18, and R3-27) signs or NO TURN ON RED signs displayed by using a blank-out sign for the time period or one or more portion(s) of a particular cycle of the traffic control signal during which the prohibition is applicable; or

White LEDs may be used in the border and activated during periods of turn prohibition to enhance the sign conspicuity.

A RIGHT TURN ON RED MUST YIELD TO U-TURN (R10-30) sign may be installed to remind road users that they must yield to conflicting U-turn traffic on the street or highway onto which they are turning right on a red signal after stopping.

A RIGHT TURN MUST YIELD TO U-TURN (R10-30a) sign may be installed under a yield sign to remind road users that they must yield to conflicting U-turn traffic on the street or highway on to which they are turning right controlled by a yield sign.

=={{SpanID|903.2.50}}903.2.50 Ramp Metering Signs (R10-28 and R10-29) (MUTCD Section 2B.61)==

<center>
{|
| [[File:R10-28.jpg|thumb|center|95px|<center>'''R10-28'''</center>]]
| [[File:R10-29.jpg|thumb|center|125px|<center>'''R10-29'''</center>]]
|}
</center>

'''Option. '''When ramp control signals (see [[902.16 Traffic Control Signals for Freeway Entrance Ramps (MUTCD Chapter 4P) #902.2.16|EPG 902.16]]) are used to meter traffic on a freeway or expressway entrance ramp, regulatory signs with legends appropriate to the control may be installed adjacent to the ramp control signal faces.

For entrance ramps with only one controlled lane, an XX VEHICLE(S) PER GREEN (R10-28) sign may be used to inform road users of the number of vehicles that are permitted to proceed during each short display of the green signal indication. For entrance ramps with more than one controlled lane, an XX VEHICLE(S) PER GREEN EACH LANE (R10-29) sign may be used to inform road users of the number of vehicles that are permitted to proceed from each lane during each short display of the green signal indication.

'''Support. '''[[903.12 Changeable Message Signs (MUTCD Chapter 2L) #903.12|EPG 903.12]] contains provisions for the use of blank-out or changeable message signs when the metering is limited by time, day, or condition.

=={{SpanID|903.2.51}}903.2.51 KEEP OFF MEDIAN Sign (R11-1) (MUTCD Section 2B.62)==

<center>
{|
|[[File:R11-1.jpg|thumb|center|105px|<center>'''R11-1'''</center>]]
|}
</center>

'''Option. '''The KEEP OFF MEDIAN (R11-1) sign may be used to prohibit driving into or parking on the median.

'''Guidance. '''The KEEP OFF MEDIAN sign should be installed on the left-hand side of the roadway within the median at random intervals as needed wherever there is a tendency for encroachment.

'''Support. '''A median is the area between two roadways of a divided highway measured from edge of travel way to edge of travel way or the area between a highway and an outer road.

=={{SpanID|903.2.52}}903.2.52 ROAD CLOSED Sign (R11-2) and LOCAL TRAFFIC ONLY Signs (R11-3 and R11-4) (MUTCD Section 2B.63)==

<center>
{|
|[[File:R11-2.jpg|thumb|center|135px|<center>'''R11-2'''</center>]]
|[[File:R11-3.jpg|thumb|center|170px|<center>'''R11-3'''</center>]]
|[[File:R11-4.jpg|thumb|center|170px|<center>'''R11-4'''</center>]]
|}
</center>

'''Guidance. '''The ROAD CLOSED (R11-2) sign should be installed where roads have been closed to all traffic (except authorized vehicles).

ROAD CLOSED—LOCAL TRAFFIC ONLY (R11-3) or ROAD CLOSED TO THRU TRAFFIC (R11-4) signs should be used where through traffic is not permitted, or for a closure some distance beyond the sign, but where the highway is open for local traffic up to the point of closure.

'''Standard. '''The Road Closed (R11-2, R11-3, and R11-4) signs shall be designed as horizontal rectangles. These signs shall be preceded by the applicable Advance Road Closed warning sign with the secondary legend AHEAD and, if applicable, an Advance Detour warning sign (see [[616.8 TTC Zone Warning Signs (MUTCD Chapter 6H) #616.8.4|EPG 616.8.4]]).

=={{SpanID|903.2.53}}903.2.53 Weight Limit Sign (R12-1) (MUTCD Section 2B.64)==

<center>
{|
|[[File:R12-1.jpg|thumb|center|105px|<center>'''R12-1'''</center>]]
|}
</center>

'''Support. '''In 2022, a new load posting policy was implemented by MoDOT in the EPG. This new policy resulted from a plan of corrective action with FHWA. With this new policy, all structures on the national bridge inventory will be categorized under this new policy within the next 10 years. There are 10,387 structures on the state system. 270 of these structures are major or unusual structures and these will be categorized over the next 10 years. The remaining 10,117 structures consist of 6,940 normal bridges and 3,177 culverts. The normal bridges will be categorized in the next 4 years and the culverts will be reviewed in the last 3 years of the 10 year timeline of the plan. The R12-1 sign remains in use, with the remaining MoDOT bridge posting signs being replaced by one of three new bridge posting signs in this article.

'''Standard. '''Weight limit signs shall be used to indicate a structure that has a vehicle weight restriction.

'''Guidance. '''The units shown on any weight limit sign should be tons.

'''Standard. '''Weight limit signs shall be installed in accordance with the new bridge posting classifications once completed.

A weight limit sign shall be located at the applicable structure in accordance with (see [[#tab903.2.53|Table 903.2.53]] and [[#fig903.2.53.1|Figures 903.2.53.1]] to [[#fig903.2.53.3|903.2.53.3]]).

An additional weight limit sign, with an advisory distance or directional legend, shall be located in advance of the applicable section of highway or structure so that prohibited vehicles can detour or turn around prior to the limit zone.

In commercial zones, bridges with the capacity of more the 65 tons shall not be posted, as normally loads in excess of 65 tons will not occur.

Once a bridge has been categorized, the bridge posting signs shall be updated within 30 days of the bridge posting reclassification. This includes installing the correct sign and configuring the sign locations to match the appropriate bridge posting figure (see [[#fig903.2.53.1|Figures 903.2.53.1]] to [[#fig903.2.53.3|903.2.53.3]]).

'''Support. '''If existing weight limit signs need to be replaced prior to a bridge being categorized, contact Highway Safety and Traffic Division, Signing Section, for guidance.

<div align="center";>
{| border="1" class="wikitable" style="text-align:center;"
|+ Table 903.2.53, Listing of Bridge Posting Categories
! style="background:#BEBEBE" colspan="6" | Statewide Legal Load Posting Gross Weight Categories
|-
! Classification || Category || Description || Sign Verbiage || Sign || Figure
|-
| Normal Legal || SW-1 || No Posting Required || N/A || N/A || N/A
|-
| Normal Legal || SW-2 || General Gross Weight Limit || Weight Limit XX Tons || R12-1 || 903.5.36.1
|-
| Normal Legal || SW-3 || Single Unit Vehicle Gross Weight Limit || Weight Limit Single Unit XX Tons || R12-12 || 903.5.36.1
|-
| Normal Legal || SW-4 || Combination Vehicle Gross Weight Limit || Weight Limit Combination XX Tons || R12-13 || 903.5.36.1
|-
| Normal Legal || SW-5 || Single Unit Vehicle and Combination Vehicle Gross Weight Limits || Weight Limit Single Unit XX Tons Combination XX Tons || R12-14 || 903.5.36.1
|-
| colspan="6" | 
|-
! style="background:#BEBEBE" colspan="6" | Statewide Legal Load Posting Centerline Restriction with Gross Weight Categories
|-
! Classification || Category || Description || Sign Verbiage || Sign || Figure
|-
| Lane Restricted || LR-1 || Lane Restriction Only || N/A || N/A || 903.5.36.3
|-
| Lane Restricted || LR-2 || Lane Restriction with General Gross Weight Limit || Weight Limit XX Tons || R12-1 || 903.5.36.2
|-
| Lane Restricted || LR-3 || Lane Restriction with Single Unit Vehicle Gross Weight Limit || Weight Limit Single Unit XX Tons || R12-12 || 903.5.36.2
|-
| Lane Restricted || LR-4 || Lane Restriction with Combination Vehicle Gross Weight Limit || Weight Limit Combination XX Tons || R12-13 || 903.5.36.2
|-
| Lane Restricted || LR-5 || Lane Restriction with Single Unit Vehicle and Combination Vehicle Gross Weight Limits || Weight Limit Single Unit XX Tons Combination XX Tons || R12-14 || 903.5.36.2
|-
| colspan="6" | 
|-
! style="background:#BEBEBE" colspan="6" | Commercial Zone Areas Gross Weight Categories
|-
! Classification || Category || Description || Sign Verbiage || Sign || Figure
|-
| Commercial Zone || CZ-1 || No Posting Required || N/A || N/A || N/A
|-
| Commercial Zone || CZ-2 || General Gross Weight Limit || Weight Limit XX Tons || R12-1 || 903.5.36.1
|-
| Commercial Zone || CZ-3 || Single Unit Vehicle Gross Weight Limit || Weight Limit Single Unit XX Tons || R12-12 || 903.5.36.1
|-
| Commercial Zone || CZ-4 || Combination Vehicle Gross Weight Limit || Weight Limit Combination XX Tons || R12-13 || 903.5.36.1
|-
| Commercial Zone || CZ-5 || Single Unit Vehicle and Combination Vehicle Gross Weight Limits || Weight Limit Single Unit XX Tons Combination XX Tons || R12-14 || 903.5.36.1
|-
| colspan="6" | 
|-
! style="background:#BEBEBE" colspan="6" | Other Miscellaneous Load Posting Categories
|-
! Classification || Category || Description || Sign Verbiage || Sign || Figure
|-
| Fire Truck || FT-1|| General Gross Weight Limit for Emergency Vehicles Included in the FAST Act, Federal Reauthorization Bill || Weight Limit XX Tons || R12-1 || 903.5.36.1
|-
| Closed Bridge || K-CD || Closed to All Traffic || N/A || N/A || N/A
|-
| Closed Bridge || K-CIF || Closed to All Traffic as the Result of a Critical Inspection Finding || N/A || N/A || N/A
|-
| Other || OT-1 || For Local Agency Bridges that have Signage that Doesn't Fit the Normal Legal, Lane Restricted, or Commercial Zone Categories || N/A || N/A || N/A
|-
|}
</div>

<div class="flex-container1">
{{SpanID|fig903.2.53.1}}
<div>[[File:Figure 903.2.53.1 Weight Limit Restrictions.png|center|alt=A horizontal segment of roadway is shown. The middle of the roadway segment is illustrated to be crossing a bridge. The centerline of the roadway is a single dashed yellow line with one lane in each direction. On either side of the bridge, a WEIGHT LIMIIT SIGN is posted, facing the oncoming traffic. At the top of the figure are 4 different Weight Limit sign faces with a table below. These sign faces and the table are to help indicate what sign type and size to use at the beginning of a bridge crossing. The signs faces included in the table are R12-1, R12-12, R12-13, and R12-14.
|700px|thumb|<center>'''Figure 903.2.53.1''' Weight Limit Restrictions</center>]] </div>

{{SpanID|fig903.2.53.2}}
<div>[[File:Figure 903.2.53.2 One Lane Bridge Weight and Width Restrictions.png|center|alt=A horizontal segment of roadway is shown. The middle of the roadway segment is illustrated to be crossing a bridge. The centerline of the roadway is a double solid yellow line with one lane in each direction. Multiple sign faces are shown at varying distances on either side of the brdige, facing ocoming traffic. These signs include a W5-3, W12-1, W3-2, and a R1-2 sign. At the top of the figure are 4 different Weight Limit sign faces with a table below. These sign faces and the table are to help indicate what sign type and size to use at the beginning of a bridge crossing. The signs faces included in the table are R12-1, R12-12, R12-13, and R12-14. There is a note to "See EPG 903.3.72 for placement of Type 3 Object Markers" in the bottom right corner of the figure.|700px|thumb|<center>'''Figure 903.2.53.2''' One Lane Bridge Weight and Width Restrictions</center>]]</div>

{{SpanID|fig903.2.53.3}}
<div>[[File:Figure 903.2.53.3 One Lane Bridge Width Restrictions.png|center|alt=A horizontal segment of roadway is shown. The middle of the roadway segment is illustrated to be crossing a bridge. The centerline of the roadway is a double solid yellow line with one lane in each direction. Multiple sign faces are shown at varying distances on either side of the brdige, facing ocoming traffic. These signs include a W5-3,, W3-2, and a R1-2 sign. There is a note to "See EPG 903.3.72 for placement of Type 3 Object Markers" in the bottom right corner of the figure.|700px|thumb|<center>'''Figure 903.2.53.3''' One Lane Bridge Width Restrictions</center>]]</div>
</div>

=={{SpanID|903.2.54}}903.2.54 Weigh Station Sign (R13 Series) (MUTCD Section 2B.65)==

{| style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto"
|-
||[[image:R13-11.jpg|left|thumb|<center>'''R13-11'''</center>|130px]]
||[[image:R13-15P.jpg|left|thumb|<center>'''R13-15P'''</center>|130px]]
||[[image:R13-16.png|left|thumb|<center>'''R13-16'''</center>|80px]]
|}

'''Standard. '''The BUSES WEIGH sign (R13-11) should be used at all weigh stations to supplement the standard weigh station signing.

'''Guidance. '''The OPEN-CLOSED plaque (R13-15P) should be installed below all WEIGH STATION RIGHT LANE signs whenever an automatic OPEN-CLOSED sign has not been provided.

The BEFORE PULLING ON SCALE (R13-16) sign should be installed just to the right of the weigh scale and immediately in front thereof. A 30 in. STOP sign should be mounted above the sign.

=={{SpanID|903.2.55}}903.2.55 TRUCK ROUTE Sign (R14-1) (MUTCD Section 2B.66)==

<center>
{|
|[[File:R14-1.png|thumb|center|135px|<center>'''R14-1'''</center>]]
|}
</center>

'''Guidance. '''The TRUCK ROUTE (R14-1) sign should be used to mark a route that has been designated to allow truck traffic.

=={{SpanID|903.2.56}}903.2.56 Photo Enforced Signs and Plaques (R10-18a and R10-19P) (MUTCD Section 2B.69)==

<center>
{|
|[[File:R10-18a.jpg|thumb|center|<center>'''R10-18a'''</center>|105px]]
|[[File:R10-19P.jpg|thumb|center|<center>'''R10-19P'''</center>|105px]]
|}
</center>

'''Option. '''A Signal Ahead (W3-3) sign and a Traffic Signal Photo Enforced (R10-18a) sign may be used on the same approach provided that they are on separate supports.

A Photo Enforced (R10-19P) plaque may be mounted below a regulatory sign to advise road users that the regulation is being enforced by photographic equipment.

'''Standard. '''The Traffic Signal Photo Enforced (R10-18a) sign shall be used on approaches to signalized locations where red-light cameras are present.

The Traffic Signal Photo Enforced (R10-18a) sign shall not be installed on approaches to signalized locations where red-light cameras are not present on any of the approaches to the signalized location.

A Traffic Signal Photo Enforced (R10-18a) sign shall not be installed on the same support in combination with a Signal Ahead (W3-3) sign.

If used below a regulatory sign, the Photo Enforced (R10-19P) plaque shall be a rectangle with a black legend and border on a white background.

'''Support. '''For more information about photo enforcement requirements, see [[:Category:950 Automated Traffic Enforcement|EPG 950]].

=={{SpanID|903.2.57}}903.2.57 STATE LAW MOVE OVER OR SLOW DOWN FOR STOPPED EMERGENCY VEHICLES Sign (R16-25) (MUTCD Section 2B.71)==

<center>
{|
| [[File:R16-25.jpg|thumb|center|175px|<center>'''R16-25'''</center>]]
|}
</center>

'''Support. '''The STATE LAW MOVE OVER OR SLOW DOWN FOR STOPPED EMERGENCY VEHICLES (R16-25) sign is used to inform motorists of Missouri Revised Statutes 304.022, which requires motorists to drive with caution when approaching stopped emergency vehicles.

'''Guidance. '''The STATE LAW MOVE OVER OR SLOW DOWN FOR STOPPED EMERGENCY VEHICLES sign should be installed on Interstates entering the state at the state line. The location of the sign should be as close to the state line as possible and placed at the discretion of MoDOT.

'''Option. '''Additional STATE LAW MOVE OVER OR SLOW DOWN FOR STOPPED EMERGENCY VEHICLES signs may be installed on U.S. routes entering the state where there are no adjacent interstates and rest areas at the request of the Missouri State Highway Patrol.

'''Standard. '''Requests for additional signs shall be forwarded to the appropriate district engineer for approval. These signs shall only be installed on divided highways. The installation of this sign shall not interfere with or detract from any other regulatory, warning, or guide signs.

=={{SpanID|903.2.58}}903.2.58 Headlight Use Signs (R16-5a) (MUTCD Section 2B.73)==

'''Support. '''The HEADLIGHTS ON WHEN WIPERS ARE REQUIRED (R16-5a) sign, supported by RSMo 307.020 in 2004, was developed to inform motorists of the new law directing them to turn on headlights when wipers are on and during inclement weather. The use of these signs has been discontinued as the law has been in place for more than 15 years and many vehicles come equipped with headlights that turn on when wipers are activated. Existing signs are to be removed at the end of their sign life.

=={{SpanID|903.2.59}}903.2.59 Seat Belt Symbol (MUTCD Section 2B.74)==

<center>
{|
| [[File:R16-30.jpg|thumb|center|175px|<center>'''R16-30'''</center>]]
|}
</center>

'''Guidance. '''The seat belt symbol should not be used alone. If used, the seat belt symbol should be incorporated into regulatory sign messages for mandatory seat belt use.

'''Support. '''The seat belt symbol is illustrated in the FHWA “Standard Highway Signs” publication (see [[911 General (MUTCD Part 1) #911.1.5|EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1A.05)]]).

'''Guidance. '''The R16-2, R16-3, R16-24, R16-27, and R16-27a seatbelt signs have been discontinued. These signs should remain in place to the end of their service life.

The STATE LAW BUCKLE UP PHONE DOWN (R16-30) sign should be installed at the end of the on ramp of rest areas and Missouri Welcome Centers on the interstate system. The STATE LAW BUCKLE UP PHONE DOWN (R16-30a) sign should be installed on Interstate and U.S. Routes at the state line entering Missouri. Neither sign should be installed at any other location along a roadway.

'''Support. '''A growing number of cities and counties are passing local ordinances to make seat belt usage a primary law in their communities. To promote the use of seat belts a PRIMARY SEAT BELT CITY / COUNTY - ORDINANCE sign may be installed by MoDOT upon request.

'''Standard. '''If a city/county has an established primary seat belt ordinance, MoDOT will install PRIMARY SEAT BELT CITY / COUNTY - ORDINANCE signs upon request once a copy of the ordinance has been received. When the PRIMARY SEAT BELT CITY / COUNTY - ORDINANCE is installed they shall be mounted to the right of the city limit sign or the entering county line sign.

'''Option. '''If insufficient space is available to mount the assembly to the right of these signs, the assembly shall be installed 200 ft. downstream of the city limit or county line signs at the appropriate sign spacing.

=={{SpanID|903.2.60}}903.2.60 Barricades (MUTCD Section 2B.75)==

'''Option. '''Barricades may be used to mark any of the following conditions:
::A. The end of a roadway,
::B. A ramp or lane that is closed for operational purposes, or
::C. The permanent or semi-permanent closure or termination of a roadway.

'''Standard. '''When used to warn and alert road users of the terminus of a roadway, other than in temporary traffic control zones, barricades shall meet the design criteria of [[616.11 TTC Zone Channelizing Devices (MUTCD Chapter 6K) #616.11.7|EPG 616.11.7]] for a Type 3 Barricade, except that the colors of the stripes shall be retroreflective white and retroreflective red.

'''Option. '''An end-of-roadway marker or markers may be used as described in [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.73|EPG 903.3.73]].

'''Guidance. '''Appropriate advance warning signs (see [[903.3 Ground-Mounted Sign Supports #903.3|EPG 903.3]]) should be used.

=={{SpanID|903.2.61}}903.2.61 NO PARKING ALL TRAILERS AND TRUCKS OVER 6 TONS (R7-36)==

[[File:R7-36.png|thumb|center|105px|alt=|<center>'''R7-36'''</center>]]

'''Standard. '''NO PARKING ALL TRAILERS AND TRUCKS OVER 6 TONS (R7-36) signs shall be placed in each commuter parking lot. A sign shall be installed at or near each entrance of the commuter parking lot.

'''Support. '''This parking restriction is necessary because commuter lots have been used by commercial trailers and trucks for extended periods of parking.

=={{SpanID|903.2.62}}903.2.62 STOP FOR SCHOOL BUS SIGN (R16-26)==

'''Standard. '''The STOP FOR SCHOOL BUS (R16-26) sign has been discontinued. MoDOT shall no longer provide STOP FOR SCHOOL BUS (R16-26) signs. Existing STOP FOR SCHOOL BUS (R16-26) signs shall be left in place until they reach the end of their service life.

=={{SpanID|903.2.63}}903.2.63 Other Regulatory Signs==

'''Option. '''Regulatory word message signs other than those classified and specified in the EPG and the federal Standard Highway Signs and Markings book may be developed to aid the enforcement of other laws or regulations.

Except for symbols on regulatory signs, minor modifications in the design may be permitted provided that the essential appearance characteristics are met.

'''Standard. '''Special regulatory signs shall be approved by the State Highway Safety and Traffic Engineer.

=={{SpanID|903.2.64}}903.2.64 Engine Brake Muffler Required Signing==

[[File:R5-23.jpg|thumb|center|105px|alt=|<center>'''R5-23'''</center>]]

'''History. '''MoDOT once had a NOISE ORDINANCE ENFORCED policy which was developed to address cities’ requests to install NO JAKE BRAKE signing. These requests were generated when a community experienced excessive noise related to improperly installed/operated engine braking systems on commercial vehicles. Jake brakes, or engine braking systems, are safety features of commercial vehicles. MoDOT was not willing to post signs on state routes which prohibited the use of these safety devices. However, to address the increasing requests for signing, MoDOT did permit the installation of NOISE ORDINANCE ENFORCED signs if a city passed an appropriate ordinance. This program was replaced with the current ENGINE BRAKE MUFFLERS REQUIRED signing in January 2022. This change was designed to address shortcomings of the noise ordinance signing program, which included difficulty in enforcing a noise level and noise ordinances which did not contain language relevant to engine braking noise levels. The current program is based on the direction other states have taken, focusing on the physical equipment on a commercial vehicle which can be more easily inspected and evaluated for deficiencies. This signing program is also targeting the primary concern of excessive noise from engine braking.

'''Support. '''Commercial vehicles are commonly equipped with an engine braking system. These systems supplement the vehicle’s mechanical brakes aiding in slowing these heavy vehicles safely. These safety systems, when not properly installed, can create excessive noise which many communities find objectionable. MoDOT does not permit regulatory signs which prohibit the use of these safety devices, however, the ENGINE BRAKE MUFFLERS REQUIRED signing conveys to truck drivers they must use these safety devices in an appropriate manner.

'''Option. '''If a community experiences issues with excessive noise from improperly used and installed engine braking systems on commercial vehicles, they can pass an ordinance and request MoDOT to install ENGINE BRAKE MUFFLERS REQUIRED signing at their city limit sign locations. MoDOT will install and maintain these signs with only a copy of the ordinance for our records, no fee or contract is involved. A jurisdiction can pass an ordinance specifically related to engine braking or include the language as part of another ordinance, such as a noise ordinance.

'''Standard. '''Before MoDOT will install ENGINE BRAKE MUFFLERS REQUIRED signing, a city must pass an appropriate ordinance which will be approved and kept on file by CO Highway Safety and Traffic. The ordinance shall include the following language:

Engine compression braking devices on any commercial vehicle, as defined in Missouri Revised Statute RSMo Section 301.010, may only be used within the city limits of [CITY NAME] if the truck is equipped with an adequate muffler (factory muffler or equivalent aftermarket muffler) which is properly maintained to prevent any excessive or unusual noise. If the truck’s exhaust system is equipped with a muffler cut-off, bypass, or similar device, that device shall not be activated when the engine brake is being utilized. Unmuffled engine braking system shall only be utilized within the city limits by commercial motor vehicles in emergency situations to protect life or property. Engine braking systems on rescue vehicles, city and state vehicles are exempt from this ordinance if used in the performance of official duties.

ENGINE BRAKE MUFFLER REQUIRED signing shall only be installed at the city limit location.

ENGINE BRAKE MUFFLER REQUIRED signing shall not be installed on freeways or expressways within the city limits where the posted speed limit is 45 mph or greater due to the critical need for the device at higher speeds.

Existing NOISE ORDINANCE ENFORCED signs shall be removed at the end of the signs’ service life, with no new NOISE ORDINANCE ENFORCED signs being installed after January 2022.

Individual sign installation locations can be denied by MoDOT if engineering judgement determines the prohibition would negatively impact safety, such as on long steep grades or abrupt/unexpected approaches to intersections.

'''Option. '''If the city limit on a freeway or expressway is within a posted speed limit of 45 mph or greater and the posted speed limit on that route drops to 40 mph or less, the ENGINE BRAKE MUFFLER REQUIRED sign may be installed adjacent to the speed limit sign where the speed limit drops below 45 mph.

At the end of a NOISE ORDINANCE ENFORCED sign’s life, or before, a city may request the new ENGINE BRAKE MUFFLER REQUIRED signing once the appropriate ordinance is passed.

If there is insufficient space to the right of the city limit sign to place the ENGINE BRAKE MUFFLER REQUIRED sign, it may be installed 200 ft. downstream of the city limit sign.

=={{SpanID|903.2.65}}903.2.65 Regulatory Signs For Trash/Dumping (R5-26, R5-28)==

[[File:R5-18.gif|thumb|center|220px|alt=|<center>'''R5-28'''</center>]]

'''Standard. '''The NO DUMPING sign (R5-28) shall be erected only at locations where the Department of Natural Resources has given us written notice that solid waste is being disposed of on highway right of way. NO MORE TRASH signs (R5-26) are not typically installed along MoDOT roadways. NO MORE TRASH signs (R5-26) should only be installed at commuter lots, rest areas or roadside parks. NO MORE TRASH signs shall only be installed along the roadway if a major liter issue has been identified and the sign is needed for enforcement purposes. Existing NO MORE TRASH signs (R5-26) shall be left in place until they reach the end of their service life.

=={{SpanID|903.2.66}}903.2.66 Regulation Signs For Roadside Parks and Commuter Parking Lots (R20-1)==

[[image:R19-1.gif|center|thumb|<center>'''R20-1'''</center>|175px]]

'''Support. '''Regulation signs are displayed at MoDOT maintained roadside parks and commuter parking lots to convey the rules and regulations pertaining to each type of facility.

'''Guidance. '''A minimum of one regulation sign should be installed at each MoDOT maintained roadside park and commuter parking lot, with the sign(s) being installed in centralized location(s) where the sign will be within normal sight of visitors once they leave their vehicles.

=={{SpanID|903.2.67}}903.2.67 Rest Area Regulatory Signing (R20-2, R20-3, R20-4)==

{| style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto"
|-
|[[image:R20-2.jpg|left|thumb|<center>'''R20-2'''</center>|195px]]
||[[image:R19-3.gif|left|thumb|<center>'''R20-3'''</center>|175px]]
|| [[image:R19-4.gif|left|thumb|<center>'''R20-4'''</center>|125px]]
|}

'''Guidance. '''The REST AREA MAINTAINED BY (R20-3) sign should be installed in a prominent area along the entrance ramp to the rest area, preferably in the gore area separating truck / car traffic.

'''Standard. '''The TRUCKS-CARS (R20-4) sign shall be installed at the gore point inside the rest area to direct various vehicles to the appropriate parking lot.

A minimum of three REST AREA REGULATIONS (R20-2) signs shall be installed at each rest area.

The REST AREA MAINTAINED BY (R20-3) sign shall be installed at all rest areas to inform the public who is responsible to maintain the facility prior to the gore point.

=={{SpanID|903.2.68}}903.2.68 Access Management Signing (R21-1 through R21-5)==

'''Standard. '''ACCESS MANAGEMENT (R22-1 through R22-5) signs have been discontinued. MoDOT shall no longer provide ACCESS MANAGEMENT (R22-1 through R22-5) signs. Existing ACCESS MANAGEMENT (R22-1 through R22-5) signs shall be left in place until they reach the end of their service life.

=={{SpanID|903.2.69}}903.2.69 Trucks and Buses 300 Ft Interval Sign (R4-30)==

'''Standard.''' TRUCKS AND BUSES (R4-30) signs have been discontinued. MoDOT shall no longer provide TRUCKS AND BUSES (R4-30) signs. Existing TRUCKS AND BUSES (R4-30) signs shall be left in place until they reach the end of their service life.

=={{SpanID|903.2.70}}903.2.70 FINES DOUBLED ENDS Sign (R2-20)==

[[File:R2-20.jpg|center|thumb|70px|<center>'''R2-20'''</center>]]

'''Support. '''The FINES DOUBLED ENDS (R2-20) sign is not to be used on a system-wide basis. It is part of a signing package intended for special use at locations where severe crashes are occurring. There is a requirement for regional support to focus a safety campaign involving local law enforcement and public information efforts to reduce the number and severity of crashes within the travel safe zone (see [[907.3 Travel Safe Zones #907.3.2|EPG 907.3.2]]).

'''Standard: '''A FINES DOUBLED ENDS sign shall be used to mark the end of a designated travel safe zone. This sign is installed in conjunction with the TRAVEL SAFE ZONE – FINES DOUBLED (W26-1) sign.

903.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 2A)

2025-12-01T17:19:28Z

HogsettC: /* {{SpanID|903.1.11}}903.1.11 Enhanced Conspicuity for Standards Signs (MUTCD Section 2A.11) */

[[Category:903 Highway Signing (MUTCD Part 2)|903.0]]
{| align="right" style="margin-left: 15px;"
| __TOC__
|}

=={{SpanID|903.1.1}}903.1.1 Function and Purpose of Signs (MUTCD Section 2A.01)==
'''Support. '''The EPG contains Standards, Guidance, and Options for the signing of all types of highways, and site roadways open to public travel within the right-of-way maintained by MoDOT. The functions of signs are to provide regulations, warnings, and guidance information for road users. Words, symbols, and arrows are used to convey the messages. Signs are not typically used to confirm rules of the road.

Detailed sign requirements are located in the following articles of the EPG:
*[[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B)|EPG 903.2]] - Regulatory Signs and Barricades
*[[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C)|EPG 903.3]] - Warning Signs and Object Markers
*[[903.4_Guide_Signs—Conventional_Roads_(MUTCD_Chapter_2D)|EPG 903.4]] - Guide Signs for Conventional Roads
*[[903.5 Guide Signs - Freeways and Expressways (MUTCD Chapter 2E)|EPG 903.5]] - Guide Signs for Freeways and Expressways
*[[903.6 Toll Road Signs (MUTCD Chapter 2F)|EPG 903.6]] - Toll Road Signs – Not used on MoDOT facilities
*[[903.7 Preferential and Managed Lane Signs (MUTCD Chapter 2G)|EPG 903.7]] - Preferential and Managed Lane Signs – Not used on MoDOT facilities
*[[903.8 General Information Signs (MUTCD Chapter 2H)|EPG 903.8]] - General Information Signs
*[[903.9 General Service Signs (MUTCD Chapter 2I)|EPG 903.9]] - General Service Signs
*[[903.10 Specific Service Signs (MUTCD Chapter 2J)|EPG 903.10]] - Specific Service Signs
*[[903.11 Tourist-Oriented Directional Signs (MUTCD Chapter 2K)|EPG 903.11]] - Tourist-Oriented Directional Signs
*[[903.12 Changeable Message Signs (MUTCD Chapter 2L)|EPG 903.12]] - Changeable Message Signs
*[[903.13 Recreational, Historic Site, and Cultural Interest Area Signs (MUTCD Chapter 2M)|EPG 903.13]] - Recreational, Historic Site, and Cultural Interest Area Signs
*[[903.14 Emergency Management Signs (MUTCD Chapter 2N)|EPG 903.14]] - Emergency Management Signs – Not used on MoDOT facilities

Definitions and acronyms that are applicable to signs are provided in [[:Category:911_General_(MUTCD_Part_1) #911.3.2 | EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1C.02)]].

MoDOT typically will not use signing to confirm rules of the road or state laws. The application of such signing will typically be used when a new law is passed for educational purposes, with the signs remaining in place until the end of their service life and then removed. Some signs may be left in place at strategic locations such as major entry points into the state.

'''Standard. '''The decision to install and maintain signs to confirm rules of the road or state laws shall be made by the MoDOT Highway Safety and Traffic Division along with the MoDOT Executive Leadership Team.

=={{SpanID|903.1.2}}903.1.2 Standardization of Application (MUTCD Section 2A.02)==
'''Support. '''It is recognized that urban traffic conditions differ from those in rural environments, and in many instances signs are applied and located differently. Where pertinent and practical, the EPG sets forth separate recommendations for urban and rural conditions. This generally applies to sign mounting heights.

'''Guidance. '''Signs should be used only where justified by engineering judgment or studies, as provided in [[:Category:911_General_(MUTCD_Part_1) #911.4.3 | EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1D.03)]].

Results from traffic engineering studies of physical and traffic safety or operational factors should indicate the locations where signs are deemed necessary or desirable.

Roadway geometric design and sign application should be coordinated so that signing can be effectively placed to give the road user any necessary regulatory, warning, guidance, and other information.

'''Standard. '''Each standard sign (see first paragraph of [[#903.1.4|EPG 903.1.4]]) shall be displayed only for the specific purpose as prescribed in the EPG. Before any new highway, site roadway open to public travel (see definition in [[:Category:911_General_(MUTCD_Part_1) #911.3.2 | EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1C.02)]]), detour, or temporary route is opened to public travel, all necessary signs shall be in place. Signs required by road conditions or restrictions shall be removed when those conditions cease to exist or the restrictions are withdrawn.

=={{SpanID|903.1.3}}903.1.3 Classification of Signs (MUTCD Section 2A.03) ==
'''Standard. '''Signs shall be defined by their function as follows:
::A. Regulatory signs give notice of traffic laws or regulations.
::B. Warning signs give notice of a situation that might not be readily apparent.
::C. Guide signs show route designations, destinations, directions, distances, services, points of interest, and other geographical, recreational, or cultural information.

'''Support. '''Barricades are described in [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2.60|EPG 903.2.60]] and [[616.11 TTC Zone Channelizing Devices (MUTCD Chapter 6K) #616.11.7|616.11.7]].

Object markers are described in [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.70|EPG 903.3.70]].

=={{SpanID|903.1.4}}903.1.4 Design of Signs (MUTCD Section 2A.04)==
'''Support. '''The EPG shows many standard signs and object markers approved for use on streets, highways, bikeways, and pedestrian crossings. Standard signs and object markers have a standardized design, shape, background, and legend as shown in the EPG.

In the provisions for individual standard signs and object markers, the general appearance of the legend, color, and size are shown in the accompanying tables and illustrations, and are not always detailed in the text.

The MoDOT Highway Safety and Traffic Division maintains design files of standard signs, object markers, alphabets, symbols, and arrows that meet or exceed MUTCD standards and are used to detail, order, and fabricate signs used on MoDOT routes.

The basic requirements of a sign are that it be legible to those for whom it is intended and that it be understandable in time to allow for a proper response. Desirable attributes include:
::A. High visibility by day and night; and
::B. High legibility (adequately-sized letters, symbols, or arrows, and a short legend for quick comprehension by a road user approaching a sign).

Standardized colors and shapes are specified so that the several classes of traffic signs can be promptly recognized. Simplicity and uniformity in design, position, and application are essential for a sign to be effective.

'''Standard. '''The term legend shall include all word messages and symbol and arrow designs that are intended to convey specific meanings.

Uniformity in design shall include shape, color, dimensions, legends, letter style, borders, and illumination or retroreflectivity.

Standardization of these designs does not preclude further improvement by minor modifications to the orientation of symbols (see [[#903.1.9|EPG 903.1.9]]), width of borders, or layout of word messages, but all shapes and colors shall be as indicated.

All symbols (see [[#903.1.9|EPG 903.1.9]]) shall be unmistakably similar to, or mirror images of, the adopted symbol signs, all of which are shown in the FHWA's “Standard Highway Signs” publication (see [[:Category:911_General_(MUTCD_Part_1) #911.1.5 | EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1A.05)]]). Symbols and colors shall not be modified unless otherwise provided in the EPG. All symbols, colors, or other design features for signs not shown in the FHWA's “Standard Highway Signs” publication (see [[:Category:911_General_(MUTCD_Part_1) #911.1.5 | EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1A.05)]]) shall be approved by the MoDOT Highway Safety and Traffic Division and shall follow the MUTCD procedures for experimentation and change described in [[:Category:911_General_(MUTCD_Part_1) #911.2.1 | EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1B.01)]].

Where a standard word message is applicable, the wording shall be as provided in the EPG.

In situations where word messages are necessary other than those provided in the EPG (see the first Option paragraph below), the signs shall be of the same shape and color as standard signs of the same functional type.

Where the legend of a standard sign is a symbol or a combination of a symbol and words, an alternative word legend shall not be allowed in place of the symbol, except as otherwise provided in the EPG.

Where a standard sign provided in the EPG or the FHWA's “Standard Highway Signs” publication (see [[:Category:911_General_(MUTCD_Part_1) #911.1.5 | EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1A.05)]]) is applicable, an alternative legend sign or alternative sign design shall not be allowed in place of the standardized legend or design except as provided in the EPG.

Where a standard sign provided in the EPG or the FHWA's “Standard Highway Signs” publication (see [[:Category:911_General_(MUTCD_Part_1) #911.1.5 | EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1A.05)]]) is applicable, but the legend is variable, such as for destination names, an alternative sign design or dimensions shall not be allowed in place of the standardized design for the non-variable elements except as provided in the EPG.

'''Option. '''The MoDOT Highway Safety and Traffic Division may develop special word legend signs in situations where engineering judgment determines roadway conditions make it necessary to provide road users with additional regulatory, warning, or guidance information, such as when road users need to be notified of special regulations or warned about a situation that might not be readily apparent. Unlike colors that have not been assigned or symbols that have not been approved for signs, new word legend signs may be used without the need for experimentation.

'''Support. '''The message conveyed by some special word legend signs might be unclear to the road user. Although experimentation is not required for such word legends, they might still warrant an evaluation to determine comprehension or possible misinterpretation of the intended message by the road user.

Scanning graphics are graphics designed for scanning by machine, and include bar codes, quick-response (QR) codes or other matrix bar-code formats, or similar graphics.

'''Standard. '''Unless otherwise provided in the EPG for a specific sign or as provided in the Option paragraph below, telephone numbers, Internet addresses, e-mail addresses, domain names, uniform resource locators (URL), metadata tags (“hash-tags”), and scanning graphics (see Support paragraph above) for the purpose of obtaining information (other than those for maintenance or inventory purposes per the provisions of the second Standard paragraph below) shall not be displayed on any sign, plaque, sign panel, or changeable message sign.

'''Option. '''Internet addresses, e-mail addresses, telephone numbers, scanning graphics, or other graphics for the purpose of conveying information may be displayed on the face of signs, plaques, sign panels, and changeable message signs that are oriented away from or otherwise not readily visible to operators of motor vehicles but rather are intended for viewing only by pedestrians, occupants of parked vehicles, and driving automation systems if approved by the MoDOT Highway Safety and Traffic Division.

'''Standard. '''Pictographs (see definition in [[:Category:911_General_(MUTCD_Part_1) #911.3.2 | EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1C.02)]]) shall not be displayed on signs except as specifically provided in the EPG for a particular type of sign. Pictographs shall be simple, dignified, and devoid of any advertising and shall not contain any scanning graphics (see first Support paragraph above) for the purpose of conveying information. When used to represent a political jurisdiction (a State, county, or municipal corporation) the pictograph shall be the official designation adopted by the jurisdiction, except as provided otherwise in the EPG. When used to represent any other type of jurisdiction, the pictograph shall be the official designation adopted by the jurisdiction. When used to represent a college or university, the pictograph shall be the official seal adopted by the institution. College or university pictographs shall not include pictorial representations of university or college programs, or athletic mascots.

No items other than official traffic control signs, inventory stickers or decals, sign installation dates, manufacturer name, sign sizes, sign designations, anti-vandalism stickers, inventory or maintenance codes, and maintenance-related scanning graphics shall be mounted on the back of a sign.

Only the MoDOT ID logo shall be displayed on the face of a sign to identify the sign as MoDOT property and define the penalties for tampering with the sign. The MoDOT ID logo shall match the detail and installation location as displayed in [https://www.modot.org/media/16920 Standard Plan 903.02].

=={{SpanID|903.1.5}}903.1.5 Shapes (MUTCD Section 2A.05)==
'''Standard. '''Particular shapes, as shown in [[#tab903.1.5|Table 903.1.5]], shall be used exclusively for specific signs or a series of signs, unless otherwise provided in the EPG for a particular sign or class of signs.

{{SpanID|tab903.1.5}}

<div style="width: 100%; display: flex; justify-content: center;">
{| class="wikitable"
|+ Table 903.1.5, Use of Sign Shapes
|-
!Shape !! Signs
|-
|Octagon*||Stop (R1-1)**
|-
|Equilateral Triangle (downward-pointing)* ||Yield (R1-2)**
|-
|Circle*||Grade Crossing Advance Warning (W10-1)**
|-
|Pentagon (upward-pointing)*||School (S1-1) (squares bottom corners)**
|-
|Crossbuck (two rectangles in a perpendicular "X" configuration)*||Grade Crossing (R15-1)**
|-
|Diamond||Warning Series
|-
|Rectangle (including square)||Regulatory Series Guide Series*** Warning Series
|-
|colspan="2" style="background-color: #ffffff"|Key: * This shape shall be limited exclusively to the sign(s) indicated. ** This sign shall be exclusively the shape shown. *** Guide series includes general service, specific service, tourist-oriented directional, general information, recreational and cultural interest area, and emergency management signs. Note: Signs with standardized designs shall not be modified to accommodate a different shape except as provided in the EPG.
|}
</div>

The Crossbuck is a shape exclusive to the Grade Crossing (R15-1) sign and shall not be obscured by mounting a different shape sign on the back of the Crossbuck (see [[913.2 Signs (MUTCD Chapter 8B) #913.2.3 | EPG 913.2.3]]).

'''Guidance. '''Shapes that are exclusive to a particular sign (STOP, YIELD, Railroad Advance, School, Warning, and Crossbuck signs) should not be obscured by another sign mounted on the back of the same assembly protruding or extending beyond the edge of the sign with the exclusive shape. The following methods should be considered in lieu of mounting a sign on the back of another sign that would obscure the exclusive shape of the sign:
::A. Install the signs on separate mountings to maintain the exclusive shape.
::B. Increase the size of the sign with the exclusive shape and/or decrease the size of the sign mounted behind the sign with the exclusive shape so the sign installed on the back does not obscure its shape.

Where the lateral space available in which to install a standard sign is constrained, such as mounting on a narrow median barrier or adjacent to a retaining wall, the following methods should be considered to maintain the shape of the sign:
::A. Angle the sign up to 45 degrees toward the roadway while still maintaining adequate legibility.
::B. Install the sign at a different location that still provides adequate advance warning, supplementing the sign with a Distance plaque (see [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.60|EPG 903.3.60]]), if appropriate.
::C. Reduce the size of the sign, but supplement it with a duplicate sign on the opposite side of the roadway (see [[#903.1.11|EPG 903.1.11]]).
::D. In addition to either angling or reducing the size of the sign, supplement it with a duplicate warning sign and Distance plaque at an upstream location.
::E. Mount the sign asymmetrically on the sign support, such as when the support is mounted on a bridge parapet or railing, such that the edge of the sign does not overhang the roadway, shoulder, or other areas used by bicyclists or pedestrians.

'''Option. '''Where the shape of the sign cannot be maintained due to lateral constraints, the following methods may be considered:
::A. For warning signs or other types of signs displayed in a horizontally-oriented rectangle, the legend may be displayed in a vertically-oriented rectangle.
::B. When mounted overhead, the word legend for a standard warning sign may be displayed in a horizontally-oriented rectangle.

'''Support. '''Provisions for mounting height of signs that overhang any portion of the traveled way are contained in [[#903.1.15|EPG 903.1.15]].

Provisions for lateral offset are contained in [[#903.1.16|EPG 903.1.16]].

'''Standard. '''Modifications to sign shapes, such as cutting off the left and right points of a diamond, shall not be allowed. This applies to both permanent and temporary traffic control signs.

'''Option. '''Where the methods described in the first Guidance paragraph of this article are impracticable, the legend of the warning sign may be displayed in a vertically-oriented rectangle.

=={{SpanID|903.1.6}}903.1.6 Colors (MUTCD Section 2A.06)==
'''Standard. '''The colors to be used on signs and their specific uses on signs shall be as provided in the applicable articles of the EPG. The color coordinates and values shall be as described in 23 CFR, Part 655, Subpart F, Appendix.

Colors (see [[:Category:911_General_(MUTCD_Part_1) #911.4.5 | EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1D.05)]]) shall be consistent across the face of a sign or a sign panel. Color gradients (smooth or defined gradual transitions either within a color or transition to another color) shall not be allowed.

{{SpanID|tab903.1.6}}
{|| class="wikitable" style="margin:auto; text-align: center; font-size: 80%"
|+ style="font-size:125%;"|Table 903.1.6, Common Uses of Sign Colors
!rowspan="2"|Type of Sign!!colspan="8"|Legend!!colspan="11"|Background
|- style="writing-mode: vertical-lr;"
!Black!!Green!!Red!!White!!Yellow!!Orange!!Fluorescent Yellow-Green1!!Fluorescent Pink!!Black!!Blue!!Brown!!Green!!Fluorescent Orange!!Red!!White!!Fluorescent Yellow!!Purple!!Fluorescent Yellow-Green1!!Fluorescent Pink
|-

||Regulatory||X|| ||X||X|| || || || ||X|| || || || ||X||X|| || || ||
|-
||Prohibitive|| || ||X||X2|| || || || || || || || || ||X2||X|| || || ||
|-
||Permissive|| ||X|| || || || || || || || || || || || ||X|| || || ||
|-
||Warning||X|| || || || || || || || || || || || || || ||X|| || ||
|-
||Pedestrian||X|| || || || || || || || || || || || || || ||X|| || ||
|-
||Bicycle||X|| || || || || || || || || || || || || || ||X|||| ||
|-
||Guide|| || || ||X|| || || || || || || ||X|| || || || || || ||
|-
||Interstate Route|| || || ||X|| || || || || ||X|| || || ||X|| || || || ||
|-
||State Route||X|| || || || || || || || || || || || || ||X|| || || ||
|-
||U.S. Route||X|| || || || || || || || || || || || || ||X|| || || ||
|-
||Street Name|| || || ||X|| || || || || || || ||X|| || || || || || ||
|-
||Destination|| || || ||X|| || || || || || || ||X|| || || || || || ||
|-
||Reference Location|| || || ||X|| || || || || || || ||X|| || || || || || ||
|-
||Information|| || || ||X|| || || || || ||X|| ||X|| || || || || || ||
|-
||Road User Service|| || || ||X|| || || || || ||X|| || || || || || || || ||
|-
||Recreational|| || || ||X|| || || || || || ||X||X|| || || || || || ||
|-
||Temporary Traffic Control||X|| || || || || || || || || || || ||X|| || || || || ||
|-
||Incident Management||X|| || || || || || || || || || || ||X|| || || || || ||X
|-
||School||X|| || || || || || || || || || || || || || || || ||X||
|-
|-
!colspan="99" style="text-align:left"|Changeable Message Signs
|-
|Regulatory || || ||X4||X|| || || || ||X|| || || || || || || || || ||
|-
|Warning, Pedestrian, Bicycle|| || || || ||X|| || || ||X|| || || || || || || || || ||
|-
|Temporary Traffic Control || || || || ||X||X|| || ||X|| || || || || || || || || ||
|-
|Guide || || || ||X|| || || || ||X|| || ||X3|| || || || || || ||
|-
|Motorist Services || || || ||X|| || || || ||X||X3|| || || || || || || || ||
|-
|Incident Management || || || || ||X|| || ||X||X|| || || || || || || || || ||
|-
|School || || || || || || ||X|| ||X|| || || || || || || || || ||
|-
|colspan="99" style="text-align:left; font-size: 120%;"|1 MoDOT has conducted research on the use of Fluorescent Yellow-Green for Pedestrian and Bicycle Signs. Research did not indicate any safety benefit, therefore the color is reserved for School signs only. 

2 Legend and background color combination for use only as identified for specific signs in the EPG or FHWA's Standard Highway Signs publication. 

3 These alternative background colors would be provided by blue or green lighted pixels such that the entire CMS would be lighted, not just the legend. 

4 Red is used only for the circle and diagonal or other red elements of a similar static regulatory sign. 

Notes: 
# The purpose of the information in this table is to provide a general overview of common color combinations. The color combinations and orientations for signs with standardized designs shall not be modified. For signs with unique legends, the shape and color shall be the same as standard signs of the same functional type.
# The colors shown for changeable message signs are for those with electronic displays.
|-
|}

'''Support. '''Common uses of sign colors are shown in [[#tab903.1.6|Table 903.1.6]]. Color schemes on specific signs are shown in the illustrations located in each applicable EPG article.

Whenever white is specified in the EPG or in the FHWA's “Standard Highway Signs” publication (see [[:Category:911_General_(MUTCD_Part_1) #911.1.5 | EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1A.05)]]) as a color, it is understood to include silver-colored retroreflective coatings or elements that reflect white light.

The colors coral and light blue are being reserved for uses that will be determined in the future by the Federal Highway Administration.

Information regarding color coding of destinations on guide signs, including community wayfinding signs, is contained in [[903.4 Guide Signs—Conventional Roads (MUTCD Chapter 2D) #903.4|EPG 903.4]].

=={{SpanID|903.1.7}}903.1.7 Dimensions (MUTCD Section 2A.07)==
'''Support. '''To standardize signing throughout the state highway system, MoDOT has predetermined the sizes for all highway signs; refer to the appropriate EPG article. Larger sizes are designed for use on freeways and expressways, and can also be used in oversized applications to enhance road user safety and convenience on other facilities, especially on multi-lane divided highways and on undivided highways having five or more lanes of traffic and/or high speeds. The intermediate sizes are designed to be used on other highway types. MoDOT does not adopt smaller sized signs for bikeways or other off-road applications as MoDOT typically does not maintain these types of facilities. MoDOT's minimum sign sizes generally exceed the MUTCD minimum sign sizes. The MUTCD minimum sizes in these cases are intended more for low-speed, local jurisdictional roadways and not for state highways. The sign size tables at the beginning of each EPG signing article lists the correct sign sizes for MoDOT applications.

'''Standard. '''The sign dimensions prescribed in the sign size tables in the various EPG articles shall be used unless engineering judgment determines that other sizes are appropriate. All sign sizes smaller than the prescribed dimensions shall be approved by the MoDOT Highway Safety and Traffic Division.

'''Guidance. '''The sizes shown in the Oversized columns in the various sign size tables in the EPG should be used for those special applications where speed, volume, or other factors result in conditions where increased emphasis, improved recognition, or increased legibility is needed, as determined by engineering judgment or study.

Except as provided in the Standard paragraph below, and where specifically prohibited in the EPG, increases above the minimum prescribed sizes should be used where greater legibility or emphasis is needed. If signs larger than the prescribed sizes are used, the overall sign dimensions will typically be increased in 12-inch increments.

'''Standard. '''Where a maximum allowable sign size is prescribed, increases in sign size above the maximum size shall not be allowed.

Where engineering judgment determines that sizes that are different from the minimum prescribed dimensions are appropriate for use, standard shapes and colors shall be used. Standard proportions shall be retained as much as practicable. Any application of size which is different from those given in the EPG shall first be approved by the MoDOT Highway Safety and Traffic Division.

=={{SpanID|903.1.8}}903.1.8 Word Messages (MUTCD Section 2A.08)==
'''Standard. '''Except as otherwise provided in the EPG, all word messages shall be aligned horizontally across a sign, reading left to right.

Except as provided in [[#903.1.4|EPG 903.1.4]], all word messages shall use standard wording as shown in the EPG and in the FHWA's “Standard Highway Signs” publication (see [[:Category:911_General_(MUTCD_Part_1) #911.1.5 | EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1A.05)]]).

All sign lettering, numerals, and other characters shall be of the Standard Alphabets as provided in the FHWA's “Standard Highway Signs” publication (see [[:Category:911_General_(MUTCD_Part_1) #911.1.5 | EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1A.05)]]), unless otherwise provided in the EPG.

The sign lettering for names of places, streets, and highways shall be composed of a combination of lower-case letters with initial upper-case letters. The sign lettering for other legends shall be composed of upper-case letters, unless otherwise provided in the EPG for a particular sign or type of message.

Except as provided in [[903.5 Guide Signs - Freeways and Expressways (MUTCD Chapter 2E)|EPG 903.5]], when a mixed-case legend is used, the nominal loop height of the lower-case letters shall be ¾ of the height of the initial upper-case letter.

The unique letter forms for each of the Standard Alphabet series shall not be stretched, compressed, warped, or otherwise manipulated.

Any non-standard or variable sign shall be detailed by the MoDOT Highway Safety and Traffic Division for signs installed by MoDOT forces as well as those installed by contractors on MoDOT projects.

'''Support. '''[[903.4 Guide Signs—Conventional Roads (MUTCD Chapter 2D) #903.4.3|EPG 903.4.3]] contains information regarding the acceptable methods of modifying the length of a word for a given letter height and series.

'''Guidance. '''Word messages should be as brief as practical to convey a clear, simple meaning, and the lettering should be large enough to provide the necessary legibility distance. A minimum specific ratio of 1 inch of letter height per 30 feet of legibility distance should be used.

Abbreviations (see [[:Category:911_General_(MUTCD_Part_1) #911.4.8 | EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1D.08)]]) should be kept to a minimum, except as otherwise prescribed in the EPG.

Word messages should not contain periods, apostrophes, question marks, ampersands, or other punctuation or characters that are not letters, numerals, or hyphens unless necessary to avoid confusion.

'''Support. '''Diacritical marks on words or names that are adapted to English are not normally needed on signs for comprehension or navigational purposes.

A legend in a secondary language, in addition to English, may be displayed on the face of signs, plaques, sign panels, and changeable message signs that are oriented away from or otherwise not readily visible to operators of motor vehicles, but rather are intended for viewing only by pedestrians and occupants of parked vehicles.

'''Guidance. '''The solidus (slanted line or forward slash) is intended to be used for fractions only and should not be used to separate words on the same line of legend. Instead, a hyphen should be used for this purpose, such as “TRUCKS - BUSES.”

'''Standard. '''Fractions shall be displayed with the numerator and denominator diagonally arranged about the solidus. The overall height of the fraction is measured from the top of the numerator to the bottom of the denominator, each of which is vertically aligned with the upper and lower ends of the solidus. The overall height of the fraction shall be determined by the height of the numerals within the fraction, and shall be 1.5 times the height of an individual numeral within the fraction.

Except as otherwise provided in the EPG, distances shall be displayed on signs using fractions of a mile rather than decimals.

'''Support. '''The FHWA's “Standard Highway Signs” publication (see [[:Category:911_General_(MUTCD_Part_1) #911.1.5 | EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1A.05)]]) contains details regarding the layouts of fractions on signs.

'''Guidance. '''When initials are used to represent an abbreviation for separate words (such as “U S” for a United States route), the initials should be separated by a space of between ½ and ¾ of the letter height of the initials.

When an Interstate route is displayed in text form instead of using the route shield, a hyphen should be used for clarity, such as “I-70.”

'''Support. '''Letter height is expressed in terms of the height of an upper-case letter. For mixed-case legends (those composed of an initial upper-case letter followed by lower-case letters), the height of the lower-case letters is derived from the specified height of the initial upper-case letter based on a prescribed ratio. Letter heights for mixed-case legends might be expressed in terms of both the upper- and lower-case letters, or in terms of the initial upper-case letter alone. When the height of a lower-case letter is specified or determined from the prescribed ratio, the reference is to the nominal loop height of the letter. The term loop height refers to the portion of a lower-case letter that excludes any ascending or descending stems or tails of the letter, such as with the letters “d” or “q.” The nominal loop height is equal to the actual height of a non-rounded lower-case letter whose form does not include ascending or descending stems or tails, such as the letter “x.” The rounded portions of a lower-case letter extend slightly above and below the baselines projected from the top and bottom of such a non-rounded letter so that the appearance of a uniform letter height within a word is achieved. The actual loop height of a rounded lower-case letter is slightly greater than the nominal loop height and this additional height is excluded from the expression of the lower-case letter height.

=={{SpanID|903.1.9}}903.1.9 Symbols (MUTCD Section 2A.09)==
'''Standard. '''Symbol designs shall in all cases be unmistakably similar to those shown in the EPG and in the FHWA's “Standard Highway Signs” publication (see [[:Category:911_General_(MUTCD_Part_1) #911.1.5 | EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1A.05)]]).

'''Option. '''Although most standard symbols are oriented facing left, mirror images of these symbols may be used where the reverse orientation might better convey to road users a direction of movement.

'''Support. '''New symbol designs are adopted by the Federal Highway Administration based on research evaluations to determine road user comprehension, sign conspicuity, and sign legibility.

Sometimes a change from word messages to symbols requires significant time for public education and transition. Therefore, the EPG sometimes includes the practice of using educational plaques to accompany new symbol signs.

'''Guidance. '''New standard warning or regulatory symbol signs should be accompanied by an educational plaque where engineering judgment determines that the plaque will improve road user comprehension during the transition from word message to symbol signs.

'''Option. '''Educational plaques may be left in place as long as they are in serviceable condition.

'''Standard. '''A symbol used for a given category of signs (regulatory, warning, or guide) shall not be used for a different category of signs, except as specifically authorized in the EPG.

A recreational and cultural interest area symbol (see [[903.13 Recreational, Historic Site, and Cultural Interest Area Signs (MUTCD Chapter 2M) #903.13|EPG 903.13]]) shall not be used on streets or highways outside of recreational and cultural interest areas.

A recreational and cultural interest area symbol (see [[903.13 Recreational, Historic Site, and Cultural Interest Area Signs (MUTCD Chapter 2M) #903.13|EPG 903.13]]) shall not be used on any regulatory or warning sign on any street, road, or highway.

=={{SpanID|903.1.10}}903.1.10 Sign Borders (MUTCD Section 2A.10)==
'''Standard. '''Unless otherwise provided, signs shall have a border of the same color as the legend in order to outline their distinctive shape and thereby give them easy recognition and a finished appearance.

The corners of all sign borders shall be rounded, except for STOP signs.

'''Guidance. '''A dark border on a light background should be set in from the edge, while a light border on a dark background should extend to the edge of the sign. A border for 30-inch signs with a light background should be from ½ to ¾ inch in width, ½ inch from the edge. For similar signs with a light border, a width of 1 inch should be used. For other sizes, the border width should be of similar proportions, but should not exceed the stroke-width of the major lettering of the sign. On signs exceeding 72 x 120 inches in size, the border should be 2 inches wide. On unusually large signs with oversized letter heights, route shields, or other legend elements, the border should be 2.5 inches wide and should not exceed 3 inches in width. Except for STOP signs and as otherwise provided in [[903.5 Guide Signs - Freeways and Expressways (MUTCD Chapter 2E) #903.5.13|EPG 903.5.13]], the corners of the sign should be rounded to a radius that is concentric with that of the border.

'''Support. '''[[#903.1.12|EPG 903.1.12]] contains information regarding the use of light-emitting diode (LED) units within the border of a sign.

=={{SpanID|903.1.11}}903.1.11 Enhanced Conspicuity for Standards Signs (MUTCD Section 2A.11)==

'''Option. '''Based upon engineering judgment, where the improvement of the conspicuity of a standard regulatory, warning, or guide sign is desired, any of the following methods may be used, as appropriate, to enhance the sign’s conspicuity (see [[#fig903-1-11|Figure 903.1.11]]):
::A. Increasing the size of a standard regulatory, warning, or guide sign.
::B. Dual signing of a standard regulatory, warning, or guide sign by adding a second identical sign on the left-hand side of the roadway at the same location.
::C. Adding a fluorescent yellow rectangular header panel above a standard regulatory sign, with the width of the panel corresponding to the width of the standard regulatory sign. A legend of “NOTICE,” “STATE LAW,” or other appropriate text may be added in black letters within the header panel for a period of time determined by engineering judgment.
::D. Adding a Warning Beacon (see [[902.18 Flashing Beacons (MUTCD Chapter 4S) #902.18.3|EPG 902.18.3]]) to a standard regulatory (other than a STOP, DO NOT ENTER, WRONG WAY, or a Speed Limit sign), warning, or guide sign.
::E. Adding a Speed Limit Sign Beacon (see [[902.18 Flashing Beacons (MUTCD Chapter 4S) #902.18.4|EPG 902.18.4 ]]) to a standard Speed Limit sign.
::F. Adding a Stop Beacon (see [[902.18 Flashing Beacons (MUTCD Chapter 4S) #902.18.5|EPG 902.18.5]]) to a STOP, DO NOT ENTER, or WRONG WAY sign.
::G. Adding a rectangular rapid-flashing beacon (see [[902.12 Rectangular Rapid Flashing Beacons (MUTCD Chapter 4L)#902.12.1|EPG 902.12]]) to a Pedestrian, School, or Trail warning sign at an uncontrolled marked crosswalk.
::H. Adding light-emitting diode (LED) units within the symbol, legend, or border of a standard regulatory, warning, or guide sign, as provided in [[#903.1.12|EPG 903.1.12]].
::I. Adding a strip of retroreflective material to the sign support in accordance with the provisions of the second Standard paragraph below.
::J. Using other methods that are specifically allowed for certain signs as described elsewhere in the EPG. The MoDOT Highway Safety and Traffic Division will evaluate any new methods to improve sign conspicuity.

{{SpanID|fig903-1-11}}
[[File:Figure 903.1.11 Examples of Enhanced Conspicuity for Signs.png|thumb|alt=A W16-18P plaque above a regulatory sign, a supplemental beacon above a warning sign, a stop sign with LEDs in the border, and a vertical retroreflective strip on a sign support.|center|600px| '''Figure 903.1.11''' Examples of Enhanced Conspicuity for Signs]]

'''Support. '''Sign conspicuity improvements can also be achieved by removing non-essential and illegal signs from the right-of-way (see [[:Category:911_General_(MUTCD_Part_1) #911.4.2 | EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1D.02)]]), and by relocating signs to provide better spacing. [[#903.1.20|EPG 903.1.20]] contains information on excessive use of signs.

'''Standard. '''Strobe lights shall not be used to enhance the conspicuity of highway signs.

If a strip of retroreflective material is used on the sign support, it shall be at least 4 inches in width, it shall be placed for the full length of the support from the bottom of the sign and extending down the length of the post, with the bottom of the retroreflective strip not being taller than 2 feet above the edge of the roadway, (see [[#fig903-1-11|Figure 903.1.11]]), and its color shall match the background color of the primary sign, except that the color of the strip for the YIELD and DO NOT ENTER signs shall be red. The retroreflective strip shall not display any legend or other information. MoDOT’s standard for this application uses a 4” x 72” aluminum panel with the retroreflective material applied to it where the panel can then be attached to the signpost using the same types of fasteners used to attach signs. These panels are available from MoDOT’s third party sign fabricator. Retroreflective strips shall not be placed on the sign supports below green, blue, or brown guide signs and shall only be placed below regulatory, warning, and school signs, and route marker assemblies.

For a post-mounted sign installation, placing a duplicate sign in the same assembly facing the same direction of traffic shall not be permitted as a method of enhancing conspicuity.

If plaques are used, they shall be installed below the main sign, up to two plaques.

'''Option. '''Retroreflective strips may be used to help identify and delineate the location of rural and unlit intersections and expressway crossovers, giving drivers visual cues where these intersections are located in dark nighttime conditions, see [[620.6 Delineators (MUTCD Chapter 3G) #620.6.3|EPG 620.6.3]] for information regarding this application.

=={{SpanID|903.1.12}}903.1.12 LEDs Used for Conspicuity Enhancement on Standard Signs (MUTCD Section 2A.12) ==
'''Support. '''This article regarding light-emitting diode (LED) units applies to the use of illuminated elements that supplement a sign legend to enhance the conspicuity of the sign.

LED units that are used to illuminate the full sign display, background, or legend are changeable message signs (CMS), which are covered in [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2|EPG 903.2]], [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3| 903.3]], [[903.12 Changeable Message Signs (MUTCD Chapter 2L) #903.12|903.12]], and [[:Category:908 Traffic Controls for School Areas (MUTCD Part 7)|908]].

The application of LED units in compliance with the third Standard paragraph below does not create a changeable message sign because the legend of the sign is always displayed when the LED units are not illuminated. Changeable message or blank-out signs whose legends change or extinguish by means of illuminated elements are addressed elsewhere in the EPG.

Approved LED sign manufacturers that are MUTCD compliant and whose products have been evaluated by MoDOT are listed in the MoDOT’s Traffic Approved Products List (APL) found on MoDOT's public website (https://www.modot.org/traffic).

'''Standard. '''If LED enhanced signs are used, only those products listed on the Traffic APL shall be permitted.

'''Option. '''New products may be considered for the APL, however, before being used they must first be vetted by the MoDOT Highway Safety and Traffic Division and its APL review process. The [[:File:LED Sign Compliance Checklist.pdf|LED Sign Compliance Checklist]] can be used to verify if a manufacturer’s LED sign is in compliance with the MUTCD and can be considered for the APL.

Light-emitting diode (LED) units may be used individually within the symbol, legend, or border of a sign to enhance the sign conspicuity and legibility (see [[#903.1.11|EPG 903.1.11]]).

Except as provided in the sixth Standard paragraph below, LED units may either operate continuously or be actuated.

'''Standard. '''Where LED units are used to enhance the conspicuity of a sign, the sign shall otherwise comply with the requirements for retroreflection and illumination for nighttime viewing (see [[#903.1.21|EPG 903.1.21]]).

Except as provided in the Option and Support paragraphs below, and for changeable message signs, neither individual LEDs nor groups of LEDs shall be placed within the background area of a sign.

The application of LEDs to display sign legends or symbols shall use a maximum pitch of 20 millimeters to cover the stroke width of the letter or symbol.

The LEDs shall not protrude outside the sign border or legend when used in such applications, shall have a maximum diameter of ¼ inch, and shall be the following colors based on the type of sign:
::A. White or red, with STOP, YIELD, DO NOT ENTER, or WRONG WAY signs.
::B. White, with other regulatory signs.
::C. White or yellow, with warning signs.
::D. White or green, with guide signs.
::E. White, yellow, or orange, with temporary traffic control signs.
::F. White or yellow, with pedestrian or bicycle warning signs.
::G. White or fluorescent yellow-green, with school area signs.

If flashed, all LED units shall flash simultaneously at a steady rate between 50 and 60 times per minute. All the LED units in a sign legend or border shall be illuminated simultaneously with no sequential (chasing) or variable flash rates (dancing), except as otherwise allowed in the EPG. A cluster of LEDs shall not be used within the border of a sign.

Where used in STOP or YIELD signs, flashing LED units shall operate continuously. Actuation of the LED units shall not be allowed.

Flashing LED units shall not be used within the legend or border of a Speed Limit sign to indicate that the displayed speed limit is in effect.

LED units shall not be used within the legend or border of a sign in conjunction with the phrase WHEN FLASHING in its legend (see Item E in the first paragraph of [[902.18 Flashing Beacons (MUTCD Chapter 4S)#902.18.3|EPG 902.18.3]] for the use of Warning Beacons to indicate when a regulatory or warning message is in effect).

Where LED units are used along the edge of a sign, at least one LED unit shall be placed along each edge of the sign, in addition to one LED unit at each corner of the sign, so that the distinct outline of the sign shape is recognized under nighttime viewing conditions. The LED units along each side of the sign shall be spaced approximately equidistantly. For a circular sign shape, the number of LED units shall clearly form the appearance of a circle and not be perceived as some other shape.

The uniformity of the sign design shall be maintained without any decrease in visibility, legibility, or driver comprehension during either daytime or nighttime conditions. The LED units shall have the capability to be dimmed automatically by a timing mechanism or a device sensitive to ambient light (photoelectric cell) such that the LEDs do not reduce the visibility of the sign legend.

'''Option. '''For STOP, YIELD, DO NOT ENTER, and WRONG WAY signs, LEDs may be placed within the border or within one border width within the background of the sign.

'''Support. '''[[616.4 Flagger Control (MUTCD Chapter 6D) #616.4.2|EPG 616.4.2]] contains information about STOP/SLOW paddles used by flaggers. [[908.4 Crossing Supervision (MUTCD Chapter 7D) #908.4.1|EPG 908.4.1]] contains information about STOP paddles used by adult crossing guards.

Other methods of enhancing the conspicuity of standard signs are described in [[#903.1.11|EPG 903.1.11]].

=={{SpanID|903.1.13}}903.1.13 Standardization of Location (MUTCD Section 2A.13)==

'''Support. '''Standardization of position cannot always be attained in practice. Examples of heights and lateral locations of signs for typical installations are illustrated in [[#fig903-1-13-1|Figure 903.1.13.1]], and examples of locations for some typical signs at intersections are illustrated in [[#fig903-1-13-2|Figure 903.1.13.2]] and [[616.16 Typical Applications (MUTCD Chapter 6P) #616.16|EPG 616.16]].

Examples of advance signing on intersection approaches are illustrated in [[616.16 Typical Applications (MUTCD Chapter 6P) #616.16|EPG 616.16]]. [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2|EPG 903.2]], [[903.3 Ground-Mounted Sign Supports #903.3|903.3]], and [[903.4 Guide Signs—Conventional Roads (MUTCD Chapter 2D) #903.4|903.4]] contain provisions regarding the application of regulatory, warning, and conventional guide signs, respectively.

{{SpanID|fig903-1-13-1}}
[[File:Figure 903.1.13.1 Examples of Heights and Lateral Locations of Sign Installations.png|thumb|alt=Examples of sign locations at an acute-angle intersection, a channelized intersection, a minor crossroad, an urban intersection, a divisional island, and a wide-throat intersection.|center|600px|'''Figure 903.1.13.1''' Examples of Locations for Some Typical Signs at Intersections]]

{{SpanID|fig903-1-13-2}}
[[File:Figure 903.1.13.2 Examples of Locations for Some Typical Signs at Intersections.png|thumb|alt=Examples of sign locations at an acute-angle intersection, a channelized intersection, a minor crossroad, an urban intersection, a divisional island, and a wide-throat intersection.|center|600px|'''Figure 903.1.13.2''' Examples of Locations for Some Typical Signs at Intersections]]

'''Standard. '''Signs requiring separate decisions by the road user shall be spaced sufficiently far apart for the appropriate decisions to be made.

'''Guidance. '''One of the factors considered when determining the appropriate spacing of signs should be the posted or 85th percentile speed.

Mainline signs on freeways and expressways should be visible a minimum of 800 feet and signs on conventional roads should be visible a minimum of 200 feet (minimum sign spacing in [[903.4 Guide Signs—Conventional Roads (MUTCD Chapter 2D) #903.4|EPG 903.4]] and [[903.5 Regulatory Signs #903.5|EPG 903.5]]. These distances should be considered when determining spacing between signs and when evaluating sign legibility during sign inspections. When these minimum sign spacing distances are not achievable, engineering judgement should be used to determine if the sign can be relocated to improve visibility, provide advance signing or determine if a reduced sign spacing distance is appropriate.

Except as provided in the third Guidance paragraph below, signs should be located on the right-hand side of the roadway where they are easily recognized and understood by road users. Signs in other locations should be considered only as supplementary to signs in the normal locations, except as otherwise provided in the EPG.

Signs should be individually installed on separate posts or mountings except where:
::A. One sign supplements another;
::B. Route or directional signs are grouped to clarify information to motorists;
::C. Regulatory signs that do not conflict with each other are grouped, such as Turn Prohibition signs posted with ONE WAY signs or a parking regulation sign posted with a Speed Limit sign; or
::D. Street Name signs are posted with a STOP or YIELD sign.

Signs should be located so that they:
::A. When post mounted, are installed on a breakaway assembly, regardless of where they are located on right-of-way,
::B. Optimize nighttime visibility,
::C. Minimize the effects of mud splatter and debris,
::D. Do not obscure each other,
::E. Do not obscure the sight distance to approaching vehicles on the major street for drivers who are stopped on minor-street approaches, and
::F. Are not hidden from view.

Except for STOP, YIELD, DO NOT ENTER, and WRONG WAY signs, or as otherwise provided in the EPG, where a sign on a one-way roadway indicates an action intended exclusively or primarily for a road user in the left-hand lane or at the left-hand side of that roadway, such as LEFT LANE MUST TURN LEFT (R3-7) or LEFT LANE ENDS (W9-1), the sign should be located on the left-hand side of the roadway. In the case of a divided road, the sign should be located in the median.

'''Option. '''Signs located on the left-hand side of a one-way roadway or in the median of a divided road, in accordance with the Guidance paragraph above, may be supplemented by an identical sign located on the right-hand side of the roadway.

'''Support. '''The clear zone (see definition in [[:Category:911_General_(MUTCD_Part_1) #911.3.2 | EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1C.02)]]) is the total roadside border area, starting at the edge of the traveled way, available for an errant driver to stop or regain control of a vehicle. The width of the clear zone is dependent upon traffic volumes, speeds, and roadside geometry. Additional information can be found in the “Roadside Design Guide,” 4th Edition, 2011, AASHTO. Based on the Roadside Design Guide, the clear zone only accounts for 80% of vehicles leaving the roadway, leaving 20% traveling outside the clear zone, this is the reason all MoDOT signs are required to be on breakaway sign supports.

'''Guidance. '''With the increase in traffic volumes and the need to provide road users regulatory, warning, and guidance information, an order of priority for sign installation should be established.

'''Support. '''An order of priority is especially critical where space is limited for sign installation and there is a demand for several different types of signs. Overloading road users with too much information is not desirable. Priority according to type of sign will depend on the specific situation and conditions of the site at which the signs are to be installed. For example, in the vicinity of an exit ramp, guide signs and warning signs for the exit ramp might take precedence over supplemental guide signs or a mainline Speed Limit sign where there is no change in the speed zone.

'''Guidance. '''Because regulatory and warning information is typically more critical to the road user than guidance information, regulatory and warning signing whose locations are critical should be displayed rather than guide signing in cases where conflicts occur. In such cases, the guide sign should be relocated to another appropriate location where it will still be effective. In other cases, such as at a decision point, the guide sign should take precedence over other signs whose locations are not as critical to an immediate decision or action necessary by the road user. In all cases, careful attention should be given to minimizing sign clutter (see [[#903.1.20|EPG 903.1.20]]). Community wayfinding and acknowledgment guide signs should have a lower priority as to placement than other guide signs. Signs conveying information of a less-critical nature should be moved to less-critical locations or omitted.

'''Option. '''Under some circumstances, such as on curves to the right, signs may be placed on median islands or on the left-hand side of the road. A supplementary sign located on the left-hand side of the roadway may be used on a multi-lane road where traffic in a lane to the right might obstruct the view to the right.

'''Guidance. '''In urban areas where crosswalks exist, signs should not be placed within 4 feet in advance of the crosswalk (see Drawing D in [[#fig903-1-13-2|Figure 903.1.13.2]]).

=={{SpanID|903.1.14}}903.1.14 Overhead Sign Installation (MUTCD Section 2A.14)==
'''Standard. '''Overhead sign installations shall be limited to MoDOT regulatory, warning, and guide sign installations, unless otherwise specified in the EPG. Supplemental signs or aesthetic messages shall not be displayed on overhead structures, which also apply to structures constructed and installed by another jurisdiction over a state route. Supplemental signs or aesthetic messages include, but are not limited to Welcome To signs, Welcome To monuments, and Community Wayfinding signs.

'''Guidance. '''Overhead signs should be used on freeways and expressways, at locations where some degree of lane-use control is desirable, and at locations where space is not available at the roadside. It is recommended that justification be provided when mounting signs overhead.

'''Support. '''The operational requirements of the present highway system are such that overhead signs have value at many locations. The factors to be considered for the installation of overhead sign displays are not definable in specific numerical terms. In some cases, overhead mounting of a sign might be required by other provisions of the EPG.

MoDOT has established the following general criteria for the use of overhead signs on the state highway system:

'''Standard. '''Overhead signs shall be used in the following applications:
::A. EXIT ONLY lane drops,
::B. Complex interchange design, including, but not limited to:
:::1. Directional ramps, and
:::2. Ramp splits
::C. Three or more lanes in each direction in urban areas,
::D. Closely-spaced interchanges,
::E. Multi-lane exits,
::F. Consistency of sign message location through a series of interchanges,
::G. Junction of two freeways, and
::H. Complex intersection guide signs, including, but not limited to:
::: 1. Multi-lane roundabouts,
::: 2. Diverging Diamond Interchanges, and
::: 3. Single Point Urban Interchanges.

'''Guidance.''' Overhead signs should be used in the following applications:
::A. Reduction of basic lanes in a LANE ENDS application and
::B. Left-side exit ramps.

'''Option.''' Overhead signs may be used in the following applications:
::A. Insufficient space for post-mounted signs,
::B. Restricted sight distance,
::C. Traffic volume at or near capacity,
::D. Large percentage of trucks,
::E. In urban areas with ambient light issues which obscure the visibility of the ground mounted sign,
::F. Locations where there is a history of crashes with a ground-mounted sign, and
::G. High-speed traffic.

Over-crossing structures may be used to support overhead signs.

'''Support. '''Under some circumstances, the use of over-crossing structures as sign supports might be the only practical solution that will provide adequate viewing distance. The use of such structures as sign supports might eliminate the need for the foundations and sign supports along the roadside.

=={{SpanID|903.1.15}}903.1.15 Mounting Height (MUTCD Section 2A.15)==
'''Standard. '''The provisions of this article shall apply unless specifically stated otherwise for a particular sign or object marker elsewhere in the EPG.

'''Support. '''Mounting heights in the EPG and in [https://www.modot.org/media/16921 Standard Plan 903.03] are nominal dimensions, meaning these dimensions represent the minimum mounting height, as well as the maximum mounting heights unless otherwise stated. The mounting height, measured from the roadway surface to the bottom of the sign, is only increased in order to meet the minimum distance requirements from the bottom of the sign to the ground directly below the sign. Minimum mounting heights ensure the installations meet breakaway standards as well as placing the signs at the appropriate level for visibility. Installing signs taller than these nominal dimensions will move the signs outside the driver’s normal line of sight negatively affecting the signs legibility and visibility.

In addition to the provisions of this article, information affecting the minimum mounting height of signs as a function of crash performance can be found in the “Roadside Design Guide,” 4th Edition, 2011, AASHTO.

'''Standard. '''In rural areas, the minimum height, measured vertically from the bottom of the sign to the elevation of the near edge of the pavement, of signs installed at the side of the road shall be 5 feet (see [[#fig903-1-13-1|Figure 903.1.13.1]]).

In business, commercial, or residential areas where parking, bicyclist, or pedestrian movements are likely to occur, or where the view of the sign might be obstructed, the minimum height, measured vertically from the bottom of the sign to the top of the curb, or in the absence of curb, measured vertically from the bottom of the sign to the elevation of the near edge of the traveled way, of signs installed at the side of the road shall be 7 feet (see [[#fig903-1-13-1|Figure 903.1.13.1]]).

'''Option. '''The height to the bottom of a secondary sign mounted below another sign may be 1 foot less than the height specified in the Standard paragraphs above.

'''Standard. '''The minimum height of signs, measured vertically from the bottom of the sign to the sidewalk shall be 7 feet.

If the bottom of a secondary sign that is mounted below another sign is mounted lower than 7 feet above a pedestrian sidewalk or pathway (see [[616.3 Pedestrian and Worker Safety (MUTCD Chapter 6C) #616.3.2|EPG 616.3.2]]), the secondary sign shall not project more than 4 inches into the pedestrian facility.

'''Support. '''[[914.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 9A) #914.1.2|EPG 914.1.2]] contains provisions for the minimum mounting height of signs on shared-use paths.

'''Standard. '''All sign installations shall meet the installation, mounting height and lateral offset of MoDOT specifications for the type of signs support being used, see [https://www.modot.org/media/16921 Standard Plan 903.03].

'''Option. '''A route sign assembly (see [[903.4 Guide Signs—Conventional Roads (MUTCD Chapter 2D) #fig903.4.25.1|Figures 903.4.25.1]] through [[903.4 Guide Signs—Conventional Roads (MUTCD Chapter 2D)#fig903.4.25.3|903.4.25.3]]) consisting of a route sign and auxiliary signs may be treated as a single sign for the purposes of this article.

The mounting height may be adjusted when supports are located near the edge of the right-of-way on a steep backslope in order to avoid the sometimes less desirable alternative of placing the sign closer to the roadway.

'''Standard. '''Signs that are post-mounted on a median barrier shall not overhang any portion of the traveled way.

New overhead sign installations shall provide a vertical clearance of not less than 18 feet from the highest point of pavement or shoulder (including mountable curbs located within the shoulder limits) to the lowest point of the sign, light fixture, or sign bridge over the entire width of the pavement and shoulders, except where the structure on which the overhead signs are to be mounted or other structures along the roadway near the sign structure have a lesser vertical clearance. No overhead sign installations shall have a mounting height that is lower than 17 feet.

'''Option. '''If the vertical clearance of other structures along the roadway near the sign structure is less than 16 feet, the vertical clearance to an overhead sign structure or support may be as low as 1 foot higher than the vertical clearance of the other structures in order to improve the visibility of the overhead signs.

In special cases the clearance to overhead signs may be reduced if necessary because of substandard dimensions in tunnels and other major structures such as double-deck bridges.

Signs may be raised above the standard vertical clearance to improve visibility and avoid other obstructions such as signal equipment.

'''Guidance. '''While a maximum mounting height for signs is generally not prescribed in the EPG, the nominal mounting heights should be adhered to, ensuring that signs are not mounted at such a height as to be out of the road user’s normal field of vision (see the second paragraph of this article and the third paragraph of [[:Category:911_General_(MUTCD_Part_1) #911.4.9 | EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1D.09)]]), especially in urban settings where signs are mounted on traffic signal or light poles.

'''Support. '''[[#fig903-1-13-1|Figure 903.1.13.1]] illustrates some examples of the mounting height requirements contained in this article.

See [[903.17 Overhead Sign Mounting #903.17.4|EPG 903.17.4]] for information regarding vertical clearances for overhead signs.

=={{SpanID|903.1.16}}903.1.16 Lateral Offset (MUTCD Section 2A.16)==
'''Standard. '''For overhead sign supports, the minimum lateral offset from the edge of the shoulder (or if no shoulder exists, from the edge of the pavement) to the near edge of overhead sign supports (cantilever or sign bridges) shall be 6 feet. Overhead sign supports shall have a barrier or crash cushion to shield them if they are within the right-of-way.

See [[903.17 Overhead Sign Mounting #903.17.3|EPG 903.17.3]] for information regarding lateral offset of overhead sign supports.

Post-mounted sign and object marker supports shall be crashworthy (see [[:Category:911_General_(MUTCD_Part_1) #911.4.11 | EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1D.11)]]) if within the right-of-way.

'''Guidance. '''For post-mounted signs, the minimum lateral offset should be 12 feet from the edge of the traveled way. If a shoulder wider than 6 feet exists, the minimum lateral offset for post-mounted signs should be 6 feet from the edge of the shoulder.

Supports for signs mounted laterally behind a longitudinal barrier should be placed so that the near edge of the support is located beyond the deflection distance of the longitudinal barrier and the edge of the sign does not extend beyond the face of the barrier towards traffic.

'''Support. '''The minimum lateral offset requirements for object markers are provided in [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3|EPG 903.3]].

The minimum lateral offset is intended to keep trucks and cars that use the shoulders from striking the signs or supports. The minimum lateral offset requirements do not supersede the requirement for crashworthiness (see the second Standard paragraph of this article) if the sign is located within the right-of-way.

'''Guidance. '''All supports should be located as far as practical from the edge of the shoulder. Advantage should be taken to place signs behind existing roadside barriers, on over-crossing structures, or other locations that minimize the exposure of the traffic to sign supports.

'''Option. '''Lesser lateral offsets may be used on connecting roadways or ramps at interchanges, but not less than 6 feet from the edge of the traveled way.

On conventional roads in areas where it is impractical to locate a sign with the lateral offset prescribed by this article because of roadside features such as terrain or vegetation, a lateral offset of at least 2 feet may be used.

A lateral offset of at least 1 foot from the face of the curb may be used in business, commercial, or residential areas where sidewalk width is limited or where existing poles are close to the curb.

'''Guidance. '''Overhead sign supports and post-mounted sign and object marker supports should not obstruct the sidewalk or the pedestrian access route such that less than 4 feet of clear space is available.

'''Support. '''Guidance for maintaining sign shape in laterally-constrained conditions is described in [[#903.1.5|EPG 903.1.5]].

[[#fig903-1-13-1|Figure 903.1.13.1]] and [[#fig903-1-13-2|903.1.13.2]] illustrate some examples of the lateral offset requirements contained in this article.

=={{SpanID|903.1.17}}903.1.17 Orientation (MUTCD Section 2A.17)==
'''Guidance. '''Unless otherwise provided in the EPG, signs should be vertically mounted at right angles to the direction of, and facing, the traffic that they are intended to serve.

Where mirror reflection from the sign face is encountered to such a degree as to reduce legibility, the sign should be turned slightly away from the road. On curved alignments, the angle of placement should be determined by the direction of approaching traffic rather than by the roadway edge at the point where the sign is located.

=={{SpanID|903.1.18}}903.1.18 Posts and Mountings (MUTCD Section 2A.18)==
'''Standard. '''Sign posts, foundations, and mountings shall be so constructed as to hold signs in a proper and permanent position, and to resist swaying in the wind or displacement by vandalism.

'''Support. '''See [https://www.modot.org/media/16921 Standard Plan 903.03] for additional information regarding posts and mounting. The Standard Plans are compliant with the latest edition of AASHTO’s “Specifications for Structural Supports for Highway Signs, Luminaires, and Traffic Signals.”

'''Option. '''Where permitted, signs may be placed on existing supports used for other purposes, such as highway traffic signal supports or overhead sign supports. This does not include utility poles or light poles.

'''Support. '''[[#903.1.11|EPG 903.1.11]] contains criteria for enhanced conspicuity of standard signs.

[[#903.1.15|EPG 903.1.15]] and [[#903.1.16|903.1.16]] contain lateral and height placement criteria for signs placed on existing supports.

'''Standard. '''If mounted to the sign support, equipment for powering electronic components of a sign, including solar panels, the sign support shall be a traffic signal pedestal pole with a breakaway base so as to not to compromise the crashworthy performance of the sign installation (see [[:Category:911_General_(MUTCD_Part_1) #911.4.11 | EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1D.11)]]). Such equipment shall be mounted so as not to obscure the shape of the sign. Any wiring installed in the breakaway base shall include appropriate breakaway fuse connectors.

=={{SpanID|903.1.19}}903.1.19 Maintenance (MUTCD Section 2A.19)==
'''Guidance. '''Maintenance activities should consider proper position, cleanliness, legibility, and daytime and nighttime visibility (see [[#903.1.21|EPG 903.1.21]] and [[#903.1.22|903.1.22]]). Damaged or deteriorated signs or object markers should be replaced.

To assure adequate maintenance, a schedule for inspecting (at night), trimming vegetation, and replacing signs and object markers should be established. Employees of highway, law enforcement, and other public agencies whose duties require that they travel on the roadways should be encouraged to report any damaged, deteriorated, or obscured signs or object markers at the first opportunity. While MoDOT’s sign maintenance program relies on nighttime inspections, random daytime inspections are encouraged to identify needs between scheduled nighttime inspections.

Steps should be taken to see that weeds, trees, shrubbery, and construction, maintenance, and utility materials and equipment do not obscure the face of any sign or object marker.

A regular schedule of replacement of lighting elements for illuminated signs should be maintained.

'''Support. '''See [[903.20 Construction Inspection Guidelines for Sec 903 #903.20.4|EPG 903.20.4]] for additional information related to sign inspection.

=={{SpanID|903.1.20}}903.1.20 Excessive Use of Signs (MUTCD Section 2A.20)==
'''Guidance. '''Signs should be used and located judiciously, minimizing their proliferation in order to maintain their effectiveness. Regulatory and warning signs should be used conservatively because these signs, if used to excess, tend to lose their effectiveness. Route signs and directional guide signs for primary routes and destinations should be used frequently at strategic locations because their use promotes efficient operations by keeping road users informed of their location. In all cases, however, sign clutter (see the Support paragraph below) should be avoided and minimized as much as practicable.

'''Support. '''Sign clutter is the proliferation of sign installations or assemblies along the roadway or roadside, either separately or grouped, to such an extent that adequate spacing between installations necessary for orderly processing of the sign messages by the driver cannot be achieved. Sign clutter can reduce the effectiveness of one or more signs in a sequence of signs.

The basic role of traffic control devices is to provide only as much information to the road user as necessary to promote the safe and efficient operation of streets and highways. Sign clutter can result from the overuse of MUTCD-compliant signs and or signs that display information unrelated to traffic operation, navigation, or transportation information. Examples of such signs would include, but are not limited to, those displaying the birthplace or home of a noted person, local sports team accomplishments, population information, and self-described qualities of a community such as “friendly” or “open for business.”

'''Guidance. '''Signs and other traffic control devices should be installed and maintained from a systematic standpoint rather than individually. When a new sign is installed, the existing signs in the vicinity should be considered for replacement, relocation, or removal as a result of the new sign that is installed. Existing systems of signs should be reviewed periodically for evidence of sign clutter and adjustments should be made accordingly.

'''Support. '''[[#903.1.13|EPG 903.1.13]] contains information regarding an order of priority for signs where available spacing along the roadway is limited.

=={{SpanID|903.1.21}}903.1.21 Retroreflection and Illumination (MUTCD Section 2A.21)==
'''Support. '''There are many materials currently available for retroreflection and various methods currently available for the illumination of signs and object markers. New materials and methods continue to emerge. New materials and methods can be used as long as the signs and object markers meet the standard requirements for color, both by day and by night.

This article applies to visibility of signs at night or in low-light or adverse weather conditions, whose legends are otherwise visible under typical daytime viewing conditions.

'''Standard. '''All traffic control signs on MoDOT right-of-way shall be retroreflective to show the same shape and similar color by both day and night, unless otherwise provided in the EPG for a particular sign or group of signs.

Where the color black is specified for the legend or background of a sign, an opaque and non-retroreflective material shall be used.

The requirements for sign illumination shall not be considered to be satisfied by street or highway lighting.

In special conditions when illuminated signs are permitted to be used per the EPG, sign symbols, word messages, and backgrounds shall be illuminated by a light behind the sign face through a translucent material.

Retroreflection of sign elements shall be accomplished by the means shown in [[#tab903.1.21|Table 903.1.21]].

{{SpanID|tab903.1.21}}

<div style="width: 100%; display: flex; justify-content: center;">
{| class="wikitable"
|+Table 903.1.21, Retroreflection of Sign Elements
|-
!Means of Retroreflection!!Sign Element
|-
|A material that has a smooth, sealed outer surface over a microstructure that reflects light||Symbol Word message Border Background 
|-
|colspan="2"style="background-color:#ffffff;"|Note: Illuminated signs are not used by MoDOT. Cities and counties may use illuminated street name signs if a maintenance agreement is in place.
|}
</div>

'''Guidance. '''Overhead sign installations should not be illuminated unless an engineering study shows a need for illumination, e.g. fog prone areas.

'''Support. '''Information regarding the use of retroreflective material on the sign support is contained in [[#903.1.11|EPG 903.1.11]].

Information regarding MoDOT sheeting types is contained in [[903.16 Design Aspects of MoDOT Signing #903.16.2|EPG 903.16.3]].

=={{SpanID|903.1.22}}903.1.22 Maintaining Minimum Retroreflectivity (MUTCD Section 2A.22)==
'''Support. '''Retroreflectivity is one of several factors associated with maintaining nighttime sign visibility (see [[#903.1.21|EPG 903.1.21]]).

'''Standard. '''MoDOT shall use an assessment or management method that is designed to maintain sign retroreflectivity at or above the minimum levels in [[#tab903-1-22|Table 903.1.22]]. Local jurisdictions who maintain sections of state routes and the signs on those sections under maintenance agreements shall maintain those signs in accordance with one of the MUTCD assessment methods.

{{SpanID|tab903-1-22}}


<div style="display: flex; justify-content: center;">
{|class="wikitable" style="text-align: center;"
|+ Table 903.1.22, Minimum Maintained Retroreflectivity Levels
|-
!rowspan="2"|Sign Color!!colspan="3"|Beaded Sheeting Type (ASTM D4956)!!rowspan="2"|Prismatic Sheeting!!rowspan="2"|Additional Criteria
|-
!I!!II!!III
|-
|rowspan="2"|White on Green || W*; G ≥ 7 || W*; G ≥ 15 || W*; G ≥ 25 || W ≥ 250; G ≥ 25 || Overhead
|-
| W*; G ≥ 7 || colspan="3"| W ≥ 120; G ≥ 15 || Post-mounted
|-
|rowspan="2"|White on Blue || W*; B ≥ 3 || W*; B ≥ 5 || W*; B ≥ 12 || W ≥ 250; B ≥ 12 || Overhead
|-
| W*; B ≥ 3 || colspan="3"|W ≥ 120; B ≥ 7 || Post-mounted
|-
|rowspan="2"|White on Brown || W*; Br ≥ 1 || W*; Br ≥ 5 || W*; Br ≥ 10 || W ≥ 350; Br ≥ 10 || Overhead
|-
| W*; Br ≥ 1 || colspan="3"|W ≥ 150; B ≥ 5 || Post-mounted
|-
|rowspan="2"|Black on Yellow or Black on Orange || Y*; O* || colspan="3"|Y ≥ 50; O ≥ 50 || 2
|-
| Y*; O* || colspan="3"|Y ≥ 75; O ≥ 75 || 3
|-
|White on Red || colspan="4"| W ≥ 35; R ≥ 7 || 4
|-
|Black on White || colspan="4"| W ≥ 50 || -
|-
|colspan="6" style="background-color: #ffffff; text-align: left;text-indent:-1em; padding-left: 1.5em;"| 1 The minimum maintained retroreflectivity levels shown in this table are in units of cd/Ix/m2 measured at an observation angle of 0.2° and an entrance angle of -4.0°.2 For word legend and fine symbol signs measuring at least 48 inches and for all sizes of bold symbol signs.3For word legend and fine symbol signs measuring less than 48 inches.4 Minimum sign contrast ratio ≥ 3:1 (white retroreflectivity ÷ red retroreflectivity).*This sheeting type shall not be used for this color for this application.
|-
!colspan="6"|Bold Symbol Signs
|-
|colspan="6"|<ul style="columns:3;"><li>W1-1,2 - Turn and Curve</li>
<li>W1-3,4 - Reverse Turn and Curve</li>
<li>W1-5 - Winding Road</li>
<li>W1-6,7 - Large Arrow</li>
<li>W1-8 - Chevron</li>
<li>W1-10 - Intersection in Curve</li>
<li>W1-11 - Hairpin Curve</li>
<li>W1-15 - 270 Degree Loop</li>
<li>W2-1 - Cross Road</li>
<li>W2-2,3 - Side Road</li>
<li>W2-4,5 - T and Y Intersection</li>
<li>W2-6 - Circular Intersection</li>
<li>W2-7,8 - Double Side Roads</li>
<li>W3-1 - Stop Ahead</li>
<li>W3-2 - Yield Ahead</li>
<li>W3-3 - Signal Ahead</li>
<li>W4-1 - Merge</li>
<li>W4-2 - Lane Ends</li>
<li>W4-3 - Added Lane</li>
<li>W4-5 - Entering Roadway Merge</li>
<li>W4-6 - Entering Roadway Added Lane</li>
<li>W6-1,2 - Divided Highway Begins and Ends</li>
<li>W6-3 - Two-Way Traffic</li>
<li>W10-1,2,3,4,11,12 - Grade Crossing Advance Warning</li>
<li>W11-2 - Pedestrian Crossing</li>
<li>W11-5 - Farm Equipment</li>
<li>W11-7 - Equestrian Crossing</li>
<li>W11-10 - Truck Crossing</li>
<li>W12-1 - Double Arrow</li>
<li>W16-5P,6P,7P - Pointing Arrow Plaques</li>
<li>W20-7 - Flagger</li>
<li>W21-1 - Worker</li></ul>
|-
!colspan="6"|Fine Symbol Signs (symbol signs not listed as bold symbol signs)
|-
|colspan="6" style="text-align: left"|'''Special Cases''' <ul><li>W3-1 - Stop Ahead: Red retroreflectivity ≥ 7</li><li>W3-2 - Yield Ahead: Red retroreflectivity ≥ 7; White retroreflectivity ≥ 35</li><li>W3-3 - Signal Ahead: Red retroreflectivity ≥ 7; Green retroreflectivity ≥ 35</li><li>W3-5 - Speed Reduction: White retroreflectivity ≥ 50</li><li>For non-diamond shaped signs, such as W14-3 (No Passing Zone), WP-4P (Cross Traffic Does Not Stop), or W13-1P,2,3,6,7 (Speed Advisory Signs), use the largest sign dimension to determine the proper minimum retroreflectivity level.</li>
|-
|colspan="6" style="background-color:#ffffff; text-align: left;"|'''Note:''' All MoDOT signs shall be fabricated as retroreflective for durability and longevity
|}
</div>

'''Support. '''Compliance with the Standard in the paragraph above is achieved by having a method in place and using the method to maintain the minimum levels established in [[#tab903-1-22|Table 903.1.22]]. Provided that an assessment or management method is being used, MoDOT would be in compliance with the Standard in the paragraph above even if there are some individual signs that do not meet the minimum retroreflectivity levels at a particular point in time.

MoDOT has a sign inspection process to maintain sign retroreflectivity at or above the minimum levels. See [[903.20 Construction Inspection Guidelines for Sec 903 #903.20.4|EPG 903.20.4]] for additional information related to sign inspection.

=={{SpanID|903.1.23}}903.1.23 Median Opening Treatments for Divided Highways (MUTCD Section 2A.23)==
'''Guidance. '''A divided highway crossing should be signed and marked as separate intersections when both of the following conditions are present:
::A. The paths of opposing left turns from the divided highway cross each other (see [[#fig903-1-23|Figure 903.1.23]]), and
::B. There is adequate storage in the interior approaches for the design vehicles expected to cross the divided highway.

If either one or both of the conditions in the Guidance paragraph above do not exist, the divided highway crossing should be signed and marked as a single intersection.

{{SpanID|fig903-1-23}}
[[File:Figure 903.1.23 Intersection Configuration at a Divided Highway Crossing.png|center|thumb|alt=An example of separate intersections, where the paths the of opposing left-turning vehicles cross, and an example of a single intersection, in which the paths of opposing left-turning vehicles do not cross. |800px| '''Figure 903.1.23''' Intersection Configuration at a Divided Highway Crossing]]

At the crossing of two divided highways, engineering judgment should be used to determine the number of separate intersections.

'''Support. '''Divided highway crossings with median widths 150 feet or greater might function as two intersections depending upon the interaction of the opposing left-turn vehicle paths and the available interior storage in the median for a crossing vehicle. Other factors that could determine whether a divided highway crossing is operating as one or two intersections include:
::A. The geometric design of the divided highway crossing,
::B. The use of positive offset mainline left-turn lanes,
::C. The length of the median opening (as measured parallel to the center line of the divided highway),
::D. The geometric design of the median noses,
::E. Other roadway geometric considerations such as a skewed side street approach or a variable median width,
::F. Intersection sight distance,
::G. The physical characteristics of the design vehicle, and
::H. The observed prevailing driver behavior with regard to opposing left-turn path interaction.

=={{SpanID|903.1.24}}903.1.24 Priority Order of Signs==
'''Standard. '''The order classification of signs shall be defined as follows (refer to [[#fig903-1-24|Figure 903.1.24]]):
#First Order Signing. Signs that are installed in advance of the closest intersection or interchange where motorists turn off of the state highway system to arrive at the desired traffic generator or site. First order signing will always be on state right-of-way.
#Second Order Signing. Signs that are installed in advance of the intersection or interchange where motorists turn to access the highway where the first order signing is provided. Second order signing will always be on state right-of-way and shall require the use of first order signing on state right-of-way.
#Third Order Signing. Signs that are installed in advance of the intersection or interchange where motorists turn to access the highway where the second order signing is provided. Third order signing will always be on state right-of-way and shall require the use of first order and second order signing on state right-of-way.

[[File:Figure 903.1.24 Sign Order Classification.gif|center|frame|thumb|alt=A diagram illustrating the priority order of signs for state highway directions with First, Second, and Third Order Signing.| <center>'''Figure 903.1.24 Sign Order Classification'''</center>]]

'''Support. '''In general, as the “order” of signing increases, the functional classification of road stays the same or increases. For example, if first order signing is on a four-lane U.S. route, second order signing should be on another U.S. route, expressway, or a freeway. In this example case, second order signing should not be placed on a two-lane lettered route.

903.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 2A)

2025-12-01T17:18:52Z

HogsettC: /* {{SpanID|903.1.13}}903.1.13 Standardization of Location (MUTCD Section 2A.13) */

[[Category:903 Highway Signing (MUTCD Part 2)|903.0]]
{| align="right" style="margin-left: 15px;"
| __TOC__
|}

=={{SpanID|903.1.1}}903.1.1 Function and Purpose of Signs (MUTCD Section 2A.01)==
'''Support. '''The EPG contains Standards, Guidance, and Options for the signing of all types of highways, and site roadways open to public travel within the right-of-way maintained by MoDOT. The functions of signs are to provide regulations, warnings, and guidance information for road users. Words, symbols, and arrows are used to convey the messages. Signs are not typically used to confirm rules of the road.

Detailed sign requirements are located in the following articles of the EPG:
*[[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B)|EPG 903.2]] - Regulatory Signs and Barricades
*[[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C)|EPG 903.3]] - Warning Signs and Object Markers
*[[903.4_Guide_Signs—Conventional_Roads_(MUTCD_Chapter_2D)|EPG 903.4]] - Guide Signs for Conventional Roads
*[[903.5 Guide Signs - Freeways and Expressways (MUTCD Chapter 2E)|EPG 903.5]] - Guide Signs for Freeways and Expressways
*[[903.6 Toll Road Signs (MUTCD Chapter 2F)|EPG 903.6]] - Toll Road Signs – Not used on MoDOT facilities
*[[903.7 Preferential and Managed Lane Signs (MUTCD Chapter 2G)|EPG 903.7]] - Preferential and Managed Lane Signs – Not used on MoDOT facilities
*[[903.8 General Information Signs (MUTCD Chapter 2H)|EPG 903.8]] - General Information Signs
*[[903.9 General Service Signs (MUTCD Chapter 2I)|EPG 903.9]] - General Service Signs
*[[903.10 Specific Service Signs (MUTCD Chapter 2J)|EPG 903.10]] - Specific Service Signs
*[[903.11 Tourist-Oriented Directional Signs (MUTCD Chapter 2K)|EPG 903.11]] - Tourist-Oriented Directional Signs
*[[903.12 Changeable Message Signs (MUTCD Chapter 2L)|EPG 903.12]] - Changeable Message Signs
*[[903.13 Recreational, Historic Site, and Cultural Interest Area Signs (MUTCD Chapter 2M)|EPG 903.13]] - Recreational, Historic Site, and Cultural Interest Area Signs
*[[903.14 Emergency Management Signs (MUTCD Chapter 2N)|EPG 903.14]] - Emergency Management Signs – Not used on MoDOT facilities

Definitions and acronyms that are applicable to signs are provided in [[:Category:911_General_(MUTCD_Part_1) #911.3.2 | EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1C.02)]].

MoDOT typically will not use signing to confirm rules of the road or state laws. The application of such signing will typically be used when a new law is passed for educational purposes, with the signs remaining in place until the end of their service life and then removed. Some signs may be left in place at strategic locations such as major entry points into the state.

'''Standard. '''The decision to install and maintain signs to confirm rules of the road or state laws shall be made by the MoDOT Highway Safety and Traffic Division along with the MoDOT Executive Leadership Team.

=={{SpanID|903.1.2}}903.1.2 Standardization of Application (MUTCD Section 2A.02)==
'''Support. '''It is recognized that urban traffic conditions differ from those in rural environments, and in many instances signs are applied and located differently. Where pertinent and practical, the EPG sets forth separate recommendations for urban and rural conditions. This generally applies to sign mounting heights.

'''Guidance. '''Signs should be used only where justified by engineering judgment or studies, as provided in [[:Category:911_General_(MUTCD_Part_1) #911.4.3 | EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1D.03)]].

Results from traffic engineering studies of physical and traffic safety or operational factors should indicate the locations where signs are deemed necessary or desirable.

Roadway geometric design and sign application should be coordinated so that signing can be effectively placed to give the road user any necessary regulatory, warning, guidance, and other information.

'''Standard. '''Each standard sign (see first paragraph of [[#903.1.4|EPG 903.1.4]]) shall be displayed only for the specific purpose as prescribed in the EPG. Before any new highway, site roadway open to public travel (see definition in [[:Category:911_General_(MUTCD_Part_1) #911.3.2 | EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1C.02)]]), detour, or temporary route is opened to public travel, all necessary signs shall be in place. Signs required by road conditions or restrictions shall be removed when those conditions cease to exist or the restrictions are withdrawn.

=={{SpanID|903.1.3}}903.1.3 Classification of Signs (MUTCD Section 2A.03) ==
'''Standard. '''Signs shall be defined by their function as follows:
::A. Regulatory signs give notice of traffic laws or regulations.
::B. Warning signs give notice of a situation that might not be readily apparent.
::C. Guide signs show route designations, destinations, directions, distances, services, points of interest, and other geographical, recreational, or cultural information.

'''Support. '''Barricades are described in [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2.60|EPG 903.2.60]] and [[616.11 TTC Zone Channelizing Devices (MUTCD Chapter 6K) #616.11.7|616.11.7]].

Object markers are described in [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.70|EPG 903.3.70]].

=={{SpanID|903.1.4}}903.1.4 Design of Signs (MUTCD Section 2A.04)==
'''Support. '''The EPG shows many standard signs and object markers approved for use on streets, highways, bikeways, and pedestrian crossings. Standard signs and object markers have a standardized design, shape, background, and legend as shown in the EPG.

In the provisions for individual standard signs and object markers, the general appearance of the legend, color, and size are shown in the accompanying tables and illustrations, and are not always detailed in the text.

The MoDOT Highway Safety and Traffic Division maintains design files of standard signs, object markers, alphabets, symbols, and arrows that meet or exceed MUTCD standards and are used to detail, order, and fabricate signs used on MoDOT routes.

The basic requirements of a sign are that it be legible to those for whom it is intended and that it be understandable in time to allow for a proper response. Desirable attributes include:
::A. High visibility by day and night; and
::B. High legibility (adequately-sized letters, symbols, or arrows, and a short legend for quick comprehension by a road user approaching a sign).

Standardized colors and shapes are specified so that the several classes of traffic signs can be promptly recognized. Simplicity and uniformity in design, position, and application are essential for a sign to be effective.

'''Standard. '''The term legend shall include all word messages and symbol and arrow designs that are intended to convey specific meanings.

Uniformity in design shall include shape, color, dimensions, legends, letter style, borders, and illumination or retroreflectivity.

Standardization of these designs does not preclude further improvement by minor modifications to the orientation of symbols (see [[#903.1.9|EPG 903.1.9]]), width of borders, or layout of word messages, but all shapes and colors shall be as indicated.

All symbols (see [[#903.1.9|EPG 903.1.9]]) shall be unmistakably similar to, or mirror images of, the adopted symbol signs, all of which are shown in the FHWA's “Standard Highway Signs” publication (see [[:Category:911_General_(MUTCD_Part_1) #911.1.5 | EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1A.05)]]). Symbols and colors shall not be modified unless otherwise provided in the EPG. All symbols, colors, or other design features for signs not shown in the FHWA's “Standard Highway Signs” publication (see [[:Category:911_General_(MUTCD_Part_1) #911.1.5 | EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1A.05)]]) shall be approved by the MoDOT Highway Safety and Traffic Division and shall follow the MUTCD procedures for experimentation and change described in [[:Category:911_General_(MUTCD_Part_1) #911.2.1 | EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1B.01)]].

Where a standard word message is applicable, the wording shall be as provided in the EPG.

In situations where word messages are necessary other than those provided in the EPG (see the first Option paragraph below), the signs shall be of the same shape and color as standard signs of the same functional type.

Where the legend of a standard sign is a symbol or a combination of a symbol and words, an alternative word legend shall not be allowed in place of the symbol, except as otherwise provided in the EPG.

Where a standard sign provided in the EPG or the FHWA's “Standard Highway Signs” publication (see [[:Category:911_General_(MUTCD_Part_1) #911.1.5 | EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1A.05)]]) is applicable, an alternative legend sign or alternative sign design shall not be allowed in place of the standardized legend or design except as provided in the EPG.

Where a standard sign provided in the EPG or the FHWA's “Standard Highway Signs” publication (see [[:Category:911_General_(MUTCD_Part_1) #911.1.5 | EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1A.05)]]) is applicable, but the legend is variable, such as for destination names, an alternative sign design or dimensions shall not be allowed in place of the standardized design for the non-variable elements except as provided in the EPG.

'''Option. '''The MoDOT Highway Safety and Traffic Division may develop special word legend signs in situations where engineering judgment determines roadway conditions make it necessary to provide road users with additional regulatory, warning, or guidance information, such as when road users need to be notified of special regulations or warned about a situation that might not be readily apparent. Unlike colors that have not been assigned or symbols that have not been approved for signs, new word legend signs may be used without the need for experimentation.

'''Support. '''The message conveyed by some special word legend signs might be unclear to the road user. Although experimentation is not required for such word legends, they might still warrant an evaluation to determine comprehension or possible misinterpretation of the intended message by the road user.

Scanning graphics are graphics designed for scanning by machine, and include bar codes, quick-response (QR) codes or other matrix bar-code formats, or similar graphics.

'''Standard. '''Unless otherwise provided in the EPG for a specific sign or as provided in the Option paragraph below, telephone numbers, Internet addresses, e-mail addresses, domain names, uniform resource locators (URL), metadata tags (“hash-tags”), and scanning graphics (see Support paragraph above) for the purpose of obtaining information (other than those for maintenance or inventory purposes per the provisions of the second Standard paragraph below) shall not be displayed on any sign, plaque, sign panel, or changeable message sign.

'''Option. '''Internet addresses, e-mail addresses, telephone numbers, scanning graphics, or other graphics for the purpose of conveying information may be displayed on the face of signs, plaques, sign panels, and changeable message signs that are oriented away from or otherwise not readily visible to operators of motor vehicles but rather are intended for viewing only by pedestrians, occupants of parked vehicles, and driving automation systems if approved by the MoDOT Highway Safety and Traffic Division.

'''Standard. '''Pictographs (see definition in [[:Category:911_General_(MUTCD_Part_1) #911.3.2 | EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1C.02)]]) shall not be displayed on signs except as specifically provided in the EPG for a particular type of sign. Pictographs shall be simple, dignified, and devoid of any advertising and shall not contain any scanning graphics (see first Support paragraph above) for the purpose of conveying information. When used to represent a political jurisdiction (a State, county, or municipal corporation) the pictograph shall be the official designation adopted by the jurisdiction, except as provided otherwise in the EPG. When used to represent any other type of jurisdiction, the pictograph shall be the official designation adopted by the jurisdiction. When used to represent a college or university, the pictograph shall be the official seal adopted by the institution. College or university pictographs shall not include pictorial representations of university or college programs, or athletic mascots.

No items other than official traffic control signs, inventory stickers or decals, sign installation dates, manufacturer name, sign sizes, sign designations, anti-vandalism stickers, inventory or maintenance codes, and maintenance-related scanning graphics shall be mounted on the back of a sign.

Only the MoDOT ID logo shall be displayed on the face of a sign to identify the sign as MoDOT property and define the penalties for tampering with the sign. The MoDOT ID logo shall match the detail and installation location as displayed in [https://www.modot.org/media/16920 Standard Plan 903.02].

=={{SpanID|903.1.5}}903.1.5 Shapes (MUTCD Section 2A.05)==
'''Standard. '''Particular shapes, as shown in [[#tab903.1.5|Table 903.1.5]], shall be used exclusively for specific signs or a series of signs, unless otherwise provided in the EPG for a particular sign or class of signs.

{{SpanID|tab903.1.5}}

<div style="width: 100%; display: flex; justify-content: center;">
{| class="wikitable"
|+ Table 903.1.5, Use of Sign Shapes
|-
!Shape !! Signs
|-
|Octagon*||Stop (R1-1)**
|-
|Equilateral Triangle (downward-pointing)* ||Yield (R1-2)**
|-
|Circle*||Grade Crossing Advance Warning (W10-1)**
|-
|Pentagon (upward-pointing)*||School (S1-1) (squares bottom corners)**
|-
|Crossbuck (two rectangles in a perpendicular "X" configuration)*||Grade Crossing (R15-1)**
|-
|Diamond||Warning Series
|-
|Rectangle (including square)||Regulatory Series Guide Series*** Warning Series
|-
|colspan="2" style="background-color: #ffffff"|Key: * This shape shall be limited exclusively to the sign(s) indicated. ** This sign shall be exclusively the shape shown. *** Guide series includes general service, specific service, tourist-oriented directional, general information, recreational and cultural interest area, and emergency management signs. Note: Signs with standardized designs shall not be modified to accommodate a different shape except as provided in the EPG.
|}
</div>

The Crossbuck is a shape exclusive to the Grade Crossing (R15-1) sign and shall not be obscured by mounting a different shape sign on the back of the Crossbuck (see [[913.2 Signs (MUTCD Chapter 8B) #913.2.3 | EPG 913.2.3]]).

'''Guidance. '''Shapes that are exclusive to a particular sign (STOP, YIELD, Railroad Advance, School, Warning, and Crossbuck signs) should not be obscured by another sign mounted on the back of the same assembly protruding or extending beyond the edge of the sign with the exclusive shape. The following methods should be considered in lieu of mounting a sign on the back of another sign that would obscure the exclusive shape of the sign:
::A. Install the signs on separate mountings to maintain the exclusive shape.
::B. Increase the size of the sign with the exclusive shape and/or decrease the size of the sign mounted behind the sign with the exclusive shape so the sign installed on the back does not obscure its shape.

Where the lateral space available in which to install a standard sign is constrained, such as mounting on a narrow median barrier or adjacent to a retaining wall, the following methods should be considered to maintain the shape of the sign:
::A. Angle the sign up to 45 degrees toward the roadway while still maintaining adequate legibility.
::B. Install the sign at a different location that still provides adequate advance warning, supplementing the sign with a Distance plaque (see [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.60|EPG 903.3.60]]), if appropriate.
::C. Reduce the size of the sign, but supplement it with a duplicate sign on the opposite side of the roadway (see [[#903.1.11|EPG 903.1.11]]).
::D. In addition to either angling or reducing the size of the sign, supplement it with a duplicate warning sign and Distance plaque at an upstream location.
::E. Mount the sign asymmetrically on the sign support, such as when the support is mounted on a bridge parapet or railing, such that the edge of the sign does not overhang the roadway, shoulder, or other areas used by bicyclists or pedestrians.

'''Option. '''Where the shape of the sign cannot be maintained due to lateral constraints, the following methods may be considered:
::A. For warning signs or other types of signs displayed in a horizontally-oriented rectangle, the legend may be displayed in a vertically-oriented rectangle.
::B. When mounted overhead, the word legend for a standard warning sign may be displayed in a horizontally-oriented rectangle.

'''Support. '''Provisions for mounting height of signs that overhang any portion of the traveled way are contained in [[#903.1.15|EPG 903.1.15]].

Provisions for lateral offset are contained in [[#903.1.16|EPG 903.1.16]].

'''Standard. '''Modifications to sign shapes, such as cutting off the left and right points of a diamond, shall not be allowed. This applies to both permanent and temporary traffic control signs.

'''Option. '''Where the methods described in the first Guidance paragraph of this article are impracticable, the legend of the warning sign may be displayed in a vertically-oriented rectangle.

=={{SpanID|903.1.6}}903.1.6 Colors (MUTCD Section 2A.06)==
'''Standard. '''The colors to be used on signs and their specific uses on signs shall be as provided in the applicable articles of the EPG. The color coordinates and values shall be as described in 23 CFR, Part 655, Subpart F, Appendix.

Colors (see [[:Category:911_General_(MUTCD_Part_1) #911.4.5 | EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1D.05)]]) shall be consistent across the face of a sign or a sign panel. Color gradients (smooth or defined gradual transitions either within a color or transition to another color) shall not be allowed.

{{SpanID|tab903.1.6}}
{|| class="wikitable" style="margin:auto; text-align: center; font-size: 80%"
|+ style="font-size:125%;"|Table 903.1.6, Common Uses of Sign Colors
!rowspan="2"|Type of Sign!!colspan="8"|Legend!!colspan="11"|Background
|- style="writing-mode: vertical-lr;"
!Black!!Green!!Red!!White!!Yellow!!Orange!!Fluorescent Yellow-Green1!!Fluorescent Pink!!Black!!Blue!!Brown!!Green!!Fluorescent Orange!!Red!!White!!Fluorescent Yellow!!Purple!!Fluorescent Yellow-Green1!!Fluorescent Pink
|-

||Regulatory||X|| ||X||X|| || || || ||X|| || || || ||X||X|| || || ||
|-
||Prohibitive|| || ||X||X2|| || || || || || || || || ||X2||X|| || || ||
|-
||Permissive|| ||X|| || || || || || || || || || || || ||X|| || || ||
|-
||Warning||X|| || || || || || || || || || || || || || ||X|| || ||
|-
||Pedestrian||X|| || || || || || || || || || || || || || ||X|| || ||
|-
||Bicycle||X|| || || || || || || || || || || || || || ||X|||| ||
|-
||Guide|| || || ||X|| || || || || || || ||X|| || || || || || ||
|-
||Interstate Route|| || || ||X|| || || || || ||X|| || || ||X|| || || || ||
|-
||State Route||X|| || || || || || || || || || || || || ||X|| || || ||
|-
||U.S. Route||X|| || || || || || || || || || || || || ||X|| || || ||
|-
||Street Name|| || || ||X|| || || || || || || ||X|| || || || || || ||
|-
||Destination|| || || ||X|| || || || || || || ||X|| || || || || || ||
|-
||Reference Location|| || || ||X|| || || || || || || ||X|| || || || || || ||
|-
||Information|| || || ||X|| || || || || ||X|| ||X|| || || || || || ||
|-
||Road User Service|| || || ||X|| || || || || ||X|| || || || || || || || ||
|-
||Recreational|| || || ||X|| || || || || || ||X||X|| || || || || || ||
|-
||Temporary Traffic Control||X|| || || || || || || || || || || ||X|| || || || || ||
|-
||Incident Management||X|| || || || || || || || || || || ||X|| || || || || ||X
|-
||School||X|| || || || || || || || || || || || || || || || ||X||
|-
|-
!colspan="99" style="text-align:left"|Changeable Message Signs
|-
|Regulatory || || ||X4||X|| || || || ||X|| || || || || || || || || ||
|-
|Warning, Pedestrian, Bicycle|| || || || ||X|| || || ||X|| || || || || || || || || ||
|-
|Temporary Traffic Control || || || || ||X||X|| || ||X|| || || || || || || || || ||
|-
|Guide || || || ||X|| || || || ||X|| || ||X3|| || || || || || ||
|-
|Motorist Services || || || ||X|| || || || ||X||X3|| || || || || || || || ||
|-
|Incident Management || || || || ||X|| || ||X||X|| || || || || || || || || ||
|-
|School || || || || || || ||X|| ||X|| || || || || || || || || ||
|-
|colspan="99" style="text-align:left; font-size: 120%;"|1 MoDOT has conducted research on the use of Fluorescent Yellow-Green for Pedestrian and Bicycle Signs. Research did not indicate any safety benefit, therefore the color is reserved for School signs only. 

2 Legend and background color combination for use only as identified for specific signs in the EPG or FHWA's Standard Highway Signs publication. 

3 These alternative background colors would be provided by blue or green lighted pixels such that the entire CMS would be lighted, not just the legend. 

4 Red is used only for the circle and diagonal or other red elements of a similar static regulatory sign. 

Notes: 
# The purpose of the information in this table is to provide a general overview of common color combinations. The color combinations and orientations for signs with standardized designs shall not be modified. For signs with unique legends, the shape and color shall be the same as standard signs of the same functional type.
# The colors shown for changeable message signs are for those with electronic displays.
|-
|}

'''Support. '''Common uses of sign colors are shown in [[#tab903.1.6|Table 903.1.6]]. Color schemes on specific signs are shown in the illustrations located in each applicable EPG article.

Whenever white is specified in the EPG or in the FHWA's “Standard Highway Signs” publication (see [[:Category:911_General_(MUTCD_Part_1) #911.1.5 | EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1A.05)]]) as a color, it is understood to include silver-colored retroreflective coatings or elements that reflect white light.

The colors coral and light blue are being reserved for uses that will be determined in the future by the Federal Highway Administration.

Information regarding color coding of destinations on guide signs, including community wayfinding signs, is contained in [[903.4 Guide Signs—Conventional Roads (MUTCD Chapter 2D) #903.4|EPG 903.4]].

=={{SpanID|903.1.7}}903.1.7 Dimensions (MUTCD Section 2A.07)==
'''Support. '''To standardize signing throughout the state highway system, MoDOT has predetermined the sizes for all highway signs; refer to the appropriate EPG article. Larger sizes are designed for use on freeways and expressways, and can also be used in oversized applications to enhance road user safety and convenience on other facilities, especially on multi-lane divided highways and on undivided highways having five or more lanes of traffic and/or high speeds. The intermediate sizes are designed to be used on other highway types. MoDOT does not adopt smaller sized signs for bikeways or other off-road applications as MoDOT typically does not maintain these types of facilities. MoDOT's minimum sign sizes generally exceed the MUTCD minimum sign sizes. The MUTCD minimum sizes in these cases are intended more for low-speed, local jurisdictional roadways and not for state highways. The sign size tables at the beginning of each EPG signing article lists the correct sign sizes for MoDOT applications.

'''Standard. '''The sign dimensions prescribed in the sign size tables in the various EPG articles shall be used unless engineering judgment determines that other sizes are appropriate. All sign sizes smaller than the prescribed dimensions shall be approved by the MoDOT Highway Safety and Traffic Division.

'''Guidance. '''The sizes shown in the Oversized columns in the various sign size tables in the EPG should be used for those special applications where speed, volume, or other factors result in conditions where increased emphasis, improved recognition, or increased legibility is needed, as determined by engineering judgment or study.

Except as provided in the Standard paragraph below, and where specifically prohibited in the EPG, increases above the minimum prescribed sizes should be used where greater legibility or emphasis is needed. If signs larger than the prescribed sizes are used, the overall sign dimensions will typically be increased in 12-inch increments.

'''Standard. '''Where a maximum allowable sign size is prescribed, increases in sign size above the maximum size shall not be allowed.

Where engineering judgment determines that sizes that are different from the minimum prescribed dimensions are appropriate for use, standard shapes and colors shall be used. Standard proportions shall be retained as much as practicable. Any application of size which is different from those given in the EPG shall first be approved by the MoDOT Highway Safety and Traffic Division.

=={{SpanID|903.1.8}}903.1.8 Word Messages (MUTCD Section 2A.08)==
'''Standard. '''Except as otherwise provided in the EPG, all word messages shall be aligned horizontally across a sign, reading left to right.

Except as provided in [[#903.1.4|EPG 903.1.4]], all word messages shall use standard wording as shown in the EPG and in the FHWA's “Standard Highway Signs” publication (see [[:Category:911_General_(MUTCD_Part_1) #911.1.5 | EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1A.05)]]).

All sign lettering, numerals, and other characters shall be of the Standard Alphabets as provided in the FHWA's “Standard Highway Signs” publication (see [[:Category:911_General_(MUTCD_Part_1) #911.1.5 | EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1A.05)]]), unless otherwise provided in the EPG.

The sign lettering for names of places, streets, and highways shall be composed of a combination of lower-case letters with initial upper-case letters. The sign lettering for other legends shall be composed of upper-case letters, unless otherwise provided in the EPG for a particular sign or type of message.

Except as provided in [[903.5 Guide Signs - Freeways and Expressways (MUTCD Chapter 2E)|EPG 903.5]], when a mixed-case legend is used, the nominal loop height of the lower-case letters shall be ¾ of the height of the initial upper-case letter.

The unique letter forms for each of the Standard Alphabet series shall not be stretched, compressed, warped, or otherwise manipulated.

Any non-standard or variable sign shall be detailed by the MoDOT Highway Safety and Traffic Division for signs installed by MoDOT forces as well as those installed by contractors on MoDOT projects.

'''Support. '''[[903.4 Guide Signs—Conventional Roads (MUTCD Chapter 2D) #903.4.3|EPG 903.4.3]] contains information regarding the acceptable methods of modifying the length of a word for a given letter height and series.

'''Guidance. '''Word messages should be as brief as practical to convey a clear, simple meaning, and the lettering should be large enough to provide the necessary legibility distance. A minimum specific ratio of 1 inch of letter height per 30 feet of legibility distance should be used.

Abbreviations (see [[:Category:911_General_(MUTCD_Part_1) #911.4.8 | EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1D.08)]]) should be kept to a minimum, except as otherwise prescribed in the EPG.

Word messages should not contain periods, apostrophes, question marks, ampersands, or other punctuation or characters that are not letters, numerals, or hyphens unless necessary to avoid confusion.

'''Support. '''Diacritical marks on words or names that are adapted to English are not normally needed on signs for comprehension or navigational purposes.

A legend in a secondary language, in addition to English, may be displayed on the face of signs, plaques, sign panels, and changeable message signs that are oriented away from or otherwise not readily visible to operators of motor vehicles, but rather are intended for viewing only by pedestrians and occupants of parked vehicles.

'''Guidance. '''The solidus (slanted line or forward slash) is intended to be used for fractions only and should not be used to separate words on the same line of legend. Instead, a hyphen should be used for this purpose, such as “TRUCKS - BUSES.”

'''Standard. '''Fractions shall be displayed with the numerator and denominator diagonally arranged about the solidus. The overall height of the fraction is measured from the top of the numerator to the bottom of the denominator, each of which is vertically aligned with the upper and lower ends of the solidus. The overall height of the fraction shall be determined by the height of the numerals within the fraction, and shall be 1.5 times the height of an individual numeral within the fraction.

Except as otherwise provided in the EPG, distances shall be displayed on signs using fractions of a mile rather than decimals.

'''Support. '''The FHWA's “Standard Highway Signs” publication (see [[:Category:911_General_(MUTCD_Part_1) #911.1.5 | EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1A.05)]]) contains details regarding the layouts of fractions on signs.

'''Guidance. '''When initials are used to represent an abbreviation for separate words (such as “U S” for a United States route), the initials should be separated by a space of between ½ and ¾ of the letter height of the initials.

When an Interstate route is displayed in text form instead of using the route shield, a hyphen should be used for clarity, such as “I-70.”

'''Support. '''Letter height is expressed in terms of the height of an upper-case letter. For mixed-case legends (those composed of an initial upper-case letter followed by lower-case letters), the height of the lower-case letters is derived from the specified height of the initial upper-case letter based on a prescribed ratio. Letter heights for mixed-case legends might be expressed in terms of both the upper- and lower-case letters, or in terms of the initial upper-case letter alone. When the height of a lower-case letter is specified or determined from the prescribed ratio, the reference is to the nominal loop height of the letter. The term loop height refers to the portion of a lower-case letter that excludes any ascending or descending stems or tails of the letter, such as with the letters “d” or “q.” The nominal loop height is equal to the actual height of a non-rounded lower-case letter whose form does not include ascending or descending stems or tails, such as the letter “x.” The rounded portions of a lower-case letter extend slightly above and below the baselines projected from the top and bottom of such a non-rounded letter so that the appearance of a uniform letter height within a word is achieved. The actual loop height of a rounded lower-case letter is slightly greater than the nominal loop height and this additional height is excluded from the expression of the lower-case letter height.

=={{SpanID|903.1.9}}903.1.9 Symbols (MUTCD Section 2A.09)==
'''Standard. '''Symbol designs shall in all cases be unmistakably similar to those shown in the EPG and in the FHWA's “Standard Highway Signs” publication (see [[:Category:911_General_(MUTCD_Part_1) #911.1.5 | EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1A.05)]]).

'''Option. '''Although most standard symbols are oriented facing left, mirror images of these symbols may be used where the reverse orientation might better convey to road users a direction of movement.

'''Support. '''New symbol designs are adopted by the Federal Highway Administration based on research evaluations to determine road user comprehension, sign conspicuity, and sign legibility.

Sometimes a change from word messages to symbols requires significant time for public education and transition. Therefore, the EPG sometimes includes the practice of using educational plaques to accompany new symbol signs.

'''Guidance. '''New standard warning or regulatory symbol signs should be accompanied by an educational plaque where engineering judgment determines that the plaque will improve road user comprehension during the transition from word message to symbol signs.

'''Option. '''Educational plaques may be left in place as long as they are in serviceable condition.

'''Standard. '''A symbol used for a given category of signs (regulatory, warning, or guide) shall not be used for a different category of signs, except as specifically authorized in the EPG.

A recreational and cultural interest area symbol (see [[903.13 Recreational, Historic Site, and Cultural Interest Area Signs (MUTCD Chapter 2M) #903.13|EPG 903.13]]) shall not be used on streets or highways outside of recreational and cultural interest areas.

A recreational and cultural interest area symbol (see [[903.13 Recreational, Historic Site, and Cultural Interest Area Signs (MUTCD Chapter 2M) #903.13|EPG 903.13]]) shall not be used on any regulatory or warning sign on any street, road, or highway.

=={{SpanID|903.1.10}}903.1.10 Sign Borders (MUTCD Section 2A.10)==
'''Standard. '''Unless otherwise provided, signs shall have a border of the same color as the legend in order to outline their distinctive shape and thereby give them easy recognition and a finished appearance.

The corners of all sign borders shall be rounded, except for STOP signs.

'''Guidance. '''A dark border on a light background should be set in from the edge, while a light border on a dark background should extend to the edge of the sign. A border for 30-inch signs with a light background should be from ½ to ¾ inch in width, ½ inch from the edge. For similar signs with a light border, a width of 1 inch should be used. For other sizes, the border width should be of similar proportions, but should not exceed the stroke-width of the major lettering of the sign. On signs exceeding 72 x 120 inches in size, the border should be 2 inches wide. On unusually large signs with oversized letter heights, route shields, or other legend elements, the border should be 2.5 inches wide and should not exceed 3 inches in width. Except for STOP signs and as otherwise provided in [[903.5 Guide Signs - Freeways and Expressways (MUTCD Chapter 2E) #903.5.13|EPG 903.5.13]], the corners of the sign should be rounded to a radius that is concentric with that of the border.

'''Support. '''[[#903.1.12|EPG 903.1.12]] contains information regarding the use of light-emitting diode (LED) units within the border of a sign.

=={{SpanID|903.1.11}}903.1.11 Enhanced Conspicuity for Standards Signs (MUTCD Section 2A.11)==
{{SpanID|fig903-1-11}}
[[File:Figure 903.1.11 Examples of Enhanced Conspicuity for Signs.png|thumb|alt=A W16-18P plaque above a regulatory sign, a supplemental beacon above a warning sign, a stop sign with LEDs in the border, and a vertical retroreflective strip on a sign support. |600px| '''Figure 903.1.11''' Examples of Enhanced Conspicuity for Signs]]

'''Option. '''Based upon engineering judgment, where the improvement of the conspicuity of a standard regulatory, warning, or guide sign is desired, any of the following methods may be used, as appropriate, to enhance the sign’s conspicuity (see [[#fig903-1-11|Figure 903.1.11]]):
::A. Increasing the size of a standard regulatory, warning, or guide sign.
::B. Dual signing of a standard regulatory, warning, or guide sign by adding a second identical sign on the left-hand side of the roadway at the same location.
::C. Adding a fluorescent yellow rectangular header panel above a standard regulatory sign, with the width of the panel corresponding to the width of the standard regulatory sign. A legend of “NOTICE,” “STATE LAW,” or other appropriate text may be added in black letters within the header panel for a period of time determined by engineering judgment.
::D. Adding a Warning Beacon (see [[902.18 Flashing Beacons (MUTCD Chapter 4S) #902.18.3|EPG 902.18.3]]) to a standard regulatory (other than a STOP, DO NOT ENTER, WRONG WAY, or a Speed Limit sign), warning, or guide sign.
::E. Adding a Speed Limit Sign Beacon (see [[902.18 Flashing Beacons (MUTCD Chapter 4S) #902.18.4|EPG 902.18.4 ]]) to a standard Speed Limit sign.
::F. Adding a Stop Beacon (see [[902.18 Flashing Beacons (MUTCD Chapter 4S) #902.18.5|EPG 902.18.5]]) to a STOP, DO NOT ENTER, or WRONG WAY sign.
::G. Adding a rectangular rapid-flashing beacon (see [[902.12 Rectangular Rapid Flashing Beacons (MUTCD Chapter 4L)#902.12.1|EPG 902.12]]) to a Pedestrian, School, or Trail warning sign at an uncontrolled marked crosswalk.
::H. Adding light-emitting diode (LED) units within the symbol, legend, or border of a standard regulatory, warning, or guide sign, as provided in [[#903.1.12|EPG 903.1.12]].
::I. Adding a strip of retroreflective material to the sign support in accordance with the provisions of the second Standard paragraph below.
::J. Using other methods that are specifically allowed for certain signs as described elsewhere in the EPG. The MoDOT Highway Safety and Traffic Division will evaluate any new methods to improve sign conspicuity.

'''Support. '''Sign conspicuity improvements can also be achieved by removing non-essential and illegal signs from the right-of-way (see [[:Category:911_General_(MUTCD_Part_1) #911.4.2 | EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1D.02)]]), and by relocating signs to provide better spacing. [[#903.1.20|EPG 903.1.20]] contains information on excessive use of signs.

'''Standard. '''Strobe lights shall not be used to enhance the conspicuity of highway signs.

If a strip of retroreflective material is used on the sign support, it shall be at least 4 inches in width, it shall be placed for the full length of the support from the bottom of the sign and extending down the length of the post, with the bottom of the retroreflective strip not being taller than 2 feet above the edge of the roadway, (see [[#fig903-1-11|Figure 903.1.11]]), and its color shall match the background color of the primary sign, except that the color of the strip for the YIELD and DO NOT ENTER signs shall be red. The retroreflective strip shall not display any legend or other information. MoDOT’s standard for this application uses a 4” x 72” aluminum panel with the retroreflective material applied to it where the panel can then be attached to the signpost using the same types of fasteners used to attach signs. These panels are available from MoDOT’s third party sign fabricator. Retroreflective strips shall not be placed on the sign supports below green, blue, or brown guide signs and shall only be placed below regulatory, warning, and school signs, and route marker assemblies.

For a post-mounted sign installation, placing a duplicate sign in the same assembly facing the same direction of traffic shall not be permitted as a method of enhancing conspicuity.

If plaques are used, they shall be installed below the main sign, up to two plaques.

'''Option. '''Retroreflective strips may be used to help identify and delineate the location of rural and unlit intersections and expressway crossovers, giving drivers visual cues where these intersections are located in dark nighttime conditions, see [[620.6 Delineators (MUTCD Chapter 3G) #620.6.3|EPG 620.6.3]] for information regarding this application.

=={{SpanID|903.1.12}}903.1.12 LEDs Used for Conspicuity Enhancement on Standard Signs (MUTCD Section 2A.12) ==
'''Support. '''This article regarding light-emitting diode (LED) units applies to the use of illuminated elements that supplement a sign legend to enhance the conspicuity of the sign.

LED units that are used to illuminate the full sign display, background, or legend are changeable message signs (CMS), which are covered in [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2|EPG 903.2]], [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3| 903.3]], [[903.12 Changeable Message Signs (MUTCD Chapter 2L) #903.12|903.12]], and [[:Category:908 Traffic Controls for School Areas (MUTCD Part 7)|908]].

The application of LED units in compliance with the third Standard paragraph below does not create a changeable message sign because the legend of the sign is always displayed when the LED units are not illuminated. Changeable message or blank-out signs whose legends change or extinguish by means of illuminated elements are addressed elsewhere in the EPG.

Approved LED sign manufacturers that are MUTCD compliant and whose products have been evaluated by MoDOT are listed in the MoDOT’s Traffic Approved Products List (APL) found on MoDOT's public website (https://www.modot.org/traffic).

'''Standard. '''If LED enhanced signs are used, only those products listed on the Traffic APL shall be permitted.

'''Option. '''New products may be considered for the APL, however, before being used they must first be vetted by the MoDOT Highway Safety and Traffic Division and its APL review process. The [[:File:LED Sign Compliance Checklist.pdf|LED Sign Compliance Checklist]] can be used to verify if a manufacturer’s LED sign is in compliance with the MUTCD and can be considered for the APL.

Light-emitting diode (LED) units may be used individually within the symbol, legend, or border of a sign to enhance the sign conspicuity and legibility (see [[#903.1.11|EPG 903.1.11]]).

Except as provided in the sixth Standard paragraph below, LED units may either operate continuously or be actuated.

'''Standard. '''Where LED units are used to enhance the conspicuity of a sign, the sign shall otherwise comply with the requirements for retroreflection and illumination for nighttime viewing (see [[#903.1.21|EPG 903.1.21]]).

Except as provided in the Option and Support paragraphs below, and for changeable message signs, neither individual LEDs nor groups of LEDs shall be placed within the background area of a sign.

The application of LEDs to display sign legends or symbols shall use a maximum pitch of 20 millimeters to cover the stroke width of the letter or symbol.

The LEDs shall not protrude outside the sign border or legend when used in such applications, shall have a maximum diameter of ¼ inch, and shall be the following colors based on the type of sign:
::A. White or red, with STOP, YIELD, DO NOT ENTER, or WRONG WAY signs.
::B. White, with other regulatory signs.
::C. White or yellow, with warning signs.
::D. White or green, with guide signs.
::E. White, yellow, or orange, with temporary traffic control signs.
::F. White or yellow, with pedestrian or bicycle warning signs.
::G. White or fluorescent yellow-green, with school area signs.

If flashed, all LED units shall flash simultaneously at a steady rate between 50 and 60 times per minute. All the LED units in a sign legend or border shall be illuminated simultaneously with no sequential (chasing) or variable flash rates (dancing), except as otherwise allowed in the EPG. A cluster of LEDs shall not be used within the border of a sign.

Where used in STOP or YIELD signs, flashing LED units shall operate continuously. Actuation of the LED units shall not be allowed.

Flashing LED units shall not be used within the legend or border of a Speed Limit sign to indicate that the displayed speed limit is in effect.

LED units shall not be used within the legend or border of a sign in conjunction with the phrase WHEN FLASHING in its legend (see Item E in the first paragraph of [[902.18 Flashing Beacons (MUTCD Chapter 4S)#902.18.3|EPG 902.18.3]] for the use of Warning Beacons to indicate when a regulatory or warning message is in effect).

Where LED units are used along the edge of a sign, at least one LED unit shall be placed along each edge of the sign, in addition to one LED unit at each corner of the sign, so that the distinct outline of the sign shape is recognized under nighttime viewing conditions. The LED units along each side of the sign shall be spaced approximately equidistantly. For a circular sign shape, the number of LED units shall clearly form the appearance of a circle and not be perceived as some other shape.

The uniformity of the sign design shall be maintained without any decrease in visibility, legibility, or driver comprehension during either daytime or nighttime conditions. The LED units shall have the capability to be dimmed automatically by a timing mechanism or a device sensitive to ambient light (photoelectric cell) such that the LEDs do not reduce the visibility of the sign legend.

'''Option. '''For STOP, YIELD, DO NOT ENTER, and WRONG WAY signs, LEDs may be placed within the border or within one border width within the background of the sign.

'''Support. '''[[616.4 Flagger Control (MUTCD Chapter 6D) #616.4.2|EPG 616.4.2]] contains information about STOP/SLOW paddles used by flaggers. [[908.4 Crossing Supervision (MUTCD Chapter 7D) #908.4.1|EPG 908.4.1]] contains information about STOP paddles used by adult crossing guards.

Other methods of enhancing the conspicuity of standard signs are described in [[#903.1.11|EPG 903.1.11]].

=={{SpanID|903.1.13}}903.1.13 Standardization of Location (MUTCD Section 2A.13)==

'''Support. '''Standardization of position cannot always be attained in practice. Examples of heights and lateral locations of signs for typical installations are illustrated in [[#fig903-1-13-1|Figure 903.1.13.1]], and examples of locations for some typical signs at intersections are illustrated in [[#fig903-1-13-2|Figure 903.1.13.2]] and [[616.16 Typical Applications (MUTCD Chapter 6P) #616.16|EPG 616.16]].

Examples of advance signing on intersection approaches are illustrated in [[616.16 Typical Applications (MUTCD Chapter 6P) #616.16|EPG 616.16]]. [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2|EPG 903.2]], [[903.3 Ground-Mounted Sign Supports #903.3|903.3]], and [[903.4 Guide Signs—Conventional Roads (MUTCD Chapter 2D) #903.4|903.4]] contain provisions regarding the application of regulatory, warning, and conventional guide signs, respectively.

{{SpanID|fig903-1-13-1}}
[[File:Figure 903.1.13.1 Examples of Heights and Lateral Locations of Sign Installations.png|thumb|alt=Examples of sign locations at an acute-angle intersection, a channelized intersection, a minor crossroad, an urban intersection, a divisional island, and a wide-throat intersection.|center|600px|'''Figure 903.1.13.1''' Examples of Locations for Some Typical Signs at Intersections]]

{{SpanID|fig903-1-13-2}}
[[File:Figure 903.1.13.2 Examples of Locations for Some Typical Signs at Intersections.png|thumb|alt=Examples of sign locations at an acute-angle intersection, a channelized intersection, a minor crossroad, an urban intersection, a divisional island, and a wide-throat intersection.|center|600px|'''Figure 903.1.13.2''' Examples of Locations for Some Typical Signs at Intersections]]

'''Standard. '''Signs requiring separate decisions by the road user shall be spaced sufficiently far apart for the appropriate decisions to be made.

'''Guidance. '''One of the factors considered when determining the appropriate spacing of signs should be the posted or 85th percentile speed.

Mainline signs on freeways and expressways should be visible a minimum of 800 feet and signs on conventional roads should be visible a minimum of 200 feet (minimum sign spacing in [[903.4 Guide Signs—Conventional Roads (MUTCD Chapter 2D) #903.4|EPG 903.4]] and [[903.5 Regulatory Signs #903.5|EPG 903.5]]. These distances should be considered when determining spacing between signs and when evaluating sign legibility during sign inspections. When these minimum sign spacing distances are not achievable, engineering judgement should be used to determine if the sign can be relocated to improve visibility, provide advance signing or determine if a reduced sign spacing distance is appropriate.

Except as provided in the third Guidance paragraph below, signs should be located on the right-hand side of the roadway where they are easily recognized and understood by road users. Signs in other locations should be considered only as supplementary to signs in the normal locations, except as otherwise provided in the EPG.

Signs should be individually installed on separate posts or mountings except where:
::A. One sign supplements another;
::B. Route or directional signs are grouped to clarify information to motorists;
::C. Regulatory signs that do not conflict with each other are grouped, such as Turn Prohibition signs posted with ONE WAY signs or a parking regulation sign posted with a Speed Limit sign; or
::D. Street Name signs are posted with a STOP or YIELD sign.

Signs should be located so that they:
::A. When post mounted, are installed on a breakaway assembly, regardless of where they are located on right-of-way,
::B. Optimize nighttime visibility,
::C. Minimize the effects of mud splatter and debris,
::D. Do not obscure each other,
::E. Do not obscure the sight distance to approaching vehicles on the major street for drivers who are stopped on minor-street approaches, and
::F. Are not hidden from view.

Except for STOP, YIELD, DO NOT ENTER, and WRONG WAY signs, or as otherwise provided in the EPG, where a sign on a one-way roadway indicates an action intended exclusively or primarily for a road user in the left-hand lane or at the left-hand side of that roadway, such as LEFT LANE MUST TURN LEFT (R3-7) or LEFT LANE ENDS (W9-1), the sign should be located on the left-hand side of the roadway. In the case of a divided road, the sign should be located in the median.

'''Option. '''Signs located on the left-hand side of a one-way roadway or in the median of a divided road, in accordance with the Guidance paragraph above, may be supplemented by an identical sign located on the right-hand side of the roadway.

'''Support. '''The clear zone (see definition in [[:Category:911_General_(MUTCD_Part_1) #911.3.2 | EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1C.02)]]) is the total roadside border area, starting at the edge of the traveled way, available for an errant driver to stop or regain control of a vehicle. The width of the clear zone is dependent upon traffic volumes, speeds, and roadside geometry. Additional information can be found in the “Roadside Design Guide,” 4th Edition, 2011, AASHTO. Based on the Roadside Design Guide, the clear zone only accounts for 80% of vehicles leaving the roadway, leaving 20% traveling outside the clear zone, this is the reason all MoDOT signs are required to be on breakaway sign supports.

'''Guidance. '''With the increase in traffic volumes and the need to provide road users regulatory, warning, and guidance information, an order of priority for sign installation should be established.

'''Support. '''An order of priority is especially critical where space is limited for sign installation and there is a demand for several different types of signs. Overloading road users with too much information is not desirable. Priority according to type of sign will depend on the specific situation and conditions of the site at which the signs are to be installed. For example, in the vicinity of an exit ramp, guide signs and warning signs for the exit ramp might take precedence over supplemental guide signs or a mainline Speed Limit sign where there is no change in the speed zone.

'''Guidance. '''Because regulatory and warning information is typically more critical to the road user than guidance information, regulatory and warning signing whose locations are critical should be displayed rather than guide signing in cases where conflicts occur. In such cases, the guide sign should be relocated to another appropriate location where it will still be effective. In other cases, such as at a decision point, the guide sign should take precedence over other signs whose locations are not as critical to an immediate decision or action necessary by the road user. In all cases, careful attention should be given to minimizing sign clutter (see [[#903.1.20|EPG 903.1.20]]). Community wayfinding and acknowledgment guide signs should have a lower priority as to placement than other guide signs. Signs conveying information of a less-critical nature should be moved to less-critical locations or omitted.

'''Option. '''Under some circumstances, such as on curves to the right, signs may be placed on median islands or on the left-hand side of the road. A supplementary sign located on the left-hand side of the roadway may be used on a multi-lane road where traffic in a lane to the right might obstruct the view to the right.

'''Guidance. '''In urban areas where crosswalks exist, signs should not be placed within 4 feet in advance of the crosswalk (see Drawing D in [[#fig903-1-13-2|Figure 903.1.13.2]]).

=={{SpanID|903.1.14}}903.1.14 Overhead Sign Installation (MUTCD Section 2A.14)==
'''Standard. '''Overhead sign installations shall be limited to MoDOT regulatory, warning, and guide sign installations, unless otherwise specified in the EPG. Supplemental signs or aesthetic messages shall not be displayed on overhead structures, which also apply to structures constructed and installed by another jurisdiction over a state route. Supplemental signs or aesthetic messages include, but are not limited to Welcome To signs, Welcome To monuments, and Community Wayfinding signs.

'''Guidance. '''Overhead signs should be used on freeways and expressways, at locations where some degree of lane-use control is desirable, and at locations where space is not available at the roadside. It is recommended that justification be provided when mounting signs overhead.

'''Support. '''The operational requirements of the present highway system are such that overhead signs have value at many locations. The factors to be considered for the installation of overhead sign displays are not definable in specific numerical terms. In some cases, overhead mounting of a sign might be required by other provisions of the EPG.

MoDOT has established the following general criteria for the use of overhead signs on the state highway system:

'''Standard. '''Overhead signs shall be used in the following applications:
::A. EXIT ONLY lane drops,
::B. Complex interchange design, including, but not limited to:
:::1. Directional ramps, and
:::2. Ramp splits
::C. Three or more lanes in each direction in urban areas,
::D. Closely-spaced interchanges,
::E. Multi-lane exits,
::F. Consistency of sign message location through a series of interchanges,
::G. Junction of two freeways, and
::H. Complex intersection guide signs, including, but not limited to:
::: 1. Multi-lane roundabouts,
::: 2. Diverging Diamond Interchanges, and
::: 3. Single Point Urban Interchanges.

'''Guidance.''' Overhead signs should be used in the following applications:
::A. Reduction of basic lanes in a LANE ENDS application and
::B. Left-side exit ramps.

'''Option.''' Overhead signs may be used in the following applications:
::A. Insufficient space for post-mounted signs,
::B. Restricted sight distance,
::C. Traffic volume at or near capacity,
::D. Large percentage of trucks,
::E. In urban areas with ambient light issues which obscure the visibility of the ground mounted sign,
::F. Locations where there is a history of crashes with a ground-mounted sign, and
::G. High-speed traffic.

Over-crossing structures may be used to support overhead signs.

'''Support. '''Under some circumstances, the use of over-crossing structures as sign supports might be the only practical solution that will provide adequate viewing distance. The use of such structures as sign supports might eliminate the need for the foundations and sign supports along the roadside.

=={{SpanID|903.1.15}}903.1.15 Mounting Height (MUTCD Section 2A.15)==
'''Standard. '''The provisions of this article shall apply unless specifically stated otherwise for a particular sign or object marker elsewhere in the EPG.

'''Support. '''Mounting heights in the EPG and in [https://www.modot.org/media/16921 Standard Plan 903.03] are nominal dimensions, meaning these dimensions represent the minimum mounting height, as well as the maximum mounting heights unless otherwise stated. The mounting height, measured from the roadway surface to the bottom of the sign, is only increased in order to meet the minimum distance requirements from the bottom of the sign to the ground directly below the sign. Minimum mounting heights ensure the installations meet breakaway standards as well as placing the signs at the appropriate level for visibility. Installing signs taller than these nominal dimensions will move the signs outside the driver’s normal line of sight negatively affecting the signs legibility and visibility.

In addition to the provisions of this article, information affecting the minimum mounting height of signs as a function of crash performance can be found in the “Roadside Design Guide,” 4th Edition, 2011, AASHTO.

'''Standard. '''In rural areas, the minimum height, measured vertically from the bottom of the sign to the elevation of the near edge of the pavement, of signs installed at the side of the road shall be 5 feet (see [[#fig903-1-13-1|Figure 903.1.13.1]]).

In business, commercial, or residential areas where parking, bicyclist, or pedestrian movements are likely to occur, or where the view of the sign might be obstructed, the minimum height, measured vertically from the bottom of the sign to the top of the curb, or in the absence of curb, measured vertically from the bottom of the sign to the elevation of the near edge of the traveled way, of signs installed at the side of the road shall be 7 feet (see [[#fig903-1-13-1|Figure 903.1.13.1]]).

'''Option. '''The height to the bottom of a secondary sign mounted below another sign may be 1 foot less than the height specified in the Standard paragraphs above.

'''Standard. '''The minimum height of signs, measured vertically from the bottom of the sign to the sidewalk shall be 7 feet.

If the bottom of a secondary sign that is mounted below another sign is mounted lower than 7 feet above a pedestrian sidewalk or pathway (see [[616.3 Pedestrian and Worker Safety (MUTCD Chapter 6C) #616.3.2|EPG 616.3.2]]), the secondary sign shall not project more than 4 inches into the pedestrian facility.

'''Support. '''[[914.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 9A) #914.1.2|EPG 914.1.2]] contains provisions for the minimum mounting height of signs on shared-use paths.

'''Standard. '''All sign installations shall meet the installation, mounting height and lateral offset of MoDOT specifications for the type of signs support being used, see [https://www.modot.org/media/16921 Standard Plan 903.03].

'''Option. '''A route sign assembly (see [[903.4 Guide Signs—Conventional Roads (MUTCD Chapter 2D) #fig903.4.25.1|Figures 903.4.25.1]] through [[903.4 Guide Signs—Conventional Roads (MUTCD Chapter 2D)#fig903.4.25.3|903.4.25.3]]) consisting of a route sign and auxiliary signs may be treated as a single sign for the purposes of this article.

The mounting height may be adjusted when supports are located near the edge of the right-of-way on a steep backslope in order to avoid the sometimes less desirable alternative of placing the sign closer to the roadway.

'''Standard. '''Signs that are post-mounted on a median barrier shall not overhang any portion of the traveled way.

New overhead sign installations shall provide a vertical clearance of not less than 18 feet from the highest point of pavement or shoulder (including mountable curbs located within the shoulder limits) to the lowest point of the sign, light fixture, or sign bridge over the entire width of the pavement and shoulders, except where the structure on which the overhead signs are to be mounted or other structures along the roadway near the sign structure have a lesser vertical clearance. No overhead sign installations shall have a mounting height that is lower than 17 feet.

'''Option. '''If the vertical clearance of other structures along the roadway near the sign structure is less than 16 feet, the vertical clearance to an overhead sign structure or support may be as low as 1 foot higher than the vertical clearance of the other structures in order to improve the visibility of the overhead signs.

In special cases the clearance to overhead signs may be reduced if necessary because of substandard dimensions in tunnels and other major structures such as double-deck bridges.

Signs may be raised above the standard vertical clearance to improve visibility and avoid other obstructions such as signal equipment.

'''Guidance. '''While a maximum mounting height for signs is generally not prescribed in the EPG, the nominal mounting heights should be adhered to, ensuring that signs are not mounted at such a height as to be out of the road user’s normal field of vision (see the second paragraph of this article and the third paragraph of [[:Category:911_General_(MUTCD_Part_1) #911.4.9 | EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1D.09)]]), especially in urban settings where signs are mounted on traffic signal or light poles.

'''Support. '''[[#fig903-1-13-1|Figure 903.1.13.1]] illustrates some examples of the mounting height requirements contained in this article.

See [[903.17 Overhead Sign Mounting #903.17.4|EPG 903.17.4]] for information regarding vertical clearances for overhead signs.

=={{SpanID|903.1.16}}903.1.16 Lateral Offset (MUTCD Section 2A.16)==
'''Standard. '''For overhead sign supports, the minimum lateral offset from the edge of the shoulder (or if no shoulder exists, from the edge of the pavement) to the near edge of overhead sign supports (cantilever or sign bridges) shall be 6 feet. Overhead sign supports shall have a barrier or crash cushion to shield them if they are within the right-of-way.

See [[903.17 Overhead Sign Mounting #903.17.3|EPG 903.17.3]] for information regarding lateral offset of overhead sign supports.

Post-mounted sign and object marker supports shall be crashworthy (see [[:Category:911_General_(MUTCD_Part_1) #911.4.11 | EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1D.11)]]) if within the right-of-way.

'''Guidance. '''For post-mounted signs, the minimum lateral offset should be 12 feet from the edge of the traveled way. If a shoulder wider than 6 feet exists, the minimum lateral offset for post-mounted signs should be 6 feet from the edge of the shoulder.

Supports for signs mounted laterally behind a longitudinal barrier should be placed so that the near edge of the support is located beyond the deflection distance of the longitudinal barrier and the edge of the sign does not extend beyond the face of the barrier towards traffic.

'''Support. '''The minimum lateral offset requirements for object markers are provided in [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3|EPG 903.3]].

The minimum lateral offset is intended to keep trucks and cars that use the shoulders from striking the signs or supports. The minimum lateral offset requirements do not supersede the requirement for crashworthiness (see the second Standard paragraph of this article) if the sign is located within the right-of-way.

'''Guidance. '''All supports should be located as far as practical from the edge of the shoulder. Advantage should be taken to place signs behind existing roadside barriers, on over-crossing structures, or other locations that minimize the exposure of the traffic to sign supports.

'''Option. '''Lesser lateral offsets may be used on connecting roadways or ramps at interchanges, but not less than 6 feet from the edge of the traveled way.

On conventional roads in areas where it is impractical to locate a sign with the lateral offset prescribed by this article because of roadside features such as terrain or vegetation, a lateral offset of at least 2 feet may be used.

A lateral offset of at least 1 foot from the face of the curb may be used in business, commercial, or residential areas where sidewalk width is limited or where existing poles are close to the curb.

'''Guidance. '''Overhead sign supports and post-mounted sign and object marker supports should not obstruct the sidewalk or the pedestrian access route such that less than 4 feet of clear space is available.

'''Support. '''Guidance for maintaining sign shape in laterally-constrained conditions is described in [[#903.1.5|EPG 903.1.5]].

[[#fig903-1-13-1|Figure 903.1.13.1]] and [[#fig903-1-13-2|903.1.13.2]] illustrate some examples of the lateral offset requirements contained in this article.

=={{SpanID|903.1.17}}903.1.17 Orientation (MUTCD Section 2A.17)==
'''Guidance. '''Unless otherwise provided in the EPG, signs should be vertically mounted at right angles to the direction of, and facing, the traffic that they are intended to serve.

Where mirror reflection from the sign face is encountered to such a degree as to reduce legibility, the sign should be turned slightly away from the road. On curved alignments, the angle of placement should be determined by the direction of approaching traffic rather than by the roadway edge at the point where the sign is located.

=={{SpanID|903.1.18}}903.1.18 Posts and Mountings (MUTCD Section 2A.18)==
'''Standard. '''Sign posts, foundations, and mountings shall be so constructed as to hold signs in a proper and permanent position, and to resist swaying in the wind or displacement by vandalism.

'''Support. '''See [https://www.modot.org/media/16921 Standard Plan 903.03] for additional information regarding posts and mounting. The Standard Plans are compliant with the latest edition of AASHTO’s “Specifications for Structural Supports for Highway Signs, Luminaires, and Traffic Signals.”

'''Option. '''Where permitted, signs may be placed on existing supports used for other purposes, such as highway traffic signal supports or overhead sign supports. This does not include utility poles or light poles.

'''Support. '''[[#903.1.11|EPG 903.1.11]] contains criteria for enhanced conspicuity of standard signs.

[[#903.1.15|EPG 903.1.15]] and [[#903.1.16|903.1.16]] contain lateral and height placement criteria for signs placed on existing supports.

'''Standard. '''If mounted to the sign support, equipment for powering electronic components of a sign, including solar panels, the sign support shall be a traffic signal pedestal pole with a breakaway base so as to not to compromise the crashworthy performance of the sign installation (see [[:Category:911_General_(MUTCD_Part_1) #911.4.11 | EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1D.11)]]). Such equipment shall be mounted so as not to obscure the shape of the sign. Any wiring installed in the breakaway base shall include appropriate breakaway fuse connectors.

=={{SpanID|903.1.19}}903.1.19 Maintenance (MUTCD Section 2A.19)==
'''Guidance. '''Maintenance activities should consider proper position, cleanliness, legibility, and daytime and nighttime visibility (see [[#903.1.21|EPG 903.1.21]] and [[#903.1.22|903.1.22]]). Damaged or deteriorated signs or object markers should be replaced.

To assure adequate maintenance, a schedule for inspecting (at night), trimming vegetation, and replacing signs and object markers should be established. Employees of highway, law enforcement, and other public agencies whose duties require that they travel on the roadways should be encouraged to report any damaged, deteriorated, or obscured signs or object markers at the first opportunity. While MoDOT’s sign maintenance program relies on nighttime inspections, random daytime inspections are encouraged to identify needs between scheduled nighttime inspections.

Steps should be taken to see that weeds, trees, shrubbery, and construction, maintenance, and utility materials and equipment do not obscure the face of any sign or object marker.

A regular schedule of replacement of lighting elements for illuminated signs should be maintained.

'''Support. '''See [[903.20 Construction Inspection Guidelines for Sec 903 #903.20.4|EPG 903.20.4]] for additional information related to sign inspection.

=={{SpanID|903.1.20}}903.1.20 Excessive Use of Signs (MUTCD Section 2A.20)==
'''Guidance. '''Signs should be used and located judiciously, minimizing their proliferation in order to maintain their effectiveness. Regulatory and warning signs should be used conservatively because these signs, if used to excess, tend to lose their effectiveness. Route signs and directional guide signs for primary routes and destinations should be used frequently at strategic locations because their use promotes efficient operations by keeping road users informed of their location. In all cases, however, sign clutter (see the Support paragraph below) should be avoided and minimized as much as practicable.

'''Support. '''Sign clutter is the proliferation of sign installations or assemblies along the roadway or roadside, either separately or grouped, to such an extent that adequate spacing between installations necessary for orderly processing of the sign messages by the driver cannot be achieved. Sign clutter can reduce the effectiveness of one or more signs in a sequence of signs.

The basic role of traffic control devices is to provide only as much information to the road user as necessary to promote the safe and efficient operation of streets and highways. Sign clutter can result from the overuse of MUTCD-compliant signs and or signs that display information unrelated to traffic operation, navigation, or transportation information. Examples of such signs would include, but are not limited to, those displaying the birthplace or home of a noted person, local sports team accomplishments, population information, and self-described qualities of a community such as “friendly” or “open for business.”

'''Guidance. '''Signs and other traffic control devices should be installed and maintained from a systematic standpoint rather than individually. When a new sign is installed, the existing signs in the vicinity should be considered for replacement, relocation, or removal as a result of the new sign that is installed. Existing systems of signs should be reviewed periodically for evidence of sign clutter and adjustments should be made accordingly.

'''Support. '''[[#903.1.13|EPG 903.1.13]] contains information regarding an order of priority for signs where available spacing along the roadway is limited.

=={{SpanID|903.1.21}}903.1.21 Retroreflection and Illumination (MUTCD Section 2A.21)==
'''Support. '''There are many materials currently available for retroreflection and various methods currently available for the illumination of signs and object markers. New materials and methods continue to emerge. New materials and methods can be used as long as the signs and object markers meet the standard requirements for color, both by day and by night.

This article applies to visibility of signs at night or in low-light or adverse weather conditions, whose legends are otherwise visible under typical daytime viewing conditions.

'''Standard. '''All traffic control signs on MoDOT right-of-way shall be retroreflective to show the same shape and similar color by both day and night, unless otherwise provided in the EPG for a particular sign or group of signs.

Where the color black is specified for the legend or background of a sign, an opaque and non-retroreflective material shall be used.

The requirements for sign illumination shall not be considered to be satisfied by street or highway lighting.

In special conditions when illuminated signs are permitted to be used per the EPG, sign symbols, word messages, and backgrounds shall be illuminated by a light behind the sign face through a translucent material.

Retroreflection of sign elements shall be accomplished by the means shown in [[#tab903.1.21|Table 903.1.21]].

{{SpanID|tab903.1.21}}

<div style="width: 100%; display: flex; justify-content: center;">
{| class="wikitable"
|+Table 903.1.21, Retroreflection of Sign Elements
|-
!Means of Retroreflection!!Sign Element
|-
|A material that has a smooth, sealed outer surface over a microstructure that reflects light||Symbol Word message Border Background 
|-
|colspan="2"style="background-color:#ffffff;"|Note: Illuminated signs are not used by MoDOT. Cities and counties may use illuminated street name signs if a maintenance agreement is in place.
|}
</div>

'''Guidance. '''Overhead sign installations should not be illuminated unless an engineering study shows a need for illumination, e.g. fog prone areas.

'''Support. '''Information regarding the use of retroreflective material on the sign support is contained in [[#903.1.11|EPG 903.1.11]].

Information regarding MoDOT sheeting types is contained in [[903.16 Design Aspects of MoDOT Signing #903.16.2|EPG 903.16.3]].

=={{SpanID|903.1.22}}903.1.22 Maintaining Minimum Retroreflectivity (MUTCD Section 2A.22)==
'''Support. '''Retroreflectivity is one of several factors associated with maintaining nighttime sign visibility (see [[#903.1.21|EPG 903.1.21]]).

'''Standard. '''MoDOT shall use an assessment or management method that is designed to maintain sign retroreflectivity at or above the minimum levels in [[#tab903-1-22|Table 903.1.22]]. Local jurisdictions who maintain sections of state routes and the signs on those sections under maintenance agreements shall maintain those signs in accordance with one of the MUTCD assessment methods.

{{SpanID|tab903-1-22}}


<div style="display: flex; justify-content: center;">
{|class="wikitable" style="text-align: center;"
|+ Table 903.1.22, Minimum Maintained Retroreflectivity Levels
|-
!rowspan="2"|Sign Color!!colspan="3"|Beaded Sheeting Type (ASTM D4956)!!rowspan="2"|Prismatic Sheeting!!rowspan="2"|Additional Criteria
|-
!I!!II!!III
|-
|rowspan="2"|White on Green || W*; G ≥ 7 || W*; G ≥ 15 || W*; G ≥ 25 || W ≥ 250; G ≥ 25 || Overhead
|-
| W*; G ≥ 7 || colspan="3"| W ≥ 120; G ≥ 15 || Post-mounted
|-
|rowspan="2"|White on Blue || W*; B ≥ 3 || W*; B ≥ 5 || W*; B ≥ 12 || W ≥ 250; B ≥ 12 || Overhead
|-
| W*; B ≥ 3 || colspan="3"|W ≥ 120; B ≥ 7 || Post-mounted
|-
|rowspan="2"|White on Brown || W*; Br ≥ 1 || W*; Br ≥ 5 || W*; Br ≥ 10 || W ≥ 350; Br ≥ 10 || Overhead
|-
| W*; Br ≥ 1 || colspan="3"|W ≥ 150; B ≥ 5 || Post-mounted
|-
|rowspan="2"|Black on Yellow or Black on Orange || Y*; O* || colspan="3"|Y ≥ 50; O ≥ 50 || 2
|-
| Y*; O* || colspan="3"|Y ≥ 75; O ≥ 75 || 3
|-
|White on Red || colspan="4"| W ≥ 35; R ≥ 7 || 4
|-
|Black on White || colspan="4"| W ≥ 50 || -
|-
|colspan="6" style="background-color: #ffffff; text-align: left;text-indent:-1em; padding-left: 1.5em;"| 1 The minimum maintained retroreflectivity levels shown in this table are in units of cd/Ix/m2 measured at an observation angle of 0.2° and an entrance angle of -4.0°.2 For word legend and fine symbol signs measuring at least 48 inches and for all sizes of bold symbol signs.3For word legend and fine symbol signs measuring less than 48 inches.4 Minimum sign contrast ratio ≥ 3:1 (white retroreflectivity ÷ red retroreflectivity).*This sheeting type shall not be used for this color for this application.
|-
!colspan="6"|Bold Symbol Signs
|-
|colspan="6"|<ul style="columns:3;"><li>W1-1,2 - Turn and Curve</li>
<li>W1-3,4 - Reverse Turn and Curve</li>
<li>W1-5 - Winding Road</li>
<li>W1-6,7 - Large Arrow</li>
<li>W1-8 - Chevron</li>
<li>W1-10 - Intersection in Curve</li>
<li>W1-11 - Hairpin Curve</li>
<li>W1-15 - 270 Degree Loop</li>
<li>W2-1 - Cross Road</li>
<li>W2-2,3 - Side Road</li>
<li>W2-4,5 - T and Y Intersection</li>
<li>W2-6 - Circular Intersection</li>
<li>W2-7,8 - Double Side Roads</li>
<li>W3-1 - Stop Ahead</li>
<li>W3-2 - Yield Ahead</li>
<li>W3-3 - Signal Ahead</li>
<li>W4-1 - Merge</li>
<li>W4-2 - Lane Ends</li>
<li>W4-3 - Added Lane</li>
<li>W4-5 - Entering Roadway Merge</li>
<li>W4-6 - Entering Roadway Added Lane</li>
<li>W6-1,2 - Divided Highway Begins and Ends</li>
<li>W6-3 - Two-Way Traffic</li>
<li>W10-1,2,3,4,11,12 - Grade Crossing Advance Warning</li>
<li>W11-2 - Pedestrian Crossing</li>
<li>W11-5 - Farm Equipment</li>
<li>W11-7 - Equestrian Crossing</li>
<li>W11-10 - Truck Crossing</li>
<li>W12-1 - Double Arrow</li>
<li>W16-5P,6P,7P - Pointing Arrow Plaques</li>
<li>W20-7 - Flagger</li>
<li>W21-1 - Worker</li></ul>
|-
!colspan="6"|Fine Symbol Signs (symbol signs not listed as bold symbol signs)
|-
|colspan="6" style="text-align: left"|'''Special Cases''' <ul><li>W3-1 - Stop Ahead: Red retroreflectivity ≥ 7</li><li>W3-2 - Yield Ahead: Red retroreflectivity ≥ 7; White retroreflectivity ≥ 35</li><li>W3-3 - Signal Ahead: Red retroreflectivity ≥ 7; Green retroreflectivity ≥ 35</li><li>W3-5 - Speed Reduction: White retroreflectivity ≥ 50</li><li>For non-diamond shaped signs, such as W14-3 (No Passing Zone), WP-4P (Cross Traffic Does Not Stop), or W13-1P,2,3,6,7 (Speed Advisory Signs), use the largest sign dimension to determine the proper minimum retroreflectivity level.</li>
|-
|colspan="6" style="background-color:#ffffff; text-align: left;"|'''Note:''' All MoDOT signs shall be fabricated as retroreflective for durability and longevity
|}
</div>

'''Support. '''Compliance with the Standard in the paragraph above is achieved by having a method in place and using the method to maintain the minimum levels established in [[#tab903-1-22|Table 903.1.22]]. Provided that an assessment or management method is being used, MoDOT would be in compliance with the Standard in the paragraph above even if there are some individual signs that do not meet the minimum retroreflectivity levels at a particular point in time.

MoDOT has a sign inspection process to maintain sign retroreflectivity at or above the minimum levels. See [[903.20 Construction Inspection Guidelines for Sec 903 #903.20.4|EPG 903.20.4]] for additional information related to sign inspection.

=={{SpanID|903.1.23}}903.1.23 Median Opening Treatments for Divided Highways (MUTCD Section 2A.23)==
'''Guidance. '''A divided highway crossing should be signed and marked as separate intersections when both of the following conditions are present:
::A. The paths of opposing left turns from the divided highway cross each other (see [[#fig903-1-23|Figure 903.1.23]]), and
::B. There is adequate storage in the interior approaches for the design vehicles expected to cross the divided highway.

If either one or both of the conditions in the Guidance paragraph above do not exist, the divided highway crossing should be signed and marked as a single intersection.

{{SpanID|fig903-1-23}}
[[File:Figure 903.1.23 Intersection Configuration at a Divided Highway Crossing.png|center|thumb|alt=An example of separate intersections, where the paths the of opposing left-turning vehicles cross, and an example of a single intersection, in which the paths of opposing left-turning vehicles do not cross. |800px| '''Figure 903.1.23''' Intersection Configuration at a Divided Highway Crossing]]

At the crossing of two divided highways, engineering judgment should be used to determine the number of separate intersections.

'''Support. '''Divided highway crossings with median widths 150 feet or greater might function as two intersections depending upon the interaction of the opposing left-turn vehicle paths and the available interior storage in the median for a crossing vehicle. Other factors that could determine whether a divided highway crossing is operating as one or two intersections include:
::A. The geometric design of the divided highway crossing,
::B. The use of positive offset mainline left-turn lanes,
::C. The length of the median opening (as measured parallel to the center line of the divided highway),
::D. The geometric design of the median noses,
::E. Other roadway geometric considerations such as a skewed side street approach or a variable median width,
::F. Intersection sight distance,
::G. The physical characteristics of the design vehicle, and
::H. The observed prevailing driver behavior with regard to opposing left-turn path interaction.

=={{SpanID|903.1.24}}903.1.24 Priority Order of Signs==
'''Standard. '''The order classification of signs shall be defined as follows (refer to [[#fig903-1-24|Figure 903.1.24]]):
#First Order Signing. Signs that are installed in advance of the closest intersection or interchange where motorists turn off of the state highway system to arrive at the desired traffic generator or site. First order signing will always be on state right-of-way.
#Second Order Signing. Signs that are installed in advance of the intersection or interchange where motorists turn to access the highway where the first order signing is provided. Second order signing will always be on state right-of-way and shall require the use of first order signing on state right-of-way.
#Third Order Signing. Signs that are installed in advance of the intersection or interchange where motorists turn to access the highway where the second order signing is provided. Third order signing will always be on state right-of-way and shall require the use of first order and second order signing on state right-of-way.

[[File:Figure 903.1.24 Sign Order Classification.gif|center|frame|thumb|alt=A diagram illustrating the priority order of signs for state highway directions with First, Second, and Third Order Signing.| <center>'''Figure 903.1.24 Sign Order Classification'''</center>]]

'''Support. '''In general, as the “order” of signing increases, the functional classification of road stays the same or increases. For example, if first order signing is on a four-lane U.S. route, second order signing should be on another U.S. route, expressway, or a freeway. In this example case, second order signing should not be placed on a two-lane lettered route.